LECTURES
OF 
PHARMACY: 
EXHIBITING 
EXACT RULES for PRESCRIBING, 
And of Use to every 
STUDENT of PHYSIC, 
As well as Necessary to all 
APOTHECARIES. 
FIRST GIVEN 
At the Close of an Annual COURSE of CHYMISTRY (on
the Desire of the late Learned Dr. BOERHAAVE) and since 
Published by Dr. H. GAUBIUS, Successor to that celebrated 
PROFESSOR in the Colledges of MEDICINE and CHEMISTRY, 
in the UNIVERSITY of LEYDEN. 
Translated by a PHYSICIAN, 
With proper NOTES, additional FORMS of PRESCRIPTION, 
an useful APPENDIX, and a double INDEX. 
LONDON: 
PRINTED for JOHN NOON, at the White Hart, near Mercers-
Chapel, in Cheapside, MDCCXLIV. 



(iii)
THE 
TRANSLATOR'S 
PREFACE. 
THE public, it is presumed, can 
be under no surprize at the ap- 
pearance of the present treatise: 
the character, abilities, and station of 
its learned author are so considerable, 
the composition and order of the book it- 
self so accurate, and its usefulness so ex- 
tensive and evident, that to make any 
apology on this account, would be alto- 
gether useless if not ridiculous. 
A2 THE

iv The Translator’s 
THE judicious will soon perceive the 
book to be none of those justly complain'd 
of; which consisting of mere repeti- 
tions from others, or a bare parade 
of method, leave the science as they 
found it; or rather retarded, by aug- 
menting the number of books without in- 
creasing knowledge. So far from it, that 
we have not any modern performance of 
the kind (at least in our language) ex- 
tant; notwithstanding the subject is so 
evidently useful and important: in so 
much, that it seems surprising Dr. Fuller 
shou'd give us (ex professo) an extempo- 
raneous Dispensatory, and yet neglect the 
main part; which is here largely con- 
sider’d; viz. the method of prescribing,
compounding, and exhibiting extempo- 
raneous medicines. 
Dr. Quincy has indeed said something 
on this head, in the latter part of his 
Dispensatory; but very little, and tran- 
siently, in comparison with the fulness 
and order of this: so that we may justly 
deem it more worthy of the title usurped 
by

v PREFACE.
by Dr. Fuller (i.e. Pharmacopæa Ex- 
temporanea), than any performance yet 
exposed to the world. 
To make the book as useful to the rea- 
der as intended by the author, does indeed 
require frequent revolution, and consul- 
tation by reference; but then it excludes 
numerous tautologies, and restrains the 
volume to a moderate size. 
THE formulas inserted as specimens 
by our author, may serve very well to il- 
lustrate the rules he has just before pre- 
scribed for them, and will give the rea- 
der some idea of the foreign practice this 
way: but most of them wou'd be judged 
aukward prescriptions by the physicians 
our own practice, notwithstanding they 
are generally extracted from the materia 
medica of the late celebrated professor 
Boerhaave: for which reason it was 
thought proper to further add such spe- 
cimens to the forms most in use, as are 
frequently to be met with in the practice 
of our best physicians. Those of the au- 
thor may be distinguished from such as 
A3 are 

vi The Translator’s 
are added; as the first begin with ꝶ. but 
the last with 4: and if any body is de- 
sirous to have still a larger number of 
specimens for each form, they may have 
recourse to Fuller; whose Pharmacopæa 
may be taken as a supplement to this.
WITH regard to the present trans- 
lation and edition, to have given a ver- 
sion directly literal wou’d have made the 
reading too stiff, and less agreeable with 
our own language: but care has been all 
along taken to preserve the author's sense, 
and to represent it generally to advan- 
tage, as much as possible in his own words. 
It is hoped the book has improved and 
pained in the translation; and there are 
several things which render this edition 
more compleat and useful than the origi- 
nal: the quotations referred to by our 
author are here subjoined in their pro- 
per places, Some occasional but necessary 
observations are here and there made,
and both are properly distinguished in the 
way of note; the several formulœ are in- 
stanced more largely and accurately, and 
the


vii PREFACE. 
the book is closed with useful and necessa- 
ry indices. 
TO conclude, for the literal errors, 
or other small over-sights which have 
accidentally crept in, we must presume 
on the readers allowance; since we 
find the most elaborate performances 
are not intirely free: and as the com- 
mon interest of the faculty was the cause 
of this publication, there is the more 
room to expect candor and good nature 
from its members, in behalf of their 
Humble Servant, 
S. M.

THE
AUTHOR’S PREFACE 
WHEN I first applied myself to the 
profession of physic, among several dif- 
ficulties which offer'd, the greatest 
was that of prescribing a proper form 
to the medicines indicated; such as might not 
only best answer the intention, but also fit them 
for the most just and easy composition in the pro- 
per hands, and make their exhibition to the pa- 
tient the least irksome mid most successful. For 
I soon found the general precepts which are usu- 
ally learned on this head, barely in universities, 
were very unequal to the purpose; and that a 
just determination of the form was to be had only 
from considering every individual, and even the 
most minute circumstances both of the patient 
and the medicine: that there were no forms of 
medicines answer able for the same intention in all 
cases alike; and that the same indication often 
required the application of a medicine in very 
different ways and forms, before a physician cou'd 
effect his design, and acquit himself to his patient. 
I also remarked the admonition of Hippocrates, 
(μηfεγ ειχη, μηδεv ζωεgopαv) that to attempt a 
cure inconsiderately, was to attempt to do no- 
thing to the purpose; which caution is service- 
able here, if any where: for if a physician be
wrong


ix The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.        
wrong or careless in prescribing proper medicines, 
he will quickly find how easily his intention may 
be frustrated, notwithstanding that and his other 
observations be ever so just. The vast hopes and 
designs which a physician may have formed to 
himself from a due consideration of the disease, 
must inevitably fall to nothing, if he does not 
establish their being, by a just prescription and 
exhibition of proper medicines; the result of 
which, may be a happy cure, the proper end of 
his profession: nor does a physician draw his cha-
racter so much from what he thinks, as from 
what he orders and commits to paper; from 
whence, the great importance of our present sub- 
ject, both to the physician and patient, is suffici- 
ently evident.
I found it not only a great difficulty to charge 
my memory with set forms, composed by my tea- 
chers and the best writers; but I also perceived, 
notwithstanding the deference and credulity of 
youth, that such could not directly, suit my prac- 
tice in all similar cases that occurred: as my 
cases did not in every circumstance correspond with 
those for which the set forms were compiled; and 
that therefore I  must be under a necessity of com- 
posing new forms for my particular patients; or 
else of making frequent changes in those which I 
had learned. This consideration, with the new
and sudden changes in the state of disease; and a 
natural aversion to the servile yoke of prejudice, 
prevailed with me to set my judgment free from 
the fetters of set forms complied by other men; 
especially as I was encouraged thereto, by the cus-
tom

x The AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
tom of extemporaneous prescription prevailing, 
now, almost universally.  
NOR was I satisfied with the answer made 
me by some old standers in practice, whom I some- 
times consulted in those difficult and sudden changes, 
viz. that use and experience would make this 
work easy, however difficult it might seem to a 
beginner; but for fear of an irreparable loss of 
my reputation in practice, from many unhappy 
events, and even death, I was resolved to be also 
guided by my own reason, I therefore thought it 
incumbent on before I advanced in practice, 
to acquaint myself with all that had been well 
said on the subject by my predecessors in physic: 
for which end, I turned over all the physical 
writings that I cou'd get upon this theme, and 
compared the general rules which they prescribed, 
with the particular formulæ or prescriptions of 
the best physicians. 
BUT I as quickly found upon this review, 
that a great number of these rules were so uncer- 
tain, as to be oftener neglected than observed; 
that many were contradictory to each other, and 
the greatest part of them all liable to abundance 
of exceptions: as will appear to any one who 
compares them with the prescription in the daily 
practice of our most skilful physicians. Many 
physicians who had undertaken to instruct their 
juniors by their works on this head, having as it 
were forgot themselves, seem to have writ rather 
as expert masters, to masters, than to unskilful 
beginners: while others, over studious of brevity,
only

xi The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.             
only throw a darker mist before us. I therefore 
came at last to this resolution, viz. of collecting 
indifferently all the precepts which had been given 
for each particular form, and subjoining all the 
exceptions that occurred in their proper places, 
that by comparing and accommodating the dif- 
ference, I might thence deduce a set of general 
and more intelligible directions or propositions, 
which being methodized and reduced to their 
proper heads, wou'd form a manual to consult, 
and to direct my hand in practice. 
AND hence arose the present treatise: which 
tho' now published, I have not the vanity to pretend 
it has many great perfections and new doctrines, 
which are not to be met with scatter'd in the 
works of others; but I ingenuously confess there 
are few or none, but what have been exhausted, 
with some pains, from the attempts of others in 
this way. Nor will an impartial reader think 
the worse of this performance for having thus 
candidly imparted to him its origin. 
THE authors who have contributed and been 
consulted in the composition of this work, are too 
numerous to give a particular account of them 
here; tho' almost all of them are worthy of 
esteem: and were each to take bis proper quota, 
there wou'd not remain many pages to myself; for 
which reason I have omitted citations and refe- 
rences to authors in the body of the book itself; 
that I might not tire my reader with their num- 
ber, nor appear to him ostentatious of much 
reading. 
TO

xii The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
TO conclude, the only cause of my publication, 
was this: being promoted to the public professor- 
ship of chemistry in this university, I was strongly 
sollicited by Boerhaave to subjoin a pharmaceuti- 
cal to my annual chemical course; and here it 
seemed for the interest of my audience to exhibit 
the doctrine and preparation of extemporaneous, 
as well as officinal medicines. I had therefore 
recourse to what I had formerly collected and me- 
thodized for my own use on this head, and from 
thence, as every one is pleased with his own, I 
took the method and materials of my lectures; 
that so my pupils might have same general rules 
to direct their prescriptions conformable to prac- 
tice, which I endeavoured to illustrate to them 
by specimen or example. But the time limited 
for the performance of this course was too short, 
to give the doctrine with that slowness and distinc- 
tion which is necessary for a swift elocution 
wou'd not make an impression on their minds, suf- 
ficient to enable them to prescribe a form regular- 
ly to a proposed case, by that time they were re- 
turned home; so that I thought of the press as an 
expedient to save myself trouble, and make this 
doctrine the more useful to them. If I obtain this, 
it is enough; but if any body else reap advantage 
from hence, they are welcome: I shall then at 
least have the happiness of thinking myself the more 
useful by my labours. 
Written at Leyden, 1739.
THE

(xiii) 
THE 
CONTENTS. 
THE introduction—Pag.1
General rules and cautions to he observed
before prescribing—4 
OF FORMS IN GENERAL—4—57 
Of the general heads and circumstances of formula or 
prescriptions: 
(I.) In common to all—13 
Viz. Inscription (§.55.), beginning (§.56.), 
order or method (§. 57.), the way of 
writing the ingredients and their quan- 
tities (§.58.), the subscription directing 
the apothecary (§. 59.), the superscrip-
tion directing the patient (§. 60.). 
(II.) In common to simple formula—25 
Viz. The dose (§. 65.) and general quantity 
to be made up at once (§. 68.)—25 
(III.)

xiv The CONTENTS. 
(III.) Proper to compound formulæ—Pag.35 
Viz. 1°. Parts; basis (§.75.), adjuvans 
(§.78.), corrigens (§.83.), consti- 
tuens (§.86.) 
2°. Their mutual proportion (§.87.), 
general quantity (§.93.), and dose 
(§.92.) 
3°. Their QUALITIES; consistence 
(§.96.), colour (§.99.), odor 
(§.100.), taste (§.101.), medicinal 
virtues (§.102.).
OF FORMS IN PARTICULAR—Pag.54 
Forms of internal medicines—ib. 
Powder—ib. 
Bolus—76 
Electuary–88 
Linctus—99 
Pills—106 
Troches—122 
Tablets—131 
Cakes—138 
Insusions—143 
Decoctions—164 
Expressed juices—182 
Emulsions—194 
Forms

xv The CONTENTS.
Forms by mixture, p. 210
Juleps—pag. 211 
Mixtures—224 
Drops, &c—237 
Forms of external medicines—246 
Of external forms common to several parts. 
Of Injections—246 
Aspersions—255 
Epithems in general—259 
liquid, or fomentations—260 
dry, of several kinds—273 
Cataplasms in general—282 
boiled—ib. 
crude—294 
Baths in general—300 
watery—ib 
vaporous in general—307 
Moist vapours—308 
Suffitus, or dry fumes—315 
Plasters—326 
Cerates—342 
Ointments—345 
Balsams, odoriserous—354 
Liniments—363 
Epispastics—371 
Frications-374 
Of external forms proper to certain parts—375 
—to the head—ib. 
Cucusa, or scull-cap—ib. 
Frontal—ib. 
Collyrium—378
Exter-

xvi THE CONTENTS.
External forms proper to the nose—382 
Errhines—ib. 
Smelling bottles, &c.—380 
Of stomatics for the mouth, in general—388 
Dentifrices—389 
Apophlegmatisms—391 
Gargarisms—399 
Scutes, or stomach plasters—402 
Clysters, intestinal—ib. 
Suppositories—417 
Pessaries, and nascales—423 
Addenda—424 
AN

AN 
INTRODUCTION 
TO THE 
Method of Prescribing, &c. 
§.1. Formula or prescription, a- 
mong physicians, is a rati- 
onal assignment and com- 
bination of such pharma- 
ceutical remedies as have 
by art been found to be 
proper in particular cases; 
respect being had to the 
matter and form of the ingredients and medicine: 
so that it may be commodiously made up by the 
apothecary, and applied with ease and success by 
the patient.  
§.2. Therefore that branch of the practice of 
physic which delivers rules for the effecting this 
rational combination (§.1.), is termed the method 
of prescribing forms of medicines. 
§.3. The matter of the formula (§.1.), whe- 
ther it be the product of nature or art, is sup- 
plied from the (iλη iατoiχη) materia medica, or 
pharmaceutical stores. The form thereof is va- 
rious, being determined by the very different 
B cir-

2 INTRODUCTION.
circumstances both of the patient and ingredi- 
ents; as will hereafter more evidently appear. The 
end and design of it, is, an artful preparation and 
just administration of those means by which the 
physician endeavours to answer his indications, and 
effect a cure. 
§.4. The method of prescribing (§.2.) therefore 
comprises the very last part which a physician is 
to engage with in his profession; this being the 
point to which his skill in all the other branches 
of the science have a direct tendence: nor does a 
complete workman therein hardly ever miss 
of a happy compensation for his industry and 
care. 
§.5. From hence (§.3. and §.4.), the neces- 
sity, usefulness and advantages as well as dignity 
of this ultimate branch of the profession, are suf- 
ficiently obvious. 
§.6. The formulæ, or prescriptions, (§.1.) are 
distinguished into (1.) officinal, respecting a medi- 
cine made and kept ready for future uses in apo- 
thecaries shops; and (2.) extemporaneous, to be 
directly made up and applied for present exigen- 
cies. 'Tis chiefly the latter of these we intend re- 
handle in this treatie. 
§.7. In order to prescribe either of these for- 
mula’s (§.6.), it is supposed that the physician or 
prescriber has a previous knowledge of, 
1. The doctrine of indications; whereby he is 
instructed whether any thing is to be done, what, 
by what means, and after what manner, toge- 
ther with the time, order, &c. in which the me- 
dicines or instruments are to be used. 
2. Of the whole materia medica in all the 
three kingdoms, animal, vegetable and mine- 
ral; inasmuch as they afford the matter (§.3.) 
of the prescribed formula: but he shou'd be 
more particularly versed in those simples and 
medicines


3 INTRODUCTION.
medicines which are at hand, or proper to the 
country where he practises. And lastly, 
3. Of all the preparations in pharmacy, both 
chemical and galenical, simple and compound; 
together with the manner in which they all 
operate, and the effects they produce in the 
animal system: for by the knowledge of these 
(1.2.3.) the physician knows how to direct 
his choice of ingredients, when he prescribes 
the formula (§.1.) 
§.8. And indeed it is not a superficial, as is 
too commonly found, but a just and more exten- 
sive knowledge of the two last (§.7. n° 2. 3.), that 
is here required for this purpose. For who will 
pretend to direct the apothecary how to act, that 
is himself ignorant of the proper methods of act- 
ing, in things of that nature? How can any one 
select or make a rational choice ot materials which 
he has never seen, or scarce heard, of? What 
room has he to foresee (and consequently prevent 
the bad) effects of applications, who has never 
examined their composition and texture, nor ex- 
perienced their action on other bodies?—He 
therefore that intends for this branch (§.2.) of the 
profession will doubtless find his account in giving 
some attention to the practical part of officinal phar- 
macy; in critically examining the mechanical struc- 
ture and sensible qualities of the materia medica & 
chemica, and in observing their effects and manner 
of acting on animal bodies. 
§.9. So that from comparing what has been 
said (§ 7. and 8. with §.4.), we may naturally 
infer that there is required more time and diligence 
than is generally supposed, to qualify one for this 
business; with regard to which, we are going to 
lay down directions according to the best of our 
abilities. But a just treatment and method will 
B2 cer-

4 INTRODUCTION. 
certainly have their, force in making the acquisi- 
tion hereof the more easy. 
§.10. Supposing therefore the preliminaries 
(mentioned §.7. and §.8.), requisite for prescrib- 
ing forms rationally, to be sufficiently known; 
we shall distribute the matter of our subject
under three general heads; the first of which, 
by way of introduction to the rest, will com- 
prise the rules and cautions necessary to be 
observed before prescribing, the second, will ex- 
hibit what relates to prescriptions in general, with- 
out regarding the particular form; and the last, 
will contain the particulars of every individual 
form of medicine in use, with proper examples or 
specimens of each. 
GENERAL RULES and CAUTIONS 
to be observed before prescribing. 
§.11. A prudent physician never orders any  
thing in his prescription but what he 
has a sufficient reason for, which upon inquiry he 
is able to give; so that he does not ad at random, 
from custom or prejudice, but as the indications, 
which he has before rightly deduced and consider- 
ed, direct him. 
§.12. He is first of all therefore to determine 
rationally, whether in the present case there be 
required any thing to be done on his part. 
§.13. In consequence of which determination 
if nature herself be found strong enough, and in a 
proper disposition to throw off the disease, if the 
disorder can absolutely receive no benefit from 
medicines, if its nature or particular disposition be 
doubtful and not yet determined, or if it be fore- 
seen

5 General Rules and Cautions.
seen that a cure thereof will bring on a worse dis- 
ease; it is then both just and rational to omit pre- 
scribing, at least any thing that will much affect
the œconomy, in order to avoid oppressing the 
patient both in his body and purse. 
§.14. But to prevent the patient’s falling into 
despair from being destitute of physical help, and 
to exclude ignominious reflection on the physician 
and his profession, as seeming useless or imper- 
fect; it is often adviseable in those circumstances 
(§.13.), to order something innocent in a pre- 
scription, such as will do no harm, if they should 
prove of no great benefit. With this view, the 
physician will acquaint and familiarise himself with 
several forms consisting of simple ingredients; as 
innocent julaps, mild emulsions, easing mixtures, 
unactive powders, &c. by which specious shew of 
assistance, the patient will rest much more quiet 
and easy both in his body and mind, than if left 
destitute with a harsh prognostic. This conside- 
ration will be more particularly useful in the un- 
certain and often imaginary disorders of virgins, 
and married women, especially whilst teeming. 
§.15. If the physician finds by his indications 
that there is room to expect success from his en- 
deavours, the next step is to determine how and 
by what means that may be obtained with the 
greatest ease and expedition: both which we are 
directed to by the doctrine of indications, which 
being supposed already known, we shall here men- 
tion such only as more immediately relate to our 
present design. 
§.16. The grand scope in a cure being to re- 
cover (tuto, cito & jucunde) safely, quickly and 
pleasantly, the physician should always have his 
eye fix’d upon that view; as being the point to 
which every thing he orders shou’d have, as much 
as possible, an immediate tendency. 
§.17.

6 General Rules and Cautions. 
§.17. Hence he is directed to select the most 
efficacious and proper ingredients, and to combine 
them in a manner most suitable to answer his in- 
tentions, having a regard both to their matter and 
the form. 
§.18. His prescription should also contain no- 
thing that will be attended with hazard or danger 
in the administration: tho' in desperate and un- 
tractable cases, it is allowable to try a new method; 
supposing it to be conducted with judgment, and 
the relations forewarned of the doubtfulness of 
success in the case. 
§.19. A physician that consults his character 
and interest, will never be fond of using new and 
unexperienced methods and remedies, whilst there 
are others of long standing in practice as suitable 
for his purpose; and even those, he will order 
with the utmost circumspection: reputation being 
oftener lost and envy got in its room, by such at- 
tempts, than thro' ignorance. 
§.20. He will reject all obsolete and useless 
medicines, and such as easily change or corrupt 
by keeping, left, they prove disagreeable and hurt- 
ful to the patient, or at least obstruct his inten- 
tion: upon which account, it is proportionably 
better for medicines to be made up at the shops of 
the most celebrated apothecaries; because their 
more constant and speedy vent gives oftener occa- 
sion for a renewal or fresh making of those medi- 
cines; but skill and honesty in compounding, are, 
however, stronger recommendations on the behalf 
of the apothecary. 
§.21. Rough medicines are to be always laid 
aside, where more gentle ones will serve the turn; 
but if such are used, it must be with great circum- 
spection and prudence, especially when intended 
for weak and delicate habits of body, or very sen- 
sible and nervous parts, left the violence of 
remedy

7 General Rules and Cautions.
remedy raise an ill opinion of the physician and 
his profession. 
§.22. Medicines which require extraordinary 
skill to prepare them, shou'd be made up and ex- 
hibited with one's own hand, or else not be pre- 
scribed at all; unless we be sufficiently assured of 
the faithfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.23. Very costly ingredients shou'd be spar- 
ingly or very little used, when others more com- 
mon and cheap are as suitable for the intention; 
which caution we generally find to be observed in 
prescriptions: but some allowance must be made 
for the luxurious daintiness of the rich, who of- 
ten judge the virtue of a medicine by its price. 
§.24. Exotic or far-fetch'd remedies, are not 
to be superstitiously preferred to such as are the 
product of our own country, when the latter are 
equal to our design; for the indigenous simples and 
compounds are not so subject to adulteration and 
fraud, nor decay from the length of time and 
change ot climate, as exoticks are. 
§.25. It is often prudent to order such things 
as (by their great commonness, easy and frequent 
name, particular smell, taste and other qualities) 
are popularly known and discoverable, by titles 
the least in use, or else mix'd and veiled with 
other substances; left being discovered, the pa- 
tient might be disgusted at them, or else despise 
them as of no efficacy. 
§.26. We may be more ready and liberal in 
the use of particular medicines to such as have 
frequently undergone their operation, than to o- 
thers unaccustomed to 'em, which particularly 
holds good with regard to emetics, cathartics, 
opiates, &c. 
§.27. Such ingredients as are unpleasant, nau- 
seous or troublesome to be taken, should be avoid- 
ed as much as possible; or at least ordered in a
B4 very

8 General Rules and Cautions. 
very small quantity, and artfully disguised in 
something more agreeable: it being generally bet- 
ter to give nothing, than what nature has a parti- 
cular abhorrence to; which caution is particularly 
of consequence with respect to very nice and 
fanciful women, children, infants, and such as have 
some particular antipathy, &c. 
§.28. Hence it is often proper to be satisfied, 
that the patient has no natural disgust and aver- 
sion to the particular medicine and form pre- 
scribed; for otherwise, remedies extremely well 
adapted to the disorder, may prove not only in- 
effectual, but sometimes of pernicious consequence; 
notwithstanding that be brought about by nothing 
more than the imagination or fancy. 
§.29. The judicious physician will aim at sim- 
plicity with efficacy, and not multitude and quan- 
tity of ingredients in his prescription; studying 
rather a concise brevity, than a pompous and af- 
fected scroll: and accordingly he will select his 
materials from the vast field of the materia medica, 
not promiscuously, but as they stand approved by 
reason and experience. 
§.30. But the younger physician, whose cha- 
racter and business are not yet sufficiently establish- 
ed, will accommodate his practice, as much as is 
consistent with his intention, to the customs and 
opinions of the age, place, and people he is con- 
cerned with: thus he will the more easily pave 
the way for coming into publick esteem; but 
when confirmed, and of considerable standing in 
practice, he may then safely disregard such cir- 
cumstances. 
§.31. Natural and simple medicines are prefer- 
able to prepared and compound ones, when the 
virtues of both are equally the same. For in pre- 
paration and competition, medicines are not only 
subject to change and put on other qualities, but
their

9 General Rules and Cautions. 
their goodness must also greatly depend on the 
honesty and dexterity of the compounder; whereas 
the conduct and constancy of faithful nature greatly 
surpasses all the pretensions of art. 
§.32. Tho' the knowledge of every simple in 
the Materia medica be useful to a physician, he is 
required to have a more particular acquaintance 
with such as are in constant practice, and for that 
purpose always kept ready in the shops; left he 
should order things which are not ready at hand: 
which would be matter of little consequence, were 
it not for the prevailing forwardness of substitut- 
ing one thing for another, without consulting the 
physician. 
§.33. Besides the properties and doses of each 
simple and compound medicine, the young phy- 
sician. will remember the several synonimous appella- 
tions usually assigned to each; that he may not be 
liable to order the same thing more than once in a 
prescription, under different titles. Upon the 
same account he will also learn the several general 
appellations, which are for brevity used to signify 
several simples, as they are expressed in Morellus *. 
§.34. An acquaintance also with the several 
seasons of the year, proper to vegitable and ani- 
mal substances, should not be neglected but had in 
memory; left he order something to be fresh ga- 
thered, &c. in autumn or winter, which is to be had 
in that flourishing state only in spring' or summer. 
§.35. The different textures and consistences of 
both simple and compound medicines, must also 
come into consideration; to avoid improper forms 
and proportions in prescription. 
§.36. The mutual affinity and aptitude of the 
simples for mixture with each other, and of the 
instruments and methods by which they must be 
so
* See a list of these general appellations at the end of the Book.

10 General Rules and Cautions. 
so prepared, should be in like manner learned 
from a rational and practical pharmacy; which 
will make for the interest both of himself and pati- 
ent, and preserve him from being ridiculed by 
the apothecary’s man, when he may have occasion 
to mention them in his prescription. 
§.37. By remembering the constituent ingredi- 
ents of officinal compounds, we may avoid an im- 
proper repetition of the same simples in an ex- 
temporaneous form; but indications, sometimes, 
require such repetition. 
§.38. Nor is it proper to accumulate many in- 
gredients in one form, which differ, indeed, in 
name, but not in their nature and specific virtues; 
for that would be much the same as neglecting the 
caution at §.33. 
§.39. Such of the select ingredients as may com- 
modiously enter one form, should not, without ne- 
cessity, be distributed into more, respect being had 
to the opinions and circumstances mention’d 
§.30;  for there are some who are much displeased 
with few and short formulæ. 
§.40. On the other hand, simples which have 
no congruity with each other, so as to mix uni- 
formly, should be left out off the form, or be as- 
signed to some other, especially oily and terebin- 
thinate substances with watery, and such things, 
as upon mixture, change or destroy the properties 
of each other, &c. of which, particular mention 
will be made hereafter, well worth special ob- 
servation. 
§.41. To avoid in some measure both these 
difficulties {§.39. & 40.), we must oppose medi- 
cines not to every trifling, but the most urgent 
Symptoms; for these being the effects or conse- 
quences of the disease, that, or its immediate cause 
being removed, the symptoms must spontaneously 
vanish; besides, the train of symptoms is often so 
numerous

11 General Rules and Cautions.
numerous and opposite, as so make a distinct 
treatment of them impracticable without confusion. 
§.42. In very acute diseases, and in symptoms 
extremely urgent, it is adviseable to order remedies 
that may be made up and exhibited with the greatest 
ease and expedition; that a critical opportunity 
may not be lost through a want of the medicine, or 
a delay of the apothecary. 
§.43. If the texture of the ingredients suit 
them indifferently for several forms, we may, upon 
inquiry, reduce them to that most agreeable to 
the patient; as many have a particular liking, or 
aversion, naturally or from use, more for one form 
than another: by which means the physician and 
his profession will come more into the good opi- 
nion of the patient, as well as taking the medi- 
cine be render’d more certain and pleasant. 
§.44. On the contrary, we must not be so solli- 
citous about the palate as to forget the proper na- 
ture, danger, and symptoms of the disease; nor 
neglect the pre-disposing cause in the patient’s 
habit. Some forms are more suitable to one dis- 
ease than another. How preposterous would it be 
to order an electuary, or bolus, in a quinsy,or where 
deglutition is difficult, &c. 
§.45. Nor is the intention of a medicine as 
easily answer’d by one form as another: sudorifics 
agree best with a liquid form, absorbents with a 
dry one, and fœtid, or nauseous things, with that 
of a pill, as we shall observe more at large in 
the several histories of each particular form. 
§.46. The age and circumstances of the pati- 
ent have also their force in determining the parti- 
cular form of the medicine. Infants should not be 
fatigued with internals, when external forms will 
prove as effectual; nor should they be ever mo- 
lested with a bolus, pill, or any thing unpleasant 
and difficult to swallow.
§.47.

12 General Rules and Cautions.
§.47. The patients natural constitution, or ha- 
bit, has, in like manner, some influence in de- 
manding a variation in the particular form. The 
hot and dry require a liquid, the moist and phleg- 
matic are benefited most by a dry form; but these 
being of less consequence must give place to the 
consideration of §.43, to 47, which are of greater 
importance *. 
* The condition of the disease, being either acute 
or chronic, has also no small influence in deter- 
mining the particular form, and manner of exhi- 
bition.—In the 
(1.) Chronic, we should gradually inlarge the 
dose (per §.26.), and may more regard the pa- 
late (per §.43.) with the patients convenience 
and circumstances (per §.23. 27. 28. 29. 46. 47. 
48. 50.); always preferring pills, electuaries, 
wines, ales, &c. to a train of boles, draughts, &c. 
which appear more formidable and discouraging. 
But, the 
(2.) Acute, generally require medicines of the 
strongest efficacy, to be used often, interchange- 
ably, in different forms for the same case, and to 
be more ascertain’d in their dose; as in boles, 
powders, draughts, drops, &c. 
§.48. Medicines that are to be taken upon long 
journeys, or continually carried about in boxes for 
constant use, should consist of ingredients the least 
bulky, most effectual and durable, and reduced to 
a form the most convenient and portable. 
§.49. If a patient finds himself better after a 
prescription, he should continue in the use of it 'till 
the physician finds some variation required; nor 
is it commendable to make a change therein with- 
out an evident and weighty reason. 
§.50. It is, however, allowable and proper, in 
hereditary, or habitual and very chronical distem- 
pers,

13 General Rules and Cautions. 
pers, to vary both the ingredients and form, tho'
the face of symptoms and their indications re- 
main the same: whereby is shewn the skill of the 
physician and the copiousness of his art, and that 
the patient may not be tired out with one form, 
nor particular medicines become habitual and use- 
less to him. 
§.51. When no benefit arises from the use of a 
medicine, rather than persist therein, it shou'd be 
changed, either wholly or in part, at the discretion 
of the physician: but, if noxious, it must be 
speedily and altogether suppressed; for, by the ju- 
vantia & ledentia, or what helps and hurts, we 
are directed principally how to act. 
§.52. Lastly, as a prudent physician never pre- 
scribes but with great attention and circumspection 
of mind, so he should never lay the formula out of 
his hand ’till he has first revised it; that he may 
be sure every thing is right, distinct and clear; 
for it being the too general lot of prescriptions 
to be made up by the hands of journeymen 
and apprentices, who are often both ignorant 
and careless, a flip of the pen, or an obscurity, 
might chance to be of fatal consequence to the pa- 
tient. 
Of the GENERAL Circumstances of pre- 
scriptions, exclusive of the particular form of 
a medicine. 
§.53. WE come now to consider the formula, 
or prescription (§.1.) in general, 
as agreeing with, or common to, all forms with- 
out distinction; and this we shall do (1.) abstractly, 
with respect to the bill itself, and then (2.) in com-
position, 

14 Of Forms in general.
position, with respect to the circumstances of its 
constituent parts. 
§,54. With regard to the first (§.53.), we un- 
derstand every thing that does not immediately 
affect or concern the medicine it self; but serve ei- 
ther for ornament, brevity, or perspecuity in the 
way of compounding and applying it. 
§.55. The first (I.) that occurs among these 
(§.54.) is an arbitrary and superstitious inscrip- 
tion, appearing in the front of the bill, and con- 
timating in some particular characters or letters in- 
timating the pious wish and inclination of the pre-
scriber: as, †. C. D. JD. JJ. α & ω *; which 
may be, and are, generally omitted without 
neglecting any thing serviceable to the patient. 
§.56. The next (II.) that appears, at the head 
of the prescription, is that constantly used, abbre- 
viated word (Rec. or ꝶ.)  † Recipe; importing that 
the apothecary is to take something, afterwards 
mentioned. 
§.57. Our business is now to examine the (III.) 
order, or series, in which the things to be thus 
(§.56.) taken are wrote. This we shall perceive 
upon enquiry to vary with every particular form of 
medicine; nor even there, shall we find one con- 
stant and uniform method observ'd; as will be 
more apparent in the particular histories of each. 
We may, however, observe in the general, 
1. That a distinct line shou'd be made of every 
single ingredient; not to obsure them, by 
writing one continuous or in the same direct- 
ion with the other. 
2. That
* This seems to smell very strong of a Romish or superstitious 
priest-craft; but as such hands are seldom daubed with physic a- 
mong us, we are intirely strangers to things of this nature. 
† When the back part of the ꝶ is left out, it makes another 
character (♃) of the same import but more frequent use, as being 
less known. 

15 Of Forms in general.
2. That ingredients of the same kind should 
be placed next to each other; roots with roots. 
waters with waters, &c. 
3. Not to be wanting in the least point of 
order, we should begin and range things, that 
differ from each other in substance, according 
to their quantities; beginning with the largest 
and ending with the smallest, or the reverse. 
4. Next to that consideration (n° 3.), the 
basis, or main ingredients (§.75.) shou'd hold 
the first place; then, the assistants (§.78.); af- 
ter them, the correcters (§.83.); and lastly, the 
vehicle (§.86.), or what serves to make them up. 
5. Such things as have their quantity undeter- 
min'd, or dependant on the consistence and bulk 
of the rest, shou'd come generally in the last 
place of a prescription. 
Not but there are several exceptions from these 
rules, which will be taken notice of in the ensuing 
parts of this treatise, and will be therefore worth 
the readers observation. 
§.58. For the (IV.) method of writing, or or- 
dering these several ingredients, and their quanti- 
ties; the more distinct and intelligible they are set 
down, the more commendable: accordingly 
1. The physician shou'd use himself to write 
plain and distinct; not to neglect and hurry over 
his letters with a careless pen. 
2. He shou'd keep up to custom and orthogra- 
phy, to avoid the sneering of an apothecary or 
his man. 
3. An irregular, or confused method of wri- 
ting, shou'd be avoided as much as possible; 
and to make things appear with more evidence 
and method, ingredients of the same kind shou'd 
be placed next to each other {per §.57. n° 2.):  
the


16 Of Forms in general.
the general appellation common to each similar 
ingredient shou’d be always placed first, and 
need not be mentioned more than once; as the 
proper name of each shou’d be placed directly 
under and even with the first, in the method of 
§.57. n° 1. The same is also to be observed, 
with respect to several ingredients following 
each other that are to enter a form in the same 
quantity, i, e. not to write the particular mark 
of quantity to each singly, but to assign only 
one character of quantity to them all; before 
which should be inserted the technical word 
ana or aa, which is used to denote that the quan- 
tity to be taken of the several preceeding ingre- 
dients must be equal or alike, whether it be in 
number, weight or measure.—There are ma- 
ny such abbreviations in use, which will be met 
with in the ensuing formulæ, and ought not to 
be neglected (if it were safe) because universally 
received and establish'd by long custom. 
4. Too much brevity in writing is still of a 
worse consequence; especially when the ingre- 
dients and their quantities are order’d, not by 
common letters, but odd characters or figures, not 
constantly used, and often falsely or imperfectly 
made *: by which means it too frequently hap- 
pens that the apothecary is brought into a mis- 
take, either of the ingredient or quantity, to the
great 
* These odd characters, of which the German (and especially 
the chemical) physicians were very fond, are extremely seldom, if 
ever, used in prescriptions among us; and therefore the caution 
seems to be directed chiefly to that quarter. But as they frequently 
occur in writers (especially foreigners) in physic, pharmacy and 
chemistry; and as they may be sometimes used with propriety in a 
prescription {per §.25.); it will be proper for the young physician 
to acquaint himself with the chief of them, agreeable to cur au- 
thors advice in the end of this paragraph: we have therefore fur- 
nished our reader with a list and explanation of the most usual of 
these characters at the end of the book; it being too long to be in- 
serted here. 

17 Of Forms in general. 
great danger of the patient. So that it is more 
prudent to intirely relinquish such, or else to use 
those only which are the most distinct and com- 
mon, and the least ambiguous; and then, only 
when {per §.25.) we have some particular rea- 
son for concealing the ingredients of the formula. 
The characters; or weight, shou’d be express’d 
with the greatest exactness, by such as love to 
use them.—And tho' the first sort of cha- 
racters are improper to enter prescriptions in 
writing, 'tis yet fit they shou’d be known; as 
they frequently occur in the works of physi- 
cians. 
5. The ingredients of a prescription shou’d be 
wrote for by those names under which they are 
kept and known in the shops; notwithstand- 
ing they shou’d be barbarous or improper: by 
which means the compounder will be under no 
difficulty, nor fall into any mistake. But if for 
concealment (per §.25.) an uncommon term be 
used, the apothecary shou’d have, if it be ne- 
cessary, a speedy and private intelligence thereof. 
6. The WEIGHTS used at present in the shops 
of apothecaries, are 
℔ the physical pound  
℥ an ounce  
ʒ a dram 
℈ a scruple
Gr. a grain
containing 
℥ xij.
ʒ viij.
℈ iij.
gr. xx.
ß ij.
A grain is seldom divided further than into two 
equal parts, whose whole amount is supposed 
to be equal to a grain of white pepper or a 
middling barley-corn: but it is much the best 
to use a grain of a determinate or standing 
weight, like that of the Goldsmiths; without 
which, this and all larger weights thence arising, 
as from unity, wou’d be always varying and un- 
certain, as Fernelius observes. 
C 7.

18 Of Forms in general. 
7. The physical measures now in use, are such 
as belong either to dry or liquid ingredients: 
and are 
(1.) Dry; as the 
Fasc. Fasciculus, or a small armfull, being as 
much as can be easily grasped by the arm bended 
together, and is equal to twelve handfuls. 
M. Manipulus, or handfull, which is as 
much as can be taken up by the whole hand at 
once, and may be compared to four pugills, 
or half an ounce. 
Pug. Pugillus, comprehends as much as can 
be contained between the thumb and two first 
fingers, and answers to about the whole or half 
of a dram. 
N°. Numero, in number, equal or unequal. 
(2.) Liquid; comprehending, besides the 
common trading measures, also the Cyath. 
Cyathum, which holds about an ounce and an 
half. 
Cochl. Coohlearium, reckon’d to be about 
half an ounce. 
Gutt. Gutta, or a Drop, which being the least 
of liquid measures, is substituted in room of a 
grain among weights, and may, like that, be 
commodiously subdivided into two (or more) 
equal parts, being first imbibed by a bit of su- 
gar, to be afterwards pulverised and divided by 
weight: but the quantity under this measure 
varies with the specific gravity and degree of 
cohesion in the liquid to be so measured; and, 
also the quantity of surface in contact with 
it, or the largeness of the bottle’s neck from 
whence it is to be dropp’d; which first also 
holds good with respect to the Cyathum and 
Cochlearium.
8.

19 Of Forms in general.
8. With regard to these medical divisions of 
quantity (n° 6. and 7.), we may observe 
(1.) That every thing, not only soft and 
solid but also liquid, whose quantity is requi- 
red to be determined with accuracy and ex- 
actness, shou’d be portion'd out by weight 
only.
(2.) The dry measures (n°. 7.) are to be 
used only for such things as are very bulky, 
and of no strength; as herbs, leaves, flowers, 
feeds, &c. The larger kind of seeds, bulbous 
roots, the whites and yolks of eggs, &c. are
usually prescribed by number. 
(3.) The liquid measures (n°. 7.) shou’d be 
seldom used in prescriptions, unless to signify 
the particular dose; by reason of their uncer- 
tainty, the measures differing with particular 
liquors and countries: but the use of weights 
is more constant and certain; and if we have, 
notwithstanding, a fancy for the use of mea- 
sures, we shou’d at least know the several 
weights of different liquors which they can con- 
tain. Strong liquids may be also portion’d 
out with more exactness by drams, scruples and 
grains, than by drops. 
(4.) Number, in prescribing ingredients, 
with their weights and measures, is to be ex- 
pressed by characters not barbarous (as 1, 2, 3, 
&c.) but Roman (as j, ij, iij, iv, &c.) as being 
more distinct and evident. 
(5.) All weights and measures are usually 
subdivided into halves, and their half part is 
then signified by the character ß.
(6.) The larger weights and measures are 
to be express’d by the characters proper to 
their whole, or half quantities; and not by 
the number of lesser weights or measures they 
contain.
C2 (7.)

20 Of Forms in general.
(7.) Sometimes the weight or measure of an 
ingredient is left to be determined at discre- 
tion by the apothecary, and is only wrote 
(q. s.) quantum sufficit, or a sufficient quantity: 
which might be well enough bore with, had 
the apothecary any constant rule to go by, or 
were the quantity and consistence of a me- 
dicine to be always the same; but when it be- 
comes on this account very uncertain, it is ad- 
viseabie for the physician to determine the quan- 
tity, as may be seen under the particular forms 
hereafter. 
(8.) Among the ancients, there were many 
other weights and measures than these (n° 7, 
8.) infrequent use; which tho' now obsolete 
and unpractised, are yet necessary to be known 
by a physician that intends to be conversant with 
their writings, and may be therefore learned 
from Fernelius and others *. 
§.59. The (V.) fifth part of a formula, or bill, 
is the SUBSCRIPTION, directing the apothecary 
in what form the physician wou’d have the ingre- 
dients made up, the manner in which they are 
to be so prepared, and the method in which they 
are to be applied, or exhibited by him to the pati- 
ent. With regard to which, 
1. If a prescription contains but one ingredi- 
ent, which requires no extemporaneous prepa- 
ration, it may be subscribed only (F.) Fiat, 
adding the name of the form, v. g. pulvis, bo- 
lus, &c. 
2.
* A list and explanation of the several weights and measures 
used by the ancient Greek, Roman, and Arabian physicians (as 
taken from Fernelius, who is for that end recommeded by our au- 
thor,) being rather too large to he conveniently inserted in this 
place, the reader will meet with that, and some others, at the 
end of the book. 

21 Of Forms in general.
2. But if it consists of several, to be only 
mix’d together without other preparation; 
there must be first inserted (M.) misce, and af- 
terwards (F.) fiat, and lastly the name of the 
form; as e.g. M. F. Bolus. But in liquid mix- 
tures it is often sufficient to write M. only; tho' 
it is sometimes requisite to give a particular ad- 
monition concerning the uniformity or exact- 
ness of the mixture. 
3. If there shou’d be required some other 
preparation besides mixture, as cutting, brui- 
ting, digesting, boiling, &c. these are also to 
be inserted either before or after M. as shall seem 
most proper. 
4. It is then requisite to add (if necessary) the 
number of doses into which the medicine is to 
be distributed: where it is also frequently pro- 
per to admonish, the apothecary to be very ex- 
act in making every dose equal and alike; be- 
cause they often, for expedition, divide a medi- 
cine by guess or the eye. 
5. Mention is to be sometimes made of the 
receptacle into which the medicine is to be put, 
and of the method of keeping, or close stop- 
ping the same; when they contain things very 
volatile, or soon melting in the air, as will be 
hereafter observed in particular forms. 
6. Lastly, the instrument whereby, and the 
particular part or the body to which, the me- 
dicine is to be applied, are required to be 
sometimes mention'd, when it appertains to the 
apothecary; as will be hereafter observed in 
the history of plasters, lambatives, glysters, 
&c. 
7. In all these particulars (no 1. to 6.), it is 
best for the physician to be full, and distinct or 
clear, and to use the terms of art, however bar- 
C3 barous:


22 Of Forms in general.
barous; left an error be committed thro' his 
own fault, or the apothecary shou’d be put to a 
nonplus. 
§.60. The (VI.) last general part of a pre- 
scription or formula, is the SUPERSCRIPTION †, 
of the medicine or direction to the patient; which 
is often (tho' not always) very necessary, inasmuch 
as it declares the form of the prescribed medicine, 
its virtue, dose, method and time of administration, 
the proper vehicle, regimen, &c. as far as they 
regard the sick patient and his attendants: which 
is to be carried on in the following order, 
1. Beneath the Subscription (§.59. n° 1, to 
6.), at a distance from the line, write the capi- 
tal letter S. i. e. signetur, let it be intitled, &c. 
2. If there be several medicines of the same 
form and appearance prescribed together for one 
patient; they shou’d be marked with the capital 
letters A, B, C, &c. or numbers, 1, 2, 3, &c. at 
the head or in the margin of each formula that 
they may be distinguish’d from each other; and 
then these distinguishing marks are to be inserted 
after the letter S. in each Superscription or di- 
rection: e.g. (S. lit. A, vel n°. 1.). But this is 
unnecessary where there is but one formula pre- 
scribed, or where there is several, but easily di- 
stinguishable from each other. 
3. There must be then annex’d the title of the 
medicine, taken from its form and virtue, e.g. 
potio purgans, a purging draught, &c. 
4. Next in order, the dose, way of taking, 
the time when, the vehicle and the regimen; 
and
† Our author calls it signatura, signment. I suppose we need 
not inform our reader that this part of a prescription is almost uni- 
versally left out by our physicians; who judge it most convenient to 
give these orders by word of mouth to the patient or his attendants, 
or leave it to the discretion of the apothecary. 

23 Of Forms in general.
and if any thing else is to be observed, it shou’d 
be mentioned in its proper place. 
5. Since this direction (n°. 1. to 4.) contains 
the rules to be observed by the patient in taking 
or applying the remedy; it shou’d be either cut 
off from the formula or prescription for him to 
keep, or else (which is the common practice) it 
shou’d be translated and wrote fair by the apo- 
thecary, on every label that is affix’d to the re- 
ceptacle of the medicine, to be transmitted there- 
with to the patient. 
6. The style of the direction shou’d be there- 
fore agreeable with the age and country wherein 
it is wrote, being concise and plain, or very in- 
telligible. 
7. In naming the medicine we shou’d avoid 
the oftentatious or quackish titles used by pre- 
tenders, nor shou’d we ever inhanse or give it 
an hyperbolical epithet; as incomparable, golden, 
grand, &c. For tho’ these may take with the 
vulgar and illiterate, it will but expose the pre- 
scriber to laughter and ridicule, among the more 
intelligible part of mankind. 
8. Care is to be also taken to hide or omit the 
names of such diseases as are indecent or impro- 
per to be mention’d in the directions; as the 
lues venerea, disorders of the menses, sterility, 
impotency, &c. For such shou’d be either 
wholly neglected, or at least signified by terms 
the least known: as exciters of the menses may 
be call’d aperients; antivenerials, purifiers of 
the blood; exciters of Venus, strengtheners, &c. 
And what relates to the method of taking, &c. 
shou’d be delivered to the patient, if possible, 
by word of mouth. 
9. The dose of the medicine, when left to 
the patient or his attendants, shou’d be ordered 
by quantities the most commonly known and 
C4 easy

24 Of Forms in general. 
easy to determine; as by large or tea spoons full, 
the size of nuts, drops, &c. But if it be of 
consequence to have the dose determined to ex- 
actness; the distribution and exhibition thereof, 
may be referr’d to the apothecary. 
10. The method and time of administring the 
remedy, depending upon the particular nature 
of the disease, the medicine itself, and many 
other circumstances; shou’d be in the general di- 
rected so as to suit best with the physician’s in- 
tention, and the patient’s convenience: neg- 
lecting the scrupulous and superstitious observa- 
tion of times and seasons deduced from astrolo- 
gy, as both useless and unbecoming the sagacity 
of our age. 
11. If there be any occasion for a vehicle to 
take it in, we shou’d endeavour to chuse one, 
that besides pleasing the palate, falls in with the 
intention of the medicine itself. The materials 
for vehicles are usually taken from things that 
are readiest at hand, grateful or pleasant to the 
patient, or become so by common and frequent 
use: as ale, wine, broth, tea, coffee, juleps, 
wafers, marmalade, roasted apple, or the like. 
12. A proper regimen, before, in, and after 
the operation of the medicine, is often abso- 
lutely necessary to be observed; for without this, 
the action of the remedy wou’d be frequently, 
either too much increased, diminish’d, chang’d, 
or wholly destroyed. But to determine what re- 
gimen will be most proper, the doctrine of in- 
dications must be call’d into consideration. 
§.61. We have been hitherto treating of a for- 
mula in general, exclusive of its particular contents; 
we come now to examine its internal composition, 
the number of its constituent parts, their nature, 
quantity, mutual affinity, proportion and the like. 
§.62.

25 Of Forms in general. 
§.62. The formula, or prescript (§.1. &
§.6.) consists either of (1.) only one officinal sim- 
ple or compound preparation; or else (2.) of se- 
veral such properly combined together: which 
first, we shall call a simple formula; but the last, a 
compound one. 
§.63. A simple formula (§.62.), as it con- 
sists of but one officinal preparation selected out of 
many, does scarce require any other restriction or 
limitation than that of its quantity. 
§.64. Its quantity then, is twofold: (1.) so 
much as is order’d by the physician to be made up 
and sent to the patient by the apothecary at one 
time; or (2.) such a quantity of the first as is to 
be applied or administred to the sick patient at 
once. The first, we shall call tht general quantity; 
the latter, the particular one, or dose: but as the 
quantity of the first depends upon the number of 
the last, we shall consider that before the former. 
§.65. The dose of a medicine comes under two 
considerations; viz. that of continued quantity, and 
that of number. 
§.66. The bulk or weight of a dose, is deter- 
mined by the physicians due consideration of the 
condition and circumstances of both the patient and 
the medicine: without which, a well chosen re- 
medy, by exceeding or falling short of its just 
quantity, may prove either hurtful or at least in- 
effectual. To prevent this, we must: therefore at- 
tend 
1. To the nature of the disease, its seat, stage, 
force or degree of strength, causes, symptoms, 
&c. that our force may be proportion’d to the 
obstacle to be removed. For as diseases that are 
violent, acute or deep-rooted, are scarce to be 
overcome but by large doses; so, if we shou’d 
overload a slight case, the remedy itself wou’d 
prove another disease. 
2.

26 Of Forms in general.
2. We must regard the strength; depending 
on that of the fibre, or the blood's motion, and 
functions of the body: that our assistant means 
may be adiquate the defect, and not prove a bur- 
then instead of a helping hand. So that large 
doses will be found to suit strong bodies; whereas 
the weak can only bear small ones. But we must 
carefully distinguish strength that is latent and 
oppress'd, from that which is really absent and 
exhausted. 
3. We must have respect to the age: with re- 
gard to which, the following general rules may 
be of service for internal medicines. 
Suppose a dose proper for a man of a consistent 
age (i. e.) about 30, or when he has done growing) 
to be 
as — 1, or ʒj.
a dose for one of 14 to 21, will be 2/3, or ℈ij.
— 7 to 14,—1/2 or ʒß. 
— 4 to 7,—1/3 or ℈j. 
— 4—1/4 or gr. xv. 
— 3—1/6 or  ℈ß. 
— 2—1/8, or gr.viij.
— 1—1/12, or gr.v.  
Old people being observed to be twice children 
in their strength and diet, as such they shou'd be 
also consider'd in this respect of dose; so that we 
may compare
an old man of 60, to a young man of 21 years. 
— 7O,—14 
— 80,—7 
and so with the rest. But it cannot be supposed that 
these rules hold always so, as not to admit of many
exceptions;

27 Of Forms in general.
exceptions for, that there must be frequently a 
variation, will appear evidently to all who consi- 
der the diversity of strength in people of the same 
age. So that a true estimate of the dose, is hardly 
deducible from the age alone. 
4. The size of the body, in people of the 
same age, does also frequently require a variation 
in the dose; tho' we shall find, their strength is 
not always proportionable to their size. 
5. The temperature has also some influence 
upon the quantity of a dose. The biliose and 
melancholly can easily dispense with a larger 
mass of cooling, moistening and relaxing me- 
dicines, than their opposite temperatures; and 
so (vice versa) on the contrary side. 
6. The difference of sex has also its force. 
Women, who are generally of a more delicate 
and weak constitution than men, require a pro- 
portionable diminution of the dose. But such as 
are very nice and fanciful, will sometimes throw 
up the dose notwithstanding it was proportion’d 
to their strength. For such, it is therefore ad- 
visable to let the quantity be as small as possible; 
or else to subdivide a larger dose into several 
smaller parcels. 
7. The particular disposition, whether morbid, 
natural, constant, periodical, from the make or 
habit of body, sex, proceeding diseases, &c. 
with the complication of the original disease, 
may have each their concern in determining the 
particular dose as well as the kind of a medi- 
cine. 
To this head belong a regard to the menses, 
breeding, lying-in, suckling, hysteric fits in wo- 
men, and the hippo in men; with obesity, tender- 
ness, a weakness in some particular organ, a defor- 
mity in the back or break, the stone, an aptness to  
vomit,

28 Of Forms in general.
vomit, with abundance of the like particular indif- 
positions. 
8. To be still more particular, it is sometimes 
very necessary to have a regard to the individual 
constitution, idiosyncrasia, or particular inclina- 
tion of every patient, as they stand affected to 
this or that class of medicines, or some one par- 
ticular remedy. These being generally inexpli- 
cable, are to be known only by experience, or 
from the patient's relation: thus some are pur- 
ged even by the smell of a cathartic; while 
others are scarce affected by double the usual 
quantity taken inwardly for a dose. 
9. Use or custom has also its force here; for 
a large dose of a medicine will produce less ef- 
fect upon one used to the same, than a small 
dose upon one who is a stranger thereto; which 
is very obvious in the use of narcotics and to- 
bacco. 
10. Nor is the employ or course of life to be 
here altogether neglected; for as the several de- 
grees of health and sickness are particularly in- 
fluenced thereby so it also frequently brings the 
body into particular habits, which either in- 
crease or diminish the action of certain medicines. 
11. The particular nation or people is to be 
also consider'd with regard to the dose; as they 
have often something in that respect singular and 
proper to themselves. Thus, the Saxons and 
Westphalians *, are hard to work upon. The 
Siamese use an arsenical instead of an antimonial 
cup; and the Indians require a dose of ipecacu- 
anha twenty times as large as the Europeans, to 
make them vomit †. 
12.
* Wedelii de compos. medic. tab. II. 
† Histoire de l'academ royale, 1703. 

29 Of Forms in general. 
12. A regard to the season of the year is also 
sometimes of consequence: as the sultry dog- 
days, the hard frost, or the temperate air, dis- 
pose the body to be more or less affected by 
one and the same dose. 
13. The known strength and virtues of the 
remedy also, when consider’d with their relation 
to the several preceeding heads, still greatly in- 
crease the variation of the dose. Thence, a phy- 
sician that intends to prescribe forms rationally, 
will make himself exactly acquainted with the 
several quantities of medicines found by experi- 
ence, and established by use to be proper for one 
dose: with the several degrees of that dose, as 
being small, mean or large, with respect to the 
preceeding considerations; more especially he 
will keep in memory those of the capital and 
most efficacious medicines. But if he would 
bring any simple into use which has not been yet 
sufficiently experienced, being mindful of the 
rule §.19. he will begin first with the least quan- 
tity, afterwards judiciously inlarging the dose, 
as he is assured of the preceeding unactivity, or 
usefulness of the medicine. 
14. Sometimes the high price of medicines, 
which are otherwise of no great efficacy, restrains 
the dose to a small compass; witness, prepared 
pearl, gems, oriental and porcupine bezoar, &c. 
15. The great bulkeyness of the matter, con- 
taining but a due quantity of medicinal parti- 
cles, obliges the dose to be sometimes less than 
is otherwise requisite; left the load of inactive 
matter shou’d excite a nausea: as is often the 
case in herbs, barks, woods, flowers, &c. 
16. The unpleasantness of a medicine, whether 
in taste, smell, or other qualities, frequently per- 
swades the physician to prescribe them in a smal- 
ler dose than the other: as asa fœt. castor. olea, 
&c. agreeable to §.27.
17.

30 Of Forms in general. 
17. The particular form of the medicine itself, 
often restrains the dose to a determinate quantum. 
For many of the forms have certain limits as to 
quantity, which they cannot exceed without the 
greatest necessity; as will hereafter appear under 
each. 
18. Lastly, the various external or internal 
use of a remedy, and its application to different 
parts of the body, are here, also, to be consi- 
dered as having some influence in determining 
the quantity of a dose. Very wide is the diffe- 
rence between the dose of a cathartic when it is 
to be given by the mouth, and when by way of 
glyster, &c. 
Nota. The limits of our present design forbid 
me to say more, or to pursue the theme of dose in 
a more special manner. The copiousness and un- 
certainty of the subject, being scarce determinable 
even by general bounds, prevailed with me not to 
insert (as is usual) a table exhibiting the proper dose 
of every single remedy. These are liable to so many 
exceptions, that they cannot be rationally ascer- 
tain’d to particular cases, without the several pro- 
ceeding conditions (§.66. n°. 1 to 18.) are first li- 
mited and consider’d. Besides, we have supposed 
our reader (per §.7.) previously acquainted with the 
doctrine of indications, and the materia medica, 
both simple and compound; which teaches their 
general doses as well as virtues: and then, what 
will be said of each form in particular, will also 
reflect much light upon this head. 
§.67. The number of doses (§.65.) is either 
one, or more, being often arbitrary and undeter- 
mined; but it may be generally limited by parti- 
cular consideration; among which, the following 
may be look’d upon as general rules. 
1.

31 Of Forms in general. 
1. If one dose will answer the physicians in- 
tention; what need of more? 
2. If the medicine be in itself unpleasant, if 
the patient has an aversion or dislike to the taking 
of it, or if the application or taking be difficult 
and troublesome; these call for the exhibition of 
as few doses as possible. 
3. Medicines, which by keeping, easily fer- 
ment and corrupt, grow moist and liquid, or too 
dry, or else exhale and lose their finest parts, 
shou’d, upon those accounts, be prescribed in 
but few doses at a time. The different state 
of the atmosphere, as to heat, moisture, and 
other qualities, has also its share in limiting the 
quantity and number of doses of such remedies; 
as those states of the air may more or less pro- 
mote such inconveniences or defects of particu- 
lar medicines. 
4. If the adequate dose of a prescribed medi- 
cine is of a larger bulk than can be conveniently 
swallow’d at once, if nothing contradicts, it may 
be properly divided into many lesser doses, to be 
taken at small intervals; to prevent it from ex- 
citing a nausea or vomiting in the patient; 
which is a consideration that takes place princi- 
pally and frequently in emetics and strong ca- 
thartics. 
5. If you order potent remedies for a patient 
whose case, constitution, and particular condi- 
tion is not yet thoroughly known; it is better 
for the just dose to be given in little separate por- 
tions at several times, that we may timely break 
off its use upon the least appearance of its im- 
propriety. The same holds good also with re- 
gard to the use of new and less experienced re- 
medies (agreeable to §.66. n°. 13.) 
6. If the obscurity, or instability, of the par- 
ticular morbid indisposition renders the effect of 
the

32 Of Forms in general.
the medicine uncertain; if we are obliged to 
prescribe something (by reason of §.14.), it 
should be but in small and few doses: by which 
means, less injury can happen to the patient, and 
it may be the more easily changed for some other 
medicine, when that may be required. 
7. When the preparation of a medicine is dif- 
ficult and a long while in making up, unless 
something forbid, it shou’d be prescribed in 
a larger quantity or more doses; to spare the 
time and pains of the apothecary, whose hands 
are sometimes too full. 
8. Hence also, remedies which are difficultly 
convey’d, and to parts remote from apotheca- 
ries, shou’d be {cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
transmitted in larger quantities or more doses, 
9. On the other hand, if the patient lives near 
his physician, so as to be often visited by him, 
the number of doses order’d at one time shou’d be 
few; left the physician’s coming often without 
prescribing shou’d be thought much of, or look’d 
upon as dilatory. 
10. When the same medicine is required to be 
used for a long time together ; there shou’d be 
as many doses order’d at once as may be conve- 
nient. For tho’ scantiness of a medicine for mo- 
ney, is a persuasive for the patient to take it 
when bought; it will hardly encourage him to 
be constantly purchasing, especially if it be disa- 
greeable at the same time. 
11. If the exhibition of the medicine is to 
be repeated at short intervals of time, the doses 
must be on that account the more numerous; to 
prevent the trouble of repeating the prescription 
and composition. 
12. Lastly, as the patient may like a variety, 
and the different face of the symptoms require a 
change (per §.50.), both in the form and me-
dicine,

33 Of Form in general.
medicine, especially in chronical cases; it may 
be on those accounts adviseable to order the me- 
dicine in a small quantity: that the form and 
remedy may be changed the oftener, and at a 
less expence to the patient. 
§.68. The general quantity (§.64.) of any form 
fit to be prescribed for the patient at one time, 
rnay be easily estimated from a previous determi- 
nation of the number or size of the proper dose, 
(per §.66. 67.): for, if the bulk or weight of a 
dose be multiplied by the number you would give, 
the product will be the whole quantity to be or- 
der’d for the patient in one prescription. Whence 
it follows, 
1. That the general quantity will be equal to 
the special or particular one (§.64.), if only 
one dose be prescribed for at one time. 
2. But if we design the prescription should 
contain more doses than one, the least general 
quantity that can be order'd will be doubly 
equal to the particular one, or dose. 
3. If the dose of a form is to be exactly de- 
termin’d by weight, the general quantity should 
be proportioned so, as that it may be distribu- 
ted into proper and exact doses, without leaving 
any remainder. But this rule is not constantly 
and every where observ’d; especially if the pre- 
scription contains many doses of a form. 
§.69. The physician should also be mindful of 
the particular consistence and texture of his ingre- 
dient, when he prescribes a simple formula; that 
it may have a natural fitness to be reduced into the 
form he desires. 
§.70. Lastly, when his prescription orders but 
one ingredient, he should be careful that it be not 
over strong, nauseous to the smell or taste, nor  
D diffi-


34 Of Forms in general.
difficult to swallow, &c. (per §.27.); because a
simple formula does not admit of that correction 
and mixture which are necessary to conceal those 
disagreeable qualities; unless he will compliment 
the patient, by ordering the medicine to be taken 
in some proper and pleasant vehicle. 
§.71. We have been hitherto considering a 
simple formula: our next business is to treat of the 
compound one (§.62.); which consisting of several 
ingredients, requires greater circumspection and 
skill in its prescription and composition. 
§.72. There seems, at the first view indeed, to 
be little or seldom occasion for extemporaneous 
composition since we are furnished with such a 
number of handing officinal compounds (per §.31. 
and 37.): but the frequent and great necessity we 
are under of forming the officinals into extempo- 
raneous compositions, is sufficiently apparent from 
the following. For, 
1. The officinal simples and compounds are 
frequently not well adapted to the particular cir- 
cumstances of the patient and his disease. Their 
dose is frequently too bulky for their strength, 
their composition unjust or inaccurate, and their 
textures or virtues changed or spoiled by long 
keeping, &c. which considerations are often e- 
nough to dissuade one from the use of officinal 
compounds, tho’ they were directly suitable for 
the intention. 
2. When the virtues and strength of an offi- 
cinal medicine are too weak, and not equal to 
the disease we would remove we are then of- 
ten obliged to the addition of others, more po- 
tent, in an extemporaneous composition. 
3. If its action be too violent, or attended 
with some ill consequence; we are then often 
obliged to moderate and correct it by extempo- 
raneous composition. 
4.

35 Of Forms in general.
4. We have frequently several different in- 
tentions to answer at the same time, which can- 
not be done by one officinal simple or com- 
pound: while the natural disposition of the se- 
veral ingredients indicated, to make a uniform 
mixture, requires them to be reduced into one 
form (per §.39.) 
5. This composition is sometimes required 
also from the situation, sensibility, and other 
circumstances of the Part to which the medicine 
is to be applied or conveyed. 
6. The constituent ingredients suited to each 
indication do also require to be combined in a 
form, for the reasons (§.43. to §.50.) which 
determine the particular form, they being of 
themselves very unsuitable. 
7. Composition sometimes serves to conceal a 
necessary remedy (per §.25.) 
8. It is often requisite, in order to change or 
correct some disagreeable smell, taste or colour, 
in an effectual remedy. 
9. Lastly, the vile and received custom of 
crouding, without necessity, more ingredients 
than are required in an officinal composition, 
often obliges the physician to make a new form: 
tho’ prudence sometimes bids the physician, 
especially a junior, (per §.30.) to pay obedi- 
ence to inch old and venerable jumbles. 
§.73. In the compound formula (§.71.) we 
are to consider (1.) its component parts, their num- 
ber, use and proportion: (2.) its quantity (§.64.) 
general, to be made up at once. and particular, to 
be taken at once. (3.) And lastly, its qualities, 
as arising from composition or mixture, 
§.74. The constituent parts are four in num- 
ber: (1.) the basis or main ingredients; (2.) the 
adjuvant, or what promotes the action of the for- 
D2 mer;

36 Of Forms in general. 
mer; (3.) the corrigens, Or correcter of something 
improper therein; (4.) and lastly, the constituens, 
or what serves to inlarge, mix and make up the 
whole. If there be any dirigens, which some 
make a fifth Part, it may be properly taken in 
under the adjuvans, 
§.75. The BASIS is the principal part in the 
composition, calculated against the immediate cause 
and chief symptoms of the disease, being that by 
which the physician endeavours chiefly to answer 
his indications. This is required to be present in 
every form, even the simple one, (§.63.) where 
it often makes the whole formula: being sometimes 
sufficient of itself alone, without tiny other addi- 
tion; but it is frequently mixed with other things, 
suitable to make it act with safety, ease and expe- 
dition, as it ought. 
§.76. The basis is, with respect to its virtue, 
either simple or compound. A simple basis is what 
corresponds to only one indication; whereas the 
compound one serves several intentions at the same 
time. Each of these are again subdivisible into 
simple and compound, with respect to their matter; 
according as they are made up of one or more in- 
gradients. 
§.77. But which of these kinds of basis (§.76.) 
is most suitable for the prescription, may be con-
cluded from the following considerations or rules, 
1. What may be well effected by a simple 
basis need not be attempted by a compound 
one: so that if only one indication is to be an- 
swered, it may be done by a basis which is 
simple both in its virtue and matter or ingre- 
dients: when the intentions are serveral, the ba- 
sis may be simple and compound in its virtues 
or properties; both which, when sufficient, are 
preferable to the more complex basis. 
2.

37 Of Forms in general. 
2. But if a combination of several simples 
one basis seems to promise more efficacy, we 
shall do well to comply with it. 
3. But then we must be careful not to con- 
fuse the mixture, by inserting things together 
which have no congruity or affinity to each 
other, both in their consistence and virtues: as 
we have in some measure already hinted, (§.29, 
30, 31, 36, 40, 41.) and shall observe more 
largely hereafter. 
§.78. The ADJUVANS (§.74.) is that part of 
a formula or extemporaneous composition which 
promotes and assists the action of the basis (§.75.) 
when that alone is not every way adequate to each 
of our intentions. So that the presence of this 
part is not absolutely necessary in all, but in only 
some prescriptions and compositions. 
§.79. The manner in which we assist the basis 
by the adjuvans, is threefold: for either (1.) we 
would directly increase its force or power; or (2.) 
we would dispose it to pass thro' particular vessels, 
and act upon certain of the animal fluids, (which 
was used to be termed preparing them) that its 
action may meet with less resistance there; or, 
lastly, (3.) we would direct that action more to 
some one particular viscus or organ of the body 
than another. 
§.80. Augmenting the natural virtue of the 
basis (per §.79. (1.) comes into use, when the 
basis is of itself too unactive, or so bulkey as to 
make a sufficient dose troublesome to take (per 
§.66. n° 1. 3. 6. 15. 17.) This is done by ad- 
ding something stronger of the same virtue, or 
invested with some more effectual specific property 
found out by experiment: as when we add tro- 
chisci alhandal to a very mild cathartic, or add an-
timonium diaphoreticum to a small dose of a drastic, 
D3 or

38 Of Forms in general.
or strong purge. This takes place frequently in 
evacuants, but seldom in alteratives: and may be 
often rather look’d upon as a piece of the basis, 
than any thing distinct. 
§.81. Preparing the animal fluids (per §.79. 
(2.) ) is seldom made use of but in evacuations; 
when the peccant matter to be discharged is diffi- 
cult to move, the basis slow and unlively, or the 
passages want to be opened and set at liberty: in 
which cases it may be useful to add attenuants, di- 
luents, antacids, antalcalescents, aperients, anti- 
spasmodics, laxatives, and the like. 
§.82. Lastly, it is. necessary to direct and re- 
gulate the action of the basis (per §.79. (3.)) when 
we find by experience that it has a natural ten- 
dance to a viscus, or part which may not be suit- 
able to our present design. Thus the action of 
mercury is determined to the intestines downwards, 
by adding a cathartic; and upwards to the salival 
glands, by astringents and opiates, &c. Bat this 
determination, especially of the antients by topical 
specifics, does for the generality seem not to have 
so much in it as was formerly supposed. 
§.83. The CORRIGENS (§.74.) is that part 
of the formula which removes some unpleasant- 
ness, or noxious quality in some of the ingredi- 
ents, without imparing any of their virtues. When 
the ingredients are free from such vices, there is 
hardly any occasion for a correcter. 
§.84. Those noxious qualities (§.83.) which are 
commonly complained of in emetics, cathartics 
and opiates, are acrimony, ftatulency, weakening 
of the viscera, too much heat, cold, or the, like. 
In order to correct these, we make use of sweeteners, 
obtunders of particular acrimony, carminatives, 
strengtheners, warmers, coolers, &c. But ob- 
serve, 
1.

39 Of Forms in general.
1. That it cannot be properly called correc- 
tion, when the virtues of the medicine are de- 
stroyed, together with its vices. 
2. That the generality of such things as re- 
markably require correction, have their virtues 
and vicious qualities so inseparable from each 
other, that one cannot be removed without 
equally imparing the other: but to say truth, 
the medicine proves offensive oftener by the 
unseasonable or unskilful use of it, than from 
any innate vice; to say nothing of the adulte- 
ration, unskilful preparation, corruption from 
a long and careless keeping, &c. which are of- 
ten the sole causes of such vices, if it have any. 
3. Hence, many commonly reputed correc- 
tions are improperly so judged and called;
since by removing the virtues with the vices, 
they either prove useless or hurtful: while at 
the same time, the addition of such correcters
often discommodes the form, and inlarges the 
proper dose to a sickly bulk, as well as weakens 
the efficacy of the basis. 
4. Also, such medicines as stand most in 
need of it, are generally kept ready prepared 
and corrected in the shops; so that if the phy- 
sician has a mind, he may spare himself the 
pains of such correction in an extemporaneous 
composition. 
5. The best correction is to have the simples 
good and genuine, the composition faithful and 
skilful, and to use it with discretion, at a pro- 
per season, and in a just dose (per §.66.) 
6. If any thing wants correcting, it is the 
inflaming oils, biting and insoluble rezins, fats 
which turn rancid, and things which are caustic: 
these being taken alone, will not mix uniformly 
with the aqueous juices in the primæ viæ, so 
that by adhering firmly to the coats and vessels 
D4 of

40 Of Forms in general.
of the œsophagus, stomach and intestines, they 
often produce an inflammation and pain by their 
stimulus, which are not very easy to remove. 
The remedies or correcters in this case, are, 
loaf-sugar, the yolk of an egg, sopes, sweet 
olive oil, mild alcalies or acids, absorbent pow- 
ders, &c. 
§.85. The unpleasantness (§.83.) to be cor- 
rected, respects either the taste, smell or color: 
for the first are used sugar, syrups, acids, &c. for 
the second, fragrant waters and oils, with amber- 
grease, musk, &c. and the last, or beauty of co- 
lour, is given by dragons blood, redsanders, co- 
chineal, leaf gold and silver, &c. But we must 
observe. 
1. It can hardly be supposed in the apothe- 
caries power, nor in the patient’s expectation, 
to have medicines always as pleasant as our meat 
and drink: nor is there any need of so much
cookery here; since the disorder gives the pa- 
tient an appetite to them. 
2. Smells and tastes reputed pleasant or un- 
grateful, are not promiscuously and equally 
esteemed so by all people: what delights and 
comforts one, is sometimes unpleasant and per- 
nicious to another: sweet tastes and smells are 
to some the most ungrateful. 
3. Every thing that comes from the apothe- 
cary, is judged by the patient to be of an ill 
smell and taste; so that often the more you cor- 
rect in those respects, the less you please: there- 
fore the best and most pleasant correction is to 
let the remedy be effectual, and contracted into 
as small a compass and as few doses as possible. 
4. But if it should be proper at any time to 
make some correction of this kind, it should 
be done with neatness and judgment; that while 
one

41 Of Forms in general. 
one fault is removing, a worse may not come in 
its room; and to be particularly careful to pre- 
serve the virtue of the medicine intire, free 
from change and destruction. 
5. We should not be over sollicitous to please 
the eye, like some, who thrust leaf gold and sil- 
ver into every thing they make up: it is indeed 
tolerable in pills or a bolus; but to never omit 
it, is a piece of ridiculous vanity. 
6. The unpleasantness of a medicine arises 
sometimes from the unfitness of the several 
simples to enter together into one form; but 
that may be avoided by chusing only such as 
have an affinity to mixture with each other, or 
else by distributing the ingredients into more 
forms, (per §.40.) 
7. Lastly, accommodating only a suitable form 
to the patient and medicine (per §.43. 44.) is 
sometimes no inconsiderable correction in this 
case. 
§.86. We come in the last place to the CON- 
STITUENTS (§.74.) which is that part of the com- 
position which serves to reduce the ingredients to 
a proper consistence and bulk for the form desired. 
So that this part has the least business to do in a 
formula, unless the ingredients cannot mix well of 
themselves, or are too small in bulk. Here we 
may observe. 
1. That if any adjuvans (§.78.), or corrigens 
(§.83.) or both be required, we must try if 
we can’t find such as will at the same time an- 
swer the end of a constituens; to avoid a multi- 
plicity of ingredients without necessity. 
2. Or else some other must be chose which 
coincides with the virtue of remedy, or at least, 
does not oppose it. 
3.

42 Of Forms in general.
3.The constituens ought to have a natural 
aptitude to mix with the rest of the ingredients; 
but if the indication should require one that has 
not, the mixture may be effected by sugar, sope, 
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
§.87. The mutual proportion of the several 
parts, now enumerated (§.74. to 86.) to each 
other, may be determined from (1.) considering 
the proper dose and consistence of each (per §.35. 
and 66.); (2.) from knowing their dose, con- 
sistence and virtue, when mix’d together; (3.) 
from the particular quantity required by the de- 
terminate form (per §.66. n° 17.) 
§.88. With regard to the proportion of the 
basis, (§.75.) tho' should not sometimes ex- 
ceed the other parts in bulk or quantity, it ought 
always to excel them ail in strength and efficacy; 
and whether it be fimple or compound, the quan- 
tity taken should be proportioned, as near as pos- 
sible, to the design to be answered: with this 
view, 
1. A respect must be had to the adjuvans 
(§.78.) if any be ordered; for if adjuvantia of 
the first kind (§.79. n° 1. and §.80.) be used, 
so as to considerably increase the energy of the 
basis, the basis must be then proportionably less. 
2. If any corrigens (§.83.) be ordered, we 
must then also consider whether and how much 
it will weaken the basis (per §.84. n° 2, 3.) 
and accordingly allow a proportionable aug- 
ment of the basis. 
3. There must be also a proportionable al- 
lowance for the constituens (§.86. n° 1.) whe- 
ther it assist or correct the basis. 
§.B9. The proportion of the adjuvans (§.78.) 
to the basis, should be such, that at least the strength,
if


43 Of Forms in general.
if not bulk of the former, may be inferior to the 
latter: for otherwise it may be termed rather a 
part of the basis, than adjuvans; especially when 
its virtue is the same with that of the basis (per 
§.8O.) Nor can we here, in general, assign a 
more particular determination of the proportion 
of this part than that care must be taken to ad- 
just the adjuvans to the basis, so, that when they 
are both joined together they make a just and ade- 
quate dose, being neither too strong, nor too bulky. 
§.90. With regard to the proportionable quan- 
tity of the corrigentia of both kinds, (§.84. and 
85.) it is in the general more adviseable to let it 
be small, that we may avoid the faults in §.84. 
n° 2, 3. §.85. n° 2, 4, 5. Hence, it is often 
improper to leave the correction of the smell, or 
taste of the medicine, to be determined at the 
apothecary’s discretion, (per §.58. n° 8. (7.) 
What farther regards this head, will be given un- 
der each particular form. 
§.91. The proportion of the constituens (§.86.) 
is pretty uncertain; for the requisite quantity 
thereof is more or less, according to the particu- 
lar nature of the constituens itself, and agreeable 
to the particular form in which the medicine is to 
be made up, as well as proportionable to the 
quantity and consistence of the several constituent 
ingredients. If it be only intended to inlarge the 
medicine, just so much may be added as will com- 
plete the required dose or quantity; but if its use 
is only to make up the form, the quantity is usu- 
ally left be determined at the discretion of the 
apothecary, without any danger, agreeable to 
§.58. n° 8. (7.) 
§.92. We have hitherto considered the com- 
ponent parts, and general quantity of a compound 
formula, (per §.73.) we come now to its PAR- 
TICULAR QUANTITY OR DOSE, which maybe be
deter-

44 Of Forms in genera!. 
determined, both as to quantity and number, upon 
the conditions of the simple formula (per §.66. 
and 67.) But the following considerations should 
be here observed. 
I. When full doses are taken of the several 
component ingredients, especially of the basis 
and its congener the adjuvans, they make up as 
many effectual doses as there are efficacious in- 
gredients: so that in this case, the number of 
ingredients will express the number of doses. 
2. When the number of active ingredients 
are but few, or when there is but one dose re- 
quired, such proportionable parts of each in- 
gredient must be taken as will together amount 
to the desired quantity or dose. 
3. Also the strength of the simples does not 
remain always in the same degree after mixture 
as before; but are sometimes made weaker there- 
by, and sometimes stronger in their virtues: 
which is therefore a consideration to be attended 
to. For there is a wide difference between ad- 
ding the adjuvans to the basis, or the corrigens, 
or both: one will sometimes inhanse the virtue, 
when the other will diminish it, the bulk re- 
maining the same, per §.79. 84. 85. Examples 
of which will be given when we come present- 
ly to treat of the qualities. 
4. From the variety of mixture often arise 
compositions by far more or less corruptible 
than the several ingredients were when asunder. 
Emulsions grow sour presently; while on the 
other hand, fix'd alcalies, ground with absor- 
bents, keep dry a long time without melting. 
So that this consideration has often no small in- 
fluence in determining the number of doses to 
be prescribed at one time, in a compound for- 
mula. (per §.67. n° 3.) 
§.93.

45 Of Forms in general 
§.93. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.73.) of 
a compound formula will evidently appear from 
comparing what has been said §.68. with §.92. 
§.94. Lastly, the QUALITIES (§.73.) which 
arise from the mixture of several ingredients, being 
frequently very different from those of any of the 
simples which make up the formula, do greatly 
merit our consideration here: for the changes 
which do thence arise are not confined only to ex- 
ternal appearance, but the most intimate nature 
and medicinal properties of the ingredients are 
also greatly affected and changed; in so much, 
that this is no small argument for preferring the 
use of simples (per §.31.) to that of compounds, 
where there is no real necessity (per §.72.) for 
the latter. 
§.95. The qualities here intended to be in- 
quired into (§.94.) are chiefly the consistence, co- 
loury smell, taste, and medicinal virtues. 
§.96. The consistence; which is proper to each 
particular form, should be cautiously preserved 
from being confused, or disturbed by various and 
injudicious mixture: otherwise the remedy may 
be render’d nauseous, unfit for use, or give the 
patient occasion to think it ill prepared: it may 
be also tedious to make up by the apothecary, and 
sometimes excite his ridicule; but what is worse, 
it may destroy the virtue of the medicine, or in- 
troduce foreign qualities. 
§.97. Its consistence (§.96.) may be vitiated 
(1.) by the inequality or ununiformity of the mix- 
ture; (2.) from too great thickness or dryness; 
(3.) from too great fluidity or softness. 
§.98. To avoid these inconsistences (§.97.) in 
prescribing, we ought to make ourselves previ- 
ously acquainted with,
1.

46 Of Forms in general. 
1. The consistence proper to every particu- 
lar form, which we shall explain hereafter in 
each of them. 
2. The consistence of every separate ingre- 
dient (§.35) which enters them, which are to 
be learned per §.7. n° 2, 3. and §.8. 
3. The mutual disposition of each ingredient 
for mixture with the other, agreeable to §.36. 
Here is to be particularly consider’d the mutual 
affinity, attraction, or repulsion that obtains be- 
tween certain simples, their effervescence, fer- 
mentation, precipitation, deliquation, concretion, 
or coagulation, &c. But as these are to be learn- 
ed from chemistry only, it is evident of what 
considerable advantage that is to pharmacy. 
§.99. The colour, is the most uncertain and 
changeable of all the qualities; especially when 
the simples mix’d together are of different natures. 
We may therefore the more readily introduce such 
as are most agreeable; the better to effect which, 
we must attend to the following considerations. 
1. No colours in nature are more agreeable 
than crystalline, white, golden, red and blue 
yellow, green, black, and such as are opake and 
compound of these, are less agreeable.
2. Several forms have their particular and 
usual colour, which are to be commended: as 
milky or white, in emulsions; red, in julaps, 
but never blue; golden, red, or crystalline, in 
mixtures, &c. Unusual colours either nauseate 
or offend the more nice patient; but it is some- 
time's prudently used, for concealment of some- 
thing (per §.25.) 
3. There can be no physical nor general de- 
termination of the particular colour that will a- 
rise from a mixture of several colour’d ingre- 
dients together in a medicine. The chemist,
from

47 Of Forms in general. 
from a mixture of colourless ingredients, pro- 
duces black, white, yellow, red, blue, brown, 
and almost what colour he pleases: we must
therefore refer to chemistry on this head, as that 
alone affords the examples and rules requifite for 
the prefent business. Consult also §.85. fore- 
going. 
§.100. The mutability and uncertainty of odors 
upon mixture, is but little inferior to that of co- 
lours (§.99.): but then they are more consider- 
able and certain signs of the internal texture and 
virtues of the compound, and they act more strong- 
ly upon the body than colours. Here we must be 
careful to prevent the result of vicious and offen- 
sive odors upon composition of different ingre- 
dients. Therefore observe. 
1. The rules concerning gratefulness of odors 
are very uncertain and confin'd; those pleasing 
Some, not pleasing all, (per §.85. 23.) 
2. Pleasantness and utility in odors are often 
very distant companions. Patients who are hy- 
pochondriacal, hysterical, epileptic, &c. often 
fare the worst from the pleasantest and sweetest 
smelling ingredients. 
3. Things which are inodorous, and mode- 
rately either sweet or fœtid, are most in univer- 
sal esteem; but putrid and excrementitious smells 
are intollerable: in the mean time, such as are 
the most fœtid or the most fragrant, will produce 
the strongest, either good or bad, effects upon 
the body.  
4. Frequently the whole virtue of a medicine 
depends upon its order, and the principles of 
which that is constituted; destroy one, and the 
other also perishes, a change in one makes also 
a change in the other.
5.

48 Of Forms In general. 
5. The odor of a compound cannot be ge- 
nerally determined from the odors of its several 
ingredients: as chemistry largely demonstrates. 
(1.) From a mixture ot inodorous ingredients 
arise compounds of the strongest smell. If sal 
ammoniacum and a fix’d alcaly or quick lime 
be ground together, tho' they are both sepa- 
rately inodorous, what a sudden and violent 
smell do they produce! oil of vitriol poured on 
nitre, sea-salt, sal ammoniac, regenerated tartar, 
and the like, produce the same. 
(2.) From a mixture of very strong smelling 
substances results a compound without any smell. 
Let a saturation of spirit of sal ammoniac with 
spirit of nitre or common salt be taken as an 
example. 
(3.) The worst of stenches may be excited 
upon a mixture of things little fœtid, or even 
fragrant: and on the contrary, the most fra- 
grant odors may arise from a composition of the 
most fœtid ingredients. Sulphur being dis- 
solved in a fixed alcaly, and mix’d with vine- 
gar, can you distinguish it from the smell of a 
rotten egg? on the other hand, juices of an 
offensive smell being carried about mix’d in a 
leather bag by Mr. Lemery *, afforded the plea- 
sant persume of musk. 
In order therefore to act circumspectly in this 
case also, a knowledge in chemistry is both use- 
ful and necessary. 
§.101. Tastes come under the same conditions 
with odors (§.100.), and answer to the same cau- 
tions. Insipid, sweet, sour, bitter, salt, &c. are 
the most agreeable: rancid, putrid and urinous, 
the most unpleasant: the production, destruction,
and 
* Hist. de l’Acad. Royal. an. 1706.

49 Of Forms in general.
and change of tastes, upon a variety of mixtures, 
is also no less various; and these too we are to 
learn from chemistry. 
Do not the sharpest tasted acid and alcaly be- 
come insipid upon a just commixture? 
What is more ungrateful to the tongue, than the 
brackishness which crabs-eyes, oyster-shells, &c.
impart to acids? 
The softest and insipid earths become aluminous 
when mix’d with acids. 
Lead mix’d with acids affords a saccharine 
sweetness: iron with acids affords a sweetish 
roughness; and the other metals with acids afford 
tastes intolerably nauseous. 
§.102. But we might easily pass by any fault 
that might happen in any of the fore-mention’d 
qualities (§.96. to §.102.), if they were not so 
frequently attended with an improper diminution 
and even intire change of the medicinal virtues of 
the composition. Even the medicinal virtues are 
often suddenly and unexpectedly impared and 
changed, without any considerable alteration in 
the other sensible qualities of the ingredients: as 
may be easily apprehended from the few following 
examples. 
1. Acids and alcalies destroy the properties 
of each other, upon mixture; and turn into a 
neutral salt, which is neither an acid or an 
alcaly. 
2. Acids arid the earthy absorbents destroy 
the natural action of each other, upon mixture; 
and produce a (tertium quid) new substance, 
which has neither the virtues of an acid nor an 
absorbent. 
3. Earths and the boles used in pharmacy, 
being mix’d with acids, acquire a stronger force 
of astringing, with an aluminous stipticity. 
E 4.

50 Of Forms in general. 
4. Some cathartics are hindred in their ac- 
tion by acids or alcalies, others are promoted 
in their action by being mix’d with the same. 
Scammony mix’d with an acid becomes as un- 
active as a little sand; on the contrary, by a 
fix’d alcaly, it is rendered stronger than alone. 
Jalap and colocynthis become quite tame and 
gentle in their stimulus, upon being mix’d with 
sal-tartari. 
5. Opiates promote the action of sudorifics 
and sialogogues: but they almost suppress the 
power of other evacuants. 
6. Mucilaginous and astringent medicines 
are weakened by a mixture of sugar. 
7. Mercury changed into an æthiops, or a 
cinnabar, by sulphur, is no longer a sialogogue, 
but loses its salivating power. Crude mercury 
ground with twice as much sugar, or testaceous 
powder *, becomes an unactive œthiops albus †. 
Turbith mineral is changed from an evacuant 
to an alterative, upon being mix’d with pil. de 
duobus & camph. ‡. Calomel ground with sul- 
phur of antimony will scarce either vomit, 
purge, salivate or provoke urine ‖. Corrosive 
sublimate, ground with more crude mercury, 
becomes sweet again. The many precipitates 
of mercury, which are stuck full of the sharp 
spicula of acids, lose all their force and acri- 
mony upon being ground with alcalies, and ear- 
thy absorbents. But ’tis a question whether 
æthiops and cinnabar remain the same, unalter’d 
by a mixture with alcalies.
8. 
* It is then the mercurius alcalizatus, which made some stir, 
not long ago. 
†. V. Edinburgh Medic. Essays, Vol. III. p. 388. 
‡ Ibid. vol. IV. p. 32. 
‖ Ibid. vol. I.  p. 46. vol. III. p. 389.

51 Of Forms in general. 
8. Calx viva being tailed unawares, burns the 
tongue with the acrimony of a fix’d alcaly. 
What a strange effed has it, when mix’d with 
sal ammoniacum! 
9. Alcalies mix’d with acids, or acids with 
alcalies, do generally excite a struggling ebul- 
lition; which is follow’d by a considerable 
change in the virtues and properties of each. 
Vitriolum martis, mix’d with alcalies, turns to 
a kind of tartarum vitriolatum, with an incor- 
rigible ochre. The same holds good with re- 
spect to the vitriols of other metals and semi- 
metals, except copper. Alum, mix’d with an 
alcaly, is precipitated in the form of an unactive 
calx: upon which principle, the nature of alu- 
minous magisteries is sufficiently apparent. Sul- 
phur, dissolved in an alcaly, is thence precipi- 
tated in a curdly form by acids, &c. 
10. Earthy absorbents, being mix’d with a- 
cids, do also in like manner reciprocally act 
upon and change each other; the absorbent 
loses its antacid property, and the acid loses its 
acrimony or acidity. 
11. A fix’d alcaly, upon mixture, sets at li- 
berty the volatile alcaline, and absorbent earthy 
parts of mix’d bodies, A volatile alcali will al- 
so separate the absorbent earthy parts of bodies:
but we must except the calx viva, which, on the 
contrary, separates and expels the volatile alca- 
ly. V. n° 8. Hence, what vast alterations must 
a compound suffer, which is made up of a fix’d 
alcaly, or calx viva, and ingredients which con- 
tain an ammoniacal or volatile salt; or when a 
volatile or fix’d alcaly is mix’d in a liquid form, 
with any of the soluble magisteries of coral or 
pearl? * &c.
E2 12. 
* Such a mixture in julaps, &c. would precipitate the fine 
magisteries into an unsightly hypostasis. 


52 Of Forms in general. 
12. A stronger acid will disengage and drive 
out a weaker, from the earthy substance or basis 
to which it has fix’d itself in bodies. The 
strongest acid is oil of vitriol; the weakest, are 
those of the vegetable juices. Hence, what will 
be the consequence if the strong acid of vitriol, 
sulphur or alum (which are all much of the 
same nature) be joined with sal ammoniacum, 
common salt, nitre, the sal febrifugum Sylvii, 
tartarum solubile, tartarum regeneratum, and 
the like? What will be the effect of this strong 
vitriolic or aluminous acid, when it disengages 
the weaker acid from the earthy parts which 
constitute those salts, and places itself in their 
room *? Hence, we may form a judgment of 
the tinctura martis Zwelseri, and others of the 
same tribe. 
13. Care must be taken not to mix acids, e- 
specially of the fossil kind, with any thing that 
is metalline or mineral: for that may pro- 
duce strange alterations in a composition; it 
may even turn a good medicine into the rankest 
poison. Mercury sublimate, red precipitate, 
lapis infernalis, butyrum antimonii, and many 
of the like nature, demand this caution. 
14. The same substance assumes very diffe- 
rent medicinal properties, barely from the dif- 
ferent menstruum in which it is dissolved. The 
generality of vegetable cathartics operate best 
when they have been first extracted with an 
aqueous menstruum; whereas if they are ex- 
tracted in a menstruum; wholly spirituous, as al-
cohol, 
* The consequence will be, that the weaker acid being disen- 
gaged by the stronger, from the earthy basis to which it was fix'd, 
will become volatile, and exhale in fumes; while the remaining 
earth and stronger acid will form another saline body, agreeable 
to the strength and mutual proportion of each.

53 Of Forms in general. 
cohol, they gripe more and purge less *. Glass, 
or liver of antimony, communicates an emetic 
power to wine; but not so to water, distilled 
vinegar, burnt wine, nor the alcohol of wine †. 
Copper dissolved in an acid, proves erhetic; dis- 
solved in a volatile alcaly, it makes a powerful 
diuretic; open’d by sal ammoniacum, it purges 
by stool ‖, &c. 
§.103. We could bring many more instances 
of the like kind with those now mention’d (§.102.), 
and it is wish’d we could say, all: but as the me- 
thod of composition is in our day without order 
and without end (per §.72. n° 9.), we must con- 
sequently fall vastly short of a just knowledge of 
the several alterations which arise in every com- 
pound upon mixture: but we should be pretty- 
near the mark, if we had but once arrived at an 
accurate knowledge of the mechanical structure, 
and constituent principles of the several simple in- 
gredients, with the mutual affinity or disposition 
they bear to each other, and from a full discovery 
of the true ways in which they act upon each o- 
ther, and upon the animal œconomy. 
§.104. In the mean time, who would be so 
rash as to enter upon the composition of the me- 
dicines used in pharmacy, without a competent 
skill in chemistry; for ’tis that which must teach 
him the surprising and infinitely various changes 
which arise upon mixture: and therefore there still 
remains an infinite number of those changes to be 
discovered and farther prosecuted by that art; for 
the mutual application and affinity of all the simples 
E3 to
* M. Boulduc dans les Memoir, de l’Acad. Roy. an. 1701. 
p. 256.
† Lemery Traité de l’Antimoine, p. 413, &c. p. 561, &c.
‖ Boerhaave Elem. Chem. vol. II. process. 189. 

54 Of Forms in particular. 
to each other have never yet been experimented, 
nor have most of those been rightly examined 
which have been already tried and observed. 
Of FORMS in particular. 
§.105. DISTINCTION and method in writing re- 
commends to us the received division 
of forms into external and internal. Internal me- 
dicines or forms, are restrained to those only which 
are convey’d thro’ the mouth and œsophagus into 
the stomach: but under the external, are compre- 
hended all such medicines as are applied to the 
body any other way, whether they lodge upon the 
skin only, or are by particular means convey’d into 
various cells or cavities. To act therefore agree- 
able to this method, we shall begin first with the 
internal forms of medicines. 
OF the INTERNAL FORMS of
MEDICINES. 
Of a POWDER. 
§.106. A Powder is a dry, uniform and (here) 
internal medicine, consisting of one 
or more ingredients, broke into 
small particles: which do not adhere to each other, 
but remain equably mix’d. 
§.107. The powder (§.106.) is distinguished 
into three KINDS, according to its particular de- 
gree of tenuity: being either (1.) very subtle, called 
alcohol;


55 Of a Powder.
alcohol *; (2.) coarse or gross, as in spices, cof- 
fee, &c. usually call’d tragea; or (3.) of a mid- 
dling degree of fineness between the two former, 
when the simples are beat as fine as they can be 
without levigation, which is what we commonly 
intend by the word powder or species †. 
§.108. Which of these degrees of subtility 
(§.107.) will be most convenient for the intention 
and form, may be chiefly determined from con-
sidering (1.) the nature of the ingredients to be 
reduced into a powder; (2.) the degree of pene- 
trability we would give it; (3.) to determine its 
action to be quicker or flower, or more to one 
part than another; (4.) to have the mixture ap- 
pear more or less uniform, and in proportion to 
the patients more easy or difficult deglutition. 
1. Ingredients which are absorbent, hard and 
ponderous, ungrateful and refinous, should be 
more exactly comminuted, and when they are 
to penetrate far, or act quickly, &c. the first 
kind (§.107.) is required. 
2. Aromatics, and volatile substances lose a 
great part of their virtue in an over exact pul- 
verization, and much more by keeping in that 
state. 
3. Some things prove purgatives in a gross 
powder; but in a more subtle one, they are 
diuretic, &c. 
§.109. The ingredients or proper MATTER
for the powder (§.106.), is every thing that is 
E4 redu-
* This is obtained by levigation; and by ablution and precipi- 
tation with water, air, &c. when the subject will conveniently 
admit of it: and may be then distinguished into a vast number of 
degrees of tenuity; for the resistance of the medium and specific gra- 
vity of the subject being determined, the fineness of the powder will 
be as the time and highth wherein it precipitates. 
† This is also subdivisible into various other degrees of tenuity, 
by the different fineness of sieves. 

56 Of a Powder. 
reducible (either alone or mix'd) into a dry or 
dusty form, and is at the same time proper for 
internal use: so that liquids are not wholly exclu- 
ded from entering into the form of a powder. 
§.110 Hence (§.109.), this form takes in (1.) 
all officinal whether vegitable, animal or 
mineral, that may be used internally with safety, 
and are of a solid, dry and brittle texture. (2.) 
All officinal preparations and compounds which 
are of the like nature. (3.) All soft and thick 
substances of the two preceding classes (1. and 2.), 
as inspissated juices, extracts, electuaries, &c. (4.) 
All liquids of the same kind (1. and 2.) in a 
small quantity, as balsams, oils, &c. 
§.111. But a CHOICE of these ingredients 
is necessary in order to avoid inconsistence in a 
prescription: with regard to which, observe 
1. That simples which are very bulky in 
proportion to their efficacy are seldom, if ever, 
reduced to the two most subtle kinds of this 
form (§.107. (1.) (3.) ): on the contrary, they 
are very frequently made into the gross powder 
(§.107. (2.) ). Of this nature, are woods, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, &c. But we must not 
exclude things which are very light and bulky 
from the two finer kinds of this form, when 
they act in a little quantity, or make but a small 
dose, as agar. colocinth. &c. 
2. If we lie under a necessity of transgressing 
against the preceding rule, we should take care 
to supply the inactivity of the former bulky 
ingredients, by adding something that is more 
potent and effectual in a very small quantity. 
3. If any liquids be order'd, they should be 
in a very small quantity, in proportion to the 
dry ingredients; that the proper consistence of 
the form may not be thence disturbed. The 
same

57 Of a Powder.
same caution holds good, with regard to soft 
and thick substances. 
4. Gums should hardly ever enter the form 
of a powder: for they are not only very diffi- 
cult to reduce to this form, but they are also 
difficult to take in that manner, as they become 
gluey by mixing with the saliva. 
5. Such simples as are full of a mucilage or 
an oil, like many seeds, should not be order’d 
for this form, but in conjunction with things 
that are more dry and brittle: for the mucilage 
or oil being express’d in the pulverization, will 
make rather a paste than a powder, which will 
grow rank so much the sooner by keeping. 
6. Fœtid ingredients should be excluded this 
form as much as possible, as they are much more 
suitable for that of a pill. 
7. Things that are very sharp, bitter, or 
otherwise disagreeable to the taste, if given at 
all in this form, should be at least not given 
alone, but mix’d and qualify’d with others that 
are more mild and pleasant: by which means 
we shall avoid sleaing or burning the patient’s 
mouth, making him sick or nauseated, and ex- 
citing him to vomit. 
8. Therefore the stronger kind of resins 
should be ground up with sugar, or earthy ab- 
sorbents, and corrected with proper salts and 
effential oils; by which means they will be 
render’d more dissolvable in the aqueous juices 
of the stomach, nor so apt to gripe and adhere 
to the membranous parts. 
9. The more potent and effectual preparations 
of mercury, are more suitable to be exhibited in 
the form of pills or a bolus, than this of a pow- 
der. At least, it is not so safe to give such 
things unmix’d; by reason of the smallness of 
the dose: but something should be judiciously 
chose

58 Of a Powder. 
chose and adapted (per §.86. and §.102. n° 7.
and 13.) to enlarge the bulk. 
10. We are dissuaded from giving fix’d al- 
calies in this form, at least unmix’d by reason 
of their urinous acrimony, and their aptness to 
liquify by the air. 
11. Volatile alcalies, as they are offensive 
both to smell and taste, so they also quickly ex- 
hale, and are lost in this form. 
12. When the ingredients of a powder are 
of an unpleasant taste, especially in the tragea, 
or coarse powder (§.107. (2.)), they may be 
corrected with sugar, solid sugar confects, or 
the like: when they are of an unpleasant smell, 
we may add some fragrant essential oil, and 
sometimes a little musk or ambergrease: and 
both intentions may be frequently answer’d at 
once by a little elæosaccharum. For the sake 
of colour, we may add sang, dracon. l. santal. 
rub. leaf-gold and silver, &c. being at the same 
time mindful of the cautions, §.85. 99. 100. 
101. 
13. The physician, studying simplicity, will 
not take in above three or four ingredients at 
most, when he prescribes this form in but a 
small quantity. But in the tragea, (§.107. 2.) 
or coarse powder, and such as are more bulky, 
he may take the liberty of inserting a greater 
number. 
§.112. The neatest ORDER for placing the se- 
veral constituent ingredients or parts of this form 
in a prescription, is, to place the basis (§.75.) 
first, then the adjuvans (§.78.) and corrigens 
(§.83.); lastly, to add the constituens (§.86.) 
agreeable to §.57. n° 4. The several quantities 
of the ingredients may also direct another order 
(per §.57. n° 3.) But in both, the placing ingre- 
dients

59 Of a Powder.
dients of the same tribe together should be ob- 
serv’d (per §.75. n° 2.) And if any sugar is to 
be added, especially when its quantity is to be de- 
termin’d from the quantity of the other ingre- 
dients, it ought always to close the series in a pre- 
script, (per §.75. n° 5.) 
§.113. The DOSE (§.64.) of a powder, espe- 
cially of the two finer forts, (§.107. (1.) (3.)) is, 
at a medium, about half a dram. But it is some- 
times increased to a whole dram; tho’ but seldom, 
and never but when the patient has a good appe- 
tite to physic, or when the ingredients are very 
weighty in proportion to their bulk, and are easy 
to dissolve. As the dose of this form seldom ex- 
ceeds a dram, so it is as seldom less than a scruple, 
unless the substance is very bulky in proportion to 
its weight. But the tragea (§.107.) or coarse powder, 
will often easily admit of a larger dose than a dram: 
tho’ the dose of these is often not determin’d by 
weight, but at discretion in a spoon, upon the 
point of a knife, &c. But in either, we are to 
observe, 
1. Bulky doses should be avoided as much 
as possible, especially when the ingredients are 
unpleasant, and the patient nice and sickly, or 
apt to vomit, and of a difficult deglutition, &c. 
2. A respect must be had to the several cir- 
cumstances limiting the dose of medicines in ge- 
neral (per §.66.), and especially with regard to 
young infants (ib. n° 3.), that such may not be 
fatigued with a large dose.
3. Hence it is frequently more proper to in- 
crease the number of doses than their bulk (per 
§.67. no° 4. 5.); as the smallness of the dose 
will make amends for the repetition of it. 
4. There are yet some powders that are easily 
soluble in a proper vehicle, which may be given 
to the quantity ot several drams for a dose, and 
2 yet

60 Of a Powder. 
yet may be taken without difficulty. Even the 
Epsom salts may be given to an ounce. 
§.114. The GENERNAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, to be transmitted from the apothe- 
cary to the patient at one time, is in different 
cases and circumstances various. The tragea (§.107. 
(2.)) may be order’d from ℥ ß. to one or two ℥'s
or more. Evacuants are very frequently prescribed 
only in one dose at a time; unless the physician 
intends the operation to be repeated in a continued 
series, and at no long intervals. Alteratives are 
used to be prescribed from  ʒij. to ℥j. or ℥j ß.
but they are sometimes order’d in the quantity of 
two or three doses only at a time. But observe, 
1. That constant bounds cannot be assigned 
to the quantity of this form in general; where- 
as it may be easily determined from considering 
the condition of the patient, and his particular 
case, with the nature of the ingredients and in- 
tention of the physician, &c. See §.67, n° 1. 
to n° 12. and §. 68. and 92. n° 4. 
2. We should be more particularly careful in 
this form, that the general quantity may be di- 
visible by weight into doses, without leaving any 
remainder; if the distribution into doses of a 
determinate weight is to be performed by the 
apothecary (per §.68. n° 3.). 
3. And sometimes, when there is danger of 
bad consequence from an inaccurate division of 
potent materials, it is adviseable to order the 
apothecary to make an exact and distinct distri- 
bution; directing the manner in which it is to 
be done in the subscription. 
§.115. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients in this form, when it consists 
of more than one; that is to be determined from 
2 the

61 Of a Powder.
the dose proper for every patient (per §.66.), 
from the common and establish’d dose of this 
form (§.113.); and lastly, from the general quan- 
tity which the physician thinks proper to order in 
his prescription. Therefore, 
1. So much of each ingredient is to be taken 
as will amount to a remedy equal to the inten- 
tion, whose dose and general quantity may be 
neither more nor less than is requisite. 
2. If the quantity of the ingredients, which 
are judged equal to the physician’s intention, 
should exceed the just dose (§.113.) of the 
form; we must either use the rule mention’d 
(ib. n° 3.), or increase its strength by adding 
such as act more powerfully in a small bulk 
(per §.80.); which is to be observed more espe- 
cially in simples that are light and bulky (per 
§.111. n° 1. and 2.) 
3. But if on the contrary, the sufficient quan- 
tity of the ingredients are of a much less bulk 
than is convenient for the proper dose (§.113.) 
of this form; we are to augment it to a proper 
size by intermixing some suitable constituens 
(per §.86. and 91.): which is frequently re- 
quired in opiates, and preparations from metals 
and minerals, &c. 
4. When liquids are to be order’d, we should 
be mindful of the rule at §.111. n° 3. 
5. The quantity of sugar used in this form, 
especially in the lighter coarse powders (§.107. 
(2.)), is often equal to, or double and triple the 
weight of the other ingredients 
6. But we should all the while carefully con- 
sider the several changes and other qualities that 
may happen to the ingredients upon mixture 
(per §.94. to 102.); lest we frustrate our in- 
tention, or occasion some injury to the patient.
§.116.

62 Of a Powder. 
§.116. The SUBSCRIPTION (§.59.) of this 
form, declares to the apothecary, the preparation 
of the powder, its distribution, and its receptacle, 
or what it is to be put up in. 
§. 17. The preparation consists in pounding 
and grinding, pulverisation or trituration; and 
where there is more than one ingredient, mixation 
is added. Which are order’d in these terms, F. 
i. e. fiat, or M. F. Pulv. i. e. misce, fiat pulvis;
per §.59. n° 1. and 2. If the powder is to be 
coarse, we add the word grossus, or tragea if ex- 
ceeding fine, we add after, or in the room of pul- 
vis, the term alcohol, or pulv. subtiliss. and when 
neither of these are expressed, the powder is sup- 
posed to be of a mean fineness, per §.107. Some- 
times it is necessary to further advise (miscel. & 
trit. diu permanend.) or, citò perficiend. that the 
mixture and trituration is to be continued a long 
or a short time; and (œquabiliter, mortario tecto, 
&c.) that the mixture should be equably made, 
and in a cover’d mortar, &c. (per §.108.) when 
the ingredients require such a treatment. 
§.118. The division or distribution of the pow- 
der into its proper doses, when it belongs to the 
apothecary, should be immediately added next af- 
ter the former (§.117.): (divide in (tot.) partes 
equales) directing him to divide it into so many 
equal parts or doses. Nor should we sometimes 
omit an admonishment in strong medicines, that 
(partitio fiat exabtissima) the distribution may be 
made with the greatest exactness; but the most cau- 
tious physicians prescribe only one dose of such 
medicines at a time, ordering a new composition 
for every dose they require, thus, fiat, or repetatur 
idem bis, ter, &c. per §.114. n° 3. But there is 
no need of this caution, when the dose of the pow- 
der is not to be determined by weight (per §.113.), 
nor


63 Of a Powder. 
nor when its division is left to the patient or his 
attendants. 
§.119. The receptacle, or case to put up and 
keep the powder in, varies with different circum- 
stances; and may sometimes require to be parti- 
cularly mentioned in a prescription. Such as will 
exhale or liquify with the air, should be put up in 
glasses. Each dose of the whole quantity of the 
powder is to be folded up in a separate paper, or 
inclosed in little card or deal boxes, which we call 
scatulte. We therefore commonly order the re- 
ceptacle thus: D. (i.e. datur, let it be sent) in 
vitro, chartis, scatula. And when the powder is 
to be taken in wafer-paper (made by the consec- 
tioners), we write afterwards, cum nebula charta- 
cea, pro vehiculo. 
§.120. The signment or SUPERSCRIPTION
(§.60.) of this form, contains the title of the 
powder, its dose, vehicle, time of taking, regi- 
men, &c. agreeable to §.60. n° 1, 2, 3, &c. that 
§.121. The title is to be deduced from the 
form, v.g. pulvis vel pulveres; and then from its 
virtue, v.g. absorbens, pectoralis, &c. being at the 
same time mindful of the cautions at §.60. 
n° 7, 8. 
§.122. The dose of this form is either left to 
be portion’d out by weight, or some common mea- 
sure by the patient (per §. .n° 9. and §. 113.), 
in which case we write sumatur drachm, or ʒj. or 
ʒß. or quantum digitabulo, cultri apice, cochleari, 
&c. capi potest. But if the powders are to be 
taken already divided by the apothecary (per 
§.118.); it may then be sufficient to write only, 
capiatur una dosis. 
§.123. The vehicles used, to take this form in, 
are various: according to the circumstances of the 
patient’s case, with the nature of the ingredients, 
and form itself. 
1.

64 Of a Powder.
1. The coarse powder (§.107. (2.)) fre- 
quently requires no vehicle, being sufficiently 
pleasant of itself (per §. 115. n° 5,): it is how- 
ever sometimes given in medicated breads, bis- 
kets, sugar cakes, or sprinkled, in a proper 
quantity, upon a common toast in some rich 
wine, or mead, &c. 
2. A very usual vehicle for the other two 
kinds of this form (§.107. (1.) (3.)), is, the 
nebula chartacea, or wafer paper of our confec- 
tioners; which, when wetted in the mouth, is 
extremely well adapted to flip down whole with 
the powder, without offending the palate by 
any of its contents. The apothecary is to be 
advised in the subscription to send as many ne- 
bulæ or wafers to the patient, as there are doses 
of the powder, and sometimes to double the 
wafer: he should also express the use of them 
to the patient, in the superscription or direction. 
3. But the most common of all vehicles for 
this form, is, some proper liquid (per §.60. 
n° 11.), indued with the qualities there men- 
tioned. Hence, 
(1.) An acid vehicle should not be used for 
alcaline or absorbent powders; lest by exciting 
an effervescence they should nauseate the pa- 
tient, or destroy the virtues of each other (per 
§.102. n° 1, 2.) But we must except a de- 
signed mixture of this kind, as in the antemetic 
of RIVERIUS ex sal. abs. & succ. limon. 
(2.) We must abstain from liquid vehicles 
which are too fat or oily; for as they are gene- 
rally disagreeable to the patient, so they fre- 
quently obstruct the action of the medicine; 
which must be observed with regard to broths. 
(3.) Sometimes it is proper to mention whe- 
ther the liquid vehicle is to be drank warm, hot 
or

65 Of a Powder. 
or cold. Such as are fat, are nauseous when 
drank cold. Such as are just warm, promote vo- 
miting. Such as are taken hot, are apt to make 
gummy powders grumous or clog together; 
they diffipate such as are volatile, make such as 
are unpleasant more so by opening their body, 
and sometimes excite a status or hysteric passion. 
The particular nature also of the liquid vehicle 
itself, the customary way of using it, and the 
use or habit of the patient, have each their pro- 
per force in assigning limits to these circumstances. 
§.124. Lastly, we are to ascertain the times for 
taking each dose, and to assign a proper regimen 
to be observ’d thro' the whole course; both which 
must vary with the physicians particular indications 
(per §.60. n° 10, and 12.); nor is an explana- 
tion of them the proper business of this place, 
(per §.7. n° 1.) 
§.125. The Use of this form, is almost univer- 
sal, being suited to evacuants as well as alteratives. 
But we must be careful that the nature of the dis- 
ease, its seat and symptoms, the constitution and 
custom of the patient, with the disposition of the 
remedies indicated, are not repugnant, but suitable 
to this form, per §.35. 43—48. 109—111. For 
the difficulty of swallowing in a quinsey, ulcers of 
the sauces, an apoplexy, epilepsy, syncope, &c. 
do forbid the use of powders. 
§.126. Take the following as SPECIMENS of 
this form, suited to common or general cases. 
1. Pulv. emet. pro adulto nimia cibi repleto. 
ꝶ. Tart. emetic, gr. v. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. iij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. emeti cum cerevisia callida sumend. pro una dosi. 
F 2.

66 Of a Powder. 
2. Pulv. emet. common. pro adulto. 
♃. Rad. ipecacuanh. ʒß. 
F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis emeticus in haustul. vini alb. una vice su- 
mendus super bibendo copiose de infuso tepido fa- 
rinœ aven. tenuiter & fine ebullitione facta, 
inter vomendum. 
3. P. Purgans pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. x. 
Elœsacch. fœnicul. gr. xxv. 
M. terendo diu, F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro dosi mane cum infuso caffe su-
mendus. 
4. P. Cathart. communis pro adulto.
♃. Rad. jalapp. ℈j. 
Diagrydii gr. xij. 
Ol. caryoph. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis cathart. mane cum custiodia in haustul. ce- 
rivis. recent, calid. sumend. 
5. Alius in cancro nondum exulcerato. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 110. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. vj. 
Diagrydii gr. vij. 
Stibii diaphoret. non ablut. gr.xxiv. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. P. Hydragog. sive drastic. pro adulto. 
(1.) ♃. Gutt.gamb. 
Calomelan. aa gr. xvj. 
Sal. succin. gr. vj. 
Ol. essent. junip. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane cum custodia in nebula char- 
tacea deglutiend.
(2.) 

67 Of a Powder.
(2.) Alius- 
4. ♃. jalapp. ʒß. 
Tartar. vitriolat. 
Spec. diambræ aa gr. v. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior, vel in haustu cerevis. recent. tepide 
sumend. 
7. Alius in scorbuti initio. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ Tart, vitriol. non acid. 
Crystal. tartar. 
Sal. polychrest. aa  ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane ex sero lactis hauriendus: 
super bibantur dein seri lactis ℥xij. 
8. P. antihelminticus purgans: pro puero circa vj 
vel viij. annos nato. 
♃. Diagrydii. 
Calomelan. aa gr. vj. 
Rad. rhei ℈ß
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro verm. mane cum regimine, in 
pulpa pomi torrifacti sumendus. 
9. Alius antihelminticus pro infante. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 234. 
ꝶ Aloës succot. gr. iij. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. j. 
Vitriol. mart. gr. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Mane, jejuna stomacho, pro una dosi sumatur.
F2 10. 

68 Of a Powder. 
10. P. antihelmint. cathart. pro infante. 
♃. P. cornachini. 
R. Rhabarhar. aa gr. vj. ad xij. 
Æthiop. alb. vel merc. alcalisat. 
Sacchar. alb. aa ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis vermifug. & purgat. in alimento lacteo 
communi exhibendus. 
11. Alius vermifugus alterans. 
♃. † Æthiop. alb. ʒß. 
Nitri purif. ℈j. 
Sal.jovis gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. sabin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Alternis auror. (cum sequent.) pro ij dosib. in 
infus. casse sumendus. 
12. Pulv. solutivus. 
♃. Pol. sen. gr. xxv. 
Tartar. vitriolat. gr. v. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. P. laxativ. vel lenitiv. in pulpa pomi tosti, vel 
aliter, sumendus, &c. 
13. Alius vermifugus evacuans 
♃. Spec. hier. gr. xv. 
Rad. rhei 
Sem. santon. aa ℈ß. 
M. f. pulv. 
S. In nebula deglutiendus: & alternis auror. 
repetendus. 
† Vel tnercur. alcalisat. fit ex pulv. testac. pts. ij. & argent. 
viv. pt. j. 
14.

69 of a Powder. 
14. Pulv. diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. 
Test. Ostreor. calcinat. aa℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu saponacea octavis horis 
sumendus. 
15. Alius diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. ℈ß. 
succin. gr. iv. 
Sp. terebinth, gtt. iij. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Capiatur statim in nebula vel haust. supra prœscript. 
16. Pulv. sialagogus.
♃. Chrystal. miner. ʒj. 
Sal. succin. ℈j. 
Sacch. alb. ʒij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. in viij. chart. dividend. 
S. Pulv. sputator. quarum unam in orem capiat sub- 
inde, vel singulis horis. 
17. Pulvis sudorificus. 
♃. Croc. angl. sicc. ℈ß 
Castor. R. gr. vj. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. chamomill. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. alexipharm. tempore idoneo in haust. julapii 
appropriat. sumendus. 
F3 18.

70 Of a Powder. 
18. Pulv. diaphoreticus. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Angel. Hispan. 
Croc. angl. sicc. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart, ij. 
S. Pulv. cardiac. in haust. julapii sumend. 
(2.) Alius P.
♃. Lapid. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Pulv. e C. C. C. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Ut prior, 6ta quaqs hora sumendus. 
19. Pulvis febrifugus. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
Alumin. rupe. gr. iv. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. febris. tertiis horis sumendus cum haustu vini 
rubri astringentis aq. Fontan. œquali parte diluti. 
20. Pulvis narcoticus in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ Opii lamellatim tenuiter scissi & lente 
exsiccati, gr.j. 
Corall. rubr. gr. xij. 
Olibani, gr. vj. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis, quavis vespera ite- 
randus. 
S. Pulvis pacans, vesperi ante somnum sumendus. 
21.

71 Of a Powder. 
21. Pulvis cephalicus. 
♃. Cinnab. antimon. levigat. ℈j. 
Rad. valer. sylv. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. bis in dies cum haustu infusi Flor. Cha- 
momillœ sumendus. 
22. Pulvis stimulans & resolvens, ib. p. 43. 
ꝶ Ol. destillat. menth. 
Marjoran. 
Tanacet. aa gtt. iv. 
Sacch. alb. sicciss. ℥j. 
M. F. s. a. † Elæosaccharum, cui adde 
Rad. Z.Z. alb. 
Cort. magellanic. aa ℥B. 
S. Pulv. ut supra, &c. capiat ʒß. ter de die ex vino.
23. Pulvis pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm, ceti ℈j. 
Bals tolut. ℈ß. 
Flor. benz. gr. iv. 
Ol. anis. 
Hysop. aa gtt. j 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. pect. vel bechic. &c. in nebula vel haust. 
appropriat. sumend. 
F4 24.
† The Eleosacchara are not near so much in use with us, as 
among foreigners: tho' we do not know any substantial reason why 
they should not be more in use than they are. 

72 Of a Powder.
24. Tragea peptica in ventric. debil 
ꝶ. Spec. diagalang. ℥ß. 
Rad. gentian. 
Cort. winteran. 
Myrrh, rubrœ aa ʒj. 
Sem. coriandr. 
Rad. calam. arom. aa ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℥j.
M. F. pulvis, dandus in scatula. 
S. Tragea stomachica: de qua cochlear. ß. pani bis- 
cocto, vino Hispanico imbuto, inspersum capiat, post 
pastum. 
25. Pulvis restorativus. 
♃. Cam. viperar. sicc. ʒß. 
F. pulvis tenuis.
Pubv. &c. bis in dies sumendus cum haust. lactis 
assinini recentis. 
26. Pulvis corrohorans. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. elect. ℈ij. 
Cinnam. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
0l. cinnam. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haustful. vini rubri sumendus. 
27. Pulvis antacidus. 
ꝶ Lap. 69 ror. ppt. 
Cretœ. 
Conch. ostreor. calcin. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. zedoar. 
Nuc. myristic. aa ʒjß.  
M. F. pulv. ten. in scatula dand. 
S. Pulvis temperans. Sumatur, quantum apice cultri 
capi potest, acido infestante. 
28.

73 Of a Powder.
28. (1.) Pulvis absorbens albus. 
♃. Test. ostreor. calcinat. ʒij. 
Cret. alb. 
Sacch. alb. ad  ʒjß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Pulvis edulcorans, cujus capiat cochleam parvam 
in haust. caffe vel theœ solut. 
(2.) Alius–Ruber. 
♃. Coral. ruhr. 
Succin. ppt. aa  ʒjß. 
801. armen. ʒß. 
Cinab. antimon. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. viij. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Alius–Niger. 
♃. Lap. Hibernic. ʒij. 
Antimon. crud. 
Æthiop. miner. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Ut prior. 
29. Pulvis niger, nosocomii sancti Bartholomæi. 
♃. Æthiop. miner. 
Antimon. crud. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Capiatur j. hor. med. cum haustu aq. benedict. 
comp. Batean. 
30. Pulvis cardialgicus. 
(1.) ♃. Cretœ alb. pl. ℈j. 
Sal. absinth. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis ten. 
S. Capiatur cum hastu aq. calc. saccharo edulcorat.
(2.)

74 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius
♃. Corall. R. levigat. 
Cretœ alb. 
Oc. gro ror ppt. aa ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Ut prior. 
31. Pul vis ecbolicus, 
♃. Borac. ℈j. 
Castor. R. 
Croc. Ang. aa gr. vj. 
Ol. sabin. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Pulvis ad partum, in haustu julapii appropriati 
sumendus. 
32. Pulvis emmenagogus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myrrh. ℈j. 
Rubig. martis ℈ß. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Capiaiur bis in dies cum haustu infusi amari. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Rubig. martis ℈j. 
Cinnab. antimon. ℈ß. 
Spec. diamhrœ, gr. viij. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
33. Pulvis hystericus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myr. gr. xv. 
Castor. gr. vj. 
Sal.succin. gr. iij. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. sabin. vel puleg. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. julapii appropriat. sumendus.
(2.)

75 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Sperm. ceti ʒß. 
Assœ fœt. gr. ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
34. Pulvis astringens rubic. 
♃. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Croc. mart. astr. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij.
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. vini rubri sumend. 
35. Pulvis nephriticus. 
♃. Test. ovor. calcinat. ʒjß. 
Sperm. ceti ʒj. 
Tereh. e chio coct. ℈ij. 
Sacch. alb. ʒj. 
M.F. pulv. ten. pro chart. iv. 
S. Pulv. ad calculum, &c. cum haustu saponacea hor. 
med. vel 4ta quaq; hor. sumend. super bibendo copiose 
de decoct. altheœ
36. Pulvis ad hœmorrhagiam. 
♃. Nitri purisicat. 
Trochisc. de carab. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu julapii cretacei octavis 
horis sumendus. 
Of

76 Of a Bolus.
Of a BOLUS. 
§.127. A Bolus is a soft, cohesive, internal 
medicine, of a roundish figure, a 
little thicker or more consistent than honey, and 
limited in quantity to a morsel, or what may be 
easily swallowed at once: whence some call it 
buccella, a Morsel. 
§.128. The MATTER or ingredients which 
are admitted to enter this form (§.127.) are every 
thing that is fit for internal use, and is also capable 
of being reduced, either of itself or by mixture, 
to the considence beforemention’d (§.127.) So 
that this form may take in all 
1. Dry substances: which are effectual in a 
small dose, and suited to form the powder 
(§.110, & 111.) These are termed excipienda, 
or what are to be taken in by others; but 
alone, they are incapable of making up this 
form of medicine. 
2. Soft medicines: which are more or less te- 
nacious and consistent: as conserves, electu- 
aries, soft extracts, inspissated Juices, soft con- 
sections, thick balsoms, both native and arti- 
ficial, potable ointments, syrups, &c. which, 
are termed excipientia or receivers; because, be- 
ing mix’d with the former, they make up the 
consistence proper for a bole: and they have 
in some measure of themselves a natural fitness 
to make up this form. 
3. Liquids: which are of a small bulk in pro- 
portion to their Strength: as natural and arti- 
ficial liquid balsoms, oils, spirits, tinctures, es- 
sences, elixirs, &c. which being of themselves 
unfit for this form, are either receiv'd by the 
others (n° 1, 2.) or else they receive other 
more

77 of a Bolus. 
more consistent substances as accessory to the 
form. 
§.129. A proper Election of the several 
ingredients (§.128.) is directed by the following 
Considerations: 
1. The most commendable Qualities of a 
Bolus are, to be so consistent as to retain its 
form, and not run or spread flat by standing;
to be so soft as easily to give way to the action 
of the sauces and œsophagus in deglution; and 
to have the mixture of its several ingredients 
made uniform and equable. 
2. Hence, the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
and also the liquid (n° 3.) are of themselves 
not fit to make up this form; but they require 
the intervention of something soft and tenacious- 
(n° 2.) to cement or glue together the whole. 
3. Also the soft substances (§.128. n° 2.) 
do for the generality require to be incrassated 
by the Addition of some that are dry, in order 
to fit them for the formation of a bolus. Yet, 
some of them are susceptible of this form with- 
out any addition: as conserves, electuaries, and 
the thicker kind of inspissated juices. These 
may be therefore formed into simple boles, 
per §.62. 
4. Every ingredient shou’d be of such a dis- 
position, as to mix uniformly with each other 
in composition. 
5. Medicines which are viscid, sharp or acrid, 
or very unpleasant to the smell and taste, are 
much more suitable for this form, than that of 
a powder (§.111.); because they may be in this 
more concealed from those sensible organs. 
Whence, strong mercurials can enter no form 
more conveniently than this.
6. Such

78 Of a Bolus. 
6. Such as are fat and resinous, as balsoms, 
potable ointments, &c. should have their parts 
divided by grinding with sugar or something 
which is dry, that they may be the more easily 
dissolved and digested in the stomach. 
7. Fix’d and volatile alcaline Salts, and every 
thing else that suddenly exhales or else liquifies 
in the air, shou’d not enter the composition of 
boles which are to be kept some time: for by 
that means, the medicine will be much the 
worse in its form or consistence, as well as in- 
tended virtue. 
8. Nor are things which effervesce with each 
other, or easily ferment, fit to enter this form; 
unless the Bolus is to be taken soon after its 
composition. 
9. The number of ingredients for composing 
this form, should scarce ever exceed three or 
four, in a prescription. 
§.130. The more usual ORDER or method of 
placing the ingredients of this form in a pre- 
scription, is, to put the excipiens (§.128. n° 2.) 
first, as being determin’d in quantity; then, the 
excipienda or dry ingredients (ib. n° 1.); after- 
wards, the liquid Substances (ib. n° 3.); and last- 
ly, (if there be any) the excipiens whose quantity 
is left to be determin’d by the apothecary. 
§.131. The Dose (§.64.) of a bolus is ex- 
tended from one dram, to a dram and a half, or 
two drams; but the dose shou’d never be injudi- 
ciously increas’d beyond the last quantity, unless 
when the ingredients are very weighty in propor- 
tion to their bulk, and the patient happens to be 
a good taker of physic. But if the bolus should 
be made up of the lighter sort of ingredients, it 
ought not to exceed one dram. So that, when the 
proper and effectual dose of the ingredients ex-
ceeds

79 Of a Bolus. 
ceeds these bounds, it is more advisable to distri- 
bute the mass in several parcels or little boles, than 
to choak the patient with a great lump. Small- 
ness of bulk in a dose, as commendable in a pow- 
der (per §.113. n° 1.), is equally or more so in a 
bolus. We can hardly err in making the dose of 
this form too small, even tho' the bolus should not 
exceed a scruple. 
§.132. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is most frequently but one dose or bolus, or 
two, but seldom more than three or four, unless 
when they are to be taken at very short intervals 
of time. For as they are always sent in separate 
Doses, portion’d out by the apothecary, they 
easily become either too dry and hard, or too 
moist and liquid, by long keeping. Therefore, 
upon multiplying the number of doses with the 
mass (§.131.) together, the physician will know 
how much the general quantity, to be prescribed 
at one time, ought to be. 
§.133. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients of this form, is determin’d from 
their particular virtues and consistences. Consult 
§.87. & 115. So that the same proportion does 
not obtain in all cases alike. For, 
1. If the soft Substances (§.128. n° 2. & 
§.129. n° 3.) which are of themselves fit to 
compose a bolus, are order’d alone in a pre- 
scription, the reciprocal proportion of each of 
them may be determin’d from the known suffi- 
cient dose (§.66.), and the dose of the bolus 
(§.131.). Fur the consistence in that case, has 
no influence to limit the proportion. 
2. When the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
are to enter this form, they may be order’d for 
one dose in the quantity of ʒß. ℈ij, or, at most, 
ʒj. But the excipientia or soft substances (§.128.  
n° 2.)


80 Of a Bolus. 
n° 2.) require to be order’d in a different pro- 
portion, according as they are more or less 
consistent. As 
(1.) Conserves (which are the most frequent 
ingredients of this form), electuaries, honey, 
thick balsoms, &c. are order’d from ℈ij, to 
ʒj.or ʒjß. 
(2.) Inspissated juices, pulps, and soft con- 
sections are order’d from ʒß. to ʒj. or ℈jv. 
(3.) To make up a determinate quantity of the 
dry ingredients into this form, so much the less 
is required of the soft substances, as these latter 
are more liquid. 
3. Hence it appears, that when the quantity 
of dry ingredients is but small, it will be most
convenient to order the excipiens or soft substance 
to be of the more consistent kind: but when the 
quantity of the first is large, the consistence of 
the latter should be proportionably thinner or 
more liquid: that the dose (§.131.) of the 
bolus may not be too much enlarged. 
4. But if to the preceeding (n° 2.), liquids 
(§.128. n° 3.) are also added, they should not 
enter in a larger quantity than from gutt. j, to 
ij, iij, or at most, jv, for each bolus. And then 
the quantity of soft excipients must be propor- 
tionably diminished. 
5. Otherwise, the dry and liquid substances 
(n° 2. 4.) only may be order’d in a determi- 
nate quantity, and the quantity of the soft sub- 
stances or excipients may be left to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary, writing only q. s. (per 
§.58. n° 8 (7.)). But this method cannot be 
comply’d with, when the effectual dose of these 
requires an exactness of limitation. 
6. But very often, when the quantity of the 
dry ingredients is pretty large, and its preced- 
ing excipiens or soft substance is very consistent, 
or


81 Of a Bolus. 
or thick and small in quantity, so that we may 
thence doubt whether they will make the bolus 
of a proper consistence and pliability; in that 
case we may still add a secondary and more li- 
quid substance, e.g. syr. q. s. &c. 
7. On the contrary, when we foresee that the 
consistence of the bolus will be too thin or soft 
(§.129. n° 1.), it is usual to adjoin q. s. Sac- 
charic pulv. liquorit. &c. which more especially 
holds good When this form is to be made up of 
simple terebinthinates, &c. 
§.134. The Subscription or direction to 
the apothecary for this form may be thus: M. F. 
bolus or boli n°. ij, iij, &c. And it may be some- 
times necessary to enjoin the same caution, with 
regard to the division of this form, with that men- 
tioned concerning powders (§.118.), which may 
be thence repeated. Sometimes we also add in the 
prescription, either for ornament to the bolus, or 
pleasantness of taking, auri folio, or nebula obvol-
vatur, or exhibeatur cum nebula. Consult §. 119. 
The receptacles for conveying this form to the pa- 
tients, are generally either gallipots or proper pa- 
pers; for mentioning which in a prescription, 
there is hardly ever any occasion. 
§.135. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient, with regard to this form, may be easily 
understood from what has been already said upon 
that head (at §.120, to 125.), For a vehicle, some 
like a nebula or water best, others prefer some li- 
quor, wherein they may first dissolve the bolus. 
It is also generally of service to order some proper 
liquid to be drank after the bolus, especially if we 
have any reason to fear that it will meet with a 
difficult dissolution in the stomach; which is to be 
more particularly observed with regard to terebin-
thinate substances, and others of the like kind.
G §.136.

82 Boles.
§. 136. The Use of this form, a bolus, is pret- 
ty much the same with that of the powder (§.125.); 
but it is not so frequently in practice * as the pow- 
der: for boles, possessing in some measure the na- 
ture of a continuous and solid body, do frequently 
not act so speedily as we would desire (§.135.). 
We often use this form for variety, or to gratify those 
who are better pleased with a bolus than a powder. 
§.137. Take the following as specimens of this 
form: which may be adapted, with a small varia- 
tion according to particular circumstances, to most 
cases which occur in practice. 
1. Bolus emeticus pro adulto. 
(1.) ꝶ Vitrioli albi, gr. xxv. 
Elect, lenit. q. s. 
M, F. bolus, detur cum nebula. 
S. Bolus emeticus ex pauxillo cerevisiœ aut infusi 
theœ viridis hariendus: post quamlibet vomitio- 
nem superbibantur cyathi aliquot infusi ejusdem 
tepidi.  
Bolus emet. communis pro adulto. 
(2.) ♃. Rad. ipecacuan. pulv. ʒß. 
Syr. flor. persicor. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Bolus emet.—salinus—
♃. Sal. vel gillœ vitriol. ℈j. 
Tarari emet. gr. ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. q. s. 
M. F: bolus, in nebula dandus. 
S. Ut prior. 2. 
* This form is seldom used among us but in acute cases, when 
we exhibit emetics, cathartics, opiates, and strong alexipharmics, 
whose dose require to be well ascertain'd; tho' it may be used also 
in some chronical cases, when we are afraid a patient will fall 
short of his proper dose, in taking an electuary. 


83 Boles. 
2. Bolus purgans communis. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Calomelan. gr. xv. 
Ol. essent. sassafr. gtt. ij.
Elect. lenit. q. s. 
M. F. bolus deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus 
(2.)
♃. Scammm. gr. xij.
Cremor. tartar. 
Calamelan. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de rhabarb. q. s. 
M. F. bol. deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)
♃. Rad. rhœi opt. pulv. ℈j. 
Trochisc. Alhandal. gr. vij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Bolus leniens. 
♃. Rad. jalap. 
Rhei pulv. 
Tereb. venet. coct. pulv. aa ℈B. 
Nitri purificat. gr. xv. 
Elect. lenitiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. quotidie repetendus. 
G2 4.


84 Boles.
4. Bolus hydragogus. 
♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Gutt. gamb. ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. iij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum haustu cerivisiœ recentis calidœ
sumendus. 
5. Bolus rheumaticus catharticus. 
♃. Rad. jalap. ℈j. 
Gum. guaiac. 
Calomelan. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de ros. solutiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus. 
6. Bolus diuret. vel è cantharid. 
♃. Pulv. cantharid. gr. vj. 
Gamph. gr. iv. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° ij. 
Extract. thebaic. gr. ss. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Bol. &c. statim sumendus, superbibendo frequenter 
de decocto hordii, radicum & sumitat. althœœ sac- 
charo pauco dulcificato. 
7. Bolus alexipharm. vel sudorif. 
(1.) ♃.Sal. vol. C. C. 
Camph. aa gr. v. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° j. 
Confect. mitbrid. ℈ij. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu seri vinosi calidi sumendus.
(2.) 


85 Boles.
(2.) Bolus alexipharm. vel card. 
♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Contrayerv. aa ℈ß. 
Flor. benzoin, gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. chamom. gtt. j. 
Philon. Roman. ℈j. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Ut prior. 
8. Bolus cardiacus flav. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. flav. aurant. ʒß. 
Lap. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Croc. angl. gr. vij. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu julapii vel seri vinosi sumend. 
(2.) Bolus cardiacus rub. 
♃. Confect. alkerm. ℈ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℈j. 
Coccinell. pulv. ℈ß. 
Spir. vitriol. gtt. iij. 
M. F. bol.
S. Bol. &c. cum haust. apozemat. aquos. acidulat. 
exhibendus. 
9. Bolus febrifug. 
♃. Pulv. cort. elect. ℈j. 
Resin. ejusd. gr. vj. 
Cons. abs. pont. ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. j. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S.Bol. &c. 4ta vel 6ta quaque bora repetendus.
G3 10.

86 Boles. 
10. Bolus anodynus vel paregor. 
♃. Philon. Roman. ℈j. ad ʒß. 
F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane, vel H. S. sumendus, & pro re 
nata repetend. 
11. Bolus antihystericus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Cons. nut. 3j. 
Troch. de myrrh. ℈ß. 
Ol. stillat. succin. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, auri folio obducendus.
S. Bolus pacans cum aquœ pulegii cyatho sumendus. 
(2.)
♃. Gum. guaiac. 
Cinnab. antimon. 
Philon. Roman. aa ℈j. 
Ext. gentian. gr. vj. 
Syr. chalib. vel hyster. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Ut prior. 
12. Boli balsamici. 
Vid. Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. 2. obs. 2. 
ꝶ. Tereb. e chio ʒij. 
Pulv. liquorit. q. s. 
M. F. boli, n° ij. 
S. boli nervini, quorum alter mane, alter vesperi ex 
vitello ovi recentis sumatur, superbibendo singulis 
aq. lact. alexiter. ℥ij. 
13.

87 Boles. 
13. Boli sialogogi. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros rub. ʒß. 
Mercutii dulc. trit. gr. ix. 
M. F. bolus: cui similes duo alii seorsim 
confecti, exhibeantur cum totidem nebulis. 
S. Boli aperientes, quorum unum singulis quadrihoriis 
capiat œger, corpore prius ptisana appropriata bene 
impleto.  
14. Bolus scilliticus. 
♃. Pulp. scill. rec. ℈j. 
Ext. gentian, gr. vj. 
Spec. diamhr. ℈B. 
Ol. juniper. essent. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, contundendo. 
S. Bol, &c. bis in dies cum nebula sumendus, super- 
bibendo haustum julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
15. Bolus paregoricus refrigerans. 
♃. Spec. diatrag. frig. recent. ʒß. 
Sperm. cet. ℈j. 
Nitri purifcat. ℈ß. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. ß. 
Syr. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. 6ta quaque hora sumendus, cum haustu 
julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
16. Bolus alterans. 
♃. Cinnabar. antimon. ℈j.
Pulv. R. ari. rec. 
Gum. guaiac. aa ℈ß. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. bis in dies h. m. sumendus, cum haustu 
aq. benidict. C. Batean. 
F4 17.

88 Boles. 
17. Bolus pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℈j. 
Rad. ir. Florent. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi chemic. gtt. j. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, &c. 
18. Bolus ad asthma nervosuni. 
♃. Cinnabar, nativ. ℈j. 
Cort. peruv. opt. pulv. ℈ß. 
Syr. pœon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bis in dies sumendus cum haustu infusi amari S. 
19. Bolus ad diarrhœam. 
♃. Pulv. rhei. torrifact. ℈ß. 
Spec. pro. confect. fracast. ℈j. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
Syr. e mecon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu decocti albi sumendus. 
Of an ELECTUARY. 
§.138. AN ELECTUARY is a soft, internal 
medicine: pretty much resembling 
the consistence of a bolus (§.127.), but not 
quite so thick; being prescribed for by more doses 
than one at a time, which are not to be portion’d 
out by the apothecary. This form sometimes, 
(tho’ seldom) comes under the denomination of
mistura; but is frequently term’d (among foreign 
physicians), from its preserv’d or candy’d ingre- 
dients, conditum: it is also sometimes named by 
them,

89 Of an Electuary. 
them, opiatum, from the opium in its composi- 
tion. 
§.139. The Matter or ingredients admitted 
to enter the composition of this form, are the same 
with those of the bolus (§.128.) If any have the 
preference, they are conserves; which are gene- 
rally taken into the composition of electuaries, 
more constantly and largely than the other sub- 
stances. 
§.140. The CHOICE of the most suitable in- 
gredients for this form, is also pretty much the 
same with that of the bolus, preceding (§.129.): 
yet the following considerations relate more parti- 
cularly to the Electuary. 
1. Such substances should more especially be 
kept out of this form, as are very unpleasant in 
smell, take and colour; by reason, electuaries 
are of constant and frequent use. 
2. Such things as liquify, exhale, corrupt, 
effervesce or easily ferment and turn sower, are 
the less suitable for this form, as the composi- 
tion is required to be pretty soft, and to keep 
some time. 
3. For the same reasons (n° 2.), the com- 
mixture of ingredients, in an electuary, should 
be perform’d with the greatest accuracy and ex- 
actness; the trituration of brittle substances shou’d 
be continu’d till they are exceeding fine, and the  
mixation of such as are fat or oily, resinous or 
terebinthinate, should be effected by yolks of 
eggs; left they should separate, subside or e- 
merge, by standing the length of time which 
this form frequently requires to be taken in. 
4. Hence also, if substances which are very 
heavy in proportion to their bulk, are to enter 
the composition of an electuary, its consistence  
is


90 Of an Electuary. 
is then required to be a little thicker than other- 
wise. 
5. Therefore the drastic or strongest purga- 
tives, with the preparations of mercury and 
other metals, are not suitable for an electuary; 
for, by an inequality of their mixture, by their 
precipitation in keeping, or by a careless dosing 
or partition ot the electuary in taking, which 
is usually left to be done by the patient or his- 
attendants; the use of such ingredients in this 
form might prove of dangerous consequence. 
6. An electuary will indeed admit of a few 
more ingredients to enter its composition, than 
a bolus (§.129. n° 9.): yet it should not be 
over-charg’d, (per §.29.). 
7. The covering this form with leaf-gold or 
silver, and sometimes intermixing them in 
the substance of an electuary, for the sake of 
ornament, or to please the patient; may be or- 
der’d at discretion by them who approve there- 
of, being at the same time mindful of the 
Rules §.85. n° 5. 
§.141. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form in a prescription, is not much diffe- 
rent from that used in writing for a bolus (§ 130.): 
the soft substances whose weight are determin’d, 
should take the first place; then, the dry ingre- 
dients; afterwards, the liquid; and lastly, we 
are to place those, whose weight or quantity is to 
be ascertain’d by the apothecary, and are usually 
wrote for under q. s. or quantum sufficit. Hence 
it appears, that when the soft substances are not 
to be ascertained in their weights by the physician 
in his prefcription; in that case, they must give 
place to the dry ingredients, which may then be 
placed first. 
§.142.

91 Of an Electuary.
§.142. The DOSE of an electuary shou'd not 
without necessity be made larger than that of a bo- 
lus (§.131.). It is seldom determin'd by weight, 
but is generally taken by bulk, as by the size of 
filberts or hazle-nuts, wall-nuts, chesnuts, and 
nutmegs, or as much as can be taken upon the 
point of a knife, spoon, &c. Sometimes the 
whole electuary is order'd to be taken at so many 
times, v. g. 3, 4, 5, &c. at certain intervals of 
time. But in those cases we must also be mindful 
that those parts or portions are not larger than 
can be conveniently swallowed at once. 
§.143. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed for at one time, is scarce 
ever less than ℥j, and very seldom exceeds ℥jv, 
or five at most: according as indications require a 
more of less frequent or continued taking of the 
electuary. When this form is order'd in very large 
quantities, or is to be kept a good while, it fre- 
quently grows either too thick and dry, too thin 
and soft, or is otherwise corrupted and spoiled * 
§.144. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is something diffe- 
rent from that of the bolus (§.133.), by reason an 
electuary is of a softer consistence (per §.138.); 
this variation of proportion, may however be li- 
mited by the following considerations. 
1. As the soft Substances or excipientia (§.128. 
n° 2.) are more or less consistent, they will 
require
* It is almost become a rule among us, that the general quan- 
tity of an extemporaneous electuary should seldom exceed ʒ iij. 
and thereabout ℥jss of conserve, ʒij. of powders, with 
a q. s. of syrup, amount to; tho' cinnabar, and some of the hea- 
vier things will not take up so much syrup. And if this rule, 
as to quantity, be not observed by the prescriber, but more he 
order'd, it is a common thing for the compounder to do it for him, 
by proportioning the materials suitable thereto; as by making up 
half, or a third of what is directed.

92 Of an Electuary. 
require a greater or less proportion of the dry 
excipienda (§.128. n° 1.). Hence, supppose the 
dry ingredients or excipienda to be ʒj. if the 
soft excipientiœ are of the thicker kind, as con- 
serves, officinal electuaries, &c. it will be ne- 
cessary to take of them ʒj: if they are thinner, 
as inspissated juices, pulps, honeys, soft con- 
fections, &c. we may take ʒiij: if more liquid, 
as syrups, ʒij will be sufficient. (See §.133. 
n° 2.) 
2. If therefore the soft excipientia of this 
form, are of different consistences, it will be no 
difficult matter to determine the mutual propor- 
tion of each {per. n° 1.). And it is customary, 
in prescribing this form, to limit only the thick- 
er substances by weight, and to subjoin those 
which are more fluid under the title of q. s. or 
quantum sufficit (per §.133. n° 6.) 
3. If ingredients be added to this form which 
are merely liquid ( per §.128. n° 3.), the mu- 
tual proportion of these may be learned from 
what has been said (at §.133. n° 4.), compar’d 
with the dose, and general quantity of the. elec- 
tuary to be prescribed, (per. §.142. and 143). 
The quantity of soft excipients must be then 
proportiorubly diminish'd, or that of the dry in- 
gredients must be accordingly increased. 
4. One or two leaves of gold or silver will 
be generally sufficient to decorate the whole 
mass of the electuary (§.143.). 
5. Sometimes the patient chuses to have the 
electuary a little softer than usual, that it may 
be the more easily diluted and taken in some li- 
quor, We, may easily obtain this point, by 
in larging the quantity of fluid excipients(n° 1, 2.). 
and by giving notice in the subscription, when 
the quantity of those ingredients is left to be de- 
termin'd by the Apothecary. 
6. What

93 Of an Electuary.  
6. What may be said further in this place, 
relating to the mutual proportion of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be seen at §.133. 
n° 3. 5. 6. 7. to which we therefore refer. 
§.145. The usual SUBSCRIPTION, or direction 
to the apothecary for this form, is no more than 
M. or M. F. electuarium vel conditum; adding 
molle, when it is to be of a thinner consistence, 
(per §.144. n° 5.). The common receptacle to re- 
tain and convey this form to the patient, is, a 
white, earthen gallypot; of which, there will be 
no occasion to make mention in a prescription. 
§.146. The Signature or direction to the 
patient proper for this form, is sufficiently appa- 
rent from §.135. 138. & 142. Sometimes it may 
be proper to advise the patient in this place, to 
stir up the electuary before taking; especially if it 
contains ingredients of a great specific gravity, or 
which are very apt to separate from each other. 
§.147. The use of this form is pretty much 
like that of the bolus (§.136.) *; but an electuary 
is not so suitable for the intention of an hysteric, 
by reason of the great quantity of sugar which usu- 
ally enters its composition. 
§. 148. Take the following Specimens of this 
form. 
1.
* There is however an obvious difference between the use of 
this form and that of a bolus: for an electuary is mostly used in 
chronical cases, and consist chiefly of alteratives; but it is not so 
with a bolus. See §.136.—Yet it is allowable, in case of po- 
verty, to save the patient from the expence of boles by ordering an 
electuary; even in acute cases, and where the electuary will co- 
incide with the proper nature of a bolus; if so be we can rely 
on the exact dosing thereof. 

94 Electuaries.
1. Elect. purgans antiphlogist. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 230. 
ꝶ. Tamarind, elect. pulp. ℥ij. 
Crystall. tartar. minutim. pulv. ʒij. 
M. 
S. Capiat omni 1/8 horœ ʒj. donec commode purgetur. 
2. Elect. solutivum. 
♃. Pulp. cash. rec. 
Fruct. tamarind. aa ℥jß.  
Pulv. rhei  ʒjß. 
Cremor. tartar. ʒvj. 
Tartar. vitriolat. ʒß.  
Syr. violar. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem nucis castan.
mane & vesperi, vel ter in die. 
3. Electuar. aromaticum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Limon. aa ℥ß. 
Rad. Z. Z. & N. M cond. aa ʒiij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Syr. cinnamomi q. s. ad consist. debit. 
M. F elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. avellan. vel mos- 
chatœ subinde: vel ter in die, paulo ante pastum. 
4. Elect. stipticum incrassans. 
ꝶ Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ij.
Mivæ cydonior. ℥j. 
Flor. granat. ʒjß. 
Boli armen. lœvig. ʒij. 
Lap. Hœmatit. ppt. ʒj. 
M. F. conditum. D. ad fictile album. 
S. Elect. astringens, de quo ter vel. quater de die ad 
castaneœ magnitudinem capiatur. 
5.


95 Electuaries. 
5. Elect. astringens. 
♃. Confect. fracastor. 
Cons. ros. rubr. aa ℥ß. 
Sang. dracon. ʒiij. 
Rad. rhei terrifact. ʒj. 
Ter. Japon. ℈j. 
Sur. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat Q. N. M. minoris ter 
in die. 
6. Elect. alterans 
♃. Cons. fruct. cynosbat. ℥jß.
Cinmb. antimon. ʒiij. 
Gum. Guaiac. ʒij. 
Ol. sassaf. in sacch. q. s. solut. gtt. vj. 
Syr. de 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat quant. nuc. mosc. mane & 
vesperi cum haustu cerivisœ medicat. calid. 
7. Elect. balsamicum. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbator. ʒx. 
Carn. viperin. pulv. ℥j. 
Rad. ering. cond. ʒij. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj.
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiatur q. n. m. 4ta quaque 
hora. 
8.


96 Electuaries. 
8. Elect. cephalicum. 
♃. Cons. flor. caryophil. ℥j.  
Anth. ℥ß. 
Rad. valer. sylv. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒijß. 
Succ. cherm. q. s.  
M. F. elect.
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. hor. med. cum 
haustul. julapii appropriate. 
M. F. eleft. 
9. Elect. pectorale. 
♃. Trochisc. bec. alb. ʒx. 
Rad. ering. condit. ʒij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Ol. essent. anis. gtt. vj. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. urgente tusse. 
10. Elect. excitans in febrili languore. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 119. 
ꝶ. Confect. alkerm. ʒj. 
Zinzib. condit. ʒvj. 
Rad. contrayerv. 
Serpentar. virgin, aa ʒj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
Ut. F. elect. 
S. capiatur 3ß. omni quadrihorio. 
11.

97 Electuaries. 
11. Elect. refrig., acidulat. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. berher. ℥ij. 
Ros. rub. ℥ß.
Ol. sulph. q. s. ad grat. acidit. 
Syr. diamar. q. s. ut. 
F. elect. molle. 
S. Elect. cardiac. cujus in orem solvatur q. n. avel-
lan. subinde. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. ros. rub. ℥ß. 
Pulp. tamarind. ʒiij. 
Sp. vitriol, ad grat. acid. 
Succ. cherm. q. s. ad debit. consist. 
M. F. elect. molle. 
S. Ut supra. 
12. Elect. antifebrile. 
ꝶ. Cort. Peruvian, opt. ℥ß. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒij. 
Syr. 5. Tad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Sumatur tempore apyrexias, omni bihorio octava 
pars totius, ex vino. 
13. Elect, ad strumas. 
♃. Cons. cochlear. hort. 
Æthiop. min. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒvj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus sumat q. n. m. ter de die, cum 
hanstu appropriat. liquor. 
H 14.

98 Electuaries. 
14. Elect. stomachicum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Absinth. Rom. aa ʒvj. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒij. 
Spec. diamb. 
Menth. crisp. aa ʒj. 
Syr. e cond. R. Z. Z. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. sumat q. n. m. ter vel quater de die
cum haustul. vini rub. 
15. Elect. deobstruens. 
(1.) ♃. Conf. absinth. Rom. ʒj. 
Ext. rad. gentian. ʒj. 
Sapon. venet. 
Millep. viv. aa ʒiij.
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiat q. n. m. ter in die. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. cochl. hort. ℥j. 
Pulp. scillit. torrifact. ℥ß. 
Pulv. ari rec. ʒjß.
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiatur ut supra, cum haust. vin. millepid.
16. Elect. chalibiatum. 
♃. Cons. absinth. Rom. ʒjß. 
Rubigin. mart. ʒiij. 
Spec, diamhr. ʒjß. 
Cinnah. antimon. ʒj. 
Syr. chalib. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat q. n. m. ter de die, cum
haustu julapii appropriat. 
Of

99 Of a Linctus. 
Of a LINCTUS 
§.149. A LINCTUS (call’d by the Greeks 
eclegma, and by the Arabians Loch, 
or Lohock) is a soft, internal medicine, thinner 
than the electuary (§.138.), but not so apt to run 
or spread as a thick syrup, which it very much re- 
sembles; being composed of the softer and more 
viscid kind of ingredients, which are to be, at se- 
parate times licked up by the tongue, retained in 
the mouth, and afterwards swallowed as they gra- 
dually dissolve there. 
§.150. The MATTER or ingredients fit to 
compose this form of medicine, is pretty much the 
same with what enters the composition of the elec- 
tuary (§.139.), or bolus (§.128.). It also takes 
in officinal lohochs, sweet oils made by expression, 
mucilages, the yolks of eggs, and sometimes dis- 
tilled waters. 
§.151. For the Choice of ingredients most 
suitable for this form, we are to observe. 
1. If any of the dry and solid substances 
(§.128. n° 1) are to  enter the composition of 
this form, they are required to be ground ex- 
ceeding fine, or to be easily dissolvable; that 
they may not injure the softness and uniformity 
proper to a linctus: to prevent which, such 
things are generally left intirely out of this form. 
2. It is upon the same account that most con- 
serves and candied simples are seldom permitted 
to enter the composition of a linctus, unless they 
have been first pulped thro’ a strainer, which 
should never be omitted in compounding for 
nice patients. 
3. The very strongest medicines, cannot be 
safely admitted into this form because they so
H2 easily

100 Of a Linctus.
easily separate, precipitate or emerge by stand- 
ing in a linctus, whose dose is at the same time 
too uncertain for such things, being not deter- 
mined with exactness by weight; so that the 
effects of such medicines could never be depend- 
ed on in this form. But as a linctus is not fitted 
for such ingredients, our indications never call 
for them in that form. 
4. Acrimonious ingredients, and such as are 
unpleasant to the smell and tast, require to be 
more cautiously avoided in this form than any 
other; for as a linctus stays so long in the mouth, 
as it is swallowed so slowly, such things would 
nauseate the patient, and render the medicine 
very difficult to be taken. 
5. As oily and mucilaginous substances are 
very frequently prescribed in this form, we 
should be the more careful that they are not 
rancid or otherwise corrupted: an ill quality 
which they readily acquire by long standing in 
the shops.  
6. It is in the general very proper to beat up 
oily substances with the yolk of an egg; to which 
may be afterwards added, sugar, honey, and 
the compositions made up with these. 
7. The number of ingredients admitted into 
this form in a prescription, is the same with 
that of a bolus §.129. n° 9. 
§.152. For the ORDER in which the several 
ingredients of this form are to be placed in a pre- 
scription, there is hardly any constant one observ’d. 
Such things as serve to prepare and mix ingredients 
which are difficultly soluble (per §.151. n° 6.), 
should be placed next to each other; but for the 
rest, they may be placed by the rules at §.57. 
n° 2, 3, 5.
§.153. 

101 Of a Linctus. 
§.153. The Dose of a linctus is seldom ascer- 
tained by weight; bat when it is, it should not 
exceed ℥ß. The more usual method of dosing this 
form, is, by the measure of a large, eating, or 
small, tea-spoon, or as much as can be taken up by 
a bruised liquorish stick *. 
§.154. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, which is usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is nearly the same with that of an electuary 
(§.132.); hardly ever exceeding ℥vj †. unless 
there should be a speedy consumption of the me- 
dicine from the very frequent repetition of its use. 
The great inclination of the softer saccharine com- 
positions to ferment, the natural aptitude of ingre- 
dients which are oily or mucilaginous to turn rank 
and corrupt, and more especially great heat of 
weather, do each forbid preferibing this form in 
large quantities. 
§.155. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingredients which are to make up this form, is 
determin’d from a previous knowledge of the con- 
sidence of each ingredient, and from considering 
also the considence (§.149.) proper to a linctus 
itself. Hence 
1. A linctus may be compounded in almost 
any proportion of Ingredients, whose consistence 
is much the same with that of the form itself: 
such are officinal lohocks, honey, cream, yolks 
of eggs, soft confections, syrups, mucilages, 
expressed oils, and the like viscid substances. 
The medicinal virtues of each ingredient, their 
price and other circumstances (mention’d §.66. 
n° 1. to 14.) may also have some influence in 
limiting their proportion. Saponaceous sub- 
H3 stances
* A method of taking now in difuse with us. 
† The quantity of a linctus order'd at one time among us, is 
seldom more than half this Quantity. 

102 Of a Linctus. 
stances may be order’d in a quantity sufficient 
to reduce such as are oily (per §.151. n° 6.) 
The yolks of eggs should be three times as much 
as the oil, &c. but honey or sugar must enter 
in a larger quantity. 
2. Conserves, electuaries, and pulps, require 
to be diluted with almost three times their quan- 
tity of syrup; but dry substances require eight 
times as much syrup: from whence we may per- 
ceive the proportion of each kind of ingredients. 
But when the solid parts of dry substances, or 
of conferves, are to be pulped thro' a strainer 
(per §.151. n° 2.), a less quantity of syrup 
will suffice. 
3. Distilled oils, liquid balsoms, elixirs, es- 
sences, tinctures, spirits, and the like, which 
are very strong, should enter a linctus (as in an 
electuary §.144. n° 3.) in but a very small quan- 
tity, so that there will be hardly any occasion to 
change the proportion of the rest of the ingre- 
dients upon their account. 
4. Distilled waters may happen to over-dilute 
the consistence proper to this form, if they are 
order’d in a certain quantity, and therefore it is 
best to leave the quantity of them to be deter- 
mined at the discretion of the apothecary. 
Upon the same account, the quantity of syrup 
is also frequently order’d by q. s. When the 
consistence of a linctus happens to be too thin, 
it may be helped by a q. s. sacchar. alb. 
5. The degree of consistence (§.149.) is 
however not so ablolutely proper to and inse- 
parable from a linctus, but that it may frequent- 
ly be made a little thicker or thinner than what 
is there mentioned: whence we learn, that the 
rules now deliver’d for proportioning the ingre- 
dients of this form, are not absolutely invio- 
lable. If we have any reason to fear a Separa- 
tion


103 Of a Linctus.
tion or emersion of the oily parts, it is a suffi- 
cient authority to make the consistence of a 
linctus a little thicker than ordinary. 
§.156. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary, concerning the composition of this 
form, is by the physician order’d M. F. linctus. 
adding per setaceum trajeciendus, when it is to be 
passed thro’ a sieve or strainer. When the ingre- 
dients are not inclined to mix uniformly together, 
it may be proper for him to advise the apothecary 
to let them be beat up well together for a good 
while. The common receptacle for a linctus, is 
a gallypot, or a wide-mouth’d phial, which may 
be either added or omitted in a prescription. Some- 
times the dose is determin’d by a scraped liquorish 
stick *, bruised at one end, which being dipped 
in the linctus, is afterwards cleared by licking it 
off. The subscription therefore concludes detur ad 
fictile cum bacillo liquoritiœ. 
§.157. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient concerning the taking of a linctus, may 
be deduced from what has been said under that 
head (§.60.) in general, and from (§.120. 121. 
122. 146.): it imports at least that a certain quan- 
tity (§.153.) the linctus is to be taken conti- 
nually or at certain intervals, to lie in the mouth 
'till it gradually dissolves there, and to be after- 
wards swallowed. If we suspect there will be a Se- 
paration or inequality of parts by its standing, it 
may be proper to order the medicine to be stirred 
about before any of it be taken. 
§.158. The USE of this form is only in dis- 
orders which infest the internal parts of the mouth, 
fauces, œsophagus, larynx, trachea and bronchia: 
* This method of taking a linctus, by a liquorish-stick, is of late 
rejected among us, as being more disagreeable, unsightly, and less 
exact than the use of a tea-spoon. 
H4 whence 


104 Linctus’s. 
whence lohocks are frequently order’d in apthæ, 
coughs, peripneumonis, phthisis, &c. to answer 
the intention of softening, healing, astringing, 
&c; for it is very rare that a linctus is order’d in 
any other diseases or intentions. 
§.159. Specimens of this form. 
1. Linctus communis. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥j. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥ij. 
Spt. vitriol, q. s. ad grat. acid. 
M. exactissime, F. linctus. 
S. Linct. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem cochleœ mi- 
noris subinde. 
2. Linctus ad sputa suppresa in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 148. 
ꝶ Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥jß.
Syr. violar. 
Mell. virgin. 
Vitell. ov. recent. aa ℥ß. 
M. accurate. 
S. Lingat. unc. ß. omni hord, donec sputa redeant.  
3. Lindus pectoralis niger. 
(1.) ♃. Succ. Hispan. ʒj.
Ext. R. liquor it. angl. ʒij. 
Ol. sem. lin. rec. frig. ext. ʒvj. 
Hysop. distillat. gtt. iv. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Linct. &c. ut prior sumendus. 
(2.)


105 Linctus's. 
(2.) Lintus pectoralis albus. 
♃. Trochisc. bech. alb. ʒiij. 
Sperm. ceti. ʒjß. 
Ol. sem. sinap. ʒx. 
Vitel. ov. rec. n° j. 
Syr. balsamic. ℥ijß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)—ruber. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. bals. tolut. 
Gum. benz. aa gtt. xx. 
Ol. chem. anis. gtt. iij. 
Syr. papav. errat. ʒjß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
4. Linct. ad partes aphthis delapsis excoriatas. 
H. Boerh. p. 170. 
ꝶ Syr. papav. alb. 
Cremor. lact. dulc. aa ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n° ij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. F. linctus. 
S. Hujus pauxillum ore assiduo contineat. 
5.


106 Pills.
5. Linctus tussim leniens. 
ꝶ. Loho. sani & experti. 
Syr. diacod. 
Mucilag. rad. alth. aq. ros. ext. aa ℥j. 
Spermat. cet. vit. ov. solut ʒj. 
Sacch. crystall. q. s. 
M. F. linct. detur in fictili cum baculo 
S. Lambat. sæpius, cum tustis urget. 
liquoritiæ. 
6. Linctus incrassans Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. 
Syr. violar. 
de mecon. aa ℥j. 
Sem. papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Contusis simul, & per setaceum trajectis, adde 
Ol. nuc. mossch. expr. gtt. vj. 
F. eclegma. 
S. Ut supra. 
Of PILLS
§.160. A Pill (the catapotium or Kαlαπoπov
of the Greeks) is a small, dry or solid, 
internal medicine; of a globular figure: made up 
of thick and cohesive substances, so as to be flex- 
ible, or give way to a small pressure. 
§.161. The MATTER or ingredients allowed 
to enter this form, is, every thing fit for internal 
use, which is capable of being brought, either of 
itself or by mixture, to the due consistence (§.160.) 
of a pill. So that in the general, we may admit 
all


107 Of Pills. 
all those substances into this form, which are enu- 
merated at §.110. 
§. 162. But a CHOICE of these several ingre- 
dients is necessary, in order to maintain the re- 
quisite cohesion, smallness of dose, and proper fi- 
gure of this kind of medicine: in order to which, 
1. Some ingredients are termed excipientiay 
others excipienda. (see §.86. 128.) Both which, 
tho’ they are the principal parts of the form, 
are yet frequently of such a texture, that they 
cannot be conveniently made into a mass of 
pills alone, without the addition of something 
accessory. 
2. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and co- 
hesive; as gums, resins, gum-resins, solid ex- 
trads, inspissated juices, officinal masses for 
pills, hard sopes, the stronger fort of troches, 
&c. or (2.) dry and brittle, or fit for pulveri- 
sation, whether they be animal, vegitable, or 
mineral substances. 
3. The first kind of these ingredients are the 
most suitable and frequent in use for this form. 
Such chiefly of the latter or brittle kind are ad- 
mitted into this form, as are very weighty in 
proportion to their bulk, or act strongly in a 
small dose: but light and dry powders, whose 
parts are gross, do not easily stick together, 
and act only in a large dose, are generally ex- 
cluded from the form of pills. 
4. But the officinal masses of pills, are, for 
the generality, better omitted in prescribing 
this form; except a few of the more neat and 
frequent in use: because they usually grow too 
dry, or are otherwise corrupted by long keep- 
ing. 
5. Salts also, which soon liquify or exhale 
in the air, are not so convenient for this form: 
they may however be permitted in a small quan- 
tity,

108 Of Pills. 
tity, when combined with other proper ingre- 
dients. 
6. But the most, powerful and acrid medi- 
cines of any kind, preparations of mercury, me- 
tals, and the like, are fitter to be exhibited in 
this form than any other. 
7. Ingredients also, which are the most of- 
sensive to the smell and taste, may be conveni- 
ently receiv’d into this form; because no other 
form of medicine can conceal them so well as 
Pills. 
8. The excipientia (n° 1.) are supplied from 
substanccs which are either (1.) thick: as honey, 
turpentine, extracts, electuaries but very seldom, 
to which we may add the crumb of new bread, 
and things of the like kind, or (2.) soft or less 
thick: as thin confections, syrups, liquid bal- 
soms, mucilages, the yolks of eggs, &c. or (3.) 
liquid: as essences, elixirs, tinctures, spirits, 
essential oils, &c. 
9.But it is not any of theforemention’d (n° 8.) 
excipients that will suit every kind of excipiend 
(n°.2.): for such as are dry and tenacious (n° 2. 
(1.).), especially refinous, should be mix’d with 
the more liquid excipients (n° 8. (3).) or else 
joined with the yolks of eggs, balsoms or tur- 
pentines. The dry and brittle substances (n° 2. 
(2.).) require to be mix’d with the thick and 
glutinous excipients (n° 8. (2.).) 
10. Sometimes all or some ot the excipienda 
(n° 1. 2.) are selected from some one class of the 
excipientia (n° 8.), being more or less tenaci- 
ous : in which case, the excipientia are to be sa- 
turated with dry and bibulous powders, as slow- 
er, powder of liquorish, and the like. 
11. The number of ingredients taken into 
this form, is much the same with that of the 
bolus (§.129. n° 9.), if the mass of pills or- 
der'd

109 Of Pills.
der’d is but small; but when the quantity pre- 
scribed for at once is large, the number of in- 
gredients may be the same with that of the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.163. The ORDER (§.57.) of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is 
hardly always the same; but the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 2. and 10.) ought to be generally placed first, 
and ranged according to the likeness or affinity 
and quantity of each (per §.57. n° 2. 3.): 
afterwards may be subjoined the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 8. 10.), the last of which should be such as are 
prescribed in no determinate quantity (per §.57. 
n° 5.). When the several constituent parts of a 
form (§.74.) enter the composition of pills, we 
should then place them by the rule (at §.57. n° 4.): 
which, frequently takes place in purging pills. 
§.164. The quantity of each pill is at present 
much less than formerly; but it is not constant- 
ly and universally the same: for different patients, 
physicians and nations, use pills of different sizes 
and weights. It is generally reputed a large Pill 
(among the Dutch) that weighs viij or x grains; 
which is however the quantity generally used among 
us and the French, who even permit our pills to 
be sometimes larger than that. Pills are deemed 
to be midling, when they are between two and 
five grains, which is almost the received standard 
for pills in Holland. The Germans love the least
pills, of a grain weight, which will frequently 
seem a large pill to many of them, unless it be 
subdivided into ij, iij, or iv lesser pills. But with 
regard to the mass of a pill in general, the young 
prescriber should observe, that 
1. Pills of the same moles or weight may be 
some very large, others very small, in propor- 
tion to the different specific gravities of the in-  
gredients

110 Of Pills.
gredients which compose them: so that a regard 
ought always to be had to the specific gravity of 
each ingredient, in limitting the mass of a pill. 
2. Smallness in a pill facilitates its dissolution 
in the stomach, and of consequence makes it act 
the more readily; because small pills have a 
greater surface in proportion to their contents, 
than large ones. 
3. But then on the contrary, large pills are 
for the same reason fitter for keeping; because 
they do not so soon grow dry, hard, add lose 
their virtue by exhalation. 
4. The physician will therefore accommo- 
date the size or weight of the pills to his parti- 
cular intention, the nature of their ingredients, 
their general quantity, or the mass which he 
prescribes, the quantity proper for a dose, &c.
together with the circumstances of the patient 
and place (per §.30. 43.): from weighing and 
comparing which, he will readily find out the 
rule which is to direct him in this point. 
§.165. For the DOSE of this form, the less the 
better, and more agreeable if it be but of sufficient 
strength; so that we can hardly commit an error 
in making the dose of a pill or pills too small. A 
moderate and commodious dose is between ℈j. 
and ʒß. It seldom amounts to ℈ij. or ʒj. unless 
in very urgent cases, when the ingredients are of 
a great specific gravity, or when the patient takes 
this form very easily. As for what further relates 
to the dose of this form, we may observe, that, 
1. Alteratives, which are of a slow opera- 
tion, difficult to dissolve in the primæ viæ, and 
are intended to be gradually insinuated into the 
mass of blood; such should be rather given in a 
small dose, and be frequently repeated, than to 
be crouded upon the patient all at once. 
2.

111 Of Pills. 
2. Salivating mercurials, drastic purgatives, 
and such like strong medicines, are, for the 
generality, more safely administer’d by dividing 
their proper dose into several smaller portions 
or pills; if so be the indication does not re- 
quire it to be otherwise, nor the nature of the 
disease or any thing else forbid it. See §.21. 
§.66. n° 13. §.67. n° 5. 
3. When the patient is to be purged without 
violence, or we would work upon the whole 
habit, it is usual to give one third or fourth 
part of the dose over night, and the rest the 
next morning. 
4. The number of pills for a dose may be de- 
termined by dividing the known quantity of 
the dose explained in this section, by the de- 
sired weight of each pill (per §.164.) 
5. There are some patients, from a supersti- 
tious notion which was introduced too by the 
physicians, who entertain an ill opinion of an 
even number of pills for a dose, especially when 
they are to purge. Such we may gratify by 
making the size of them a little less, and adding 
one more to their number. 
§.166. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is very vague and undetermined, being not assign- 
able but from the patient’s particular case com- 
pared with the weight and number of doses 
(§.165.): which latter, depend upon the physi- 
cians indications being rightly deduced, and com- 
pared with the several circumstances of the pa- 
tient, together with knowing and considering the 
disposition of each separate ingredient. Peruse 
what has been said at §.67. and 92. Evacuants 
are frequently prescribed for by only one, two, or 
three doses at a time: but alteratives are some- 
times order’d to as many ounces. In the mean 
time

112 Of Pills.
time the prescriber should be mindful of the rule 
at §.114. n° 2. Also what is there said at n° 3. 
is sometimes of consequence, with regard to the 
general quantity of this form. 
§.167. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral Ingredients of this form, may be determined 
without much difficulty, from the following con- 
siderations. 
1. The excipienda (§.162. n° 2. 10.) ma- 
king the main part of the mass, should be or- 
der’d in as many adiquate doses, suitable to the 
indication, (per §.66, 67. 87, to 91. 165, 
166.), as if they were to be exhibited separately. 
2. If these (n° 1.) are solid and tenacious 
(per §.162. n° 2. (1.)), there should be but 
little of the excipient (§.162. n° 8.) order’d; 
writing for it only by q. s. and sometimes it 
should be even wholly omitted in a prescrip- 
tion; the choice and quantity thereof, if any be 
required, being referred to the discretion of 
the apothecary. 
3. But if the excipienda be dry and brittle 
(per §.162. n° 2. (2.)), the quantity of the 
tenacious excipient must be various, according 
to the particular degree of its own consistence 
(§.162. n° 8.). The quantity thereof in gene- 
ral, should be the larger as it is thicker or 
more consistent. Whence, the particular quan- 
tity requisite, will be 
Supposing the dry excipienda as - ℥j. 
Of the exci-
pient that is 
of the thickest kind 
(§.162. n° 8.(1.)) 
ʒv to vj. 
softer or less thick 
(ib. (2.))  
ʒiij to iv.
liquid or thinest
(ib. (1.)) 
ʒij to iij.
such will be the quantities required to form a 
mass of a due consistence (§.160.) for pills. 
But

113 Of Pills. 
But sometimes in this case, as in the former 
(n° 2.), the quantity is left to be determined 
by the apothecary. 
4. From the foregoing, we may easily deter- 
mine the necessary proportion to be observed, 
when several excipients of different consistences, 
or excipiends of both classes (§.162. n° 2. (1.) 
(2.)), are order’d together, in the composition 
of pills. 
5. Such excipienda (§.162. n° 10.) as are 
less consistent than pills, are to be made up with 
a q. s. of some proper powder: tho' the requisite 
proportion of these too, may be understood 
from the rule at n° 3. 
6. If, in assigning the quantity of soft but ne- 
cessary excipients, you are doubtful, and afraid 
of ordering too much or too little, take a quan- 
tity so small, that you may be sure it is not suf- 
ficient, and subjoin q. s. of some other excipient, 
as Syr. &c. 
7. Hence appears, how necessary is the rule 
at §.35. A knowledge of the specific gravity 
of each ingredient is also here very serviceable; 
since that alone may make a great variation in 
the proportions necessary for a due consisence. 
8. What we have further to advise the young 
prescriber in relation to the proportion of 
parts in this form, is, that he be mindful of 
what we said before at §.86. and 88. n° 3. 
that if the excipientia possess the property of 
increasing or diminishing the action of the dry 
excipienda, that such alteration may be com- 
puted and allowed for in determining the dose, 
and the quantity of excipienda be proportion’d 
accordingly. See n° 1. of this section. 
§.168. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. pilulœ.
I Always  

114 Of Pills. 
Always subjoining afterwards the number of pills 
that is to be formed out of the whole mass: as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or, if the mass is large, by di- 
recting how many pills are to be formed out of a 
certain weight thereof: as ex scrupulo n° v, vij, &c. 
or lastly, by adding the exacs weight of each pill: 
as singulœ gr. ij, iij, iv, &c. Sometimes we direct 
them to be cover’d, by rolling them in some fine 
powder: as obruantur pulvere glycyrrhizœ, cinna- 
mom. &c. in which they are order’d to be rolled 
to prevent their sticking together. If we would 
have them gilded, We add deaurentur, or auri vel 
argenti foliis obducantur: which is the more al- 
lowable, as it makes them agreeable to the eye, 
confines their smell and taste, which are often ex- 
tremely unpleasant, keeps them from sticking to 
each other, from spreading flat, from growing 
too hard, dry, or crumbling into powder; but 
long keeping may deface their fine covering. The 
usual receptacle for this form is a scatula or box, 
seldom paper. 
§.169. The SIGNATURE, or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains first, the title,
compos’d of the name and virtue (per §.60. 
n° 3.); then the dose (§.165.), determining 
the number of pills to be taken at a time (ib. 
n° 4, 5.); unless when they are all to be taken 
for one dose. The time of taking them and the re- 
gimen to be used under their operation, are to be de- 
duced from the physicians indication: but here we 
must be careful, in strong doses which are divided 
into smaller portions {per §.165. n° 2.), that one 
part be not taken before the other begins to ope- 
rate and shew its effects; because, as pills are but 
slowly dissolved in the stomach, they may lie a good 
while before they begin to operate. As to a vehi- 
cle for this form, many use none at all; some use 
a thick or solid vehicle, as a waser, a fig, or rasin,
mar-


115 Of Pills.
marmalad, &c. others use liquid vehicles, which 
are generally best cold; because when they are 
hot, they in a great measure dissolve the pill, make 
it stick to the mouth, and give a greater offence 
to the taste. It is also, sometimes, necessary to 
drink some liquor after taking this form, in order 
to wash off what may have adhered to the mem- 
branes in its passage, to take off the disagreeable 
taste it may have left behind, and to facilitate its 
dissolution, and promote its action in the stomach. 
See §.60. n° 11. §.123. n° 2, 3. and §.135. 
§.170. The USE of this form is almost univer- 
sal, being equally extensive with that of the pow- 
der (§.125.): it is fitted as well for most evacuants 
as alteratives; but it is more especially useful and 
convenient in chronical cases. Pills are, however, 
sometimes given in acute cases, tho’ but seldom, and 
with the intention of narcotics, emetics *, and the 
like. One advantage which the form of pills possesses 
beyond any other, is, that it will commodiously 
take in and conceal ingredients which in other 
forms must be extremely nauseous and offensive. 
Yet, there are some particular patients to whom 
pills are less agreeable than other forms: and such 
we may gratify by changing it (per §.43.). Pills 
are also not very convenient for infants or young 
children, because they will chew them, and can- 
not get them down so easily as a liquid. They are 
also less suitable for dry habits of body (per §.47.); 
I2 but 
* Emetics are never order'd in pills among us, for the same rea- 
son that they are hardly ever given in form of a bolus: viz. left 
the cohesion of parts- in the form should be such, as to let them slip 
thro' the stomach (without exerting their energy there) into the in- 
testines, where they would become severe cathartics; whereas, in 
this intention, there is required the largest and speediest contact of 
surface between the parts of the medicine and the coats of the stomach. 
But our author, agreeable with foreign practice, begins his speci- 
mens of this form with emetic pills ex tart. emetic. gr. v. & micæ 
panis q. s. ut F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 

116 Pills. 
but that fault may be corrected by drinking some 
proper liquor, either before or after them. A diffi- 
culty, or incapacity, for swallowing in the patient, 
is a greater obstacle against ordering this form 
than that of a powder (§.125.). And lastly, the 
slow dissolution and operation of this form, being 
sometimes not speedy  enough for the intention, 
may also forbid its use. 
§.171. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Pil. cathartiæ communes. 
(1.) ♃. Pil coch. min. ℈j. 
Calomelan. ℈ß. 
Resin. jalap. gr. vj. 
Ol. junip. gtt. iij.
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 
S. Pil. &c. primo mane, in quovis vehiculo, cum re- 
gimine sumend. 
(2.)  
♃. Extract. rud. 
Pil. ex duob. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. chem. gtt. j. 
Elix. propriet. tartariz. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Summo mane cum regimine sumend. 
(3.)—ecphradicæ. 
♃. Pil. fœtid. gr. xv. 
Resin. jalap. 
Sal. succin. aa gr. v. 
Ol. succin. gtt. ij. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Pit. &c. quarum ij capiat hord somni, & tres 
summo mane, cum regimine.
2. 

117 Pills. 
2. Pil. alterantes. 
♃. Pil. ruffi ℈j. 
Ext. thebaic, gr. j. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° iij. 
S. Pil. &c. H. S. in quovis vehiculo sumendœ. 
3. Pilulæ resolventes, stimulantes, in morbis a 
glutinoso spontaneo. 
ꝶ Sapon. alcalici vel starkeani ʒjß
Extract. centaur. min.
Gumm. galban. aa ʒj. 
Sagapen.  ℈ij. 
Ol. stillat. absinth. gtt. xij. 
Cort. winteran. subtil. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ ex  ℈j. n° x. deaurandæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger ij. ter vel quater de 
die ex vino. 
4. Pilul. astringentes in fibra laxa, secund. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 8. 
ꝶ Extrad. tormentill. ʒj. 
Bistortœ. 
Pulv. cort. granator. aa ʒß. 
Lap. hœmatit. ppt. ℈j. 
Syr. myrtin. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ singulæ gr. ij. 
S. Pilulœ roborantes. Capiat œger umam ter, vel 
quater de die, ex ℥j. infusi, decocti, vel vini me- 
dicati, ib. p. 5 ad 7. descriptorum. 
I3 5.

118 Pills. 
5. Pilulæ martiales nigræ. 
♃. Mart. c. sulph. ppt. ʒjß. 
Sal. mart. 
Ter. japon. aa ℈ij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Extract. theœ virid. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ mediocres, obruantur pul-
vere sub. cort. cinnam. 
S. Nomine precedentium. Capiat unam ter die in 
quovis vehiculo, hora ante cibum. 
6. Pilulæ hypochondriacæ 
♃. Gumm. ammon. 
Asœ fœtid. 
Myrrh. pulv. 
Aloe socotrin. 
Rubig. mart. 
Extract. gent. aa ℈j. 
Syr. de 5. rad. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies cum haustul. 
vini amari. 
7. Pilulæ uterinæ. 
♃. Pil. gummos. ʒj. 
Fol. sabin. crisp. pulv. ℈ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. jv. 
Bals. sulph. terebinth. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pilulœ aperientes. Capiat n° iij. dosi, pro re 
nata repetend.
8. 

119 Pills.
8. Pilulæ emmenagogæ
♃. Cort. peruv. subt. pulv. ʒij. 
Rubig. mart. ʒj. 
Extract. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies c. haustu infusi 
amari. 
9. Pilulæ asthmaticæ. 
4. Pulp. scillœ siccat. 
Gumm. ammon. aa  ʒß. 
Flor. benz. ℈j. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres his in dies quovis vehiculo. 
10. Pilulæ terebinthinatæ. 
♃. Tereb. venet. 
E. chio coct. aa ʒj. 
Sacchar. alb. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies, superbibendo vi- 
tel. ov. rec. in haustul. vin. alb. dulcificati. 
11 Pilulæ febrifugæ.
♃. Ext. cort. peruv. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth.  ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. iv. 
Pulv. cort. elect. subt. q. s.  
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat unam omni hora, superbilendo 
haustum [℥iv.] theœ ex flor. chamom. factœ. 
I4 12.

120 Pills. 
12. Pilulæ ad strumas. 
♃. Hydrarg. in tereb. v. q. f. solut. 
Gumm. guaiac. aa ʒjß. 
Ol. sassafr. chem. gtt. xx. 
Ext. R. sarsaparill. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlvilj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies cum haustu ℥iv. 
aq. bened. Bat. C. 
13. Pilulæ nigræ. 
♃. Antimon. crud. levigat. 
Hydrarg. 
Pil. Ruffi aa ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Sumat quater omni nocte cum haust. aq. 
(ad n° xij.) precedent. 
14. Pilulæ ictericæ. 
♃. Sapon. e joppá ʒij. 
Pulv. rhei ℈ij. 
Ext. croc, anglic. ℈j. 
R. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. ex ʒß. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat quinque bis in dies cum haustu 
infusi amari. 
15. Pilula antisyphilica. 
♃. Merc. precipit. per se. 
Extract. thebaic. aa gr. j. 
Balsam. peruv. guttulam. 
M. F. pilula deauranda. 
S. Pil. ad sanguinem abstergendum, omni nocte sumenda. 
16.

121 Pills.
16. Pilulæ ceruleæ. 
♃. Scammon. ʒj. 
Gumm. guaiac. ℈ij. 
Camphor. ℈j. 
Hydrarg. ʒij. 
Ol. terebinth. gtt. vj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlviij. pulvere liquoritæ 
obruendæ. 
S. Titulo precedentis pilulœ. Capiat quater omni nocte. 
17. Pilulæ camphoratæ. 
♃. Gumm. guaiac. ʒij. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Bals. peruv. 
Ol. sassafr. aa gtt. xij. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xlviij. deaurantur. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij pro dosi. 
18. Pilulæ balsamicæ. 
(1.) ♃. Gumm. tragac. 
Tereb. e chio aa ℈ iv. 
Camphor. ℈ j. 
Bals. copaih. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. obruantur pulvere 
sang. dracon. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres mane & vesperi.
(2.)

122 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.)—in gonorrhea venerea.
Boerh. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. vulg. ℥j. 
Rei-barh. ℥ß. 
Glycyrrbiz. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ, singulæ gr. iv. 
S. Capiat unam omni hord. 
19. Pilulæ narcoticæ. 
(l.) ꝶ. Opii purissimi gr. ij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Detur una pro dosi, repetendo post horam, si prior 
nihil efficit, sic & tertio. 
(2.)—
♃. Pil. Matthœi gr. xij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Ut prior. 
Of TROCHES, or LOZENGES. 
§.l72. A Troche, (sometimes call’d up a pastill, 
or a Lozenge) is a pill (§.160.), tho' 
not of a globular figure, nor to be swallowed 
whole; but is to pass down the œsophagus slowly, 
after a gradual dissolution in the mouth, like a 
linctus (§.149.): hence, we might venture to term 
it eclegma solidum, a solid linctus. 
§.173. But it is here very proper to distinguish 
troches which are officinal from those which are ex- 
temporaneous (per §.6.); for tho' they both agree 
as

123 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
as to their form, they have frequently very diffe- 
rent uses or intentions: since the composition of 
the officinal troche is calculated chiefly for the pre- 
servation of certain species or ingredients, which 
are often, by that means, the better fitted to enter 
many other forms; but the extemporaneous regards 
more the case and circumstances of some particular 
patient. 
§.174. The MATTER, or ingredients of this 
form, are in general of two kinds: excipienda, 
things to be taken in by others; or excipientia (per 
§.128. n° 1, 2.) which are to take in, and make 
up the former.  
1. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and 
brittle; or (2.) dry and cohesive, or tenacious 
(vide §.162. n° 2.): or (3.) soft; as pulps, 
electuaries, &c. or (4.) liquid; which are either 
of the weaker and more dissused kind; as de- 
ceptions, infusions, &c. or else more contracted 
and strong; as effential oils, &c. 
2. The ingredients which serve for excipientia, 
are either (1.) liquid, with but little tenacity; 
as wines, distilled waters, spirits, vegetable jui- 
ces, decoctions, infusions, &c. or (2.) viscid: 
as the whites of eggs, mucilages, syrups, bal- 
soms, honey, pulps, &c. or (3.) dry and glu- 
tinous; as gums, extracts, inspissated juices, &c. 
or (4.) dry and not oily; as the meal of vetches, 
lupines, &c.
§.175. But a Choice of these ingredients is 
necessary for an accurate composition of this form; 
since the consistence, proper to each of the fore- 
going kinds, does not fit them promiscuously for 
an uniform mixture with each other. But, 
1. The dry excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) 
generally require to be joined with the viscid ex- 
cipientia ib. n° 2. (2.)).
2. 

124 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
2. The excipienda which, are dry and tena- 
cious (ib. n° 1. (2.)) may be well enough com- 
bin’d with the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. 
(1.)) when they are properly chose. 
3. The soft excipienda (n° 1. (3.)) are to be 
made of a due consistence for this form, by the 
mealy excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
4. The liquid excipienda (n° 1. (4.)) agree 
best with the dry and glutinous excipients (n° 
2. (3.)).
5. Thence, we may easily determine whether 
any, and what kind of excipients, are required 
when excipienda of different consistences enter 
together in composition. In which Case there 
is sometimes none at all required. 
6. Substances which are unpleasant to the 
smell and taste, shou’d be avoided in this form, 
or at least be added in a very small quantity, for 
reasons at §.151. n° 4. & §.172. 
7. Medicines of the more potent and pun- 
gent kind, shou’d also be here avoided; since 
their use and our intention do not call for them 
in this form. 
8. Salts, (for the same reason, and from their 
aptness to melt, with their unpleasant taste) are 
therefore scarce ever permitted to enter this 
form.
9. Sugar, on the contrary, is of very fre- 
quent use in this form; as it reconciles the taste 
of the medicine to the tongue, facilitates the 
dissolution thereof in the mouth, and increases 
their bulk or mass to a proper size. Which last 
intention, is also frequently answer’d with 
starch. 
10. Ingredients which are glutinous, or very 
tenacious, shou’d not enter this form (at least in 
any great quantity) when it is designed for in- 
fants;

125 Of Troches or Lozenges.
fants; for as they chew ’em, such things prove 
very troublesome, by glewing their teeth toge- 
ther. 
11. For the number of ingredients, this form 
will hardly admit of more than the electuary 
(§.140. n° 6.). 
12. If there be any officinal Troches fit to 
answer our intention, we shou’d rather order 
those than prescribe new (per §.29. 37.). 
§.176. The ORDER of placing the several in- 
gredientsof this form in a prescription,is the same 
with that observed in pills (§. 163). 
§.177. The QUANTITY of a Troche was for- 
merly extended from ʒj to ʒiij, but at present they 
are much less, being usually-limited between 
gr. vi. and ℈ß. which last quantity is seldom ex- 
ceeded; they are even sometimes but of ij or iij gr. 
weight, especiaily when designed to sweeten the 
breath. But they are oftner not determined by 
weight, but by magnitude; as the size of peas, 
lupines, &c. nor is there any danger in this di- 
sion of extemporaneous troches (per §.175. n° 7.) 
§.178. The FIGURE usually given to troches, 
is either flat and circular like a cake, tringular, 
cubical, rhomboidal, or cylindrical, &c. the choice 
of which, with the seal to imprint ’em with, may 
be well enough left to the discretion of the apo- 
thecary. 
§. 179. The DOSE of this form is usually de- 
termined by number, according to the greater or 
less size or weight of the troches (§. 177.), and 
particular nature of the ingredients. N° i, ij, iij, 
&c. are order’d to lie dissolving in the mouth; but 
when drastic or very potent medicines (such as 
opium, &c.) enter the compostion of troches, 
which is very seldom the case (per §.175. n° 7.), 
the number of troches for a dose to be ex- 
actly

126 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
actly limited from the known particular weight of 
each, and from the known proportion such strong 
ingredients bare to the whole. 
§.180. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, sent to the patient at one time, is seldom 
less than ℥j, or ℥jß; because a less quantity can- 
not be conveniently made up by the apothecary. 
But if officinal troches (§.175. n° 12.) are ordered 
alone in a prescription, there is then no reason to 
be confin'd to this quantity; but so much at least
ought to be prescribed at once, as may be judged 
sufficient to answer the intention (per §.67, 68.). 
§.181. For the PROPORTION of the excipi- 
entia to the excipienda (§.174.), as it varies with 
the different consistences of each, so it is scarce 
possible it shou'd be determin'd in all Cases with 
exactness. And, as ingredients of the stronger 
kind are seldom permitted to enter the composi- 
tion of this form (per §.175. n° 7.), the propor- 
tion may be therefore safely referred to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary (per §.58. n° 8. (7.)). But 
in general, to take notice of the following conside- 
rations may be of some use. 
1. The greater or less specific gravity of the 
dry and bibulous excipienda (§.174. n° 1. 
(1.)), makes (more or less) a considerable alter- 
ation in the necessary quantity of the excipienda. 
2. There is requir'd a less quantity of the 
excipienda to make up a certain quantity of ex- 
cipienda, as this lad is thicker, or more tena- 
cious. 
3. Hence, to iij parts of the dry powder'd 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) which are of a 
mean specific gravity, there is required almost 
ij parts of the most liquid excipienda (n°. 2. (i.)):
but of the viscid excipienria (n° 2. (2.)), there 
will be required from iv. to vj. parts, according 
as it is more or less consistent. 
To

127 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
To make up iij parts of the like dry excipi- 
enda, which are lightest, or of the least specific 
gravity, is required, of the most liquid excipi- 
entia (n° 2. (1.)) iv parts, of the viscid exci- 
pientia (n° 2. (2.)) from vj to ix parts. 
To make iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into troches, 
j part of the most liquid excipienda (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into this form, 
j part of the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the soft excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (3.)), there is need of ij parts 
of the dry excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
To iij parts of the diffused liquid excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (4.)). shou’d be added ix parts of 
the dry excipientia (n° 2. (3.)). 
4. The quantity of sugar to be added, is fre- 
quently the weight of the whole; but sometimes 
double, tripple, quadruple, and beyond, that 
quantity: according as it is required by the cir- 
cumstances at §.175. n° 9. The same holds 
good also, with regard to the use of starch in 
the composition of this form. 
§.182. The SUBSCRIPTION, or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. l. a. Tro- 
chisci, adding afterwards their size or weight (per 
§.177.), v. g. Parvi, or Pisi, Lupini, magnitudine: 
or gr. ij, vj. ℈ß. But there is no occasion for any 
such direction when the troches prescribed are offi- 
cinal (per §.175. n° 12.). Boxes, papers, &c. are 
the usual receptacles for this form. When very 
strong medicines enter the composition of this 
form (per §.179.) the quantity of excipients being
at

128 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
at the same time undetermined; it is then prudeht 
to determine the quantity of each troche, not by 
size or weight, but by directing the number to be 
formed out of the whole mass, as in pills (§.168.). 
By this means We shall be the better assured of the 
certain quantity of the drastic medicine, which 
is contained and given in each troche. 
§.183. The SIGNATURE, or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on this head, at §.60. 
and 157. compared with §.172. 179. 
§.184. The USE of this form is at present but 
seldom in practice, add even then it is only ap- 
plied, 
1. In disorders of the mouth and sauces, pha- 
rynx, larynx, aspera artera, &c. like a linctus, 
§.158. 
2. To sweeten or perfume a stinking breath: 
or, 
3. As a preventive against the action of 
contagious efluvia, upon the membranes of the 
mouth, nose and lungs. 
§.185. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Trochisci ad ptyalismum, ab apthis delapsis. 
ꝶ. Ter japon. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. 
Extract. agrimon. aa ʒj. 
Mucilag. sem. cydonior. 
Cum aq. rosar. extract. q. s. 
M. F. l. a. trochisci pisi magnitudine. 
S. Trochisci rohorantes quorum unum assiduò ore volu- 
tet œger ac lente deglutiat. 
2.

129 Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.) Trochisci opiati in pulmone suppurato, rupto. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ. Succ. liquorit. 
Flor. sulphur. aa ʒij. 
Olihan. ℈ij. 
Opii puri ℈j. 
Bals. copayb. q. s. 
Ut exacte mistis F. trochisci n° xl. 
S. Trochisci pacantes, quorum duos sumat qualibet 
vespera ante somnum. 
3. Trochisci nervini. 
♃. Sp. lavend. comp. gtt. lx. 
Ol. essent. rorismar. 
Cinnam. aa gtt. iv. 
Farin. R. ir. florent. ʒij.
Sacchart albi ℥j 
Mucilag. gummi tragac. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß.
S. Trochisci cephalici, paralytici, &c. unum vel plures 
ore volutet œger, pro re nata. 
4. Trochisci sialagogi.
♃. Rad. pyreth. pulv. ℥ß 
Mastiches  ʒij. 
Ol. caryophyllor. 
Macis. 
Sal. succin. aa ʒj. 
Cerœ flav. recent. odorat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci magni. 
S. Troch. &c. quorum unum vel duo ore volutet ad 
libitum.
K 5.

130 Troches or Lozenges. 
5. Trochisci swaveolentes ad fœtorem spiritus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Resin. cort. thymiam Hoffm. ℈j.
Amhar. grys. gr. xv. 
Moschi gr. vij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Sacchari albissimi ℥j. 
Mucilag. gumm. arab. in aq.
Cinnam. fact. q. s. ut. 
F. l. a. trochisci minimi. 
S. Unum vel alterum pro necessitate ore volutet. 
(2.) Alii- 
♃. Ol. thym. limon. gtt. xx. 
Cort. citror. gtt. vij. 
Moschi 
Ambrœ grissiœ aa gr. j. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Sacchari albissmi ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in spt. rosar. damascenar.
Solut. q. s. ut 
F. trochisci minimi. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. Trochisci sublinguales ad prophylaxin a contagio. 
ꝶ. Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Myrrh. elect. ʒj. 
Ol. still. cort. citri gtt. xij. 
Succin. citri recent. ℥ß. 
Pulv. cort. aurant. q. s. 
Ut F. l. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Mane exiturus capiat unum, alerum sub lingua 
detineat. 
7.

131 Of Tablets.
7. Trochisci bechici. 
♃. Succ. hispan. ʒjß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj. 
Flor. benz. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi gtt. xxij. 
Hysop. gtt. iv. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in syr. bals. solut. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Trochisci, &c. quorum unum ore volutet urgente 
tussi. 
Of TABLETS. 
§.186. A Tablet (sometimes termed morsu- 
lus, and from its consistence, electu- 
arium solidum, vid. §.190.) is a dry, internal me- 
dicine, formed into various figures, and made 
up of various ingredients; which are dissolved 
and boiled up with a large proportion of sugar, 
till the whole acquires a solid and brittle con- 
sistence *. Whence appears the difference of this 
form from that of the troche, §.172 †. 
§.187. The MATTER or ingredients of this 
form, are either (1.) excipienda, by which we here 
Understand all ingredients concerned or taken into 
the form as a medicine; or (2.) excipiens, what is 
employ’d in making up and rendering the form a- 
greeable. 
K2 The
* Like the barley-sugar of our confectioners, which may be 
looked upon as (tabella simplex, or) the basis of this form. 
† The difference of the tablet from the troche seems to consist in 
its brittle texture, great quantity of sugar, large dose and way of 
taking: all which are proper to a tablet, but not to a troche. But 
as this form has been long out of date, being never used among us, 
nor hardly ever in other nations we need not be very sollicitous 
about its difference. 


132 Of Tablets.
The excipienda comprehend almost every 
thing that is admitted into the electuary, whe- 
ther excipientia or excipienda (per §.139. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3.). From whence we may perceive 
the reason of the form's having been antiently 
call'd electuarium solidum. 
The excipiens is always dry or loaf sugar, 
dissolved in some proper liquor, which is gene- 
rally aqueous, and afterwards boiled to a due 
consistence. 
§.188. But a CHOICE of the ingredients is re- 
quired upon several accounts; as, 
1. It its required that this form be brittle as 
well as solid, that it be so consistent as not to 
run or flow, being also easily dissolvable in the 
mouth, and not unpleasant to the taste. 
2. Hence, gums, extracts, inspissated juices, 
things gross and oily, or the like, which intro- 
duce tenacity in the compound, should enter 
the composition of this form in the least quan- 
tity. 
3. For the same reason, the sugar made use 
of, should not be fat or repleat with its melosus; 
but if simple, it should be the whitest and dry- 
est, or else it may be saccharum rosatum. 
4. There is therefore no room in this form 
for ingredients which are very offenve to the 
smell and taste; because the use thereof requires 
it to undergo mastication and a dissolution in 
the mouth. 
5. This form will in like manner also, scarce- 
ly admit of any salts to enter its composition, 
especially those which are apt to liquify or ex- 
hale in the air. 
6. The grosser powders (species or trageæ) 
may indeed be admitted into this form, when 
they are a little soft at the same time. But for 
the

133 Of Tablets.
the harder powders, unless they are very finely 
levigated, they will prove gritty and trouble- 
some between the teeth. 
7. Acids from fossils should be also omitted, 
as they hinder the coagulation of the sugar. 
8. So also, oily things are, for the same rea- 
son and their unpleasantness, excluded from this 
form. 
9. Kernels, which are repleat with an oil that 
soon turns rancid, the fleshy parts of animals, 
and the like, are improperly order’d in this 
form, when it is to last any length of time in 
taking. 
10. Astringent and incrassating substances 
should also be expunged from this form; be- 
cause they lose their virtues by being buried in 
so large a quantity of sugar. 
11. The solid consistence of tablets will well 
enough admit of medicines which are the most 
potent, and possess the greatest specific gravity; 
if so be they undergo an equable mixture in the 
composition. 
12. Sweet smells are given to tablets by in- 
termixing a small quantity of ambergrease, musk, 
or civet; or when the mass is congealed, it may 
be wash'd over with some fragrant liquor, essen- 
tial oil, &c. and for the fake of colour, it may 
be gilded with leaf gold or silver, or tinged by 
sprinkling in flowers of various colours cut 
small, a little before the mass is grown cold;
but those who approve of these ornaments should 
be mindful of the caution at §. 85. 
13. The composition of tablets will not well 
take in a greater number of ingredients than the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.189. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients of this form, is the same with that to be 
K3 ob-

134 Of Tablets. 
observed in troches (§.176.) and pills (§.163.); 
tho' that method does frequently not agree with 
the just order of preparation and compostion. 
§.190. The FIGURE given to this mass is va- 
rious, which as it neither adds to nor diminishes 
from the virtue of the medicine, that part may 
be well enough left to be determined by the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. When it is poured into 
a box, before it is quire cold, so as to receive the 
figure thereof, it then takes the name of panda- 
leon: and when it is poured out and spread flat 
upon a plain, they afterwards cut and frame it in- 
to little, masses of a square figure, cubical like dice, 
rhomboidal or diamond-fashion, &c. which they 
accordingly term tablets, morsules, or tessellœ, lo- 
zenges, &c. tho’ it would have been much better 
to have always distinguished them by the single 
name of tablets, rejecting the rest. 
§.191. The QUANTITY or size of a tablet is 
very seldom determined either by weight or mea- 
sure; nor is it fo strictly limited but it may be 
extended from ʒj. to ℥ß. and beyond. 
§.192. The DOSE of this form is usually or- 
der’d by number, as ß, j, ij, iij, &c. according as 
they are bigger or less: or if the mass is all in one 
Jump, it may be order’d to be taken a bit at a 
time: or if it contains ingredients of any strength, 
the bits may be proportioned cut by weight: and 
in that case die dose will be more or less, accord- 
ing to the strength and proportion of the ingre- 
dients. But the dose hardly ever exceeds an ounce, 
in any case. 
§.193. For the GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time; if it 
be less than ℥iv. it cannot be conveniently made 
up by the apothecary. But if you order an offici- 
nal composition of this kind, just so much may be 
wrote

135 Of Tablets. 
wrote for as will suffice for the intention; tho' that 
should not be less than ℥ß. 
§.194. With regard to the PROPORTION of in- 
gredients for this form, that of the exciprenda is de- 
termined from a previous knowledge of the parti- 
cular nature of each, with their consistence and 
relation to one another, compared with the inten- 
tion, and the cautions given at §.188. (Vid. §.66, 
67. 115. n° 1. 6.) But the proportion of the ex- 
cipiens depends much on the former, and may be 
determined from the following considerations. 
1. In general, four or six times as much sugar 
may be conveniently taken, as the quantity of 
excipienda. But there are some who are pleased 
to order eight times as much sugar, or more; 
but with no great judgment: because the virtue 
of the ingredients is often by that means so much 
diffused, and often diminished or obtunded by 
so much sugar; from whence, the effectual dose 
must be also increased without necessity. 
2. In the mean time we must have a regard to 
the specific gravity and consistence of the ingre- 
dients. Those of the lightest kind will take up 
the most sugar, as they are very bulkey. Sub- 
stances which are dry, hard and porous, will 
grow almost stony with but a small portion of 
sugar. V. §.188. n° 1. 
3. If the excipienda or ingredients themselves 
contain any sugar, the quantity of excipiens or 
sugar should be proportionably less: which holds 
good with regard to conserves, candies, confec- 
tions, &c. 
4. But the quantity of sugar is often left to be 
determined at the pleasure of the apothecary 
(per §.58. n° 8. (7.) ), which is a liberty not 
to be comply’d with, when the dose is required 
to be adjusted by weight (per §.192.); because 
that unlimited quantity may differ very widely  
K4 in

130 Of Tablets.
in different shops, and many may be at a loss 
for the proper quantity to be used. 
§.195. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is usually wrote M. F. 
l. a. tabulœ, morsuli, electuarium solidum, panda- 
leon, &c. (§.190.), leaving what relates to the or- 
der and manner of making up the composition, to 
the judgment and dexterity of the apothecary. 
Afterwards, when it seems proper, may be sub- 
joined the liquid with which they are to be wash- 
ed, and whether the mass is to be ornamented with 
leaf gold, silver or flowers (per §.188. n° 12.) 
Sometimes the weight of each tablet (§.197.) is 
mentioned in a prescription, and a scatula or box 
order’d for the receptacle. But in prescribing for 
officinal tablets (§.193.), there is generally no oc- 
casion to mention any of these; unless you may 
think fit to add some external embellishment (per 
§.188. n° 12.) 
§.196. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on that head (at §.60. 
186. 190. 192.). A vehicle for this form is unnecessa- 
ry, upon account of the sugar. The time and me- 
thod of taking is deduced from the intention: for it 
is to be either chewed and directly swallowed, or else 
gradually dissolved by the saliva, and swallowed 
slowly. 
§.197. The USE of tablets is at present al- 
most universally laid aside. The pandaleon is quite 
obsolete. But the tablet may be sometimes order’d 
with the intention of a purgative, vermifuge, sto- 
machic, carminative, antacid, attenuant, aphrodi- 
siac, alexipharmic, pectoral, and to correct a soul 
breath. Some are better pleased with medicines in 
this form than another, and it may do well enough 
for a domestic remedy, arid to carry upon long 
journeys;

137 Tablets. 
neys; as it keeps found a long time, serves to dis- 
guise the medicine for the infant and nice patient, 
and is easy to make up: but it is not so convenient 
in many cases, when the patient is poor, or his 
blood in too thin a state; it is also culpable for the 
slowness of its action, and in hysterical cases, where 
sweet things are less agreeable. 
§.198 For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Tabulæ antihelminticæ verminum nidum de- 
struentes. 
ꝶ. Conserv. absinth. valg.
Semin. santonic. 
Tanacet. aa ʒij. 
Æthiop. mineral. ʒiij. 
Resin. jalap. ʒjß. 
Sacch. albiss. Infuso tanaceti solut. ℥v. 
M. F. l. a. tabellæ, singulæ ℥ß
S. Capiat umam mane & vesperi, vacuo ventriculo. 
2. Tabellæ purgantes. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. jalap. ʒiij. 
Scammon. opt.  ʒij. 
Antimon. diaphoret. ℥ß 
Flaved. cort. citri rec. ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. in aq. ros. solut. ℥viij. 
M. F. l. a. confectio pro tabellis. 
S. Dosis ʒiij ad v. adultis jʒß ad ʒj infantibus.
3.

138 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
3. Tabellæ antacidæ. 
ꝶ  Matr. perlar. ppt. 
Cret. albiss. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒiij. 
Cinnam. grossè triti ʒj.
Sacch. albis in aq. pur a solut. q. s. 
Ut. F. l. a. tabellæ. 
S. Tab. &c. quarum una vel altera pro necessitate 
capiatur.  
4. Tabellæ stomachicæ carminantes; in casu frigido, 
ꝶ. Cons. menth. ʒiij. 
Nuc. moschat. in Ind. cond. 
Cort. winteran. 
Aurantior. aa ʒij. 
Macis ʒj. 
M. F. cum sacch. alb. in aq. rosar. solut. 
q. s. tabellæ, ol. stillat. cort. citri ob- 
linendæ. D. in scatula. 
S. Sumatur una ante & post pastum. 
Of SUGAR-CAKES. 
§.199. A SUGAR-CAKE (termed rotula and or- 
biculus) is nothing more than the tablet 
(§.186.) made into a flat and round form, it be- 
ing (like that) received by and made up with 
sugar; but then its ingredients are usually ground 
finer, or render’d more soluble: So that there is 
but very little difference between this and the pre- 
ceeding form. However, as they are not abso- 
lutely the same, I thought it more advisable to be 
scrupulously exact in their division, than to load
the

139 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
the rules for these forms with too many exceptions 
by treating them as one. 
§.200. The MATTER or ingredients are in ge- 
neral the same as for the tablets (§.187.). Sugar 
is also in this form, always the excipient, or what 
serves to glew together and make up the other in- 
gredients. Whence, they confound sugar-cakes 
with troches or lozenges (§.172.) who give the 
name of sugar-cake to this form, when the ingre- 
dients are made up with a mucilage. 
§.201. The CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, is in some measure different from that in 
the troche. For, 
1. Besides the conditions at §.188. n° 1. su- 
gar-cakes are also most delectable when their so- 
lidity is joined with an imperfect pellucidity, or 
are semidiaphanous. Therefore, 
2. Such substances as cannot be sufficiently 
attenuated and equably diffused thro’ the substance 
of the sugar, such as conserves; candies, gross 
powders, with kernels of the nut or almond 
kind, which are apt to clog together and turn 
grumous, these are all less fit to enter the com- 
position of this form. 
3. Hence it is the more necessary for the su- 
gar to be as white and fine as possible (per- 
§.188. n° 3.): but the several other circum- 
stances (ib. n° 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 ) viz. 
gleweyness, unpleasantness, &c. ought to be 
more regarded. 
4. Sometimes, rejecting dry or thick sub- 
stances, the sugar is made into cakes with only 
the more pleasant liquid juices, especially acid, 
as juice of entrance, berberries, citrons, &c. 
which form a medicine exceeding pleasant for 
use. But those add no virtue, who endeavour to 
boil up sugar into cakes with distilled waters. 
5.

140 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
5. Others only drop aromatic or essential oils, 
and the more contracted essences upon sugar, 
and dissolving it in water, they afterwards boil 
it to a consistence for cakes: but by that me- 
thod, the medicine must suffer great loss in its 
virtues. 
6. We may therefore reasonably doubt whe- 
ther this form contains any thing more than su- 
gar, when it is made up by boiling eleosacchara 
to a consistence with water. 
7. Those also who inspissate mere syrups over 
the fire, in order to form sugar-cakes, can by 
no means expect to find the more volatile parts 
of a medicine in this form. So that 
8. When the intention requires this form to 
contain things of a volatile nature, the best way 
is to order the rotula to be washed over with 
some proper oil or essence, before it is to be 
taken by the patient: by which method, we 
need not fear such a loss, as when volatile sub- 
stances are mix’d with the mass while hot. 
9. For external ornaments to this form, there is 
here no need to say more than we have at §.188. 
n° 12. 
10. The number of ingredients for this form, 
should be less than in the table (§.188 n° 13.); 
coming nearest to that or the bolus (§.129. 
n° 9.). 
§.202. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form, in a prescription, is the same with 
that of the tablet §.189. 
§.202. The QUANTITY or weight of each 
rotula should be less than than that of the tablet 
(§.191.) being usually about ℈j. or ʒß. tho'
the quantity of this form, as well as the tablet, is 
seldom determined either by weight or measure.
§.204.

141 Of Sugar-Cakes.
§.204. The DOSE of this form, like that of the 
tablet (§.192.), is also determined by number, as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or else by weight, agreeable to the 
different strength and proportion of the ingredients. 
§.205. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time, is the 
same with that of the tablet (§.193.): But it is 
a form which cannot be very conveniently made 
extemporaneously, especially when its ingredients 
are the syrups and juices at §.201. n° 4. 7. 
§.206. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, may be pretty well 
understood from what has been said on this head at 
§.194.): for the proportion is the same as in tab- 
lets, except two or three particulars. As, 
1. We generally use a greater proportion of 
sugar for this form, with respect to the other 
ingredients (§.194. n° 1.); for reasons men- 
tioned at §.201. n° 1. 4. 5. 
2. Hence, to reduce the acid juices (§.201. 
n° 4.) to a consistence for cakes, will take up 
fix or eight times as much sugar: ʒj. or ʒjß of 
the essences (ib. n° 5.) require ʒij of sugar; 
and the like quantity of sugar is necessary to 
make up gutt. xx. of essential or aromatic oils. 
3. The dressing or washing this form (per 
§.201. n° 8.) with essences or essential oils of 
the like nature, is to be also done in the pre- 
ceeding proportion.  
§.207. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
Apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
tablet (§.195.). supposing a change of name. 
The due preparation is supposed to be previously 
known by the apothecary, who ought to manage 
it so, as to let the dissipation of volatile parts be 
as small as possible. The acid juices, essences, and 
aromatic oils (§.201. n° 4. 5.) are not to be 
mixed

142 Sugar-Cakes.
mixed with the sugar till it is boiled up to a con- 
sistence, and is beginning to cool and harden; as 
well for the foresaid reason, as because it will hin- 
der the sugar from hardening to that degree which 
the form requires. 
§.208. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is hardly any ways different 
from that of the tablet, (at §.196.). 
§.209. The USE is also much the same (as at 
§.197.). To which we may add, that rotulœ made 
up with acid juices, stand well recommended for 
abating thirst in inflammatory disorders. 
§.210. Take the following SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1. Rotulæ purgantes, antihelminticæ, pro infante 
ad exemplum. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 233. 
ꝶ. Semin. absinth. ʒij.
Mercur. dulcis ℈iv. 
Diagrydii ʒj. 
Sacchar. aq. still. tanaceti solut. ℥ijß.
M. exactissimè F. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis drach. ij ad iij alternis die- 
bus, manè, vacuo ventriculo capienda. 
2. Rotulæ contra dolores a partu. V. l. c. p. 220. 
ꝶ Matris perlar. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Laudan. gr. vj. 
M. exactissmè, dein cum sacchar. aq. 
cinnam. solut. & inspissat. ℥ijß. 
Redige in rotulas, paulo ante effusio- 
nem addendo 
Ol. cinnam. stillat. gtt. iv. 
S. Rotulœ anodynes. Capiat drach. ij. omni semihora, 
superbibendo vini rhenani unc. ß. donee dolor mi- 
tescit: dein detur tantundem mane saltem & vesperi. 
3.

143 Of Infusions. 
3. Rotulæ roborantes ventriculum debilem 
frigidum. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat. menth. 
Absinth. aa gtt. x. 
Essent. myrrh. Boerh. ʒij. 
Sacch. albiss. aq. menth. solut. & in- 
spissat. ℥ v. 
F. l. a. rotultæ. 
S. Rotulœ stomachicœ. Capiat drach. ij vel iij ter, 
quater de die, horis medicis. 
4. Rotulæ adversus sitim. 
ꝶ. Sacch. albissmi, subtiliss. pulverisat. 
℥iij.
Leni igne calefactis immisce 
Succi pomi citrei rec. ʒv. 
Flaved. ejusdem tenuiter rasœ ℈j. 
F. l. a. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Unam alteramve ore detineat assiduè. 
Nota. There is no need to take notice here of 
several other saccharine compositions used formerly 
by the ancient physicians, such as pasta regia, mas- 
sa panis, pineolatum mustaceum buccellatum, &c. for 
these have been long ago turned over from the 
shops of apothecaries to those of confectioners. 
Of INFUSIONS for Internal Use. 
§.211. AN Infusion, is a fluid, internal me- 
dicine, made by macerating proper 
ingredients in a liquid menstruum, without boil- 
ing: by which means, their finer parts, chiefly, are 
dissolved

144 Of Infusions. 
dissolved and retained by the liquor. The diffe- 
rent kinds of menstruums, and ways of infusing the 
ingredients, give different names to this form; 
which we shall mention hereafter, §.221. 
§.212. The MATTER for composing an Infu- 
sion is of three kinds: (1) the menstruum or sol-
vent; (2) the solvend; and lastly, (3) the ac- 
cessories. 
1. The menstruum is either (1) aqueous: as 
common and distilled waters, milk, whey, some 
watery decoction, the phlegm of vitriol, &c.
Or (2) vinous: as wines of all sorts, cyder, per- 
ry, meade, ale, must, &c. Or (3) spirituous: 
as common spirit of wine, alcohol, strong wa- 
ters, and other inflammable or fermented li- 
quors. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be infused, 
are, every thing fit for internal use, which pos- 
sess medicinal virtues capable of being extracted 
without boiling, by macerating in some hot or 
cold menstruum (n° 1.): of this kind there are 
a great many vegitable substances, few of the 
fossil or mineral class; but fewest of all among 
the animal substances.  
3. The accessories are either (1) such as pro- 
mote the solution, by (α) sharpening the men- 
struum, and making it fitter to penetrate, or 
else (ß) by opening the body of the solvend, 
or accommodating the texture of the solvend to 
the menstruum: for which purposes, salts of 
various kinds are used, both acid, alcaline, and 
neutral; and sometimes, tho' but seldom, in- 
flammable spirits, obtained by fermentation, 
are made use of, and that either per se, or mix’d 
and impregnated with the aromatic parts of ve- 
getables. Or (2) there are other accessories 
which are added after the infusion is compleat- 
ed, in order to increase the medicinal virtues or 
correct

145 Of Infusions. 
correct some noxious and unpleasant quality: to 
which head belong syrups, elœosacchara, ho- 
ney, soft confections, tinctures, essences, spirits, 
wine, &c. 
§.213. A proper ELECTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form seems to be more necessary than 
in any other, as they are so very numerous and dif- 
ferent in their natures. For no one can expect to 
succeed well in compositions of this kind, who is 
ignorant of the texture and disposition of the sol- 
venda (§.212. n° 2.) or ingredients to be infused, 
with the nature and dissolving power of the several 
menstruums (ib. n° 1.), and the properties or effects 
which the accessories (ib. n° 3.) may produce upon 
each. But as we suppose the prescriber to be pre- 
viously acquainted (per §.7. 8. 104.) with these; 
we shall comprise what we have to say upon this 
head in a few words. 
1. Water and watery menstruums dissolve salts, 
gums, mucilages, sopes, and that part which 
gives smell and taste to vegetables, when it is 
not too closely confined in their substance. 
Water makes the better menstruum for these 
substances, as it is purer, and less mix’d or sa- 
turated with the particles of foreign bodies. 
It will not, of itself alone, dissolve oils, fats, 
balsams, resins, or sulphurs; but it may be 
assisted and accommodated to such things by 
using alcaline salts, sugar, and inflammable spi- 
rits. Nor will it, of itself, dissolve stones, 
earths, metals and semimetals: but it may be 
qualified to dissolve these by adding a salt which 
is mildly or vehemently acid, and sometimes by 
the addition of one that is alcaline, or even 
neutral. 
2. Alcohol of wine dissolves the aromatic spi- 
ritus rector (or what gives the smell and taste 
L in

146 Of Infusion. 
in vegetables), oils of die like nature, balsoms, 
refins, soft sopes, volatile alcaline salts, and 
fix’d salts of the same kind, after they are made 
exceeding dry. It scarce dissolves any thing of 
other salts, nor of stones or earths; nor even of 
gums, common sulphur, metals or semi-metals: 
yet it will enter the substance and draw a tinc- 
ture from those bodies, when assisted by the in- 
tervention of a fix’d alcaline or lixivious salt. 
3. Now as the common inflammable spirits 
or strong waters (§.212. n° 1. (3).) consist of 
alcohol, water, and an acid, mix’d together in 
various proportions, according to the more or 
less strength or height of such liquors; we may 
readily perceive from what we have but now 
said (n° 1. 2.), the effects such liquors must
have upon bodies of the several kinds there 
mentioned. 
4. If to the forementioned principles (n° 3.) 
we add a subtle oil, almost like alcohol, we 
have then a menstruum of the same properties 
and consistence with wines of all sorts (§.212. 
n° 1. 2.) of which those are the basis: but with 
this difference, that some wines have more and 
others less spirit, some abound with the acid, 
and others are more repleat and smoothed with 
the oil. From whence we may, without much 
difficulty, understand the dissolving power of 
vinous menstruums, upon the several foremen- 
tioned substances (n° 1. 2.) 
5. Hence also appears, what simples in the 
three kingdoms of the materia medica (§.212. 
n° 2.) are suitable to each kind of these men- 
struums; observing that their solution is to be 
promoted, not by boiling, but is to be effected 
by macerating in the cold, or at most, in a strong 
heat. 
6.

147 Of Infusions. 
6. Among vegetables, those simples are most 
suitable for this intention, which being treated 
by a gentle heat, (either alone or mix’d with 
boiling water) afford essential oils and simple 
waters for medical uses *: to these we may add 
inspissated juices, sopes, gums, resins, and things 
compounded of these; as also, substances whose 
virtues are rather lock’d up, than set at liberty 
by the force of fire, or whose efficacies lodge 
in a substance capable of dissolution in some of 
those menstruums (n° 1. 2. 3. 4.), and are not 
so closely confin’d in the earthly and unactive 
parts of their composition, but that they may be 
disengaged from thence without boiling: of which 
nature we find many things in the tribe of eme- 
tics, cathartics, paregorics, emollients, astrin- 
gents, vulneraries, refrigerants, aperients, sa- 
ponacea, stimulantia, &c. 
7. The animal kingdom of the materia me- 
dica affords not many things fit to part with 
their virtues by infusion, besides a few infects, 
with castor, musk, civet, some calculi and ster- 
cora. In the mineral class, the chief are the 
ambers and sulphurs, copper, iron, antimony, 
and preparations from these. 
8. But as the several substances before enu- 
merated (n° 6. 7.) are not promiscuously and 
equally fitted to communicate their virtues to 
all menstruums (n° 1. to 4.) alike; it is there- 
fore our business to chuse out such a solvent as 
we know to be best fitted, by its consistence and 
principles to extract the parts we want to have 
separated. When one menstruum alone is unfit 
L2 for 
* See Boerhaave’s Chemistry: vol. II. Process. I. XV. 
XXIII. 


148 Of Infusions.
for all the parts we want, what have we to do, 
but to make a combination of two or more. 
And when that is insufficient or repugnant to 
our intention, we must have recourse to some 
of the accessories (§.212. n° 3 (1).). But 
the virtues and choice of these is sufficiently ap- 
parent from loc. cit. and §.213. n° 1. to 4. 
9. For the rest, things very unpleasant to the 
smell and taste should be avoided (in liquid and 
dissusive, and consequently) in this form as much 
as possible; more especially when it is prescrib’d 
for infants, nice patients, or for a common 
drink. 
10. The accessories of the second class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)) have often no occasion to enter an 
infusion. But if such should be required, they 
ought to be capable of an entire solution in the 
menstruum, without precipitating the parts 
which are already dissolved, and suspended there- 
in (consult §.102. n° 9. 10. 11. 12.). If you 
use any correctors, be careful you don’t mis- 
use them. (See §.84. 85. 96 to 103.) 
11. We may be pretty free as to the number 
of ingredients for this form; yet it ought not 
to be over-stuffed (per §.29). 
§.214. For the ORDER of prescribing this 
form, the ingredients to be infused take the first 
place: and among these the animal substances 
precede the vegetable, and the mineral take the 
last place. Those who are still more exact, range 
the parts of vegetables according to their pre- 
cedency; as first roots, then herbs, leaves, tops, 
flowers, seeds, berries, woods, barks, spices, 
fruits, juices, and lastly (if there are to be any) 
purgatives, with their correctors. Next to the 
ingredients to be infused, are subjoined the acces- 
sories of the first class (§.212. n°3. (1.)): then
follows

149 Of Infusion.
follows the menstruum; and the series is closed by 
the latter class of accessories (§.212. n° 3. (2.)). 
§.215. The DOSE is various, being more or 
less in proportion to the strength of the ingredi- 
ents and menstruum, the different intention of the 
physician, the age and other circmstances of the 
patient, &c. (per §.66.). But in general, watery 
infusions are given from ℥j. to iij, jv, v, or vj; Vi- 
nous, from ℥ß to ℥j, ij, iij or iv. Spirituous, 
from ʒij. to ℥ß. ℥j or ij. Sometimes the rules 
mentioned (§.67. n° 4. 5.) take place in the dose 
of this form. But frequently it is determined not 
by weight but by measure: v. g. Cochlear. j, ij. 
&c. or cyathum (§.58. n° 7. (2.)), or to be 
taken in the quantity of a tea or coffee-cup full, 
&c. or to drink as much as is liked, for an ordi- 
nary drink. Lastly, if the ingredients are to be 
portioned out by the patient or his attendants;
and to be infused in scalding water, in the man- 
ner of tea; then, as much as may be order’d to be 
used at a time as will lye between the fingers, in 
a spoon or tea-cup, or, to be more exact, a pugil, 
ʒij, iij, or ℥ß.  
§.216. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, has very un- 
certain bounds; making sometimes no more than 
one dose (§.215.): as in the infusions of emetics, 
cathartics, &c. either in wine or water. But when
intended for an alterative, or to purge the whole 
habit, it is frequently prescribed to ℔. j, iij, jv, 
more; according as the indication and other 
circumstances require. (Consult §.67. 68. 92. n° 4.) 
The price too, of some things restrains their quan- 
tity (per §.66. n° 14.): therefore the infusion of 
tincture of porcupine bezoar is seldom order’d in a 
larger quantity than to ℥jv, vj or viij. Sometimes, 
a medicated wine or ale that is to be used for a 
long time, or as a common drink, is order’d to 
L3 be

150 Of Infusions. 
be made in the quantity of a hogshead, or a whole 
pipe at a time. From what has been here said, 
and from what we shall observe in the proportion 
following, it will be no difficult matter to deter- 
mine how much of the ingredients to be infused 
should be order’d at one time, if the infusion of 
them is refer’d to the patient or his assistants. 
§.217. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for medicines of this kind, 
there is hardly any general rules to be given, since 
the proportion must vary with the several circum- 
stances of the things to be infused, the nature of 
the menstruum, the way of using, the state of the 
patient himself, and many other circumstances, 
with which it must vary, Observe therefore 
1. The ingredients to be macerated (§.212. 
n° 2.) are generally order’d in two or three 
times a greater quantity for an infusion, than 
when they are to be given crude or in sub- 
stance: and this, in proportion as the virtue or 
strength of the medicine is more or less with 
respect to its bulk, and according as the men- 
struum used extracts the virtues either wholly, 
or but in part. 
2. Herbs, their leaves, tops and flowers, are 
usually order’d for this form by manipules or 
pugils; and fruits are mostly prescribed by num- 
ber (per §.58 n° 7. (2.)): but the proportion 
of emetics and cathartics should be determin’d 
by weight; except the leaves of asarum, which 
are oftner order’d by number. 
3. The rest of the ingredients (§.212.) 
which are neither emetic nor cathartic, may be 
order’d in a quantity sufficient to answer the in- 
tention and proper dose (§.215. 216.): nor is 
it possible to assign the proportion of these in- 
gredients in general, by rules more determi- 
nate and particular (per §.87. 88. 217. n° 1.)
4. 

151 Of Infusions.
4. The proportion of the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.) with respect to the ingredients to be in- 
fused, is also no less various and uncertain: for, 
very often it is six, eight or twelve times the 
quantity of the other ingredients; sometimes 
it is much less than any of those quantities, at 
other times it is much larger, ascending up to 
twenty, thirty, and even a hundred times the 
quantity of the things to be infused. 
5. The proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients in short, varies with their specific 
gravity; and as their virtues are more or less 
contracted or strong, and their extraction more 
or less difficult to make: it also differs as the 
menstruum is more or less active and strong, 
and as the intention may require the liquor to 
be more or less saturated with the medicinal par- 
ticles; all which have their force in demanding 
a greater or less proportion of the menstruum 
to a certain quantity of the ingredients. 
6. Besides these considerations (n° 5.), the 
proportion of the menstruum to the ingredients, 
should be always large when the latter are un- 
pleasant, or intended for infants, nice patients, 
or a constant drink. Hence, in making medi- 
cated ales, wines, hippocras, must, &c. espe- 
cially when they are to be fermented; in such 
case, the quantity of the menstruum should be 
from thirty to a hundred times larger than that 
of the ingredients to be infused. 
7. The proportion of accessories of the first 
class §.212. n° 3. (1), which promote the 
action of the menstruum, is order’d more or less 
according as they are stronger or weaker in 
themselves, or as the other ingredients are 
more or less hard to be wrought upon, as the 
menstruum naturally possesses more or less 
strength and activity, and as it has a more or  
L4 less

152 Of Infusions. 
less congruity or affinity to the particular sub- 
stances to be extacted: so that hence, ʒj or ij. 
of these accessories are sometimes order’d to 
each pound of the menstruums; but they are 
frequently used in a much less proportion. The 
spirituous kind of these accessories are often or- 
der’d in no determinate quantity, if intended for 
irroration, or to be sprinkled upon the ingre- 
dients. 
8. The accessories of the latter class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are intended to correct or 
promote the action of the infusion as a medi- 
cine, may be order’d in a proportion equal to 
the intention to be answer’d. Nor can we pre- 
scribe any general limits to this proportion. But 
sugar and things of the like nature are com- 
monly order’d in the proportion of part j to 
viij, or x parrs of the liquor: but in making 
hippocras or aromatized wine, they are used in 
the proportion of a half,, third or quarter part, 
with respect to the menstruum. Tho’ the de- 
gree of dulcification is sometimes referr’d to the 
judgment and palate pf the patient. See 
§.85. 90. 
§.218. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction for 
making up this form, is of two kinds: (1) one is, 
when the process of infusion is committed to the 
apothecary; (2) the other, when the ingredients 
are only transmitted by the apothecary, and the 
care of infusion referr’d to the patient or his at- 
tendants. 
§.219. In the find case (§.218.), the subscrip- 
tion contains. 
1. The preparation of the ingredients in order 
for infusion: which requires, (1.) a comminu- 
tion or reduction of them into a gross powder, 
and is effected by cutting, rasping, or pounding; 
which

153 Of Infusions. 
which operations are omitted in substances na- 
turally of a pulverulent consistence, as filings of 
iron, the ashes of vegitables, &c. (2.) The 
making them up into nodules, bundles and bags, 
with muslin or fine linen; which contrivance is 
used when the virtues are not required to be ex- 
tracted all at once, or when we would save the 
trouble of straining, or when the ingredients are 
very ponderous, and require to be suspended 
in the menstruum, left falling to the bottom 
they might not be so apt to dissolve or commu- 
nicate their strength to the liquor. For these rea- 
sons, sometimes all, or only one or two of the in- 
gredients should be thus done up. (3.) Irroration 
or sprinkling; when we use liquid accessories 
(§.212. n° 3. (1.)), as the spirits of vitriol, 
sulphur, wine, roses, &c. Hot water is also 
sometimes used for this process, when dry in- 
gredients require to be opened and softened by 
heat and moisture, that they may more easily 
part with their virtues in a cold menstruum. 
(4.) A proper vessel, wherein the ingredients 
are to be put. But that is very seldom men- 
tion’d in the prescription; unless when for fear of 
a dissipation of the virtues, we would advise the 
infusion to be made chemically in a bolt-head; 
or when the fermentation with ale or must re- 
quires the materials to be put up in a cask. 
2. Infusion, which is perform’d with a men- 
struum either hot or cold. Watery menstruums 
only (§.212. n° 1. (1.) ) are poured on hot or 
scalding: the vinous and spirituous (ib. (2.)(3.)) 
are used cold. 
3. Maceration, which is also either hot or 
cold. Cold maceration is used when there is 
required but a weak extraction of the virtues; 
or when the ingredients are of such an open 
texture, and the menstruum so penetrating as 
not

154 Of Infusions.
not to require any heat; or when we are appre- 
hensive that heat will occasion some improper 
change in the medicine. Maceration with heat 
is used when the contrary of these obtain, or 
when the menstruum is of that kind (n° 2.) as 
will bear the heat of infusion; or when, after 
it is applied cold, the addition of heat will pro- 
mote its action. This heat is communicated ei- 
ther by what is term’d insolation, or by diges- 
tion, in a place or furnace proper for that pur- 
pose, using the medium water, sand or ashes, 
&c. whereby various degrees of heat are given, 
but all lower than to make the menstruum boil 
(per §.211.) the degree of heat should vary al- 
so, as the season of the year is more or less fa- 
vourable to the operation, as the texture of the 
ingredients is more or less fit for suck a process, 
and as the intention may require a more or less 
speedy extraction. Sometimes the extraction 
may be promoted by shaking the mixture now 
and then at intervals. The time or length of 
maceration is to be limited either from its 
effects, ’till the menstruum has acquired the re- 
quisite colour, smell, taste and strength; or, 
which is more usual, for so many hours, days, 
nights, &c. according as the ingredients and 
menstruum are known to be disposed for a more 
or less speedy extraction, or as it is intended to 
be stronger or weaker. The vessel is almost 
constantly order’d to be closed during the ma- 
ceration; unless when the structure of the vessel 
makes it unnecessary, or the manner in which 
the maceration is to be perform’d forbids it: 
the first obtains in the phiala chemica, or long 
and narrow-neck’d bolt-head; the last in fer- 
mentations. 
4. Depuration, This is either (1.) unnecessary, 
as when the ingredients to be macerated are 
made

155 Of Infusions. 
made into a nodule, or included in a bag (per 
n° 1. (2.)): and in that case, after a due ex- 
traction has been made, the nodule may be ei- 
ther left suspended in the liquor during its use, 
or else it may be taken out, and by pressing it 
strongly, the liquor will be more saturated. Or, 
(2.) when the ingredients are to be infused loose, 
and are not very light, the liquor may be cla- 
risied barely by standing still; so that the purer 
part of the liquor may be gradually poured off 
fine from the sediment, which will reside at 
bottom undissolved: and so much of the infu- 
sion as remains behind turbid with the residuum, 
may be afterwards separated clear by filtration; 
which is a method well enough adapted to me- 
dicated ales, wines, and spirituous infusions. Or 
(3.) the depuration may be effected by trans- 
mitting all the liquor thro' a strainer or flannel 
bagg, term’d (manica hippocratis) Hippocrates’s 
sleeve: and here also, towards the end, a strong 
expression of the residuum may be order’d, when 
the liquor is required to be very strong, and 
not over clear. Thus are depurated watery in- 
fusions, and clareta or hippocratic wines: the 
latter of which may be further purified by an 
addition of milk before percolation, whose vis- 
cid parts, stopping up the larger pores of the 
filter, will intercept the finer lee. Or (4.) the 
infusion may be clarified by filtrating thro' bi- 
bulous or spongy paper, which as it is the neat- 
est method, making the liquor perfectly clear, 
so it is the slowest and most tedious: it is used 
for liquors that require the highest purity, and 
a separation of all the parts which are not most 
intimately dissolved and combined therewith, 
and when, at the same time, the quantify to be 
filtrated is not very large. It is therefore dur- 
able for spirituous infusions, and emetic or an-  
timoniated

156 Of Infusions. 
timoniated wines. But we must be cautious how 
we treat such as are volatile, and just come from 
the fire, by the two last methods (n° (3.) (4.));
left they should be thus deprived of their vir- 
tues. 
5. The addition of such, accessories (§.212. n° 3. 
(2.) as alter or correct the infusion as a medi- 
cine: where (besides the things at §.213. n° 10.) 
we are to observe, that the sugar, and such 
things ought to be mix’d with hippocratic wines. 
&c. before their depuration (per n° 4. (4.); 
that by passing through the filter together, they 
may not be liable to render the liquor soul. 
6. The receptacle, is a glass phial, with a nar- 
row mouth: which may be order’d to be kept 
stopp’d very close; if there be any danger of a 
corruption or dissipation of the medicinal parts 
of the liquor, from a too free admission of the 
air. 
§.220. But when the ingredients are only to be 
transmitted to the patient by the apothecary, with- 
out other preparations (per §.218. (2.)); in that 
case, all that regards the infusion (§.219. n° 1. 
(4.) to §.220.) is not to enter the subscription: 
but the comminution, mixation, and forming into 
a nodule, &c. (per. §.219. n° 1. (1.) (2.) ) may 
be subjoined, when there is occasion by subscrib- 
ing e.g. conscissa, tusa, grosso, moado, M. and if the 
species are to be sent loose, add, F. collectio, or 
D. ad Chartam; for a paper, in that case, performs 
the office of a receptacle. But when the species are 
to be made into a nodule, &c. you may write: 
includantur nodulo vel sindoni. As for irroration 
(per §.219. n° 1. (3.)), that is left sometimes to 
the apothecary, and sometimes to the patient: if 
to the patient; the liquor for that purpose is to be 
transmitted to him by the apothecary with the 
other

157 Of Infusions. 
other ingredients, unless it be one of common 
use. 
§.221. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is also various, according to 
the different circumstances (§.218.—221.). 
Hence, 
1. If the preparation by the apothecary (§.219.) 
takes place, the name of the infusion will then be 
various; according as the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.), the ingredients to be infused (ib. n° 2.), the 
accessories (ib. n° 3.), the general quantity (§.216.), 
and the depuration (§.219. n° 4.), are different. 
An infusion prescribed for in but one dose, is 
without any regard to the menstruum, ingre- 
dients, or manner of preparation, termed hau- 
stus, a draught: but when it comprises more 
doses than one, and is made with water for a 
menstruum, it passes then by the bare name of 
an infusion, infusum. But if the menstruum used, 
be milk, whey, wine, ale, mead, &c. The in- 
fusion, in that case, borrows its name from 
thence. If the menstruum was spirituous, it 
takes the name of tinture. And lastly, if the 
ingredients are spices; and the menstruum, aro- 
matic distilled waters, wine and its spirit; 
sweetened with a large quantity of sugar (per 
§.217. n° 8.), and the clarification extremely 
fine (per §.219. n° 4.(3.)): the name then 
usually given to it, is, claretum or nectar; or, 
if cinnamon is the chief of the spices, and wine 
be the menstruum, it may be only term’d hippo- 
cratic wine. To each of these names may be 
added another, denoting its virtues; and then 
may be subjoined what relates to the using of it, 
which may be easily, deduced from §.60. 215. 
It is also sometimes proper to advise the patient 
to let the vessel and infusion stand in a cold 
place, especially when the general quantity of  
it


158 Of Infusions. 
it is large, and made in the summer time; and 
this, to prevent it from fermenting, turning 
sower, or musty. 
2. If the process of infusion is to be left to 
the patient (per §.220.), and the ingredients 
are to be sent to him by the apothecary, done 
up in very porous linen (per §.219. n° 1.); 
it is then term’d a nodule: but it they are sent 
loose, in a paper, they are named species; or 
else the a medicata, when they are to be infused 
by a little at a time (§.215.) like common tea. 
Here, also, should be added a name, importing 
its virtues. Afterwards should be wrote the 
menstruum, manner, proportion, order, time, 
&c. wherein the infusion, maceration and de- 
puration are to be perform’d; just as they are 
deliver’d in the subscription, at (§.219.): but 
they should be deliver’d in terms, and methods 
of preparation which are intelligible, and suited 
to the conveniency of the patient or his atten- 
dants (per §.60. n° 5. 6.). For the rest, what 
regards the taking and keeping, may be di- 
rected the same as (at n° 1.) preceding.
§.222. The USE of these formulæ, made by 
infusion, is very universal, being adapted to almost 
every disease, age and intention; provided the 
ingredients and menstruum are chose so as to be 
agreeable to each other, and suitable to the indi- 
cation (per §.213.). These formulæ are indeed 
sometimes less agreeable to infants, when the in- 
gredients have a considerable smell and taste; 
otherwise many things may be commodiously in- 
sinuated even to them, under the form of common 
drink, which they could not be so well induced to 
take under any other form. To conclude, though 
these formulæ are best fitted to penetrate the in- 
most recesses of the morbid body, they are yet fre-
quently

159 Forms by Infusion. 
quently prohibited, by their tedious preparation, 
in cases where delay is dangerous. 
§.223. Take the following examples in these 
formulæ. 
1. Vinum emeticum, antimoniatum, validè movens. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 131. 209. 
(1.) ꝶ. Croci metallor. gr. viij. 
Vini rhenan. ℥ij. 
Stent in frigida infusione per noctem: 
manè per chartam filtratis adde 
Oxymell. scillit. ʒvj. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haustus emeticus, adulto pro dosi, manè exhihendus. 
(2.) Aliud, mitius pro infante rachitico. 
V. ibid. p. 256. 
ꝶ. Radic. ipecacuanhœ ℈j. 
Vini albi gallici ℥j. 
Sacchari albi ʒij. 
Infusa totam noctem, depurata, exhibe 
manè. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro dosi, manè capiendus. 
2. Collectio purgans, roborans, anti-rachitica. ibid. 
ꝶ. Rhei selecti ℥ß. 
Mirobalan. citrin. sine nucleis ʒiij. 
Agarici trochiscati ℈ij. 
Conscissa, tusa groso modo, M. D. ad 
chartam. 
S. Species pro cerevisia medicata, que insundantur 
frigidœ cum Cerivis. fortioris ℔. iv. per horas xxiv. 
Utatur hoc potu pro familiari quotidiano, spatio iv. 
septimanarum, &c. 
3.

160 Forms by Infusion. 
3. Nodulus diureticus, in hydrope conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ciner. stipit. fabar. 
Genistœ aa ℔ ß. 
Inclusa nodulo exhibeantur. 
S. Nodulus diureticus, cui infundantur vini rhenani 
℔ iv. frigidœ, stent per noctem: tum, relicto intrœ 
vinum nodulo, illius ℥iij. ter de die bibantur. 
4. Serum lactis anti-scorbuticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Acetosellœ m. jß. 
Betoniœ. 
Chaerophylli aa m. ß. 
Tamarindor. ℥jß. 
Conscissa insunde cum 
Seri lactis œstivi ℔ iij. 
Spatio horæ, in calore sere servido, abs-
que ebullitione tamen, dein per 
linteum expressis admisce. 
Syrup e succo citri. 
Rubi idœi. 
Violacei aa ℥j. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat hujus unc. j. omni semihorio 
inter diu. 
5. Thea medicata anti-pthisica. 
V. l. c. p. 199. & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. caryophillat. mont. ℥ij 
Liquoritœ ℥jß. 
Herb. veronie. 
Heder. terrestr. aa m. j. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Centaur. min. aa pug. iij. 
Semin. fœnicul. dulc. ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S.

161 Forms by Infusion. 
S. Thea balsamica. Hujus ℥ß insundatur cum aquœ
serventis v vel vj vasculis these potui dicatis: stent 
vase clauso, calida, per aliquot minuta, tum bibat 
omni hora vasculum simile plenum,  in quo prius  
dissolutum fit'mellis virginœi cochl. parv. Eodem 
modo parantur theœ medicatœ ex omnibus vegetan- 
tium partibus; prœipuè particulis, adstringenti- 
bus, amarulentis, aromaticis fixis, pauco oleo gau- 
dentibus: e.g. 
Flor. chaimœm. 
Sem. lin
Cort. aurant.
Iead. gent. &c.
Sumit. absinth R.
Fumar. 
Centaur. min. &c. 
6. Infusum anti-hydropicum, fluorem lymphæ con- 
cilians pro plebejo. 
V. Boerh. 1. c. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristol. utriusque aa ℥jß.
Zinziberis ʒvj. 
Summit, absinth. vulg. 
Centaur. min. 
Bacc. junip, aa ℥j. 
Sal. absinthii ʒß. 
Concissa, tusa, mista D. ad chartam. 
S. Species. Infundantur cum sp. juniperi vulg. ℔. iv. 
insolentur per aliquot dies, vase clauso, turn bibat 
℥j. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, cum regimine. 
M 7.

162 Forms by Infusion. 
7. Infusum acidulatum refrigcrans in sebre ar- 
dente bibendum. 
♃. Fr. cydon. medioc. 
Limon. rec. aa n°. j. 
Pipon. aurant. n°. vj. 
In lamellis tenuissimis conscisis assunde 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. iv. 
Scent per noctem, & post decantationem 
adde
Syr. diamor. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger, haustulum, subinde, 
ad libitum. 
8. Infusum aperiens, in hydrope, icterio, &c. 
exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. raph. rustic. consciss. ℥ij 
Sem. synap. contus. ℥j. 
Millep. viv. contus. n°. C. 
Infundantur per noctem, vase stricte 
clauso, in 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. j ß. adde 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥iv hor. med.
(1.)

163 Forms by Infusion.
(1.) Infusum catharticum. 
♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒij ß. 
Rad. rhabarh. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth. ℈j. 
Infundantur per noctem in q. s. aq. font. 
ebullient, pro ℥ij. adde 
Sp. lavend. comp. ʒij. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. ʒvj. 
S. Haustus purgans mane cum regimine sumendus. 
(2.) ♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒiij. 
Cort. intern. sambuc. ʒß. 
Sal. ebishamens. ʒiij. 
Ebulliant parumper in aq. font. q. s. ut 
exprimatur ℥ij. adde 
Syr. de spin. cerv. ℥ß. 
S. Ut prior. 
9. Claretum purgans & roborans 
ꝶ. Rad. calam. aromat. ʒvj. 
Cort. magellanic. 
Rad. rhabarh. opt. 
Fol. senn. S. stipit. aa ℥ß. 
Agaric. trochiscat. ʒiij. 
Cinnamom. acut. ʒij. 
Cubebar. ʒj. 
Conscissa, infunde in vini rhenani opt. 
℔. jv. per triduum, vase clauso, loco 
tepido, subinde concute: turn adde 
sacchari albi ℔. ß. trajice aliquoties 
per manicam Hippocratis. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis mane unus vel alter cyathus. 
M2 10.


164 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
10. Cerivisia anti-scorbutica. 
Vid. Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 191. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. cochlear.
Erucœ. 
Erysimi. 
Trisol. aquat. aa m. j. 
Semin. rec. contus. nasturt. hort. 
Raphan. hort. aa ℥ij. 
Flor. centaur. min. ℥j. 
Rad. raphan. rustic. ℥v. 
Conscissa reconde in cerevisiæ recentis 
& servescentis 1/2 dolio. 
S. Sit pro potu assiduo. 
Medicated ales, wines, &c. by infusion, are
now come so much into difuse, that we shall not 
trouble our reader with a larger detail of speci- 
mens than what is given by our author. 
Of DECOCTIONS for internal Use. 
§.224. A DECOCTION or apozem is a liquid, in- 
ternal medicine, pretty much like the 
infusion (§.211.) proceeding; but with this diffe- 
rence, that as the infusion is made without boiling, 
the apozem has both its ingredients and menstruum 
boiled over the fire. Hence we see wherein the 
apozem differs from the infusion. The apozem or 
decoction goes also under various denominations, 
agreeable to particular circumstances; whereof, 
those names that are now retained in use, shall be 
mention’d hereafter. 
§.225. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
in general the same as for the infusion (§.212.), 
and may be also distinguished into three kinds:
viz. 

165 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
viz. the menstruum or liquor, the solvenda or in- 
gredients, and the accessories, which assist or cor- 
rect. 
1. The menstruum for this, like as in the 
proceeding form, is of three kinds: aqueous, vi- 
nous, and spirituous; for which, conside the in- 
fusion (§. 212. n° 1.) proceeding. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be boiled, 
are also in like manner taken from either of 
the three kingdoms of animal, vegetable, or 
mineral substances; provided they are fit for in- 
ternal use; and tho’ they part with few or none 
of their virtues in a bare maceration or infusion, 
may yet communicate them sufficiently to a pro- 
per menstruum, by means of boiling. 
3. The accessories are here of the same use, 
and often obtain the same general division as (at 
§.212. n° 3.) of infusions proceeding: where, 
those of the first kind (1.) hold good the same 
here; but those of the latter (2.) are in some 
measure to be varied, as discretion shall indi- 
cate. 
§.226. A proper Choice of the materials for 
this form, is determined not only from the know- 
ledge of what has been said (at §.213.); but also 
from the known force and degree of fire to be ap- 
plied to the menstruum and ingredients in the ope- 
ration of boiling. But the young prescriber will 
be sufficiently instrusted on this head, from having 
learned what we deem previously necessary (per 
§.7. n° 2. 3. §.8. §.104.). So that I shall only 
observe here. 
1. That water and watery menstruums are 
more frequently used, for decoctions than others; 
because they cannot lose any virtues in boiling, 
as others do. Nor are distilled waters so fit for 
this purpose: for if you use those of any strength,
M3 their  


Of Apozems or Decoctions.
their virtues are dissipated in boiling; and if 
you take those of no strength, why may not 
simple water do as well, or better. Mead was 
in the highest repute and greatest use for this 
purpose among the antients; who had some-
times justice on their side for so doing: but in 
our day, we prefer the addition of honey, after 
the decoction is made. The lighter and purer 
your water, the litter for dissolving and extract- 
ing the virtues of your ingredients (§.213. 
n° 1.). 
2. Wine is a menstruum fitter for infusions 
than decoctions, and even though you should 
boil it in a vessel, so close as to prevent any va- 
pour from exhaling, it is a liquor that will be 
the worse for the heat. I therefore chuse, when 
wine is necessary; to add it after the boiling is 
over. But we should except must (which is 
like mead) before it has become wine by fer- 
mentation; because in that state, it rather be- 
longs to the class of aqueous, than vinous or 
spirituous menstruums. 
3. Spirituous menstruums (§.212. n° 1. (3.)) 
however, will bear boiling in chemical glasses 
without any considerable loss or alteration; so 
that they are fitter for this purpose than vinous 
menstruums. 
4. The dissolving power proper to each of 
these menstruums (§.225. n° 1.), is the same 
with what we have described at §. 213. n°. 1. 
to 4; only they act more intensely upon the in- 
gredients, by the force of the fire in boiling: 
so that tho' a decoction may take out more of 
the medicinal particles than an infusion, yet it 
either changes or loses more of the finest and 
most volatile principles, and sometimes draws 
out more than it shou’d.
5.

167 Of Apoxems or Decoctions. 
5. In the mean time, the degree of heat for 
boiling, is not the same for all menstruums; the 
spirituous boil with a less heat than the vinous, 
and both, than the watery: according to which, 
there will be a variation in the dissolving power 
arising from the action of the fire. 
6. Also the greater or less strength and con- 
tinuance of the boiling will make a proportion- 
able difference in the decoction; as some things 
are hurt by a long and violent boiling, others 
require it, and the contrary. 
7. Hence it appears, that ingredients (§.325. 
n° 2.) are fit for a decoction, when (1.) their 
medicinal particles or virtues required are so- 
luble in the determinate menstruum; (2.) when 
at the same time they cannot be so well extracted 
by maceration, as ebullition; when (3.) that ope- 
ration does not dissipate, nor (4.) change their 
virtues, nor (5.) introduce any foreign quality op- 
poring the intention. 
8. Therefore the choice of a proper men- 
struum, with the adapting it by suitable acces- 
sories to particular ingredients, are things of the 
highest consequence in this form as well as infu- 
sions (§. 213. n° 8.), and are both to be directed 
by the same considerations (n° 7.) proceeding; sup- 
posing the ebullition not to change, but augment 
the force of the menstruum and accessories. 
9. A previous and just preparation of the in- 
gredients, of themselves naturally unfit for a de- 
coction, is also none of the least considerations. 
To this head belong comminution of all kinds, 
and previous maceration; which are extremely 
useful in all substances that are dry, hard and 
difficult to dissolve. 
10. The choice of a proper vessel fit for 
making the docoction, is also very necessary; as 
the success of the process and medicines do in a  
M4 great

168 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
great measure depend thereon. (V. n° 3. and 
§.219. n° 1. (4.)), See also what we shall say 
on this head in the subscription, §.231. 
11. He would take a very injudicious course, 
that orders a decoction of a menstruum merely 
aqueous, and ingredients which are earthy, in- 
sipid, stony, refinous, sulphnreous, or oily: 
for such will scarce afford any virtue to a de- 
coction, unless mix'd with the accessories at 
§. 213. n° 1. 
12. The same (n° 11.) holds good also with 
regard to metals, and semi-metals, which do not 
abound with saline parts: tho' by a previous 
ignition, or a long and strong boiling, they 
seem in some measure subject to communicate 
new qualities to water. 
13. There is scarce any thing to be extracted 
by decoction, from most of the solid parts of 
animals; unless you continue the boiling for a 
long time together. Tho’ there are a few sub- 
stances exceptionable; as the porcupine bezoar: 
for that may be even dissolved by a bare ma- 
ceration in the cold. 
14- Those substances which will communi- 
cate their virtues to a menstruum by maceration, 
should not be tortured for that end, by the 
violence of boiling: because the intensity of 
the heat generally changes, more or less, the 
texture and virtues of the medicinal particles. 
But a gentle and short boiling is sometimes al- 
lowable, as it expedites the solution and ex- 
traction. This caution chiefly regards such in- 
gredients as are fresh, and of a soft or light tex- 
ture; as are most ot the parts of vegetables. 
15. Things whose virtues are apt to evapo- 
rate in boiling, should be rather assigned to an 
infusion; but if boiling in this case be necessary, 
it should be the more gentle, short, and per- 
form'd

169 Of Apezems or Decoctions. 
Form’d in a suitable vessel (per n° 6. and 10.) 
This is of consequence in aromatics, alcalescents, 
and such as are sit for the distillation of waters 
and oils *. 
16. Such things as by boiling change their 
virtues into other qualities, disagreeing with 
the intention; should be either boiled not at all, 
or else but gently and for a short time. Asarum 
proves more diuretic than emetic, by boiling. 
Liquorish grows bitter by a long boiling. Fol. 
senœ in a decoction that has had much boiling, 
proves very griping in its operation, &c. 
17. But if the virtues are required to be drawn 
out but in part by the menstruum, and the in- 
gredient be easy to extract; we should then ra- 
ther prefer maceration, or at least use only a 
gentle boiling. R. Rhei, myrobalani, &c. do 
by long boiling impart not only their purging, 
but also astringing qualities to a decoction. Mu- 
cilaginous substances, as rad. symphyti, altheœ, 
malvœ, with many seeds, fruits, juices, and the 
like, do by long boiling give a disagreeable 
viscidity to the liquor, &c. 
18. It is matter of great consequence in de- 
coctions, whether the ingredients to be boiled 
are new or old, dry or green, and fresh gather’d; 
since that permits them to communicate their 
virtues, with more or less difficulty to certain 
menstruums †. 
19. When several ingredients are boiled to- 
gether, we should observe whether and how far 
they promote or retard each others solution; 
and whether or no the same strength and length 
of boiling may be equally suitable to them all. 
For
* F. Boerh. Elem. Chem. l. c. 
† V. Boerh. ibid. vol 11. process. II. n° 5, 6.  


170 Of Apozems or Decoction. 
For there are many things which alone give no 
virtues to a decoction, but boiled with others 
prove very efficacious, and, the contrary. But 
the various times of boiling, required for differ 
rent ingredients and menstruums, we shall de- 
termine hereafter. 
20. With regard to avoiding disagreeable o- 
dours and tastes in this form, the same caution 
holds good here, as mentioned §.213. n° 9. 
A thick slimyness is to be also avoided (per 
n° 17.). 
21. Accessories of the later kind (§.225. 
n° 3.); used in this form for augmenting the me- 
dicinal virtues, are (1.) the same with those enu- 
merated (§.212. n° 3.(2.) §.213. n° 10.). But 
(2.) when many of the medicinal particles re- 
quired are so volatile as to fly off in the boiling, 
it may be perform’d in an alembic, and the con- 
densed vapours returned into the decoction, 
when cold. But sometimes, (3.) when among 
the ingredients there are some of a very soft tex- 
ture, abounding with volatile parts, and so, fit- 
ter for infusion than decoction (per §.213. n° 5. 
to 7.); in that case, those ingredients may be 
infused in the liquor of the decoction after it has 
done boiling, agreeable to the rules of infusion 
at §.211—223; by which means the virtues 
and pleasantness of the medicine will be increas- 
ed, and the formula consisting partly both in 
decoction and infusion, may be term’d decocto- 
infusum. 
22. From what has been said (at n° 21.(3.)), 
we may understand the method of aromatiza- 
tion used by the antients; in the room whereof, 
the moderns substitute a mixture of aromatic 
waters, spirits, tinctures, elæosacchara, &c.
as being more neat and expeditious, §.212. 
n° 3.(2.). 
23.

171 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
23. With regard to the number of ingredients 
for a decoction, the same holds good here, as at 
§. 213. n° 11. of infusions. 
§.227. The ORDER of prescribing or com- 
pounding the ingredients of this form, ought in 
general to be much the same as in (§.214.) infusi- 
ons; especially if the ingredients are to be boiled 
with one equal degree of fire, or sent by the apo- 
thecary to the patient under the form of species, 
bag, nodule, &c. (per §.220.): but if some things 
require to be boiled a longer, and others a shorter 
time, the best method will be to place them next 
to each other, according to the time of their boil- 
ing; to put those which require the least boiling, 
first, and the most, last; unless we can rely on the 
skill and dexterity of the apothecary for this ma- 
nagement. Observe therefore, 
1. That the generality of fossil or mineral 
substances §.226, n° 11. 12; the bones, horns, 
and more tough or even fleshy parts of old ani- 
mals, hard and dry woods, roots, barks, &c. 
which are very refinous and without volatile 
parts; these will bear and require boiling for 
three, four, or six hours, and more. So that it 
is often necessary to open the body of those sub- 
stances by a previous maceration; that they may 
part with their virtues the more freely, per 
§.226. n° 9. 
2. The flesh and other solid parts of young 
animals, woods, barks, stalks, roots, &c. which 
are not so compact as the former, nor abound 
with aromatic particles, but are astringent, bit- 
ter, saponaceous, &c. with those of the nourish- 
ing grain or pulse kind, being laxative or cool- 
ing, diuretic, incrassating, &c; for these, one 
or two hours boiling may be sufficient. 
3.

172 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. Next to these (n° 2.) come vegetable sub- 
stances of a still softer texture; such as soft roots, 
not aromatic but cooling, nourishing, astringing, 
aperient, diuretic or saponaceous; and such as 
are purging, of the more refinous kind; and 
lastly, soft pulpy fruits, which are sweet, acid 
or austere: these will scarce admit of boiling 
beyond the space of twenty minutes, or, at most, 
the space of an hour. 
4. For plants and leaves of a pretty firm tex- 
ture, without aromatic or volatile saline parts, 
whether emollient, astringing, incrassating, re- 
frigerating or aperient; seeds of the like nature, 
but not mucilaginous; woods, roots and barks, 
which are compact, and possess parts of the more 
fix'd aromatic kind: for these, half an hour's 
boiling will be sufficient to extract their medici- 
nal virtues. 
5. Lastly, the most tender parts of vegetables, 
their flowers; with herbs and leaves which are 
subaromatic, vulnerary, bitter, uterine, &c. the 
more tender seeds, berries, fruits, barks and roots 
of the like nature; to, which we may add some 
purgatives, as senna, rhubarb, myrobalans, &c.
liquorish with such roots and seeds as afford a 
mucilage in decoction; all which ought not to
boil above a quarter of an hour. Even for the 
major part of these especially such as are fresh 
gathered and pretty soft), it may be sufficient 
only to infuse them in the scalding liquor, after 
the decoction is removed from the fire, per §.226. 
n° 21.(3.). 
6. Yet the physician may sometimes find rea- 
son to order the boiling to be longer or shorter 
than the times now(n° 1. to 5.) specified; as when 
his intention requires only the extraction of such 
parts as adhere but superficially to the ingredi- 
ents,


173 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
ents, or when, without regarding the former, he 
would obtain such as adhere more intimately. 
7. But what has been hitherto said (n° 1. to 
5.), I would have understood to relate chiefly to 
aqueous decoctions. The vinous, (which do 
not well suit this form (per §.226, n° 2.) and 
spirituous, do not directly fall under the pre- 
ceeding rules: since they require to be made in 
chemical glasses or vessels exactly closed. But 
the latter or spirituous decoctions, boiling with 
a less heat than the others (per §.226. n° 5.), 
do not require so much caution.. 
§.228. the DOSE of this form agrees with that 
of the infusion (§.215); and is therefore to be de- 
duced from thence. 
§.229. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is also much the same as that of the infusion (at §.216.): 
but it is seldom ever extended beyond ℔ vj or viij; 
nor does it ever amount to that quantity, but when 
the preparation is difficult, the dose large, and to 
be drank at short intervals; supposing the season 
of the year, and the disposition of the decoction to 
keep good, to favour its being made and sent in 
such quantities. 
§.230. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we have little more to 
say than what we have already deliver’d at §.217. 
1. With regard to the solid ingredients 
(§.225.), what has been said at §.217. n° 1. 
to 3. takes place here. 
2. For the proportion of the menstruum 
(§.225. n° 1.) to the ingredients to be boiled, 
that again differs according to the circumstances 
at §.217. n° 5.; and according as the decoction 
is to be made with or without evaporation, 
(per §.226. n° 3. 10. 14.).
3.

174 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. If there will be no loss by evaporation, or
if the vapours are to be collected and refunded 
into the decoction (§.226. n° 21); in that 
case, the proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients should be the same as for infusions 
(§.217. n° 4.): tho' the quantity of the men- 
struum is sometimes, but seldom, increased to 
twelve times and upwards the quantity of ingre- 
dients. 
4. But if on the contrary, there will be any 
loss or dissipation in the boiling; the quantity 
of the menstruum should be increased in propor- 
tion to such loss; that the liquor of the decoc- 
tion, left after the operation, may be neither too 
thick nor too thin, but duly saturated. 
5. The physician may therefore determine 
the quantity of menstruum to be poured on the 
ingredients, partly by guess, but more exactly by 
considering, n° 3. and 4.; according as the 
length of time, and force with which the boiling 
is to be continued, or as the quantity or number 
of parts to be evaporated, shall indicate, 
6. Or, which is more safe and usual, the phy- 
sician may prescribe only q. s. of the menstruum, 
and determine the quantity of boiling by either 
the length of uime or quantity to be boiled 
away; or, lastly, he may only mention the 
quantity he would have left after the operation. So 
that the apothecary must then compute what 
quantity of menstruum will boil the determinate 
length of time, so as to leave the prescribed quan- 
tity of decoction. But it is in this case very easy for 
the physician to determine the quantity of men- 
struum, being much the same as when the decoc- 
tion is made without any evaporation per n°. 3. 
7. For the proportion of accessories of the 
first kind, which are to promote the solution or 
extraction of the ingredients (§.212.) n° 3.
(1.)

Of Apozems or Decoctions. 175
(1.) §.225. n° 3.), their quantity may be de- 
termined from the considerations mention’d at 
§.217. n° 7. But as the boiling greatly pro- 
motes that action (per §.266. n° 4, 5, 7.), 
there is frequently occasion for a less quantity of 
those accessories. 
8. The proportion of accessories of the second 
kind (§.225. n° 3. §.226. n° 21.) for cor- 
recting or exalting the medicinal virtues, is the 
same with that for infusions (§.217. n° 8.); so 
far as the accessories agree with their intention 
in that form. But such accessories as are infused 
after the boiling is over {per §.226. n° 21.(3.)) 
are subject to the same rules as those in the hi- 
story of infusions, §.217. But it should be ob- 
served, that those accessories will suffer a less per- 
fect solution, by maceration, in proportion as the 
liquor of the decoction was before more highly 
saturated with the ingredients by boiling: nor is 
a decoction agreeable to the patient, when of 
too thick a consistence, especially when it is to 
be drank in large quantities. 
§.231. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction of the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, differs 
but little from that of infusions (§.218. to 221.). 
For if the ingredients for the decoction are to be 
sent by the apothecary to be boiled by the patient, 
nothing more need be observed than what we have 
mentioned at §.220. But if the apothecary him- 
self is to take charge of the decoction, the phy- 
sician may order him to observe what is to be 
done, 
1. Before the operation of boiling: which, (1.) 
regarding the comminution, colligation and irro- 
ration, differ nothing from what has been said 
on those heads at §.219. n° 1.; unless we ex- 
cept the moistening with scalding water, which 
is

176 Of Apozems or Dococtions. 
is seldom used for decoctions. (2.) It may be re- 
quisite to mention the vessel proper for making 
the decoction, when if is to be one not com- 
monly used for that operation, but required by 
the particular of boiling, or by the acri- 
mony or volatility of the ingredients; v. g. 
phiala chemica, cucurbit a alembico instructa, lagena 
stannea, olla sictilis, diploma, &c. The received 
method, among apothecaries, of making all 
forts of decoctions promiscuously in a copper 
vessel, frequently not tinned, often makes the 
repetition of this caution to the compounder ne- 
cessary in a physician’s prescription. (3.) Ma- 
ceration of all or some part of the ingredients is 
to be sometimes premised (per §.226. n° 9. §. 
227. n° 1.); as some substances are much more 
dense and compact than others. This is to be 
ordered according to the rules at §.219. n° 2. 3. 
and the form may then assume the title of Infuso- 
Decoctum. 
2. In the operation of boiling: where, the phy- 
sician may determine (1.) the degree of fire to be 
used, and the method wherein it is to be ap- 
plied; whether the ingredients are to be boiled 
with a strong or slow fire and ebullition (per §. 
226. n° 4. 6. 12. 14. &c.) whether with a 
naked fire, or in balneo? which latter, is much 
the best for decoctions that require long and 
equal boiling, and are in danger of getting an 
empyreuma, or other change from the violence 
and inequality of heat. (2.) The order and length 
of time, when some things are to be boiled for a 
longer or shorter space than others, should be 
mentioned in the prescription (vide §.227.);
which is also required for some menstruums and 
accessories (§.212. n° 3.(1.)), which cannot 
well bear long boiling. (3.) The keeping of 
the vessel close stopped, with more or less ex-
actness;

177 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
actness; according as any evaporation will prove 
more or less pernicious to the medicine. And 
the keeping up an equable degree of heat, that 
the nature of the decoction may not thence be 
changed. (4.) To ascertain the quantity of boil- 
ing which the decoction is to suffer: which is 
frequently determined; when there is any evapo- 
ration, from the number of parts dissipated, or 
the quantity left; but these are methods not very 
exact. It is better to six a time per §.227. n° 
1. to 5. or else to limit the quantity of boiling 
by the colour, taste, &c. of the decoction: for 
the quantity that will exhale by vapor in a given 
time, must vary greatly with the different width 
of the vessel and intensity of boiling. 
3. Lastly, what is to he done after the boiling: 
to which belongs (1.) the infusion of such ingre- 
dients as will not bear boiling (per §.226. n° 
21.(3).); in performing which, the same rules 
are to be observed as mentioned at §.219. n° 1. 
2. 3.(2.) Depuration, or a separation of the 
foul parts from the decoction, like as at §.219. 
n° 4.; only in decoctions made with aqueous 
menstruums, the liquor is sometimes depurated 
not only by straining or filtration, but also by 
clarification with the whites of eggs: which in- 
deed renders the medicine exceeding limpid and 
clear; but at the same time makes it less effica- 
cious; for the whites of eggs do by their tena- 
city stick to and retain those medicinal particles 
which are fittest for a decoction, and concreting 
by the force of fire, carries them up with itself 
to the surface, in form of scome: so that this 
part of the process ought to be hardly comply’d 
with, even tor the nicest patients. (3.) The ad- 
dition and mixture of such accessories as may be 
thought proper, the business of which may be 
understood from consulting §.226, n° 21.(1.) 
N (2.)

178 Apozems or Decoctions.
(2.) In the last place (4.) comes the receptacle, 
&c. as at §.219. n° 6. 
4. In executing what has been said, n° 1. 3.
regard should be had to the rule at §.59. n° 7. 
§.232. For the SUPERSCRIPTION or direction 
to the patient for this form, that may be deduced 
without much difficulty from what has been said at 
§.221; for several of the very same names (§.ib.) 
are in a measure applicable to this form; so that a 
decoction which is prescribed for one dose may be 
termed Haustus or Polio: if it contains several 
doses and is made with a spirituous menstruum, it 
may be intitled Tinctura; if made with an aqueous 
menstruum, Decoctum or Apozema; if the ingre- 
dients which form the basis (§.75.) consist of the 
parts of animals, it may be called Jus Jusculum; 
if the ingredients which have been once boiled, 
are boiled again in more water, it was formerly 
termed Bochetum or Decoctum secundarium: but the 
other denominations, used by ancients, are now- 
become almost obsolete. 
§.233. The USE of this form coincides with 
that of the infusion (§.222). 
§.234. For SPECIMENS, take the following: 
1. Haustus emeticus, ventriculo cibis nimium 
infarcto. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 117. 
ꝶ. Rad. ipecacuhan. pulv. ℈iv.
cum vini albi  ℥iij. 
Coque in phiala alta hor. iv. 
Colaturam exhibe pro una dosi.
2. 

179 Apozems or Decoctions. 
2. Nodulus purgans, minus calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Fol. senn. sine stipit. ʒiij. 
Fung, agaric. opt. ʒij. 
Nitri puri ʒj. 
Concissa, tusa, includantur sindoni. 
S. Nodulus purgans. Coquatur per 1/4 horœ in cerisiœ
dulcis ℔ ß. vase clauso. Exprimatur. capiat œger 
cyathum omni semihora, donec purgetur. 
3. Jus cancrorum fluviatilium. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 16. 
ꝶ. Cancror. fluviatil. vivor. ℔ iij.
Coque spatio horæ cum aq. ℔ xij. tum ex-
emptos contunde una cum testis, atque 
coque in priore jure proprio adhuc per 
horas iv. addendo semper tantum aquæ, 
ut a coctione ℔ viij. circiter supersint, 
tum jus fortiter exprime, atque ei infunde 
Flor. horragin. ℥jß. 
Buglossi ℥j. 
Rad. tragopogoni ℥iv. 
Sisari ℥ij. 
Dein ebulliant simul spatio 1/16 horæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumatur ad ℥ijß. omni bihoric. 
4. Decocto-infusum adstringens, incrassans, ad 
hæmoptysin. 
V. Boerh. Mater, p. 196, 197.
ꝶ Rad. consolid. maj. 
Tamarisc. aa ℥B.
N2 Cum

180 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. pur. q. s. per 1/2 horæ decoctis,
adhuc servidis, insunde 
Herb. agrimon. 
Betonic. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Papav. rhoead. aa m. ß. 
Stent vase clauso, in infusione calida per 
horæ spatium. Colaturæ ℔ ij. admisce 
Syr. myrtin. ℥j. 
S. Liquor vulnerarius. Bibat ℥ij. omni bihorio diei. 
5. Tinctura anti-hydropica ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. ib. p. 204. 
ꝶ Rad. helenii ℥j. 
Aristolochiœ utriusque.
Zedoaria aa ʒvj. 
Zinziber. ℥ß. 
Sumit. absinth. 
Centaur, min.
Semin. dauci. 
Bacc. juniper. 
Lign. sassafras rasi aa ℥j. 
Cort. winteran. ℥ß. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum sp. juniper. ℔ ij. in 
phiala alta chemica ebuliiant per vj 
horas. Tinctura frigida, pura de- 
cantetur. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥ß quater de die, vacuo 
stomacho, cum regimine. 
6. Infuso-decoctum abstergens, antisepticum, in 
spina ventosa. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Lign.guajaci virid. ponderos. rasi ℥x. 
Sal. tartari ʒß.
Cum 

181 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. comm. ℔ vj. spatio xxiv horar. 
digestum in diplomate, decoque spa- 
tio ij horar. sub sinem admiscendo 
Spir. vini rectific. ℥iv. 
Ebulliant iterum parumper, turn exhibe. 
S. Sumat ℥iv. quater de die, vacuo ventriculo: mane 
hora 7ma dein hora undecima, iterum 4ta pomeri-
diana, & ultima hora 7ma vesp. 
7. Bochetum ex residuo prioris. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Residuum decocti prioris 
Aq. pur. ℔ iij. 
Ebulliant per iv horas. Colatura D. usui. 
S. Sit pro potu quotidiano. 
8. Decoctum aperiens, attenuans; ad ictericos, in 
hydrope, &c, exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. rhei. opt. 
Rubiœ tinctor. aa ʒijß. 
Sal. absinthii ʒjß. 
Aq. font. pur. ℔ ij. 
Leni ebullitione, per horæ spatium con- 
tinuata, fiat apozema; cui, depu- 
ratæ, adde, 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat  ℥iij. ter de die. 
9. Decoctum pectorale, in tussi, phthisi, pleuritide, 
nephritide, viscerum vulneribus, & inflamma- 
tionibus exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Consolid. maj. rec. contus. 
Ering. cond. aa ℥j. 
Sem, urtic. major, vulg.  ʒvi. 
N3 De-

182 Of Expressed Juices. 
Decoque in aq. font. ℔ iv ad lb ij. ex- 
prime, & adde 
Nitri puri ʒij. 
Syr. bals. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat a ij ad vj℥. subinde, 
pro re nata. 
10. Decoctum febrifugum. 
♃. Pulv. peruv. ℥jß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
F. Tribus coctionibus decoct. ℔ ij. cum
Aq. font: q. s. 
Cui adhuc bullienti adde 
Sumit. absinth. rom. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamœmel. ʒjß. 
Cons. flav. aurat. ℥ij. 
S. Ut in fronte, Depuratas & grate dulificatas 
exhihe ℥ij quater de die. 
Nota. We say nothing here concerning the Hy- 
drosacchara, Hydromel. Medical, and ptisans of 
the ancients; nor of their medicated whey, diet, 
cock-broth, Consummatum, Destillatum instaurans, 
&c. because the preparation of these, almost quite 
out of use, may be easily understood and deduced 
from the doctrine of infusions and decoctions §.211. 
to §.234. Conf. P. Morelli Method. prœscrib. Form. 
Of Expressed JUICES *. 
§.235. AN EXPRESSED JUICE is a liquid, 
internal medicine; consisting chiefly 
of an aqueous juice, extracted by beating, grinding,
and
* A form hardly ever used among us; whatever it may be a- 
mong the German and Dutch physicians. 

183 Of Expressed Juices. 
and pressing, from the softer and more succulent 
parts of recent vegetables: being a form intended 
only for present use. 
§.236. The Matter or ingredients for this 
form are of two kinds: primary, or most effential; 
and secondary, or less essential. 
1. Of the primary kind are every thing which 
by beating, grinding and pressing, will afford an 
aqueous juice, fit for internal use: such we are 
supplied with from almost none but the parts of 
recent vegetables. 
2. Those of the secondary kind are intended 
either (1.) to promote tfie expreffion of the juice, 
either by diluting it, or by opening and soften- 
ing the texture of the bodies trom whence it is 
to be expressed. For which purpose are used to 
be added, before expression, whey, milk, &c. 
Or (2.) to increase the medicinal virtues of the 
juice already expressed, or to correct some per- 
nicious or unpleasant quality therein. To which 
end are added salts, either acid, alcaline, or neu- 
tral; wine, distilled waters, sugar, honey, sy- 
rups, eleosacchara, &c. which are suitable for 
meliorating and correcting. 
§.237. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, the business of that may be contained in a 
few words; because of the small number of sub- 
stances which are fit to afford juices by expression. 
Therefore 
1. The primary ingredients (§.236. n° 1.) 
used in this form, are only the succulent parts 
of recent vegetables: such as leaves, flowers, 
fruits, roots and whole plants, which are of a 
fort texture and abound with a thin aqueous 
juice. 
2. Substances of a dry and compact texture 
N4 are

184 Of Expressed Juices.
are all excluded from this form. Hence, woods,
barks, ligneous stalks, &c. are quite unfit. 
3. Nor are seeds fit for this form by expres- 
sion; because they abound more with an oil, 
than an aqueous juice. 
4. Such things are also less sit for this form, 
whose juices, tho' copious, are yet too thick or 
viscid; because they are more difficult to extract. 
But being mix’d with the secondary or accessory 
liquors (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), they will, by means 
of heat, pretty readily part with their more fluid 
contents by expression. 
5. If the physician's intention should require 
some ingredients which are less succulent, or re- 
plete with a thick and viscid juice, as at n° 4. 
in that case, a proper addition of other plants, 
or their parts, which are full of a thinner juice, 
will supply the place of the accessories at §.236. 
n° 2. (1.). 
6. The medicated juices taken from living a- 
nimals, or their excrements, &c. by expression, 
are hardly used by any but the more vulgar fort 
of people: for there is scarce any physician that 
would advise or prescribe the use of 'em. 
7. Hence it appears, that this form of medi- 
cine is not agreeable with all times, places and 
circumstances of the ingredients and patient: so 
that the physician ought to be cautious not to pre- 
scribe any vegetable or its parts, for expression, 
which are out of season; nor several things toge- 
ther which are not in season at the same time, left 
he should order some vegetables green or fresh ga- 
thered, which can be only had dry at that time 
of the year. 
8. The secondary kind of ingredients (§.236. 
n° 2.) of both classes, are very frequently o- 
mitted. But the first kind (ib. n° 2. (l.)) of 
accessory ingredients are often very useful, when 
the

185 Of Expressed Juices. 
the natural humidity of the rest is either too 
small in quantity or of a too thick and viscid 
consistence. Therefore such accessories ought 
to be chose for remedying those inconveniences, 
which cannot introduce any noxious quality, or 
make any sudden change in the texture and vir- 
tues of the juice; but rather correct, or fall in 
with the intention of the form itself. The latter 
kind of accessory ingredients at (§.236. n° 2. 
(2).), require the same cautions with those men- 
tioned at §.13. n° 10. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form 
should be but few, less than for infusions, at 
§.213. n° 11. For when there are many ingre- 
dients accumulated together, the prescriber will 
be much more liable to commit an error in re- 
gard to the season (per n° 7.), or to occasion 
some improper quality and consistence in the 
medicine by such a compound mixture. Vide 
§.94—105. 
§.238. The ORDER wherein the ingredients 
for this form are to be prescribed, is hardly de- 
termined by physicians; but in general, the same 
method §.214) may be observed, as for infusions, 
so far as the matter or ingredients of this form a- 
gree with the nature of those §.214. 
§.239. The DOSE of this form is to be more or 
less according to the various circumstances at §.66. 
and as the indication requires a repetition thereof, 
at longer or shorter intervals of time. Sometimes 
the dose of expressed juices is determined only by 
measure, as cochlear, j, ij, iij, or ad Cyathum j, ij, 
&c. but they are more frequently ordered by 
weight, a ʒij. ad ij, iij, seldom more, unless the 
expressed juice be very thin and pleasant. The 
slatulent crudity natural to these vegetable juices, 
with the unpleasantness of their colour, smell, and
taste,

186 Of Expressed Juices. 
taste, do require the adiquate dose to be divided 
rather into several lesser ones, agreeable to the rule 
at §.67. n° 4. 
§.240. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, it is various ac- 
cording to the several circumstances mentioned at 
§.67. with the number of doses, &c. Sometimes 
the whole general quantity sufficient, is but one 
dose; as when the intention is to vomit, &c. But 
more frequently, when this form is intended to 
alter or purge the whole habit, the use of it is 
continued for several days or even weeks together. 
In that case, (1.) so much may be prescribed as may 
serve for one or two days together; or the form 
may be fresh made every, or every other day: 
which is the more necessary to be done, if the cir- 
cumstances of the patient (§.67. n° 8.) permit, as 
these vegetable juices by expression are so apt to 
ferment and change by keeping. Or (2.) if the 
first method (1.) cannot be well complied with, 
and a quantity of juice is to be made at one time 
sufficient to last several days or a week: in that 
case, we may in some measure prevent it from 
fermenting and corrupting by stuming with the 
fumes of sulphur, by boiling, with the addition of 
such things as preserve and pickle, a close exclu- 
sion of the ambient air and keeping in a cool 
cellar. 
§.241. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, it neither requires 
nor admits of an exact determination; but may, 
in the general, be pretty easily understood from 
what follows. 
1. The general quantity (§.240.) of the ex- 
pressed juice, to be made at once, being deter- 
mined by weight; the primary ingredients at 
§.236. n° 1. may be ordered to be taken only 
in q. s. 
2. 

187 Of Expressed Juices. 
2. Or the quantity of juice to be expressed 
being unlimited, the quantity of ingredients 
only may be determined by weight or measure 
per §.58. n° 6, 7, 8. (1.) (2.).: but to deter- 
mine exactly the quantity both of juice and in- 
gredients cannot be easily done. 
3. The first method, n° 1, is generally the 
most used, and is even necessary when the dose 
(§.239, 240). being one or more is required to 
be of a certain size or number. When the lat- 
ter, n° 2. is made use of, the physician should 
consider whether the ingredients have a great or 
small degree of succulency, as also the more or 
less bulk, and frequent use or exhibition thereof, 
that he may not commit an error in excess or de- 
fect, which give room for the apothecary to ri- 
dicule, or giving himself the trouble of writing 
several of the same prescriptions in one day. So 
that this latter method (n° 2.) is hardly ever 
used, but when the general quantity of expressed 
juice is large and undetermined. 
4. But if the ingredients are several, and of 
different textures and virtues, the mutual pro- 
portion of each should be such as may corres- 
pond to the physician’s indication; as that may 
require more or less of one than another, ac- 
cording to their degree of succulency and parti- 
cular virtues. Such vegetables and their parts 
which have but a small quantity of juice, and 
that very thick or viscid (per §.237. n° 4, 5.), 
ought to be (cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
taken in a less quantity than those which are 
more succulent; that the expressed juice may be 
obtained more thin and plentiful. 
5. Therefore, in the first case, n° 1. when 
the circumstances before-mentioned (n° 4.) do 
not require all the ingredients to be taken in 
equal quantities, they may be only determin’d 
in

188 Of Expressed Juices. 
in the proportion of double, triple, sub- 
duple, &c, e.g. Radic. pars j, herhar part. ij, 
baccar. part. iij, or otherwise. As for what 
is to be done in the latter case, n° 2. that is 
self-evident. 
6. Sometimes a certain quantity of the ex- 
pressed juices of vegetables and their parts, is 
prescribed for after they have been depurat- 
ed, without making particular mention of 
each individual, or the method and order of 
expression: which is the most simple and easy 
method, if follow’d in the common way. 
7. The Secundary ingredients of the first kind 
§.236. n° 2. (1.) are prescribed in but a small 
quantity, left if they were used plentifully, they 
should render this form more like an emulsion, 
decoction or infusion, than an expressed juice; 
for the business of these is to serve not as a real 
menstruum, but only to dilute the more viscid 
parts §.236. and 237. n° 8. These should be 
therefore added in a proportion more or less, ac- 
cording as the particular texture and consistence 
of the primary ingredients may require; if so 
be they do not exceed the quantity of the juice 
itself. 
8. The latter kind of secundary ingredients 
§.236. n° 2. (2.)) do acknowledge much the 
same proportion with that given at §.216. n° 8. 
But care should be taken to prefer juices before 
other addenda, as they make part of the basis 
(§.88.); and to, be mindful that the juice be 
not made of too thick a considence by any ad- 
denda; as also, that the quantity of all together 
may not exceed the adiquate and sufficient dose, 
(§.239.). But when the weight of the juice is 
left undetermined (per. n° 2.), the proportion 
of the addenda is to be limited by equaling a cer- 
tain part thereof (per n° 5.); whence the apo- 
thecary

189 Of Expressed Juices. 
thecary may easily compute how much the whole 
will require. 
§.242. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, contains several par- 
ticulars; such as 
1. The preparation of the primary ingredients 
(§.236. n° 1.) in order for the expression of their 
juice. And this includes (1.) comminution, or a 
division of them into small parts; which for dif- 
ferent ingredients is done after different me- 
thods; sometimes by cutting, scraping, and 
beating into a soft and succulent paste; for 
which purpose a pestle and mortar of stone or 
wood is preferable to one of metal. (2.) The 
addition of a diluent liquor (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), 
when that may be necessary (per §.237. n° 8.); 
whether mixed by affusion, aspersion, or va- 
pour. (3.) The digestion, or else assation of 
the paste, after contusionand humectation; which 
is however, generally omitted: nor is it of any 
service, but when the juice of the ingredients 
is very viscid, or in but a small quantity, and 
at the same time not subject to an improper 
change by heat; but then it is often attended 
with this advantage, that it takes off a good deal of 
the crudity and flatulency of the vegetable juice, 
and often fits it to keep longer. 
2. The expression itself of the juice; concerning 
which, we have nothing in particular to observe, 
more than what is usual in the common pro- 
cess.  
3. The depuration of the expressed juice; which 
is effected by letting it stand, or it may be done 
sooner, by passing it through a strainer (§.219. 
n° 4. (2.) (3.)): which should not be neglected, 
because it greatly removes the more gross parts, 
and unpleasant viscidity or thickness of the juice.
Nor

190 Of Expressed Juices. 
Nor is it amiss to proceed like some, who, be- 
fore they strain the juice, do without any pre- 
vious digestion or assation, simmer the liquor 
over a gentle fire till they almost perceive the 
signs of boiling, which they do in a close 
vessel, if the virtue consists in volatile parts, 
or else it may be done in an open vessel till it 
even boils up a little, whereupon they depurate 
it by a strainer, whilst hot, or let it stand 'till 
cold §.219. n° 4. (4.) ult.): for by that method 
the liquor may be not only despumated, and 
freed from its more flatulent parts; but the gross 
fæces may be better separated, the insects and 
their eggs which it contains, will be destroy'd 
and the whole liquor fitted to keep a longer 
time, and with less alteration. 
4. The addition and mixture of the secundary 
ingredients §.236. n° 2. (2.), which is to be per- 
formed after what has been said at n° 3.: tho'
it would be better to dissolve suck things, whose 
solution is difficult in a cold liquor, in the juice 
whilst it is hot, (n° 3.) before draining. I 
should also advise, for the exhibition of salts, 
which are apt to congeal and separate from the 
juice, to send them to the patient distributed 
in their proper doses in the form of a powder, 
that the patient may mix a dose of the salts in 
a proper quantity of the juice a little before 
taking; by which means, the dose and distri- 
bution thereof will be more certain and equal,
than if disturbed by shooting or crystallizing 
from the juice in the cold; which observation is 
more especially of consequence, when the gene- 
ral quantity of this form to be made at once, is 
very large. 
5. The keeping of the expressed and prepared 
juice; which, if but for a short time (per §.240. 
(1.)), is of no great consequence, but if for ma-
ny

191 Of Expressed Juices. 
ny days or weeks (per ib. (2.)), it ought to be 
particularly regarded: since the natural dispo- 
sition of those juices, and the season of the year 
wherein they are mostly used, do very much sub- 
ject them to change, ferment and corrupt. Nor 
is keeping the juice in a narrow neck’d vessel well 
stopp’d, and set in a cool place, always suffi- 
cient to preserve it found and unalter’d: but we 
ought besides, as Helmont advises, to fumigate 
the vessel well with burning sulphur; or else to 
preserve the juice from fermenting by the ad- 
dition of a little spirit of wine, especially if the 
secundary ingredient; do not tend to prevent cor- 
ruption, and a vinous spirit be not repugnant to 
the indication; or, if the juice be very thin, 
and will receive no hurt from the fire, it may be 
inspissated by evaporating half a way. 
§.243. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily de- 
duced from §.60. 235. 239: nor is there any oc- 
casion to advertize the patient pf any thing more 
than usual in directions; only, when the expressed 
juice is to last several days taking, he should be 
cautioned to keep it in a close vessel, and in a cool 
place. 
§.244. The USE of this form in chronical, 
disorders, is to correct inveterate indispositions of 
the solids and fluids, the blood and fibres; to open 
obstructions of the viscera, especially those of the 
abdomen, &c. In acute diseases, this form of me- 
dicine is used to abate thirst, to prevent and drive 
out putrifaction in inflammatory disorders, &c. 
the form itself being suited as well for alteratives 
as evacuants, whether the later operate by vomit,
stool or urine. But then it is not so agreeable to 
infants and nicer patients as some other forms, nor 
is it suited indifferently for all seasons of the year:
tho'

192 Expressed Juices. 
tho* there are not wanting juices which cannot 
fail to please the most squeamish palate. The last 
objection to the use of this form, is, that it can- 
not be so easily and speedily prepared as many 
others. 
§.245. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Succus emolliens, aperiens, humectans, solido- 
rum nimiam rigiditatem corrigens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 9 & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. scorzoner. 
Rapar. aa ℥iv. 
Herb. recent. cichorei. 
Taraxaci. 
Endiviœ aa m. ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, adsunde 
Seri lact. recent, pint. ß.
Ebulliant leniter spatio vj horæ minuto- 
rum in balneo maris: turn succum 
exprime: cujus per colum depurati 
singulis unciis admisce 
Syrup. rubi idaei ʒj. 
D. in lagena sulphurata. 
S. Ut in fronte. Servetur in loco frigido. Dosis 
cochlearium omni bihorio diet. 
2. Succus emeticus, in hydrope utilis.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Cort. medii sambuc. recent. q. s. 
Ut consciff. tus exprimatur succi ℥j. 
cui adde 
Syr. violor. ℥ß 
D. usui. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro una dosi. 
3.

193 Expressed Juices.
3. Succus antipyicus in statu phlogistico variolarum. 
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 239.  
ꝶ. Succi recens expressi cichorei. 
Lactucœ. 
Taraxaci. 
Fumariœ aa  ℥ij. 
Radic. scorzoner. ℥iv. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
M. 
S. Bibat ℥j. omni hora did. 
4. Succus diluens resolvens abstergens ad aphthas. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 168. 
ꝶ. Bulb. rapar. cum cortice q. s. 
Tyrocnesti, vel radula ex bractea serrata, 
radantur: turn exprimatur succus, 
qui ebulliens leniter despumetur: 
hujus ℥xvj. admisce 
Vitell. ovor. n°. ij. 
Syrup. violar. ʒvj. 
S. Bibat ℥ß. omni semihora. 
5. Succus antacidus, in frigida scorbuti specie: 
ad exemplum Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 189. 190. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. raphan. rustican. 
Ari ana part. j. 
Herb. recent. trisol. aquat. 
Nasturt. aquatic, ana part, ij.
Radula rasis, conscissis, tusis, exprime succi 
unc. vj. quibus admisce 
Spir. antiscorbut. Fred. Dekk. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
D. vase clauso. 
S. Capiat omni trihorio ℥ß. vel cochlearium.
O 6. 

194 Emulsions. 
6. Alius in scorbuti specie alcalina. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 192. 
ꝶ. Herb. recent. acetosœ. 
Taraxaci aa q. s. 
Fr. pom. citreum n°. j. 
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succi ℥v. his, 
per colum trajectis, adde 
Sacchari albi ʒvj. 
D. usui: iterentur quovis die per duas 
hebdomodas. 
ꝶ. Crem. tartar. ʒv. 
Sal. essent. acetosell. ʒij. 
M. Divide in xxiv partes æquales. 
D. singulæ in chartulis seorsim. 
S. Capiat mane hora septima dimidium succi, cut ad- 
misceat unam dosin pulveris: reliquum hora nona 
sine pulvere. Id fiat per xiv dies. 
7. Succus in febre biliosa, inflammatoria, nause- 
ante-propinandus. 
♃. Suc. limon. recent. express. ℥ß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒß. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Syr. violar. aa ʒiij. 
M. pro dosi. 
S. Haustus cardiacus, stomachicus, 4ta quaque hora, 
vel post singulos conatus, sumendus. 
Of EMULSIONS. 
§.246. AN EMULSION is an internal liquid, 
and Somewhat oily, but more aqueous 
medicine; approaching generally to the colour and 
consistence of milk: being formed of the oily parts 
of

195 Of Emulsions: 
of vegetables, pressed out and intimately mix’d by 
trituration and emulsion in an aqueous menstruum. 
Whence appears the reason of the name, and the 
difference of this form from the preceeding 
(§.235.) 
§.247. The MATTER or ingredients for emul-
sions are of three kinds (as at §.212. 225.): viz.
the menstruum, the oily ingredients to be emulsed 
and the accessories. 
1. The menstruum commonly used is of the 
aqueous kind: as common or spring water, dis- 
tilled simple waters of the shops, some aqueous 
decoction or infusion, &c. Tho’ sometimes, 
very seldom, wine is used for the menstruum. 
2. The ingredients to he emulsed are, (1.) the 
nuclei or kernels and seeds of plants, which are 
repleat with oil. (2.) The oily juices of vege- 
tables: as resins, gum-resins and balsams; and 
sometimes roots, which are very resinous and 
mucilaginous, &c. 
3. The accessories for emulsions are, (1.) such 
as promote the solutioh and mixture of the olea- 
ginous parts of the ingredients at n° 2. being of 
a viscid and saponaceous substance; as the yolks 
of eggs, sugar, honey, and such of the oily 
seeds or fruits (at n° 2. (1.)) as are readily dis- 
solved and united with an aqueous menstruum. 
Or, (2.) such as are to be added after the emul- 
sion is made, in order to increase the medicinal 
virtues of the form, or render it more pleasant, 
and are, in general, much the same as at §.212. 
n° 3. (2.) 
§.248. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we are to observe, that 
there are two kinds of emulsions; some, (1.) pro- 
perly so called, being prepared from the ingre- 
dients at §.247. n° 2. (1.); others (2.) less proper-
O2 ly  

196 Of Emulsions. 
ly so termed, being made from the latter kind of 
gredients, §.ib. n° 2. (2.). We designedly omit the 
compositions which some refer to this form, con- 
sisting of white earthy powders (as pearl, &c.) 
ground with an aqueous menstruum; for these are 
not properly emulsions, but only mixtures: since 
we are sufficiently convinced how soon they lose 
their milky colour, by the fine white powder sub- 
siding to the bottom. 
§.249. For ingredients of the first kind (§.247. 
n° 2. (1.) ), as they resemble milk in colour and 
consistence, so should they also in their smell and 
taste; at least they should have no unpleasantness, 
which their intention will very well permit, as 
they are seldom used but for cooling, nourishing, 
easing, &c. Hence, 
1. They will admit of no menstruum but 
what is aqueous (§.247. n° 1.), having neither 
viscidity, acrimony, nor any other unpleasant 
quality, but the more simple the better. There- 
fore the best menstruum for this form, is pure 
boiling water; or else some thin and watery de- 
coction, which is insipid, inodorous, or plea- 
sant; as are those from barley, oat-meal, harts- 
horn, the roots of viper-grass, vetches, liquo- 
rish, &c. with infusions of the like kind. 
2. If any of the more simple distilled waters 
are used for this form, which they frequently are, 
care should be taken to let them be such as are 
skilfully prepared, without any empyreuma. 
Such distilled waters as are spirituous, aromatic, 
vinous, or endued with any strong or consider- 
able smell and taste, are either wholly excluded 
by the nature and intention of this form, or at 
most, are admitted in but a very small quantity, 
in the room of accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)). 
Such liquors as are acid are also prohibited 
for

197 Of Emulsions. 
for the same reasons, and because they make an. 
emulsion rancid and unfit to keep. 
3. The ingredients to be emulsed, are, nu- 
clei and seeds, mention'd §.247. n°. 2 (1.); 
and these, not of any kind indifferently, but 
such as square with the nature and intention of 
an emulsion, before-mentioned. 
4. Therefore those nuclei and seeds as are 
internally of a colour different from that proper 
to an- emulsion, are not fo fit for this form: but 
those which are fat, soft, and white within, are 
the fittest for an emulsion. 
5. Also the larger kind of these nuclei and 
seeds should be first freed from their external 
husks or skins; for if they were to be beat or 
ground together in making the emulsion, they 
would not only obscure its proper milky colour, 
but also impart a strong and disagreeable taste, 
together with an astringency, repugnant to the 
proper intention of the form. 
6. Those seeds and nuclei which are bitter, 
pungent, warm and aromatic, scarce ever enter 
the composition of an emulsion, because the co- 
lour, odour, taste and virtues of them are sel- 
dom agreeable to the intention of this form. 
But sometimes the intention will admit some 
that have a mild bitterness, as the seeds of ci- 
trons, oranges, &c. the nuclei of cherries, bit- 
ter almonds, &c. Even some which are less plea- 
sant than these may be used in a small quantity 
without offending the palate. 
7. Those seeds which afford a great quantity 
of mucilage after grinding, are also less fit for 
this form: such are the seeds of quinces, lin-seed, 
fleabane, henbane, &c. to which we add barley, 
when boiled till it bursts; for only a gentle 
boiling of that grain is usually sufficient, and 
fitter for this form. 
O3 8.

198 Of Emulsions. 
8. Care should be taken that none of these 
nuclei or seeds be rancid; which should be try'd 
in the month, before they are used: for nothing 
is more liable than these to this kind of corrup- 
tion, in a short time, which renders them unfit 
for use in any form. 
9. Those who intermix other things among 
the ingredients to be emulsed than these men- 
tioned at n° 3. to 9. such as the peels of ci- 
trons, oranges, myrrh, &c. do not consider the 
unfitness of the taste, colour and consistence of 
such for emulsion. It would seem better to add 
elæosacchara of the first, and the tincture of 
myrrh, as accessories. 
10. For accessories of the first class (§.247. 
n° 3. (1.)), there is no occasion for them in 
this form: but those of the latter kind (§.ib. (2.)) 
are admitted. These, however, should be such 
as fall in with the intention, and no ways dis- 
turb the proper qualities of an emulsion. So that 
the best accessories for this purpose, are, the 
more pleasant kind of aromatic distilled waters;
pleasaht syrups, which are without colour; ju- 
leps, sugar, elæosacchara, and neutral salts. 
11. If any powder be added which is not ca- 
pable of an intire dissolution in an emulsion, 
it ought to be white, and not very heavy, but 
ground exceeding fine, and not subject to run 
into grumes or clog together: so that there is 
room for almost none but the lighter, earthy 
powders in this form, and not those, unless they 
are most exactly levigated. 
12. Conserves, electuaries, extracts and the 
like, should not enter this form; because they 
disturb its requisite colour, taste, and consistence. 
13. Acids should be also excluded; unless the 
indication should require an emulsion really acid, 
or very quickly apt to turn so. 
14.

199 Of Emulsions. 
14. Alcaline substances, which have an uri- 
nous taste, are by their unpleasantness prohi- 
bited from entering this form. 
15. The intention of this form will also sel- 
dom permit the addition of spirits, tinctures, 
effences, elixirs, &c. tho’ they may sometimes 
enter in a very small quantity. 
16. Yet we ought not to be over solicitous 
about the smell and taste, (per. §.65. 100. 101.). 
Emulsions are generally the more agreeable, as 
they arrive nearer to the nature of milk. 
17. Some patients may imagine they shall 
eject the medicine, if the physician prescribes 
for an emulsion: but such may be easily deceiv’d 
by using a menstruum of a red or some other 
colour, or else by mixing the like colour’d pow- 
ders, syrups, tinctures, &c. 
§.250. The latter kind of Ingredients (§.247. 
n° 2. (2.) ), are less conformable to the nature of 
milk, and do not always resemble either its colour 
or consistence, they should be therefore only or- 
der’d to be emulsed; that they may be exhibited 
and made into an emulsion with some oil, inti- 
mately combin’d with an aqueous menstruum. 
Therefore emulsions of this kind differ much from 
the former (§.249.): for 
1. They do not require, nor can they be 
made so pleasant as the proceeding; because they 
do not take in the same ingredients for emul- 
sion. 
2. Their intentions are generally very diffe- 
rent; since the latter kind (§.247. n° 2. (2.)) 
is more frequently intended for heating, &c. 
than for cooling, &c. per §.249. 
3. The primary ingredients (§.247. n° 2. 
(2.)) are those of the more oily kind, which 
are difficult to dissolve in water: as oils and bal- 
O4 sams


200 Of Emulsions. 
fams which are liquid, thick, or solid; v. g. 
Terebinthina omn. bals. peruvian. capaib. tolutan. 
&c. resins and gum-resins from jalapp. scammon. 
juniper, mastiche, myrrha, opopanax, ammonia- 
cum; rad. jalappœ, &c. In order to make these 
more penetrating and easy to take, they are 
sometimes very properly exhibited under this 
milkey form. 
4. We must however abstain here from the 
use of such substances of this kind which are the 
most fœtid and disagreeable, and which are best 
exhibited in the form of pills (§.162. n° 7.). 
5. The menstruum used here, is not very dif- 
ferent from that of the former at §.249. n° 1. 
But the vinous, spirituous and aromatic waters 
are more constantly and liberally used for these 
milkey compositions; not only because they 
more readily and intimately dissolve these resinous 
substances, but also, as the emulsion and these 
mixtures have different intentions. Hence, 
wine itself is sometimes used here, for the men- 
struum. 
6. Accessories of the first class (§.247. n° 3.
(1.)) are of the greatest use here: for without 
their intervention, the generality of the preceed- 
ing, resinous ingredients (n° 3.) are altoge- 
ther immiscible with an aqueous menstruum. 
We should therefore use accessories the more 
strong and saponaceous, as the ingredients are 
more cohesive and difficult to dissolve, and as 
the menstruum is more aqueous, or the dissolu- 
tion required to be the more intimate and exact. 
7. The yolk of an egg has this saponaceous 
and, dissolving property beyond most other ac- 
cessories, and will accommodate the most oily 
and tenaceous substances for an uniform mixture 
with even water. Sugar, syrups and honey have 
this property in a less degree, But honey dar- 
kens

201 Of Emulsions. 
kens the milkey colour in a great measure. Even 
common sope may be commodiously used for 
this purpose, when it is not repugnant to the pa- 
tient’s disorder and palate. 
8. When the quantity of ingredients (at n° 3)
to be dissolved is but small, the nuclei and seeds 
for the first kind of emulsion (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) 
are added as accessories; as almonds, and most 
of the oiley nuclei and seeds, &c. For these be- 
ing ground together with the resinous substances, 
pour out a thin oil and a mealy substance, which 
insinuating between the parts of those substances 
which are difficultly soluble, perform the office 
of a sope, so that by attenuating, and intimately- 
blending the more cohesive parts with the liquid 
menstruum, they form a medicine of the same 
colour and consistence with the emulsion, 
§.246. 
9. The accessories of the latter kind (§.247. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are for augmenting the plea- 
santness or virtues of these mixtures, are much 
the same with those mention’d at §.249. n° 10. 
&c. But those of the spirituous kind (§.ib. 
n° 15.) are more frequently used here, by rea- 
son of §.250. n° 2. 5.): nor need we be so cau- 
tious to preserve the colour, taste, &c. (per. 
§.ib. n° 1.) 
§.251. For the Order or method of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for this form; in both the true 
(§.249.) and the spurious emulsion (§.250.), 
the substances to be dissolved take the first place:
after these, in emulsions of the spurious kind 
(§.250.), may be subjoined the saponaceous acces- 
sory; then, the menstruum; and lastly the acces- 
sories for augmenting the pleasantness and virtues 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)). But the prescriber may vary  
the

202 Of Emulsions.
the order of each particular kind of these, at his 
own discretion. 
§.252. The Dose of this form is almost the 
same with that of expressed juices (§.239.), and 
is like that determined either by weight or measure. 
The true kind of emulsion (§.249.), is generally 
exhibited in a very large quantity, ad cyathum, or 
from une. j, ij, &c. ad ℔ß. and sometimes it is to 
be drank at pleasure as an ordinary drink. The 
spurious emulsion (§.250.), is generally given in a 
much more restrained quantity, ad cochlearium, or a 
ʒj, ij, &c. ad ℥j. or more; according as it is more 
or less strong, dilute, or nauseous, and as the diffe- 
rent intention, and more or less easy taking by the 
patient, &c. shall indicate. (V.§.66. and 67. n° 4.).
§.253. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is sometimes no 
more than one dose (§.252.); which obtains 
mostly in the spurious emulsion (§.250.). Nor is 
it proper to prescribe the later kind of this form in 
a quantity sufficient for several days; because by 
standing, unless the mixture be very uniform and 
well confirmed, there will follow a reparation, 
precipitation or emersion of the grossest parts. The 
first or true kind of emulsion (§.249.) easily turns 
sower, and the sooner as the season is warmer; in 
so much that it will hardly keep good six or seven 
hours in a hot summer, whereas it will stand a day 
and a night without changing in the winter time. 
Having therefore considered the quantity and fre- 
quency of the dose (§.252.), together with the 
temperature of the atmosphere, the wise physician 
will prescribe no more at one time than may be 
taken whilst it is good; having no acidity, except 
when the disorder and patient may chance to re-
quire it so. 
§.254.

203 Of Emulfions. 
§.254. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, varies very much
with their different natures and indications. 
1. The true kind of emulsions (§.249.) are 
made more or less dilute and thin, as they are 
intended to answer only the intention of cooling 
and moistening, or nourishing, easing, &c.
2. It makes one of the thickest kind of emul- 
sions, when the proportion of the menstruum is 
but three, four or five times greater than that of 
the ingredients: from twelve to twenty times as 
much more menstruum as ingredients makes one 
of the thinnest emulsions; if in the proportion 
of 8 to 1, an emulsion of a midling consistence. 
3. But respect should be had to the size of 
those nuclei and seeds (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) which 
are to make the emulsion: for the smaller they 
are, the more bark and skin they have in pro- 
portion to their internal, mealy and oily sub- 
stance; of which later is formed the emul- 
sion. So that the same quantity of small seeds 
will not so much saturate a certain quantity of 
menstruum, as will a like quantity of nuclei. 
4. For the proportion of the menstruum, that 
is usually prescribed by q. s. nor is the quantity 
of menstruum to be determined but from the ge- 
neral quantity of emulsion to be made; nor even, 
sometimes, can it be determined from thence: 
in which case the apothecary takes it in a mean 
proportion, per n° 2. 
5. But to more accurately determine the due 
proportion of menstruum, respect should be had 
to the degree of consistence, and mutual solubi- 
lity of the liquors (§.250.) and ingredients 
(§.247. n° 2. (2.)), in conjunction with the 
more or less quantity of accessories (§.ib. n° 3. 
(1.) §.250. n° 6. &c.) which they may require: 
the result of which, will be a proportion nearly 
the


204 Of Emulsions. 
the same with that given at n° 2. and is fre- 
quently referr’d to be ascertained at the discre- 
tion of the compounder (per n° 4.), especially 
when the emulsion consists of but one dose. 
6. The proportionable quantity of accesso- 
ries (§.247. n° 3. (1.)) should be more or 
less according to the quantity and texture of the 
ingredients and menstruum: the quantity may 
be double, triple, or quadruple that of the in- 
gredients, more or less, as the accessory may 
have a stronger or weaker dissolving power, 
(per §.250. n° 6, 7, 8.), and as the ingredients 
to be emulsed are more or less disposed for an 
intimate union with the menstruum. Hence, it 
is the most usual to prescribe vitell. ovi q. s. 
which method is also commonly taken with those 
accessories at §.250. n° 8. 
7. For the proportion of the second kind of 
accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)), which are to 
be added after the emulsion is made; there can 
be no more particular determination thereof, 
than by the rules given at §.217. and 241. n° 8. 
An ounce of emulsion will bear ℈j of the pul- 
verulent accessories (§.249. n° 11.), and ʒß of 
the sweet: but then we should consider whether 
any honey or sugar has before enter’d the emul- 
sion in the room of sope(per §.247. n° 3. (1.)), 
with what degree of correction the unpleasant- 
ness of the ingredients may require by these 
sweets, and whether we are prescribing for an 
infant, a child, or an adult, &c. The true kind 
of emulsion (§.249.) ought not to be made 
very unpleasant by adding too large a quantity 
of salts: for ℥vj of emulsion will seldom admit 
of more than ℈j. The proportion of the rest 
may be guided by the intention. 
§.255.

205 Of Emulsions.
§.255. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, in the true kind, 
(§.249.) is comprehended barely in F. I. a. emuls. 
Afterwards is to be mentioned the quantity of emul- 
sion to be strained off, if the menstruum were only 
order’d in q. s. (per §.254. n° 4.). And lastly, 
directions may be given for adding what else is to 
be mix’d. To say any thing of the vessel for con- 
taining this form, is generally unnecessary. In the 
spurious emulsion (§.250.) or white mixture, are 
prescribed first the ingredients to be dissolved 
(§.ib. n° 3.) and their saponaceous accessory 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)) by which they are to be ex- 
actly mixed: afterwards the addition of the men- 
struum, and other things, which is to be done 
gradually, by a little at a time. But what else 
more particularly regards the encheiresis of this 
form, is supposed (per §.7. n° 3. and §.8.) to be 
previously and sufficiently understood both by the 
prescriber and compounder. 
§.256. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient advises (besides what is usual in this 
place, and has been often before repeated) that the 
emulsion may be kept under cold water or in a 
cold cellar, that it may not turn sower, especially 
if the quantity is to last taking for several days. 
V. §.249. and 253. And sometimes it may be pro- 
per to order the emulsion to be well shook before 
use, especially if any of the fine but unsoluble pow- 
ders are added, or when we fear the distribution 
and mixture of its parts may become unequal by 
standing. 
§.257. The USE of this form is not so universal 
as that of infusions (§.222.). But the first or true 
kind of emulsion (§.249.) makes one of the most 
pleasant medicines, and may be properly given to 
the nicest patient, when the intentions are to cool, 
ease, moisten, incrassate, afford light aliment, in- 
cline

206 Emulsions.
cline to sleep, recruit the spirits without heating 
the blood, or to qualify sharp humours, which are 
biliose, putrid or alcaline: it may be also accom- 
modated to provoke urine and sweat, but seldom 
to stool. This form may however chance to be 
pernicious to such patients as are of a cold habit, 
and subject to acidities. The latter kind of emul- 
sion, or white mixture (§.250.), is adapted to an- 
swer all the intentions for which its several ingre- 
dients (§.247.) n° 2. (2.) 250. n° 3.) are recom- 
mended by physicians; and has the reputation of 
making ’em even more penetrating and effectual by 
its liquid form. But it frequently takes in many 
ingredients which are not at all agreeable to ei- 
ther the smell or taste; and is usually thought pro- 
per for purging by stool, urine and sweat, to kill 
worms, to cleanse internal ulcers, to strengthen 
the nerves, &c. 
§. 258. For SPECIMENS of this Form, you 
have the following. 
1. Emulsio communis. 
♃. Amigd. dulc. excortic. ʒvj. 
Sem. quat. frig. rec. ℥ß. 
Papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Sach. alb. siccatiss. ℥j. 
Contundantur simul donec in pastam co- 
alescant, & dein, paulatim adde 
Aq. hord. ℔ ij. 
M. F. emuls. s. a. quæ fortiter expri- 
mendo coletur. 
S. Emuls. &c. de qua bibat adlibitum. 
2.

207 Emulsions. 
2. Emulsio balsamica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ j. 
Sperm. cet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut.  ʒijß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒjß. 
Tinct. benzoin, gtt. C. 
Syr. bals. C. 3vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat cochlear. iij omni bihorio. 
3. Emulsio anti-alcalica. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Avenœ exconic. ℥iij. 
F. cum aq. pur. q. s. emulsio, cujus ℔ jß 
admisce 
Nitri puri ʒß. 
Syrup, violar. ℥j. 
Aceti squillit. ʒij. 
S. Utatur pro potu familiari. 
4. Emulsio nutriens, demulcens, incrassans. 
ꝶ. Amigdal. dulc. excortic. ℥ij. 
Amaror.—n°.ij. 
Aquœ pur. servent. ℥x. 
F. S. a. emulsio. Colaturæ fortiter ex- 
pressæ admisce
Aq. stillat. cinnam. ℥j. 
Sacchar. albiss. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Amigdalatum, de quo capiat œger omni semihora 
cochlearium.
5. 

208 Emulsions.
5. Emulsio narcotica. 
V. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 64. 
ꝶ. Sem. papav. alb. contus. ℥ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. hord. F. emulsio, cujus 
℥x adde 
Syr. diacod. ℥jß. 
Tinct. opii cum S. V. rectis. gtt. xx. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ʒij. 
Cortic. citrei ʒx. 
S. Capiat ℥jß. omni 1/2 hora, donec incipiat leniri dolor.
6. Emulsio lubricans, diuretica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 243, 244. 
ꝶ. Semin. cardui mariœ. 
Bardanœ. 
Fœniculi ana ʒvj. 
Papaver. alb. ℥j. 
Amigdal. dulc. n°. xx. 
Infusi rad. liquorit. q. s. 
F. l. a. emulsio. Colatur ℔ iij. admisce 
Sal. prunellœ ʒij. 
Syr. papaver. alb. ℥jB. 
D. usui. 
S. Bibat omni semihora ℥ij. servetur lagena sub aqua 
frigida, aut in cella. 
7. Emulsum antihelminticum:
V. Boerh. ib. p. 229. 
ꝶ. Gumm. opoponac. ʒj. 
Vitell ovor. ʒij. 
M. s. a. dein adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Syrup, artemis. ʒjß
Ap stillat. fœniculi ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ʒj omni quadrihorio, cum regimine. 
8.

209 Emulsions. 
8. Emulsum purgans, forte, scammoneatum, ad 
hydropem. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 210. 
ꝶ. Semin. carthami ʒij. 
Scammon. pur. gr. viij. 
Contusis, assunde paulatim 
Aq. stillat. cort. aurant. ℥j. 
Tum colatis misce 
Syrup. de spina cervina ʒij. 
S. Sit pro dosi, mane. 
9. Emulsio Balsamica, ad ulcera interna, phthisin, 
gonorrhæam, paralysin. 
V.
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 197. & 247. Et 
Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. II. obs. II. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ʒiij. 
Vitell. ovor. q. s. 
Probe subactis admisce sensim 
Mellis alb. ʒiij. 
Aq. stillat. bacc. juniper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumat œger omni quadrihorio coch- 
learium, semper ante usum concutiendo lagenam. 
10. Emulsio asthmatica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔j.
Gumm. ammon. ʒij. solvatur in
Aq. hyssop. frigid. ℥iij. & adde
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. C.
Syr. balsamic. C. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Emuls. &c. Capiat cochlear, ij. sœpè in die, &
urgente paraxysmo asthmatico. 
P 11.

210 Of Mixtures. 
11. Emulsio nephritica. 
In statu renum inflmmatoria exhibenda. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ jß  
Aq. raph. comp. ℥jß. 
Nitri puri ℈ij. 
Syr. althœœ ℥ij. 
M.
S. Capiat ℥iv omni bihorio. 
Of MIXTURES for internal Use. 
§.259. MIXTURES are internal liquid 
medicines, made up of several in- 
gredients, without any preparation but barely that 
of commixing. Hence, they may be easily distin- 
guished from the infusion (§.211.), decoction 
(§.224.), expressed juice (§.235.), and emulsion 
(§.246.)preceding. 
§.260. There are three kinds of these mixtures 
in common use: (1.) Mixtura diffusissima, com- 
monly termed a julep: (2.) mixtura media, which 
is what we understand to be properly signified by 
the name mixture; and lastly, (3.) the mixtura 
contracta, which has various names given it, ac- 
cording to the particular circumstances we shall 
hereafter mention. Concerning each of these, we 
shall treat separately.
Of

211 Of Juleps.
Of JULEPS. 
§.261. A Julep (julapium, julepus recentiorum) 
is the largest and most dilute kind of 
mixture, almost pellucid, and invested with an 
agreeable colour, smell and taste; serving as a 
pleasant drink, to be taken at several doses. The 
julep of the antients, therefore, differs from that of 
the moderns in consistence; as the first was a kind 
of thin syrup. 
§.262. The MATTER or ingredients for this 
form are either such as are to receive, of else to be 
received by the former. 
1. The fluid excipient, as the basis or men- 
struum, is a thin, pellucid and pleasant liquor,
generally aqueous, serving to dilute the other 
substances. 
2. The excipenda, are, every thing capable of 
a solution in the preceding liquor (n° 1.), 
which can afford the requisite qualities and vir- 
tues of this form. 
§.263. The proper Election of both these 
kinds of ingredients (§.262. n° 1, 2.) is deter- 
mined from the requisite qualities or conditions of 
a julep. It may be therefore observed, 
1. As this form is very frequently exhibited 
as a common drink, or to be drank as a plea- 
sant vehicle after the taking of other medicines; 
we are therefore to give it, as much as possible, 
the most agreeable qualities: to make it thin, 
pellucid, and of a pleasant, dulcido-acid, or 
other agreeable taste; without any smell, but 
such as will please; and without colour, but 
such as will delight the eye, especially red. So 
that. 
P2 2.

212 Of Juleps. 
2. The excipient may be any liquor which is 
endued with an agreeable, or no colour, smell, 
and taste. As, 
(1.) Pure water, after it has been boiled: 
which is an excipient or menstruum preferable 
to others, as being more easy to be had and 
prepared, fitted to the texture of most things it 
is to receive, and not destroying or changing 
any of their virtues. 
(2.) The pleasant or inodorous and insipid 
distilled waters of the shops: as from sorrel, 
borrage, buglos, endive, lettuce, house-leak, &c. 
Tho' common water (1.) is generally prefer- 
able to these; because they acquire no agreeable 
smell or taste from the fire and vessels used in 
the process. But it may be better to use such 
as have a small tho' more delightful smell and 
taste: such as those obtained from baum, roses, 
black cherries, whole citrons, &c. 
(3.) The use ot the more pleasant and aque- 
ous infusions (§.211.) which can be readily 
made, may be also well enough permitted in 
the basis of this form: such as those made with 
the flowers of roses, violets, corn-poppies, or 
with apples, citrons, and conserves of the 
like, &c. Or, 
(4.) Some thin decoction (§.224.) of the 
like kind: as from barley, the roots of vipers- 
grass, harts-horn, figs, tamarinds, bread, &c.
Or, 
(5.) Wines: as rhenish, or any other, tart 
or sweet, French or Spanish wine; which are 
very suitable for this form as a cardiac, when 
the intention requires the animal fluids to be 
put into a little brisker motion. Or, 
(6.) The phlegm of vitriol well diluted; or 
thin whey, a little sower: but this latter is re- 
quired to be not turbid, but well clarified. Or, 
(7.)

213 Of Juleps.
(7.) Several of these (n° 1, to 6.) may be 
commodiously compounded together, for the 
basis of this form.  
3. The excipienda (§.262. n° 2.) or things 
fit to be diluted in the preceding liquors, must 
be such as are capable of an intire dissolution, 
and will also add to the pleasantness of those li- 
quors: such as, 
(1.) The stronger fort of aromatic distilled 
waters; from cinnament, pennyroyal, marjo- 
ram, rosemary, the flowers and peals of oranges, 
citrons, and sometimes wines, as at n° 2. 
(5.) unless that liquor makes the whole basis of 
the form. All which may in a manner be ac- 
counted a secundary kind of excipients. 
(2.) The sweet and tart, fresh expressed, juices 
of garden-fruits: as of cherries, currance, ber- 
berries, rasberries, citrons, oranges, pomegra- 
nates, golden pippins, &c. But when the pre- 
scriber orders juices of this kind, he should con- 
sider whether these things are in season (§.237. 
n° 7.) so as to be had fresh at that time: and 
how long they will keep good(§.242. n° 5.) 
without changing. 
(3.) Tincturœ acido-aquosœ, which are of a red 
colour; as e.g. Flor. 4. cordial. tunicœ  bellidis, 
aquilegiœ, rhœados, granor kermes, &c. which 
may, upon occasion, serve instead of the exci- 
pient (n° 2. (3.)) 
(4.) Spirituous tinctures, which are very plea- 
sant: as e cortic, cinnamom. citric aurantior. cassiœ, 
croc. &c. which are very useful when a gentle 
stimulus is required. 
(5.) inflammable or vinous spirits. simple, 
or else impregnated by distillation with-the 
smell and taste of the more pleasant vegetables: 
as roses, angelica, lavender, baum, cinnamon. 
P3 citrons 


214 Of Juleps. 
citrons, oranges, black cherries, aq. vitœ mat-
thioli, &c. which are of great use when the 
stimulus is required to be a little stronger than 
(4.). 
(6.) But the vegetable and fossil acid spirits, 
are very frequent ingredients in this form: as 
distilled vinegar, spirit of salt, and of nitre either 
strong or dulcified, the spirit and gas. of sul- 
phur, vitriol, &c. 
(7.) All sorts of officinal syrups, which are 
very pleasant, colourless, red, or turn so with 
acids, whether prepared from the juices of fruits 
(at 2.) or other parts of vegetables: as flor. aca- 
cia, rosar. violar. tunicœ, borragin. rhoead. herb. 
capillor. vener. melissœ, cort, cinnamom. citri, gra- 
nor. kermes, caryophyllor. &c. To this place 
also belong the liquors of candied fruits, the of- 
ficinal juleps, with oxymella and oxysacchara. 
(8.) Gellies and inspissated juices made from 
garden fruits; to which we may add, the gelly 
of harts-horn, as sometimes entering this form. 
(9.) Sugars: either simple and white, or else 
compounded by various artificers with other 
pleasant ingredients, and formed into elaeosac- 
chas, tablets, cakes, &c. 
(10.) Dry salts: of which enter scarce any 
but those of the neutral kind; and among these, 
nitre, fall prunell and polychrestum are almost 
the only ones. 
4. Substances in the form of powder, which 
are not soluble, are very seldom admitted into 
this form; at least, those of the grosser kind, 
never; but a few things which are light, plea- 
sant, or without smell and taste, are sometimes 
put into juleps, after they have been very ex- 
actly levigated; such are, principally, the earthy 
absorbents, as coral, pearl, harts-horn, &c. But 
even


215 Of Juleps. 
even these are to be excluded, if any acid is to 
enter the julep; for reasons at §101. 102. 
5. Conserves are hardly ever tiled here, unless 
for making a kind of infusion (n° 2. (3.)). 
6. Electuaries, extracts, tinctures, effences, 
spirits, and the like, whose considence, colour, 
smell and taste would make a julep unpleasant, 
should be excluded from this form (per n° 1.). 
Except only two or three confections of the 
more pleasant kind, as confect. alkermes. hya- 
cinthor. &c. 
7. By striving to make a julep over-pleasant 
it may be spoiled (per §.85. 100. 101.). Be 
careful therefore not to misuse either sweets or 
acids. When conserves, syrups, robs and fu- 
gar'd things enter in a large,quantity, there will 
be no need of adding more sugar. If mineral 
acids are not at hand, or not mix'd in a sufficient 
quantity, their place may be well enough supply'd 
with a vegetable acid. 
8. If you mix a mineral acid (n° 3. (6.)) 
together with the neutral salts (n° 3. (10.)), be 
mindful of what has been said of them at §.102. 
n° 12. 
9. To conclude, the young physician is ad- 
vised to study conciseness and simplicity in pre- 
scribing this form: not to compile something to- 
gether of every kind mentioned (n° 2. and 3.), 
but to select such only as are more immediately 
demanded by his intention, and are best fitted 
to mix and make this form agreeable to art, 
Those compositions are generally the most friend- 
ly to nature, which consist of but a few ingre- 
dients, (per §.29.) 
10. From what has been hitherto said, it ap- 
pears that hydrosaccharum and oxyhydrosaccarum 
are each a kind of julep.
P4  §.264.


216 Of Juleps. 
§.264. For the ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients of this form, the liquid ex- 
cipient (§.263. n° 2.) is generally put in the first 
place; next to this is subjoined any other, which 
is a secundary excipient (§.ib. n° 3 (1.)); and 
then the excipienda or substances to be diluted 
therein may be placed agreeable to §.57. n° 2. 3. 
5. But sometimes the liquid excipient is put in 
the last place: which is however not so proper 
when its basis is to be some extemporaneous decoc- 
tion or infusion per §.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.)). 
§.265. The DOSE of a julep is determined ei- 
ther by weight, as ad ℥j, ij, iij, &c. or by mea- 
sure, as ad cyathum, or for infants ad cochl. j, ij, 
iij, &c. But a julep is sometimes order’d as a sa- 
miliar drink, in which case it may be given in a 
quantity sufficient to appease the patient’s thirst; 
but even in this case it is generally better to give 
but a small quantity at a time, tho’ the draught be 
the oftener repeated, than to overload and swell the 
stomach by indulging great drinking. 
§.266. For the GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form to be made up at once, that will be more 
or less in proportion to the quantity and frequency 
of the dose (§.265.), and as thirst is more or less 
intense; it may be sent in quantities even to ℔ j, 
ij, iij, iv: but for infants, there is seldom less than 
℔ß made up at a time., Nor is the general quan. 
tity of a julep restrained like that of an emulsion 
(§.253.) from its sooner or later changing or cor- 
rupting. 
§.267. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients of this form, we shall endea- 
vour to prescribe general bounds to the quantities 
wherein they are to be taken; as
Ad

217 Of Juleps. 
Ad excipientis (§.263. n° 2.) ℔j vel ℥xij.
Excipientis secundarii (§.ib. n° 3. (1.)) ℥j, ij. 
Succorum (ib. (2.))—℥ij, iij. 
Tinctur. acido-aquos.(ib. (3.))—℥j, jß. 
Spirituoforum (ib. (4.) (5.).)—ʒij, vj. 
Syrup, brodior. julepor. rob. gelatinar. &c. (§.263. 
n° 3. (7.) (8.).)—℥ij, iij.
Confectionum (ib. n° 6.)—ʒij, vj. 
Salium (ib. n°.3. (10.).)—ʒß, j. 
Pulverum (ib. n° 4.)—ʒj, ij. 
Aceti destillati (ib. n° 3. (6.).)—℥j, jß. 
Acidorum fossilium (ib. q. s. ad gratum acorem 
gtt. xx.—ʒj.
Sacchari (ib. (9.).) q. s. ad gratum dulced. ℥j, jß. 
With regard to these several ingredients and their
proportions, besides what is said at §.263. n° 9.
it is requisite to observe. 
1. That the great diversity of indications, and 
palates, with the vast variety of other circum- 
stances in particular cases, do often make many 
and great exceptions from these rules of propor- 
tion; so as to make the difference sometimes 
very wide. Hence 
2. When the intention is mostly to increase 
the circulation and warm the habit, wine, with 
such as are aromatic and spirituous (§.263. n° 3. 
(1.) (4.) (5.) enter a julep in a much larger pro- 
portion than that here assigned in so much that 
wine often makes the whole basis,(§.263. n° 2. 
(5.)) or menstruum for the other substances. 
3. If the extemporaneous infusions or decoc- 
tion.(§.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.) are to make up the 
greatest part of the julep, they are required to 
be somewhat thinner than usual. So that the 
proportion of ℥j of the species to ℔j of the  
menstrumm

218 Of Juleps. 
menstruum will suffice. See the history of infu- 
sions and decoctions. 
4. The neutral salts (§.263. n° 3. (10.)) 
ought therefore to be added in a very small quan- 
tity, left they should nauseate the julep by their 
unpleasant gust. 
5. Large quantities of powder, rob, gelleys 
and the like, would destroy the proper con- 
sistence of a julep. 
6. For determining the proportion of the 
sweet and acid ingredients of this form, the rule 
at §.263. n° 7. is to be observed. Sometimes 
the liquid excipient or menstruum itself is in- 
clined to sweetness or acidity (§.ib. n° 2. (3.) 
(4.) (5.) (6.)), for which, there should be a 
proportionable allowance. Too much sugar 
will make a julep not only unpleasant to many 
patients, but will also attenuate the blood too 
much, and incline ’em to sweat. 
§.268. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is, 
by M. F. Julapium D. ad vitrum. But if the basis 
of the julep is to be some extemporaneous infusion 
or decoction, directions are to be first given for 
them, and then for their mixture with the rest 
(per §.219. 231.): but this is omitted when the in- 
fusion or decoction is an officinal, with whose pre- 
paration the apothecary is supposed to be suffici- 
ently acquainted. 
§.269. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.60. 261. and 265. But it may be some- 
times proper to admonish the patient to drink the 
julep warm or hot, when things actually cold will 
abate the fluidity or perviousness of the animal 
fluids. The patient is generally sufficiently desi- 
rous of himself to drink this form cold; so that 
there


219 Of Juleps. 
there is hardly ever any occasion, to give a parti- 
cular direction for that. 
§.270. With regard to the USE of this form, 
it is not only extremely pleasant to take, but is 
also serviceable in most diseases, both acute and 
chronic; which are attended with too great heat or 
chillyness, an alcalescent corruption of the humours, 
or a viscidity of them, with violent thirst, faint- 
ings, &c. It is also very well adapted for a ve- 
hicle to other medicines, to facilitate the taking of 
them, and to promote their action or operation. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Julapium refrigerans gratissimum. 
♃. Vin. rhenan. recent. ℔ß. 
Aq. rosar. damascen. ℥iv. 
Succ. aurant. sev. recent. express. ℥jß 
Syr. violar. ℥jß 
M. F. julapium.
S. Julap. cardiac. &c. de quo bibat cyathum, ad 
libitum. 
2. Julapium pectorale. 
♃. Decoct. Pectoral. ℔ ij. 
Aq. theriacal. ℥ij. 
Gumm. arab. ʒvj. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. tolut. ℥ij. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. De quo frequenter bibat haustum tepide.
3.

220 Juleps. 
3. Julapium stomachicum anodynum. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℔ß. 
Fort. 
Menth. simplic. aa ℥ij. 
Test. ostreor. pp. ʒjß.
Laud. liquid. gtt. xxx. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapiumi 
S. De quo bibat cochlear iij vel iv, frequenter, agi- 
tato prius vitro. 
4. Julapium stomachicum pepticum. 
♃. Vin. rub. gallic. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. aa ℥iv.
Fort. ℥ij. 
Syr. de menth. ℥jß. 
Sp. vitriol. q. s. ad gratam acidit.
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat cyathum urgente nausea. 
5. Julapium hystericum. 
♃. Aq. puleg. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Brion. comp. aa ℥iij. 
Syr. paeon. comp. ℥j. 
M. F. julap. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
6.

221 Juleps. 
6. Julapium cardiacum. 
♃. Aq. epidem. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Lact. alexiter. aa ℥iij. 
Margarit. pp. ʒjß. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
(1.) Aliud- 
♃. Aq. theriacal. 
Epidem. aa ℥ij. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥vj. 
Acet. destillat. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒß. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum 3tia quaque hora. 
7. Julapium diureticum.
♃. Vin. rhenan. vet. 
Aq. raphan. C. 
Petroselin. C. aa ℥iij. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. C. ℥j 
M. F. julapium.
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum, pro re nata. 
8.

222 Juleps. 
8. Julapium in frigore febris intermittentis 
conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 120. 
ꝶ. Aq. decoct. hord. ℥xxx. 
Oxymel. simplic. ℥iij. 
Aq. stillat. caryophyll. arom. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ij. omni 1/4 horœ, calidè valde. sorbendas. 
9. Julapium roborans, anti-acidum, califaciens.
ꝶ Aq. stillat. cerasor. nigror. ℥ viij. 
Pulegii ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. ℥jB. 
Vitœ matthioli ℥ß 
Margarit. ppt. ʒjß. 
Confect. alkermes ʒij. 
Elœosacchar. citri ʒiij. 
M. D. ad vitrum.
S. Julapium perlatam, de quo capiat ℥j. omni semi- 
bora in languore: aut sit pro vehiculo alterius me- 
dicamenti. 
10. Julapium ex decocto magistrali, cardiacum 
ad dolores a partu. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Hord. mund. 
Avenœ integrœ ana ℥j. 
Cum aq. decoct. spatio 1/2 horæ, ℔ iij. 
adde 
Vini rhenani ℔j. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ij.
Syrup. kermesin. ℥iß. 
M. 
S. Hujus ℥ij. superbibat singulis dosibus mixturœ ano- 
dynœ ibidem descriptœ, donec sopialur dolor.
11.

223 Juleps.  
11. Julapium specie infusi, antiphlogisticum, in 
variolis utile. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 238. & seq. 
ꝶ. Flor. papaver. errat. 
Tunicœ ana m. ß. 
Infunde cum aq. pur. calidœ ℥xx. stent 
vase clauso, calore leni, per iij 
horas. Colaturæ expressæ adde 
Spir. sulphuris per campan. gtt. xx. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒjß. 
Syr. flor. rhoead. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Bibat, quantum lubet. 
12. Aliud, spiritus excitans in gangræna a causa 
calida, temperie alcalina. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 95. 
ꝶ. Rob. ribesiorum. 
Berberis ana ℥ij. 
Spir. salis commun. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. melissœ ℥vj
Vini rhenani ℥x. 
M.  
S. Capiat ℥j. omni hora. 
13.

224 Of Mixtures. 
13. Julapium confortans in metu abortus ab in- 
commodis graviditatis, ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 217. 
ꝶ Vini rhenani ℔ ij. 
Ag. stillat. cort. citrei ℥iv. 
Tinctur. granor. kermes ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. 
Balsam. embryon. aa ℥j. 
Gelatin. corn. cerv. citrat. ℥jß 
Syrup. rubi idœi  ℥ij.
M.
S. Capiat ℥jß languore. 
Of MIXTURES. 
§.272. A Mixture properly so call’d (§.260. 
(2.)) is a kind of internal and li- 
quid composition (§.259.), somewhat thicker in 
consistence than a julep (§.261.), and much strong- 
er in proportion to its bulk; taking in all forts of 
ingredients, even the most unpleasant, and con- 
taining several doses, but not to be determined by 
drops. 
§.273. The MATTER for this form (as at 
§.262.) is two-fold; excipient, or receiving, and 
excipienda, to be received by the former.
1. The excipient may be any liquor fit for 
internal use, whose sufficient dose is not so small 
as to be determined by drops; so that both aque- 
ous, vinous, and spirituous menstruums are very 
frequently used for the excipient of this form: 
such as distilled waters, both simple and com- 
pound; decoctions, infusions, wines, &c.
2. 

225 Of Mixtures. 
2. The excipicnda, are, in general, all dry, 
soft and liquid substances, mentioned §. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3. and whatever else has been found 
serviceable by an internal use. 
§.274. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is almost wholly directed by their medicinal 
virtures. Not are we here so much under a necessi- 
ty of regarding their tenuity, pellucidity, or agree- 
ableness of colour, smell and taste, as we are in 
the election of ingredients for a julep (§.263.): 
tho' these considerations are not to be wholly ne- 
glected; especially too great thickness, which 
greatly incommodes the taking of this form. But 
we may observe, 
1. That distilled waters are more frequently 
used for the excipient than other liquors; be- 
cause some one or other of them may be chose 
suitable to almost every intention, and their 
great degree of fluidity makes them fitter for 
the reception and dilution of other ingredients. 
2. Decoctions and infusions are likewise often 
used; whose preparation is to be sometimes 
mentioned in a prescription, but is not the pro- 
per business of this place (V. §.211. and 224.): 
Tho' there are very few decoctions and infusions 
used in the composition of mixtures, but such 
as require no particular subscription or direction 
to the apothecary for their preparation (§.268.). 
But they should be such as are very thin: if they 
are a little thicker, they ought to be taken in a 
proportionably larger quantity. 
3. Substances of the powder kind, which are 
not dissolvable, being very frequent ingredients 
of this form, should not be gross, but of the 
most subtle kind; in order to prevent their be- 
ing troublesome to the patient the act of 
deglutition. 
Q 4.

226 Of Mixtures.
4. Things of the metallic kind, which have 
a very great specific gravity, ought to be ex- 
cluded from this form; especially if they are 
not capable of a dissolution in the liquor be- 
cause as they instantly subside, their distribution 
and the strength of the dose, may by that means 
be render’d very unequal; tho' this may be in 
in some measure excusable, when a mixture is to 
be taken for one dose, after it has been well 
shook. 
5. Such gums and gummose substances as af- 
ford a thick mucilage in an aqueous menstruum, 
ought to be either entirely omitted, or else en- 
ter in but small quantities: that the taking of 
this form may be render’d the more easy and 
agreeable. 
6. For the more uniform and intimate com- 
mixture of refinous and oily things with an aque- 
ous excipient, there is required the use of a sa- 
ponaceous intermedium. We therefore use the 
yolk of an egg for the more tenacious, as sper- 
maceti, the turpentines and the like; but sugar 
is sufficient for the more liquid, which are only 
used in small quantities, as the aromatic oils by 
distillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, &c. V. §.250. n° 3. 6, 7. 
7. Gum-resins, as ammoniacum, galbanum, 
&c. do usually enter the composition of mix- 
tures, after they have been first dissolved in 
wine, or vinegar. 
8. We ought to be the more cautious in these 
mixtures, not to compound things which will 
effervesce with, or preciptate each other, destroy 
each others virtues, or make some improper 
change; because their liquid form will render 
them much more liable to produce such tumultuous 
motions, and improper changes. (V. §.97. to 
103.). But there are some cases wherein the
physician

227 Of Mixtures. 
physician designedly combines such opposite sub- 
stances in mixtures, the better to answer his in- 
tention. 
9. If you endeavour to correct the colour, smell 
or taste, be mindful of what was said at §.85. 
99, 100, 101. that you may not disappoint your 
intention, nor appear ridiculous. 
10. Lastly, as in every form so in this, the 
prescriber should make his choice of ingredients 
short and just; aiming rather at conciseness and 
efficacy than number: in a manner that a pro- 
per judge may easily perceive his intention; 
otherwise, he may make rather a chaos than a 
uniform and proper mixture. V. §.29. 
§.275. For the ORDER of prescribing the se- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, it is the same as that 
to be observed in writing for a julep (§.264.); 
nor is it more constant or particular than that. 
§.276. The DOSE of this form is less than that 
of the julep (§.265.); being generally a spoon- 
ful or two, or a tea-cup full: by weight it is or- 
der’d from ʒj to ℥ß. But sometimes the dose is 
inlarged ad cyathum, or ad ℥j, ij, iij: which ob- 
tains mostly when the whole mixture is to be exhi- 
bited for one draught. Otherwise the dose may be 
determined by portions, in regard to the whole 
mixtures, as when one half, a third or a fourth part, 
order’d to be taken at a time: but we ought here 
to be cautious that the quantity do not exceed a 
convenient draught. For the rest, it may be of 
use to observe what'has been said at §.67. 
n° 4, 5. 
§.277. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, contains sometimes 
but one dose (§.276.),sometimes several: if the 
first, it is termed haustus, which should never ex- 
ceed ℥iij: if the latter, the mixture generally 
Q2 amounts 

228 Of Mixtures. 
amounts to ℥vj or viij; tho' it may by chance ex- 
ceed lb j. more or less according as the frequency 
and number of doses, and the circumstances at §.67. 
may require. 
§.278. The mutual Proportion of the seve- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, is determined as 
well from the proper consistence of the form (§.272. 
274.), as from the medicinal virtues of each ingre- 
dient, when separate or mixed, (per §.87. n° 1, 2.). 
collated with §.276, 277. Hence, 
1. If there are none but liquids to enter the 
composition, having no regard to the consistence, 
the proportion may be directed only by the me- 
dicinal virtues, in conjunction with the phy- 
sician’s intention. 
2. But when dry and soft substances are also 
to enter, the prescriber must guard against too 
much thickness (§.274.). In order to which,   
he may observe the following general rules of 
proportion for mixture, viz. 
Of the excipient (§.273. n° 1.)—℥j
Of soft substances, as electuaries, conserves, 
robs, pulps, and the like,—ʒj 
Of dry substances, as extracts, inspissated juices, 
mass of pills, powders, &c.—℈j, or jß.
Of sugar—ʒj, jss. 
or 
Syrups—ʒj, ij, iij. 
or q. s.
3. So that the quantity of soft substances may 
be advanced to ʒij, and the dry, to ʒj; when 
only one of them enters the composition of a 
mixture. 
4. But then the consistence of the fluid exci- 
pient will make some difference in the propor- 
tion: according as whether the liquor be of the 
thinner kind, as water, wine, &c. or of some 
thicker

229 Of Mixtures.
thicker infusion or decoction. (§.273. n° 1.). 
5. It should be likewise observed whether any 
liquid ingredients are received by the excipient; 
for in that case, the soft and dry substances may 
enter in a larger proportion. 
6. The proportion of saline and dry ingre- 
dients is to be deduced from their degree of 
strength, and their more or less easy dissolution: 
tho’ this form does not require an intire dissolu- 
tion of its ingredients; but when they are less 
soluble, they may be shook up in the mixture, 
like a powder, at the time of taking. 
7. For the quantity of sugar or syrups, read 
§.267. n° 6. These are sometimes prescribed in 
a much larger quantity than that assign’d at n° 2. 
as when they are intended to mix resins, balsams, 
oils, &c. with water or any aqueous menstruum; 
in which case, a greater inspissation of the mix- 
ture, will prevent the reparation of parts by stand- 
ing, which it would other wise suffer. 
8. A mixture for a single draught, will also 
admit of a larger proportion of soft and dry sub- 
stances, then when the intention may require it, 
than one for several doses. The generality of 
patients had rather put up with the thickness of 
a mixture, to have it in a smaller quantity; than 
to have it more liquid, but in a greater bulk,
or more doses. 
§.279.The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is 
order’d by M. F. Haustus, when the mixture is for 
one dose (§.277.): but if it is to be taken at se- 
veral times, it may be sufficient barely to write M. 
Afterwards, D. ad vitrum may be subjoined. And 
the phiol may be also order’d to be close stopp’d, 
when any loss or change may be apprehended 
from an admission of the ambient air. Sometimes  
Q3 a

230 Of Mixtures. 
a dry ingredient is order’d separate, in the form of 
a powder (§.106.), as (per §.242. n° 4. ult.), 
that it may be added to a quantity of the mixture 
a little before taking; In that case, we prescribe 
two forms. The same method is to be also ob- 
served, when an effervescence arising upon mix- 
ture ought to accompany the taking it, or when 
the intention may require the dose of powder to be 
larger, or more exactly determined, than is usual 
in this form. 
§.280. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient concerning the use of mixtures, may be 
sufficiently understood, in the general, from §.60. 
272. 276. and 277. Tho’ it may be sometimes 
proper to say whether it should be drank hot or 
cold (V. §.123. n° 3. (3.)) A julep may be or- 
der’d as a vehicle to be drank afterward, when the 
mixture is very unpleasant; otherwise it may be 
omitted, when nothing else requires it. When a 
powder is to be mix’d (per §.279. ult.) with it, 
the manner of compounding and taking it may be 
prescribed at discretion. 
§.281. The USE of this form is very frequent 
in practice, for as it is very easy to take, and fuits 
almost every intention, it is as often prescribed as 
the infusion (§.222.); it is rather order’d oftener: 
for it being a form so easilyand speedily prepar’d, 
it is fitted to give assistance in all sudden emergen- 
cies, as well as other cases; in so much that there 
is hardly any internal disease, but what will admit 
of being treated with this form. 
§.282. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Haustus anti-emeticus.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Succi recent, citrei ℥ß. 
Vini rhenani ℥j. 
M. ꝶ

231 Mixtures.
ꝶ. Salis absinthii ʒj.  
D. utraque seorsim. 
S. Pulverem misceat liquori, moxque in ipso actu ef- 
fervescentiœ hauriat. 
2. Mixtura anti-emetica. 
♃. Succ. limon. recent. express. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒj. 
Aq. cinnamom. fort. 
Tenuis aa ℥j ss. 
Sacchar. albiss. q. s. 
M. 
S. Mistur. stomach. &c. Capiat cochlear, iij in 
singulis evomendi conat. 
3. Mixtura anti-alcalica, saponacea, abstergens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Oxymell. squillit. ℥iij. 
Aceti squillit.  ʒij. 
Myrrhœ in aceto solutœ in tinct. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. cichorei ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. omni hora. 
4. Mixtura cardiaca, pretiosa, calfaciens,  
diaphoretica. 
ꝶ. Infus. lapid. porcini malacc. in aq. 
card, bened. fact. ℥iv. 
Vini rhenani generosiss ℥ij. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ss. 
Extract. essential. croci gtt. iv. 
Confect. alkermes ʒvj. 
M 
S. Sumat omni semihora cochlear. j. 
Q4 5.

232 Mixtures. 
5. Mixtura opiata, antacida, roborans, ad dolores
a partu. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Lapid. cancror. ʒiij. 
Corall, rubr. ʒij. 
Margarit. ppt. ʒj. 
Laud, puri gr. iij.
Syrup kermes ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cort. citrei. 
Melissœ. 
Majoranœ aa ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. 1/4 horœ, donec sopiatur dolor, 
superbibendo ℥ij. julapii ibid. descripti. 
6. Mixtura resolvens, saponacea. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rutœ  ℥xij. 
Borac. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒiij. 
Mellis puriss. ℥iij. 
M. 
Capiat ℥j. omni hora diet. 
7. Mixtura adstringens, ad hæmoptysin 
Vide Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. rhocados. 
Plantag. ana ℥iv.  
Extract. tormentiil. 
Bol. armen. levig. ana ʒj ss. 
Lap. hœmaiit. ppt. ʒj. 
Syr. Myrtin. ℥j. 
M.   
S. Capiat omni bora ℥j, concusso prius vitro. 
8.

233 Mixtures. 
8. Haustus emeticus, antimoniatus, fortis, pro 
adulto. 
R. Oxysacchar. emetic. Ludovic. 
Oxymell. squillit. ana ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥j.
M. F. haustus. 
S. Sit pro dosi. 
9. Haustus purgans, in febre intermittente utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 132. 
ꝶ. Pulver. cornachin. ʒss. 
Elix. Propriet. cum sale tart. ppt. 
gtt. xl. 
Elœosacchar. menthœ ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. menth. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Capiat mane, die apyrexiasy vacuo stomacho, 
pro dosi. 
1O. Mixtura balsamica, in gonorrhœa conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Tereb. vulg. in q. s. vitel. ov. solut. ʒij. 
Extract. rhei. 
Sal. prunell. aa ʒj. 
Syr. allhœœ & Fernel. ℥j. 
Infus. rad. glycyrrhiz. ℥x.
M. 
S. Capiat omni bihorio cochlear. j. probè concussa prius 
lagena: superbibat cyathum emulsi idonei, ibid. 
p. 246. descripti.
11. 


234 Mixtures. 
11. Haustus emeticus, communis. 
♃. Rad. ipecac, pulv. ʒss. 
Aq. lact. alexiter. ʒjß. 
Syr. violar. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora quinta pomeridiana 
bibendo copiose de decoct. hordei inter vomendum. 
12. Haustus catharticus, refrigerans. 
♃. Sails mirab. glaub. 
Mann. calabr. opt. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. aa ʒvj. 
Aq. cinndmom. ten. ℥iij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat primo mane cum regimine. 
13. Haustus nephriticus. 
♃. Ol. Amigd. dulc. rec. frigide expres. ʒvj. 
Tartar. P. D. ʒij. incorporat. adde 
Aq. raphan. C. ℥j fs. 
Syr. de mecon. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. bis, vel ter in dies repetendus. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat mane & vesperi, vel urgente pa- 
raxysmo. Quo tempore (pro re nata) insolvantur 
℈ij. pulv. è test. ovor. calcinat. 
(1.)

235 Mixtures. 
(1.) Alius
♃. Ol. lini sem. frigid. & recent. ext. ʒx. 
Lixiv. saponis gtt. xxx. exactissime 
incorporates, adde 
Syr. de althœœ ℥ß. 
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut prior. 
14. Haustus balsamicus. 
♃. Tereb. è chio ℈j. 
Bals. tolut. ℈ß 
Vitel. ovor. q. s. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℥ij. 
Syr. de 5 rad. aper. ʒvj.
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut in fronte, &c. 
15. Haustus pleuriticus. 
♃. Ol. sem. lini frigidè extract. ℥j. 
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. xxx. 
Aq. cerasor. nigror. 
Syr. bals. C. ana ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pector. &c, Capiat 6ta quaque hora.
16. 

236 Mixtures. 
16. Haustus diaphoreticus. 
♃. Aq. theriac. ʒvj. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥jß. 
Theriac. androm. ʒß. 
Spir. nitri dulc. gtt. xxx.
Syr. de mecon. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora decubitus. 
17. Haustus peruvianus. 
♃. Aq. absinth. mag. C. ℥ß.  
Flor. chamomel. simplic. ℥jß. 
Ext. cort, peruv. ʒß. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haustus febrifugus, 3tia quaque hora sumendus.
18. Haustus antipyreticus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamon. ten. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒß. 
Sp. vitriol, gtt. xx. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haust. antifebrilis: 4ta quaque hora exhibendus.
19. 


237 Of Drops. 
19. Haustus bechicus. 
♃. Aq. hyssop. simplic. ʒjß. 
Lact. ammoniac. ℥ß.
Tinct. benz. 
Sp. C. C. per se aa gtt. xxx. 
Syr. diacod. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pect. Hora somni sumendus.
20. Haustus paregoricus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Decoct. pectoral. aa ℥j. 
Nitri puri ℈j. 
Lauq. liq. gtt. xv.
Syr. de con. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. anodyn. &c. Decubitus hora sumendus. 
N. B. When draughts are not so well approved of, 
mixtures may he order’d after any of these formulœ; 
by a proportionable enlargement of the quantities to 
about three or four times as much. 
Of DROPS, or small Mixtures. 
§.283. DROPS (or mixtura contracta) are a kind 
of smaller or less bulkey, and stronger 
mixture (§.259.) than the foregoing (§.272.); 
consisting generally of substances which are spiri- 
tuous, 

238 of Drops.
tuous, or of great strength in proportion to their 
bulk, requiring to be dosed or portioned out by 
drops. As this form of medicine ows its origin 
to chemistry, so it undergoes various denomina- 
tions, as we shall presently observe. 
§.284. Therefore the MATTER or ingredients 
for this form, may be any kind of liquor which is 
fit for internal use, and is also effectual in a small 
quantity or dose: such as the stronger tinctures 
(§.221. n° 1. and §.232.) spirits of the like kind, 
essences, quintessences, elixirs, liquid balsams, na- 
tive and artificial, essential extracts, aromatic oils 
by distillation, the more strong and contracted sa- 
line liquors, &c.
§.285. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be guided by the physician’s inten- 
tion, the particular virtues of each ingredient 
(§.284.), and the mutual affinity or disposition 
of one to the other upon mixture. Nor is there 
any necessity in this form, to have so great a re- 
gard to the colour, smell and taste; the smallness 
of its dose being a sufficient recommendation. 
1. Therefore such ingredients should be select- 
ed as may agree not only in their virtues or in- 
tentions, but also mix with each other without 
any effervesence, precipitation, or other im- 
proper change. But the cautions which are re- 
quisite for this purpose, are hardly to be learn- 
ed but from chemistry. 
2. Tho’ sometimes ingredients are judiciously 
enough commixed, which do both ferment and 
destroy each other’s properties: as, e.g. acids 
and alcalies. There are some cases where, a 
neutral salt (which is at a medium between acid 
and alcaly, resulting from such mixture) is both 
more effectual and less hazardous. But even in 
these mixtures, we should be cautious not to let 
any


239 Of Drops. 
any precipitation ensue; for that is acircumstance 
hardly ever approved of in this form. 
3. Such substances as are aqueous, gummose, 
or repleat with an olive or butyraceous oil, which 
does not well unite with spirituous things; as 
also, conferves, electuaries, insoluble powders, 
and the like: these should be excluded from 
mixtures for drops, as well for their being of 
too thick a consistence, as for their ineptitude 
for an uniform mixture. 
4. The stronger resins, solid extracts and mas- 
ses of pills, are sometimes order’d in small mix- 
tures; when the intention is to purge, and the 
form but for one dose: but then sugar, syrups, 
or some officinal julep is usually added, either 
to promote the solution, or to qualify the heat 
of the spirituous menstruum. 
5. This form will admit of dry salts, if so be 
they act strongly in a small dose, and are also 
soluble in a spirituous menstruum: but of this 
kind there are hardly any, but such salts as are 
volatile, the tartarus regenerate, and a few  
others. 
6. Sometimes saline liquors are also order’d 
in this form: but if such are not to be exhibited 
separately, we ought to consider with what we 
mix them; for they frequently do not agree 
with liquors which are spirituous. 
7. The number of ingredients to be order’d 
in this form should be few: three or four are 
usually sufficient. The errors of mixture may 
be more easily avoided in a prescription of but 
few ingredients; we shall be also more sure of 
our intention, and give less trouble to the com- 
pounder. But when one ingredient or officinal 
compound will answer the intention, as is fre- 
quently the case; that may be then order’d to 
be given in drops (§.283.), without the trouble  
of


240 Of Drops. 
of mixture. There are also such a vast number 
of officinal compositions, that those who love a 
great many simples in a form, may well enough 
spare themselves the trouble of prescribing new 
extemporaneous mixtures for drops. 
8. Lastly, if drastic or very strong things are 
exhibited in this form, directions should be 
given for making the dose very exact; the men- 
duration by drops being usually left to,the pa- 
tient or his attendants. 
§.286. The ORDER or method of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is no 
other than what may be deduced from the rules 
at §.57. n° 2, 3. But when there are any ingre- 
dients of a more difficult solution order’d, as resins, 
extracts, &c. (§.285. n° 4.) these ought to be ge- 
nerally set in the first place; then the menstruum 
and other addenda may be subjoined. 
§.287. The DOSE of this form is usually deter- 
mined by a certain number of drops (§.283.) more 
or less; but seldom more than lx. Otherwise, 
small mixtures of the weaker kind may be dosed 
by cochlear. ß. vel j. and such as are purgative, to 
be taken all at one time (§.285. n° 4.) may equal 
℥ß vel j. for a dose. 
§.288. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is generally restrain- 
ed between ʒij and ℥j  or ij. But if the dose be 
large, to be measured by the spoon, and continued 
a long time, with other considerations at §.68. 
if these urge, the form may be prescribed in still 
larger quantities; especially as the nature of the 
ingredients is generally such as not to be subject to 
corrupt or change by keeping. Sometimes only 
one dose is sufficient for the intention: but if it be 
only a few drops, it cannot well be taken in this
forms;

241 Of Drops.
form; it should be rather diluted or inlarged into 
a draught, with some proper vehicle. 
§.289. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, does scarce admit of a de- 
termination, even by general rules. It is to be 
principally regulated by the physician’s indication, 
with the particular virtues and strength of each in- 
gredient, and their more or less easy solution or 
mixture; with which, the physician ought to be 
previously acquainted. Hence 
1. Such things as are more bulkey in propor- 
tion to their strength, may be order’d in large 
quantities; but less portions of those which are 
more strong or contracted: such are essential 
oils and extracts, volatile salts, balsams, &c.
Thus one thing is to be assisted, qualified and 
corrected by another. 
2. Otherwise, when the physician rather 
chuses a small dose, the more strong and effica- 
cious ingredients may be taken in an equal, or 
even a larger proportion than the weaker or 
more dilute. 
3. Such substances as can be dissolved in only 
a certain quantity by the rest, should be order’d 
in a proportion rather below than above than 
quantity; left some part should remain undis- 
solved, or the mixture be render’d over thick. 
To this head belong balsams, oils, resins, solid 
extracts, &c. 
4. The quantity of drastic or very strong in- 
gredients should be so carefully proportioned to 
the rest, as that every dose of the mixture may 
contain its due share. 
§.290. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, is usually order’d 
by M. D. ad vitrum. For what regards extempo- 
raneous infusion or decoction, that is not the bu- 
R siness

242 Of Drops. 
siness of this place, but belongs to §.211. 224.
But when the mixture is required to be made very 
exact, by triture, that may be allowed a particular 
injunction to the compounder: as is frequent in 
resins, solid extracts, and the like, after this it 
may be sometimes proper to order the mixture to 
be strained, when there are any impurities, or 
parts which cannot be wholly dissolved. The re- 
ceptacle may be order’d to be exactly closed with 
a cork and bladder, when the virtues of the mix- 
ture are very volatile and easy to be dissipated. It is 
sometimes usual to tie the phiol twice over with 
pieces of bladder, without a cork, when the dose 
is to be measured out by drops; for by that means, 
by perforating the inner bladder with a needle, 
&c. upon shaking and turning up the phiol, the 
drops may be number’d more easily, as they come 
but more slowly and regularly. 
§.291. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, has scarce any thing in 
it particular; unless that we give it the name of 
haustus or haustulus, when the whole quantity makes 
but one dose (§.288.); but if it contains several, 
it is usual to call it after the title of the most con- 
siderable ingredient; hence, the tincture, balsam, 
oil, spirit, essence, elixir, &c. are names frequent- 
ly in use; many of which, are however used pro- 
miscuously: nor do they often exactly observe the 
difference assigned by the chemist between the 
forms signified by those names. The title of drops 
may be a general one, for all whose dose is to be 
determined by that measure. A vehicle cannot 
well be omitted for taking the stronger mixtures:
one ought therefore to be chose which is agreeable 
with the form both in texture and virtues, making 
no precipitation, repulsion, dissipation, destruc- 
tion or change among the medicinal parts. The 
vehicles commonly in use, are, wine, juleps (§.261.), 
infu-

243 Drops or small Mixtures. 
ihfusions (§.211.), decoctions(§.224.), broth, 
&c. balsams, and oily drops, are best taken in su- 
gar or syrup. 
§.292. The USE of this form is Very exten- 
sive and agreeable: there are few but what like it 
for the smallness of ther dose; it being used mostly 
where a warming and stimulating power is requi- 
site, to which the ingredients for this form have 
a general aptitude: tho' there are not wanting some 
things which are given in drops for the intention of 
cooling, &c. as the acid spirits from minerals of 
various kinds, &c. 
§.293. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1. Haustulus aquam purgans, nec acriter tameri 
irritans. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 78. 
ꝶ. Scammon. syriac. puri gr. xiv. 
Spir. reginœ hungariœ ʒij. 
In mortario vitreo s. a. tritis, &c. fæces 
separatis, admisce 
Syrup, rosar. solut. cumsenn. ʒvj. 
F. haust. 
S. Capiat pro dosi. 
2. Alius; purgans, in scorbuta utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ. Pil. coch. maj. ℈j. 
Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. ʒj.
Spir. menthœ ʒj ss. 
Syr. rosar. solut. cum senn. ʒj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Hauriat. mane pro dosi. 
R2 3.

244 Drops or small Mixtures.
3. Elixir, stimulans, resolvens. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. 
Sal. volat. oleos. 
Purgans SENNERTI ana ℥ss, 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xxv. quater de die ex vino. 
♃. Liquor antipodagricus. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Alcahest. Glauber. ℥j. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Sumat cmni mane gtt. ix. ex jure vitulino. 
5. Tinctura anti-hysterica, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Tinct. succin. ʒij. 
Castor. 
Spir. sal. ammoniac. aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Sumat gtt. xxx. ex syrup. kermes in paraxysmo. 
6. Mixtura stimulans, roborans, anti-hydropica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Tinct. rad. helen. ℥j. 
Myrrh. 
Spir. matrical. ana ℥ss. 
Ol. stillat. baccar. juniper. 
Absinth. ana gtt. viij. 
M.
S. Capiat cochlear. ss. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, 
ex vino generoso. 
7.

245 Drops or small Mixtures. 
7. Tinctura cephalica. 
♃. Sp. lavendul. comp. ʒij. 
C. C. per se ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat gtt. xxx. in haustul. julap. 
8. Tinctura corroborans. 
♃. Tinctur. cortic. peruv. ʒiij. 
Elix. vitriol. mynsicht. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. lx. ter in die ex haustulo vini rubri. 
9. Tinctura hysterica. 
♃. Spir. castor. C. ʒiv. 
C. C. succin. 
Tinct. myrrhœ aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. l. in haust. julap. 5ta quaque bora, in 
& extra paraxysmo. 
10. Tinctura stomachica. 
♃. Elix. propriet. cum acido ℥ß 
Tinctur. mart. aur. ʒjß. 
Ol. cinnamom. in sacch. q. s. solut. 
gtt. iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xl. in haustulo julapii. 
(1.) Alius- 
♃. Tinct. stomach. amar. ʒss. 
Elix. vitriol. ʒjss.
M. 
S. Ut supra. 
R3 Of

246 Of Injections. 
Of the Forms of EXTERNAL MEDICINES. 
§.294. EXTERNAL FORMS (§.105.), are ei- 
ther commom to several parts of the 
body, or else proper to but one particular part. 
We shall treat first of those common to several 
parts. 
Of Common EXTERNAL FORMS. 
Of INJECTIONS. 
§.295. AN Infection (enema) is a medi- 
cated liquor, to be convey'd generally 
by means of some tube, thro' natural or preterna- 
tural apertures, into particular cells or cavities in 
the body, for various uses. 
§.296. The particular cavities (§.295.) into 
which injections are usually convey'd, are those of 
the ears, nose, eyes, mouth, anus, bladder, penis, 
uterus and vagina; not excluding wounds, absces- 
ses, sinusses and sistulæ. But as those for the mouth 
and anus, viz. glysters and gargarizms are more 
frequently used, and proper only to those parts; 
to proceed agreeable to our proposed method 
(§.294.), we shall hereafter give them a separate 
treatment. 
§.297. To the form of injections belongs the 
chirurgia infusoria, or injection of liquors into the 
blood-vessels of living animals, which became so 
considerable towards the end of the last century; 
but this practice being now almost extinct, we shall 
not here give a particular treatise thereof. 
§.298. 


247 Of Injections.
§.298. The Matter or ingredients for com- 
peting the medicated liquor(§.295.), are taken 
from infusions (§.211), decoctions (§.224.) 
juices (§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), and mixtures, 
large (§.272.) or small (§.283.). From whence 
(ex l.c.), whatever is necessary to be known on 
this head, may be readily learned. 
§.299. A proper Election of these ingredients 
(§.298.) can only be directed by a previous 
knowledge of the medicinal virtues of each, with 
proper judgment in the indication; for we here 
need not regard the colour, smell or taste, Hence 
1. There is here no occasion for the correc- 
tors (§.83 and 85.), which are so frequently 
used in prescribing and compounding internal 
forms. 
2. On the contrary, this form often takes in 
things, which, by reason of their unpleasant- 
ness and noxious qualities, are seldom or never 
applied to internal uses: such as oils infused or 
boiled, ointments, urine, henbane, and the 
strongest mercurials, &c. 
3. But we need be extremely cautious not to 
order things of too violent action for injections, 
in over large quantities; for the bibulous vasa 
inhalantia, which are open in every part, may 
transfer them immediately to the blood and 
lymph: or the vicinity and nakedness of some 
nerve, tendon or bone, may prove equally of 
as bad a consequence. 
4. Tho' this form will admit of a little thick- 
er consistence than others, yet it ought to be suf- 
ficiently fluid, and its mixture equable; both 
that it may not obstruct the small tube through 
which it is to be convey’d (§.295.), and that 
the intermix’d solid parts may not prove often- 
sive by their roughness. Therefore the dry in- 
gredients, which are not dissolvable, ought to 
R4 be

248 Of Injections. 
be most exactly levigated. There is also some- 
times occasion for a saponaceous intermedium 
(§.274. n° 6.) in this form, when oily sub- 
stances are to be intimately mix’d with aqueous. 
5. Sometimes things are order’d in this form 
which are of the considence of an ointment or 
butter, and which grow more or less solid upon 
cooling; but such things are not to be injected 
before they are sufficiently attenuated, by heat, 
or a proper menstruum. 
§.300. The ORDER or method of precribing 
the ingredients for an injection, is to be observed 
the same as in the several liquors §.298. agreeable 
to the particular nature of each, as we have before 
observed, in loc. ibid. cit. 
§.301. The DOSE of an injection is hardly to 
be limited in the general, as it differs very much 
with the size of the cavity (§.296.) into which 
it is to be injected, and the particular strength of 
the liquor or injection itself. In some cases only a 
drop or two will suffice; and then there is no oc- 
casion for a siphon or tube; as frequently happens 
in disorders of the eyes and ears. In many other 
cases, ʒj. ℥ss, j, ij, jv, or more, is injected into a 
part at a time. But most commonly, the filling
a part ’till it runs over is the proper limits of the 
dose of this form. 
§.302. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an in- 
jection to be prescribed at a time, may be easily 
deduced from considering the quantity of each 
dose (§.301.), the more or less frequent repeti- 
tion thereof, and the disposition of it to keep a 
longer or shorter time without changing, &c. 
§.303. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for composing an injection, may 
be learned from what has been said on this head 
in the histories of the several liquors (§.298.) 
to


249 Of Injections. 
to compound it, compared with the rules for elect- 
ing (§.299.) We may however observe, that an 
efficacious medicine may be used in three or four 
times a larger dose for this form, than for an
internal one. Yet we should not over-load it 
(§.299. n° 3.).
§.304. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for an injection, should be con- 
formable to the directions proper to the several 
other forms (§.298.) composing it; from whence, 
this article is to be learned. Tho' we sometimes 
add F. liquor pro injectione. The operation of in- 
jecting this form, not belonging to the apothecary, 
except in glysters, it is not the business of this 
place to treat thereof. 
§.305. The SUPERSCIPTION or direction to 
the patient for an injection, explains to him (be- 
sides the title §.60. n° 3. §.295. and 304.) what 
relates to the method of using or applying it; be- 
cause this business is generally referr’d to the pa- 
tient or his attendants, tho’ it may be sometimes 
properly assigned to a surgeon. The direction 
therefore injoins 
1. Whether the liquor is to be injected cold, 
warm, or hot. Cold injection being frequently 
pernicious to the body, is very seldom used; 
except when the intention is to repel, astringe 
or strengthen. A warmth nearest to that of a 
healthy human body, is the most serviceable 
and usual for this form, as best agreeing with 
every part. Too intense a heat is as bad as to 
inject cold, as it may scald or shrink up the 
small fibres and vessels. 
2. The injection is sometimes made barely by 
dropping the liquor into a part, when the cavity 
has an aperture large enough, and the quantity to 
be injected is but small (§.301.), requiring no 
great force to throw it in. But in the contrary 
cases,

250 Of Injections.
cases, a proper instrument is required. For this 
purpose, are used syringes of several sizes, made 
of various substances, and adapted to emissary 
tubes of various figures, according to the diffe- 
rence of the cavity and liquor to be injected. In- 
jections for the uterus and vagina are convey’d 
by an instrument on purpose, term’d metren- 
chites *; The bladder is injected by means of 
a tubulated catheter. 
3. The particular position of the patient, 
most convenient for injecting the liquor, may 
be sometimes directed; as may also that, where- 
in the patient is most likely to retain the liquor 
longest, whether by keeping the same posture, 
or by changing it after the injection. 
4. There are frequently several things to be 
observed also, after the injection; as when the 
liquor is to be retained in the cavity a certain 
time, or having performed its office, to be soon- 
er or later discharged. To this head belongs 
keeping the part at rest, its orifice closed, or the 
contained liquor in a proper agitation, &c. 
5. Lastly, we are here to direct how much 
at once, how often, at what time, and ’till 
when, &c. the injection is to be made and fol- 
lowed: the limitation of all which particulars, 
will readily appear to the physician, from his 
intention. 
6. But both the prescriber and compounder 
ought to be particularly cautious in this form, 
not to write any thing beyond the rule of secre- 
cy and decency, per §.60. n° 8. 
§.306.
* Described by SCULTETUS, in armament. chyrurg. part I. 
tab. 13. fig. 2. and tab. 43. fig. 6. 

251 Injections. 
§.306. The USES of injections are very nu- 
merous and extensive, especially in chirurgical cases, 
in all ages; being well accommodated to the in- 
tentions of absterging, diluting, mollifying, re- 
solving, easing, astringing, opening, healing, 
cleansing the solid, and washing out soft and fluid 
parts, &c. 
§.307. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Clysma auriculare, ulceri intra meatum audito- 
rium abstergendo, mundando, aptum. 
ꝶ. Urirœ homin. san. ℥iv. 
Sapon. venet. ℈j. 
Tinct. myrrh, gtt. xl. 
Mell. rofar. ʒvj. 
M.  
S. Hujus liquoris tepidi, quantum cavo capi potest, 
quotidie bis injiciatur in aurem œgram supinatam,
ac detineatur per aliquot minuta, dein aure prona 
rursus emittatur. 
2. Aliud, airi sordibus induratis obstructæ 
conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒij. 
Amaror. ʒj 
Fell. lucii piscis ʒß. 
Exacte M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Gtt. vj. ter de die instillentur auri supinatœ, de- 
tineantur gossypio immisso. Idem & antihelmin- 
ticum est. 
3.

252 Injections. 
3. Injectio ad cruorem coagulatum, extravasatum, 
diluendum. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 75. 
ꝶ. Mell. commun. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. marin. ℥ß. 
Aq. pluviœ ℥xij. 
M.  
S. Hujus tepefacti q. s. injiciatur cavo cruorem con- 
tinenti, leniterque conquassatum dein una cum cru- 
ore dilute rursus evacuetur. 
4. Emulsum digestivum ad sistulas curandas. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 93. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. ℥j. 
S. a. subactis admisce 
Mellis commun. ℥ij. 
Spir. vini commun. ℥ß, 
Aq. commun. ℥ix. 
D. 
S. Calefactum & probe mistum injice. 
5. Decoctum balsamicum, consolidans fistulam 
puram. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 94. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. hyperic. ℥iv. 
Aloes. 
Myrrhœ. 
Olibani ana ʒij. 
Coquendo leniter, mista, subige cum 
Vitell. ovor. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Calefactum parum in fistulam injice.
6.

253 Injections. 
6. Injectio detergens, ad urethram ulcere venereo 
erosam. Ibid. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Mell. rosar. ℥j. 
Aloes puriss. gr. x. 
Sal. ammon. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. fœnicul. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Liquor mundans, cujus q. s. ter, quater de die, in 
virgam, sanie pruis expressa vacuam, & pone lo- 
cum ulceratum constrictam, ope siphunculi injiciatur. 
7. Injectio ad gonorrhæam non virulentam. 
4. Aq. calc. viv. ℥vj. 
Tereb. venet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut. 
ʒß
Merc. dulc. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j.
Mell. commun. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Usurpetur liquor, per residentiam horœ minut. j. 
depurates, concusso prius vitro. 
8. Injectio ad sphacelum cavum. 
♃. Aq. calc. ℥vj. 
Tinct. myrrh. ℥ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ℥j. 
Mel. œrugin. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur calide, frequenter. 
9.

254 Injections. 
9. Injectio ad hæmorrhagiam in cavum. 
♃. Aq. ferrat. fabri ferrarii ℔ jß. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℥ij. 
Vitriol. alb. ʒjß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. & cola. 
S. Injiciatur frigide, ad cavi repletionem. 
10. Injectio confolidans. 
♃. Aq. hord. tepid. ℔j. 
Bals. tolut. (in vitel. ov. n°. j. solut.)
ʒij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur tepide, post hœmorrhagiam obturatam.
11. Injectio ad urethram inflammatam. 
♃. Aq. hord. ℥vj. 
Trochisch. alb. rhas. ʒij. 
Alum. rup. ℈ij. 
Mel. rosar. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur. lenissme tepifacta, frequenter.
Of

255 Of Aspersions. 
Of ASPERSIONS. 
§.308. AN ASPERSION (termed by the an- 
tients pasma, catapasma, diapasma, 
empasma, and sympasma), is a powder of the finer 
kind (§.106.), to be sprinkled upon external parts 
of the body for various uses. 
§.309. This powder is seldom thus used, but 
when it is of the midling or greatest degree of 
tenuity (per. §.107. n° 1. 3.); because large par- 
ticles do not spread fo well and equally, nor so 
easily adhere to a part, as when they have a larger 
surface given them by comminution. 
§.310. The Matter or ingredients, ELEC- 
TION and ORDER to be observed in prescribing 
this form, may be easily understood from compar- 
ing what has been said at §.109, 110. with the in- 
dication. For there is no material difference or 
exception to make, unless that we need not be so 
solicitous about the colour, smell and taste; but 
without any regard to the specific gravity, we 
may only accommodate all these three (matter, 
election and order) agreeable to our intention. 
Hence, many substances are used in this form, 
which are seldom or never taken into the body 
§.299. n° 2. 
§.311. The DOSE of this form is very uncer- 
tain, nor is it ever determined by weight; being 
generally limited only by the largeness of surface 
on the part, upon which it is to be sprinkled: 
Hence, it is not subject to that division which ob- 
tains at §.113. 118. 
§.312. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined upon the same condi- 
tions with those mention’d at §.301. 
§.313.

256 Of Aspersions.
§.313. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, that can only be 
deduced from a previous knowledge of the par- 
ticular nature and virtues of each ingredient, and 
their relation to the physicians intention. 
§.314. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is order’d by F. or M. F. 
pulvis: sometimes adding tenuissimus, when it is so 
required. A small card or deal box is the usual 
receptacle for this form; tho’ it is sometimes or- 
der’d to be ty’d up in a bit of coarse muslin, or 
lawn. 
§.315. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, acquaints him with the 
method of using it, which is usually performed 
only by inspersion, or sprinkling upon the part 
When it is ty’d up in a bit of lawn or muslin, it 
is then to be shook or sifted thro’ upon the part.
But if the declivity or oblique surface of the part, 
renders it less apt to receive and retain the powder 
by aspersion, it may be first strew’d upon a piece 
of linen or woollen cloth, or paper, and by that 
means be applied and held to the parts. 
The pasma, or powder for aspersion, is seldom 
order’d to be applied hot. But there are some- 
times several things order’d to be observed and 
done before and after the aspersion: as when the 
part is to-be first cleansed, rubbed, anointed, or 
bound up, &c. But these will sufficiently appear 
from every one’s indication. 
§.316. The USE of aspersions is pretty am- 
ple, being most frequently found in the hands of 
Surgeons, for the intentions of drying up, dispers- 
ing, astringing, cleansing, corroding, correcting 
acrimony, healing, &c. hence, this form is fre- 
quently required in wounds, ulcers and hæmor- 
rhages; in denudations and hurts of the bones, 
nerves and tendons; in defluctions of humours,
erysi-

257 Aspersions.
erysipelas, cutaneous disorders, &c. To this 
head we may also refer those powders which are 
applied by aspersion to persume or beautify divers 
parts of the body; sometimes called cyprus- 
powders.  
§.317. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Pulvis mundans, ad bubonem venereum 
apertum.  
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 249. 
ꝶ. Pulv. fol. siccator. scordii ℥ij. 
Vitriol, alb. ʒij. 
Aloes ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Aperto ulcert, deterso prius, inspergatur ad 
depurandum.  
2. Pulvis ad erysipelas. 
ꝶ. Pulv. erysipelatod. Mynsich. 
Flor. sambuc. siccator. ana ℥iij. 
Smalti ℥ij. 
Camphorœ ʒjß. 
Tenuiter trita M. 
S. Hujus calefacti prius q. s. loco adsecto insperga- 
tur, aut super charta cœrulea distributum parti 
applicetur & fascid leniter circumvoluta firmetur.
S 3. 


258 Aspersions. 
3. Pulvis balsamicus, ossibus, tendinibus nervis, 
nudatis conveniens. 
ꝶ. Myrrhœ ʒß. 
Olibani. 
Mastiches ana ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Colophoniœ ℥ß. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Eo conspergantur partes adfectœ, sub qualibet 
deligatione. 
4. Pulvis adstringens, ad sistendam hæmorrhagiam 
vulneris externi. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dratonis ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lapid. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis tenuissimus. 
S. Hujus q. s. inspergatur vasi vulnerato, & stupis 
alcohole calido madidis, vesicaque vel sascia circum- 
posita, firmetur. 
5. Diapasma acrimoniam obtunclens, ad in- 
tertriginem. 
ꝶ. Amyli ℥ij. 
Cretœ alb. 
Cerussœ ana ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. florent. ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Inclusus sindoni rarœ excuiiatur super parte exco- 
riata, prius detersa.
6. 

259 Of Epithems.
6. Diapasma detergens. 
(1.) ♃. Myrrhœ. 
Alöes ana ℈ij. 
Alum. ust. ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis subtillissimus. 
S. Flocculo gossipii excutiatur, super partes sordidas 
fungosas. 
(2.)—fortior. 
♃. Vitriol. alb. ʒij. 
Precipit. rubr. ʒjß. 
Alum. ust. ʒj. 
Disjunctim levigantur, & per cribra- 
tionem simul misce. 
S. Ut prior. 
7. Diapasma cicatrizans. 
♃. Colophon. nig. ʒij. 
Bals. tolut. ʒj. 
Sacch. albis. ʒvj. 
M. F. pulv. subtilis. exactissime levigando. 
S. In partibus excoriatis, ex gossipio, asperge. 
Of EPITHEMS. 
§.318. EPITHEMS are a kind of external me- 
dicines, of various consistences (but 
not like that of an ointment or emplaster), to be 
applied to the superficies of some external part of 
the body, for various intentions. When they are 
S2 to

260 Of Fomentations. 
to be applied hot, they take the name of somentum 
or fotus. 
§.319. Epithems are of a threefold consistence: 
either (1.) liquid; (2.) dry or solid; or (3.) soft 
and like a pultice. It is those of the first and se- 
cond consistence which ate properly termed epi- 
thems: the last kind is usually called malagma, 
puis or a cataplasm. We shall, for dictinction sake, 
treat of each separately. 
Of Liquid EPITHEMS. 
§.320. A Liquid Epithem, fotus or fomen- 
tation, is a simpie or compound medi- 
cated liquor, which is to be applied either hot or cold, 
by means of a proper vehicle, to some external part 
or the body; in order to make a change in the 
affected and adjacent parts, agreeable to the phy- 
sicians intention. 
§.321. The Matter or ingrediehts for com- 
posing the medicated liquor (§.320.) are, water, 
milk, wine, vinegar, spirit of wine, liquid juices, 
oil, urine, &c. either simple and by themselves, 
or variously compounded and prepared together, 
and mix'd with each other, or with other officinal 
or extemporaneous simples or compounds, of dif- 
ferent consistences: as distilled waters of all kinds, 
vinegars, oils by infusion or decoction, aromatic 
spirits, tinctures, essences, saline and lixivious li- 
quors, smith's-forge and lime water, &c. more 
particularly infusions made from these and other 
proper ingredients (per §.211.), decoctions 
(§.224), expressed juices (§.235.), emuisions 
(§.246.) and mixtures, diffuse (§.272.) and con- 
tracted (§.283.).
§.322. 

261 Of Fomentations. 
§.322. A proper ELECTION of the ingredients 
for infusions is to be deduced from the physician’s 
indication, with the structure and disposition of 
the particular part of the body to be alter’d, or 
to which infusions are to be applied, together with 
its morbid or sound state and the known nature of 
the liquor made use of. Observe therefore,
1. That what has been said in general con- 
cerning the election of ingredients for internal 
forms (§.213, 226, 237, 248, 274, 285.), 
may also take place here. 
2. But as we need not be solicitous about the 
colour, odour and taste, in this external form; 
so we need not make any addition of substances 
used for the correction of those qualities for in- 
ternal use, such as syrups, sugar, &c. 
3. Nor is a little thicker consistence usually 
disagreeable to this form: unless when it is re- 
quired to penetrate more than ordinary; for 
which, a greater degree of fluidity is generally 
preferable. 
4. The intention is often to produce a change, 
not only in the part to which this form is im- 
mediately applied, but it is also intended some- 
times to affect the viscera which are deeply situ- 
ated beneath, (§.320.). 
5. Hence, it will be most proper to select 
ingredients, whose principles and virtues consist 
of parts extremely small, volatile and penetrat- 
ing; especially when the intention is to affect 
parts internally situated, So that earths, stony 
substances, astringents, such as incrassate, and 
the like, seem to have little or no efficacy in 
them; since their grossness prevents their being 
absorbed by the small pores and vessels of the 
part, or else, by cloging up the small orifices, 
prevent their own ingress. But one may much 
more easily and effectually obtain the intention
S3 of

262 Of Fomentations.
of a striction, by the addition of aromatic and 
spirituous substances, which are more penetrat- 
ing. 
6. A regard must be also had to the nature of 
the part to which the fomentation is to be im- 
mediately applied; whether it will be injured by 
the action of oil, water, spirit, or something 
sharp; or whether one thing may not do the 
part as much harm as the other does it good.
7. For the rest, this form often takes in sub- 
stances which are seldom or never used inter- 
nally, such as the strongest preparations of mer- 
cury, and lead, with alcohol vini per se, the 
henbanes, mandrakes, nightshades, hemlocks, 
&c. 
8. But in ordering these deleterious substan- 
ces, the prescriber should be mindful, that as 
there are vasa inhalantia, very open and bibu- 
lous throughout the whole external surface of the 
body, their parts may enter the blood without 
ever passing thro' the stomach and primœ viœ. 
§.323. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of a fomentation, is to be observ’d 
much the same as that for internal forms (§.321.), 
which we have before recited. 
§. 324. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined either by the weight or measures used for 
the other internal forms. Its quantity or dose be- 
ing more or less, according to the size of the part 
to be fomented, and as the substance, by whose 
intervention it is to be applied, is more or less 
bibulous. A woollen cloth takes more than a 
linen one, and a cloth two or three times folded 
will imbibe more of the fomentation than one 
single, &c. 
§.325. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of 
this form to be sent to the patient at a time, as it 
is


263 Of Fomentations. 
is seldom less than lbss. so it is very frequently 
more than equal to ℔j, ij, iij.; according as the 
parts to be fomented are larger or smaller, and 
more or less in number; or as the vehicle is more 
or less bibulous (per §.324.); or the fomentation 
is to be continued a longer or shorter time, or is 
required to be repeated at longer or shorter inter- 
vals; or as the fomentation itself is more or less 
subject to change and corrupt, or is more or less 
easily prepared. It is, however, generally better 
to order somewhat too much than too little, espe- 
cially when the parts to be fomented are pretty 
large or numerous; left the liquor should be ex- 
pended too soon, or not hold out for the number 
of applications. 
§.326. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingrediens for a fomentation may be determined 
from what has been already said on this head (at 
§.217. 230. 241. 254. 278. 289.), compared with 
§.303. 322. It can be well ascertained, only from 
the phystcian's indication, and the known virtues 
of the ingredients: but the form being for exter- 
nal use, does not require so very exact a determi- 
nation of the proportion, as those do which are 
internal. Yet it may not be improper to observe 
the caution at §.322. n° 8. as also the consistence 
of each ingredient; left the form should become 
less penetrating, by its too great thickness. 
§.327. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is conformable to the 
same rules with those deliver’d for the composi- 
tion of internal liquid forms (§.218, 220, 231, 
242, 255, 279, 290.), from which, we'need ex- 
cept nothing but the names importing their inter- 
nal use, in the room of which others may be sub- 
stituted: as F. liquor pro epithemate vel fomento. 
But sometimes the form takes a name from the 
part to which it is to be applied; as may be seen 
S4 here-

264 Of Fomentations. 
hereafter in the external forms proper to particular 
parts (§.294.): at other times the form is in part 
denominated from the names of the ingredients; 
and hence the appellation oxyrhodon, &c. For 
the rest, the ingredients for this form are some- 
times only made up by the apothecary, in order 
to be afterwards infused or boiled for the fomen- 
tation, the remainder of the process being referr’d 
to the patient or his attendants, like as at §.218, 
220, 231: in which case, we may give it the name 
of species, or collectio. Lastly, this form does not 
require so exact a depuration, as at §.219. n° 4. 
§.231. n° 3. and 242. n° 3. 
§.328. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, indicates to him not 
only the name (per §.60. n° 3. §.230, and 327.), 
but also, 
1. The preparation: when that is not to be- 
performed by the apothecary (per §.327.).
Consult §.221. n° 2. 
2. The parts to he fomented: which are (per 
§.320, and 322, n° 4,) either (1.) external, to 
which the fomentation must be immediately ap- 
plied; or else, (2.) internal, invested by the for- 
mer, and only secundarily affected by the fo- 
mentation. (1) With regard to the external parts; 
as they are sufficiently manifest to the eye, we 
need only observe that, if they should have any 
open wound or ulcer, it may be sometimes pro- 
per to defend them first with some suitable mat- 
ter; that the crude liquor may not injure the 
excoriated parts, nor prove, by drying or sepa- 
rating the fibres or otherwise, hurtful to them. 
For (2.) the internal parts: when these are to 
be alter'd or affected by a fomentation, a proper 
external region should be first chose, agreeable 
to the different situation of the viscus, and inten- 
lion of the physician. And here, a previous 
know.


265 Of Fomentations.
knowledge of the consent of parts, or the distri- 
bution and communication of the nerves and 
blood vessels, will be of great service to direct 
the prescriber. For some intentions the fomen- 
tation is required to act more directly upon the 
affected part, as by strengthening, mollifying, 
moistening, cooling, relaxing, attenuating and 
dispersing impacted matter, &c. and then, the 
fittest external region for applying the fomenta- 
tion, will be, that which is neared the affected 
viscus, is the softest, and has tne thinnest integu- 
ments. Sometimes the intention requires a re- 
vulsion of the humours from, or a derivation of 
them to, some particular part; and in that case, 
the application should be accordingly made ei- 
ther in the upper or lower regions of the body; 
according as the viscus itself is situated, and as 
it may have a greater or less consent faith this 
or that external part of the body. At other 
times, our intention may be to affect the whole 
mass of blood, by the application of this form; 
and agreeable thereto, we pitch upon parts where 
the larged: vessels run the most exposed: as in 
the temples, neck, arm-pits, wrists, groyns, 
hams, &c. 
3. The vehicles by which it is to he applied 
(§.320.). Those most in use, are, linen or wool- 
len cloths of various colours, especially red, silk 
thrumbs, stupœ or bathing vessels, bread toasted, 
or its crumb, sponge, and dry epithems or bags 
of other ingredients, of which we shall treat 
hereafter. Sometimes the liquor is included in 
a hog’s bladder, capable of holding double the 
contents. The choice of these may be directed 
by the different intention, and nature of the 
parts to be fomented, and as one may be more 
easy to get than the other. When a great deal 
of the fomentation is to be applied at once, or 
its

266 Of Fomentations. 
its heat to be retained for a long time, for those 
purposes, woollen cloths, sponges and bathing ves- 
sels are most commonly used. A bladder, indeed, 
prevents any considerable dissipation of the li- 
quor, retains its heat, and keeps it from fouling 
or wetting any thing: but then it transmits none 
but the more subtle parts of the fomentation, to 
the affected parts, and those but very slowly. 
Hence, we may judge in what cases such a me- 
thod of application may be agreeable. If the 
region to be fomented is but thin, and does not 
require the epithem to be applied hot, or has 
no great necessity of retaining the heat, in these 
circumstances, linen cloths may do very well; 
and if a good deal of the fomentation is requir’d 
to be apply’d at once, they may be folded two, 
three, or more times together. 
4. Whether the fomentation is to he applied hot 
or cold. But this will be easily learned by the 
prescriber, from his own intention, and from 
the particular nature of the ingredients and part 
affected. When a fomentation is intended to 
attenuate strongly, to penetrate, or attract; to 
apply it hot, will then be of great service. But 
a cold application is the best for constringing 
the fibres, repelling the humours, &c. Such 
fomentations as are spirituous, or volatile, are 
fittest to be applied cold, or only warm; with- 
out the intention requires it otherwise. It may 
be also not improper to consider whether the ve- 
hicle (n° 3.) is to be first heated before it im- 
bibes any of the fomentation, or whether it may 
be more conveniently used cold. 
5. A direction for the method of retaining the 
epithem upon the parts. This is commonly ef- 
fected by proper bandages. But if the heat and 
humidity of the epithem be required to last any 
considerable time, it may be of service to bind
a 

267 Of Fomentations. 
a hog’s-bladder over the epithem, which has 
been first moistened with oil. Over that may 
be fastened a small bag full of warm sand, or an 
earthen tyle, brick, or any other body which 
will retain its heat a long time, without growing 
suddenly cold: and when the heat of such bo- 
dies is found declining and too low, they may 
be removed, and other hotter ones put in their 
place, the epithem itself remaining all the time 
upon the part. 
6. Lastly, the superscription also frequently- 
directs the time an epithem is to remain upon the 
part, how long the patient is to continue the use of 
it, at what times the application of it is to be re- 
newed, &c. Among these circumstances there 
is a great variety. Sometimes they are limited 
by the cessation or mitigation of particular symp- 
toms; as when, v. g. there is a remission of 
pain, watching, heat, cold, anguish, vomiting, 
bleeding, fainting, raving, &c. Sometimes 
they are limited by the strength of the liquor go- 
ing off; as, v. g. when it is cold, or all absor- 
bed by the vehicle, &c. They are also frequent- 
ly order’d to be used at some particular time; 
as in the morning, evening, or once or twice 
every day, or every second or third hour, &c. 
In all these cases, the physician may easily limit 
the application, by considering his particular in- 
tention, the disposition of the disease and its 
symptoms, with the nature of the fomentation, 
as being more volatile, fix’d, &c. as also, the 
vehicle (n° 3.) and apparatus being more easy 
or difficult to be had, or made. 
§.329. The USE of fomentations is very ex- 
tensive, being employ’d in most disorders whe- 
ther acute or chronic, external or internal; this be- 
ing a form well adapted to alleviate or remove many 
of

268 Of Fomentations. 
of their symptoms: and is used in various inten- 
tions, for mollifying, astringing, corroborating, 
repelling, drawing, warming, cooling, diluting, 
attenuating, opening, easing, stimulating, cor- 
recting or obtunding particular acrimony, &c. 
wherein the solids are no less affected and relieved 
than the fluids. This form is also suited to cause 
or promote almost every kind of evacuation by the 
emunctories, and is well enough adapted to pa- 
tients of all ages in general; supposing the 
dients to be carefully selected and adapted, and the 
application of them to be made at a proper time. 
These external epithems may very well supply the 
place of internal remedies, for infants, or others, 
who abhor to swallow, or cannot take physic in- 
ternally, But the application, and renovation of 
this form, is sometimes more troublesome than the 
use of internals. This form may also prove some- 
times hurtful by an improper application; as when 
it dissipates or relieves the symptoms, without re- 
moving the cause of the disease: which accident 
very frequently occurs in the use of narcotic epi- 
thems. Or the use of repellents in this form may 
prove pernicious, by constringing the vessels, and 
impacting the morbific matter, when it has not 
had a previous attenuation, or proper degree of 
fluidity; at other times, these applications may do 
harm by becoming too cold thro' a long residence, 
upon the part, when their warmth is all they can 
prove serviceable by, &c. But these accidental 
ill consequences are to be rather attributed to the 
injudicious application, than to the form itself; 
and may be very easily avoided by a skilful pre- 
scriber. 
§.330. Take the following. SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1.

269 Fomentations. 
1. Epithema aromaticum, promovens saburræ in- 
testinalis excretionem in infante recens nato. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Vitell. ovi. n°. j. 
Spir. matrical. 
Tinct. absynth. 
Aq. stillat, fœnicul. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Except a pauxillo micœ panis, stomacho applicentur. 
2. Aliud, ad nauseam ab inordinato liquidi nervosi 
motu ortam.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Aq. vitœ matthioli ℥j. 
Spir. rad. angelic. 
Carmin. sylv. 
Menthœ ana ℥ij. 
M. D. 
S. Taleola panis triticei tosti, bene irrorata his, ap- 
plicetur calidè epigastrio, super applicetur vesica
suilla oleo humectata, & dein supra hanc ligatura: 
renovetur post xij horas.  
3. Emulsum externum, anodynum, demulcens, 
leniter aperiens. 
V. Boerhi Mater. Med. p. 113. 
ꝶ. Semin. pomor. cotoneor. n°. vj. cum 
Aq. stillat. flor. rosar. 
Sambuc. aa ℥iij. 
F. s. a. Emulsio, cujus puro liquori ad- 
misce 
Spir. vini rectificat. ℥ß. 
Tinct. opii ʒij. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Parti a caustico aliove acri foris applicato lœsœ 
& dolenti cum panno linco triplicato admoveatur 
calidè: renovetur, ubi siccescii.
4. 

270 Fomentations.
4. Fomentum laxans, resolvens, paregoricum, ad 
pleuritidem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 149. 
ꝶ. Fol. malvæ. 
Bismalvæ
Parietar. ana m. ij. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Hyoscyam. ana m. j. 
Flor. sambuc. 
ChamœmeL 
Melilot. ana ℥iii. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. F. decoctum pro so-
mento 
S. Vesica stiilla hoc liquore calidissmo ad dimidias re- 
pleta, admoveatur lateri dolenti; firmetur liga- 
mine: turn super ponatur saccuius arena calidis- 
sima plenus, qui frigescens iterum calesiat, aut ei 
mox substituatur alius jam calefactus. Continuen- 
tur hœc, donec dolor remisit. 
5. Fotus antisepticus, calorem vitalem refuscitans, 
intestino per vulnus abdominis egresso conveniens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 79. 
ꝶ. Intestina pura animalis junioris q. s. 
Coq. in Aq. q. s. spatio 1/8 horæ; dein adde 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Lavendul. 
Centaur. ana m. ß. 
Fol. menth. m. j. 
Stent in infusione per 1/16 horæ. 
D. 
S. Liquor calidus cum panno laneo appicetur.
6.

271 Fomentations: 
6. Epithema anti-alcalicum, cardiacum, in gan- 
grena: ad exemplum ibid. p. 96. 
ꝶ. Herb. scordii 
Menthœ 
Summit. rutœ 
Fol. rosmarin. ana m. ß. 
Cort. cinnamom. 
Nuc. myristic. ana ʒij. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum acet. rosac. & vini
rhenan. aā ℥viij. coquantur in 
phialia alta, vitrea per 1/8 horæ. 
Liquori decantato adde 
Aq. prophylact. sylv. ℥ij. 
S. Hoc liquors imbutœ spongiolœ admoveantur paro-
tidibus, axillis, scrobiculo cordis, carpis, inguini-
bus. Taleola panis tosti eodem imbuta naribus sup- 
ponatur. Renoventur quolibet trihorio. 
7. Fotus antiphlogisticus. 
♃. Aq. benedict. ℥vj. 
Acet. vini alb. 
Sp. vin. camph. aā ℥ij. 
Sacch. saturn. 
Opii aā ʒj. 
M. F. Fotus, s. a. 
S. Ut in fronte, cum pannis linteis tepide adhibend. 
pro re nata. 


272 Fomentations. 
8. Fotus astringens. 
♃. Gall. virid. 
Cort. granator. aa ℥ß. 
Flor. rosar. rubr. m. j. 
Coque in Aq. font. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. 
Colaturæ adde Vin. rubr. ℔ ß. 
Alumen. rup. ʒij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Frigide applicetur, cum pannis 
linteis, omni 12° horœ parte renovand. 
9. Fotus discutiens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. absinth. vulg. 
Flor. chamœem. 
Sambuc. aa m. j. 
Ciner. lign. vulg. ℥vj. 
Coque in Aq. benedict. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. colaturæ 
adde 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv.
M. F. fotus.  
S. Cum pannis laneis calide adhibend. & frequenter 
renovand. 
10. Fotus emolliens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. & radit. althœœ aa ℥jv. 
Hyosciam. 
Flor. sambuc. 
Melilot. aa m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. ℥ij. 
Coque in A. font. ℔ iij ad ij. colaturæ adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Cremor. lact. recent. ℥ij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Cum pannis lintels tepide appli- 
cand. & pro re nata, renovand.
Of 

273 Of dry Epithems. 
Of dry EPITHEMS. 
§.331 EPITHEMA SICCUM, or a dry Fotus, 
is a kind of medicated powder (§.106.); 
which being generally fewed up in a cloth, is appli- 
ed to alter various external parts of the body, in va- 
rious intentions. It takes several names, according 
to the different parts of the body it is to be appli- 
ed to: as, saccus, sacculus, cucusa, cucullus, fron- 
tale, Scutum, lectulus, pulvinar, &c. 
§.332. The consistence of the powder for this 
form is hardly ever finer than the two first degrees 
(§.107. n° (2.)), tragea, and species; and this, in 
order to prevent its parts from sticking to each 
other, and from falling thro' the interstices of the 
cloth. 
§.333. The MATTER or ingredients for dry 
epithems, may be the same, in general, with those 
for the powder (at §.109. and 110.); supposing 
they are judged proper for external use, and for 
the particular intention. 
§.334. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
this form may be learned from §.111. 110. 322. 
compared with §.331. 332. But we may observe 
in brief; 
1. That the ingredients most frequently in 
use for dry epithems, are roots, barks, leaves, 
flowers, seeds; berries, spices, concreted jui- 
ces, and the officinal species compounded of 
these, &c. 
2. That this form does require equally, or ra- 
ther more (than at §.322, n° 5.), that its in- 
gredients should be such as consist of parts which 
are very volatile and penetrating; because its 
T con- 

274 Of dry Epithems. 
consistence and mode of application (§.331. and 
332.), would otherwise make them useless. 
3. That to these dry ingredients is frequently 
added some liquid epithem (§.320.); by which 
means, the substances become more useful or 
active, and the preceeding form becomes a ve- 
hicle for this (per §.328. n° 3.).
4. That chaff is generally used to dilate the 
ingredients of this form, when they are intend- 
ed for the composition of little beds or pillows. 
The same substance is also used (or rather one 
which is softer, as wool, cotton, &c.) to sepa- 
rate the parts of the medicated powder, when it 
is to compose a scul-cap, frontal, or the like 
small baggs; which are required to set easy upon 
the part, and have no occasion to be wetted 
much. 
5. That to this form belongs the use of small 
bags filled with sand; whether applied alone,
or mix'd with some liquid epithem (§.328. n° 5.): 
in cases which require a dry or moist heat to be 
preseved for a considerable time. 
§.335. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for dry epithems, may be observ'd 
the same as at §.112. of the internal powder. 
§.336. The DOSE of this form is limited by fil- 
ling the capacity of the bag, and that capacity is 
usually proportioned to the size of the hollow part 
of the body it is to be applied to. Hence, the 
dose of dry epithems is very different and undeter- 
mined. The hairy scalp of the head, the stomach, 
and the liver, commonly take up about ℥ij, iij, or 
jv: the heart, splen, and kidneys, about ℥j, jß or 
ij. and the other pans in proportion to their mag- 
nitudes. The little beds and pillows which are for 
the patient to lye upon, require a dose of several 
pounds. But we may observe, 
1.

275 Of dry Epithems. 
1. That different ages in patients, and degrees 
of extension for morbid parts, make a great varia- 
tion in the quantity or dose of these dry epithems. 
4. That these bags should not be stuffed full, 
but in a loose manner; that they may be the 
more soft, or easy, and the more readily adapt 
themselves to the form of the parts. 
§.337. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be transmitted to the patient at one time, 
is to be determined by the quantity of the dose 
(§.336.) and the number of bags to be filled. 
For very often there ate several bags to be trans- 
mitted together, which are to be either applied at 
one time to different parts, or to the same part at 
different times, alternately. 
§.338. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for dry epithems, may be determined front 
the same circumstances as at §.313. of aspersions. 
§.339. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, orders 
1. The preparation of the powder: which is 
usually performed by cutting, pounding or grind- 
ing in a gross manner (per §.332.); then comes 
mixation. Sometimes, particular ingredients, or 
all of them, are order’d to be roasted in a fry- 
ing-pan; in order to increase or change their 
medicinal virtues: but this process should not, 
however, be practiced upon ingredients, whose 
virtues consist in very volatile parts. At other 
times, the dry powders are order’d to be sprink- 
led with some efficacious liquor, before they are 
included in bags; as with spirits, oils, aromatic 
tinctures, &c. 
2. The making of the bag: where the first thing 
that offers, is, (1.) the cloth to be cut out, and 
few’d; which is commonly some thin and coarse 
linen, muslin, or silk, but seldom woollen. The
T2 nature 

276 Of dry Epithems. 
nature or disposition of the morbid part, the 
quantity or quality of the powder, the greater 
or smaller stress the bag will suffer in its appli- 
cation, the opinion of the patient, and the price 
of the cloth, &c. have each their particular 
share in determining the choice of its kind. 
(2.) The figure of the bag, which is to be adapt- 
ed to that of the morbid part, and the method 
of using it. It is customary to be in form of a 
hood, tor the hairy scalp of the head, and to be 
of an oblong-square, for the fore-head; pyra- 
midal for the heart, scutiform for the stomach. 
lunated for the liver; and to be in the form of an 
ox's tongue for the splen, round for the navel, 
&c. The little beds and pillows retain their 
usual form, being only proportion'd in their 
size. Sometimes the length and breadth of the 
bag is expressed to correspond to the morbid 
part, by a number of fingers breadths or inches: 
when at other times, mention is made only of 
the part to be cover'd, and the rest referr'd to 
the discretion of the apothecary. (3.) The num- 
ber of bags is sometimes mentioned, when there 
are several to be made at one time (per §.337.). 
3.The filling or stuffing of the bag: before 
which process, should go, when necessary, mixa- 
tion with the chaff, or an interposition of the 
cotton or wool (per §.334. n° 4.). The inclo- 
sure and fixation of the ingredients in the bag is 
usually performed by future: tho' sometimes,
barely tying or folding them up, is sufficient, 
when its stay upon the part is required to be but 
short, and its figure (n° 2. (2.)) less exact. And 
lastly the larger bags, which are not stuffed over 
tight, are frequently interfew'd or quilted; that 
the included powder may not clog together, or 
settle more to one part of the bag than to ano- 
ther.
4. 

277 Of dry Epithems.
4. But the business of all that has been hitherto 
said (n° 2. and 3.), is very often referr’d to be 
performed by the patient or his attendants; the 
preparation and exhibition (n° 1.) of the pow- 
der only, being left to the apothecary. And in 
this case the subscription barely orders P. species 
pro cucufa, sacculo, lectulo, &c. 
§.340. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides its name, 
(§.321. 339. n° 4.) also 
1. The inclosure of the species or powders; 
when they are to be transmitted loose to the pa- 
tient, by the apothecary (per §.339. n° 4.). 
But for this, the same directions take place, as 
at §. preced. n° 2, and 3. 
2. What belongs to the application of them: 
but this application of the dry epithems is usa- 
ally made either (1.) alone and dry, being ge- 
nerally made warm first. Or (2.) when they 
have been imbib’d with the medicinal virtues of 
others, to render them more active. Therefore 
the dry epithems are frequently order’d to be 
moitened with liquid ones (§.320. 328. n° 3.), 
either by maceration, aspersion or decoction with 
them; or else by imbibing the vapours of some 
proper decoction, boiling, or the dry fumes 
arising from the accension of some suffitus or fu- 
migation. Or (3.) a dry epithem may be ap- 
plied with a super-apposition of a liquid one, in 
order to retain its heat, or increase its virtues 
(per §.328. n° 3. 5. and §.334 n° 5.). What 
farther relates to the application of this form, by 
the patient may be deduced from what has been 
said at §.328; the greatest part of which may 
generally take place here. 
T3 §.341.


278 Of dry Epithems. 
§.341. The USE of this form is much the 
same with that of fomentations (§.329.). But a 
dry epithem is generally less penetrating, and more 
slow in action, unless it be mix’d with a liquid one 
(per §.340. n° 2. (2.)). Tho’ there are some cases 
where a dry heat is more useful and tolerable to the 
patient. To this form, of epithems, also belongs 
the application of live whelps, pigeons, chickens, 
&c. after they have been split in two; as also the 
omentum, intestine, and other parts of animals, 
while they retain their vital heat: to these we may 
add, bread hot from the oven, applied either alone 
or with some proper mixture, agreeable to the usual 
methods; the business of which, may be readily 
understood from the preceeding doctrine of epi- 
thems. 
§.342. For SPECIMENS of dry epithems, take 
the following. 
1. Cucufa confortans, capiti debili, frigido ca- 
tarrhis obnoxio, prosicua. 
ꝶ. Rad. angelicœ ℥j. 
Herb, majoran. 
Salviœ. 
Folior. & flor. rosmarin 
Sumit. serpill. aa m. ß. 
Semin, nigell. rom. ʒiij.
Caryophyll. arom. 
Mastiches. 
Styrac. calamit. ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. species pro cucufa, quœ gossypio exceptœ includan- 
tur duplicaturœ cuculli, & punctim intersuantur. 
Cucullo, mane & vesperi fumo ligni juniperi accensi 
imbuto, semper tegatur caput. 
2.

279 Dry Epithems. 
2. Scutum stomachicum, ad nauseam a motu li- 
quidi nervosi inordinato ortam. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Pulv. aromat. rosat. 
Diagalang. 
Diarrhod. abb. ana ℥j. 
M. 
S. Insuta sindoni applica epigastrio. 
3. Epithema ad dolores colicos a causa frigida, 
slatulenta, natos. 
ꝶ. Semin, contus. anisi. 
Cumini ana ℥j. 
Piperis ʒiij. 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Caryophillor. aromat. 
Maceris ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. Species califacientes, quœ panis adhuc a furno ca- 
lentis, transversim dissecti, superficei internœ mi- 
caceœ, inspergantur, tum spiritu vini irroratœ
sindone super extensd contineantur, & epigastrio 
vel regioni dolenti applicentur: post tres quasque 
boras sindon spiritu vini iterum humectetur. 
4. Epithema febrifugum. 
♃ . Camph. opt. ʒij. 
Sal. vol. C.C. per se ʒj. 
Cort. cinnam. pulv. 3j. 
Nuc. myristic. ras. ʒß. 
Ol. essent. chamœm. gtt. xxiv. 
M. 
S. Includantur species sacculo serico, rubro, septies re- 
duplicate & in figuram pyramidalem redacto: 
quœ in collum filo serico rubro suspensœ, circa cordis 
scrobiculum retineantur; donec ʒiij. pondere avo- 
lantur.
T4 5. 

280 Dry Epithems. 
5. Lectulus & pulvinaria roborantia, anti-rachitica. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Folior. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Filicis maris ℔ iij.
Majoranœ, 
Melissœ. 
Menthœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Meliloti. 
Trisolii odorati. 
Sambuci. 
Rosarum ana ℥ij. 
Tritis in pulverem tenucm, & mistis. 
F. Species pro lectulo & pulvinaribus. 
S. Species rohorantes, quibus cum duplo tanto paleæ 
hordei mistis, ac dein linteo immissis, fiant lectulus 
& pulvinaria, quibus incumbat œger. Defendan- 
tur autem ab humido, & sæpe exsiccentur. 
6. Epithema siccum ad hydrocelen, serum dissi- 
pans, educens. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 211. 
ꝶ. Sails marin. decrepit. siccissimi, calidi, 
tenuissime triti. q. s. 
D. 
S. Intra lintea consuta applicetur calidus: simul ac 
madescit, alius similis sacculus, priori remote, sub- 
stituatur. 
7.

281 Dry Epithems. 
7. Epithema anti-phlogisticum, ad nephritidem. 
V. H. Boerh. in Aphorism. §.997. n°. iij. 
ꝶ. Herb. parietar. m. ij. 
Flor. chamæmeli. 
Melioti. 
Sambuci ana ℥ß. 
Semin. contus. lini ℥j. 
Conscissa, tusa, tenuiter, mista, laxe im- 
missa duobus sacculis lineis, qua- 
tuor pollices longis, duos latis, 
insuantur. 
S. Sacculi renales, quorum urns horœ quadrante cum 
lacte dulci coctus, calidus, imponatur regioni lum- 
bari dolenti; firmetur ligamine: ubi refrixit, in- 
tera similiter coctus alter priori substituatur. 
8. Sacculus cordialis, excitans in languore ab inertia 
defectuve liquidi nervosi orto. 
(A.) ꝶ. Folior. recent. melissœ. 
Basilic. ana ʒiij. 
Flor. lavendul. siccator. ʒij. 
Cort. recent. aurant. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Croci britannici ʒß. 
Conscissa tenuiter insuantur sacculo, py- 
ramidali, serico, rubro. 
(B.) ꝶ. Aq. meliss. magistral. ℥ij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒij. 
Tinct. ambari ʒj.
M. D. seorsim vitro probe clauso  
S. Sacculus (A.) regioni cordis apponatur prius ir-
roratus liquore (B.): ubi exaruit iterum humec- 
tetur. 
9.

282 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
9. Epithema adstringens, in intestino recto pro- 
lapso, reducto, conveniens. 
ꝶ. Herb. anserin. 
Folior. querc. ana m. j. 
Flor. balaust. 
Gallar. quercin. ana ℥ß.
Conscissa, tusa insuantur binis sacculis 
sericis, æqualibus. 
S. Coquantur sacculi in vini rubri & aceti ana q. s. 
& calidi alternatim admoveantur ano. 
Of CATAPLASMS. 
§.343. A Cataplasm is a soft, cohesive epi- 
them (§.318, 319. n° 3.), in the 
form of pap; and of a middle consistence, between 
that of an ointment, and an emplaster; but not 
melting with heat, in its external application for 
various uses. 
§.344. The consistence of this form (§.343.) 
is generally given to it by boiling: but it is some- 
times prepared without that, bately by tritura- 
tion and mixture. Hence we have a two-fold di- 
stinction of cataplasms, into boiled and crude. 
Of CATAPLASMS by Decoction. 
§.345. CATAPLASMA COCTUM, or a pultice 
made by of such a consistence. 
(§.343.) as not to flow about, be composed 
of ingredients whose parts are very small, cohesive 
and

283 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.  
and slippery. These, being sufficiently attenuated 
and equably mixed, take the name of puls. 
§.346. The MATTER, or ingredients for this 
form is threefold: a liquor: a substance to be boiled 
therein: and accessories. 
1. The liquor to be used, may be of various 
kinds: as water, new-milk, butter-milk, whey, 
liquid juices by expression, mead, wine; vine- 
gar, simple, or compound of the shops; urine lixi- 
vium; oil by expression, infusion or decoction: 
and sometimes thicker substances are added, which 
yet melt with heat; as butter, the fat of animals, 
ointments, &c. And sometimes, an intention re- 
quires several of these to be mix’d together. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled in the liquor, 
are usually taken from the class of vegitable sub- 
stances: to which belong roots, bulbs, rinds, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds; or else 
meals, powders, inspissated juices, &c. made 
from these. The animal and mineral class of 
substances afford but few ingredients to be boil- 
ed into a cataplasm; tho’ the excrements of par- 
ticular animals, the nests of swallows, with pre- 
parations from lead, are sometimes taken into 
this form. 
3. The Accessories are usually added either to- 
wards the end of the decoction, or else mixed 
after that is over: and this, either to (1.) increase 
the medicinal virtues, their texture not being able 
to resist the action of the fire; such as the aro- 
matic waters and oils, tinctures, essences, spi- 
rits, wines, vinegars, balsams, extracts, pulps, 
electuaries, gums and resins, or gum-resins, li- 
quid or inspissated juices of vegetables, yest, 
salt, sope, with the finer aromatic powders of 
the softer parts of vegetables, e.g. of saffron, 
and the like. Or, (2.) they are added to give 
the form a proper cohesion and lubricity (§.345.): 
of


284 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
of which kind are meals, fine powders, oils, 
ointments, butter, honey, the crumb of white 
bread, the whites or yolks of eggs, mucilages, &c. 
§.347. The ELECTION of ingredients most  
proper for this form, is directed by the requi- 
site consistence and uniformity of a cataplasm 
(§.345.), in conjunction with the physician’s in- 
tention, and previous knowledge of the effects 
boiling will have upon the ingredients. Hence, 
1. The reader may consult what has been said 
at (§.322.); the greater part of which observa- 
tions are agreeable to this cohesive, as well as 
that liquid kind of epithem. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled (§.346. n° 2.), 
should be either naturally of a soft texture, or 
else apt to become so by the decoction: so that 
the harder parts of vegetables, which are less 
succulent, as woods, stalks, roots, barks, &c. 
are generally excluded from this, form: the 
more soft and succulent parts of recent vege- 
tables, being preferable to the more compact 
and dry, 
3. Bread, flower, or the finer powders of the 
parts of vegetables, are generally used to make 
a smooth pultice, like paste (§.345.). 
5. Sometimes the residuum left after boiling 
a liquid fomentation (§.321.), composes the 
matter of a cataplasm; when both a pultice 
and fomentation of the same virtues are requir- 
ed to be used at the same time. In this case 
there is seldom any occasion to repeat, or make 
a second decoction of the ingredients. 
6. The liquor (§.346. n° 1.) to boil, the ingre- 
dients for the cataplasm, should be chose agreeable 
to the physician’s intention, and texture of the 
ingredients; and be able to sustain the force of 
fire in the decoction. When the intention is to 
moisten,

285 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
moisten, mollify and relax, it is advisible to let 
the liquor be water, milk, or preparations of 
the last, with oil and unctuous substances: but 
when the design is to open obstructions, attenu- 
ate viscidities, or stimulate the small vessels, it 
may be best to use vinegar, oxycrate, urine, a 
lixivium, &c. From a combination of several 
of these with each other, will arise a new mix- 
ture, of complex virtues. It is advisable to mix 
such things, as may be lost by the fire in boil- 
ing, after that operation is over, and the cata- 
plasm made (per §.226. n° 1, 2, 3.); such are 
wines, distilled waters, inflammable spirits, aro- 
matic oils, and the like. 
6. The accessories (§.346. n° 3.) of both 
kinds, are not always necessary in this form. 
Tho’ the proper consistence, or requisite virtues, 
not found in the other boiled ingredients, may 
sometimes give occasion to make this addition. 
Hence, when a cataplasm is too fluid, and its 
mixture not sufficiently uniform; we then add 
fine powders or meals: if too dry, and not sub-
sicently pliable; we mix oils and unctuous sub- 
stances. And sometimes we add both, to increase 
the bulk of a cataplasm to a proper size. 
7. But both kinds of accessories (whether they 
be fluid, liquisiable by heat, or naturally soft and 
viscous, or of the fine powder kind) ought to 
be disposed to make a uniform and equable 
mixture. Such as are difficultly soluble, or run 
together into grumes by heat; such as e.g. re- 
sins and gum-resins, galbanums sagapenum, &c. 
ought to be first dissolved in vinegar, wine or its 
spirit, or else reduced by the yolk of an egg. 
8. Oils and unctuous substances should not be 
mix’d in all cases promiscuously. For they are 
often pernicious by obstructing the pores of the 
skin; unless they have previously undergone 
a

286 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.
a sufficient attenuation, by sope, or some proper 
menstruum. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form, 
may be the same as for a decoction (§.226. 
n° 23.). 
§.348. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
and compounding the ingredients for a cataplasm, 
is much the same as at §.227. of the internal de- 
coction. The accessories (§.346. n° 3. (2.)) ge- 
nerally come in the last place; because they are 
frequently order’d in an undetermined quantity. 
But if there are any ingredients whose parts are ex- 
tremely volatile, they should be mix’d the very 
last, after all the rest. 
§.349. The DOSE of this form is determined by 
the size of the part to be fomented; nor does it 
require to be limited by any other consideration. 
§.350. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be precribed and transmitted to the pa- 
tient at a time, may be determined from the con- 
siderations at §.325. Whence we learn, that as 
the general quantity is often equal to ℔j, ij, iij, 
or more; so it is seldom prescribed in a less quan- 
tity than ℔ss. because it would bo troublesome 
to boil. 
§.351. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredi- 
ents for a cataplasm, may be almost wholly under- 
stood from what has been said on this head at 
§.217. 230. 303. 326. We shall only add, 
1. That the ingredients to be boiled should 
be order’d in a proportion conformable to the 
physician’s intention, the particular dose (§.349.); 
and general quantity (§.350.); because the whole 
substance of, them are used in this form. For 
the rest, consult what is said at §.303. and 326.
2. The proportion of the liquor for decoction 
(§.346. n° 1.), is hardly ever limited, but is
only 

287 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
only order’d to be taken in q. s. But a less quan- 
tity is generally sufficient for this form, than 
for internal decoctions (per §.230.), for injec- 
tions (per §.303.), or for fomentations; and 
this, that a cataplasm may the sooner acquire 
its due consistence (§.343.): supposing the in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) do not require a long 
decoction in order to molify them. 
3. When oil, butter, or the softer fats of 
animals are used for the menstruum or liquor 
(§.346. n° 1.) of this form, they should be or- 
der’d in a very small proportion; left they should 
become rank and acrimonious by the heat of the 
fire. Whence, a bare maceration and contu- 
sion of them together, is generally preferable to 
boiling them. 
4. To make a farinaceous cataplasm, a still 
less proportion of liquor may suffice; because 
those ingredients(§.347. n° 4.), do well enough 
incorporate and acquire a consistence without 
much boiling. 
5. The proportion of accessories (§.346. n° 3. 
(1.) will hardly admit of limitation even by 
general bounds. Their virtues and consistences 
coming more or less near to those proper to this 
form, the quantity of ingredients to be boiled, 
and the particular intention of the prescriber, 
are to have each their consideration in order to 
determine their due proportion. If they should 
happen to disturb the due consistence (§.343. 
345.) of the cataplasm, by making it too thick 
or too thin; in that case we make use of the 
accessories at (§.346. n° 3. (2.). and §.347. 
n° 7.). 
6. The proportion of those accessories (§.346. 
n° 3. (2.)) may be determined from the quan- 
tity and consistence as well of the boiled ingre- 
dients as of the accessories (n° 5.) preceeding. 
But

288 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
But as they are not always of the same consi- 
stence, we may readily perceive that their quan- 
tities alone will not be sufficient to direct the due 
proportion. Hence, in doubtful cases, our most
expeditious method will be to add the requisite 
proportion of acceffories (§.347.n°.7.) by 
q. s. And if we have a mind to use accessories both 
of the dry and liquid kind (§.ib) we may then also 
order the proportion of one of both of them by q.s. 
§.352. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, orders the prescribed in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) to be macerated or boiled 
in the menstruum or liquor (§.ib. n° 1.); after they 
have been first comminuted by cutting, pounding, &c. 
when such preparation is necessary. But the quantity of 
maceration and boiling is determined by the ingre- 
dients being sufficiently softened, putrid, or atte- 
nuated; when they are of a gross and compact tex- 
ture; but if they are of a soft texture, and of the 
powder kind; then the degree of boiling is to be 
limited by their acquiring the consistence of paste, 
which will be much promoted by sufficiently agi- 
tating the mass with a spathula or pudding-stirer 
whilst boiling, by which means it will acquire a 
more uniform mixture, and be also prevented from 
burning to the vessel, when the quantity of liquor 
is but small. The next thing that this part of the 
formula directs, is, the beating and straining of 
the boiled ingredients, when their stalks, or more 
tough and woody parts cannot be sufficiently mol- 
lified. Lastly, the pulp or pultice being thus made, 
the accessories (§.346. n° 3.) are order’d to be 
mix’d therewith, according to their texture, ei- 
ther whilst it is still over, or after it is removed 
from, the fire. And the direction concludes, F. 
cataplasma vel puls. D. ad fictile. 
§.353.

289 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
§.353. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is pretty evident from 
§.345. and 328. This kind of epithem, a cata- 
plasm, is almost constantly applied hot; and some- 
times it is rolled up in linen, that if may not smere 
any thing. Sometimes volatile substances are mix- 
ed therewith, immediately before its application, 
as wine, spirits, tinctures, &c. which, unless they 
are in common use, should be for that purpose 
transmitted separately, to the patient, by the apo- 
thecary. When by a very frequent repetition, or 
continued use of this form, the substance of the ca- 
taplasm becomes too thick and dry, it may be con- 
venient to order a remixture with the decoction 
wherein the ingredients of the cataplasm were boil- 
ed, or some other proper liquor, hot. For the 
rest, it may be understood from consulting the 
forecited sections. 
§.354. The USE of this form is very conside- 
rable in tumours, inflammations, abscesse, gan- 
grenes, obstructions, contusions, burns, pains, 
where the fibres and small vessels are to be re- 
laxed and opened, or contracted and stimulated; 
and their fluids to be cooled, attenuated, derived, 
digested, or corrected in acrimony; and when the 
obstruction, heat, tension and pain from both, are 
to be removed: all which, may be effected by ac- 
commodating proper ingredients in this form, 
suitable to the case. 
§.355. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
U 1.


290 Cataplams by Decoction. 
1. Cataplasma emolliens, narcoticum: ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 65. 
ꝶ. Rad. altheœ ℥ij. 
Capit. recent. papav. hort. cum sem. 
n°. iv. 
Fol. recent. hyoscyam. nigr. m. ß. 
Micœ panis albi ℥iij. 
Contusis cum lact. recent. q. s. ad emol- 
litionem usque decoctis, trajectis, adde 
Olei solani ℥j. 
Farin. semin. lini. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum parti dolenti applicetur, donec re- 
mittet dolor. 
2. Cataplasma antisepticum, ad gangrænam: juxta 
exemplum H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 100. 
(A.) ꝶ. Rad. helenii ℥ij. 
Herb. tanacet. 
Absynth. 
Scordii ana ℥iij. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥jß 
Conscissa, tusa, decoque in aq. & acet. 
ana q. s. ad teneritudinem. Contusis 
dein & per setaceum trajectis admisce 
Sal. gemmœ  ℥ß. 
Ol. nardini ℥jß. 
Farin. lupinor. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
(B.)


291 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
(B.) ꝶ. Spirit. matrical. ℥iv. 
Camphorœ  ʒj. 
Concute ad solutionem usque D. seorsim 
vitro clauso. 
S. Cataplasma (A.) calidum, irroratum prius tan- 
tillo spiritus (B.) applicetur cum pannis lineis 
parti adfectœ, & vesica suilla oleo madefacta deti-
neatur: renovetur quolibet trihorio. 
3. Puls emolliens, stimulans, in pus maturans. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 90, 91. 
ꝶ. Farin. tritici. 
Lini recent, ana ℥iij. 
Cum Acet. & olei lilior. alb. ana q. s. sub 
jugi agitatione, cocta leniter, redige 
in pultis consistentiam, cui dein ad- 
misce 
Pulp. cepar. sub cinerihus assatar. ℥ij. 
Gumm. ammon. in vitell. ovi solut. ℥j.
D. ad fictile. 
S. Admoveatur calidè loco adfecto: renovetur quater 
de die: ubi arescit, tantillo butyri insulsi emol- 
liatur. 
4. Aliud simile. Ibid. p. 90. 
ꝶ. Fol. acetos. recent. m. iv. 
Butyri insulsi ℥j. 
Ad ignem leniter, parum, decoctis adds 
Fermenti panis ℥ij. 
Gumm. sagapen. in vitello ovi solut ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Ut prius. 
U2 5.

292 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
5. Cataplasma suppurans, ad bubonem venereum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Ficus molles, matures, ad ℔ß. 
Mell. recent. ℥ij. 
Galbani in vitello ovi soluti ℥j. 
F. s. a. cum aq. coquendo cataplasma. 
S. Admoveatur calidum parti affectœ, cum panno li- 
neo quadruplicato: renovetur post iv vel vj horas. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, commune. 
♃ Micœ panis albi. in 
Lact. rec. q. s. coct. & leniter ex- 
press. ℔ß. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Sev. melilot. ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepidè parti admoveatur, & pro re nata renovetur. 
7. Cataplasma refrigerans. 
♃. Pulp. pomor. coct. 
Micœ panis, in latte coct. aa ℥iv. 
Cacl. viv. in aq. rosar. extinct. ℥ß. 
Trochisc. alb. rhas. ʒvj. 
Acet. opt. vin. alb. ℥ij. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Statimpost compositionem, frigide applicetur.
8.

293 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
8. Cataplasma discutiens. 
♃. Ol. infus. sambuc. 
Nicotian, aa ℥ij. 
Camph. in tinct. opii q. s. solut. ʒjß. 
Lixiv. capital. ebullient. ℥ij. 
Misce in vitro, exactissime concutiendo, cui adde 
Furfur. tenuior. ℔ jß. 
Aq. pluv. ebullient. q. s. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidè parti applicetur, & frequenter renovetur. 
9. Cataplasma nervinum. 
♃ . Pulp, rapar. coct. & lenit. express. ℔ß. 
Rad. allii contus. 
Sem. sinapeos pulv. aa ℥ij. 
Ol. succin. empyreumat. ℥ß. 
Ung. opodeldoc ℥jß. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepide applicetur capiti, carpis, pedum plantis, 
partibus paralyticis, &c. 
10. Cataplasma bechicum, stomachicum, ad tussim 
anginosam. 
♃. Caffœ pulv. ℥jß. 
Spec. diamh. odorat. ʒjß. 
R. allii contus. rec. ℈iv. 
Axung. human. ʒiij. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. 
Hyssop. 
Succin. ana gtt. iij. 
Theriac. venet. q. s. ad consist. debit. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Sindone incluso, regioni epigastrici & circa collum, 
tepide applicetur; & fasciis laneis, hora somni; 
retineatur: post septimanam, si desit, renovetur. 
U3 Of

294 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
Of Crude CATAPLASMS. 
§.356. A Crude Cataplasm (§.344.) comes 
near to the consistence of a bolus or 
electuary (§.127. 138.), not having the softness, 
smoothness and uniformity of mixture proper to 
the boiled one (§.345.): which properties, as 
they are not always required in this form, so it does 
not always admit of them. 
§.357. The MATTER or ingredients for the 
composition of this form, is in general the same as 
for the bolus (§.128.): and are either excipiens, 
receiving; or excipienda, to be received by the 
former. 
1. The excipient must be either (1.) soft: as 
Conserves, robs, electuaries, honey, thick bal- 
sams, soft extracts, concreted juices (mollified 
in some proper liquor, and so, fitted for enter- 
ing the form of a cataplasm) sope, yest, the 
crumb of new bread, or of stale bread softened 
by maceration, butter, lard, ointments, pulps, 
the fresh dung of animals, or their soft and 
fleshy parts, with the soft and succulent parts of 
recent vegetables, beat into a past, &c. Or, 
(2.) Liquid: as wine and its spirit, vinegar, 
distiiled waters, milk, mucilages, syrups, oils, 
the whites and yolks of eggs, urine, lye, ex- 
pressed juices, and those mentioned at §.128. 
n° 3. 
2. The excipienda, to be made up with the 
preceeding, are, every dry substance, whether 
animal, vegetable or mineral, which is capable 
of being reduced into a fine powder.
§.358.

295 Of Crude Cataplasms.
§.358. The ELECTION of proper ingredients 
for this form, is to be determined by the intention 
of the physician, and other particular circum- 
stances of the form itself (§.356.); and may be 
easily understood from what has been hither to said 
on this head, for other external forms. But we 
may observe in brief. 
1. That when vegetables or their parts can- 
not be had green or fresh gathered, we may sub- 
stitute dry ones in their room, by macerating 
them in some proper liquor, as was said before 
of dry bread, (§.537. n° 1. (1.)). 
2. That fruits and bulbous roots are frequent- 
ly roasted first in the ashes, to make them af- 
ford a softer pulp in beating. 
3. That the soft substances (§.357. n° 1. 
(1.)) are frequently used alone, or with the li- 
quid excipients (ib. 2.) when they are of the 
thicker kind; without any addition of the dry 
excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). At other times, the 
dry excipienda only, are used with liquids: but 
they will then require something glutinous, or an 
addition of dry substances which become very co- 
hesive upon a mixture with liquors. Tho' it is most 
usual to compound the dry excipienda with both 
soft and liquid substances, in order to beat ’em 
up into a cataplasm. 
4. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the electuary (§.140. n° 6.). 
§.359. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form is also like that at 
§.141. 
§.360. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the same circumstances as at §.349. 
§.361. The GENERAL QUANTITY to be pre- 
scribed or compounded at once, is generally less 
than that of the cataplasm by decoction (§.350.);
U4 it

296 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
it sometimcs not exceeding one ounce, but is sel- 
dom larger than ℔j: for as the composition of 
this form may be much sooner and more easily 
made than the former, it is very often prescribed 
for in no larger a quantity than what will suffice 
for one dose: and the intention of this form will 
be oftener answer'd by such a quantity of the 
crude, than of the boiled cataplasm (§.353. 
355.). 
§.362. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for a crude cataplasm, may be deduced from 
comparing what has been said (at §.133. and 144.) 
with the medicinal virtues and consistence of those 
ingredients, which have been selected (per §.357. 
and 358.), together with the peculiar circumstan- 
ces ot the form itself (§.356.), its dose (§.360.), 
and general quantity (§.361.). To which we may 
add, 
1. That the degree of consistence (§.356.), 
is not always so constant, but that it may be 
sometimes more or less than specified; whenever 
the intention or nature of the ingredients may 
require it. When it is to penetrate deep, a 
thinner or more dilute consistence is most agree- 
able (per §.322. n° 3.), &c. Hence, the pro- 
portion of ingredients is not always observed the 
same, for the composition of this form; though 
it is, in the general, pretty much like that of the 
electuary (§.144.), or bolus (§.133.). 
2. It is very usual in prescribing this form, to 
order the excipient (whether soft, liquid, or both, 
per §.357. n° 1. (.1.) (2.)), only by q. s. or, on 
the contrary, to determine the quantity of these, 
but not that of the dry excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). 
By which means, the prescriber may be satisfy’d 
of the justness of his proportion, when he is 
under any doubt or difficulty. 
§.363.

279 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
§.363. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, or- 
ders first the contusion of the ingredients, and then 
their mixture, ut F. s. a. cataplasma, or epithema: 
for these two names have been generally used pro- 
miscuousty. Sometimes it takes a name from the 
part, to which it is to be applied: and accordingly, 
such as are to be applied to the wrists, are termed 
epicarpia, if to the forehead, frontale, &c. But 
more frequently, we only mention the part to which 
it is to be applied; especially when we refer its 
application ( viz. the spreading it upon some ve- 
hicle (§.320.), as linen or woollen cloth, silk, 
leather, wet rags, &c. (per §.328. n° 3.) to the 
apothecary; and in that case, the size and figure 
of the vehicle may be mentioned (per. §.339. 
n° 2. (2.)); tho' this last circumstance is not of 
so much moment. 
§.364. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.328. 353. and 363. consider’d with the 
particular part to be pulticed, the time and method 
of-application, &c. which have been but now ex- 
plained at §.363. The vehicle (§.ib.) or cloth 
is frequently wetted first (with some liquid epithem, 
vinegar, wine, oil, alcohol, or other proper liquor,) 
before the cataplasm is spread thereon. At other 
times this form is folded up in linen, &c. per §.353. 
that it may not smeer the parts, or dirty the pa- 
tient’s cloths, The application of it is made 
hot, warm, or cold, according to the physician’s in- 
tention, and the nature of the ingredients; but it is 
not so frequently used hot, as the boiled cataplasm. 
§.363. The USE of the crude cataplasm is much 
the same with that of the liquid epithem (§.329.) 
and boiled cataplasm (§.354.) but is not so exten- 
sive. Epispastics and vesicatories are very frequent- 
ly used in this form. The greater consistence of  
the

298 Crude Cataplasms.
the cataplasm beyond that of the liquid epithem, 
makes it generally less apt to penetrate into parts 
which are deeply situated, and is also not so easily 
dissipated: whence, it must act with a stronger and 
more lasting force upon the external parts. 
§.366. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Epicarpia antifebrilia. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Uvar. corinthiac. 
Summit. lupuli. 
Sal. marin. ana ℥ij. 
Contusa in pultem D. 
S. Excepta linteis pulsuum locis applica ad arterias, 
duabus horis ante ingruentem paraxysmum. 
2. Epithema stomachicum, roborans, pro infante. 
V. ibid. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Flaved. cort. citrei ras. ℥ß 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Vini hispanic. ʒiij. 
M. conterendo simul in mortario. 
S. Excepta mica panis adplicentur stomacho. 
3. Cataplasma adstringens, ad hæmorrhagiam 
partis externæ vulneratæ. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lap. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
Tenuissime pulverisata, mista, excipiantur 
Album. ovor. q. s. ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Exceptum id stupâ alcohole vini madidâ admoveatur 
vulneri, turn vesica vel fascia circumpositâ firmetur. 
4.


299 Crude Cataplasms.
4. Epithema molle, excitans, cardiacum: 
ꝶ. Summit. tener. recent. melissœ. 
Abrotan. aā ℥ß. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒiij. 
Caryophyll. aromat. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Cum Vini rhen. geros. tantillo. 
Contusa D. ad fictile. 
S. Extensa super pannum scarlat. vino rhenano prius 
madefactum, tepida, regioni cordis applicentur. 
5. Cataplasma acre, emolliens, stupifaciens. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 92. 
ꝶ. Fermenti panis acris ℥ij 
Sapon. venet. ras. ʒij. 
Mellis ℥ß. 
Ol. chamœmel. infus. ʒii. 
M. F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum imponatur abscessui maturo, aperiendo, 
donec integumenta macerata sensum perdiderint. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, anodynum. 
ꝶ. Micœ panis siligin. in lacte dulci ma- 
cerat. ℔ß. 
Vitell. ovor. n°. iij. 
Croci pulveris. ʒij. 
Farin. lini q. s. 
Ut conterendo F. cataplasma.
S. Cum linteamine duplicato, aut panno laneo, do- 
lerti parti applicetur calidum. 
V. §.355. Formul. ult. quam huic pertinet. 
Nota.

300 Of Humid Baths. 
Nota. To the history of epithems, which we 
have hitherto (§.318. to 366.) laid down, belongs 
also an account of AMULETS; so that those who 
approve of them, may thence deduce general di- 
rections to be observed for their prescription and 
composition. To the cataplasma crudum (§.356.) 
we may also refer the cataplasma emplastrodes ex the- 
riaca; spread upon linen or leather, and usually 
applied to strengthen the stomach and intestines. 
Of BATHS. 
§.367. A Bath is an external fluid medicine, 
in the form of a liquor, or a vapour; 
serving to wash or bathe the surface of the external 
parts of the human body: without the intervention 
of any vehicle, §.320. and 328. n° 3. 
§.368. It appears therefore, that baths are ei- 
ther humid or vaporous: and that each of these are 
either universal or particular; according as they are 
destined to act upon the surface of the whole, or 
some particular part of the body. We shall treat 
first of the humid bath. 
Of Humid BATHS. 
§.369. A HUMID BATH, balneum humidum, re- 
ceives various denominations, accord- 
ing to the different parts of the body, and methods 
used for its application. It is the universal (§.368.) 
only, which can be properly termed balneum; for 
if it reaches only halt way up, to the middle region 
of the body, or any space between the scrobiculum 
cordis, navel and thighs even down to the feet, it 
is then termed semicupium, insessio or insessum: if it
only 


301 Of Humid Bath.
only covers the feet, pedilivium; if appropriated 
to the head, capitiluvium; if to other parts, it is 
termed lavatio, lotio, and lavamentum: when it is 
poured by drops, or in a continued stream from 
above upon any part, it is then termed embroche, 
stillicidium, and impluvium; tho' this method of 
using is now become almost obsolete, except in the 
natural baths.  
§.370. The MATERIALS for this form, are,	 
all dilute medicated liquors, of what kind soever, 
suitable to the intention; but more frequently such 
as are in common use, requiring no preparation 
from the apothecary, nor any need of a prescrip- 
tion: such as simple or salt water, sope-suds, lye 
made from ashes, chamber-lye, new or sower milk 
and its whey; natural bath-waters, sweet-oil, wine, 
or vinegar and water, hydrogalum or milk and wa- 
ter, hydrelœon or oil and water, common dish- 
water made with bran, from the parts of animals, 
&c. At other times the liquors for baths are made 
of some decoctions (§.224.), infusions (§.211.), 
or mixtures (§.272.) prepared by the apothecary. 
Consult §.321. 
§.371. A proper ELECTION of the materials 
for this form, is apparent from §.299. and 322. 
We are here to have a principal regard to the me- 
dicinal virtues required, with the penetrability and 
consistence of the liquor neglecting what belongs 
to the colour, smell, &c. For the rest, we may 
observe 
1. That when a simple and common liquor 
will suffice, we should prefer that to an offici- 
nal composition (per §.29. and 31.); because 
the great quantity used in this form, would be 
otherwise too expensive for the patient. So that, 
for a universal bath (§.368.) especially, we sel-
dom 

302 Of Humid Baths. 
dom use any thing but the common liquors (at 
§.370 ): being, however, mindfull of the cau- 
tions at §.23, and 30. 
2. That when oily and aqueous liquors (§.370.) 
are used together in this form, their commixture 
is seldom required to be so intimate, as to call 
for a combination by means of sope (per §.274. 
n° 6.). 
3. That the artificial baths, made from fos- 
sils; as nitre, sea-salt, alum, vitriol, sulphur, 
quick-lime, fix'd alcalies, &c. can never pro- 
duce altogether the same effects as the natural 
baths, notwithstanding they have considerable 
uses. 
4. That the number of ingredients for this 
form, is seldom larger than for the decoction, 
§.226. n° 23. 
§.372. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form, agrees with that for 
similar internal forms; infusions (§.214.), decoc- 
tions (§.227.), and mixtures (§.264.). 
§.373. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the quantity of surface, or number of parts to be 
bathed (§.369.), in conjunction with the struc- 
ture of the bathing vessel. 
§.374. The GENERAL QUANTITY of an ex- 
temporaneous bath consists frequently of but one 
dose; especially when it is universal, or adapted 
to bathe any considerable extent of surface on the 
body (per §.369.). When it is design’d for the 
wafhing of leffer parts or members, it is ufual to 
prescribe several doses at a time: so that the ge- 
neral quantity may be easily determined (per 
§.325.). 
§.375. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, is limited by the same cir- 
cumstances


303 Of Humid Baths. 
cumstances as at §.326. compared with §.373, 
and 374. Observe also, 
1. That the medicinal virtues of the ingre- 
dients for this form, do not require to be pro- 
portioned with the greatest exactness: so that 
both the liquor and ingredients may be taken in 
a much larger proportion, than for internal li- 
quid forms of the like kind. 
2. That the liquid menstruum, used to boil 
the other ingredients, is very often prescribed 
only by q. s.
3. Otherwise, the decoction or infusion for a 
bath, may be order’d by the same proportions 
as for the like internal forms (§.217. and 230.); 
it being the best way to make them highly sa- 
turated, and to afterwards dilute them sufficient- 
ly, with more of a proper menstruum, at the 
time of using: which is a method the most con- 
venient for the composition of extemporaneous 
baths, which are very extensive or univesal; 
that we may not be obliged to have recourse to 
larger boilers or coppers than are at hand. 
§.376. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of an extempo- 
raneous bath, may be order’d like that for the com- 
position of similar internal liquid forms (§.218. 
to 220. 231. and 279.). For an exact depuration 
(per §.219. n° 4. (2.) (3.) (4.)), it does not re- 
quire it. Even the gross substances are frequently 
infused and macerated together with the menstru- 
um in the bathing-tub, or they are poured with 
their liquor into the bathing-tub, after they have 
been first boiled in a separate vessel, that they may 
serve to rub with, stand or fit upon, &c. And this 
is frequently observed, especially in large baths; 
when the ingredients are transmitted by the apo- 
thecary to be infused or boiled by the patient at 
his

304 Of Humid Baths. 
his own house (per. §.220. and 231.): in which 
case, they are often few’d up first in a linen or 
woollen bag, that they may be applied like a dry 
epithem (§.331.) to the affected parts, during the 
time of bathing, or to serve as a cushion to sit upon; 
which is very often practiced in the semicupium. 
Hence, this part of the formula concludes F. li- 
quor, vel species vel saccus, pro balneo, semicupio, 
pediluvio, &c. V. §.369. 
§.377. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be learned from 
§.60. 369. 373. and 376. compared with what 
will be suggested to the physician, from a proper 
knowledge of the doctrine of indications, and a 
legitimate use of baths and bathing: the business
of which, will not lie in a little compass; and 
cannot well be brought into this small treatise. Con- 
sult F. hoffmanni opuscul. physico-med. as also his 
Medic. ration. system. tom. iii. sect. ii. cap. x. & 
alii. 
§.378. The USE of baths is at present not very 
frequent; but among the antients they were very 
much used: nor are they only adapted for cleanly- 
ness and delicacy, but are also extremely serviceable 
for the cure of many diseases, by moistening, soften- 
ing, diluting, attracting, discussing, strengthening, 
opening, cooling, warming, attenuating, easing, 
&c. in most disorders, whether external or inter- 
nal, acute or chronic, in which, they afford very 
great benefit; tho' they are not without their ill 
consequences, when improperly used. V. id. hoff-
man. loc. cit. 
§.379. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

305 Humid Baths. 
1. Lotio mundans ad pediculos planos pubis. 
Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. tom. II. p. 488. 
ꝶ. Mercur. sublimat. corros. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iv. 
M. D. 
S. Tantillo hujus liquoris laventur mane & vesperi 
loca infestata. 
2. Semicupium emolliens, anodynum, calculo ure- 
teribus impacto prosicuum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphor. §.1426. 
ꝶ. Rad. althœœ  ℥iv. 
Herb. 5. emollient. aa m. iv. 
Flor. papaver. errat. 
Chamœmel. ana m. ij. 
Conscissa infuantur laxè sacculo lineo qua- 
drato, ad lumborum dimensionem apto. 
D. 
S Saccus coquatur per 1/2 horam in lact. dulc. duplo 
aquœ diluti q. s. Liquori calenti insideat œger ab 
umbilico ad crura usque, sacco lumbis supposito, 
manè & vesperi per horam. Interea bibat decoc 
tum diureticum H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 244. de- 
scriptum. 
3. Lavamentum ad intertriginem. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥x. 
Tinct. benzoin. ℥j. 
Sacch. Saturn. ʒj.
M. 
S. Lac virginale, quo partes excoriatœ, prius aqua 
abstersœ, laventur.
X 4. 

306 Humid Baths. 
4. Balneum ad glutinosa, pro infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 44. 
ꝶ. Summitat. rutœ. 
Sabinœ. 
Absynthii. 
Tanaceti. 
Chamœmeli ana m. iij. 
Cum Aq. decoct pintis xij. admisce 
Sapon. venet. ℥jv. 
Sal. sarmento. ℥j. 
F. Liquor pro balneo. 
S. Huic tepido insideat œger collo tenus mane & ves- 
peri per 1/2 horam: post fricetur corpus universum 
cum pannis laneis, siccis, calidis. 
5. Pediluvium refrigerans, paregoricum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. salicis. 
Malvœ. 
Lactuc. 
Nymphœœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. rhoead. m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. n°. vj. 
Nitri ℥ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, mistis, F. species pro 
pediluvio. 
S. Species cum aq. pluv. q. s. coquatur, sub finem ad- 
dendo aceti vini pint. j. Decoctum tepidum sit pro 
pediluvio, cui insideat œger ad crura usque per ho- 
ram, vespere: egressus ad somnum se componat.
6. 


307 Of Vaporous Baths.
6. Balneum emolliens, antisepticum, ad go- 
norrhæam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Fol rec. rutœ. 
Scordii. 
Malvœ. 
Aliiariœ ana m. ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. & expressis ad ℔ ij. adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Spir. vini comm. ʒvj. 
S. In hoc tepido virga & scrotum immergantur ter 
quaterve de die, spatio 1/2 horœ: dein panni lanei
eodem decocto immersi, & expressi omni applicentur 
pubi, scroto, perinœo. 
Of Vaporous BATHS. 
§.380. A Vaporous BATHS. balneum vaporo- 
sum (§.368.), is an external medicine 
adapted to answer some intention of the physician, 
by directing and applying its Fumes or vapours to 
the surface of some external part of the body; or 
else by conveying and drawing them, together 
with the air, into various cavities of the body, 
thro’ their particular apertures. 
§.381. The preceding vapours or fumes (§.380.), 
do either exhale (1.) spontaneously, by the action 
of the natural heat of the atmosphere, and are, 
termed smelling-bottles, balls, &c. which we shall 
explain hereafter; because they require a previous 
knowledge of several things, concerning which, 
We have not yet treated, or (2.) the effluvia are 
X2 drove

308. Of Humid Vapours. 
drove out by means of fire: and of these we intend 
to treat first. 
§.382. These last kind of exhalations (§.381. 
(2.)), are expelled either from liquors, or else from 
dry ingredients: the first of which, we shall call 
humid vapours; but the last, dry fumes, fumigation, 
suffitus or suffiment. And both of them are distin- 
guished like the humid bath (§.368.) into uni-
versal, applied to the whole body, or particular to 
some one part. We shall first consider the humid 
vaporation, or moist vapours. 
Of Humid VAPOURS. 
§.383. THE MATTER of humid vapours may 
be any liquor that is capable of being 
reduced into medicinal vapours by the force of fire: 
of which kind are, common water, milk or its 
whey, wine or its spirit, vinegar, and urine; to- 
gether with the liquid preparations and composi- 
tions of the shops, distilled waters, tinctures, essen- 
ces, elixirs, spirits, and the like: to these we may 
add, infusions (§.211.), mixtures (§.272. and 
283.), and more efpecially decodions (§.224.) com- 
pounded from the above-mention’d officinal liquid 
forms. 
§.384. In order to make a proper ELECTION
of the ingredients for this form, we are directed 
to observe (besides what has been so often repeat- 
ed under this head for other external forms) that 
1. The vapours are expelled from the ingre- 
dients (§.383.), either by accension, setting ’em 
On fire; or by ebullition, keeping them boiling 
over a fire: hence, the one or the other degree 
of heat is requisite, according as the medicinal 
virtues are more or less volatile.
2. 

309 Of Humid Vapours.
2. The prescriber should therefore consider, 
in the first place, which of those kinds of heat 
(n° 1.) he is either desirous or capable of using; 
that he may afterwards adapt the choice of his 
ingredients thereto: for from the same ingredi- 
ents, different vapours will arise, according 
as which of those different degrees of fire (n° 1.) 
are used. 
3. Hence, if the vapours are to be raised by- 
boiling, which is generally the case; those li- 
quors and ingredients will be added and used in 
vain, whose medicinal virtues cannot be elevated 
by the heat of an ebullition. Astringents there- 
fore, thick extracts made by decoction, with the 
more fix’d parts of animal and mineral substan- 
ces, &c. are unfit for this purpose. The best 
ingredients for this end (whether animal, ve- 
getable or mineral) are, all those, which upon 
boiling with water, afford distilled water, spirits 
or oils, of some strength *. And tho’ emol- 
lient, relaxing and easing virtues seem to be al- 
together fixed; yet they are in some measure ca- 
pable of an elevation, in the vapours of boiling 
liquors. 
4. Hence we also find, that those decoctions 
(§.226. n° 1, 2, 3, 15.) abounding with vola- 
tile parts, may be safely used under this form, 
tho' they cannot be properly exhibited for inter- 
nal uses; supposing their virtues are drove off 
in vapours by boiling. 
5. When various liquors and ingredients are 
to be mixed together in this form, we should 
consider their mutual affinity or actions upon each 
other, and the effects consequent thereon; which 
are to be learned from chemistry. We are by 
X3 that
* Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. vol. II. proc. I. XV. &c.

310 Of Humid Vapours.
that art taught, that a mixture of two substances, 
in themselves fix’d, emits volatile vapours; and 
on the contrary, that volatiles become fix’d, 
barely by mixture with other substances which 
are fix’d, or even volatile. Thus the fix’d sal 
ammoniacum becomes volatile by the addition of 
quick lime, or a lixivious salt, the acid part of 
nitre and common salt, becomes volatile by add- 
ing oil of vitriol to them, &c. The volatile 
acid spirits of nitre, common salt, and vinegar, 
become fixed upon an addition of alcalies; whe- 
ther saline volatile, saline fixed, or earthy ab- 
sorbent, &c. This, however strange, may be 
relied upon for true. 
6. Lastly, being mindful of the great pene- 
trating force possessed by the vapours elevated by 
fire, we should be cautious not to let them dis- 
appoint our intention. 
7. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the internals, at §.383. 
§.385. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients, has also nothing peculiar in it. 
§.386. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined by weight or measure, but is usually limited 
by the length of time assigned for the evaporation: 
so that, either the whole general quantity of the 
liquor is exposed to evaporation by the fire at one 
time, or only a certain part thereof, supplying the 
consumption by a gradual addition of more, as the 
other evaporates. But sometimes, the dose is re- 
strained to a few drops; as when we use nothing 
but precious oils or essences, to correct the dis- 
agreeable smell of any place. 
§.387. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined from the quantity of sur- 
face which is to afford vapours, the degree of fire, 
with the length of time and frequency of evapora- 
tion:

311 Of Humid Vapours. 
tion: so that ℔j, ij, iij, and more, is frequently 
order’d to be compounded and transmitted to the 
patient at a time. But when the dose is to be only 
a few drops (per §.386.), a scruple or a dram 
may be enough to order at once. 
§.388. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form, is apparent from what has been 
hitherto said on this head for external forms of the 
like nature, §.303. 326. The proportion of the 
menstruum to that of the ingredients to be infused 
or boiled, is frequently prescribed by q. s. 
§.389. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
liquid bath (§.376.). Nor does the liquor for a 
vaporous bath require to be more exactly depurat- 
ed, than barely by decantation from the fœces. 
The ingredients for this form are very often trans- 
mitted to the patient by the apothecary, in order 
to make the decoClion and evaporation before the 
patient at one and the same time (per §.384. n° 3.). 
And sometimes the species are included in a small 
bag, that they may be applied hot to the parts af- 
fected, after the vaporation is over. The subscrip- 
tion may therefore conclude, F. liquor, vel species, 
vel sacculus, pro vaporario vel balneo vaporis. 
§.390. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to the 
patient contains, besides what is common to other 
forms under this head, the method of using or ap- 
plying these vapours, which is various in different 
intentions. 
1. When the vapours are intended to correct
some disagreeable smell, putrifaction, contagion 
or pestilential state of the air, &c.; the liquor is 
then to be flung on live coals in the infected 
place, or diffused thro' the air in vapours, by 
evaporating over the coals, in an open and broad 
vessel, making the liquor boil.
X4 2. 

312 Of Humid Vapours.
2. If the vapours are to be applied immedi- 
ately to the surface of some part of the patient’s 
body; in that case, there are various contrivan- 
ces to contain and direct the vapours: as domicils, 
seats, coffers, and vaulted machines; wherein 
the patient either stands, fits, or lies down, with 
his body naked, or only cover’d with fine linen, 
and his head let thro' an apperture, that his or- 
gans of sense and respiration may enjoy the com- 
mon air, unmolested by the vapours or fumes: 
the patient’s body thus confined, receives the 
vapours expelled from the liquor, either by ac- 
cension, as in burning spirit of wine, or else by 
evaporation, with or without boiling, or by the 
extinction of red hot flints, either by throwing 
the liquor upon them, or them into the liquor, 
supplying others when they are grown cold. 
3. If the vapours are to be received into some 
small particular cavity of the body, as the ears, 
nose, mouth, fauces, bronchia, vagina, uterus, 
&c. or convey’d to the surface of a particular 
limb; it is usually done by means of a funnel, 
or a blanket, &c. 
4. What is to be done before, in, and after 
the vaporation, together with its continuation, 
repetition, &c. may be deduced from the phy- 
sician’s indication in particular cases. 
§.391. The Use of vaporations is not inconsi- 
derable, being much like that of the liquid bath 
(§.378.); and is in some cases much more effec- 
tual: upon which head, consult the excellent Hoff- 
man, in opusculo Physico-medica, & in Medic. Ra- 
tion. System. Tom. III. sect. II. cap. X. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1.

313 Humid Vapours,
2. Vaporarium particulare, emolliens, resolvens, 
ad anginam inflammatoriam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 137. 
ꝶ. Acet. sambuc. 
Rosar. 
Calendul. ana ℥j. 
Aq. stillat. sambuc. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Vapor calidus hauriatur infundibuli ope in fauces. 
2. Balneum vaporosum universale, nervinum, 
antiparalyticum. 
Conf. H. Boerh. Aphorism. §.1068, 1069. 
ꝶ. Herb. marjoran. 
Menth. 
Mari syriac.
Fol rec. cochlear. 
Summit. rec. rutœ. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Baccar. juniper. ana m. j. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, digere in phiala alta 
chemica, cum aceti & spirit. vini vulg.
ana q. s. per diem & noctem. 
S. Liquor bene calidus, una cum speciebus, in ollam 
effusus, reponatur in loculum fornicis sudatorii,
ac silicibus candentibus injectis fervens detineatur. 
Sub fornice decumbens æger, ingesto prius decocto at- 
tenuante, vapores excipiat nudo corpore, ut sudet 
per 1/2 horam aut ultra, si vires ferunt. Sudoribus 
detersis corpus fricetur pannis laneis, calidis, sic- 
cis, villosis. 
3.

314 Humid Vapours, 
3. Vapor suaveolens ad fœtorem loci corrigendum. 
ꝶ. Essent. amhar. ʒij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophillor. gtt. xxv. 
Cinnamom. gtt. x. 
M. D. vitro probe clauso. 
S. Hujus aliquot guttulœ prunis non fumantibus, aut 
silici ignito, instillentur. 
4. Vaporatio emolliens, resolvens, ad gravem adi- 
tum a causa frigida. 
ꝶ. Folior. absinth. 
Rosmarin. 
Summit. rutœ ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. ℥ß. 
Baccar. laur. 
Semin. cumin. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, insue sacculo. 
D. 
S. Coquatur sacculus in q. s. vini: vapor ope infun- 
dibuli immittatur auri affecta, mane & vesperi 
per 1/2 horam: post sacculus ipse e dococto exemptus, 
valdse calens, auri applicetur, firmetur. 
5. Vapor antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Aceti vini vulg. pint. ij. 
Sal. marin. 
Nitri. 
Ol. vitriol. vulg. ana ℔ß. 
Aq.purœ pint. j. 
M.
S. Immissa in ollam fictilem vitreatam, repandam, 
super prumas reposita, in limine domus aut cubiculi 
kniter evaporent.
6. 

315 Of Fumigations.
6. Vapor hæmorrhoidalis, anodynus, discutiens. 
♃. Summit. hyoscyam. 
Solan. vulg. 
Cicut. ana m. j. 
Aq. fontan. ℔ij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv. 
Ol succin. rect. ℈ij. 
M. 
S. Ebulliantur simul, sub sedile aperto cubiculario, 
& vapores dirigantur partibus affectis mediante 
tubo conico, donec sopiantur hœmorrhoides cœcœ, 
tumentes. 
7. Vapor swaveolens cubicularius. 
♃. Aq. omn. flor. Batean. ℥j.
Odorifer. ejusd. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Evaporentur in limine cubiculi, per ollam fictilem 
calidam vel potius œolipilam. 
Of FUMIGATIONS, 
§.393. A SUFFUMIGATION, or suffitus, is the 
fumes arising from a dry medicine, 
suspended in the air, and elevated there by accen- 
sion, or an intense heat; being afterwards con- 
ducted to the surface of some external part, or in- 
ternal cavity of the body, to answer some medicinal 
intention. 
§.394. The chief MATERIALS for this form, 
are, all dry substances, which, being either vola-  
tile

316 Of Fumigations. 
tile or inflammable, are capable of exhaling me- 
dicinal fumes by the force of fire. Hence, the 
most numerous ingredients are afforded by the 
solid parts of vegetables, their concreted juices, 
resins, gums, gum-resins, dry balsams, &c. From 
animals are taken musk, civet, castor, dry’d gall, 
&c. Among the mineral class of substances the chief 
are cinnabar, amber, ambergriss, sulphur, nitre, 
sal ammoniac, &c. 
§.395. The FORM for the ingredients of a 
suffumigation, is, either that of a dry powder, or a 
dry and cohesive or solid mass. 
1. The powder kind generally consists of par- 
ticles much grosser than the tragea (at §.107. 
n° 2.): and is to be either sprinkled on coals of 
fire, call’d fumigating powder; or else to be 
smoaked in a pipe after the manner of common 
tobacco, and may be called medicated tobacco. 
2. The solid or cohesive kind, consisting of 
smaller particles, have them more intimately 
mix’d, and being joined together by some pro- 
per glutinous substance, are made into various 
figures: as troches or pastills, little sticks, can- 
dles, little cyprus birds, and small or large 
torches; which being cast upon live coals, rubb’d 
upon hot bricks or tyles, or set on fire, do emit 
the required fumes. 
§.396. A proper ELECTION of the ingre- 
dients (§.394.) for these medicines, is to be de- 
duced from the physician’s intention, and the de- 
sired form (§.395.). 
1. Hence, the fumigations used for pleasure, 
or to correct the disagreeable smell of a cham- 
ber, &c. do consist only of perfuming ingre- 
dients; such as spices, frankincense, styrax, 
labdanum, benjamin, ambergriss, and the like. 
But when the intention is to warm and strengthen 
relaxed

317 Of Fumigations. 
relaxed parts, or to dissipate, and dry up su- 
persfluous humidities; the best things for those 
purposes are, resins, gums, gum-resins, warm, 
and partly aromatic substances joined with no 
pleasant smell, with amber, salt ammoniac, &c. 
Hysteric cases are best; suited with fœtid fumes, 
from castor, galbanum, asascetida, &c. Putri- 
faction and animal stenches are best resisted and 
overcome by the fumes of nitre and sulphur. 
Venereal cases are usually opposed by fumiga- 
tions with cinnabar. 
2. The parts of vegetables used in this form, 
are those only, which are naturally of a more so- 
lid and dry texture, or else made so by art; 
otherwise, they would be unfit for fumigations, 
as being not easily inflammable. 
3. But this form often takes in the stronger 
kind of aromatic and spirituous liquors, which 
are not watery, but inflammable; as effences, 
spirits, oils, liquid balsams, &c. but then they 
are to be mix’d in a small quantity, in propor- 
tion to the other dry ingredients: agreeable to 
the rules of composition for the internal solid 
forms at §.110. n° 3. 174. n° 1. (4.). 
4. The basis of the medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.) is usually made of the leaves of common 
tobacco, compounded with a less quantity of the 
leaves of other herbs, flowers, rinds or barks, 
spices, &c. Concreted juices which melt by 
heat, are excluded hences, because they obstruct 
the cavity of the tube or pipe, thro' which the 
smoak is to be drawn. 
5. In order to make up the latter kind or so- 
lid mass (§.295 n° 2.) for this form, we ge- 
nerally use a mucilage of gum tragacanth, a so- 
lution of labdanum, the turpentines, or ether li- 
quid balsams.  
6.

318 Of Fumigations. 
6. Sometimes, sugar is added in the compo- 
sition of pastills, small candles and cypruss birds; 
in order to augment and diffuse the other ingre- 
dients, and make them burn more briskly. 
7. That some of these fumigations may keep 
on fire when once kindled, and burn with a ser- 
pentine sparkling, as cyprus candles and. birds 
ought; for this purpose, their composition usu- 
ally takes in a sufficient quantity of powder of some 
burnt wood, which is of a soft and light texture; 
as is the wood of willows, and lime-trees; or 
even fine small-coal-dust, being mix’d in a due 
proportion with the other ingredients, renders 
them very apt to take and spread the fire. 
8. In making the larger kind of torches or 
candles, bees-wax is generally used for the basis 
of the composition. 
9. In using all fumigations (especially when 
they are to be immediately applied to the sur- 
face of the body, or convey’d into some of its 
cavities) the physician should consider the quan- 
tity of the skin’s surface to be in contact with the 
fumes, and its degree of porosity (per §.322. 
n° 8.), with the exceeding tenerity and sensi- 
bility of the internal skins: and lastly, he should 
be previously acquainted with the action and ef- 
fects of naked fire, in separating the principles 
and changing the parts of mix’d bodies; that 
he may be thereby enabled to make a judicious 
election of substances fit for his intention, which 
while they are doing good to some parts may 
do no harm to others. Cinnabar, can never 
excite a sallivation, whilst it retains the form of 
that concrete; but being converted into an atte- 
nuated mercury by naked fire, its effects are dif- 
ferent. It may be asked whether the parts of 
benjamin, amber, &c. arise the same in fumes 
as


319 Of Fumigations.
as they were in the concrete? consult chemistry, 
and you will find the contrary. 
10. Many shops are frequently ready furnish’d 
with fumigations of all forms; so that, when 
these are adapted to the intention, the prescriber 
may spare himself the trouble of an extempo- 
raneous composition: and as some of them may 
be required to keep a considerable time without 
much decaying, it may be proper to intermix, 
or else varnish them over with some suitable li- 
quid substance (at n°.3.). 
11. The number of ingredients permitted to 
enter the composition of this form, is frequently 
very great; but a concise brevity is always more 
commendable (per §.29.). 
§.397. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be observed the same as 
in the internal powders (§.112.), and troch 
(§.176.). 
§.398. The DOSE of this form varies with dif- 
ferent circumstances, being seldom determined by 
weight, but generally by number, or measure. 
Of the powder kind (§.395. n° 1.) drach. i, ij.
or pugill. i, ij. may be order'd to be cast upon the 
live coals at a time. The dose of the tobacco kind 
of fumigation (§.ib.), is usually limited by the 
capacity of the conic bowl of the tobacco-pipe. 
The troches, candles, and little birds (§.ib. n° 2.), 
may be prescribed to be burnt, or laid upon the 
live coals in n°.j, ij, iij. &c. The small sticks 
(§.ib.) may be rubbed upon a hot iron or tyle, 
in any quantity. And the dose of troches or wax- 
candles to be consumed at once, may be determin- 
ed by their number, and the length of time, 
§.399. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be prescribed and compounded at once, 
is to be deduced from the use of it being continu’d 
a


320 Of Fumigations. 
a longer or shorter time, and the repetition of it 
being more seldom or frequent. Such as are more 
troublesome in their composition and configura- 
tion, as are the generality of the latter or consi- 
stent kind of this form (§.395. n° 2.), should 
hardly be prescribed for in a less quantity than ℔ß.
at a time; unless when you order such as are kept 
ready in the shops (§.396. n° 10.). consult §.180. 
§.400. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for fumigations, is to be collected from a 
consideration of the physician’s intention, with 
the virtues and price of the materials, and the re- 
quisite consistence and form (§.395.) of the com- 
position, compared with what has been said be- 
fore (at §.87 to 92. 115. 181. 303. and 396.). 
1. The more precious and efficacious perfumes 
are generally taken in much the lesser propor- 
tion, in comparison of the other ingredients, 
whether they are intended for the composition 
of the powder or consistent kind of fumigation 
(§.395. n° 1. 2.). The same also obtains with 
regard to the liquid substances (§.396. n° 3.), 
2. In ordering a medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.), the leaves of common tobacco are usu- 
ally taken in above three, four, or six times a 
larger quantity, than the other ingredients. 
3. The proportion of glutinous substances 
(§.396. n° 5.) to form the composition into 
troches, candles, &c. (§.395. n° 2.) is usually 
prescribed by a. s: the proportion of bees-wax, 
to form troches or candles is (§. 396. n° 8.) usu- 
ally order’d to be double or triple the quantity 
of the other ingredients. 
4. The proportion of fine small-coal-dust 
(§.396. n° 7.) may be also order’d by q. s. or 
it may be order’d in equal or double the quanti- 
ty of the other ingredients. Sugar may be also 
order’d in much the same proportion. 
§.401.

321 Of Fumigations. 
§.401. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, orders 
comminution in a gross manner, mixation, &c. 
ut F. pulvis pro suffitu, nicotiana medicata, &c. or 
working the materials up with something glutinous, 
ut F. trochisci, haculi, aviculœ, cypriœ, tœde, &c. 
Nor is it usual to determine the quantity of each 
of these, either by size or weight. When officinal 
fumigations are order'd (§.396. n° 10.), it is 
evident that there will be no occasion for a sub- 
scription, unless it be to order the form to be mix- 
ed or varnished over with liquid substances. At
last, may be added D. ad chartam, scatulam, &c. 
§.402. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily understood 
from what has been said on this head at §.60. 393. 
395. and 398. But observe, 
1. That all the kinds of fumigations (§.395. 
n° 1, 2.) are frequently used only to correct or 
perfume the air; and indeed the sticks, candles, 
Cyprus, birds and troches serve no other inten- 
tion: but the powders and troches are often used 
to fumigate various parts of the body, by an im- 
mediate communication of their vapours. There- 
fore, as the first kind are used only for pleasure, 
or to prevent contagious disorders, there is hard- 
ly any necessity of observing an exact regimen 
during the use of 'em. 
2. When this form is to fumigate the body, 
the generality of what has been said at §.390. 
n° 2, 3. does also here take place. But the 
fumes are always evaporated by live coals, or a 
naked fire. Sometimes, handkerchiefs, hoods, 
and bags are fumigated (per. §.340. n°2. (2.)) 
before they are applied to the body. At other 
times, linen or woollen cloths are well impreg- 
nated with the dry fumes, in order to foment or 
rub particular parts. 
Y §.403.

322 Fumigations.
§.403. The USE of fumigations has been in a 
great measure already hinted, viz. for pleasure, as 
well as preventing and curing disorders; the latter 
by strengthening, discussing, warming, drying, &c. 
There are many who have a great esteem for fumi- 
gations of cinnabar in venereal cases; tho' they 
cannot be always apply’d with safety (§.396. n° 1. 
and 9.). Nor do I think other sharp or adust 
fumes convenient for weak lungs. 
§.404. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Suffitus antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Myrrh. 
Flor. sulph. 
Nitri ana ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis grossus. 
S. Hujus pugill. aliquot in punas inspersis vaporen- 
tur cubicula aut œdes. 
2. Suffitus roborans, discutiens, ad hydrocelem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Oliban. 
Sarcocollœ. 
Resin. guajac. ana ℥ß. 
Camphorœ ʒß. 
Mastiches ℥j.
Salis ammoniac. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Hujus incensi vapor excipiatur nudo scroto, dein 
panni lanei sumo hoc vaporosi, calidi, superappli- 
centur. 
3.

323 Fumigations. 
3. Nicotiana suaveolens, cephalica. 
ꝶ. Herb. siccat. salviœ. 
Majoran. 
Thymi. 
Flor. siccat. lilior. convall. 
Rosar. ana pug. ij. 
Cort. cascarill. 
Cinnamom. ana ℈j. 
Comminutis crassiuscule admisce 
Fol. nicotianœ concissor. ℥iv. 
Turn consperge tantillo essent. ambar. 
D. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sugatur fumus mane, dimidiam 
aut integrant horam ex fistula tabacaria. 
4. Suffumigium anti-rachiticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Mastiches. 
Succin. ana ℥j. 
Lign. aloes. 
Cort. cinnam: ana ℥ij. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒj. 
Contusa, mista, cum terebinth, venet. q. s. 
redigantur in trochiscos. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Trochisci pro suffitu, quorum aliquot prunis injici- 
antur, dum ante ignem sedet insans nudatis inferi- 
oribus. Pannis etiam laneis, siccis, horum fumo 
imbutis, fricetur spina dorsi, abdomen, &c. manè 
& vesperi. 
Y2 5.

324 Fumigations. 
5. Baculi swaveolentes ad fornacem. 
ꝶ. Labdan. 
Styrac. calamit. 
Benzoin. ana ℥j.
Bals. tolutan. ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. flor. 
Cort. cascaryll. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. lign. rhod. gtt. xx. 
Cum q. s. Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. 
Aq. rosar. extract F. massa, quæ for- 
metur in bacculos instar ceræ sigil- 
laris. 
S. Fornaci aut testœ calidœ affricetur parum baculus 
ad discutiendam mephitim. 
6. Aviculæ cypriæ. 
ꝶ. Oliban. 
Mastiches. 
Benzoin. 
Cort. thymiam. ana ℥j. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥ß. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒij. 
Sacchar. alb. ʒiv. 
Carbon. salicis ℔j. 
F. omnium pulvis subtilissimus, qui cum 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Ag. rosar. factœ q. s. subigatur & ef- 
fingatur in aviculas vel candelas. 
S. Duœ, tres, &c, accensœ reponantur in loco odore 
grato inficiendo. 
7.

325 Fumigations. 
7. Tædæ odoratæ.
ꝶ. Easdem vel similes species formulœ prœ- 
ced. exceptis saccharo & carbone. 
Cerœ flavœ duplum ad pond. omn. 
Concorporentur & formentur in tædas 
minores vel majores. 
S. Ardeant hœ ad delicias aut ad prophylaxin in 
locis infectis. 
8. Suffimentum hystericum. 
♃. Assa fœtid. ʒvj. 
Myrrh. ʒiij. 
Galban. ʒjß. 
Ol. succin. ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci n°. xxiv. 
S. Injiciantur duos vel tres in prunas, & vapores 
inhalentur œgro, naribus, & hiante ore. 
9. Fumigatio ad procidentiam ani, vel uteri. 
♃. Myrrh. 
Succin. ana ʒjß. 
Cort. cinnam. 
Menth. crisp. ana ʒj. 
Piper. jamaic. ad pond. omn. 
M. F. s. a. pulvis grosso modo. 
S. In prunas conspergatur, ad affectas vaporandas 
partes sub sedile, fundo aperto.
Y3 10. 

326 Of Plasters. 
10. Tædæ odoriseræ. 
♃. Gum. benz. ℥ij. 
Storac. ℥j.
Lahdan. ℥ß. 
Mosch. 
Ambragrisea ana ℈ß. 
Cer. flav. rec. ℔ß. 
Cera liquisacta, insperge pulverem subti- 
lissimam, & in filo gossipio contorto 
imbuatur, & deinde ex primatur. 
S. Hujus frustrum in loco comburatur contaminato, 
frequenter flammam extinguendo, ad fumum au- 
gendum. 
Nota. In this place we might add universal, and 
topical sumigation with cinnabar, and the dry gly- 
ster of the smoak of tobacco; the uses of which 
are sufficently known: so that they need not be 
inferred here; since they require no extraordinary 
artifice to prescribe them. 
Of PLASTERS. 
§.405. An EMPLASTER is an external, flex- 
ible and glutinous medicine; solid in 
the cold, but not brittle, yet melting with heat:
consisting chiefly of oily and cohesive substances, 
which being spread or extended upon a suitable 
vehicle, are applied to some external part of the 
body, for various uses. It is call’d dropax or pi- 
catio, when pitch is its basis; and sparadrapum or 
tela emplastica, a cere-cloth or paper, when spread 
upon either of those vehicles. 
§.406.

327 Of Plasters. 
§. 406. The MATERIALS for an extemporane- 
ous emplasater, are of two kinds: (1.) excipient, 
making the basis of the form; or (2.) excipienda, 
to be received by the former in much less quanti- 
ties. 
1. The excipient ingredients are generally of 
a tenacious, fat or oily consistence: and are ei- 
ther (1.) liquid; as oils made by expression, in- 
fusion or decoction: or (2.) more thick, but 
pliable; as animal fats, marrow, butter, honey, 
officinal unguents, &c. or (3.) more tenacious, 
cohesive or glutinous; as the turpentines, in- 
spissated juices, balsams, &c. or (4.) more con- 
sistent, hard, dry, and in the cold somewhat 
brittle; as wax, resins, gums, gum-resins, 
to which we may add the officinal emplasters. 
2. The excipienda also, are either (1.) liquid: 
as watery liquors, mucilages, decoctions, infu- 
sions, expressed juices; aromatic oils, whether 
obtained by expression, or distillation; liquid 
balsams, natural or artificial; tinctures, spirits, 
wine, vinegar, gall, &c. or (2.) more cohesive; 
as inspissated juices, extracts, sope, amalgams, 
&c. or (3.) dry and brittle, or capable of pul- 
verifation ; as metalline calces, powders from 
the parts of vegetables, animals, or minerals, 
&c. 
§.407. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, requires a previous know- 
ledge, and consideration of the physicians inten- 
tion, the proper nature of the several materials 
(§.406.), and the requisite qualities of an em- 
plaster (§.405.) Hence, observe 
1. That the laudable qualities of an emplaster 
are, (1.) to be of so dry a consistence in the cold, 
as not to stick to the fingers: (2.) to be soft, 
ductile and pliable in a small heat; (3.) to be 
Y4 mode-


328 Of Plasters.
moderately tenacious, or adhesive by the 
warmth of an human body, so as to readily stick 
fast both to the morbid part, and the extended 
vehicle and lastly, (4.) to have the mixture of 
its ingredients equable, and its consistence uni- 
form. 
2. The first property (n° 1. (1.)) depends 
on the proportion of materials at §.406. n° 1. 
(4.) n° 2. (3.): the second (n° 1. (2.)) pro- 
ceeds from the excipients at §.406. n° 1. (1.). 
(2.): the third (n° 1. (3.)) arises chiefly from 
the terebinthinate and gum-resinous substances 
(at §.406. n° 1. (3.). (4.)): and the last qua- 
lity (n° (4.)) is obtained by a skilful and close 
incorporation of all the ingredients. 
3. The excipienda (at §.406. n° 2.) are not 
essentially necessary for the composition of a 
plaster; for the excipient substances (§.ib. n° 1.) 
alone, being skillfully combined, will make an 
emplaster perfectly endued with every requi- 
site quality of the form. Even wax and turpen- 
tine of themselves, being melted together in a 
due proportion, will exhibit all the laudable qua- 
lities (n° 1.) proper to an emplaster. 
4. Oils (§.406. n° 1. (1.)) or substances of 
the like kind (ib. (2.)), with turpentine and 
wax, (ib. (3.) (4.)) do usually compose the ba- 
sis of most emplasters: but for wax and turpen- 
tine are sometimes substituted pitch, resins and 
gum-resins. 
5. Even pitch or gum-resins alone, are occa- 
sionally converted into an emplaster, by incor- 
porating and mollifying them with some proper 
oil or spirit, by means of a hot pestle. 
6. But what is more, oil itself may be form'd 
into an emplaster by boiling it a sufficient length 
of time with the calces of lead; as litharge, ce- 
russ, red-lead. 
7.

329 Of Plasters. 
7. The aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)), 
whose virtues consist in volatile principles, shou’d 
not enter this form: for the quantity of boiling 
necessary to evaporate their aqueous parts, will 
also at the same time dissipate their virtues. 
8. The parts of vegetables which are very 
bulkey in proportion to their weight, and whose 
virtues are inconsiderable and much diffused, are 
not proper to enter the composition of an em- 
plaster in the form of powder: but the apothe- 
cary should rather substitute their juices, decoc- 
tions, infusions, oils, or extracts. 
9. Salts (except they be metalline ones, as 
sacch. saturni, &c.) are hardly ever permitted to 
enter the composition of this form; either be- 
cause they are very difficult to incorporate with 
oily and ceraceous substances, exhale their vo- 
latile parts during the incorporation, diminish 
the emplastic, or adhesive property of the other 
ingredients, or disturb the form itself by melting 
in the air. 
10. When any powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
enter the composition of a plaster, they should 
be either capable of a dissolution, or else ground 
exceeding fine; that they may be so equably in- 
terspersed as to render the mass uniform (per 
n° 1. (2.) and n° 2.). 
11. Hence, extracts, concreted juices, gum- 
resins and the like, when they will not melt with 
the other ingredients, or be reduced into a fine 
powder, should be first dissolved in some proper 
menstruum: as vinegar, wine, oil, turpenine,
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
12. Sometimes vegetable or animal substances, 
whose virtues are desired in an emplaster, are 
first infused, boiled or fry’d in lard, oil, wine, 
or vinegar; that after expressing and straining, 
their


330 Of Plasters.
their liquid parts may be brought to the consi- 
stence of a plaster, with the other ingredients. 
13. When crude mercury is required to enter 
the composition of this form, it should be first 
reduced or kill’d by grinding with lard or turpen- 
tine, or by dissolving it in a suitable menstruum. 
14. The officinal emplasters reserved in the 
shops, are so numerous, as seldom to give occa- 
sion for an extemporaneous prescription and 
composition of others, especially in any consi- 
derable quantity. So that it is the common prac- 
tice to prescribe more for the plasters, common- 
ly used in the shops, either separately, or seve- 
ral such combined together, being mix’d and 
mollified with some proper oil, spirit, tincture, 
or elixir, &c. Sometimes the officinal emplas- 
ters serve as a basis to the other ingredients, 
more immediately adapted to the physician’s in- 
tention, for an extemporaneous plaster: as pow- 
ders, gums, resins, juices, &c. which are com- 
pounded by intermixing some excipient (at 
§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.) (3.)). Thus the time and 
trouble of extemporaneous composition may be 
much abridg’d, and the intention more effectu- 
ally answer’d, without incurring other danger. 
15. For the number of ingredients, concise- 
ness is laudable in this form, as well as in all others. 
Those who desire to contract their prescriptions 
of this form (per n° 14.), may write to several 
intentions in a few words. 
§.408. For the ORDER or series of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for a plaster, tho' they are 
more frequently ranged according to their quanti- 
ties (per §.57 n° 3.), the excipients being trans- 
posed before those which are order’d by q. s: yet 
the best method seems to be that which corresponds. 
to the order of commixture in a skilful composi- 
tion.

331 Of Plasters. 
tion. Hence the excipientia and excipienda which 
require boiling to incorporate them, should be 
placed first; and those which require melting only, 
may follow; and in the last place may come those 
substances, which should be incorporated with the 
mass when removed from the fire, as those of the 
fine powder and volatile kind, &c. But there is 
no need of being scrupulously exact on this head 
in a prescription, when we are previously satisfied 
of the skilfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.409. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
of this form are usually the same, or equal to each 
other; because there is seldom more prescribed at 
once than what is to be used at a time. The quantity 
of surface on the morbid part, and of the vehicle to 
be covered with an emplaster, are to be duly con- 
sider’d in order to determine the proper dose and 
general quantity of this form. But as the diversity 
of ages, and habits of body being more obese or 
emaciated, &c. will make the surface of the same 
parts considerably different, it is evident there can 
be no general limits assign'd to these quantities; so 
that when we order an officinal emplaster, or an ex- 
temporaneous one of the more simple kind, (§.407. 
n° 3. 5. 14.) it may be sufficient to prescribe the dose 
and general quantity thereof by q. s. mentioning the 
part which is to be covered by the plaster, or the size 
of the vehicle upon which it is to be spread. In 
extemporaneous compositions of this form which 
are difficult and tedious, it is allowable to prescribe 
a larger quantity. If the quantity prescribed be 
for several doses, the length of time and fre- 
quency of exhibition are to be taken into consi- 
deration together. 
§.410. The mutual Proportion of the se- 
veral ingredients for a plaster, is to be determined 
from the same considerations as their election (at  
§.407.

332 Of Plasters. 
§.407.), in conjunction with the different degree 
of consistence in the plaster. For take notice, 
1. That according to the different use of an 
emplaster it may obtain three degrees of con- 
sistence; viz. (1.) soft, approaching the con- 
sistence of a cerate, (2.) hard, or (3.) interme- 
diate, between hard and soft. The soft emplas- 
ters are used mostly for sparadrapes §.405. in 
the use of emollients, and substances which are 
to penetrate deep, or in applications of this form 
to moveable parts and articulations. Emplasters 
of the two last degrees of consistence are used 
mostly for desiccarives, astringents and 
lives, &c.
2. Hence, the requisite proportions for these 
different degrees of consistence (n° 1.) may be 
nearly determined thus. 
For a soft plaster,—ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥j. 
Pulver. ℥ß.
For a hard plaster,-ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j. 
Cerœ ℥ij. 
Pulver. ℥j.
For a plaster of midling
consistence,
ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥jß. 
Pulver. ℥vj. 
3. The proportion for oil is applicable to all 
thick and fat subances of the like nature (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.). (3.)): as is the proportion for wax; to 
its similar substances, enumerated at §, ib. 4. In 
the absence of powders, a larger proportion of 
wax, or its analogous substances, may supply 
the defect. 
4. But in powders, at the same time, we are 
also to consider their specific gravity, and parti- 
cular affinity to oily substances. Powders of the 
more

333 Of Plasters. 
more ponderous fossils inspissate a certain quan- 
tity of oil less than those of a lighter kind, Tho 
calces of lead imbibe large quantities of oily and 
fat substances. 
5. The physician will determine the propor- 
tion of aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) 
from his particular intention: and as almost all 
the aqueous parts of those liquors evaporate in 
the boiling, the proportion of the other ingre- 
dients may remain nearly the same. 
6. Inspissated juices, &c. (§.406. n° 2. (2.)) 
may be refer’d either to wax or lard, according 
as they come nearest to the density of one or the 
other (n° 3.): tho' they are usually added in 
but small quantities. 
7. When white wax is used in this form, as 
it is more brittle than the yellow, its proportion 
should be somewhat diminished. But it is the 
yellow wax which is almost constantly used for 
emplasters.  
8. Remembring that cold makes bodies more 
dense and rigid: in winter we should in large the 
proportion of soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2). (3).); and in summer add more of hard 
ingredients (at §.ib. n° (4.)) for a plaster. 
9. Those substances which serve to mollify or 
dissolve others (§.407. n° 5. 11. and 14.), may 
be prescribed by q. s. 
10. It is also customary to refer the propor- 
tion of oil, wax, and the like substances, to be 
determined at discretion by the apothecary: by 
which means an error in proportion may be ea- 
sily avoided by the prescriber. 
11. And when we desire to adjoin other in- 
gredients more suitable to our intention with 
some officinal emplaster (per §.407. n° 14.), 
being sensible of the consistence of those ingre- 
dients, we may readily know whether they will  
require

334 of Plasters. 
require the addition of an accessory which is soft 
and tenacious, or dry and solid; and the propor- 
tion of such accessories may be order’d by q. s. 
§.411. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, directs. 
1. The preparation of the emplastic mass. And 
this is performed either by (1.) emollition, with 
a gentle heat, or an admixture of some fit men- 
stuum (per §.407. n° 5. 14.); which latter is 
termed madifaction. Or, (2.) by colliquation or 
melting; in such a manner that the ingredients 
may be so fluid upon the fire, as to run into a 
very close commixture with each other; this 
process admitting no excipienda but that are ea- 
sily soluble, or else ground into a fine powder. 
Or, (3.) by means of boiling; which is requir’d 
when any aqueous liquor is to be evaporated 
(§.406. n° 2. (1.)), or when the more fix’d 
medicinal virtues are by this means to be ex- 
tracted from certain vegetables, rejecting after- 
wards their more solid and gross parts, or when 
metalline calces, especially those of lead, are to 
be intimately dissolved and combin’d in this form. 
We here designedly omit what relates to a re- 
gular and artificial preparation of plasters, as well 
for reasons at §.7. n° 3. and §.8. as because 
the business of that is usually refer’d to the dex- 
terity and judgment of the apothecary. Consult 
§.408. 
2. The extention or spreading this form upon 
some vehicle, which is generally either pieces of 
linen, silk, cotton, or leather, &c, according 
as the surface of the part to be covered is subject 
to various motions, is more or less tender or in 
fight, and as the plaster is to remain a longer 
or shorter time upon the part, &c. The size and 
figure of the plaster, agreeable to various parts 
and

335 Of Plasters. 
and uses, may be represented by sending a pat- 
tern cut out in paper, or limited by fingers 
breadths or any other measure, or it may be 
wholly refer’d to the discretion of the apothe- 
cary, mentioning only the particular part to 
which it is to be applied; for we suppose it suf- 
ficiently known, that the figure of an emplaster 
should be scutiform for the stomach, lunated 
for the liver, oval for the splen, orbicular for 
the umbilicus and uterus, and of an oblong-square 
for the kidneys, &c. The method of spreading 
common emplasters is sufficiently known by all; 
for making sparadrapes (§.405.), the linen 
shou’d be soft and well worn, but not ragged, 
the paper thick and soft or spongy; so that the 
melted emplaster may be equally embibed by, 
and extended upon the vehicle, making it ex- 
actly level when cold. Sometimes the internal 
surface of the plaster is smeared over with some 
oil, at other times it is sprinkled with some 
powder; by which means it will not adhere so 
firmly, nor be so apt to daub the parts. Others
do for the same purpose cover the whole, or some 
part of the plaster’s surface, with red or white 
lawn or muslin, crape or gauze, which they 
few or fasten to the margin of the plaster, before 
its application to the surface of the particular 
part it is to cover. 
§.412. The SUPERSCRIPTION (signatura) 
or direction to the patient for this form, is suffi- 
ciently intelligible from what has been already said 
at §.60. and §.405. 
§.413. The USES of emplasters are various and 
manifold, serving to mollify, disperse, maturate, 
deterge, desiccate, corroborate, attract, aggluti- 
nate and retain; excluding the air from wounds, 
ulcers and tumors, and serving to retain the lips 
of

336 Plasters. 
of wounds, fractur’d bones, tents, pledgits, asper- 
sions (§.308.), and other dressings. Depilatories, 
rubisiers, and vestcatories, are frequently exhibited 
in this form to the patient. Nor does it commu- 
nicate its virtues to the bare surface of the body on- 
ly, but even to the recesses of the more internal 
parts: as appears from the use of aromatic, opiate 
and mercurial plasters. Yet this form may be of 
disservice in many cases, by obstructing the cuta- 
neous pores, and exciting a redness, itching, pus- 
tules, or erysipelas. 
§.414. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Emplastrum anodynum, motum sedans, ad scir- 
rhum nec resolutione,nec extirpatione medicabilem. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Succi recent. expressi & puri. 
Fol. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Phellandrii ana ℥iv. 
Leni igne coque, inspissa, sub sinem admisce 
Cerœ albœ ℥viij. 
Ol. infus. rosar. ℥j. 
F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. super alutá dehitœ magnitudinis & fi- 
gurœ extensum parti scirrhosœ, prius nutritio ibid.
descripto oblitœ, applicetur. 
2. Emplastrum dissipans, ad bubonem venereum ad 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Flor. sulphuris ℥ß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ʒj. 
Picis sutoriœ ℥ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum super aluta extendendum. 
S. Applicetur loco affecto. Recentetur quovis die.
3. 

337 Plasters.
3. Emplastrum hystericum Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Galban. in tinct. castor. solut. & colat. 
ʒiij.
Tacamahac. ʒij. 
M. F. emplastrum: extendatur super a- 
luta orbiculatâ pro umbilicali regione. 
S. Ut in fronte. Admoveatur calidum umbilico. 
4. Emplastrum defensivum rubrum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 68. 
ꝶ. Ol. rosac. 
Cerœ albœ ana ℥vj. 
Boli armen. 
Sang. dracon. ana ℥jß. 
Rosar. rubr. pulv. ℥ß. 
Ceræ in oleo calore leni liquatæ, tum ab ig- 
ne remotæ, paulatim intere reliqua sub- 
tilissimè pulverisata, jugiter agitando, do- 
nec simul refrixerint. 
S. Hujus q. s. super linteamine extensum applicetur 
vulneri ad aërem arcendum & continenda reliqua. 
5- Emplastrum roborans, calisaciens, carminans, 
stomachicum. 
ꝶ. Emplast. de bacc. laur. 
Cumino ana q. s. 
Malaxata cum balsam. peruv. tantillo ex- 
tende super tela gossypina, scutiformi, te- 
ge sindone rubra decussatim interpassata. 
D. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod calidum regioni ventri- 
culi apponatur, & subinde balsami peruviani, aut 
olei vel spiritus menthœ tantillo irroretur.
Z 6. 

338 Plasters. 
6. Sparadrapum ad fonticulos 
ꝶ. Emplast. diapalm. 
Grat. Dei ana pt. ij. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec.press. pt. j.
Calore leni sub continua agitatione colli- 
qnatis turn ab igne remotis intinge lon- 
ga chartæ albæ, satis firmæ, segmina, 
tres circiter digitos lata: rite infecta 
exime, extende, cultro æqua, suspende,
ut sponte siccescant, turn in segmenta 
quadrata discinde & exhibe. 
S. Chartœ inceratœ pro deligando fonticulo. 
7. Sparadrapum pectorale, emolliens, resolvens,
ad tussim a frigore suscepto. 
ꝶ. Unguent, althœœ comp. ℥j. 
Adipis gallin. ℥iij. 
Olei press. sem. papav. ℥ß. 
Cerœ citrin. rec. ℥jß.
Simul leni igne liquifactis immisce 
Rad. irid. florent. subtiliss. pulv. ʒj. 
Olei express. nuc. myrist. ℈j. 
Detentis in fluore immerge telam lineam ve- 
terem magnirudinis & figuræ in charata
transmissa descriptæ: probè imbutam 
extende, læviga, & laxè convolutam ex- 
hibe. 
S. Tela emplastica, quœ pectori apponatur; tegatur 
panno laneo, rubro villoso, aut pelle cati.
8. 

339 Plasters. 
8. Emplastrum resolvens, ad contusa. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 83. 
ꝶ. Bryon. in farin. redact. ℥ij. 
Flor. sulphur. ℥j. 
Mercur. nigri  ʒiij. 
Galbani puri & s. a. soluti ℥iv. 
Emplastr. de melilot. ℥ix. 
Ol. chamamel. q. s. 
Ut F. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo inductum applicetur parti 
contusœ. 
9. Emplastrum nervinum, anti-arthriticum. 
♃. Emp. è cumin. ℥j. 
Ung. opodel. ʒiij. 
Sal. vol. ammon. 
Camph. subt. pulv. 
Ext. thebaic. ana ʒß.
Ol. petrol. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & regioni, vel parti- 
bus affectis tepide applicandum. 
10. Emplastrum suppuratorium, adhesivum. 
♃. Emplast. diachyl. cum mucag. 
Pic. burgundic. ana ʒvj. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Extendatur q. s. super linteum crassum, vel potius 
alutam, parti affectœ applicand.
Z2 11. 


340 Plasters.
11. Emplastrum anodynum. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. ℥ij. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥ß. 
Ol. nicotian. ʒij. 
Camph. pulv. subt. 
Sacch. saturn.
Opti ana ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Extende super linteum duplicatum, & lateri affecto 
vel parti dolenli applicetur.
12. Emplastrum emolliens, & refrigerans. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℥jß. 
Cerœ albœ ℥j. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ʒx. 
Commistis & ab igne remotis, insperge 
Sacch. saturn. pulv. subt. ʒiij. 
Camph. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
S. Extende super pannum linteum, & ung. merc. in- 
unct. applicetur ad hœmorrhoidas cœcas externas. 
13. Emplastrum discutiens, commune. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. 
è cicut. cum ammon. aā ℥j. 
Ung. cœrul. ℥ß. 
Camph. 
Opii ana ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle, lenissimo 
calore. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & parti affectœ vel 
regioni viscerum infarct. applicandum. 
14.

341 Plasters. 
14. Emplastrum epuloticum, ad familias. 
♃. Cerœ citrinœ rec. ℥ij. 
Mellis commun. ℥ß. 
Croci opt. ʒj. 
Sacchar. albiss. 
Sperm. ceti aa ʒvj. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ℥iij ß. 
M, F. s. a. emplast. mediæ consist. 
S. Emp. vulner. super pannum linteum album, vel 
sericum nigrum extendendum, & in abrasionibus 
cutaneis, incisuris levioribus, &c. applicandum. 
15. Emplastrum ad strumas, discutiens. 
♃. Emp. è cicut. 
de sapon. aa ℥j. 
Hydrarg. (in pauc. tereb. extinct.) ʒvj. 
Camph. (in ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. solut.) 
℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. In glandularum infarctionibus, partibus affectis 
applicandum. 
16. Emplastrum hystericum. 
♃. Gum. ammon. 
Galban. colat. 
Assa fœtid. ana ʒij. 
Cerœ citrinœ ʒj. 
Bals. sulph. succinat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
Ut in fronte. Super alutam extendendum, &
regioni hypogastricœ applicandum.
Z3 Nota.

342 Of Cerates. 
Nota. To the form of sparadrapes we might add 
several others composed of talc, camphir, borace, 
wax and oil; entitled telae cosmeticae ( P. Morell. 
meth. prescr. form. p. 246.): but as these hardly 
ever come under the extemporaneous prescription 
of a physician, there is no great occasion to insert 
them in this place. 
Of CERATES. 
§.415. A CERATE (ceratum, cerotum, cerelae-
um,) is a kind of soft emplaster 
(§.405.), coming near to a midling consistence 
between an ointment and emplaster. But as we do 
not at present, as they did formerly, call every 
composition of wax, whether ointment or emplas- 
ter, a cerate; the distinction of this form into li- 
quid and solid, does also of consequence vanish. 
§.416. The MATERIALS, ELECTION, OR- 
DER, DOSE, and GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form, hold the same here as in the emplaster 
(§.406 to 409.). A cerate derives its names (§.415.) 
from the wax and oil in its composition: but those 
substances are at present no such constant ingre- 
dients, but that they are often omitted, and the 
cerate composed of other similar substances, enu- 
merated at §.406, and 407. This is also a compo- 
sition very seldom in extemporaneous practice; but 
more frequently occurs among the officinals: and 
when an officinal cerate is not at hand, suitable to 
the intention, any of the emplasters may be rea- 
dily reduced to its consistence by the addition of 
some oil, mollifying it (per §.407. n° 14.). 
§.417. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is what it principally 
differs in from the emplaster: for the proportion
here, should be of oil ℥j. wax ℥ß. powders ʒj. or
ʒjss. more or less, according to their specific 
weight:


343 Of Cerates. 
weight: or excluding the powders, the wax may 
be augmented to ʒv. But observe 
1. That there is a sort of latitude for varying 
the proportions of this form, in order to make 
the cerate sometimes a little softer, or harder, 
than at others; nor are the specified proportions 
constantly observed in prescriptions: in so much 
that what is placed under the title of cerates in 
some shops, would be rank’d among the class of 
ointments or emplasters in the hands of others. 
2. For the rest, what we have before repeat- 
ed (at §.410. n° 3 to 11.) is also in this place 
applicable to the form of cerates. 
§.418. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPER 
SCRIPTION, or direction to the apothecary and 
patient for this form, is much the same as for the 
emplaster (at §.411. and 412.); supposing you 
do but change the name (§.415.). Sparadrapes 
(§.411. n° 2.) are also more frequently made from 
this form than from emplasters; because the sub- 
stance of a cerate is more soft and pliable, and so, 
more convenient (per §.410. n° 1.). Cerates are 
also transmitted to the patient, and reserved for 
use, in gallipots or bladders, when they are to last 
any considerable length of time; otherwise they 
might melt and run about, or become too hard and 
dry, thro' keeping. Their greater degree of soft- 
ness, renders them also capable of being spread upon 
proper vehicles with much more ease, than plasters. 
§.419, The USE of cerates is much the same 
as of emplasters (§.413.); and we may venture 
to say they are in more frequent use than the latter; 
for many forms which are prescribed under the 
title of emplasters, are cerates in effect and consi- 
stence. Its less degree of hardness and tenacity, in 
comparison with an emplaster, gives it a greater 
recommendation, in cases where the virtues are to 
penetrate deeper (per §.410. n° 1), where the  
Z4 parts

344 Cerates. 
parts to be cover’d are very tender and sensible, or 
seated in some moveable articulation, or when we 
are apprehensive that a more consistent form will 
do harm (per §.413.). 
§.420. FOR SPECIMEN, take the following. 
1. Ceratum exsiccans, obtundens, antiphlogisticum, 
ad ulcera tibiarum inveterata. 
ꝶ. Cerat. desensiv. cœrul. pharm. leid. 
℥iij. vel q. v. 
D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus q. s. extensum super linteo applicetur ulceri, 
prius puro, siccis, aut idoneo balsamo imbutis, carp- 
tis tecto. Renovetur quovis die semel. 
2. Ceratum adtrahens, emmenagogum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 214. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. oxycroc. 
de melilot. ana q. s. 
Cum ol. rutœ q. s. malaxando in con- 
sistentiam cerati redacta extendan- 
tur super aluta lunata juxta exem- 
plum transmissum. 
D.
S. Pubis & inguinibus applicetur. 
3. Ceratum resolvens, ad scirrhum lienis. 
ꝶ. Gumm. ammoniac. 
Galban. ana ℥ß. 
Dissolvantur in acet. squillitic. q. s. & cum 
Cerœ citrinœ ℥ß.
Ol. infus. absynth. q. s. 
Leni igne colliquata redigantur in cera- 
tum, quod super aluta ovata, in- 
star linguæ bubulæ, extensum. 
D. 
S. Ceratum spleneticum, hypochondria sinistro in re- 
gions splenis applicandum. 
4.

345 Of Ointments. 
4. Ceratum ad scabiem, lepram, &c. 
♃. Emp. de cicut. cum ammon. 
mercurial. aa 
Ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. 
M. F. ceratum. 
S. Super pannum linteum extendendum, & cuti af- 
fectœ applicandum. 
Of OINTMENTS. 
§.421. AN OINTMENTS or unguent is an ex- 
ternal, soft medicine; not so hard as 
a cerate (§.415.), but coming nearer to the con- 
sistence of thick honey, or an electuary (§.138.): 
melting with a small heat, and composed chiefly 
of oleaginous and ceraceoas substances; which are 
to be rubbed upon the suface, of divers exter- 
nal parts of the body, or applied upon some 
proper vehicle, to answer various medicinal inten- 
tions. 
§.422. The MATERIALS for this form, are in 
general the same as for an emplaster or cerate 
(§.406. 416.). 
§.423. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is also determined by the same circumstan- 
ces, as at §.407. viz. 
1. In the composition of an ointment are re- 
quired (1.) a consistence sufficient to preserve it 
from melting in the air, but so as to make it 
soft and pliable in the cold, resembling, as it 
were, soft lard. (2.) Its softness should also be 
joined

346 Of Ointments. 
joined with smoothness and lubricity, without 
any roughness or gross parts. (3.) It requires 
an equable distribution and uniform commixture 
of its ingredients. From hence, we may per- 
ceive what materials are fittest for this form; 
and what kind of preparation they are to under- 
go. Consult §.407. n° 1. and 2. 
2. Oil (§.406. n° 1. (1.)), fat (ib. (2.)), 
turpentine (ib. (3.)), wax (ib. (4.) ), or sub- 
stances analogous to these (§.410. n°3.), being 
melted together in a due quantity, will compose 
an unguent without any other addition: so that 
in this form there is no occasion for any of the 
excipienda (§.406. n° 2.), unless such should 
be required by the indication.
3, Wax, pitch, resins, gum-resins, officinal 
emplasters and cerates, or the like (§.406. n°1. 
(4.)). being mollified with oil, separately, or 
several of them in conjunction, will compose an 
ointment without any other materials (§.ib. 
n° 1. (2.) (3.) and n° 2.). 
4. Even lard, marrow, butter, &c. (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.)) have naturally of themselves the 
consistence proper to an ointment, without any 
other addition of either liquid or solid substances 
(§.ib. (1.) (4.)); but if either of these be re- 
quired a little softer, which is frequent in ex- 
temporaneous practice, they may be made so by 
the addition of a little oil; if they are desired 
somewhat more consistent, they will acquire that 
by mixture with a little wax, or some fine pow- 
der. But to reduce the more tenacious turpen- 
tines into an ointment, requires a previous atte- 
nuation and division of their parts by lard, oil, 
or the yolks of eggs. 
5. Hence, wax and turpentine are not such 
constant and necessary ingredients in this form,
as


347 Of Ointments. 
as in that of a plaster (§.407. n° 4.). They 
are both frequently excluded the composition of 
extemporaneous unguents. Wax also renders an 
ointment punch less apt to penetrate into the 
parts.  
6. If an intention persuades us to take watery 
liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) into this form, 
they are to be first boiled with the fat or oil 
(§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.)), in order to exhale their 
aqueous parts: so that what has been said at 
§.407.n°.7. may here take place. 
7. But certain watery liquors are sometimes 
reduced into an ointment, merely by a long tri- 
turation with fat substances, without any boiling: 
as we learn from the composition of rosaceum, 
and nutrilium: by which last, it appears that 
two liquors will inspissate into an ointment, 
without evaporation; but this will hold in but 
few instances. 
8. Besides the excipienda (§.406. n° 2. 
(2.)), this form sometimes takes in pulps and 
electuaries, to be intermixed with its other fat 
and glutinous ingredients. Even the whole mass 
of an ointment is sometimes composed, like an 
electuary, without any oily or fat substances at 
all: as we see in the preparation of Ægyp- 
tiacum. 
9. To make up powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
into this form, sometimes oil alone, or joined 
with vinegar, is sufficient: which obtains chiefly 
in saturnine unguents. For otherwise it will ge- 
nerally require a mixture of some thick and glu- 
tinous substance (§.406. n° 1. (2.) (3.) (4.) 
10. Very strong and corrosive ingredients, 
which inflame, should be very cautiously used 
in this form: and not at all, unless they are in- 
fringed and curbed by other more lenient sub- 
stances;

348 Of Ointments. 
stances; left they should destroy the skin, or, by- 
running thro' the pores into the circulation, di- 
sturb the whole œconomy. 
11. Such ointments as are intended to operate 
upon the more internal parts of the body, shou’d 
consist of very penetrating substances, and not 
be made of too thick a consistence (V. n° 5.). 
12. In prescribing this form, it is more ad- 
visable to order the officinal compositions of this 
kind, either separately or combined together; 
which may be adapted to the intention, by an 
extemporaneous addition of other ingredients. 
Consult §.407. n° 14. 
13. For the rest, what has been said (at 
§.407. n° 8. to 13, and 14.) does also here take 
place. Though several kinds of salts are fre- 
quently prescribed in this form, yet the mineral 
calces very seldom enter the composition of oint- 
ments, especially extemporaneous ones. 
§.424. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for ointments, is much the same 
with that used in emplasters at §.408. 
§.425. The DOSE of this form is to be deter- 
mined by the size of the part to be anointed, nor 
does it require any other limitation. 
§.426. The GENERAL QUANITY of this form 
to be prescribed and transmitted to the patient at one 
time, is limited by the consideration at §.425. as 
also from the continuation and frequency of its 
application, so that sometimes an ounce may suf- 
fice, when at other times the case may require 
above a pound. 
§.427. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredients 
for this form, may be deduced from §.410. and 
417. compared with §.421. 423. But observe, 
1. That the consistence of this form is not 
so precisely limited, but that it may be made a 
little

349 Of Ointments. 
little thicker or thinner, according to the par- 
ticular intention, as will appear from viewing 
the consistence of several officinal ointments. 
Soft ointments are bed adapted for tender and 
sensible parts, for penetrating and for entering 
the pores by friction, &c. The more solid and 
consistent ointments stop up the pores, are 
more slowly imbibed by them, and rather ob- 
struct perspiration. 
2. The materials fit for this form are of a 
threefold consistence (§.422.): liquid, soft and 
solid; so that the proportion of each ingredient 
is to be varied, according as the ointment is to 
be more soft, or else consistent (per. §.421. 
423. n° 1. 427. n° 1.). 
3. The soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (2.) 
(3.)) mix’d together in any proportion will make 
an ointment; but if you are apprehensive it will 
be too consistent adjoin q. s. olei. For the parti- 
cular management of the turpentines for this 
form consult §.423. n° 4. 
4. A mixture of oil ℥j with ℥ij or iij. of 
wax or similar substances compose an ointment 
per §.410. n° 3. If to the wax and oil we add 
a powder §.406. n° 2. (3.), the wax should 
then be proportionably diminished, so that we 
may order of wax ʒij, of powder ʒj, or ʒjß. 
or the quantity of powder being determined, 
the wax may be prescribed q. s. unless you are 
sensible that the powder and oil together will of 
themselves form an ointment per §.423. n° 9. 
and in that case the wax being omitted, the 
quantity of powder may be augmented to ʒiij. 
and sometimes ʒjv. 
5. Hence we learn what is to be done when 
the soft substances n° 3. are added instead of 
the powder, n° 4. for the proportion of those
ingre-  


350 Of Ointments. 
ingredients may remain nearly the same as if 
those soft substances were omitted. 
6. If you prescribe ung. nutritum of oil and 
vinegar of lead, per §.423. n° 7; the propor- 
tion of each may be nearly equal parts, or either 
of them may be ordered by q. s. cape: if the 
ointment consists of oil, simple vinegar and su- 
gar of lead, or any of the saturnine calces, the 
two first may be prescribed ana pt. 1. and of the 
two latter pt. ß. 
7. If the basis of this form is an officinal oint- 
ment, you will easily perceive from the consi- 
stence of its other ingredients, whether any, of 
how much wax will bring it to a consistence, 
which is generally prescribed by q. s. Oil will 
reduce its consistence, wax will increase it, when 
it exceeds either way. 
8. Lastly; to this place also belongs what 
has been said at §.410. Substances which are 
only analogous to oil and sat §.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2.) are not so constant ingredients in this form. 
§.428. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, varies 
with the different method of preparing it; it either 
orders only simple mixture, when there is no oc- 
casion for the use of fire; or the mixture may
be order’d to be done gradually, and made uni- 
form by a continued triuration, when the oint- 
ment is to consist of a mixture of sat and watery 
substances (per §.423. n° 7. 427. n° 6.) the 
mixture by triuration is then term’d nutritio, and 
the ointment, nutritum. Or, the composition may 
be order’d by melting, or by boiling, as well as 
mixture; the directions for which are much the 
same as in the emplaster §.411. n° 1. The pre- 
scription may conclude F. s. a. unguentum vel nu-
tritum. D. ad fictile. This form is seldom applied 
upon leather like the emplaster at §.411. n° 2.
but 


351 Of Ointnients. 
but when it is thus used, the margin of the latter 
should be spread about a finger’s breadth with 
some sticking emplaster, in order to prevent the 
ointment from melting and falling oh by the heat 
of the part. 
§.429. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains nothing very 
particular, except the method of using it. The ap- 
plication or inunction of this form upon particu- 
lar parts, is usually performed by spreading it first 
upon linen, leather, srap’d lint, pledgets, tents, or 
in walnut-shells, &c. But it is very usual to pre- 
mise hot or cold bathing, lotions and frictions be- 
fore inunction of the parts. For the rest, what 
relates to the chusing a proper part of the body, 
the length of time, and frequency of using the 
ointment, with the proper regimen, &c. is to be 
deduced from the physician’s indications in parti- 
cular cases. Consult §.328. n° 2. 5. 7. It is advi- 
sable to be cautious in the use of ointments which 
are corrosive, cathartic or mercurial, &c. left the 
too frequent or long continued use of them should 
bring on a salivation, a superpurgation, or other 
bad symptoms. 
§. 430. The USE of ointments is very frequent 
with physicians as well as surgeons; in order to 
mollify, disperse, maturate, deterge, warm, 
strengthen, alleviate, obtund acrimony, &c. which 
virtues it communicates not only by external ap- 
plication, but frequently by internal exhibition, in 
which case it acts more potently on the internal 
parts; being promoted in that action by its con- 
sistence being more soft and penetrating than a ce- 
rate or emplaster. The effects of this form exter- 
nally applied, are sufficiently obvious in the use of 
mercurial, cathartic, and opiate ointments, which 
produce a spitting, purging, or constipation; but 
an unseasonable or improper use of some ointments. 
proves

352 Ointments.
proves frequently pernicious by relaxing the fibres 
too much, by obstructing the cutaneous pores, or 
by acting too roughly upon some of the internal 
viscera. 
§.431. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Unguentum digestivum ad contusa, attenuans, 
antisepticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 76. 
ꝶ. Tereb. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n°.j. 
Exacte mistis admisce 
Unguent. basilici ℥ij. 
Aloës puræ ʒiv. 
F. s. a. unguentum. 
S. Hujus tantillum plumaceolis exceptum imponatur 
loco contuso, tegatur emplastro de galbano & fo- 
mento ibid, descriptis. 
2. Unguentum anodynum, motum sedans, scirrho 
dolenti aptum. Ibid. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Aceti lithargyrii ℥j. 
Ol. express. sem. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. alb. 
Rosar. infus. ana ʒij. 
F. s. a. nutritum, cui sub finem admisce 
Opii puri gr. vj. 
S. Nutritum pacans, quo leniter inungatur locus af- 
fellus, ac dein tegatur emplastro, ibid. descripto. 
3.

353 Ointments. 
3.Unguentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Fellis taurini. 
Aloës pur. ana ℥j. 
Unguent. althœœ ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici: 
aut pars dimidia juglandis nucis putamine excepta 
eidem loco apponatur. 
Cautelam huic necessariam vid. ibidem.  
4. Unguentum laxans, mitigans, sopiens, ad pleu- 
ritidem. Ibid. p.150. 
ꝶ. Unguent. popul. 
Althœœ. 
Nutrit. ana ℥j. 
M. 
F. unguentum. 
S. Hoc calido latus dolens, ter de die, inungatur, 
superponendo dein somentum, ante in histor. epithe- 
matis liquidi, p.232. descript. 
5. Unguentum emplastrodes, roborans, calesaciens, 
stomachicum ad nauseam vel vomitum à pertur- 
bato liquidi nervosi motu ortum. 
ꝶ. Cerat. stomach. Galen. 
Theriac. Andromach. ana ʒvj. 
Ol nuc. myrist. express. ʒj. 
Bals. peruvian. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. unguentum: illinatur aluti scuri- 
formi, cujus margo ad digiti latitudinem 
obducta sit emplastro mucagin. aut meliloti. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod regioni ventriculi ap- 
plicetur. 
Aa Nota.

354 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Nota. From the history of ointments, may be 
understood the composition of internal vulnerary 
balsams, or potable ointments; which are used in 
almost the same intentions with some electuaries 
or pills (§.138. 160.) External vulnerary bal- 
sams do generally differ but little from ointments: 
though they are sometimes softer; but are hardly 
ever prescribed or prepared in extemporaneous 
practice 
Of Odoriferous BALSAMS. 
§.432. A PERFUMED OR ODORIFEROUS BAL- 
SAM, is a kind of ointment (§.421.) 
composed of the more fragrant and strong scented 
ingredients, incorporated with some of the more 
tenacious, and oily or fat substances, serving for 
the inunction of several parts, and invested with 
very strong, odorous and active principles. Hence, 
it seems to differ but little from an ointment. 
§.433. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
almost the same as for the ointment (§.422.); 
but are not so numerous: they are either excipient, 
or excipiend. 
1. The excipient substances are either (1.) pri-
mary, being fat and tenacious; as oil of nut- 
megs by expression, white inodorous fats, of the 
hog, &c. the marrow of legs of veal, butter, 
wax, officinal ointments, pomatum, rosatum, 
nervinum, &c. The strong-scented officinal 
balsams, manna, and sometimes gum-resins. 
Or (2.) secundary, oleaginous and liquid: as the 
more common oils by expression, infusion, or 
decoction, and the native liquid balsams, as pe- 
ruvian. copaib. &c. 
2. The excipiend a are also either (1.) primary, 
containing the medicinal virtues, and of a liquid
con-

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
consistence: as aromatic oils obtained by dis- 
tillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, essences, spirits, volatile oily salts, 
&c. or of a thick consistence; as extracts and 
the more potent electuaries; of opium, saffron, 
theriaca, gum-resins, opium itself, musk, civet 
and the like: or dry and solid: as spices, saf- 
fron, cinnamon, cloves, benjamin, castor, am- 
bergiss, amber, its salt; &c. Or (2.) secundary, 
of less consequence, giving some colour, &c. 
for which purpose are used the finest powders, 
magisteries precipitated by alum, with various 
pigments, smalt, cochineal, turmeric, umbre, 
asphaltus, cinnabar, juice of buck-thorn, red 
sanders, the grants chermes, ochres; armenian 
bole, &c. 
§.434. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is to be directed by the intention, and other 
circumstances (at §.423. n° 1.): but as the prin- 
cipal difference of this form from an ointment con- 
sists in its strong penetrating odor, we ought to 
pay the greatest regard to that; left it should be 
weaken’d, dissipated, changed, or made worse by 
the action of other substances. The tinging it with 
some pleasant colour, is indeed less necessary, but 
more usual; nor should it be entirely neglected. 
Hence, 
1. The primary excipient (§.433. n° 1.
(1.)) should be chose the whitest: and most ino- 
dorous; in order to avoid any change of the 
odor and colour to be given it by the excipi- 
enda (§.433. n° 2.). Nut oil by expression, 
being deprived of its colour and smell by spirit 
of wine, is the most frequent in use here; in so 
much that it may well be call’d, as it usually is, 
a body for perfumed balsams. We should be 
cautious that the other fat substances are not ran- 
A22 cid:

356 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
cid: to avoid which, they should be chose very 
fresh, and be sometimes first washed with 
some proper liquor. Nor is it often that any 
other substance is used here, but white virgin’s 
wax. 
2. But there are some cases where a strong 
scented or fœtid excipient is preferable, when 
it happens to agree with the intention and vir- 
tues of the other ingredients: as may several of 
the officinal ointments and balsams, common 
oils of nuts, gum-resins, &c. and in this case 
the indication should direct the choice. The 
colour may be easily corrected or made agree- 
able per §.433. n° 2. (2.). 
3. Wax alone is seldom the excipient; be- 
cause the generality of ingrediens can be suffi- 
ciently mollified by none but oil. Oil also serves, 
by repeated mixture in small quantities, to at- 
tenuate and mix the more soft and fat substance 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) for this form. 
4. There is not always occasion for the se- 
cundary excipients (at §.ib. n° 1. (2.)): only 
when the mass is of too thick a consistence their 
addition may be proper. But then, one should be 
chose without any smell, or else with one agree- 
able to that of the other ingredients. 
5. The primary excipienda (§.433. n° 2. 
(1.)) or ingredients should be chose conformable 
to the intention (§.432. 434.), efficacious in 
a small quantity, and agreeing with each other, 
also capable of an uniform mixture with the ex- 
cipient (§.433.). Therefore those substances 
chiefly which abound in the more active odorous 
parts are principally used in this form; espe- 
cially such as are naturally of an oily or fat con- 
sistence, or else capable of an intimate commix- 
ture with oily substances. Oils by infusion or 
decoction are seldom used in this form, but to
dilute

357 Of Odorifeous Balsams. 
dilute it, when of too much consistence. If dry 
substances are order’d, which are not capable of 
a dissolutipn, they should be first reduced into 
a most subtle powder. 
6. But this form takes in not only fragrant 
substances, but sometimes fœtid ones also: as 
we may learn from what has been said at §.433. 
n° 2. So that musk, civet and ambergriss are 
not always necessary ingredients of this form: 
it is even generally better to omit these, as be- 
ing to many very unpleasant, and to others hurt- 
ful. Consult §.85. and 100. 
7. The pigments or colours (§.433. n° 2. 
(2.)) are generally elected agreeable to the co- 
lour of the medicinal basis, from which the bal- 
sam takes its name, or conformable to the re- 
ceived idea of the virtues it is to exert, or to the 
genius of the disease it is to oppose: hence, to 
the balsam of rue should be given a green co- 
lour; of amber, a yellow; of roses, a red; to
cardiac balsams, a pleasant colour, and to ant- 
apoplectic, or antiepileptic balsams should be 
given a sorrowful, fable, or black colour. But 
it is not always neccessary to colour them in this 
manner. 
8. Yet care should be taken not to use pig- 
ments which are corrosive or acrimonious, the 
use of which would be attended with bad conse- 
quences. But the powder or magistery of the 
substance which composed the basis of a balsam, 
is generally better to colour it than any other. 
If such is not to be had, a quantity of some other 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) may be substituted. 
9. Here also, if there are any officinal bal- 
sams adapted to the physician’s intention, he 
may save himself the trouble of an extempora- 
neous formula; or he may adapt some officinal
Aa3 balsam

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
balsam to his intention, by adding other ingre- 
dients to it (V. §.407. n° 14.). 
10. For the number of ingredients for this 
form, as at §.407. n° 15. so here, brevity is 
commendable. 
§.435. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of this form, is much the same as 
in the emplaster (§.408.). 
§.436. The DOSE of this form is generally but 
small, and never precisely limited; but is propor- 
tioned to the size and number of parts to be anointed. 
§.437. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an 
odorous balsam order’d at a time, is seldom more 
than ℥jß. because of the smallness of its dose 
(§.436.); it is more frequently prescribed in the 
quantity of a few drams only, according to diffe- 
rent circumstances (at §.426. 436.): it may be 
even prescribed in a still less quantity, when the 
balsam is an officinal composition (§.434. n° 9.) 
§.438. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be easily understood 
from §.427; when the consistence of the balsam 
and its ingredients are first determined and known. 
Hence we learn. 
1. That a balsam is usually a little thicker 
than an ointment (§.421. 423. n° 1.); tho' 
sometimes it is of directly the same consistence, 
or a little softer, or even so thin as to come 
nearer to a liniment. Such balsams as are to keep 
any considerable time, to be carried about in the 
pocket, or to serve for perfuming, &c. should be 
of a more hard consistence: but those to be rubb’d 
into parts, should have a softer consistence. 
2. There is therefore hardly any constant pro- 
portion observed between the excipientia and ex- 
cipienda (§.433.); but the more usual is as fol- 
lows, v.g.
Of


359 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Of the excipient or balsamic body (§.434. 
n° 1)—℥j 
—excipienda or ingredients
Liquid ʒj, ij, iij.
thick, ordry ʒss. j, ij.      
—Primary (§.434. n° 2. (1.))  
—Secundary (ib.—(2.)) 
q. s. 
3. Hence it appears, that if the excipient is 
some soft nut-oil, the quantity of thick or dry ex- 
cipienda, should be proportionably increased,and 
the liquid diminish’d; except when you would 
by accident desire to have the balsam very liquid 
(per n° 1.). 
4. It is also usual to add about a dram of wax 
to an ounce of lard, ointment, or other very soft 
excipient (§.434. n° 3.); in order to make 
their consistence equal to that of the balsamic body 
(n°. 2.), the proportion of excipienda (n°. 2.) 
remaining still the same. 
5. If the excipient (§.434. n° 3.) be wax 
only, it will require double the same quantity of 
some fluid oil, to sufficiently mollify it. But if 
any dry substance come also into the composition, 
it is to be estimated as wax. So that it is then. 
chiefly, that there will be occasion to use some 
secundary excipient (§.433. n° 1. (2.) and 
434. n° 3.); that we may not be forced to use 
a larger quantity of others which are dearer 
or stronger. Its proportion may be therefore 
order’d by q. s.
6. If you make additions to some officinal 
balsam (per §.434. n° 9.), their proportion 
should be as their consistences; and then, the 
intention only lays any restriction upon the 
proportion. But if to officinal balsams you also 
add several other substances (n° 1. to 6.) hi- 
therto mentioned, you may easily perceive what 
proportion should be follow’d, or what consti- 
tuent substance should be used, when you are 
Aa4 desirous

360 Of Odoriferous Balsams, 
desirous to avoid too much or little consistence, 
Consult §.427.n°.7. 
7. But very often the excipienda only are 
prescribed in a determinate quantity, and the ex- 
cipient (or accessory substance to make up the 
form) order’d by q. s. or when there are two 
such excipient substances, one of them only 
may be order’d in a determinate quantity. And 
sometimes, the excipientia being determined in 
quantity, the proportion of excipienda is left to 
the diseretion of the apothecary. 
8. For the rest, consult what has been said 
at §.410. and 427. 
§.439. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is prescribed by 
F. s. a. balsamum. D. in pyxide stannea, plumbea, 
eburnea, lignea vel fictili. Sometimes the balsam 
is order’d to be included in half a walnut shell, to 
be applied to and retained upon the navel. The 
method of composition is usually left to the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. 
§.440. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides the 
name taken from the basis and virtues (§.434. 
n° 7.), the method of application; which is ge- 
nerally almost like that of using an ointment 
(§.429.), by inunction or infriction. It is very 
seldom that a balsam is spread upon a vehicle, and 
so applied to a part (§.439.). The particular 
Parts of the body most suitable for the application 
of this form, is usually judged to be such as are 
the most sensible, and where the larged: vessels and 
nerves run the most exposed; as the nose, temples, 
vertex of the head, the wrists, præcordia, &c. 
§.441. The USE of this form in extempora- 
neous Practice, is not very frequent; but it is 
often used merely for pleasure or persuming, and 
some

361 Odoriferous Balsams.
sometimes in morbid affections of the brain and 
nerves: as in epilepsies, apoplexies, vertigos, faint- 
ings; in convulsive disorders, hysteric and hypo- 
chondriac; in pains, flatulencies, &c. where it is 
frequently of service by stimulating, easing, chang- 
ing the motion of the fluids, or acting by some 
other specific virtues. But the surprising activity 
and subtility of these odoriferous principles, with 
their secret manner of acting on the body, not to 
be discovered but by their effects, seems to per- 
suade us to great caution in the use of this form. 
§.442. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Balsamum fragrans, cardiacum. 
ꝶ. Corp. pro bals. ℥ß. 
Ol. stillat. cinnam. ver. ℈j. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈ß. 
Ambar. griss. gr. ij. 
Mosch. orient. gr. j. 
Bol. armen. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. balsam. 
S. Balsamum cinnamomi, naribus, carpis, &c. infri- 
candum. Ambaro & Moscho exclusis, idem fieri 
potest universalius. 
2. Balsamum excitans, antapoplecticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ Ol. stillat. rorismar. 
Tanacet. 
Lavend. 
Rutœ. 
Absynth. ana gtt. iv. 
Infus. castor. ʒj. 
Unguent. nervin. ℥j.
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Pro suffitu sub naribus & circa tempora affricetur. 
3.


362 Odoriferous Balsams. 
3. Balsamum succini, anticatarrhale. 
ꝶ. Olei nucist. express. ʒij. 
Stillat. succin. alb. ʒj. 
Sal. fuccin. volat. ℈j. 
Cera flavœ q. s. 
Colliquatis, cum rad. curcum pulv. q. s. tinctis, 
F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum cephalicum, vertici, temporibus, pone 
aures, affricandum. 
4. Balsamum hystericum. 
ꝶ. Sev. hircin. ℥ß. 
Galban. pur. ʒj. 
Ass. fœtidœ. 
Castorii ana ℈j. 
Ol. stillat. succin. 
Corn. cerv. rect. aa gtt.xxv. 
Sal. volat. corn. cerv. ℈ß. 
Ol. infus. rutœ q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. Balsamus. 
S. In languore aut paroxysmo illinatur naribus, 
temporibus, &c. 
5. Balsamum carminans, stomachicum, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Balsam. caryophyll. arom. 
Theriac. andromach. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. stillat. macis  ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Ut in fronte. Illinatur regioni epigastricœ & 
umbilico: tum operculum figulinum probe calidum, 
aut scutum stomachicum admoveatur. 
6.

363 Of Liniments. 
6.Balsamum suaveolens, ad delicias. 
ꝶ. Unguent. pomat. ℥j. 
Cerœ abiss. ʒj.
Ol. stillat. cort. citri ʒß. 
Aurant. 
Melissœ ana gtt. xij. 
Cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Ochrœ vel rad. curcum. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum citri. Sit pro odoramento. Eo & ca- 
pilli inungi possunt, aut his pectendis adhiberi pec- 
ten eo imbutus. 
Of LINIMENTS. 
§.443. A Liniment or litus, is a kind of 
very soft ointment (§.421.), being 
of a consistence between that of oil and a com- 
mon ointment, subservient to some medicinal in- 
tention by smearing over some part of the body. 
So that this form differs from an ointment in no- 
thing but consistence; and not always in that: as 
will hereafter appear. 
§.444. The MATERIALS for a liniment are in 
general the same as for an emplaster, cerate, oint- 
ment or balsam, preceding (§.406. 416. 422. 
433.).
§.445. But the ELECTION of ingredients fit- 
test for this form, is somewhat different; because 
of the different degree of consistence (§.443.). 
For.
1. This form does indeed require a softness, 
lubricity, and equable or uniform mixture, as 
well

364 Of Liniments. 
well as the ointment (§.423 n° 1. (2.) (3.)): 
but its degree of consistence is so vague and un- 
limited, that it is sometimes permitted not only 
to put on all the intermediate degrees of con- 
sistence between an oil and unguent, but a so to 
have the density of the very ointments or oils 
themselves. 
2. Hence, sometimes mere oils by expression, 
infusion, decoction, or distillation, are the mat- 
ter of this form, without any addition of more 
consistent substances. 
3. At other times, these oils are only mix’d 
with aqueous or spirituous liquors (§.406. n° 2. 
(1.)) by a long attrition or concussion of their 
parts, or by evaporating the more aqueous parts 
by boiling, in order to more intimately mix the 
viscid. 
4. Also the thick substances like an ointment 
(§.406. n° 1. (2.)), as fats, lard, officinal un- 
guents, &c. are sometimes only mix’d with 
each other, without any liquid substance, for 
the composition of a liniment, which then ab- 
solutely resembles an ointment. 
5. But liniments are more frequently com- 
pos’d both of the soft substances (n° 4.) and 
oils together, which makes this form much softer 
than (n° 4). 
6. But. sometimes liniments are compos'd of 
oil combin’d with the more solid substances, 
§.406. n° 1. (4.) n° 2. (2.). 
7. Also the powder (§.406. n° 2. (3.)). 
mix’d with oil only, or with other liquors (n° 3.) 
and joined by trituration or boiling, does some- 
times pass for a liniment. 
8. Hence it appears that those who will may 
compose liniments both of liquid (§.406. n° 1. 
(1.) n° 2. (1.)) thick (ib. n° 1. (2.) (3.) and 
n° 2. (2.)) and dry substances (ib. n° 1. (4.)
n° 2. 

365 Of Liniments. 
n° 2. (3.)), combin’d together in due propor- 
tions: tho' neatness and brevity is also laudable 
in this form (per. §.29.). 
9. There is sometimes occasion for a sapona- 
ceous intermedium in this form, when oily and 
watery substances are to be mix’d together by 
trituration; in order to prevent them from sepa- 
rating from each other by standing. For this 
purpose are used the yolk of an egg, honey, 
sope, alcalies, &c. 
10. Lastly, I would here advise the reader to 
consult what has been said at §.423. n° 5. to n° 6. 
§.446. The best ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients for this form, corresponds 
to that for the emplaster §.408. 
§.447. The DOSE and GENERNAL QUANTITY 
of this form are the same with those of the oint- 
ment at §.425. 426. But as a liniment may he 
readily composed barely by mixture, and as its con- 
sistence and long keeping will subject it much to a 
loss of its virtues, it is generally advisable to pre- 
scribe it in but a small quantity at a time, hardly 
ever exceeding ℥iij or jv. 
§.448. The mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for a liniment, is by reason of its various 
consistence (§.445. n° 1.) very undetermined; so 
that their proportion is generally regulated by their 
virtues. Hence observe, 
1. That this form can never be made of too 
thin a consistence; but too thick, it may: for 
that will obstruct both its illinition and pene- 
tration. 
2. When the liniment is to be composed of 
none but oils (§.405. n° 2.) the consistence 
will then admit of any proportion. But we shou’d 
be cautious not to let those too much predomi- 
nate, which are very hot and acrimonious: for 
these

366 Of Liniments. 
these ought to be tempered by three of four 
times as much of those which are milder. 
3. If you would combine oils with other li- 
quors by trituration (per §.445. n°.3.) it is in 
that case allowable to follow the proportion at 
§.426.n°.6: except when the liquors are spi- 
rituous; and more acrid, or saline, &c; for 
such should be mix’d in less quantities, that they 
may not prove hurtful by their too great 
strength.  
4. When this form is to be composed of a 
mixture of oily and watery substances, whose 
aqueous parts are to be exhaled by boiling, there 
is then no regard to be had to the proportion of 
such aqueous liquors (per §.410. n° 5.).  
5. If you order intermediate substances, (§.445.
n° 4.) alone in this form; then, what is said at 
n° 2. holds good here. But to avoid too great 
consistence (n° 1.), we should consider that some 
of these substances are more dense than others. 
6. If you order 3 ij, iij, of jv of intermediate 
substances (per. §. 445. n° 5.), more or less in 
proportion to their densities, to be mixed with 
℥j of oil, you will then have a liniment of a 
midling consistence (§.443.). 
7. You will also have a liniment of a mid- 
dle consistence from a mixture of oil ℥j. and of 
the more solid substances (§.445. n° 6.) ℥j: 
which will also hold with regard to the species 
at §.ib. n° 7. 
8. Lastly, from a mixture of oil ℥j of inter- 
mediate substances ʒij. and of dry ones ʒß. 
you will have a specimen of this form com- 
posed agreeable to §.445. n° 8. 
9. For the rest, consult what has been said at 
§. 410. 427. 438. a great part of which is here 
of consequence to observe. See also §.445. n° 1.
§.449 


367 Of Liniments. 
§.449. For the SUBSCRIPTION or directon to 
the apothecary for this form, having changed the 
name (§.443.), the method of preparing it may 
be order’d the same as for the ointment (§.428.). 
Sometimes a liniment is sent to the patient in a 
glass phiol, instead of an earthen gallipot, when 
its consistence is very thin, or its virtues extremely 
volatile. This form is seldom extended, like pla- 
sters, upon some vehicle; at least; hardly ever by 
the apothecary. 
§.450. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is apparent from §.429. 
The application of it is almost constantly per- 
form’d by illinition, and sometimes accompanied 
with frictions. When a bladder is to be arm’d with 
some liniment and applied to a part, I should 
ther call it an epithem (§.320.). 
§.451. The USE of this form is the same as 
that of the ointment §.430. but it is better adapt- 
ed to penetrate into the parts. 
§.452. SPECIMENS. 
1. Litus balsamicus, anodynus, ad papillarum 
dolores, &c.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 221. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Infusi hyperici. 
Violar. 
Rosar. ana ℥ß. 
M. F. linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Hujus tantillo subinde oblinatur pars affecta. 
2.

368 Liniments. 
2. Linimentum stomachicum, carminans, calc- 
faciens. 
ꝶ Ol. infus. absynth. 
crocin. ana ℥ß. 
Stillat. menth. ʒj. 
Caryophill. gtt. x. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
M. F. Linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Serviat pro inunctione regionis ventriculi & 
umbilici. 
3. Litus leniens, emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
ꝶ. Mucilagin. sem. cydonior. cum 
Aq. rosar. extract. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec. press. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥ß. 
Exactè mistis F. linimentum. D. ad fictile, 
S. Gingivœ dolentes eo subinde demulceantur. 
4. Linimentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Unguent. Agripp. 
Arthanit. ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici.
5. 

369 Liniments. 
5. Linimentum emmenagogum. 
Ad exemplum ibid. p. 215, 216. 
ꝶ. Gum. sagapen. ℥ß. 
Axung. castor. ʒij. 
Cum Ol. infus rut. q. s. dissolutis admisce 
Ol. stillat. sabin. ʒij. 
bacc. junip. ʒj. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Umbilico, pubi, inguinibus illinatur mane & vesperi. 
6. Linimentum antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 180. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥j. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Spirit, vin. rectis. q. s. 
Dissolutis admisce 
Ol. irini ℥ß. 
Stillat. succin. ʒjß. 
Spir. sal. ammon. ℥ß. 
Ung. net vin. q. s. 
Ut F. linimentum mediæ consistentiæ. 
S. Partes affectœ, prius pannis asperis, siccis, cali- 
dis, frictœ, dein hoc litu perfricentur bis de die. 
7. Litus antipleuriticus mitisicans, resolvens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 150. 
ꝶ. Sacch. saturn. ℥ß. 
Aceti ʒvj. 
Ol. rosac. infus. ℥j 
M. F. nutritum. 
S. Hoc calido inungatur latus affectum ter de die.
Bb 8.

370 Liniments.
8. Alius emolliens Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Lilior. infus. 
Ung. dialthœœ ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Ut præced. Illito loco superponatur solium brassicœ. 
9. Linimentum balsamicum demulcens, ad inter- 
triginem. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. rosar. 
Express. amygd. D. ana ℥ß. 
Ung. nutrit. S. corp. ʒiij. 
Rad. irid. flor. pulv. ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. ʒß. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Eo oblinantur partes adfectæ, prius detersæ. 
10. Linimentum ad ambusta. 
♃. Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Nicotian. ℥ß.
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒiij. 
Camph. pulv. ʒß. 
Ol. hyperic. ℥j.
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus q. s. illinantur partes affectæ, integræ.
11.

371 Of Epispastics. 
11. Linimentum ad scabiem. 
♃. Ung. nicotian. 
Cœrul. ana ʒvi. 
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒij. 
Sulph. viv. exact. trit. ℥ß. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. ℥j.
M. F. s. a. linimentum. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hoc libere inungantur partes affectœ omni nocte, 
calida manu. 
Of EPISPASTICS. 
§.453. EPISPASTICS are very warm, or stimu- 
lating external remedies, to be appli- 
ed to the surface of the skin, in various forms, and 
for various uses. When pitch is the basis of epis- 
pastics, they are termed dropaces; if they are made 
up with mustard-seed, they are then call’d, after 
the antients, synapisms; if their acrimony and sti- 
mulus are only sufficient to excite a redness upon 
the parts, they are termed phoenigmi, or rubefa- 
cientia; if they are strong enough to elevate the 
cuticle into vesicles, or little bladders, they are 
then call’d vesicatories: these are generally exhi- 
bited in the form either of a crude cataplasm 
(§.356. and 365.), an emplaster (§.405. and 413.), 
or a cerate (§.415.). 
§.454. Therefore the extemporaneous prescrip- 
tion of these medicines may be understood by the 
histories of those (loc. cit.). Their MATERIALS 
may be found under the title of stimulantia in the 
materia medica, and their USES shewn and directed 
to by the doctrine of indications; so that there is 
no need to enlarge upon them here (per.7. n° 1. 
and 2. §.8.)
Bb2  §.455.


372 Epispastics. 
§.455. A few SPECIMENS will give a better idea 
of these remedies. 
1. Dropax ad membrum paralyticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Picis ʒij. 
Galban. pur. ℥j. 
Piperis tenuiter contus. ʒiij. 
Castorei ʒj. 
Ol. irini q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. emplastrum ad alutam. 
S. Parti affectœ prius frictœ apponatur calidum; 
priusquam refrixit, iterum subito avellatur: quod 
repetendum donec pars rubeat, tumeat, caleat. 
2. Pasta rubifaciens, antifebrilis. Ibid. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Summit. rutœ virid. ℥jj. 
Semin. sinapi. ʒij. 
Contusa exhibe ad epicarpia. 
S. Applicentur carpis ad pulsuum loca, aliquot horis 
ante ingruentem paroxysmum. 
3. Synapismus cataplasmodes. Ibid. p.240. 
ꝶ. Fermenti acidi pansis ℥vj. 
Rutœ m. j. 
Semin. sinapios contus. ʒvj. 
Salis. 
Aceti ana ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Applica ad cava pedum & poplitum noctes 
atque dies. 
4.

373 Epispastics.
4. Phœnigmus emplastrodes. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 240. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. de melilot. 
Galbani 
Sagapeni ana ℥j. 
M. extende super duabus alutis ovatis. 
S. Applicentur cavis pedum. 
5. Sinapismus fortior veterum, vesicatorius. 
ꝶ. Ficuum siccar. in aq. tepida macerat. 
contusar. part. j. 
Semin. sinapios seorsim tenuissime con- 
tus. part. ij vel iij. 
Accuratè mistis F. pasta. 
S. Applicetur loco indicate, donec vesica enata sit. 
6. Vesicatorium cataplasmodes. Vid. ibid. p. 45. 
ꝶ. Cantharid. sine alis contritar. in pulv.
tenuem. ʒij. 
Accuratè misceantur cum 
Fermenti panis, pauxillo cum aceto 
subacti ʒvj. 
D. 
S. Applica spatio xij horarum, vel donec in vesicam 
manifestò epidermis elata sit. 
7. Emplastrum vesicatorium. 
ꝶ. Empl. de mucilagin. ℥jß. 
Cantharid. sine alis tenuiter pulv. ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
Accuratè mista extende super alutis orbulatis. 
S. Applicentur subutroque poplite, aut alibi; ut in- 
dicatio fert.
Bb3 Of 


374 Of Frications. 
Of FRICATIONS. 
§.456. BY a FRICATION (fricium vel frica- 
torium) we understand an external me- 
dicine which is to be applied by friction, or rub- 
bing into the surface of some soft external part of 
the body. 
§.457. Frications are distinguished into three 
kinds, according to their consistence: dry, soft, 
and liquid. The first is administer’d in the form 
of dry fumes, by rubbing with cloths; but the 
latter, in humid vapours, or wet cloths. 
§.458. The MATERIALS and FORMS for fri- 
cations may be understood from (§.272. 283. 369. 
393. 421. 432. 443.): subservient hereto, are mix- 
tures, lotions, fumes or vapors, ointments, bal- 
sams, liniments, &c. 
§.459. The USE of frications was very consi- 
derable among the antients, and is with us not con- 
temptible at present: those who are acquainted how 
much of some medicines may be introduced to the 
blood by external frictions, and have experienced 
the great effects they produce there, cannot be ig- 
norant of their uses. 
§.460. SPECIMENS of medicines to be used by 
friction, have been occasionally exhibited in the 
several places before cited (§.458.), to which we 
may add one more.  
Fricium, mixturæ mediæ formâ, antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Sp. lavendul. ℥iij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Tinctur. castorei ʒiv. 
Aq. stillat. lavend. ℥vj 
M. 
S. Perfricentur bac cum misturâ partes. 
Of

375 Of a Frontal. 
Of External FORMS, proper to particular 
Parts. 
§.461. I Might here omit to treat particularly of 
these forms; since they are in effect the 
same, and not different from several of those which 
we have consider’d in the preceding histories: 
their difference arising only from their being adapt- 
ed to particular parts (§.294.), from whence they 
take their particular denominations. 
Of FORMS proper to the Head.
Of a CUCUFA, or Scul-cap. See §.331. 
and 342. 
Of a FRONTAL. 
§.462. A Frontal is some external medi- 
cine, to be apply’d to the forehead 
and temples for various uses. 
§.463. The substances applied to these parts, are 
generally either in the form of a dry (§.320.) or 
liquid (§.331.) epithem, a boiled (§.345.) or 
crude (§.356.) cataplasm (but more frequently 
the latter), an ointment (§.421.), balsam (§.432.), 
or liniment (§.443.).  
§.464. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP- 
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient for 
the composition and application of this form, have 
neither of them any thing in particular, except 
the particular name, and the part §.462. Some- 
times the ingredients change the name of this form:
Bb4 as 


376 Frontals. 
as when the mixture, consisting of oil and vine- 
gar, especially of roses, is termed oxyrrhodinum; 
or of constipating substances beat into a cataplasm 
with some liquor, anacollema. For the rest, the 
dry rose-cake, made from the leaves, left after the 
distillation of the water, is sometimes used as a ve- 
hicle (§.328. n° 3.) for this form. 
§.465. The USES of this form are principally 
for cooling, moistening, relaxing, easing, and re- 
pelling; seldom used for the intentions of dispers- 
ing, attracting, warming, &c. and in the appli- 
cation of it for external and internal diseases of the 
head, it requires great circumspection; left by not 
removing, or even fixing, the cause of the disorder, 
there should arise a stupor, or lethargic indispo- 
sition; or by constringing the external parts, it 
should chance to throw the disease inwards. The 
election of ingredients for this form, is self- 
evident. 
§.466. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
l. Oxyrrhodinum demulcens, refrigerans, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Olei infus. rosar. ℥jß. 
Acet. sambuc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. opii cum sp. 
Acet. parat. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij. 
M. s. a. F. oxyrrhodinum. D. cum 
Placent. rosac. 
S. Placenta hoc liquore irrorata fronti & tempori- 
bus utrinque applicelur: exsiccata rursum humec- 
tetur; donec somnus obrepat.
2. 

377 Frontals. 
2. Frontale cataplasmodes, hypnoticum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. hyoscyam. 
Flor. rhœad. ana ʒij. 
Capit. rec. papav. hort. cum semin. 
n°.iij. 
Cum Acet. rosac. q. s. in pastam trita ex- 
hibe. 
S. Inclusa linteo fronti applicentur tepida. 
3. Frontale, linimenti forma, anodynum, discu- 
tiens, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Unguent. nervin. ʒvj. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Croci pulveris gr. viij. 
Ol. infus. chamœmel. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Exceptum stupis cannabinis, duobus linteis, inclu- 
sum, fronti imponatur. 
4. Anacollema constipans. 
ꝶ. Bol. Armen. 
Succ. acaciœ ana ʒij. 
Mastiches. 
Sang. dracon. 
Lap. hœmatit. ana ʒj. 
Cum Album. ov. conquass. q. s. redacta in 
pultem excipe stupis cannabinis. D. 
S. Fronti & temporibus applicentur. 
5.


378 Of Collyria. 
5. Sacculus frontalis, calesaciens, discutiens, ad ce- 
phalalgiam aut vertiginem, a causa frigida natam. 
ꝶ. Herb. rec. rutœ. 
Fol. rosmarin. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Sambuc. 
Summit. anethi ana m. ß. 
Caryophill. arom. ʒjß. 
Conscissa, tusa grosso modo, include binis 
sacculis oblongis, interpassandis. D. 
cum 
Spirtús lavendul. ℥iij. 
S. Alternatim fronti applicentur irrorati prius spi- 
ritu simul exhibito. 
Nota. To this place also belongs the emplastra 
temporalia, which are sufficiently intelligible, from 
what has been said of the emplaster at §.405. 
Of COLLYRIA. 
§.467. A COLLYRIUM is an external me- 
dicine to be applied to the eyes
for various uses. 
§.468. It is often exhibited in many of the forms 
which we have before descibed; as injections 
(§.295), aspersions (§.308.), liquid epithems 
(§.320.), and dry epithems (§.331.), cataplasms 
boiled (§.345.) and crude (§.356.), lotions 
(§.369.), humid vapours (§.383.), fumes 
(§.393), ointments (§.421.), liniments (§.443.). 
And from thence, the necessary directions and pre- 
cautions not be deduced.
§.469.

379 Of Collyria.
§.469. But the very great usefulness, tender- 
ness and sensibility of the organ of sight, being 
easily injured from slight causes, do require the 
utmost circumspection in the use of collyria which 
are either repelling or acrimonious: nor should any 
solid substances be applied, but when they have 
been most exactly levigated, to prevent them from 
offending the eye by their roughness; as in the 
dry collyria or sief of the Arabians, which are ap- 
plied alone, or mix'd with some liquor, wherein 
they are not dissolvable. For the same reason the 
mixture of sharp substances should be very equable, 
and the liquids order’d to be strained. 
§.470. The APPLICATION of collyria differs 
with their particular form, and the physician’s in- 
tention. Such as are liquid are usually applied 
to the eye, by dipping lint or a feather in them; 
or else instill’d, by a small tube or a quill, into 
the eye. Those which are of a thicker consistence 
may be applied by in unction, or spread upon 
some suitable vehicle. The dry collyria may be 
sprinkled, or blown into the eye thro’ aquil. 
§.471. The USES of collyria are many and va- 
rious, being sufficiently well adapted to most dis- 
orders of the eyes, when they are prudently di- 
rected; (§.469.) by mollifying, strengthening, 
maturating, resolving, cooling, easing, cleansing, 
&c. 
§.472. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

380 Collyria. 
1. Collyrium liquidum, antiphlogisticum, rep-
pellens, in initio ophthalmiæ externæ. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. plantag. 
Rosar. 
Troch. alb. rhas. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. gr. vj. 
M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Collyrium, quo concusso imbutum linteum quadrupli- 
catum imponatur oculo affecto: recentetur omni 
trihorio. 
2. Collyrium cataplasmodes, antiphlogisticum 
emolliens, demulcens. 
ꝶ. Pom. dulc. q. v. 
Assentur sub. cineribus, aut cum 
Lact. dulc. q. s. coquantur ad molli- 
tiem. Pulpæ per setaceum tra- 
jectæ ℥j. admisce 
Micœ panis alb. ʒvj. 
Album. ovi in liquorem conquass. q. s. 
Ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo exceptum calidè admoveatur 
oculo firmetur sine compressione. Renovetur quar- 
ta quavis horâ. 
3.

381 Collyria. 
3. Collyrium vaporosum, stimulans, roborans ad 
paralysin palpebrarum. 
ꝶ. Herb. majoran. 
Thymi. 
Mar. syriac. ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. 
Chamœmel. 
Bacc. juniper. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, D. ad Chartam. 
S. Species roborantes quarum pars quarta cum vin. 
rubr. pint. 1/4 infusa per horam maceretur tum ebul- 
liat vase aperto, & vapor exhalans per infundibu- 
lum determinetur ad oculum affectum, spatio qua- 
drantis horœ. Id fiat manè & vesperi. 
4. Collyrium siccum, detergens, leniter erodens, 
ad delendas cicatrices opacas corneæ diaphanæ. 
ꝶ. Sacchar. cand. albiss. ℥j. 
Almiin. ust. ℈ij. 
Vitriol. alb. gr. x. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Hujus tantilium bis de die loco erodendo imponatur. 
5. Collyrium, formâ unguenti, ad trachoma. 
ꝶ. Ung. rosac. ℥j. 
Tutiœ prœparat. ʒij. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j. 
Camphor. gr. vj. 
Ol. infus. rosar. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Hujus tantilium illinat palpebris omni vesiperâ,  
cubitum iturus.
Of 


382 Of Errhins.
Of FORMS proper to the Nose. 
§.473. NASALIA, are certain medicines to 
be applied to the internal parts of 
the nose; as well for pleasure, as for the cure of 
particular diseases. Among these, some are apply'd 
in gross substance to the nose, or their vapours on- 
ly are expell'd by heat; which we then term er- 
rhins: others, exhaling their vapours spontane- 
ously, only affect the organs of smelling; and are 
called odoramenta, or smelling-bottles, balls, &c. 
Of ERRHINS. 
§.474. ERRHINS have various forms, and are 
in general either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are infusions (§.211.), de- 
coctions (§.224.), juices (§.235.), emul- 
sions (§.246.), mixtures (§.272.) and drops 
(§.283.). 
2. The soft are electuaries (§.138.), oint- 
ments (§.421.), balsams (§.432.), liniments 
(§.443.). 
3. The solid are powders (§.106. 308.) of 
the two finer kinds (§.107. and 309.), fumes 
(§.393.), pyramidal tents properly call'd na-
sals, which are composed of some powder and 
a glutinous mucilage v. g. the whites of eggs, 
turpentine, honey, labdanum, wax, &c. com- 
pounded as for troches (§.172.): But are some- 
times simple, as ex rad. betœ, cyclaminis, iridis, 
&c. cut into a proper form, or ex sol. betæ, 
nicotianæ, cort. recent. aurant. &c. twisted to- 
gether in a suitable manner.
§.475.

383 Of Errhins.
§.475. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for errhins, with what belongs to them, may be 
learned from the physician’s intention, and their 
various forms (§.474. and loc. ibid. cit.). 
§.479. The APPLICATION of liquid errhins 
(§.474. n° 1.) is performed by injection (§.295.), 
by snuffing them in, and washing them but again, 
(§.369.) by evaporation (§.383.), or like a 
liquid fomentation (§.320.), by introducing 
scraped lint, tents, &c. The soft errhins (§.474
n° 2.) are apply’d either by injunction, or by 
snuffing them up with some proper vehicle, to be 
hereafter mentioned. Errhins of the powder kind 
(§.474. n° 3.) are drawn up the nose like snuff; 
fumes are conducted into the nostrils by a funnel, 
and tents are introduced or thrust there. 
§.477. The USE of errhins is recommended 
by their various virtues, of astringing, mollifying, 
relaxing, easing, opening, stimulating, and by ex- 
citing to sneeze, absterging and discharging the 
mucus, &c. by which operations they may prove 
serviceable not only in diseases proper to the nose, 
but also in those of other parts, where an evacu- 
ation by this emunctory is proper. We should 
also consider what an effect sneezing has upon the 
whole body, by violently shaking it, and whether 
the patient has been accustomed to an evacuation 
at this part, by a constant habit of taking errhins, 
not easy to be broke off. 
§.478. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1.


384 Errhins. 
1. Dococtum mundans ad ozænam. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristoloch. rot. ℥ß.
Herb. veronic.
Menth. ana m. j.  
Cum Aq. pur. q. s. quoque vase clauso per 
1/8 horæ. Colat. ℥xij. adde 
Tinct. myrrh. 
Aloës ana ℥ß. 
Mell. rosac. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur hujus repidi q. s. aliquoties de die: 
turn gossypium aut carpta eo imbuta applicentur. 
2. Liquor stipticus ad narium hæmorrhagiam. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 161. 
ꝶ. Alumin. rup. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. plantag. ℥j 
M. solve. 
S. Turundis ingestis applicetur cavo narium. 
3. Suffitus roborans, nimiam per pares destilla- 
tionem minuens. 
ꝶ. Mastiches. 
Olibani. 
Succini. 
Gumm. anim. ana ʒj. 
Herb. sicc. puleg. ʒij.
M. F. pulvis grossus. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Pujillus hujus prunis inspergatur, fumusque tecto 
capite excipiatur naribus.
4. 
 

385 Errhins. 
4. Electuarium errhinum ad gravedinem. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. galang.  
Irid. florent. ana ʒj. 
Zinziber. ʒß. 
Piper. alb. ℈j. 
Mellis comm. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S. Ter, quater de die, tantillum naribus illinatur, 
aut cum turundâ indatur. 
5. Succus errhinus, muci e naribus excretionem
promovens. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. brassicœ. 
Betonic. 
Anagalb. purp. ana q. s. 
Aq. stillat. majoran. ℥j. 
Contusis simul succum exprime, cujus
℥. iv. adde 
Spir. lilior. convall. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Hujus quantum volâ manus capi potest, mane & 
vesperi, naribus attrahatur. 
6. Nasalia ejusdem virtutis. 
ꝶ. Herb. sicc. majoran. 
Rad. ellebor. alb. 
Sem. nigell. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ℈j. 
Mastiches ʒß. 
Muciiag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Aq. rosar. damasc. fact. q. s.
Ut F. s. a. turundæ pyramidales pro nasalibus. 
S. Manè naribus immittatur. 
Cc 7.

386 Of Odoramenta.
7. Pulvis ptarmicus. 
ꝶ. Fol. siccat nicotian. ℥j. 
Majoran. 
Mari syriac. 
Flor. lavendul.
Lilior. convall. ana ʒij. 
Rad. pyrethri pulver. ʒj. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Attrahatur naribus tantilium, tempore matutino, 
ut sternutatio excitetur. 
Of ODORAMENTA, or Medicines 
to smell at. 
§.479. ODORAMENTA (§.473.) may be 
composed of every thing which emits 
or exhales odorous and medicinal particles, whe- 
ther pleasant or unpleasant. 
§.480. Their FORM, like that of errhins. 
(§.474.), is either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are compounded either of offi- 
cinal liquors only, or else of these and some other 
mixtures (§.272. and 283.) compounded to- 
gether. 
2. The soft, are composed of balsams (§.432.). 
3. The solid, are powders (§.106. 308.), 
or troches (§.172.) made of them, with some 
proper glutinous substance, and formed into odo- 
riserous apples, bails, globules, sopes, &c. But 
odoriserous sopes and wash-balls, being pre- 
pared mostly for pleasure, are at present hardly 
any where made and sold, but at the shops of 
persumers.
§.481. 

387 Odoramenta. 
§.481. These liquid balsams, powders, balls, 
apples, &c. are applied either to or near the nose; 
that they may the more strongly act upon the or- 
gan of smelling: the globules are usually carried 
about in the hands or bosom; and the sopes serve 
to wash with. 
§.482 From hence (§.479 to 481.) and from 
our intention, it will be easy to judge what may 
be further necessary in prescribing these things, 
agreeable to the rules of composition. 
§.483. The USES of smelling-bottles, balls, 
&c. are principally for pleasure, or for raising the 
spirits by their stimulus, to determine the course 
of the blood and spirits to other parts, and to cor- 
rect the ambient air. Here also consult what has 
been said at (§.85. 100. 396. n° 9. and 441.) 
§.484. SPECIMENS of balsams have been given 
before (at §.442.): examples of the rest follow. 
1. Vapor stimulans nares, in apoplexia imminente 
a causa frigida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ. Tinct. castor. 
Spir. sal. amon. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Subolfaciat sœpe. 
2. Pulvis odoratus, cardiacus. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat cinnamom. gtt. vj. 
Meliss. 
Rorismar. ana gtt. iv. 
Sal. volat. sicc. de sal. ammon. ℈ß. 
Sacchar. albissim. ℥ß 
Cinnab. nat. subtiliss. levigat. q. s. ad 
coccineum ruborem. 
Accurate, cito, mista immittantur vasculo 
vitreo, obthuraculo vitrio claudendo. 
S. Admoveatur naribus in languore.
CC2 3.

388 Of Stomatics. 
3. Pomum odoratum. 
ꝶ. Lahdani ʒiij. 
Benzoin. 
Styrac. calam. ana ʒij. 
Herb. thymi. 
Mari syriac. ana ʒj. 
Camphorœ gr. ij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
Cum Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. aq. cort. 
citri. solut. q. s. F. pomum. 
Ut supra. Ex iisdem quoque globuli magnitudinis 
arbitrariœ formari possunt. 
4. Sapo fragrans. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥viij. 
Pulv. subtiliss. rad. irid. florent. 
Flor. lavendul. ana 3iij. 
Ol. stillat. cort. citr. gtt. xv. 
Tinct. benzoin. aquâ pnœcipitat. q. s. 
Concorporentur in pastam, ex qua for- 
mentur pilæ hinc inde auri foliolis 
exornandæ. 
S. lavandis manibus, faciei, inservit. 
Of STOMATICS, or medicines proper 
to the Mouth. 
§.485. BY STOMATICS we understand such me- 
dicines as are to be applied to any of the 
internal parts of the mouth and fauces. Of these, 
there are three kinds: dentifrices, to correct the 
dis-

389 Of DENTIFRICES. 
disorders of the teeth and gums; apophlegmatisms, 
to discharge the saliva and mucus of the mouth; 
and gargarisms, to wash the membranes of the 
mouth and fauces. 
Of DENTIFRICES. 
§.486. A DENTIFRICES is either liquid, soft, 
or dry. 
1. Liquid dentifrices are usally composed of 
mixtures (§.272.), or drops (§.283.): but 
sometimes officinal liquors, decoctions, infusions, 
expressed juices, &c. are also used. It is then 
also frequently called collutorium, or collutio. 
2. Soft dentifrices may be prescribed in the 
form of an electuary. (§.135.), linctus (§.149.), 
or liniment (§.443.). 
3. A dry dentifrice may be some powder 
(§.106. and 308.) finer or coarser (§.107. 
309.): which may be made into troches (§.172.) 
or sticks (Styli dentifricii) with some proper 
glutinous substance; which latter, are not so 
much in use at present. 
§.487. The INGREDIENTS and their CHOICE, 
&c. for dentifrices, may be understood from con- 
sidering the nature of the disorder to be remedied, 
and the particular form (§.486.) desired. Mineral 
acids should be used with great caution for the 
teeth; otherwise, they may not only whiten, but 
also dissolve them. 
§.488. The USES of dentifrices are principally to 
render the teeth and gums firm, to cleanse ’em and 
free ’em from any scorbutical taint: they may upon 
occasion be also serviceable to cool and mollify 
the gums, in the difficult dentition of infants. 
§.489. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
CC3 1.

390 Dentifrices. 
1. Collutorium in scorbuto a causa calida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Myriœ limonum. 
Mell. rosac. ana ℥ij. 
Sp. sal. dulc. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. rutœ ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Eo sœpiusculè laventer dentes gingivœ. 
2. Linimentum: Vide in §.452. n° 3. 
P. 
3. Collutio, eclegmatis ferè  formâ, refrigerans, 
emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 236. 
ꝶ. Crem. lact. rec. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥j. 
Syr. violar. ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij 
M. 
S. His foveantur gingivœ dolentes. 
4. Opiata dentes detergentes, firmans. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ß. 
Oss. sepiœ. ppt. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. ana ʒj. 
Alumin. usti. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosac. q. s. 
Ut F. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S Manè & post prandium ac cœnam eo fricentur 
dentes, turn abluantur cum spirit, vini myrrhato. 
5.  


391 Of Apophlegmatisms.
5. Pulvis dentifricus. 
ꝶ. Pumicis ppt. ʒij. 
Flor. balaust. 
Rad. irid. flor. 
Myrrh. rubr. ana ʒj. 
Lap. hæmat. ppt.  
Sal. ammoniac. ana ʒß 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Ut supra. 
6. Trochisci vel styli dentifricii. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedent. 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. cum aq 
salviœ fact. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci vel styli probè siccandi. 
Of APOPHLEGMATISMS, or 
Medicines to excite a Spitting. 
§.490. APOPHLEGMATISMS (§.485.) are 
also prescribed in three forms, liquid, 
soft, and dry. 
1. Liquid apophlegmatisms are frequently 
made of decoctions (§.224.), and mixtures, 
(§.272.), but oftener drops (§.283.); some- 
times infusions (§.211.) and expressed juices 
(§.235.) or other officinal liquors are used, 
either uncompounded or mix’d. 
2. A soft apophlegmatism may be some elec- 
tuary (§.138.).  
3. Of dry, there are various kinds, either 
by the way of smoaking (§.395. n° 1.), as 
common tobacco, or a medicated one; or by 
Cc4 letting


392 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
letting a little cake (§.199.) disolve under the 
tongue; or by chewing something in the mouth, 
commonly termed a masticatory, which should 
be solid, tenacious and pungent: for which pun- 
pose are used the solid parts of the more pun- 
gent, or hot and biting vegetables, or concret- 
ed juices which are difficult to dissolve, and gross 
powders (§.106, 107. n° 2.) made of these 
or things of the like kind, which are either used 
loose in the mouth, when they are dissolvable, 
or else included in a bit of linen cloth, like a no- 
dule (§.219. n° 1. (2.)); or they may be 
formed into troches or pastills, with some glu- 
tinous substance (per §.172.). 
§.491. But we are not always at liberty to use 
any of these forms (§.490.) promiscuously. We 
are to consider which are most suitable to the par- 
ticular indication, seat of the disease, and consti- 
tution of the patient. 
1. For dispatch, upon sudden emergencies, it 
is advisable to use liquid apophlegmatisms(§.490. 
n° 1.), especially simple ones, or prepared only 
by mixture. 
2. The same (§.490. n° 1.) are also prefer- 
able in cases, where tough phlegm is to be se- 
parated, from the posterior or more remote 
parts of the mouth. 
3. Apophlegmatisms of the electuary kind, 
(§.490. n° 2.) are mostly of use when a dry 
or liquid one cannot be retained, turned about, 
and directed by manducation in the mouth: as 
frequently happens in paralytic and comatose 
affections; where an electuary kind of apophleg- 
matism being spread upon the palate, gradu- 
ally dissolves, and acts more effectually. 
4. The smoaking kind of apophlegmatisms 
are intolerable, to many who have been unaccus-
tomed 

393 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
tomed to them, they act too roughly upon the 
nerves; and the smoak not being dextrously ex- 
cluded from the cavities of the nose, larynx and 
pharynx, excites vertigos, head-achs, coughs, 
sickness and vomiting. 
5. Children and nicer patients should not be 
confined to apophlegmatisms which require a 
tedious mastication. They will be better pleas’d 
with little cakes (§.490. n° 3.), in which the 
pungent substances are none of the strongest, and 
cover’d with sugar. 
6. When the humours of the mouth are to be 
discharg’d slowly, in large quantities, or for a 
considerable time, then apophlegmatisms which 
will bear mastication, are preferable to others; 
unless any thing of the former (n° 3, 4, 5.) 
forbids. 
§.492. The MATERIALS for apophlegmatisms 
are taken from those substances, which being put 
into, retained and moved in the mouth, do exert 
a relaxing, or rather a stimulating power; so as to 
solicit a greater discharge than usual of the saliva 
and mucus which are deposited in that cavity. 
(V. H. Boerh. Inst. Med. §.1195. 1197. and 1200. 
n° 1, 2, and 3. ). We have in this place nothing 
to do with medicines which promote spitting, by 
being received into the stomach and exciting a 
nausea; nor with those which produce a ptyalism, 
by being convey’d into, and dissolving the cohe- 
sion of the blood, for we are here treating of 
topical remedies, proper to the mouth (per 
§.485.). 
§.493. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
an apophlegmatism is to be directed by their de- 
gree of strength and form required (§.491.). 
1. The materia medica furnishes the physician 
with a vast field of substances, capable of pro- 
moting

394 Of Apophlegmatisms.  
moting this discharge; some of which are 
stronger, others weaker; but most of them are 
either emollient, saponaceous, aromatic, or re- 
pleat with a sharp or pungent oil or salt; from 
whence the physician is to make a choice, agree- 
able to his intention and circumstances of the 
case. Of these, apophlegmatisms may be easily 
made with various menstrums, watery, vinous, 
decoctions, infusions, expressed juices, &c. of a 
greater or less degree of strength: and their 
composition maybe order'd by the rules at §.211. 
224. 235. They may be qualified for tender 
palates, by adding sugar and honey.
2. The materials proper for apophlegmatisms 
by mixture (§.490. n° 1.) are, distilled wa- 
ters, vinegar, spirits, tinctures, essences, oils, 
and, salts prepared from the preceding ingre- 
dients (n° 1.); which are more convenient for 
this purpose after dilution. 
3. The method of preparing medicated to- 
bacco, and fumes, for apophlegmatisms, has 
been before related, (at §.395. n° 1. 396. n° 4 
and seq.). 
4. Spices, roots, barks, leaves and seeds, which 
are whole, and of the more pungent kind, do 
often undergo a previous maceration in wine, 
vinegar, and spirit of wine. Concreated juices 
of the like nature, which are not of a very dis- 
agreeable smell, will each of them afford an ef- 
ficacious masticatory: such are myrrh, mastic, 
&c. Some can ever chew the leaves of tobacco 
without nausea: and the indians are pleased with 
chewing their betel and arac, mix'd with lime. 
5. Or the preceding ingredients (n° 4.), by 
triture, are formed powders (§.490. n° 3.); 
which being included in bits of linen cloth, make 
nodules; mix'd up with sugar, they may be 
formed into rotulœ or lozenges; incorporated 
with

395 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
with wax, mastich, honey, and other glutinous 
substances, they will form masticatories; but 
mix’d up with equal parts, or more of simple or 
medicated honey, they will afford an electuary: 
all to be used for apophlegmatisms. 
6. In prescribing apophlegmatisms for masti- 
cation, we should constantly abstain from those 
substances which are of a detestible smell and 
taste because they are to come so near, and lie 
so long upon those organs of sensation: though 
by custom or habit, the most nauseous may be- 
come tolerable (per n° 4.). 
§.494. The ORDER, DOSE, GENERAL QUAN-
TITY, PROPORTION,and SUBSCRIPTION for apo- 
phlegmatisms, are suffciently apparent from what 
has been said under these heads for forms of the like 
nature; from comparing what is deliver’d at (§.490. 
to 494.), and from consulting the subsequent spe- 
cimens. The size or weight of pastills for this pur- 
pose, are generally larger than the others (§.177.): 
they are sometimes ℈j, ʒß, or even a whole ʒ. 
§.495. With regard to the SUPERSCRIPTION 
or direction to the patient for apophlegmatisms, 
we need say but little, it is of itself so obvious. 
This evacuation is generally the best excited upon 
an empty stomach: so that these medicines are 
commonly exhibited some hours before meals; ex- 
cept when the least delay is of dangerous conse- 
quence. The discharge is forwarded by inclining 
the head, with the mouth downward; which pos- 
ture will also prevent any of the pungent apo- 
phlegmatism from slipping into the fauces, larynx 
or pharynx. Their operation is seldom continu’d 
longer than half an hour. There will be hardly 
any occasion to order the patient to wash his mouth, 
after the operation, with some mild liquor, as 
warm water, milk, &c. for he will of himself be 
ready enough to do that. 
§.496.

396 Apophlegmatisms. 
§.496. The USES of apophlegmatisms are 
very considerable when judiciously directed, for 
they produce very great effects obtainable by no 
other means, in cold habits and defluctions; in 
comatose, paralytic and epileptic disorders; in lu- 
cophlegmatic or watery habits, the watery quinsey, 
tooth-ach, &c. But the abuse of a good thing, 
in its place, may be of the worst consequence; for 
by depriving the blood of too great quantities of 
its more subtle lymph by the salival glands, it will 
extenuate the whole habit, as at also will by im- 
peding chylification; but when once the body is 
accustomed to it, 'tis no small difficulty to lay it 
aside. 
§.497. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Decoctum apophlegmatizans, ingruente apo- 
plexiâ frigidâ utilissimum. 
Vide H.Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 175. 
ꝶ. Rad. imperator. 
Pyrethri ana ℥j.
Fol. recent. rutœ. 
Majoran. ana m.j. 
Flor. lavendul. m. ß. 
Semin. sinapis contus. ℥ß
Concissa, cum vin. alb. libr. ij. coque per 1/2 
horæ, vase exacte clauso. Colat. admisce 
Spir. sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Mell. anthos. ℥ß. 
D. 
S. Hujus tepidi pauxilium ore detineat ac volutet, 
humorem prolectum jugiter exscreans. Repetat 
pro necessitate urgente, quavis horâ aut citius. 
2

397 Apophlegmatisms.
2. Mixtura similis, odontalgiæ catarrhosæ apta. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. lavendul. ℥vj. 
Spirit. regin. hungar. ℥ij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒj. 
Tinct. sal. tart. helmont. ʒij.
Zinzib. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
M. D. vitro clauso. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Apophlegmatismus, formâ succi pressi 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. becabung. m. j. 
Cochlear. m. ß. 
Rad. recent. ari. 
Armorac. 
Sem. sinapis ana ℥ß
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succum, cui 
admisce 
Vin. alb. ℥j. ß. 
Sacchari alb. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus haustulum, omni manè ore prius aqua eluto, 
contineat aliquamdiu scorbuto frigido laborans, 
tum exspuat una cum saliva sic prolectâ. 
4. Pulvis apophlegmatizans. 
ꝶ. Rad. pyrethri 
Cort. magellanic. ana ʒjß. 
Cubeb. 
Cardamom. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ʒß. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒj.  
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. vj. 
Contusis F. pulvis crassiusculus. D. in scatulâ. 
S. Capiat omni mane, jejunus quantum apice cultri 
sustineri potest, & commandat, exspuatque humorem 
proritatum.
5.

398 Apophlegmatisms. 
5 Rotulæ sialogogæ. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedentes subtilissimè tritas.
Sacchar. albiss. aq. rosar. solut. & in- 
spissat. sextuplum. 
Ut F. s. a. rotulæ, 
S. Una vel duœ sub lingua detineantur, ut sensim li- 
quescant. Excernatur liquidum affluens. 
6. Electuarium ex iisdem. 
ꝶ. Species easdem pulveris, subtilissime 
comminutas. 
Mellis anthos. triplum.
M. exactè. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus tantillum palato affricetur in morbis sopo- 
rosis frigidís. 
7. Nodulus similis. 
ꝶ. Pulver. prœcedent. ʒjß. 
Mastiches  ʒiij. 
Mista illigentur panno lineo, ut F. nodulus. 
S. Mandatur leniter mane per 1/2 horam, ut saliva pro- 
ritetur exspuenda. 
8. Trochisci masticatorii. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 175 
ꝶ. Mastich. 
Cerœ alb. 
Zinzib. ana ℥j.
F. s. a. parvi pastilli, singuli ʒß vel ʒj. 
S. Ut supra. 
9. Pulveres sialagogæ.
Vid. §.126. n° 16. pag. 69.
Of

399 Of Gargarisms. 
Of GARGARISMS. 
§.498. A GARGAISM (§.485.) is a liquid 
medicine, adapted to wash the inter- 
nal parts of the mouth and fauces, for various 
uses. It is also termed (collutio vel collutorium) 
a mouth-wash, when intended for no other use but 
to cleanse and wash those parts. 
§.499. The FORM of this medicine is always 
liquid, generally composed of some infusion 
(§.211.), decoction (§.224.), expressed juices 
(§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), juleps (§.261.), 
or mixtures, (§.272.): and is to be accordingly 
prescribed by the rules for those forms. 
§.500. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for a gargarism, is to be regulated by the physi- 
cian’s particular intention, and the form or kind of 
liquor to compose it (§.499.), in conjunction 
with a consideration of the rules for these heads, 
deliver’d under the internal forms before cited 
(§.499.). 
§.501. The ORDER, GENERAL QUANTITY, 
and PROPORTION for a gargarism, may be also
prescribed by the rules for these heads, delivered 
under the foresaid forms (§.499.). The DOSE is 
never determined by weight, but the capacity of 
the mouth; being as much as may be conveniently 
taken without distending the cheeks. 
§.502. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for a gargarism, orders F. liquor pro 
gargarismate vel collutorio. 
§.503. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for gargarisms, acquaints him with the 
method of applying or using them, which is not 
always the same. For sometimes the liquor is to  
be

400 Gargarisms. 
be shook about in the mouth with the head inclin’d 
backward; that it may the better penetrate and 
cleanse, or soak into the proper parts. At other 
times the liquor is only to be retained in the mouth 
quietly, without any agitation; when it will, by 
its motion, offend the inflamed, or otherwise in- 
jur’d parts, or cannot be prevented from slipping 
into the larynx or pharynx by such agitation. There 
are some other cases which require a gargarism to 
be injected by a syringe: particularly in infants, 
very weak patients, or such as cannot drink. This 
kind of medicine is also more frequently used warm 
or hot, than cold: but the latter is usually refer’d 
when the intention is to astringe or repel. 
§.504. The USE of gargarisms is very consider- 
able in most disorders of the internal parts of the 
mouth, sauces, and parts adjacent; for tumours, 
inflammations, ulcers, the thrush, great drought and 
rigidity, or too great relaxation, watery defluctions, 
and phlegm, &c. When the intention is to mol- 
lify, astringe, moisten, cool, dry up, warm, loosen, 
suppurate, deterge, &c. by this topical applica- 
tion immediately to the parts affected. 
§.505. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Collutio antiseptica, ad ulcera oris, a scorbuto 
putrido nata. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Spir. salis marin. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. salviœ ℥viij. 
M.
S. Hoc liquore colluat os & fauces sœpius de die.
2. 

401 Gargarisms.
2. Collutorium ad anginam inflammatoriam, anti- 
phlogisticum, resolvens, refrigerans. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. sambuc. ℥xvj. 
Acet. vin. destillat. ℥ij. 
Sal. prunell. ʒjß.  
Rob. sambuc. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Callido hoc liquore, ore detento, fauces assiduò hu-
mectentur. 
3. Decoctum emolliens, demulcens, ad promoven- 
dum ptyalysmum mercurialem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphorism. 1475.
ꝶ. Herb. althœœ m. ij. 
Malvœ. 
Flor. rhœad. 
Verbasci ana m.j. 
Rad. glycirrhiz. ℥j. 
Cum Seri. lact. rec. q. s. decoct. spatio 1/4 
horæ, turn colat. express. ℔ij. admisce 
Mellis puri ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Hoc. tepido gargariset & colluat jugiter totum 
oris cavum. 
4. Aliud laxans & detergens, ad crustæ aphthosæ 
lapsum promovendum. 
Vid. Ketelaar de Aphthis p. 38. 
ꝶ. Hordei mundat. ℥j. 
Passul exacinat. ℥ij. 
Ficuum n°.iij. 
Liquorit. ras. ℥iij. 
Coque ex aq. pur. turn cola & exprimè. 
Colat. ℔ij. admisce syr. jujubin. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Tepidum ore semper contineatur, &, sipotè, gar- 
garisetur.
Dd 5. 

402 Of Glysters. 
5. Infusum balsamicum consolidans, ad ulcera fau- 
cium mundata. 
ꝶ. Herb. agrimon. 
Veronic. 
Salviœ. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Betonic. 
Rhœad. ana m. ß. 
Infundantur cum aq. pur. fervid. ℥xx. 
stent per horam infusa, vase clauso, 
tum colat. express. admisce mell. rosat. 
℥ij. 
S. Ut supra. 
Concerning SCUTES: See §.331. 342. 414. 431. 
Of Intestinal GLYSTERS. 
§.506. A Glyster (termed also clysma, ene- 
ma, lavamentum intestinale,) is some 
kind of liquor, to be injected by the anus into the 
rectum, and the other large intestines; with a view 
to alter their morbid state, nourish the body, or 
discharge their fæces. It is therefore a member 
of injections (§.295. & seq.), of which we gave 
a general treatment before, and may from thence 
be in a great measure understood. 
§.507. The MATERIALS, in general, do re- 
ceive, or are received. 
1. The excipiens or receiving, is some liquor, 
either (1.) in vulgar use; as common and smith’s- 
forge-water, new-milk, skim’d-milk, whey, ale, 
wine, urine, &c. Or, (2.) retained in the shops, or
ready 

403 Of Glysters. 
prepared by the apothecary, so as not to require 
extemporaneous prescription; as Aq. stillat. lac. 
chalybiat. dococt. hord, avenœ, specier. emollient. 
carminant. clysmat. ordin. juscula carn. olea pressa, 
infusa, &c. Or (3.) made by extemporanous 
decoction, seldom infusion, agreeable to the phy- 
sician’s prescription. 
2. The excipienda are all things suitable to 
the physician’s intention, and capable of a solu- 
tion in the preceding liquors (n° 1.): either 
in (1.) the watery; as electuaries, juices, extracts, 
salt, sugar, honey, sope, eggs, syrups, &c. Or 
(2.) oily, as oils by infusion, decoction, expres- 
sion and distillation, fats, butter, balsams, espe- 
cially turpentine, ointments, &c. Or (3.) of 
the powder kind not soluble, which are but very 
seldom used in glysters. 
§.508. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be regulated by the different intention 
of the physician, together with the known virtues 
of the medicines, their price, and more or less 
easy preparation, with the other circumstances, 
both of the patient and medicine: and may be 
easily determined in particular cases. Hence 
1. The reader may here peruse what has been 
said before of injections at §.299. 
2. When there is very sudden occasion for the 
assistance of this form, as is frequently the case, 
we may omit infusions and decoctions with the 
other excipienda, and express’d oils, as requir- 
ing a too tedious preparation (per. §.42.). 
Tho' there are not wanting decoctions, &c. rea- 
dy prepared in the shops, adapted to most inten- 
tions. 
3. In prescribing this form, we shou’d avoid the 
more costly ingredients; especially when the gly- 
ster is to be frequently repeated: by which means 
Dd2 we

404 Of Glysters. 
we may prevent the poor patient from suffering 
too much in his pocket, and give the apothe- 
cary no opportunity of sophisticating the com- 
position, who may think any thing good enough 
to wash the grosser intestines, being also sensible 
that this kind of medicine is seldom examined 
into. 
4. The several emollient, carminative, and 
other species of the shops should be avoided, in 
extemporaneous prescriptions, as much as pos- 
sible; because, by long standing, they lose their 
virtues, breed insects, or are otherwise corrupted. 
It will be no great trouble to prescribe those that 
are fresh made. 
5. The mixture of oily and aqueous substances 
for this form, need not be so very intimate or 
exact, as is requisite for the internal ones, (at 
§.274. n° 6.) tho' the addition of honey, yolks 
of eggs, sugar, salt, sope, &c. will answer this 
purpose, at the same time it does other inten- 
tions. The turpentines should indeed be very 
exactly mix’d up with the yolk of an egg for 
this form, that by the division of their parts, 
they may have the greater action: for they are 
commonly us’d as digestives in glysters. 
6. We may ask why some forbid the use of 
acids in glysters, who yet, at the same time, 
make very free with the strongest emetics, and 
cathartics in this form. In short, when there is 
any putrefaction to be corrected, or febrile heat 
to be kept under, there is reason enough to make 
use of the weaker acids. 
7. You may very well omit ingredients of the 
powder kind for glysters, since there are other 
substances enough suitabie to every intention. 
But if you intend to use them, be mindful of the 
caution (at §.299. n° 4.) 
8.

405 Of Glysters. 
8. Salt and oil are improperly left out of gly- 
sters for the worms, for who will say they de- 
light only in sweet things, when they make their 
nests in such as are very acrimonious? When 
they are once kill’d, they quickly dissolve, and 
may be afterwards easily discharged, 
9. When the intention is to nourish by this 
form, nothing can be more proper than flesh
broths, because these do not so much require 
digestion by the intestines, but may be imme- 
diately transmitted to the blood after their 
immission, without any bad consequence; but 
when the heat of the body will much incline 'em 
to putrefaction, it may be proper to season ’em 
with a little salt and spice. 
10. Lastly, as the physician is to do nothing 
without a reason (per §.11, 12. 15.) so, when 
he is directed to prescribe a glyster, he should 
consider what kind will best answer his inten- 
tion, that he may afterwards the more readily 
select the proper ingredients for its composition. 
Hence he will perceive that all the specifics re- 
commended in this form for the head, bread, sto- 
mach, liver, uterus, will hardly do any thing 
more than common diluents, moistners, emol- 
lients, warmers, coolers, discutients, re- 
solvents, and stimulators. Thus the manage- 
ment of this form will become easy to the be- 
ginner, and he will be under no necessity of con- 
stantly adhering to set forms of glysters pre- 
scribed by others. 
11. From what has been said (n° 10.) it 
also appears, that there is no occasion for a nu- 
merous and confus’d mass for this form, one in- 
gredient alone will be frequently sufficient, with- 
out any other mixture; but two of the following 
are used oftener e.g. water, milk, whey, honey, 
sugar, nitre, oil, butter, &c. urine alone, or 
Dd3 common

406 Of Glysters.
common salt dissolved in five times its quantity 
of water, and a decoction of tobacco leaves are 
generally prefer’d when there is occasion for a 
strong stimulus. 
§.509. The ORDER OF prescribing ingredients for 
this form, is the same with that for internal decoc- 
tion. (§.227.) Infusions (§.2l4.) or mixtures (§.275.); 
for to one of those forms all glysters may be reduced. 
§.510. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
for this form are equal to one another, because there 
is seldom more prescribed than is to be injected, at 
a time (§.68. n° 1.). But this quantity varies, 
1. With regard to the age, for which the fol- 
lowing rules of proportion may be of service. 
For a new-born infant—℥ ij. 
One more advanced—℥ iij. jv.
A child—℥ vj, vij. 
An adult—℥ viij. x. xij. 
2. With regard to the patient’s habit: large 
people will bear more; small, less. The quan- 
tity of a glyster should be small, and quickly 
discharged again, when the patient has a diffi- 
cult respiration, intestines distended with wind, 
or externally compress’d by some incumbent 
body, as a large fœtus, water, &c.
3. In proportion to their effects or operations, 
the quantity may be large when the intention is 
to dilute, cool, moisten or mollify, when no- 
thing opposes. When it is to give a strong sti- 
mulus the quantity should be less, left by its sti- 
mulus, and being too large, it may be evacuated 
too soon. When the glyster is to be retain’d a- 
considerable time, then also its quantity should 
be less, which is chiefly to be observ’d in nourish- 
ing glysters. 
4. When the quantity of a glyster is too large 
to be injected at once, it may be proper to give 
it in small quantities, at intervals. 

407 Of Glysters.
§.511. For the mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for glysters, it is hardly possible to be de- 
termined, for all cases, even by general bounds: 
but the physician will find no great difficulty to 
settle the due proportion in his particular case, by 
being attentive to his indication (§.508.), the 
medicinal virtues of the ingredients, and the con- 
stitution of his patient, with the proper degree of 
consistence for injecting (§.299. n° 4.), &c. 
Hence, 
1. When cathartics are given by infusion, de- 
coction, or mixture in glysters, they are gene- 
rally prescribed in a proportion as large again, 
as when to be given internally by the mouth; 
even, upon occasion, three times as much, or 
more is order’d, when the intention is to give 
a strong stimulus. 
2. The proportion of salts which are neither 
acid nor alcaline, as are most of those used in this 
form, may be ʒj or ij, to ℥x of the liquor, 
when intended to give a moderate stimulus. 
But sometimes ℥j or ij, is order’d in the strong- 
est glysters (§.508.). 
3. The proportion of substances in consistence 
like honey or syrup, is very undetermined; be- 
ing limited by the strength of the medicine, and 
after that, its consistence; so that it may be 
deem’d the largest proportion, when these and 
the liquor are taken in equal quantities. 
4. Oily or fat substances are seldom taken in 
a larger proportion than one fourth part of the 
whole, except when they compose the whole 
form. There is seldom more than ℥ß or ʒvj. 
of the turpentines mix’d with ℥x of liquor. 
5. Ingredients of the solid, dry and powder 
kind are never order’d in a large proportion;
left they should run into grumes, or render the
Dd4 form 


408 Of Glysters.
form of too thick a consistence; ʒj, ij, or iij. 
may be enough for an adult (§.310. n° 1.). 
6. Opiates, and the strongest medicines, 
which extend their energy to the habit, and 
insinuate into the minutest vessels, should be very 
cautiously used in glysters. For even in the large 
intestines, there is a considerable intertexture of 
nerves; and there are also some absorbent veins, 
or small lacteals. So that an imprudent use of 
drastic or deleterious remedies in this form, may 
prove of the very worst consequence. A patient 
has been even known to sleep to eternity, by 
giving gr. jv. of opium in a glyster. 
7. We should be also no less circumspect in 
limiting the proportion of remedies which di- 
mulate in this form, considering whether or no, 
in what habits, and what quantity, they may 
be properly used. Or else, by a rash addition, 
or a timorous omission, all hopes may be fru- 
strated. So that when the intention is to raise 
the spirits, evacuate or revell, we may be pret- 
ty free with those which stimulate: but when 
the glyster is to mollify, dilute, relax, ease, or 
nourish, we should exclude acrimonious, or sti- 
mulating substances. 
§.512. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, may say something of 
what relates to the infusion, decoction, or mixture 
(§.218, 219. 231. 279.); except when there is 
no occasion for perfect depuration: concluding F. 
enema or clysma. But as the injection of this form 
is frequently referr’d to the apothecary, this part 
of the prescription may sometimes mention the pro- 
per instrument, whereby it should be given. We 
may also here insert, 
1. What age the patient is of, whether an in- 
fant, child, or adult; that the anus may be fitted 
with

409 Of Glysters. 
with a sizable tube: tho’ the apothecary may ge- 
nerally guess at this, by the quantity of liquor 
(§.510. n° 1.). 
2. Of what sex; when adult: for women 
love to help one another in this office. 
3. The time of administration: whether pre- 
sently, in the morning, evening, &c. for there 
is no hour, of either day or night, but will ad- 
mit of using this form, upon urgent necessity. 
Or else, the most convenient time is supposed 
to be when the stomach is empty. 
But supposing the method of injecting this 
form to be sufficiently known, we shall consider 
what else might be brought in here, under our 
next head. 
§.513. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is not always necessary, 
only when the subscription (§.512.) does not 
give a brief instruction for its use. And in that case 
we may begin with the title (per §.60. n° 3. and 
§.506.), and the rest, as may be understood from 
§.512. n° 1, 2, 3. But it may be sometimes 
more proper to give a verbal, than a written ad- 
monition concerning its administration and action. 
This part may therefore direct. 
1. What is to be done before injection: which 
is various in different cases, and may be ascer- 
tained by the physician from his indication. 
But we may observe one thing: that in giving 
nourishing glysters, the intestines should be first 
cleansed from their fœces, by giving one that is 
cathartic; that the liquor may be the sooner and 
more purely absorb’d. 
2. What regards the injecting itself of this 
form. Where it is required (1.) that the liquor 
be made so warm, as nearly to equal the heat 
of an human body in health. We may judge of  
the

410 Of Glysters. 
the degree of heat by applying the bladder, which 
includes the glyster, to the face, lips, or back 
of the hand; if it appears not too hot to those 
parts, it is fit for use. The injection of this form, 
too hot or cold, may either of them be hurtful 
to the patient, congeal the yolks of eggs, in- 
spissate the fat or other substances, and obstruct 
the tube. (2.) The posture of the patient, most 
convenient to receive the glyster into his intes- 
tines by the tube. Some physicians approve of 
the patient’s lying on his left side, as most con- 
venient; because that will give the liquor a descent 
in its passage, to the sigmoid flexure of the con 
lon, which lies on the left * side, before it forms, 
the rectum. But then the inclination of the 
rectum a little to the right side, in its ascent 
from the anus, will give some resistance to the 
impulse of the liquor; as will also the pressure 
of the super-incumbent intestines upon the lower 
part of the colon, on the left side, next to the 
rectum: and then the inconstancy or lusus na- 
turœ in her formation and disposition of this sig- 
moid flexure of the colon, placing it sometimes 
on the left side † of the rectum, will make this 
still more uncertain. So that I rather agree 
with the generality, that it is best to lie on the 
right side. But it may be sometimes proper 
to lie on neither side but prone. (3.) For 
the patient to keep still or quiet, with an easy 
respiration; left by a strong contraction of the 
abdominal muscles, the glyster might be ob- 
structed in its passage, or be afterwards too 
quickly dischaged. (4.) The instruments for 
injecting the glyster, which are different in se-
veral 
* Vid. Eustach. tab. anat. x. fig. 2. 4. 
† Idem ibid. fig. 5. 

411 Of Glysters. 
veral counties *, the particulars of which are 
not here to be enumerated. (5.) That the in- 
jection of this form be performed gradually, 
and not too forcibly. 
3. What is to be done after the injection is 
over. That is, for the patient to turn gently 
from the right to his left side, or upon his back; 
recommending him to a small and easy respira- 
tion, with a contraction of the sphincter ani, 
when the glyster is to be retained any consider- 
able time in the intestines. 
411 
§.514. The USES of this form (in general, 
have been in some measure intimated at §.506. and 
508.). are too many and considerable, to speak 
particularly to each of them here: they may be 
conveniently used in all ages and habits, even to 
the youngest infant. But when stimulating, they 
may be hurtful to those who are subject to the 
piles, and a too long or unnecessary use of them, will 
dull the peristaltic motion of the larger intestines, 
and render the patient more constipated, so that 
he must be always oblig’d to use this incentive, to 
excite them to their office. Those who affirm there 
can be no such thing as a nourishing glyster, seem 
to be ignorant of what we said before (§.511.
n° 6.): for the indefatigable anatomist Winslow † 
has demonstrated to the royal academy, that the 
human colon has lacteals, and shew’d them repleat 
with chyle. And the patient’s becoming suddled, 
by even a moderate use of wine, or its spirit in 
glysters, seems to evince the same, &c. 
515. Take the following SPECIMENS.
1. 
* Vid. R. de Farvacques Medic. Pharm. book. III. capit. X. 
† In his Anat. Exposit. Sect. VIII. of the abdomen, n° 219. 


412 Glysters.
1. Clysma meconium induratum resolvens evacuans. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 225. 
ꝶ. Seri lact. recent. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒjß. 
Mell. ʒij. 
M. F. clysma. 
Pro infante recens nato. 
2. Aliud vermes expellens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Vitriol. mart. gr. xv. 
Aq. stillat. cichor. ℥iv. 
M. F. lavamentum. 
Pro puero trienni aut quadrienni. 
3. Clysma refrigerans, antiphlogisticum in rabie 
canina. Ibid. p. 183. 
ꝶ. Nitri ʒij. 
Acet. sambuc. 
Mell. rosar. ana ℥j. 
Aq. decoct. hord. ℥x.
M. F. clysma. 
S. Injiciatur bis vel ter in die. 
5. Clysma nutriens. Ibid. p. 139. 
ꝶ. Jur. Carnium ℥x. 
Sal. nitri gr. x. 
Sp. salis gtt. vj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur octava quaque hora, postquam primo 
clysmate purgante elota alvus fuit. 
6.

413 Glysters. 
6. Clysma emolliens, anodynus, aperiens, calcu- 
lum pellens. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 243. 
ꝶ. Herb. malvœ. 
Parietar. 
Heder. terrestr. ana m. j. 
Seri lact. recent. q. s. 
Coque spatio 1/4 horæ. Colat. express. ℥. ix. adde 
Ol. lint ℥i. 
Nitri pur. ʒß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur mane & vesperi. 
7. Clysma balsamicum, anodynum antidysentericum. 
ꝶ. Flor. chamomill. m. ij. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. coque vase clauso 
per 1/4 horæ. Colat. ℥viij. adde 
Tereb. venet. vitell. ov. subact. ʒiij.
Mell.rofar. ℥j.
M. F. enema. 
Pro adulto. 
S. Clysma revellens, salivationis mercurialis impe- 
tum minuens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Flor. sennœ  ℥j. 
Agarici ʒiv. 
Semin. cartham. ʒij. 
Rad. jalapp. ʒj. 
Cum Aqua decoct. colat. ℥xij. injice pro 
clysmate. 
For glysters of the smoak of tobacco, see §.404. ult. 
on fumigations. 
9.

414. Glysters. 
9. Enema catharticum commune. 
♃. Decoct. commun. pro clyst. ℥x. 
Resin. jalap. in vitel. ov. solut. ʒß. 
Syrup. de spin. cervin. ℥j. 
Sal. commun. ℥ß. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Injiciatur tepide, mane, vel hora 
commoda. 
10. Enema nervosum, fortiter purgans. 
♃. Decocti communis ℥x. 
Sal. cathart. amar. 
Vini emet. turbid. 
Syr. de spina cervin. aa ℥jß. 
Ung. opodeld. ʒiij.  
Sal. vol. ammon. ʒj. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema ant. -apoplect. -paralyt. &c. fere frigidum,
hora commoda, injiciendum. 
11. Enema emolliens, & movens commune.
♃. Decocti communis, ℥x. 
Ol. sem. lin. ℥jß. 
Sapon. moll. vulg. ʒiij. 
Elect. lenitiv. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. enema.
S. Enem. lenitiv.—Hora, tepide injiciendmn.
12. 

415 Glysters. 
12. Enema emolliens, laxans, in paraxysmo ne- 
phritico, &c. sopiens. 
♃. Decoct. intestinor. pulli gallinac. ℔j.
Bals. Lucatul. ℥jß. 
Vitell ov. n°. ij. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. iij. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tepide & hora commoda injiciendum. 
13. Enema hystericum, emmenagogicum. 
♃. Sumit. puleg. 
Rutœ. 
Atriplic. olid, aa m. j. 
Coque inaq. font. q. s. Colaturæ ℥x. 
adde 
Gum. galban. 
Asa fœt. aa ℈ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ʒjß.  
Vitel. ov. q. s. ut solvantur gumosa. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema. Carminativ. more usutata injiciendum, 
& pro re nata reiterandum.
14. 


416 Glyjsters.
14. Enema amarum, antihelminticum. 
♃. Sem. santon. contus. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Coque in aq, font. q. s. colaturæ ℥x. adde
Extract. rudii ʒß. 
Syr. rosar. damascen. ʒvj. 
M. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tempore commodo injiciendum & diu 
retinendum. 
15. Enema restringens. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Vini rubri ana ℥iv. 
Confect. fracast. 
Mell. rosar. aa ʒvj. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Tepide, pro re nata injiciendum.
16. Enema febrifugum. 
♃. Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Cort. peruv. pulv. ℥j.
Sal. absynth. ʒjß. 
Coque in aq. font. q. s. ut exprimatur ℔j. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tertia hujus pars, sexta vel quarta 
quaque hora, de die, absente paraxysmo, tepide in- 
jiciatur; & quamdiu poterit, retineatur. 
Of

417 Of Suppositories. 
Of SUPPOSITORIES. 
§.516. A SUPPOSITORY (Bαλαvq, glans, 
& nodulus intestinalis) is a more or less 
solid remedy, of a roundish figure, to be thrust up 
the anus for various uses. Its figure is usually cy- 
lindrical, conical, oval, globular, or in the form 
of an acorn. 
§.517. When this remedy is to be formed of 
but one simple substance, as it very frequently is, it 
will hardly require an extemporaneous prescription: 
Otherwise it will be necessary; for composition. 
§.518. The MATERIALS, and their PREPA- 
RATION for simple suppositories, are well enough 
known by almost every body: some use one thing, 
while others approve of different ones; but all are 
attended with nearly the same effects. Of this kind 
are barley-sugar in a conial form, Venice-soap in 
the same figure, tallow-candle, or wax-candle dipt 
in butter, wash’d lard, a prune or fig turn’d in- 
side outwards, new cheese, and a piece of brown 
paper rowled up in the form of a cane, and spread 
over with butter, honey boiled to a solid consi- 
tence, almonds confected, or cas’d with sugar; a 
globule or cone made of alum, and moistened with 
oil or butter, a raddish-root, a marsh-mallow-root, 
or the root of beet, cabbage, elder, &c. being first 
excoriated or peel’d, cut out into a proper form, and 
moisten’d with oil or fresh butter, or the body of a 
leech prepared in the same manner; these are the 
common means, sometimes, as well for infants as 
adults, to more ,or less lubricate and stimulate the 
rectum, and solicite a discharge of worms, &c.
§.519. A compound suppository is either sti- 
mulating, or only adapted to the peculiar disor- 
ders of the anus and rectum. 
Ee §.520.

418 Of Suppositories. 
§.520. The component ingredients of a stimu- 
lating suppository, are distinguished into excipien- 
tia and excipienda. 
1. The excipient substances are honey boiled 
to a consistence, so that being poured Upon a 
cold marble, it will not adhere but be brittle; 
to this some add an officinal purging electuary, 
or some stimulating juice. Venice soap may be 
also used for the excipient with the yolk of an 
egg, mucilage of gum tragacanth, or barley su- 
gar; but these not so frequently. 
2. The excipienda to be made up with the 
former, are all sharp stimulating substances, whe- 
ther of the consistent or powder kind, of which 
there are a great variety extant in the shops, 
such are sopes, common salt, nitre, sal gem, sal 
ammoniacum, alum vitriolum martis, mouse- 
turds, aloes, myrrh, leaves of senna, agaric, jal- 
lap, species hieræ, the masses of purging pills, 
as cochiæ extract. cathol. succ. absinth. inspissat. 
bull’s gall inspissated, castor with the strongest 
emetics and cathartics, as colocynth, trochisch. 
alhand. scammony, white hellibor, euphorbium, 
crocus metallor. &c. 
§.521. The suppositories which are adapted to 
the peculiar disorders of the anus and rectum con- 
sist of various ingredients, according to the nature 
of their particular indispositions, with the intention 
of stimulating, deterging, corroding, healing, mol- 
lifying, easing, astringing, &c. There is here no 
occasion to enumerate the materials for these inten- 
tions, but they are adapted for these uses in three 
forms. 
1. For they are either reduced into a hard 
and emplastick mass (like as at §.520.) with 
the substances there mention’d, or with some 
other proper excipient. Sometimes they are com- 
pounded

419 Of Suppositories. 
pounded with ointments, cerats, or emplasters, 
and protruded into the anus, sometimes only an 
officinal emplaster, smear’d over with some oil 
or ointment, is used for a suppository. 
2. Or being brought into the consistence of 
an ointment or balsam, it is applied by the 
means of scrap’d lint, cotton, or wool done up 
in a globular form like an acorn or tent, to 
which a thread is to be fastened, by which, 
hanging out, it may be again extracted. 
3. Or a paste of the like consistance (n° 2.) 
may be tied up in a nodule in a bit of linen, to 
which a thread is to be also fastened to extract it 
by, after it has been once introduced into the 
anus. 
§.522. In the CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, respect is to be had to the physician’s indi- 
cation, the particular virtues of each simple, espe- 
ciaily those of the stronger kind, with the patient’s 
age, habit, &c. See §.299. and 508. 
§.523. The ORDER for prescribing ingredients 
for this form, is generally to subjoin the excipient 
after the excipienda, especially when the quantity 
of the former is undetermin’d, tho' sometimes this 
order is revers’d. 
§.524. The SIZE of this form is analogous to 
the DOSE of others; when it is of a round figure, 
it sometimes equals the size of pease, chesnuts, or 
acorns; if it is conical, it’s usually made equal to 
the size of the patient’s little finger, and in length 
about three or four fingers breadth. Hence, accord- 
ing to the various size, the quantity of matter may 
be from ʒj to ʒvj or ℥j. A more exact determi- 
nation of the quantity may be taken from the pa- 
tient’s particular age, and more or less morbid 
stricture of the rectum, with the more or less strength 
of the suppository and particular disease of the rec- 
Ee2 tum:

420 Of Suppostories. 
tum: so that when the suppository is to stimulate, 
in a comatous disorder it is sometimes made much 
longer than the little finger. 
§.525. The general quantity for this form is fre- 
quently no more than the dose (§.524.). But 
when the suppository is to be used a considerable 
time 2, 3, or more cones may be transmitted to the 
patient at once, that one may be thrust up after the 
other, so that by multiplying the particular dose, 
it may be easy to determine the general quantity. 
§.526. The mutual proportion of ingredients for 
this form may be learn’d from the consistence of 
the excipient and other ingredients, with the re- 
quisite consistence of the paste to be made (§.520. 
521.), from the virtues of each ingredient, and the 
desired effect of the composition. Hence 
1. When inpissated honey is the excipient 
(§.520. n° 1.) the proportion of that may be 
℥j. to ℈iiij or ʒjß of the other ingredients. 
2. If any softer substance is used for the ex- 
cipient, it may be proportionably enlarg’d ac- 
cording to the quantity of the other ingredients 
or excipienda; except when it is required as soft 
as paste. 
§.527. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP-  
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient 
for this form, contains nothing very particular, but 
what may be easily understood from what was before 
said on these heads. The hardest suppositories are 
generally anointed with butter, oil, lard, or some 
ointment, before using it; at other times, it may be 
sufficient to moisten it with the saliva, or with 
some warm oil, when intended to stimulate. The 
rectum should be discharged of its fæces before the 
suppository is introduced, except when the use of 
it is to give a stool. 
§.528.

421 Suppositories. 
§.528. The USES of suppositories have been in 
a great measure already explained (at §.518, 519. 
521.): they are frequently substituted in the room 
of purging glysters, when the patient will not ex- 
pose himself to, or be troubled with that form. 
These will often give a stool when internal purg- 
ing might not be safe, they kill and expel worms, 
and are serviceable in comatous and apoplectic 
cases, &c. by stimulating, revelling, exciting, &c. 
To say nothing of disorders peculiar to the anus 
and rectum, ulcers, fistulæ, hæmorrhoidal pains, 
&c. where suppositories are often very useful. But 
we should be cautious not to hurt or corrode the 
rectum by too sharp suppositories, not to make na- 
ture become sluggish in discharging her fæces by a 
too constant use of this form: therefore supposi- 
tories are less proper for those who have fissures 
ulcers, tumors, or pains in the rectum, the piles, 
&c. And an over strong suppository may chance 
to produce abortion.  
§.529. SPECIMEN of simple suppositories, see 
before at §.518. and in H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 224. 
A few examples of compound suppositories follow. 
1. Suppositorium antihelminticum, necans expel- 
lens vermes. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Mell. coct. ad consist. debit. ℥iv. 
Aloës ℥ß. 
Vitriol. mart. ʒij. 
M. s. a. F. parva suppositoria v. g. xij. aut 
xiv. pro puero. Serventur oleo demersa 
ne deliquescant. 
S. Applicentur post alvum exoneratam. 
Ee3 2.

422 Suppositories. 
2. Suppositorium acre, fortiter stimulans in affecti- 
bus soporosis frigid is utile. 
ꝶ. Mellis coct. indurat. ℥j. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒß. 
Scammon. ℈j. 
Troch. alhand. 
Rad. ellehor. alb. pulv. ana ℈ß 
Euphorbii gr. ij. 
M. F. s. a. suppositoria n°. ij. oleo ca- 
storei illinenda.  
3. Glans ad alvum solicitandam, pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Sal. commun. ʒß. 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Mell. coctu inspissati q. s. 
M. F. suppositorium, oleo absinth. infuso 
illinendum. 
4. Suppositorium ad excitandum hæmorrhoidum 
fluxum. 
ꝶ. Aloës pulveris. 
Sal. gemm. ana ℈j. 
Pulp. colocynth. gr. v. 
Mellis q. s. 
Coctu redigantur in suppositorium. 
5.

423 Of Pessaries and Nascales. 
5. Nodulus anodynus ad dolores ab hæmorrhoi- 
dibus. 
ꝶ. Opii crudi ℈ß. 
Croci pulveris ℈j. 
Unguent. popul. q. s. 
Ut F. pasta, quæ inclusa sindoni, aut cot- 
tone excepta, appenso filo, fit pro sup- 
positorio. 
S. Immittatur ano, filo foras propendente & retra- 
hatur post 1/2 horam. 
Of PESSARIES and NASCALES. 
§.530. A Pessary (pessarium, talus) and a NAS- 
CALE (penicillus) are a kind of suppo- 
sitories, tents, or nodules for the uterus and vagina, as 
the preceding were for the intestines, to be intro- 
duced into the sinus pudoris, vagina, &c. for 
various uses: but as they are at present seldom 
used, and may be easily understood from consider- 
ing the form preceding, there is no occasion to 
give a diffuse treatise on them here. 
FINIS. 

424 ADDENDA. 
N°.1. ad Pag.9. 
A Ppellationum generalium plura simplicia uno 
titulo complectentium explicatio. 
Quinque radices aperientes. 
Rad.
Apii. 
Asparagi. 
Fœniculi. 
Petroselini. 
Rusci. 
Quinque herbœ emollients.
Fol. & 
Sumit
Althææ. 
Malvæ. 
Mercurialis. 
Parietariæ. 
Violarum.
Quatuor flores cordiales.
Flor.
Boraginis. 
Buglossi. 
Rosarum. 
Violarum.
Quatuor 

425 ADDENDA ad Pag.9. 
Quatuor semina calida majora. 
Sem.
Anisi. 
Carvi. 
Cumini. 
Fœniculi. 
Quatuor semina calida minora. 
Sem.
Ammeos. 
Amomi. 
Apii. 
Dauci. 
Quatuor semina frigida majora.
Sem. 
Citrulli. 
Cucumeris.
Cucurbitæ. 
Melonum. 
Quatuor semina frigida minora. 
Sem.
Cichorii. 
Endiviæ. 
Lactucæ. 
Portulacæ.
CHA- 

426 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
N°. II. ad Pag. 16. 
CHARACTERES, 
FREQUENTIORES 
IN USU. 
A Cetum 🜊
Acet. destill. 🜋
Aër 🜁 
Æs ♀ 
Æs Viride 🜨 
Alumen 🌕︎
Amalgama 🝛 
Antimonium ⛢
Aqua 🜄
Aqua fontis 🜅ont.
Aqua fortis 🜅
Aqua Regia 🜆
Aqua Rof. 🜆of. 
Arena 
Argentum ☽︎ 
Argent. vivum 
Arsenicum  🜺
Auripigmentum 🜽 
Aurum ☉ 
Balneum B  
Baln. Mariæ 🝫
Calx viva 🝤 
Cancer ♋︎
Caput mort 🝎 
Chal-


427 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
Calcanth. Vitriol. 🜖 
Chalybs ♂ 
Chalybis limatura  
Cineres 🝗
Cinnabar 🜭 
Corn. Cerv. calc. C.C.C. 
Cuprum ♀
Destillare 
Dies   
Ferrum ♂
Fimum Equin. vent. Eq. 
Hora 
Hydrargyrum ☿
Ignis 🜂
Jupiter ♃
Luna ☽︎ 
Mars ♂
Massa  
Mercurius ☿ 
Merc. præcipitatus 
Merc. sublimatus 🜐 
Nitrum 🜕
Nox  
Oleum  
Plumbum 
Præcipitare 🝟
Pulvis, Pulverare 
Retorta 
Sal Armoniacum 🜹
Sal commune 🜔 
Sal Gemmæ 🜘 
Sal Petræ 🜕 
Sol ☉ 
Spiritus Sp.
Stannum ♃ 
Strat. sup. Strat. 🝜 
Sublimare 🝞
Sulphur 🜍
Tartarum 🜿
Terra 🜃 
Tinctura 
Venus ♀ 
Vinum V. 
Viride æris 🜨 
Vitriolum 🜖 
Urina 🝕
N°.

428 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20.
N°. III. ad Pag. 20. 
A List and Explanation of the WEIGHTS 
and MEASURES used among the antient 
Greek, Latin, and Arabian Physicians. 
I. WEIGHTS. 
The chalcus,  
or 
Æreolus,
was equal to half a siliqua, or gr. ij. 
The siliqua of the Latins,  
Ceration and Diachalcum of
the Greeks,
or kirat of the Arabians,
was equal to ij 
chalci, or gr. iv. 
The nμiωCoλov,   
Semiobolus, and  
Davie of the Arabians,
was equal to siliqua
and half, iij chalci
or œreolœ, or gr. vj. 
The obolus, and 
Onolosat of the Arabs,
was equal to vj chalci,
iij siliquœ, or gr. xij.
or ℈ß.
The scriptulum, term’d  
Gramma and diobolon 
by the Greeks, 
was equal to ij oboli,
xij chalci, or gr. xiij.
The semidrachma or triobolon, term’d 
Ilarium by Oribasius, and  
Victoriatus by Scribonius and Celsus
was equal 
to ℈jß. or 
gr. xxxvj. 
The drachma attica, termed also 
Holce by the Greeks, being the 
eighth part of an ounce, 
was equal to 
℈iij. six obo- 
li, orgr. lxxij. 
The denarius of the Latins was a little heavier than 
a dram, so that only seven denarii went to the 
ounce. Hence, Celsus and Scribonius, who 
translate denarium for drachma, suppose only 
seven

429 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
seven drams to the ounce: but Plutarch, Ga- 
len and Pliny, in their Latin or Greek cita- 
tions, seem to write denarium for drachma, 
and drachma for denarium, indifferently, as 
if they were both the eighth part of an ounce. 
The sextula, 
Hexagium,  
Aureus, or  
Solidum,  
was the sixth part of an ounce,
equal to four scruples.
The sicilicus, used for didrachmum by Scribonius, 
was equal to two drams. It was also term’d 
The Assarius and αoγαρiov, from its containing 
twelve oboli, as the as does ounces. 
The duella, was equal to ij sextulœ, or ℈ viij. 
The stater was half an ounce: ℥ß. or ʒiv. Term’d 
also 
The dupondium, being equal to two assarii. 
The uncia attica, being the twelfth part of a pound, 
weigh’d eight drams, or (according to Celsus) 
seven Roman denarii. 
The libra romana, 
Pondo, or  
As,  
was equal to ℥xij. or ʒxcvj.
The mna or mina attica, was a little heavier than 
a pound, weighing ʒC. or ℥xij. & ß.
Notwithstanding the proper signification of the 
term as is a pound weight, it is yet frequently 
used by the Latins to signify some whole or solid 
body: and as they divided the pound, so they di-
stributed the whole body or thing into twelve 
parts, each of which were as ounces: but the se- 
veral other parts of the integer, were denominated 
by them after the following manner.  
As,

430 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
As, libra, a pound, or the whole thing. 
Uncia, or ounce, was the twelsth part of the pound 
or thing. 
Sextans,  
Quadrans, 
Triens,  
Quincunx,  
Semis,    
Septunx,   
Bes & octunx, 
Dodrans,  
Dextans, 
Deunx, 
was
two
three
four 
five
six 
seven
eight
nine
ten 
eleven
ounces, of
parts
II. MEASURES 
We pass from weights to an explanation of the se- 
veral measures, whether dry or liquid, in use 
among the antients. 
The cochlearium minimum, their least measure, held 
about ʒj and ℈ß. of wine, suppose canary. 
The cheme, or cochlearium mediocre, held two of the 
cochlearia minima, or ʒij. and ℈j. 
The mystrum, cochlearium magnum, or ligula, held 
of the cochlearia minima ij and ß. or ʒij ß. 
The concha held ij mystra, chema ij and ß. coch. 
minim. v. 
The cyathus contained ij concha, iij mystra, or 
℥jss. 
The acetabulum, or sesquicyathum, term’d by the 
Greeks oxybaphon, held iij concha, vj mystra, 
or ℥jj. ʒij. 
The quartarius tbtclotqvi '/yxiKOTuAiov, being the 
fourth part of a sextarius, contained cy- 
ath. iij. oxybapha ij. mystra xii. or ℥iv. 
The

431 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The hemine, cotyle, or tryblium, ημιEeςov being 
the half of a sextarius, contained ij quartarii, 
cyath. vj. oxybapha iv. mystra xxiv. coch- 
lear. lx. or ℥ix. 
The sextarius, Eeςηs, of the Greeks, was the 
most frequent in use of any measure, being 
the sixth part of a congius, containing two 
hemina, four quartarii, cyath. xij. or ℔ j ss. 
and is the same with chopin of Paris. 
The chœnix of the Greeks, and modulus of the La- 
tins, held a sextary and half, or ℔ ij. ℥iij. 
The congius, or chus of the Greeks, contained six 
sextarii, xxiv quartarii, or ℔ ix. being equal 
to three pints at Paris. 
The urna held four conga, or ℔ xxxvj. 
The amphora, 
or  
Quadrantal, 
held two urnæ, or xlviij sextarii. 
The meretes and ceramium of the Greeks, and the 
cadus of the Latins, held xij congii, or ℔. C. 
viij. 
The culeus, or most capacious of the liquid mea- 
sures among the Romans, contained xx am- 
phora, 960 sextarii, 160 congii, 40 urnæ, 
or ℔ 1350. 
For the mensuration of dry substances, the Ro- 
mans made use of the following, which were also 
applied in common to liquids, as well as solids. 
The

432 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The Ligula,   
Cyathus,  
Acetabulum, 
Quartarius, 
Hemina, 
Sextarius,  
Semodius,  
Modius, 
Medimus,
equal to 
j Mystrum, or ʒ ij ss.
iij Ligulæ.
vj  Ligulæ. 
ij Acetabula. 
ij Quartarii. 
ij Heminæ.
viij Sexsarii.
ij Semodii. 
72 Sextarii. 
The liquid measures were chiefly adapted to 
wines, which when of a mean consistence will 
come near to the weights assigned. But as oil is a 
9th part lighter than wine, and honey twice as 
heavy as wine, a measure holding ten ounces of 
wine will contain ℥xv. of honey, and of oil ele- 
ven ℥. and so in the rest.
AN

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Principal Matters in the Method 
of Prescribing, &c.
A. 
Accessory ingredients of a form, what?—p. 45. §. 107. 
—for
Decoctions—p. 144. 
Infusions—p. 165. 170. 
—Cataplasms—p. 283. 285. 
Adjuvans, the second constituent part of a form—p. 37. §.78. 
Alcohol powder, what?—p. 54. §.107. 
—of wine, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions, &c.—p. 145. 
Ales, antiscorbutic—p. 179. N° 2. p. 164. N° 10. 
Amulets, v. Epithems—p. 300. ult. 
Anacolema, what?—p. 376. §.464. 
Apophlegmatisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 389. §.485. 
—liquid, soft, and dry—p. 391. §.490. 
—their ingredients—p. 393. §.492. 
—dole, and management—p. 395. §.4. 34. & seq. 
—specimens of them—p. 396. §.497. 
Apozem, v. Decoition—p. 164. 
Apparatus for infusions—p. 152. §.219. N° 1. 
Aspersions, what kind of medicines?—p. 255. §.308. 
—their ingredients, election, and order of prescribing, 
p. 255. §.310. 
—dole, and general quantity—p. ibid. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. 256. §.313. 
—their directions, uses, and specimens—p. 256. §.317. 
Ff B.

INDEX.
B. 
Bags, v. Epithems—p. 278. & seq. 
Ball, sweet-scented—p. 388. n° 3. 
Balsams, odoriferous, what?—p. 354. §.432. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.433. 
—ejection of ingredients for—p. 355 §.434. 
—order of prescribing, dose, and general quantity—p. 358. 
§.435. & seq. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—directions for—p. 360. §.439. & seq. 
—uses of them—p. ib. §.441. 
—specimens of them–p. 361. §.442. 
Bed, v. Epithem—p. 280. n° 5. 
Basis, the first constituent part of a form—p. 36. §.75. 
Baths, what, and their kinds?—p. 300 
—ingredients for—p. 301. 370. 
—election of ingredients for—p. ib. §.371. 
—order of prescribing them p. 302. 
—their dose, general quantity, and proportion of ingredients for 
p. 302. §.313. & seq. 
—subscription or direction to the Apothecary p. 303. §.376. 
—superscription or direction to the patient—p. 304. §.377. 
—uses—p. ib. §.378. 
—specimens of—p. 305. §.379. 
Boles, what kind of medicines?—p. 76. §.127. 
—the ingredients or matter of—p. ib. §.128. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 77. §.129. 
—order of prescribing their ingredients—p. 78. §.130. 
—their dose—p. ib. §.131 
—general quantity—p. 79. §.132. 
—the proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. §.133. 
—their subscription—p. 81. §. 134. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.135. 
—uses—p. 82. §.136. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.137. 
Buccellatum, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 143. 
C. 
Cakes, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 138. 
Capitiluvium, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Catapotium, v. Pils—p. 106. 
Catapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Cataplasms, what? and their kinds—p. 282. 
—by decoction, what?—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 283. §.346.
—the election of their ingredients—p. 284. §.347.
Cataplasms, 

INDEX. 
Cataplasms, order of prescribing—p. 286. §.348. 
—dose of them—p. ib. §.349. 
—general quantity, and proportion of ingredients—p. 286. 
§.350. & seq. 
—subscription for—p. 288. §.352. 
—superscription for—p.289 §.333. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.354. 
—specimens of them—p. 290. 
Cerates, what kind of medicines?—p. 342. §.415. 
—their ingredients, management, and directions for—p. 343. 
§.418. 
—uses—p. ib. §.419. 
—specimens of them—p. 344. §.420.
Choice of ingredients for Apophlegmatisms p.393. §.493. 
—aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 355. §.434. 
—baths—p. 301. §.371. 
—boles—p. 77. §.129. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.201.
—cataplasms—p. 283. §.316.
—cerates—p. 342.
—collyria—p. 469. 
—cucusæ p. 375.
—decoctions—p. 165. §.226.
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 238. §.285. 
—electuaries—p. 89 §.140. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.407.  
—emulsions—p. 195. §.248.  
—epithems—p. ib. and §.273. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.475. 
—express'd juices—p. 183. §.237.  
—fomentations—p. 261. §.322. 
—frications—p. 374. §.458.
—frontals—p. 375. §.466. 
—fumigations—p. 316. §.396. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500 
—glysters—p. 403. §.508.
—infusions—p. 145. §.213 
—injections—p. 247. §.299 
—juleps—p. 211. §.263. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.151 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444.  
—lotions—p. 247. §.299. 
—mixtures—p. 225. §.274. 
—ointments—p. 345. §.423. 
—pills—p. 107. §.162. 
—powders—p. 56. §.111. 
—suppositories—p. 417. §.518.
Ff2 Choice

INDEX. 
Choice of ingredients for tablets—p. 132. §.188. 
—troches—p. 123. §.175 
—vapors—p. 308. §.384. 
—unguents—p. 345. §.423. 
Clysma, v. Glyster—p. 402. 
Colour of medicines arising from mixture—p. 46. §.99. 
Collutorium, v. Gargarism—p. 339. 
Colyria, what kind of medicines?—p. 378. 
—their various forms, ingredients, application, and uses—p. 379. 
—specimens of them—p. 380. 
Composition, its effefts on medicines, Mixture. 
Conditum, v. Electuary—p. 88. 
Consistence of medicines from mixture—p. 45. §.96. 
Constituens, the fourth and last part of a form—p. 41. §.86. 
Corrigens, the third condiment part of a form—p. 38. §.83. 
—for noxious qualities—p. ib. §.84. 
—unpleasantness—p. 40. §.85. 
Couch, v. Epithem—p. 285. n° 4. 
Cucullus  
Cucusa   
Cushion
v. Epithem—p. 278. & seq.  
D. 
Decoctions, internal, what kind of medicines?—p. 164. §.224. 
—their ingredients p. ib. §.225. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 165. §.226. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 171. §.227. 
—times for boiling their different ingredients—p. ib. 
n° 1. 2. & seq. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 173. 
—the mutual proportion of their ingredients p. 173. §.230. 
—process of, and apparatus for—p. 175. §.231. 
—their subscription, for the apothecary—p. ib. 
—superscription, to the patient—p. 178. 
—uses—p. ib. §.233. 
—specimens of —p. 179. §.234. 
Dentifrices, what?–p. 388. §.485. 
—their kinds—p. 389. §.486. 
—ingredients and uses–ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 390. 
Depuration of liquors, (1.) by decantation, and (2.) by filtration 
p. 155
Diapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Directions for medicines to the apothecary in a prescription, v. Sub- 
scription. 
—patient, v. Superscription. 
Distribution of medicines, v. Dose. 
—powders—p. 62. §.118. 122. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. n° 9. 
Dose


INDEX. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. §.65. & seq 
—should be proportioned to 
1° the patient's disease—p. 25. n° 1. p. 27. n° 7. 
—strength—p. 26. n° 2. 
—age—p. ib. n° 3. 
—size of body—p. 27. n°. 4. 
—habit—p. ib. n° 5. and—p. 28. n° 8. 
—sex—p. ib. n° 6. 
—use or custom to medicines—p. 28. n° 9. 
—course of life—p. ib. n° 10. 
—country or nation—p. ib. n.° 11. 
2° the Medicine's strength—p. 29. n° 15. 
—virtues—p. ib. n° 13. 
—season of the year—p. ib. n° 12. 
—price— n° 14. 
—unpleasantness—p. ib. n° 16. 
—form—p. 30. n° 17. 
—way of using—p. ib. n° 18. 
Doses, number of, in a form, agreeable to particular circumstances, 
p. 30. §.67. 
Dose, its quantity how to determine in compound forms, p. 42. §.92. 
—an estimate thereof, for different ages—p. 26. n° 3. 
—of boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.204. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.349. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.228. 
—drops—p. 240.  §.287. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.142. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.252. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.239. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.324. 
—fumes—p. 319 §.398. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. § 501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 149. §.215. 
—injections—p. 248. §.301. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.265. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.153. 
—liniment—p. 365. §.447. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.276. 
—pills—p. 110. §.165. 
—powders—p. 59. §.113. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.192. 
—troches—p. 125. §.179. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.425. 
—vapors—p. 310. §.386. 
Draughts—p. 230. & seq. 
Dropax, v. Emplasters—p. 236 
Ff3 Drops,

INDEX. 
Drops, what kind of medicines?—p. 237. §.283. 
—their ingredients—p. 238. §.284. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.285. 
—order of prescribing—p. 240. §.286. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. ib. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. 241. 
—their subscription—p. ib. §.290. 
—superscription—p. 242. §.291. 
—uses—p. 243. §.292. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.293. 
E.
Edegma, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
—solidum, v. Lozenges— p. 122. §.172. 
—Election of ingredient for forms, v. Choice. 
—Electuaries, what kind of medicines?—p. 88. §.138. 
—ingredient for—p. 89. §.139. 
—choice of their ingredients—p. ib. §.140. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 90. 
—their dose—p. 91. §.142. 
—general quantity—p. ib. §.143. 
—subscription—p. 39. §.145. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.146. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 94. & seq. 
Electuary, solid, v. Tablets—p. 131. 
Elixir, v. Drops.—p. 244. 
Embrocation, v. Bath—p. 301. 
Emplasters, what kind of medicines?—p. 326. §.405. 
—ingredients for—p. 327. §.406. 
—their election— p. ib. §.407. 
—order of prescribing—p. 330. §.408. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 331. §.409. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—their subscription—p. 334. §.411. 
—superscription—p. 335. §.412. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 336. §.414. 
Empasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Emulsions, what kind of medicines?—p. 194. §.246. 
—ingredients for—p. 195. §.247. 
—their election—p. ib. §.248. 
—order of prescribing—p. 201. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 202. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 203. 
—their subscription—p. 205. §.255. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.256.
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 206.
Enema,

INDEX. 
Enema, v. Glysters—p. 402. 
Epispastics—p. 371. & seq. 
Epithems, in general, what?—p. 259. 
—liquid, v. Fomentations. 
—soft, v. Cataplasms. 
—dry, what?—p. 273.
—their management—p. ib. & seq. 
—ingredients—p. 273. 
—order, and dose—p. 274. 
—general quantity—p. 275. 
—superscription—p. 277. 
—their uses—p. 278. §.341. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
—moist, what?—p. 294. §.356. 
—their ingredients—p. 295. 
—subscription, &c.—p. 297. 
—specimens of them—p. 298. 
Errhins, what? and their kinds—p. 382. 
—the exhibition, and uses—p. 383. 
—specimens of them—p. 384. 
Excipients, what kind of ingredients?—p. 76. n° 2. p. 108. n° 8. 
p. 123. 
Excipiends—p. 107. p. 76. n° 1. 
Expressed-juices, v. Juices. 
F. 
Fomentations, what kind of medicines— p. 260. 
—ingredient for them p. ib. §.321. 
—their election—p. 261. §.322. 
—order of prescribing— p. 262. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 263. §.326. 
—their superscription—p. 264. §.328. 
—uses—p. 267. §.329. 
—specimens of them—p. 269. 
Forms, internal and external—p. 54. §.105. 
—fitest for acute diseases—p. 12. §.47. 
—chronic diseases—p. ib. 
—should be adapted to the most urgent symptoms—p. 10. p. 41. 
—age and circumstances of the patients, 
§.26. 27. 47. 48. 
—intention and medic virtues p. 11. §. 43. 
—texture and disposition of the ingredients 
p. 9. §.35. 43. 
—condition of the disease—p. 12. §.47. 
Formula, what?—p. 1. §.1. 
—simple, what?—p. 25. §.63. 
—compound, what?—p. 34. §.71.
Ff4 Formula,

INDEX. 
Formula, its four constituent parts.—p. 35. §.74. 
—l°. its basis—p. 36. §.75. 
—2°. its adjuvans—p. 37. §.78. 
—3°. its corrigens—p. 38. §.83. 
—4°. its constituens—p. 41. §.86. 
—its six general heads, v. Prescription. 
Fotus, v. Fomentation. 
Frications, what ? their kinds and uses—p. 374. 
Frontals, v. Epithems.—p. 278. 
—what Kind of medicines—p. 373. §.462. 
—their uses and specimens—p. 376. 
Fumigations, what?—p. 315. §.393. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—forms—p. 316. §.395. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 319. 
—their dole, or quantity—p. ib. §.398. 
—oroportion of their ingredients—p. 320. 
—their sub and superscription—p. 321. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 322. 
G. 
Gargarisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 399.
—their kinds anti ingredients—p. ib. 
—management and uses—p. 400. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
General quantity of a form—p. 33. and 45. 
i. e. to be sent to the patient at once 
—of aspersions—p. 255. §.312. 
—balsams—p. 350. 
—baths—p. 302. 
—boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.205. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.250. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173 §.229. 
—drops—p. 240. §.288. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.143. 
—emplasters—p. 331. §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.253. 
—epithems—p. 195. and 275. 
—fomentations—p. 262. §.325. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 309. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 194. §.216. 
—injestions—p. 248. §.302. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.266. 
General

INDEX. 
General quantity of linctus—p. 104. §.154. 
—liniments—p. 365. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.277. 
—pills—p. 111. §.166. 
—powders—p. 60. §.114. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.193. 
—troches—p. 126. §.180. 
—unguents—p. 348. 
—vapors—p. 310. 
Glysters, what kind of medicines?—p. 402. §.506. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.507. 
—election of their d°—p. 403. §.508. 
—order of prescribing—p. 406. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. §.510. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 407. §.511. 
—their subfcription—p. 408. §.512. 
—superscription—p. 409. §.513. 
—uses—p. 411. §.514. 
—specimens—p. 412. 
Guttæ, v. Drops. 
H. 
Haustus var.—p. 234. & seq. 
Hydrelæon  
and   
Hydrogalum 
for bathing—p. 301. §.370. 
Hydromel 
and  
Hydrosaccharum 
kinds of juleps—p. 188.
I. 
Impluvium, v. Bath,—p. 301. §.369. 
Infusions, what kind of medicines?—p. 143. 
—their ingredients—p. 144. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 145. 
—order of prescribing—p. 148. 
—their dose—p. 149. §.2l5. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 150. §.217. 
—their subscription—p. 152. 
—process—p. ib. N° 2. 3. 
—apparatus—p. ib. ult. 
—depuration—p. 154. ult. 
—superscription—p. 157. §.221. 
—uses—p. 158. §.222. 
—specimens of them—p. 159. §.223. 
Ingredients for apophlegmatisms 
—aspersions—p. 255. 
Ingredients 

INDEX 
Ingredients for balsams—p. 354. §.433. 
—baths—p. 301. §.370. 
—boles—p. 71. §.128. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.200. 
—cataplasms—p. 283. 
—cerates.—p. 342. 
—collyria—p. 380. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 164. §.225. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.487. 
—drops—p. 238. §.284. 
—electuaries—p. 89. §.139. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.406. 
—emulsions—p. 195. §.247. 
—epithems—p. 294. and 273. 
—errhins—p. 384. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.236. 
—fomentations—p. 260. §.321. 
—frontal—p. 376. & seq. 
—fumigations—p. 315. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500. 
—glysters—p. 402. §.507. 
—infufions—p. 144. §.212. 
—injections—p. 247. §.298. 
—julep—p. 211. §.262. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.150. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444. 
—mixtures—p. 224. §.273. 
—pills—p. 1O6. §.161. 
—powders—p. 55. §.109. 
—tablets—p. 131. §.187. 
—troches—p. 123. §.174. 
—vapors—p. 308. 
—unguents—p. 342. 
Injections, what kind of medicines?—p. 246. 
—their ingredients—p. 247. §.298. 
—election, order, dose, &c.—p. 248. 
—their subscription—p. 249. §.304. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.305. 
—uses—p. 251. §.306. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.307. 
Inscription, the first part of formula—p. 14. §.55. 
Infessus, Bath—p. 300. §.369. 
Intitling of medicines, v. Superscription. 
—in general—p. 23. n° 7. 8. 
Juices-expressed, what?—p. 182. §.235. 
—their ingredients—p. 183. §.236. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.237. 
—order of prescribing—p. 185. §.238. 
—their dose—p. ib. 
Juices

INDEX
Juices-expressed, their general quantity—p. 186. 
—subscription—p. 189. 
—superscription—p. 191. 
—uses—p. ib. §.244. 
—specimens of them—p. 192. §.245. 
Juleps, what kind of medicine?—p. 211. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.262. 
—order of prescribing—p. 216. 
—their dose, and quantity—p. ib. 
—subscription for them—p. 218. 
—superscription for them—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 219. 
L. 
Lavamentum, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Linctus, what kind of medicine?—p. 99. §.149. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.150. 
—election, and order of prescribing—p. 100. 
—dose, and general quantity—p. 101. §.153. 
—proportion of ingredients—p.102. 
—subscription for—p. 103. §.156. 
—superscription for—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens of—p. 104. 
Liniments, what kind of medicines—p. 363. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.444. 
—order of prescribing, dose, &c.—p. 365. 
—their sub- and superscription, uses, and specimens,—p. 367. 
Lohock, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
Lotion, v. Bath—p. 201. §.369. 
Lozenges, v. Troches—p. 122 
M. 
Maceration, the process of—p. 153. N° 2. 3. 
Massa Panis, v. Sugar cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Materia Medica for forms, v. Ingredients.  
Measures now used by apothecaries—p. 18. 
—used by the antients—p. 428. 
Menstrua for infusions, their kinds and properties—p. 144. & seq. 
Method of prescribing the ingredients of a form in general—p. 15. §.58. 
Metrenchites, for injecting the Uterus—p. 250. 
Mixture, its effects on the consistence of medicines—p. 45. §.96  
—colour of medicines—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor of medicines—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste of medicines—p. 48. §.101. 
—virtues of medicines p.-49 §.102. 
Mixtures, what? and their kinds—p. 210. §.259. 
—of liquid medicines—p. 224. §.272. 
Mixtures 

INDEX. 
Mixtures, ingredients for—p. ib. §.273. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 225. §.274. 
—order of prescribing— p. 227. 
—their dose—ib. 
—general quantity—ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 228. 
—subscription for—p. 229. 
—superscription, uses, and specimens—p. 230.
N. 
Nasals, what kind of medicines?—p. 382. §.474. 
Nascale, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Nebula chartacea, a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Nodules, what?—p. 158. n° 2. p. 179. n° 2. 
—for spitting—p. 398. n° 7. 
O. 
Odor of a form upon mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Odoriferous balsams, v. Balsams. 
Odoromenta, what kind of medicines?—p. 386. §.479. 
—their uses, and specimens—p. 387. 
Ointment, v. Unguents—p. 342. 
Orbiculus, v. Cake. 
Order of ranging the ingredients of a form—p. 14. §.57. 
—prescribing the ingredients of aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 358. §.435. 
—baths—p. 322. §.372. 
—boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 140. §.202. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.348. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 171. §.227. 
—drops—p. 240. §.286. 
—electuaries p. 90. §.141. 
—emplasters—p. 330. §.408. 
—emulsions—p. 201. §.251. 
—epithems—p. 274. §.355. 
—fomentations—p. 362. §.323. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.307. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.509. 
—infusions—p. 148. §.214. 
—injections—p. 248. §.300. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.264. 
—juices—p. 185. §.338. 
—linctus—p. 100. §.152. 
Order

INDEX. 
Order of prescribing the ingredients of liniments—p. 367. §.446. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.275. 
—ointments—p. 348. §.424. 
—pills—p. 109. §.163. 
—powders—p.58. §.112 
—tablets—p. 133 §.189 
—troches—p. 125. §.176. 
—vapors—p. 308 
—unguents—p. 348. §.420. 
Oxyrrhodimum, what?—p. 376. §.464 
P. 
Pandalion, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190 
Pasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Pasta regia, v. Sugar-cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Pastills, v. Troches—p. 122.
Pessary, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Phoenigmi, v. Rubisacientia.—p. 371 
Picatio, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Pillow, v. Epithem.—p. 273. 
Pills, what kind of medicines?—p. 106. §.160. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 107. §.162. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 109. §.163.
—their size and weight—p. 109. §.164. 
—dose—p. 110. §.165 
—general quantity,—p.111 §.166. 
—proportion of ingredients—p. 112. 
—subscription—p. 113. 
—superscription—p. 114.
—uses—p. 115. §.170. 
—specimens of them—p. 116. §.171.  
Pineolatum, v. Sugar-cake,—p. 143.  
Powders, what kind of medicines?—p. 54. §.106. 
—of 3 kinds, in degree of tenuity—p. ib. 
—ingredients for—p. 55. §.109.
—their election—p. 56. §.111. 
—method of prescribing—p. 58 §.112. 
—their Dose—p. 58. §.113.
—general quantity—p. 60. §.114. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib.
—their subscription—p. 62 §.116
—preparation—p. ib. §.117
—distribution—p. ib. §.118
—receptacles—p. 63. §.119 
—superscription—p. ib. §.120. 
—uses and specimens—p. 65. 
Plasters, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Prescribing

INDEX. 
Prescribing, general rules and cautions for—p. 4. §.11. 
Prescriptions, what? v. Formula—p. 1. §.1. 
—their kinds—p. 2. §.6. 
—parts in general—p. 14. 
Preparation of Powders p. 62. §.117. 
—infusions—p. 152. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 175. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 189. & seq. 
—emplasters—p. 334. 
Proportion of in-
gredients for 
Aspersions—p. 256. §.313.
—Balsams—p. 358. §.438. 
—Baths—p. 302. §.375. 
—Boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141 §.206. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.351. 
—cerates—p. 342. §.417. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.236. 
—drops—p. 241. §.289. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.144. 
—emplasters—p. 331 §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 203. §.254. 
—epithems—p. 296. §.362. 
—epispastics—p. 372. §.455. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.326. 
—fumigations—p. 320. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 407. §.511. 
—infusions—p. 150. §.217. 
—injections—p. 248. §.303. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.267. 
—juices-expressed—p. 186. §.241. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.155. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 228. §.278. 
—pills—p. 112. §.167. 
—powders—p. 60. §.115. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 135. §.194. 
—troches—p. 126. §.181. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.388. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.427. 
Pultice, v. Cataplasm.—p. 282. 
Pulvinar, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Q.
Quantity of a medicine to be prescribed and made up at one time, v. 
General quantity. 
Quanity

INDEX. 
Quantity of a medicine to be taken at once, v. Dose. 
Qualities of a medicine from 
composition or mixture
—p. 45. §.94. 95. 
—in consistence—p. 45. §.96. 
—colour—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste—p. 48. §. 101. 
—virtues—p. 49. §.102. 
R. 
Receptacles for aspersions—p. 256. §.314. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. ult. 
—drops—p. 242. §.290. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.145. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—pills—p. 114. §.168. ult. 
—powders—p. 63. §.119. 
Recipe, the 2d general part of prescription—p. 14. §.56. 
Regimen, proper in taking medicines—p. 24. 
—powders—p. 65. §.124. 
Rotula, v. Sugar-cake.—p. 138. 
Rubisters, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
S. 
Saccus, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Salivatics, v. Apophlegmatisms.—p. 391. 
Scatulæ, what they are—p. 63. §.119. 
Scute, what kind of medicine—p. 402. 
Scul-cap, v. Cucusa.—p. 375. 
Semicupium, v. Baths.—p. 300. §.369. 
Series, for ranging the ingredients of a form, v. Order of prescribing. 
Sief of the Arabians, what?—p. 379. §.469. 
Smell of medicines, from mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Sope, persumed—p. 388. n° 4. 
Spirits, inflammable, their composition—p. 146. n° 3. 
Species or powders, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Specimens of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. 
—aspersions—p. 256. 
—balsams—p. 361. 
—baths—p. 305. 
—boles—p. 82. 
—cakes—p. 138. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. 
—cerates.—p. 344.
—colyria—p. 380. 
—cucusæ—p. 375. 
—decoctions—p. 178.
Specimens 


INDEX. 
Specimens of dentifrices—p. 390 
—draughts—p. 230. 
—drops—p. 243. 
—electuaries—p. 94. 
—emplasters—p. 336. 
—emulsions—p. 206. 
—epithems  
dry—p. 278.
moist—p. 298. 
—epispastics—p. 372. 
—errhins—p. 384. 
—expressed-juices—p. 192. 
—fomentations—p. 269. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 376. 
—fumes—p. 322. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. 
—glysters—p. 412. 
—infusions—p. 159. 
—injections—p. 251. 
—juleps—p. 219. 
—juices—p. 192. 
—linctus—p. 104. 
—liniments—p. 367. 
—mixtures—p. 230. 243. 
—nascales—p. 424. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. 
—pills—p. 116. 
—powders—p. 65. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 131. 
—troches—p. 128. 
—vapors—p. 313. 
—unguents—p. 352. 
Stillicidium, v. Baths.—p. 301. 369. 
Stomatics, what kind of medicines—p. 388. 
Subscription, i. e. directions to the compounder in general, p. 20. §.59 
—for aspersions— p. 256. §.314. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.439. 
—baths—p. 303. §.376. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.207. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.352. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418.
—decoctions—p. 175. §.231. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—electuaries—p.93. §.145. 
—emplasters—p. 334. §.4l1. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.255. 
—epithems—p. 275. §.297. 
Sub-

INDEX.
Subscription for fomentations—p. 263. §.327. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.401. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.502.
—glysters—p. 409. 512. 
—infusions—p. 132. §.218. 
—injections—p. 249. §.304.
—juleps—p. 218. §.268. 
—juices—p. 189. §.242. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.449. 
—mixtures-p. 229. §.279. 
—pills—p. 113. §.168. 
—powders—p. 62. §.116. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.195. 
—troches—p. 127. §.182. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.389. 
—unguents—p. 330. §.428. 
Suffitus, v. Fumigations—p. 315. 
Sugar-cakes, what kind of medicines?—p. 138. §.199. 
—ingredients for—p. 139. §.200. 
—their election—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing—p. 140. §.202. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.203. 
—dose—p. 141. §.204. 
—general quantity,—p. 131. §.205. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—their superscription p. 142. §.208. 
—uses and specimens p. 142. 
Superscriptions (i.e. directions to the patients in general p. 22. §.60. 
—for apophlegmatisms—p. 395. §.495. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.315. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.443. 
—baths—p. 304. §.377. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—cakes—p.142. §.208. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.353. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418. 
—colyria—p. 379. §.470. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.232. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291.
—electuaries—p.93- §.146. 
—emplasters—p. 335. §.412. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.256. 
—epithems—p. 277 and 297. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.479. 
—fomentations—p. 264. §.428. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.402. 
G2 Superscriptions

INDEX.
Superscriptions for gargarisms—p. 399. §.503. 
—glysters—p. 409. §.513.
—infusions—p. 157. §.221. 
—injections—p. 249. §.305. 
—juleps—p. 218. §.269. 
—juices—p. 191. §.243. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.157. 
—liniments p. 367. §.450. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.280. 
—pills—p. 114. §.169. 
—powders—p. 63. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.196. 
—troches—p. 128. §.183. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.330. 
—unguents—p. 351. §.429. 
Suppositories, what kind of medicines?—p. 417. 
—their ingredients and composition—p. ib. 
—uses—p. 421. 
—specimens of them—p. 422. 
Sympasma, v. Aspersions.—p. 255. 
Synapisms, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
T. 
Tablets, what kind of medicines?—p. 131. §.186. 
—election of ingredients—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 132. §.188, 
—order of prefcribing them p. 133. §.189. 
—figures of—p. 134. §.190. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.191. 
—dose general quantity—p. 134. §.190. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 135. §.194. 
—subscription for—p. 136. §.195. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.197. 
—specimens of them—p. 137. §.198. 
Tastes, various, from mixture— p. 48. §.101. 
Teas, medicinal—p. 158. n° 2. p. 160. n° 5. 
Tessellæ, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190. 
Tincture, by infusion—p. 157, n° 1. 
Tobacco, medicinal—p. 323. n° 3. 
Tragea, powder, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Transfusion of blood, in live animals—p. 246. §.299. 
Troches, what kind of medicines?—p. 122. §.172. 
—ingredients for—p. 123. §.174. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.175. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 125. §.176. 
—their figure, size, and weight—p. ib. 
—dose and general quantity—p. 126. §.180. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
Troches

INDEX. 
Troches, subscription for—p. 127. §.182. 
—superscription for—p. 128. §.183. 
—their uses and speicmens—p. ib. 
U. 
Vapors, what? and their kinds—p. 307. §.380. 
—ingredients for them—p. 307. §.383. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.384. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. 310. §.386. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 311. §.388.
—subscription for them—p. ib. 
—their uses—p. 312. §.391. 
—specimens of them—p. 313. 
Vehicles, in general—p. 24. n° 11. 
—for taking powders—p. 63. §.123. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—for applying emplasters—p. 334. n° 2. 
—fomentations—p. 265. n° 3. 
Unguents, what kind of medicines?—p. 345. §.421. 
—ingredients for them—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing, &c.—p. 348. 
—their subscription—p. 350. §.428. 
—superscription—p. 351. §.429. 
—uses—p. ib. §.430. 
—specimens of them—p. 352. §.431. 
Uses of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. §.496. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.316.
—balsams—p. 360. §.441. 
—baths—p. 304. §.378. 
—boles—p. 82. §.136. 
—cakes p. 142. §.209. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.354. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.419. 
-colyria—p. 397- §.471. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.233. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.488. 
—drops—p. 243. §.292. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.147. 
—emplasters—p. 335- §.413. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.257. 
—epithems—p. 278. and 297. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.477. 
—fomentations—p. 267. §.329. 
—frications—p. 374. §.459. 
—frontals—p. 376. §.465. 
—fumigations—p. 322. §.403. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. §.504. 
—glysters—p. 411. §.5l4.
Gg2 Uses

INDEX.
—infusions—p. 158. §.222. 
—injections—p. 251. §.306. 
—juleps—p. 219. §.270. 
—juices—p. 191. §.244. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.158. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.452. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.281. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. §.483. 
—ointments—p. 351. §.430. 
—pills—p. 115. §.170. 
—powders—p. 65. §.125. 
—suppositaries—p. 451. §.528. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.197. 
—troches—p. 128. §.184. 
—vapors—p. 312. §.391. 
—unguents—p.351. §.430.
Vinous menstrua, their kinds and properties p. 144. n° 1 (2.) 
p. 145. n° 1. 2. 
Wafer-paper, for a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Wash, v. Bath—p. 308. §.369. 
Water, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions and decoctions, 
p. 145. 
Weights, used by apothecaries—p. 17. N° 6
—the antients—p.
AN 

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Diseases and Intentions, 
TO WHICH 
The several FORMULÆ, or PRESCRIPTIONS in 
this Book, correspond. 
Note, The Intentions are in Italick. 
A.
ABORTION, to prevent, v.
Analeptics, and
Hysterics.
—promote
boles 
emetic—p. 82
diuret.—p. 84. n° 6. 
elect. chalib.—p. 98. 
emplast. hyst.—p. 341. 
ointment purg.—p. 353. 
pills—p. 118. n° 7. 
powder—p. 74. n° 31. 
Abscess to suppurate
cataplas.—p. 291. n° 3, 4, 5.
electury.—p. 94. n° 3. 10 
emplaster—p. 339. n° 10 
unguent—p. 352. n° 1. 
Absorbent cap—p. 278. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 13. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—fumigation—p. 323. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 3. p. 221. n° 6. 
Gg3 Absorbent

INDEX. 
Absorbent mixture—p. 232. n° 5. 
—powders—p. 73. n° 27, 28, 29 and 30. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 3. 
Abstergents, v. Aperients. 
Aches, v. Anodynes. 
Acid bolus—p. 85. n° 8. (2.). 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 11. & seq. 
—fomentation—p. 271. n° 1. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 194, n° 6 and 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 4. and 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 2.
—vapors—p. 322. n° 1. 
Acrimony of the juices, v.
absorbent. 
acid, and  
alcaline 
Agglutinant aspersion p. 259. n° 7. 
—bolus—p. 86. n° 12. 
—cerate—p. 344. n° 1. 
—deceptions—p. 179. n° 4. p. 181. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. p. 96. n° 9. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 4. p. 341. n° 14. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. p. 209. n° 9. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 10. 
—injections—p. 252. n° 4. p. 254. n° 10. 
—julap—p. 219. n° 2. 
—liniment—p. 3. n° 9. 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233- n° 10. p. 235. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. p. 72. n° 25. 
—troches p. 131. n° 7. 
Alcaline, bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 293. n° 8 and 9. 
—decoction—p. 181. n° 8. 
—draughts— p. 234. n° 13. & seq. p. 235. n° 15. 
-drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4, 5. p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 15. & seq. 
—emplaster—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 279. n° 4. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—liniment—p. 369 n° 6. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. p. 234. n° 13. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. p. 120. n° 14. 
Alexipharmic, apozem—p. 180. n° 5. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 7, & seq. 
Alexi-

INDEX.
Alexipharmic draught—p. 236. n° 16. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. p. 96. n° 8. and 10. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—juleps—p. 221. n° 6. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 232. n° 6. p. 236. n° 16. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 17. 18. 22. 
Ague, boles emet.—p. 82. 
—febrifug.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoc. feb.—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—elect.—p. 97. n° 12. 
—emplast. ad carp.—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 298. n° 1. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 16. 
—infusion emet.—p. 159. 
—mixture peruv.—p. 236. n° 17. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
Analeptic, (v. Corroborants) apozem.—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 17. 
—broth—p. 179. n° 3. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 7. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. and n° 4. 
—juice-expressed p. 193. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. p. 220. n° 4. 
—linct. omn.—p. 104. & seq. 
—mixture—p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25. and 26. 
—troches—p. 128. n° 1. 
Anasarca, apozem—l80. n° 5. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 2. 4. 14. 
—decoction p. 181. n° 8. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 15. & seq. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—infusions—p. 161. n° 6. 8. & seq. 
—juice-expressed—p. 192. n° 2. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—mixtures—p. 244. n° 4. 6. 8. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 14. 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6. 15. 29. 
Ani procidentia, epithems—p. 282. n° 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 9. 
—suppository—p. 382. §.521. 
Anodyne, bolus—p. 86. n° 10. n°. 15.
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. n° 1. p. 292. n° 6. 
—draught—p. 237. n° 20. 
Gg4 Anodyne,

INDEX. 
Anodyne, drops, laud. liq. omn. 
—emplasters—p. 336. n° 1. p. 340. n° 11. 
—emulsions—p. 206. n° 1. p. 208. n° 5. 
—epithems p. 279. n° 3. p. 299. n° 6. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 4. 7. 9. 10. 
—gargarisms—p. 401. n° 3, 4. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 6. 12. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 10. and 11. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 3. 
—liniments—p. 367. n° 1. 3.7, 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5 and 6. 
—mixtures p. 232. n° 5. p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 122. n° 19. & feq. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 20. p. 73. n° 30. 
—sugar-cakes—p. 142. n° 2. 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
—unguents—p. 352. n° 2. 
Antacids, v. Absorbents. 
Antarthritic apozem—p. 193. n° 4.
—boles p. 84. n° 5. 16. 
—cataplasm p. 293. no. 8. 
—draughts p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 13. seg.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° 9. 11. 13. 15. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—mixtures p. 234. n° 13. p. 244. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n°10. 14. 18. & seq. 
—powders p. 73. n° 29. 35. 
—unguents p. 352. n° 2. 
Antasthmatic boles—p. 87. n° 14. 16. 18.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 9. 13. 15. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. 10. 
—infusion—p. z62. n° 8. 
—juleps—p. 219 n° 2. 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 3. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 13. 17. 19. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—powers—p. 71. n° 23. 32. 35. 
Anticolic, v. Colic. 
Antemetic boles—p. 85. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 230. n° 1. 20. 
—drops-p. 245. n° 10. & seq. 
—electuaries-p. 98. n° 14. 16. 
—emplaster-p. 337. n° 5. 
—epithem-p. 293. n° 10. p. 208. n° 2. 
—infusion-p. 162. n° 7 
—juleps-p. 219. n° 1. 4. 
Antemetic

INDEX. 
Antemetic liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures P- 194. n° 7. p. 231. n° 2. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 8. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 24. 26.
Antepileptic apophlegmatism—p. 396. n° 1. 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—balsam—p. 361. n° 2. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—epithem—p. 281. n° 8. 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 4. 7. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 
Anthelmintic bolus—p. 83. n° 2. (3.) n° 11. (2.) 
—draught—p. 243. n° 2. p. 163. 
—emulsion—p. 208. n° 7. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 2. 14. 
—infusions—p. 163. n° 8. & seq 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 3. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 12. 
—powders—p. 67 and 68. 
—tablets—p. 137. n° 1, 2. p. 142. n° 1. 
Anthysteric balsam—p. 362. n° 4. 
—boles—p. 86. n° 11. & seq. n° 7. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 5. 7. 9. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 16. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—infusion—p. 16l. n° 6. 
—julep—p.220. n° 5. 
—liniment—p. 369- n° ib. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 6, 7. 
—powders?—p. 74. n° 32, 33. 
Anticteric, v. Jaundice
Antinephritic
Antiparalytic, v. Palsy.
—apozem—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 3. 12. 15. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 13.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 2. 15. 
—emulsion-p. 210. n° 11. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 6. 12. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. 7.
—linctus—p. 105. n° (2.) 5. 
—mixtures—p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 75. n° 35.
 



INDEX 
Antiphlogistic boles p. 83. n° 3. 15. 17. 
—baths—p. 306. n° 5, 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 292. n° 6, 7. 
—collyria—p. 380. n° 1, 2. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 20. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 11, 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—emullions—p. 206. n° 1. 3. 11. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 3. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 3. 6, 11, 12. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 192. n° 1. 3. 4. 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 2. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7, 8. 10. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 36.
Antipleuritic, v. Pleurisy. 
Antirheumatic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 12. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 5. 12. 16. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 16. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—infusion—p. 160. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 10. 
—mixture—p. 235. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 10. 12 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 29. 35. 
Antiscorbutic ale—p. 164. n° 10. p. 179. n° 2. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 87. n° 16. 
—electuaries—p. 93. n° 6. 8. 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juices—p. 193. n° 5, 6. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—infusions-p. 160. n° 4. 10. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 219. n° 10. 12. 16. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6, 7. 
Antipasmodic boles—p. 83. n° 3. 10. 16. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—electuary—p. 96. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 9. 11. 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 
Antisyphilic boles—p. 83. n° 2. (1.) n° 13. 
—electuaries p. 95. n° 6. 13. 
—emplaster p. 341. n° 15.
—fumigation p. 326. n° 10. & ult. 
—liniment—p. 371- n° 11. 
—pills—p. 12. n° 12, 13. 15, 16. 
St.

INDEX. 
St. Anthony's Fire, v. Antiphlogistic. 
Anxiety, v. Cardiac. 
Aperient boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—cataplasm.—p. 293. n° 8. 
—decoctions—p. 181. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 17. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juice—p. 192. n° 1. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 
—fumes—p. 322. n° 2. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 16. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. & seq. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 10. 12. 
Appetite to recover, v. Antemetic. 
Apophlegmatic decoction—p. 396. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 398. n° 6 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 5. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 
—juice—p. 397. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 2. 
—nodule—p. 398. n° 7.
—powders—p. 69. n° 16. p. 397. n° 4.
—sugar-cakes—p. 398. n° 5 
—troches—p. ib. n° 8. 
Apoplexy, v. Antepileptic. 
Ardor urinæ, v. Diluents, Refrigerants, and Balsamics. 
Aromatic balsam p. 362. n° 5. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 10. 14. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 2. 6. 
—fumes—p. 323. n° 4. 9. 
—glysters—p. 415. n° 13. 15. 16. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 4. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixture—p. 236. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 22. 24. 
—tablets—p. 1 38. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 
—vapors—p. 314. n° 2. 3. 
Arthritic, v. Antarthritic. 
Ascarides, v. Anthelmintic. 
Ascites, v. Anasarca. 
Asthma, v. Antastmatic.
Astringent 


INDEX. 
Astringent bolus—p. 83. n° 19. 
—decoction—p. 179. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 4, 5. 
—emplaster—p. 337. n° 4. 
—epithems—p. 280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 8. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 159. n° 2. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture— p. 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 26. 34. 
Atrophe, v. Analeptic. 
Attenuants, v.
Alexipharmics 
Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
Attrahent, v.
Epispastic.
Rubisier.
B. 
Balsamic boles—p. 86. n° 12. 17. 
—decoctions—p. 179. n° 3, 4. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 14, 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. 9. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 12. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—fotus—p. 272. n° 10. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 4, 5. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 5. 6. 12. 
—infusion—p. 160, n° 5. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 219. n° 2. 
—linctus—p. 105. (2.) and n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233. n° 10. 14. 15. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 17, 18, & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. 25. 
—troches—p. 131. n° 7. 
Bechich, v. Pectoral and Balsamic. 
Belly-ache, v. Colic. 
Birth to promote, bolus—p. 84. n° 7. 
—draughts—p. 235. n° 14. 15.
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 10. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5.
—powders—p. 74. n° 31, 32, 33. 
Blasts, v. Erisipelas, and Antiphlogistic. 
Bleeding, v. Hæmorrhage. 
Bloody-

INDEX. 
Bloody-flux, v. Dysentery. 
Breath-fetid, troches—p. 130. n° 5 & seq. 
Bruises, v.
Aperients and
Balsamics.
Bubos to suppurate—p. 339. n° 10. 
Burns, (v. Antiphlogistic,) emplast.—p. 340. n° 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7. 10. 
C.
Cachexy, v. Aperients, Aromatics, Corroborants. 
Calculus, v. Antinephritics. 
Cancer, v. Aperients and Paregorics. 
Cardiac (v. Alexipharmic) boles—p. 85. n° 8. 
—draughts—p. 236. n° 16. 18. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 96. n° 8. 10, 11. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—epithem—p. 299. n° 4. p. 281. n° 8. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 7. 15. 
—infusion—p. 262. n° 7. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. and n° (3.) 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. 16. 18. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 21. 28.
Cardialgia, v. Absorbents.
Caries, v. Alexipharmics, and Detergents. 
Carminatives, v. Alexipharmics. 
Catalepsy, v. Antapoplectics. 
Catarrh, v. Diaphoretics, and Corroborants. 
Cathartic apozem—p. p.179. n° 2.
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. 3, 4, 5. 
—cakes—p. 142 n° 1. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1. 2 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 6 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 2. 8, 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—infusions—p. 159. n° 2. p. 163. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixtures—p. 209. n° 8. p. 213. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1, 2.
—pills—p. 116. 
—potions, v. draughts. 
—powders—p. 66, 67, 68. 
—suppositories 
—tablets—p. J37. p. Ncr,nc-r, 2. 
—wines—p. 159. n° 2. 9. 
Catoche, v. Antapoplectic. 
Caustic aspersions—p. 259. n° 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. p. 299. n° 5. p. 373. n° 5. and 6.
Caustic 

INDEX. 
Caustic emplasters—p. 37. n° 7.
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—liquor—p. 244. n° 4. 
—powders—p. 259. n° ib. 
Cephalic balsams—p. 361. n° 1. 2. 6. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 8. 16. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—decoction—p. 222. n° 10. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 14. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° g. 11. 16. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—errhins—p. 385. n° 5. 
—frication—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 378. n° 5. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 3. 8. 10. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 10. 13. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 4. 5. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—pills—p. 116. n° (3.) 6. 7. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 22. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 5, 6. 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 7. 
Chaliliat drops—p. 245. n° 10. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 16. 
—mixture—p. 245. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 5. 6. 8. 
—powders—p. 74. n° 32. 34. 
Chlorosis, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Coolers, v. Acids, Refrigerants, and Diluents. 
Contusions, v. Aperients, and Balsamics. 
Cholic, Biliose, v. Acid, Absorbent, Cathartics, and oily Mixtures. 
—Arthritic, v. Aromatics, Anodynes, and Revulsives. 
—Hysteric, v. Anthysterics. 
—Flatulent, v. Aromatics. 
—Nephritic, v. Antinephritic. 
—from Aliments, v. Emetics and Cathartics. 
Constipatives, v. Astringents. 
Convulsions, v. Antispasmodics. 
Corroborant, (v. Analeptics) ale—p. 159. n° 2. 
—apozem—p. 179. n° 4.
—bath, cold water 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 18. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—colyrium, cold water 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries p. 94. n° 4. 5. 11. 14. 16. 
Corroborant

INDEX. 
Corroborant, v. (Analeptics) emplasters p. 337. n° 4, 5.
—epithems—p.280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 2. 4. 9. 
—infusion—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture—p 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4, 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25, 26. 34 
Cough, v. Balsamics, and Aperients. 
Courses to promote, v. Aperients and Anthysterics. 
—to restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Cutaneous Disorders, v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
D. 
Delivery to promote, v. Alexipharmics, Emetics, and Anthysteries. 
Dentition to facilitate, gargarism—p. 401. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 368. n° ib. 
Deobstruents, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
Desiccatives, v. Absorbents. 
Detergent, (v. Aperients) aspersions—p. 257. n° 1. 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 290. n° 2. 
—gargarism—p. 400. n° 1. 2.  
—glysters—p. 412. n° 1. 2. 7. 14. 
—injections—p. 251. n° 1. 4. 6. 8. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 6. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 21. 35. 
Diabetes 
Diarrhæ  
v. Agglutinants, Astringents, and Balsamics, 
Diaphoretics, v. Aromatics. 
Digestion to strengthen, v. Aromatics, and Astringents. 
Diluent apozem—p. 179. n° 3. 
—infusion 162. n° 7. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8. 10, 11. 
—juice—p. 93. n° 4. 
Discutients, v. Aperients. 
Diuretic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 6. 12. 
—bath—p. 303. n° 2.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 13. 
—emulsions—p. 208. n° 6. 11. 
—infusions—p. 160. n° 3. 4. 7. 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 193. n° 4. 5. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 18. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 15. 35. 
Dropsys v. Aperients, Cathartics, and Diuretics. 
Dysentery, v. Alexipharmics, Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Dysury,  v, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
E.

INDEX.
E. 
Ecbolics, v. Birth to promote. 
Ecchimoses, v. Apperients, Attenuants. 
Eccoprotics, v. Lenitives. 
Ecphratlics, v. Aperients.  
Emetic boles—p. 82. 
—draughts p. 233. n° 8. 11.
—juices p. 192. n° 2. 
—infusions p. 159. n° 1. 
—powders p. 65. 
—wines p. 159. n° 1. 
Emmenagtgs, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Emmenagogic boles—p. 86. n° 11. 16. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15, 16. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 3. 16. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5. 
—pessary—p. 424. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 6, 7, 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 2. 32. 
Emollients, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Epispastics, cataplasms—p. 372. n° 3. 6. 
—dropax—p. 372. n° 1. 
—emplasters—p. 373. n° 4. 7. 
—pastes—p. 372. n° 2. 5. 
Epulotic Aspersion—p. 259. n° 7. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 14. 
—sparadrap p. 338, n° 6. 
Erysipelas, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Errhins—p. 384 
Escharotics, v. Caustics. 
Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
Exanthemata, Scorbutic, v. Absorbents, Aperients, Diluents, Ca- 
thartics. 
—Inflammatory, v. Lenitives, Antiphlogistics, Diluents. 
F.
Faintings, v. Antapopledics, Cephalics, and Cardiacs. 
Fevers in general, v. Aiexipharmics, Epispastics, Cardiacs, Dilu- 
ents. Acids, Antiphlogistics. 
Fevers, Intermitting, v. Emetics, and Aperients. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
Fevers

INDEX. 
Fevers, intermitting, draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 12. 
—epithems—p. 279. n° 4. p. 298. n° 1. 
—glysters—p. 416. n° 14. 16. 
—infusion—p. 160. n6, 5. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8, 9. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° g. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
—Remitting, bolus feb.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—Inflammatory, v. Acids, Antiphlogistics, Diluents, Car- 
diacs, and Alexipharmics. 
—Nervous, or Slow, v. Alexipharmics, Cephalics, Epispastics. 
—Patrid-hestic, v. Antiphlogistics, Acids, Analeptics. 
G. 
Gangrene, v. Aperients, and Alexipharmics. 
Gleet, v. Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Gonorrhæ, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
Gout, v. Antarthritic. 
Gravel, v. Antinephritic, 
Green-sickness, v. Aperients, and Emmenagoges. 
Gripes, v. Cholic, and Anodynes. 
Gutta-Rosacea, v. Antiphlogistics. 
H. 
Hæmorrhage, internal, v. Balsamics, and Refrigerants. 
—pulv.—p. 75. n° 36. 
—external. 
—aspersion—p. 258. n° 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 298. n° 3. 
—injection—p. 254. n° 9. 
Hæmorrhoids (v. Eccoprotics.) 
—cataplasm—p. 292. n° 6. 
—epithem—p. 299, n° 6. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 10. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 11. 
—suppositories—p. 423. no. 5 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
Heart burn, v. Cardialgia. 
Hectic, v. Fever. 
Hemeplegia, v. Palsy. 
Hoarseness, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Hydrogog draughts—p. 102. n° 2. p. 209. n° 8. p. 243. n° 1. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 1. 
Hh Hydrocele


INDEX. 
Hydrocele, v. Aperient Externals. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
Hydrops, v. Anasarca 
Hypnotics, v. Anodynes. 
Hypo, v. Aperients. 
Hysteric Passion, v. Anthysterics. 
I. 
Jaundice, apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. p. 83. n° 3. 14. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 13. 
—drops p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 14. 
—powders p. 66. n° 2. 13. 35. 
Impotency, v. Aromatics, Externals and Internals. 
Inflammations, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Intermittents, v. Agues. 
Itch, v. Aperients, and Cathartics. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 13. 
—linimen—p. 371. n° 11. 
—unguents—p. 345. n° 4.
K. 
King's-Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
L.
Laxatives, or
Lenitives, 
boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 
—electuarics—p. 94. n° 2. 6. 
—epithems—p. 270. n° 4. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 
—mixture—p. 234. n° 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 
Leprosy, v Itch, and King's-Evil. 
Lechargy, v. Cephalics, and Antapoplectics. 
Looseness, and  
Lientery
v. Diarrhæ   
Lythontriptics, v. Antinephritics.
Lubricants, v. Balsamics.
Madness,

INDEX.
M. 
Madness, raving, v. Laxatives, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—melancholy, v. Emetics, Aperients, and Chalybiats. 
Measles, v. Balsamics, Cardiacs, Diluents, and Eccoprotics, 
Melancholy, v. Hippo. 
Menses to provoke, v. Emmenagogs. 
—restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Mortification, v. Gangrene. 
N. 
Narcotics, v. Anodynes. 
Nausea, v. Antemetics. 
Nephritics, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Neurotics, v. Cephalics. 
Numbness, v. Palsy. 
O. 
Obstructions, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
P. 
Pains to ease, v. Anodynes. 
Palsy. v. Antarthritics. 
Paregorics, Anodynes, Balsamics, and Diluents.
Phlegm, v. Hydrogogs, and Diaphoretics. 
Phthisis, v. Analeptics. 
Piles, v. Hæmorrhoides. 
Plague, v. Fevers, nervous. 
Pleurisy, v. Balsamics, Detergents, and Diluents. 
Pox, v. Antisiphilics. 
Q.
Quinsey, v. Antiphlogistics. 
R. 
Rheumatism, v. Antarthritics. 
Rickets, v. Aperients, and Corroborants. 
S. 
Scalds, v. Burns. 
Scabs 
Scald-head  
Schirri 
v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
Hh2 Scurvy,

INDEX. 
Scurvy, v. Antiscorbutics. 
Seminal Weakness, v. Analeptics, Balsamics, and Corroborants. 
Sleep to promote, v. Anodynes. 
Small Pox, v. Fevers, inflammatory. 
Spasms, v. Antispasmodics. 
Spleen, v. Aperients, and Chalibiates. 
Sterility, v. Aromatics. 
Stinking Breath, Troches for—p. 130. n° 5. 
Stone, v. Antinephrities. 
Strangury, v. Balsamics; and Diluents. 
Struma, v. Aperients, Absorbents, Antisyphilics, ahd Diluents. 
Sweats, to check, v. Acids, and Corroborants. 
T. 
Teeth, to cleanse and preserve—p. 390. 
Thirst, v. Acids, and Diluents. 
Tubercles of the Lungs, and Tumors to discuss, v. Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
U. 
Venery to provoke, v. Aromatics. 
Vertigo, v. Antepileptics. 
Vomiting, v. Antemetics. 
Urine, bloody, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—hot or scalding, v, Balsamics, and Astringents. 
—involuntary, u. Corroborants. 
W. 
Whites, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Wind, v. Carminatives, and Aromatics. 
Worms, v. Anthelmintics.







































LECTURES
OF 
PHARMACY: 
EXHIBITING 
EXACT RULES for PRESCRIBING, 
And of Use to every 
STUDENT of PHYSIC, 
As well as Necessary to all 
APOTHECARIES. 
FIRST GIVEN 
At the Close of an Annual COURSE of CHYMISTRY (on
the Desire of the late Learned Dr. BOERHAAVE) and since 
Published by Dr. H. GAUBIUS, Successor to that celebrated 
PROFESSOR in the Colledges of MEDICINE and CHEMISTRY, 
in the UNIVERSITY of LEYDEN. 
Translated by a PHYSICIAN, 
With proper NOTES, additional FORMS of PRESCRIPTION, 
an useful APPENDIX, and a double INDEX. 
LONDON: 
PRINTED for JOHN NOON, at the White Hart, near Mercers-
Chapel, in Cheapside, MDCCXLIV. 



(iii)
THE 
TRANSLATOR'S 
PREFACE. 
THE public, it is presumed, can 
be under no surprize at the ap- 
pearance of the present treatise: 
the character, abilities, and station of 
its learned author are so considerable, 
the composition and order of the book it- 
self so accurate, and its usefulness so ex- 
tensive and evident, that to make any 
apology on this account, would be alto- 
gether useless if not ridiculous. 
A2 THE

iv The Translator’s 
THE judicious will soon perceive the 
book to be none of those justly complain'd 
of; which consisting of mere repeti- 
tions from others, or a bare parade 
of method, leave the science as they 
found it; or rather retarded, by aug- 
menting the number of books without in- 
creasing knowledge. So far from it, that 
we have not any modern performance of 
the kind (at least in our language) ex- 
tant; notwithstanding the subject is so 
evidently useful and important: in so 
much, that it seems surprising Dr. Fuller 
shou'd give us (ex professo) an extempo- 
raneous Dispensatory, and yet neglect the 
main part; which is here largely con- 
sider’d; viz. the method of prescribing,
compounding, and exhibiting extempo- 
raneous medicines. 
Dr. Quincy has indeed said something 
on this head, in the latter part of his 
Dispensatory; but very little, and tran- 
siently, in comparison with the fulness 
and order of this: so that we may justly 
deem it more worthy of the title usurped 
by

v PREFACE.
by Dr. Fuller (i.e. Pharmacopæa Ex- 
temporanea), than any performance yet 
exposed to the world. 
To make the book as useful to the rea- 
der as intended by the author, does indeed 
require frequent revolution, and consul- 
tation by reference; but then it excludes 
numerous tautologies, and restrains the 
volume to a moderate size. 
THE formulas inserted as specimens 
by our author, may serve very well to il- 
lustrate the rules he has just before pre- 
scribed for them, and will give the rea- 
der some idea of the foreign practice this 
way: but most of them wou'd be judged 
aukward prescriptions by the physicians 
our own practice, notwithstanding they 
are generally extracted from the materia 
medica of the late celebrated professor 
Boerhaave: for which reason it was 
thought proper to further add such spe- 
cimens to the forms most in use, as are 
frequently to be met with in the practice 
of our best physicians. Those of the au- 
thor may be distinguished from such as 
A3 are 

vi The Translator’s 
are added; as the first begin with ꝶ. but 
the last with 4: and if any body is de- 
sirous to have still a larger number of 
specimens for each form, they may have 
recourse to Fuller; whose Pharmacopæa 
may be taken as a supplement to this.
WITH regard to the present trans- 
lation and edition, to have given a ver- 
sion directly literal wou’d have made the 
reading too stiff, and less agreeable with 
our own language: but care has been all 
along taken to preserve the author's sense, 
and to represent it generally to advan- 
tage, as much as possible in his own words. 
It is hoped the book has improved and 
pained in the translation; and there are 
several things which render this edition 
more compleat and useful than the origi- 
nal: the quotations referred to by our 
author are here subjoined in their pro- 
per places, Some occasional but necessary 
observations are here and there made,
and both are properly distinguished in the 
way of note; the several formulœ are in- 
stanced more largely and accurately, and 
the


vii PREFACE. 
the book is closed with useful and necessa- 
ry indices. 
TO conclude, for the literal errors, 
or other small over-sights which have 
accidentally crept in, we must presume 
on the readers allowance; since we 
find the most elaborate performances 
are not intirely free: and as the com- 
mon interest of the faculty was the cause 
of this publication, there is the more 
room to expect candor and good nature 
from its members, in behalf of their 
Humble Servant, 
S. M.

THE
AUTHOR’S PREFACE 
WHEN I first applied myself to the 
profession of physic, among several dif- 
ficulties which offer'd, the greatest 
was that of prescribing a proper form 
to the medicines indicated; such as might not 
only best answer the intention, but also fit them 
for the most just and easy composition in the pro- 
per hands, and make their exhibition to the pa- 
tient the least irksome mid most successful. For 
I soon found the general precepts which are usu- 
ally learned on this head, barely in universities, 
were very unequal to the purpose; and that a 
just determination of the form was to be had only 
from considering every individual, and even the 
most minute circumstances both of the patient 
and the medicine: that there were no forms of 
medicines answer able for the same intention in all 
cases alike; and that the same indication often 
required the application of a medicine in very 
different ways and forms, before a physician cou'd 
effect his design, and acquit himself to his patient. 
I also remarked the admonition of Hippocrates, 
(μηfεγ ειχη, μηδεv ζωεgopαv) that to attempt a 
cure inconsiderately, was to attempt to do no- 
thing to the purpose; which caution is service- 
able here, if any where: for if a physician be
wrong


ix The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.        
wrong or careless in prescribing proper medicines, 
he will quickly find how easily his intention may 
be frustrated, notwithstanding that and his other 
observations be ever so just. The vast hopes and 
designs which a physician may have formed to 
himself from a due consideration of the disease, 
must inevitably fall to nothing, if he does not 
establish their being, by a just prescription and 
exhibition of proper medicines; the result of 
which, may be a happy cure, the proper end of 
his profession: nor does a physician draw his cha-
racter so much from what he thinks, as from 
what he orders and commits to paper; from 
whence, the great importance of our present sub- 
ject, both to the physician and patient, is suffici- 
ently evident.
I found it not only a great difficulty to charge 
my memory with set forms, composed by my tea- 
chers and the best writers; but I also perceived, 
notwithstanding the deference and credulity of 
youth, that such could not directly, suit my prac- 
tice in all similar cases that occurred: as my 
cases did not in every circumstance correspond with 
those for which the set forms were compiled; and 
that therefore I  must be under a necessity of com- 
posing new forms for my particular patients; or 
else of making frequent changes in those which I 
had learned. This consideration, with the new
and sudden changes in the state of disease; and a 
natural aversion to the servile yoke of prejudice, 
prevailed with me to set my judgment free from 
the fetters of set forms complied by other men; 
especially as I was encouraged thereto, by the cus-
tom

x The AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
tom of extemporaneous prescription prevailing, 
now, almost universally.  
NOR was I satisfied with the answer made 
me by some old standers in practice, whom I some- 
times consulted in those difficult and sudden changes, 
viz. that use and experience would make this 
work easy, however difficult it might seem to a 
beginner; but for fear of an irreparable loss of 
my reputation in practice, from many unhappy 
events, and even death, I was resolved to be also 
guided by my own reason, I therefore thought it 
incumbent on before I advanced in practice, 
to acquaint myself with all that had been well 
said on the subject by my predecessors in physic: 
for which end, I turned over all the physical 
writings that I cou'd get upon this theme, and 
compared the general rules which they prescribed, 
with the particular formulæ or prescriptions of 
the best physicians. 
BUT I as quickly found upon this review, 
that a great number of these rules were so uncer- 
tain, as to be oftener neglected than observed; 
that many were contradictory to each other, and 
the greatest part of them all liable to abundance 
of exceptions: as will appear to any one who 
compares them with the prescription in the daily 
practice of our most skilful physicians. Many 
physicians who had undertaken to instruct their 
juniors by their works on this head, having as it 
were forgot themselves, seem to have writ rather 
as expert masters, to masters, than to unskilful 
beginners: while others, over studious of brevity,
only

xi The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.             
only throw a darker mist before us. I therefore 
came at last to this resolution, viz. of collecting 
indifferently all the precepts which had been given 
for each particular form, and subjoining all the 
exceptions that occurred in their proper places, 
that by comparing and accommodating the dif- 
ference, I might thence deduce a set of general 
and more intelligible directions or propositions, 
which being methodized and reduced to their 
proper heads, wou'd form a manual to consult, 
and to direct my hand in practice. 
AND hence arose the present treatise: which 
tho' now published, I have not the vanity to pretend 
it has many great perfections and new doctrines, 
which are not to be met with scatter'd in the 
works of others; but I ingenuously confess there 
are few or none, but what have been exhausted, 
with some pains, from the attempts of others in 
this way. Nor will an impartial reader think 
the worse of this performance for having thus 
candidly imparted to him its origin. 
THE authors who have contributed and been 
consulted in the composition of this work, are too 
numerous to give a particular account of them 
here; tho' almost all of them are worthy of 
esteem: and were each to take bis proper quota, 
there wou'd not remain many pages to myself; for 
which reason I have omitted citations and refe- 
rences to authors in the body of the book itself; 
that I might not tire my reader with their num- 
ber, nor appear to him ostentatious of much 
reading. 
TO

xii The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
TO conclude, the only cause of my publication, 
was this: being promoted to the public professor- 
ship of chemistry in this university, I was strongly 
sollicited by Boerhaave to subjoin a pharmaceuti- 
cal to my annual chemical course; and here it 
seemed for the interest of my audience to exhibit 
the doctrine and preparation of extemporaneous, 
as well as officinal medicines. I had therefore 
recourse to what I had formerly collected and me- 
thodized for my own use on this head, and from 
thence, as every one is pleased with his own, I 
took the method and materials of my lectures; 
that so my pupils might have same general rules 
to direct their prescriptions conformable to prac- 
tice, which I endeavoured to illustrate to them 
by specimen or example. But the time limited 
for the performance of this course was too short, 
to give the doctrine with that slowness and distinc- 
tion which is necessary for a swift elocution 
wou'd not make an impression on their minds, suf- 
ficient to enable them to prescribe a form regular- 
ly to a proposed case, by that time they were re- 
turned home; so that I thought of the press as an 
expedient to save myself trouble, and make this 
doctrine the more useful to them. If I obtain this, 
it is enough; but if any body else reap advantage 
from hence, they are welcome: I shall then at 
least have the happiness of thinking myself the more 
useful by my labours. 
Written at Leyden, 1739.
THE

(xiii) 
THE 
CONTENTS. 
THE introduction—Pag.1
General rules and cautions to he observed
before prescribing—4 
OF FORMS IN GENERAL—4—57 
Of the general heads and circumstances of formula or 
prescriptions: 
(I.) In common to all—13 
Viz. Inscription (§.55.), beginning (§.56.), 
order or method (§. 57.), the way of 
writing the ingredients and their quan- 
tities (§.58.), the subscription directing 
the apothecary (§. 59.), the superscrip-
tion directing the patient (§. 60.). 
(II.) In common to simple formula—25 
Viz. The dose (§. 65.) and general quantity 
to be made up at once (§. 68.)—25 
(III.)

xiv The CONTENTS. 
(III.) Proper to compound formulæ—Pag.35 
Viz. 1°. Parts; basis (§.75.), adjuvans 
(§.78.), corrigens (§.83.), consti- 
tuens (§.86.) 
2°. Their mutual proportion (§.87.), 
general quantity (§.93.), and dose 
(§.92.) 
3°. Their QUALITIES; consistence 
(§.96.), colour (§.99.), odor 
(§.100.), taste (§.101.), medicinal 
virtues (§.102.).
OF FORMS IN PARTICULAR—Pag.54 
Forms of internal medicines—ib. 
Powder—ib. 
Bolus—76 
Electuary–88 
Linctus—99 
Pills—106 
Troches—122 
Tablets—131 
Cakes—138 
Insusions—143 
Decoctions—164 
Expressed juices—182 
Emulsions—194 
Forms

xv The CONTENTS.
Forms by mixture, p. 210
Juleps—pag. 211 
Mixtures—224 
Drops, &c—237 
Forms of external medicines—246 
Of external forms common to several parts. 
Of Injections—246 
Aspersions—255 
Epithems in general—259 
liquid, or fomentations—260 
dry, of several kinds—273 
Cataplasms in general—282 
boiled—ib. 
crude—294 
Baths in general—300 
watery—ib 
vaporous in general—307 
Moist vapours—308 
Suffitus, or dry fumes—315 
Plasters—326 
Cerates—342 
Ointments—345 
Balsams, odoriserous—354 
Liniments—363 
Epispastics—371 
Frications-374 
Of external forms proper to certain parts—375 
—to the head—ib. 
Cucusa, or scull-cap—ib. 
Frontal—ib. 
Collyrium—378
Exter-

xvi THE CONTENTS.
External forms proper to the nose—382 
Errhines—ib. 
Smelling bottles, &c.—380 
Of stomatics for the mouth, in general—388 
Dentifrices—389 
Apophlegmatisms—391 
Gargarisms—399 
Scutes, or stomach plasters—402 
Clysters, intestinal—ib. 
Suppositories—417 
Pessaries, and nascales—423 
Addenda—424 
AN

AN 
INTRODUCTION 
TO THE 
Method of Prescribing, &c. 
§.1. Formula or prescription, a- 
mong physicians, is a rati- 
onal assignment and com- 
bination of such pharma- 
ceutical remedies as have 
by art been found to be 
proper in particular cases; 
respect being had to the 
matter and form of the ingredients and medicine: 
so that it may be commodiously made up by the 
apothecary, and applied with ease and success by 
the patient.  
§.2. Therefore that branch of the practice of 
physic which delivers rules for the effecting this 
rational combination (§.1.), is termed the method 
of prescribing forms of medicines. 
§.3. The matter of the formula (§.1.), whe- 
ther it be the product of nature or art, is sup- 
plied from the (iλη iατoiχη) materia medica, or 
pharmaceutical stores. The form thereof is va- 
rious, being determined by the very different 
B cir-

2 INTRODUCTION.
circumstances both of the patient and ingredi- 
ents; as will hereafter more evidently appear. The 
end and design of it, is, an artful preparation and 
just administration of those means by which the 
physician endeavours to answer his indications, and 
effect a cure. 
§.4. The method of prescribing (§.2.) therefore 
comprises the very last part which a physician is 
to engage with in his profession; this being the 
point to which his skill in all the other branches 
of the science have a direct tendence: nor does a 
complete workman therein hardly ever miss 
of a happy compensation for his industry and 
care. 
§.5. From hence (§.3. and §.4.), the neces- 
sity, usefulness and advantages as well as dignity 
of this ultimate branch of the profession, are suf- 
ficiently obvious. 
§.6. The formulæ, or prescriptions, (§.1.) are 
distinguished into (1.) officinal, respecting a medi- 
cine made and kept ready for future uses in apo- 
thecaries shops; and (2.) extemporaneous, to be 
directly made up and applied for present exigen- 
cies. 'Tis chiefly the latter of these we intend re- 
handle in this treatie. 
§.7. In order to prescribe either of these for- 
mula’s (§.6.), it is supposed that the physician or 
prescriber has a previous knowledge of, 
1. The doctrine of indications; whereby he is 
instructed whether any thing is to be done, what, 
by what means, and after what manner, toge- 
ther with the time, order, &c. in which the me- 
dicines or instruments are to be used. 
2. Of the whole materia medica in all the 
three kingdoms, animal, vegetable and mine- 
ral; inasmuch as they afford the matter (§.3.) 
of the prescribed formula: but he shou'd be 
more particularly versed in those simples and 
medicines


3 INTRODUCTION.
medicines which are at hand, or proper to the 
country where he practises. And lastly, 
3. Of all the preparations in pharmacy, both 
chemical and galenical, simple and compound; 
together with the manner in which they all 
operate, and the effects they produce in the 
animal system: for by the knowledge of these 
(1.2.3.) the physician knows how to direct 
his choice of ingredients, when he prescribes 
the formula (§.1.) 
§.8. And indeed it is not a superficial, as is 
too commonly found, but a just and more exten- 
sive knowledge of the two last (§.7. n° 2. 3.), that 
is here required for this purpose. For who will 
pretend to direct the apothecary how to act, that 
is himself ignorant of the proper methods of act- 
ing, in things of that nature? How can any one 
select or make a rational choice ot materials which 
he has never seen, or scarce heard, of? What 
room has he to foresee (and consequently prevent 
the bad) effects of applications, who has never 
examined their composition and texture, nor ex- 
perienced their action on other bodies?—He 
therefore that intends for this branch (§.2.) of the 
profession will doubtless find his account in giving 
some attention to the practical part of officinal phar- 
macy; in critically examining the mechanical struc- 
ture and sensible qualities of the materia medica & 
chemica, and in observing their effects and manner 
of acting on animal bodies. 
§.9. So that from comparing what has been 
said (§ 7. and 8. with §.4.), we may naturally 
infer that there is required more time and diligence 
than is generally supposed, to qualify one for this 
business; with regard to which, we are going to 
lay down directions according to the best of our 
abilities. But a just treatment and method will 
B2 cer-

4 INTRODUCTION. 
certainly have their, force in making the acquisi- 
tion hereof the more easy. 
§.10. Supposing therefore the preliminaries 
(mentioned §.7. and §.8.), requisite for prescrib- 
ing forms rationally, to be sufficiently known; 
we shall distribute the matter of our subject
under three general heads; the first of which, 
by way of introduction to the rest, will com- 
prise the rules and cautions necessary to be 
observed before prescribing, the second, will ex- 
hibit what relates to prescriptions in general, with- 
out regarding the particular form; and the last, 
will contain the particulars of every individual 
form of medicine in use, with proper examples or 
specimens of each. 
GENERAL RULES and CAUTIONS 
to be observed before prescribing. 
§.11. A prudent physician never orders any  
thing in his prescription but what he 
has a sufficient reason for, which upon inquiry he 
is able to give; so that he does not ad at random, 
from custom or prejudice, but as the indications, 
which he has before rightly deduced and consider- 
ed, direct him. 
§.12. He is first of all therefore to determine 
rationally, whether in the present case there be 
required any thing to be done on his part. 
§.13. In consequence of which determination 
if nature herself be found strong enough, and in a 
proper disposition to throw off the disease, if the 
disorder can absolutely receive no benefit from 
medicines, if its nature or particular disposition be 
doubtful and not yet determined, or if it be fore- 
seen

5 General Rules and Cautions.
seen that a cure thereof will bring on a worse dis- 
ease; it is then both just and rational to omit pre- 
scribing, at least any thing that will much affect
the œconomy, in order to avoid oppressing the 
patient both in his body and purse. 
§.14. But to prevent the patient’s falling into 
despair from being destitute of physical help, and 
to exclude ignominious reflection on the physician 
and his profession, as seeming useless or imper- 
fect; it is often adviseable in those circumstances 
(§.13.), to order something innocent in a pre- 
scription, such as will do no harm, if they should 
prove of no great benefit. With this view, the 
physician will acquaint and familiarise himself with 
several forms consisting of simple ingredients; as 
innocent julaps, mild emulsions, easing mixtures, 
unactive powders, &c. by which specious shew of 
assistance, the patient will rest much more quiet 
and easy both in his body and mind, than if left 
destitute with a harsh prognostic. This conside- 
ration will be more particularly useful in the un- 
certain and often imaginary disorders of virgins, 
and married women, especially whilst teeming. 
§.15. If the physician finds by his indications 
that there is room to expect success from his en- 
deavours, the next step is to determine how and 
by what means that may be obtained with the 
greatest ease and expedition: both which we are 
directed to by the doctrine of indications, which 
being supposed already known, we shall here men- 
tion such only as more immediately relate to our 
present design. 
§.16. The grand scope in a cure being to re- 
cover (tuto, cito & jucunde) safely, quickly and 
pleasantly, the physician should always have his 
eye fix’d upon that view; as being the point to 
which every thing he orders shou’d have, as much 
as possible, an immediate tendency. 
§.17.

6 General Rules and Cautions. 
§.17. Hence he is directed to select the most 
efficacious and proper ingredients, and to combine 
them in a manner most suitable to answer his in- 
tentions, having a regard both to their matter and 
the form. 
§.18. His prescription should also contain no- 
thing that will be attended with hazard or danger 
in the administration: tho' in desperate and un- 
tractable cases, it is allowable to try a new method; 
supposing it to be conducted with judgment, and 
the relations forewarned of the doubtfulness of 
success in the case. 
§.19. A physician that consults his character 
and interest, will never be fond of using new and 
unexperienced methods and remedies, whilst there 
are others of long standing in practice as suitable 
for his purpose; and even those, he will order 
with the utmost circumspection: reputation being 
oftener lost and envy got in its room, by such at- 
tempts, than thro' ignorance. 
§.20. He will reject all obsolete and useless 
medicines, and such as easily change or corrupt 
by keeping, left, they prove disagreeable and hurt- 
ful to the patient, or at least obstruct his inten- 
tion: upon which account, it is proportionably 
better for medicines to be made up at the shops of 
the most celebrated apothecaries; because their 
more constant and speedy vent gives oftener occa- 
sion for a renewal or fresh making of those medi- 
cines; but skill and honesty in compounding, are, 
however, stronger recommendations on the behalf 
of the apothecary. 
§.21. Rough medicines are to be always laid 
aside, where more gentle ones will serve the turn; 
but if such are used, it must be with great circum- 
spection and prudence, especially when intended 
for weak and delicate habits of body, or very sen- 
sible and nervous parts, left the violence of 
remedy

7 General Rules and Cautions.
remedy raise an ill opinion of the physician and 
his profession. 
§.22. Medicines which require extraordinary 
skill to prepare them, shou'd be made up and ex- 
hibited with one's own hand, or else not be pre- 
scribed at all; unless we be sufficiently assured of 
the faithfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.23. Very costly ingredients shou'd be spar- 
ingly or very little used, when others more com- 
mon and cheap are as suitable for the intention; 
which caution we generally find to be observed in 
prescriptions: but some allowance must be made 
for the luxurious daintiness of the rich, who of- 
ten judge the virtue of a medicine by its price. 
§.24. Exotic or far-fetch'd remedies, are not 
to be superstitiously preferred to such as are the 
product of our own country, when the latter are 
equal to our design; for the indigenous simples and 
compounds are not so subject to adulteration and 
fraud, nor decay from the length of time and 
change ot climate, as exoticks are. 
§.25. It is often prudent to order such things 
as (by their great commonness, easy and frequent 
name, particular smell, taste and other qualities) 
are popularly known and discoverable, by titles 
the least in use, or else mix'd and veiled with 
other substances; left being discovered, the pa- 
tient might be disgusted at them, or else despise 
them as of no efficacy. 
§.26. We may be more ready and liberal in 
the use of particular medicines to such as have 
frequently undergone their operation, than to o- 
thers unaccustomed to 'em, which particularly 
holds good with regard to emetics, cathartics, 
opiates, &c. 
§.27. Such ingredients as are unpleasant, nau- 
seous or troublesome to be taken, should be avoid- 
ed as much as possible; or at least ordered in a
B4 very

8 General Rules and Cautions. 
very small quantity, and artfully disguised in 
something more agreeable: it being generally bet- 
ter to give nothing, than what nature has a parti- 
cular abhorrence to; which caution is particularly 
of consequence with respect to very nice and 
fanciful women, children, infants, and such as have 
some particular antipathy, &c. 
§.28. Hence it is often proper to be satisfied, 
that the patient has no natural disgust and aver- 
sion to the particular medicine and form pre- 
scribed; for otherwise, remedies extremely well 
adapted to the disorder, may prove not only in- 
effectual, but sometimes of pernicious consequence; 
notwithstanding that be brought about by nothing 
more than the imagination or fancy. 
§.29. The judicious physician will aim at sim- 
plicity with efficacy, and not multitude and quan- 
tity of ingredients in his prescription; studying 
rather a concise brevity, than a pompous and af- 
fected scroll: and accordingly he will select his 
materials from the vast field of the materia medica, 
not promiscuously, but as they stand approved by 
reason and experience. 
§.30. But the younger physician, whose cha- 
racter and business are not yet sufficiently establish- 
ed, will accommodate his practice, as much as is 
consistent with his intention, to the customs and 
opinions of the age, place, and people he is con- 
cerned with: thus he will the more easily pave 
the way for coming into publick esteem; but 
when confirmed, and of considerable standing in 
practice, he may then safely disregard such cir- 
cumstances. 
§.31. Natural and simple medicines are prefer- 
able to prepared and compound ones, when the 
virtues of both are equally the same. For in pre- 
paration and competition, medicines are not only 
subject to change and put on other qualities, but
their

9 General Rules and Cautions. 
their goodness must also greatly depend on the 
honesty and dexterity of the compounder; whereas 
the conduct and constancy of faithful nature greatly 
surpasses all the pretensions of art. 
§.32. Tho' the knowledge of every simple in 
the Materia medica be useful to a physician, he is 
required to have a more particular acquaintance 
with such as are in constant practice, and for that 
purpose always kept ready in the shops; left he 
should order things which are not ready at hand: 
which would be matter of little consequence, were 
it not for the prevailing forwardness of substitut- 
ing one thing for another, without consulting the 
physician. 
§.33. Besides the properties and doses of each 
simple and compound medicine, the young phy- 
sician. will remember the several synonimous appella- 
tions usually assigned to each; that he may not be 
liable to order the same thing more than once in a 
prescription, under different titles. Upon the 
same account he will also learn the several general 
appellations, which are for brevity used to signify 
several simples, as they are expressed in Morellus *. 
§.34. An acquaintance also with the several 
seasons of the year, proper to vegitable and ani- 
mal substances, should not be neglected but had in 
memory; left he order something to be fresh ga- 
thered, &c. in autumn or winter, which is to be had 
in that flourishing state only in spring' or summer. 
§.35. The different textures and consistences of 
both simple and compound medicines, must also 
come into consideration; to avoid improper forms 
and proportions in prescription. 
§.36. The mutual affinity and aptitude of the 
simples for mixture with each other, and of the 
instruments and methods by which they must be 
so
* See a list of these general appellations at the end of the Book.

10 General Rules and Cautions. 
so prepared, should be in like manner learned 
from a rational and practical pharmacy; which 
will make for the interest both of himself and pati- 
ent, and preserve him from being ridiculed by 
the apothecary’s man, when he may have occasion 
to mention them in his prescription. 
§.37. By remembering the constituent ingredi- 
ents of officinal compounds, we may avoid an im- 
proper repetition of the same simples in an ex- 
temporaneous form; but indications, sometimes, 
require such repetition. 
§.38. Nor is it proper to accumulate many in- 
gredients in one form, which differ, indeed, in 
name, but not in their nature and specific virtues; 
for that would be much the same as neglecting the 
caution at §.33. 
§.39. Such of the select ingredients as may com- 
modiously enter one form, should not, without ne- 
cessity, be distributed into more, respect being had 
to the opinions and circumstances mention’d 
§.30;  for there are some who are much displeased 
with few and short formulæ. 
§.40. On the other hand, simples which have 
no congruity with each other, so as to mix uni- 
formly, should be left out off the form, or be as- 
signed to some other, especially oily and terebin- 
thinate substances with watery, and such things, 
as upon mixture, change or destroy the properties 
of each other, &c. of which, particular mention 
will be made hereafter, well worth special ob- 
servation. 
§.41. To avoid in some measure both these 
difficulties {§.39. & 40.), we must oppose medi- 
cines not to every trifling, but the most urgent 
Symptoms; for these being the effects or conse- 
quences of the disease, that, or its immediate cause 
being removed, the symptoms must spontaneously 
vanish; besides, the train of symptoms is often so 
numerous

11 General Rules and Cautions.
numerous and opposite, as so make a distinct 
treatment of them impracticable without confusion. 
§.42. In very acute diseases, and in symptoms 
extremely urgent, it is adviseable to order remedies 
that may be made up and exhibited with the greatest 
ease and expedition; that a critical opportunity 
may not be lost through a want of the medicine, or 
a delay of the apothecary. 
§.43. If the texture of the ingredients suit 
them indifferently for several forms, we may, upon 
inquiry, reduce them to that most agreeable to 
the patient; as many have a particular liking, or 
aversion, naturally or from use, more for one form 
than another: by which means the physician and 
his profession will come more into the good opi- 
nion of the patient, as well as taking the medi- 
cine be render’d more certain and pleasant. 
§.44. On the contrary, we must not be so solli- 
citous about the palate as to forget the proper na- 
ture, danger, and symptoms of the disease; nor 
neglect the pre-disposing cause in the patient’s 
habit. Some forms are more suitable to one dis- 
ease than another. How preposterous would it be 
to order an electuary, or bolus, in a quinsy,or where 
deglutition is difficult, &c. 
§.45. Nor is the intention of a medicine as 
easily answer’d by one form as another: sudorifics 
agree best with a liquid form, absorbents with a 
dry one, and fœtid, or nauseous things, with that 
of a pill, as we shall observe more at large in 
the several histories of each particular form. 
§.46. The age and circumstances of the pati- 
ent have also their force in determining the parti- 
cular form of the medicine. Infants should not be 
fatigued with internals, when external forms will 
prove as effectual; nor should they be ever mo- 
lested with a bolus, pill, or any thing unpleasant 
and difficult to swallow.
§.47.

12 General Rules and Cautions.
§.47. The patients natural constitution, or ha- 
bit, has, in like manner, some influence in de- 
manding a variation in the particular form. The 
hot and dry require a liquid, the moist and phleg- 
matic are benefited most by a dry form; but these 
being of less consequence must give place to the 
consideration of §.43, to 47, which are of greater 
importance *. 
* The condition of the disease, being either acute 
or chronic, has also no small influence in deter- 
mining the particular form, and manner of exhi- 
bition.—In the 
(1.) Chronic, we should gradually inlarge the 
dose (per §.26.), and may more regard the pa- 
late (per §.43.) with the patients convenience 
and circumstances (per §.23. 27. 28. 29. 46. 47. 
48. 50.); always preferring pills, electuaries, 
wines, ales, &c. to a train of boles, draughts, &c. 
which appear more formidable and discouraging. 
But, the 
(2.) Acute, generally require medicines of the 
strongest efficacy, to be used often, interchange- 
ably, in different forms for the same case, and to 
be more ascertain’d in their dose; as in boles, 
powders, draughts, drops, &c. 
§.48. Medicines that are to be taken upon long 
journeys, or continually carried about in boxes for 
constant use, should consist of ingredients the least 
bulky, most effectual and durable, and reduced to 
a form the most convenient and portable. 
§.49. If a patient finds himself better after a 
prescription, he should continue in the use of it 'till 
the physician finds some variation required; nor 
is it commendable to make a change therein with- 
out an evident and weighty reason. 
§.50. It is, however, allowable and proper, in 
hereditary, or habitual and very chronical distem- 
pers,

13 General Rules and Cautions. 
pers, to vary both the ingredients and form, tho'
the face of symptoms and their indications re- 
main the same: whereby is shewn the skill of the 
physician and the copiousness of his art, and that 
the patient may not be tired out with one form, 
nor particular medicines become habitual and use- 
less to him. 
§.51. When no benefit arises from the use of a 
medicine, rather than persist therein, it shou'd be 
changed, either wholly or in part, at the discretion 
of the physician: but, if noxious, it must be 
speedily and altogether suppressed; for, by the ju- 
vantia & ledentia, or what helps and hurts, we 
are directed principally how to act. 
§.52. Lastly, as a prudent physician never pre- 
scribes but with great attention and circumspection 
of mind, so he should never lay the formula out of 
his hand ’till he has first revised it; that he may 
be sure every thing is right, distinct and clear; 
for it being the too general lot of prescriptions 
to be made up by the hands of journeymen 
and apprentices, who are often both ignorant 
and careless, a flip of the pen, or an obscurity, 
might chance to be of fatal consequence to the pa- 
tient. 
Of the GENERAL Circumstances of pre- 
scriptions, exclusive of the particular form of 
a medicine. 
§.53. WE come now to consider the formula, 
or prescription (§.1.) in general, 
as agreeing with, or common to, all forms with- 
out distinction; and this we shall do (1.) abstractly, 
with respect to the bill itself, and then (2.) in com-
position, 

14 Of Forms in general.
position, with respect to the circumstances of its 
constituent parts. 
§,54. With regard to the first (§.53.), we un- 
derstand every thing that does not immediately 
affect or concern the medicine it self; but serve ei- 
ther for ornament, brevity, or perspecuity in the 
way of compounding and applying it. 
§.55. The first (I.) that occurs among these 
(§.54.) is an arbitrary and superstitious inscrip- 
tion, appearing in the front of the bill, and con- 
timating in some particular characters or letters in- 
timating the pious wish and inclination of the pre-
scriber: as, †. C. D. JD. JJ. α & ω *; which 
may be, and are, generally omitted without 
neglecting any thing serviceable to the patient. 
§.56. The next (II.) that appears, at the head 
of the prescription, is that constantly used, abbre- 
viated word (Rec. or ꝶ.)  † Recipe; importing that 
the apothecary is to take something, afterwards 
mentioned. 
§.57. Our business is now to examine the (III.) 
order, or series, in which the things to be thus 
(§.56.) taken are wrote. This we shall perceive 
upon enquiry to vary with every particular form of 
medicine; nor even there, shall we find one con- 
stant and uniform method observ'd; as will be 
more apparent in the particular histories of each. 
We may, however, observe in the general, 
1. That a distinct line shou'd be made of every 
single ingredient; not to obsure them, by 
writing one continuous or in the same direct- 
ion with the other. 
2. That
* This seems to smell very strong of a Romish or superstitious 
priest-craft; but as such hands are seldom daubed with physic a- 
mong us, we are intirely strangers to things of this nature. 
† When the back part of the ꝶ is left out, it makes another 
character (♃) of the same import but more frequent use, as being 
less known. 

15 Of Forms in general.
2. That ingredients of the same kind should 
be placed next to each other; roots with roots. 
waters with waters, &c. 
3. Not to be wanting in the least point of 
order, we should begin and range things, that 
differ from each other in substance, according 
to their quantities; beginning with the largest 
and ending with the smallest, or the reverse. 
4. Next to that consideration (n° 3.), the 
basis, or main ingredients (§.75.) shou'd hold 
the first place; then, the assistants (§.78.); af- 
ter them, the correcters (§.83.); and lastly, the 
vehicle (§.86.), or what serves to make them up. 
5. Such things as have their quantity undeter- 
min'd, or dependant on the consistence and bulk 
of the rest, shou'd come generally in the last 
place of a prescription. 
Not but there are several exceptions from these 
rules, which will be taken notice of in the ensuing 
parts of this treatise, and will be therefore worth 
the readers observation. 
§.58. For the (IV.) method of writing, or or- 
dering these several ingredients, and their quanti- 
ties; the more distinct and intelligible they are set 
down, the more commendable: accordingly 
1. The physician shou'd use himself to write 
plain and distinct; not to neglect and hurry over 
his letters with a careless pen. 
2. He shou'd keep up to custom and orthogra- 
phy, to avoid the sneering of an apothecary or 
his man. 
3. An irregular, or confused method of wri- 
ting, shou'd be avoided as much as possible; 
and to make things appear with more evidence 
and method, ingredients of the same kind shou'd 
be placed next to each other {per §.57. n° 2.):  
the


16 Of Forms in general.
the general appellation common to each similar 
ingredient shou’d be always placed first, and 
need not be mentioned more than once; as the 
proper name of each shou’d be placed directly 
under and even with the first, in the method of 
§.57. n° 1. The same is also to be observed, 
with respect to several ingredients following 
each other that are to enter a form in the same 
quantity, i, e. not to write the particular mark 
of quantity to each singly, but to assign only 
one character of quantity to them all; before 
which should be inserted the technical word 
ana or aa, which is used to denote that the quan- 
tity to be taken of the several preceeding ingre- 
dients must be equal or alike, whether it be in 
number, weight or measure.—There are ma- 
ny such abbreviations in use, which will be met 
with in the ensuing formulæ, and ought not to 
be neglected (if it were safe) because universally 
received and establish'd by long custom. 
4. Too much brevity in writing is still of a 
worse consequence; especially when the ingre- 
dients and their quantities are order’d, not by 
common letters, but odd characters or figures, not 
constantly used, and often falsely or imperfectly 
made *: by which means it too frequently hap- 
pens that the apothecary is brought into a mis- 
take, either of the ingredient or quantity, to the
great 
* These odd characters, of which the German (and especially 
the chemical) physicians were very fond, are extremely seldom, if 
ever, used in prescriptions among us; and therefore the caution 
seems to be directed chiefly to that quarter. But as they frequently 
occur in writers (especially foreigners) in physic, pharmacy and 
chemistry; and as they may be sometimes used with propriety in a 
prescription {per §.25.); it will be proper for the young physician 
to acquaint himself with the chief of them, agreeable to cur au- 
thors advice in the end of this paragraph: we have therefore fur- 
nished our reader with a list and explanation of the most usual of 
these characters at the end of the book; it being too long to be in- 
serted here. 

17 Of Forms in general. 
great danger of the patient. So that it is more 
prudent to intirely relinquish such, or else to use 
those only which are the most distinct and com- 
mon, and the least ambiguous; and then, only 
when {per §.25.) we have some particular rea- 
son for concealing the ingredients of the formula. 
The characters; or weight, shou’d be express’d 
with the greatest exactness, by such as love to 
use them.—And tho' the first sort of cha- 
racters are improper to enter prescriptions in 
writing, 'tis yet fit they shou’d be known; as 
they frequently occur in the works of physi- 
cians. 
5. The ingredients of a prescription shou’d be 
wrote for by those names under which they are 
kept and known in the shops; notwithstand- 
ing they shou’d be barbarous or improper: by 
which means the compounder will be under no 
difficulty, nor fall into any mistake. But if for 
concealment (per §.25.) an uncommon term be 
used, the apothecary shou’d have, if it be ne- 
cessary, a speedy and private intelligence thereof. 
6. The WEIGHTS used at present in the shops 
of apothecaries, are 
℔ the physical pound  
℥ an ounce  
ʒ a dram 
℈ a scruple
Gr. a grain
containing 
℥ xij.
ʒ viij.
℈ iij.
gr. xx.
ß ij.
A grain is seldom divided further than into two 
equal parts, whose whole amount is supposed 
to be equal to a grain of white pepper or a 
middling barley-corn: but it is much the best 
to use a grain of a determinate or standing 
weight, like that of the Goldsmiths; without 
which, this and all larger weights thence arising, 
as from unity, wou’d be always varying and un- 
certain, as Fernelius observes. 
C 7.

18 Of Forms in general. 
7. The physical measures now in use, are such 
as belong either to dry or liquid ingredients: 
and are 
(1.) Dry; as the 
Fasc. Fasciculus, or a small armfull, being as 
much as can be easily grasped by the arm bended 
together, and is equal to twelve handfuls. 
M. Manipulus, or handfull, which is as 
much as can be taken up by the whole hand at 
once, and may be compared to four pugills, 
or half an ounce. 
Pug. Pugillus, comprehends as much as can 
be contained between the thumb and two first 
fingers, and answers to about the whole or half 
of a dram. 
N°. Numero, in number, equal or unequal. 
(2.) Liquid; comprehending, besides the 
common trading measures, also the Cyath. 
Cyathum, which holds about an ounce and an 
half. 
Cochl. Coohlearium, reckon’d to be about 
half an ounce. 
Gutt. Gutta, or a Drop, which being the least 
of liquid measures, is substituted in room of a 
grain among weights, and may, like that, be 
commodiously subdivided into two (or more) 
equal parts, being first imbibed by a bit of su- 
gar, to be afterwards pulverised and divided by 
weight: but the quantity under this measure 
varies with the specific gravity and degree of 
cohesion in the liquid to be so measured; and, 
also the quantity of surface in contact with 
it, or the largeness of the bottle’s neck from 
whence it is to be dropp’d; which first also 
holds good with respect to the Cyathum and 
Cochlearium.
8.

19 Of Forms in general.
8. With regard to these medical divisions of 
quantity (n° 6. and 7.), we may observe 
(1.) That every thing, not only soft and 
solid but also liquid, whose quantity is requi- 
red to be determined with accuracy and ex- 
actness, shou’d be portion'd out by weight 
only.
(2.) The dry measures (n°. 7.) are to be 
used only for such things as are very bulky, 
and of no strength; as herbs, leaves, flowers, 
feeds, &c. The larger kind of seeds, bulbous 
roots, the whites and yolks of eggs, &c. are
usually prescribed by number. 
(3.) The liquid measures (n°. 7.) shou’d be 
seldom used in prescriptions, unless to signify 
the particular dose; by reason of their uncer- 
tainty, the measures differing with particular 
liquors and countries: but the use of weights 
is more constant and certain; and if we have, 
notwithstanding, a fancy for the use of mea- 
sures, we shou’d at least know the several 
weights of different liquors which they can con- 
tain. Strong liquids may be also portion’d 
out with more exactness by drams, scruples and 
grains, than by drops. 
(4.) Number, in prescribing ingredients, 
with their weights and measures, is to be ex- 
pressed by characters not barbarous (as 1, 2, 3, 
&c.) but Roman (as j, ij, iij, iv, &c.) as being 
more distinct and evident. 
(5.) All weights and measures are usually 
subdivided into halves, and their half part is 
then signified by the character ß.
(6.) The larger weights and measures are 
to be express’d by the characters proper to 
their whole, or half quantities; and not by 
the number of lesser weights or measures they 
contain.
C2 (7.)

20 Of Forms in general.
(7.) Sometimes the weight or measure of an 
ingredient is left to be determined at discre- 
tion by the apothecary, and is only wrote 
(q. s.) quantum sufficit, or a sufficient quantity: 
which might be well enough bore with, had 
the apothecary any constant rule to go by, or 
were the quantity and consistence of a me- 
dicine to be always the same; but when it be- 
comes on this account very uncertain, it is ad- 
viseabie for the physician to determine the quan- 
tity, as may be seen under the particular forms 
hereafter. 
(8.) Among the ancients, there were many 
other weights and measures than these (n° 7, 
8.) infrequent use; which tho' now obsolete 
and unpractised, are yet necessary to be known 
by a physician that intends to be conversant with 
their writings, and may be therefore learned 
from Fernelius and others *. 
§.59. The (V.) fifth part of a formula, or bill, 
is the SUBSCRIPTION, directing the apothecary 
in what form the physician wou’d have the ingre- 
dients made up, the manner in which they are 
to be so prepared, and the method in which they 
are to be applied, or exhibited by him to the pati- 
ent. With regard to which, 
1. If a prescription contains but one ingredi- 
ent, which requires no extemporaneous prepa- 
ration, it may be subscribed only (F.) Fiat, 
adding the name of the form, v. g. pulvis, bo- 
lus, &c. 
2.
* A list and explanation of the several weights and measures 
used by the ancient Greek, Roman, and Arabian physicians (as 
taken from Fernelius, who is for that end recommeded by our au- 
thor,) being rather too large to he conveniently inserted in this 
place, the reader will meet with that, and some others, at the 
end of the book. 

21 Of Forms in general.
2. But if it consists of several, to be only 
mix’d together without other preparation; 
there must be first inserted (M.) misce, and af- 
terwards (F.) fiat, and lastly the name of the 
form; as e.g. M. F. Bolus. But in liquid mix- 
tures it is often sufficient to write M. only; tho' 
it is sometimes requisite to give a particular ad- 
monition concerning the uniformity or exact- 
ness of the mixture. 
3. If there shou’d be required some other 
preparation besides mixture, as cutting, brui- 
ting, digesting, boiling, &c. these are also to 
be inserted either before or after M. as shall seem 
most proper. 
4. It is then requisite to add (if necessary) the 
number of doses into which the medicine is to 
be distributed: where it is also frequently pro- 
per to admonish, the apothecary to be very ex- 
act in making every dose equal and alike; be- 
cause they often, for expedition, divide a medi- 
cine by guess or the eye. 
5. Mention is to be sometimes made of the 
receptacle into which the medicine is to be put, 
and of the method of keeping, or close stop- 
ping the same; when they contain things very 
volatile, or soon melting in the air, as will be 
hereafter observed in particular forms. 
6. Lastly, the instrument whereby, and the 
particular part or the body to which, the me- 
dicine is to be applied, are required to be 
sometimes mention'd, when it appertains to the 
apothecary; as will be hereafter observed in 
the history of plasters, lambatives, glysters, 
&c. 
7. In all these particulars (no 1. to 6.), it is 
best for the physician to be full, and distinct or 
clear, and to use the terms of art, however bar- 
C3 barous:


22 Of Forms in general.
barous; left an error be committed thro' his 
own fault, or the apothecary shou’d be put to a 
nonplus. 
§.60. The (VI.) last general part of a pre- 
scription or formula, is the SUPERSCRIPTION †, 
of the medicine or direction to the patient; which 
is often (tho' not always) very necessary, inasmuch 
as it declares the form of the prescribed medicine, 
its virtue, dose, method and time of administration, 
the proper vehicle, regimen, &c. as far as they 
regard the sick patient and his attendants: which 
is to be carried on in the following order, 
1. Beneath the Subscription (§.59. n° 1, to 
6.), at a distance from the line, write the capi- 
tal letter S. i. e. signetur, let it be intitled, &c. 
2. If there be several medicines of the same 
form and appearance prescribed together for one 
patient; they shou’d be marked with the capital 
letters A, B, C, &c. or numbers, 1, 2, 3, &c. at 
the head or in the margin of each formula that 
they may be distinguish’d from each other; and 
then these distinguishing marks are to be inserted 
after the letter S. in each Superscription or di- 
rection: e.g. (S. lit. A, vel n°. 1.). But this is 
unnecessary where there is but one formula pre- 
scribed, or where there is several, but easily di- 
stinguishable from each other. 
3. There must be then annex’d the title of the 
medicine, taken from its form and virtue, e.g. 
potio purgans, a purging draught, &c. 
4. Next in order, the dose, way of taking, 
the time when, the vehicle and the regimen; 
and
† Our author calls it signatura, signment. I suppose we need 
not inform our reader that this part of a prescription is almost uni- 
versally left out by our physicians; who judge it most convenient to 
give these orders by word of mouth to the patient or his attendants, 
or leave it to the discretion of the apothecary. 

23 Of Forms in general.
and if any thing else is to be observed, it shou’d 
be mentioned in its proper place. 
5. Since this direction (n°. 1. to 4.) contains 
the rules to be observed by the patient in taking 
or applying the remedy; it shou’d be either cut 
off from the formula or prescription for him to 
keep, or else (which is the common practice) it 
shou’d be translated and wrote fair by the apo- 
thecary, on every label that is affix’d to the re- 
ceptacle of the medicine, to be transmitted there- 
with to the patient. 
6. The style of the direction shou’d be there- 
fore agreeable with the age and country wherein 
it is wrote, being concise and plain, or very in- 
telligible. 
7. In naming the medicine we shou’d avoid 
the oftentatious or quackish titles used by pre- 
tenders, nor shou’d we ever inhanse or give it 
an hyperbolical epithet; as incomparable, golden, 
grand, &c. For tho’ these may take with the 
vulgar and illiterate, it will but expose the pre- 
scriber to laughter and ridicule, among the more 
intelligible part of mankind. 
8. Care is to be also taken to hide or omit the 
names of such diseases as are indecent or impro- 
per to be mention’d in the directions; as the 
lues venerea, disorders of the menses, sterility, 
impotency, &c. For such shou’d be either 
wholly neglected, or at least signified by terms 
the least known: as exciters of the menses may 
be call’d aperients; antivenerials, purifiers of 
the blood; exciters of Venus, strengtheners, &c. 
And what relates to the method of taking, &c. 
shou’d be delivered to the patient, if possible, 
by word of mouth. 
9. The dose of the medicine, when left to 
the patient or his attendants, shou’d be ordered 
by quantities the most commonly known and 
C4 easy

24 Of Forms in general. 
easy to determine; as by large or tea spoons full, 
the size of nuts, drops, &c. But if it be of 
consequence to have the dose determined to ex- 
actness; the distribution and exhibition thereof, 
may be referr’d to the apothecary. 
10. The method and time of administring the 
remedy, depending upon the particular nature 
of the disease, the medicine itself, and many 
other circumstances; shou’d be in the general di- 
rected so as to suit best with the physician’s in- 
tention, and the patient’s convenience: neg- 
lecting the scrupulous and superstitious observa- 
tion of times and seasons deduced from astrolo- 
gy, as both useless and unbecoming the sagacity 
of our age. 
11. If there be any occasion for a vehicle to 
take it in, we shou’d endeavour to chuse one, 
that besides pleasing the palate, falls in with the 
intention of the medicine itself. The materials 
for vehicles are usually taken from things that 
are readiest at hand, grateful or pleasant to the 
patient, or become so by common and frequent 
use: as ale, wine, broth, tea, coffee, juleps, 
wafers, marmalade, roasted apple, or the like. 
12. A proper regimen, before, in, and after 
the operation of the medicine, is often abso- 
lutely necessary to be observed; for without this, 
the action of the remedy wou’d be frequently, 
either too much increased, diminish’d, chang’d, 
or wholly destroyed. But to determine what re- 
gimen will be most proper, the doctrine of in- 
dications must be call’d into consideration. 
§.61. We have been hitherto treating of a for- 
mula in general, exclusive of its particular contents; 
we come now to examine its internal composition, 
the number of its constituent parts, their nature, 
quantity, mutual affinity, proportion and the like. 
§.62.

25 Of Forms in general. 
§.62. The formula, or prescript (§.1. &
§.6.) consists either of (1.) only one officinal sim- 
ple or compound preparation; or else (2.) of se- 
veral such properly combined together: which 
first, we shall call a simple formula; but the last, a 
compound one. 
§.63. A simple formula (§.62.), as it con- 
sists of but one officinal preparation selected out of 
many, does scarce require any other restriction or 
limitation than that of its quantity. 
§.64. Its quantity then, is twofold: (1.) so 
much as is order’d by the physician to be made up 
and sent to the patient by the apothecary at one 
time; or (2.) such a quantity of the first as is to 
be applied or administred to the sick patient at 
once. The first, we shall call tht general quantity; 
the latter, the particular one, or dose: but as the 
quantity of the first depends upon the number of 
the last, we shall consider that before the former. 
§.65. The dose of a medicine comes under two 
considerations; viz. that of continued quantity, and 
that of number. 
§.66. The bulk or weight of a dose, is deter- 
mined by the physicians due consideration of the 
condition and circumstances of both the patient and 
the medicine: without which, a well chosen re- 
medy, by exceeding or falling short of its just 
quantity, may prove either hurtful or at least in- 
effectual. To prevent this, we must: therefore at- 
tend 
1. To the nature of the disease, its seat, stage, 
force or degree of strength, causes, symptoms, 
&c. that our force may be proportion’d to the 
obstacle to be removed. For as diseases that are 
violent, acute or deep-rooted, are scarce to be 
overcome but by large doses; so, if we shou’d 
overload a slight case, the remedy itself wou’d 
prove another disease. 
2.

26 Of Forms in general.
2. We must regard the strength; depending 
on that of the fibre, or the blood's motion, and 
functions of the body: that our assistant means 
may be adiquate the defect, and not prove a bur- 
then instead of a helping hand. So that large 
doses will be found to suit strong bodies; whereas 
the weak can only bear small ones. But we must 
carefully distinguish strength that is latent and 
oppress'd, from that which is really absent and 
exhausted. 
3. We must have respect to the age: with re- 
gard to which, the following general rules may 
be of service for internal medicines. 
Suppose a dose proper for a man of a consistent 
age (i. e.) about 30, or when he has done growing) 
to be 
as — 1, or ʒj.
a dose for one of 14 to 21, will be 2/3, or ℈ij.
— 7 to 14,—1/2 or ʒß. 
— 4 to 7,—1/3 or ℈j. 
— 4—1/4 or gr. xv. 
— 3—1/6 or  ℈ß. 
— 2—1/8, or gr.viij.
— 1—1/12, or gr.v.  
Old people being observed to be twice children 
in their strength and diet, as such they shou'd be 
also consider'd in this respect of dose; so that we 
may compare
an old man of 60, to a young man of 21 years. 
— 7O,—14 
— 80,—7 
and so with the rest. But it cannot be supposed that 
these rules hold always so, as not to admit of many
exceptions;

27 Of Forms in general.
exceptions for, that there must be frequently a 
variation, will appear evidently to all who consi- 
der the diversity of strength in people of the same 
age. So that a true estimate of the dose, is hardly 
deducible from the age alone. 
4. The size of the body, in people of the 
same age, does also frequently require a variation 
in the dose; tho' we shall find, their strength is 
not always proportionable to their size. 
5. The temperature has also some influence 
upon the quantity of a dose. The biliose and 
melancholly can easily dispense with a larger 
mass of cooling, moistening and relaxing me- 
dicines, than their opposite temperatures; and 
so (vice versa) on the contrary side. 
6. The difference of sex has also its force. 
Women, who are generally of a more delicate 
and weak constitution than men, require a pro- 
portionable diminution of the dose. But such as 
are very nice and fanciful, will sometimes throw 
up the dose notwithstanding it was proportion’d 
to their strength. For such, it is therefore ad- 
visable to let the quantity be as small as possible; 
or else to subdivide a larger dose into several 
smaller parcels. 
7. The particular disposition, whether morbid, 
natural, constant, periodical, from the make or 
habit of body, sex, proceeding diseases, &c. 
with the complication of the original disease, 
may have each their concern in determining the 
particular dose as well as the kind of a medi- 
cine. 
To this head belong a regard to the menses, 
breeding, lying-in, suckling, hysteric fits in wo- 
men, and the hippo in men; with obesity, tender- 
ness, a weakness in some particular organ, a defor- 
mity in the back or break, the stone, an aptness to  
vomit,

28 Of Forms in general.
vomit, with abundance of the like particular indif- 
positions. 
8. To be still more particular, it is sometimes 
very necessary to have a regard to the individual 
constitution, idiosyncrasia, or particular inclina- 
tion of every patient, as they stand affected to 
this or that class of medicines, or some one par- 
ticular remedy. These being generally inexpli- 
cable, are to be known only by experience, or 
from the patient's relation: thus some are pur- 
ged even by the smell of a cathartic; while 
others are scarce affected by double the usual 
quantity taken inwardly for a dose. 
9. Use or custom has also its force here; for 
a large dose of a medicine will produce less ef- 
fect upon one used to the same, than a small 
dose upon one who is a stranger thereto; which 
is very obvious in the use of narcotics and to- 
bacco. 
10. Nor is the employ or course of life to be 
here altogether neglected; for as the several de- 
grees of health and sickness are particularly in- 
fluenced thereby so it also frequently brings the 
body into particular habits, which either in- 
crease or diminish the action of certain medicines. 
11. The particular nation or people is to be 
also consider'd with regard to the dose; as they 
have often something in that respect singular and 
proper to themselves. Thus, the Saxons and 
Westphalians *, are hard to work upon. The 
Siamese use an arsenical instead of an antimonial 
cup; and the Indians require a dose of ipecacu- 
anha twenty times as large as the Europeans, to 
make them vomit †. 
12.
* Wedelii de compos. medic. tab. II. 
† Histoire de l'academ royale, 1703. 

29 Of Forms in general. 
12. A regard to the season of the year is also 
sometimes of consequence: as the sultry dog- 
days, the hard frost, or the temperate air, dis- 
pose the body to be more or less affected by 
one and the same dose. 
13. The known strength and virtues of the 
remedy also, when consider’d with their relation 
to the several preceeding heads, still greatly in- 
crease the variation of the dose. Thence, a phy- 
sician that intends to prescribe forms rationally, 
will make himself exactly acquainted with the 
several quantities of medicines found by experi- 
ence, and established by use to be proper for one 
dose: with the several degrees of that dose, as 
being small, mean or large, with respect to the 
preceeding considerations; more especially he 
will keep in memory those of the capital and 
most efficacious medicines. But if he would 
bring any simple into use which has not been yet 
sufficiently experienced, being mindful of the 
rule §.19. he will begin first with the least quan- 
tity, afterwards judiciously inlarging the dose, 
as he is assured of the preceeding unactivity, or 
usefulness of the medicine. 
14. Sometimes the high price of medicines, 
which are otherwise of no great efficacy, restrains 
the dose to a small compass; witness, prepared 
pearl, gems, oriental and porcupine bezoar, &c. 
15. The great bulkeyness of the matter, con- 
taining but a due quantity of medicinal parti- 
cles, obliges the dose to be sometimes less than 
is otherwise requisite; left the load of inactive 
matter shou’d excite a nausea: as is often the 
case in herbs, barks, woods, flowers, &c. 
16. The unpleasantness of a medicine, whether 
in taste, smell, or other qualities, frequently per- 
swades the physician to prescribe them in a smal- 
ler dose than the other: as asa fœt. castor. olea, 
&c. agreeable to §.27.
17.

30 Of Forms in general. 
17. The particular form of the medicine itself, 
often restrains the dose to a determinate quantum. 
For many of the forms have certain limits as to 
quantity, which they cannot exceed without the 
greatest necessity; as will hereafter appear under 
each. 
18. Lastly, the various external or internal 
use of a remedy, and its application to different 
parts of the body, are here, also, to be consi- 
dered as having some influence in determining 
the quantity of a dose. Very wide is the diffe- 
rence between the dose of a cathartic when it is 
to be given by the mouth, and when by way of 
glyster, &c. 
Nota. The limits of our present design forbid 
me to say more, or to pursue the theme of dose in 
a more special manner. The copiousness and un- 
certainty of the subject, being scarce determinable 
even by general bounds, prevailed with me not to 
insert (as is usual) a table exhibiting the proper dose 
of every single remedy. These are liable to so many 
exceptions, that they cannot be rationally ascer- 
tain’d to particular cases, without the several pro- 
ceeding conditions (§.66. n°. 1 to 18.) are first li- 
mited and consider’d. Besides, we have supposed 
our reader (per §.7.) previously acquainted with the 
doctrine of indications, and the materia medica, 
both simple and compound; which teaches their 
general doses as well as virtues: and then, what 
will be said of each form in particular, will also 
reflect much light upon this head. 
§.67. The number of doses (§.65.) is either 
one, or more, being often arbitrary and undeter- 
mined; but it may be generally limited by parti- 
cular consideration; among which, the following 
may be look’d upon as general rules. 
1.

31 Of Forms in general. 
1. If one dose will answer the physicians in- 
tention; what need of more? 
2. If the medicine be in itself unpleasant, if 
the patient has an aversion or dislike to the taking 
of it, or if the application or taking be difficult 
and troublesome; these call for the exhibition of 
as few doses as possible. 
3. Medicines, which by keeping, easily fer- 
ment and corrupt, grow moist and liquid, or too 
dry, or else exhale and lose their finest parts, 
shou’d, upon those accounts, be prescribed in 
but few doses at a time. The different state 
of the atmosphere, as to heat, moisture, and 
other qualities, has also its share in limiting the 
quantity and number of doses of such remedies; 
as those states of the air may more or less pro- 
mote such inconveniences or defects of particu- 
lar medicines. 
4. If the adequate dose of a prescribed medi- 
cine is of a larger bulk than can be conveniently 
swallow’d at once, if nothing contradicts, it may 
be properly divided into many lesser doses, to be 
taken at small intervals; to prevent it from ex- 
citing a nausea or vomiting in the patient; 
which is a consideration that takes place princi- 
pally and frequently in emetics and strong ca- 
thartics. 
5. If you order potent remedies for a patient 
whose case, constitution, and particular condi- 
tion is not yet thoroughly known; it is better 
for the just dose to be given in little separate por- 
tions at several times, that we may timely break 
off its use upon the least appearance of its im- 
propriety. The same holds good also with re- 
gard to the use of new and less experienced re- 
medies (agreeable to §.66. n°. 13.) 
6. If the obscurity, or instability, of the par- 
ticular morbid indisposition renders the effect of 
the

32 Of Forms in general.
the medicine uncertain; if we are obliged to 
prescribe something (by reason of §.14.), it 
should be but in small and few doses: by which 
means, less injury can happen to the patient, and 
it may be the more easily changed for some other 
medicine, when that may be required. 
7. When the preparation of a medicine is dif- 
ficult and a long while in making up, unless 
something forbid, it shou’d be prescribed in 
a larger quantity or more doses; to spare the 
time and pains of the apothecary, whose hands 
are sometimes too full. 
8. Hence also, remedies which are difficultly 
convey’d, and to parts remote from apotheca- 
ries, shou’d be {cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
transmitted in larger quantities or more doses, 
9. On the other hand, if the patient lives near 
his physician, so as to be often visited by him, 
the number of doses order’d at one time shou’d be 
few; left the physician’s coming often without 
prescribing shou’d be thought much of, or look’d 
upon as dilatory. 
10. When the same medicine is required to be 
used for a long time together ; there shou’d be 
as many doses order’d at once as may be conve- 
nient. For tho’ scantiness of a medicine for mo- 
ney, is a persuasive for the patient to take it 
when bought; it will hardly encourage him to 
be constantly purchasing, especially if it be disa- 
greeable at the same time. 
11. If the exhibition of the medicine is to 
be repeated at short intervals of time, the doses 
must be on that account the more numerous; to 
prevent the trouble of repeating the prescription 
and composition. 
12. Lastly, as the patient may like a variety, 
and the different face of the symptoms require a 
change (per §.50.), both in the form and me-
dicine,

33 Of Form in general.
medicine, especially in chronical cases; it may 
be on those accounts adviseable to order the me- 
dicine in a small quantity: that the form and 
remedy may be changed the oftener, and at a 
less expence to the patient. 
§.68. The general quantity (§.64.) of any form 
fit to be prescribed for the patient at one time, 
rnay be easily estimated from a previous determi- 
nation of the number or size of the proper dose, 
(per §.66. 67.): for, if the bulk or weight of a 
dose be multiplied by the number you would give, 
the product will be the whole quantity to be or- 
der’d for the patient in one prescription. Whence 
it follows, 
1. That the general quantity will be equal to 
the special or particular one (§.64.), if only 
one dose be prescribed for at one time. 
2. But if we design the prescription should 
contain more doses than one, the least general 
quantity that can be order'd will be doubly 
equal to the particular one, or dose. 
3. If the dose of a form is to be exactly de- 
termin’d by weight, the general quantity should 
be proportioned so, as that it may be distribu- 
ted into proper and exact doses, without leaving 
any remainder. But this rule is not constantly 
and every where observ’d; especially if the pre- 
scription contains many doses of a form. 
§.69. The physician should also be mindful of 
the particular consistence and texture of his ingre- 
dient, when he prescribes a simple formula; that 
it may have a natural fitness to be reduced into the 
form he desires. 
§.70. Lastly, when his prescription orders but 
one ingredient, he should be careful that it be not 
over strong, nauseous to the smell or taste, nor  
D diffi-


34 Of Forms in general.
difficult to swallow, &c. (per §.27.); because a
simple formula does not admit of that correction 
and mixture which are necessary to conceal those 
disagreeable qualities; unless he will compliment 
the patient, by ordering the medicine to be taken 
in some proper and pleasant vehicle. 
§.71. We have been hitherto considering a 
simple formula: our next business is to treat of the 
compound one (§.62.); which consisting of several 
ingredients, requires greater circumspection and 
skill in its prescription and composition. 
§.72. There seems, at the first view indeed, to 
be little or seldom occasion for extemporaneous 
composition since we are furnished with such a 
number of handing officinal compounds (per §.31. 
and 37.): but the frequent and great necessity we 
are under of forming the officinals into extempo- 
raneous compositions, is sufficiently apparent from 
the following. For, 
1. The officinal simples and compounds are 
frequently not well adapted to the particular cir- 
cumstances of the patient and his disease. Their 
dose is frequently too bulky for their strength, 
their composition unjust or inaccurate, and their 
textures or virtues changed or spoiled by long 
keeping, &c. which considerations are often e- 
nough to dissuade one from the use of officinal 
compounds, tho’ they were directly suitable for 
the intention. 
2. When the virtues and strength of an offi- 
cinal medicine are too weak, and not equal to 
the disease we would remove we are then of- 
ten obliged to the addition of others, more po- 
tent, in an extemporaneous composition. 
3. If its action be too violent, or attended 
with some ill consequence; we are then often 
obliged to moderate and correct it by extempo- 
raneous composition. 
4.

35 Of Forms in general.
4. We have frequently several different in- 
tentions to answer at the same time, which can- 
not be done by one officinal simple or com- 
pound: while the natural disposition of the se- 
veral ingredients indicated, to make a uniform 
mixture, requires them to be reduced into one 
form (per §.39.) 
5. This composition is sometimes required 
also from the situation, sensibility, and other 
circumstances of the Part to which the medicine 
is to be applied or conveyed. 
6. The constituent ingredients suited to each 
indication do also require to be combined in a 
form, for the reasons (§.43. to §.50.) which 
determine the particular form, they being of 
themselves very unsuitable. 
7. Composition sometimes serves to conceal a 
necessary remedy (per §.25.) 
8. It is often requisite, in order to change or 
correct some disagreeable smell, taste or colour, 
in an effectual remedy. 
9. Lastly, the vile and received custom of 
crouding, without necessity, more ingredients 
than are required in an officinal composition, 
often obliges the physician to make a new form: 
tho’ prudence sometimes bids the physician, 
especially a junior, (per §.30.) to pay obedi- 
ence to inch old and venerable jumbles. 
§.73. In the compound formula (§.71.) we 
are to consider (1.) its component parts, their num- 
ber, use and proportion: (2.) its quantity (§.64.) 
general, to be made up at once. and particular, to 
be taken at once. (3.) And lastly, its qualities, 
as arising from composition or mixture, 
§.74. The constituent parts are four in num- 
ber: (1.) the basis or main ingredients; (2.) the 
adjuvant, or what promotes the action of the for- 
D2 mer;

36 Of Forms in general. 
mer; (3.) the corrigens, Or correcter of something 
improper therein; (4.) and lastly, the constituens, 
or what serves to inlarge, mix and make up the 
whole. If there be any dirigens, which some 
make a fifth Part, it may be properly taken in 
under the adjuvans, 
§.75. The BASIS is the principal part in the 
composition, calculated against the immediate cause 
and chief symptoms of the disease, being that by 
which the physician endeavours chiefly to answer 
his indications. This is required to be present in 
every form, even the simple one, (§.63.) where 
it often makes the whole formula: being sometimes 
sufficient of itself alone, without tiny other addi- 
tion; but it is frequently mixed with other things, 
suitable to make it act with safety, ease and expe- 
dition, as it ought. 
§.76. The basis is, with respect to its virtue, 
either simple or compound. A simple basis is what 
corresponds to only one indication; whereas the 
compound one serves several intentions at the same 
time. Each of these are again subdivisible into 
simple and compound, with respect to their matter; 
according as they are made up of one or more in- 
gradients. 
§.77. But which of these kinds of basis (§.76.) 
is most suitable for the prescription, may be con-
cluded from the following considerations or rules, 
1. What may be well effected by a simple 
basis need not be attempted by a compound 
one: so that if only one indication is to be an- 
swered, it may be done by a basis which is 
simple both in its virtue and matter or ingre- 
dients: when the intentions are serveral, the ba- 
sis may be simple and compound in its virtues 
or properties; both which, when sufficient, are 
preferable to the more complex basis. 
2.

37 Of Forms in general. 
2. But if a combination of several simples 
one basis seems to promise more efficacy, we 
shall do well to comply with it. 
3. But then we must be careful not to con- 
fuse the mixture, by inserting things together 
which have no congruity or affinity to each 
other, both in their consistence and virtues: as 
we have in some measure already hinted, (§.29, 
30, 31, 36, 40, 41.) and shall observe more 
largely hereafter. 
§.78. The ADJUVANS (§.74.) is that part of 
a formula or extemporaneous composition which 
promotes and assists the action of the basis (§.75.) 
when that alone is not every way adequate to each 
of our intentions. So that the presence of this 
part is not absolutely necessary in all, but in only 
some prescriptions and compositions. 
§.79. The manner in which we assist the basis 
by the adjuvans, is threefold: for either (1.) we 
would directly increase its force or power; or (2.) 
we would dispose it to pass thro' particular vessels, 
and act upon certain of the animal fluids, (which 
was used to be termed preparing them) that its 
action may meet with less resistance there; or, 
lastly, (3.) we would direct that action more to 
some one particular viscus or organ of the body 
than another. 
§.80. Augmenting the natural virtue of the 
basis (per §.79. (1.) comes into use, when the 
basis is of itself too unactive, or so bulkey as to 
make a sufficient dose troublesome to take (per 
§.66. n° 1. 3. 6. 15. 17.) This is done by ad- 
ding something stronger of the same virtue, or 
invested with some more effectual specific property 
found out by experiment: as when we add tro- 
chisci alhandal to a very mild cathartic, or add an-
timonium diaphoreticum to a small dose of a drastic, 
D3 or

38 Of Forms in general.
or strong purge. This takes place frequently in 
evacuants, but seldom in alteratives: and may be 
often rather look’d upon as a piece of the basis, 
than any thing distinct. 
§.81. Preparing the animal fluids (per §.79. 
(2.) ) is seldom made use of but in evacuations; 
when the peccant matter to be discharged is diffi- 
cult to move, the basis slow and unlively, or the 
passages want to be opened and set at liberty: in 
which cases it may be useful to add attenuants, di- 
luents, antacids, antalcalescents, aperients, anti- 
spasmodics, laxatives, and the like. 
§.82. Lastly, it is. necessary to direct and re- 
gulate the action of the basis (per §.79. (3.)) when 
we find by experience that it has a natural ten- 
dance to a viscus, or part which may not be suit- 
able to our present design. Thus the action of 
mercury is determined to the intestines downwards, 
by adding a cathartic; and upwards to the salival 
glands, by astringents and opiates, &c. Bat this 
determination, especially of the antients by topical 
specifics, does for the generality seem not to have 
so much in it as was formerly supposed. 
§.83. The CORRIGENS (§.74.) is that part 
of the formula which removes some unpleasant- 
ness, or noxious quality in some of the ingredi- 
ents, without imparing any of their virtues. When 
the ingredients are free from such vices, there is 
hardly any occasion for a correcter. 
§.84. Those noxious qualities (§.83.) which are 
commonly complained of in emetics, cathartics 
and opiates, are acrimony, ftatulency, weakening 
of the viscera, too much heat, cold, or the, like. 
In order to correct these, we make use of sweeteners, 
obtunders of particular acrimony, carminatives, 
strengtheners, warmers, coolers, &c. But ob- 
serve, 
1.

39 Of Forms in general.
1. That it cannot be properly called correc- 
tion, when the virtues of the medicine are de- 
stroyed, together with its vices. 
2. That the generality of such things as re- 
markably require correction, have their virtues 
and vicious qualities so inseparable from each 
other, that one cannot be removed without 
equally imparing the other: but to say truth, 
the medicine proves offensive oftener by the 
unseasonable or unskilful use of it, than from 
any innate vice; to say nothing of the adulte- 
ration, unskilful preparation, corruption from 
a long and careless keeping, &c. which are of- 
ten the sole causes of such vices, if it have any. 
3. Hence, many commonly reputed correc- 
tions are improperly so judged and called;
since by removing the virtues with the vices, 
they either prove useless or hurtful: while at 
the same time, the addition of such correcters
often discommodes the form, and inlarges the 
proper dose to a sickly bulk, as well as weakens 
the efficacy of the basis. 
4. Also, such medicines as stand most in 
need of it, are generally kept ready prepared 
and corrected in the shops; so that if the phy- 
sician has a mind, he may spare himself the 
pains of such correction in an extemporaneous 
composition. 
5. The best correction is to have the simples 
good and genuine, the composition faithful and 
skilful, and to use it with discretion, at a pro- 
per season, and in a just dose (per §.66.) 
6. If any thing wants correcting, it is the 
inflaming oils, biting and insoluble rezins, fats 
which turn rancid, and things which are caustic: 
these being taken alone, will not mix uniformly 
with the aqueous juices in the primæ viæ, so 
that by adhering firmly to the coats and vessels 
D4 of

40 Of Forms in general.
of the œsophagus, stomach and intestines, they 
often produce an inflammation and pain by their 
stimulus, which are not very easy to remove. 
The remedies or correcters in this case, are, 
loaf-sugar, the yolk of an egg, sopes, sweet 
olive oil, mild alcalies or acids, absorbent pow- 
ders, &c. 
§.85. The unpleasantness (§.83.) to be cor- 
rected, respects either the taste, smell or color: 
for the first are used sugar, syrups, acids, &c. for 
the second, fragrant waters and oils, with amber- 
grease, musk, &c. and the last, or beauty of co- 
lour, is given by dragons blood, redsanders, co- 
chineal, leaf gold and silver, &c. But we must 
observe. 
1. It can hardly be supposed in the apothe- 
caries power, nor in the patient’s expectation, 
to have medicines always as pleasant as our meat 
and drink: nor is there any need of so much
cookery here; since the disorder gives the pa- 
tient an appetite to them. 
2. Smells and tastes reputed pleasant or un- 
grateful, are not promiscuously and equally 
esteemed so by all people: what delights and 
comforts one, is sometimes unpleasant and per- 
nicious to another: sweet tastes and smells are 
to some the most ungrateful. 
3. Every thing that comes from the apothe- 
cary, is judged by the patient to be of an ill 
smell and taste; so that often the more you cor- 
rect in those respects, the less you please: there- 
fore the best and most pleasant correction is to 
let the remedy be effectual, and contracted into 
as small a compass and as few doses as possible. 
4. But if it should be proper at any time to 
make some correction of this kind, it should 
be done with neatness and judgment; that while 
one

41 Of Forms in general. 
one fault is removing, a worse may not come in 
its room; and to be particularly careful to pre- 
serve the virtue of the medicine intire, free 
from change and destruction. 
5. We should not be over sollicitous to please 
the eye, like some, who thrust leaf gold and sil- 
ver into every thing they make up: it is indeed 
tolerable in pills or a bolus; but to never omit 
it, is a piece of ridiculous vanity. 
6. The unpleasantness of a medicine arises 
sometimes from the unfitness of the several 
simples to enter together into one form; but 
that may be avoided by chusing only such as 
have an affinity to mixture with each other, or 
else by distributing the ingredients into more 
forms, (per §.40.) 
7. Lastly, accommodating only a suitable form 
to the patient and medicine (per §.43. 44.) is 
sometimes no inconsiderable correction in this 
case. 
§.86. We come in the last place to the CON- 
STITUENTS (§.74.) which is that part of the com- 
position which serves to reduce the ingredients to 
a proper consistence and bulk for the form desired. 
So that this part has the least business to do in a 
formula, unless the ingredients cannot mix well of 
themselves, or are too small in bulk. Here we 
may observe. 
1. That if any adjuvans (§.78.), or corrigens 
(§.83.) or both be required, we must try if 
we can’t find such as will at the same time an- 
swer the end of a constituens; to avoid a multi- 
plicity of ingredients without necessity. 
2. Or else some other must be chose which 
coincides with the virtue of remedy, or at least, 
does not oppose it. 
3.

42 Of Forms in general.
3.The constituens ought to have a natural 
aptitude to mix with the rest of the ingredients; 
but if the indication should require one that has 
not, the mixture may be effected by sugar, sope, 
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
§.87. The mutual proportion of the several 
parts, now enumerated (§.74. to 86.) to each 
other, may be determined from (1.) considering 
the proper dose and consistence of each (per §.35. 
and 66.); (2.) from knowing their dose, con- 
sistence and virtue, when mix’d together; (3.) 
from the particular quantity required by the de- 
terminate form (per §.66. n° 17.) 
§.88. With regard to the proportion of the 
basis, (§.75.) tho' should not sometimes ex- 
ceed the other parts in bulk or quantity, it ought 
always to excel them ail in strength and efficacy; 
and whether it be fimple or compound, the quan- 
tity taken should be proportioned, as near as pos- 
sible, to the design to be answered: with this 
view, 
1. A respect must be had to the adjuvans 
(§.78.) if any be ordered; for if adjuvantia of 
the first kind (§.79. n° 1. and §.80.) be used, 
so as to considerably increase the energy of the 
basis, the basis must be then proportionably less. 
2. If any corrigens (§.83.) be ordered, we 
must then also consider whether and how much 
it will weaken the basis (per §.84. n° 2, 3.) 
and accordingly allow a proportionable aug- 
ment of the basis. 
3. There must be also a proportionable al- 
lowance for the constituens (§.86. n° 1.) whe- 
ther it assist or correct the basis. 
§.B9. The proportion of the adjuvans (§.78.) 
to the basis, should be such, that at least the strength,
if


43 Of Forms in general.
if not bulk of the former, may be inferior to the 
latter: for otherwise it may be termed rather a 
part of the basis, than adjuvans; especially when 
its virtue is the same with that of the basis (per 
§.8O.) Nor can we here, in general, assign a 
more particular determination of the proportion 
of this part than that care must be taken to ad- 
just the adjuvans to the basis, so, that when they 
are both joined together they make a just and ade- 
quate dose, being neither too strong, nor too bulky. 
§.90. With regard to the proportionable quan- 
tity of the corrigentia of both kinds, (§.84. and 
85.) it is in the general more adviseable to let it 
be small, that we may avoid the faults in §.84. 
n° 2, 3. §.85. n° 2, 4, 5. Hence, it is often 
improper to leave the correction of the smell, or 
taste of the medicine, to be determined at the 
apothecary’s discretion, (per §.58. n° 8. (7.) 
What farther regards this head, will be given un- 
der each particular form. 
§.91. The proportion of the constituens (§.86.) 
is pretty uncertain; for the requisite quantity 
thereof is more or less, according to the particu- 
lar nature of the constituens itself, and agreeable 
to the particular form in which the medicine is to 
be made up, as well as proportionable to the 
quantity and consistence of the several constituent 
ingredients. If it be only intended to inlarge the 
medicine, just so much may be added as will com- 
plete the required dose or quantity; but if its use 
is only to make up the form, the quantity is usu- 
ally left be determined at the discretion of the 
apothecary, without any danger, agreeable to 
§.58. n° 8. (7.) 
§.92. We have hitherto considered the com- 
ponent parts, and general quantity of a compound 
formula, (per §.73.) we come now to its PAR- 
TICULAR QUANTITY OR DOSE, which maybe be
deter-

44 Of Forms in genera!. 
determined, both as to quantity and number, upon 
the conditions of the simple formula (per §.66. 
and 67.) But the following considerations should 
be here observed. 
I. When full doses are taken of the several 
component ingredients, especially of the basis 
and its congener the adjuvans, they make up as 
many effectual doses as there are efficacious in- 
gredients: so that in this case, the number of 
ingredients will express the number of doses. 
2. When the number of active ingredients 
are but few, or when there is but one dose re- 
quired, such proportionable parts of each in- 
gredient must be taken as will together amount 
to the desired quantity or dose. 
3. Also the strength of the simples does not 
remain always in the same degree after mixture 
as before; but are sometimes made weaker there- 
by, and sometimes stronger in their virtues: 
which is therefore a consideration to be attended 
to. For there is a wide difference between ad- 
ding the adjuvans to the basis, or the corrigens, 
or both: one will sometimes inhanse the virtue, 
when the other will diminish it, the bulk re- 
maining the same, per §.79. 84. 85. Examples 
of which will be given when we come present- 
ly to treat of the qualities. 
4. From the variety of mixture often arise 
compositions by far more or less corruptible 
than the several ingredients were when asunder. 
Emulsions grow sour presently; while on the 
other hand, fix'd alcalies, ground with absor- 
bents, keep dry a long time without melting. 
So that this consideration has often no small in- 
fluence in determining the number of doses to 
be prescribed at one time, in a compound for- 
mula. (per §.67. n° 3.) 
§.93.

45 Of Forms in general 
§.93. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.73.) of 
a compound formula will evidently appear from 
comparing what has been said §.68. with §.92. 
§.94. Lastly, the QUALITIES (§.73.) which 
arise from the mixture of several ingredients, being 
frequently very different from those of any of the 
simples which make up the formula, do greatly 
merit our consideration here: for the changes 
which do thence arise are not confined only to ex- 
ternal appearance, but the most intimate nature 
and medicinal properties of the ingredients are 
also greatly affected and changed; in so much, 
that this is no small argument for preferring the 
use of simples (per §.31.) to that of compounds, 
where there is no real necessity (per §.72.) for 
the latter. 
§.95. The qualities here intended to be in- 
quired into (§.94.) are chiefly the consistence, co- 
loury smell, taste, and medicinal virtues. 
§.96. The consistence; which is proper to each 
particular form, should be cautiously preserved 
from being confused, or disturbed by various and 
injudicious mixture: otherwise the remedy may 
be render’d nauseous, unfit for use, or give the 
patient occasion to think it ill prepared: it may 
be also tedious to make up by the apothecary, and 
sometimes excite his ridicule; but what is worse, 
it may destroy the virtue of the medicine, or in- 
troduce foreign qualities. 
§.97. Its consistence (§.96.) may be vitiated 
(1.) by the inequality or ununiformity of the mix- 
ture; (2.) from too great thickness or dryness; 
(3.) from too great fluidity or softness. 
§.98. To avoid these inconsistences (§.97.) in 
prescribing, we ought to make ourselves previ- 
ously acquainted with,
1.

46 Of Forms in general. 
1. The consistence proper to every particu- 
lar form, which we shall explain hereafter in 
each of them. 
2. The consistence of every separate ingre- 
dient (§.35) which enters them, which are to 
be learned per §.7. n° 2, 3. and §.8. 
3. The mutual disposition of each ingredient 
for mixture with the other, agreeable to §.36. 
Here is to be particularly consider’d the mutual 
affinity, attraction, or repulsion that obtains be- 
tween certain simples, their effervescence, fer- 
mentation, precipitation, deliquation, concretion, 
or coagulation, &c. But as these are to be learn- 
ed from chemistry only, it is evident of what 
considerable advantage that is to pharmacy. 
§.99. The colour, is the most uncertain and 
changeable of all the qualities; especially when 
the simples mix’d together are of different natures. 
We may therefore the more readily introduce such 
as are most agreeable; the better to effect which, 
we must attend to the following considerations. 
1. No colours in nature are more agreeable 
than crystalline, white, golden, red and blue 
yellow, green, black, and such as are opake and 
compound of these, are less agreeable.
2. Several forms have their particular and 
usual colour, which are to be commended: as 
milky or white, in emulsions; red, in julaps, 
but never blue; golden, red, or crystalline, in 
mixtures, &c. Unusual colours either nauseate 
or offend the more nice patient; but it is some- 
time's prudently used, for concealment of some- 
thing (per §.25.) 
3. There can be no physical nor general de- 
termination of the particular colour that will a- 
rise from a mixture of several colour’d ingre- 
dients together in a medicine. The chemist,
from

47 Of Forms in general. 
from a mixture of colourless ingredients, pro- 
duces black, white, yellow, red, blue, brown, 
and almost what colour he pleases: we must
therefore refer to chemistry on this head, as that 
alone affords the examples and rules requifite for 
the prefent business. Consult also §.85. fore- 
going. 
§.100. The mutability and uncertainty of odors 
upon mixture, is but little inferior to that of co- 
lours (§.99.): but then they are more consider- 
able and certain signs of the internal texture and 
virtues of the compound, and they act more strong- 
ly upon the body than colours. Here we must be 
careful to prevent the result of vicious and offen- 
sive odors upon composition of different ingre- 
dients. Therefore observe. 
1. The rules concerning gratefulness of odors 
are very uncertain and confin'd; those pleasing 
Some, not pleasing all, (per §.85. 23.) 
2. Pleasantness and utility in odors are often 
very distant companions. Patients who are hy- 
pochondriacal, hysterical, epileptic, &c. often 
fare the worst from the pleasantest and sweetest 
smelling ingredients. 
3. Things which are inodorous, and mode- 
rately either sweet or fœtid, are most in univer- 
sal esteem; but putrid and excrementitious smells 
are intollerable: in the mean time, such as are 
the most fœtid or the most fragrant, will produce 
the strongest, either good or bad, effects upon 
the body.  
4. Frequently the whole virtue of a medicine 
depends upon its order, and the principles of 
which that is constituted; destroy one, and the 
other also perishes, a change in one makes also 
a change in the other.
5.

48 Of Forms In general. 
5. The odor of a compound cannot be ge- 
nerally determined from the odors of its several 
ingredients: as chemistry largely demonstrates. 
(1.) From a mixture ot inodorous ingredients 
arise compounds of the strongest smell. If sal 
ammoniacum and a fix’d alcaly or quick lime 
be ground together, tho' they are both sepa- 
rately inodorous, what a sudden and violent 
smell do they produce! oil of vitriol poured on 
nitre, sea-salt, sal ammoniac, regenerated tartar, 
and the like, produce the same. 
(2.) From a mixture of very strong smelling 
substances results a compound without any smell. 
Let a saturation of spirit of sal ammoniac with 
spirit of nitre or common salt be taken as an 
example. 
(3.) The worst of stenches may be excited 
upon a mixture of things little fœtid, or even 
fragrant: and on the contrary, the most fra- 
grant odors may arise from a composition of the 
most fœtid ingredients. Sulphur being dis- 
solved in a fixed alcaly, and mix’d with vine- 
gar, can you distinguish it from the smell of a 
rotten egg? on the other hand, juices of an 
offensive smell being carried about mix’d in a 
leather bag by Mr. Lemery *, afforded the plea- 
sant persume of musk. 
In order therefore to act circumspectly in this 
case also, a knowledge in chemistry is both use- 
ful and necessary. 
§.101. Tastes come under the same conditions 
with odors (§.100.), and answer to the same cau- 
tions. Insipid, sweet, sour, bitter, salt, &c. are 
the most agreeable: rancid, putrid and urinous, 
the most unpleasant: the production, destruction,
and 
* Hist. de l’Acad. Royal. an. 1706.

49 Of Forms in general.
and change of tastes, upon a variety of mixtures, 
is also no less various; and these too we are to 
learn from chemistry. 
Do not the sharpest tasted acid and alcaly be- 
come insipid upon a just commixture? 
What is more ungrateful to the tongue, than the 
brackishness which crabs-eyes, oyster-shells, &c.
impart to acids? 
The softest and insipid earths become aluminous 
when mix’d with acids. 
Lead mix’d with acids affords a saccharine 
sweetness: iron with acids affords a sweetish 
roughness; and the other metals with acids afford 
tastes intolerably nauseous. 
§.102. But we might easily pass by any fault 
that might happen in any of the fore-mention’d 
qualities (§.96. to §.102.), if they were not so 
frequently attended with an improper diminution 
and even intire change of the medicinal virtues of 
the composition. Even the medicinal virtues are 
often suddenly and unexpectedly impared and 
changed, without any considerable alteration in 
the other sensible qualities of the ingredients: as 
may be easily apprehended from the few following 
examples. 
1. Acids and alcalies destroy the properties 
of each other, upon mixture; and turn into a 
neutral salt, which is neither an acid or an 
alcaly. 
2. Acids arid the earthy absorbents destroy 
the natural action of each other, upon mixture; 
and produce a (tertium quid) new substance, 
which has neither the virtues of an acid nor an 
absorbent. 
3. Earths and the boles used in pharmacy, 
being mix’d with acids, acquire a stronger force 
of astringing, with an aluminous stipticity. 
E 4.

50 Of Forms in general. 
4. Some cathartics are hindred in their ac- 
tion by acids or alcalies, others are promoted 
in their action by being mix’d with the same. 
Scammony mix’d with an acid becomes as un- 
active as a little sand; on the contrary, by a 
fix’d alcaly, it is rendered stronger than alone. 
Jalap and colocynthis become quite tame and 
gentle in their stimulus, upon being mix’d with 
sal-tartari. 
5. Opiates promote the action of sudorifics 
and sialogogues: but they almost suppress the 
power of other evacuants. 
6. Mucilaginous and astringent medicines 
are weakened by a mixture of sugar. 
7. Mercury changed into an æthiops, or a 
cinnabar, by sulphur, is no longer a sialogogue, 
but loses its salivating power. Crude mercury 
ground with twice as much sugar, or testaceous 
powder *, becomes an unactive œthiops albus †. 
Turbith mineral is changed from an evacuant 
to an alterative, upon being mix’d with pil. de 
duobus & camph. ‡. Calomel ground with sul- 
phur of antimony will scarce either vomit, 
purge, salivate or provoke urine ‖. Corrosive 
sublimate, ground with more crude mercury, 
becomes sweet again. The many precipitates 
of mercury, which are stuck full of the sharp 
spicula of acids, lose all their force and acri- 
mony upon being ground with alcalies, and ear- 
thy absorbents. But ’tis a question whether 
æthiops and cinnabar remain the same, unalter’d 
by a mixture with alcalies.
8. 
* It is then the mercurius alcalizatus, which made some stir, 
not long ago. 
†. V. Edinburgh Medic. Essays, Vol. III. p. 388. 
‡ Ibid. vol. IV. p. 32. 
‖ Ibid. vol. I.  p. 46. vol. III. p. 389.

51 Of Forms in general. 
8. Calx viva being tailed unawares, burns the 
tongue with the acrimony of a fix’d alcaly. 
What a strange effed has it, when mix’d with 
sal ammoniacum! 
9. Alcalies mix’d with acids, or acids with 
alcalies, do generally excite a struggling ebul- 
lition; which is follow’d by a considerable 
change in the virtues and properties of each. 
Vitriolum martis, mix’d with alcalies, turns to 
a kind of tartarum vitriolatum, with an incor- 
rigible ochre. The same holds good with re- 
spect to the vitriols of other metals and semi- 
metals, except copper. Alum, mix’d with an 
alcaly, is precipitated in the form of an unactive 
calx: upon which principle, the nature of alu- 
minous magisteries is sufficiently apparent. Sul- 
phur, dissolved in an alcaly, is thence precipi- 
tated in a curdly form by acids, &c. 
10. Earthy absorbents, being mix’d with a- 
cids, do also in like manner reciprocally act 
upon and change each other; the absorbent 
loses its antacid property, and the acid loses its 
acrimony or acidity. 
11. A fix’d alcaly, upon mixture, sets at li- 
berty the volatile alcaline, and absorbent earthy 
parts of mix’d bodies, A volatile alcali will al- 
so separate the absorbent earthy parts of bodies:
but we must except the calx viva, which, on the 
contrary, separates and expels the volatile alca- 
ly. V. n° 8. Hence, what vast alterations must 
a compound suffer, which is made up of a fix’d 
alcaly, or calx viva, and ingredients which con- 
tain an ammoniacal or volatile salt; or when a 
volatile or fix’d alcaly is mix’d in a liquid form, 
with any of the soluble magisteries of coral or 
pearl? * &c.
E2 12. 
* Such a mixture in julaps, &c. would precipitate the fine 
magisteries into an unsightly hypostasis. 


52 Of Forms in general. 
12. A stronger acid will disengage and drive 
out a weaker, from the earthy substance or basis 
to which it has fix’d itself in bodies. The 
strongest acid is oil of vitriol; the weakest, are 
those of the vegetable juices. Hence, what will 
be the consequence if the strong acid of vitriol, 
sulphur or alum (which are all much of the 
same nature) be joined with sal ammoniacum, 
common salt, nitre, the sal febrifugum Sylvii, 
tartarum solubile, tartarum regeneratum, and 
the like? What will be the effect of this strong 
vitriolic or aluminous acid, when it disengages 
the weaker acid from the earthy parts which 
constitute those salts, and places itself in their 
room *? Hence, we may form a judgment of 
the tinctura martis Zwelseri, and others of the 
same tribe. 
13. Care must be taken not to mix acids, e- 
specially of the fossil kind, with any thing that 
is metalline or mineral: for that may pro- 
duce strange alterations in a composition; it 
may even turn a good medicine into the rankest 
poison. Mercury sublimate, red precipitate, 
lapis infernalis, butyrum antimonii, and many 
of the like nature, demand this caution. 
14. The same substance assumes very diffe- 
rent medicinal properties, barely from the dif- 
ferent menstruum in which it is dissolved. The 
generality of vegetable cathartics operate best 
when they have been first extracted with an 
aqueous menstruum; whereas if they are ex- 
tracted in a menstruum; wholly spirituous, as al-
cohol, 
* The consequence will be, that the weaker acid being disen- 
gaged by the stronger, from the earthy basis to which it was fix'd, 
will become volatile, and exhale in fumes; while the remaining 
earth and stronger acid will form another saline body, agreeable 
to the strength and mutual proportion of each.

53 Of Forms in general. 
cohol, they gripe more and purge less *. Glass, 
or liver of antimony, communicates an emetic 
power to wine; but not so to water, distilled 
vinegar, burnt wine, nor the alcohol of wine †. 
Copper dissolved in an acid, proves erhetic; dis- 
solved in a volatile alcaly, it makes a powerful 
diuretic; open’d by sal ammoniacum, it purges 
by stool ‖, &c. 
§.103. We could bring many more instances 
of the like kind with those now mention’d (§.102.), 
and it is wish’d we could say, all: but as the me- 
thod of composition is in our day without order 
and without end (per §.72. n° 9.), we must con- 
sequently fall vastly short of a just knowledge of 
the several alterations which arise in every com- 
pound upon mixture: but we should be pretty- 
near the mark, if we had but once arrived at an 
accurate knowledge of the mechanical structure, 
and constituent principles of the several simple in- 
gredients, with the mutual affinity or disposition 
they bear to each other, and from a full discovery 
of the true ways in which they act upon each o- 
ther, and upon the animal œconomy. 
§.104. In the mean time, who would be so 
rash as to enter upon the composition of the me- 
dicines used in pharmacy, without a competent 
skill in chemistry; for ’tis that which must teach 
him the surprising and infinitely various changes 
which arise upon mixture: and therefore there still 
remains an infinite number of those changes to be 
discovered and farther prosecuted by that art; for 
the mutual application and affinity of all the simples 
E3 to
* M. Boulduc dans les Memoir, de l’Acad. Roy. an. 1701. 
p. 256.
† Lemery Traité de l’Antimoine, p. 413, &c. p. 561, &c.
‖ Boerhaave Elem. Chem. vol. II. process. 189. 

54 Of Forms in particular. 
to each other have never yet been experimented, 
nor have most of those been rightly examined 
which have been already tried and observed. 
Of FORMS in particular. 
§.105. DISTINCTION and method in writing re- 
commends to us the received division 
of forms into external and internal. Internal me- 
dicines or forms, are restrained to those only which 
are convey’d thro’ the mouth and œsophagus into 
the stomach: but under the external, are compre- 
hended all such medicines as are applied to the 
body any other way, whether they lodge upon the 
skin only, or are by particular means convey’d into 
various cells or cavities. To act therefore agree- 
able to this method, we shall begin first with the 
internal forms of medicines. 
OF the INTERNAL FORMS of
MEDICINES. 
Of a POWDER. 
§.106. A Powder is a dry, uniform and (here) 
internal medicine, consisting of one 
or more ingredients, broke into 
small particles: which do not adhere to each other, 
but remain equably mix’d. 
§.107. The powder (§.106.) is distinguished 
into three KINDS, according to its particular de- 
gree of tenuity: being either (1.) very subtle, called 
alcohol;


55 Of a Powder.
alcohol *; (2.) coarse or gross, as in spices, cof- 
fee, &c. usually call’d tragea; or (3.) of a mid- 
dling degree of fineness between the two former, 
when the simples are beat as fine as they can be 
without levigation, which is what we commonly 
intend by the word powder or species †. 
§.108. Which of these degrees of subtility 
(§.107.) will be most convenient for the intention 
and form, may be chiefly determined from con-
sidering (1.) the nature of the ingredients to be 
reduced into a powder; (2.) the degree of pene- 
trability we would give it; (3.) to determine its 
action to be quicker or flower, or more to one 
part than another; (4.) to have the mixture ap- 
pear more or less uniform, and in proportion to 
the patients more easy or difficult deglutition. 
1. Ingredients which are absorbent, hard and 
ponderous, ungrateful and refinous, should be 
more exactly comminuted, and when they are 
to penetrate far, or act quickly, &c. the first 
kind (§.107.) is required. 
2. Aromatics, and volatile substances lose a 
great part of their virtue in an over exact pul- 
verization, and much more by keeping in that 
state. 
3. Some things prove purgatives in a gross 
powder; but in a more subtle one, they are 
diuretic, &c. 
§.109. The ingredients or proper MATTER
for the powder (§.106.), is every thing that is 
E4 redu-
* This is obtained by levigation; and by ablution and precipi- 
tation with water, air, &c. when the subject will conveniently 
admit of it: and may be then distinguished into a vast number of 
degrees of tenuity; for the resistance of the medium and specific gra- 
vity of the subject being determined, the fineness of the powder will 
be as the time and highth wherein it precipitates. 
† This is also subdivisible into various other degrees of tenuity, 
by the different fineness of sieves. 

56 Of a Powder. 
reducible (either alone or mix'd) into a dry or 
dusty form, and is at the same time proper for 
internal use: so that liquids are not wholly exclu- 
ded from entering into the form of a powder. 
§.110 Hence (§.109.), this form takes in (1.) 
all officinal whether vegitable, animal or 
mineral, that may be used internally with safety, 
and are of a solid, dry and brittle texture. (2.) 
All officinal preparations and compounds which 
are of the like nature. (3.) All soft and thick 
substances of the two preceding classes (1. and 2.), 
as inspissated juices, extracts, electuaries, &c. (4.) 
All liquids of the same kind (1. and 2.) in a 
small quantity, as balsams, oils, &c. 
§.111. But a CHOICE of these ingredients 
is necessary in order to avoid inconsistence in a 
prescription: with regard to which, observe 
1. That simples which are very bulky in 
proportion to their efficacy are seldom, if ever, 
reduced to the two most subtle kinds of this 
form (§.107. (1.) (3.) ): on the contrary, they 
are very frequently made into the gross powder 
(§.107. (2.) ). Of this nature, are woods, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, &c. But we must not 
exclude things which are very light and bulky 
from the two finer kinds of this form, when 
they act in a little quantity, or make but a small 
dose, as agar. colocinth. &c. 
2. If we lie under a necessity of transgressing 
against the preceding rule, we should take care 
to supply the inactivity of the former bulky 
ingredients, by adding something that is more 
potent and effectual in a very small quantity. 
3. If any liquids be order'd, they should be 
in a very small quantity, in proportion to the 
dry ingredients; that the proper consistence of 
the form may not be thence disturbed. The 
same

57 Of a Powder.
same caution holds good, with regard to soft 
and thick substances. 
4. Gums should hardly ever enter the form 
of a powder: for they are not only very diffi- 
cult to reduce to this form, but they are also 
difficult to take in that manner, as they become 
gluey by mixing with the saliva. 
5. Such simples as are full of a mucilage or 
an oil, like many seeds, should not be order’d 
for this form, but in conjunction with things 
that are more dry and brittle: for the mucilage 
or oil being express’d in the pulverization, will 
make rather a paste than a powder, which will 
grow rank so much the sooner by keeping. 
6. Fœtid ingredients should be excluded this 
form as much as possible, as they are much more 
suitable for that of a pill. 
7. Things that are very sharp, bitter, or 
otherwise disagreeable to the taste, if given at 
all in this form, should be at least not given 
alone, but mix’d and qualify’d with others that 
are more mild and pleasant: by which means 
we shall avoid sleaing or burning the patient’s 
mouth, making him sick or nauseated, and ex- 
citing him to vomit. 
8. Therefore the stronger kind of resins 
should be ground up with sugar, or earthy ab- 
sorbents, and corrected with proper salts and 
effential oils; by which means they will be 
render’d more dissolvable in the aqueous juices 
of the stomach, nor so apt to gripe and adhere 
to the membranous parts. 
9. The more potent and effectual preparations 
of mercury, are more suitable to be exhibited in 
the form of pills or a bolus, than this of a pow- 
der. At least, it is not so safe to give such 
things unmix’d; by reason of the smallness of 
the dose: but something should be judiciously 
chose

58 Of a Powder. 
chose and adapted (per §.86. and §.102. n° 7.
and 13.) to enlarge the bulk. 
10. We are dissuaded from giving fix’d al- 
calies in this form, at least unmix’d by reason 
of their urinous acrimony, and their aptness to 
liquify by the air. 
11. Volatile alcalies, as they are offensive 
both to smell and taste, so they also quickly ex- 
hale, and are lost in this form. 
12. When the ingredients of a powder are 
of an unpleasant taste, especially in the tragea, 
or coarse powder (§.107. (2.)), they may be 
corrected with sugar, solid sugar confects, or 
the like: when they are of an unpleasant smell, 
we may add some fragrant essential oil, and 
sometimes a little musk or ambergrease: and 
both intentions may be frequently answer’d at 
once by a little elæosaccharum. For the sake 
of colour, we may add sang, dracon. l. santal. 
rub. leaf-gold and silver, &c. being at the same 
time mindful of the cautions, §.85. 99. 100. 
101. 
13. The physician, studying simplicity, will 
not take in above three or four ingredients at 
most, when he prescribes this form in but a 
small quantity. But in the tragea, (§.107. 2.) 
or coarse powder, and such as are more bulky, 
he may take the liberty of inserting a greater 
number. 
§.112. The neatest ORDER for placing the se- 
veral constituent ingredients or parts of this form 
in a prescription, is, to place the basis (§.75.) 
first, then the adjuvans (§.78.) and corrigens 
(§.83.); lastly, to add the constituens (§.86.) 
agreeable to §.57. n° 4. The several quantities 
of the ingredients may also direct another order 
(per §.57. n° 3.) But in both, the placing ingre- 
dients

59 Of a Powder.
dients of the same tribe together should be ob- 
serv’d (per §.75. n° 2.) And if any sugar is to 
be added, especially when its quantity is to be de- 
termin’d from the quantity of the other ingre- 
dients, it ought always to close the series in a pre- 
script, (per §.75. n° 5.) 
§.113. The DOSE (§.64.) of a powder, espe- 
cially of the two finer forts, (§.107. (1.) (3.)) is, 
at a medium, about half a dram. But it is some- 
times increased to a whole dram; tho’ but seldom, 
and never but when the patient has a good appe- 
tite to physic, or when the ingredients are very 
weighty in proportion to their bulk, and are easy 
to dissolve. As the dose of this form seldom ex- 
ceeds a dram, so it is as seldom less than a scruple, 
unless the substance is very bulky in proportion to 
its weight. But the tragea (§.107.) or coarse powder, 
will often easily admit of a larger dose than a dram: 
tho’ the dose of these is often not determin’d by 
weight, but at discretion in a spoon, upon the 
point of a knife, &c. But in either, we are to 
observe, 
1. Bulky doses should be avoided as much 
as possible, especially when the ingredients are 
unpleasant, and the patient nice and sickly, or 
apt to vomit, and of a difficult deglutition, &c. 
2. A respect must be had to the several cir- 
cumstances limiting the dose of medicines in ge- 
neral (per §.66.), and especially with regard to 
young infants (ib. n° 3.), that such may not be 
fatigued with a large dose.
3. Hence it is frequently more proper to in- 
crease the number of doses than their bulk (per 
§.67. no° 4. 5.); as the smallness of the dose 
will make amends for the repetition of it. 
4. There are yet some powders that are easily 
soluble in a proper vehicle, which may be given 
to the quantity ot several drams for a dose, and 
2 yet

60 Of a Powder. 
yet may be taken without difficulty. Even the 
Epsom salts may be given to an ounce. 
§.114. The GENERNAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, to be transmitted from the apothe- 
cary to the patient at one time, is in different 
cases and circumstances various. The tragea (§.107. 
(2.)) may be order’d from ℥ ß. to one or two ℥'s
or more. Evacuants are very frequently prescribed 
only in one dose at a time; unless the physician 
intends the operation to be repeated in a continued 
series, and at no long intervals. Alteratives are 
used to be prescribed from  ʒij. to ℥j. or ℥j ß.
but they are sometimes order’d in the quantity of 
two or three doses only at a time. But observe, 
1. That constant bounds cannot be assigned 
to the quantity of this form in general; where- 
as it may be easily determined from considering 
the condition of the patient, and his particular 
case, with the nature of the ingredients and in- 
tention of the physician, &c. See §.67, n° 1. 
to n° 12. and §. 68. and 92. n° 4. 
2. We should be more particularly careful in 
this form, that the general quantity may be di- 
visible by weight into doses, without leaving any 
remainder; if the distribution into doses of a 
determinate weight is to be performed by the 
apothecary (per §.68. n° 3.). 
3. And sometimes, when there is danger of 
bad consequence from an inaccurate division of 
potent materials, it is adviseable to order the 
apothecary to make an exact and distinct distri- 
bution; directing the manner in which it is to 
be done in the subscription. 
§.115. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients in this form, when it consists 
of more than one; that is to be determined from 
2 the

61 Of a Powder.
the dose proper for every patient (per §.66.), 
from the common and establish’d dose of this 
form (§.113.); and lastly, from the general quan- 
tity which the physician thinks proper to order in 
his prescription. Therefore, 
1. So much of each ingredient is to be taken 
as will amount to a remedy equal to the inten- 
tion, whose dose and general quantity may be 
neither more nor less than is requisite. 
2. If the quantity of the ingredients, which 
are judged equal to the physician’s intention, 
should exceed the just dose (§.113.) of the 
form; we must either use the rule mention’d 
(ib. n° 3.), or increase its strength by adding 
such as act more powerfully in a small bulk 
(per §.80.); which is to be observed more espe- 
cially in simples that are light and bulky (per 
§.111. n° 1. and 2.) 
3. But if on the contrary, the sufficient quan- 
tity of the ingredients are of a much less bulk 
than is convenient for the proper dose (§.113.) 
of this form; we are to augment it to a proper 
size by intermixing some suitable constituens 
(per §.86. and 91.): which is frequently re- 
quired in opiates, and preparations from metals 
and minerals, &c. 
4. When liquids are to be order’d, we should 
be mindful of the rule at §.111. n° 3. 
5. The quantity of sugar used in this form, 
especially in the lighter coarse powders (§.107. 
(2.)), is often equal to, or double and triple the 
weight of the other ingredients 
6. But we should all the while carefully con- 
sider the several changes and other qualities that 
may happen to the ingredients upon mixture 
(per §.94. to 102.); lest we frustrate our in- 
tention, or occasion some injury to the patient.
§.116.

62 Of a Powder. 
§.116. The SUBSCRIPTION (§.59.) of this 
form, declares to the apothecary, the preparation 
of the powder, its distribution, and its receptacle, 
or what it is to be put up in. 
§. 17. The preparation consists in pounding 
and grinding, pulverisation or trituration; and 
where there is more than one ingredient, mixation 
is added. Which are order’d in these terms, F. 
i. e. fiat, or M. F. Pulv. i. e. misce, fiat pulvis;
per §.59. n° 1. and 2. If the powder is to be 
coarse, we add the word grossus, or tragea if ex- 
ceeding fine, we add after, or in the room of pul- 
vis, the term alcohol, or pulv. subtiliss. and when 
neither of these are expressed, the powder is sup- 
posed to be of a mean fineness, per §.107. Some- 
times it is necessary to further advise (miscel. & 
trit. diu permanend.) or, citò perficiend. that the 
mixture and trituration is to be continued a long 
or a short time; and (œquabiliter, mortario tecto, 
&c.) that the mixture should be equably made, 
and in a cover’d mortar, &c. (per §.108.) when 
the ingredients require such a treatment. 
§.118. The division or distribution of the pow- 
der into its proper doses, when it belongs to the 
apothecary, should be immediately added next af- 
ter the former (§.117.): (divide in (tot.) partes 
equales) directing him to divide it into so many 
equal parts or doses. Nor should we sometimes 
omit an admonishment in strong medicines, that 
(partitio fiat exabtissima) the distribution may be 
made with the greatest exactness; but the most cau- 
tious physicians prescribe only one dose of such 
medicines at a time, ordering a new composition 
for every dose they require, thus, fiat, or repetatur 
idem bis, ter, &c. per §.114. n° 3. But there is 
no need of this caution, when the dose of the pow- 
der is not to be determined by weight (per §.113.), 
nor


63 Of a Powder. 
nor when its division is left to the patient or his 
attendants. 
§.119. The receptacle, or case to put up and 
keep the powder in, varies with different circum- 
stances; and may sometimes require to be parti- 
cularly mentioned in a prescription. Such as will 
exhale or liquify with the air, should be put up in 
glasses. Each dose of the whole quantity of the 
powder is to be folded up in a separate paper, or 
inclosed in little card or deal boxes, which we call 
scatulte. We therefore commonly order the re- 
ceptacle thus: D. (i.e. datur, let it be sent) in 
vitro, chartis, scatula. And when the powder is 
to be taken in wafer-paper (made by the consec- 
tioners), we write afterwards, cum nebula charta- 
cea, pro vehiculo. 
§.120. The signment or SUPERSCRIPTION
(§.60.) of this form, contains the title of the 
powder, its dose, vehicle, time of taking, regi- 
men, &c. agreeable to §.60. n° 1, 2, 3, &c. that 
§.121. The title is to be deduced from the 
form, v.g. pulvis vel pulveres; and then from its 
virtue, v.g. absorbens, pectoralis, &c. being at the 
same time mindful of the cautions at §.60. 
n° 7, 8. 
§.122. The dose of this form is either left to 
be portion’d out by weight, or some common mea- 
sure by the patient (per §. .n° 9. and §. 113.), 
in which case we write sumatur drachm, or ʒj. or 
ʒß. or quantum digitabulo, cultri apice, cochleari, 
&c. capi potest. But if the powders are to be 
taken already divided by the apothecary (per 
§.118.); it may then be sufficient to write only, 
capiatur una dosis. 
§.123. The vehicles used, to take this form in, 
are various: according to the circumstances of the 
patient’s case, with the nature of the ingredients, 
and form itself. 
1.

64 Of a Powder.
1. The coarse powder (§.107. (2.)) fre- 
quently requires no vehicle, being sufficiently 
pleasant of itself (per §. 115. n° 5,): it is how- 
ever sometimes given in medicated breads, bis- 
kets, sugar cakes, or sprinkled, in a proper 
quantity, upon a common toast in some rich 
wine, or mead, &c. 
2. A very usual vehicle for the other two 
kinds of this form (§.107. (1.) (3.)), is, the 
nebula chartacea, or wafer paper of our confec- 
tioners; which, when wetted in the mouth, is 
extremely well adapted to flip down whole with 
the powder, without offending the palate by 
any of its contents. The apothecary is to be 
advised in the subscription to send as many ne- 
bulæ or wafers to the patient, as there are doses 
of the powder, and sometimes to double the 
wafer: he should also express the use of them 
to the patient, in the superscription or direction. 
3. But the most common of all vehicles for 
this form, is, some proper liquid (per §.60. 
n° 11.), indued with the qualities there men- 
tioned. Hence, 
(1.) An acid vehicle should not be used for 
alcaline or absorbent powders; lest by exciting 
an effervescence they should nauseate the pa- 
tient, or destroy the virtues of each other (per 
§.102. n° 1, 2.) But we must except a de- 
signed mixture of this kind, as in the antemetic 
of RIVERIUS ex sal. abs. & succ. limon. 
(2.) We must abstain from liquid vehicles 
which are too fat or oily; for as they are gene- 
rally disagreeable to the patient, so they fre- 
quently obstruct the action of the medicine; 
which must be observed with regard to broths. 
(3.) Sometimes it is proper to mention whe- 
ther the liquid vehicle is to be drank warm, hot 
or

65 Of a Powder. 
or cold. Such as are fat, are nauseous when 
drank cold. Such as are just warm, promote vo- 
miting. Such as are taken hot, are apt to make 
gummy powders grumous or clog together; 
they diffipate such as are volatile, make such as 
are unpleasant more so by opening their body, 
and sometimes excite a status or hysteric passion. 
The particular nature also of the liquid vehicle 
itself, the customary way of using it, and the 
use or habit of the patient, have each their pro- 
per force in assigning limits to these circumstances. 
§.124. Lastly, we are to ascertain the times for 
taking each dose, and to assign a proper regimen 
to be observ’d thro' the whole course; both which 
must vary with the physicians particular indications 
(per §.60. n° 10, and 12.); nor is an explana- 
tion of them the proper business of this place, 
(per §.7. n° 1.) 
§.125. The Use of this form, is almost univer- 
sal, being suited to evacuants as well as alteratives. 
But we must be careful that the nature of the dis- 
ease, its seat and symptoms, the constitution and 
custom of the patient, with the disposition of the 
remedies indicated, are not repugnant, but suitable 
to this form, per §.35. 43—48. 109—111. For 
the difficulty of swallowing in a quinsey, ulcers of 
the sauces, an apoplexy, epilepsy, syncope, &c. 
do forbid the use of powders. 
§.126. Take the following as SPECIMENS of 
this form, suited to common or general cases. 
1. Pulv. emet. pro adulto nimia cibi repleto. 
ꝶ. Tart. emetic, gr. v. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. iij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. emeti cum cerevisia callida sumend. pro una dosi. 
F 2.

66 Of a Powder. 
2. Pulv. emet. common. pro adulto. 
♃. Rad. ipecacuanh. ʒß. 
F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis emeticus in haustul. vini alb. una vice su- 
mendus super bibendo copiose de infuso tepido fa- 
rinœ aven. tenuiter & fine ebullitione facta, 
inter vomendum. 
3. P. Purgans pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. x. 
Elœsacch. fœnicul. gr. xxv. 
M. terendo diu, F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro dosi mane cum infuso caffe su-
mendus. 
4. P. Cathart. communis pro adulto.
♃. Rad. jalapp. ℈j. 
Diagrydii gr. xij. 
Ol. caryoph. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis cathart. mane cum custiodia in haustul. ce- 
rivis. recent, calid. sumend. 
5. Alius in cancro nondum exulcerato. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 110. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. vj. 
Diagrydii gr. vij. 
Stibii diaphoret. non ablut. gr.xxiv. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. P. Hydragog. sive drastic. pro adulto. 
(1.) ♃. Gutt.gamb. 
Calomelan. aa gr. xvj. 
Sal. succin. gr. vj. 
Ol. essent. junip. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane cum custodia in nebula char- 
tacea deglutiend.
(2.) 

67 Of a Powder.
(2.) Alius- 
4. ♃. jalapp. ʒß. 
Tartar. vitriolat. 
Spec. diambræ aa gr. v. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior, vel in haustu cerevis. recent. tepide 
sumend. 
7. Alius in scorbuti initio. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ Tart, vitriol. non acid. 
Crystal. tartar. 
Sal. polychrest. aa  ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane ex sero lactis hauriendus: 
super bibantur dein seri lactis ℥xij. 
8. P. antihelminticus purgans: pro puero circa vj 
vel viij. annos nato. 
♃. Diagrydii. 
Calomelan. aa gr. vj. 
Rad. rhei ℈ß
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro verm. mane cum regimine, in 
pulpa pomi torrifacti sumendus. 
9. Alius antihelminticus pro infante. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 234. 
ꝶ Aloës succot. gr. iij. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. j. 
Vitriol. mart. gr. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Mane, jejuna stomacho, pro una dosi sumatur.
F2 10. 

68 Of a Powder. 
10. P. antihelmint. cathart. pro infante. 
♃. P. cornachini. 
R. Rhabarhar. aa gr. vj. ad xij. 
Æthiop. alb. vel merc. alcalisat. 
Sacchar. alb. aa ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis vermifug. & purgat. in alimento lacteo 
communi exhibendus. 
11. Alius vermifugus alterans. 
♃. † Æthiop. alb. ʒß. 
Nitri purif. ℈j. 
Sal.jovis gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. sabin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Alternis auror. (cum sequent.) pro ij dosib. in 
infus. casse sumendus. 
12. Pulv. solutivus. 
♃. Pol. sen. gr. xxv. 
Tartar. vitriolat. gr. v. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. P. laxativ. vel lenitiv. in pulpa pomi tosti, vel 
aliter, sumendus, &c. 
13. Alius vermifugus evacuans 
♃. Spec. hier. gr. xv. 
Rad. rhei 
Sem. santon. aa ℈ß. 
M. f. pulv. 
S. In nebula deglutiendus: & alternis auror. 
repetendus. 
† Vel tnercur. alcalisat. fit ex pulv. testac. pts. ij. & argent. 
viv. pt. j. 
14.

69 of a Powder. 
14. Pulv. diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. 
Test. Ostreor. calcinat. aa℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu saponacea octavis horis 
sumendus. 
15. Alius diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. ℈ß. 
succin. gr. iv. 
Sp. terebinth, gtt. iij. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Capiatur statim in nebula vel haust. supra prœscript. 
16. Pulv. sialagogus.
♃. Chrystal. miner. ʒj. 
Sal. succin. ℈j. 
Sacch. alb. ʒij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. in viij. chart. dividend. 
S. Pulv. sputator. quarum unam in orem capiat sub- 
inde, vel singulis horis. 
17. Pulvis sudorificus. 
♃. Croc. angl. sicc. ℈ß 
Castor. R. gr. vj. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. chamomill. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. alexipharm. tempore idoneo in haust. julapii 
appropriat. sumendus. 
F3 18.

70 Of a Powder. 
18. Pulv. diaphoreticus. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Angel. Hispan. 
Croc. angl. sicc. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart, ij. 
S. Pulv. cardiac. in haust. julapii sumend. 
(2.) Alius P.
♃. Lapid. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Pulv. e C. C. C. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Ut prior, 6ta quaqs hora sumendus. 
19. Pulvis febrifugus. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
Alumin. rupe. gr. iv. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. febris. tertiis horis sumendus cum haustu vini 
rubri astringentis aq. Fontan. œquali parte diluti. 
20. Pulvis narcoticus in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ Opii lamellatim tenuiter scissi & lente 
exsiccati, gr.j. 
Corall. rubr. gr. xij. 
Olibani, gr. vj. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis, quavis vespera ite- 
randus. 
S. Pulvis pacans, vesperi ante somnum sumendus. 
21.

71 Of a Powder. 
21. Pulvis cephalicus. 
♃. Cinnab. antimon. levigat. ℈j. 
Rad. valer. sylv. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. bis in dies cum haustu infusi Flor. Cha- 
momillœ sumendus. 
22. Pulvis stimulans & resolvens, ib. p. 43. 
ꝶ Ol. destillat. menth. 
Marjoran. 
Tanacet. aa gtt. iv. 
Sacch. alb. sicciss. ℥j. 
M. F. s. a. † Elæosaccharum, cui adde 
Rad. Z.Z. alb. 
Cort. magellanic. aa ℥B. 
S. Pulv. ut supra, &c. capiat ʒß. ter de die ex vino.
23. Pulvis pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm, ceti ℈j. 
Bals tolut. ℈ß. 
Flor. benz. gr. iv. 
Ol. anis. 
Hysop. aa gtt. j 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. pect. vel bechic. &c. in nebula vel haust. 
appropriat. sumend. 
F4 24.
† The Eleosacchara are not near so much in use with us, as 
among foreigners: tho' we do not know any substantial reason why 
they should not be more in use than they are. 

72 Of a Powder.
24. Tragea peptica in ventric. debil 
ꝶ. Spec. diagalang. ℥ß. 
Rad. gentian. 
Cort. winteran. 
Myrrh, rubrœ aa ʒj. 
Sem. coriandr. 
Rad. calam. arom. aa ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℥j.
M. F. pulvis, dandus in scatula. 
S. Tragea stomachica: de qua cochlear. ß. pani bis- 
cocto, vino Hispanico imbuto, inspersum capiat, post 
pastum. 
25. Pulvis restorativus. 
♃. Cam. viperar. sicc. ʒß. 
F. pulvis tenuis.
Pubv. &c. bis in dies sumendus cum haust. lactis 
assinini recentis. 
26. Pulvis corrohorans. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. elect. ℈ij. 
Cinnam. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
0l. cinnam. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haustful. vini rubri sumendus. 
27. Pulvis antacidus. 
ꝶ Lap. 69 ror. ppt. 
Cretœ. 
Conch. ostreor. calcin. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. zedoar. 
Nuc. myristic. aa ʒjß.  
M. F. pulv. ten. in scatula dand. 
S. Pulvis temperans. Sumatur, quantum apice cultri 
capi potest, acido infestante. 
28.

73 Of a Powder.
28. (1.) Pulvis absorbens albus. 
♃. Test. ostreor. calcinat. ʒij. 
Cret. alb. 
Sacch. alb. ad  ʒjß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Pulvis edulcorans, cujus capiat cochleam parvam 
in haust. caffe vel theœ solut. 
(2.) Alius–Ruber. 
♃. Coral. ruhr. 
Succin. ppt. aa  ʒjß. 
801. armen. ʒß. 
Cinab. antimon. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. viij. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Alius–Niger. 
♃. Lap. Hibernic. ʒij. 
Antimon. crud. 
Æthiop. miner. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Ut prior. 
29. Pulvis niger, nosocomii sancti Bartholomæi. 
♃. Æthiop. miner. 
Antimon. crud. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Capiatur j. hor. med. cum haustu aq. benedict. 
comp. Batean. 
30. Pulvis cardialgicus. 
(1.) ♃. Cretœ alb. pl. ℈j. 
Sal. absinth. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis ten. 
S. Capiatur cum hastu aq. calc. saccharo edulcorat.
(2.)

74 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius
♃. Corall. R. levigat. 
Cretœ alb. 
Oc. gro ror ppt. aa ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Ut prior. 
31. Pul vis ecbolicus, 
♃. Borac. ℈j. 
Castor. R. 
Croc. Ang. aa gr. vj. 
Ol. sabin. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Pulvis ad partum, in haustu julapii appropriati 
sumendus. 
32. Pulvis emmenagogus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myrrh. ℈j. 
Rubig. martis ℈ß. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Capiaiur bis in dies cum haustu infusi amari. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Rubig. martis ℈j. 
Cinnab. antimon. ℈ß. 
Spec. diamhrœ, gr. viij. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
33. Pulvis hystericus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myr. gr. xv. 
Castor. gr. vj. 
Sal.succin. gr. iij. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. sabin. vel puleg. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. julapii appropriat. sumendus.
(2.)

75 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Sperm. ceti ʒß. 
Assœ fœt. gr. ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
34. Pulvis astringens rubic. 
♃. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Croc. mart. astr. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij.
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. vini rubri sumend. 
35. Pulvis nephriticus. 
♃. Test. ovor. calcinat. ʒjß. 
Sperm. ceti ʒj. 
Tereh. e chio coct. ℈ij. 
Sacch. alb. ʒj. 
M.F. pulv. ten. pro chart. iv. 
S. Pulv. ad calculum, &c. cum haustu saponacea hor. 
med. vel 4ta quaq; hor. sumend. super bibendo copiose 
de decoct. altheœ
36. Pulvis ad hœmorrhagiam. 
♃. Nitri purisicat. 
Trochisc. de carab. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu julapii cretacei octavis 
horis sumendus. 
Of

76 Of a Bolus.
Of a BOLUS. 
§.127. A Bolus is a soft, cohesive, internal 
medicine, of a roundish figure, a 
little thicker or more consistent than honey, and 
limited in quantity to a morsel, or what may be 
easily swallowed at once: whence some call it 
buccella, a Morsel. 
§.128. The MATTER or ingredients which 
are admitted to enter this form (§.127.) are every 
thing that is fit for internal use, and is also capable 
of being reduced, either of itself or by mixture, 
to the considence beforemention’d (§.127.) So 
that this form may take in all 
1. Dry substances: which are effectual in a 
small dose, and suited to form the powder 
(§.110, & 111.) These are termed excipienda, 
or what are to be taken in by others; but 
alone, they are incapable of making up this 
form of medicine. 
2. Soft medicines: which are more or less te- 
nacious and consistent: as conserves, electu- 
aries, soft extracts, inspissated Juices, soft con- 
sections, thick balsoms, both native and arti- 
ficial, potable ointments, syrups, &c. which, 
are termed excipientia or receivers; because, be- 
ing mix’d with the former, they make up the 
consistence proper for a bole: and they have 
in some measure of themselves a natural fitness 
to make up this form. 
3. Liquids: which are of a small bulk in pro- 
portion to their Strength: as natural and arti- 
ficial liquid balsoms, oils, spirits, tinctures, es- 
sences, elixirs, &c. which being of themselves 
unfit for this form, are either receiv'd by the 
others (n° 1, 2.) or else they receive other 
more

77 of a Bolus. 
more consistent substances as accessory to the 
form. 
§.129. A proper Election of the several 
ingredients (§.128.) is directed by the following 
Considerations: 
1. The most commendable Qualities of a 
Bolus are, to be so consistent as to retain its 
form, and not run or spread flat by standing;
to be so soft as easily to give way to the action 
of the sauces and œsophagus in deglution; and 
to have the mixture of its several ingredients 
made uniform and equable. 
2. Hence, the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
and also the liquid (n° 3.) are of themselves 
not fit to make up this form; but they require 
the intervention of something soft and tenacious- 
(n° 2.) to cement or glue together the whole. 
3. Also the soft substances (§.128. n° 2.) 
do for the generality require to be incrassated 
by the Addition of some that are dry, in order 
to fit them for the formation of a bolus. Yet, 
some of them are susceptible of this form with- 
out any addition: as conserves, electuaries, and 
the thicker kind of inspissated juices. These 
may be therefore formed into simple boles, 
per §.62. 
4. Every ingredient shou’d be of such a dis- 
position, as to mix uniformly with each other 
in composition. 
5. Medicines which are viscid, sharp or acrid, 
or very unpleasant to the smell and taste, are 
much more suitable for this form, than that of 
a powder (§.111.); because they may be in this 
more concealed from those sensible organs. 
Whence, strong mercurials can enter no form 
more conveniently than this.
6. Such

78 Of a Bolus. 
6. Such as are fat and resinous, as balsoms, 
potable ointments, &c. should have their parts 
divided by grinding with sugar or something 
which is dry, that they may be the more easily 
dissolved and digested in the stomach. 
7. Fix’d and volatile alcaline Salts, and every 
thing else that suddenly exhales or else liquifies 
in the air, shou’d not enter the composition of 
boles which are to be kept some time: for by 
that means, the medicine will be much the 
worse in its form or consistence, as well as in- 
tended virtue. 
8. Nor are things which effervesce with each 
other, or easily ferment, fit to enter this form; 
unless the Bolus is to be taken soon after its 
composition. 
9. The number of ingredients for composing 
this form, should scarce ever exceed three or 
four, in a prescription. 
§.130. The more usual ORDER or method of 
placing the ingredients of this form in a pre- 
scription, is, to put the excipiens (§.128. n° 2.) 
first, as being determin’d in quantity; then, the 
excipienda or dry ingredients (ib. n° 1.); after- 
wards, the liquid Substances (ib. n° 3.); and last- 
ly, (if there be any) the excipiens whose quantity 
is left to be determin’d by the apothecary. 
§.131. The Dose (§.64.) of a bolus is ex- 
tended from one dram, to a dram and a half, or 
two drams; but the dose shou’d never be injudi- 
ciously increas’d beyond the last quantity, unless 
when the ingredients are very weighty in propor- 
tion to their bulk, and the patient happens to be 
a good taker of physic. But if the bolus should 
be made up of the lighter sort of ingredients, it 
ought not to exceed one dram. So that, when the 
proper and effectual dose of the ingredients ex-
ceeds

79 Of a Bolus. 
ceeds these bounds, it is more advisable to distri- 
bute the mass in several parcels or little boles, than 
to choak the patient with a great lump. Small- 
ness of bulk in a dose, as commendable in a pow- 
der (per §.113. n° 1.), is equally or more so in a 
bolus. We can hardly err in making the dose of 
this form too small, even tho' the bolus should not 
exceed a scruple. 
§.132. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is most frequently but one dose or bolus, or 
two, but seldom more than three or four, unless 
when they are to be taken at very short intervals 
of time. For as they are always sent in separate 
Doses, portion’d out by the apothecary, they 
easily become either too dry and hard, or too 
moist and liquid, by long keeping. Therefore, 
upon multiplying the number of doses with the 
mass (§.131.) together, the physician will know 
how much the general quantity, to be prescribed 
at one time, ought to be. 
§.133. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients of this form, is determin’d from 
their particular virtues and consistences. Consult 
§.87. & 115. So that the same proportion does 
not obtain in all cases alike. For, 
1. If the soft Substances (§.128. n° 2. & 
§.129. n° 3.) which are of themselves fit to 
compose a bolus, are order’d alone in a pre- 
scription, the reciprocal proportion of each of 
them may be determin’d from the known suffi- 
cient dose (§.66.), and the dose of the bolus 
(§.131.). Fur the consistence in that case, has 
no influence to limit the proportion. 
2. When the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
are to enter this form, they may be order’d for 
one dose in the quantity of ʒß. ℈ij, or, at most, 
ʒj. But the excipientia or soft substances (§.128.  
n° 2.)


80 Of a Bolus. 
n° 2.) require to be order’d in a different pro- 
portion, according as they are more or less 
consistent. As 
(1.) Conserves (which are the most frequent 
ingredients of this form), electuaries, honey, 
thick balsoms, &c. are order’d from ℈ij, to 
ʒj.or ʒjß. 
(2.) Inspissated juices, pulps, and soft con- 
sections are order’d from ʒß. to ʒj. or ℈jv. 
(3.) To make up a determinate quantity of the 
dry ingredients into this form, so much the less 
is required of the soft substances, as these latter 
are more liquid. 
3. Hence it appears, that when the quantity 
of dry ingredients is but small, it will be most
convenient to order the excipiens or soft substance 
to be of the more consistent kind: but when the 
quantity of the first is large, the consistence of 
the latter should be proportionably thinner or 
more liquid: that the dose (§.131.) of the 
bolus may not be too much enlarged. 
4. But if to the preceeding (n° 2.), liquids 
(§.128. n° 3.) are also added, they should not 
enter in a larger quantity than from gutt. j, to 
ij, iij, or at most, jv, for each bolus. And then 
the quantity of soft excipients must be propor- 
tionably diminished. 
5. Otherwise, the dry and liquid substances 
(n° 2. 4.) only may be order’d in a determi- 
nate quantity, and the quantity of the soft sub- 
stances or excipients may be left to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary, writing only q. s. (per 
§.58. n° 8 (7.)). But this method cannot be 
comply’d with, when the effectual dose of these 
requires an exactness of limitation. 
6. But very often, when the quantity of the 
dry ingredients is pretty large, and its preced- 
ing excipiens or soft substance is very consistent, 
or


81 Of a Bolus. 
or thick and small in quantity, so that we may 
thence doubt whether they will make the bolus 
of a proper consistence and pliability; in that 
case we may still add a secondary and more li- 
quid substance, e.g. syr. q. s. &c. 
7. On the contrary, when we foresee that the 
consistence of the bolus will be too thin or soft 
(§.129. n° 1.), it is usual to adjoin q. s. Sac- 
charic pulv. liquorit. &c. which more especially 
holds good When this form is to be made up of 
simple terebinthinates, &c. 
§.134. The Subscription or direction to 
the apothecary for this form may be thus: M. F. 
bolus or boli n°. ij, iij, &c. And it may be some- 
times necessary to enjoin the same caution, with 
regard to the division of this form, with that men- 
tioned concerning powders (§.118.), which may 
be thence repeated. Sometimes we also add in the 
prescription, either for ornament to the bolus, or 
pleasantness of taking, auri folio, or nebula obvol-
vatur, or exhibeatur cum nebula. Consult §. 119. 
The receptacles for conveying this form to the pa- 
tients, are generally either gallipots or proper pa- 
pers; for mentioning which in a prescription, 
there is hardly ever any occasion. 
§.135. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient, with regard to this form, may be easily 
understood from what has been already said upon 
that head (at §.120, to 125.), For a vehicle, some 
like a nebula or water best, others prefer some li- 
quor, wherein they may first dissolve the bolus. 
It is also generally of service to order some proper 
liquid to be drank after the bolus, especially if we 
have any reason to fear that it will meet with a 
difficult dissolution in the stomach; which is to be 
more particularly observed with regard to terebin-
thinate substances, and others of the like kind.
G §.136.

82 Boles.
§. 136. The Use of this form, a bolus, is pret- 
ty much the same with that of the powder (§.125.); 
but it is not so frequently in practice * as the pow- 
der: for boles, possessing in some measure the na- 
ture of a continuous and solid body, do frequently 
not act so speedily as we would desire (§.135.). 
We often use this form for variety, or to gratify those 
who are better pleased with a bolus than a powder. 
§.137. Take the following as specimens of this 
form: which may be adapted, with a small varia- 
tion according to particular circumstances, to most 
cases which occur in practice. 
1. Bolus emeticus pro adulto. 
(1.) ꝶ Vitrioli albi, gr. xxv. 
Elect, lenit. q. s. 
M, F. bolus, detur cum nebula. 
S. Bolus emeticus ex pauxillo cerevisiœ aut infusi 
theœ viridis hariendus: post quamlibet vomitio- 
nem superbibantur cyathi aliquot infusi ejusdem 
tepidi.  
Bolus emet. communis pro adulto. 
(2.) ♃. Rad. ipecacuan. pulv. ʒß. 
Syr. flor. persicor. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Bolus emet.—salinus—
♃. Sal. vel gillœ vitriol. ℈j. 
Tarari emet. gr. ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. q. s. 
M. F: bolus, in nebula dandus. 
S. Ut prior. 2. 
* This form is seldom used among us but in acute cases, when 
we exhibit emetics, cathartics, opiates, and strong alexipharmics, 
whose dose require to be well ascertain'd; tho' it may be used also 
in some chronical cases, when we are afraid a patient will fall 
short of his proper dose, in taking an electuary. 


83 Boles. 
2. Bolus purgans communis. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Calomelan. gr. xv. 
Ol. essent. sassafr. gtt. ij.
Elect. lenit. q. s. 
M. F. bolus deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus 
(2.)
♃. Scammm. gr. xij.
Cremor. tartar. 
Calamelan. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de rhabarb. q. s. 
M. F. bol. deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)
♃. Rad. rhœi opt. pulv. ℈j. 
Trochisc. Alhandal. gr. vij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Bolus leniens. 
♃. Rad. jalap. 
Rhei pulv. 
Tereb. venet. coct. pulv. aa ℈B. 
Nitri purificat. gr. xv. 
Elect. lenitiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. quotidie repetendus. 
G2 4.


84 Boles.
4. Bolus hydragogus. 
♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Gutt. gamb. ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. iij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum haustu cerivisiœ recentis calidœ
sumendus. 
5. Bolus rheumaticus catharticus. 
♃. Rad. jalap. ℈j. 
Gum. guaiac. 
Calomelan. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de ros. solutiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus. 
6. Bolus diuret. vel è cantharid. 
♃. Pulv. cantharid. gr. vj. 
Gamph. gr. iv. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° ij. 
Extract. thebaic. gr. ss. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Bol. &c. statim sumendus, superbibendo frequenter 
de decocto hordii, radicum & sumitat. althœœ sac- 
charo pauco dulcificato. 
7. Bolus alexipharm. vel sudorif. 
(1.) ♃.Sal. vol. C. C. 
Camph. aa gr. v. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° j. 
Confect. mitbrid. ℈ij. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu seri vinosi calidi sumendus.
(2.) 


85 Boles.
(2.) Bolus alexipharm. vel card. 
♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Contrayerv. aa ℈ß. 
Flor. benzoin, gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. chamom. gtt. j. 
Philon. Roman. ℈j. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Ut prior. 
8. Bolus cardiacus flav. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. flav. aurant. ʒß. 
Lap. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Croc. angl. gr. vij. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu julapii vel seri vinosi sumend. 
(2.) Bolus cardiacus rub. 
♃. Confect. alkerm. ℈ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℈j. 
Coccinell. pulv. ℈ß. 
Spir. vitriol. gtt. iij. 
M. F. bol.
S. Bol. &c. cum haust. apozemat. aquos. acidulat. 
exhibendus. 
9. Bolus febrifug. 
♃. Pulv. cort. elect. ℈j. 
Resin. ejusd. gr. vj. 
Cons. abs. pont. ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. j. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S.Bol. &c. 4ta vel 6ta quaque bora repetendus.
G3 10.

86 Boles. 
10. Bolus anodynus vel paregor. 
♃. Philon. Roman. ℈j. ad ʒß. 
F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane, vel H. S. sumendus, & pro re 
nata repetend. 
11. Bolus antihystericus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Cons. nut. 3j. 
Troch. de myrrh. ℈ß. 
Ol. stillat. succin. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, auri folio obducendus.
S. Bolus pacans cum aquœ pulegii cyatho sumendus. 
(2.)
♃. Gum. guaiac. 
Cinnab. antimon. 
Philon. Roman. aa ℈j. 
Ext. gentian. gr. vj. 
Syr. chalib. vel hyster. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Ut prior. 
12. Boli balsamici. 
Vid. Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. 2. obs. 2. 
ꝶ. Tereb. e chio ʒij. 
Pulv. liquorit. q. s. 
M. F. boli, n° ij. 
S. boli nervini, quorum alter mane, alter vesperi ex 
vitello ovi recentis sumatur, superbibendo singulis 
aq. lact. alexiter. ℥ij. 
13.

87 Boles. 
13. Boli sialogogi. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros rub. ʒß. 
Mercutii dulc. trit. gr. ix. 
M. F. bolus: cui similes duo alii seorsim 
confecti, exhibeantur cum totidem nebulis. 
S. Boli aperientes, quorum unum singulis quadrihoriis 
capiat œger, corpore prius ptisana appropriata bene 
impleto.  
14. Bolus scilliticus. 
♃. Pulp. scill. rec. ℈j. 
Ext. gentian, gr. vj. 
Spec. diamhr. ℈B. 
Ol. juniper. essent. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, contundendo. 
S. Bol, &c. bis in dies cum nebula sumendus, super- 
bibendo haustum julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
15. Bolus paregoricus refrigerans. 
♃. Spec. diatrag. frig. recent. ʒß. 
Sperm. cet. ℈j. 
Nitri purifcat. ℈ß. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. ß. 
Syr. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. 6ta quaque hora sumendus, cum haustu 
julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
16. Bolus alterans. 
♃. Cinnabar. antimon. ℈j.
Pulv. R. ari. rec. 
Gum. guaiac. aa ℈ß. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. bis in dies h. m. sumendus, cum haustu 
aq. benidict. C. Batean. 
F4 17.

88 Boles. 
17. Bolus pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℈j. 
Rad. ir. Florent. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi chemic. gtt. j. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, &c. 
18. Bolus ad asthma nervosuni. 
♃. Cinnabar, nativ. ℈j. 
Cort. peruv. opt. pulv. ℈ß. 
Syr. pœon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bis in dies sumendus cum haustu infusi amari S. 
19. Bolus ad diarrhœam. 
♃. Pulv. rhei. torrifact. ℈ß. 
Spec. pro. confect. fracast. ℈j. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
Syr. e mecon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu decocti albi sumendus. 
Of an ELECTUARY. 
§.138. AN ELECTUARY is a soft, internal 
medicine: pretty much resembling 
the consistence of a bolus (§.127.), but not 
quite so thick; being prescribed for by more doses 
than one at a time, which are not to be portion’d 
out by the apothecary. This form sometimes, 
(tho’ seldom) comes under the denomination of
mistura; but is frequently term’d (among foreign 
physicians), from its preserv’d or candy’d ingre- 
dients, conditum: it is also sometimes named by 
them,

89 Of an Electuary. 
them, opiatum, from the opium in its composi- 
tion. 
§.139. The Matter or ingredients admitted 
to enter the composition of this form, are the same 
with those of the bolus (§.128.) If any have the 
preference, they are conserves; which are gene- 
rally taken into the composition of electuaries, 
more constantly and largely than the other sub- 
stances. 
§.140. The CHOICE of the most suitable in- 
gredients for this form, is also pretty much the 
same with that of the bolus, preceding (§.129.): 
yet the following considerations relate more parti- 
cularly to the Electuary. 
1. Such substances should more especially be 
kept out of this form, as are very unpleasant in 
smell, take and colour; by reason, electuaries 
are of constant and frequent use. 
2. Such things as liquify, exhale, corrupt, 
effervesce or easily ferment and turn sower, are 
the less suitable for this form, as the composi- 
tion is required to be pretty soft, and to keep 
some time. 
3. For the same reasons (n° 2.), the com- 
mixture of ingredients, in an electuary, should 
be perform’d with the greatest accuracy and ex- 
actness; the trituration of brittle substances shou’d 
be continu’d till they are exceeding fine, and the  
mixation of such as are fat or oily, resinous or 
terebinthinate, should be effected by yolks of 
eggs; left they should separate, subside or e- 
merge, by standing the length of time which 
this form frequently requires to be taken in. 
4. Hence also, if substances which are very 
heavy in proportion to their bulk, are to enter 
the composition of an electuary, its consistence  
is


90 Of an Electuary. 
is then required to be a little thicker than other- 
wise. 
5. Therefore the drastic or strongest purga- 
tives, with the preparations of mercury and 
other metals, are not suitable for an electuary; 
for, by an inequality of their mixture, by their 
precipitation in keeping, or by a careless dosing 
or partition ot the electuary in taking, which 
is usually left to be done by the patient or his- 
attendants; the use of such ingredients in this 
form might prove of dangerous consequence. 
6. An electuary will indeed admit of a few 
more ingredients to enter its composition, than 
a bolus (§.129. n° 9.): yet it should not be 
over-charg’d, (per §.29.). 
7. The covering this form with leaf-gold or 
silver, and sometimes intermixing them in 
the substance of an electuary, for the sake of 
ornament, or to please the patient; may be or- 
der’d at discretion by them who approve there- 
of, being at the same time mindful of the 
Rules §.85. n° 5. 
§.141. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form in a prescription, is not much diffe- 
rent from that used in writing for a bolus (§ 130.): 
the soft substances whose weight are determin’d, 
should take the first place; then, the dry ingre- 
dients; afterwards, the liquid; and lastly, we 
are to place those, whose weight or quantity is to 
be ascertain’d by the apothecary, and are usually 
wrote for under q. s. or quantum sufficit. Hence 
it appears, that when the soft substances are not 
to be ascertained in their weights by the physician 
in his prefcription; in that case, they must give 
place to the dry ingredients, which may then be 
placed first. 
§.142.

91 Of an Electuary.
§.142. The DOSE of an electuary shou'd not 
without necessity be made larger than that of a bo- 
lus (§.131.). It is seldom determin'd by weight, 
but is generally taken by bulk, as by the size of 
filberts or hazle-nuts, wall-nuts, chesnuts, and 
nutmegs, or as much as can be taken upon the 
point of a knife, spoon, &c. Sometimes the 
whole electuary is order'd to be taken at so many 
times, v. g. 3, 4, 5, &c. at certain intervals of 
time. But in those cases we must also be mindful 
that those parts or portions are not larger than 
can be conveniently swallowed at once. 
§.143. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed for at one time, is scarce 
ever less than ℥j, and very seldom exceeds ℥jv, 
or five at most: according as indications require a 
more of less frequent or continued taking of the 
electuary. When this form is order'd in very large 
quantities, or is to be kept a good while, it fre- 
quently grows either too thick and dry, too thin 
and soft, or is otherwise corrupted and spoiled * 
§.144. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is something diffe- 
rent from that of the bolus (§.133.), by reason an 
electuary is of a softer consistence (per §.138.); 
this variation of proportion, may however be li- 
mited by the following considerations. 
1. As the soft Substances or excipientia (§.128. 
n° 2.) are more or less consistent, they will 
require
* It is almost become a rule among us, that the general quan- 
tity of an extemporaneous electuary should seldom exceed ʒ iij. 
and thereabout ℥jss of conserve, ʒij. of powders, with 
a q. s. of syrup, amount to; tho' cinnabar, and some of the hea- 
vier things will not take up so much syrup. And if this rule, 
as to quantity, be not observed by the prescriber, but more he 
order'd, it is a common thing for the compounder to do it for him, 
by proportioning the materials suitable thereto; as by making up 
half, or a third of what is directed.

92 Of an Electuary. 
require a greater or less proportion of the dry 
excipienda (§.128. n° 1.). Hence, supppose the 
dry ingredients or excipienda to be ʒj. if the 
soft excipientiœ are of the thicker kind, as con- 
serves, officinal electuaries, &c. it will be ne- 
cessary to take of them ʒj: if they are thinner, 
as inspissated juices, pulps, honeys, soft con- 
fections, &c. we may take ʒiij: if more liquid, 
as syrups, ʒij will be sufficient. (See §.133. 
n° 2.) 
2. If therefore the soft excipientia of this 
form, are of different consistences, it will be no 
difficult matter to determine the mutual propor- 
tion of each {per. n° 1.). And it is customary, 
in prescribing this form, to limit only the thick- 
er substances by weight, and to subjoin those 
which are more fluid under the title of q. s. or 
quantum sufficit (per §.133. n° 6.) 
3. If ingredients be added to this form which 
are merely liquid ( per §.128. n° 3.), the mu- 
tual proportion of these may be learned from 
what has been said (at §.133. n° 4.), compar’d 
with the dose, and general quantity of the. elec- 
tuary to be prescribed, (per. §.142. and 143). 
The quantity of soft excipients must be then 
proportiorubly diminish'd, or that of the dry in- 
gredients must be accordingly increased. 
4. One or two leaves of gold or silver will 
be generally sufficient to decorate the whole 
mass of the electuary (§.143.). 
5. Sometimes the patient chuses to have the 
electuary a little softer than usual, that it may 
be the more easily diluted and taken in some li- 
quor, We, may easily obtain this point, by 
in larging the quantity of fluid excipients(n° 1, 2.). 
and by giving notice in the subscription, when 
the quantity of those ingredients is left to be de- 
termin'd by the Apothecary. 
6. What

93 Of an Electuary.  
6. What may be said further in this place, 
relating to the mutual proportion of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be seen at §.133. 
n° 3. 5. 6. 7. to which we therefore refer. 
§.145. The usual SUBSCRIPTION, or direction 
to the apothecary for this form, is no more than 
M. or M. F. electuarium vel conditum; adding 
molle, when it is to be of a thinner consistence, 
(per §.144. n° 5.). The common receptacle to re- 
tain and convey this form to the patient, is, a 
white, earthen gallypot; of which, there will be 
no occasion to make mention in a prescription. 
§.146. The Signature or direction to the 
patient proper for this form, is sufficiently appa- 
rent from §.135. 138. & 142. Sometimes it may 
be proper to advise the patient in this place, to 
stir up the electuary before taking; especially if it 
contains ingredients of a great specific gravity, or 
which are very apt to separate from each other. 
§.147. The use of this form is pretty much 
like that of the bolus (§.136.) *; but an electuary 
is not so suitable for the intention of an hysteric, 
by reason of the great quantity of sugar which usu- 
ally enters its composition. 
§. 148. Take the following Specimens of this 
form. 
1.
* There is however an obvious difference between the use of 
this form and that of a bolus: for an electuary is mostly used in 
chronical cases, and consist chiefly of alteratives; but it is not so 
with a bolus. See §.136.—Yet it is allowable, in case of po- 
verty, to save the patient from the expence of boles by ordering an 
electuary; even in acute cases, and where the electuary will co- 
incide with the proper nature of a bolus; if so be we can rely 
on the exact dosing thereof. 

94 Electuaries.
1. Elect. purgans antiphlogist. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 230. 
ꝶ. Tamarind, elect. pulp. ℥ij. 
Crystall. tartar. minutim. pulv. ʒij. 
M. 
S. Capiat omni 1/8 horœ ʒj. donec commode purgetur. 
2. Elect. solutivum. 
♃. Pulp. cash. rec. 
Fruct. tamarind. aa ℥jß.  
Pulv. rhei  ʒjß. 
Cremor. tartar. ʒvj. 
Tartar. vitriolat. ʒß.  
Syr. violar. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem nucis castan.
mane & vesperi, vel ter in die. 
3. Electuar. aromaticum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Limon. aa ℥ß. 
Rad. Z. Z. & N. M cond. aa ʒiij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Syr. cinnamomi q. s. ad consist. debit. 
M. F elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. avellan. vel mos- 
chatœ subinde: vel ter in die, paulo ante pastum. 
4. Elect. stipticum incrassans. 
ꝶ Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ij.
Mivæ cydonior. ℥j. 
Flor. granat. ʒjß. 
Boli armen. lœvig. ʒij. 
Lap. Hœmatit. ppt. ʒj. 
M. F. conditum. D. ad fictile album. 
S. Elect. astringens, de quo ter vel. quater de die ad 
castaneœ magnitudinem capiatur. 
5.


95 Electuaries. 
5. Elect. astringens. 
♃. Confect. fracastor. 
Cons. ros. rubr. aa ℥ß. 
Sang. dracon. ʒiij. 
Rad. rhei terrifact. ʒj. 
Ter. Japon. ℈j. 
Sur. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat Q. N. M. minoris ter 
in die. 
6. Elect. alterans 
♃. Cons. fruct. cynosbat. ℥jß.
Cinmb. antimon. ʒiij. 
Gum. Guaiac. ʒij. 
Ol. sassaf. in sacch. q. s. solut. gtt. vj. 
Syr. de 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat quant. nuc. mosc. mane & 
vesperi cum haustu cerivisœ medicat. calid. 
7. Elect. balsamicum. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbator. ʒx. 
Carn. viperin. pulv. ℥j. 
Rad. ering. cond. ʒij. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj.
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiatur q. n. m. 4ta quaque 
hora. 
8.


96 Electuaries. 
8. Elect. cephalicum. 
♃. Cons. flor. caryophil. ℥j.  
Anth. ℥ß. 
Rad. valer. sylv. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒijß. 
Succ. cherm. q. s.  
M. F. elect.
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. hor. med. cum 
haustul. julapii appropriate. 
M. F. eleft. 
9. Elect. pectorale. 
♃. Trochisc. bec. alb. ʒx. 
Rad. ering. condit. ʒij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Ol. essent. anis. gtt. vj. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. urgente tusse. 
10. Elect. excitans in febrili languore. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 119. 
ꝶ. Confect. alkerm. ʒj. 
Zinzib. condit. ʒvj. 
Rad. contrayerv. 
Serpentar. virgin, aa ʒj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
Ut. F. elect. 
S. capiatur 3ß. omni quadrihorio. 
11.

97 Electuaries. 
11. Elect. refrig., acidulat. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. berher. ℥ij. 
Ros. rub. ℥ß.
Ol. sulph. q. s. ad grat. acidit. 
Syr. diamar. q. s. ut. 
F. elect. molle. 
S. Elect. cardiac. cujus in orem solvatur q. n. avel-
lan. subinde. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. ros. rub. ℥ß. 
Pulp. tamarind. ʒiij. 
Sp. vitriol, ad grat. acid. 
Succ. cherm. q. s. ad debit. consist. 
M. F. elect. molle. 
S. Ut supra. 
12. Elect. antifebrile. 
ꝶ. Cort. Peruvian, opt. ℥ß. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒij. 
Syr. 5. Tad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Sumatur tempore apyrexias, omni bihorio octava 
pars totius, ex vino. 
13. Elect, ad strumas. 
♃. Cons. cochlear. hort. 
Æthiop. min. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒvj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus sumat q. n. m. ter de die, cum 
hanstu appropriat. liquor. 
H 14.

98 Electuaries. 
14. Elect. stomachicum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Absinth. Rom. aa ʒvj. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒij. 
Spec. diamb. 
Menth. crisp. aa ʒj. 
Syr. e cond. R. Z. Z. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. sumat q. n. m. ter vel quater de die
cum haustul. vini rub. 
15. Elect. deobstruens. 
(1.) ♃. Conf. absinth. Rom. ʒj. 
Ext. rad. gentian. ʒj. 
Sapon. venet. 
Millep. viv. aa ʒiij.
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiat q. n. m. ter in die. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. cochl. hort. ℥j. 
Pulp. scillit. torrifact. ℥ß. 
Pulv. ari rec. ʒjß.
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiatur ut supra, cum haust. vin. millepid.
16. Elect. chalibiatum. 
♃. Cons. absinth. Rom. ʒjß. 
Rubigin. mart. ʒiij. 
Spec, diamhr. ʒjß. 
Cinnah. antimon. ʒj. 
Syr. chalib. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat q. n. m. ter de die, cum
haustu julapii appropriat. 
Of

99 Of a Linctus. 
Of a LINCTUS 
§.149. A LINCTUS (call’d by the Greeks 
eclegma, and by the Arabians Loch, 
or Lohock) is a soft, internal medicine, thinner 
than the electuary (§.138.), but not so apt to run 
or spread as a thick syrup, which it very much re- 
sembles; being composed of the softer and more 
viscid kind of ingredients, which are to be, at se- 
parate times licked up by the tongue, retained in 
the mouth, and afterwards swallowed as they gra- 
dually dissolve there. 
§.150. The MATTER or ingredients fit to 
compose this form of medicine, is pretty much the 
same with what enters the composition of the elec- 
tuary (§.139.), or bolus (§.128.). It also takes 
in officinal lohochs, sweet oils made by expression, 
mucilages, the yolks of eggs, and sometimes dis- 
tilled waters. 
§.151. For the Choice of ingredients most 
suitable for this form, we are to observe. 
1. If any of the dry and solid substances 
(§.128. n° 1) are to  enter the composition of 
this form, they are required to be ground ex- 
ceeding fine, or to be easily dissolvable; that 
they may not injure the softness and uniformity 
proper to a linctus: to prevent which, such 
things are generally left intirely out of this form. 
2. It is upon the same account that most con- 
serves and candied simples are seldom permitted 
to enter the composition of a linctus, unless they 
have been first pulped thro’ a strainer, which 
should never be omitted in compounding for 
nice patients. 
3. The very strongest medicines, cannot be 
safely admitted into this form because they so
H2 easily

100 Of a Linctus.
easily separate, precipitate or emerge by stand- 
ing in a linctus, whose dose is at the same time 
too uncertain for such things, being not deter- 
mined with exactness by weight; so that the 
effects of such medicines could never be depend- 
ed on in this form. But as a linctus is not fitted 
for such ingredients, our indications never call 
for them in that form. 
4. Acrimonious ingredients, and such as are 
unpleasant to the smell and tast, require to be 
more cautiously avoided in this form than any 
other; for as a linctus stays so long in the mouth, 
as it is swallowed so slowly, such things would 
nauseate the patient, and render the medicine 
very difficult to be taken. 
5. As oily and mucilaginous substances are 
very frequently prescribed in this form, we 
should be the more careful that they are not 
rancid or otherwise corrupted: an ill quality 
which they readily acquire by long standing in 
the shops.  
6. It is in the general very proper to beat up 
oily substances with the yolk of an egg; to which 
may be afterwards added, sugar, honey, and 
the compositions made up with these. 
7. The number of ingredients admitted into 
this form in a prescription, is the same with 
that of a bolus §.129. n° 9. 
§.152. For the ORDER in which the several 
ingredients of this form are to be placed in a pre- 
scription, there is hardly any constant one observ’d. 
Such things as serve to prepare and mix ingredients 
which are difficultly soluble (per §.151. n° 6.), 
should be placed next to each other; but for the 
rest, they may be placed by the rules at §.57. 
n° 2, 3, 5.
§.153. 

101 Of a Linctus. 
§.153. The Dose of a linctus is seldom ascer- 
tained by weight; bat when it is, it should not 
exceed ℥ß. The more usual method of dosing this 
form, is, by the measure of a large, eating, or 
small, tea-spoon, or as much as can be taken up by 
a bruised liquorish stick *. 
§.154. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, which is usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is nearly the same with that of an electuary 
(§.132.); hardly ever exceeding ℥vj †. unless 
there should be a speedy consumption of the me- 
dicine from the very frequent repetition of its use. 
The great inclination of the softer saccharine com- 
positions to ferment, the natural aptitude of ingre- 
dients which are oily or mucilaginous to turn rank 
and corrupt, and more especially great heat of 
weather, do each forbid preferibing this form in 
large quantities. 
§.155. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingredients which are to make up this form, is 
determin’d from a previous knowledge of the con- 
sidence of each ingredient, and from considering 
also the considence (§.149.) proper to a linctus 
itself. Hence 
1. A linctus may be compounded in almost 
any proportion of Ingredients, whose consistence 
is much the same with that of the form itself: 
such are officinal lohocks, honey, cream, yolks 
of eggs, soft confections, syrups, mucilages, 
expressed oils, and the like viscid substances. 
The medicinal virtues of each ingredient, their 
price and other circumstances (mention’d §.66. 
n° 1. to 14.) may also have some influence in 
limiting their proportion. Saponaceous sub- 
H3 stances
* A method of taking now in difuse with us. 
† The quantity of a linctus order'd at one time among us, is 
seldom more than half this Quantity. 

102 Of a Linctus. 
stances may be order’d in a quantity sufficient 
to reduce such as are oily (per §.151. n° 6.) 
The yolks of eggs should be three times as much 
as the oil, &c. but honey or sugar must enter 
in a larger quantity. 
2. Conserves, electuaries, and pulps, require 
to be diluted with almost three times their quan- 
tity of syrup; but dry substances require eight 
times as much syrup: from whence we may per- 
ceive the proportion of each kind of ingredients. 
But when the solid parts of dry substances, or 
of conferves, are to be pulped thro' a strainer 
(per §.151. n° 2.), a less quantity of syrup 
will suffice. 
3. Distilled oils, liquid balsoms, elixirs, es- 
sences, tinctures, spirits, and the like, which 
are very strong, should enter a linctus (as in an 
electuary §.144. n° 3.) in but a very small quan- 
tity, so that there will be hardly any occasion to 
change the proportion of the rest of the ingre- 
dients upon their account. 
4. Distilled waters may happen to over-dilute 
the consistence proper to this form, if they are 
order’d in a certain quantity, and therefore it is 
best to leave the quantity of them to be deter- 
mined at the discretion of the apothecary. 
Upon the same account, the quantity of syrup 
is also frequently order’d by q. s. When the 
consistence of a linctus happens to be too thin, 
it may be helped by a q. s. sacchar. alb. 
5. The degree of consistence (§.149.) is 
however not so ablolutely proper to and inse- 
parable from a linctus, but that it may frequent- 
ly be made a little thicker or thinner than what 
is there mentioned: whence we learn, that the 
rules now deliver’d for proportioning the ingre- 
dients of this form, are not absolutely invio- 
lable. If we have any reason to fear a Separa- 
tion


103 Of a Linctus.
tion or emersion of the oily parts, it is a suffi- 
cient authority to make the consistence of a 
linctus a little thicker than ordinary. 
§.156. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary, concerning the composition of this 
form, is by the physician order’d M. F. linctus. 
adding per setaceum trajeciendus, when it is to be 
passed thro’ a sieve or strainer. When the ingre- 
dients are not inclined to mix uniformly together, 
it may be proper for him to advise the apothecary 
to let them be beat up well together for a good 
while. The common receptacle for a linctus, is 
a gallypot, or a wide-mouth’d phial, which may 
be either added or omitted in a prescription. Some- 
times the dose is determin’d by a scraped liquorish 
stick *, bruised at one end, which being dipped 
in the linctus, is afterwards cleared by licking it 
off. The subscription therefore concludes detur ad 
fictile cum bacillo liquoritiœ. 
§.157. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient concerning the taking of a linctus, may 
be deduced from what has been said under that 
head (§.60.) in general, and from (§.120. 121. 
122. 146.): it imports at least that a certain quan- 
tity (§.153.) the linctus is to be taken conti- 
nually or at certain intervals, to lie in the mouth 
'till it gradually dissolves there, and to be after- 
wards swallowed. If we suspect there will be a Se- 
paration or inequality of parts by its standing, it 
may be proper to order the medicine to be stirred 
about before any of it be taken. 
§.158. The USE of this form is only in dis- 
orders which infest the internal parts of the mouth, 
fauces, œsophagus, larynx, trachea and bronchia: 
* This method of taking a linctus, by a liquorish-stick, is of late 
rejected among us, as being more disagreeable, unsightly, and less 
exact than the use of a tea-spoon. 
H4 whence 


104 Linctus’s. 
whence lohocks are frequently order’d in apthæ, 
coughs, peripneumonis, phthisis, &c. to answer 
the intention of softening, healing, astringing, 
&c; for it is very rare that a linctus is order’d in 
any other diseases or intentions. 
§.159. Specimens of this form. 
1. Linctus communis. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥j. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥ij. 
Spt. vitriol, q. s. ad grat. acid. 
M. exactissime, F. linctus. 
S. Linct. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem cochleœ mi- 
noris subinde. 
2. Linctus ad sputa suppresa in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 148. 
ꝶ Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥jß.
Syr. violar. 
Mell. virgin. 
Vitell. ov. recent. aa ℥ß. 
M. accurate. 
S. Lingat. unc. ß. omni hord, donec sputa redeant.  
3. Lindus pectoralis niger. 
(1.) ♃. Succ. Hispan. ʒj.
Ext. R. liquor it. angl. ʒij. 
Ol. sem. lin. rec. frig. ext. ʒvj. 
Hysop. distillat. gtt. iv. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Linct. &c. ut prior sumendus. 
(2.)


105 Linctus's. 
(2.) Lintus pectoralis albus. 
♃. Trochisc. bech. alb. ʒiij. 
Sperm. ceti. ʒjß. 
Ol. sem. sinap. ʒx. 
Vitel. ov. rec. n° j. 
Syr. balsamic. ℥ijß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)—ruber. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. bals. tolut. 
Gum. benz. aa gtt. xx. 
Ol. chem. anis. gtt. iij. 
Syr. papav. errat. ʒjß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
4. Linct. ad partes aphthis delapsis excoriatas. 
H. Boerh. p. 170. 
ꝶ Syr. papav. alb. 
Cremor. lact. dulc. aa ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n° ij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. F. linctus. 
S. Hujus pauxillum ore assiduo contineat. 
5.


106 Pills.
5. Linctus tussim leniens. 
ꝶ. Loho. sani & experti. 
Syr. diacod. 
Mucilag. rad. alth. aq. ros. ext. aa ℥j. 
Spermat. cet. vit. ov. solut ʒj. 
Sacch. crystall. q. s. 
M. F. linct. detur in fictili cum baculo 
S. Lambat. sæpius, cum tustis urget. 
liquoritiæ. 
6. Linctus incrassans Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. 
Syr. violar. 
de mecon. aa ℥j. 
Sem. papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Contusis simul, & per setaceum trajectis, adde 
Ol. nuc. mossch. expr. gtt. vj. 
F. eclegma. 
S. Ut supra. 
Of PILLS
§.160. A Pill (the catapotium or Kαlαπoπov
of the Greeks) is a small, dry or solid, 
internal medicine; of a globular figure: made up 
of thick and cohesive substances, so as to be flex- 
ible, or give way to a small pressure. 
§.161. The MATTER or ingredients allowed 
to enter this form, is, every thing fit for internal 
use, which is capable of being brought, either of 
itself or by mixture, to the due consistence (§.160.) 
of a pill. So that in the general, we may admit 
all


107 Of Pills. 
all those substances into this form, which are enu- 
merated at §.110. 
§. 162. But a CHOICE of these several ingre- 
dients is necessary, in order to maintain the re- 
quisite cohesion, smallness of dose, and proper fi- 
gure of this kind of medicine: in order to which, 
1. Some ingredients are termed excipientiay 
others excipienda. (see §.86. 128.) Both which, 
tho’ they are the principal parts of the form, 
are yet frequently of such a texture, that they 
cannot be conveniently made into a mass of 
pills alone, without the addition of something 
accessory. 
2. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and co- 
hesive; as gums, resins, gum-resins, solid ex- 
trads, inspissated juices, officinal masses for 
pills, hard sopes, the stronger fort of troches, 
&c. or (2.) dry and brittle, or fit for pulveri- 
sation, whether they be animal, vegitable, or 
mineral substances. 
3. The first kind of these ingredients are the 
most suitable and frequent in use for this form. 
Such chiefly of the latter or brittle kind are ad- 
mitted into this form, as are very weighty in 
proportion to their bulk, or act strongly in a 
small dose: but light and dry powders, whose 
parts are gross, do not easily stick together, 
and act only in a large dose, are generally ex- 
cluded from the form of pills. 
4. But the officinal masses of pills, are, for 
the generality, better omitted in prescribing 
this form; except a few of the more neat and 
frequent in use: because they usually grow too 
dry, or are otherwise corrupted by long keep- 
ing. 
5. Salts also, which soon liquify or exhale 
in the air, are not so convenient for this form: 
they may however be permitted in a small quan- 
tity,

108 Of Pills. 
tity, when combined with other proper ingre- 
dients. 
6. But the most, powerful and acrid medi- 
cines of any kind, preparations of mercury, me- 
tals, and the like, are fitter to be exhibited in 
this form than any other. 
7. Ingredients also, which are the most of- 
sensive to the smell and taste, may be conveni- 
ently receiv’d into this form; because no other 
form of medicine can conceal them so well as 
Pills. 
8. The excipientia (n° 1.) are supplied from 
substanccs which are either (1.) thick: as honey, 
turpentine, extracts, electuaries but very seldom, 
to which we may add the crumb of new bread, 
and things of the like kind, or (2.) soft or less 
thick: as thin confections, syrups, liquid bal- 
soms, mucilages, the yolks of eggs, &c. or (3.) 
liquid: as essences, elixirs, tinctures, spirits, 
essential oils, &c. 
9.But it is not any of theforemention’d (n° 8.) 
excipients that will suit every kind of excipiend 
(n°.2.): for such as are dry and tenacious (n° 2. 
(1.).), especially refinous, should be mix’d with 
the more liquid excipients (n° 8. (3).) or else 
joined with the yolks of eggs, balsoms or tur- 
pentines. The dry and brittle substances (n° 2. 
(2.).) require to be mix’d with the thick and 
glutinous excipients (n° 8. (2.).) 
10. Sometimes all or some ot the excipienda 
(n° 1. 2.) are selected from some one class of the 
excipientia (n° 8.), being more or less tenaci- 
ous : in which case, the excipientia are to be sa- 
turated with dry and bibulous powders, as slow- 
er, powder of liquorish, and the like. 
11. The number of ingredients taken into 
this form, is much the same with that of the 
bolus (§.129. n° 9.), if the mass of pills or- 
der'd

109 Of Pills.
der’d is but small; but when the quantity pre- 
scribed for at once is large, the number of in- 
gredients may be the same with that of the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.163. The ORDER (§.57.) of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is 
hardly always the same; but the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 2. and 10.) ought to be generally placed first, 
and ranged according to the likeness or affinity 
and quantity of each (per §.57. n° 2. 3.): 
afterwards may be subjoined the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 8. 10.), the last of which should be such as are 
prescribed in no determinate quantity (per §.57. 
n° 5.). When the several constituent parts of a 
form (§.74.) enter the composition of pills, we 
should then place them by the rule (at §.57. n° 4.): 
which, frequently takes place in purging pills. 
§.164. The quantity of each pill is at present 
much less than formerly; but it is not constant- 
ly and universally the same: for different patients, 
physicians and nations, use pills of different sizes 
and weights. It is generally reputed a large Pill 
(among the Dutch) that weighs viij or x grains; 
which is however the quantity generally used among 
us and the French, who even permit our pills to 
be sometimes larger than that. Pills are deemed 
to be midling, when they are between two and 
five grains, which is almost the received standard 
for pills in Holland. The Germans love the least
pills, of a grain weight, which will frequently 
seem a large pill to many of them, unless it be 
subdivided into ij, iij, or iv lesser pills. But with 
regard to the mass of a pill in general, the young 
prescriber should observe, that 
1. Pills of the same moles or weight may be 
some very large, others very small, in propor- 
tion to the different specific gravities of the in-  
gredients

110 Of Pills.
gredients which compose them: so that a regard 
ought always to be had to the specific gravity of 
each ingredient, in limitting the mass of a pill. 
2. Smallness in a pill facilitates its dissolution 
in the stomach, and of consequence makes it act 
the more readily; because small pills have a 
greater surface in proportion to their contents, 
than large ones. 
3. But then on the contrary, large pills are 
for the same reason fitter for keeping; because 
they do not so soon grow dry, hard, add lose 
their virtue by exhalation. 
4. The physician will therefore accommo- 
date the size or weight of the pills to his parti- 
cular intention, the nature of their ingredients, 
their general quantity, or the mass which he 
prescribes, the quantity proper for a dose, &c.
together with the circumstances of the patient 
and place (per §.30. 43.): from weighing and 
comparing which, he will readily find out the 
rule which is to direct him in this point. 
§.165. For the DOSE of this form, the less the 
better, and more agreeable if it be but of sufficient 
strength; so that we can hardly commit an error 
in making the dose of a pill or pills too small. A 
moderate and commodious dose is between ℈j. 
and ʒß. It seldom amounts to ℈ij. or ʒj. unless 
in very urgent cases, when the ingredients are of 
a great specific gravity, or when the patient takes 
this form very easily. As for what further relates 
to the dose of this form, we may observe, that, 
1. Alteratives, which are of a slow opera- 
tion, difficult to dissolve in the primæ viæ, and 
are intended to be gradually insinuated into the 
mass of blood; such should be rather given in a 
small dose, and be frequently repeated, than to 
be crouded upon the patient all at once. 
2.

111 Of Pills. 
2. Salivating mercurials, drastic purgatives, 
and such like strong medicines, are, for the 
generality, more safely administer’d by dividing 
their proper dose into several smaller portions 
or pills; if so be the indication does not re- 
quire it to be otherwise, nor the nature of the 
disease or any thing else forbid it. See §.21. 
§.66. n° 13. §.67. n° 5. 
3. When the patient is to be purged without 
violence, or we would work upon the whole 
habit, it is usual to give one third or fourth 
part of the dose over night, and the rest the 
next morning. 
4. The number of pills for a dose may be de- 
termined by dividing the known quantity of 
the dose explained in this section, by the de- 
sired weight of each pill (per §.164.) 
5. There are some patients, from a supersti- 
tious notion which was introduced too by the 
physicians, who entertain an ill opinion of an 
even number of pills for a dose, especially when 
they are to purge. Such we may gratify by 
making the size of them a little less, and adding 
one more to their number. 
§.166. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is very vague and undetermined, being not assign- 
able but from the patient’s particular case com- 
pared with the weight and number of doses 
(§.165.): which latter, depend upon the physi- 
cians indications being rightly deduced, and com- 
pared with the several circumstances of the pa- 
tient, together with knowing and considering the 
disposition of each separate ingredient. Peruse 
what has been said at §.67. and 92. Evacuants 
are frequently prescribed for by only one, two, or 
three doses at a time: but alteratives are some- 
times order’d to as many ounces. In the mean 
time

112 Of Pills.
time the prescriber should be mindful of the rule 
at §.114. n° 2. Also what is there said at n° 3. 
is sometimes of consequence, with regard to the 
general quantity of this form. 
§.167. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral Ingredients of this form, may be determined 
without much difficulty, from the following con- 
siderations. 
1. The excipienda (§.162. n° 2. 10.) ma- 
king the main part of the mass, should be or- 
der’d in as many adiquate doses, suitable to the 
indication, (per §.66, 67. 87, to 91. 165, 
166.), as if they were to be exhibited separately. 
2. If these (n° 1.) are solid and tenacious 
(per §.162. n° 2. (1.)), there should be but 
little of the excipient (§.162. n° 8.) order’d; 
writing for it only by q. s. and sometimes it 
should be even wholly omitted in a prescrip- 
tion; the choice and quantity thereof, if any be 
required, being referred to the discretion of 
the apothecary. 
3. But if the excipienda be dry and brittle 
(per §.162. n° 2. (2.)), the quantity of the 
tenacious excipient must be various, according 
to the particular degree of its own consistence 
(§.162. n° 8.). The quantity thereof in gene- 
ral, should be the larger as it is thicker or 
more consistent. Whence, the particular quan- 
tity requisite, will be 
Supposing the dry excipienda as - ℥j. 
Of the exci-
pient that is 
of the thickest kind 
(§.162. n° 8.(1.)) 
ʒv to vj. 
softer or less thick 
(ib. (2.))  
ʒiij to iv.
liquid or thinest
(ib. (1.)) 
ʒij to iij.
such will be the quantities required to form a 
mass of a due consistence (§.160.) for pills. 
But

113 Of Pills. 
But sometimes in this case, as in the former 
(n° 2.), the quantity is left to be determined 
by the apothecary. 
4. From the foregoing, we may easily deter- 
mine the necessary proportion to be observed, 
when several excipients of different consistences, 
or excipiends of both classes (§.162. n° 2. (1.) 
(2.)), are order’d together, in the composition 
of pills. 
5. Such excipienda (§.162. n° 10.) as are 
less consistent than pills, are to be made up with 
a q. s. of some proper powder: tho' the requisite 
proportion of these too, may be understood 
from the rule at n° 3. 
6. If, in assigning the quantity of soft but ne- 
cessary excipients, you are doubtful, and afraid 
of ordering too much or too little, take a quan- 
tity so small, that you may be sure it is not suf- 
ficient, and subjoin q. s. of some other excipient, 
as Syr. &c. 
7. Hence appears, how necessary is the rule 
at §.35. A knowledge of the specific gravity 
of each ingredient is also here very serviceable; 
since that alone may make a great variation in 
the proportions necessary for a due consisence. 
8. What we have further to advise the young 
prescriber in relation to the proportion of 
parts in this form, is, that he be mindful of 
what we said before at §.86. and 88. n° 3. 
that if the excipientia possess the property of 
increasing or diminishing the action of the dry 
excipienda, that such alteration may be com- 
puted and allowed for in determining the dose, 
and the quantity of excipienda be proportion’d 
accordingly. See n° 1. of this section. 
§.168. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. pilulœ.
I Always  

114 Of Pills. 
Always subjoining afterwards the number of pills 
that is to be formed out of the whole mass: as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or, if the mass is large, by di- 
recting how many pills are to be formed out of a 
certain weight thereof: as ex scrupulo n° v, vij, &c. 
or lastly, by adding the exacs weight of each pill: 
as singulœ gr. ij, iij, iv, &c. Sometimes we direct 
them to be cover’d, by rolling them in some fine 
powder: as obruantur pulvere glycyrrhizœ, cinna- 
mom. &c. in which they are order’d to be rolled 
to prevent their sticking together. If we would 
have them gilded, We add deaurentur, or auri vel 
argenti foliis obducantur: which is the more al- 
lowable, as it makes them agreeable to the eye, 
confines their smell and taste, which are often ex- 
tremely unpleasant, keeps them from sticking to 
each other, from spreading flat, from growing 
too hard, dry, or crumbling into powder; but 
long keeping may deface their fine covering. The 
usual receptacle for this form is a scatula or box, 
seldom paper. 
§.169. The SIGNATURE, or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains first, the title,
compos’d of the name and virtue (per §.60. 
n° 3.); then the dose (§.165.), determining 
the number of pills to be taken at a time (ib. 
n° 4, 5.); unless when they are all to be taken 
for one dose. The time of taking them and the re- 
gimen to be used under their operation, are to be de- 
duced from the physicians indication: but here we 
must be careful, in strong doses which are divided 
into smaller portions {per §.165. n° 2.), that one 
part be not taken before the other begins to ope- 
rate and shew its effects; because, as pills are but 
slowly dissolved in the stomach, they may lie a good 
while before they begin to operate. As to a vehi- 
cle for this form, many use none at all; some use 
a thick or solid vehicle, as a waser, a fig, or rasin,
mar-


115 Of Pills.
marmalad, &c. others use liquid vehicles, which 
are generally best cold; because when they are 
hot, they in a great measure dissolve the pill, make 
it stick to the mouth, and give a greater offence 
to the taste. It is also, sometimes, necessary to 
drink some liquor after taking this form, in order 
to wash off what may have adhered to the mem- 
branes in its passage, to take off the disagreeable 
taste it may have left behind, and to facilitate its 
dissolution, and promote its action in the stomach. 
See §.60. n° 11. §.123. n° 2, 3. and §.135. 
§.170. The USE of this form is almost univer- 
sal, being equally extensive with that of the pow- 
der (§.125.): it is fitted as well for most evacuants 
as alteratives; but it is more especially useful and 
convenient in chronical cases. Pills are, however, 
sometimes given in acute cases, tho’ but seldom, and 
with the intention of narcotics, emetics *, and the 
like. One advantage which the form of pills possesses 
beyond any other, is, that it will commodiously 
take in and conceal ingredients which in other 
forms must be extremely nauseous and offensive. 
Yet, there are some particular patients to whom 
pills are less agreeable than other forms: and such 
we may gratify by changing it (per §.43.). Pills 
are also not very convenient for infants or young 
children, because they will chew them, and can- 
not get them down so easily as a liquid. They are 
also less suitable for dry habits of body (per §.47.); 
I2 but 
* Emetics are never order'd in pills among us, for the same rea- 
son that they are hardly ever given in form of a bolus: viz. left 
the cohesion of parts- in the form should be such, as to let them slip 
thro' the stomach (without exerting their energy there) into the in- 
testines, where they would become severe cathartics; whereas, in 
this intention, there is required the largest and speediest contact of 
surface between the parts of the medicine and the coats of the stomach. 
But our author, agreeable with foreign practice, begins his speci- 
mens of this form with emetic pills ex tart. emetic. gr. v. & micæ 
panis q. s. ut F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 

116 Pills. 
but that fault may be corrected by drinking some 
proper liquor, either before or after them. A diffi- 
culty, or incapacity, for swallowing in the patient, 
is a greater obstacle against ordering this form 
than that of a powder (§.125.). And lastly, the 
slow dissolution and operation of this form, being 
sometimes not speedy  enough for the intention, 
may also forbid its use. 
§.171. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Pil. cathartiæ communes. 
(1.) ♃. Pil coch. min. ℈j. 
Calomelan. ℈ß. 
Resin. jalap. gr. vj. 
Ol. junip. gtt. iij.
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 
S. Pil. &c. primo mane, in quovis vehiculo, cum re- 
gimine sumend. 
(2.)  
♃. Extract. rud. 
Pil. ex duob. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. chem. gtt. j. 
Elix. propriet. tartariz. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Summo mane cum regimine sumend. 
(3.)—ecphradicæ. 
♃. Pil. fœtid. gr. xv. 
Resin. jalap. 
Sal. succin. aa gr. v. 
Ol. succin. gtt. ij. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Pit. &c. quarum ij capiat hord somni, & tres 
summo mane, cum regimine.
2. 

117 Pills. 
2. Pil. alterantes. 
♃. Pil. ruffi ℈j. 
Ext. thebaic, gr. j. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° iij. 
S. Pil. &c. H. S. in quovis vehiculo sumendœ. 
3. Pilulæ resolventes, stimulantes, in morbis a 
glutinoso spontaneo. 
ꝶ Sapon. alcalici vel starkeani ʒjß
Extract. centaur. min.
Gumm. galban. aa ʒj. 
Sagapen.  ℈ij. 
Ol. stillat. absinth. gtt. xij. 
Cort. winteran. subtil. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ ex  ℈j. n° x. deaurandæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger ij. ter vel quater de 
die ex vino. 
4. Pilul. astringentes in fibra laxa, secund. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 8. 
ꝶ Extrad. tormentill. ʒj. 
Bistortœ. 
Pulv. cort. granator. aa ʒß. 
Lap. hœmatit. ppt. ℈j. 
Syr. myrtin. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ singulæ gr. ij. 
S. Pilulœ roborantes. Capiat œger umam ter, vel 
quater de die, ex ℥j. infusi, decocti, vel vini me- 
dicati, ib. p. 5 ad 7. descriptorum. 
I3 5.

118 Pills. 
5. Pilulæ martiales nigræ. 
♃. Mart. c. sulph. ppt. ʒjß. 
Sal. mart. 
Ter. japon. aa ℈ij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Extract. theœ virid. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ mediocres, obruantur pul-
vere sub. cort. cinnam. 
S. Nomine precedentium. Capiat unam ter die in 
quovis vehiculo, hora ante cibum. 
6. Pilulæ hypochondriacæ 
♃. Gumm. ammon. 
Asœ fœtid. 
Myrrh. pulv. 
Aloe socotrin. 
Rubig. mart. 
Extract. gent. aa ℈j. 
Syr. de 5. rad. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies cum haustul. 
vini amari. 
7. Pilulæ uterinæ. 
♃. Pil. gummos. ʒj. 
Fol. sabin. crisp. pulv. ℈ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. jv. 
Bals. sulph. terebinth. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pilulœ aperientes. Capiat n° iij. dosi, pro re 
nata repetend.
8. 

119 Pills.
8. Pilulæ emmenagogæ
♃. Cort. peruv. subt. pulv. ʒij. 
Rubig. mart. ʒj. 
Extract. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies c. haustu infusi 
amari. 
9. Pilulæ asthmaticæ. 
4. Pulp. scillœ siccat. 
Gumm. ammon. aa  ʒß. 
Flor. benz. ℈j. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres his in dies quovis vehiculo. 
10. Pilulæ terebinthinatæ. 
♃. Tereb. venet. 
E. chio coct. aa ʒj. 
Sacchar. alb. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies, superbibendo vi- 
tel. ov. rec. in haustul. vin. alb. dulcificati. 
11 Pilulæ febrifugæ.
♃. Ext. cort. peruv. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth.  ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. iv. 
Pulv. cort. elect. subt. q. s.  
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat unam omni hora, superbilendo 
haustum [℥iv.] theœ ex flor. chamom. factœ. 
I4 12.

120 Pills. 
12. Pilulæ ad strumas. 
♃. Hydrarg. in tereb. v. q. f. solut. 
Gumm. guaiac. aa ʒjß. 
Ol. sassafr. chem. gtt. xx. 
Ext. R. sarsaparill. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlvilj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies cum haustu ℥iv. 
aq. bened. Bat. C. 
13. Pilulæ nigræ. 
♃. Antimon. crud. levigat. 
Hydrarg. 
Pil. Ruffi aa ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Sumat quater omni nocte cum haust. aq. 
(ad n° xij.) precedent. 
14. Pilulæ ictericæ. 
♃. Sapon. e joppá ʒij. 
Pulv. rhei ℈ij. 
Ext. croc, anglic. ℈j. 
R. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. ex ʒß. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat quinque bis in dies cum haustu 
infusi amari. 
15. Pilula antisyphilica. 
♃. Merc. precipit. per se. 
Extract. thebaic. aa gr. j. 
Balsam. peruv. guttulam. 
M. F. pilula deauranda. 
S. Pil. ad sanguinem abstergendum, omni nocte sumenda. 
16.

121 Pills.
16. Pilulæ ceruleæ. 
♃. Scammon. ʒj. 
Gumm. guaiac. ℈ij. 
Camphor. ℈j. 
Hydrarg. ʒij. 
Ol. terebinth. gtt. vj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlviij. pulvere liquoritæ 
obruendæ. 
S. Titulo precedentis pilulœ. Capiat quater omni nocte. 
17. Pilulæ camphoratæ. 
♃. Gumm. guaiac. ʒij. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Bals. peruv. 
Ol. sassafr. aa gtt. xij. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xlviij. deaurantur. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij pro dosi. 
18. Pilulæ balsamicæ. 
(1.) ♃. Gumm. tragac. 
Tereb. e chio aa ℈ iv. 
Camphor. ℈ j. 
Bals. copaih. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. obruantur pulvere 
sang. dracon. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres mane & vesperi.
(2.)

122 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.)—in gonorrhea venerea.
Boerh. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. vulg. ℥j. 
Rei-barh. ℥ß. 
Glycyrrbiz. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ, singulæ gr. iv. 
S. Capiat unam omni hord. 
19. Pilulæ narcoticæ. 
(l.) ꝶ. Opii purissimi gr. ij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Detur una pro dosi, repetendo post horam, si prior 
nihil efficit, sic & tertio. 
(2.)—
♃. Pil. Matthœi gr. xij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Ut prior. 
Of TROCHES, or LOZENGES. 
§.l72. A Troche, (sometimes call’d up a pastill, 
or a Lozenge) is a pill (§.160.), tho' 
not of a globular figure, nor to be swallowed 
whole; but is to pass down the œsophagus slowly, 
after a gradual dissolution in the mouth, like a 
linctus (§.149.): hence, we might venture to term 
it eclegma solidum, a solid linctus. 
§.173. But it is here very proper to distinguish 
troches which are officinal from those which are ex- 
temporaneous (per §.6.); for tho' they both agree 
as

123 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
as to their form, they have frequently very diffe- 
rent uses or intentions: since the composition of 
the officinal troche is calculated chiefly for the pre- 
servation of certain species or ingredients, which 
are often, by that means, the better fitted to enter 
many other forms; but the extemporaneous regards 
more the case and circumstances of some particular 
patient. 
§.174. The MATTER, or ingredients of this 
form, are in general of two kinds: excipienda, 
things to be taken in by others; or excipientia (per 
§.128. n° 1, 2.) which are to take in, and make 
up the former.  
1. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and 
brittle; or (2.) dry and cohesive, or tenacious 
(vide §.162. n° 2.): or (3.) soft; as pulps, 
electuaries, &c. or (4.) liquid; which are either 
of the weaker and more dissused kind; as de- 
ceptions, infusions, &c. or else more contracted 
and strong; as effential oils, &c. 
2. The ingredients which serve for excipientia, 
are either (1.) liquid, with but little tenacity; 
as wines, distilled waters, spirits, vegetable jui- 
ces, decoctions, infusions, &c. or (2.) viscid: 
as the whites of eggs, mucilages, syrups, bal- 
soms, honey, pulps, &c. or (3.) dry and glu- 
tinous; as gums, extracts, inspissated juices, &c. 
or (4.) dry and not oily; as the meal of vetches, 
lupines, &c.
§.175. But a Choice of these ingredients is 
necessary for an accurate composition of this form; 
since the consistence, proper to each of the fore- 
going kinds, does not fit them promiscuously for 
an uniform mixture with each other. But, 
1. The dry excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) 
generally require to be joined with the viscid ex- 
cipientia ib. n° 2. (2.)).
2. 

124 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
2. The excipienda which, are dry and tena- 
cious (ib. n° 1. (2.)) may be well enough com- 
bin’d with the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. 
(1.)) when they are properly chose. 
3. The soft excipienda (n° 1. (3.)) are to be 
made of a due consistence for this form, by the 
mealy excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
4. The liquid excipienda (n° 1. (4.)) agree 
best with the dry and glutinous excipients (n° 
2. (3.)).
5. Thence, we may easily determine whether 
any, and what kind of excipients, are required 
when excipienda of different consistences enter 
together in composition. In which Case there 
is sometimes none at all required. 
6. Substances which are unpleasant to the 
smell and taste, shou’d be avoided in this form, 
or at least be added in a very small quantity, for 
reasons at §.151. n° 4. & §.172. 
7. Medicines of the more potent and pun- 
gent kind, shou’d also be here avoided; since 
their use and our intention do not call for them 
in this form. 
8. Salts, (for the same reason, and from their 
aptness to melt, with their unpleasant taste) are 
therefore scarce ever permitted to enter this 
form.
9. Sugar, on the contrary, is of very fre- 
quent use in this form; as it reconciles the taste 
of the medicine to the tongue, facilitates the 
dissolution thereof in the mouth, and increases 
their bulk or mass to a proper size. Which last 
intention, is also frequently answer’d with 
starch. 
10. Ingredients which are glutinous, or very 
tenacious, shou’d not enter this form (at least in 
any great quantity) when it is designed for in- 
fants;

125 Of Troches or Lozenges.
fants; for as they chew ’em, such things prove 
very troublesome, by glewing their teeth toge- 
ther. 
11. For the number of ingredients, this form 
will hardly admit of more than the electuary 
(§.140. n° 6.). 
12. If there be any officinal Troches fit to 
answer our intention, we shou’d rather order 
those than prescribe new (per §.29. 37.). 
§.176. The ORDER of placing the several in- 
gredientsof this form in a prescription,is the same 
with that observed in pills (§. 163). 
§.177. The QUANTITY of a Troche was for- 
merly extended from ʒj to ʒiij, but at present they 
are much less, being usually-limited between 
gr. vi. and ℈ß. which last quantity is seldom ex- 
ceeded; they are even sometimes but of ij or iij gr. 
weight, especiaily when designed to sweeten the 
breath. But they are oftner not determined by 
weight, but by magnitude; as the size of peas, 
lupines, &c. nor is there any danger in this di- 
sion of extemporaneous troches (per §.175. n° 7.) 
§.178. The FIGURE usually given to troches, 
is either flat and circular like a cake, tringular, 
cubical, rhomboidal, or cylindrical, &c. the choice 
of which, with the seal to imprint ’em with, may 
be well enough left to the discretion of the apo- 
thecary. 
§. 179. The DOSE of this form is usually de- 
termined by number, according to the greater or 
less size or weight of the troches (§. 177.), and 
particular nature of the ingredients. N° i, ij, iij, 
&c. are order’d to lie dissolving in the mouth; but 
when drastic or very potent medicines (such as 
opium, &c.) enter the compostion of troches, 
which is very seldom the case (per §.175. n° 7.), 
the number of troches for a dose to be ex- 
actly

126 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
actly limited from the known particular weight of 
each, and from the known proportion such strong 
ingredients bare to the whole. 
§.180. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, sent to the patient at one time, is seldom 
less than ℥j, or ℥jß; because a less quantity can- 
not be conveniently made up by the apothecary. 
But if officinal troches (§.175. n° 12.) are ordered 
alone in a prescription, there is then no reason to 
be confin'd to this quantity; but so much at least
ought to be prescribed at once, as may be judged 
sufficient to answer the intention (per §.67, 68.). 
§.181. For the PROPORTION of the excipi- 
entia to the excipienda (§.174.), as it varies with 
the different consistences of each, so it is scarce 
possible it shou'd be determin'd in all Cases with 
exactness. And, as ingredients of the stronger 
kind are seldom permitted to enter the composi- 
tion of this form (per §.175. n° 7.), the propor- 
tion may be therefore safely referred to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary (per §.58. n° 8. (7.)). But 
in general, to take notice of the following conside- 
rations may be of some use. 
1. The greater or less specific gravity of the 
dry and bibulous excipienda (§.174. n° 1. 
(1.)), makes (more or less) a considerable alter- 
ation in the necessary quantity of the excipienda. 
2. There is requir'd a less quantity of the 
excipienda to make up a certain quantity of ex- 
cipienda, as this lad is thicker, or more tena- 
cious. 
3. Hence, to iij parts of the dry powder'd 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) which are of a 
mean specific gravity, there is required almost 
ij parts of the most liquid excipienda (n°. 2. (i.)):
but of the viscid excipienria (n° 2. (2.)), there 
will be required from iv. to vj. parts, according 
as it is more or less consistent. 
To

127 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
To make up iij parts of the like dry excipi- 
enda, which are lightest, or of the least specific 
gravity, is required, of the most liquid excipi- 
entia (n° 2. (1.)) iv parts, of the viscid exci- 
pientia (n° 2. (2.)) from vj to ix parts. 
To make iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into troches, 
j part of the most liquid excipienda (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into this form, 
j part of the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the soft excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (3.)), there is need of ij parts 
of the dry excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
To iij parts of the diffused liquid excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (4.)). shou’d be added ix parts of 
the dry excipientia (n° 2. (3.)). 
4. The quantity of sugar to be added, is fre- 
quently the weight of the whole; but sometimes 
double, tripple, quadruple, and beyond, that 
quantity: according as it is required by the cir- 
cumstances at §.175. n° 9. The same holds 
good also, with regard to the use of starch in 
the composition of this form. 
§.182. The SUBSCRIPTION, or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. l. a. Tro- 
chisci, adding afterwards their size or weight (per 
§.177.), v. g. Parvi, or Pisi, Lupini, magnitudine: 
or gr. ij, vj. ℈ß. But there is no occasion for any 
such direction when the troches prescribed are offi- 
cinal (per §.175. n° 12.). Boxes, papers, &c. are 
the usual receptacles for this form. When very 
strong medicines enter the composition of this 
form (per §.179.) the quantity of excipients being
at

128 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
at the same time undetermined; it is then prudeht 
to determine the quantity of each troche, not by 
size or weight, but by directing the number to be 
formed out of the whole mass, as in pills (§.168.). 
By this means We shall be the better assured of the 
certain quantity of the drastic medicine, which 
is contained and given in each troche. 
§.183. The SIGNATURE, or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on this head, at §.60. 
and 157. compared with §.172. 179. 
§.184. The USE of this form is at present but 
seldom in practice, add even then it is only ap- 
plied, 
1. In disorders of the mouth and sauces, pha- 
rynx, larynx, aspera artera, &c. like a linctus, 
§.158. 
2. To sweeten or perfume a stinking breath: 
or, 
3. As a preventive against the action of 
contagious efluvia, upon the membranes of the 
mouth, nose and lungs. 
§.185. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Trochisci ad ptyalismum, ab apthis delapsis. 
ꝶ. Ter japon. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. 
Extract. agrimon. aa ʒj. 
Mucilag. sem. cydonior. 
Cum aq. rosar. extract. q. s. 
M. F. l. a. trochisci pisi magnitudine. 
S. Trochisci rohorantes quorum unum assiduò ore volu- 
tet œger ac lente deglutiat. 
2.

129 Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.) Trochisci opiati in pulmone suppurato, rupto. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ. Succ. liquorit. 
Flor. sulphur. aa ʒij. 
Olihan. ℈ij. 
Opii puri ℈j. 
Bals. copayb. q. s. 
Ut exacte mistis F. trochisci n° xl. 
S. Trochisci pacantes, quorum duos sumat qualibet 
vespera ante somnum. 
3. Trochisci nervini. 
♃. Sp. lavend. comp. gtt. lx. 
Ol. essent. rorismar. 
Cinnam. aa gtt. iv. 
Farin. R. ir. florent. ʒij.
Sacchart albi ℥j 
Mucilag. gummi tragac. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß.
S. Trochisci cephalici, paralytici, &c. unum vel plures 
ore volutet œger, pro re nata. 
4. Trochisci sialagogi.
♃. Rad. pyreth. pulv. ℥ß 
Mastiches  ʒij. 
Ol. caryophyllor. 
Macis. 
Sal. succin. aa ʒj. 
Cerœ flav. recent. odorat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci magni. 
S. Troch. &c. quorum unum vel duo ore volutet ad 
libitum.
K 5.

130 Troches or Lozenges. 
5. Trochisci swaveolentes ad fœtorem spiritus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Resin. cort. thymiam Hoffm. ℈j.
Amhar. grys. gr. xv. 
Moschi gr. vij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Sacchari albissimi ℥j. 
Mucilag. gumm. arab. in aq.
Cinnam. fact. q. s. ut. 
F. l. a. trochisci minimi. 
S. Unum vel alterum pro necessitate ore volutet. 
(2.) Alii- 
♃. Ol. thym. limon. gtt. xx. 
Cort. citror. gtt. vij. 
Moschi 
Ambrœ grissiœ aa gr. j. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Sacchari albissmi ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in spt. rosar. damascenar.
Solut. q. s. ut 
F. trochisci minimi. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. Trochisci sublinguales ad prophylaxin a contagio. 
ꝶ. Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Myrrh. elect. ʒj. 
Ol. still. cort. citri gtt. xij. 
Succin. citri recent. ℥ß. 
Pulv. cort. aurant. q. s. 
Ut F. l. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Mane exiturus capiat unum, alerum sub lingua 
detineat. 
7.

131 Of Tablets.
7. Trochisci bechici. 
♃. Succ. hispan. ʒjß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj. 
Flor. benz. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi gtt. xxij. 
Hysop. gtt. iv. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in syr. bals. solut. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Trochisci, &c. quorum unum ore volutet urgente 
tussi. 
Of TABLETS. 
§.186. A Tablet (sometimes termed morsu- 
lus, and from its consistence, electu- 
arium solidum, vid. §.190.) is a dry, internal me- 
dicine, formed into various figures, and made 
up of various ingredients; which are dissolved 
and boiled up with a large proportion of sugar, 
till the whole acquires a solid and brittle con- 
sistence *. Whence appears the difference of this 
form from that of the troche, §.172 †. 
§.187. The MATTER or ingredients of this 
form, are either (1.) excipienda, by which we here 
Understand all ingredients concerned or taken into 
the form as a medicine; or (2.) excipiens, what is 
employ’d in making up and rendering the form a- 
greeable. 
K2 The
* Like the barley-sugar of our confectioners, which may be 
looked upon as (tabella simplex, or) the basis of this form. 
† The difference of the tablet from the troche seems to consist in 
its brittle texture, great quantity of sugar, large dose and way of 
taking: all which are proper to a tablet, but not to a troche. But 
as this form has been long out of date, being never used among us, 
nor hardly ever in other nations we need not be very sollicitous 
about its difference. 


132 Of Tablets.
The excipienda comprehend almost every 
thing that is admitted into the electuary, whe- 
ther excipientia or excipienda (per §.139. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3.). From whence we may perceive 
the reason of the form's having been antiently 
call'd electuarium solidum. 
The excipiens is always dry or loaf sugar, 
dissolved in some proper liquor, which is gene- 
rally aqueous, and afterwards boiled to a due 
consistence. 
§.188. But a CHOICE of the ingredients is re- 
quired upon several accounts; as, 
1. It its required that this form be brittle as 
well as solid, that it be so consistent as not to 
run or flow, being also easily dissolvable in the 
mouth, and not unpleasant to the taste. 
2. Hence, gums, extracts, inspissated juices, 
things gross and oily, or the like, which intro- 
duce tenacity in the compound, should enter 
the composition of this form in the least quan- 
tity. 
3. For the same reason, the sugar made use 
of, should not be fat or repleat with its melosus; 
but if simple, it should be the whitest and dry- 
est, or else it may be saccharum rosatum. 
4. There is therefore no room in this form 
for ingredients which are very offenve to the 
smell and taste; because the use thereof requires 
it to undergo mastication and a dissolution in 
the mouth. 
5. This form will in like manner also, scarce- 
ly admit of any salts to enter its composition, 
especially those which are apt to liquify or ex- 
hale in the air. 
6. The grosser powders (species or trageæ) 
may indeed be admitted into this form, when 
they are a little soft at the same time. But for 
the

133 Of Tablets.
the harder powders, unless they are very finely 
levigated, they will prove gritty and trouble- 
some between the teeth. 
7. Acids from fossils should be also omitted, 
as they hinder the coagulation of the sugar. 
8. So also, oily things are, for the same rea- 
son and their unpleasantness, excluded from this 
form. 
9. Kernels, which are repleat with an oil that 
soon turns rancid, the fleshy parts of animals, 
and the like, are improperly order’d in this 
form, when it is to last any length of time in 
taking. 
10. Astringent and incrassating substances 
should also be expunged from this form; be- 
cause they lose their virtues by being buried in 
so large a quantity of sugar. 
11. The solid consistence of tablets will well 
enough admit of medicines which are the most 
potent, and possess the greatest specific gravity; 
if so be they undergo an equable mixture in the 
composition. 
12. Sweet smells are given to tablets by in- 
termixing a small quantity of ambergrease, musk, 
or civet; or when the mass is congealed, it may 
be wash'd over with some fragrant liquor, essen- 
tial oil, &c. and for the fake of colour, it may 
be gilded with leaf gold or silver, or tinged by 
sprinkling in flowers of various colours cut 
small, a little before the mass is grown cold;
but those who approve of these ornaments should 
be mindful of the caution at §. 85. 
13. The composition of tablets will not well 
take in a greater number of ingredients than the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.189. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients of this form, is the same with that to be 
K3 ob-

134 Of Tablets. 
observed in troches (§.176.) and pills (§.163.); 
tho' that method does frequently not agree with 
the just order of preparation and compostion. 
§.190. The FIGURE given to this mass is va- 
rious, which as it neither adds to nor diminishes 
from the virtue of the medicine, that part may 
be well enough left to be determined by the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. When it is poured into 
a box, before it is quire cold, so as to receive the 
figure thereof, it then takes the name of panda- 
leon: and when it is poured out and spread flat 
upon a plain, they afterwards cut and frame it in- 
to little, masses of a square figure, cubical like dice, 
rhomboidal or diamond-fashion, &c. which they 
accordingly term tablets, morsules, or tessellœ, lo- 
zenges, &c. tho’ it would have been much better 
to have always distinguished them by the single 
name of tablets, rejecting the rest. 
§.191. The QUANTITY or size of a tablet is 
very seldom determined either by weight or mea- 
sure; nor is it fo strictly limited but it may be 
extended from ʒj. to ℥ß. and beyond. 
§.192. The DOSE of this form is usually or- 
der’d by number, as ß, j, ij, iij, &c. according as 
they are bigger or less: or if the mass is all in one 
Jump, it may be order’d to be taken a bit at a 
time: or if it contains ingredients of any strength, 
the bits may be proportioned cut by weight: and 
in that case die dose will be more or less, accord- 
ing to the strength and proportion of the ingre- 
dients. But the dose hardly ever exceeds an ounce, 
in any case. 
§.193. For the GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time; if it 
be less than ℥iv. it cannot be conveniently made 
up by the apothecary. But if you order an offici- 
nal composition of this kind, just so much may be 
wrote

135 Of Tablets. 
wrote for as will suffice for the intention; tho' that 
should not be less than ℥ß. 
§.194. With regard to the PROPORTION of in- 
gredients for this form, that of the exciprenda is de- 
termined from a previous knowledge of the parti- 
cular nature of each, with their consistence and 
relation to one another, compared with the inten- 
tion, and the cautions given at §.188. (Vid. §.66, 
67. 115. n° 1. 6.) But the proportion of the ex- 
cipiens depends much on the former, and may be 
determined from the following considerations. 
1. In general, four or six times as much sugar 
may be conveniently taken, as the quantity of 
excipienda. But there are some who are pleased 
to order eight times as much sugar, or more; 
but with no great judgment: because the virtue 
of the ingredients is often by that means so much 
diffused, and often diminished or obtunded by 
so much sugar; from whence, the effectual dose 
must be also increased without necessity. 
2. In the mean time we must have a regard to 
the specific gravity and consistence of the ingre- 
dients. Those of the lightest kind will take up 
the most sugar, as they are very bulkey. Sub- 
stances which are dry, hard and porous, will 
grow almost stony with but a small portion of 
sugar. V. §.188. n° 1. 
3. If the excipienda or ingredients themselves 
contain any sugar, the quantity of excipiens or 
sugar should be proportionably less: which holds 
good with regard to conserves, candies, confec- 
tions, &c. 
4. But the quantity of sugar is often left to be 
determined at the pleasure of the apothecary 
(per §.58. n° 8. (7.) ), which is a liberty not 
to be comply’d with, when the dose is required 
to be adjusted by weight (per §.192.); because 
that unlimited quantity may differ very widely  
K4 in

130 Of Tablets.
in different shops, and many may be at a loss 
for the proper quantity to be used. 
§.195. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is usually wrote M. F. 
l. a. tabulœ, morsuli, electuarium solidum, panda- 
leon, &c. (§.190.), leaving what relates to the or- 
der and manner of making up the composition, to 
the judgment and dexterity of the apothecary. 
Afterwards, when it seems proper, may be sub- 
joined the liquid with which they are to be wash- 
ed, and whether the mass is to be ornamented with 
leaf gold, silver or flowers (per §.188. n° 12.) 
Sometimes the weight of each tablet (§.197.) is 
mentioned in a prescription, and a scatula or box 
order’d for the receptacle. But in prescribing for 
officinal tablets (§.193.), there is generally no oc- 
casion to mention any of these; unless you may 
think fit to add some external embellishment (per 
§.188. n° 12.) 
§.196. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on that head (at §.60. 
186. 190. 192.). A vehicle for this form is unnecessa- 
ry, upon account of the sugar. The time and me- 
thod of taking is deduced from the intention: for it 
is to be either chewed and directly swallowed, or else 
gradually dissolved by the saliva, and swallowed 
slowly. 
§.197. The USE of tablets is at present al- 
most universally laid aside. The pandaleon is quite 
obsolete. But the tablet may be sometimes order’d 
with the intention of a purgative, vermifuge, sto- 
machic, carminative, antacid, attenuant, aphrodi- 
siac, alexipharmic, pectoral, and to correct a soul 
breath. Some are better pleased with medicines in 
this form than another, and it may do well enough 
for a domestic remedy, arid to carry upon long 
journeys;

137 Tablets. 
neys; as it keeps found a long time, serves to dis- 
guise the medicine for the infant and nice patient, 
and is easy to make up: but it is not so convenient 
in many cases, when the patient is poor, or his 
blood in too thin a state; it is also culpable for the 
slowness of its action, and in hysterical cases, where 
sweet things are less agreeable. 
§.198 For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Tabulæ antihelminticæ verminum nidum de- 
struentes. 
ꝶ. Conserv. absinth. valg.
Semin. santonic. 
Tanacet. aa ʒij. 
Æthiop. mineral. ʒiij. 
Resin. jalap. ʒjß. 
Sacch. albiss. Infuso tanaceti solut. ℥v. 
M. F. l. a. tabellæ, singulæ ℥ß
S. Capiat umam mane & vesperi, vacuo ventriculo. 
2. Tabellæ purgantes. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. jalap. ʒiij. 
Scammon. opt.  ʒij. 
Antimon. diaphoret. ℥ß 
Flaved. cort. citri rec. ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. in aq. ros. solut. ℥viij. 
M. F. l. a. confectio pro tabellis. 
S. Dosis ʒiij ad v. adultis jʒß ad ʒj infantibus.
3.

138 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
3. Tabellæ antacidæ. 
ꝶ  Matr. perlar. ppt. 
Cret. albiss. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒiij. 
Cinnam. grossè triti ʒj.
Sacch. albis in aq. pur a solut. q. s. 
Ut. F. l. a. tabellæ. 
S. Tab. &c. quarum una vel altera pro necessitate 
capiatur.  
4. Tabellæ stomachicæ carminantes; in casu frigido, 
ꝶ. Cons. menth. ʒiij. 
Nuc. moschat. in Ind. cond. 
Cort. winteran. 
Aurantior. aa ʒij. 
Macis ʒj. 
M. F. cum sacch. alb. in aq. rosar. solut. 
q. s. tabellæ, ol. stillat. cort. citri ob- 
linendæ. D. in scatula. 
S. Sumatur una ante & post pastum. 
Of SUGAR-CAKES. 
§.199. A SUGAR-CAKE (termed rotula and or- 
biculus) is nothing more than the tablet 
(§.186.) made into a flat and round form, it be- 
ing (like that) received by and made up with 
sugar; but then its ingredients are usually ground 
finer, or render’d more soluble: So that there is 
but very little difference between this and the pre- 
ceeding form. However, as they are not abso- 
lutely the same, I thought it more advisable to be 
scrupulously exact in their division, than to load
the

139 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
the rules for these forms with too many exceptions 
by treating them as one. 
§.200. The MATTER or ingredients are in ge- 
neral the same as for the tablets (§.187.). Sugar 
is also in this form, always the excipient, or what 
serves to glew together and make up the other in- 
gredients. Whence, they confound sugar-cakes 
with troches or lozenges (§.172.) who give the 
name of sugar-cake to this form, when the ingre- 
dients are made up with a mucilage. 
§.201. The CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, is in some measure different from that in 
the troche. For, 
1. Besides the conditions at §.188. n° 1. su- 
gar-cakes are also most delectable when their so- 
lidity is joined with an imperfect pellucidity, or 
are semidiaphanous. Therefore, 
2. Such substances as cannot be sufficiently 
attenuated and equably diffused thro’ the substance 
of the sugar, such as conserves; candies, gross 
powders, with kernels of the nut or almond 
kind, which are apt to clog together and turn 
grumous, these are all less fit to enter the com- 
position of this form. 
3. Hence it is the more necessary for the su- 
gar to be as white and fine as possible (per- 
§.188. n° 3.): but the several other circum- 
stances (ib. n° 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 ) viz. 
gleweyness, unpleasantness, &c. ought to be 
more regarded. 
4. Sometimes, rejecting dry or thick sub- 
stances, the sugar is made into cakes with only 
the more pleasant liquid juices, especially acid, 
as juice of entrance, berberries, citrons, &c. 
which form a medicine exceeding pleasant for 
use. But those add no virtue, who endeavour to 
boil up sugar into cakes with distilled waters. 
5.

140 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
5. Others only drop aromatic or essential oils, 
and the more contracted essences upon sugar, 
and dissolving it in water, they afterwards boil 
it to a consistence for cakes: but by that me- 
thod, the medicine must suffer great loss in its 
virtues. 
6. We may therefore reasonably doubt whe- 
ther this form contains any thing more than su- 
gar, when it is made up by boiling eleosacchara 
to a consistence with water. 
7. Those also who inspissate mere syrups over 
the fire, in order to form sugar-cakes, can by 
no means expect to find the more volatile parts 
of a medicine in this form. So that 
8. When the intention requires this form to 
contain things of a volatile nature, the best way 
is to order the rotula to be washed over with 
some proper oil or essence, before it is to be 
taken by the patient: by which method, we 
need not fear such a loss, as when volatile sub- 
stances are mix’d with the mass while hot. 
9. For external ornaments to this form, there is 
here no need to say more than we have at §.188. 
n° 12. 
10. The number of ingredients for this form, 
should be less than in the table (§.188 n° 13.); 
coming nearest to that or the bolus (§.129. 
n° 9.). 
§.202. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form, in a prescription, is the same with 
that of the tablet §.189. 
§.202. The QUANTITY or weight of each 
rotula should be less than than that of the tablet 
(§.191.) being usually about ℈j. or ʒß. tho'
the quantity of this form, as well as the tablet, is 
seldom determined either by weight or measure.
§.204.

141 Of Sugar-Cakes.
§.204. The DOSE of this form, like that of the 
tablet (§.192.), is also determined by number, as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or else by weight, agreeable to the 
different strength and proportion of the ingredients. 
§.205. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time, is the 
same with that of the tablet (§.193.): But it is 
a form which cannot be very conveniently made 
extemporaneously, especially when its ingredients 
are the syrups and juices at §.201. n° 4. 7. 
§.206. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, may be pretty well 
understood from what has been said on this head at 
§.194.): for the proportion is the same as in tab- 
lets, except two or three particulars. As, 
1. We generally use a greater proportion of 
sugar for this form, with respect to the other 
ingredients (§.194. n° 1.); for reasons men- 
tioned at §.201. n° 1. 4. 5. 
2. Hence, to reduce the acid juices (§.201. 
n° 4.) to a consistence for cakes, will take up 
fix or eight times as much sugar: ʒj. or ʒjß of 
the essences (ib. n° 5.) require ʒij of sugar; 
and the like quantity of sugar is necessary to 
make up gutt. xx. of essential or aromatic oils. 
3. The dressing or washing this form (per 
§.201. n° 8.) with essences or essential oils of 
the like nature, is to be also done in the pre- 
ceeding proportion.  
§.207. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
Apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
tablet (§.195.). supposing a change of name. 
The due preparation is supposed to be previously 
known by the apothecary, who ought to manage 
it so, as to let the dissipation of volatile parts be 
as small as possible. The acid juices, essences, and 
aromatic oils (§.201. n° 4. 5.) are not to be 
mixed

142 Sugar-Cakes.
mixed with the sugar till it is boiled up to a con- 
sistence, and is beginning to cool and harden; as 
well for the foresaid reason, as because it will hin- 
der the sugar from hardening to that degree which 
the form requires. 
§.208. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is hardly any ways different 
from that of the tablet, (at §.196.). 
§.209. The USE is also much the same (as at 
§.197.). To which we may add, that rotulœ made 
up with acid juices, stand well recommended for 
abating thirst in inflammatory disorders. 
§.210. Take the following SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1. Rotulæ purgantes, antihelminticæ, pro infante 
ad exemplum. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 233. 
ꝶ. Semin. absinth. ʒij.
Mercur. dulcis ℈iv. 
Diagrydii ʒj. 
Sacchar. aq. still. tanaceti solut. ℥ijß.
M. exactissimè F. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis drach. ij ad iij alternis die- 
bus, manè, vacuo ventriculo capienda. 
2. Rotulæ contra dolores a partu. V. l. c. p. 220. 
ꝶ Matris perlar. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Laudan. gr. vj. 
M. exactissmè, dein cum sacchar. aq. 
cinnam. solut. & inspissat. ℥ijß. 
Redige in rotulas, paulo ante effusio- 
nem addendo 
Ol. cinnam. stillat. gtt. iv. 
S. Rotulœ anodynes. Capiat drach. ij. omni semihora, 
superbibendo vini rhenani unc. ß. donee dolor mi- 
tescit: dein detur tantundem mane saltem & vesperi. 
3.

143 Of Infusions. 
3. Rotulæ roborantes ventriculum debilem 
frigidum. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat. menth. 
Absinth. aa gtt. x. 
Essent. myrrh. Boerh. ʒij. 
Sacch. albiss. aq. menth. solut. & in- 
spissat. ℥ v. 
F. l. a. rotultæ. 
S. Rotulœ stomachicœ. Capiat drach. ij vel iij ter, 
quater de die, horis medicis. 
4. Rotulæ adversus sitim. 
ꝶ. Sacch. albissmi, subtiliss. pulverisat. 
℥iij.
Leni igne calefactis immisce 
Succi pomi citrei rec. ʒv. 
Flaved. ejusdem tenuiter rasœ ℈j. 
F. l. a. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Unam alteramve ore detineat assiduè. 
Nota. There is no need to take notice here of 
several other saccharine compositions used formerly 
by the ancient physicians, such as pasta regia, mas- 
sa panis, pineolatum mustaceum buccellatum, &c. for 
these have been long ago turned over from the 
shops of apothecaries to those of confectioners. 
Of INFUSIONS for Internal Use. 
§.211. AN Infusion, is a fluid, internal me- 
dicine, made by macerating proper 
ingredients in a liquid menstruum, without boil- 
ing: by which means, their finer parts, chiefly, are 
dissolved

144 Of Infusions. 
dissolved and retained by the liquor. The diffe- 
rent kinds of menstruums, and ways of infusing the 
ingredients, give different names to this form; 
which we shall mention hereafter, §.221. 
§.212. The MATTER for composing an Infu- 
sion is of three kinds: (1) the menstruum or sol-
vent; (2) the solvend; and lastly, (3) the ac- 
cessories. 
1. The menstruum is either (1) aqueous: as 
common and distilled waters, milk, whey, some 
watery decoction, the phlegm of vitriol, &c.
Or (2) vinous: as wines of all sorts, cyder, per- 
ry, meade, ale, must, &c. Or (3) spirituous: 
as common spirit of wine, alcohol, strong wa- 
ters, and other inflammable or fermented li- 
quors. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be infused, 
are, every thing fit for internal use, which pos- 
sess medicinal virtues capable of being extracted 
without boiling, by macerating in some hot or 
cold menstruum (n° 1.): of this kind there are 
a great many vegitable substances, few of the 
fossil or mineral class; but fewest of all among 
the animal substances.  
3. The accessories are either (1) such as pro- 
mote the solution, by (α) sharpening the men- 
struum, and making it fitter to penetrate, or 
else (ß) by opening the body of the solvend, 
or accommodating the texture of the solvend to 
the menstruum: for which purposes, salts of 
various kinds are used, both acid, alcaline, and 
neutral; and sometimes, tho' but seldom, in- 
flammable spirits, obtained by fermentation, 
are made use of, and that either per se, or mix’d 
and impregnated with the aromatic parts of ve- 
getables. Or (2) there are other accessories 
which are added after the infusion is compleat- 
ed, in order to increase the medicinal virtues or 
correct

145 Of Infusions. 
correct some noxious and unpleasant quality: to 
which head belong syrups, elœosacchara, ho- 
ney, soft confections, tinctures, essences, spirits, 
wine, &c. 
§.213. A proper ELECTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form seems to be more necessary than 
in any other, as they are so very numerous and dif- 
ferent in their natures. For no one can expect to 
succeed well in compositions of this kind, who is 
ignorant of the texture and disposition of the sol- 
venda (§.212. n° 2.) or ingredients to be infused, 
with the nature and dissolving power of the several 
menstruums (ib. n° 1.), and the properties or effects 
which the accessories (ib. n° 3.) may produce upon 
each. But as we suppose the prescriber to be pre- 
viously acquainted (per §.7. 8. 104.) with these; 
we shall comprise what we have to say upon this 
head in a few words. 
1. Water and watery menstruums dissolve salts, 
gums, mucilages, sopes, and that part which 
gives smell and taste to vegetables, when it is 
not too closely confined in their substance. 
Water makes the better menstruum for these 
substances, as it is purer, and less mix’d or sa- 
turated with the particles of foreign bodies. 
It will not, of itself alone, dissolve oils, fats, 
balsams, resins, or sulphurs; but it may be 
assisted and accommodated to such things by 
using alcaline salts, sugar, and inflammable spi- 
rits. Nor will it, of itself, dissolve stones, 
earths, metals and semimetals: but it may be 
qualified to dissolve these by adding a salt which 
is mildly or vehemently acid, and sometimes by 
the addition of one that is alcaline, or even 
neutral. 
2. Alcohol of wine dissolves the aromatic spi- 
ritus rector (or what gives the smell and taste 
L in

146 Of Infusion. 
in vegetables), oils of die like nature, balsoms, 
refins, soft sopes, volatile alcaline salts, and 
fix’d salts of the same kind, after they are made 
exceeding dry. It scarce dissolves any thing of 
other salts, nor of stones or earths; nor even of 
gums, common sulphur, metals or semi-metals: 
yet it will enter the substance and draw a tinc- 
ture from those bodies, when assisted by the in- 
tervention of a fix’d alcaline or lixivious salt. 
3. Now as the common inflammable spirits 
or strong waters (§.212. n° 1. (3).) consist of 
alcohol, water, and an acid, mix’d together in 
various proportions, according to the more or 
less strength or height of such liquors; we may 
readily perceive from what we have but now 
said (n° 1. 2.), the effects such liquors must
have upon bodies of the several kinds there 
mentioned. 
4. If to the forementioned principles (n° 3.) 
we add a subtle oil, almost like alcohol, we 
have then a menstruum of the same properties 
and consistence with wines of all sorts (§.212. 
n° 1. 2.) of which those are the basis: but with 
this difference, that some wines have more and 
others less spirit, some abound with the acid, 
and others are more repleat and smoothed with 
the oil. From whence we may, without much 
difficulty, understand the dissolving power of 
vinous menstruums, upon the several foremen- 
tioned substances (n° 1. 2.) 
5. Hence also appears, what simples in the 
three kingdoms of the materia medica (§.212. 
n° 2.) are suitable to each kind of these men- 
struums; observing that their solution is to be 
promoted, not by boiling, but is to be effected 
by macerating in the cold, or at most, in a strong 
heat. 
6.

147 Of Infusions. 
6. Among vegetables, those simples are most 
suitable for this intention, which being treated 
by a gentle heat, (either alone or mix’d with 
boiling water) afford essential oils and simple 
waters for medical uses *: to these we may add 
inspissated juices, sopes, gums, resins, and things 
compounded of these; as also, substances whose 
virtues are rather lock’d up, than set at liberty 
by the force of fire, or whose efficacies lodge 
in a substance capable of dissolution in some of 
those menstruums (n° 1. 2. 3. 4.), and are not 
so closely confin’d in the earthly and unactive 
parts of their composition, but that they may be 
disengaged from thence without boiling: of which 
nature we find many things in the tribe of eme- 
tics, cathartics, paregorics, emollients, astrin- 
gents, vulneraries, refrigerants, aperients, sa- 
ponacea, stimulantia, &c. 
7. The animal kingdom of the materia me- 
dica affords not many things fit to part with 
their virtues by infusion, besides a few infects, 
with castor, musk, civet, some calculi and ster- 
cora. In the mineral class, the chief are the 
ambers and sulphurs, copper, iron, antimony, 
and preparations from these. 
8. But as the several substances before enu- 
merated (n° 6. 7.) are not promiscuously and 
equally fitted to communicate their virtues to 
all menstruums (n° 1. to 4.) alike; it is there- 
fore our business to chuse out such a solvent as 
we know to be best fitted, by its consistence and 
principles to extract the parts we want to have 
separated. When one menstruum alone is unfit 
L2 for 
* See Boerhaave’s Chemistry: vol. II. Process. I. XV. 
XXIII. 


148 Of Infusions.
for all the parts we want, what have we to do, 
but to make a combination of two or more. 
And when that is insufficient or repugnant to 
our intention, we must have recourse to some 
of the accessories (§.212. n° 3 (1).). But 
the virtues and choice of these is sufficiently ap- 
parent from loc. cit. and §.213. n° 1. to 4. 
9. For the rest, things very unpleasant to the 
smell and taste should be avoided (in liquid and 
dissusive, and consequently) in this form as much 
as possible; more especially when it is prescrib’d 
for infants, nice patients, or for a common 
drink. 
10. The accessories of the second class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)) have often no occasion to enter an 
infusion. But if such should be required, they 
ought to be capable of an entire solution in the 
menstruum, without precipitating the parts 
which are already dissolved, and suspended there- 
in (consult §.102. n° 9. 10. 11. 12.). If you 
use any correctors, be careful you don’t mis- 
use them. (See §.84. 85. 96 to 103.) 
11. We may be pretty free as to the number 
of ingredients for this form; yet it ought not 
to be over-stuffed (per §.29). 
§.214. For the ORDER of prescribing this 
form, the ingredients to be infused take the first 
place: and among these the animal substances 
precede the vegetable, and the mineral take the 
last place. Those who are still more exact, range 
the parts of vegetables according to their pre- 
cedency; as first roots, then herbs, leaves, tops, 
flowers, seeds, berries, woods, barks, spices, 
fruits, juices, and lastly (if there are to be any) 
purgatives, with their correctors. Next to the 
ingredients to be infused, are subjoined the acces- 
sories of the first class (§.212. n°3. (1.)): then
follows

149 Of Infusion.
follows the menstruum; and the series is closed by 
the latter class of accessories (§.212. n° 3. (2.)). 
§.215. The DOSE is various, being more or 
less in proportion to the strength of the ingredi- 
ents and menstruum, the different intention of the 
physician, the age and other circmstances of the 
patient, &c. (per §.66.). But in general, watery 
infusions are given from ℥j. to iij, jv, v, or vj; Vi- 
nous, from ℥ß to ℥j, ij, iij or iv. Spirituous, 
from ʒij. to ℥ß. ℥j or ij. Sometimes the rules 
mentioned (§.67. n° 4. 5.) take place in the dose 
of this form. But frequently it is determined not 
by weight but by measure: v. g. Cochlear. j, ij. 
&c. or cyathum (§.58. n° 7. (2.)), or to be 
taken in the quantity of a tea or coffee-cup full, 
&c. or to drink as much as is liked, for an ordi- 
nary drink. Lastly, if the ingredients are to be 
portioned out by the patient or his attendants;
and to be infused in scalding water, in the man- 
ner of tea; then, as much as may be order’d to be 
used at a time as will lye between the fingers, in 
a spoon or tea-cup, or, to be more exact, a pugil, 
ʒij, iij, or ℥ß.  
§.216. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, has very un- 
certain bounds; making sometimes no more than 
one dose (§.215.): as in the infusions of emetics, 
cathartics, &c. either in wine or water. But when
intended for an alterative, or to purge the whole 
habit, it is frequently prescribed to ℔. j, iij, jv, 
more; according as the indication and other 
circumstances require. (Consult §.67. 68. 92. n° 4.) 
The price too, of some things restrains their quan- 
tity (per §.66. n° 14.): therefore the infusion of 
tincture of porcupine bezoar is seldom order’d in a 
larger quantity than to ℥jv, vj or viij. Sometimes, 
a medicated wine or ale that is to be used for a 
long time, or as a common drink, is order’d to 
L3 be

150 Of Infusions. 
be made in the quantity of a hogshead, or a whole 
pipe at a time. From what has been here said, 
and from what we shall observe in the proportion 
following, it will be no difficult matter to deter- 
mine how much of the ingredients to be infused 
should be order’d at one time, if the infusion of 
them is refer’d to the patient or his assistants. 
§.217. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for medicines of this kind, 
there is hardly any general rules to be given, since 
the proportion must vary with the several circum- 
stances of the things to be infused, the nature of 
the menstruum, the way of using, the state of the 
patient himself, and many other circumstances, 
with which it must vary, Observe therefore 
1. The ingredients to be macerated (§.212. 
n° 2.) are generally order’d in two or three 
times a greater quantity for an infusion, than 
when they are to be given crude or in sub- 
stance: and this, in proportion as the virtue or 
strength of the medicine is more or less with 
respect to its bulk, and according as the men- 
struum used extracts the virtues either wholly, 
or but in part. 
2. Herbs, their leaves, tops and flowers, are 
usually order’d for this form by manipules or 
pugils; and fruits are mostly prescribed by num- 
ber (per §.58 n° 7. (2.)): but the proportion 
of emetics and cathartics should be determin’d 
by weight; except the leaves of asarum, which 
are oftner order’d by number. 
3. The rest of the ingredients (§.212.) 
which are neither emetic nor cathartic, may be 
order’d in a quantity sufficient to answer the in- 
tention and proper dose (§.215. 216.): nor is 
it possible to assign the proportion of these in- 
gredients in general, by rules more determi- 
nate and particular (per §.87. 88. 217. n° 1.)
4. 

151 Of Infusions.
4. The proportion of the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.) with respect to the ingredients to be in- 
fused, is also no less various and uncertain: for, 
very often it is six, eight or twelve times the 
quantity of the other ingredients; sometimes 
it is much less than any of those quantities, at 
other times it is much larger, ascending up to 
twenty, thirty, and even a hundred times the 
quantity of the things to be infused. 
5. The proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients in short, varies with their specific 
gravity; and as their virtues are more or less 
contracted or strong, and their extraction more 
or less difficult to make: it also differs as the 
menstruum is more or less active and strong, 
and as the intention may require the liquor to 
be more or less saturated with the medicinal par- 
ticles; all which have their force in demanding 
a greater or less proportion of the menstruum 
to a certain quantity of the ingredients. 
6. Besides these considerations (n° 5.), the 
proportion of the menstruum to the ingredients, 
should be always large when the latter are un- 
pleasant, or intended for infants, nice patients, 
or a constant drink. Hence, in making medi- 
cated ales, wines, hippocras, must, &c. espe- 
cially when they are to be fermented; in such 
case, the quantity of the menstruum should be 
from thirty to a hundred times larger than that 
of the ingredients to be infused. 
7. The proportion of accessories of the first 
class §.212. n° 3. (1), which promote the 
action of the menstruum, is order’d more or less 
according as they are stronger or weaker in 
themselves, or as the other ingredients are 
more or less hard to be wrought upon, as the 
menstruum naturally possesses more or less 
strength and activity, and as it has a more or  
L4 less

152 Of Infusions. 
less congruity or affinity to the particular sub- 
stances to be extacted: so that hence, ʒj or ij. 
of these accessories are sometimes order’d to 
each pound of the menstruums; but they are 
frequently used in a much less proportion. The 
spirituous kind of these accessories are often or- 
der’d in no determinate quantity, if intended for 
irroration, or to be sprinkled upon the ingre- 
dients. 
8. The accessories of the latter class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are intended to correct or 
promote the action of the infusion as a medi- 
cine, may be order’d in a proportion equal to 
the intention to be answer’d. Nor can we pre- 
scribe any general limits to this proportion. But 
sugar and things of the like nature are com- 
monly order’d in the proportion of part j to 
viij, or x parrs of the liquor: but in making 
hippocras or aromatized wine, they are used in 
the proportion of a half,, third or quarter part, 
with respect to the menstruum. Tho’ the de- 
gree of dulcification is sometimes referr’d to the 
judgment and palate pf the patient. See 
§.85. 90. 
§.218. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction for 
making up this form, is of two kinds: (1) one is, 
when the process of infusion is committed to the 
apothecary; (2) the other, when the ingredients 
are only transmitted by the apothecary, and the 
care of infusion referr’d to the patient or his at- 
tendants. 
§.219. In the find case (§.218.), the subscrip- 
tion contains. 
1. The preparation of the ingredients in order 
for infusion: which requires, (1.) a comminu- 
tion or reduction of them into a gross powder, 
and is effected by cutting, rasping, or pounding; 
which

153 Of Infusions. 
which operations are omitted in substances na- 
turally of a pulverulent consistence, as filings of 
iron, the ashes of vegitables, &c. (2.) The 
making them up into nodules, bundles and bags, 
with muslin or fine linen; which contrivance is 
used when the virtues are not required to be ex- 
tracted all at once, or when we would save the 
trouble of straining, or when the ingredients are 
very ponderous, and require to be suspended 
in the menstruum, left falling to the bottom 
they might not be so apt to dissolve or commu- 
nicate their strength to the liquor. For these rea- 
sons, sometimes all, or only one or two of the in- 
gredients should be thus done up. (3.) Irroration 
or sprinkling; when we use liquid accessories 
(§.212. n° 3. (1.)), as the spirits of vitriol, 
sulphur, wine, roses, &c. Hot water is also 
sometimes used for this process, when dry in- 
gredients require to be opened and softened by 
heat and moisture, that they may more easily 
part with their virtues in a cold menstruum. 
(4.) A proper vessel, wherein the ingredients 
are to be put. But that is very seldom men- 
tion’d in the prescription; unless when for fear of 
a dissipation of the virtues, we would advise the 
infusion to be made chemically in a bolt-head; 
or when the fermentation with ale or must re- 
quires the materials to be put up in a cask. 
2. Infusion, which is perform’d with a men- 
struum either hot or cold. Watery menstruums 
only (§.212. n° 1. (1.) ) are poured on hot or 
scalding: the vinous and spirituous (ib. (2.)(3.)) 
are used cold. 
3. Maceration, which is also either hot or 
cold. Cold maceration is used when there is 
required but a weak extraction of the virtues; 
or when the ingredients are of such an open 
texture, and the menstruum so penetrating as 
not

154 Of Infusions.
not to require any heat; or when we are appre- 
hensive that heat will occasion some improper 
change in the medicine. Maceration with heat 
is used when the contrary of these obtain, or 
when the menstruum is of that kind (n° 2.) as 
will bear the heat of infusion; or when, after 
it is applied cold, the addition of heat will pro- 
mote its action. This heat is communicated ei- 
ther by what is term’d insolation, or by diges- 
tion, in a place or furnace proper for that pur- 
pose, using the medium water, sand or ashes, 
&c. whereby various degrees of heat are given, 
but all lower than to make the menstruum boil 
(per §.211.) the degree of heat should vary al- 
so, as the season of the year is more or less fa- 
vourable to the operation, as the texture of the 
ingredients is more or less fit for suck a process, 
and as the intention may require a more or less 
speedy extraction. Sometimes the extraction 
may be promoted by shaking the mixture now 
and then at intervals. The time or length of 
maceration is to be limited either from its 
effects, ’till the menstruum has acquired the re- 
quisite colour, smell, taste and strength; or, 
which is more usual, for so many hours, days, 
nights, &c. according as the ingredients and 
menstruum are known to be disposed for a more 
or less speedy extraction, or as it is intended to 
be stronger or weaker. The vessel is almost 
constantly order’d to be closed during the ma- 
ceration; unless when the structure of the vessel 
makes it unnecessary, or the manner in which 
the maceration is to be perform’d forbids it: 
the first obtains in the phiala chemica, or long 
and narrow-neck’d bolt-head; the last in fer- 
mentations. 
4. Depuration, This is either (1.) unnecessary, 
as when the ingredients to be macerated are 
made

155 Of Infusions. 
made into a nodule, or included in a bag (per 
n° 1. (2.)): and in that case, after a due ex- 
traction has been made, the nodule may be ei- 
ther left suspended in the liquor during its use, 
or else it may be taken out, and by pressing it 
strongly, the liquor will be more saturated. Or, 
(2.) when the ingredients are to be infused loose, 
and are not very light, the liquor may be cla- 
risied barely by standing still; so that the purer 
part of the liquor may be gradually poured off 
fine from the sediment, which will reside at 
bottom undissolved: and so much of the infu- 
sion as remains behind turbid with the residuum, 
may be afterwards separated clear by filtration; 
which is a method well enough adapted to me- 
dicated ales, wines, and spirituous infusions. Or 
(3.) the depuration may be effected by trans- 
mitting all the liquor thro' a strainer or flannel 
bagg, term’d (manica hippocratis) Hippocrates’s 
sleeve: and here also, towards the end, a strong 
expression of the residuum may be order’d, when 
the liquor is required to be very strong, and 
not over clear. Thus are depurated watery in- 
fusions, and clareta or hippocratic wines: the 
latter of which may be further purified by an 
addition of milk before percolation, whose vis- 
cid parts, stopping up the larger pores of the 
filter, will intercept the finer lee. Or (4.) the 
infusion may be clarified by filtrating thro' bi- 
bulous or spongy paper, which as it is the neat- 
est method, making the liquor perfectly clear, 
so it is the slowest and most tedious: it is used 
for liquors that require the highest purity, and 
a separation of all the parts which are not most 
intimately dissolved and combined therewith, 
and when, at the same time, the quantify to be 
filtrated is not very large. It is therefore dur- 
able for spirituous infusions, and emetic or an-  
timoniated

156 Of Infusions. 
timoniated wines. But we must be cautious how 
we treat such as are volatile, and just come from 
the fire, by the two last methods (n° (3.) (4.));
left they should be thus deprived of their vir- 
tues. 
5. The addition of such, accessories (§.212. n° 3. 
(2.) as alter or correct the infusion as a medi- 
cine: where (besides the things at §.213. n° 10.) 
we are to observe, that the sugar, and such 
things ought to be mix’d with hippocratic wines. 
&c. before their depuration (per n° 4. (4.); 
that by passing through the filter together, they 
may not be liable to render the liquor soul. 
6. The receptacle, is a glass phial, with a nar- 
row mouth: which may be order’d to be kept 
stopp’d very close; if there be any danger of a 
corruption or dissipation of the medicinal parts 
of the liquor, from a too free admission of the 
air. 
§.220. But when the ingredients are only to be 
transmitted to the patient by the apothecary, with- 
out other preparations (per §.218. (2.)); in that 
case, all that regards the infusion (§.219. n° 1. 
(4.) to §.220.) is not to enter the subscription: 
but the comminution, mixation, and forming into 
a nodule, &c. (per. §.219. n° 1. (1.) (2.) ) may 
be subjoined, when there is occasion by subscrib- 
ing e.g. conscissa, tusa, grosso, moado, M. and if the 
species are to be sent loose, add, F. collectio, or 
D. ad Chartam; for a paper, in that case, performs 
the office of a receptacle. But when the species are 
to be made into a nodule, &c. you may write: 
includantur nodulo vel sindoni. As for irroration 
(per §.219. n° 1. (3.)), that is left sometimes to 
the apothecary, and sometimes to the patient: if 
to the patient; the liquor for that purpose is to be 
transmitted to him by the apothecary with the 
other

157 Of Infusions. 
other ingredients, unless it be one of common 
use. 
§.221. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is also various, according to 
the different circumstances (§.218.—221.). 
Hence, 
1. If the preparation by the apothecary (§.219.) 
takes place, the name of the infusion will then be 
various; according as the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.), the ingredients to be infused (ib. n° 2.), the 
accessories (ib. n° 3.), the general quantity (§.216.), 
and the depuration (§.219. n° 4.), are different. 
An infusion prescribed for in but one dose, is 
without any regard to the menstruum, ingre- 
dients, or manner of preparation, termed hau- 
stus, a draught: but when it comprises more 
doses than one, and is made with water for a 
menstruum, it passes then by the bare name of 
an infusion, infusum. But if the menstruum used, 
be milk, whey, wine, ale, mead, &c. The in- 
fusion, in that case, borrows its name from 
thence. If the menstruum was spirituous, it 
takes the name of tinture. And lastly, if the 
ingredients are spices; and the menstruum, aro- 
matic distilled waters, wine and its spirit; 
sweetened with a large quantity of sugar (per 
§.217. n° 8.), and the clarification extremely 
fine (per §.219. n° 4.(3.)): the name then 
usually given to it, is, claretum or nectar; or, 
if cinnamon is the chief of the spices, and wine 
be the menstruum, it may be only term’d hippo- 
cratic wine. To each of these names may be 
added another, denoting its virtues; and then 
may be subjoined what relates to the using of it, 
which may be easily, deduced from §.60. 215. 
It is also sometimes proper to advise the patient 
to let the vessel and infusion stand in a cold 
place, especially when the general quantity of  
it


158 Of Infusions. 
it is large, and made in the summer time; and 
this, to prevent it from fermenting, turning 
sower, or musty. 
2. If the process of infusion is to be left to 
the patient (per §.220.), and the ingredients 
are to be sent to him by the apothecary, done 
up in very porous linen (per §.219. n° 1.); 
it is then term’d a nodule: but it they are sent 
loose, in a paper, they are named species; or 
else the a medicata, when they are to be infused 
by a little at a time (§.215.) like common tea. 
Here, also, should be added a name, importing 
its virtues. Afterwards should be wrote the 
menstruum, manner, proportion, order, time, 
&c. wherein the infusion, maceration and de- 
puration are to be perform’d; just as they are 
deliver’d in the subscription, at (§.219.): but 
they should be deliver’d in terms, and methods 
of preparation which are intelligible, and suited 
to the conveniency of the patient or his atten- 
dants (per §.60. n° 5. 6.). For the rest, what 
regards the taking and keeping, may be di- 
rected the same as (at n° 1.) preceding.
§.222. The USE of these formulæ, made by 
infusion, is very universal, being adapted to almost 
every disease, age and intention; provided the 
ingredients and menstruum are chose so as to be 
agreeable to each other, and suitable to the indi- 
cation (per §.213.). These formulæ are indeed 
sometimes less agreeable to infants, when the in- 
gredients have a considerable smell and taste; 
otherwise many things may be commodiously in- 
sinuated even to them, under the form of common 
drink, which they could not be so well induced to 
take under any other form. To conclude, though 
these formulæ are best fitted to penetrate the in- 
most recesses of the morbid body, they are yet fre-
quently

159 Forms by Infusion. 
quently prohibited, by their tedious preparation, 
in cases where delay is dangerous. 
§.223. Take the following examples in these 
formulæ. 
1. Vinum emeticum, antimoniatum, validè movens. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 131. 209. 
(1.) ꝶ. Croci metallor. gr. viij. 
Vini rhenan. ℥ij. 
Stent in frigida infusione per noctem: 
manè per chartam filtratis adde 
Oxymell. scillit. ʒvj. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haustus emeticus, adulto pro dosi, manè exhihendus. 
(2.) Aliud, mitius pro infante rachitico. 
V. ibid. p. 256. 
ꝶ. Radic. ipecacuanhœ ℈j. 
Vini albi gallici ℥j. 
Sacchari albi ʒij. 
Infusa totam noctem, depurata, exhibe 
manè. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro dosi, manè capiendus. 
2. Collectio purgans, roborans, anti-rachitica. ibid. 
ꝶ. Rhei selecti ℥ß. 
Mirobalan. citrin. sine nucleis ʒiij. 
Agarici trochiscati ℈ij. 
Conscissa, tusa groso modo, M. D. ad 
chartam. 
S. Species pro cerevisia medicata, que insundantur 
frigidœ cum Cerivis. fortioris ℔. iv. per horas xxiv. 
Utatur hoc potu pro familiari quotidiano, spatio iv. 
septimanarum, &c. 
3.

160 Forms by Infusion. 
3. Nodulus diureticus, in hydrope conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ciner. stipit. fabar. 
Genistœ aa ℔ ß. 
Inclusa nodulo exhibeantur. 
S. Nodulus diureticus, cui infundantur vini rhenani 
℔ iv. frigidœ, stent per noctem: tum, relicto intrœ 
vinum nodulo, illius ℥iij. ter de die bibantur. 
4. Serum lactis anti-scorbuticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Acetosellœ m. jß. 
Betoniœ. 
Chaerophylli aa m. ß. 
Tamarindor. ℥jß. 
Conscissa insunde cum 
Seri lactis œstivi ℔ iij. 
Spatio horæ, in calore sere servido, abs-
que ebullitione tamen, dein per 
linteum expressis admisce. 
Syrup e succo citri. 
Rubi idœi. 
Violacei aa ℥j. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat hujus unc. j. omni semihorio 
inter diu. 
5. Thea medicata anti-pthisica. 
V. l. c. p. 199. & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. caryophillat. mont. ℥ij 
Liquoritœ ℥jß. 
Herb. veronie. 
Heder. terrestr. aa m. j. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Centaur. min. aa pug. iij. 
Semin. fœnicul. dulc. ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S.

161 Forms by Infusion. 
S. Thea balsamica. Hujus ℥ß insundatur cum aquœ
serventis v vel vj vasculis these potui dicatis: stent 
vase clauso, calida, per aliquot minuta, tum bibat 
omni hora vasculum simile plenum,  in quo prius  
dissolutum fit'mellis virginœi cochl. parv. Eodem 
modo parantur theœ medicatœ ex omnibus vegetan- 
tium partibus; prœipuè particulis, adstringenti- 
bus, amarulentis, aromaticis fixis, pauco oleo gau- 
dentibus: e.g. 
Flor. chaimœm. 
Sem. lin
Cort. aurant.
Iead. gent. &c.
Sumit. absinth R.
Fumar. 
Centaur. min. &c. 
6. Infusum anti-hydropicum, fluorem lymphæ con- 
cilians pro plebejo. 
V. Boerh. 1. c. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristol. utriusque aa ℥jß.
Zinziberis ʒvj. 
Summit, absinth. vulg. 
Centaur. min. 
Bacc. junip, aa ℥j. 
Sal. absinthii ʒß. 
Concissa, tusa, mista D. ad chartam. 
S. Species. Infundantur cum sp. juniperi vulg. ℔. iv. 
insolentur per aliquot dies, vase clauso, turn bibat 
℥j. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, cum regimine. 
M 7.

162 Forms by Infusion. 
7. Infusum acidulatum refrigcrans in sebre ar- 
dente bibendum. 
♃. Fr. cydon. medioc. 
Limon. rec. aa n°. j. 
Pipon. aurant. n°. vj. 
In lamellis tenuissimis conscisis assunde 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. iv. 
Scent per noctem, & post decantationem 
adde
Syr. diamor. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger, haustulum, subinde, 
ad libitum. 
8. Infusum aperiens, in hydrope, icterio, &c. 
exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. raph. rustic. consciss. ℥ij 
Sem. synap. contus. ℥j. 
Millep. viv. contus. n°. C. 
Infundantur per noctem, vase stricte 
clauso, in 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. j ß. adde 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥iv hor. med.
(1.)

163 Forms by Infusion.
(1.) Infusum catharticum. 
♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒij ß. 
Rad. rhabarh. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth. ℈j. 
Infundantur per noctem in q. s. aq. font. 
ebullient, pro ℥ij. adde 
Sp. lavend. comp. ʒij. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. ʒvj. 
S. Haustus purgans mane cum regimine sumendus. 
(2.) ♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒiij. 
Cort. intern. sambuc. ʒß. 
Sal. ebishamens. ʒiij. 
Ebulliant parumper in aq. font. q. s. ut 
exprimatur ℥ij. adde 
Syr. de spin. cerv. ℥ß. 
S. Ut prior. 
9. Claretum purgans & roborans 
ꝶ. Rad. calam. aromat. ʒvj. 
Cort. magellanic. 
Rad. rhabarh. opt. 
Fol. senn. S. stipit. aa ℥ß. 
Agaric. trochiscat. ʒiij. 
Cinnamom. acut. ʒij. 
Cubebar. ʒj. 
Conscissa, infunde in vini rhenani opt. 
℔. jv. per triduum, vase clauso, loco 
tepido, subinde concute: turn adde 
sacchari albi ℔. ß. trajice aliquoties 
per manicam Hippocratis. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis mane unus vel alter cyathus. 
M2 10.


164 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
10. Cerivisia anti-scorbutica. 
Vid. Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 191. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. cochlear.
Erucœ. 
Erysimi. 
Trisol. aquat. aa m. j. 
Semin. rec. contus. nasturt. hort. 
Raphan. hort. aa ℥ij. 
Flor. centaur. min. ℥j. 
Rad. raphan. rustic. ℥v. 
Conscissa reconde in cerevisiæ recentis 
& servescentis 1/2 dolio. 
S. Sit pro potu assiduo. 
Medicated ales, wines, &c. by infusion, are
now come so much into difuse, that we shall not 
trouble our reader with a larger detail of speci- 
mens than what is given by our author. 
Of DECOCTIONS for internal Use. 
§.224. A DECOCTION or apozem is a liquid, in- 
ternal medicine, pretty much like the 
infusion (§.211.) proceeding; but with this diffe- 
rence, that as the infusion is made without boiling, 
the apozem has both its ingredients and menstruum 
boiled over the fire. Hence we see wherein the 
apozem differs from the infusion. The apozem or 
decoction goes also under various denominations, 
agreeable to particular circumstances; whereof, 
those names that are now retained in use, shall be 
mention’d hereafter. 
§.225. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
in general the same as for the infusion (§.212.), 
and may be also distinguished into three kinds:
viz. 

165 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
viz. the menstruum or liquor, the solvenda or in- 
gredients, and the accessories, which assist or cor- 
rect. 
1. The menstruum for this, like as in the 
proceeding form, is of three kinds: aqueous, vi- 
nous, and spirituous; for which, conside the in- 
fusion (§. 212. n° 1.) proceeding. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be boiled, 
are also in like manner taken from either of 
the three kingdoms of animal, vegetable, or 
mineral substances; provided they are fit for in- 
ternal use; and tho’ they part with few or none 
of their virtues in a bare maceration or infusion, 
may yet communicate them sufficiently to a pro- 
per menstruum, by means of boiling. 
3. The accessories are here of the same use, 
and often obtain the same general division as (at 
§.212. n° 3.) of infusions proceeding: where, 
those of the first kind (1.) hold good the same 
here; but those of the latter (2.) are in some 
measure to be varied, as discretion shall indi- 
cate. 
§.226. A proper Choice of the materials for 
this form, is determined not only from the know- 
ledge of what has been said (at §.213.); but also 
from the known force and degree of fire to be ap- 
plied to the menstruum and ingredients in the ope- 
ration of boiling. But the young prescriber will 
be sufficiently instrusted on this head, from having 
learned what we deem previously necessary (per 
§.7. n° 2. 3. §.8. §.104.). So that I shall only 
observe here. 
1. That water and watery menstruums are 
more frequently used, for decoctions than others; 
because they cannot lose any virtues in boiling, 
as others do. Nor are distilled waters so fit for 
this purpose: for if you use those of any strength,
M3 their  


Of Apozems or Decoctions.
their virtues are dissipated in boiling; and if 
you take those of no strength, why may not 
simple water do as well, or better. Mead was 
in the highest repute and greatest use for this 
purpose among the antients; who had some-
times justice on their side for so doing: but in 
our day, we prefer the addition of honey, after 
the decoction is made. The lighter and purer 
your water, the litter for dissolving and extract- 
ing the virtues of your ingredients (§.213. 
n° 1.). 
2. Wine is a menstruum fitter for infusions 
than decoctions, and even though you should 
boil it in a vessel, so close as to prevent any va- 
pour from exhaling, it is a liquor that will be 
the worse for the heat. I therefore chuse, when 
wine is necessary; to add it after the boiling is 
over. But we should except must (which is 
like mead) before it has become wine by fer- 
mentation; because in that state, it rather be- 
longs to the class of aqueous, than vinous or 
spirituous menstruums. 
3. Spirituous menstruums (§.212. n° 1. (3.)) 
however, will bear boiling in chemical glasses 
without any considerable loss or alteration; so 
that they are fitter for this purpose than vinous 
menstruums. 
4. The dissolving power proper to each of 
these menstruums (§.225. n° 1.), is the same 
with what we have described at §. 213. n°. 1. 
to 4; only they act more intensely upon the in- 
gredients, by the force of the fire in boiling: 
so that tho' a decoction may take out more of 
the medicinal particles than an infusion, yet it 
either changes or loses more of the finest and 
most volatile principles, and sometimes draws 
out more than it shou’d.
5.

167 Of Apoxems or Decoctions. 
5. In the mean time, the degree of heat for 
boiling, is not the same for all menstruums; the 
spirituous boil with a less heat than the vinous, 
and both, than the watery: according to which, 
there will be a variation in the dissolving power 
arising from the action of the fire. 
6. Also the greater or less strength and con- 
tinuance of the boiling will make a proportion- 
able difference in the decoction; as some things 
are hurt by a long and violent boiling, others 
require it, and the contrary. 
7. Hence it appears, that ingredients (§.325. 
n° 2.) are fit for a decoction, when (1.) their 
medicinal particles or virtues required are so- 
luble in the determinate menstruum; (2.) when 
at the same time they cannot be so well extracted 
by maceration, as ebullition; when (3.) that ope- 
ration does not dissipate, nor (4.) change their 
virtues, nor (5.) introduce any foreign quality op- 
poring the intention. 
8. Therefore the choice of a proper men- 
struum, with the adapting it by suitable acces- 
sories to particular ingredients, are things of the 
highest consequence in this form as well as infu- 
sions (§. 213. n° 8.), and are both to be directed 
by the same considerations (n° 7.) proceeding; sup- 
posing the ebullition not to change, but augment 
the force of the menstruum and accessories. 
9. A previous and just preparation of the in- 
gredients, of themselves naturally unfit for a de- 
coction, is also none of the least considerations. 
To this head belong comminution of all kinds, 
and previous maceration; which are extremely 
useful in all substances that are dry, hard and 
difficult to dissolve. 
10. The choice of a proper vessel fit for 
making the docoction, is also very necessary; as 
the success of the process and medicines do in a  
M4 great

168 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
great measure depend thereon. (V. n° 3. and 
§.219. n° 1. (4.)), See also what we shall say 
on this head in the subscription, §.231. 
11. He would take a very injudicious course, 
that orders a decoction of a menstruum merely 
aqueous, and ingredients which are earthy, in- 
sipid, stony, refinous, sulphnreous, or oily: 
for such will scarce afford any virtue to a de- 
coction, unless mix'd with the accessories at 
§. 213. n° 1. 
12. The same (n° 11.) holds good also with 
regard to metals, and semi-metals, which do not 
abound with saline parts: tho' by a previous 
ignition, or a long and strong boiling, they 
seem in some measure subject to communicate 
new qualities to water. 
13. There is scarce any thing to be extracted 
by decoction, from most of the solid parts of 
animals; unless you continue the boiling for a 
long time together. Tho’ there are a few sub- 
stances exceptionable; as the porcupine bezoar: 
for that may be even dissolved by a bare ma- 
ceration in the cold. 
14- Those substances which will communi- 
cate their virtues to a menstruum by maceration, 
should not be tortured for that end, by the 
violence of boiling: because the intensity of 
the heat generally changes, more or less, the 
texture and virtues of the medicinal particles. 
But a gentle and short boiling is sometimes al- 
lowable, as it expedites the solution and ex- 
traction. This caution chiefly regards such in- 
gredients as are fresh, and of a soft or light tex- 
ture; as are most ot the parts of vegetables. 
15. Things whose virtues are apt to evapo- 
rate in boiling, should be rather assigned to an 
infusion; but if boiling in this case be necessary, 
it should be the more gentle, short, and per- 
form'd

169 Of Apezems or Decoctions. 
Form’d in a suitable vessel (per n° 6. and 10.) 
This is of consequence in aromatics, alcalescents, 
and such as are sit for the distillation of waters 
and oils *. 
16. Such things as by boiling change their 
virtues into other qualities, disagreeing with 
the intention; should be either boiled not at all, 
or else but gently and for a short time. Asarum 
proves more diuretic than emetic, by boiling. 
Liquorish grows bitter by a long boiling. Fol. 
senœ in a decoction that has had much boiling, 
proves very griping in its operation, &c. 
17. But if the virtues are required to be drawn 
out but in part by the menstruum, and the in- 
gredient be easy to extract; we should then ra- 
ther prefer maceration, or at least use only a 
gentle boiling. R. Rhei, myrobalani, &c. do 
by long boiling impart not only their purging, 
but also astringing qualities to a decoction. Mu- 
cilaginous substances, as rad. symphyti, altheœ, 
malvœ, with many seeds, fruits, juices, and the 
like, do by long boiling give a disagreeable 
viscidity to the liquor, &c. 
18. It is matter of great consequence in de- 
coctions, whether the ingredients to be boiled 
are new or old, dry or green, and fresh gather’d; 
since that permits them to communicate their 
virtues, with more or less difficulty to certain 
menstruums †. 
19. When several ingredients are boiled to- 
gether, we should observe whether and how far 
they promote or retard each others solution; 
and whether or no the same strength and length 
of boiling may be equally suitable to them all. 
For
* F. Boerh. Elem. Chem. l. c. 
† V. Boerh. ibid. vol 11. process. II. n° 5, 6.  


170 Of Apozems or Decoction. 
For there are many things which alone give no 
virtues to a decoction, but boiled with others 
prove very efficacious, and, the contrary. But 
the various times of boiling, required for differ 
rent ingredients and menstruums, we shall de- 
termine hereafter. 
20. With regard to avoiding disagreeable o- 
dours and tastes in this form, the same caution 
holds good here, as mentioned §.213. n° 9. 
A thick slimyness is to be also avoided (per 
n° 17.). 
21. Accessories of the later kind (§.225. 
n° 3.); used in this form for augmenting the me- 
dicinal virtues, are (1.) the same with those enu- 
merated (§.212. n° 3.(2.) §.213. n° 10.). But 
(2.) when many of the medicinal particles re- 
quired are so volatile as to fly off in the boiling, 
it may be perform’d in an alembic, and the con- 
densed vapours returned into the decoction, 
when cold. But sometimes, (3.) when among 
the ingredients there are some of a very soft tex- 
ture, abounding with volatile parts, and so, fit- 
ter for infusion than decoction (per §.213. n° 5. 
to 7.); in that case, those ingredients may be 
infused in the liquor of the decoction after it has 
done boiling, agreeable to the rules of infusion 
at §.211—223; by which means the virtues 
and pleasantness of the medicine will be increas- 
ed, and the formula consisting partly both in 
decoction and infusion, may be term’d decocto- 
infusum. 
22. From what has been said (at n° 21.(3.)), 
we may understand the method of aromatiza- 
tion used by the antients; in the room whereof, 
the moderns substitute a mixture of aromatic 
waters, spirits, tinctures, elæosacchara, &c.
as being more neat and expeditious, §.212. 
n° 3.(2.). 
23.

171 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
23. With regard to the number of ingredients 
for a decoction, the same holds good here, as at 
§. 213. n° 11. of infusions. 
§.227. The ORDER of prescribing or com- 
pounding the ingredients of this form, ought in 
general to be much the same as in (§.214.) infusi- 
ons; especially if the ingredients are to be boiled 
with one equal degree of fire, or sent by the apo- 
thecary to the patient under the form of species, 
bag, nodule, &c. (per §.220.): but if some things 
require to be boiled a longer, and others a shorter 
time, the best method will be to place them next 
to each other, according to the time of their boil- 
ing; to put those which require the least boiling, 
first, and the most, last; unless we can rely on the 
skill and dexterity of the apothecary for this ma- 
nagement. Observe therefore, 
1. That the generality of fossil or mineral 
substances §.226, n° 11. 12; the bones, horns, 
and more tough or even fleshy parts of old ani- 
mals, hard and dry woods, roots, barks, &c. 
which are very refinous and without volatile 
parts; these will bear and require boiling for 
three, four, or six hours, and more. So that it 
is often necessary to open the body of those sub- 
stances by a previous maceration; that they may 
part with their virtues the more freely, per 
§.226. n° 9. 
2. The flesh and other solid parts of young 
animals, woods, barks, stalks, roots, &c. which 
are not so compact as the former, nor abound 
with aromatic particles, but are astringent, bit- 
ter, saponaceous, &c. with those of the nourish- 
ing grain or pulse kind, being laxative or cool- 
ing, diuretic, incrassating, &c; for these, one 
or two hours boiling may be sufficient. 
3.

172 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. Next to these (n° 2.) come vegetable sub- 
stances of a still softer texture; such as soft roots, 
not aromatic but cooling, nourishing, astringing, 
aperient, diuretic or saponaceous; and such as 
are purging, of the more refinous kind; and 
lastly, soft pulpy fruits, which are sweet, acid 
or austere: these will scarce admit of boiling 
beyond the space of twenty minutes, or, at most, 
the space of an hour. 
4. For plants and leaves of a pretty firm tex- 
ture, without aromatic or volatile saline parts, 
whether emollient, astringing, incrassating, re- 
frigerating or aperient; seeds of the like nature, 
but not mucilaginous; woods, roots and barks, 
which are compact, and possess parts of the more 
fix'd aromatic kind: for these, half an hour's 
boiling will be sufficient to extract their medici- 
nal virtues. 
5. Lastly, the most tender parts of vegetables, 
their flowers; with herbs and leaves which are 
subaromatic, vulnerary, bitter, uterine, &c. the 
more tender seeds, berries, fruits, barks and roots 
of the like nature; to, which we may add some 
purgatives, as senna, rhubarb, myrobalans, &c.
liquorish with such roots and seeds as afford a 
mucilage in decoction; all which ought not to
boil above a quarter of an hour. Even for the 
major part of these especially such as are fresh 
gathered and pretty soft), it may be sufficient 
only to infuse them in the scalding liquor, after 
the decoction is removed from the fire, per §.226. 
n° 21.(3.). 
6. Yet the physician may sometimes find rea- 
son to order the boiling to be longer or shorter 
than the times now(n° 1. to 5.) specified; as when 
his intention requires only the extraction of such 
parts as adhere but superficially to the ingredi- 
ents,


173 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
ents, or when, without regarding the former, he 
would obtain such as adhere more intimately. 
7. But what has been hitherto said (n° 1. to 
5.), I would have understood to relate chiefly to 
aqueous decoctions. The vinous, (which do 
not well suit this form (per §.226, n° 2.) and 
spirituous, do not directly fall under the pre- 
ceeding rules: since they require to be made in 
chemical glasses or vessels exactly closed. But 
the latter or spirituous decoctions, boiling with 
a less heat than the others (per §.226. n° 5.), 
do not require so much caution.. 
§.228. the DOSE of this form agrees with that 
of the infusion (§.215); and is therefore to be de- 
duced from thence. 
§.229. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is also much the same as that of the infusion (at §.216.): 
but it is seldom ever extended beyond ℔ vj or viij; 
nor does it ever amount to that quantity, but when 
the preparation is difficult, the dose large, and to 
be drank at short intervals; supposing the season 
of the year, and the disposition of the decoction to 
keep good, to favour its being made and sent in 
such quantities. 
§.230. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we have little more to 
say than what we have already deliver’d at §.217. 
1. With regard to the solid ingredients 
(§.225.), what has been said at §.217. n° 1. 
to 3. takes place here. 
2. For the proportion of the menstruum 
(§.225. n° 1.) to the ingredients to be boiled, 
that again differs according to the circumstances 
at §.217. n° 5.; and according as the decoction 
is to be made with or without evaporation, 
(per §.226. n° 3. 10. 14.).
3.

174 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. If there will be no loss by evaporation, or
if the vapours are to be collected and refunded 
into the decoction (§.226. n° 21); in that 
case, the proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients should be the same as for infusions 
(§.217. n° 4.): tho' the quantity of the men- 
struum is sometimes, but seldom, increased to 
twelve times and upwards the quantity of ingre- 
dients. 
4. But if on the contrary, there will be any 
loss or dissipation in the boiling; the quantity 
of the menstruum should be increased in propor- 
tion to such loss; that the liquor of the decoc- 
tion, left after the operation, may be neither too 
thick nor too thin, but duly saturated. 
5. The physician may therefore determine 
the quantity of menstruum to be poured on the 
ingredients, partly by guess, but more exactly by 
considering, n° 3. and 4.; according as the 
length of time, and force with which the boiling 
is to be continued, or as the quantity or number 
of parts to be evaporated, shall indicate, 
6. Or, which is more safe and usual, the phy- 
sician may prescribe only q. s. of the menstruum, 
and determine the quantity of boiling by either 
the length of uime or quantity to be boiled 
away; or, lastly, he may only mention the 
quantity he would have left after the operation. So 
that the apothecary must then compute what 
quantity of menstruum will boil the determinate 
length of time, so as to leave the prescribed quan- 
tity of decoction. But it is in this case very easy for 
the physician to determine the quantity of men- 
struum, being much the same as when the decoc- 
tion is made without any evaporation per n°. 3. 
7. For the proportion of accessories of the 
first kind, which are to promote the solution or 
extraction of the ingredients (§.212.) n° 3.
(1.)

Of Apozems or Decoctions. 175
(1.) §.225. n° 3.), their quantity may be de- 
termined from the considerations mention’d at 
§.217. n° 7. But as the boiling greatly pro- 
motes that action (per §.266. n° 4, 5, 7.), 
there is frequently occasion for a less quantity of 
those accessories. 
8. The proportion of accessories of the second 
kind (§.225. n° 3. §.226. n° 21.) for cor- 
recting or exalting the medicinal virtues, is the 
same with that for infusions (§.217. n° 8.); so 
far as the accessories agree with their intention 
in that form. But such accessories as are infused 
after the boiling is over {per §.226. n° 21.(3.)) 
are subject to the same rules as those in the hi- 
story of infusions, §.217. But it should be ob- 
served, that those accessories will suffer a less per- 
fect solution, by maceration, in proportion as the 
liquor of the decoction was before more highly 
saturated with the ingredients by boiling: nor is 
a decoction agreeable to the patient, when of 
too thick a consistence, especially when it is to 
be drank in large quantities. 
§.231. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction of the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, differs 
but little from that of infusions (§.218. to 221.). 
For if the ingredients for the decoction are to be 
sent by the apothecary to be boiled by the patient, 
nothing more need be observed than what we have 
mentioned at §.220. But if the apothecary him- 
self is to take charge of the decoction, the phy- 
sician may order him to observe what is to be 
done, 
1. Before the operation of boiling: which, (1.) 
regarding the comminution, colligation and irro- 
ration, differ nothing from what has been said 
on those heads at §.219. n° 1.; unless we ex- 
cept the moistening with scalding water, which 
is

176 Of Apozems or Dococtions. 
is seldom used for decoctions. (2.) It may be re- 
quisite to mention the vessel proper for making 
the decoction, when if is to be one not com- 
monly used for that operation, but required by 
the particular of boiling, or by the acri- 
mony or volatility of the ingredients; v. g. 
phiala chemica, cucurbit a alembico instructa, lagena 
stannea, olla sictilis, diploma, &c. The received 
method, among apothecaries, of making all 
forts of decoctions promiscuously in a copper 
vessel, frequently not tinned, often makes the 
repetition of this caution to the compounder ne- 
cessary in a physician’s prescription. (3.) Ma- 
ceration of all or some part of the ingredients is 
to be sometimes premised (per §.226. n° 9. §. 
227. n° 1.); as some substances are much more 
dense and compact than others. This is to be 
ordered according to the rules at §.219. n° 2. 3. 
and the form may then assume the title of Infuso- 
Decoctum. 
2. In the operation of boiling: where, the phy- 
sician may determine (1.) the degree of fire to be 
used, and the method wherein it is to be ap- 
plied; whether the ingredients are to be boiled 
with a strong or slow fire and ebullition (per §. 
226. n° 4. 6. 12. 14. &c.) whether with a 
naked fire, or in balneo? which latter, is much 
the best for decoctions that require long and 
equal boiling, and are in danger of getting an 
empyreuma, or other change from the violence 
and inequality of heat. (2.) The order and length 
of time, when some things are to be boiled for a 
longer or shorter space than others, should be 
mentioned in the prescription (vide §.227.);
which is also required for some menstruums and 
accessories (§.212. n° 3.(1.)), which cannot 
well bear long boiling. (3.) The keeping of 
the vessel close stopped, with more or less ex-
actness;

177 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
actness; according as any evaporation will prove 
more or less pernicious to the medicine. And 
the keeping up an equable degree of heat, that 
the nature of the decoction may not thence be 
changed. (4.) To ascertain the quantity of boil- 
ing which the decoction is to suffer: which is 
frequently determined; when there is any evapo- 
ration, from the number of parts dissipated, or 
the quantity left; but these are methods not very 
exact. It is better to six a time per §.227. n° 
1. to 5. or else to limit the quantity of boiling 
by the colour, taste, &c. of the decoction: for 
the quantity that will exhale by vapor in a given 
time, must vary greatly with the different width 
of the vessel and intensity of boiling. 
3. Lastly, what is to he done after the boiling: 
to which belongs (1.) the infusion of such ingre- 
dients as will not bear boiling (per §.226. n° 
21.(3).); in performing which, the same rules 
are to be observed as mentioned at §.219. n° 1. 
2. 3.(2.) Depuration, or a separation of the 
foul parts from the decoction, like as at §.219. 
n° 4.; only in decoctions made with aqueous 
menstruums, the liquor is sometimes depurated 
not only by straining or filtration, but also by 
clarification with the whites of eggs: which in- 
deed renders the medicine exceeding limpid and 
clear; but at the same time makes it less effica- 
cious; for the whites of eggs do by their tena- 
city stick to and retain those medicinal particles 
which are fittest for a decoction, and concreting 
by the force of fire, carries them up with itself 
to the surface, in form of scome: so that this 
part of the process ought to be hardly comply’d 
with, even tor the nicest patients. (3.) The ad- 
dition and mixture of such accessories as may be 
thought proper, the business of which may be 
understood from consulting §.226, n° 21.(1.) 
N (2.)

178 Apozems or Decoctions.
(2.) In the last place (4.) comes the receptacle, 
&c. as at §.219. n° 6. 
4. In executing what has been said, n° 1. 3.
regard should be had to the rule at §.59. n° 7. 
§.232. For the SUPERSCRIPTION or direction 
to the patient for this form, that may be deduced 
without much difficulty from what has been said at 
§.221; for several of the very same names (§.ib.) 
are in a measure applicable to this form; so that a 
decoction which is prescribed for one dose may be 
termed Haustus or Polio: if it contains several 
doses and is made with a spirituous menstruum, it 
may be intitled Tinctura; if made with an aqueous 
menstruum, Decoctum or Apozema; if the ingre- 
dients which form the basis (§.75.) consist of the 
parts of animals, it may be called Jus Jusculum; 
if the ingredients which have been once boiled, 
are boiled again in more water, it was formerly 
termed Bochetum or Decoctum secundarium: but the 
other denominations, used by ancients, are now- 
become almost obsolete. 
§.233. The USE of this form coincides with 
that of the infusion (§.222). 
§.234. For SPECIMENS, take the following: 
1. Haustus emeticus, ventriculo cibis nimium 
infarcto. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 117. 
ꝶ. Rad. ipecacuhan. pulv. ℈iv.
cum vini albi  ℥iij. 
Coque in phiala alta hor. iv. 
Colaturam exhibe pro una dosi.
2. 

179 Apozems or Decoctions. 
2. Nodulus purgans, minus calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Fol. senn. sine stipit. ʒiij. 
Fung, agaric. opt. ʒij. 
Nitri puri ʒj. 
Concissa, tusa, includantur sindoni. 
S. Nodulus purgans. Coquatur per 1/4 horœ in cerisiœ
dulcis ℔ ß. vase clauso. Exprimatur. capiat œger 
cyathum omni semihora, donec purgetur. 
3. Jus cancrorum fluviatilium. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 16. 
ꝶ. Cancror. fluviatil. vivor. ℔ iij.
Coque spatio horæ cum aq. ℔ xij. tum ex-
emptos contunde una cum testis, atque 
coque in priore jure proprio adhuc per 
horas iv. addendo semper tantum aquæ, 
ut a coctione ℔ viij. circiter supersint, 
tum jus fortiter exprime, atque ei infunde 
Flor. horragin. ℥jß. 
Buglossi ℥j. 
Rad. tragopogoni ℥iv. 
Sisari ℥ij. 
Dein ebulliant simul spatio 1/16 horæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumatur ad ℥ijß. omni bihoric. 
4. Decocto-infusum adstringens, incrassans, ad 
hæmoptysin. 
V. Boerh. Mater, p. 196, 197.
ꝶ Rad. consolid. maj. 
Tamarisc. aa ℥B.
N2 Cum

180 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. pur. q. s. per 1/2 horæ decoctis,
adhuc servidis, insunde 
Herb. agrimon. 
Betonic. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Papav. rhoead. aa m. ß. 
Stent vase clauso, in infusione calida per 
horæ spatium. Colaturæ ℔ ij. admisce 
Syr. myrtin. ℥j. 
S. Liquor vulnerarius. Bibat ℥ij. omni bihorio diei. 
5. Tinctura anti-hydropica ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. ib. p. 204. 
ꝶ Rad. helenii ℥j. 
Aristolochiœ utriusque.
Zedoaria aa ʒvj. 
Zinziber. ℥ß. 
Sumit. absinth. 
Centaur, min.
Semin. dauci. 
Bacc. juniper. 
Lign. sassafras rasi aa ℥j. 
Cort. winteran. ℥ß. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum sp. juniper. ℔ ij. in 
phiala alta chemica ebuliiant per vj 
horas. Tinctura frigida, pura de- 
cantetur. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥ß quater de die, vacuo 
stomacho, cum regimine. 
6. Infuso-decoctum abstergens, antisepticum, in 
spina ventosa. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Lign.guajaci virid. ponderos. rasi ℥x. 
Sal. tartari ʒß.
Cum 

181 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. comm. ℔ vj. spatio xxiv horar. 
digestum in diplomate, decoque spa- 
tio ij horar. sub sinem admiscendo 
Spir. vini rectific. ℥iv. 
Ebulliant iterum parumper, turn exhibe. 
S. Sumat ℥iv. quater de die, vacuo ventriculo: mane 
hora 7ma dein hora undecima, iterum 4ta pomeri-
diana, & ultima hora 7ma vesp. 
7. Bochetum ex residuo prioris. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Residuum decocti prioris 
Aq. pur. ℔ iij. 
Ebulliant per iv horas. Colatura D. usui. 
S. Sit pro potu quotidiano. 
8. Decoctum aperiens, attenuans; ad ictericos, in 
hydrope, &c, exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. rhei. opt. 
Rubiœ tinctor. aa ʒijß. 
Sal. absinthii ʒjß. 
Aq. font. pur. ℔ ij. 
Leni ebullitione, per horæ spatium con- 
tinuata, fiat apozema; cui, depu- 
ratæ, adde, 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat  ℥iij. ter de die. 
9. Decoctum pectorale, in tussi, phthisi, pleuritide, 
nephritide, viscerum vulneribus, & inflamma- 
tionibus exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Consolid. maj. rec. contus. 
Ering. cond. aa ℥j. 
Sem, urtic. major, vulg.  ʒvi. 
N3 De-

182 Of Expressed Juices. 
Decoque in aq. font. ℔ iv ad lb ij. ex- 
prime, & adde 
Nitri puri ʒij. 
Syr. bals. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat a ij ad vj℥. subinde, 
pro re nata. 
10. Decoctum febrifugum. 
♃. Pulv. peruv. ℥jß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
F. Tribus coctionibus decoct. ℔ ij. cum
Aq. font: q. s. 
Cui adhuc bullienti adde 
Sumit. absinth. rom. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamœmel. ʒjß. 
Cons. flav. aurat. ℥ij. 
S. Ut in fronte, Depuratas & grate dulificatas 
exhihe ℥ij quater de die. 
Nota. We say nothing here concerning the Hy- 
drosacchara, Hydromel. Medical, and ptisans of 
the ancients; nor of their medicated whey, diet, 
cock-broth, Consummatum, Destillatum instaurans, 
&c. because the preparation of these, almost quite 
out of use, may be easily understood and deduced 
from the doctrine of infusions and decoctions §.211. 
to §.234. Conf. P. Morelli Method. prœscrib. Form. 
Of Expressed JUICES *. 
§.235. AN EXPRESSED JUICE is a liquid, 
internal medicine; consisting chiefly 
of an aqueous juice, extracted by beating, grinding,
and
* A form hardly ever used among us; whatever it may be a- 
mong the German and Dutch physicians. 

183 Of Expressed Juices. 
and pressing, from the softer and more succulent 
parts of recent vegetables: being a form intended 
only for present use. 
§.236. The Matter or ingredients for this 
form are of two kinds: primary, or most effential; 
and secondary, or less essential. 
1. Of the primary kind are every thing which 
by beating, grinding and pressing, will afford an 
aqueous juice, fit for internal use: such we are 
supplied with from almost none but the parts of 
recent vegetables. 
2. Those of the secondary kind are intended 
either (1.) to promote tfie expreffion of the juice, 
either by diluting it, or by opening and soften- 
ing the texture of the bodies trom whence it is 
to be expressed. For which purpose are used to 
be added, before expression, whey, milk, &c. 
Or (2.) to increase the medicinal virtues of the 
juice already expressed, or to correct some per- 
nicious or unpleasant quality therein. To which 
end are added salts, either acid, alcaline, or neu- 
tral; wine, distilled waters, sugar, honey, sy- 
rups, eleosacchara, &c. which are suitable for 
meliorating and correcting. 
§.237. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, the business of that may be contained in a 
few words; because of the small number of sub- 
stances which are fit to afford juices by expression. 
Therefore 
1. The primary ingredients (§.236. n° 1.) 
used in this form, are only the succulent parts 
of recent vegetables: such as leaves, flowers, 
fruits, roots and whole plants, which are of a 
fort texture and abound with a thin aqueous 
juice. 
2. Substances of a dry and compact texture 
N4 are

184 Of Expressed Juices.
are all excluded from this form. Hence, woods,
barks, ligneous stalks, &c. are quite unfit. 
3. Nor are seeds fit for this form by expres- 
sion; because they abound more with an oil, 
than an aqueous juice. 
4. Such things are also less sit for this form, 
whose juices, tho' copious, are yet too thick or 
viscid; because they are more difficult to extract. 
But being mix’d with the secondary or accessory 
liquors (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), they will, by means 
of heat, pretty readily part with their more fluid 
contents by expression. 
5. If the physician's intention should require 
some ingredients which are less succulent, or re- 
plete with a thick and viscid juice, as at n° 4. 
in that case, a proper addition of other plants, 
or their parts, which are full of a thinner juice, 
will supply the place of the accessories at §.236. 
n° 2. (1.). 
6. The medicated juices taken from living a- 
nimals, or their excrements, &c. by expression, 
are hardly used by any but the more vulgar fort 
of people: for there is scarce any physician that 
would advise or prescribe the use of 'em. 
7. Hence it appears, that this form of medi- 
cine is not agreeable with all times, places and 
circumstances of the ingredients and patient: so 
that the physician ought to be cautious not to pre- 
scribe any vegetable or its parts, for expression, 
which are out of season; nor several things toge- 
ther which are not in season at the same time, left 
he should order some vegetables green or fresh ga- 
thered, which can be only had dry at that time 
of the year. 
8. The secondary kind of ingredients (§.236. 
n° 2.) of both classes, are very frequently o- 
mitted. But the first kind (ib. n° 2. (l.)) of 
accessory ingredients are often very useful, when 
the

185 Of Expressed Juices. 
the natural humidity of the rest is either too 
small in quantity or of a too thick and viscid 
consistence. Therefore such accessories ought 
to be chose for remedying those inconveniences, 
which cannot introduce any noxious quality, or 
make any sudden change in the texture and vir- 
tues of the juice; but rather correct, or fall in 
with the intention of the form itself. The latter 
kind of accessory ingredients at (§.236. n° 2. 
(2).), require the same cautions with those men- 
tioned at §.13. n° 10. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form 
should be but few, less than for infusions, at 
§.213. n° 11. For when there are many ingre- 
dients accumulated together, the prescriber will 
be much more liable to commit an error in re- 
gard to the season (per n° 7.), or to occasion 
some improper quality and consistence in the 
medicine by such a compound mixture. Vide 
§.94—105. 
§.238. The ORDER wherein the ingredients 
for this form are to be prescribed, is hardly de- 
termined by physicians; but in general, the same 
method §.214) may be observed, as for infusions, 
so far as the matter or ingredients of this form a- 
gree with the nature of those §.214. 
§.239. The DOSE of this form is to be more or 
less according to the various circumstances at §.66. 
and as the indication requires a repetition thereof, 
at longer or shorter intervals of time. Sometimes 
the dose of expressed juices is determined only by 
measure, as cochlear, j, ij, iij, or ad Cyathum j, ij, 
&c. but they are more frequently ordered by 
weight, a ʒij. ad ij, iij, seldom more, unless the 
expressed juice be very thin and pleasant. The 
slatulent crudity natural to these vegetable juices, 
with the unpleasantness of their colour, smell, and
taste,

186 Of Expressed Juices. 
taste, do require the adiquate dose to be divided 
rather into several lesser ones, agreeable to the rule 
at §.67. n° 4. 
§.240. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, it is various ac- 
cording to the several circumstances mentioned at 
§.67. with the number of doses, &c. Sometimes 
the whole general quantity sufficient, is but one 
dose; as when the intention is to vomit, &c. But 
more frequently, when this form is intended to 
alter or purge the whole habit, the use of it is 
continued for several days or even weeks together. 
In that case, (1.) so much may be prescribed as may 
serve for one or two days together; or the form 
may be fresh made every, or every other day: 
which is the more necessary to be done, if the cir- 
cumstances of the patient (§.67. n° 8.) permit, as 
these vegetable juices by expression are so apt to 
ferment and change by keeping. Or (2.) if the 
first method (1.) cannot be well complied with, 
and a quantity of juice is to be made at one time 
sufficient to last several days or a week: in that 
case, we may in some measure prevent it from 
fermenting and corrupting by stuming with the 
fumes of sulphur, by boiling, with the addition of 
such things as preserve and pickle, a close exclu- 
sion of the ambient air and keeping in a cool 
cellar. 
§.241. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, it neither requires 
nor admits of an exact determination; but may, 
in the general, be pretty easily understood from 
what follows. 
1. The general quantity (§.240.) of the ex- 
pressed juice, to be made at once, being deter- 
mined by weight; the primary ingredients at 
§.236. n° 1. may be ordered to be taken only 
in q. s. 
2. 

187 Of Expressed Juices. 
2. Or the quantity of juice to be expressed 
being unlimited, the quantity of ingredients 
only may be determined by weight or measure 
per §.58. n° 6, 7, 8. (1.) (2.).: but to deter- 
mine exactly the quantity both of juice and in- 
gredients cannot be easily done. 
3. The first method, n° 1, is generally the 
most used, and is even necessary when the dose 
(§.239, 240). being one or more is required to 
be of a certain size or number. When the lat- 
ter, n° 2. is made use of, the physician should 
consider whether the ingredients have a great or 
small degree of succulency, as also the more or 
less bulk, and frequent use or exhibition thereof, 
that he may not commit an error in excess or de- 
fect, which give room for the apothecary to ri- 
dicule, or giving himself the trouble of writing 
several of the same prescriptions in one day. So 
that this latter method (n° 2.) is hardly ever 
used, but when the general quantity of expressed 
juice is large and undetermined. 
4. But if the ingredients are several, and of 
different textures and virtues, the mutual pro- 
portion of each should be such as may corres- 
pond to the physician’s indication; as that may 
require more or less of one than another, ac- 
cording to their degree of succulency and parti- 
cular virtues. Such vegetables and their parts 
which have but a small quantity of juice, and 
that very thick or viscid (per §.237. n° 4, 5.), 
ought to be (cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
taken in a less quantity than those which are 
more succulent; that the expressed juice may be 
obtained more thin and plentiful. 
5. Therefore, in the first case, n° 1. when 
the circumstances before-mentioned (n° 4.) do 
not require all the ingredients to be taken in 
equal quantities, they may be only determin’d 
in

188 Of Expressed Juices. 
in the proportion of double, triple, sub- 
duple, &c, e.g. Radic. pars j, herhar part. ij, 
baccar. part. iij, or otherwise. As for what 
is to be done in the latter case, n° 2. that is 
self-evident. 
6. Sometimes a certain quantity of the ex- 
pressed juices of vegetables and their parts, is 
prescribed for after they have been depurat- 
ed, without making particular mention of 
each individual, or the method and order of 
expression: which is the most simple and easy 
method, if follow’d in the common way. 
7. The Secundary ingredients of the first kind 
§.236. n° 2. (1.) are prescribed in but a small 
quantity, left if they were used plentifully, they 
should render this form more like an emulsion, 
decoction or infusion, than an expressed juice; 
for the business of these is to serve not as a real 
menstruum, but only to dilute the more viscid 
parts §.236. and 237. n° 8. These should be 
therefore added in a proportion more or less, ac- 
cording as the particular texture and consistence 
of the primary ingredients may require; if so 
be they do not exceed the quantity of the juice 
itself. 
8. The latter kind of secundary ingredients 
§.236. n° 2. (2.)) do acknowledge much the 
same proportion with that given at §.216. n° 8. 
But care should be taken to prefer juices before 
other addenda, as they make part of the basis 
(§.88.); and to, be mindful that the juice be 
not made of too thick a considence by any ad- 
denda; as also, that the quantity of all together 
may not exceed the adiquate and sufficient dose, 
(§.239.). But when the weight of the juice is 
left undetermined (per. n° 2.), the proportion 
of the addenda is to be limited by equaling a cer- 
tain part thereof (per n° 5.); whence the apo- 
thecary

189 Of Expressed Juices. 
thecary may easily compute how much the whole 
will require. 
§.242. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, contains several par- 
ticulars; such as 
1. The preparation of the primary ingredients 
(§.236. n° 1.) in order for the expression of their 
juice. And this includes (1.) comminution, or a 
division of them into small parts; which for dif- 
ferent ingredients is done after different me- 
thods; sometimes by cutting, scraping, and 
beating into a soft and succulent paste; for 
which purpose a pestle and mortar of stone or 
wood is preferable to one of metal. (2.) The 
addition of a diluent liquor (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), 
when that may be necessary (per §.237. n° 8.); 
whether mixed by affusion, aspersion, or va- 
pour. (3.) The digestion, or else assation of 
the paste, after contusionand humectation; which 
is however, generally omitted: nor is it of any 
service, but when the juice of the ingredients 
is very viscid, or in but a small quantity, and 
at the same time not subject to an improper 
change by heat; but then it is often attended 
with this advantage, that it takes off a good deal of 
the crudity and flatulency of the vegetable juice, 
and often fits it to keep longer. 
2. The expression itself of the juice; concerning 
which, we have nothing in particular to observe, 
more than what is usual in the common pro- 
cess.  
3. The depuration of the expressed juice; which 
is effected by letting it stand, or it may be done 
sooner, by passing it through a strainer (§.219. 
n° 4. (2.) (3.)): which should not be neglected, 
because it greatly removes the more gross parts, 
and unpleasant viscidity or thickness of the juice.
Nor

190 Of Expressed Juices. 
Nor is it amiss to proceed like some, who, be- 
fore they strain the juice, do without any pre- 
vious digestion or assation, simmer the liquor 
over a gentle fire till they almost perceive the 
signs of boiling, which they do in a close 
vessel, if the virtue consists in volatile parts, 
or else it may be done in an open vessel till it 
even boils up a little, whereupon they depurate 
it by a strainer, whilst hot, or let it stand 'till 
cold §.219. n° 4. (4.) ult.): for by that method 
the liquor may be not only despumated, and 
freed from its more flatulent parts; but the gross 
fæces may be better separated, the insects and 
their eggs which it contains, will be destroy'd 
and the whole liquor fitted to keep a longer 
time, and with less alteration. 
4. The addition and mixture of the secundary 
ingredients §.236. n° 2. (2.), which is to be per- 
formed after what has been said at n° 3.: tho'
it would be better to dissolve suck things, whose 
solution is difficult in a cold liquor, in the juice 
whilst it is hot, (n° 3.) before draining. I 
should also advise, for the exhibition of salts, 
which are apt to congeal and separate from the 
juice, to send them to the patient distributed 
in their proper doses in the form of a powder, 
that the patient may mix a dose of the salts in 
a proper quantity of the juice a little before 
taking; by which means, the dose and distri- 
bution thereof will be more certain and equal,
than if disturbed by shooting or crystallizing 
from the juice in the cold; which observation is 
more especially of consequence, when the gene- 
ral quantity of this form to be made at once, is 
very large. 
5. The keeping of the expressed and prepared 
juice; which, if but for a short time (per §.240. 
(1.)), is of no great consequence, but if for ma-
ny

191 Of Expressed Juices. 
ny days or weeks (per ib. (2.)), it ought to be 
particularly regarded: since the natural dispo- 
sition of those juices, and the season of the year 
wherein they are mostly used, do very much sub- 
ject them to change, ferment and corrupt. Nor 
is keeping the juice in a narrow neck’d vessel well 
stopp’d, and set in a cool place, always suffi- 
cient to preserve it found and unalter’d: but we 
ought besides, as Helmont advises, to fumigate 
the vessel well with burning sulphur; or else to 
preserve the juice from fermenting by the ad- 
dition of a little spirit of wine, especially if the 
secundary ingredient; do not tend to prevent cor- 
ruption, and a vinous spirit be not repugnant to 
the indication; or, if the juice be very thin, 
and will receive no hurt from the fire, it may be 
inspissated by evaporating half a way. 
§.243. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily de- 
duced from §.60. 235. 239: nor is there any oc- 
casion to advertize the patient pf any thing more 
than usual in directions; only, when the expressed 
juice is to last several days taking, he should be 
cautioned to keep it in a close vessel, and in a cool 
place. 
§.244. The USE of this form in chronical, 
disorders, is to correct inveterate indispositions of 
the solids and fluids, the blood and fibres; to open 
obstructions of the viscera, especially those of the 
abdomen, &c. In acute diseases, this form of me- 
dicine is used to abate thirst, to prevent and drive 
out putrifaction in inflammatory disorders, &c. 
the form itself being suited as well for alteratives 
as evacuants, whether the later operate by vomit,
stool or urine. But then it is not so agreeable to 
infants and nicer patients as some other forms, nor 
is it suited indifferently for all seasons of the year:
tho'

192 Expressed Juices. 
tho* there are not wanting juices which cannot 
fail to please the most squeamish palate. The last 
objection to the use of this form, is, that it can- 
not be so easily and speedily prepared as many 
others. 
§.245. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Succus emolliens, aperiens, humectans, solido- 
rum nimiam rigiditatem corrigens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 9 & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. scorzoner. 
Rapar. aa ℥iv. 
Herb. recent. cichorei. 
Taraxaci. 
Endiviœ aa m. ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, adsunde 
Seri lact. recent, pint. ß.
Ebulliant leniter spatio vj horæ minuto- 
rum in balneo maris: turn succum 
exprime: cujus per colum depurati 
singulis unciis admisce 
Syrup. rubi idaei ʒj. 
D. in lagena sulphurata. 
S. Ut in fronte. Servetur in loco frigido. Dosis 
cochlearium omni bihorio diet. 
2. Succus emeticus, in hydrope utilis.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Cort. medii sambuc. recent. q. s. 
Ut consciff. tus exprimatur succi ℥j. 
cui adde 
Syr. violor. ℥ß 
D. usui. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro una dosi. 
3.

193 Expressed Juices.
3. Succus antipyicus in statu phlogistico variolarum. 
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 239.  
ꝶ. Succi recens expressi cichorei. 
Lactucœ. 
Taraxaci. 
Fumariœ aa  ℥ij. 
Radic. scorzoner. ℥iv. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
M. 
S. Bibat ℥j. omni hora did. 
4. Succus diluens resolvens abstergens ad aphthas. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 168. 
ꝶ. Bulb. rapar. cum cortice q. s. 
Tyrocnesti, vel radula ex bractea serrata, 
radantur: turn exprimatur succus, 
qui ebulliens leniter despumetur: 
hujus ℥xvj. admisce 
Vitell. ovor. n°. ij. 
Syrup. violar. ʒvj. 
S. Bibat ℥ß. omni semihora. 
5. Succus antacidus, in frigida scorbuti specie: 
ad exemplum Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 189. 190. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. raphan. rustican. 
Ari ana part. j. 
Herb. recent. trisol. aquat. 
Nasturt. aquatic, ana part, ij.
Radula rasis, conscissis, tusis, exprime succi 
unc. vj. quibus admisce 
Spir. antiscorbut. Fred. Dekk. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
D. vase clauso. 
S. Capiat omni trihorio ℥ß. vel cochlearium.
O 6. 

194 Emulsions. 
6. Alius in scorbuti specie alcalina. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 192. 
ꝶ. Herb. recent. acetosœ. 
Taraxaci aa q. s. 
Fr. pom. citreum n°. j. 
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succi ℥v. his, 
per colum trajectis, adde 
Sacchari albi ʒvj. 
D. usui: iterentur quovis die per duas 
hebdomodas. 
ꝶ. Crem. tartar. ʒv. 
Sal. essent. acetosell. ʒij. 
M. Divide in xxiv partes æquales. 
D. singulæ in chartulis seorsim. 
S. Capiat mane hora septima dimidium succi, cut ad- 
misceat unam dosin pulveris: reliquum hora nona 
sine pulvere. Id fiat per xiv dies. 
7. Succus in febre biliosa, inflammatoria, nause- 
ante-propinandus. 
♃. Suc. limon. recent. express. ℥ß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒß. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Syr. violar. aa ʒiij. 
M. pro dosi. 
S. Haustus cardiacus, stomachicus, 4ta quaque hora, 
vel post singulos conatus, sumendus. 
Of EMULSIONS. 
§.246. AN EMULSION is an internal liquid, 
and Somewhat oily, but more aqueous 
medicine; approaching generally to the colour and 
consistence of milk: being formed of the oily parts 
of

195 Of Emulsions: 
of vegetables, pressed out and intimately mix’d by 
trituration and emulsion in an aqueous menstruum. 
Whence appears the reason of the name, and the 
difference of this form from the preceeding 
(§.235.) 
§.247. The MATTER or ingredients for emul-
sions are of three kinds (as at §.212. 225.): viz.
the menstruum, the oily ingredients to be emulsed 
and the accessories. 
1. The menstruum commonly used is of the 
aqueous kind: as common or spring water, dis- 
tilled simple waters of the shops, some aqueous 
decoction or infusion, &c. Tho’ sometimes, 
very seldom, wine is used for the menstruum. 
2. The ingredients to he emulsed are, (1.) the 
nuclei or kernels and seeds of plants, which are 
repleat with oil. (2.) The oily juices of vege- 
tables: as resins, gum-resins and balsams; and 
sometimes roots, which are very resinous and 
mucilaginous, &c. 
3. The accessories for emulsions are, (1.) such 
as promote the solutioh and mixture of the olea- 
ginous parts of the ingredients at n° 2. being of 
a viscid and saponaceous substance; as the yolks 
of eggs, sugar, honey, and such of the oily 
seeds or fruits (at n° 2. (1.)) as are readily dis- 
solved and united with an aqueous menstruum. 
Or, (2.) such as are to be added after the emul- 
sion is made, in order to increase the medicinal 
virtues of the form, or render it more pleasant, 
and are, in general, much the same as at §.212. 
n° 3. (2.) 
§.248. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we are to observe, that 
there are two kinds of emulsions; some, (1.) pro- 
perly so called, being prepared from the ingre- 
dients at §.247. n° 2. (1.); others (2.) less proper-
O2 ly  

196 Of Emulsions. 
ly so termed, being made from the latter kind of 
gredients, §.ib. n° 2. (2.). We designedly omit the 
compositions which some refer to this form, con- 
sisting of white earthy powders (as pearl, &c.) 
ground with an aqueous menstruum; for these are 
not properly emulsions, but only mixtures: since 
we are sufficiently convinced how soon they lose 
their milky colour, by the fine white powder sub- 
siding to the bottom. 
§.249. For ingredients of the first kind (§.247. 
n° 2. (1.) ), as they resemble milk in colour and 
consistence, so should they also in their smell and 
taste; at least they should have no unpleasantness, 
which their intention will very well permit, as 
they are seldom used but for cooling, nourishing, 
easing, &c. Hence, 
1. They will admit of no menstruum but 
what is aqueous (§.247. n° 1.), having neither 
viscidity, acrimony, nor any other unpleasant 
quality, but the more simple the better. There- 
fore the best menstruum for this form, is pure 
boiling water; or else some thin and watery de- 
coction, which is insipid, inodorous, or plea- 
sant; as are those from barley, oat-meal, harts- 
horn, the roots of viper-grass, vetches, liquo- 
rish, &c. with infusions of the like kind. 
2. If any of the more simple distilled waters 
are used for this form, which they frequently are, 
care should be taken to let them be such as are 
skilfully prepared, without any empyreuma. 
Such distilled waters as are spirituous, aromatic, 
vinous, or endued with any strong or consider- 
able smell and taste, are either wholly excluded 
by the nature and intention of this form, or at 
most, are admitted in but a very small quantity, 
in the room of accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)). 
Such liquors as are acid are also prohibited 
for

197 Of Emulsions. 
for the same reasons, and because they make an. 
emulsion rancid and unfit to keep. 
3. The ingredients to be emulsed, are, nu- 
clei and seeds, mention'd §.247. n°. 2 (1.); 
and these, not of any kind indifferently, but 
such as square with the nature and intention of 
an emulsion, before-mentioned. 
4. Therefore those nuclei and seeds as are 
internally of a colour different from that proper 
to an- emulsion, are not fo fit for this form: but 
those which are fat, soft, and white within, are 
the fittest for an emulsion. 
5. Also the larger kind of these nuclei and 
seeds should be first freed from their external 
husks or skins; for if they were to be beat or 
ground together in making the emulsion, they 
would not only obscure its proper milky colour, 
but also impart a strong and disagreeable taste, 
together with an astringency, repugnant to the 
proper intention of the form. 
6. Those seeds and nuclei which are bitter, 
pungent, warm and aromatic, scarce ever enter 
the composition of an emulsion, because the co- 
lour, odour, taste and virtues of them are sel- 
dom agreeable to the intention of this form. 
But sometimes the intention will admit some 
that have a mild bitterness, as the seeds of ci- 
trons, oranges, &c. the nuclei of cherries, bit- 
ter almonds, &c. Even some which are less plea- 
sant than these may be used in a small quantity 
without offending the palate. 
7. Those seeds which afford a great quantity 
of mucilage after grinding, are also less fit for 
this form: such are the seeds of quinces, lin-seed, 
fleabane, henbane, &c. to which we add barley, 
when boiled till it bursts; for only a gentle 
boiling of that grain is usually sufficient, and 
fitter for this form. 
O3 8.

198 Of Emulsions. 
8. Care should be taken that none of these 
nuclei or seeds be rancid; which should be try'd 
in the month, before they are used: for nothing 
is more liable than these to this kind of corrup- 
tion, in a short time, which renders them unfit 
for use in any form. 
9. Those who intermix other things among 
the ingredients to be emulsed than these men- 
tioned at n° 3. to 9. such as the peels of ci- 
trons, oranges, myrrh, &c. do not consider the 
unfitness of the taste, colour and consistence of 
such for emulsion. It would seem better to add 
elæosacchara of the first, and the tincture of 
myrrh, as accessories. 
10. For accessories of the first class (§.247. 
n° 3. (1.)), there is no occasion for them in 
this form: but those of the latter kind (§.ib. (2.)) 
are admitted. These, however, should be such 
as fall in with the intention, and no ways dis- 
turb the proper qualities of an emulsion. So that 
the best accessories for this purpose, are, the 
more pleasant kind of aromatic distilled waters;
pleasaht syrups, which are without colour; ju- 
leps, sugar, elæosacchara, and neutral salts. 
11. If any powder be added which is not ca- 
pable of an intire dissolution in an emulsion, 
it ought to be white, and not very heavy, but 
ground exceeding fine, and not subject to run 
into grumes or clog together: so that there is 
room for almost none but the lighter, earthy 
powders in this form, and not those, unless they 
are most exactly levigated. 
12. Conserves, electuaries, extracts and the 
like, should not enter this form; because they 
disturb its requisite colour, taste, and consistence. 
13. Acids should be also excluded; unless the 
indication should require an emulsion really acid, 
or very quickly apt to turn so. 
14.

199 Of Emulsions. 
14. Alcaline substances, which have an uri- 
nous taste, are by their unpleasantness prohi- 
bited from entering this form. 
15. The intention of this form will also sel- 
dom permit the addition of spirits, tinctures, 
effences, elixirs, &c. tho’ they may sometimes 
enter in a very small quantity. 
16. Yet we ought not to be over solicitous 
about the smell and taste, (per. §.65. 100. 101.). 
Emulsions are generally the more agreeable, as 
they arrive nearer to the nature of milk. 
17. Some patients may imagine they shall 
eject the medicine, if the physician prescribes 
for an emulsion: but such may be easily deceiv’d 
by using a menstruum of a red or some other 
colour, or else by mixing the like colour’d pow- 
ders, syrups, tinctures, &c. 
§.250. The latter kind of Ingredients (§.247. 
n° 2. (2.) ), are less conformable to the nature of 
milk, and do not always resemble either its colour 
or consistence, they should be therefore only or- 
der’d to be emulsed; that they may be exhibited 
and made into an emulsion with some oil, inti- 
mately combin’d with an aqueous menstruum. 
Therefore emulsions of this kind differ much from 
the former (§.249.): for 
1. They do not require, nor can they be 
made so pleasant as the proceeding; because they 
do not take in the same ingredients for emul- 
sion. 
2. Their intentions are generally very diffe- 
rent; since the latter kind (§.247. n° 2. (2.)) 
is more frequently intended for heating, &c. 
than for cooling, &c. per §.249. 
3. The primary ingredients (§.247. n° 2. 
(2.)) are those of the more oily kind, which 
are difficult to dissolve in water: as oils and bal- 
O4 sams


200 Of Emulsions. 
fams which are liquid, thick, or solid; v. g. 
Terebinthina omn. bals. peruvian. capaib. tolutan. 
&c. resins and gum-resins from jalapp. scammon. 
juniper, mastiche, myrrha, opopanax, ammonia- 
cum; rad. jalappœ, &c. In order to make these 
more penetrating and easy to take, they are 
sometimes very properly exhibited under this 
milkey form. 
4. We must however abstain here from the 
use of such substances of this kind which are the 
most fœtid and disagreeable, and which are best 
exhibited in the form of pills (§.162. n° 7.). 
5. The menstruum used here, is not very dif- 
ferent from that of the former at §.249. n° 1. 
But the vinous, spirituous and aromatic waters 
are more constantly and liberally used for these 
milkey compositions; not only because they 
more readily and intimately dissolve these resinous 
substances, but also, as the emulsion and these 
mixtures have different intentions. Hence, 
wine itself is sometimes used here, for the men- 
struum. 
6. Accessories of the first class (§.247. n° 3.
(1.)) are of the greatest use here: for without 
their intervention, the generality of the preceed- 
ing, resinous ingredients (n° 3.) are altoge- 
ther immiscible with an aqueous menstruum. 
We should therefore use accessories the more 
strong and saponaceous, as the ingredients are 
more cohesive and difficult to dissolve, and as 
the menstruum is more aqueous, or the dissolu- 
tion required to be the more intimate and exact. 
7. The yolk of an egg has this saponaceous 
and, dissolving property beyond most other ac- 
cessories, and will accommodate the most oily 
and tenaceous substances for an uniform mixture 
with even water. Sugar, syrups and honey have 
this property in a less degree, But honey dar- 
kens

201 Of Emulsions. 
kens the milkey colour in a great measure. Even 
common sope may be commodiously used for 
this purpose, when it is not repugnant to the pa- 
tient’s disorder and palate. 
8. When the quantity of ingredients (at n° 3)
to be dissolved is but small, the nuclei and seeds 
for the first kind of emulsion (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) 
are added as accessories; as almonds, and most 
of the oiley nuclei and seeds, &c. For these be- 
ing ground together with the resinous substances, 
pour out a thin oil and a mealy substance, which 
insinuating between the parts of those substances 
which are difficultly soluble, perform the office 
of a sope, so that by attenuating, and intimately- 
blending the more cohesive parts with the liquid 
menstruum, they form a medicine of the same 
colour and consistence with the emulsion, 
§.246. 
9. The accessories of the latter kind (§.247. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are for augmenting the plea- 
santness or virtues of these mixtures, are much 
the same with those mention’d at §.249. n° 10. 
&c. But those of the spirituous kind (§.ib. 
n° 15.) are more frequently used here, by rea- 
son of §.250. n° 2. 5.): nor need we be so cau- 
tious to preserve the colour, taste, &c. (per. 
§.ib. n° 1.) 
§.251. For the Order or method of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for this form; in both the true 
(§.249.) and the spurious emulsion (§.250.), 
the substances to be dissolved take the first place:
after these, in emulsions of the spurious kind 
(§.250.), may be subjoined the saponaceous acces- 
sory; then, the menstruum; and lastly the acces- 
sories for augmenting the pleasantness and virtues 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)). But the prescriber may vary  
the

202 Of Emulsions.
the order of each particular kind of these, at his 
own discretion. 
§.252. The Dose of this form is almost the 
same with that of expressed juices (§.239.), and 
is like that determined either by weight or measure. 
The true kind of emulsion (§.249.), is generally 
exhibited in a very large quantity, ad cyathum, or 
from une. j, ij, &c. ad ℔ß. and sometimes it is to 
be drank at pleasure as an ordinary drink. The 
spurious emulsion (§.250.), is generally given in a 
much more restrained quantity, ad cochlearium, or a 
ʒj, ij, &c. ad ℥j. or more; according as it is more 
or less strong, dilute, or nauseous, and as the diffe- 
rent intention, and more or less easy taking by the 
patient, &c. shall indicate. (V.§.66. and 67. n° 4.).
§.253. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is sometimes no 
more than one dose (§.252.); which obtains 
mostly in the spurious emulsion (§.250.). Nor is 
it proper to prescribe the later kind of this form in 
a quantity sufficient for several days; because by 
standing, unless the mixture be very uniform and 
well confirmed, there will follow a reparation, 
precipitation or emersion of the grossest parts. The 
first or true kind of emulsion (§.249.) easily turns 
sower, and the sooner as the season is warmer; in 
so much that it will hardly keep good six or seven 
hours in a hot summer, whereas it will stand a day 
and a night without changing in the winter time. 
Having therefore considered the quantity and fre- 
quency of the dose (§.252.), together with the 
temperature of the atmosphere, the wise physician 
will prescribe no more at one time than may be 
taken whilst it is good; having no acidity, except 
when the disorder and patient may chance to re-
quire it so. 
§.254.

203 Of Emulfions. 
§.254. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, varies very much
with their different natures and indications. 
1. The true kind of emulsions (§.249.) are 
made more or less dilute and thin, as they are 
intended to answer only the intention of cooling 
and moistening, or nourishing, easing, &c.
2. It makes one of the thickest kind of emul- 
sions, when the proportion of the menstruum is 
but three, four or five times greater than that of 
the ingredients: from twelve to twenty times as 
much more menstruum as ingredients makes one 
of the thinnest emulsions; if in the proportion 
of 8 to 1, an emulsion of a midling consistence. 
3. But respect should be had to the size of 
those nuclei and seeds (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) which 
are to make the emulsion: for the smaller they 
are, the more bark and skin they have in pro- 
portion to their internal, mealy and oily sub- 
stance; of which later is formed the emul- 
sion. So that the same quantity of small seeds 
will not so much saturate a certain quantity of 
menstruum, as will a like quantity of nuclei. 
4. For the proportion of the menstruum, that 
is usually prescribed by q. s. nor is the quantity 
of menstruum to be determined but from the ge- 
neral quantity of emulsion to be made; nor even, 
sometimes, can it be determined from thence: 
in which case the apothecary takes it in a mean 
proportion, per n° 2. 
5. But to more accurately determine the due 
proportion of menstruum, respect should be had 
to the degree of consistence, and mutual solubi- 
lity of the liquors (§.250.) and ingredients 
(§.247. n° 2. (2.)), in conjunction with the 
more or less quantity of accessories (§.ib. n° 3. 
(1.) §.250. n° 6. &c.) which they may require: 
the result of which, will be a proportion nearly 
the


204 Of Emulsions. 
the same with that given at n° 2. and is fre- 
quently referr’d to be ascertained at the discre- 
tion of the compounder (per n° 4.), especially 
when the emulsion consists of but one dose. 
6. The proportionable quantity of accesso- 
ries (§.247. n° 3. (1.)) should be more or 
less according to the quantity and texture of the 
ingredients and menstruum: the quantity may 
be double, triple, or quadruple that of the in- 
gredients, more or less, as the accessory may 
have a stronger or weaker dissolving power, 
(per §.250. n° 6, 7, 8.), and as the ingredients 
to be emulsed are more or less disposed for an 
intimate union with the menstruum. Hence, it 
is the most usual to prescribe vitell. ovi q. s. 
which method is also commonly taken with those 
accessories at §.250. n° 8. 
7. For the proportion of the second kind of 
accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)), which are to 
be added after the emulsion is made; there can 
be no more particular determination thereof, 
than by the rules given at §.217. and 241. n° 8. 
An ounce of emulsion will bear ℈j of the pul- 
verulent accessories (§.249. n° 11.), and ʒß of 
the sweet: but then we should consider whether 
any honey or sugar has before enter’d the emul- 
sion in the room of sope(per §.247. n° 3. (1.)), 
with what degree of correction the unpleasant- 
ness of the ingredients may require by these 
sweets, and whether we are prescribing for an 
infant, a child, or an adult, &c. The true kind 
of emulsion (§.249.) ought not to be made 
very unpleasant by adding too large a quantity 
of salts: for ℥vj of emulsion will seldom admit 
of more than ℈j. The proportion of the rest 
may be guided by the intention. 
§.255.

205 Of Emulsions.
§.255. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, in the true kind, 
(§.249.) is comprehended barely in F. I. a. emuls. 
Afterwards is to be mentioned the quantity of emul- 
sion to be strained off, if the menstruum were only 
order’d in q. s. (per §.254. n° 4.). And lastly, 
directions may be given for adding what else is to 
be mix’d. To say any thing of the vessel for con- 
taining this form, is generally unnecessary. In the 
spurious emulsion (§.250.) or white mixture, are 
prescribed first the ingredients to be dissolved 
(§.ib. n° 3.) and their saponaceous accessory 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)) by which they are to be ex- 
actly mixed: afterwards the addition of the men- 
struum, and other things, which is to be done 
gradually, by a little at a time. But what else 
more particularly regards the encheiresis of this 
form, is supposed (per §.7. n° 3. and §.8.) to be 
previously and sufficiently understood both by the 
prescriber and compounder. 
§.256. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient advises (besides what is usual in this 
place, and has been often before repeated) that the 
emulsion may be kept under cold water or in a 
cold cellar, that it may not turn sower, especially 
if the quantity is to last taking for several days. 
V. §.249. and 253. And sometimes it may be pro- 
per to order the emulsion to be well shook before 
use, especially if any of the fine but unsoluble pow- 
ders are added, or when we fear the distribution 
and mixture of its parts may become unequal by 
standing. 
§.257. The USE of this form is not so universal 
as that of infusions (§.222.). But the first or true 
kind of emulsion (§.249.) makes one of the most 
pleasant medicines, and may be properly given to 
the nicest patient, when the intentions are to cool, 
ease, moisten, incrassate, afford light aliment, in- 
cline

206 Emulsions.
cline to sleep, recruit the spirits without heating 
the blood, or to qualify sharp humours, which are 
biliose, putrid or alcaline: it may be also accom- 
modated to provoke urine and sweat, but seldom 
to stool. This form may however chance to be 
pernicious to such patients as are of a cold habit, 
and subject to acidities. The latter kind of emul- 
sion, or white mixture (§.250.), is adapted to an- 
swer all the intentions for which its several ingre- 
dients (§.247.) n° 2. (2.) 250. n° 3.) are recom- 
mended by physicians; and has the reputation of 
making ’em even more penetrating and effectual by 
its liquid form. But it frequently takes in many 
ingredients which are not at all agreeable to ei- 
ther the smell or taste; and is usually thought pro- 
per for purging by stool, urine and sweat, to kill 
worms, to cleanse internal ulcers, to strengthen 
the nerves, &c. 
§. 258. For SPECIMENS of this Form, you 
have the following. 
1. Emulsio communis. 
♃. Amigd. dulc. excortic. ʒvj. 
Sem. quat. frig. rec. ℥ß. 
Papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Sach. alb. siccatiss. ℥j. 
Contundantur simul donec in pastam co- 
alescant, & dein, paulatim adde 
Aq. hord. ℔ ij. 
M. F. emuls. s. a. quæ fortiter expri- 
mendo coletur. 
S. Emuls. &c. de qua bibat adlibitum. 
2.

207 Emulsions. 
2. Emulsio balsamica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ j. 
Sperm. cet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut.  ʒijß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒjß. 
Tinct. benzoin, gtt. C. 
Syr. bals. C. 3vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat cochlear. iij omni bihorio. 
3. Emulsio anti-alcalica. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Avenœ exconic. ℥iij. 
F. cum aq. pur. q. s. emulsio, cujus ℔ jß 
admisce 
Nitri puri ʒß. 
Syrup, violar. ℥j. 
Aceti squillit. ʒij. 
S. Utatur pro potu familiari. 
4. Emulsio nutriens, demulcens, incrassans. 
ꝶ. Amigdal. dulc. excortic. ℥ij. 
Amaror.—n°.ij. 
Aquœ pur. servent. ℥x. 
F. S. a. emulsio. Colaturæ fortiter ex- 
pressæ admisce
Aq. stillat. cinnam. ℥j. 
Sacchar. albiss. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Amigdalatum, de quo capiat œger omni semihora 
cochlearium.
5. 

208 Emulsions.
5. Emulsio narcotica. 
V. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 64. 
ꝶ. Sem. papav. alb. contus. ℥ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. hord. F. emulsio, cujus 
℥x adde 
Syr. diacod. ℥jß. 
Tinct. opii cum S. V. rectis. gtt. xx. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ʒij. 
Cortic. citrei ʒx. 
S. Capiat ℥jß. omni 1/2 hora, donec incipiat leniri dolor.
6. Emulsio lubricans, diuretica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 243, 244. 
ꝶ. Semin. cardui mariœ. 
Bardanœ. 
Fœniculi ana ʒvj. 
Papaver. alb. ℥j. 
Amigdal. dulc. n°. xx. 
Infusi rad. liquorit. q. s. 
F. l. a. emulsio. Colatur ℔ iij. admisce 
Sal. prunellœ ʒij. 
Syr. papaver. alb. ℥jB. 
D. usui. 
S. Bibat omni semihora ℥ij. servetur lagena sub aqua 
frigida, aut in cella. 
7. Emulsum antihelminticum:
V. Boerh. ib. p. 229. 
ꝶ. Gumm. opoponac. ʒj. 
Vitell ovor. ʒij. 
M. s. a. dein adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Syrup, artemis. ʒjß
Ap stillat. fœniculi ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ʒj omni quadrihorio, cum regimine. 
8.

209 Emulsions. 
8. Emulsum purgans, forte, scammoneatum, ad 
hydropem. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 210. 
ꝶ. Semin. carthami ʒij. 
Scammon. pur. gr. viij. 
Contusis, assunde paulatim 
Aq. stillat. cort. aurant. ℥j. 
Tum colatis misce 
Syrup. de spina cervina ʒij. 
S. Sit pro dosi, mane. 
9. Emulsio Balsamica, ad ulcera interna, phthisin, 
gonorrhæam, paralysin. 
V.
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 197. & 247. Et 
Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. II. obs. II. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ʒiij. 
Vitell. ovor. q. s. 
Probe subactis admisce sensim 
Mellis alb. ʒiij. 
Aq. stillat. bacc. juniper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumat œger omni quadrihorio coch- 
learium, semper ante usum concutiendo lagenam. 
10. Emulsio asthmatica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔j.
Gumm. ammon. ʒij. solvatur in
Aq. hyssop. frigid. ℥iij. & adde
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. C.
Syr. balsamic. C. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Emuls. &c. Capiat cochlear, ij. sœpè in die, &
urgente paraxysmo asthmatico. 
P 11.

210 Of Mixtures. 
11. Emulsio nephritica. 
In statu renum inflmmatoria exhibenda. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ jß  
Aq. raph. comp. ℥jß. 
Nitri puri ℈ij. 
Syr. althœœ ℥ij. 
M.
S. Capiat ℥iv omni bihorio. 
Of MIXTURES for internal Use. 
§.259. MIXTURES are internal liquid 
medicines, made up of several in- 
gredients, without any preparation but barely that 
of commixing. Hence, they may be easily distin- 
guished from the infusion (§.211.), decoction 
(§.224.), expressed juice (§.235.), and emulsion 
(§.246.)preceding. 
§.260. There are three kinds of these mixtures 
in common use: (1.) Mixtura diffusissima, com- 
monly termed a julep: (2.) mixtura media, which 
is what we understand to be properly signified by 
the name mixture; and lastly, (3.) the mixtura 
contracta, which has various names given it, ac- 
cording to the particular circumstances we shall 
hereafter mention. Concerning each of these, we 
shall treat separately.
Of

211 Of Juleps.
Of JULEPS. 
§.261. A Julep (julapium, julepus recentiorum) 
is the largest and most dilute kind of 
mixture, almost pellucid, and invested with an 
agreeable colour, smell and taste; serving as a 
pleasant drink, to be taken at several doses. The 
julep of the antients, therefore, differs from that of 
the moderns in consistence; as the first was a kind 
of thin syrup. 
§.262. The MATTER or ingredients for this 
form are either such as are to receive, of else to be 
received by the former. 
1. The fluid excipient, as the basis or men- 
struum, is a thin, pellucid and pleasant liquor,
generally aqueous, serving to dilute the other 
substances. 
2. The excipenda, are, every thing capable of 
a solution in the preceding liquor (n° 1.), 
which can afford the requisite qualities and vir- 
tues of this form. 
§.263. The proper Election of both these 
kinds of ingredients (§.262. n° 1, 2.) is deter- 
mined from the requisite qualities or conditions of 
a julep. It may be therefore observed, 
1. As this form is very frequently exhibited 
as a common drink, or to be drank as a plea- 
sant vehicle after the taking of other medicines; 
we are therefore to give it, as much as possible, 
the most agreeable qualities: to make it thin, 
pellucid, and of a pleasant, dulcido-acid, or 
other agreeable taste; without any smell, but 
such as will please; and without colour, but 
such as will delight the eye, especially red. So 
that. 
P2 2.

212 Of Juleps. 
2. The excipient may be any liquor which is 
endued with an agreeable, or no colour, smell, 
and taste. As, 
(1.) Pure water, after it has been boiled: 
which is an excipient or menstruum preferable 
to others, as being more easy to be had and 
prepared, fitted to the texture of most things it 
is to receive, and not destroying or changing 
any of their virtues. 
(2.) The pleasant or inodorous and insipid 
distilled waters of the shops: as from sorrel, 
borrage, buglos, endive, lettuce, house-leak, &c. 
Tho' common water (1.) is generally prefer- 
able to these; because they acquire no agreeable 
smell or taste from the fire and vessels used in 
the process. But it may be better to use such 
as have a small tho' more delightful smell and 
taste: such as those obtained from baum, roses, 
black cherries, whole citrons, &c. 
(3.) The use ot the more pleasant and aque- 
ous infusions (§.211.) which can be readily 
made, may be also well enough permitted in 
the basis of this form: such as those made with 
the flowers of roses, violets, corn-poppies, or 
with apples, citrons, and conserves of the 
like, &c. Or, 
(4.) Some thin decoction (§.224.) of the 
like kind: as from barley, the roots of vipers- 
grass, harts-horn, figs, tamarinds, bread, &c.
Or, 
(5.) Wines: as rhenish, or any other, tart 
or sweet, French or Spanish wine; which are 
very suitable for this form as a cardiac, when 
the intention requires the animal fluids to be 
put into a little brisker motion. Or, 
(6.) The phlegm of vitriol well diluted; or 
thin whey, a little sower: but this latter is re- 
quired to be not turbid, but well clarified. Or, 
(7.)

213 Of Juleps.
(7.) Several of these (n° 1, to 6.) may be 
commodiously compounded together, for the 
basis of this form.  
3. The excipienda (§.262. n° 2.) or things 
fit to be diluted in the preceding liquors, must 
be such as are capable of an intire dissolution, 
and will also add to the pleasantness of those li- 
quors: such as, 
(1.) The stronger fort of aromatic distilled 
waters; from cinnament, pennyroyal, marjo- 
ram, rosemary, the flowers and peals of oranges, 
citrons, and sometimes wines, as at n° 2. 
(5.) unless that liquor makes the whole basis of 
the form. All which may in a manner be ac- 
counted a secundary kind of excipients. 
(2.) The sweet and tart, fresh expressed, juices 
of garden-fruits: as of cherries, currance, ber- 
berries, rasberries, citrons, oranges, pomegra- 
nates, golden pippins, &c. But when the pre- 
scriber orders juices of this kind, he should con- 
sider whether these things are in season (§.237. 
n° 7.) so as to be had fresh at that time: and 
how long they will keep good(§.242. n° 5.) 
without changing. 
(3.) Tincturœ acido-aquosœ, which are of a red 
colour; as e.g. Flor. 4. cordial. tunicœ  bellidis, 
aquilegiœ, rhœados, granor kermes, &c. which 
may, upon occasion, serve instead of the exci- 
pient (n° 2. (3.)) 
(4.) Spirituous tinctures, which are very plea- 
sant: as e cortic, cinnamom. citric aurantior. cassiœ, 
croc. &c. which are very useful when a gentle 
stimulus is required. 
(5.) inflammable or vinous spirits. simple, 
or else impregnated by distillation with-the 
smell and taste of the more pleasant vegetables: 
as roses, angelica, lavender, baum, cinnamon. 
P3 citrons 


214 Of Juleps. 
citrons, oranges, black cherries, aq. vitœ mat-
thioli, &c. which are of great use when the 
stimulus is required to be a little stronger than 
(4.). 
(6.) But the vegetable and fossil acid spirits, 
are very frequent ingredients in this form: as 
distilled vinegar, spirit of salt, and of nitre either 
strong or dulcified, the spirit and gas. of sul- 
phur, vitriol, &c. 
(7.) All sorts of officinal syrups, which are 
very pleasant, colourless, red, or turn so with 
acids, whether prepared from the juices of fruits 
(at 2.) or other parts of vegetables: as flor. aca- 
cia, rosar. violar. tunicœ, borragin. rhoead. herb. 
capillor. vener. melissœ, cort, cinnamom. citri, gra- 
nor. kermes, caryophyllor. &c. To this place 
also belong the liquors of candied fruits, the of- 
ficinal juleps, with oxymella and oxysacchara. 
(8.) Gellies and inspissated juices made from 
garden fruits; to which we may add, the gelly 
of harts-horn, as sometimes entering this form. 
(9.) Sugars: either simple and white, or else 
compounded by various artificers with other 
pleasant ingredients, and formed into elaeosac- 
chas, tablets, cakes, &c. 
(10.) Dry salts: of which enter scarce any 
but those of the neutral kind; and among these, 
nitre, fall prunell and polychrestum are almost 
the only ones. 
4. Substances in the form of powder, which 
are not soluble, are very seldom admitted into 
this form; at least, those of the grosser kind, 
never; but a few things which are light, plea- 
sant, or without smell and taste, are sometimes 
put into juleps, after they have been very ex- 
actly levigated; such are, principally, the earthy 
absorbents, as coral, pearl, harts-horn, &c. But 
even


215 Of Juleps. 
even these are to be excluded, if any acid is to 
enter the julep; for reasons at §101. 102. 
5. Conserves are hardly ever tiled here, unless 
for making a kind of infusion (n° 2. (3.)). 
6. Electuaries, extracts, tinctures, effences, 
spirits, and the like, whose considence, colour, 
smell and taste would make a julep unpleasant, 
should be excluded from this form (per n° 1.). 
Except only two or three confections of the 
more pleasant kind, as confect. alkermes. hya- 
cinthor. &c. 
7. By striving to make a julep over-pleasant 
it may be spoiled (per §.85. 100. 101.). Be 
careful therefore not to misuse either sweets or 
acids. When conserves, syrups, robs and fu- 
gar'd things enter in a large,quantity, there will 
be no need of adding more sugar. If mineral 
acids are not at hand, or not mix'd in a sufficient 
quantity, their place may be well enough supply'd 
with a vegetable acid. 
8. If you mix a mineral acid (n° 3. (6.)) 
together with the neutral salts (n° 3. (10.)), be 
mindful of what has been said of them at §.102. 
n° 12. 
9. To conclude, the young physician is ad- 
vised to study conciseness and simplicity in pre- 
scribing this form: not to compile something to- 
gether of every kind mentioned (n° 2. and 3.), 
but to select such only as are more immediately 
demanded by his intention, and are best fitted 
to mix and make this form agreeable to art, 
Those compositions are generally the most friend- 
ly to nature, which consist of but a few ingre- 
dients, (per §.29.) 
10. From what has been hitherto said, it ap- 
pears that hydrosaccharum and oxyhydrosaccarum 
are each a kind of julep.
P4  §.264.


216 Of Juleps. 
§.264. For the ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients of this form, the liquid ex- 
cipient (§.263. n° 2.) is generally put in the first 
place; next to this is subjoined any other, which 
is a secundary excipient (§.ib. n° 3 (1.)); and 
then the excipienda or substances to be diluted 
therein may be placed agreeable to §.57. n° 2. 3. 
5. But sometimes the liquid excipient is put in 
the last place: which is however not so proper 
when its basis is to be some extemporaneous decoc- 
tion or infusion per §.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.)). 
§.265. The DOSE of a julep is determined ei- 
ther by weight, as ad ℥j, ij, iij, &c. or by mea- 
sure, as ad cyathum, or for infants ad cochl. j, ij, 
iij, &c. But a julep is sometimes order’d as a sa- 
miliar drink, in which case it may be given in a 
quantity sufficient to appease the patient’s thirst; 
but even in this case it is generally better to give 
but a small quantity at a time, tho’ the draught be 
the oftener repeated, than to overload and swell the 
stomach by indulging great drinking. 
§.266. For the GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form to be made up at once, that will be more 
or less in proportion to the quantity and frequency 
of the dose (§.265.), and as thirst is more or less 
intense; it may be sent in quantities even to ℔ j, 
ij, iij, iv: but for infants, there is seldom less than 
℔ß made up at a time., Nor is the general quan. 
tity of a julep restrained like that of an emulsion 
(§.253.) from its sooner or later changing or cor- 
rupting. 
§.267. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients of this form, we shall endea- 
vour to prescribe general bounds to the quantities 
wherein they are to be taken; as
Ad

217 Of Juleps. 
Ad excipientis (§.263. n° 2.) ℔j vel ℥xij.
Excipientis secundarii (§.ib. n° 3. (1.)) ℥j, ij. 
Succorum (ib. (2.))—℥ij, iij. 
Tinctur. acido-aquos.(ib. (3.))—℥j, jß. 
Spirituoforum (ib. (4.) (5.).)—ʒij, vj. 
Syrup, brodior. julepor. rob. gelatinar. &c. (§.263. 
n° 3. (7.) (8.).)—℥ij, iij.
Confectionum (ib. n° 6.)—ʒij, vj. 
Salium (ib. n°.3. (10.).)—ʒß, j. 
Pulverum (ib. n° 4.)—ʒj, ij. 
Aceti destillati (ib. n° 3. (6.).)—℥j, jß. 
Acidorum fossilium (ib. q. s. ad gratum acorem 
gtt. xx.—ʒj.
Sacchari (ib. (9.).) q. s. ad gratum dulced. ℥j, jß. 
With regard to these several ingredients and their
proportions, besides what is said at §.263. n° 9.
it is requisite to observe. 
1. That the great diversity of indications, and 
palates, with the vast variety of other circum- 
stances in particular cases, do often make many 
and great exceptions from these rules of propor- 
tion; so as to make the difference sometimes 
very wide. Hence 
2. When the intention is mostly to increase 
the circulation and warm the habit, wine, with 
such as are aromatic and spirituous (§.263. n° 3. 
(1.) (4.) (5.) enter a julep in a much larger pro- 
portion than that here assigned in so much that 
wine often makes the whole basis,(§.263. n° 2. 
(5.)) or menstruum for the other substances. 
3. If the extemporaneous infusions or decoc- 
tion.(§.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.) are to make up the 
greatest part of the julep, they are required to 
be somewhat thinner than usual. So that the 
proportion of ℥j of the species to ℔j of the  
menstrumm

218 Of Juleps. 
menstruum will suffice. See the history of infu- 
sions and decoctions. 
4. The neutral salts (§.263. n° 3. (10.)) 
ought therefore to be added in a very small quan- 
tity, left they should nauseate the julep by their 
unpleasant gust. 
5. Large quantities of powder, rob, gelleys 
and the like, would destroy the proper con- 
sistence of a julep. 
6. For determining the proportion of the 
sweet and acid ingredients of this form, the rule 
at §.263. n° 7. is to be observed. Sometimes 
the liquid excipient or menstruum itself is in- 
clined to sweetness or acidity (§.ib. n° 2. (3.) 
(4.) (5.) (6.)), for which, there should be a 
proportionable allowance. Too much sugar 
will make a julep not only unpleasant to many 
patients, but will also attenuate the blood too 
much, and incline ’em to sweat. 
§.268. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is, 
by M. F. Julapium D. ad vitrum. But if the basis 
of the julep is to be some extemporaneous infusion 
or decoction, directions are to be first given for 
them, and then for their mixture with the rest 
(per §.219. 231.): but this is omitted when the in- 
fusion or decoction is an officinal, with whose pre- 
paration the apothecary is supposed to be suffici- 
ently acquainted. 
§.269. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.60. 261. and 265. But it may be some- 
times proper to admonish the patient to drink the 
julep warm or hot, when things actually cold will 
abate the fluidity or perviousness of the animal 
fluids. The patient is generally sufficiently desi- 
rous of himself to drink this form cold; so that 
there


219 Of Juleps. 
there is hardly ever any occasion, to give a parti- 
cular direction for that. 
§.270. With regard to the USE of this form, 
it is not only extremely pleasant to take, but is 
also serviceable in most diseases, both acute and 
chronic; which are attended with too great heat or 
chillyness, an alcalescent corruption of the humours, 
or a viscidity of them, with violent thirst, faint- 
ings, &c. It is also very well adapted for a ve- 
hicle to other medicines, to facilitate the taking of 
them, and to promote their action or operation. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Julapium refrigerans gratissimum. 
♃. Vin. rhenan. recent. ℔ß. 
Aq. rosar. damascen. ℥iv. 
Succ. aurant. sev. recent. express. ℥jß 
Syr. violar. ℥jß 
M. F. julapium.
S. Julap. cardiac. &c. de quo bibat cyathum, ad 
libitum. 
2. Julapium pectorale. 
♃. Decoct. Pectoral. ℔ ij. 
Aq. theriacal. ℥ij. 
Gumm. arab. ʒvj. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. tolut. ℥ij. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. De quo frequenter bibat haustum tepide.
3.

220 Juleps. 
3. Julapium stomachicum anodynum. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℔ß. 
Fort. 
Menth. simplic. aa ℥ij. 
Test. ostreor. pp. ʒjß.
Laud. liquid. gtt. xxx. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapiumi 
S. De quo bibat cochlear iij vel iv, frequenter, agi- 
tato prius vitro. 
4. Julapium stomachicum pepticum. 
♃. Vin. rub. gallic. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. aa ℥iv.
Fort. ℥ij. 
Syr. de menth. ℥jß. 
Sp. vitriol. q. s. ad gratam acidit.
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat cyathum urgente nausea. 
5. Julapium hystericum. 
♃. Aq. puleg. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Brion. comp. aa ℥iij. 
Syr. paeon. comp. ℥j. 
M. F. julap. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
6.

221 Juleps. 
6. Julapium cardiacum. 
♃. Aq. epidem. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Lact. alexiter. aa ℥iij. 
Margarit. pp. ʒjß. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
(1.) Aliud- 
♃. Aq. theriacal. 
Epidem. aa ℥ij. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥vj. 
Acet. destillat. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒß. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum 3tia quaque hora. 
7. Julapium diureticum.
♃. Vin. rhenan. vet. 
Aq. raphan. C. 
Petroselin. C. aa ℥iij. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. C. ℥j 
M. F. julapium.
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum, pro re nata. 
8.

222 Juleps. 
8. Julapium in frigore febris intermittentis 
conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 120. 
ꝶ. Aq. decoct. hord. ℥xxx. 
Oxymel. simplic. ℥iij. 
Aq. stillat. caryophyll. arom. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ij. omni 1/4 horœ, calidè valde. sorbendas. 
9. Julapium roborans, anti-acidum, califaciens.
ꝶ Aq. stillat. cerasor. nigror. ℥ viij. 
Pulegii ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. ℥jB. 
Vitœ matthioli ℥ß 
Margarit. ppt. ʒjß. 
Confect. alkermes ʒij. 
Elœosacchar. citri ʒiij. 
M. D. ad vitrum.
S. Julapium perlatam, de quo capiat ℥j. omni semi- 
bora in languore: aut sit pro vehiculo alterius me- 
dicamenti. 
10. Julapium ex decocto magistrali, cardiacum 
ad dolores a partu. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Hord. mund. 
Avenœ integrœ ana ℥j. 
Cum aq. decoct. spatio 1/2 horæ, ℔ iij. 
adde 
Vini rhenani ℔j. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ij.
Syrup. kermesin. ℥iß. 
M. 
S. Hujus ℥ij. superbibat singulis dosibus mixturœ ano- 
dynœ ibidem descriptœ, donec sopialur dolor.
11.

223 Juleps.  
11. Julapium specie infusi, antiphlogisticum, in 
variolis utile. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 238. & seq. 
ꝶ. Flor. papaver. errat. 
Tunicœ ana m. ß. 
Infunde cum aq. pur. calidœ ℥xx. stent 
vase clauso, calore leni, per iij 
horas. Colaturæ expressæ adde 
Spir. sulphuris per campan. gtt. xx. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒjß. 
Syr. flor. rhoead. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Bibat, quantum lubet. 
12. Aliud, spiritus excitans in gangræna a causa 
calida, temperie alcalina. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 95. 
ꝶ. Rob. ribesiorum. 
Berberis ana ℥ij. 
Spir. salis commun. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. melissœ ℥vj
Vini rhenani ℥x. 
M.  
S. Capiat ℥j. omni hora. 
13.

224 Of Mixtures. 
13. Julapium confortans in metu abortus ab in- 
commodis graviditatis, ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 217. 
ꝶ Vini rhenani ℔ ij. 
Ag. stillat. cort. citrei ℥iv. 
Tinctur. granor. kermes ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. 
Balsam. embryon. aa ℥j. 
Gelatin. corn. cerv. citrat. ℥jß 
Syrup. rubi idœi  ℥ij.
M.
S. Capiat ℥jß languore. 
Of MIXTURES. 
§.272. A Mixture properly so call’d (§.260. 
(2.)) is a kind of internal and li- 
quid composition (§.259.), somewhat thicker in 
consistence than a julep (§.261.), and much strong- 
er in proportion to its bulk; taking in all forts of 
ingredients, even the most unpleasant, and con- 
taining several doses, but not to be determined by 
drops. 
§.273. The MATTER for this form (as at 
§.262.) is two-fold; excipient, or receiving, and 
excipienda, to be received by the former.
1. The excipient may be any liquor fit for 
internal use, whose sufficient dose is not so small 
as to be determined by drops; so that both aque- 
ous, vinous, and spirituous menstruums are very 
frequently used for the excipient of this form: 
such as distilled waters, both simple and com- 
pound; decoctions, infusions, wines, &c.
2. 

225 Of Mixtures. 
2. The excipicnda, are, in general, all dry, 
soft and liquid substances, mentioned §. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3. and whatever else has been found 
serviceable by an internal use. 
§.274. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is almost wholly directed by their medicinal 
virtures. Not are we here so much under a necessi- 
ty of regarding their tenuity, pellucidity, or agree- 
ableness of colour, smell and taste, as we are in 
the election of ingredients for a julep (§.263.): 
tho' these considerations are not to be wholly ne- 
glected; especially too great thickness, which 
greatly incommodes the taking of this form. But 
we may observe, 
1. That distilled waters are more frequently 
used for the excipient than other liquors; be- 
cause some one or other of them may be chose 
suitable to almost every intention, and their 
great degree of fluidity makes them fitter for 
the reception and dilution of other ingredients. 
2. Decoctions and infusions are likewise often 
used; whose preparation is to be sometimes 
mentioned in a prescription, but is not the pro- 
per business of this place (V. §.211. and 224.): 
Tho' there are very few decoctions and infusions 
used in the composition of mixtures, but such 
as require no particular subscription or direction 
to the apothecary for their preparation (§.268.). 
But they should be such as are very thin: if they 
are a little thicker, they ought to be taken in a 
proportionably larger quantity. 
3. Substances of the powder kind, which are 
not dissolvable, being very frequent ingredients 
of this form, should not be gross, but of the 
most subtle kind; in order to prevent their be- 
ing troublesome to the patient the act of 
deglutition. 
Q 4.

226 Of Mixtures.
4. Things of the metallic kind, which have 
a very great specific gravity, ought to be ex- 
cluded from this form; especially if they are 
not capable of a dissolution in the liquor be- 
cause as they instantly subside, their distribution 
and the strength of the dose, may by that means 
be render’d very unequal; tho' this may be in 
in some measure excusable, when a mixture is to 
be taken for one dose, after it has been well 
shook. 
5. Such gums and gummose substances as af- 
ford a thick mucilage in an aqueous menstruum, 
ought to be either entirely omitted, or else en- 
ter in but small quantities: that the taking of 
this form may be render’d the more easy and 
agreeable. 
6. For the more uniform and intimate com- 
mixture of refinous and oily things with an aque- 
ous excipient, there is required the use of a sa- 
ponaceous intermedium. We therefore use the 
yolk of an egg for the more tenacious, as sper- 
maceti, the turpentines and the like; but sugar 
is sufficient for the more liquid, which are only 
used in small quantities, as the aromatic oils by 
distillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, &c. V. §.250. n° 3. 6, 7. 
7. Gum-resins, as ammoniacum, galbanum, 
&c. do usually enter the composition of mix- 
tures, after they have been first dissolved in 
wine, or vinegar. 
8. We ought to be the more cautious in these 
mixtures, not to compound things which will 
effervesce with, or preciptate each other, destroy 
each others virtues, or make some improper 
change; because their liquid form will render 
them much more liable to produce such tumultuous 
motions, and improper changes. (V. §.97. to 
103.). But there are some cases wherein the
physician

227 Of Mixtures. 
physician designedly combines such opposite sub- 
stances in mixtures, the better to answer his in- 
tention. 
9. If you endeavour to correct the colour, smell 
or taste, be mindful of what was said at §.85. 
99, 100, 101. that you may not disappoint your 
intention, nor appear ridiculous. 
10. Lastly, as in every form so in this, the 
prescriber should make his choice of ingredients 
short and just; aiming rather at conciseness and 
efficacy than number: in a manner that a pro- 
per judge may easily perceive his intention; 
otherwise, he may make rather a chaos than a 
uniform and proper mixture. V. §.29. 
§.275. For the ORDER of prescribing the se- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, it is the same as that 
to be observed in writing for a julep (§.264.); 
nor is it more constant or particular than that. 
§.276. The DOSE of this form is less than that 
of the julep (§.265.); being generally a spoon- 
ful or two, or a tea-cup full: by weight it is or- 
der’d from ʒj to ℥ß. But sometimes the dose is 
inlarged ad cyathum, or ad ℥j, ij, iij: which ob- 
tains mostly when the whole mixture is to be exhi- 
bited for one draught. Otherwise the dose may be 
determined by portions, in regard to the whole 
mixtures, as when one half, a third or a fourth part, 
order’d to be taken at a time: but we ought here 
to be cautious that the quantity do not exceed a 
convenient draught. For the rest, it may be of 
use to observe what'has been said at §.67. 
n° 4, 5. 
§.277. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, contains sometimes 
but one dose (§.276.),sometimes several: if the 
first, it is termed haustus, which should never ex- 
ceed ℥iij: if the latter, the mixture generally 
Q2 amounts 

228 Of Mixtures. 
amounts to ℥vj or viij; tho' it may by chance ex- 
ceed lb j. more or less according as the frequency 
and number of doses, and the circumstances at §.67. 
may require. 
§.278. The mutual Proportion of the seve- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, is determined as 
well from the proper consistence of the form (§.272. 
274.), as from the medicinal virtues of each ingre- 
dient, when separate or mixed, (per §.87. n° 1, 2.). 
collated with §.276, 277. Hence, 
1. If there are none but liquids to enter the 
composition, having no regard to the consistence, 
the proportion may be directed only by the me- 
dicinal virtues, in conjunction with the phy- 
sician’s intention. 
2. But when dry and soft substances are also 
to enter, the prescriber must guard against too 
much thickness (§.274.). In order to which,   
he may observe the following general rules of 
proportion for mixture, viz. 
Of the excipient (§.273. n° 1.)—℥j
Of soft substances, as electuaries, conserves, 
robs, pulps, and the like,—ʒj 
Of dry substances, as extracts, inspissated juices, 
mass of pills, powders, &c.—℈j, or jß.
Of sugar—ʒj, jss. 
or 
Syrups—ʒj, ij, iij. 
or q. s.
3. So that the quantity of soft substances may 
be advanced to ʒij, and the dry, to ʒj; when 
only one of them enters the composition of a 
mixture. 
4. But then the consistence of the fluid exci- 
pient will make some difference in the propor- 
tion: according as whether the liquor be of the 
thinner kind, as water, wine, &c. or of some 
thicker

229 Of Mixtures.
thicker infusion or decoction. (§.273. n° 1.). 
5. It should be likewise observed whether any 
liquid ingredients are received by the excipient; 
for in that case, the soft and dry substances may 
enter in a larger proportion. 
6. The proportion of saline and dry ingre- 
dients is to be deduced from their degree of 
strength, and their more or less easy dissolution: 
tho’ this form does not require an intire dissolu- 
tion of its ingredients; but when they are less 
soluble, they may be shook up in the mixture, 
like a powder, at the time of taking. 
7. For the quantity of sugar or syrups, read 
§.267. n° 6. These are sometimes prescribed in 
a much larger quantity than that assign’d at n° 2. 
as when they are intended to mix resins, balsams, 
oils, &c. with water or any aqueous menstruum; 
in which case, a greater inspissation of the mix- 
ture, will prevent the reparation of parts by stand- 
ing, which it would other wise suffer. 
8. A mixture for a single draught, will also 
admit of a larger proportion of soft and dry sub- 
stances, then when the intention may require it, 
than one for several doses. The generality of 
patients had rather put up with the thickness of 
a mixture, to have it in a smaller quantity; than 
to have it more liquid, but in a greater bulk,
or more doses. 
§.279.The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is 
order’d by M. F. Haustus, when the mixture is for 
one dose (§.277.): but if it is to be taken at se- 
veral times, it may be sufficient barely to write M. 
Afterwards, D. ad vitrum may be subjoined. And 
the phiol may be also order’d to be close stopp’d, 
when any loss or change may be apprehended 
from an admission of the ambient air. Sometimes  
Q3 a

230 Of Mixtures. 
a dry ingredient is order’d separate, in the form of 
a powder (§.106.), as (per §.242. n° 4. ult.), 
that it may be added to a quantity of the mixture 
a little before taking; In that case, we prescribe 
two forms. The same method is to be also ob- 
served, when an effervescence arising upon mix- 
ture ought to accompany the taking it, or when 
the intention may require the dose of powder to be 
larger, or more exactly determined, than is usual 
in this form. 
§.280. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient concerning the use of mixtures, may be 
sufficiently understood, in the general, from §.60. 
272. 276. and 277. Tho’ it may be sometimes 
proper to say whether it should be drank hot or 
cold (V. §.123. n° 3. (3.)) A julep may be or- 
der’d as a vehicle to be drank afterward, when the 
mixture is very unpleasant; otherwise it may be 
omitted, when nothing else requires it. When a 
powder is to be mix’d (per §.279. ult.) with it, 
the manner of compounding and taking it may be 
prescribed at discretion. 
§.281. The USE of this form is very frequent 
in practice, for as it is very easy to take, and fuits 
almost every intention, it is as often prescribed as 
the infusion (§.222.); it is rather order’d oftener: 
for it being a form so easilyand speedily prepar’d, 
it is fitted to give assistance in all sudden emergen- 
cies, as well as other cases; in so much that there 
is hardly any internal disease, but what will admit 
of being treated with this form. 
§.282. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Haustus anti-emeticus.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Succi recent, citrei ℥ß. 
Vini rhenani ℥j. 
M. ꝶ

231 Mixtures.
ꝶ. Salis absinthii ʒj.  
D. utraque seorsim. 
S. Pulverem misceat liquori, moxque in ipso actu ef- 
fervescentiœ hauriat. 
2. Mixtura anti-emetica. 
♃. Succ. limon. recent. express. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒj. 
Aq. cinnamom. fort. 
Tenuis aa ℥j ss. 
Sacchar. albiss. q. s. 
M. 
S. Mistur. stomach. &c. Capiat cochlear, iij in 
singulis evomendi conat. 
3. Mixtura anti-alcalica, saponacea, abstergens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Oxymell. squillit. ℥iij. 
Aceti squillit.  ʒij. 
Myrrhœ in aceto solutœ in tinct. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. cichorei ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. omni hora. 
4. Mixtura cardiaca, pretiosa, calfaciens,  
diaphoretica. 
ꝶ. Infus. lapid. porcini malacc. in aq. 
card, bened. fact. ℥iv. 
Vini rhenani generosiss ℥ij. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ss. 
Extract. essential. croci gtt. iv. 
Confect. alkermes ʒvj. 
M 
S. Sumat omni semihora cochlear. j. 
Q4 5.

232 Mixtures. 
5. Mixtura opiata, antacida, roborans, ad dolores
a partu. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Lapid. cancror. ʒiij. 
Corall, rubr. ʒij. 
Margarit. ppt. ʒj. 
Laud, puri gr. iij.
Syrup kermes ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cort. citrei. 
Melissœ. 
Majoranœ aa ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. 1/4 horœ, donec sopiatur dolor, 
superbibendo ℥ij. julapii ibid. descripti. 
6. Mixtura resolvens, saponacea. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rutœ  ℥xij. 
Borac. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒiij. 
Mellis puriss. ℥iij. 
M. 
Capiat ℥j. omni hora diet. 
7. Mixtura adstringens, ad hæmoptysin 
Vide Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. rhocados. 
Plantag. ana ℥iv.  
Extract. tormentiil. 
Bol. armen. levig. ana ʒj ss. 
Lap. hœmaiit. ppt. ʒj. 
Syr. Myrtin. ℥j. 
M.   
S. Capiat omni bora ℥j, concusso prius vitro. 
8.

233 Mixtures. 
8. Haustus emeticus, antimoniatus, fortis, pro 
adulto. 
R. Oxysacchar. emetic. Ludovic. 
Oxymell. squillit. ana ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥j.
M. F. haustus. 
S. Sit pro dosi. 
9. Haustus purgans, in febre intermittente utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 132. 
ꝶ. Pulver. cornachin. ʒss. 
Elix. Propriet. cum sale tart. ppt. 
gtt. xl. 
Elœosacchar. menthœ ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. menth. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Capiat mane, die apyrexiasy vacuo stomacho, 
pro dosi. 
1O. Mixtura balsamica, in gonorrhœa conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Tereb. vulg. in q. s. vitel. ov. solut. ʒij. 
Extract. rhei. 
Sal. prunell. aa ʒj. 
Syr. allhœœ & Fernel. ℥j. 
Infus. rad. glycyrrhiz. ℥x.
M. 
S. Capiat omni bihorio cochlear. j. probè concussa prius 
lagena: superbibat cyathum emulsi idonei, ibid. 
p. 246. descripti.
11. 


234 Mixtures. 
11. Haustus emeticus, communis. 
♃. Rad. ipecac, pulv. ʒss. 
Aq. lact. alexiter. ʒjß. 
Syr. violar. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora quinta pomeridiana 
bibendo copiose de decoct. hordei inter vomendum. 
12. Haustus catharticus, refrigerans. 
♃. Sails mirab. glaub. 
Mann. calabr. opt. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. aa ʒvj. 
Aq. cinndmom. ten. ℥iij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat primo mane cum regimine. 
13. Haustus nephriticus. 
♃. Ol. Amigd. dulc. rec. frigide expres. ʒvj. 
Tartar. P. D. ʒij. incorporat. adde 
Aq. raphan. C. ℥j fs. 
Syr. de mecon. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. bis, vel ter in dies repetendus. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat mane & vesperi, vel urgente pa- 
raxysmo. Quo tempore (pro re nata) insolvantur 
℈ij. pulv. è test. ovor. calcinat. 
(1.)

235 Mixtures. 
(1.) Alius
♃. Ol. lini sem. frigid. & recent. ext. ʒx. 
Lixiv. saponis gtt. xxx. exactissime 
incorporates, adde 
Syr. de althœœ ℥ß. 
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut prior. 
14. Haustus balsamicus. 
♃. Tereb. è chio ℈j. 
Bals. tolut. ℈ß 
Vitel. ovor. q. s. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℥ij. 
Syr. de 5 rad. aper. ʒvj.
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut in fronte, &c. 
15. Haustus pleuriticus. 
♃. Ol. sem. lini frigidè extract. ℥j. 
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. xxx. 
Aq. cerasor. nigror. 
Syr. bals. C. ana ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pector. &c, Capiat 6ta quaque hora.
16. 

236 Mixtures. 
16. Haustus diaphoreticus. 
♃. Aq. theriac. ʒvj. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥jß. 
Theriac. androm. ʒß. 
Spir. nitri dulc. gtt. xxx.
Syr. de mecon. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora decubitus. 
17. Haustus peruvianus. 
♃. Aq. absinth. mag. C. ℥ß.  
Flor. chamomel. simplic. ℥jß. 
Ext. cort, peruv. ʒß. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haustus febrifugus, 3tia quaque hora sumendus.
18. Haustus antipyreticus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamon. ten. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒß. 
Sp. vitriol, gtt. xx. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haust. antifebrilis: 4ta quaque hora exhibendus.
19. 


237 Of Drops. 
19. Haustus bechicus. 
♃. Aq. hyssop. simplic. ʒjß. 
Lact. ammoniac. ℥ß.
Tinct. benz. 
Sp. C. C. per se aa gtt. xxx. 
Syr. diacod. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pect. Hora somni sumendus.
20. Haustus paregoricus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Decoct. pectoral. aa ℥j. 
Nitri puri ℈j. 
Lauq. liq. gtt. xv.
Syr. de con. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. anodyn. &c. Decubitus hora sumendus. 
N. B. When draughts are not so well approved of, 
mixtures may he order’d after any of these formulœ; 
by a proportionable enlargement of the quantities to 
about three or four times as much. 
Of DROPS, or small Mixtures. 
§.283. DROPS (or mixtura contracta) are a kind 
of smaller or less bulkey, and stronger 
mixture (§.259.) than the foregoing (§.272.); 
consisting generally of substances which are spiri- 
tuous, 

238 of Drops.
tuous, or of great strength in proportion to their 
bulk, requiring to be dosed or portioned out by 
drops. As this form of medicine ows its origin 
to chemistry, so it undergoes various denomina- 
tions, as we shall presently observe. 
§.284. Therefore the MATTER or ingredients 
for this form, may be any kind of liquor which is 
fit for internal use, and is also effectual in a small 
quantity or dose: such as the stronger tinctures 
(§.221. n° 1. and §.232.) spirits of the like kind, 
essences, quintessences, elixirs, liquid balsams, na- 
tive and artificial, essential extracts, aromatic oils 
by distillation, the more strong and contracted sa- 
line liquors, &c.
§.285. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be guided by the physician’s inten- 
tion, the particular virtues of each ingredient 
(§.284.), and the mutual affinity or disposition 
of one to the other upon mixture. Nor is there 
any necessity in this form, to have so great a re- 
gard to the colour, smell and taste; the smallness 
of its dose being a sufficient recommendation. 
1. Therefore such ingredients should be select- 
ed as may agree not only in their virtues or in- 
tentions, but also mix with each other without 
any effervesence, precipitation, or other im- 
proper change. But the cautions which are re- 
quisite for this purpose, are hardly to be learn- 
ed but from chemistry. 
2. Tho’ sometimes ingredients are judiciously 
enough commixed, which do both ferment and 
destroy each other’s properties: as, e.g. acids 
and alcalies. There are some cases where, a 
neutral salt (which is at a medium between acid 
and alcaly, resulting from such mixture) is both 
more effectual and less hazardous. But even in 
these mixtures, we should be cautious not to let 
any


239 Of Drops. 
any precipitation ensue; for that is acircumstance 
hardly ever approved of in this form. 
3. Such substances as are aqueous, gummose, 
or repleat with an olive or butyraceous oil, which 
does not well unite with spirituous things; as 
also, conferves, electuaries, insoluble powders, 
and the like: these should be excluded from 
mixtures for drops, as well for their being of 
too thick a consistence, as for their ineptitude 
for an uniform mixture. 
4. The stronger resins, solid extracts and mas- 
ses of pills, are sometimes order’d in small mix- 
tures; when the intention is to purge, and the 
form but for one dose: but then sugar, syrups, 
or some officinal julep is usually added, either 
to promote the solution, or to qualify the heat 
of the spirituous menstruum. 
5. This form will admit of dry salts, if so be 
they act strongly in a small dose, and are also 
soluble in a spirituous menstruum: but of this 
kind there are hardly any, but such salts as are 
volatile, the tartarus regenerate, and a few  
others. 
6. Sometimes saline liquors are also order’d 
in this form: but if such are not to be exhibited 
separately, we ought to consider with what we 
mix them; for they frequently do not agree 
with liquors which are spirituous. 
7. The number of ingredients to be order’d 
in this form should be few: three or four are 
usually sufficient. The errors of mixture may 
be more easily avoided in a prescription of but 
few ingredients; we shall be also more sure of 
our intention, and give less trouble to the com- 
pounder. But when one ingredient or officinal 
compound will answer the intention, as is fre- 
quently the case; that may be then order’d to 
be given in drops (§.283.), without the trouble  
of


240 Of Drops. 
of mixture. There are also such a vast number 
of officinal compositions, that those who love a 
great many simples in a form, may well enough 
spare themselves the trouble of prescribing new 
extemporaneous mixtures for drops. 
8. Lastly, if drastic or very strong things are 
exhibited in this form, directions should be 
given for making the dose very exact; the men- 
duration by drops being usually left to,the pa- 
tient or his attendants. 
§.286. The ORDER or method of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is no 
other than what may be deduced from the rules 
at §.57. n° 2, 3. But when there are any ingre- 
dients of a more difficult solution order’d, as resins, 
extracts, &c. (§.285. n° 4.) these ought to be ge- 
nerally set in the first place; then the menstruum 
and other addenda may be subjoined. 
§.287. The DOSE of this form is usually deter- 
mined by a certain number of drops (§.283.) more 
or less; but seldom more than lx. Otherwise, 
small mixtures of the weaker kind may be dosed 
by cochlear. ß. vel j. and such as are purgative, to 
be taken all at one time (§.285. n° 4.) may equal 
℥ß vel j. for a dose. 
§.288. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is generally restrain- 
ed between ʒij and ℥j  or ij. But if the dose be 
large, to be measured by the spoon, and continued 
a long time, with other considerations at §.68. 
if these urge, the form may be prescribed in still 
larger quantities; especially as the nature of the 
ingredients is generally such as not to be subject to 
corrupt or change by keeping. Sometimes only 
one dose is sufficient for the intention: but if it be 
only a few drops, it cannot well be taken in this
forms;

241 Of Drops.
form; it should be rather diluted or inlarged into 
a draught, with some proper vehicle. 
§.289. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, does scarce admit of a de- 
termination, even by general rules. It is to be 
principally regulated by the physician’s indication, 
with the particular virtues and strength of each in- 
gredient, and their more or less easy solution or 
mixture; with which, the physician ought to be 
previously acquainted. Hence 
1. Such things as are more bulkey in propor- 
tion to their strength, may be order’d in large 
quantities; but less portions of those which are 
more strong or contracted: such are essential 
oils and extracts, volatile salts, balsams, &c.
Thus one thing is to be assisted, qualified and 
corrected by another. 
2. Otherwise, when the physician rather 
chuses a small dose, the more strong and effica- 
cious ingredients may be taken in an equal, or 
even a larger proportion than the weaker or 
more dilute. 
3. Such substances as can be dissolved in only 
a certain quantity by the rest, should be order’d 
in a proportion rather below than above than 
quantity; left some part should remain undis- 
solved, or the mixture be render’d over thick. 
To this head belong balsams, oils, resins, solid 
extracts, &c. 
4. The quantity of drastic or very strong in- 
gredients should be so carefully proportioned to 
the rest, as that every dose of the mixture may 
contain its due share. 
§.290. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, is usually order’d 
by M. D. ad vitrum. For what regards extempo- 
raneous infusion or decoction, that is not the bu- 
R siness

242 Of Drops. 
siness of this place, but belongs to §.211. 224.
But when the mixture is required to be made very 
exact, by triture, that may be allowed a particular 
injunction to the compounder: as is frequent in 
resins, solid extracts, and the like, after this it 
may be sometimes proper to order the mixture to 
be strained, when there are any impurities, or 
parts which cannot be wholly dissolved. The re- 
ceptacle may be order’d to be exactly closed with 
a cork and bladder, when the virtues of the mix- 
ture are very volatile and easy to be dissipated. It is 
sometimes usual to tie the phiol twice over with 
pieces of bladder, without a cork, when the dose 
is to be measured out by drops; for by that means, 
by perforating the inner bladder with a needle, 
&c. upon shaking and turning up the phiol, the 
drops may be number’d more easily, as they come 
but more slowly and regularly. 
§.291. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, has scarce any thing in 
it particular; unless that we give it the name of 
haustus or haustulus, when the whole quantity makes 
but one dose (§.288.); but if it contains several, 
it is usual to call it after the title of the most con- 
siderable ingredient; hence, the tincture, balsam, 
oil, spirit, essence, elixir, &c. are names frequent- 
ly in use; many of which, are however used pro- 
miscuously: nor do they often exactly observe the 
difference assigned by the chemist between the 
forms signified by those names. The title of drops 
may be a general one, for all whose dose is to be 
determined by that measure. A vehicle cannot 
well be omitted for taking the stronger mixtures:
one ought therefore to be chose which is agreeable 
with the form both in texture and virtues, making 
no precipitation, repulsion, dissipation, destruc- 
tion or change among the medicinal parts. The 
vehicles commonly in use, are, wine, juleps (§.261.), 
infu-

243 Drops or small Mixtures. 
ihfusions (§.211.), decoctions(§.224.), broth, 
&c. balsams, and oily drops, are best taken in su- 
gar or syrup. 
§.292. The USE of this form is Very exten- 
sive and agreeable: there are few but what like it 
for the smallness of ther dose; it being used mostly 
where a warming and stimulating power is requi- 
site, to which the ingredients for this form have 
a general aptitude: tho' there are not wanting some 
things which are given in drops for the intention of 
cooling, &c. as the acid spirits from minerals of 
various kinds, &c. 
§.293. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1. Haustulus aquam purgans, nec acriter tameri 
irritans. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 78. 
ꝶ. Scammon. syriac. puri gr. xiv. 
Spir. reginœ hungariœ ʒij. 
In mortario vitreo s. a. tritis, &c. fæces 
separatis, admisce 
Syrup, rosar. solut. cumsenn. ʒvj. 
F. haust. 
S. Capiat pro dosi. 
2. Alius; purgans, in scorbuta utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ. Pil. coch. maj. ℈j. 
Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. ʒj.
Spir. menthœ ʒj ss. 
Syr. rosar. solut. cum senn. ʒj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Hauriat. mane pro dosi. 
R2 3.

244 Drops or small Mixtures.
3. Elixir, stimulans, resolvens. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. 
Sal. volat. oleos. 
Purgans SENNERTI ana ℥ss, 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xxv. quater de die ex vino. 
♃. Liquor antipodagricus. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Alcahest. Glauber. ℥j. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Sumat cmni mane gtt. ix. ex jure vitulino. 
5. Tinctura anti-hysterica, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Tinct. succin. ʒij. 
Castor. 
Spir. sal. ammoniac. aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Sumat gtt. xxx. ex syrup. kermes in paraxysmo. 
6. Mixtura stimulans, roborans, anti-hydropica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Tinct. rad. helen. ℥j. 
Myrrh. 
Spir. matrical. ana ℥ss. 
Ol. stillat. baccar. juniper. 
Absinth. ana gtt. viij. 
M.
S. Capiat cochlear. ss. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, 
ex vino generoso. 
7.

245 Drops or small Mixtures. 
7. Tinctura cephalica. 
♃. Sp. lavendul. comp. ʒij. 
C. C. per se ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat gtt. xxx. in haustul. julap. 
8. Tinctura corroborans. 
♃. Tinctur. cortic. peruv. ʒiij. 
Elix. vitriol. mynsicht. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. lx. ter in die ex haustulo vini rubri. 
9. Tinctura hysterica. 
♃. Spir. castor. C. ʒiv. 
C. C. succin. 
Tinct. myrrhœ aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. l. in haust. julap. 5ta quaque bora, in 
& extra paraxysmo. 
10. Tinctura stomachica. 
♃. Elix. propriet. cum acido ℥ß 
Tinctur. mart. aur. ʒjß. 
Ol. cinnamom. in sacch. q. s. solut. 
gtt. iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xl. in haustulo julapii. 
(1.) Alius- 
♃. Tinct. stomach. amar. ʒss. 
Elix. vitriol. ʒjss.
M. 
S. Ut supra. 
R3 Of

246 Of Injections. 
Of the Forms of EXTERNAL MEDICINES. 
§.294. EXTERNAL FORMS (§.105.), are ei- 
ther commom to several parts of the 
body, or else proper to but one particular part. 
We shall treat first of those common to several 
parts. 
Of Common EXTERNAL FORMS. 
Of INJECTIONS. 
§.295. AN Infection (enema) is a medi- 
cated liquor, to be convey'd generally 
by means of some tube, thro' natural or preterna- 
tural apertures, into particular cells or cavities in 
the body, for various uses. 
§.296. The particular cavities (§.295.) into 
which injections are usually convey'd, are those of 
the ears, nose, eyes, mouth, anus, bladder, penis, 
uterus and vagina; not excluding wounds, absces- 
ses, sinusses and sistulæ. But as those for the mouth 
and anus, viz. glysters and gargarizms are more 
frequently used, and proper only to those parts; 
to proceed agreeable to our proposed method 
(§.294.), we shall hereafter give them a separate 
treatment. 
§.297. To the form of injections belongs the 
chirurgia infusoria, or injection of liquors into the 
blood-vessels of living animals, which became so 
considerable towards the end of the last century; 
but this practice being now almost extinct, we shall 
not here give a particular treatise thereof. 
§.298. 


247 Of Injections.
§.298. The Matter or ingredients for com- 
peting the medicated liquor(§.295.), are taken 
from infusions (§.211), decoctions (§.224.) 
juices (§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), and mixtures, 
large (§.272.) or small (§.283.). From whence 
(ex l.c.), whatever is necessary to be known on 
this head, may be readily learned. 
§.299. A proper Election of these ingredients 
(§.298.) can only be directed by a previous 
knowledge of the medicinal virtues of each, with 
proper judgment in the indication; for we here 
need not regard the colour, smell or taste, Hence 
1. There is here no occasion for the correc- 
tors (§.83 and 85.), which are so frequently 
used in prescribing and compounding internal 
forms. 
2. On the contrary, this form often takes in 
things, which, by reason of their unpleasant- 
ness and noxious qualities, are seldom or never 
applied to internal uses: such as oils infused or 
boiled, ointments, urine, henbane, and the 
strongest mercurials, &c. 
3. But we need be extremely cautious not to 
order things of too violent action for injections, 
in over large quantities; for the bibulous vasa 
inhalantia, which are open in every part, may 
transfer them immediately to the blood and 
lymph: or the vicinity and nakedness of some 
nerve, tendon or bone, may prove equally of 
as bad a consequence. 
4. Tho' this form will admit of a little thick- 
er consistence than others, yet it ought to be suf- 
ficiently fluid, and its mixture equable; both 
that it may not obstruct the small tube through 
which it is to be convey’d (§.295.), and that 
the intermix’d solid parts may not prove often- 
sive by their roughness. Therefore the dry in- 
gredients, which are not dissolvable, ought to 
R4 be

248 Of Injections. 
be most exactly levigated. There is also some- 
times occasion for a saponaceous intermedium 
(§.274. n° 6.) in this form, when oily sub- 
stances are to be intimately mix’d with aqueous. 
5. Sometimes things are order’d in this form 
which are of the considence of an ointment or 
butter, and which grow more or less solid upon 
cooling; but such things are not to be injected 
before they are sufficiently attenuated, by heat, 
or a proper menstruum. 
§.300. The ORDER or method of precribing 
the ingredients for an injection, is to be observed 
the same as in the several liquors §.298. agreeable 
to the particular nature of each, as we have before 
observed, in loc. ibid. cit. 
§.301. The DOSE of an injection is hardly to 
be limited in the general, as it differs very much 
with the size of the cavity (§.296.) into which 
it is to be injected, and the particular strength of 
the liquor or injection itself. In some cases only a 
drop or two will suffice; and then there is no oc- 
casion for a siphon or tube; as frequently happens 
in disorders of the eyes and ears. In many other 
cases, ʒj. ℥ss, j, ij, jv, or more, is injected into a 
part at a time. But most commonly, the filling
a part ’till it runs over is the proper limits of the 
dose of this form. 
§.302. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an in- 
jection to be prescribed at a time, may be easily 
deduced from considering the quantity of each 
dose (§.301.), the more or less frequent repeti- 
tion thereof, and the disposition of it to keep a 
longer or shorter time without changing, &c. 
§.303. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for composing an injection, may 
be learned from what has been said on this head 
in the histories of the several liquors (§.298.) 
to


249 Of Injections. 
to compound it, compared with the rules for elect- 
ing (§.299.) We may however observe, that an 
efficacious medicine may be used in three or four 
times a larger dose for this form, than for an
internal one. Yet we should not over-load it 
(§.299. n° 3.).
§.304. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for an injection, should be con- 
formable to the directions proper to the several 
other forms (§.298.) composing it; from whence, 
this article is to be learned. Tho' we sometimes 
add F. liquor pro injectione. The operation of in- 
jecting this form, not belonging to the apothecary, 
except in glysters, it is not the business of this 
place to treat thereof. 
§.305. The SUPERSCIPTION or direction to 
the patient for an injection, explains to him (be- 
sides the title §.60. n° 3. §.295. and 304.) what 
relates to the method of using or applying it; be- 
cause this business is generally referr’d to the pa- 
tient or his attendants, tho’ it may be sometimes 
properly assigned to a surgeon. The direction 
therefore injoins 
1. Whether the liquor is to be injected cold, 
warm, or hot. Cold injection being frequently 
pernicious to the body, is very seldom used; 
except when the intention is to repel, astringe 
or strengthen. A warmth nearest to that of a 
healthy human body, is the most serviceable 
and usual for this form, as best agreeing with 
every part. Too intense a heat is as bad as to 
inject cold, as it may scald or shrink up the 
small fibres and vessels. 
2. The injection is sometimes made barely by 
dropping the liquor into a part, when the cavity 
has an aperture large enough, and the quantity to 
be injected is but small (§.301.), requiring no 
great force to throw it in. But in the contrary 
cases,

250 Of Injections.
cases, a proper instrument is required. For this 
purpose, are used syringes of several sizes, made 
of various substances, and adapted to emissary 
tubes of various figures, according to the diffe- 
rence of the cavity and liquor to be injected. In- 
jections for the uterus and vagina are convey’d 
by an instrument on purpose, term’d metren- 
chites *; The bladder is injected by means of 
a tubulated catheter. 
3. The particular position of the patient, 
most convenient for injecting the liquor, may 
be sometimes directed; as may also that, where- 
in the patient is most likely to retain the liquor 
longest, whether by keeping the same posture, 
or by changing it after the injection. 
4. There are frequently several things to be 
observed also, after the injection; as when the 
liquor is to be retained in the cavity a certain 
time, or having performed its office, to be soon- 
er or later discharged. To this head belongs 
keeping the part at rest, its orifice closed, or the 
contained liquor in a proper agitation, &c. 
5. Lastly, we are here to direct how much 
at once, how often, at what time, and ’till 
when, &c. the injection is to be made and fol- 
lowed: the limitation of all which particulars, 
will readily appear to the physician, from his 
intention. 
6. But both the prescriber and compounder 
ought to be particularly cautious in this form, 
not to write any thing beyond the rule of secre- 
cy and decency, per §.60. n° 8. 
§.306.
* Described by SCULTETUS, in armament. chyrurg. part I. 
tab. 13. fig. 2. and tab. 43. fig. 6. 

251 Injections. 
§.306. The USES of injections are very nu- 
merous and extensive, especially in chirurgical cases, 
in all ages; being well accommodated to the in- 
tentions of absterging, diluting, mollifying, re- 
solving, easing, astringing, opening, healing, 
cleansing the solid, and washing out soft and fluid 
parts, &c. 
§.307. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Clysma auriculare, ulceri intra meatum audito- 
rium abstergendo, mundando, aptum. 
ꝶ. Urirœ homin. san. ℥iv. 
Sapon. venet. ℈j. 
Tinct. myrrh, gtt. xl. 
Mell. rofar. ʒvj. 
M.  
S. Hujus liquoris tepidi, quantum cavo capi potest, 
quotidie bis injiciatur in aurem œgram supinatam,
ac detineatur per aliquot minuta, dein aure prona 
rursus emittatur. 
2. Aliud, airi sordibus induratis obstructæ 
conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒij. 
Amaror. ʒj 
Fell. lucii piscis ʒß. 
Exacte M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Gtt. vj. ter de die instillentur auri supinatœ, de- 
tineantur gossypio immisso. Idem & antihelmin- 
ticum est. 
3.

252 Injections. 
3. Injectio ad cruorem coagulatum, extravasatum, 
diluendum. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 75. 
ꝶ. Mell. commun. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. marin. ℥ß. 
Aq. pluviœ ℥xij. 
M.  
S. Hujus tepefacti q. s. injiciatur cavo cruorem con- 
tinenti, leniterque conquassatum dein una cum cru- 
ore dilute rursus evacuetur. 
4. Emulsum digestivum ad sistulas curandas. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 93. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. ℥j. 
S. a. subactis admisce 
Mellis commun. ℥ij. 
Spir. vini commun. ℥ß, 
Aq. commun. ℥ix. 
D. 
S. Calefactum & probe mistum injice. 
5. Decoctum balsamicum, consolidans fistulam 
puram. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 94. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. hyperic. ℥iv. 
Aloes. 
Myrrhœ. 
Olibani ana ʒij. 
Coquendo leniter, mista, subige cum 
Vitell. ovor. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Calefactum parum in fistulam injice.
6.

253 Injections. 
6. Injectio detergens, ad urethram ulcere venereo 
erosam. Ibid. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Mell. rosar. ℥j. 
Aloes puriss. gr. x. 
Sal. ammon. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. fœnicul. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Liquor mundans, cujus q. s. ter, quater de die, in 
virgam, sanie pruis expressa vacuam, & pone lo- 
cum ulceratum constrictam, ope siphunculi injiciatur. 
7. Injectio ad gonorrhæam non virulentam. 
4. Aq. calc. viv. ℥vj. 
Tereb. venet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut. 
ʒß
Merc. dulc. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j.
Mell. commun. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Usurpetur liquor, per residentiam horœ minut. j. 
depurates, concusso prius vitro. 
8. Injectio ad sphacelum cavum. 
♃. Aq. calc. ℥vj. 
Tinct. myrrh. ℥ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ℥j. 
Mel. œrugin. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur calide, frequenter. 
9.

254 Injections. 
9. Injectio ad hæmorrhagiam in cavum. 
♃. Aq. ferrat. fabri ferrarii ℔ jß. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℥ij. 
Vitriol. alb. ʒjß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. & cola. 
S. Injiciatur frigide, ad cavi repletionem. 
10. Injectio confolidans. 
♃. Aq. hord. tepid. ℔j. 
Bals. tolut. (in vitel. ov. n°. j. solut.)
ʒij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur tepide, post hœmorrhagiam obturatam.
11. Injectio ad urethram inflammatam. 
♃. Aq. hord. ℥vj. 
Trochisch. alb. rhas. ʒij. 
Alum. rup. ℈ij. 
Mel. rosar. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur. lenissme tepifacta, frequenter.
Of

255 Of Aspersions. 
Of ASPERSIONS. 
§.308. AN ASPERSION (termed by the an- 
tients pasma, catapasma, diapasma, 
empasma, and sympasma), is a powder of the finer 
kind (§.106.), to be sprinkled upon external parts 
of the body for various uses. 
§.309. This powder is seldom thus used, but 
when it is of the midling or greatest degree of 
tenuity (per. §.107. n° 1. 3.); because large par- 
ticles do not spread fo well and equally, nor so 
easily adhere to a part, as when they have a larger 
surface given them by comminution. 
§.310. The Matter or ingredients, ELEC- 
TION and ORDER to be observed in prescribing 
this form, may be easily understood from compar- 
ing what has been said at §.109, 110. with the in- 
dication. For there is no material difference or 
exception to make, unless that we need not be so 
solicitous about the colour, smell and taste; but 
without any regard to the specific gravity, we 
may only accommodate all these three (matter, 
election and order) agreeable to our intention. 
Hence, many substances are used in this form, 
which are seldom or never taken into the body 
§.299. n° 2. 
§.311. The DOSE of this form is very uncer- 
tain, nor is it ever determined by weight; being 
generally limited only by the largeness of surface 
on the part, upon which it is to be sprinkled: 
Hence, it is not subject to that division which ob- 
tains at §.113. 118. 
§.312. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined upon the same condi- 
tions with those mention’d at §.301. 
§.313.

256 Of Aspersions.
§.313. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, that can only be 
deduced from a previous knowledge of the par- 
ticular nature and virtues of each ingredient, and 
their relation to the physicians intention. 
§.314. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is order’d by F. or M. F. 
pulvis: sometimes adding tenuissimus, when it is so 
required. A small card or deal box is the usual 
receptacle for this form; tho’ it is sometimes or- 
der’d to be ty’d up in a bit of coarse muslin, or 
lawn. 
§.315. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, acquaints him with the 
method of using it, which is usually performed 
only by inspersion, or sprinkling upon the part 
When it is ty’d up in a bit of lawn or muslin, it 
is then to be shook or sifted thro’ upon the part.
But if the declivity or oblique surface of the part, 
renders it less apt to receive and retain the powder 
by aspersion, it may be first strew’d upon a piece 
of linen or woollen cloth, or paper, and by that 
means be applied and held to the parts. 
The pasma, or powder for aspersion, is seldom 
order’d to be applied hot. But there are some- 
times several things order’d to be observed and 
done before and after the aspersion: as when the 
part is to-be first cleansed, rubbed, anointed, or 
bound up, &c. But these will sufficiently appear 
from every one’s indication. 
§.316. The USE of aspersions is pretty am- 
ple, being most frequently found in the hands of 
Surgeons, for the intentions of drying up, dispers- 
ing, astringing, cleansing, corroding, correcting 
acrimony, healing, &c. hence, this form is fre- 
quently required in wounds, ulcers and hæmor- 
rhages; in denudations and hurts of the bones, 
nerves and tendons; in defluctions of humours,
erysi-

257 Aspersions.
erysipelas, cutaneous disorders, &c. To this 
head we may also refer those powders which are 
applied by aspersion to persume or beautify divers 
parts of the body; sometimes called cyprus- 
powders.  
§.317. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Pulvis mundans, ad bubonem venereum 
apertum.  
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 249. 
ꝶ. Pulv. fol. siccator. scordii ℥ij. 
Vitriol, alb. ʒij. 
Aloes ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Aperto ulcert, deterso prius, inspergatur ad 
depurandum.  
2. Pulvis ad erysipelas. 
ꝶ. Pulv. erysipelatod. Mynsich. 
Flor. sambuc. siccator. ana ℥iij. 
Smalti ℥ij. 
Camphorœ ʒjß. 
Tenuiter trita M. 
S. Hujus calefacti prius q. s. loco adsecto insperga- 
tur, aut super charta cœrulea distributum parti 
applicetur & fascid leniter circumvoluta firmetur.
S 3. 


258 Aspersions. 
3. Pulvis balsamicus, ossibus, tendinibus nervis, 
nudatis conveniens. 
ꝶ. Myrrhœ ʒß. 
Olibani. 
Mastiches ana ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Colophoniœ ℥ß. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Eo conspergantur partes adfectœ, sub qualibet 
deligatione. 
4. Pulvis adstringens, ad sistendam hæmorrhagiam 
vulneris externi. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dratonis ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lapid. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis tenuissimus. 
S. Hujus q. s. inspergatur vasi vulnerato, & stupis 
alcohole calido madidis, vesicaque vel sascia circum- 
posita, firmetur. 
5. Diapasma acrimoniam obtunclens, ad in- 
tertriginem. 
ꝶ. Amyli ℥ij. 
Cretœ alb. 
Cerussœ ana ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. florent. ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Inclusus sindoni rarœ excuiiatur super parte exco- 
riata, prius detersa.
6. 

259 Of Epithems.
6. Diapasma detergens. 
(1.) ♃. Myrrhœ. 
Alöes ana ℈ij. 
Alum. ust. ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis subtillissimus. 
S. Flocculo gossipii excutiatur, super partes sordidas 
fungosas. 
(2.)—fortior. 
♃. Vitriol. alb. ʒij. 
Precipit. rubr. ʒjß. 
Alum. ust. ʒj. 
Disjunctim levigantur, & per cribra- 
tionem simul misce. 
S. Ut prior. 
7. Diapasma cicatrizans. 
♃. Colophon. nig. ʒij. 
Bals. tolut. ʒj. 
Sacch. albis. ʒvj. 
M. F. pulv. subtilis. exactissime levigando. 
S. In partibus excoriatis, ex gossipio, asperge. 
Of EPITHEMS. 
§.318. EPITHEMS are a kind of external me- 
dicines, of various consistences (but 
not like that of an ointment or emplaster), to be 
applied to the superficies of some external part of 
the body, for various intentions. When they are 
S2 to

260 Of Fomentations. 
to be applied hot, they take the name of somentum 
or fotus. 
§.319. Epithems are of a threefold consistence: 
either (1.) liquid; (2.) dry or solid; or (3.) soft 
and like a pultice. It is those of the first and se- 
cond consistence which ate properly termed epi- 
thems: the last kind is usually called malagma, 
puis or a cataplasm. We shall, for dictinction sake, 
treat of each separately. 
Of Liquid EPITHEMS. 
§.320. A Liquid Epithem, fotus or fomen- 
tation, is a simpie or compound medi- 
cated liquor, which is to be applied either hot or cold, 
by means of a proper vehicle, to some external part 
or the body; in order to make a change in the 
affected and adjacent parts, agreeable to the phy- 
sicians intention. 
§.321. The Matter or ingrediehts for com- 
posing the medicated liquor (§.320.) are, water, 
milk, wine, vinegar, spirit of wine, liquid juices, 
oil, urine, &c. either simple and by themselves, 
or variously compounded and prepared together, 
and mix'd with each other, or with other officinal 
or extemporaneous simples or compounds, of dif- 
ferent consistences: as distilled waters of all kinds, 
vinegars, oils by infusion or decoction, aromatic 
spirits, tinctures, essences, saline and lixivious li- 
quors, smith's-forge and lime water, &c. more 
particularly infusions made from these and other 
proper ingredients (per §.211.), decoctions 
(§.224), expressed juices (§.235.), emuisions 
(§.246.) and mixtures, diffuse (§.272.) and con- 
tracted (§.283.).
§.322. 

261 Of Fomentations. 
§.322. A proper ELECTION of the ingredients 
for infusions is to be deduced from the physician’s 
indication, with the structure and disposition of 
the particular part of the body to be alter’d, or 
to which infusions are to be applied, together with 
its morbid or sound state and the known nature of 
the liquor made use of. Observe therefore,
1. That what has been said in general con- 
cerning the election of ingredients for internal 
forms (§.213, 226, 237, 248, 274, 285.), 
may also take place here. 
2. But as we need not be solicitous about the 
colour, odour and taste, in this external form; 
so we need not make any addition of substances 
used for the correction of those qualities for in- 
ternal use, such as syrups, sugar, &c. 
3. Nor is a little thicker consistence usually 
disagreeable to this form: unless when it is re- 
quired to penetrate more than ordinary; for 
which, a greater degree of fluidity is generally 
preferable. 
4. The intention is often to produce a change, 
not only in the part to which this form is im- 
mediately applied, but it is also intended some- 
times to affect the viscera which are deeply situ- 
ated beneath, (§.320.). 
5. Hence, it will be most proper to select 
ingredients, whose principles and virtues consist 
of parts extremely small, volatile and penetrat- 
ing; especially when the intention is to affect 
parts internally situated, So that earths, stony 
substances, astringents, such as incrassate, and 
the like, seem to have little or no efficacy in 
them; since their grossness prevents their being 
absorbed by the small pores and vessels of the 
part, or else, by cloging up the small orifices, 
prevent their own ingress. But one may much 
more easily and effectually obtain the intention
S3 of

262 Of Fomentations.
of a striction, by the addition of aromatic and 
spirituous substances, which are more penetrat- 
ing. 
6. A regard must be also had to the nature of 
the part to which the fomentation is to be im- 
mediately applied; whether it will be injured by 
the action of oil, water, spirit, or something 
sharp; or whether one thing may not do the 
part as much harm as the other does it good.
7. For the rest, this form often takes in sub- 
stances which are seldom or never used inter- 
nally, such as the strongest preparations of mer- 
cury, and lead, with alcohol vini per se, the 
henbanes, mandrakes, nightshades, hemlocks, 
&c. 
8. But in ordering these deleterious substan- 
ces, the prescriber should be mindful, that as 
there are vasa inhalantia, very open and bibu- 
lous throughout the whole external surface of the 
body, their parts may enter the blood without 
ever passing thro' the stomach and primœ viœ. 
§.323. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of a fomentation, is to be observ’d 
much the same as that for internal forms (§.321.), 
which we have before recited. 
§. 324. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined either by the weight or measures used for 
the other internal forms. Its quantity or dose be- 
ing more or less, according to the size of the part 
to be fomented, and as the substance, by whose 
intervention it is to be applied, is more or less 
bibulous. A woollen cloth takes more than a 
linen one, and a cloth two or three times folded 
will imbibe more of the fomentation than one 
single, &c. 
§.325. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of 
this form to be sent to the patient at a time, as it 
is


263 Of Fomentations. 
is seldom less than lbss. so it is very frequently 
more than equal to ℔j, ij, iij.; according as the 
parts to be fomented are larger or smaller, and 
more or less in number; or as the vehicle is more 
or less bibulous (per §.324.); or the fomentation 
is to be continued a longer or shorter time, or is 
required to be repeated at longer or shorter inter- 
vals; or as the fomentation itself is more or less 
subject to change and corrupt, or is more or less 
easily prepared. It is, however, generally better 
to order somewhat too much than too little, espe- 
cially when the parts to be fomented are pretty 
large or numerous; left the liquor should be ex- 
pended too soon, or not hold out for the number 
of applications. 
§.326. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingrediens for a fomentation may be determined 
from what has been already said on this head (at 
§.217. 230. 241. 254. 278. 289.), compared with 
§.303. 322. It can be well ascertained, only from 
the phystcian's indication, and the known virtues 
of the ingredients: but the form being for exter- 
nal use, does not require so very exact a determi- 
nation of the proportion, as those do which are 
internal. Yet it may not be improper to observe 
the caution at §.322. n° 8. as also the consistence 
of each ingredient; left the form should become 
less penetrating, by its too great thickness. 
§.327. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is conformable to the 
same rules with those deliver’d for the composi- 
tion of internal liquid forms (§.218, 220, 231, 
242, 255, 279, 290.), from which, we'need ex- 
cept nothing but the names importing their inter- 
nal use, in the room of which others may be sub- 
stituted: as F. liquor pro epithemate vel fomento. 
But sometimes the form takes a name from the 
part to which it is to be applied; as may be seen 
S4 here-

264 Of Fomentations. 
hereafter in the external forms proper to particular 
parts (§.294.): at other times the form is in part 
denominated from the names of the ingredients; 
and hence the appellation oxyrhodon, &c. For 
the rest, the ingredients for this form are some- 
times only made up by the apothecary, in order 
to be afterwards infused or boiled for the fomen- 
tation, the remainder of the process being referr’d 
to the patient or his attendants, like as at §.218, 
220, 231: in which case, we may give it the name 
of species, or collectio. Lastly, this form does not 
require so exact a depuration, as at §.219. n° 4. 
§.231. n° 3. and 242. n° 3. 
§.328. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, indicates to him not 
only the name (per §.60. n° 3. §.230, and 327.), 
but also, 
1. The preparation: when that is not to be- 
performed by the apothecary (per §.327.).
Consult §.221. n° 2. 
2. The parts to he fomented: which are (per 
§.320, and 322, n° 4,) either (1.) external, to 
which the fomentation must be immediately ap- 
plied; or else, (2.) internal, invested by the for- 
mer, and only secundarily affected by the fo- 
mentation. (1) With regard to the external parts; 
as they are sufficiently manifest to the eye, we 
need only observe that, if they should have any 
open wound or ulcer, it may be sometimes pro- 
per to defend them first with some suitable mat- 
ter; that the crude liquor may not injure the 
excoriated parts, nor prove, by drying or sepa- 
rating the fibres or otherwise, hurtful to them. 
For (2.) the internal parts: when these are to 
be alter'd or affected by a fomentation, a proper 
external region should be first chose, agreeable 
to the different situation of the viscus, and inten- 
lion of the physician. And here, a previous 
know.


265 Of Fomentations.
knowledge of the consent of parts, or the distri- 
bution and communication of the nerves and 
blood vessels, will be of great service to direct 
the prescriber. For some intentions the fomen- 
tation is required to act more directly upon the 
affected part, as by strengthening, mollifying, 
moistening, cooling, relaxing, attenuating and 
dispersing impacted matter, &c. and then, the 
fittest external region for applying the fomenta- 
tion, will be, that which is neared the affected 
viscus, is the softest, and has tne thinnest integu- 
ments. Sometimes the intention requires a re- 
vulsion of the humours from, or a derivation of 
them to, some particular part; and in that case, 
the application should be accordingly made ei- 
ther in the upper or lower regions of the body; 
according as the viscus itself is situated, and as 
it may have a greater or less consent faith this 
or that external part of the body. At other 
times, our intention may be to affect the whole 
mass of blood, by the application of this form; 
and agreeable thereto, we pitch upon parts where 
the larged: vessels run the most exposed: as in 
the temples, neck, arm-pits, wrists, groyns, 
hams, &c. 
3. The vehicles by which it is to he applied 
(§.320.). Those most in use, are, linen or wool- 
len cloths of various colours, especially red, silk 
thrumbs, stupœ or bathing vessels, bread toasted, 
or its crumb, sponge, and dry epithems or bags 
of other ingredients, of which we shall treat 
hereafter. Sometimes the liquor is included in 
a hog’s bladder, capable of holding double the 
contents. The choice of these may be directed 
by the different intention, and nature of the 
parts to be fomented, and as one may be more 
easy to get than the other. When a great deal 
of the fomentation is to be applied at once, or 
its

266 Of Fomentations. 
its heat to be retained for a long time, for those 
purposes, woollen cloths, sponges and bathing ves- 
sels are most commonly used. A bladder, indeed, 
prevents any considerable dissipation of the li- 
quor, retains its heat, and keeps it from fouling 
or wetting any thing: but then it transmits none 
but the more subtle parts of the fomentation, to 
the affected parts, and those but very slowly. 
Hence, we may judge in what cases such a me- 
thod of application may be agreeable. If the 
region to be fomented is but thin, and does not 
require the epithem to be applied hot, or has 
no great necessity of retaining the heat, in these 
circumstances, linen cloths may do very well; 
and if a good deal of the fomentation is requir’d 
to be apply’d at once, they may be folded two, 
three, or more times together. 
4. Whether the fomentation is to he applied hot 
or cold. But this will be easily learned by the 
prescriber, from his own intention, and from 
the particular nature of the ingredients and part 
affected. When a fomentation is intended to 
attenuate strongly, to penetrate, or attract; to 
apply it hot, will then be of great service. But 
a cold application is the best for constringing 
the fibres, repelling the humours, &c. Such 
fomentations as are spirituous, or volatile, are 
fittest to be applied cold, or only warm; with- 
out the intention requires it otherwise. It may 
be also not improper to consider whether the ve- 
hicle (n° 3.) is to be first heated before it im- 
bibes any of the fomentation, or whether it may 
be more conveniently used cold. 
5. A direction for the method of retaining the 
epithem upon the parts. This is commonly ef- 
fected by proper bandages. But if the heat and 
humidity of the epithem be required to last any 
considerable time, it may be of service to bind
a 

267 Of Fomentations. 
a hog’s-bladder over the epithem, which has 
been first moistened with oil. Over that may 
be fastened a small bag full of warm sand, or an 
earthen tyle, brick, or any other body which 
will retain its heat a long time, without growing 
suddenly cold: and when the heat of such bo- 
dies is found declining and too low, they may 
be removed, and other hotter ones put in their 
place, the epithem itself remaining all the time 
upon the part. 
6. Lastly, the superscription also frequently- 
directs the time an epithem is to remain upon the 
part, how long the patient is to continue the use of 
it, at what times the application of it is to be re- 
newed, &c. Among these circumstances there 
is a great variety. Sometimes they are limited 
by the cessation or mitigation of particular symp- 
toms; as when, v. g. there is a remission of 
pain, watching, heat, cold, anguish, vomiting, 
bleeding, fainting, raving, &c. Sometimes 
they are limited by the strength of the liquor go- 
ing off; as, v. g. when it is cold, or all absor- 
bed by the vehicle, &c. They are also frequent- 
ly order’d to be used at some particular time; 
as in the morning, evening, or once or twice 
every day, or every second or third hour, &c. 
In all these cases, the physician may easily limit 
the application, by considering his particular in- 
tention, the disposition of the disease and its 
symptoms, with the nature of the fomentation, 
as being more volatile, fix’d, &c. as also, the 
vehicle (n° 3.) and apparatus being more easy 
or difficult to be had, or made. 
§.329. The USE of fomentations is very ex- 
tensive, being employ’d in most disorders whe- 
ther acute or chronic, external or internal; this be- 
ing a form well adapted to alleviate or remove many 
of

268 Of Fomentations. 
of their symptoms: and is used in various inten- 
tions, for mollifying, astringing, corroborating, 
repelling, drawing, warming, cooling, diluting, 
attenuating, opening, easing, stimulating, cor- 
recting or obtunding particular acrimony, &c. 
wherein the solids are no less affected and relieved 
than the fluids. This form is also suited to cause 
or promote almost every kind of evacuation by the 
emunctories, and is well enough adapted to pa- 
tients of all ages in general; supposing the 
dients to be carefully selected and adapted, and the 
application of them to be made at a proper time. 
These external epithems may very well supply the 
place of internal remedies, for infants, or others, 
who abhor to swallow, or cannot take physic in- 
ternally, But the application, and renovation of 
this form, is sometimes more troublesome than the 
use of internals. This form may also prove some- 
times hurtful by an improper application; as when 
it dissipates or relieves the symptoms, without re- 
moving the cause of the disease: which accident 
very frequently occurs in the use of narcotic epi- 
thems. Or the use of repellents in this form may 
prove pernicious, by constringing the vessels, and 
impacting the morbific matter, when it has not 
had a previous attenuation, or proper degree of 
fluidity; at other times, these applications may do 
harm by becoming too cold thro' a long residence, 
upon the part, when their warmth is all they can 
prove serviceable by, &c. But these accidental 
ill consequences are to be rather attributed to the 
injudicious application, than to the form itself; 
and may be very easily avoided by a skilful pre- 
scriber. 
§.330. Take the following. SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1.

269 Fomentations. 
1. Epithema aromaticum, promovens saburræ in- 
testinalis excretionem in infante recens nato. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Vitell. ovi. n°. j. 
Spir. matrical. 
Tinct. absynth. 
Aq. stillat, fœnicul. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Except a pauxillo micœ panis, stomacho applicentur. 
2. Aliud, ad nauseam ab inordinato liquidi nervosi 
motu ortam.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Aq. vitœ matthioli ℥j. 
Spir. rad. angelic. 
Carmin. sylv. 
Menthœ ana ℥ij. 
M. D. 
S. Taleola panis triticei tosti, bene irrorata his, ap- 
plicetur calidè epigastrio, super applicetur vesica
suilla oleo humectata, & dein supra hanc ligatura: 
renovetur post xij horas.  
3. Emulsum externum, anodynum, demulcens, 
leniter aperiens. 
V. Boerhi Mater. Med. p. 113. 
ꝶ. Semin. pomor. cotoneor. n°. vj. cum 
Aq. stillat. flor. rosar. 
Sambuc. aa ℥iij. 
F. s. a. Emulsio, cujus puro liquori ad- 
misce 
Spir. vini rectificat. ℥ß. 
Tinct. opii ʒij. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Parti a caustico aliove acri foris applicato lœsœ 
& dolenti cum panno linco triplicato admoveatur 
calidè: renovetur, ubi siccescii.
4. 

270 Fomentations.
4. Fomentum laxans, resolvens, paregoricum, ad 
pleuritidem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 149. 
ꝶ. Fol. malvæ. 
Bismalvæ
Parietar. ana m. ij. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Hyoscyam. ana m. j. 
Flor. sambuc. 
ChamœmeL 
Melilot. ana ℥iii. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. F. decoctum pro so-
mento 
S. Vesica stiilla hoc liquore calidissmo ad dimidias re- 
pleta, admoveatur lateri dolenti; firmetur liga- 
mine: turn super ponatur saccuius arena calidis- 
sima plenus, qui frigescens iterum calesiat, aut ei 
mox substituatur alius jam calefactus. Continuen- 
tur hœc, donec dolor remisit. 
5. Fotus antisepticus, calorem vitalem refuscitans, 
intestino per vulnus abdominis egresso conveniens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 79. 
ꝶ. Intestina pura animalis junioris q. s. 
Coq. in Aq. q. s. spatio 1/8 horæ; dein adde 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Lavendul. 
Centaur. ana m. ß. 
Fol. menth. m. j. 
Stent in infusione per 1/16 horæ. 
D. 
S. Liquor calidus cum panno laneo appicetur.
6.

271 Fomentations: 
6. Epithema anti-alcalicum, cardiacum, in gan- 
grena: ad exemplum ibid. p. 96. 
ꝶ. Herb. scordii 
Menthœ 
Summit. rutœ 
Fol. rosmarin. ana m. ß. 
Cort. cinnamom. 
Nuc. myristic. ana ʒij. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum acet. rosac. & vini
rhenan. aā ℥viij. coquantur in 
phialia alta, vitrea per 1/8 horæ. 
Liquori decantato adde 
Aq. prophylact. sylv. ℥ij. 
S. Hoc liquors imbutœ spongiolœ admoveantur paro-
tidibus, axillis, scrobiculo cordis, carpis, inguini-
bus. Taleola panis tosti eodem imbuta naribus sup- 
ponatur. Renoventur quolibet trihorio. 
7. Fotus antiphlogisticus. 
♃. Aq. benedict. ℥vj. 
Acet. vini alb. 
Sp. vin. camph. aā ℥ij. 
Sacch. saturn. 
Opii aā ʒj. 
M. F. Fotus, s. a. 
S. Ut in fronte, cum pannis linteis tepide adhibend. 
pro re nata. 


272 Fomentations. 
8. Fotus astringens. 
♃. Gall. virid. 
Cort. granator. aa ℥ß. 
Flor. rosar. rubr. m. j. 
Coque in Aq. font. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. 
Colaturæ adde Vin. rubr. ℔ ß. 
Alumen. rup. ʒij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Frigide applicetur, cum pannis 
linteis, omni 12° horœ parte renovand. 
9. Fotus discutiens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. absinth. vulg. 
Flor. chamœem. 
Sambuc. aa m. j. 
Ciner. lign. vulg. ℥vj. 
Coque in Aq. benedict. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. colaturæ 
adde 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv.
M. F. fotus.  
S. Cum pannis laneis calide adhibend. & frequenter 
renovand. 
10. Fotus emolliens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. & radit. althœœ aa ℥jv. 
Hyosciam. 
Flor. sambuc. 
Melilot. aa m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. ℥ij. 
Coque in A. font. ℔ iij ad ij. colaturæ adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Cremor. lact. recent. ℥ij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Cum pannis lintels tepide appli- 
cand. & pro re nata, renovand.
Of 

273 Of dry Epithems. 
Of dry EPITHEMS. 
§.331 EPITHEMA SICCUM, or a dry Fotus, 
is a kind of medicated powder (§.106.); 
which being generally fewed up in a cloth, is appli- 
ed to alter various external parts of the body, in va- 
rious intentions. It takes several names, according 
to the different parts of the body it is to be appli- 
ed to: as, saccus, sacculus, cucusa, cucullus, fron- 
tale, Scutum, lectulus, pulvinar, &c. 
§.332. The consistence of the powder for this 
form is hardly ever finer than the two first degrees 
(§.107. n° (2.)), tragea, and species; and this, in 
order to prevent its parts from sticking to each 
other, and from falling thro' the interstices of the 
cloth. 
§.333. The MATTER or ingredients for dry 
epithems, may be the same, in general, with those 
for the powder (at §.109. and 110.); supposing 
they are judged proper for external use, and for 
the particular intention. 
§.334. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
this form may be learned from §.111. 110. 322. 
compared with §.331. 332. But we may observe 
in brief; 
1. That the ingredients most frequently in 
use for dry epithems, are roots, barks, leaves, 
flowers, seeds; berries, spices, concreted jui- 
ces, and the officinal species compounded of 
these, &c. 
2. That this form does require equally, or ra- 
ther more (than at §.322, n° 5.), that its in- 
gredients should be such as consist of parts which 
are very volatile and penetrating; because its 
T con- 

274 Of dry Epithems. 
consistence and mode of application (§.331. and 
332.), would otherwise make them useless. 
3. That to these dry ingredients is frequently 
added some liquid epithem (§.320.); by which 
means, the substances become more useful or 
active, and the preceeding form becomes a ve- 
hicle for this (per §.328. n° 3.).
4. That chaff is generally used to dilate the 
ingredients of this form, when they are intend- 
ed for the composition of little beds or pillows. 
The same substance is also used (or rather one 
which is softer, as wool, cotton, &c.) to sepa- 
rate the parts of the medicated powder, when it 
is to compose a scul-cap, frontal, or the like 
small baggs; which are required to set easy upon 
the part, and have no occasion to be wetted 
much. 
5. That to this form belongs the use of small 
bags filled with sand; whether applied alone,
or mix'd with some liquid epithem (§.328. n° 5.): 
in cases which require a dry or moist heat to be 
preseved for a considerable time. 
§.335. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for dry epithems, may be observ'd 
the same as at §.112. of the internal powder. 
§.336. The DOSE of this form is limited by fil- 
ling the capacity of the bag, and that capacity is 
usually proportioned to the size of the hollow part 
of the body it is to be applied to. Hence, the 
dose of dry epithems is very different and undeter- 
mined. The hairy scalp of the head, the stomach, 
and the liver, commonly take up about ℥ij, iij, or 
jv: the heart, splen, and kidneys, about ℥j, jß or 
ij. and the other pans in proportion to their mag- 
nitudes. The little beds and pillows which are for 
the patient to lye upon, require a dose of several 
pounds. But we may observe, 
1.

275 Of dry Epithems. 
1. That different ages in patients, and degrees 
of extension for morbid parts, make a great varia- 
tion in the quantity or dose of these dry epithems. 
4. That these bags should not be stuffed full, 
but in a loose manner; that they may be the 
more soft, or easy, and the more readily adapt 
themselves to the form of the parts. 
§.337. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be transmitted to the patient at one time, 
is to be determined by the quantity of the dose 
(§.336.) and the number of bags to be filled. 
For very often there ate several bags to be trans- 
mitted together, which are to be either applied at 
one time to different parts, or to the same part at 
different times, alternately. 
§.338. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for dry epithems, may be determined front 
the same circumstances as at §.313. of aspersions. 
§.339. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, orders 
1. The preparation of the powder: which is 
usually performed by cutting, pounding or grind- 
ing in a gross manner (per §.332.); then comes 
mixation. Sometimes, particular ingredients, or 
all of them, are order’d to be roasted in a fry- 
ing-pan; in order to increase or change their 
medicinal virtues: but this process should not, 
however, be practiced upon ingredients, whose 
virtues consist in very volatile parts. At other 
times, the dry powders are order’d to be sprink- 
led with some efficacious liquor, before they are 
included in bags; as with spirits, oils, aromatic 
tinctures, &c. 
2. The making of the bag: where the first thing 
that offers, is, (1.) the cloth to be cut out, and 
few’d; which is commonly some thin and coarse 
linen, muslin, or silk, but seldom woollen. The
T2 nature 

276 Of dry Epithems. 
nature or disposition of the morbid part, the 
quantity or quality of the powder, the greater 
or smaller stress the bag will suffer in its appli- 
cation, the opinion of the patient, and the price 
of the cloth, &c. have each their particular 
share in determining the choice of its kind. 
(2.) The figure of the bag, which is to be adapt- 
ed to that of the morbid part, and the method 
of using it. It is customary to be in form of a 
hood, tor the hairy scalp of the head, and to be 
of an oblong-square, for the fore-head; pyra- 
midal for the heart, scutiform for the stomach. 
lunated for the liver; and to be in the form of an 
ox's tongue for the splen, round for the navel, 
&c. The little beds and pillows retain their 
usual form, being only proportion'd in their 
size. Sometimes the length and breadth of the 
bag is expressed to correspond to the morbid 
part, by a number of fingers breadths or inches: 
when at other times, mention is made only of 
the part to be cover'd, and the rest referr'd to 
the discretion of the apothecary. (3.) The num- 
ber of bags is sometimes mentioned, when there 
are several to be made at one time (per §.337.). 
3.The filling or stuffing of the bag: before 
which process, should go, when necessary, mixa- 
tion with the chaff, or an interposition of the 
cotton or wool (per §.334. n° 4.). The inclo- 
sure and fixation of the ingredients in the bag is 
usually performed by future: tho' sometimes,
barely tying or folding them up, is sufficient, 
when its stay upon the part is required to be but 
short, and its figure (n° 2. (2.)) less exact. And 
lastly the larger bags, which are not stuffed over 
tight, are frequently interfew'd or quilted; that 
the included powder may not clog together, or 
settle more to one part of the bag than to ano- 
ther.
4. 

277 Of dry Epithems.
4. But the business of all that has been hitherto 
said (n° 2. and 3.), is very often referr’d to be 
performed by the patient or his attendants; the 
preparation and exhibition (n° 1.) of the pow- 
der only, being left to the apothecary. And in 
this case the subscription barely orders P. species 
pro cucufa, sacculo, lectulo, &c. 
§.340. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides its name, 
(§.321. 339. n° 4.) also 
1. The inclosure of the species or powders; 
when they are to be transmitted loose to the pa- 
tient, by the apothecary (per §.339. n° 4.). 
But for this, the same directions take place, as 
at §. preced. n° 2, and 3. 
2. What belongs to the application of them: 
but this application of the dry epithems is usa- 
ally made either (1.) alone and dry, being ge- 
nerally made warm first. Or (2.) when they 
have been imbib’d with the medicinal virtues of 
others, to render them more active. Therefore 
the dry epithems are frequently order’d to be 
moitened with liquid ones (§.320. 328. n° 3.), 
either by maceration, aspersion or decoction with 
them; or else by imbibing the vapours of some 
proper decoction, boiling, or the dry fumes 
arising from the accension of some suffitus or fu- 
migation. Or (3.) a dry epithem may be ap- 
plied with a super-apposition of a liquid one, in 
order to retain its heat, or increase its virtues 
(per §.328. n° 3. 5. and §.334 n° 5.). What 
farther relates to the application of this form, by 
the patient may be deduced from what has been 
said at §.328; the greatest part of which may 
generally take place here. 
T3 §.341.


278 Of dry Epithems. 
§.341. The USE of this form is much the 
same with that of fomentations (§.329.). But a 
dry epithem is generally less penetrating, and more 
slow in action, unless it be mix’d with a liquid one 
(per §.340. n° 2. (2.)). Tho’ there are some cases 
where a dry heat is more useful and tolerable to the 
patient. To this form, of epithems, also belongs 
the application of live whelps, pigeons, chickens, 
&c. after they have been split in two; as also the 
omentum, intestine, and other parts of animals, 
while they retain their vital heat: to these we may 
add, bread hot from the oven, applied either alone 
or with some proper mixture, agreeable to the usual 
methods; the business of which, may be readily 
understood from the preceeding doctrine of epi- 
thems. 
§.342. For SPECIMENS of dry epithems, take 
the following. 
1. Cucufa confortans, capiti debili, frigido ca- 
tarrhis obnoxio, prosicua. 
ꝶ. Rad. angelicœ ℥j. 
Herb, majoran. 
Salviœ. 
Folior. & flor. rosmarin 
Sumit. serpill. aa m. ß. 
Semin, nigell. rom. ʒiij.
Caryophyll. arom. 
Mastiches. 
Styrac. calamit. ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. species pro cucufa, quœ gossypio exceptœ includan- 
tur duplicaturœ cuculli, & punctim intersuantur. 
Cucullo, mane & vesperi fumo ligni juniperi accensi 
imbuto, semper tegatur caput. 
2.

279 Dry Epithems. 
2. Scutum stomachicum, ad nauseam a motu li- 
quidi nervosi inordinato ortam. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Pulv. aromat. rosat. 
Diagalang. 
Diarrhod. abb. ana ℥j. 
M. 
S. Insuta sindoni applica epigastrio. 
3. Epithema ad dolores colicos a causa frigida, 
slatulenta, natos. 
ꝶ. Semin, contus. anisi. 
Cumini ana ℥j. 
Piperis ʒiij. 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Caryophillor. aromat. 
Maceris ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. Species califacientes, quœ panis adhuc a furno ca- 
lentis, transversim dissecti, superficei internœ mi- 
caceœ, inspergantur, tum spiritu vini irroratœ
sindone super extensd contineantur, & epigastrio 
vel regioni dolenti applicentur: post tres quasque 
boras sindon spiritu vini iterum humectetur. 
4. Epithema febrifugum. 
♃ . Camph. opt. ʒij. 
Sal. vol. C.C. per se ʒj. 
Cort. cinnam. pulv. 3j. 
Nuc. myristic. ras. ʒß. 
Ol. essent. chamœm. gtt. xxiv. 
M. 
S. Includantur species sacculo serico, rubro, septies re- 
duplicate & in figuram pyramidalem redacto: 
quœ in collum filo serico rubro suspensœ, circa cordis 
scrobiculum retineantur; donec ʒiij. pondere avo- 
lantur.
T4 5. 

280 Dry Epithems. 
5. Lectulus & pulvinaria roborantia, anti-rachitica. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Folior. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Filicis maris ℔ iij.
Majoranœ, 
Melissœ. 
Menthœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Meliloti. 
Trisolii odorati. 
Sambuci. 
Rosarum ana ℥ij. 
Tritis in pulverem tenucm, & mistis. 
F. Species pro lectulo & pulvinaribus. 
S. Species rohorantes, quibus cum duplo tanto paleæ 
hordei mistis, ac dein linteo immissis, fiant lectulus 
& pulvinaria, quibus incumbat œger. Defendan- 
tur autem ab humido, & sæpe exsiccentur. 
6. Epithema siccum ad hydrocelen, serum dissi- 
pans, educens. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 211. 
ꝶ. Sails marin. decrepit. siccissimi, calidi, 
tenuissime triti. q. s. 
D. 
S. Intra lintea consuta applicetur calidus: simul ac 
madescit, alius similis sacculus, priori remote, sub- 
stituatur. 
7.

281 Dry Epithems. 
7. Epithema anti-phlogisticum, ad nephritidem. 
V. H. Boerh. in Aphorism. §.997. n°. iij. 
ꝶ. Herb. parietar. m. ij. 
Flor. chamæmeli. 
Melioti. 
Sambuci ana ℥ß. 
Semin. contus. lini ℥j. 
Conscissa, tusa, tenuiter, mista, laxe im- 
missa duobus sacculis lineis, qua- 
tuor pollices longis, duos latis, 
insuantur. 
S. Sacculi renales, quorum urns horœ quadrante cum 
lacte dulci coctus, calidus, imponatur regioni lum- 
bari dolenti; firmetur ligamine: ubi refrixit, in- 
tera similiter coctus alter priori substituatur. 
8. Sacculus cordialis, excitans in languore ab inertia 
defectuve liquidi nervosi orto. 
(A.) ꝶ. Folior. recent. melissœ. 
Basilic. ana ʒiij. 
Flor. lavendul. siccator. ʒij. 
Cort. recent. aurant. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Croci britannici ʒß. 
Conscissa tenuiter insuantur sacculo, py- 
ramidali, serico, rubro. 
(B.) ꝶ. Aq. meliss. magistral. ℥ij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒij. 
Tinct. ambari ʒj.
M. D. seorsim vitro probe clauso  
S. Sacculus (A.) regioni cordis apponatur prius ir-
roratus liquore (B.): ubi exaruit iterum humec- 
tetur. 
9.

282 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
9. Epithema adstringens, in intestino recto pro- 
lapso, reducto, conveniens. 
ꝶ. Herb. anserin. 
Folior. querc. ana m. j. 
Flor. balaust. 
Gallar. quercin. ana ℥ß.
Conscissa, tusa insuantur binis sacculis 
sericis, æqualibus. 
S. Coquantur sacculi in vini rubri & aceti ana q. s. 
& calidi alternatim admoveantur ano. 
Of CATAPLASMS. 
§.343. A Cataplasm is a soft, cohesive epi- 
them (§.318, 319. n° 3.), in the 
form of pap; and of a middle consistence, between 
that of an ointment, and an emplaster; but not 
melting with heat, in its external application for 
various uses. 
§.344. The consistence of this form (§.343.) 
is generally given to it by boiling: but it is some- 
times prepared without that, bately by tritura- 
tion and mixture. Hence we have a two-fold di- 
stinction of cataplasms, into boiled and crude. 
Of CATAPLASMS by Decoction. 
§.345. CATAPLASMA COCTUM, or a pultice 
made by of such a consistence. 
(§.343.) as not to flow about, be composed 
of ingredients whose parts are very small, cohesive 
and

283 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.  
and slippery. These, being sufficiently attenuated 
and equably mixed, take the name of puls. 
§.346. The MATTER, or ingredients for this 
form is threefold: a liquor: a substance to be boiled 
therein: and accessories. 
1. The liquor to be used, may be of various 
kinds: as water, new-milk, butter-milk, whey, 
liquid juices by expression, mead, wine; vine- 
gar, simple, or compound of the shops; urine lixi- 
vium; oil by expression, infusion or decoction: 
and sometimes thicker substances are added, which 
yet melt with heat; as butter, the fat of animals, 
ointments, &c. And sometimes, an intention re- 
quires several of these to be mix’d together. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled in the liquor, 
are usually taken from the class of vegitable sub- 
stances: to which belong roots, bulbs, rinds, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds; or else 
meals, powders, inspissated juices, &c. made 
from these. The animal and mineral class of 
substances afford but few ingredients to be boil- 
ed into a cataplasm; tho’ the excrements of par- 
ticular animals, the nests of swallows, with pre- 
parations from lead, are sometimes taken into 
this form. 
3. The Accessories are usually added either to- 
wards the end of the decoction, or else mixed 
after that is over: and this, either to (1.) increase 
the medicinal virtues, their texture not being able 
to resist the action of the fire; such as the aro- 
matic waters and oils, tinctures, essences, spi- 
rits, wines, vinegars, balsams, extracts, pulps, 
electuaries, gums and resins, or gum-resins, li- 
quid or inspissated juices of vegetables, yest, 
salt, sope, with the finer aromatic powders of 
the softer parts of vegetables, e.g. of saffron, 
and the like. Or, (2.) they are added to give 
the form a proper cohesion and lubricity (§.345.): 
of


284 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
of which kind are meals, fine powders, oils, 
ointments, butter, honey, the crumb of white 
bread, the whites or yolks of eggs, mucilages, &c. 
§.347. The ELECTION of ingredients most  
proper for this form, is directed by the requi- 
site consistence and uniformity of a cataplasm 
(§.345.), in conjunction with the physician’s in- 
tention, and previous knowledge of the effects 
boiling will have upon the ingredients. Hence, 
1. The reader may consult what has been said 
at (§.322.); the greater part of which observa- 
tions are agreeable to this cohesive, as well as 
that liquid kind of epithem. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled (§.346. n° 2.), 
should be either naturally of a soft texture, or 
else apt to become so by the decoction: so that 
the harder parts of vegetables, which are less 
succulent, as woods, stalks, roots, barks, &c. 
are generally excluded from this, form: the 
more soft and succulent parts of recent vege- 
tables, being preferable to the more compact 
and dry, 
3. Bread, flower, or the finer powders of the 
parts of vegetables, are generally used to make 
a smooth pultice, like paste (§.345.). 
5. Sometimes the residuum left after boiling 
a liquid fomentation (§.321.), composes the 
matter of a cataplasm; when both a pultice 
and fomentation of the same virtues are requir- 
ed to be used at the same time. In this case 
there is seldom any occasion to repeat, or make 
a second decoction of the ingredients. 
6. The liquor (§.346. n° 1.) to boil, the ingre- 
dients for the cataplasm, should be chose agreeable 
to the physician’s intention, and texture of the 
ingredients; and be able to sustain the force of 
fire in the decoction. When the intention is to 
moisten,

285 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
moisten, mollify and relax, it is advisible to let 
the liquor be water, milk, or preparations of 
the last, with oil and unctuous substances: but 
when the design is to open obstructions, attenu- 
ate viscidities, or stimulate the small vessels, it 
may be best to use vinegar, oxycrate, urine, a 
lixivium, &c. From a combination of several 
of these with each other, will arise a new mix- 
ture, of complex virtues. It is advisable to mix 
such things, as may be lost by the fire in boil- 
ing, after that operation is over, and the cata- 
plasm made (per §.226. n° 1, 2, 3.); such are 
wines, distilled waters, inflammable spirits, aro- 
matic oils, and the like. 
6. The accessories (§.346. n° 3.) of both 
kinds, are not always necessary in this form. 
Tho’ the proper consistence, or requisite virtues, 
not found in the other boiled ingredients, may 
sometimes give occasion to make this addition. 
Hence, when a cataplasm is too fluid, and its 
mixture not sufficiently uniform; we then add 
fine powders or meals: if too dry, and not sub-
sicently pliable; we mix oils and unctuous sub- 
stances. And sometimes we add both, to increase 
the bulk of a cataplasm to a proper size. 
7. But both kinds of accessories (whether they 
be fluid, liquisiable by heat, or naturally soft and 
viscous, or of the fine powder kind) ought to 
be disposed to make a uniform and equable 
mixture. Such as are difficultly soluble, or run 
together into grumes by heat; such as e.g. re- 
sins and gum-resins, galbanums sagapenum, &c. 
ought to be first dissolved in vinegar, wine or its 
spirit, or else reduced by the yolk of an egg. 
8. Oils and unctuous substances should not be 
mix’d in all cases promiscuously. For they are 
often pernicious by obstructing the pores of the 
skin; unless they have previously undergone 
a

286 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.
a sufficient attenuation, by sope, or some proper 
menstruum. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form, 
may be the same as for a decoction (§.226. 
n° 23.). 
§.348. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
and compounding the ingredients for a cataplasm, 
is much the same as at §.227. of the internal de- 
coction. The accessories (§.346. n° 3. (2.)) ge- 
nerally come in the last place; because they are 
frequently order’d in an undetermined quantity. 
But if there are any ingredients whose parts are ex- 
tremely volatile, they should be mix’d the very 
last, after all the rest. 
§.349. The DOSE of this form is determined by 
the size of the part to be fomented; nor does it 
require to be limited by any other consideration. 
§.350. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be precribed and transmitted to the pa- 
tient at a time, may be determined from the con- 
siderations at §.325. Whence we learn, that as 
the general quantity is often equal to ℔j, ij, iij, 
or more; so it is seldom prescribed in a less quan- 
tity than ℔ss. because it would bo troublesome 
to boil. 
§.351. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredi- 
ents for a cataplasm, may be almost wholly under- 
stood from what has been said on this head at 
§.217. 230. 303. 326. We shall only add, 
1. That the ingredients to be boiled should 
be order’d in a proportion conformable to the 
physician’s intention, the particular dose (§.349.); 
and general quantity (§.350.); because the whole 
substance of, them are used in this form. For 
the rest, consult what is said at §.303. and 326.
2. The proportion of the liquor for decoction 
(§.346. n° 1.), is hardly ever limited, but is
only 

287 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
only order’d to be taken in q. s. But a less quan- 
tity is generally sufficient for this form, than 
for internal decoctions (per §.230.), for injec- 
tions (per §.303.), or for fomentations; and 
this, that a cataplasm may the sooner acquire 
its due consistence (§.343.): supposing the in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) do not require a long 
decoction in order to molify them. 
3. When oil, butter, or the softer fats of 
animals are used for the menstruum or liquor 
(§.346. n° 1.) of this form, they should be or- 
der’d in a very small proportion; left they should 
become rank and acrimonious by the heat of the 
fire. Whence, a bare maceration and contu- 
sion of them together, is generally preferable to 
boiling them. 
4. To make a farinaceous cataplasm, a still 
less proportion of liquor may suffice; because 
those ingredients(§.347. n° 4.), do well enough 
incorporate and acquire a consistence without 
much boiling. 
5. The proportion of accessories (§.346. n° 3. 
(1.) will hardly admit of limitation even by 
general bounds. Their virtues and consistences 
coming more or less near to those proper to this 
form, the quantity of ingredients to be boiled, 
and the particular intention of the prescriber, 
are to have each their consideration in order to 
determine their due proportion. If they should 
happen to disturb the due consistence (§.343. 
345.) of the cataplasm, by making it too thick 
or too thin; in that case we make use of the 
accessories at (§.346. n° 3. (2.). and §.347. 
n° 7.). 
6. The proportion of those accessories (§.346. 
n° 3. (2.)) may be determined from the quan- 
tity and consistence as well of the boiled ingre- 
dients as of the accessories (n° 5.) preceeding. 
But

288 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
But as they are not always of the same consi- 
stence, we may readily perceive that their quan- 
tities alone will not be sufficient to direct the due 
proportion. Hence, in doubtful cases, our most
expeditious method will be to add the requisite 
proportion of acceffories (§.347.n°.7.) by 
q. s. And if we have a mind to use accessories both 
of the dry and liquid kind (§.ib) we may then also 
order the proportion of one of both of them by q.s. 
§.352. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, orders the prescribed in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) to be macerated or boiled 
in the menstruum or liquor (§.ib. n° 1.); after they 
have been first comminuted by cutting, pounding, &c. 
when such preparation is necessary. But the quantity of 
maceration and boiling is determined by the ingre- 
dients being sufficiently softened, putrid, or atte- 
nuated; when they are of a gross and compact tex- 
ture; but if they are of a soft texture, and of the 
powder kind; then the degree of boiling is to be 
limited by their acquiring the consistence of paste, 
which will be much promoted by sufficiently agi- 
tating the mass with a spathula or pudding-stirer 
whilst boiling, by which means it will acquire a 
more uniform mixture, and be also prevented from 
burning to the vessel, when the quantity of liquor 
is but small. The next thing that this part of the 
formula directs, is, the beating and straining of 
the boiled ingredients, when their stalks, or more 
tough and woody parts cannot be sufficiently mol- 
lified. Lastly, the pulp or pultice being thus made, 
the accessories (§.346. n° 3.) are order’d to be 
mix’d therewith, according to their texture, ei- 
ther whilst it is still over, or after it is removed 
from, the fire. And the direction concludes, F. 
cataplasma vel puls. D. ad fictile. 
§.353.

289 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
§.353. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is pretty evident from 
§.345. and 328. This kind of epithem, a cata- 
plasm, is almost constantly applied hot; and some- 
times it is rolled up in linen, that if may not smere 
any thing. Sometimes volatile substances are mix- 
ed therewith, immediately before its application, 
as wine, spirits, tinctures, &c. which, unless they 
are in common use, should be for that purpose 
transmitted separately, to the patient, by the apo- 
thecary. When by a very frequent repetition, or 
continued use of this form, the substance of the ca- 
taplasm becomes too thick and dry, it may be con- 
venient to order a remixture with the decoction 
wherein the ingredients of the cataplasm were boil- 
ed, or some other proper liquor, hot. For the 
rest, it may be understood from consulting the 
forecited sections. 
§.354. The USE of this form is very conside- 
rable in tumours, inflammations, abscesse, gan- 
grenes, obstructions, contusions, burns, pains, 
where the fibres and small vessels are to be re- 
laxed and opened, or contracted and stimulated; 
and their fluids to be cooled, attenuated, derived, 
digested, or corrected in acrimony; and when the 
obstruction, heat, tension and pain from both, are 
to be removed: all which, may be effected by ac- 
commodating proper ingredients in this form, 
suitable to the case. 
§.355. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
U 1.


290 Cataplams by Decoction. 
1. Cataplasma emolliens, narcoticum: ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 65. 
ꝶ. Rad. altheœ ℥ij. 
Capit. recent. papav. hort. cum sem. 
n°. iv. 
Fol. recent. hyoscyam. nigr. m. ß. 
Micœ panis albi ℥iij. 
Contusis cum lact. recent. q. s. ad emol- 
litionem usque decoctis, trajectis, adde 
Olei solani ℥j. 
Farin. semin. lini. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum parti dolenti applicetur, donec re- 
mittet dolor. 
2. Cataplasma antisepticum, ad gangrænam: juxta 
exemplum H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 100. 
(A.) ꝶ. Rad. helenii ℥ij. 
Herb. tanacet. 
Absynth. 
Scordii ana ℥iij. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥jß 
Conscissa, tusa, decoque in aq. & acet. 
ana q. s. ad teneritudinem. Contusis 
dein & per setaceum trajectis admisce 
Sal. gemmœ  ℥ß. 
Ol. nardini ℥jß. 
Farin. lupinor. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
(B.)


291 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
(B.) ꝶ. Spirit. matrical. ℥iv. 
Camphorœ  ʒj. 
Concute ad solutionem usque D. seorsim 
vitro clauso. 
S. Cataplasma (A.) calidum, irroratum prius tan- 
tillo spiritus (B.) applicetur cum pannis lineis 
parti adfectœ, & vesica suilla oleo madefacta deti-
neatur: renovetur quolibet trihorio. 
3. Puls emolliens, stimulans, in pus maturans. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 90, 91. 
ꝶ. Farin. tritici. 
Lini recent, ana ℥iij. 
Cum Acet. & olei lilior. alb. ana q. s. sub 
jugi agitatione, cocta leniter, redige 
in pultis consistentiam, cui dein ad- 
misce 
Pulp. cepar. sub cinerihus assatar. ℥ij. 
Gumm. ammon. in vitell. ovi solut. ℥j.
D. ad fictile. 
S. Admoveatur calidè loco adfecto: renovetur quater 
de die: ubi arescit, tantillo butyri insulsi emol- 
liatur. 
4. Aliud simile. Ibid. p. 90. 
ꝶ. Fol. acetos. recent. m. iv. 
Butyri insulsi ℥j. 
Ad ignem leniter, parum, decoctis adds 
Fermenti panis ℥ij. 
Gumm. sagapen. in vitello ovi solut ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Ut prius. 
U2 5.

292 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
5. Cataplasma suppurans, ad bubonem venereum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Ficus molles, matures, ad ℔ß. 
Mell. recent. ℥ij. 
Galbani in vitello ovi soluti ℥j. 
F. s. a. cum aq. coquendo cataplasma. 
S. Admoveatur calidum parti affectœ, cum panno li- 
neo quadruplicato: renovetur post iv vel vj horas. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, commune. 
♃ Micœ panis albi. in 
Lact. rec. q. s. coct. & leniter ex- 
press. ℔ß. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Sev. melilot. ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepidè parti admoveatur, & pro re nata renovetur. 
7. Cataplasma refrigerans. 
♃. Pulp. pomor. coct. 
Micœ panis, in latte coct. aa ℥iv. 
Cacl. viv. in aq. rosar. extinct. ℥ß. 
Trochisc. alb. rhas. ʒvj. 
Acet. opt. vin. alb. ℥ij. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Statimpost compositionem, frigide applicetur.
8.

293 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
8. Cataplasma discutiens. 
♃. Ol. infus. sambuc. 
Nicotian, aa ℥ij. 
Camph. in tinct. opii q. s. solut. ʒjß. 
Lixiv. capital. ebullient. ℥ij. 
Misce in vitro, exactissime concutiendo, cui adde 
Furfur. tenuior. ℔ jß. 
Aq. pluv. ebullient. q. s. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidè parti applicetur, & frequenter renovetur. 
9. Cataplasma nervinum. 
♃ . Pulp, rapar. coct. & lenit. express. ℔ß. 
Rad. allii contus. 
Sem. sinapeos pulv. aa ℥ij. 
Ol. succin. empyreumat. ℥ß. 
Ung. opodeldoc ℥jß. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepide applicetur capiti, carpis, pedum plantis, 
partibus paralyticis, &c. 
10. Cataplasma bechicum, stomachicum, ad tussim 
anginosam. 
♃. Caffœ pulv. ℥jß. 
Spec. diamh. odorat. ʒjß. 
R. allii contus. rec. ℈iv. 
Axung. human. ʒiij. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. 
Hyssop. 
Succin. ana gtt. iij. 
Theriac. venet. q. s. ad consist. debit. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Sindone incluso, regioni epigastrici & circa collum, 
tepide applicetur; & fasciis laneis, hora somni; 
retineatur: post septimanam, si desit, renovetur. 
U3 Of

294 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
Of Crude CATAPLASMS. 
§.356. A Crude Cataplasm (§.344.) comes 
near to the consistence of a bolus or 
electuary (§.127. 138.), not having the softness, 
smoothness and uniformity of mixture proper to 
the boiled one (§.345.): which properties, as 
they are not always required in this form, so it does 
not always admit of them. 
§.357. The MATTER or ingredients for the 
composition of this form, is in general the same as 
for the bolus (§.128.): and are either excipiens, 
receiving; or excipienda, to be received by the 
former. 
1. The excipient must be either (1.) soft: as 
Conserves, robs, electuaries, honey, thick bal- 
sams, soft extracts, concreted juices (mollified 
in some proper liquor, and so, fitted for enter- 
ing the form of a cataplasm) sope, yest, the 
crumb of new bread, or of stale bread softened 
by maceration, butter, lard, ointments, pulps, 
the fresh dung of animals, or their soft and 
fleshy parts, with the soft and succulent parts of 
recent vegetables, beat into a past, &c. Or, 
(2.) Liquid: as wine and its spirit, vinegar, 
distiiled waters, milk, mucilages, syrups, oils, 
the whites and yolks of eggs, urine, lye, ex- 
pressed juices, and those mentioned at §.128. 
n° 3. 
2. The excipienda, to be made up with the 
preceeding, are, every dry substance, whether 
animal, vegetable or mineral, which is capable 
of being reduced into a fine powder.
§.358.

295 Of Crude Cataplasms.
§.358. The ELECTION of proper ingredients 
for this form, is to be determined by the intention 
of the physician, and other particular circum- 
stances of the form itself (§.356.); and may be 
easily understood from what has been hither to said 
on this head, for other external forms. But we 
may observe in brief. 
1. That when vegetables or their parts can- 
not be had green or fresh gathered, we may sub- 
stitute dry ones in their room, by macerating 
them in some proper liquor, as was said before 
of dry bread, (§.537. n° 1. (1.)). 
2. That fruits and bulbous roots are frequent- 
ly roasted first in the ashes, to make them af- 
ford a softer pulp in beating. 
3. That the soft substances (§.357. n° 1. 
(1.)) are frequently used alone, or with the li- 
quid excipients (ib. 2.) when they are of the 
thicker kind; without any addition of the dry 
excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). At other times, the 
dry excipienda only, are used with liquids: but 
they will then require something glutinous, or an 
addition of dry substances which become very co- 
hesive upon a mixture with liquors. Tho' it is most 
usual to compound the dry excipienda with both 
soft and liquid substances, in order to beat ’em 
up into a cataplasm. 
4. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the electuary (§.140. n° 6.). 
§.359. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form is also like that at 
§.141. 
§.360. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the same circumstances as at §.349. 
§.361. The GENERAL QUANTITY to be pre- 
scribed or compounded at once, is generally less 
than that of the cataplasm by decoction (§.350.);
U4 it

296 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
it sometimcs not exceeding one ounce, but is sel- 
dom larger than ℔j: for as the composition of 
this form may be much sooner and more easily 
made than the former, it is very often prescribed 
for in no larger a quantity than what will suffice 
for one dose: and the intention of this form will 
be oftener answer'd by such a quantity of the 
crude, than of the boiled cataplasm (§.353. 
355.). 
§.362. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for a crude cataplasm, may be deduced from 
comparing what has been said (at §.133. and 144.) 
with the medicinal virtues and consistence of those 
ingredients, which have been selected (per §.357. 
and 358.), together with the peculiar circumstan- 
ces ot the form itself (§.356.), its dose (§.360.), 
and general quantity (§.361.). To which we may 
add, 
1. That the degree of consistence (§.356.), 
is not always so constant, but that it may be 
sometimes more or less than specified; whenever 
the intention or nature of the ingredients may 
require it. When it is to penetrate deep, a 
thinner or more dilute consistence is most agree- 
able (per §.322. n° 3.), &c. Hence, the pro- 
portion of ingredients is not always observed the 
same, for the composition of this form; though 
it is, in the general, pretty much like that of the 
electuary (§.144.), or bolus (§.133.). 
2. It is very usual in prescribing this form, to 
order the excipient (whether soft, liquid, or both, 
per §.357. n° 1. (.1.) (2.)), only by q. s. or, on 
the contrary, to determine the quantity of these, 
but not that of the dry excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). 
By which means, the prescriber may be satisfy’d 
of the justness of his proportion, when he is 
under any doubt or difficulty. 
§.363.

279 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
§.363. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, or- 
ders first the contusion of the ingredients, and then 
their mixture, ut F. s. a. cataplasma, or epithema: 
for these two names have been generally used pro- 
miscuousty. Sometimes it takes a name from the 
part, to which it is to be applied: and accordingly, 
such as are to be applied to the wrists, are termed 
epicarpia, if to the forehead, frontale, &c. But 
more frequently, we only mention the part to which 
it is to be applied; especially when we refer its 
application ( viz. the spreading it upon some ve- 
hicle (§.320.), as linen or woollen cloth, silk, 
leather, wet rags, &c. (per §.328. n° 3.) to the 
apothecary; and in that case, the size and figure 
of the vehicle may be mentioned (per. §.339. 
n° 2. (2.)); tho' this last circumstance is not of 
so much moment. 
§.364. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.328. 353. and 363. consider’d with the 
particular part to be pulticed, the time and method 
of-application, &c. which have been but now ex- 
plained at §.363. The vehicle (§.ib.) or cloth 
is frequently wetted first (with some liquid epithem, 
vinegar, wine, oil, alcohol, or other proper liquor,) 
before the cataplasm is spread thereon. At other 
times this form is folded up in linen, &c. per §.353. 
that it may not smeer the parts, or dirty the pa- 
tient’s cloths, The application of it is made 
hot, warm, or cold, according to the physician’s in- 
tention, and the nature of the ingredients; but it is 
not so frequently used hot, as the boiled cataplasm. 
§.363. The USE of the crude cataplasm is much 
the same with that of the liquid epithem (§.329.) 
and boiled cataplasm (§.354.) but is not so exten- 
sive. Epispastics and vesicatories are very frequent- 
ly used in this form. The greater consistence of  
the

298 Crude Cataplasms.
the cataplasm beyond that of the liquid epithem, 
makes it generally less apt to penetrate into parts 
which are deeply situated, and is also not so easily 
dissipated: whence, it must act with a stronger and 
more lasting force upon the external parts. 
§.366. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Epicarpia antifebrilia. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Uvar. corinthiac. 
Summit. lupuli. 
Sal. marin. ana ℥ij. 
Contusa in pultem D. 
S. Excepta linteis pulsuum locis applica ad arterias, 
duabus horis ante ingruentem paraxysmum. 
2. Epithema stomachicum, roborans, pro infante. 
V. ibid. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Flaved. cort. citrei ras. ℥ß 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Vini hispanic. ʒiij. 
M. conterendo simul in mortario. 
S. Excepta mica panis adplicentur stomacho. 
3. Cataplasma adstringens, ad hæmorrhagiam 
partis externæ vulneratæ. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lap. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
Tenuissime pulverisata, mista, excipiantur 
Album. ovor. q. s. ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Exceptum id stupâ alcohole vini madidâ admoveatur 
vulneri, turn vesica vel fascia circumpositâ firmetur. 
4.


299 Crude Cataplasms.
4. Epithema molle, excitans, cardiacum: 
ꝶ. Summit. tener. recent. melissœ. 
Abrotan. aā ℥ß. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒiij. 
Caryophyll. aromat. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Cum Vini rhen. geros. tantillo. 
Contusa D. ad fictile. 
S. Extensa super pannum scarlat. vino rhenano prius 
madefactum, tepida, regioni cordis applicentur. 
5. Cataplasma acre, emolliens, stupifaciens. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 92. 
ꝶ. Fermenti panis acris ℥ij 
Sapon. venet. ras. ʒij. 
Mellis ℥ß. 
Ol. chamœmel. infus. ʒii. 
M. F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum imponatur abscessui maturo, aperiendo, 
donec integumenta macerata sensum perdiderint. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, anodynum. 
ꝶ. Micœ panis siligin. in lacte dulci ma- 
cerat. ℔ß. 
Vitell. ovor. n°. iij. 
Croci pulveris. ʒij. 
Farin. lini q. s. 
Ut conterendo F. cataplasma.
S. Cum linteamine duplicato, aut panno laneo, do- 
lerti parti applicetur calidum. 
V. §.355. Formul. ult. quam huic pertinet. 
Nota.

300 Of Humid Baths. 
Nota. To the history of epithems, which we 
have hitherto (§.318. to 366.) laid down, belongs 
also an account of AMULETS; so that those who 
approve of them, may thence deduce general di- 
rections to be observed for their prescription and 
composition. To the cataplasma crudum (§.356.) 
we may also refer the cataplasma emplastrodes ex the- 
riaca; spread upon linen or leather, and usually 
applied to strengthen the stomach and intestines. 
Of BATHS. 
§.367. A Bath is an external fluid medicine, 
in the form of a liquor, or a vapour; 
serving to wash or bathe the surface of the external 
parts of the human body: without the intervention 
of any vehicle, §.320. and 328. n° 3. 
§.368. It appears therefore, that baths are ei- 
ther humid or vaporous: and that each of these are 
either universal or particular; according as they are 
destined to act upon the surface of the whole, or 
some particular part of the body. We shall treat 
first of the humid bath. 
Of Humid BATHS. 
§.369. A HUMID BATH, balneum humidum, re- 
ceives various denominations, accord- 
ing to the different parts of the body, and methods 
used for its application. It is the universal (§.368.) 
only, which can be properly termed balneum; for 
if it reaches only halt way up, to the middle region 
of the body, or any space between the scrobiculum 
cordis, navel and thighs even down to the feet, it 
is then termed semicupium, insessio or insessum: if it
only 


301 Of Humid Bath.
only covers the feet, pedilivium; if appropriated 
to the head, capitiluvium; if to other parts, it is 
termed lavatio, lotio, and lavamentum: when it is 
poured by drops, or in a continued stream from 
above upon any part, it is then termed embroche, 
stillicidium, and impluvium; tho' this method of 
using is now become almost obsolete, except in the 
natural baths.  
§.370. The MATERIALS for this form, are,	 
all dilute medicated liquors, of what kind soever, 
suitable to the intention; but more frequently such 
as are in common use, requiring no preparation 
from the apothecary, nor any need of a prescrip- 
tion: such as simple or salt water, sope-suds, lye 
made from ashes, chamber-lye, new or sower milk 
and its whey; natural bath-waters, sweet-oil, wine, 
or vinegar and water, hydrogalum or milk and wa- 
ter, hydrelœon or oil and water, common dish- 
water made with bran, from the parts of animals, 
&c. At other times the liquors for baths are made 
of some decoctions (§.224.), infusions (§.211.), 
or mixtures (§.272.) prepared by the apothecary. 
Consult §.321. 
§.371. A proper ELECTION of the materials 
for this form, is apparent from §.299. and 322. 
We are here to have a principal regard to the me- 
dicinal virtues required, with the penetrability and 
consistence of the liquor neglecting what belongs 
to the colour, smell, &c. For the rest, we may 
observe 
1. That when a simple and common liquor 
will suffice, we should prefer that to an offici- 
nal composition (per §.29. and 31.); because 
the great quantity used in this form, would be 
otherwise too expensive for the patient. So that, 
for a universal bath (§.368.) especially, we sel-
dom 

302 Of Humid Baths. 
dom use any thing but the common liquors (at 
§.370 ): being, however, mindfull of the cau- 
tions at §.23, and 30. 
2. That when oily and aqueous liquors (§.370.) 
are used together in this form, their commixture 
is seldom required to be so intimate, as to call 
for a combination by means of sope (per §.274. 
n° 6.). 
3. That the artificial baths, made from fos- 
sils; as nitre, sea-salt, alum, vitriol, sulphur, 
quick-lime, fix'd alcalies, &c. can never pro- 
duce altogether the same effects as the natural 
baths, notwithstanding they have considerable 
uses. 
4. That the number of ingredients for this 
form, is seldom larger than for the decoction, 
§.226. n° 23. 
§.372. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form, agrees with that for 
similar internal forms; infusions (§.214.), decoc- 
tions (§.227.), and mixtures (§.264.). 
§.373. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the quantity of surface, or number of parts to be 
bathed (§.369.), in conjunction with the struc- 
ture of the bathing vessel. 
§.374. The GENERAL QUANTITY of an ex- 
temporaneous bath consists frequently of but one 
dose; especially when it is universal, or adapted 
to bathe any considerable extent of surface on the 
body (per §.369.). When it is design’d for the 
wafhing of leffer parts or members, it is ufual to 
prescribe several doses at a time: so that the ge- 
neral quantity may be easily determined (per 
§.325.). 
§.375. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, is limited by the same cir- 
cumstances


303 Of Humid Baths. 
cumstances as at §.326. compared with §.373, 
and 374. Observe also, 
1. That the medicinal virtues of the ingre- 
dients for this form, do not require to be pro- 
portioned with the greatest exactness: so that 
both the liquor and ingredients may be taken in 
a much larger proportion, than for internal li- 
quid forms of the like kind. 
2. That the liquid menstruum, used to boil 
the other ingredients, is very often prescribed 
only by q. s.
3. Otherwise, the decoction or infusion for a 
bath, may be order’d by the same proportions 
as for the like internal forms (§.217. and 230.); 
it being the best way to make them highly sa- 
turated, and to afterwards dilute them sufficient- 
ly, with more of a proper menstruum, at the 
time of using: which is a method the most con- 
venient for the composition of extemporaneous 
baths, which are very extensive or univesal; 
that we may not be obliged to have recourse to 
larger boilers or coppers than are at hand. 
§.376. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of an extempo- 
raneous bath, may be order’d like that for the com- 
position of similar internal liquid forms (§.218. 
to 220. 231. and 279.). For an exact depuration 
(per §.219. n° 4. (2.) (3.) (4.)), it does not re- 
quire it. Even the gross substances are frequently 
infused and macerated together with the menstru- 
um in the bathing-tub, or they are poured with 
their liquor into the bathing-tub, after they have 
been first boiled in a separate vessel, that they may 
serve to rub with, stand or fit upon, &c. And this 
is frequently observed, especially in large baths; 
when the ingredients are transmitted by the apo- 
thecary to be infused or boiled by the patient at 
his

304 Of Humid Baths. 
his own house (per. §.220. and 231.): in which 
case, they are often few’d up first in a linen or 
woollen bag, that they may be applied like a dry 
epithem (§.331.) to the affected parts, during the 
time of bathing, or to serve as a cushion to sit upon; 
which is very often practiced in the semicupium. 
Hence, this part of the formula concludes F. li- 
quor, vel species vel saccus, pro balneo, semicupio, 
pediluvio, &c. V. §.369. 
§.377. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be learned from 
§.60. 369. 373. and 376. compared with what 
will be suggested to the physician, from a proper 
knowledge of the doctrine of indications, and a 
legitimate use of baths and bathing: the business
of which, will not lie in a little compass; and 
cannot well be brought into this small treatise. Con- 
sult F. hoffmanni opuscul. physico-med. as also his 
Medic. ration. system. tom. iii. sect. ii. cap. x. & 
alii. 
§.378. The USE of baths is at present not very 
frequent; but among the antients they were very 
much used: nor are they only adapted for cleanly- 
ness and delicacy, but are also extremely serviceable 
for the cure of many diseases, by moistening, soften- 
ing, diluting, attracting, discussing, strengthening, 
opening, cooling, warming, attenuating, easing, 
&c. in most disorders, whether external or inter- 
nal, acute or chronic, in which, they afford very 
great benefit; tho' they are not without their ill 
consequences, when improperly used. V. id. hoff-
man. loc. cit. 
§.379. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

305 Humid Baths. 
1. Lotio mundans ad pediculos planos pubis. 
Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. tom. II. p. 488. 
ꝶ. Mercur. sublimat. corros. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iv. 
M. D. 
S. Tantillo hujus liquoris laventur mane & vesperi 
loca infestata. 
2. Semicupium emolliens, anodynum, calculo ure- 
teribus impacto prosicuum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphor. §.1426. 
ꝶ. Rad. althœœ  ℥iv. 
Herb. 5. emollient. aa m. iv. 
Flor. papaver. errat. 
Chamœmel. ana m. ij. 
Conscissa infuantur laxè sacculo lineo qua- 
drato, ad lumborum dimensionem apto. 
D. 
S Saccus coquatur per 1/2 horam in lact. dulc. duplo 
aquœ diluti q. s. Liquori calenti insideat œger ab 
umbilico ad crura usque, sacco lumbis supposito, 
manè & vesperi per horam. Interea bibat decoc 
tum diureticum H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 244. de- 
scriptum. 
3. Lavamentum ad intertriginem. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥x. 
Tinct. benzoin. ℥j. 
Sacch. Saturn. ʒj.
M. 
S. Lac virginale, quo partes excoriatœ, prius aqua 
abstersœ, laventur.
X 4. 

306 Humid Baths. 
4. Balneum ad glutinosa, pro infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 44. 
ꝶ. Summitat. rutœ. 
Sabinœ. 
Absynthii. 
Tanaceti. 
Chamœmeli ana m. iij. 
Cum Aq. decoct pintis xij. admisce 
Sapon. venet. ℥jv. 
Sal. sarmento. ℥j. 
F. Liquor pro balneo. 
S. Huic tepido insideat œger collo tenus mane & ves- 
peri per 1/2 horam: post fricetur corpus universum 
cum pannis laneis, siccis, calidis. 
5. Pediluvium refrigerans, paregoricum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. salicis. 
Malvœ. 
Lactuc. 
Nymphœœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. rhoead. m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. n°. vj. 
Nitri ℥ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, mistis, F. species pro 
pediluvio. 
S. Species cum aq. pluv. q. s. coquatur, sub finem ad- 
dendo aceti vini pint. j. Decoctum tepidum sit pro 
pediluvio, cui insideat œger ad crura usque per ho- 
ram, vespere: egressus ad somnum se componat.
6. 


307 Of Vaporous Baths.
6. Balneum emolliens, antisepticum, ad go- 
norrhæam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Fol rec. rutœ. 
Scordii. 
Malvœ. 
Aliiariœ ana m. ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. & expressis ad ℔ ij. adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Spir. vini comm. ʒvj. 
S. In hoc tepido virga & scrotum immergantur ter 
quaterve de die, spatio 1/2 horœ: dein panni lanei
eodem decocto immersi, & expressi omni applicentur 
pubi, scroto, perinœo. 
Of Vaporous BATHS. 
§.380. A Vaporous BATHS. balneum vaporo- 
sum (§.368.), is an external medicine 
adapted to answer some intention of the physician, 
by directing and applying its Fumes or vapours to 
the surface of some external part of the body; or 
else by conveying and drawing them, together 
with the air, into various cavities of the body, 
thro’ their particular apertures. 
§.381. The preceding vapours or fumes (§.380.), 
do either exhale (1.) spontaneously, by the action 
of the natural heat of the atmosphere, and are, 
termed smelling-bottles, balls, &c. which we shall 
explain hereafter; because they require a previous 
knowledge of several things, concerning which, 
We have not yet treated, or (2.) the effluvia are 
X2 drove

308. Of Humid Vapours. 
drove out by means of fire: and of these we intend 
to treat first. 
§.382. These last kind of exhalations (§.381. 
(2.)), are expelled either from liquors, or else from 
dry ingredients: the first of which, we shall call 
humid vapours; but the last, dry fumes, fumigation, 
suffitus or suffiment. And both of them are distin- 
guished like the humid bath (§.368.) into uni-
versal, applied to the whole body, or particular to 
some one part. We shall first consider the humid 
vaporation, or moist vapours. 
Of Humid VAPOURS. 
§.383. THE MATTER of humid vapours may 
be any liquor that is capable of being 
reduced into medicinal vapours by the force of fire: 
of which kind are, common water, milk or its 
whey, wine or its spirit, vinegar, and urine; to- 
gether with the liquid preparations and composi- 
tions of the shops, distilled waters, tinctures, essen- 
ces, elixirs, spirits, and the like: to these we may 
add, infusions (§.211.), mixtures (§.272. and 
283.), and more efpecially decodions (§.224.) com- 
pounded from the above-mention’d officinal liquid 
forms. 
§.384. In order to make a proper ELECTION
of the ingredients for this form, we are directed 
to observe (besides what has been so often repeat- 
ed under this head for other external forms) that 
1. The vapours are expelled from the ingre- 
dients (§.383.), either by accension, setting ’em 
On fire; or by ebullition, keeping them boiling 
over a fire: hence, the one or the other degree 
of heat is requisite, according as the medicinal 
virtues are more or less volatile.
2. 

309 Of Humid Vapours.
2. The prescriber should therefore consider, 
in the first place, which of those kinds of heat 
(n° 1.) he is either desirous or capable of using; 
that he may afterwards adapt the choice of his 
ingredients thereto: for from the same ingredi- 
ents, different vapours will arise, according 
as which of those different degrees of fire (n° 1.) 
are used. 
3. Hence, if the vapours are to be raised by- 
boiling, which is generally the case; those li- 
quors and ingredients will be added and used in 
vain, whose medicinal virtues cannot be elevated 
by the heat of an ebullition. Astringents there- 
fore, thick extracts made by decoction, with the 
more fix’d parts of animal and mineral substan- 
ces, &c. are unfit for this purpose. The best 
ingredients for this end (whether animal, ve- 
getable or mineral) are, all those, which upon 
boiling with water, afford distilled water, spirits 
or oils, of some strength *. And tho’ emol- 
lient, relaxing and easing virtues seem to be al- 
together fixed; yet they are in some measure ca- 
pable of an elevation, in the vapours of boiling 
liquors. 
4. Hence we also find, that those decoctions 
(§.226. n° 1, 2, 3, 15.) abounding with vola- 
tile parts, may be safely used under this form, 
tho' they cannot be properly exhibited for inter- 
nal uses; supposing their virtues are drove off 
in vapours by boiling. 
5. When various liquors and ingredients are 
to be mixed together in this form, we should 
consider their mutual affinity or actions upon each 
other, and the effects consequent thereon; which 
are to be learned from chemistry. We are by 
X3 that
* Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. vol. II. proc. I. XV. &c.

310 Of Humid Vapours.
that art taught, that a mixture of two substances, 
in themselves fix’d, emits volatile vapours; and 
on the contrary, that volatiles become fix’d, 
barely by mixture with other substances which 
are fix’d, or even volatile. Thus the fix’d sal 
ammoniacum becomes volatile by the addition of 
quick lime, or a lixivious salt, the acid part of 
nitre and common salt, becomes volatile by add- 
ing oil of vitriol to them, &c. The volatile 
acid spirits of nitre, common salt, and vinegar, 
become fixed upon an addition of alcalies; whe- 
ther saline volatile, saline fixed, or earthy ab- 
sorbent, &c. This, however strange, may be 
relied upon for true. 
6. Lastly, being mindful of the great pene- 
trating force possessed by the vapours elevated by 
fire, we should be cautious not to let them dis- 
appoint our intention. 
7. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the internals, at §.383. 
§.385. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients, has also nothing peculiar in it. 
§.386. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined by weight or measure, but is usually limited 
by the length of time assigned for the evaporation: 
so that, either the whole general quantity of the 
liquor is exposed to evaporation by the fire at one 
time, or only a certain part thereof, supplying the 
consumption by a gradual addition of more, as the 
other evaporates. But sometimes, the dose is re- 
strained to a few drops; as when we use nothing 
but precious oils or essences, to correct the dis- 
agreeable smell of any place. 
§.387. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined from the quantity of sur- 
face which is to afford vapours, the degree of fire, 
with the length of time and frequency of evapora- 
tion:

311 Of Humid Vapours. 
tion: so that ℔j, ij, iij, and more, is frequently 
order’d to be compounded and transmitted to the 
patient at a time. But when the dose is to be only 
a few drops (per §.386.), a scruple or a dram 
may be enough to order at once. 
§.388. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form, is apparent from what has been 
hitherto said on this head for external forms of the 
like nature, §.303. 326. The proportion of the 
menstruum to that of the ingredients to be infused 
or boiled, is frequently prescribed by q. s. 
§.389. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
liquid bath (§.376.). Nor does the liquor for a 
vaporous bath require to be more exactly depurat- 
ed, than barely by decantation from the fœces. 
The ingredients for this form are very often trans- 
mitted to the patient by the apothecary, in order 
to make the decoClion and evaporation before the 
patient at one and the same time (per §.384. n° 3.). 
And sometimes the species are included in a small 
bag, that they may be applied hot to the parts af- 
fected, after the vaporation is over. The subscrip- 
tion may therefore conclude, F. liquor, vel species, 
vel sacculus, pro vaporario vel balneo vaporis. 
§.390. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to the 
patient contains, besides what is common to other 
forms under this head, the method of using or ap- 
plying these vapours, which is various in different 
intentions. 
1. When the vapours are intended to correct
some disagreeable smell, putrifaction, contagion 
or pestilential state of the air, &c.; the liquor is 
then to be flung on live coals in the infected 
place, or diffused thro' the air in vapours, by 
evaporating over the coals, in an open and broad 
vessel, making the liquor boil.
X4 2. 

312 Of Humid Vapours.
2. If the vapours are to be applied immedi- 
ately to the surface of some part of the patient’s 
body; in that case, there are various contrivan- 
ces to contain and direct the vapours: as domicils, 
seats, coffers, and vaulted machines; wherein 
the patient either stands, fits, or lies down, with 
his body naked, or only cover’d with fine linen, 
and his head let thro' an apperture, that his or- 
gans of sense and respiration may enjoy the com- 
mon air, unmolested by the vapours or fumes: 
the patient’s body thus confined, receives the 
vapours expelled from the liquor, either by ac- 
cension, as in burning spirit of wine, or else by 
evaporation, with or without boiling, or by the 
extinction of red hot flints, either by throwing 
the liquor upon them, or them into the liquor, 
supplying others when they are grown cold. 
3. If the vapours are to be received into some 
small particular cavity of the body, as the ears, 
nose, mouth, fauces, bronchia, vagina, uterus, 
&c. or convey’d to the surface of a particular 
limb; it is usually done by means of a funnel, 
or a blanket, &c. 
4. What is to be done before, in, and after 
the vaporation, together with its continuation, 
repetition, &c. may be deduced from the phy- 
sician’s indication in particular cases. 
§.391. The Use of vaporations is not inconsi- 
derable, being much like that of the liquid bath 
(§.378.); and is in some cases much more effec- 
tual: upon which head, consult the excellent Hoff- 
man, in opusculo Physico-medica, & in Medic. Ra- 
tion. System. Tom. III. sect. II. cap. X. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1.

313 Humid Vapours,
2. Vaporarium particulare, emolliens, resolvens, 
ad anginam inflammatoriam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 137. 
ꝶ. Acet. sambuc. 
Rosar. 
Calendul. ana ℥j. 
Aq. stillat. sambuc. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Vapor calidus hauriatur infundibuli ope in fauces. 
2. Balneum vaporosum universale, nervinum, 
antiparalyticum. 
Conf. H. Boerh. Aphorism. §.1068, 1069. 
ꝶ. Herb. marjoran. 
Menth. 
Mari syriac.
Fol rec. cochlear. 
Summit. rec. rutœ. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Baccar. juniper. ana m. j. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, digere in phiala alta 
chemica, cum aceti & spirit. vini vulg.
ana q. s. per diem & noctem. 
S. Liquor bene calidus, una cum speciebus, in ollam 
effusus, reponatur in loculum fornicis sudatorii,
ac silicibus candentibus injectis fervens detineatur. 
Sub fornice decumbens æger, ingesto prius decocto at- 
tenuante, vapores excipiat nudo corpore, ut sudet 
per 1/2 horam aut ultra, si vires ferunt. Sudoribus 
detersis corpus fricetur pannis laneis, calidis, sic- 
cis, villosis. 
3.

314 Humid Vapours, 
3. Vapor suaveolens ad fœtorem loci corrigendum. 
ꝶ. Essent. amhar. ʒij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophillor. gtt. xxv. 
Cinnamom. gtt. x. 
M. D. vitro probe clauso. 
S. Hujus aliquot guttulœ prunis non fumantibus, aut 
silici ignito, instillentur. 
4. Vaporatio emolliens, resolvens, ad gravem adi- 
tum a causa frigida. 
ꝶ. Folior. absinth. 
Rosmarin. 
Summit. rutœ ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. ℥ß. 
Baccar. laur. 
Semin. cumin. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, insue sacculo. 
D. 
S. Coquatur sacculus in q. s. vini: vapor ope infun- 
dibuli immittatur auri affecta, mane & vesperi 
per 1/2 horam: post sacculus ipse e dococto exemptus, 
valdse calens, auri applicetur, firmetur. 
5. Vapor antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Aceti vini vulg. pint. ij. 
Sal. marin. 
Nitri. 
Ol. vitriol. vulg. ana ℔ß. 
Aq.purœ pint. j. 
M.
S. Immissa in ollam fictilem vitreatam, repandam, 
super prumas reposita, in limine domus aut cubiculi 
kniter evaporent.
6. 

315 Of Fumigations.
6. Vapor hæmorrhoidalis, anodynus, discutiens. 
♃. Summit. hyoscyam. 
Solan. vulg. 
Cicut. ana m. j. 
Aq. fontan. ℔ij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv. 
Ol succin. rect. ℈ij. 
M. 
S. Ebulliantur simul, sub sedile aperto cubiculario, 
& vapores dirigantur partibus affectis mediante 
tubo conico, donec sopiantur hœmorrhoides cœcœ, 
tumentes. 
7. Vapor swaveolens cubicularius. 
♃. Aq. omn. flor. Batean. ℥j.
Odorifer. ejusd. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Evaporentur in limine cubiculi, per ollam fictilem 
calidam vel potius œolipilam. 
Of FUMIGATIONS, 
§.393. A SUFFUMIGATION, or suffitus, is the 
fumes arising from a dry medicine, 
suspended in the air, and elevated there by accen- 
sion, or an intense heat; being afterwards con- 
ducted to the surface of some external part, or in- 
ternal cavity of the body, to answer some medicinal 
intention. 
§.394. The chief MATERIALS for this form, 
are, all dry substances, which, being either vola-  
tile

316 Of Fumigations. 
tile or inflammable, are capable of exhaling me- 
dicinal fumes by the force of fire. Hence, the 
most numerous ingredients are afforded by the 
solid parts of vegetables, their concreted juices, 
resins, gums, gum-resins, dry balsams, &c. From 
animals are taken musk, civet, castor, dry’d gall, 
&c. Among the mineral class of substances the chief 
are cinnabar, amber, ambergriss, sulphur, nitre, 
sal ammoniac, &c. 
§.395. The FORM for the ingredients of a 
suffumigation, is, either that of a dry powder, or a 
dry and cohesive or solid mass. 
1. The powder kind generally consists of par- 
ticles much grosser than the tragea (at §.107. 
n° 2.): and is to be either sprinkled on coals of 
fire, call’d fumigating powder; or else to be 
smoaked in a pipe after the manner of common 
tobacco, and may be called medicated tobacco. 
2. The solid or cohesive kind, consisting of 
smaller particles, have them more intimately 
mix’d, and being joined together by some pro- 
per glutinous substance, are made into various 
figures: as troches or pastills, little sticks, can- 
dles, little cyprus birds, and small or large 
torches; which being cast upon live coals, rubb’d 
upon hot bricks or tyles, or set on fire, do emit 
the required fumes. 
§.396. A proper ELECTION of the ingre- 
dients (§.394.) for these medicines, is to be de- 
duced from the physician’s intention, and the de- 
sired form (§.395.). 
1. Hence, the fumigations used for pleasure, 
or to correct the disagreeable smell of a cham- 
ber, &c. do consist only of perfuming ingre- 
dients; such as spices, frankincense, styrax, 
labdanum, benjamin, ambergriss, and the like. 
But when the intention is to warm and strengthen 
relaxed

317 Of Fumigations. 
relaxed parts, or to dissipate, and dry up su- 
persfluous humidities; the best things for those 
purposes are, resins, gums, gum-resins, warm, 
and partly aromatic substances joined with no 
pleasant smell, with amber, salt ammoniac, &c. 
Hysteric cases are best; suited with fœtid fumes, 
from castor, galbanum, asascetida, &c. Putri- 
faction and animal stenches are best resisted and 
overcome by the fumes of nitre and sulphur. 
Venereal cases are usually opposed by fumiga- 
tions with cinnabar. 
2. The parts of vegetables used in this form, 
are those only, which are naturally of a more so- 
lid and dry texture, or else made so by art; 
otherwise, they would be unfit for fumigations, 
as being not easily inflammable. 
3. But this form often takes in the stronger 
kind of aromatic and spirituous liquors, which 
are not watery, but inflammable; as effences, 
spirits, oils, liquid balsams, &c. but then they 
are to be mix’d in a small quantity, in propor- 
tion to the other dry ingredients: agreeable to 
the rules of composition for the internal solid 
forms at §.110. n° 3. 174. n° 1. (4.). 
4. The basis of the medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.) is usually made of the leaves of common 
tobacco, compounded with a less quantity of the 
leaves of other herbs, flowers, rinds or barks, 
spices, &c. Concreted juices which melt by 
heat, are excluded hences, because they obstruct 
the cavity of the tube or pipe, thro' which the 
smoak is to be drawn. 
5. In order to make up the latter kind or so- 
lid mass (§.295 n° 2.) for this form, we ge- 
nerally use a mucilage of gum tragacanth, a so- 
lution of labdanum, the turpentines, or ether li- 
quid balsams.  
6.

318 Of Fumigations. 
6. Sometimes, sugar is added in the compo- 
sition of pastills, small candles and cypruss birds; 
in order to augment and diffuse the other ingre- 
dients, and make them burn more briskly. 
7. That some of these fumigations may keep 
on fire when once kindled, and burn with a ser- 
pentine sparkling, as cyprus candles and. birds 
ought; for this purpose, their composition usu- 
ally takes in a sufficient quantity of powder of some 
burnt wood, which is of a soft and light texture; 
as is the wood of willows, and lime-trees; or 
even fine small-coal-dust, being mix’d in a due 
proportion with the other ingredients, renders 
them very apt to take and spread the fire. 
8. In making the larger kind of torches or 
candles, bees-wax is generally used for the basis 
of the composition. 
9. In using all fumigations (especially when 
they are to be immediately applied to the sur- 
face of the body, or convey’d into some of its 
cavities) the physician should consider the quan- 
tity of the skin’s surface to be in contact with the 
fumes, and its degree of porosity (per §.322. 
n° 8.), with the exceeding tenerity and sensi- 
bility of the internal skins: and lastly, he should 
be previously acquainted with the action and ef- 
fects of naked fire, in separating the principles 
and changing the parts of mix’d bodies; that 
he may be thereby enabled to make a judicious 
election of substances fit for his intention, which 
while they are doing good to some parts may 
do no harm to others. Cinnabar, can never 
excite a sallivation, whilst it retains the form of 
that concrete; but being converted into an atte- 
nuated mercury by naked fire, its effects are dif- 
ferent. It may be asked whether the parts of 
benjamin, amber, &c. arise the same in fumes 
as


319 Of Fumigations.
as they were in the concrete? consult chemistry, 
and you will find the contrary. 
10. Many shops are frequently ready furnish’d 
with fumigations of all forms; so that, when 
these are adapted to the intention, the prescriber 
may spare himself the trouble of an extempo- 
raneous composition: and as some of them may 
be required to keep a considerable time without 
much decaying, it may be proper to intermix, 
or else varnish them over with some suitable li- 
quid substance (at n°.3.). 
11. The number of ingredients permitted to 
enter the composition of this form, is frequently 
very great; but a concise brevity is always more 
commendable (per §.29.). 
§.397. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be observed the same as 
in the internal powders (§.112.), and troch 
(§.176.). 
§.398. The DOSE of this form varies with dif- 
ferent circumstances, being seldom determined by 
weight, but generally by number, or measure. 
Of the powder kind (§.395. n° 1.) drach. i, ij.
or pugill. i, ij. may be order'd to be cast upon the 
live coals at a time. The dose of the tobacco kind 
of fumigation (§.ib.), is usually limited by the 
capacity of the conic bowl of the tobacco-pipe. 
The troches, candles, and little birds (§.ib. n° 2.), 
may be prescribed to be burnt, or laid upon the 
live coals in n°.j, ij, iij. &c. The small sticks 
(§.ib.) may be rubbed upon a hot iron or tyle, 
in any quantity. And the dose of troches or wax- 
candles to be consumed at once, may be determin- 
ed by their number, and the length of time, 
§.399. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be prescribed and compounded at once, 
is to be deduced from the use of it being continu’d 
a


320 Of Fumigations. 
a longer or shorter time, and the repetition of it 
being more seldom or frequent. Such as are more 
troublesome in their composition and configura- 
tion, as are the generality of the latter or consi- 
stent kind of this form (§.395. n° 2.), should 
hardly be prescribed for in a less quantity than ℔ß.
at a time; unless when you order such as are kept 
ready in the shops (§.396. n° 10.). consult §.180. 
§.400. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for fumigations, is to be collected from a 
consideration of the physician’s intention, with 
the virtues and price of the materials, and the re- 
quisite consistence and form (§.395.) of the com- 
position, compared with what has been said be- 
fore (at §.87 to 92. 115. 181. 303. and 396.). 
1. The more precious and efficacious perfumes 
are generally taken in much the lesser propor- 
tion, in comparison of the other ingredients, 
whether they are intended for the composition 
of the powder or consistent kind of fumigation 
(§.395. n° 1. 2.). The same also obtains with 
regard to the liquid substances (§.396. n° 3.), 
2. In ordering a medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.), the leaves of common tobacco are usu- 
ally taken in above three, four, or six times a 
larger quantity, than the other ingredients. 
3. The proportion of glutinous substances 
(§.396. n° 5.) to form the composition into 
troches, candles, &c. (§.395. n° 2.) is usually 
prescribed by a. s: the proportion of bees-wax, 
to form troches or candles is (§. 396. n° 8.) usu- 
ally order’d to be double or triple the quantity 
of the other ingredients. 
4. The proportion of fine small-coal-dust 
(§.396. n° 7.) may be also order’d by q. s. or 
it may be order’d in equal or double the quanti- 
ty of the other ingredients. Sugar may be also 
order’d in much the same proportion. 
§.401.

321 Of Fumigations. 
§.401. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, orders 
comminution in a gross manner, mixation, &c. 
ut F. pulvis pro suffitu, nicotiana medicata, &c. or 
working the materials up with something glutinous, 
ut F. trochisci, haculi, aviculœ, cypriœ, tœde, &c. 
Nor is it usual to determine the quantity of each 
of these, either by size or weight. When officinal 
fumigations are order'd (§.396. n° 10.), it is 
evident that there will be no occasion for a sub- 
scription, unless it be to order the form to be mix- 
ed or varnished over with liquid substances. At
last, may be added D. ad chartam, scatulam, &c. 
§.402. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily understood 
from what has been said on this head at §.60. 393. 
395. and 398. But observe, 
1. That all the kinds of fumigations (§.395. 
n° 1, 2.) are frequently used only to correct or 
perfume the air; and indeed the sticks, candles, 
Cyprus, birds and troches serve no other inten- 
tion: but the powders and troches are often used 
to fumigate various parts of the body, by an im- 
mediate communication of their vapours. There- 
fore, as the first kind are used only for pleasure, 
or to prevent contagious disorders, there is hard- 
ly any necessity of observing an exact regimen 
during the use of 'em. 
2. When this form is to fumigate the body, 
the generality of what has been said at §.390. 
n° 2, 3. does also here take place. But the 
fumes are always evaporated by live coals, or a 
naked fire. Sometimes, handkerchiefs, hoods, 
and bags are fumigated (per. §.340. n°2. (2.)) 
before they are applied to the body. At other 
times, linen or woollen cloths are well impreg- 
nated with the dry fumes, in order to foment or 
rub particular parts. 
Y §.403.

322 Fumigations.
§.403. The USE of fumigations has been in a 
great measure already hinted, viz. for pleasure, as 
well as preventing and curing disorders; the latter 
by strengthening, discussing, warming, drying, &c. 
There are many who have a great esteem for fumi- 
gations of cinnabar in venereal cases; tho' they 
cannot be always apply’d with safety (§.396. n° 1. 
and 9.). Nor do I think other sharp or adust 
fumes convenient for weak lungs. 
§.404. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Suffitus antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Myrrh. 
Flor. sulph. 
Nitri ana ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis grossus. 
S. Hujus pugill. aliquot in punas inspersis vaporen- 
tur cubicula aut œdes. 
2. Suffitus roborans, discutiens, ad hydrocelem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Oliban. 
Sarcocollœ. 
Resin. guajac. ana ℥ß. 
Camphorœ ʒß. 
Mastiches ℥j.
Salis ammoniac. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Hujus incensi vapor excipiatur nudo scroto, dein 
panni lanei sumo hoc vaporosi, calidi, superappli- 
centur. 
3.

323 Fumigations. 
3. Nicotiana suaveolens, cephalica. 
ꝶ. Herb. siccat. salviœ. 
Majoran. 
Thymi. 
Flor. siccat. lilior. convall. 
Rosar. ana pug. ij. 
Cort. cascarill. 
Cinnamom. ana ℈j. 
Comminutis crassiuscule admisce 
Fol. nicotianœ concissor. ℥iv. 
Turn consperge tantillo essent. ambar. 
D. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sugatur fumus mane, dimidiam 
aut integrant horam ex fistula tabacaria. 
4. Suffumigium anti-rachiticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Mastiches. 
Succin. ana ℥j. 
Lign. aloes. 
Cort. cinnam: ana ℥ij. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒj. 
Contusa, mista, cum terebinth, venet. q. s. 
redigantur in trochiscos. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Trochisci pro suffitu, quorum aliquot prunis injici- 
antur, dum ante ignem sedet insans nudatis inferi- 
oribus. Pannis etiam laneis, siccis, horum fumo 
imbutis, fricetur spina dorsi, abdomen, &c. manè 
& vesperi. 
Y2 5.

324 Fumigations. 
5. Baculi swaveolentes ad fornacem. 
ꝶ. Labdan. 
Styrac. calamit. 
Benzoin. ana ℥j.
Bals. tolutan. ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. flor. 
Cort. cascaryll. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. lign. rhod. gtt. xx. 
Cum q. s. Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. 
Aq. rosar. extract F. massa, quæ for- 
metur in bacculos instar ceræ sigil- 
laris. 
S. Fornaci aut testœ calidœ affricetur parum baculus 
ad discutiendam mephitim. 
6. Aviculæ cypriæ. 
ꝶ. Oliban. 
Mastiches. 
Benzoin. 
Cort. thymiam. ana ℥j. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥ß. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒij. 
Sacchar. alb. ʒiv. 
Carbon. salicis ℔j. 
F. omnium pulvis subtilissimus, qui cum 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Ag. rosar. factœ q. s. subigatur & ef- 
fingatur in aviculas vel candelas. 
S. Duœ, tres, &c, accensœ reponantur in loco odore 
grato inficiendo. 
7.

325 Fumigations. 
7. Tædæ odoratæ.
ꝶ. Easdem vel similes species formulœ prœ- 
ced. exceptis saccharo & carbone. 
Cerœ flavœ duplum ad pond. omn. 
Concorporentur & formentur in tædas 
minores vel majores. 
S. Ardeant hœ ad delicias aut ad prophylaxin in 
locis infectis. 
8. Suffimentum hystericum. 
♃. Assa fœtid. ʒvj. 
Myrrh. ʒiij. 
Galban. ʒjß. 
Ol. succin. ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci n°. xxiv. 
S. Injiciantur duos vel tres in prunas, & vapores 
inhalentur œgro, naribus, & hiante ore. 
9. Fumigatio ad procidentiam ani, vel uteri. 
♃. Myrrh. 
Succin. ana ʒjß. 
Cort. cinnam. 
Menth. crisp. ana ʒj. 
Piper. jamaic. ad pond. omn. 
M. F. s. a. pulvis grosso modo. 
S. In prunas conspergatur, ad affectas vaporandas 
partes sub sedile, fundo aperto.
Y3 10. 

326 Of Plasters. 
10. Tædæ odoriseræ. 
♃. Gum. benz. ℥ij. 
Storac. ℥j.
Lahdan. ℥ß. 
Mosch. 
Ambragrisea ana ℈ß. 
Cer. flav. rec. ℔ß. 
Cera liquisacta, insperge pulverem subti- 
lissimam, & in filo gossipio contorto 
imbuatur, & deinde ex primatur. 
S. Hujus frustrum in loco comburatur contaminato, 
frequenter flammam extinguendo, ad fumum au- 
gendum. 
Nota. In this place we might add universal, and 
topical sumigation with cinnabar, and the dry gly- 
ster of the smoak of tobacco; the uses of which 
are sufficently known: so that they need not be 
inferred here; since they require no extraordinary 
artifice to prescribe them. 
Of PLASTERS. 
§.405. An EMPLASTER is an external, flex- 
ible and glutinous medicine; solid in 
the cold, but not brittle, yet melting with heat:
consisting chiefly of oily and cohesive substances, 
which being spread or extended upon a suitable 
vehicle, are applied to some external part of the 
body, for various uses. It is call’d dropax or pi- 
catio, when pitch is its basis; and sparadrapum or 
tela emplastica, a cere-cloth or paper, when spread 
upon either of those vehicles. 
§.406.

327 Of Plasters. 
§. 406. The MATERIALS for an extemporane- 
ous emplasater, are of two kinds: (1.) excipient, 
making the basis of the form; or (2.) excipienda, 
to be received by the former in much less quanti- 
ties. 
1. The excipient ingredients are generally of 
a tenacious, fat or oily consistence: and are ei- 
ther (1.) liquid; as oils made by expression, in- 
fusion or decoction: or (2.) more thick, but 
pliable; as animal fats, marrow, butter, honey, 
officinal unguents, &c. or (3.) more tenacious, 
cohesive or glutinous; as the turpentines, in- 
spissated juices, balsams, &c. or (4.) more con- 
sistent, hard, dry, and in the cold somewhat 
brittle; as wax, resins, gums, gum-resins, 
to which we may add the officinal emplasters. 
2. The excipienda also, are either (1.) liquid: 
as watery liquors, mucilages, decoctions, infu- 
sions, expressed juices; aromatic oils, whether 
obtained by expression, or distillation; liquid 
balsams, natural or artificial; tinctures, spirits, 
wine, vinegar, gall, &c. or (2.) more cohesive; 
as inspissated juices, extracts, sope, amalgams, 
&c. or (3.) dry and brittle, or capable of pul- 
verifation ; as metalline calces, powders from 
the parts of vegetables, animals, or minerals, 
&c. 
§.407. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, requires a previous know- 
ledge, and consideration of the physicians inten- 
tion, the proper nature of the several materials 
(§.406.), and the requisite qualities of an em- 
plaster (§.405.) Hence, observe 
1. That the laudable qualities of an emplaster 
are, (1.) to be of so dry a consistence in the cold, 
as not to stick to the fingers: (2.) to be soft, 
ductile and pliable in a small heat; (3.) to be 
Y4 mode-


328 Of Plasters.
moderately tenacious, or adhesive by the 
warmth of an human body, so as to readily stick 
fast both to the morbid part, and the extended 
vehicle and lastly, (4.) to have the mixture of 
its ingredients equable, and its consistence uni- 
form. 
2. The first property (n° 1. (1.)) depends 
on the proportion of materials at §.406. n° 1. 
(4.) n° 2. (3.): the second (n° 1. (2.)) pro- 
ceeds from the excipients at §.406. n° 1. (1.). 
(2.): the third (n° 1. (3.)) arises chiefly from 
the terebinthinate and gum-resinous substances 
(at §.406. n° 1. (3.). (4.)): and the last qua- 
lity (n° (4.)) is obtained by a skilful and close 
incorporation of all the ingredients. 
3. The excipienda (at §.406. n° 2.) are not 
essentially necessary for the composition of a 
plaster; for the excipient substances (§.ib. n° 1.) 
alone, being skillfully combined, will make an 
emplaster perfectly endued with every requi- 
site quality of the form. Even wax and turpen- 
tine of themselves, being melted together in a 
due proportion, will exhibit all the laudable qua- 
lities (n° 1.) proper to an emplaster. 
4. Oils (§.406. n° 1. (1.)) or substances of 
the like kind (ib. (2.)), with turpentine and 
wax, (ib. (3.) (4.)) do usually compose the ba- 
sis of most emplasters: but for wax and turpen- 
tine are sometimes substituted pitch, resins and 
gum-resins. 
5. Even pitch or gum-resins alone, are occa- 
sionally converted into an emplaster, by incor- 
porating and mollifying them with some proper 
oil or spirit, by means of a hot pestle. 
6. But what is more, oil itself may be form'd 
into an emplaster by boiling it a sufficient length 
of time with the calces of lead; as litharge, ce- 
russ, red-lead. 
7.

329 Of Plasters. 
7. The aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)), 
whose virtues consist in volatile principles, shou’d 
not enter this form: for the quantity of boiling 
necessary to evaporate their aqueous parts, will 
also at the same time dissipate their virtues. 
8. The parts of vegetables which are very 
bulkey in proportion to their weight, and whose 
virtues are inconsiderable and much diffused, are 
not proper to enter the composition of an em- 
plaster in the form of powder: but the apothe- 
cary should rather substitute their juices, decoc- 
tions, infusions, oils, or extracts. 
9. Salts (except they be metalline ones, as 
sacch. saturni, &c.) are hardly ever permitted to 
enter the composition of this form; either be- 
cause they are very difficult to incorporate with 
oily and ceraceous substances, exhale their vo- 
latile parts during the incorporation, diminish 
the emplastic, or adhesive property of the other 
ingredients, or disturb the form itself by melting 
in the air. 
10. When any powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
enter the composition of a plaster, they should 
be either capable of a dissolution, or else ground 
exceeding fine; that they may be so equably in- 
terspersed as to render the mass uniform (per 
n° 1. (2.) and n° 2.). 
11. Hence, extracts, concreted juices, gum- 
resins and the like, when they will not melt with 
the other ingredients, or be reduced into a fine 
powder, should be first dissolved in some proper 
menstruum: as vinegar, wine, oil, turpenine,
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
12. Sometimes vegetable or animal substances, 
whose virtues are desired in an emplaster, are 
first infused, boiled or fry’d in lard, oil, wine, 
or vinegar; that after expressing and straining, 
their


330 Of Plasters.
their liquid parts may be brought to the consi- 
stence of a plaster, with the other ingredients. 
13. When crude mercury is required to enter 
the composition of this form, it should be first 
reduced or kill’d by grinding with lard or turpen- 
tine, or by dissolving it in a suitable menstruum. 
14. The officinal emplasters reserved in the 
shops, are so numerous, as seldom to give occa- 
sion for an extemporaneous prescription and 
composition of others, especially in any consi- 
derable quantity. So that it is the common prac- 
tice to prescribe more for the plasters, common- 
ly used in the shops, either separately, or seve- 
ral such combined together, being mix’d and 
mollified with some proper oil, spirit, tincture, 
or elixir, &c. Sometimes the officinal emplas- 
ters serve as a basis to the other ingredients, 
more immediately adapted to the physician’s in- 
tention, for an extemporaneous plaster: as pow- 
ders, gums, resins, juices, &c. which are com- 
pounded by intermixing some excipient (at 
§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.) (3.)). Thus the time and 
trouble of extemporaneous composition may be 
much abridg’d, and the intention more effectu- 
ally answer’d, without incurring other danger. 
15. For the number of ingredients, concise- 
ness is laudable in this form, as well as in all others. 
Those who desire to contract their prescriptions 
of this form (per n° 14.), may write to several 
intentions in a few words. 
§.408. For the ORDER or series of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for a plaster, tho' they are 
more frequently ranged according to their quanti- 
ties (per §.57 n° 3.), the excipients being trans- 
posed before those which are order’d by q. s: yet 
the best method seems to be that which corresponds. 
to the order of commixture in a skilful composi- 
tion.

331 Of Plasters. 
tion. Hence the excipientia and excipienda which 
require boiling to incorporate them, should be 
placed first; and those which require melting only, 
may follow; and in the last place may come those 
substances, which should be incorporated with the 
mass when removed from the fire, as those of the 
fine powder and volatile kind, &c. But there is 
no need of being scrupulously exact on this head 
in a prescription, when we are previously satisfied 
of the skilfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.409. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
of this form are usually the same, or equal to each 
other; because there is seldom more prescribed at 
once than what is to be used at a time. The quantity 
of surface on the morbid part, and of the vehicle to 
be covered with an emplaster, are to be duly con- 
sider’d in order to determine the proper dose and 
general quantity of this form. But as the diversity 
of ages, and habits of body being more obese or 
emaciated, &c. will make the surface of the same 
parts considerably different, it is evident there can 
be no general limits assign'd to these quantities; so 
that when we order an officinal emplaster, or an ex- 
temporaneous one of the more simple kind, (§.407. 
n° 3. 5. 14.) it may be sufficient to prescribe the dose 
and general quantity thereof by q. s. mentioning the 
part which is to be covered by the plaster, or the size 
of the vehicle upon which it is to be spread. In 
extemporaneous compositions of this form which 
are difficult and tedious, it is allowable to prescribe 
a larger quantity. If the quantity prescribed be 
for several doses, the length of time and fre- 
quency of exhibition are to be taken into consi- 
deration together. 
§.410. The mutual Proportion of the se- 
veral ingredients for a plaster, is to be determined 
from the same considerations as their election (at  
§.407.

332 Of Plasters. 
§.407.), in conjunction with the different degree 
of consistence in the plaster. For take notice, 
1. That according to the different use of an 
emplaster it may obtain three degrees of con- 
sistence; viz. (1.) soft, approaching the con- 
sistence of a cerate, (2.) hard, or (3.) interme- 
diate, between hard and soft. The soft emplas- 
ters are used mostly for sparadrapes §.405. in 
the use of emollients, and substances which are 
to penetrate deep, or in applications of this form 
to moveable parts and articulations. Emplasters 
of the two last degrees of consistence are used 
mostly for desiccarives, astringents and 
lives, &c.
2. Hence, the requisite proportions for these 
different degrees of consistence (n° 1.) may be 
nearly determined thus. 
For a soft plaster,—ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥j. 
Pulver. ℥ß.
For a hard plaster,-ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j. 
Cerœ ℥ij. 
Pulver. ℥j.
For a plaster of midling
consistence,
ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥jß. 
Pulver. ℥vj. 
3. The proportion for oil is applicable to all 
thick and fat subances of the like nature (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.). (3.)): as is the proportion for wax; to 
its similar substances, enumerated at §, ib. 4. In 
the absence of powders, a larger proportion of 
wax, or its analogous substances, may supply 
the defect. 
4. But in powders, at the same time, we are 
also to consider their specific gravity, and parti- 
cular affinity to oily substances. Powders of the 
more

333 Of Plasters. 
more ponderous fossils inspissate a certain quan- 
tity of oil less than those of a lighter kind, Tho 
calces of lead imbibe large quantities of oily and 
fat substances. 
5. The physician will determine the propor- 
tion of aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) 
from his particular intention: and as almost all 
the aqueous parts of those liquors evaporate in 
the boiling, the proportion of the other ingre- 
dients may remain nearly the same. 
6. Inspissated juices, &c. (§.406. n° 2. (2.)) 
may be refer’d either to wax or lard, according 
as they come nearest to the density of one or the 
other (n° 3.): tho' they are usually added in 
but small quantities. 
7. When white wax is used in this form, as 
it is more brittle than the yellow, its proportion 
should be somewhat diminished. But it is the 
yellow wax which is almost constantly used for 
emplasters.  
8. Remembring that cold makes bodies more 
dense and rigid: in winter we should in large the 
proportion of soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2). (3).); and in summer add more of hard 
ingredients (at §.ib. n° (4.)) for a plaster. 
9. Those substances which serve to mollify or 
dissolve others (§.407. n° 5. 11. and 14.), may 
be prescribed by q. s. 
10. It is also customary to refer the propor- 
tion of oil, wax, and the like substances, to be 
determined at discretion by the apothecary: by 
which means an error in proportion may be ea- 
sily avoided by the prescriber. 
11. And when we desire to adjoin other in- 
gredients more suitable to our intention with 
some officinal emplaster (per §.407. n° 14.), 
being sensible of the consistence of those ingre- 
dients, we may readily know whether they will  
require

334 of Plasters. 
require the addition of an accessory which is soft 
and tenacious, or dry and solid; and the propor- 
tion of such accessories may be order’d by q. s. 
§.411. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, directs. 
1. The preparation of the emplastic mass. And 
this is performed either by (1.) emollition, with 
a gentle heat, or an admixture of some fit men- 
stuum (per §.407. n° 5. 14.); which latter is 
termed madifaction. Or, (2.) by colliquation or 
melting; in such a manner that the ingredients 
may be so fluid upon the fire, as to run into a 
very close commixture with each other; this 
process admitting no excipienda but that are ea- 
sily soluble, or else ground into a fine powder. 
Or, (3.) by means of boiling; which is requir’d 
when any aqueous liquor is to be evaporated 
(§.406. n° 2. (1.)), or when the more fix’d 
medicinal virtues are by this means to be ex- 
tracted from certain vegetables, rejecting after- 
wards their more solid and gross parts, or when 
metalline calces, especially those of lead, are to 
be intimately dissolved and combin’d in this form. 
We here designedly omit what relates to a re- 
gular and artificial preparation of plasters, as well 
for reasons at §.7. n° 3. and §.8. as because 
the business of that is usually refer’d to the dex- 
terity and judgment of the apothecary. Consult 
§.408. 
2. The extention or spreading this form upon 
some vehicle, which is generally either pieces of 
linen, silk, cotton, or leather, &c, according 
as the surface of the part to be covered is subject 
to various motions, is more or less tender or in 
fight, and as the plaster is to remain a longer 
or shorter time upon the part, &c. The size and 
figure of the plaster, agreeable to various parts 
and

335 Of Plasters. 
and uses, may be represented by sending a pat- 
tern cut out in paper, or limited by fingers 
breadths or any other measure, or it may be 
wholly refer’d to the discretion of the apothe- 
cary, mentioning only the particular part to 
which it is to be applied; for we suppose it suf- 
ficiently known, that the figure of an emplaster 
should be scutiform for the stomach, lunated 
for the liver, oval for the splen, orbicular for 
the umbilicus and uterus, and of an oblong-square 
for the kidneys, &c. The method of spreading 
common emplasters is sufficiently known by all; 
for making sparadrapes (§.405.), the linen 
shou’d be soft and well worn, but not ragged, 
the paper thick and soft or spongy; so that the 
melted emplaster may be equally embibed by, 
and extended upon the vehicle, making it ex- 
actly level when cold. Sometimes the internal 
surface of the plaster is smeared over with some 
oil, at other times it is sprinkled with some 
powder; by which means it will not adhere so 
firmly, nor be so apt to daub the parts. Others
do for the same purpose cover the whole, or some 
part of the plaster’s surface, with red or white 
lawn or muslin, crape or gauze, which they 
few or fasten to the margin of the plaster, before 
its application to the surface of the particular 
part it is to cover. 
§.412. The SUPERSCRIPTION (signatura) 
or direction to the patient for this form, is suffi- 
ciently intelligible from what has been already said 
at §.60. and §.405. 
§.413. The USES of emplasters are various and 
manifold, serving to mollify, disperse, maturate, 
deterge, desiccate, corroborate, attract, aggluti- 
nate and retain; excluding the air from wounds, 
ulcers and tumors, and serving to retain the lips 
of

336 Plasters. 
of wounds, fractur’d bones, tents, pledgits, asper- 
sions (§.308.), and other dressings. Depilatories, 
rubisiers, and vestcatories, are frequently exhibited 
in this form to the patient. Nor does it commu- 
nicate its virtues to the bare surface of the body on- 
ly, but even to the recesses of the more internal 
parts: as appears from the use of aromatic, opiate 
and mercurial plasters. Yet this form may be of 
disservice in many cases, by obstructing the cuta- 
neous pores, and exciting a redness, itching, pus- 
tules, or erysipelas. 
§.414. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Emplastrum anodynum, motum sedans, ad scir- 
rhum nec resolutione,nec extirpatione medicabilem. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Succi recent. expressi & puri. 
Fol. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Phellandrii ana ℥iv. 
Leni igne coque, inspissa, sub sinem admisce 
Cerœ albœ ℥viij. 
Ol. infus. rosar. ℥j. 
F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. super alutá dehitœ magnitudinis & fi- 
gurœ extensum parti scirrhosœ, prius nutritio ibid.
descripto oblitœ, applicetur. 
2. Emplastrum dissipans, ad bubonem venereum ad 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Flor. sulphuris ℥ß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ʒj. 
Picis sutoriœ ℥ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum super aluta extendendum. 
S. Applicetur loco affecto. Recentetur quovis die.
3. 

337 Plasters.
3. Emplastrum hystericum Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Galban. in tinct. castor. solut. & colat. 
ʒiij.
Tacamahac. ʒij. 
M. F. emplastrum: extendatur super a- 
luta orbiculatâ pro umbilicali regione. 
S. Ut in fronte. Admoveatur calidum umbilico. 
4. Emplastrum defensivum rubrum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 68. 
ꝶ. Ol. rosac. 
Cerœ albœ ana ℥vj. 
Boli armen. 
Sang. dracon. ana ℥jß. 
Rosar. rubr. pulv. ℥ß. 
Ceræ in oleo calore leni liquatæ, tum ab ig- 
ne remotæ, paulatim intere reliqua sub- 
tilissimè pulverisata, jugiter agitando, do- 
nec simul refrixerint. 
S. Hujus q. s. super linteamine extensum applicetur 
vulneri ad aërem arcendum & continenda reliqua. 
5- Emplastrum roborans, calisaciens, carminans, 
stomachicum. 
ꝶ. Emplast. de bacc. laur. 
Cumino ana q. s. 
Malaxata cum balsam. peruv. tantillo ex- 
tende super tela gossypina, scutiformi, te- 
ge sindone rubra decussatim interpassata. 
D. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod calidum regioni ventri- 
culi apponatur, & subinde balsami peruviani, aut 
olei vel spiritus menthœ tantillo irroretur.
Z 6. 

338 Plasters. 
6. Sparadrapum ad fonticulos 
ꝶ. Emplast. diapalm. 
Grat. Dei ana pt. ij. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec.press. pt. j.
Calore leni sub continua agitatione colli- 
qnatis turn ab igne remotis intinge lon- 
ga chartæ albæ, satis firmæ, segmina, 
tres circiter digitos lata: rite infecta 
exime, extende, cultro æqua, suspende,
ut sponte siccescant, turn in segmenta 
quadrata discinde & exhibe. 
S. Chartœ inceratœ pro deligando fonticulo. 
7. Sparadrapum pectorale, emolliens, resolvens,
ad tussim a frigore suscepto. 
ꝶ. Unguent, althœœ comp. ℥j. 
Adipis gallin. ℥iij. 
Olei press. sem. papav. ℥ß. 
Cerœ citrin. rec. ℥jß.
Simul leni igne liquifactis immisce 
Rad. irid. florent. subtiliss. pulv. ʒj. 
Olei express. nuc. myrist. ℈j. 
Detentis in fluore immerge telam lineam ve- 
terem magnirudinis & figuræ in charata
transmissa descriptæ: probè imbutam 
extende, læviga, & laxè convolutam ex- 
hibe. 
S. Tela emplastica, quœ pectori apponatur; tegatur 
panno laneo, rubro villoso, aut pelle cati.
8. 

339 Plasters. 
8. Emplastrum resolvens, ad contusa. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 83. 
ꝶ. Bryon. in farin. redact. ℥ij. 
Flor. sulphur. ℥j. 
Mercur. nigri  ʒiij. 
Galbani puri & s. a. soluti ℥iv. 
Emplastr. de melilot. ℥ix. 
Ol. chamamel. q. s. 
Ut F. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo inductum applicetur parti 
contusœ. 
9. Emplastrum nervinum, anti-arthriticum. 
♃. Emp. è cumin. ℥j. 
Ung. opodel. ʒiij. 
Sal. vol. ammon. 
Camph. subt. pulv. 
Ext. thebaic. ana ʒß.
Ol. petrol. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & regioni, vel parti- 
bus affectis tepide applicandum. 
10. Emplastrum suppuratorium, adhesivum. 
♃. Emplast. diachyl. cum mucag. 
Pic. burgundic. ana ʒvj. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Extendatur q. s. super linteum crassum, vel potius 
alutam, parti affectœ applicand.
Z2 11. 


340 Plasters.
11. Emplastrum anodynum. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. ℥ij. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥ß. 
Ol. nicotian. ʒij. 
Camph. pulv. subt. 
Sacch. saturn.
Opti ana ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Extende super linteum duplicatum, & lateri affecto 
vel parti dolenli applicetur.
12. Emplastrum emolliens, & refrigerans. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℥jß. 
Cerœ albœ ℥j. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ʒx. 
Commistis & ab igne remotis, insperge 
Sacch. saturn. pulv. subt. ʒiij. 
Camph. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
S. Extende super pannum linteum, & ung. merc. in- 
unct. applicetur ad hœmorrhoidas cœcas externas. 
13. Emplastrum discutiens, commune. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. 
è cicut. cum ammon. aā ℥j. 
Ung. cœrul. ℥ß. 
Camph. 
Opii ana ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle, lenissimo 
calore. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & parti affectœ vel 
regioni viscerum infarct. applicandum. 
14.

341 Plasters. 
14. Emplastrum epuloticum, ad familias. 
♃. Cerœ citrinœ rec. ℥ij. 
Mellis commun. ℥ß. 
Croci opt. ʒj. 
Sacchar. albiss. 
Sperm. ceti aa ʒvj. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ℥iij ß. 
M, F. s. a. emplast. mediæ consist. 
S. Emp. vulner. super pannum linteum album, vel 
sericum nigrum extendendum, & in abrasionibus 
cutaneis, incisuris levioribus, &c. applicandum. 
15. Emplastrum ad strumas, discutiens. 
♃. Emp. è cicut. 
de sapon. aa ℥j. 
Hydrarg. (in pauc. tereb. extinct.) ʒvj. 
Camph. (in ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. solut.) 
℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. In glandularum infarctionibus, partibus affectis 
applicandum. 
16. Emplastrum hystericum. 
♃. Gum. ammon. 
Galban. colat. 
Assa fœtid. ana ʒij. 
Cerœ citrinœ ʒj. 
Bals. sulph. succinat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
Ut in fronte. Super alutam extendendum, &
regioni hypogastricœ applicandum.
Z3 Nota.

342 Of Cerates. 
Nota. To the form of sparadrapes we might add 
several others composed of talc, camphir, borace, 
wax and oil; entitled telae cosmeticae ( P. Morell. 
meth. prescr. form. p. 246.): but as these hardly 
ever come under the extemporaneous prescription 
of a physician, there is no great occasion to insert 
them in this place. 
Of CERATES. 
§.415. A CERATE (ceratum, cerotum, cerelae-
um,) is a kind of soft emplaster 
(§.405.), coming near to a midling consistence 
between an ointment and emplaster. But as we do 
not at present, as they did formerly, call every 
composition of wax, whether ointment or emplas- 
ter, a cerate; the distinction of this form into li- 
quid and solid, does also of consequence vanish. 
§.416. The MATERIALS, ELECTION, OR- 
DER, DOSE, and GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form, hold the same here as in the emplaster 
(§.406 to 409.). A cerate derives its names (§.415.) 
from the wax and oil in its composition: but those 
substances are at present no such constant ingre- 
dients, but that they are often omitted, and the 
cerate composed of other similar substances, enu- 
merated at §.406, and 407. This is also a compo- 
sition very seldom in extemporaneous practice; but 
more frequently occurs among the officinals: and 
when an officinal cerate is not at hand, suitable to 
the intention, any of the emplasters may be rea- 
dily reduced to its consistence by the addition of 
some oil, mollifying it (per §.407. n° 14.). 
§.417. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is what it principally 
differs in from the emplaster: for the proportion
here, should be of oil ℥j. wax ℥ß. powders ʒj. or
ʒjss. more or less, according to their specific 
weight:


343 Of Cerates. 
weight: or excluding the powders, the wax may 
be augmented to ʒv. But observe 
1. That there is a sort of latitude for varying 
the proportions of this form, in order to make 
the cerate sometimes a little softer, or harder, 
than at others; nor are the specified proportions 
constantly observed in prescriptions: in so much 
that what is placed under the title of cerates in 
some shops, would be rank’d among the class of 
ointments or emplasters in the hands of others. 
2. For the rest, what we have before repeat- 
ed (at §.410. n° 3 to 11.) is also in this place 
applicable to the form of cerates. 
§.418. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPER 
SCRIPTION, or direction to the apothecary and 
patient for this form, is much the same as for the 
emplaster (at §.411. and 412.); supposing you 
do but change the name (§.415.). Sparadrapes 
(§.411. n° 2.) are also more frequently made from 
this form than from emplasters; because the sub- 
stance of a cerate is more soft and pliable, and so, 
more convenient (per §.410. n° 1.). Cerates are 
also transmitted to the patient, and reserved for 
use, in gallipots or bladders, when they are to last 
any considerable length of time; otherwise they 
might melt and run about, or become too hard and 
dry, thro' keeping. Their greater degree of soft- 
ness, renders them also capable of being spread upon 
proper vehicles with much more ease, than plasters. 
§.419, The USE of cerates is much the same 
as of emplasters (§.413.); and we may venture 
to say they are in more frequent use than the latter; 
for many forms which are prescribed under the 
title of emplasters, are cerates in effect and consi- 
stence. Its less degree of hardness and tenacity, in 
comparison with an emplaster, gives it a greater 
recommendation, in cases where the virtues are to 
penetrate deeper (per §.410. n° 1), where the  
Z4 parts

344 Cerates. 
parts to be cover’d are very tender and sensible, or 
seated in some moveable articulation, or when we 
are apprehensive that a more consistent form will 
do harm (per §.413.). 
§.420. FOR SPECIMEN, take the following. 
1. Ceratum exsiccans, obtundens, antiphlogisticum, 
ad ulcera tibiarum inveterata. 
ꝶ. Cerat. desensiv. cœrul. pharm. leid. 
℥iij. vel q. v. 
D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus q. s. extensum super linteo applicetur ulceri, 
prius puro, siccis, aut idoneo balsamo imbutis, carp- 
tis tecto. Renovetur quovis die semel. 
2. Ceratum adtrahens, emmenagogum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 214. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. oxycroc. 
de melilot. ana q. s. 
Cum ol. rutœ q. s. malaxando in con- 
sistentiam cerati redacta extendan- 
tur super aluta lunata juxta exem- 
plum transmissum. 
D.
S. Pubis & inguinibus applicetur. 
3. Ceratum resolvens, ad scirrhum lienis. 
ꝶ. Gumm. ammoniac. 
Galban. ana ℥ß. 
Dissolvantur in acet. squillitic. q. s. & cum 
Cerœ citrinœ ℥ß.
Ol. infus. absynth. q. s. 
Leni igne colliquata redigantur in cera- 
tum, quod super aluta ovata, in- 
star linguæ bubulæ, extensum. 
D. 
S. Ceratum spleneticum, hypochondria sinistro in re- 
gions splenis applicandum. 
4.

345 Of Ointments. 
4. Ceratum ad scabiem, lepram, &c. 
♃. Emp. de cicut. cum ammon. 
mercurial. aa 
Ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. 
M. F. ceratum. 
S. Super pannum linteum extendendum, & cuti af- 
fectœ applicandum. 
Of OINTMENTS. 
§.421. AN OINTMENTS or unguent is an ex- 
ternal, soft medicine; not so hard as 
a cerate (§.415.), but coming nearer to the con- 
sistence of thick honey, or an electuary (§.138.): 
melting with a small heat, and composed chiefly 
of oleaginous and ceraceoas substances; which are 
to be rubbed upon the suface, of divers exter- 
nal parts of the body, or applied upon some 
proper vehicle, to answer various medicinal inten- 
tions. 
§.422. The MATERIALS for this form, are in 
general the same as for an emplaster or cerate 
(§.406. 416.). 
§.423. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is also determined by the same circumstan- 
ces, as at §.407. viz. 
1. In the composition of an ointment are re- 
quired (1.) a consistence sufficient to preserve it 
from melting in the air, but so as to make it 
soft and pliable in the cold, resembling, as it 
were, soft lard. (2.) Its softness should also be 
joined

346 Of Ointments. 
joined with smoothness and lubricity, without 
any roughness or gross parts. (3.) It requires 
an equable distribution and uniform commixture 
of its ingredients. From hence, we may per- 
ceive what materials are fittest for this form; 
and what kind of preparation they are to under- 
go. Consult §.407. n° 1. and 2. 
2. Oil (§.406. n° 1. (1.)), fat (ib. (2.)), 
turpentine (ib. (3.)), wax (ib. (4.) ), or sub- 
stances analogous to these (§.410. n°3.), being 
melted together in a due quantity, will compose 
an unguent without any other addition: so that 
in this form there is no occasion for any of the 
excipienda (§.406. n° 2.), unless such should 
be required by the indication.
3, Wax, pitch, resins, gum-resins, officinal 
emplasters and cerates, or the like (§.406. n°1. 
(4.)). being mollified with oil, separately, or 
several of them in conjunction, will compose an 
ointment without any other materials (§.ib. 
n° 1. (2.) (3.) and n° 2.). 
4. Even lard, marrow, butter, &c. (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.)) have naturally of themselves the 
consistence proper to an ointment, without any 
other addition of either liquid or solid substances 
(§.ib. (1.) (4.)); but if either of these be re- 
quired a little softer, which is frequent in ex- 
temporaneous practice, they may be made so by 
the addition of a little oil; if they are desired 
somewhat more consistent, they will acquire that 
by mixture with a little wax, or some fine pow- 
der. But to reduce the more tenacious turpen- 
tines into an ointment, requires a previous atte- 
nuation and division of their parts by lard, oil, 
or the yolks of eggs. 
5. Hence, wax and turpentine are not such 
constant and necessary ingredients in this form,
as


347 Of Ointments. 
as in that of a plaster (§.407. n° 4.). They 
are both frequently excluded the composition of 
extemporaneous unguents. Wax also renders an 
ointment punch less apt to penetrate into the 
parts.  
6. If an intention persuades us to take watery 
liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) into this form, 
they are to be first boiled with the fat or oil 
(§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.)), in order to exhale their 
aqueous parts: so that what has been said at 
§.407.n°.7. may here take place. 
7. But certain watery liquors are sometimes 
reduced into an ointment, merely by a long tri- 
turation with fat substances, without any boiling: 
as we learn from the composition of rosaceum, 
and nutrilium: by which last, it appears that 
two liquors will inspissate into an ointment, 
without evaporation; but this will hold in but 
few instances. 
8. Besides the excipienda (§.406. n° 2. 
(2.)), this form sometimes takes in pulps and 
electuaries, to be intermixed with its other fat 
and glutinous ingredients. Even the whole mass 
of an ointment is sometimes composed, like an 
electuary, without any oily or fat substances at 
all: as we see in the preparation of Ægyp- 
tiacum. 
9. To make up powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
into this form, sometimes oil alone, or joined 
with vinegar, is sufficient: which obtains chiefly 
in saturnine unguents. For otherwise it will ge- 
nerally require a mixture of some thick and glu- 
tinous substance (§.406. n° 1. (2.) (3.) (4.) 
10. Very strong and corrosive ingredients, 
which inflame, should be very cautiously used 
in this form: and not at all, unless they are in- 
fringed and curbed by other more lenient sub- 
stances;

348 Of Ointments. 
stances; left they should destroy the skin, or, by- 
running thro' the pores into the circulation, di- 
sturb the whole œconomy. 
11. Such ointments as are intended to operate 
upon the more internal parts of the body, shou’d 
consist of very penetrating substances, and not 
be made of too thick a consistence (V. n° 5.). 
12. In prescribing this form, it is more ad- 
visable to order the officinal compositions of this 
kind, either separately or combined together; 
which may be adapted to the intention, by an 
extemporaneous addition of other ingredients. 
Consult §.407. n° 14. 
13. For the rest, what has been said (at 
§.407. n° 8. to 13, and 14.) does also here take 
place. Though several kinds of salts are fre- 
quently prescribed in this form, yet the mineral 
calces very seldom enter the composition of oint- 
ments, especially extemporaneous ones. 
§.424. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for ointments, is much the same 
with that used in emplasters at §.408. 
§.425. The DOSE of this form is to be deter- 
mined by the size of the part to be anointed, nor 
does it require any other limitation. 
§.426. The GENERAL QUANITY of this form 
to be prescribed and transmitted to the patient at one 
time, is limited by the consideration at §.425. as 
also from the continuation and frequency of its 
application, so that sometimes an ounce may suf- 
fice, when at other times the case may require 
above a pound. 
§.427. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredients 
for this form, may be deduced from §.410. and 
417. compared with §.421. 423. But observe, 
1. That the consistence of this form is not 
so precisely limited, but that it may be made a 
little

349 Of Ointments. 
little thicker or thinner, according to the par- 
ticular intention, as will appear from viewing 
the consistence of several officinal ointments. 
Soft ointments are bed adapted for tender and 
sensible parts, for penetrating and for entering 
the pores by friction, &c. The more solid and 
consistent ointments stop up the pores, are 
more slowly imbibed by them, and rather ob- 
struct perspiration. 
2. The materials fit for this form are of a 
threefold consistence (§.422.): liquid, soft and 
solid; so that the proportion of each ingredient 
is to be varied, according as the ointment is to 
be more soft, or else consistent (per. §.421. 
423. n° 1. 427. n° 1.). 
3. The soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (2.) 
(3.)) mix’d together in any proportion will make 
an ointment; but if you are apprehensive it will 
be too consistent adjoin q. s. olei. For the parti- 
cular management of the turpentines for this 
form consult §.423. n° 4. 
4. A mixture of oil ℥j with ℥ij or iij. of 
wax or similar substances compose an ointment 
per §.410. n° 3. If to the wax and oil we add 
a powder §.406. n° 2. (3.), the wax should 
then be proportionably diminished, so that we 
may order of wax ʒij, of powder ʒj, or ʒjß. 
or the quantity of powder being determined, 
the wax may be prescribed q. s. unless you are 
sensible that the powder and oil together will of 
themselves form an ointment per §.423. n° 9. 
and in that case the wax being omitted, the 
quantity of powder may be augmented to ʒiij. 
and sometimes ʒjv. 
5. Hence we learn what is to be done when 
the soft substances n° 3. are added instead of 
the powder, n° 4. for the proportion of those
ingre-  


350 Of Ointments. 
ingredients may remain nearly the same as if 
those soft substances were omitted. 
6. If you prescribe ung. nutritum of oil and 
vinegar of lead, per §.423. n° 7; the propor- 
tion of each may be nearly equal parts, or either 
of them may be ordered by q. s. cape: if the 
ointment consists of oil, simple vinegar and su- 
gar of lead, or any of the saturnine calces, the 
two first may be prescribed ana pt. 1. and of the 
two latter pt. ß. 
7. If the basis of this form is an officinal oint- 
ment, you will easily perceive from the consi- 
stence of its other ingredients, whether any, of 
how much wax will bring it to a consistence, 
which is generally prescribed by q. s. Oil will 
reduce its consistence, wax will increase it, when 
it exceeds either way. 
8. Lastly; to this place also belongs what 
has been said at §.410. Substances which are 
only analogous to oil and sat §.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2.) are not so constant ingredients in this form. 
§.428. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, varies 
with the different method of preparing it; it either 
orders only simple mixture, when there is no oc- 
casion for the use of fire; or the mixture may
be order’d to be done gradually, and made uni- 
form by a continued triuration, when the oint- 
ment is to consist of a mixture of sat and watery 
substances (per §.423. n° 7. 427. n° 6.) the 
mixture by triuration is then term’d nutritio, and 
the ointment, nutritum. Or, the composition may 
be order’d by melting, or by boiling, as well as 
mixture; the directions for which are much the 
same as in the emplaster §.411. n° 1. The pre- 
scription may conclude F. s. a. unguentum vel nu-
tritum. D. ad fictile. This form is seldom applied 
upon leather like the emplaster at §.411. n° 2.
but 


351 Of Ointnients. 
but when it is thus used, the margin of the latter 
should be spread about a finger’s breadth with 
some sticking emplaster, in order to prevent the 
ointment from melting and falling oh by the heat 
of the part. 
§.429. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains nothing very 
particular, except the method of using it. The ap- 
plication or inunction of this form upon particu- 
lar parts, is usually performed by spreading it first 
upon linen, leather, srap’d lint, pledgets, tents, or 
in walnut-shells, &c. But it is very usual to pre- 
mise hot or cold bathing, lotions and frictions be- 
fore inunction of the parts. For the rest, what 
relates to the chusing a proper part of the body, 
the length of time, and frequency of using the 
ointment, with the proper regimen, &c. is to be 
deduced from the physician’s indications in parti- 
cular cases. Consult §.328. n° 2. 5. 7. It is advi- 
sable to be cautious in the use of ointments which 
are corrosive, cathartic or mercurial, &c. left the 
too frequent or long continued use of them should 
bring on a salivation, a superpurgation, or other 
bad symptoms. 
§. 430. The USE of ointments is very frequent 
with physicians as well as surgeons; in order to 
mollify, disperse, maturate, deterge, warm, 
strengthen, alleviate, obtund acrimony, &c. which 
virtues it communicates not only by external ap- 
plication, but frequently by internal exhibition, in 
which case it acts more potently on the internal 
parts; being promoted in that action by its con- 
sistence being more soft and penetrating than a ce- 
rate or emplaster. The effects of this form exter- 
nally applied, are sufficiently obvious in the use of 
mercurial, cathartic, and opiate ointments, which 
produce a spitting, purging, or constipation; but 
an unseasonable or improper use of some ointments. 
proves

352 Ointments.
proves frequently pernicious by relaxing the fibres 
too much, by obstructing the cutaneous pores, or 
by acting too roughly upon some of the internal 
viscera. 
§.431. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Unguentum digestivum ad contusa, attenuans, 
antisepticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 76. 
ꝶ. Tereb. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n°.j. 
Exacte mistis admisce 
Unguent. basilici ℥ij. 
Aloës puræ ʒiv. 
F. s. a. unguentum. 
S. Hujus tantillum plumaceolis exceptum imponatur 
loco contuso, tegatur emplastro de galbano & fo- 
mento ibid, descriptis. 
2. Unguentum anodynum, motum sedans, scirrho 
dolenti aptum. Ibid. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Aceti lithargyrii ℥j. 
Ol. express. sem. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. alb. 
Rosar. infus. ana ʒij. 
F. s. a. nutritum, cui sub finem admisce 
Opii puri gr. vj. 
S. Nutritum pacans, quo leniter inungatur locus af- 
fellus, ac dein tegatur emplastro, ibid. descripto. 
3.

353 Ointments. 
3.Unguentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Fellis taurini. 
Aloës pur. ana ℥j. 
Unguent. althœœ ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici: 
aut pars dimidia juglandis nucis putamine excepta 
eidem loco apponatur. 
Cautelam huic necessariam vid. ibidem.  
4. Unguentum laxans, mitigans, sopiens, ad pleu- 
ritidem. Ibid. p.150. 
ꝶ. Unguent. popul. 
Althœœ. 
Nutrit. ana ℥j. 
M. 
F. unguentum. 
S. Hoc calido latus dolens, ter de die, inungatur, 
superponendo dein somentum, ante in histor. epithe- 
matis liquidi, p.232. descript. 
5. Unguentum emplastrodes, roborans, calesaciens, 
stomachicum ad nauseam vel vomitum à pertur- 
bato liquidi nervosi motu ortum. 
ꝶ. Cerat. stomach. Galen. 
Theriac. Andromach. ana ʒvj. 
Ol nuc. myrist. express. ʒj. 
Bals. peruvian. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. unguentum: illinatur aluti scuri- 
formi, cujus margo ad digiti latitudinem 
obducta sit emplastro mucagin. aut meliloti. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod regioni ventriculi ap- 
plicetur. 
Aa Nota.

354 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Nota. From the history of ointments, may be 
understood the composition of internal vulnerary 
balsams, or potable ointments; which are used in 
almost the same intentions with some electuaries 
or pills (§.138. 160.) External vulnerary bal- 
sams do generally differ but little from ointments: 
though they are sometimes softer; but are hardly 
ever prescribed or prepared in extemporaneous 
practice 
Of Odoriferous BALSAMS. 
§.432. A PERFUMED OR ODORIFEROUS BAL- 
SAM, is a kind of ointment (§.421.) 
composed of the more fragrant and strong scented 
ingredients, incorporated with some of the more 
tenacious, and oily or fat substances, serving for 
the inunction of several parts, and invested with 
very strong, odorous and active principles. Hence, 
it seems to differ but little from an ointment. 
§.433. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
almost the same as for the ointment (§.422.); 
but are not so numerous: they are either excipient, 
or excipiend. 
1. The excipient substances are either (1.) pri-
mary, being fat and tenacious; as oil of nut- 
megs by expression, white inodorous fats, of the 
hog, &c. the marrow of legs of veal, butter, 
wax, officinal ointments, pomatum, rosatum, 
nervinum, &c. The strong-scented officinal 
balsams, manna, and sometimes gum-resins. 
Or (2.) secundary, oleaginous and liquid: as the 
more common oils by expression, infusion, or 
decoction, and the native liquid balsams, as pe- 
ruvian. copaib. &c. 
2. The excipiend a are also either (1.) primary, 
containing the medicinal virtues, and of a liquid
con-

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
consistence: as aromatic oils obtained by dis- 
tillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, essences, spirits, volatile oily salts, 
&c. or of a thick consistence; as extracts and 
the more potent electuaries; of opium, saffron, 
theriaca, gum-resins, opium itself, musk, civet 
and the like: or dry and solid: as spices, saf- 
fron, cinnamon, cloves, benjamin, castor, am- 
bergiss, amber, its salt; &c. Or (2.) secundary, 
of less consequence, giving some colour, &c. 
for which purpose are used the finest powders, 
magisteries precipitated by alum, with various 
pigments, smalt, cochineal, turmeric, umbre, 
asphaltus, cinnabar, juice of buck-thorn, red 
sanders, the grants chermes, ochres; armenian 
bole, &c. 
§.434. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is to be directed by the intention, and other 
circumstances (at §.423. n° 1.): but as the prin- 
cipal difference of this form from an ointment con- 
sists in its strong penetrating odor, we ought to 
pay the greatest regard to that; left it should be 
weaken’d, dissipated, changed, or made worse by 
the action of other substances. The tinging it with 
some pleasant colour, is indeed less necessary, but 
more usual; nor should it be entirely neglected. 
Hence, 
1. The primary excipient (§.433. n° 1.
(1.)) should be chose the whitest: and most ino- 
dorous; in order to avoid any change of the 
odor and colour to be given it by the excipi- 
enda (§.433. n° 2.). Nut oil by expression, 
being deprived of its colour and smell by spirit 
of wine, is the most frequent in use here; in so 
much that it may well be call’d, as it usually is, 
a body for perfumed balsams. We should be 
cautious that the other fat substances are not ran- 
A22 cid:

356 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
cid: to avoid which, they should be chose very 
fresh, and be sometimes first washed with 
some proper liquor. Nor is it often that any 
other substance is used here, but white virgin’s 
wax. 
2. But there are some cases where a strong 
scented or fœtid excipient is preferable, when 
it happens to agree with the intention and vir- 
tues of the other ingredients: as may several of 
the officinal ointments and balsams, common 
oils of nuts, gum-resins, &c. and in this case 
the indication should direct the choice. The 
colour may be easily corrected or made agree- 
able per §.433. n° 2. (2.). 
3. Wax alone is seldom the excipient; be- 
cause the generality of ingrediens can be suffi- 
ciently mollified by none but oil. Oil also serves, 
by repeated mixture in small quantities, to at- 
tenuate and mix the more soft and fat substance 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) for this form. 
4. There is not always occasion for the se- 
cundary excipients (at §.ib. n° 1. (2.)): only 
when the mass is of too thick a consistence their 
addition may be proper. But then, one should be 
chose without any smell, or else with one agree- 
able to that of the other ingredients. 
5. The primary excipienda (§.433. n° 2. 
(1.)) or ingredients should be chose conformable 
to the intention (§.432. 434.), efficacious in 
a small quantity, and agreeing with each other, 
also capable of an uniform mixture with the ex- 
cipient (§.433.). Therefore those substances 
chiefly which abound in the more active odorous 
parts are principally used in this form; espe- 
cially such as are naturally of an oily or fat con- 
sistence, or else capable of an intimate commix- 
ture with oily substances. Oils by infusion or 
decoction are seldom used in this form, but to
dilute

357 Of Odorifeous Balsams. 
dilute it, when of too much consistence. If dry 
substances are order’d, which are not capable of 
a dissolutipn, they should be first reduced into 
a most subtle powder. 
6. But this form takes in not only fragrant 
substances, but sometimes fœtid ones also: as 
we may learn from what has been said at §.433. 
n° 2. So that musk, civet and ambergriss are 
not always necessary ingredients of this form: 
it is even generally better to omit these, as be- 
ing to many very unpleasant, and to others hurt- 
ful. Consult §.85. and 100. 
7. The pigments or colours (§.433. n° 2. 
(2.)) are generally elected agreeable to the co- 
lour of the medicinal basis, from which the bal- 
sam takes its name, or conformable to the re- 
ceived idea of the virtues it is to exert, or to the 
genius of the disease it is to oppose: hence, to 
the balsam of rue should be given a green co- 
lour; of amber, a yellow; of roses, a red; to
cardiac balsams, a pleasant colour, and to ant- 
apoplectic, or antiepileptic balsams should be 
given a sorrowful, fable, or black colour. But 
it is not always neccessary to colour them in this 
manner. 
8. Yet care should be taken not to use pig- 
ments which are corrosive or acrimonious, the 
use of which would be attended with bad conse- 
quences. But the powder or magistery of the 
substance which composed the basis of a balsam, 
is generally better to colour it than any other. 
If such is not to be had, a quantity of some other 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) may be substituted. 
9. Here also, if there are any officinal bal- 
sams adapted to the physician’s intention, he 
may save himself the trouble of an extempora- 
neous formula; or he may adapt some officinal
Aa3 balsam

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
balsam to his intention, by adding other ingre- 
dients to it (V. §.407. n° 14.). 
10. For the number of ingredients for this 
form, as at §.407. n° 15. so here, brevity is 
commendable. 
§.435. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of this form, is much the same as 
in the emplaster (§.408.). 
§.436. The DOSE of this form is generally but 
small, and never precisely limited; but is propor- 
tioned to the size and number of parts to be anointed. 
§.437. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an 
odorous balsam order’d at a time, is seldom more 
than ℥jß. because of the smallness of its dose 
(§.436.); it is more frequently prescribed in the 
quantity of a few drams only, according to diffe- 
rent circumstances (at §.426. 436.): it may be 
even prescribed in a still less quantity, when the 
balsam is an officinal composition (§.434. n° 9.) 
§.438. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be easily understood 
from §.427; when the consistence of the balsam 
and its ingredients are first determined and known. 
Hence we learn. 
1. That a balsam is usually a little thicker 
than an ointment (§.421. 423. n° 1.); tho' 
sometimes it is of directly the same consistence, 
or a little softer, or even so thin as to come 
nearer to a liniment. Such balsams as are to keep 
any considerable time, to be carried about in the 
pocket, or to serve for perfuming, &c. should be 
of a more hard consistence: but those to be rubb’d 
into parts, should have a softer consistence. 
2. There is therefore hardly any constant pro- 
portion observed between the excipientia and ex- 
cipienda (§.433.); but the more usual is as fol- 
lows, v.g.
Of


359 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Of the excipient or balsamic body (§.434. 
n° 1)—℥j 
—excipienda or ingredients
Liquid ʒj, ij, iij.
thick, ordry ʒss. j, ij.      
—Primary (§.434. n° 2. (1.))  
—Secundary (ib.—(2.)) 
q. s. 
3. Hence it appears, that if the excipient is 
some soft nut-oil, the quantity of thick or dry ex- 
cipienda, should be proportionably increased,and 
the liquid diminish’d; except when you would 
by accident desire to have the balsam very liquid 
(per n° 1.). 
4. It is also usual to add about a dram of wax 
to an ounce of lard, ointment, or other very soft 
excipient (§.434. n° 3.); in order to make 
their consistence equal to that of the balsamic body 
(n°. 2.), the proportion of excipienda (n°. 2.) 
remaining still the same. 
5. If the excipient (§.434. n° 3.) be wax 
only, it will require double the same quantity of 
some fluid oil, to sufficiently mollify it. But if 
any dry substance come also into the composition, 
it is to be estimated as wax. So that it is then. 
chiefly, that there will be occasion to use some 
secundary excipient (§.433. n° 1. (2.) and 
434. n° 3.); that we may not be forced to use 
a larger quantity of others which are dearer 
or stronger. Its proportion may be therefore 
order’d by q. s.
6. If you make additions to some officinal 
balsam (per §.434. n° 9.), their proportion 
should be as their consistences; and then, the 
intention only lays any restriction upon the 
proportion. But if to officinal balsams you also 
add several other substances (n° 1. to 6.) hi- 
therto mentioned, you may easily perceive what 
proportion should be follow’d, or what consti- 
tuent substance should be used, when you are 
Aa4 desirous

360 Of Odoriferous Balsams, 
desirous to avoid too much or little consistence, 
Consult §.427.n°.7. 
7. But very often the excipienda only are 
prescribed in a determinate quantity, and the ex- 
cipient (or accessory substance to make up the 
form) order’d by q. s. or when there are two 
such excipient substances, one of them only 
may be order’d in a determinate quantity. And 
sometimes, the excipientia being determined in 
quantity, the proportion of excipienda is left to 
the diseretion of the apothecary. 
8. For the rest, consult what has been said 
at §.410. and 427. 
§.439. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is prescribed by 
F. s. a. balsamum. D. in pyxide stannea, plumbea, 
eburnea, lignea vel fictili. Sometimes the balsam 
is order’d to be included in half a walnut shell, to 
be applied to and retained upon the navel. The 
method of composition is usually left to the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. 
§.440. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides the 
name taken from the basis and virtues (§.434. 
n° 7.), the method of application; which is ge- 
nerally almost like that of using an ointment 
(§.429.), by inunction or infriction. It is very 
seldom that a balsam is spread upon a vehicle, and 
so applied to a part (§.439.). The particular 
Parts of the body most suitable for the application 
of this form, is usually judged to be such as are 
the most sensible, and where the larged: vessels and 
nerves run the most exposed; as the nose, temples, 
vertex of the head, the wrists, præcordia, &c. 
§.441. The USE of this form in extempora- 
neous Practice, is not very frequent; but it is 
often used merely for pleasure or persuming, and 
some

361 Odoriferous Balsams.
sometimes in morbid affections of the brain and 
nerves: as in epilepsies, apoplexies, vertigos, faint- 
ings; in convulsive disorders, hysteric and hypo- 
chondriac; in pains, flatulencies, &c. where it is 
frequently of service by stimulating, easing, chang- 
ing the motion of the fluids, or acting by some 
other specific virtues. But the surprising activity 
and subtility of these odoriferous principles, with 
their secret manner of acting on the body, not to 
be discovered but by their effects, seems to per- 
suade us to great caution in the use of this form. 
§.442. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Balsamum fragrans, cardiacum. 
ꝶ. Corp. pro bals. ℥ß. 
Ol. stillat. cinnam. ver. ℈j. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈ß. 
Ambar. griss. gr. ij. 
Mosch. orient. gr. j. 
Bol. armen. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. balsam. 
S. Balsamum cinnamomi, naribus, carpis, &c. infri- 
candum. Ambaro & Moscho exclusis, idem fieri 
potest universalius. 
2. Balsamum excitans, antapoplecticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ Ol. stillat. rorismar. 
Tanacet. 
Lavend. 
Rutœ. 
Absynth. ana gtt. iv. 
Infus. castor. ʒj. 
Unguent. nervin. ℥j.
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Pro suffitu sub naribus & circa tempora affricetur. 
3.


362 Odoriferous Balsams. 
3. Balsamum succini, anticatarrhale. 
ꝶ. Olei nucist. express. ʒij. 
Stillat. succin. alb. ʒj. 
Sal. fuccin. volat. ℈j. 
Cera flavœ q. s. 
Colliquatis, cum rad. curcum pulv. q. s. tinctis, 
F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum cephalicum, vertici, temporibus, pone 
aures, affricandum. 
4. Balsamum hystericum. 
ꝶ. Sev. hircin. ℥ß. 
Galban. pur. ʒj. 
Ass. fœtidœ. 
Castorii ana ℈j. 
Ol. stillat. succin. 
Corn. cerv. rect. aa gtt.xxv. 
Sal. volat. corn. cerv. ℈ß. 
Ol. infus. rutœ q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. Balsamus. 
S. In languore aut paroxysmo illinatur naribus, 
temporibus, &c. 
5. Balsamum carminans, stomachicum, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Balsam. caryophyll. arom. 
Theriac. andromach. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. stillat. macis  ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Ut in fronte. Illinatur regioni epigastricœ & 
umbilico: tum operculum figulinum probe calidum, 
aut scutum stomachicum admoveatur. 
6.

363 Of Liniments. 
6.Balsamum suaveolens, ad delicias. 
ꝶ. Unguent. pomat. ℥j. 
Cerœ abiss. ʒj.
Ol. stillat. cort. citri ʒß. 
Aurant. 
Melissœ ana gtt. xij. 
Cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Ochrœ vel rad. curcum. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum citri. Sit pro odoramento. Eo & ca- 
pilli inungi possunt, aut his pectendis adhiberi pec- 
ten eo imbutus. 
Of LINIMENTS. 
§.443. A Liniment or litus, is a kind of 
very soft ointment (§.421.), being 
of a consistence between that of oil and a com- 
mon ointment, subservient to some medicinal in- 
tention by smearing over some part of the body. 
So that this form differs from an ointment in no- 
thing but consistence; and not always in that: as 
will hereafter appear. 
§.444. The MATERIALS for a liniment are in 
general the same as for an emplaster, cerate, oint- 
ment or balsam, preceding (§.406. 416. 422. 
433.).
§.445. But the ELECTION of ingredients fit- 
test for this form, is somewhat different; because 
of the different degree of consistence (§.443.). 
For.
1. This form does indeed require a softness, 
lubricity, and equable or uniform mixture, as 
well

364 Of Liniments. 
well as the ointment (§.423 n° 1. (2.) (3.)): 
but its degree of consistence is so vague and un- 
limited, that it is sometimes permitted not only 
to put on all the intermediate degrees of con- 
sistence between an oil and unguent, but a so to 
have the density of the very ointments or oils 
themselves. 
2. Hence, sometimes mere oils by expression, 
infusion, decoction, or distillation, are the mat- 
ter of this form, without any addition of more 
consistent substances. 
3. At other times, these oils are only mix’d 
with aqueous or spirituous liquors (§.406. n° 2. 
(1.)) by a long attrition or concussion of their 
parts, or by evaporating the more aqueous parts 
by boiling, in order to more intimately mix the 
viscid. 
4. Also the thick substances like an ointment 
(§.406. n° 1. (2.)), as fats, lard, officinal un- 
guents, &c. are sometimes only mix’d with 
each other, without any liquid substance, for 
the composition of a liniment, which then ab- 
solutely resembles an ointment. 
5. But liniments are more frequently com- 
pos’d both of the soft substances (n° 4.) and 
oils together, which makes this form much softer 
than (n° 4). 
6. But. sometimes liniments are compos'd of 
oil combin’d with the more solid substances, 
§.406. n° 1. (4.) n° 2. (2.). 
7. Also the powder (§.406. n° 2. (3.)). 
mix’d with oil only, or with other liquors (n° 3.) 
and joined by trituration or boiling, does some- 
times pass for a liniment. 
8. Hence it appears that those who will may 
compose liniments both of liquid (§.406. n° 1. 
(1.) n° 2. (1.)) thick (ib. n° 1. (2.) (3.) and 
n° 2. (2.)) and dry substances (ib. n° 1. (4.)
n° 2. 

365 Of Liniments. 
n° 2. (3.)), combin’d together in due propor- 
tions: tho' neatness and brevity is also laudable 
in this form (per. §.29.). 
9. There is sometimes occasion for a sapona- 
ceous intermedium in this form, when oily and 
watery substances are to be mix’d together by 
trituration; in order to prevent them from sepa- 
rating from each other by standing. For this 
purpose are used the yolk of an egg, honey, 
sope, alcalies, &c. 
10. Lastly, I would here advise the reader to 
consult what has been said at §.423. n° 5. to n° 6. 
§.446. The best ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients for this form, corresponds 
to that for the emplaster §.408. 
§.447. The DOSE and GENERNAL QUANTITY 
of this form are the same with those of the oint- 
ment at §.425. 426. But as a liniment may he 
readily composed barely by mixture, and as its con- 
sistence and long keeping will subject it much to a 
loss of its virtues, it is generally advisable to pre- 
scribe it in but a small quantity at a time, hardly 
ever exceeding ℥iij or jv. 
§.448. The mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for a liniment, is by reason of its various 
consistence (§.445. n° 1.) very undetermined; so 
that their proportion is generally regulated by their 
virtues. Hence observe, 
1. That this form can never be made of too 
thin a consistence; but too thick, it may: for 
that will obstruct both its illinition and pene- 
tration. 
2. When the liniment is to be composed of 
none but oils (§.405. n° 2.) the consistence 
will then admit of any proportion. But we shou’d 
be cautious not to let those too much predomi- 
nate, which are very hot and acrimonious: for 
these

366 Of Liniments. 
these ought to be tempered by three of four 
times as much of those which are milder. 
3. If you would combine oils with other li- 
quors by trituration (per §.445. n°.3.) it is in 
that case allowable to follow the proportion at 
§.426.n°.6: except when the liquors are spi- 
rituous; and more acrid, or saline, &c; for 
such should be mix’d in less quantities, that they 
may not prove hurtful by their too great 
strength.  
4. When this form is to be composed of a 
mixture of oily and watery substances, whose 
aqueous parts are to be exhaled by boiling, there 
is then no regard to be had to the proportion of 
such aqueous liquors (per §.410. n° 5.).  
5. If you order intermediate substances, (§.445.
n° 4.) alone in this form; then, what is said at 
n° 2. holds good here. But to avoid too great 
consistence (n° 1.), we should consider that some 
of these substances are more dense than others. 
6. If you order 3 ij, iij, of jv of intermediate 
substances (per. §. 445. n° 5.), more or less in 
proportion to their densities, to be mixed with 
℥j of oil, you will then have a liniment of a 
midling consistence (§.443.). 
7. You will also have a liniment of a mid- 
dle consistence from a mixture of oil ℥j. and of 
the more solid substances (§.445. n° 6.) ℥j: 
which will also hold with regard to the species 
at §.ib. n° 7. 
8. Lastly, from a mixture of oil ℥j of inter- 
mediate substances ʒij. and of dry ones ʒß. 
you will have a specimen of this form com- 
posed agreeable to §.445. n° 8. 
9. For the rest, consult what has been said at 
§. 410. 427. 438. a great part of which is here 
of consequence to observe. See also §.445. n° 1.
§.449 


367 Of Liniments. 
§.449. For the SUBSCRIPTION or directon to 
the apothecary for this form, having changed the 
name (§.443.), the method of preparing it may 
be order’d the same as for the ointment (§.428.). 
Sometimes a liniment is sent to the patient in a 
glass phiol, instead of an earthen gallipot, when 
its consistence is very thin, or its virtues extremely 
volatile. This form is seldom extended, like pla- 
sters, upon some vehicle; at least; hardly ever by 
the apothecary. 
§.450. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is apparent from §.429. 
The application of it is almost constantly per- 
form’d by illinition, and sometimes accompanied 
with frictions. When a bladder is to be arm’d with 
some liniment and applied to a part, I should 
ther call it an epithem (§.320.). 
§.451. The USE of this form is the same as 
that of the ointment §.430. but it is better adapt- 
ed to penetrate into the parts. 
§.452. SPECIMENS. 
1. Litus balsamicus, anodynus, ad papillarum 
dolores, &c.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 221. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Infusi hyperici. 
Violar. 
Rosar. ana ℥ß. 
M. F. linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Hujus tantillo subinde oblinatur pars affecta. 
2.

368 Liniments. 
2. Linimentum stomachicum, carminans, calc- 
faciens. 
ꝶ Ol. infus. absynth. 
crocin. ana ℥ß. 
Stillat. menth. ʒj. 
Caryophill. gtt. x. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
M. F. Linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Serviat pro inunctione regionis ventriculi & 
umbilici. 
3. Litus leniens, emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
ꝶ. Mucilagin. sem. cydonior. cum 
Aq. rosar. extract. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec. press. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥ß. 
Exactè mistis F. linimentum. D. ad fictile, 
S. Gingivœ dolentes eo subinde demulceantur. 
4. Linimentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Unguent. Agripp. 
Arthanit. ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici.
5. 

369 Liniments. 
5. Linimentum emmenagogum. 
Ad exemplum ibid. p. 215, 216. 
ꝶ. Gum. sagapen. ℥ß. 
Axung. castor. ʒij. 
Cum Ol. infus rut. q. s. dissolutis admisce 
Ol. stillat. sabin. ʒij. 
bacc. junip. ʒj. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Umbilico, pubi, inguinibus illinatur mane & vesperi. 
6. Linimentum antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 180. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥j. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Spirit, vin. rectis. q. s. 
Dissolutis admisce 
Ol. irini ℥ß. 
Stillat. succin. ʒjß. 
Spir. sal. ammon. ℥ß. 
Ung. net vin. q. s. 
Ut F. linimentum mediæ consistentiæ. 
S. Partes affectœ, prius pannis asperis, siccis, cali- 
dis, frictœ, dein hoc litu perfricentur bis de die. 
7. Litus antipleuriticus mitisicans, resolvens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 150. 
ꝶ. Sacch. saturn. ℥ß. 
Aceti ʒvj. 
Ol. rosac. infus. ℥j 
M. F. nutritum. 
S. Hoc calido inungatur latus affectum ter de die.
Bb 8.

370 Liniments.
8. Alius emolliens Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Lilior. infus. 
Ung. dialthœœ ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Ut præced. Illito loco superponatur solium brassicœ. 
9. Linimentum balsamicum demulcens, ad inter- 
triginem. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. rosar. 
Express. amygd. D. ana ℥ß. 
Ung. nutrit. S. corp. ʒiij. 
Rad. irid. flor. pulv. ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. ʒß. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Eo oblinantur partes adfectæ, prius detersæ. 
10. Linimentum ad ambusta. 
♃. Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Nicotian. ℥ß.
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒiij. 
Camph. pulv. ʒß. 
Ol. hyperic. ℥j.
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus q. s. illinantur partes affectæ, integræ.
11.

371 Of Epispastics. 
11. Linimentum ad scabiem. 
♃. Ung. nicotian. 
Cœrul. ana ʒvi. 
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒij. 
Sulph. viv. exact. trit. ℥ß. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. ℥j.
M. F. s. a. linimentum. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hoc libere inungantur partes affectœ omni nocte, 
calida manu. 
Of EPISPASTICS. 
§.453. EPISPASTICS are very warm, or stimu- 
lating external remedies, to be appli- 
ed to the surface of the skin, in various forms, and 
for various uses. When pitch is the basis of epis- 
pastics, they are termed dropaces; if they are made 
up with mustard-seed, they are then call’d, after 
the antients, synapisms; if their acrimony and sti- 
mulus are only sufficient to excite a redness upon 
the parts, they are termed phoenigmi, or rubefa- 
cientia; if they are strong enough to elevate the 
cuticle into vesicles, or little bladders, they are 
then call’d vesicatories: these are generally exhi- 
bited in the form either of a crude cataplasm 
(§.356. and 365.), an emplaster (§.405. and 413.), 
or a cerate (§.415.). 
§.454. Therefore the extemporaneous prescrip- 
tion of these medicines may be understood by the 
histories of those (loc. cit.). Their MATERIALS 
may be found under the title of stimulantia in the 
materia medica, and their USES shewn and directed 
to by the doctrine of indications; so that there is 
no need to enlarge upon them here (per.7. n° 1. 
and 2. §.8.)
Bb2  §.455.


372 Epispastics. 
§.455. A few SPECIMENS will give a better idea 
of these remedies. 
1. Dropax ad membrum paralyticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Picis ʒij. 
Galban. pur. ℥j. 
Piperis tenuiter contus. ʒiij. 
Castorei ʒj. 
Ol. irini q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. emplastrum ad alutam. 
S. Parti affectœ prius frictœ apponatur calidum; 
priusquam refrixit, iterum subito avellatur: quod 
repetendum donec pars rubeat, tumeat, caleat. 
2. Pasta rubifaciens, antifebrilis. Ibid. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Summit. rutœ virid. ℥jj. 
Semin. sinapi. ʒij. 
Contusa exhibe ad epicarpia. 
S. Applicentur carpis ad pulsuum loca, aliquot horis 
ante ingruentem paroxysmum. 
3. Synapismus cataplasmodes. Ibid. p.240. 
ꝶ. Fermenti acidi pansis ℥vj. 
Rutœ m. j. 
Semin. sinapios contus. ʒvj. 
Salis. 
Aceti ana ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Applica ad cava pedum & poplitum noctes 
atque dies. 
4.

373 Epispastics.
4. Phœnigmus emplastrodes. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 240. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. de melilot. 
Galbani 
Sagapeni ana ℥j. 
M. extende super duabus alutis ovatis. 
S. Applicentur cavis pedum. 
5. Sinapismus fortior veterum, vesicatorius. 
ꝶ. Ficuum siccar. in aq. tepida macerat. 
contusar. part. j. 
Semin. sinapios seorsim tenuissime con- 
tus. part. ij vel iij. 
Accuratè mistis F. pasta. 
S. Applicetur loco indicate, donec vesica enata sit. 
6. Vesicatorium cataplasmodes. Vid. ibid. p. 45. 
ꝶ. Cantharid. sine alis contritar. in pulv.
tenuem. ʒij. 
Accuratè misceantur cum 
Fermenti panis, pauxillo cum aceto 
subacti ʒvj. 
D. 
S. Applica spatio xij horarum, vel donec in vesicam 
manifestò epidermis elata sit. 
7. Emplastrum vesicatorium. 
ꝶ. Empl. de mucilagin. ℥jß. 
Cantharid. sine alis tenuiter pulv. ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
Accuratè mista extende super alutis orbulatis. 
S. Applicentur subutroque poplite, aut alibi; ut in- 
dicatio fert.
Bb3 Of 


374 Of Frications. 
Of FRICATIONS. 
§.456. BY a FRICATION (fricium vel frica- 
torium) we understand an external me- 
dicine which is to be applied by friction, or rub- 
bing into the surface of some soft external part of 
the body. 
§.457. Frications are distinguished into three 
kinds, according to their consistence: dry, soft, 
and liquid. The first is administer’d in the form 
of dry fumes, by rubbing with cloths; but the 
latter, in humid vapours, or wet cloths. 
§.458. The MATERIALS and FORMS for fri- 
cations may be understood from (§.272. 283. 369. 
393. 421. 432. 443.): subservient hereto, are mix- 
tures, lotions, fumes or vapors, ointments, bal- 
sams, liniments, &c. 
§.459. The USE of frications was very consi- 
derable among the antients, and is with us not con- 
temptible at present: those who are acquainted how 
much of some medicines may be introduced to the 
blood by external frictions, and have experienced 
the great effects they produce there, cannot be ig- 
norant of their uses. 
§.460. SPECIMENS of medicines to be used by 
friction, have been occasionally exhibited in the 
several places before cited (§.458.), to which we 
may add one more.  
Fricium, mixturæ mediæ formâ, antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Sp. lavendul. ℥iij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Tinctur. castorei ʒiv. 
Aq. stillat. lavend. ℥vj 
M. 
S. Perfricentur bac cum misturâ partes. 
Of

375 Of a Frontal. 
Of External FORMS, proper to particular 
Parts. 
§.461. I Might here omit to treat particularly of 
these forms; since they are in effect the 
same, and not different from several of those which 
we have consider’d in the preceding histories: 
their difference arising only from their being adapt- 
ed to particular parts (§.294.), from whence they 
take their particular denominations. 
Of FORMS proper to the Head.
Of a CUCUFA, or Scul-cap. See §.331. 
and 342. 
Of a FRONTAL. 
§.462. A Frontal is some external medi- 
cine, to be apply’d to the forehead 
and temples for various uses. 
§.463. The substances applied to these parts, are 
generally either in the form of a dry (§.320.) or 
liquid (§.331.) epithem, a boiled (§.345.) or 
crude (§.356.) cataplasm (but more frequently 
the latter), an ointment (§.421.), balsam (§.432.), 
or liniment (§.443.).  
§.464. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP- 
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient for 
the composition and application of this form, have 
neither of them any thing in particular, except 
the particular name, and the part §.462. Some- 
times the ingredients change the name of this form:
Bb4 as 


376 Frontals. 
as when the mixture, consisting of oil and vine- 
gar, especially of roses, is termed oxyrrhodinum; 
or of constipating substances beat into a cataplasm 
with some liquor, anacollema. For the rest, the 
dry rose-cake, made from the leaves, left after the 
distillation of the water, is sometimes used as a ve- 
hicle (§.328. n° 3.) for this form. 
§.465. The USES of this form are principally 
for cooling, moistening, relaxing, easing, and re- 
pelling; seldom used for the intentions of dispers- 
ing, attracting, warming, &c. and in the appli- 
cation of it for external and internal diseases of the 
head, it requires great circumspection; left by not 
removing, or even fixing, the cause of the disorder, 
there should arise a stupor, or lethargic indispo- 
sition; or by constringing the external parts, it 
should chance to throw the disease inwards. The 
election of ingredients for this form, is self- 
evident. 
§.466. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
l. Oxyrrhodinum demulcens, refrigerans, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Olei infus. rosar. ℥jß. 
Acet. sambuc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. opii cum sp. 
Acet. parat. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij. 
M. s. a. F. oxyrrhodinum. D. cum 
Placent. rosac. 
S. Placenta hoc liquore irrorata fronti & tempori- 
bus utrinque applicelur: exsiccata rursum humec- 
tetur; donec somnus obrepat.
2. 

377 Frontals. 
2. Frontale cataplasmodes, hypnoticum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. hyoscyam. 
Flor. rhœad. ana ʒij. 
Capit. rec. papav. hort. cum semin. 
n°.iij. 
Cum Acet. rosac. q. s. in pastam trita ex- 
hibe. 
S. Inclusa linteo fronti applicentur tepida. 
3. Frontale, linimenti forma, anodynum, discu- 
tiens, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Unguent. nervin. ʒvj. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Croci pulveris gr. viij. 
Ol. infus. chamœmel. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Exceptum stupis cannabinis, duobus linteis, inclu- 
sum, fronti imponatur. 
4. Anacollema constipans. 
ꝶ. Bol. Armen. 
Succ. acaciœ ana ʒij. 
Mastiches. 
Sang. dracon. 
Lap. hœmatit. ana ʒj. 
Cum Album. ov. conquass. q. s. redacta in 
pultem excipe stupis cannabinis. D. 
S. Fronti & temporibus applicentur. 
5.


378 Of Collyria. 
5. Sacculus frontalis, calesaciens, discutiens, ad ce- 
phalalgiam aut vertiginem, a causa frigida natam. 
ꝶ. Herb. rec. rutœ. 
Fol. rosmarin. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Sambuc. 
Summit. anethi ana m. ß. 
Caryophill. arom. ʒjß. 
Conscissa, tusa grosso modo, include binis 
sacculis oblongis, interpassandis. D. 
cum 
Spirtús lavendul. ℥iij. 
S. Alternatim fronti applicentur irrorati prius spi- 
ritu simul exhibito. 
Nota. To this place also belongs the emplastra 
temporalia, which are sufficiently intelligible, from 
what has been said of the emplaster at §.405. 
Of COLLYRIA. 
§.467. A COLLYRIUM is an external me- 
dicine to be applied to the eyes
for various uses. 
§.468. It is often exhibited in many of the forms 
which we have before descibed; as injections 
(§.295), aspersions (§.308.), liquid epithems 
(§.320.), and dry epithems (§.331.), cataplasms 
boiled (§.345.) and crude (§.356.), lotions 
(§.369.), humid vapours (§.383.), fumes 
(§.393), ointments (§.421.), liniments (§.443.). 
And from thence, the necessary directions and pre- 
cautions not be deduced.
§.469.

379 Of Collyria.
§.469. But the very great usefulness, tender- 
ness and sensibility of the organ of sight, being 
easily injured from slight causes, do require the 
utmost circumspection in the use of collyria which 
are either repelling or acrimonious: nor should any 
solid substances be applied, but when they have 
been most exactly levigated, to prevent them from 
offending the eye by their roughness; as in the 
dry collyria or sief of the Arabians, which are ap- 
plied alone, or mix'd with some liquor, wherein 
they are not dissolvable. For the same reason the 
mixture of sharp substances should be very equable, 
and the liquids order’d to be strained. 
§.470. The APPLICATION of collyria differs 
with their particular form, and the physician’s in- 
tention. Such as are liquid are usually applied 
to the eye, by dipping lint or a feather in them; 
or else instill’d, by a small tube or a quill, into 
the eye. Those which are of a thicker consistence 
may be applied by in unction, or spread upon 
some suitable vehicle. The dry collyria may be 
sprinkled, or blown into the eye thro’ aquil. 
§.471. The USES of collyria are many and va- 
rious, being sufficiently well adapted to most dis- 
orders of the eyes, when they are prudently di- 
rected; (§.469.) by mollifying, strengthening, 
maturating, resolving, cooling, easing, cleansing, 
&c. 
§.472. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

380 Collyria. 
1. Collyrium liquidum, antiphlogisticum, rep-
pellens, in initio ophthalmiæ externæ. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. plantag. 
Rosar. 
Troch. alb. rhas. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. gr. vj. 
M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Collyrium, quo concusso imbutum linteum quadrupli- 
catum imponatur oculo affecto: recentetur omni 
trihorio. 
2. Collyrium cataplasmodes, antiphlogisticum 
emolliens, demulcens. 
ꝶ. Pom. dulc. q. v. 
Assentur sub. cineribus, aut cum 
Lact. dulc. q. s. coquantur ad molli- 
tiem. Pulpæ per setaceum tra- 
jectæ ℥j. admisce 
Micœ panis alb. ʒvj. 
Album. ovi in liquorem conquass. q. s. 
Ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo exceptum calidè admoveatur 
oculo firmetur sine compressione. Renovetur quar- 
ta quavis horâ. 
3.

381 Collyria. 
3. Collyrium vaporosum, stimulans, roborans ad 
paralysin palpebrarum. 
ꝶ. Herb. majoran. 
Thymi. 
Mar. syriac. ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. 
Chamœmel. 
Bacc. juniper. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, D. ad Chartam. 
S. Species roborantes quarum pars quarta cum vin. 
rubr. pint. 1/4 infusa per horam maceretur tum ebul- 
liat vase aperto, & vapor exhalans per infundibu- 
lum determinetur ad oculum affectum, spatio qua- 
drantis horœ. Id fiat manè & vesperi. 
4. Collyrium siccum, detergens, leniter erodens, 
ad delendas cicatrices opacas corneæ diaphanæ. 
ꝶ. Sacchar. cand. albiss. ℥j. 
Almiin. ust. ℈ij. 
Vitriol. alb. gr. x. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Hujus tantilium bis de die loco erodendo imponatur. 
5. Collyrium, formâ unguenti, ad trachoma. 
ꝶ. Ung. rosac. ℥j. 
Tutiœ prœparat. ʒij. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j. 
Camphor. gr. vj. 
Ol. infus. rosar. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Hujus tantilium illinat palpebris omni vesiperâ,  
cubitum iturus.
Of 


382 Of Errhins.
Of FORMS proper to the Nose. 
§.473. NASALIA, are certain medicines to 
be applied to the internal parts of 
the nose; as well for pleasure, as for the cure of 
particular diseases. Among these, some are apply'd 
in gross substance to the nose, or their vapours on- 
ly are expell'd by heat; which we then term er- 
rhins: others, exhaling their vapours spontane- 
ously, only affect the organs of smelling; and are 
called odoramenta, or smelling-bottles, balls, &c. 
Of ERRHINS. 
§.474. ERRHINS have various forms, and are 
in general either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are infusions (§.211.), de- 
coctions (§.224.), juices (§.235.), emul- 
sions (§.246.), mixtures (§.272.) and drops 
(§.283.). 
2. The soft are electuaries (§.138.), oint- 
ments (§.421.), balsams (§.432.), liniments 
(§.443.). 
3. The solid are powders (§.106. 308.) of 
the two finer kinds (§.107. and 309.), fumes 
(§.393.), pyramidal tents properly call'd na-
sals, which are composed of some powder and 
a glutinous mucilage v. g. the whites of eggs, 
turpentine, honey, labdanum, wax, &c. com- 
pounded as for troches (§.172.): But are some- 
times simple, as ex rad. betœ, cyclaminis, iridis, 
&c. cut into a proper form, or ex sol. betæ, 
nicotianæ, cort. recent. aurant. &c. twisted to- 
gether in a suitable manner.
§.475.

383 Of Errhins.
§.475. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for errhins, with what belongs to them, may be 
learned from the physician’s intention, and their 
various forms (§.474. and loc. ibid. cit.). 
§.479. The APPLICATION of liquid errhins 
(§.474. n° 1.) is performed by injection (§.295.), 
by snuffing them in, and washing them but again, 
(§.369.) by evaporation (§.383.), or like a 
liquid fomentation (§.320.), by introducing 
scraped lint, tents, &c. The soft errhins (§.474
n° 2.) are apply’d either by injunction, or by 
snuffing them up with some proper vehicle, to be 
hereafter mentioned. Errhins of the powder kind 
(§.474. n° 3.) are drawn up the nose like snuff; 
fumes are conducted into the nostrils by a funnel, 
and tents are introduced or thrust there. 
§.477. The USE of errhins is recommended 
by their various virtues, of astringing, mollifying, 
relaxing, easing, opening, stimulating, and by ex- 
citing to sneeze, absterging and discharging the 
mucus, &c. by which operations they may prove 
serviceable not only in diseases proper to the nose, 
but also in those of other parts, where an evacu- 
ation by this emunctory is proper. We should 
also consider what an effect sneezing has upon the 
whole body, by violently shaking it, and whether 
the patient has been accustomed to an evacuation 
at this part, by a constant habit of taking errhins, 
not easy to be broke off. 
§.478. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1.


384 Errhins. 
1. Dococtum mundans ad ozænam. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristoloch. rot. ℥ß.
Herb. veronic.
Menth. ana m. j.  
Cum Aq. pur. q. s. quoque vase clauso per 
1/8 horæ. Colat. ℥xij. adde 
Tinct. myrrh. 
Aloës ana ℥ß. 
Mell. rosac. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur hujus repidi q. s. aliquoties de die: 
turn gossypium aut carpta eo imbuta applicentur. 
2. Liquor stipticus ad narium hæmorrhagiam. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 161. 
ꝶ. Alumin. rup. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. plantag. ℥j 
M. solve. 
S. Turundis ingestis applicetur cavo narium. 
3. Suffitus roborans, nimiam per pares destilla- 
tionem minuens. 
ꝶ. Mastiches. 
Olibani. 
Succini. 
Gumm. anim. ana ʒj. 
Herb. sicc. puleg. ʒij.
M. F. pulvis grossus. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Pujillus hujus prunis inspergatur, fumusque tecto 
capite excipiatur naribus.
4. 
 

385 Errhins. 
4. Electuarium errhinum ad gravedinem. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. galang.  
Irid. florent. ana ʒj. 
Zinziber. ʒß. 
Piper. alb. ℈j. 
Mellis comm. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S. Ter, quater de die, tantillum naribus illinatur, 
aut cum turundâ indatur. 
5. Succus errhinus, muci e naribus excretionem
promovens. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. brassicœ. 
Betonic. 
Anagalb. purp. ana q. s. 
Aq. stillat. majoran. ℥j. 
Contusis simul succum exprime, cujus
℥. iv. adde 
Spir. lilior. convall. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Hujus quantum volâ manus capi potest, mane & 
vesperi, naribus attrahatur. 
6. Nasalia ejusdem virtutis. 
ꝶ. Herb. sicc. majoran. 
Rad. ellebor. alb. 
Sem. nigell. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ℈j. 
Mastiches ʒß. 
Muciiag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Aq. rosar. damasc. fact. q. s.
Ut F. s. a. turundæ pyramidales pro nasalibus. 
S. Manè naribus immittatur. 
Cc 7.

386 Of Odoramenta.
7. Pulvis ptarmicus. 
ꝶ. Fol. siccat nicotian. ℥j. 
Majoran. 
Mari syriac. 
Flor. lavendul.
Lilior. convall. ana ʒij. 
Rad. pyrethri pulver. ʒj. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Attrahatur naribus tantilium, tempore matutino, 
ut sternutatio excitetur. 
Of ODORAMENTA, or Medicines 
to smell at. 
§.479. ODORAMENTA (§.473.) may be 
composed of every thing which emits 
or exhales odorous and medicinal particles, whe- 
ther pleasant or unpleasant. 
§.480. Their FORM, like that of errhins. 
(§.474.), is either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are compounded either of offi- 
cinal liquors only, or else of these and some other 
mixtures (§.272. and 283.) compounded to- 
gether. 
2. The soft, are composed of balsams (§.432.). 
3. The solid, are powders (§.106. 308.), 
or troches (§.172.) made of them, with some 
proper glutinous substance, and formed into odo- 
riserous apples, bails, globules, sopes, &c. But 
odoriserous sopes and wash-balls, being pre- 
pared mostly for pleasure, are at present hardly 
any where made and sold, but at the shops of 
persumers.
§.481. 

387 Odoramenta. 
§.481. These liquid balsams, powders, balls, 
apples, &c. are applied either to or near the nose; 
that they may the more strongly act upon the or- 
gan of smelling: the globules are usually carried 
about in the hands or bosom; and the sopes serve 
to wash with. 
§.482 From hence (§.479 to 481.) and from 
our intention, it will be easy to judge what may 
be further necessary in prescribing these things, 
agreeable to the rules of composition. 
§.483. The USES of smelling-bottles, balls, 
&c. are principally for pleasure, or for raising the 
spirits by their stimulus, to determine the course 
of the blood and spirits to other parts, and to cor- 
rect the ambient air. Here also consult what has 
been said at (§.85. 100. 396. n° 9. and 441.) 
§.484. SPECIMENS of balsams have been given 
before (at §.442.): examples of the rest follow. 
1. Vapor stimulans nares, in apoplexia imminente 
a causa frigida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ. Tinct. castor. 
Spir. sal. amon. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Subolfaciat sœpe. 
2. Pulvis odoratus, cardiacus. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat cinnamom. gtt. vj. 
Meliss. 
Rorismar. ana gtt. iv. 
Sal. volat. sicc. de sal. ammon. ℈ß. 
Sacchar. albissim. ℥ß 
Cinnab. nat. subtiliss. levigat. q. s. ad 
coccineum ruborem. 
Accurate, cito, mista immittantur vasculo 
vitreo, obthuraculo vitrio claudendo. 
S. Admoveatur naribus in languore.
CC2 3.

388 Of Stomatics. 
3. Pomum odoratum. 
ꝶ. Lahdani ʒiij. 
Benzoin. 
Styrac. calam. ana ʒij. 
Herb. thymi. 
Mari syriac. ana ʒj. 
Camphorœ gr. ij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
Cum Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. aq. cort. 
citri. solut. q. s. F. pomum. 
Ut supra. Ex iisdem quoque globuli magnitudinis 
arbitrariœ formari possunt. 
4. Sapo fragrans. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥viij. 
Pulv. subtiliss. rad. irid. florent. 
Flor. lavendul. ana 3iij. 
Ol. stillat. cort. citr. gtt. xv. 
Tinct. benzoin. aquâ pnœcipitat. q. s. 
Concorporentur in pastam, ex qua for- 
mentur pilæ hinc inde auri foliolis 
exornandæ. 
S. lavandis manibus, faciei, inservit. 
Of STOMATICS, or medicines proper 
to the Mouth. 
§.485. BY STOMATICS we understand such me- 
dicines as are to be applied to any of the 
internal parts of the mouth and fauces. Of these, 
there are three kinds: dentifrices, to correct the 
dis-

389 Of DENTIFRICES. 
disorders of the teeth and gums; apophlegmatisms, 
to discharge the saliva and mucus of the mouth; 
and gargarisms, to wash the membranes of the 
mouth and fauces. 
Of DENTIFRICES. 
§.486. A DENTIFRICES is either liquid, soft, 
or dry. 
1. Liquid dentifrices are usally composed of 
mixtures (§.272.), or drops (§.283.): but 
sometimes officinal liquors, decoctions, infusions, 
expressed juices, &c. are also used. It is then 
also frequently called collutorium, or collutio. 
2. Soft dentifrices may be prescribed in the 
form of an electuary. (§.135.), linctus (§.149.), 
or liniment (§.443.). 
3. A dry dentifrice may be some powder 
(§.106. and 308.) finer or coarser (§.107. 
309.): which may be made into troches (§.172.) 
or sticks (Styli dentifricii) with some proper 
glutinous substance; which latter, are not so 
much in use at present. 
§.487. The INGREDIENTS and their CHOICE, 
&c. for dentifrices, may be understood from con- 
sidering the nature of the disorder to be remedied, 
and the particular form (§.486.) desired. Mineral 
acids should be used with great caution for the 
teeth; otherwise, they may not only whiten, but 
also dissolve them. 
§.488. The USES of dentifrices are principally to 
render the teeth and gums firm, to cleanse ’em and 
free ’em from any scorbutical taint: they may upon 
occasion be also serviceable to cool and mollify 
the gums, in the difficult dentition of infants. 
§.489. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
CC3 1.

390 Dentifrices. 
1. Collutorium in scorbuto a causa calida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Myriœ limonum. 
Mell. rosac. ana ℥ij. 
Sp. sal. dulc. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. rutœ ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Eo sœpiusculè laventer dentes gingivœ. 
2. Linimentum: Vide in §.452. n° 3. 
P. 
3. Collutio, eclegmatis ferè  formâ, refrigerans, 
emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 236. 
ꝶ. Crem. lact. rec. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥j. 
Syr. violar. ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij 
M. 
S. His foveantur gingivœ dolentes. 
4. Opiata dentes detergentes, firmans. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ß. 
Oss. sepiœ. ppt. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. ana ʒj. 
Alumin. usti. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosac. q. s. 
Ut F. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S Manè & post prandium ac cœnam eo fricentur 
dentes, turn abluantur cum spirit, vini myrrhato. 
5.  


391 Of Apophlegmatisms.
5. Pulvis dentifricus. 
ꝶ. Pumicis ppt. ʒij. 
Flor. balaust. 
Rad. irid. flor. 
Myrrh. rubr. ana ʒj. 
Lap. hæmat. ppt.  
Sal. ammoniac. ana ʒß 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Ut supra. 
6. Trochisci vel styli dentifricii. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedent. 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. cum aq 
salviœ fact. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci vel styli probè siccandi. 
Of APOPHLEGMATISMS, or 
Medicines to excite a Spitting. 
§.490. APOPHLEGMATISMS (§.485.) are 
also prescribed in three forms, liquid, 
soft, and dry. 
1. Liquid apophlegmatisms are frequently 
made of decoctions (§.224.), and mixtures, 
(§.272.), but oftener drops (§.283.); some- 
times infusions (§.211.) and expressed juices 
(§.235.) or other officinal liquors are used, 
either uncompounded or mix’d. 
2. A soft apophlegmatism may be some elec- 
tuary (§.138.).  
3. Of dry, there are various kinds, either 
by the way of smoaking (§.395. n° 1.), as 
common tobacco, or a medicated one; or by 
Cc4 letting


392 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
letting a little cake (§.199.) disolve under the 
tongue; or by chewing something in the mouth, 
commonly termed a masticatory, which should 
be solid, tenacious and pungent: for which pun- 
pose are used the solid parts of the more pun- 
gent, or hot and biting vegetables, or concret- 
ed juices which are difficult to dissolve, and gross 
powders (§.106, 107. n° 2.) made of these 
or things of the like kind, which are either used 
loose in the mouth, when they are dissolvable, 
or else included in a bit of linen cloth, like a no- 
dule (§.219. n° 1. (2.)); or they may be 
formed into troches or pastills, with some glu- 
tinous substance (per §.172.). 
§.491. But we are not always at liberty to use 
any of these forms (§.490.) promiscuously. We 
are to consider which are most suitable to the par- 
ticular indication, seat of the disease, and consti- 
tution of the patient. 
1. For dispatch, upon sudden emergencies, it 
is advisable to use liquid apophlegmatisms(§.490. 
n° 1.), especially simple ones, or prepared only 
by mixture. 
2. The same (§.490. n° 1.) are also prefer- 
able in cases, where tough phlegm is to be se- 
parated, from the posterior or more remote 
parts of the mouth. 
3. Apophlegmatisms of the electuary kind, 
(§.490. n° 2.) are mostly of use when a dry 
or liquid one cannot be retained, turned about, 
and directed by manducation in the mouth: as 
frequently happens in paralytic and comatose 
affections; where an electuary kind of apophleg- 
matism being spread upon the palate, gradu- 
ally dissolves, and acts more effectually. 
4. The smoaking kind of apophlegmatisms 
are intolerable, to many who have been unaccus-
tomed 

393 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
tomed to them, they act too roughly upon the 
nerves; and the smoak not being dextrously ex- 
cluded from the cavities of the nose, larynx and 
pharynx, excites vertigos, head-achs, coughs, 
sickness and vomiting. 
5. Children and nicer patients should not be 
confined to apophlegmatisms which require a 
tedious mastication. They will be better pleas’d 
with little cakes (§.490. n° 3.), in which the 
pungent substances are none of the strongest, and 
cover’d with sugar. 
6. When the humours of the mouth are to be 
discharg’d slowly, in large quantities, or for a 
considerable time, then apophlegmatisms which 
will bear mastication, are preferable to others; 
unless any thing of the former (n° 3, 4, 5.) 
forbids. 
§.492. The MATERIALS for apophlegmatisms 
are taken from those substances, which being put 
into, retained and moved in the mouth, do exert 
a relaxing, or rather a stimulating power; so as to 
solicit a greater discharge than usual of the saliva 
and mucus which are deposited in that cavity. 
(V. H. Boerh. Inst. Med. §.1195. 1197. and 1200. 
n° 1, 2, and 3. ). We have in this place nothing 
to do with medicines which promote spitting, by 
being received into the stomach and exciting a 
nausea; nor with those which produce a ptyalism, 
by being convey’d into, and dissolving the cohe- 
sion of the blood, for we are here treating of 
topical remedies, proper to the mouth (per 
§.485.). 
§.493. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
an apophlegmatism is to be directed by their de- 
gree of strength and form required (§.491.). 
1. The materia medica furnishes the physician 
with a vast field of substances, capable of pro- 
moting

394 Of Apophlegmatisms.  
moting this discharge; some of which are 
stronger, others weaker; but most of them are 
either emollient, saponaceous, aromatic, or re- 
pleat with a sharp or pungent oil or salt; from 
whence the physician is to make a choice, agree- 
able to his intention and circumstances of the 
case. Of these, apophlegmatisms may be easily 
made with various menstrums, watery, vinous, 
decoctions, infusions, expressed juices, &c. of a 
greater or less degree of strength: and their 
composition maybe order'd by the rules at §.211. 
224. 235. They may be qualified for tender 
palates, by adding sugar and honey.
2. The materials proper for apophlegmatisms 
by mixture (§.490. n° 1.) are, distilled wa- 
ters, vinegar, spirits, tinctures, essences, oils, 
and, salts prepared from the preceding ingre- 
dients (n° 1.); which are more convenient for 
this purpose after dilution. 
3. The method of preparing medicated to- 
bacco, and fumes, for apophlegmatisms, has 
been before related, (at §.395. n° 1. 396. n° 4 
and seq.). 
4. Spices, roots, barks, leaves and seeds, which 
are whole, and of the more pungent kind, do 
often undergo a previous maceration in wine, 
vinegar, and spirit of wine. Concreated juices 
of the like nature, which are not of a very dis- 
agreeable smell, will each of them afford an ef- 
ficacious masticatory: such are myrrh, mastic, 
&c. Some can ever chew the leaves of tobacco 
without nausea: and the indians are pleased with 
chewing their betel and arac, mix'd with lime. 
5. Or the preceding ingredients (n° 4.), by 
triture, are formed powders (§.490. n° 3.); 
which being included in bits of linen cloth, make 
nodules; mix'd up with sugar, they may be 
formed into rotulœ or lozenges; incorporated 
with

395 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
with wax, mastich, honey, and other glutinous 
substances, they will form masticatories; but 
mix’d up with equal parts, or more of simple or 
medicated honey, they will afford an electuary: 
all to be used for apophlegmatisms. 
6. In prescribing apophlegmatisms for masti- 
cation, we should constantly abstain from those 
substances which are of a detestible smell and 
taste because they are to come so near, and lie 
so long upon those organs of sensation: though 
by custom or habit, the most nauseous may be- 
come tolerable (per n° 4.). 
§.494. The ORDER, DOSE, GENERAL QUAN-
TITY, PROPORTION,and SUBSCRIPTION for apo- 
phlegmatisms, are suffciently apparent from what 
has been said under these heads for forms of the like 
nature; from comparing what is deliver’d at (§.490. 
to 494.), and from consulting the subsequent spe- 
cimens. The size or weight of pastills for this pur- 
pose, are generally larger than the others (§.177.): 
they are sometimes ℈j, ʒß, or even a whole ʒ. 
§.495. With regard to the SUPERSCRIPTION 
or direction to the patient for apophlegmatisms, 
we need say but little, it is of itself so obvious. 
This evacuation is generally the best excited upon 
an empty stomach: so that these medicines are 
commonly exhibited some hours before meals; ex- 
cept when the least delay is of dangerous conse- 
quence. The discharge is forwarded by inclining 
the head, with the mouth downward; which pos- 
ture will also prevent any of the pungent apo- 
phlegmatism from slipping into the fauces, larynx 
or pharynx. Their operation is seldom continu’d 
longer than half an hour. There will be hardly 
any occasion to order the patient to wash his mouth, 
after the operation, with some mild liquor, as 
warm water, milk, &c. for he will of himself be 
ready enough to do that. 
§.496.

396 Apophlegmatisms. 
§.496. The USES of apophlegmatisms are 
very considerable when judiciously directed, for 
they produce very great effects obtainable by no 
other means, in cold habits and defluctions; in 
comatose, paralytic and epileptic disorders; in lu- 
cophlegmatic or watery habits, the watery quinsey, 
tooth-ach, &c. But the abuse of a good thing, 
in its place, may be of the worst consequence; for 
by depriving the blood of too great quantities of 
its more subtle lymph by the salival glands, it will 
extenuate the whole habit, as at also will by im- 
peding chylification; but when once the body is 
accustomed to it, 'tis no small difficulty to lay it 
aside. 
§.497. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Decoctum apophlegmatizans, ingruente apo- 
plexiâ frigidâ utilissimum. 
Vide H.Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 175. 
ꝶ. Rad. imperator. 
Pyrethri ana ℥j.
Fol. recent. rutœ. 
Majoran. ana m.j. 
Flor. lavendul. m. ß. 
Semin. sinapis contus. ℥ß
Concissa, cum vin. alb. libr. ij. coque per 1/2 
horæ, vase exacte clauso. Colat. admisce 
Spir. sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Mell. anthos. ℥ß. 
D. 
S. Hujus tepidi pauxilium ore detineat ac volutet, 
humorem prolectum jugiter exscreans. Repetat 
pro necessitate urgente, quavis horâ aut citius. 
2

397 Apophlegmatisms.
2. Mixtura similis, odontalgiæ catarrhosæ apta. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. lavendul. ℥vj. 
Spirit. regin. hungar. ℥ij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒj. 
Tinct. sal. tart. helmont. ʒij.
Zinzib. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
M. D. vitro clauso. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Apophlegmatismus, formâ succi pressi 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. becabung. m. j. 
Cochlear. m. ß. 
Rad. recent. ari. 
Armorac. 
Sem. sinapis ana ℥ß
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succum, cui 
admisce 
Vin. alb. ℥j. ß. 
Sacchari alb. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus haustulum, omni manè ore prius aqua eluto, 
contineat aliquamdiu scorbuto frigido laborans, 
tum exspuat una cum saliva sic prolectâ. 
4. Pulvis apophlegmatizans. 
ꝶ. Rad. pyrethri 
Cort. magellanic. ana ʒjß. 
Cubeb. 
Cardamom. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ʒß. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒj.  
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. vj. 
Contusis F. pulvis crassiusculus. D. in scatulâ. 
S. Capiat omni mane, jejunus quantum apice cultri 
sustineri potest, & commandat, exspuatque humorem 
proritatum.
5.

398 Apophlegmatisms. 
5 Rotulæ sialogogæ. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedentes subtilissimè tritas.
Sacchar. albiss. aq. rosar. solut. & in- 
spissat. sextuplum. 
Ut F. s. a. rotulæ, 
S. Una vel duœ sub lingua detineantur, ut sensim li- 
quescant. Excernatur liquidum affluens. 
6. Electuarium ex iisdem. 
ꝶ. Species easdem pulveris, subtilissime 
comminutas. 
Mellis anthos. triplum.
M. exactè. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus tantillum palato affricetur in morbis sopo- 
rosis frigidís. 
7. Nodulus similis. 
ꝶ. Pulver. prœcedent. ʒjß. 
Mastiches  ʒiij. 
Mista illigentur panno lineo, ut F. nodulus. 
S. Mandatur leniter mane per 1/2 horam, ut saliva pro- 
ritetur exspuenda. 
8. Trochisci masticatorii. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 175 
ꝶ. Mastich. 
Cerœ alb. 
Zinzib. ana ℥j.
F. s. a. parvi pastilli, singuli ʒß vel ʒj. 
S. Ut supra. 
9. Pulveres sialagogæ.
Vid. §.126. n° 16. pag. 69.
Of

399 Of Gargarisms. 
Of GARGARISMS. 
§.498. A GARGAISM (§.485.) is a liquid 
medicine, adapted to wash the inter- 
nal parts of the mouth and fauces, for various 
uses. It is also termed (collutio vel collutorium) 
a mouth-wash, when intended for no other use but 
to cleanse and wash those parts. 
§.499. The FORM of this medicine is always 
liquid, generally composed of some infusion 
(§.211.), decoction (§.224.), expressed juices 
(§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), juleps (§.261.), 
or mixtures, (§.272.): and is to be accordingly 
prescribed by the rules for those forms. 
§.500. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for a gargarism, is to be regulated by the physi- 
cian’s particular intention, and the form or kind of 
liquor to compose it (§.499.), in conjunction 
with a consideration of the rules for these heads, 
deliver’d under the internal forms before cited 
(§.499.). 
§.501. The ORDER, GENERAL QUANTITY, 
and PROPORTION for a gargarism, may be also
prescribed by the rules for these heads, delivered 
under the foresaid forms (§.499.). The DOSE is 
never determined by weight, but the capacity of 
the mouth; being as much as may be conveniently 
taken without distending the cheeks. 
§.502. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for a gargarism, orders F. liquor pro 
gargarismate vel collutorio. 
§.503. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for gargarisms, acquaints him with the 
method of applying or using them, which is not 
always the same. For sometimes the liquor is to  
be

400 Gargarisms. 
be shook about in the mouth with the head inclin’d 
backward; that it may the better penetrate and 
cleanse, or soak into the proper parts. At other 
times the liquor is only to be retained in the mouth 
quietly, without any agitation; when it will, by 
its motion, offend the inflamed, or otherwise in- 
jur’d parts, or cannot be prevented from slipping 
into the larynx or pharynx by such agitation. There 
are some other cases which require a gargarism to 
be injected by a syringe: particularly in infants, 
very weak patients, or such as cannot drink. This 
kind of medicine is also more frequently used warm 
or hot, than cold: but the latter is usually refer’d 
when the intention is to astringe or repel. 
§.504. The USE of gargarisms is very consider- 
able in most disorders of the internal parts of the 
mouth, sauces, and parts adjacent; for tumours, 
inflammations, ulcers, the thrush, great drought and 
rigidity, or too great relaxation, watery defluctions, 
and phlegm, &c. When the intention is to mol- 
lify, astringe, moisten, cool, dry up, warm, loosen, 
suppurate, deterge, &c. by this topical applica- 
tion immediately to the parts affected. 
§.505. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Collutio antiseptica, ad ulcera oris, a scorbuto 
putrido nata. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Spir. salis marin. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. salviœ ℥viij. 
M.
S. Hoc liquore colluat os & fauces sœpius de die.
2. 

401 Gargarisms.
2. Collutorium ad anginam inflammatoriam, anti- 
phlogisticum, resolvens, refrigerans. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. sambuc. ℥xvj. 
Acet. vin. destillat. ℥ij. 
Sal. prunell. ʒjß.  
Rob. sambuc. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Callido hoc liquore, ore detento, fauces assiduò hu-
mectentur. 
3. Decoctum emolliens, demulcens, ad promoven- 
dum ptyalysmum mercurialem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphorism. 1475.
ꝶ. Herb. althœœ m. ij. 
Malvœ. 
Flor. rhœad. 
Verbasci ana m.j. 
Rad. glycirrhiz. ℥j. 
Cum Seri. lact. rec. q. s. decoct. spatio 1/4 
horæ, turn colat. express. ℔ij. admisce 
Mellis puri ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Hoc. tepido gargariset & colluat jugiter totum 
oris cavum. 
4. Aliud laxans & detergens, ad crustæ aphthosæ 
lapsum promovendum. 
Vid. Ketelaar de Aphthis p. 38. 
ꝶ. Hordei mundat. ℥j. 
Passul exacinat. ℥ij. 
Ficuum n°.iij. 
Liquorit. ras. ℥iij. 
Coque ex aq. pur. turn cola & exprimè. 
Colat. ℔ij. admisce syr. jujubin. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Tepidum ore semper contineatur, &, sipotè, gar- 
garisetur.
Dd 5. 

402 Of Glysters. 
5. Infusum balsamicum consolidans, ad ulcera fau- 
cium mundata. 
ꝶ. Herb. agrimon. 
Veronic. 
Salviœ. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Betonic. 
Rhœad. ana m. ß. 
Infundantur cum aq. pur. fervid. ℥xx. 
stent per horam infusa, vase clauso, 
tum colat. express. admisce mell. rosat. 
℥ij. 
S. Ut supra. 
Concerning SCUTES: See §.331. 342. 414. 431. 
Of Intestinal GLYSTERS. 
§.506. A Glyster (termed also clysma, ene- 
ma, lavamentum intestinale,) is some 
kind of liquor, to be injected by the anus into the 
rectum, and the other large intestines; with a view 
to alter their morbid state, nourish the body, or 
discharge their fæces. It is therefore a member 
of injections (§.295. & seq.), of which we gave 
a general treatment before, and may from thence 
be in a great measure understood. 
§.507. The MATERIALS, in general, do re- 
ceive, or are received. 
1. The excipiens or receiving, is some liquor, 
either (1.) in vulgar use; as common and smith’s- 
forge-water, new-milk, skim’d-milk, whey, ale, 
wine, urine, &c. Or, (2.) retained in the shops, or
ready 

403 Of Glysters. 
prepared by the apothecary, so as not to require 
extemporaneous prescription; as Aq. stillat. lac. 
chalybiat. dococt. hord, avenœ, specier. emollient. 
carminant. clysmat. ordin. juscula carn. olea pressa, 
infusa, &c. Or (3.) made by extemporanous 
decoction, seldom infusion, agreeable to the phy- 
sician’s prescription. 
2. The excipienda are all things suitable to 
the physician’s intention, and capable of a solu- 
tion in the preceding liquors (n° 1.): either 
in (1.) the watery; as electuaries, juices, extracts, 
salt, sugar, honey, sope, eggs, syrups, &c. Or 
(2.) oily, as oils by infusion, decoction, expres- 
sion and distillation, fats, butter, balsams, espe- 
cially turpentine, ointments, &c. Or (3.) of 
the powder kind not soluble, which are but very 
seldom used in glysters. 
§.508. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be regulated by the different intention 
of the physician, together with the known virtues 
of the medicines, their price, and more or less 
easy preparation, with the other circumstances, 
both of the patient and medicine: and may be 
easily determined in particular cases. Hence 
1. The reader may here peruse what has been 
said before of injections at §.299. 
2. When there is very sudden occasion for the 
assistance of this form, as is frequently the case, 
we may omit infusions and decoctions with the 
other excipienda, and express’d oils, as requir- 
ing a too tedious preparation (per. §.42.). 
Tho' there are not wanting decoctions, &c. rea- 
dy prepared in the shops, adapted to most inten- 
tions. 
3. In prescribing this form, we shou’d avoid the 
more costly ingredients; especially when the gly- 
ster is to be frequently repeated: by which means 
Dd2 we

404 Of Glysters. 
we may prevent the poor patient from suffering 
too much in his pocket, and give the apothe- 
cary no opportunity of sophisticating the com- 
position, who may think any thing good enough 
to wash the grosser intestines, being also sensible 
that this kind of medicine is seldom examined 
into. 
4. The several emollient, carminative, and 
other species of the shops should be avoided, in 
extemporaneous prescriptions, as much as pos- 
sible; because, by long standing, they lose their 
virtues, breed insects, or are otherwise corrupted. 
It will be no great trouble to prescribe those that 
are fresh made. 
5. The mixture of oily and aqueous substances 
for this form, need not be so very intimate or 
exact, as is requisite for the internal ones, (at 
§.274. n° 6.) tho' the addition of honey, yolks 
of eggs, sugar, salt, sope, &c. will answer this 
purpose, at the same time it does other inten- 
tions. The turpentines should indeed be very 
exactly mix’d up with the yolk of an egg for 
this form, that by the division of their parts, 
they may have the greater action: for they are 
commonly us’d as digestives in glysters. 
6. We may ask why some forbid the use of 
acids in glysters, who yet, at the same time, 
make very free with the strongest emetics, and 
cathartics in this form. In short, when there is 
any putrefaction to be corrected, or febrile heat 
to be kept under, there is reason enough to make 
use of the weaker acids. 
7. You may very well omit ingredients of the 
powder kind for glysters, since there are other 
substances enough suitabie to every intention. 
But if you intend to use them, be mindful of the 
caution (at §.299. n° 4.) 
8.

405 Of Glysters. 
8. Salt and oil are improperly left out of gly- 
sters for the worms, for who will say they de- 
light only in sweet things, when they make their 
nests in such as are very acrimonious? When 
they are once kill’d, they quickly dissolve, and 
may be afterwards easily discharged, 
9. When the intention is to nourish by this 
form, nothing can be more proper than flesh
broths, because these do not so much require 
digestion by the intestines, but may be imme- 
diately transmitted to the blood after their 
immission, without any bad consequence; but 
when the heat of the body will much incline 'em 
to putrefaction, it may be proper to season ’em 
with a little salt and spice. 
10. Lastly, as the physician is to do nothing 
without a reason (per §.11, 12. 15.) so, when 
he is directed to prescribe a glyster, he should 
consider what kind will best answer his inten- 
tion, that he may afterwards the more readily 
select the proper ingredients for its composition. 
Hence he will perceive that all the specifics re- 
commended in this form for the head, bread, sto- 
mach, liver, uterus, will hardly do any thing 
more than common diluents, moistners, emol- 
lients, warmers, coolers, discutients, re- 
solvents, and stimulators. Thus the manage- 
ment of this form will become easy to the be- 
ginner, and he will be under no necessity of con- 
stantly adhering to set forms of glysters pre- 
scribed by others. 
11. From what has been said (n° 10.) it 
also appears, that there is no occasion for a nu- 
merous and confus’d mass for this form, one in- 
gredient alone will be frequently sufficient, with- 
out any other mixture; but two of the following 
are used oftener e.g. water, milk, whey, honey, 
sugar, nitre, oil, butter, &c. urine alone, or 
Dd3 common

406 Of Glysters.
common salt dissolved in five times its quantity 
of water, and a decoction of tobacco leaves are 
generally prefer’d when there is occasion for a 
strong stimulus. 
§.509. The ORDER OF prescribing ingredients for 
this form, is the same with that for internal decoc- 
tion. (§.227.) Infusions (§.2l4.) or mixtures (§.275.); 
for to one of those forms all glysters may be reduced. 
§.510. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
for this form are equal to one another, because there 
is seldom more prescribed than is to be injected, at 
a time (§.68. n° 1.). But this quantity varies, 
1. With regard to the age, for which the fol- 
lowing rules of proportion may be of service. 
For a new-born infant—℥ ij. 
One more advanced—℥ iij. jv.
A child—℥ vj, vij. 
An adult—℥ viij. x. xij. 
2. With regard to the patient’s habit: large 
people will bear more; small, less. The quan- 
tity of a glyster should be small, and quickly 
discharged again, when the patient has a diffi- 
cult respiration, intestines distended with wind, 
or externally compress’d by some incumbent 
body, as a large fœtus, water, &c.
3. In proportion to their effects or operations, 
the quantity may be large when the intention is 
to dilute, cool, moisten or mollify, when no- 
thing opposes. When it is to give a strong sti- 
mulus the quantity should be less, left by its sti- 
mulus, and being too large, it may be evacuated 
too soon. When the glyster is to be retain’d a- 
considerable time, then also its quantity should 
be less, which is chiefly to be observ’d in nourish- 
ing glysters. 
4. When the quantity of a glyster is too large 
to be injected at once, it may be proper to give 
it in small quantities, at intervals. 

407 Of Glysters.
§.511. For the mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for glysters, it is hardly possible to be de- 
termined, for all cases, even by general bounds: 
but the physician will find no great difficulty to 
settle the due proportion in his particular case, by 
being attentive to his indication (§.508.), the 
medicinal virtues of the ingredients, and the con- 
stitution of his patient, with the proper degree of 
consistence for injecting (§.299. n° 4.), &c. 
Hence, 
1. When cathartics are given by infusion, de- 
coction, or mixture in glysters, they are gene- 
rally prescribed in a proportion as large again, 
as when to be given internally by the mouth; 
even, upon occasion, three times as much, or 
more is order’d, when the intention is to give 
a strong stimulus. 
2. The proportion of salts which are neither 
acid nor alcaline, as are most of those used in this 
form, may be ʒj or ij, to ℥x of the liquor, 
when intended to give a moderate stimulus. 
But sometimes ℥j or ij, is order’d in the strong- 
est glysters (§.508.). 
3. The proportion of substances in consistence 
like honey or syrup, is very undetermined; be- 
ing limited by the strength of the medicine, and 
after that, its consistence; so that it may be 
deem’d the largest proportion, when these and 
the liquor are taken in equal quantities. 
4. Oily or fat substances are seldom taken in 
a larger proportion than one fourth part of the 
whole, except when they compose the whole 
form. There is seldom more than ℥ß or ʒvj. 
of the turpentines mix’d with ℥x of liquor. 
5. Ingredients of the solid, dry and powder 
kind are never order’d in a large proportion;
left they should run into grumes, or render the
Dd4 form 


408 Of Glysters.
form of too thick a consistence; ʒj, ij, or iij. 
may be enough for an adult (§.310. n° 1.). 
6. Opiates, and the strongest medicines, 
which extend their energy to the habit, and 
insinuate into the minutest vessels, should be very 
cautiously used in glysters. For even in the large 
intestines, there is a considerable intertexture of 
nerves; and there are also some absorbent veins, 
or small lacteals. So that an imprudent use of 
drastic or deleterious remedies in this form, may 
prove of the very worst consequence. A patient 
has been even known to sleep to eternity, by 
giving gr. jv. of opium in a glyster. 
7. We should be also no less circumspect in 
limiting the proportion of remedies which di- 
mulate in this form, considering whether or no, 
in what habits, and what quantity, they may 
be properly used. Or else, by a rash addition, 
or a timorous omission, all hopes may be fru- 
strated. So that when the intention is to raise 
the spirits, evacuate or revell, we may be pret- 
ty free with those which stimulate: but when 
the glyster is to mollify, dilute, relax, ease, or 
nourish, we should exclude acrimonious, or sti- 
mulating substances. 
§.512. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, may say something of 
what relates to the infusion, decoction, or mixture 
(§.218, 219. 231. 279.); except when there is 
no occasion for perfect depuration: concluding F. 
enema or clysma. But as the injection of this form 
is frequently referr’d to the apothecary, this part 
of the prescription may sometimes mention the pro- 
per instrument, whereby it should be given. We 
may also here insert, 
1. What age the patient is of, whether an in- 
fant, child, or adult; that the anus may be fitted 
with

409 Of Glysters. 
with a sizable tube: tho’ the apothecary may ge- 
nerally guess at this, by the quantity of liquor 
(§.510. n° 1.). 
2. Of what sex; when adult: for women 
love to help one another in this office. 
3. The time of administration: whether pre- 
sently, in the morning, evening, &c. for there 
is no hour, of either day or night, but will ad- 
mit of using this form, upon urgent necessity. 
Or else, the most convenient time is supposed 
to be when the stomach is empty. 
But supposing the method of injecting this 
form to be sufficiently known, we shall consider 
what else might be brought in here, under our 
next head. 
§.513. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is not always necessary, 
only when the subscription (§.512.) does not 
give a brief instruction for its use. And in that case 
we may begin with the title (per §.60. n° 3. and 
§.506.), and the rest, as may be understood from 
§.512. n° 1, 2, 3. But it may be sometimes 
more proper to give a verbal, than a written ad- 
monition concerning its administration and action. 
This part may therefore direct. 
1. What is to be done before injection: which 
is various in different cases, and may be ascer- 
tained by the physician from his indication. 
But we may observe one thing: that in giving 
nourishing glysters, the intestines should be first 
cleansed from their fœces, by giving one that is 
cathartic; that the liquor may be the sooner and 
more purely absorb’d. 
2. What regards the injecting itself of this 
form. Where it is required (1.) that the liquor 
be made so warm, as nearly to equal the heat 
of an human body in health. We may judge of  
the

410 Of Glysters. 
the degree of heat by applying the bladder, which 
includes the glyster, to the face, lips, or back 
of the hand; if it appears not too hot to those 
parts, it is fit for use. The injection of this form, 
too hot or cold, may either of them be hurtful 
to the patient, congeal the yolks of eggs, in- 
spissate the fat or other substances, and obstruct 
the tube. (2.) The posture of the patient, most 
convenient to receive the glyster into his intes- 
tines by the tube. Some physicians approve of 
the patient’s lying on his left side, as most con- 
venient; because that will give the liquor a descent 
in its passage, to the sigmoid flexure of the con 
lon, which lies on the left * side, before it forms, 
the rectum. But then the inclination of the 
rectum a little to the right side, in its ascent 
from the anus, will give some resistance to the 
impulse of the liquor; as will also the pressure 
of the super-incumbent intestines upon the lower 
part of the colon, on the left side, next to the 
rectum: and then the inconstancy or lusus na- 
turœ in her formation and disposition of this sig- 
moid flexure of the colon, placing it sometimes 
on the left side † of the rectum, will make this 
still more uncertain. So that I rather agree 
with the generality, that it is best to lie on the 
right side. But it may be sometimes proper 
to lie on neither side but prone. (3.) For 
the patient to keep still or quiet, with an easy 
respiration; left by a strong contraction of the 
abdominal muscles, the glyster might be ob- 
structed in its passage, or be afterwards too 
quickly dischaged. (4.) The instruments for 
injecting the glyster, which are different in se-
veral 
* Vid. Eustach. tab. anat. x. fig. 2. 4. 
† Idem ibid. fig. 5. 

411 Of Glysters. 
veral counties *, the particulars of which are 
not here to be enumerated. (5.) That the in- 
jection of this form be performed gradually, 
and not too forcibly. 
3. What is to be done after the injection is 
over. That is, for the patient to turn gently 
from the right to his left side, or upon his back; 
recommending him to a small and easy respira- 
tion, with a contraction of the sphincter ani, 
when the glyster is to be retained any consider- 
able time in the intestines. 
411 
§.514. The USES of this form (in general, 
have been in some measure intimated at §.506. and 
508.). are too many and considerable, to speak 
particularly to each of them here: they may be 
conveniently used in all ages and habits, even to 
the youngest infant. But when stimulating, they 
may be hurtful to those who are subject to the 
piles, and a too long or unnecessary use of them, will 
dull the peristaltic motion of the larger intestines, 
and render the patient more constipated, so that 
he must be always oblig’d to use this incentive, to 
excite them to their office. Those who affirm there 
can be no such thing as a nourishing glyster, seem 
to be ignorant of what we said before (§.511.
n° 6.): for the indefatigable anatomist Winslow † 
has demonstrated to the royal academy, that the 
human colon has lacteals, and shew’d them repleat 
with chyle. And the patient’s becoming suddled, 
by even a moderate use of wine, or its spirit in 
glysters, seems to evince the same, &c. 
515. Take the following SPECIMENS.
1. 
* Vid. R. de Farvacques Medic. Pharm. book. III. capit. X. 
† In his Anat. Exposit. Sect. VIII. of the abdomen, n° 219. 


412 Glysters.
1. Clysma meconium induratum resolvens evacuans. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 225. 
ꝶ. Seri lact. recent. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒjß. 
Mell. ʒij. 
M. F. clysma. 
Pro infante recens nato. 
2. Aliud vermes expellens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Vitriol. mart. gr. xv. 
Aq. stillat. cichor. ℥iv. 
M. F. lavamentum. 
Pro puero trienni aut quadrienni. 
3. Clysma refrigerans, antiphlogisticum in rabie 
canina. Ibid. p. 183. 
ꝶ. Nitri ʒij. 
Acet. sambuc. 
Mell. rosar. ana ℥j. 
Aq. decoct. hord. ℥x.
M. F. clysma. 
S. Injiciatur bis vel ter in die. 
5. Clysma nutriens. Ibid. p. 139. 
ꝶ. Jur. Carnium ℥x. 
Sal. nitri gr. x. 
Sp. salis gtt. vj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur octava quaque hora, postquam primo 
clysmate purgante elota alvus fuit. 
6.

413 Glysters. 
6. Clysma emolliens, anodynus, aperiens, calcu- 
lum pellens. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 243. 
ꝶ. Herb. malvœ. 
Parietar. 
Heder. terrestr. ana m. j. 
Seri lact. recent. q. s. 
Coque spatio 1/4 horæ. Colat. express. ℥. ix. adde 
Ol. lint ℥i. 
Nitri pur. ʒß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur mane & vesperi. 
7. Clysma balsamicum, anodynum antidysentericum. 
ꝶ. Flor. chamomill. m. ij. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. coque vase clauso 
per 1/4 horæ. Colat. ℥viij. adde 
Tereb. venet. vitell. ov. subact. ʒiij.
Mell.rofar. ℥j.
M. F. enema. 
Pro adulto. 
S. Clysma revellens, salivationis mercurialis impe- 
tum minuens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Flor. sennœ  ℥j. 
Agarici ʒiv. 
Semin. cartham. ʒij. 
Rad. jalapp. ʒj. 
Cum Aqua decoct. colat. ℥xij. injice pro 
clysmate. 
For glysters of the smoak of tobacco, see §.404. ult. 
on fumigations. 
9.

414. Glysters. 
9. Enema catharticum commune. 
♃. Decoct. commun. pro clyst. ℥x. 
Resin. jalap. in vitel. ov. solut. ʒß. 
Syrup. de spin. cervin. ℥j. 
Sal. commun. ℥ß. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Injiciatur tepide, mane, vel hora 
commoda. 
10. Enema nervosum, fortiter purgans. 
♃. Decocti communis ℥x. 
Sal. cathart. amar. 
Vini emet. turbid. 
Syr. de spina cervin. aa ℥jß. 
Ung. opodeld. ʒiij.  
Sal. vol. ammon. ʒj. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema ant. -apoplect. -paralyt. &c. fere frigidum,
hora commoda, injiciendum. 
11. Enema emolliens, & movens commune.
♃. Decocti communis, ℥x. 
Ol. sem. lin. ℥jß. 
Sapon. moll. vulg. ʒiij. 
Elect. lenitiv. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. enema.
S. Enem. lenitiv.—Hora, tepide injiciendmn.
12. 

415 Glysters. 
12. Enema emolliens, laxans, in paraxysmo ne- 
phritico, &c. sopiens. 
♃. Decoct. intestinor. pulli gallinac. ℔j.
Bals. Lucatul. ℥jß. 
Vitell ov. n°. ij. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. iij. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tepide & hora commoda injiciendum. 
13. Enema hystericum, emmenagogicum. 
♃. Sumit. puleg. 
Rutœ. 
Atriplic. olid, aa m. j. 
Coque inaq. font. q. s. Colaturæ ℥x. 
adde 
Gum. galban. 
Asa fœt. aa ℈ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ʒjß.  
Vitel. ov. q. s. ut solvantur gumosa. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema. Carminativ. more usutata injiciendum, 
& pro re nata reiterandum.
14. 


416 Glyjsters.
14. Enema amarum, antihelminticum. 
♃. Sem. santon. contus. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Coque in aq, font. q. s. colaturæ ℥x. adde
Extract. rudii ʒß. 
Syr. rosar. damascen. ʒvj. 
M. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tempore commodo injiciendum & diu 
retinendum. 
15. Enema restringens. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Vini rubri ana ℥iv. 
Confect. fracast. 
Mell. rosar. aa ʒvj. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Tepide, pro re nata injiciendum.
16. Enema febrifugum. 
♃. Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Cort. peruv. pulv. ℥j.
Sal. absynth. ʒjß. 
Coque in aq. font. q. s. ut exprimatur ℔j. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tertia hujus pars, sexta vel quarta 
quaque hora, de die, absente paraxysmo, tepide in- 
jiciatur; & quamdiu poterit, retineatur. 
Of

417 Of Suppositories. 
Of SUPPOSITORIES. 
§.516. A SUPPOSITORY (Bαλαvq, glans, 
& nodulus intestinalis) is a more or less 
solid remedy, of a roundish figure, to be thrust up 
the anus for various uses. Its figure is usually cy- 
lindrical, conical, oval, globular, or in the form 
of an acorn. 
§.517. When this remedy is to be formed of 
but one simple substance, as it very frequently is, it 
will hardly require an extemporaneous prescription: 
Otherwise it will be necessary; for composition. 
§.518. The MATERIALS, and their PREPA- 
RATION for simple suppositories, are well enough 
known by almost every body: some use one thing, 
while others approve of different ones; but all are 
attended with nearly the same effects. Of this kind 
are barley-sugar in a conial form, Venice-soap in 
the same figure, tallow-candle, or wax-candle dipt 
in butter, wash’d lard, a prune or fig turn’d in- 
side outwards, new cheese, and a piece of brown 
paper rowled up in the form of a cane, and spread 
over with butter, honey boiled to a solid consi- 
tence, almonds confected, or cas’d with sugar; a 
globule or cone made of alum, and moistened with 
oil or butter, a raddish-root, a marsh-mallow-root, 
or the root of beet, cabbage, elder, &c. being first 
excoriated or peel’d, cut out into a proper form, and 
moisten’d with oil or fresh butter, or the body of a 
leech prepared in the same manner; these are the 
common means, sometimes, as well for infants as 
adults, to more ,or less lubricate and stimulate the 
rectum, and solicite a discharge of worms, &c.
§.519. A compound suppository is either sti- 
mulating, or only adapted to the peculiar disor- 
ders of the anus and rectum. 
Ee §.520.

418 Of Suppositories. 
§.520. The component ingredients of a stimu- 
lating suppository, are distinguished into excipien- 
tia and excipienda. 
1. The excipient substances are honey boiled 
to a consistence, so that being poured Upon a 
cold marble, it will not adhere but be brittle; 
to this some add an officinal purging electuary, 
or some stimulating juice. Venice soap may be 
also used for the excipient with the yolk of an 
egg, mucilage of gum tragacanth, or barley su- 
gar; but these not so frequently. 
2. The excipienda to be made up with the 
former, are all sharp stimulating substances, whe- 
ther of the consistent or powder kind, of which 
there are a great variety extant in the shops, 
such are sopes, common salt, nitre, sal gem, sal 
ammoniacum, alum vitriolum martis, mouse- 
turds, aloes, myrrh, leaves of senna, agaric, jal- 
lap, species hieræ, the masses of purging pills, 
as cochiæ extract. cathol. succ. absinth. inspissat. 
bull’s gall inspissated, castor with the strongest 
emetics and cathartics, as colocynth, trochisch. 
alhand. scammony, white hellibor, euphorbium, 
crocus metallor. &c. 
§.521. The suppositories which are adapted to 
the peculiar disorders of the anus and rectum con- 
sist of various ingredients, according to the nature 
of their particular indispositions, with the intention 
of stimulating, deterging, corroding, healing, mol- 
lifying, easing, astringing, &c. There is here no 
occasion to enumerate the materials for these inten- 
tions, but they are adapted for these uses in three 
forms. 
1. For they are either reduced into a hard 
and emplastick mass (like as at §.520.) with 
the substances there mention’d, or with some 
other proper excipient. Sometimes they are com- 
pounded

419 Of Suppositories. 
pounded with ointments, cerats, or emplasters, 
and protruded into the anus, sometimes only an 
officinal emplaster, smear’d over with some oil 
or ointment, is used for a suppository. 
2. Or being brought into the consistence of 
an ointment or balsam, it is applied by the 
means of scrap’d lint, cotton, or wool done up 
in a globular form like an acorn or tent, to 
which a thread is to be fastened, by which, 
hanging out, it may be again extracted. 
3. Or a paste of the like consistance (n° 2.) 
may be tied up in a nodule in a bit of linen, to 
which a thread is to be also fastened to extract it 
by, after it has been once introduced into the 
anus. 
§.522. In the CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, respect is to be had to the physician’s indi- 
cation, the particular virtues of each simple, espe- 
ciaily those of the stronger kind, with the patient’s 
age, habit, &c. See §.299. and 508. 
§.523. The ORDER for prescribing ingredients 
for this form, is generally to subjoin the excipient 
after the excipienda, especially when the quantity 
of the former is undetermin’d, tho' sometimes this 
order is revers’d. 
§.524. The SIZE of this form is analogous to 
the DOSE of others; when it is of a round figure, 
it sometimes equals the size of pease, chesnuts, or 
acorns; if it is conical, it’s usually made equal to 
the size of the patient’s little finger, and in length 
about three or four fingers breadth. Hence, accord- 
ing to the various size, the quantity of matter may 
be from ʒj to ʒvj or ℥j. A more exact determi- 
nation of the quantity may be taken from the pa- 
tient’s particular age, and more or less morbid 
stricture of the rectum, with the more or less strength 
of the suppository and particular disease of the rec- 
Ee2 tum:

420 Of Suppostories. 
tum: so that when the suppository is to stimulate, 
in a comatous disorder it is sometimes made much 
longer than the little finger. 
§.525. The general quantity for this form is fre- 
quently no more than the dose (§.524.). But 
when the suppository is to be used a considerable 
time 2, 3, or more cones may be transmitted to the 
patient at once, that one may be thrust up after the 
other, so that by multiplying the particular dose, 
it may be easy to determine the general quantity. 
§.526. The mutual proportion of ingredients for 
this form may be learn’d from the consistence of 
the excipient and other ingredients, with the re- 
quisite consistence of the paste to be made (§.520. 
521.), from the virtues of each ingredient, and the 
desired effect of the composition. Hence 
1. When inpissated honey is the excipient 
(§.520. n° 1.) the proportion of that may be 
℥j. to ℈iiij or ʒjß of the other ingredients. 
2. If any softer substance is used for the ex- 
cipient, it may be proportionably enlarg’d ac- 
cording to the quantity of the other ingredients 
or excipienda; except when it is required as soft 
as paste. 
§.527. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP-  
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient 
for this form, contains nothing very particular, but 
what may be easily understood from what was before 
said on these heads. The hardest suppositories are 
generally anointed with butter, oil, lard, or some 
ointment, before using it; at other times, it may be 
sufficient to moisten it with the saliva, or with 
some warm oil, when intended to stimulate. The 
rectum should be discharged of its fæces before the 
suppository is introduced, except when the use of 
it is to give a stool. 
§.528.

421 Suppositories. 
§.528. The USES of suppositories have been in 
a great measure already explained (at §.518, 519. 
521.): they are frequently substituted in the room 
of purging glysters, when the patient will not ex- 
pose himself to, or be troubled with that form. 
These will often give a stool when internal purg- 
ing might not be safe, they kill and expel worms, 
and are serviceable in comatous and apoplectic 
cases, &c. by stimulating, revelling, exciting, &c. 
To say nothing of disorders peculiar to the anus 
and rectum, ulcers, fistulæ, hæmorrhoidal pains, 
&c. where suppositories are often very useful. But 
we should be cautious not to hurt or corrode the 
rectum by too sharp suppositories, not to make na- 
ture become sluggish in discharging her fæces by a 
too constant use of this form: therefore supposi- 
tories are less proper for those who have fissures 
ulcers, tumors, or pains in the rectum, the piles, 
&c. And an over strong suppository may chance 
to produce abortion.  
§.529. SPECIMEN of simple suppositories, see 
before at §.518. and in H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 224. 
A few examples of compound suppositories follow. 
1. Suppositorium antihelminticum, necans expel- 
lens vermes. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Mell. coct. ad consist. debit. ℥iv. 
Aloës ℥ß. 
Vitriol. mart. ʒij. 
M. s. a. F. parva suppositoria v. g. xij. aut 
xiv. pro puero. Serventur oleo demersa 
ne deliquescant. 
S. Applicentur post alvum exoneratam. 
Ee3 2.

422 Suppositories. 
2. Suppositorium acre, fortiter stimulans in affecti- 
bus soporosis frigid is utile. 
ꝶ. Mellis coct. indurat. ℥j. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒß. 
Scammon. ℈j. 
Troch. alhand. 
Rad. ellehor. alb. pulv. ana ℈ß 
Euphorbii gr. ij. 
M. F. s. a. suppositoria n°. ij. oleo ca- 
storei illinenda.  
3. Glans ad alvum solicitandam, pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Sal. commun. ʒß. 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Mell. coctu inspissati q. s. 
M. F. suppositorium, oleo absinth. infuso 
illinendum. 
4. Suppositorium ad excitandum hæmorrhoidum 
fluxum. 
ꝶ. Aloës pulveris. 
Sal. gemm. ana ℈j. 
Pulp. colocynth. gr. v. 
Mellis q. s. 
Coctu redigantur in suppositorium. 
5.

423 Of Pessaries and Nascales. 
5. Nodulus anodynus ad dolores ab hæmorrhoi- 
dibus. 
ꝶ. Opii crudi ℈ß. 
Croci pulveris ℈j. 
Unguent. popul. q. s. 
Ut F. pasta, quæ inclusa sindoni, aut cot- 
tone excepta, appenso filo, fit pro sup- 
positorio. 
S. Immittatur ano, filo foras propendente & retra- 
hatur post 1/2 horam. 
Of PESSARIES and NASCALES. 
§.530. A Pessary (pessarium, talus) and a NAS- 
CALE (penicillus) are a kind of suppo- 
sitories, tents, or nodules for the uterus and vagina, as 
the preceding were for the intestines, to be intro- 
duced into the sinus pudoris, vagina, &c. for 
various uses: but as they are at present seldom 
used, and may be easily understood from consider- 
ing the form preceding, there is no occasion to 
give a diffuse treatise on them here. 
FINIS. 

424 ADDENDA. 
N°.1. ad Pag.9. 
A Ppellationum generalium plura simplicia uno 
titulo complectentium explicatio. 
Quinque radices aperientes. 
Rad.
Apii. 
Asparagi. 
Fœniculi. 
Petroselini. 
Rusci. 
Quinque herbœ emollients.
Fol. & 
Sumit
Althææ. 
Malvæ. 
Mercurialis. 
Parietariæ. 
Violarum.
Quatuor flores cordiales.
Flor.
Boraginis. 
Buglossi. 
Rosarum. 
Violarum.
Quatuor 

425 ADDENDA ad Pag.9. 
Quatuor semina calida majora. 
Sem.
Anisi. 
Carvi. 
Cumini. 
Fœniculi. 
Quatuor semina calida minora. 
Sem.
Ammeos. 
Amomi. 
Apii. 
Dauci. 
Quatuor semina frigida majora.
Sem. 
Citrulli. 
Cucumeris.
Cucurbitæ. 
Melonum. 
Quatuor semina frigida minora. 
Sem.
Cichorii. 
Endiviæ. 
Lactucæ. 
Portulacæ.
CHA- 

426 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
N°. II. ad Pag. 16. 
CHARACTERES, 
FREQUENTIORES 
IN USU. 
A Cetum 🜊
Acet. destill. 🜋
Aër 🜁 
Æs ♀ 
Æs Viride 🜨 
Alumen 🌕︎
Amalgama 🝛 
Antimonium ⛢
Aqua 🜄
Aqua fontis 🜅ont.
Aqua fortis 🜅
Aqua Regia 🜆
Aqua Rof. 🜆of. 
Arena 
Argentum ☽︎ 
Argent. vivum 
Arsenicum  🜺
Auripigmentum 🜽 
Aurum ☉ 
Balneum B  
Baln. Mariæ 🝫
Calx viva 🝤 
Cancer ♋︎
Caput mort 🝎 
Chal-


427 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
Calcanth. Vitriol. 🜖 
Chalybs ♂ 
Chalybis limatura  
Cineres 🝗
Cinnabar 🜭 
Corn. Cerv. calc. C.C.C. 
Cuprum ♀
Destillare 
Dies   
Ferrum ♂
Fimum Equin. vent. Eq. 
Hora 
Hydrargyrum ☿
Ignis 🜂
Jupiter ♃
Luna ☽︎ 
Mars ♂
Massa  
Mercurius ☿ 
Merc. præcipitatus 
Merc. sublimatus 🜐 
Nitrum 🜕
Nox  
Oleum  
Plumbum 
Præcipitare 🝟
Pulvis, Pulverare 
Retorta 
Sal Armoniacum 🜹
Sal commune 🜔 
Sal Gemmæ 🜘 
Sal Petræ 🜕 
Sol ☉ 
Spiritus Sp.
Stannum ♃ 
Strat. sup. Strat. 🝜 
Sublimare 🝞
Sulphur 🜍
Tartarum 🜿
Terra 🜃 
Tinctura 
Venus ♀ 
Vinum V. 
Viride æris 🜨 
Vitriolum 🜖 
Urina 🝕
N°.

428 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20.
N°. III. ad Pag. 20. 
A List and Explanation of the WEIGHTS 
and MEASURES used among the antient 
Greek, Latin, and Arabian Physicians. 
I. WEIGHTS. 
The chalcus,  
or 
Æreolus,
was equal to half a siliqua, or gr. ij. 
The siliqua of the Latins,  
Ceration and Diachalcum of
the Greeks,
or kirat of the Arabians,
was equal to ij 
chalci, or gr. iv. 
The nμiωCoλov,   
Semiobolus, and  
Davie of the Arabians,
was equal to siliqua
and half, iij chalci
or œreolœ, or gr. vj. 
The obolus, and 
Onolosat of the Arabs,
was equal to vj chalci,
iij siliquœ, or gr. xij.
or ℈ß.
The scriptulum, term’d  
Gramma and diobolon 
by the Greeks, 
was equal to ij oboli,
xij chalci, or gr. xiij.
The semidrachma or triobolon, term’d 
Ilarium by Oribasius, and  
Victoriatus by Scribonius and Celsus
was equal 
to ℈jß. or 
gr. xxxvj. 
The drachma attica, termed also 
Holce by the Greeks, being the 
eighth part of an ounce, 
was equal to 
℈iij. six obo- 
li, orgr. lxxij. 
The denarius of the Latins was a little heavier than 
a dram, so that only seven denarii went to the 
ounce. Hence, Celsus and Scribonius, who 
translate denarium for drachma, suppose only 
seven

429 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
seven drams to the ounce: but Plutarch, Ga- 
len and Pliny, in their Latin or Greek cita- 
tions, seem to write denarium for drachma, 
and drachma for denarium, indifferently, as 
if they were both the eighth part of an ounce. 
The sextula, 
Hexagium,  
Aureus, or  
Solidum,  
was the sixth part of an ounce,
equal to four scruples.
The sicilicus, used for didrachmum by Scribonius, 
was equal to two drams. It was also term’d 
The Assarius and αoγαρiov, from its containing 
twelve oboli, as the as does ounces. 
The duella, was equal to ij sextulœ, or ℈ viij. 
The stater was half an ounce: ℥ß. or ʒiv. Term’d 
also 
The dupondium, being equal to two assarii. 
The uncia attica, being the twelfth part of a pound, 
weigh’d eight drams, or (according to Celsus) 
seven Roman denarii. 
The libra romana, 
Pondo, or  
As,  
was equal to ℥xij. or ʒxcvj.
The mna or mina attica, was a little heavier than 
a pound, weighing ʒC. or ℥xij. & ß.
Notwithstanding the proper signification of the 
term as is a pound weight, it is yet frequently 
used by the Latins to signify some whole or solid 
body: and as they divided the pound, so they di-
stributed the whole body or thing into twelve 
parts, each of which were as ounces: but the se- 
veral other parts of the integer, were denominated 
by them after the following manner.  
As,

430 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
As, libra, a pound, or the whole thing. 
Uncia, or ounce, was the twelsth part of the pound 
or thing. 
Sextans,  
Quadrans, 
Triens,  
Quincunx,  
Semis,    
Septunx,   
Bes & octunx, 
Dodrans,  
Dextans, 
Deunx, 
was
two
three
four 
five
six 
seven
eight
nine
ten 
eleven
ounces, of
parts
II. MEASURES 
We pass from weights to an explanation of the se- 
veral measures, whether dry or liquid, in use 
among the antients. 
The cochlearium minimum, their least measure, held 
about ʒj and ℈ß. of wine, suppose canary. 
The cheme, or cochlearium mediocre, held two of the 
cochlearia minima, or ʒij. and ℈j. 
The mystrum, cochlearium magnum, or ligula, held 
of the cochlearia minima ij and ß. or ʒij ß. 
The concha held ij mystra, chema ij and ß. coch. 
minim. v. 
The cyathus contained ij concha, iij mystra, or 
℥jss. 
The acetabulum, or sesquicyathum, term’d by the 
Greeks oxybaphon, held iij concha, vj mystra, 
or ℥jj. ʒij. 
The quartarius tbtclotqvi '/yxiKOTuAiov, being the 
fourth part of a sextarius, contained cy- 
ath. iij. oxybapha ij. mystra xii. or ℥iv. 
The

431 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The hemine, cotyle, or tryblium, ημιEeςov being 
the half of a sextarius, contained ij quartarii, 
cyath. vj. oxybapha iv. mystra xxiv. coch- 
lear. lx. or ℥ix. 
The sextarius, Eeςηs, of the Greeks, was the 
most frequent in use of any measure, being 
the sixth part of a congius, containing two 
hemina, four quartarii, cyath. xij. or ℔ j ss. 
and is the same with chopin of Paris. 
The chœnix of the Greeks, and modulus of the La- 
tins, held a sextary and half, or ℔ ij. ℥iij. 
The congius, or chus of the Greeks, contained six 
sextarii, xxiv quartarii, or ℔ ix. being equal 
to three pints at Paris. 
The urna held four conga, or ℔ xxxvj. 
The amphora, 
or  
Quadrantal, 
held two urnæ, or xlviij sextarii. 
The meretes and ceramium of the Greeks, and the 
cadus of the Latins, held xij congii, or ℔. C. 
viij. 
The culeus, or most capacious of the liquid mea- 
sures among the Romans, contained xx am- 
phora, 960 sextarii, 160 congii, 40 urnæ, 
or ℔ 1350. 
For the mensuration of dry substances, the Ro- 
mans made use of the following, which were also 
applied in common to liquids, as well as solids. 
The

432 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The Ligula,   
Cyathus,  
Acetabulum, 
Quartarius, 
Hemina, 
Sextarius,  
Semodius,  
Modius, 
Medimus,
equal to 
j Mystrum, or ʒ ij ss.
iij Ligulæ.
vj  Ligulæ. 
ij Acetabula. 
ij Quartarii. 
ij Heminæ.
viij Sexsarii.
ij Semodii. 
72 Sextarii. 
The liquid measures were chiefly adapted to 
wines, which when of a mean consistence will 
come near to the weights assigned. But as oil is a 
9th part lighter than wine, and honey twice as 
heavy as wine, a measure holding ten ounces of 
wine will contain ℥xv. of honey, and of oil ele- 
ven ℥. and so in the rest.
AN

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Principal Matters in the Method 
of Prescribing, &c.
A. 
Accessory ingredients of a form, what?—p. 45. §. 107. 
—for
Decoctions—p. 144. 
Infusions—p. 165. 170. 
—Cataplasms—p. 283. 285. 
Adjuvans, the second constituent part of a form—p. 37. §.78. 
Alcohol powder, what?—p. 54. §.107. 
—of wine, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions, &c.—p. 145. 
Ales, antiscorbutic—p. 179. N° 2. p. 164. N° 10. 
Amulets, v. Epithems—p. 300. ult. 
Anacolema, what?—p. 376. §.464. 
Apophlegmatisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 389. §.485. 
—liquid, soft, and dry—p. 391. §.490. 
—their ingredients—p. 393. §.492. 
—dole, and management—p. 395. §.4. 34. & seq. 
—specimens of them—p. 396. §.497. 
Apozem, v. Decoition—p. 164. 
Apparatus for infusions—p. 152. §.219. N° 1. 
Aspersions, what kind of medicines?—p. 255. §.308. 
—their ingredients, election, and order of prescribing, 
p. 255. §.310. 
—dole, and general quantity—p. ibid. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. 256. §.313. 
—their directions, uses, and specimens—p. 256. §.317. 
Ff B.

INDEX.
B. 
Bags, v. Epithems—p. 278. & seq. 
Ball, sweet-scented—p. 388. n° 3. 
Balsams, odoriferous, what?—p. 354. §.432. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.433. 
—ejection of ingredients for—p. 355 §.434. 
—order of prescribing, dose, and general quantity—p. 358. 
§.435. & seq. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—directions for—p. 360. §.439. & seq. 
—uses of them—p. ib. §.441. 
—specimens of them–p. 361. §.442. 
Bed, v. Epithem—p. 280. n° 5. 
Basis, the first constituent part of a form—p. 36. §.75. 
Baths, what, and their kinds?—p. 300 
—ingredients for—p. 301. 370. 
—election of ingredients for—p. ib. §.371. 
—order of prescribing them p. 302. 
—their dose, general quantity, and proportion of ingredients for 
p. 302. §.313. & seq. 
—subscription or direction to the Apothecary p. 303. §.376. 
—superscription or direction to the patient—p. 304. §.377. 
—uses—p. ib. §.378. 
—specimens of—p. 305. §.379. 
Boles, what kind of medicines?—p. 76. §.127. 
—the ingredients or matter of—p. ib. §.128. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 77. §.129. 
—order of prescribing their ingredients—p. 78. §.130. 
—their dose—p. ib. §.131 
—general quantity—p. 79. §.132. 
—the proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. §.133. 
—their subscription—p. 81. §. 134. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.135. 
—uses—p. 82. §.136. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.137. 
Buccellatum, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 143. 
C. 
Cakes, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 138. 
Capitiluvium, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Catapotium, v. Pils—p. 106. 
Catapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Cataplasms, what? and their kinds—p. 282. 
—by decoction, what?—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 283. §.346.
—the election of their ingredients—p. 284. §.347.
Cataplasms, 

INDEX. 
Cataplasms, order of prescribing—p. 286. §.348. 
—dose of them—p. ib. §.349. 
—general quantity, and proportion of ingredients—p. 286. 
§.350. & seq. 
—subscription for—p. 288. §.352. 
—superscription for—p.289 §.333. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.354. 
—specimens of them—p. 290. 
Cerates, what kind of medicines?—p. 342. §.415. 
—their ingredients, management, and directions for—p. 343. 
§.418. 
—uses—p. ib. §.419. 
—specimens of them—p. 344. §.420.
Choice of ingredients for Apophlegmatisms p.393. §.493. 
—aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 355. §.434. 
—baths—p. 301. §.371. 
—boles—p. 77. §.129. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.201.
—cataplasms—p. 283. §.316.
—cerates—p. 342.
—collyria—p. 469. 
—cucusæ p. 375.
—decoctions—p. 165. §.226.
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 238. §.285. 
—electuaries—p. 89 §.140. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.407.  
—emulsions—p. 195. §.248.  
—epithems—p. ib. and §.273. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.475. 
—express'd juices—p. 183. §.237.  
—fomentations—p. 261. §.322. 
—frications—p. 374. §.458.
—frontals—p. 375. §.466. 
—fumigations—p. 316. §.396. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500 
—glysters—p. 403. §.508.
—infusions—p. 145. §.213 
—injections—p. 247. §.299 
—juleps—p. 211. §.263. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.151 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444.  
—lotions—p. 247. §.299. 
—mixtures—p. 225. §.274. 
—ointments—p. 345. §.423. 
—pills—p. 107. §.162. 
—powders—p. 56. §.111. 
—suppositories—p. 417. §.518.
Ff2 Choice

INDEX. 
Choice of ingredients for tablets—p. 132. §.188. 
—troches—p. 123. §.175 
—vapors—p. 308. §.384. 
—unguents—p. 345. §.423. 
Clysma, v. Glyster—p. 402. 
Colour of medicines arising from mixture—p. 46. §.99. 
Collutorium, v. Gargarism—p. 339. 
Colyria, what kind of medicines?—p. 378. 
—their various forms, ingredients, application, and uses—p. 379. 
—specimens of them—p. 380. 
Composition, its effefts on medicines, Mixture. 
Conditum, v. Electuary—p. 88. 
Consistence of medicines from mixture—p. 45. §.96. 
Constituens, the fourth and last part of a form—p. 41. §.86. 
Corrigens, the third condiment part of a form—p. 38. §.83. 
—for noxious qualities—p. ib. §.84. 
—unpleasantness—p. 40. §.85. 
Couch, v. Epithem—p. 285. n° 4. 
Cucullus  
Cucusa   
Cushion
v. Epithem—p. 278. & seq.  
D. 
Decoctions, internal, what kind of medicines?—p. 164. §.224. 
—their ingredients p. ib. §.225. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 165. §.226. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 171. §.227. 
—times for boiling their different ingredients—p. ib. 
n° 1. 2. & seq. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 173. 
—the mutual proportion of their ingredients p. 173. §.230. 
—process of, and apparatus for—p. 175. §.231. 
—their subscription, for the apothecary—p. ib. 
—superscription, to the patient—p. 178. 
—uses—p. ib. §.233. 
—specimens of —p. 179. §.234. 
Dentifrices, what?–p. 388. §.485. 
—their kinds—p. 389. §.486. 
—ingredients and uses–ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 390. 
Depuration of liquors, (1.) by decantation, and (2.) by filtration 
p. 155
Diapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Directions for medicines to the apothecary in a prescription, v. Sub- 
scription. 
—patient, v. Superscription. 
Distribution of medicines, v. Dose. 
—powders—p. 62. §.118. 122. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. n° 9. 
Dose


INDEX. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. §.65. & seq 
—should be proportioned to 
1° the patient's disease—p. 25. n° 1. p. 27. n° 7. 
—strength—p. 26. n° 2. 
—age—p. ib. n° 3. 
—size of body—p. 27. n°. 4. 
—habit—p. ib. n° 5. and—p. 28. n° 8. 
—sex—p. ib. n° 6. 
—use or custom to medicines—p. 28. n° 9. 
—course of life—p. ib. n° 10. 
—country or nation—p. ib. n.° 11. 
2° the Medicine's strength—p. 29. n° 15. 
—virtues—p. ib. n° 13. 
—season of the year—p. ib. n° 12. 
—price— n° 14. 
—unpleasantness—p. ib. n° 16. 
—form—p. 30. n° 17. 
—way of using—p. ib. n° 18. 
Doses, number of, in a form, agreeable to particular circumstances, 
p. 30. §.67. 
Dose, its quantity how to determine in compound forms, p. 42. §.92. 
—an estimate thereof, for different ages—p. 26. n° 3. 
—of boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.204. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.349. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.228. 
—drops—p. 240.  §.287. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.142. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.252. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.239. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.324. 
—fumes—p. 319 §.398. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. § 501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 149. §.215. 
—injections—p. 248. §.301. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.265. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.153. 
—liniment—p. 365. §.447. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.276. 
—pills—p. 110. §.165. 
—powders—p. 59. §.113. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.192. 
—troches—p. 125. §.179. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.425. 
—vapors—p. 310. §.386. 
Draughts—p. 230. & seq. 
Dropax, v. Emplasters—p. 236 
Ff3 Drops,

INDEX. 
Drops, what kind of medicines?—p. 237. §.283. 
—their ingredients—p. 238. §.284. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.285. 
—order of prescribing—p. 240. §.286. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. ib. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. 241. 
—their subscription—p. ib. §.290. 
—superscription—p. 242. §.291. 
—uses—p. 243. §.292. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.293. 
E.
Edegma, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
—solidum, v. Lozenges— p. 122. §.172. 
—Election of ingredient for forms, v. Choice. 
—Electuaries, what kind of medicines?—p. 88. §.138. 
—ingredient for—p. 89. §.139. 
—choice of their ingredients—p. ib. §.140. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 90. 
—their dose—p. 91. §.142. 
—general quantity—p. ib. §.143. 
—subscription—p. 39. §.145. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.146. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 94. & seq. 
Electuary, solid, v. Tablets—p. 131. 
Elixir, v. Drops.—p. 244. 
Embrocation, v. Bath—p. 301. 
Emplasters, what kind of medicines?—p. 326. §.405. 
—ingredients for—p. 327. §.406. 
—their election— p. ib. §.407. 
—order of prescribing—p. 330. §.408. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 331. §.409. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—their subscription—p. 334. §.411. 
—superscription—p. 335. §.412. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 336. §.414. 
Empasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Emulsions, what kind of medicines?—p. 194. §.246. 
—ingredients for—p. 195. §.247. 
—their election—p. ib. §.248. 
—order of prescribing—p. 201. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 202. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 203. 
—their subscription—p. 205. §.255. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.256.
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 206.
Enema,

INDEX. 
Enema, v. Glysters—p. 402. 
Epispastics—p. 371. & seq. 
Epithems, in general, what?—p. 259. 
—liquid, v. Fomentations. 
—soft, v. Cataplasms. 
—dry, what?—p. 273.
—their management—p. ib. & seq. 
—ingredients—p. 273. 
—order, and dose—p. 274. 
—general quantity—p. 275. 
—superscription—p. 277. 
—their uses—p. 278. §.341. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
—moist, what?—p. 294. §.356. 
—their ingredients—p. 295. 
—subscription, &c.—p. 297. 
—specimens of them—p. 298. 
Errhins, what? and their kinds—p. 382. 
—the exhibition, and uses—p. 383. 
—specimens of them—p. 384. 
Excipients, what kind of ingredients?—p. 76. n° 2. p. 108. n° 8. 
p. 123. 
Excipiends—p. 107. p. 76. n° 1. 
Expressed-juices, v. Juices. 
F. 
Fomentations, what kind of medicines— p. 260. 
—ingredient for them p. ib. §.321. 
—their election—p. 261. §.322. 
—order of prescribing— p. 262. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 263. §.326. 
—their superscription—p. 264. §.328. 
—uses—p. 267. §.329. 
—specimens of them—p. 269. 
Forms, internal and external—p. 54. §.105. 
—fitest for acute diseases—p. 12. §.47. 
—chronic diseases—p. ib. 
—should be adapted to the most urgent symptoms—p. 10. p. 41. 
—age and circumstances of the patients, 
§.26. 27. 47. 48. 
—intention and medic virtues p. 11. §. 43. 
—texture and disposition of the ingredients 
p. 9. §.35. 43. 
—condition of the disease—p. 12. §.47. 
Formula, what?—p. 1. §.1. 
—simple, what?—p. 25. §.63. 
—compound, what?—p. 34. §.71.
Ff4 Formula,

INDEX. 
Formula, its four constituent parts.—p. 35. §.74. 
—l°. its basis—p. 36. §.75. 
—2°. its adjuvans—p. 37. §.78. 
—3°. its corrigens—p. 38. §.83. 
—4°. its constituens—p. 41. §.86. 
—its six general heads, v. Prescription. 
Fotus, v. Fomentation. 
Frications, what ? their kinds and uses—p. 374. 
Frontals, v. Epithems.—p. 278. 
—what Kind of medicines—p. 373. §.462. 
—their uses and specimens—p. 376. 
Fumigations, what?—p. 315. §.393. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—forms—p. 316. §.395. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 319. 
—their dole, or quantity—p. ib. §.398. 
—oroportion of their ingredients—p. 320. 
—their sub and superscription—p. 321. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 322. 
G. 
Gargarisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 399.
—their kinds anti ingredients—p. ib. 
—management and uses—p. 400. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
General quantity of a form—p. 33. and 45. 
i. e. to be sent to the patient at once 
—of aspersions—p. 255. §.312. 
—balsams—p. 350. 
—baths—p. 302. 
—boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.205. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.250. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173 §.229. 
—drops—p. 240. §.288. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.143. 
—emplasters—p. 331. §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.253. 
—epithems—p. 195. and 275. 
—fomentations—p. 262. §.325. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 309. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 194. §.216. 
—injestions—p. 248. §.302. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.266. 
General

INDEX. 
General quantity of linctus—p. 104. §.154. 
—liniments—p. 365. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.277. 
—pills—p. 111. §.166. 
—powders—p. 60. §.114. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.193. 
—troches—p. 126. §.180. 
—unguents—p. 348. 
—vapors—p. 310. 
Glysters, what kind of medicines?—p. 402. §.506. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.507. 
—election of their d°—p. 403. §.508. 
—order of prescribing—p. 406. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. §.510. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 407. §.511. 
—their subfcription—p. 408. §.512. 
—superscription—p. 409. §.513. 
—uses—p. 411. §.514. 
—specimens—p. 412. 
Guttæ, v. Drops. 
H. 
Haustus var.—p. 234. & seq. 
Hydrelæon  
and   
Hydrogalum 
for bathing—p. 301. §.370. 
Hydromel 
and  
Hydrosaccharum 
kinds of juleps—p. 188.
I. 
Impluvium, v. Bath,—p. 301. §.369. 
Infusions, what kind of medicines?—p. 143. 
—their ingredients—p. 144. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 145. 
—order of prescribing—p. 148. 
—their dose—p. 149. §.2l5. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 150. §.217. 
—their subscription—p. 152. 
—process—p. ib. N° 2. 3. 
—apparatus—p. ib. ult. 
—depuration—p. 154. ult. 
—superscription—p. 157. §.221. 
—uses—p. 158. §.222. 
—specimens of them—p. 159. §.223. 
Ingredients for apophlegmatisms 
—aspersions—p. 255. 
Ingredients 

INDEX 
Ingredients for balsams—p. 354. §.433. 
—baths—p. 301. §.370. 
—boles—p. 71. §.128. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.200. 
—cataplasms—p. 283. 
—cerates.—p. 342. 
—collyria—p. 380. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 164. §.225. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.487. 
—drops—p. 238. §.284. 
—electuaries—p. 89. §.139. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.406. 
—emulsions—p. 195. §.247. 
—epithems—p. 294. and 273. 
—errhins—p. 384. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.236. 
—fomentations—p. 260. §.321. 
—frontal—p. 376. & seq. 
—fumigations—p. 315. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500. 
—glysters—p. 402. §.507. 
—infufions—p. 144. §.212. 
—injections—p. 247. §.298. 
—julep—p. 211. §.262. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.150. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444. 
—mixtures—p. 224. §.273. 
—pills—p. 1O6. §.161. 
—powders—p. 55. §.109. 
—tablets—p. 131. §.187. 
—troches—p. 123. §.174. 
—vapors—p. 308. 
—unguents—p. 342. 
Injections, what kind of medicines?—p. 246. 
—their ingredients—p. 247. §.298. 
—election, order, dose, &c.—p. 248. 
—their subscription—p. 249. §.304. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.305. 
—uses—p. 251. §.306. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.307. 
Inscription, the first part of formula—p. 14. §.55. 
Infessus, Bath—p. 300. §.369. 
Intitling of medicines, v. Superscription. 
—in general—p. 23. n° 7. 8. 
Juices-expressed, what?—p. 182. §.235. 
—their ingredients—p. 183. §.236. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.237. 
—order of prescribing—p. 185. §.238. 
—their dose—p. ib. 
Juices

INDEX
Juices-expressed, their general quantity—p. 186. 
—subscription—p. 189. 
—superscription—p. 191. 
—uses—p. ib. §.244. 
—specimens of them—p. 192. §.245. 
Juleps, what kind of medicine?—p. 211. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.262. 
—order of prescribing—p. 216. 
—their dose, and quantity—p. ib. 
—subscription for them—p. 218. 
—superscription for them—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 219. 
L. 
Lavamentum, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Linctus, what kind of medicine?—p. 99. §.149. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.150. 
—election, and order of prescribing—p. 100. 
—dose, and general quantity—p. 101. §.153. 
—proportion of ingredients—p.102. 
—subscription for—p. 103. §.156. 
—superscription for—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens of—p. 104. 
Liniments, what kind of medicines—p. 363. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.444. 
—order of prescribing, dose, &c.—p. 365. 
—their sub- and superscription, uses, and specimens,—p. 367. 
Lohock, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
Lotion, v. Bath—p. 201. §.369. 
Lozenges, v. Troches—p. 122 
M. 
Maceration, the process of—p. 153. N° 2. 3. 
Massa Panis, v. Sugar cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Materia Medica for forms, v. Ingredients.  
Measures now used by apothecaries—p. 18. 
—used by the antients—p. 428. 
Menstrua for infusions, their kinds and properties—p. 144. & seq. 
Method of prescribing the ingredients of a form in general—p. 15. §.58. 
Metrenchites, for injecting the Uterus—p. 250. 
Mixture, its effects on the consistence of medicines—p. 45. §.96  
—colour of medicines—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor of medicines—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste of medicines—p. 48. §.101. 
—virtues of medicines p.-49 §.102. 
Mixtures, what? and their kinds—p. 210. §.259. 
—of liquid medicines—p. 224. §.272. 
Mixtures 

INDEX. 
Mixtures, ingredients for—p. ib. §.273. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 225. §.274. 
—order of prescribing— p. 227. 
—their dose—ib. 
—general quantity—ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 228. 
—subscription for—p. 229. 
—superscription, uses, and specimens—p. 230.
N. 
Nasals, what kind of medicines?—p. 382. §.474. 
Nascale, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Nebula chartacea, a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Nodules, what?—p. 158. n° 2. p. 179. n° 2. 
—for spitting—p. 398. n° 7. 
O. 
Odor of a form upon mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Odoriferous balsams, v. Balsams. 
Odoromenta, what kind of medicines?—p. 386. §.479. 
—their uses, and specimens—p. 387. 
Ointment, v. Unguents—p. 342. 
Orbiculus, v. Cake. 
Order of ranging the ingredients of a form—p. 14. §.57. 
—prescribing the ingredients of aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 358. §.435. 
—baths—p. 322. §.372. 
—boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 140. §.202. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.348. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 171. §.227. 
—drops—p. 240. §.286. 
—electuaries p. 90. §.141. 
—emplasters—p. 330. §.408. 
—emulsions—p. 201. §.251. 
—epithems—p. 274. §.355. 
—fomentations—p. 362. §.323. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.307. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.509. 
—infusions—p. 148. §.214. 
—injections—p. 248. §.300. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.264. 
—juices—p. 185. §.338. 
—linctus—p. 100. §.152. 
Order

INDEX. 
Order of prescribing the ingredients of liniments—p. 367. §.446. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.275. 
—ointments—p. 348. §.424. 
—pills—p. 109. §.163. 
—powders—p.58. §.112 
—tablets—p. 133 §.189 
—troches—p. 125. §.176. 
—vapors—p. 308 
—unguents—p. 348. §.420. 
Oxyrrhodimum, what?—p. 376. §.464 
P. 
Pandalion, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190 
Pasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Pasta regia, v. Sugar-cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Pastills, v. Troches—p. 122.
Pessary, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Phoenigmi, v. Rubisacientia.—p. 371 
Picatio, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Pillow, v. Epithem.—p. 273. 
Pills, what kind of medicines?—p. 106. §.160. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 107. §.162. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 109. §.163.
—their size and weight—p. 109. §.164. 
—dose—p. 110. §.165 
—general quantity,—p.111 §.166. 
—proportion of ingredients—p. 112. 
—subscription—p. 113. 
—superscription—p. 114.
—uses—p. 115. §.170. 
—specimens of them—p. 116. §.171.  
Pineolatum, v. Sugar-cake,—p. 143.  
Powders, what kind of medicines?—p. 54. §.106. 
—of 3 kinds, in degree of tenuity—p. ib. 
—ingredients for—p. 55. §.109.
—their election—p. 56. §.111. 
—method of prescribing—p. 58 §.112. 
—their Dose—p. 58. §.113.
—general quantity—p. 60. §.114. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib.
—their subscription—p. 62 §.116
—preparation—p. ib. §.117
—distribution—p. ib. §.118
—receptacles—p. 63. §.119 
—superscription—p. ib. §.120. 
—uses and specimens—p. 65. 
Plasters, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Prescribing

INDEX. 
Prescribing, general rules and cautions for—p. 4. §.11. 
Prescriptions, what? v. Formula—p. 1. §.1. 
—their kinds—p. 2. §.6. 
—parts in general—p. 14. 
Preparation of Powders p. 62. §.117. 
—infusions—p. 152. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 175. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 189. & seq. 
—emplasters—p. 334. 
Proportion of in-
gredients for 
Aspersions—p. 256. §.313.
—Balsams—p. 358. §.438. 
—Baths—p. 302. §.375. 
—Boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141 §.206. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.351. 
—cerates—p. 342. §.417. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.236. 
—drops—p. 241. §.289. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.144. 
—emplasters—p. 331 §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 203. §.254. 
—epithems—p. 296. §.362. 
—epispastics—p. 372. §.455. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.326. 
—fumigations—p. 320. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 407. §.511. 
—infusions—p. 150. §.217. 
—injections—p. 248. §.303. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.267. 
—juices-expressed—p. 186. §.241. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.155. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 228. §.278. 
—pills—p. 112. §.167. 
—powders—p. 60. §.115. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 135. §.194. 
—troches—p. 126. §.181. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.388. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.427. 
Pultice, v. Cataplasm.—p. 282. 
Pulvinar, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Q.
Quantity of a medicine to be prescribed and made up at one time, v. 
General quantity. 
Quanity

INDEX. 
Quantity of a medicine to be taken at once, v. Dose. 
Qualities of a medicine from 
composition or mixture
—p. 45. §.94. 95. 
—in consistence—p. 45. §.96. 
—colour—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste—p. 48. §. 101. 
—virtues—p. 49. §.102. 
R. 
Receptacles for aspersions—p. 256. §.314. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. ult. 
—drops—p. 242. §.290. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.145. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—pills—p. 114. §.168. ult. 
—powders—p. 63. §.119. 
Recipe, the 2d general part of prescription—p. 14. §.56. 
Regimen, proper in taking medicines—p. 24. 
—powders—p. 65. §.124. 
Rotula, v. Sugar-cake.—p. 138. 
Rubisters, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
S. 
Saccus, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Salivatics, v. Apophlegmatisms.—p. 391. 
Scatulæ, what they are—p. 63. §.119. 
Scute, what kind of medicine—p. 402. 
Scul-cap, v. Cucusa.—p. 375. 
Semicupium, v. Baths.—p. 300. §.369. 
Series, for ranging the ingredients of a form, v. Order of prescribing. 
Sief of the Arabians, what?—p. 379. §.469. 
Smell of medicines, from mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Sope, persumed—p. 388. n° 4. 
Spirits, inflammable, their composition—p. 146. n° 3. 
Species or powders, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Specimens of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. 
—aspersions—p. 256. 
—balsams—p. 361. 
—baths—p. 305. 
—boles—p. 82. 
—cakes—p. 138. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. 
—cerates.—p. 344.
—colyria—p. 380. 
—cucusæ—p. 375. 
—decoctions—p. 178.
Specimens 


INDEX. 
Specimens of dentifrices—p. 390 
—draughts—p. 230. 
—drops—p. 243. 
—electuaries—p. 94. 
—emplasters—p. 336. 
—emulsions—p. 206. 
—epithems  
dry—p. 278.
moist—p. 298. 
—epispastics—p. 372. 
—errhins—p. 384. 
—expressed-juices—p. 192. 
—fomentations—p. 269. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 376. 
—fumes—p. 322. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. 
—glysters—p. 412. 
—infusions—p. 159. 
—injections—p. 251. 
—juleps—p. 219. 
—juices—p. 192. 
—linctus—p. 104. 
—liniments—p. 367. 
—mixtures—p. 230. 243. 
—nascales—p. 424. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. 
—pills—p. 116. 
—powders—p. 65. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 131. 
—troches—p. 128. 
—vapors—p. 313. 
—unguents—p. 352. 
Stillicidium, v. Baths.—p. 301. 369. 
Stomatics, what kind of medicines—p. 388. 
Subscription, i. e. directions to the compounder in general, p. 20. §.59 
—for aspersions— p. 256. §.314. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.439. 
—baths—p. 303. §.376. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.207. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.352. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418.
—decoctions—p. 175. §.231. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—electuaries—p.93. §.145. 
—emplasters—p. 334. §.4l1. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.255. 
—epithems—p. 275. §.297. 
Sub-

INDEX.
Subscription for fomentations—p. 263. §.327. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.401. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.502.
—glysters—p. 409. 512. 
—infusions—p. 132. §.218. 
—injections—p. 249. §.304.
—juleps—p. 218. §.268. 
—juices—p. 189. §.242. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.449. 
—mixtures-p. 229. §.279. 
—pills—p. 113. §.168. 
—powders—p. 62. §.116. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.195. 
—troches—p. 127. §.182. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.389. 
—unguents—p. 330. §.428. 
Suffitus, v. Fumigations—p. 315. 
Sugar-cakes, what kind of medicines?—p. 138. §.199. 
—ingredients for—p. 139. §.200. 
—their election—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing—p. 140. §.202. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.203. 
—dose—p. 141. §.204. 
—general quantity,—p. 131. §.205. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—their superscription p. 142. §.208. 
—uses and specimens p. 142. 
Superscriptions (i.e. directions to the patients in general p. 22. §.60. 
—for apophlegmatisms—p. 395. §.495. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.315. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.443. 
—baths—p. 304. §.377. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—cakes—p.142. §.208. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.353. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418. 
—colyria—p. 379. §.470. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.232. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291.
—electuaries—p.93- §.146. 
—emplasters—p. 335. §.412. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.256. 
—epithems—p. 277 and 297. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.479. 
—fomentations—p. 264. §.428. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.402. 
G2 Superscriptions

INDEX.
Superscriptions for gargarisms—p. 399. §.503. 
—glysters—p. 409. §.513.
—infusions—p. 157. §.221. 
—injections—p. 249. §.305. 
—juleps—p. 218. §.269. 
—juices—p. 191. §.243. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.157. 
—liniments p. 367. §.450. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.280. 
—pills—p. 114. §.169. 
—powders—p. 63. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.196. 
—troches—p. 128. §.183. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.330. 
—unguents—p. 351. §.429. 
Suppositories, what kind of medicines?—p. 417. 
—their ingredients and composition—p. ib. 
—uses—p. 421. 
—specimens of them—p. 422. 
Sympasma, v. Aspersions.—p. 255. 
Synapisms, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
T. 
Tablets, what kind of medicines?—p. 131. §.186. 
—election of ingredients—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 132. §.188, 
—order of prefcribing them p. 133. §.189. 
—figures of—p. 134. §.190. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.191. 
—dose general quantity—p. 134. §.190. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 135. §.194. 
—subscription for—p. 136. §.195. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.197. 
—specimens of them—p. 137. §.198. 
Tastes, various, from mixture— p. 48. §.101. 
Teas, medicinal—p. 158. n° 2. p. 160. n° 5. 
Tessellæ, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190. 
Tincture, by infusion—p. 157, n° 1. 
Tobacco, medicinal—p. 323. n° 3. 
Tragea, powder, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Transfusion of blood, in live animals—p. 246. §.299. 
Troches, what kind of medicines?—p. 122. §.172. 
—ingredients for—p. 123. §.174. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.175. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 125. §.176. 
—their figure, size, and weight—p. ib. 
—dose and general quantity—p. 126. §.180. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
Troches

INDEX. 
Troches, subscription for—p. 127. §.182. 
—superscription for—p. 128. §.183. 
—their uses and speicmens—p. ib. 
U. 
Vapors, what? and their kinds—p. 307. §.380. 
—ingredients for them—p. 307. §.383. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.384. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. 310. §.386. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 311. §.388.
—subscription for them—p. ib. 
—their uses—p. 312. §.391. 
—specimens of them—p. 313. 
Vehicles, in general—p. 24. n° 11. 
—for taking powders—p. 63. §.123. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—for applying emplasters—p. 334. n° 2. 
—fomentations—p. 265. n° 3. 
Unguents, what kind of medicines?—p. 345. §.421. 
—ingredients for them—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing, &c.—p. 348. 
—their subscription—p. 350. §.428. 
—superscription—p. 351. §.429. 
—uses—p. ib. §.430. 
—specimens of them—p. 352. §.431. 
Uses of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. §.496. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.316.
—balsams—p. 360. §.441. 
—baths—p. 304. §.378. 
—boles—p. 82. §.136. 
—cakes p. 142. §.209. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.354. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.419. 
-colyria—p. 397- §.471. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.233. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.488. 
—drops—p. 243. §.292. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.147. 
—emplasters—p. 335- §.413. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.257. 
—epithems—p. 278. and 297. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.477. 
—fomentations—p. 267. §.329. 
—frications—p. 374. §.459. 
—frontals—p. 376. §.465. 
—fumigations—p. 322. §.403. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. §.504. 
—glysters—p. 411. §.5l4.
Gg2 Uses

INDEX.
—infusions—p. 158. §.222. 
—injections—p. 251. §.306. 
—juleps—p. 219. §.270. 
—juices—p. 191. §.244. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.158. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.452. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.281. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. §.483. 
—ointments—p. 351. §.430. 
—pills—p. 115. §.170. 
—powders—p. 65. §.125. 
—suppositaries—p. 451. §.528. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.197. 
—troches—p. 128. §.184. 
—vapors—p. 312. §.391. 
—unguents—p.351. §.430.
Vinous menstrua, their kinds and properties p. 144. n° 1 (2.) 
p. 145. n° 1. 2. 
Wafer-paper, for a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Wash, v. Bath—p. 308. §.369. 
Water, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions and decoctions, 
p. 145. 
Weights, used by apothecaries—p. 17. N° 6
—the antients—p.
AN 

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Diseases and Intentions, 
TO WHICH 
The several FORMULÆ, or PRESCRIPTIONS in 
this Book, correspond. 
Note, The Intentions are in Italick. 
A.
ABORTION, to prevent, v.
Analeptics, and
Hysterics.
—promote
boles 
emetic—p. 82
diuret.—p. 84. n° 6. 
elect. chalib.—p. 98. 
emplast. hyst.—p. 341. 
ointment purg.—p. 353. 
pills—p. 118. n° 7. 
powder—p. 74. n° 31. 
Abscess to suppurate
cataplas.—p. 291. n° 3, 4, 5.
electury.—p. 94. n° 3. 10 
emplaster—p. 339. n° 10 
unguent—p. 352. n° 1. 
Absorbent cap—p. 278. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 13. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—fumigation—p. 323. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 3. p. 221. n° 6. 
Gg3 Absorbent

INDEX. 
Absorbent mixture—p. 232. n° 5. 
—powders—p. 73. n° 27, 28, 29 and 30. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 3. 
Abstergents, v. Aperients. 
Aches, v. Anodynes. 
Acid bolus—p. 85. n° 8. (2.). 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 11. & seq. 
—fomentation—p. 271. n° 1. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 194, n° 6 and 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 4. and 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 2.
—vapors—p. 322. n° 1. 
Acrimony of the juices, v.
absorbent. 
acid, and  
alcaline 
Agglutinant aspersion p. 259. n° 7. 
—bolus—p. 86. n° 12. 
—cerate—p. 344. n° 1. 
—deceptions—p. 179. n° 4. p. 181. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. p. 96. n° 9. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 4. p. 341. n° 14. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. p. 209. n° 9. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 10. 
—injections—p. 252. n° 4. p. 254. n° 10. 
—julap—p. 219. n° 2. 
—liniment—p. 3. n° 9. 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233- n° 10. p. 235. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. p. 72. n° 25. 
—troches p. 131. n° 7. 
Alcaline, bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 293. n° 8 and 9. 
—decoction—p. 181. n° 8. 
—draughts— p. 234. n° 13. & seq. p. 235. n° 15. 
-drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4, 5. p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 15. & seq. 
—emplaster—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 279. n° 4. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—liniment—p. 369 n° 6. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. p. 234. n° 13. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. p. 120. n° 14. 
Alexipharmic, apozem—p. 180. n° 5. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 7, & seq. 
Alexi-

INDEX.
Alexipharmic draught—p. 236. n° 16. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. p. 96. n° 8. and 10. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—juleps—p. 221. n° 6. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 232. n° 6. p. 236. n° 16. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 17. 18. 22. 
Ague, boles emet.—p. 82. 
—febrifug.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoc. feb.—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—elect.—p. 97. n° 12. 
—emplast. ad carp.—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 298. n° 1. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 16. 
—infusion emet.—p. 159. 
—mixture peruv.—p. 236. n° 17. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
Analeptic, (v. Corroborants) apozem.—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 17. 
—broth—p. 179. n° 3. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 7. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. and n° 4. 
—juice-expressed p. 193. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. p. 220. n° 4. 
—linct. omn.—p. 104. & seq. 
—mixture—p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25. and 26. 
—troches—p. 128. n° 1. 
Anasarca, apozem—l80. n° 5. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 2. 4. 14. 
—decoction p. 181. n° 8. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 15. & seq. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—infusions—p. 161. n° 6. 8. & seq. 
—juice-expressed—p. 192. n° 2. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—mixtures—p. 244. n° 4. 6. 8. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 14. 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6. 15. 29. 
Ani procidentia, epithems—p. 282. n° 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 9. 
—suppository—p. 382. §.521. 
Anodyne, bolus—p. 86. n° 10. n°. 15.
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. n° 1. p. 292. n° 6. 
—draught—p. 237. n° 20. 
Gg4 Anodyne,

INDEX. 
Anodyne, drops, laud. liq. omn. 
—emplasters—p. 336. n° 1. p. 340. n° 11. 
—emulsions—p. 206. n° 1. p. 208. n° 5. 
—epithems p. 279. n° 3. p. 299. n° 6. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 4. 7. 9. 10. 
—gargarisms—p. 401. n° 3, 4. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 6. 12. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 10. and 11. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 3. 
—liniments—p. 367. n° 1. 3.7, 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5 and 6. 
—mixtures p. 232. n° 5. p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 122. n° 19. & feq. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 20. p. 73. n° 30. 
—sugar-cakes—p. 142. n° 2. 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
—unguents—p. 352. n° 2. 
Antacids, v. Absorbents. 
Antarthritic apozem—p. 193. n° 4.
—boles p. 84. n° 5. 16. 
—cataplasm p. 293. no. 8. 
—draughts p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 13. seg.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° 9. 11. 13. 15. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—mixtures p. 234. n° 13. p. 244. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n°10. 14. 18. & seq. 
—powders p. 73. n° 29. 35. 
—unguents p. 352. n° 2. 
Antasthmatic boles—p. 87. n° 14. 16. 18.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 9. 13. 15. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. 10. 
—infusion—p. z62. n° 8. 
—juleps—p. 219 n° 2. 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 3. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 13. 17. 19. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—powers—p. 71. n° 23. 32. 35. 
Anticolic, v. Colic. 
Antemetic boles—p. 85. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 230. n° 1. 20. 
—drops-p. 245. n° 10. & seq. 
—electuaries-p. 98. n° 14. 16. 
—emplaster-p. 337. n° 5. 
—epithem-p. 293. n° 10. p. 208. n° 2. 
—infusion-p. 162. n° 7 
—juleps-p. 219. n° 1. 4. 
Antemetic

INDEX. 
Antemetic liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures P- 194. n° 7. p. 231. n° 2. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 8. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 24. 26.
Antepileptic apophlegmatism—p. 396. n° 1. 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—balsam—p. 361. n° 2. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—epithem—p. 281. n° 8. 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 4. 7. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 
Anthelmintic bolus—p. 83. n° 2. (3.) n° 11. (2.) 
—draught—p. 243. n° 2. p. 163. 
—emulsion—p. 208. n° 7. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 2. 14. 
—infusions—p. 163. n° 8. & seq 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 3. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 12. 
—powders—p. 67 and 68. 
—tablets—p. 137. n° 1, 2. p. 142. n° 1. 
Anthysteric balsam—p. 362. n° 4. 
—boles—p. 86. n° 11. & seq. n° 7. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 5. 7. 9. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 16. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—infusion—p. 16l. n° 6. 
—julep—p.220. n° 5. 
—liniment—p. 369- n° ib. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 6, 7. 
—powders?—p. 74. n° 32, 33. 
Anticteric, v. Jaundice
Antinephritic
Antiparalytic, v. Palsy.
—apozem—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 3. 12. 15. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 13.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 2. 15. 
—emulsion-p. 210. n° 11. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 6. 12. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. 7.
—linctus—p. 105. n° (2.) 5. 
—mixtures—p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 75. n° 35.
 



INDEX 
Antiphlogistic boles p. 83. n° 3. 15. 17. 
—baths—p. 306. n° 5, 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 292. n° 6, 7. 
—collyria—p. 380. n° 1, 2. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 20. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 11, 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—emullions—p. 206. n° 1. 3. 11. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 3. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 3. 6, 11, 12. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 192. n° 1. 3. 4. 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 2. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7, 8. 10. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 36.
Antipleuritic, v. Pleurisy. 
Antirheumatic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 12. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 5. 12. 16. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 16. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—infusion—p. 160. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 10. 
—mixture—p. 235. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 10. 12 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 29. 35. 
Antiscorbutic ale—p. 164. n° 10. p. 179. n° 2. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 87. n° 16. 
—electuaries—p. 93. n° 6. 8. 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juices—p. 193. n° 5, 6. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—infusions-p. 160. n° 4. 10. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 219. n° 10. 12. 16. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6, 7. 
Antipasmodic boles—p. 83. n° 3. 10. 16. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—electuary—p. 96. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 9. 11. 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 
Antisyphilic boles—p. 83. n° 2. (1.) n° 13. 
—electuaries p. 95. n° 6. 13. 
—emplaster p. 341. n° 15.
—fumigation p. 326. n° 10. & ult. 
—liniment—p. 371- n° 11. 
—pills—p. 12. n° 12, 13. 15, 16. 
St.

INDEX. 
St. Anthony's Fire, v. Antiphlogistic. 
Anxiety, v. Cardiac. 
Aperient boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—cataplasm.—p. 293. n° 8. 
—decoctions—p. 181. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 17. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juice—p. 192. n° 1. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 
—fumes—p. 322. n° 2. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 16. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. & seq. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 10. 12. 
Appetite to recover, v. Antemetic. 
Apophlegmatic decoction—p. 396. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 398. n° 6 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 5. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 
—juice—p. 397. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 2. 
—nodule—p. 398. n° 7.
—powders—p. 69. n° 16. p. 397. n° 4.
—sugar-cakes—p. 398. n° 5 
—troches—p. ib. n° 8. 
Apoplexy, v. Antepileptic. 
Ardor urinæ, v. Diluents, Refrigerants, and Balsamics. 
Aromatic balsam p. 362. n° 5. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 10. 14. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 2. 6. 
—fumes—p. 323. n° 4. 9. 
—glysters—p. 415. n° 13. 15. 16. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 4. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixture—p. 236. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 22. 24. 
—tablets—p. 1 38. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 
—vapors—p. 314. n° 2. 3. 
Arthritic, v. Antarthritic. 
Ascarides, v. Anthelmintic. 
Ascites, v. Anasarca. 
Asthma, v. Antastmatic.
Astringent 


INDEX. 
Astringent bolus—p. 83. n° 19. 
—decoction—p. 179. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 4, 5. 
—emplaster—p. 337. n° 4. 
—epithems—p. 280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 8. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 159. n° 2. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture— p. 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 26. 34. 
Atrophe, v. Analeptic. 
Attenuants, v.
Alexipharmics 
Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
Attrahent, v.
Epispastic.
Rubisier.
B. 
Balsamic boles—p. 86. n° 12. 17. 
—decoctions—p. 179. n° 3, 4. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 14, 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. 9. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 12. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—fotus—p. 272. n° 10. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 4, 5. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 5. 6. 12. 
—infusion—p. 160, n° 5. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 219. n° 2. 
—linctus—p. 105. (2.) and n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233. n° 10. 14. 15. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 17, 18, & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. 25. 
—troches—p. 131. n° 7. 
Bechich, v. Pectoral and Balsamic. 
Belly-ache, v. Colic. 
Birth to promote, bolus—p. 84. n° 7. 
—draughts—p. 235. n° 14. 15.
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 10. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5.
—powders—p. 74. n° 31, 32, 33. 
Blasts, v. Erisipelas, and Antiphlogistic. 
Bleeding, v. Hæmorrhage. 
Bloody-

INDEX. 
Bloody-flux, v. Dysentery. 
Breath-fetid, troches—p. 130. n° 5 & seq. 
Bruises, v.
Aperients and
Balsamics.
Bubos to suppurate—p. 339. n° 10. 
Burns, (v. Antiphlogistic,) emplast.—p. 340. n° 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7. 10. 
C.
Cachexy, v. Aperients, Aromatics, Corroborants. 
Calculus, v. Antinephritics. 
Cancer, v. Aperients and Paregorics. 
Cardiac (v. Alexipharmic) boles—p. 85. n° 8. 
—draughts—p. 236. n° 16. 18. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 96. n° 8. 10, 11. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—epithem—p. 299. n° 4. p. 281. n° 8. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 7. 15. 
—infusion—p. 262. n° 7. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. and n° (3.) 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. 16. 18. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 21. 28.
Cardialgia, v. Absorbents.
Caries, v. Alexipharmics, and Detergents. 
Carminatives, v. Alexipharmics. 
Catalepsy, v. Antapoplectics. 
Catarrh, v. Diaphoretics, and Corroborants. 
Cathartic apozem—p. p.179. n° 2.
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. 3, 4, 5. 
—cakes—p. 142 n° 1. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1. 2 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 6 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 2. 8, 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—infusions—p. 159. n° 2. p. 163. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixtures—p. 209. n° 8. p. 213. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1, 2.
—pills—p. 116. 
—potions, v. draughts. 
—powders—p. 66, 67, 68. 
—suppositories 
—tablets—p. J37. p. Ncr,nc-r, 2. 
—wines—p. 159. n° 2. 9. 
Catoche, v. Antapoplectic. 
Caustic aspersions—p. 259. n° 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. p. 299. n° 5. p. 373. n° 5. and 6.
Caustic 

INDEX. 
Caustic emplasters—p. 37. n° 7.
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—liquor—p. 244. n° 4. 
—powders—p. 259. n° ib. 
Cephalic balsams—p. 361. n° 1. 2. 6. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 8. 16. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—decoction—p. 222. n° 10. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 14. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° g. 11. 16. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—errhins—p. 385. n° 5. 
—frication—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 378. n° 5. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 3. 8. 10. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 10. 13. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 4. 5. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—pills—p. 116. n° (3.) 6. 7. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 22. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 5, 6. 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 7. 
Chaliliat drops—p. 245. n° 10. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 16. 
—mixture—p. 245. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 5. 6. 8. 
—powders—p. 74. n° 32. 34. 
Chlorosis, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Coolers, v. Acids, Refrigerants, and Diluents. 
Contusions, v. Aperients, and Balsamics. 
Cholic, Biliose, v. Acid, Absorbent, Cathartics, and oily Mixtures. 
—Arthritic, v. Aromatics, Anodynes, and Revulsives. 
—Hysteric, v. Anthysterics. 
—Flatulent, v. Aromatics. 
—Nephritic, v. Antinephritic. 
—from Aliments, v. Emetics and Cathartics. 
Constipatives, v. Astringents. 
Convulsions, v. Antispasmodics. 
Corroborant, (v. Analeptics) ale—p. 159. n° 2. 
—apozem—p. 179. n° 4.
—bath, cold water 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 18. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—colyrium, cold water 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries p. 94. n° 4. 5. 11. 14. 16. 
Corroborant

INDEX. 
Corroborant, v. (Analeptics) emplasters p. 337. n° 4, 5.
—epithems—p.280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 2. 4. 9. 
—infusion—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture—p 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4, 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25, 26. 34 
Cough, v. Balsamics, and Aperients. 
Courses to promote, v. Aperients and Anthysterics. 
—to restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Cutaneous Disorders, v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
D. 
Delivery to promote, v. Alexipharmics, Emetics, and Anthysteries. 
Dentition to facilitate, gargarism—p. 401. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 368. n° ib. 
Deobstruents, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
Desiccatives, v. Absorbents. 
Detergent, (v. Aperients) aspersions—p. 257. n° 1. 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 290. n° 2. 
—gargarism—p. 400. n° 1. 2.  
—glysters—p. 412. n° 1. 2. 7. 14. 
—injections—p. 251. n° 1. 4. 6. 8. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 6. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 21. 35. 
Diabetes 
Diarrhæ  
v. Agglutinants, Astringents, and Balsamics, 
Diaphoretics, v. Aromatics. 
Digestion to strengthen, v. Aromatics, and Astringents. 
Diluent apozem—p. 179. n° 3. 
—infusion 162. n° 7. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8. 10, 11. 
—juice—p. 93. n° 4. 
Discutients, v. Aperients. 
Diuretic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 6. 12. 
—bath—p. 303. n° 2.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 13. 
—emulsions—p. 208. n° 6. 11. 
—infusions—p. 160. n° 3. 4. 7. 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 193. n° 4. 5. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 18. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 15. 35. 
Dropsys v. Aperients, Cathartics, and Diuretics. 
Dysentery, v. Alexipharmics, Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Dysury,  v, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
E.

INDEX.
E. 
Ecbolics, v. Birth to promote. 
Ecchimoses, v. Apperients, Attenuants. 
Eccoprotics, v. Lenitives. 
Ecphratlics, v. Aperients.  
Emetic boles—p. 82. 
—draughts p. 233. n° 8. 11.
—juices p. 192. n° 2. 
—infusions p. 159. n° 1. 
—powders p. 65. 
—wines p. 159. n° 1. 
Emmenagtgs, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Emmenagogic boles—p. 86. n° 11. 16. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15, 16. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 3. 16. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5. 
—pessary—p. 424. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 6, 7, 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 2. 32. 
Emollients, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Epispastics, cataplasms—p. 372. n° 3. 6. 
—dropax—p. 372. n° 1. 
—emplasters—p. 373. n° 4. 7. 
—pastes—p. 372. n° 2. 5. 
Epulotic Aspersion—p. 259. n° 7. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 14. 
—sparadrap p. 338, n° 6. 
Erysipelas, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Errhins—p. 384 
Escharotics, v. Caustics. 
Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
Exanthemata, Scorbutic, v. Absorbents, Aperients, Diluents, Ca- 
thartics. 
—Inflammatory, v. Lenitives, Antiphlogistics, Diluents. 
F.
Faintings, v. Antapopledics, Cephalics, and Cardiacs. 
Fevers in general, v. Aiexipharmics, Epispastics, Cardiacs, Dilu- 
ents. Acids, Antiphlogistics. 
Fevers, Intermitting, v. Emetics, and Aperients. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
Fevers

INDEX. 
Fevers, intermitting, draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 12. 
—epithems—p. 279. n° 4. p. 298. n° 1. 
—glysters—p. 416. n° 14. 16. 
—infusion—p. 160. n6, 5. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8, 9. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° g. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
—Remitting, bolus feb.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—Inflammatory, v. Acids, Antiphlogistics, Diluents, Car- 
diacs, and Alexipharmics. 
—Nervous, or Slow, v. Alexipharmics, Cephalics, Epispastics. 
—Patrid-hestic, v. Antiphlogistics, Acids, Analeptics. 
G. 
Gangrene, v. Aperients, and Alexipharmics. 
Gleet, v. Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Gonorrhæ, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
Gout, v. Antarthritic. 
Gravel, v. Antinephritic, 
Green-sickness, v. Aperients, and Emmenagoges. 
Gripes, v. Cholic, and Anodynes. 
Gutta-Rosacea, v. Antiphlogistics. 
H. 
Hæmorrhage, internal, v. Balsamics, and Refrigerants. 
—pulv.—p. 75. n° 36. 
—external. 
—aspersion—p. 258. n° 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 298. n° 3. 
—injection—p. 254. n° 9. 
Hæmorrhoids (v. Eccoprotics.) 
—cataplasm—p. 292. n° 6. 
—epithem—p. 299, n° 6. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 10. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 11. 
—suppositories—p. 423. no. 5 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
Heart burn, v. Cardialgia. 
Hectic, v. Fever. 
Hemeplegia, v. Palsy. 
Hoarseness, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Hydrogog draughts—p. 102. n° 2. p. 209. n° 8. p. 243. n° 1. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 1. 
Hh Hydrocele


INDEX. 
Hydrocele, v. Aperient Externals. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
Hydrops, v. Anasarca 
Hypnotics, v. Anodynes. 
Hypo, v. Aperients. 
Hysteric Passion, v. Anthysterics. 
I. 
Jaundice, apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. p. 83. n° 3. 14. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 13. 
—drops p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 14. 
—powders p. 66. n° 2. 13. 35. 
Impotency, v. Aromatics, Externals and Internals. 
Inflammations, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Intermittents, v. Agues. 
Itch, v. Aperients, and Cathartics. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 13. 
—linimen—p. 371. n° 11. 
—unguents—p. 345. n° 4.
K. 
King's-Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
L.
Laxatives, or
Lenitives, 
boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 
—electuarics—p. 94. n° 2. 6. 
—epithems—p. 270. n° 4. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 
—mixture—p. 234. n° 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 
Leprosy, v Itch, and King's-Evil. 
Lechargy, v. Cephalics, and Antapoplectics. 
Looseness, and  
Lientery
v. Diarrhæ   
Lythontriptics, v. Antinephritics.
Lubricants, v. Balsamics.
Madness,

INDEX.
M. 
Madness, raving, v. Laxatives, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—melancholy, v. Emetics, Aperients, and Chalybiats. 
Measles, v. Balsamics, Cardiacs, Diluents, and Eccoprotics, 
Melancholy, v. Hippo. 
Menses to provoke, v. Emmenagogs. 
—restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Mortification, v. Gangrene. 
N. 
Narcotics, v. Anodynes. 
Nausea, v. Antemetics. 
Nephritics, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Neurotics, v. Cephalics. 
Numbness, v. Palsy. 
O. 
Obstructions, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
P. 
Pains to ease, v. Anodynes. 
Palsy. v. Antarthritics. 
Paregorics, Anodynes, Balsamics, and Diluents.
Phlegm, v. Hydrogogs, and Diaphoretics. 
Phthisis, v. Analeptics. 
Piles, v. Hæmorrhoides. 
Plague, v. Fevers, nervous. 
Pleurisy, v. Balsamics, Detergents, and Diluents. 
Pox, v. Antisiphilics. 
Q.
Quinsey, v. Antiphlogistics. 
R. 
Rheumatism, v. Antarthritics. 
Rickets, v. Aperients, and Corroborants. 
S. 
Scalds, v. Burns. 
Scabs 
Scald-head  
Schirri 
v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
Hh2 Scurvy,

INDEX. 
Scurvy, v. Antiscorbutics. 
Seminal Weakness, v. Analeptics, Balsamics, and Corroborants. 
Sleep to promote, v. Anodynes. 
Small Pox, v. Fevers, inflammatory. 
Spasms, v. Antispasmodics. 
Spleen, v. Aperients, and Chalibiates. 
Sterility, v. Aromatics. 
Stinking Breath, Troches for—p. 130. n° 5. 
Stone, v. Antinephrities. 
Strangury, v. Balsamics; and Diluents. 
Struma, v. Aperients, Absorbents, Antisyphilics, ahd Diluents. 
Sweats, to check, v. Acids, and Corroborants. 
T. 
Teeth, to cleanse and preserve—p. 390. 
Thirst, v. Acids, and Diluents. 
Tubercles of the Lungs, and Tumors to discuss, v. Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
U. 
Venery to provoke, v. Aromatics. 
Vertigo, v. Antepileptics. 
Vomiting, v. Antemetics. 
Urine, bloody, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—hot or scalding, v, Balsamics, and Astringents. 
—involuntary, u. Corroborants. 
W. 
Whites, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Wind, v. Carminatives, and Aromatics. 
Worms, v. Anthelmintics.







































LECTURES
OF 
PHARMACY: 
EXHIBITING 
EXACT RULES for PRESCRIBING, 
And of Use to every 
STUDENT of PHYSIC, 
As well as Necessary to all 
APOTHECARIES. 
FIRST GIVEN 
At the Close of an Annual COURSE of CHYMISTRY (on
the Desire of the late Learned Dr. BOERHAAVE) and since 
Published by Dr. H. GAUBIUS, Successor to that celebrated 
PROFESSOR in the Colledges of MEDICINE and CHEMISTRY, 
in the UNIVERSITY of LEYDEN. 
Translated by a PHYSICIAN, 
With proper NOTES, additional FORMS of PRESCRIPTION, 
an useful APPENDIX, and a double INDEX. 
LONDON: 
PRINTED for JOHN NOON, at the White Hart, near Mercers-
Chapel, in Cheapside, MDCCXLIV. 



(iii)
THE 
TRANSLATOR'S 
PREFACE. 
THE public, it is presumed, can 
be under no surprize at the ap- 
pearance of the present treatise: 
the character, abilities, and station of 
its learned author are so considerable, 
the composition and order of the book it- 
self so accurate, and its usefulness so ex- 
tensive and evident, that to make any 
apology on this account, would be alto- 
gether useless if not ridiculous. 
A2 THE

iv The Translator’s 
THE judicious will soon perceive the 
book to be none of those justly complain'd 
of; which consisting of mere repeti- 
tions from others, or a bare parade 
of method, leave the science as they 
found it; or rather retarded, by aug- 
menting the number of books without in- 
creasing knowledge. So far from it, that 
we have not any modern performance of 
the kind (at least in our language) ex- 
tant; notwithstanding the subject is so 
evidently useful and important: in so 
much, that it seems surprising Dr. Fuller 
shou'd give us (ex professo) an extempo- 
raneous Dispensatory, and yet neglect the 
main part; which is here largely con- 
sider’d; viz. the method of prescribing,
compounding, and exhibiting extempo- 
raneous medicines. 
Dr. Quincy has indeed said something 
on this head, in the latter part of his 
Dispensatory; but very little, and tran- 
siently, in comparison with the fulness 
and order of this: so that we may justly 
deem it more worthy of the title usurped 
by

v PREFACE.
by Dr. Fuller (i.e. Pharmacopæa Ex- 
temporanea), than any performance yet 
exposed to the world. 
To make the book as useful to the rea- 
der as intended by the author, does indeed 
require frequent revolution, and consul- 
tation by reference; but then it excludes 
numerous tautologies, and restrains the 
volume to a moderate size. 
THE formulas inserted as specimens 
by our author, may serve very well to il- 
lustrate the rules he has just before pre- 
scribed for them, and will give the rea- 
der some idea of the foreign practice this 
way: but most of them wou'd be judged 
aukward prescriptions by the physicians 
our own practice, notwithstanding they 
are generally extracted from the materia 
medica of the late celebrated professor 
Boerhaave: for which reason it was 
thought proper to further add such spe- 
cimens to the forms most in use, as are 
frequently to be met with in the practice 
of our best physicians. Those of the au- 
thor may be distinguished from such as 
A3 are 

vi The Translator’s 
are added; as the first begin with ꝶ. but 
the last with 4: and if any body is de- 
sirous to have still a larger number of 
specimens for each form, they may have 
recourse to Fuller; whose Pharmacopæa 
may be taken as a supplement to this.
WITH regard to the present trans- 
lation and edition, to have given a ver- 
sion directly literal wou’d have made the 
reading too stiff, and less agreeable with 
our own language: but care has been all 
along taken to preserve the author's sense, 
and to represent it generally to advan- 
tage, as much as possible in his own words. 
It is hoped the book has improved and 
pained in the translation; and there are 
several things which render this edition 
more compleat and useful than the origi- 
nal: the quotations referred to by our 
author are here subjoined in their pro- 
per places, Some occasional but necessary 
observations are here and there made,
and both are properly distinguished in the 
way of note; the several formulœ are in- 
stanced more largely and accurately, and 
the


vii PREFACE. 
the book is closed with useful and necessa- 
ry indices. 
TO conclude, for the literal errors, 
or other small over-sights which have 
accidentally crept in, we must presume 
on the readers allowance; since we 
find the most elaborate performances 
are not intirely free: and as the com- 
mon interest of the faculty was the cause 
of this publication, there is the more 
room to expect candor and good nature 
from its members, in behalf of their 
Humble Servant, 
S. M.

THE
AUTHOR’S PREFACE 
WHEN I first applied myself to the 
profession of physic, among several dif- 
ficulties which offer'd, the greatest 
was that of prescribing a proper form 
to the medicines indicated; such as might not 
only best answer the intention, but also fit them 
for the most just and easy composition in the pro- 
per hands, and make their exhibition to the pa- 
tient the least irksome mid most successful. For 
I soon found the general precepts which are usu- 
ally learned on this head, barely in universities, 
were very unequal to the purpose; and that a 
just determination of the form was to be had only 
from considering every individual, and even the 
most minute circumstances both of the patient 
and the medicine: that there were no forms of 
medicines answer able for the same intention in all 
cases alike; and that the same indication often 
required the application of a medicine in very 
different ways and forms, before a physician cou'd 
effect his design, and acquit himself to his patient. 
I also remarked the admonition of Hippocrates, 
(μηfεγ ειχη, μηδεv ζωεgopαv) that to attempt a 
cure inconsiderately, was to attempt to do no- 
thing to the purpose; which caution is service- 
able here, if any where: for if a physician be
wrong


ix The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.        
wrong or careless in prescribing proper medicines, 
he will quickly find how easily his intention may 
be frustrated, notwithstanding that and his other 
observations be ever so just. The vast hopes and 
designs which a physician may have formed to 
himself from a due consideration of the disease, 
must inevitably fall to nothing, if he does not 
establish their being, by a just prescription and 
exhibition of proper medicines; the result of 
which, may be a happy cure, the proper end of 
his profession: nor does a physician draw his cha-
racter so much from what he thinks, as from 
what he orders and commits to paper; from 
whence, the great importance of our present sub- 
ject, both to the physician and patient, is suffici- 
ently evident.
I found it not only a great difficulty to charge 
my memory with set forms, composed by my tea- 
chers and the best writers; but I also perceived, 
notwithstanding the deference and credulity of 
youth, that such could not directly, suit my prac- 
tice in all similar cases that occurred: as my 
cases did not in every circumstance correspond with 
those for which the set forms were compiled; and 
that therefore I  must be under a necessity of com- 
posing new forms for my particular patients; or 
else of making frequent changes in those which I 
had learned. This consideration, with the new
and sudden changes in the state of disease; and a 
natural aversion to the servile yoke of prejudice, 
prevailed with me to set my judgment free from 
the fetters of set forms complied by other men; 
especially as I was encouraged thereto, by the cus-
tom

x The AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
tom of extemporaneous prescription prevailing, 
now, almost universally.  
NOR was I satisfied with the answer made 
me by some old standers in practice, whom I some- 
times consulted in those difficult and sudden changes, 
viz. that use and experience would make this 
work easy, however difficult it might seem to a 
beginner; but for fear of an irreparable loss of 
my reputation in practice, from many unhappy 
events, and even death, I was resolved to be also 
guided by my own reason, I therefore thought it 
incumbent on before I advanced in practice, 
to acquaint myself with all that had been well 
said on the subject by my predecessors in physic: 
for which end, I turned over all the physical 
writings that I cou'd get upon this theme, and 
compared the general rules which they prescribed, 
with the particular formulæ or prescriptions of 
the best physicians. 
BUT I as quickly found upon this review, 
that a great number of these rules were so uncer- 
tain, as to be oftener neglected than observed; 
that many were contradictory to each other, and 
the greatest part of them all liable to abundance 
of exceptions: as will appear to any one who 
compares them with the prescription in the daily 
practice of our most skilful physicians. Many 
physicians who had undertaken to instruct their 
juniors by their works on this head, having as it 
were forgot themselves, seem to have writ rather 
as expert masters, to masters, than to unskilful 
beginners: while others, over studious of brevity,
only

xi The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.             
only throw a darker mist before us. I therefore 
came at last to this resolution, viz. of collecting 
indifferently all the precepts which had been given 
for each particular form, and subjoining all the 
exceptions that occurred in their proper places, 
that by comparing and accommodating the dif- 
ference, I might thence deduce a set of general 
and more intelligible directions or propositions, 
which being methodized and reduced to their 
proper heads, wou'd form a manual to consult, 
and to direct my hand in practice. 
AND hence arose the present treatise: which 
tho' now published, I have not the vanity to pretend 
it has many great perfections and new doctrines, 
which are not to be met with scatter'd in the 
works of others; but I ingenuously confess there 
are few or none, but what have been exhausted, 
with some pains, from the attempts of others in 
this way. Nor will an impartial reader think 
the worse of this performance for having thus 
candidly imparted to him its origin. 
THE authors who have contributed and been 
consulted in the composition of this work, are too 
numerous to give a particular account of them 
here; tho' almost all of them are worthy of 
esteem: and were each to take bis proper quota, 
there wou'd not remain many pages to myself; for 
which reason I have omitted citations and refe- 
rences to authors in the body of the book itself; 
that I might not tire my reader with their num- 
ber, nor appear to him ostentatious of much 
reading. 
TO

xii The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
TO conclude, the only cause of my publication, 
was this: being promoted to the public professor- 
ship of chemistry in this university, I was strongly 
sollicited by Boerhaave to subjoin a pharmaceuti- 
cal to my annual chemical course; and here it 
seemed for the interest of my audience to exhibit 
the doctrine and preparation of extemporaneous, 
as well as officinal medicines. I had therefore 
recourse to what I had formerly collected and me- 
thodized for my own use on this head, and from 
thence, as every one is pleased with his own, I 
took the method and materials of my lectures; 
that so my pupils might have same general rules 
to direct their prescriptions conformable to prac- 
tice, which I endeavoured to illustrate to them 
by specimen or example. But the time limited 
for the performance of this course was too short, 
to give the doctrine with that slowness and distinc- 
tion which is necessary for a swift elocution 
wou'd not make an impression on their minds, suf- 
ficient to enable them to prescribe a form regular- 
ly to a proposed case, by that time they were re- 
turned home; so that I thought of the press as an 
expedient to save myself trouble, and make this 
doctrine the more useful to them. If I obtain this, 
it is enough; but if any body else reap advantage 
from hence, they are welcome: I shall then at 
least have the happiness of thinking myself the more 
useful by my labours. 
Written at Leyden, 1739.
THE

(xiii) 
THE 
CONTENTS. 
THE introduction—Pag.1
General rules and cautions to he observed
before prescribing—4 
OF FORMS IN GENERAL—4—57 
Of the general heads and circumstances of formula or 
prescriptions: 
(I.) In common to all—13 
Viz. Inscription (§.55.), beginning (§.56.), 
order or method (§. 57.), the way of 
writing the ingredients and their quan- 
tities (§.58.), the subscription directing 
the apothecary (§. 59.), the superscrip-
tion directing the patient (§. 60.). 
(II.) In common to simple formula—25 
Viz. The dose (§. 65.) and general quantity 
to be made up at once (§. 68.)—25 
(III.)

xiv The CONTENTS. 
(III.) Proper to compound formulæ—Pag.35 
Viz. 1°. Parts; basis (§.75.), adjuvans 
(§.78.), corrigens (§.83.), consti- 
tuens (§.86.) 
2°. Their mutual proportion (§.87.), 
general quantity (§.93.), and dose 
(§.92.) 
3°. Their QUALITIES; consistence 
(§.96.), colour (§.99.), odor 
(§.100.), taste (§.101.), medicinal 
virtues (§.102.).
OF FORMS IN PARTICULAR—Pag.54 
Forms of internal medicines—ib. 
Powder—ib. 
Bolus—76 
Electuary–88 
Linctus—99 
Pills—106 
Troches—122 
Tablets—131 
Cakes—138 
Insusions—143 
Decoctions—164 
Expressed juices—182 
Emulsions—194 
Forms

xv The CONTENTS.
Forms by mixture, p. 210
Juleps—pag. 211 
Mixtures—224 
Drops, &c—237 
Forms of external medicines—246 
Of external forms common to several parts. 
Of Injections—246 
Aspersions—255 
Epithems in general—259 
liquid, or fomentations—260 
dry, of several kinds—273 
Cataplasms in general—282 
boiled—ib. 
crude—294 
Baths in general—300 
watery—ib 
vaporous in general—307 
Moist vapours—308 
Suffitus, or dry fumes—315 
Plasters—326 
Cerates—342 
Ointments—345 
Balsams, odoriserous—354 
Liniments—363 
Epispastics—371 
Frications-374 
Of external forms proper to certain parts—375 
—to the head—ib. 
Cucusa, or scull-cap—ib. 
Frontal—ib. 
Collyrium—378
Exter-

xvi THE CONTENTS.
External forms proper to the nose—382 
Errhines—ib. 
Smelling bottles, &c.—380 
Of stomatics for the mouth, in general—388 
Dentifrices—389 
Apophlegmatisms—391 
Gargarisms—399 
Scutes, or stomach plasters—402 
Clysters, intestinal—ib. 
Suppositories—417 
Pessaries, and nascales—423 
Addenda—424 
AN

AN 
INTRODUCTION 
TO THE 
Method of Prescribing, &c. 
§.1. Formula or prescription, a- 
mong physicians, is a rati- 
onal assignment and com- 
bination of such pharma- 
ceutical remedies as have 
by art been found to be 
proper in particular cases; 
respect being had to the 
matter and form of the ingredients and medicine: 
so that it may be commodiously made up by the 
apothecary, and applied with ease and success by 
the patient.  
§.2. Therefore that branch of the practice of 
physic which delivers rules for the effecting this 
rational combination (§.1.), is termed the method 
of prescribing forms of medicines. 
§.3. The matter of the formula (§.1.), whe- 
ther it be the product of nature or art, is sup- 
plied from the (iλη iατoiχη) materia medica, or 
pharmaceutical stores. The form thereof is va- 
rious, being determined by the very different 
B cir-

2 INTRODUCTION.
circumstances both of the patient and ingredi- 
ents; as will hereafter more evidently appear. The 
end and design of it, is, an artful preparation and 
just administration of those means by which the 
physician endeavours to answer his indications, and 
effect a cure. 
§.4. The method of prescribing (§.2.) therefore 
comprises the very last part which a physician is 
to engage with in his profession; this being the 
point to which his skill in all the other branches 
of the science have a direct tendence: nor does a 
complete workman therein hardly ever miss 
of a happy compensation for his industry and 
care. 
§.5. From hence (§.3. and §.4.), the neces- 
sity, usefulness and advantages as well as dignity 
of this ultimate branch of the profession, are suf- 
ficiently obvious. 
§.6. The formulæ, or prescriptions, (§.1.) are 
distinguished into (1.) officinal, respecting a medi- 
cine made and kept ready for future uses in apo- 
thecaries shops; and (2.) extemporaneous, to be 
directly made up and applied for present exigen- 
cies. 'Tis chiefly the latter of these we intend re- 
handle in this treatie. 
§.7. In order to prescribe either of these for- 
mula’s (§.6.), it is supposed that the physician or 
prescriber has a previous knowledge of, 
1. The doctrine of indications; whereby he is 
instructed whether any thing is to be done, what, 
by what means, and after what manner, toge- 
ther with the time, order, &c. in which the me- 
dicines or instruments are to be used. 
2. Of the whole materia medica in all the 
three kingdoms, animal, vegetable and mine- 
ral; inasmuch as they afford the matter (§.3.) 
of the prescribed formula: but he shou'd be 
more particularly versed in those simples and 
medicines


3 INTRODUCTION.
medicines which are at hand, or proper to the 
country where he practises. And lastly, 
3. Of all the preparations in pharmacy, both 
chemical and galenical, simple and compound; 
together with the manner in which they all 
operate, and the effects they produce in the 
animal system: for by the knowledge of these 
(1.2.3.) the physician knows how to direct 
his choice of ingredients, when he prescribes 
the formula (§.1.) 
§.8. And indeed it is not a superficial, as is 
too commonly found, but a just and more exten- 
sive knowledge of the two last (§.7. n° 2. 3.), that 
is here required for this purpose. For who will 
pretend to direct the apothecary how to act, that 
is himself ignorant of the proper methods of act- 
ing, in things of that nature? How can any one 
select or make a rational choice ot materials which 
he has never seen, or scarce heard, of? What 
room has he to foresee (and consequently prevent 
the bad) effects of applications, who has never 
examined their composition and texture, nor ex- 
perienced their action on other bodies?—He 
therefore that intends for this branch (§.2.) of the 
profession will doubtless find his account in giving 
some attention to the practical part of officinal phar- 
macy; in critically examining the mechanical struc- 
ture and sensible qualities of the materia medica & 
chemica, and in observing their effects and manner 
of acting on animal bodies. 
§.9. So that from comparing what has been 
said (§ 7. and 8. with §.4.), we may naturally 
infer that there is required more time and diligence 
than is generally supposed, to qualify one for this 
business; with regard to which, we are going to 
lay down directions according to the best of our 
abilities. But a just treatment and method will 
B2 cer-

4 INTRODUCTION. 
certainly have their, force in making the acquisi- 
tion hereof the more easy. 
§.10. Supposing therefore the preliminaries 
(mentioned §.7. and §.8.), requisite for prescrib- 
ing forms rationally, to be sufficiently known; 
we shall distribute the matter of our subject
under three general heads; the first of which, 
by way of introduction to the rest, will com- 
prise the rules and cautions necessary to be 
observed before prescribing, the second, will ex- 
hibit what relates to prescriptions in general, with- 
out regarding the particular form; and the last, 
will contain the particulars of every individual 
form of medicine in use, with proper examples or 
specimens of each. 
GENERAL RULES and CAUTIONS 
to be observed before prescribing. 
§.11. A prudent physician never orders any  
thing in his prescription but what he 
has a sufficient reason for, which upon inquiry he 
is able to give; so that he does not ad at random, 
from custom or prejudice, but as the indications, 
which he has before rightly deduced and consider- 
ed, direct him. 
§.12. He is first of all therefore to determine 
rationally, whether in the present case there be 
required any thing to be done on his part. 
§.13. In consequence of which determination 
if nature herself be found strong enough, and in a 
proper disposition to throw off the disease, if the 
disorder can absolutely receive no benefit from 
medicines, if its nature or particular disposition be 
doubtful and not yet determined, or if it be fore- 
seen

5 General Rules and Cautions.
seen that a cure thereof will bring on a worse dis- 
ease; it is then both just and rational to omit pre- 
scribing, at least any thing that will much affect
the œconomy, in order to avoid oppressing the 
patient both in his body and purse. 
§.14. But to prevent the patient’s falling into 
despair from being destitute of physical help, and 
to exclude ignominious reflection on the physician 
and his profession, as seeming useless or imper- 
fect; it is often adviseable in those circumstances 
(§.13.), to order something innocent in a pre- 
scription, such as will do no harm, if they should 
prove of no great benefit. With this view, the 
physician will acquaint and familiarise himself with 
several forms consisting of simple ingredients; as 
innocent julaps, mild emulsions, easing mixtures, 
unactive powders, &c. by which specious shew of 
assistance, the patient will rest much more quiet 
and easy both in his body and mind, than if left 
destitute with a harsh prognostic. This conside- 
ration will be more particularly useful in the un- 
certain and often imaginary disorders of virgins, 
and married women, especially whilst teeming. 
§.15. If the physician finds by his indications 
that there is room to expect success from his en- 
deavours, the next step is to determine how and 
by what means that may be obtained with the 
greatest ease and expedition: both which we are 
directed to by the doctrine of indications, which 
being supposed already known, we shall here men- 
tion such only as more immediately relate to our 
present design. 
§.16. The grand scope in a cure being to re- 
cover (tuto, cito & jucunde) safely, quickly and 
pleasantly, the physician should always have his 
eye fix’d upon that view; as being the point to 
which every thing he orders shou’d have, as much 
as possible, an immediate tendency. 
§.17.

6 General Rules and Cautions. 
§.17. Hence he is directed to select the most 
efficacious and proper ingredients, and to combine 
them in a manner most suitable to answer his in- 
tentions, having a regard both to their matter and 
the form. 
§.18. His prescription should also contain no- 
thing that will be attended with hazard or danger 
in the administration: tho' in desperate and un- 
tractable cases, it is allowable to try a new method; 
supposing it to be conducted with judgment, and 
the relations forewarned of the doubtfulness of 
success in the case. 
§.19. A physician that consults his character 
and interest, will never be fond of using new and 
unexperienced methods and remedies, whilst there 
are others of long standing in practice as suitable 
for his purpose; and even those, he will order 
with the utmost circumspection: reputation being 
oftener lost and envy got in its room, by such at- 
tempts, than thro' ignorance. 
§.20. He will reject all obsolete and useless 
medicines, and such as easily change or corrupt 
by keeping, left, they prove disagreeable and hurt- 
ful to the patient, or at least obstruct his inten- 
tion: upon which account, it is proportionably 
better for medicines to be made up at the shops of 
the most celebrated apothecaries; because their 
more constant and speedy vent gives oftener occa- 
sion for a renewal or fresh making of those medi- 
cines; but skill and honesty in compounding, are, 
however, stronger recommendations on the behalf 
of the apothecary. 
§.21. Rough medicines are to be always laid 
aside, where more gentle ones will serve the turn; 
but if such are used, it must be with great circum- 
spection and prudence, especially when intended 
for weak and delicate habits of body, or very sen- 
sible and nervous parts, left the violence of 
remedy

7 General Rules and Cautions.
remedy raise an ill opinion of the physician and 
his profession. 
§.22. Medicines which require extraordinary 
skill to prepare them, shou'd be made up and ex- 
hibited with one's own hand, or else not be pre- 
scribed at all; unless we be sufficiently assured of 
the faithfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.23. Very costly ingredients shou'd be spar- 
ingly or very little used, when others more com- 
mon and cheap are as suitable for the intention; 
which caution we generally find to be observed in 
prescriptions: but some allowance must be made 
for the luxurious daintiness of the rich, who of- 
ten judge the virtue of a medicine by its price. 
§.24. Exotic or far-fetch'd remedies, are not 
to be superstitiously preferred to such as are the 
product of our own country, when the latter are 
equal to our design; for the indigenous simples and 
compounds are not so subject to adulteration and 
fraud, nor decay from the length of time and 
change ot climate, as exoticks are. 
§.25. It is often prudent to order such things 
as (by their great commonness, easy and frequent 
name, particular smell, taste and other qualities) 
are popularly known and discoverable, by titles 
the least in use, or else mix'd and veiled with 
other substances; left being discovered, the pa- 
tient might be disgusted at them, or else despise 
them as of no efficacy. 
§.26. We may be more ready and liberal in 
the use of particular medicines to such as have 
frequently undergone their operation, than to o- 
thers unaccustomed to 'em, which particularly 
holds good with regard to emetics, cathartics, 
opiates, &c. 
§.27. Such ingredients as are unpleasant, nau- 
seous or troublesome to be taken, should be avoid- 
ed as much as possible; or at least ordered in a
B4 very

8 General Rules and Cautions. 
very small quantity, and artfully disguised in 
something more agreeable: it being generally bet- 
ter to give nothing, than what nature has a parti- 
cular abhorrence to; which caution is particularly 
of consequence with respect to very nice and 
fanciful women, children, infants, and such as have 
some particular antipathy, &c. 
§.28. Hence it is often proper to be satisfied, 
that the patient has no natural disgust and aver- 
sion to the particular medicine and form pre- 
scribed; for otherwise, remedies extremely well 
adapted to the disorder, may prove not only in- 
effectual, but sometimes of pernicious consequence; 
notwithstanding that be brought about by nothing 
more than the imagination or fancy. 
§.29. The judicious physician will aim at sim- 
plicity with efficacy, and not multitude and quan- 
tity of ingredients in his prescription; studying 
rather a concise brevity, than a pompous and af- 
fected scroll: and accordingly he will select his 
materials from the vast field of the materia medica, 
not promiscuously, but as they stand approved by 
reason and experience. 
§.30. But the younger physician, whose cha- 
racter and business are not yet sufficiently establish- 
ed, will accommodate his practice, as much as is 
consistent with his intention, to the customs and 
opinions of the age, place, and people he is con- 
cerned with: thus he will the more easily pave 
the way for coming into publick esteem; but 
when confirmed, and of considerable standing in 
practice, he may then safely disregard such cir- 
cumstances. 
§.31. Natural and simple medicines are prefer- 
able to prepared and compound ones, when the 
virtues of both are equally the same. For in pre- 
paration and competition, medicines are not only 
subject to change and put on other qualities, but
their

9 General Rules and Cautions. 
their goodness must also greatly depend on the 
honesty and dexterity of the compounder; whereas 
the conduct and constancy of faithful nature greatly 
surpasses all the pretensions of art. 
§.32. Tho' the knowledge of every simple in 
the Materia medica be useful to a physician, he is 
required to have a more particular acquaintance 
with such as are in constant practice, and for that 
purpose always kept ready in the shops; left he 
should order things which are not ready at hand: 
which would be matter of little consequence, were 
it not for the prevailing forwardness of substitut- 
ing one thing for another, without consulting the 
physician. 
§.33. Besides the properties and doses of each 
simple and compound medicine, the young phy- 
sician. will remember the several synonimous appella- 
tions usually assigned to each; that he may not be 
liable to order the same thing more than once in a 
prescription, under different titles. Upon the 
same account he will also learn the several general 
appellations, which are for brevity used to signify 
several simples, as they are expressed in Morellus *. 
§.34. An acquaintance also with the several 
seasons of the year, proper to vegitable and ani- 
mal substances, should not be neglected but had in 
memory; left he order something to be fresh ga- 
thered, &c. in autumn or winter, which is to be had 
in that flourishing state only in spring' or summer. 
§.35. The different textures and consistences of 
both simple and compound medicines, must also 
come into consideration; to avoid improper forms 
and proportions in prescription. 
§.36. The mutual affinity and aptitude of the 
simples for mixture with each other, and of the 
instruments and methods by which they must be 
so
* See a list of these general appellations at the end of the Book.

10 General Rules and Cautions. 
so prepared, should be in like manner learned 
from a rational and practical pharmacy; which 
will make for the interest both of himself and pati- 
ent, and preserve him from being ridiculed by 
the apothecary’s man, when he may have occasion 
to mention them in his prescription. 
§.37. By remembering the constituent ingredi- 
ents of officinal compounds, we may avoid an im- 
proper repetition of the same simples in an ex- 
temporaneous form; but indications, sometimes, 
require such repetition. 
§.38. Nor is it proper to accumulate many in- 
gredients in one form, which differ, indeed, in 
name, but not in their nature and specific virtues; 
for that would be much the same as neglecting the 
caution at §.33. 
§.39. Such of the select ingredients as may com- 
modiously enter one form, should not, without ne- 
cessity, be distributed into more, respect being had 
to the opinions and circumstances mention’d 
§.30;  for there are some who are much displeased 
with few and short formulæ. 
§.40. On the other hand, simples which have 
no congruity with each other, so as to mix uni- 
formly, should be left out off the form, or be as- 
signed to some other, especially oily and terebin- 
thinate substances with watery, and such things, 
as upon mixture, change or destroy the properties 
of each other, &c. of which, particular mention 
will be made hereafter, well worth special ob- 
servation. 
§.41. To avoid in some measure both these 
difficulties {§.39. & 40.), we must oppose medi- 
cines not to every trifling, but the most urgent 
Symptoms; for these being the effects or conse- 
quences of the disease, that, or its immediate cause 
being removed, the symptoms must spontaneously 
vanish; besides, the train of symptoms is often so 
numerous

11 General Rules and Cautions.
numerous and opposite, as so make a distinct 
treatment of them impracticable without confusion. 
§.42. In very acute diseases, and in symptoms 
extremely urgent, it is adviseable to order remedies 
that may be made up and exhibited with the greatest 
ease and expedition; that a critical opportunity 
may not be lost through a want of the medicine, or 
a delay of the apothecary. 
§.43. If the texture of the ingredients suit 
them indifferently for several forms, we may, upon 
inquiry, reduce them to that most agreeable to 
the patient; as many have a particular liking, or 
aversion, naturally or from use, more for one form 
than another: by which means the physician and 
his profession will come more into the good opi- 
nion of the patient, as well as taking the medi- 
cine be render’d more certain and pleasant. 
§.44. On the contrary, we must not be so solli- 
citous about the palate as to forget the proper na- 
ture, danger, and symptoms of the disease; nor 
neglect the pre-disposing cause in the patient’s 
habit. Some forms are more suitable to one dis- 
ease than another. How preposterous would it be 
to order an electuary, or bolus, in a quinsy,or where 
deglutition is difficult, &c. 
§.45. Nor is the intention of a medicine as 
easily answer’d by one form as another: sudorifics 
agree best with a liquid form, absorbents with a 
dry one, and fœtid, or nauseous things, with that 
of a pill, as we shall observe more at large in 
the several histories of each particular form. 
§.46. The age and circumstances of the pati- 
ent have also their force in determining the parti- 
cular form of the medicine. Infants should not be 
fatigued with internals, when external forms will 
prove as effectual; nor should they be ever mo- 
lested with a bolus, pill, or any thing unpleasant 
and difficult to swallow.
§.47.

12 General Rules and Cautions.
§.47. The patients natural constitution, or ha- 
bit, has, in like manner, some influence in de- 
manding a variation in the particular form. The 
hot and dry require a liquid, the moist and phleg- 
matic are benefited most by a dry form; but these 
being of less consequence must give place to the 
consideration of §.43, to 47, which are of greater 
importance *. 
* The condition of the disease, being either acute 
or chronic, has also no small influence in deter- 
mining the particular form, and manner of exhi- 
bition.—In the 
(1.) Chronic, we should gradually inlarge the 
dose (per §.26.), and may more regard the pa- 
late (per §.43.) with the patients convenience 
and circumstances (per §.23. 27. 28. 29. 46. 47. 
48. 50.); always preferring pills, electuaries, 
wines, ales, &c. to a train of boles, draughts, &c. 
which appear more formidable and discouraging. 
But, the 
(2.) Acute, generally require medicines of the 
strongest efficacy, to be used often, interchange- 
ably, in different forms for the same case, and to 
be more ascertain’d in their dose; as in boles, 
powders, draughts, drops, &c. 
§.48. Medicines that are to be taken upon long 
journeys, or continually carried about in boxes for 
constant use, should consist of ingredients the least 
bulky, most effectual and durable, and reduced to 
a form the most convenient and portable. 
§.49. If a patient finds himself better after a 
prescription, he should continue in the use of it 'till 
the physician finds some variation required; nor 
is it commendable to make a change therein with- 
out an evident and weighty reason. 
§.50. It is, however, allowable and proper, in 
hereditary, or habitual and very chronical distem- 
pers,

13 General Rules and Cautions. 
pers, to vary both the ingredients and form, tho'
the face of symptoms and their indications re- 
main the same: whereby is shewn the skill of the 
physician and the copiousness of his art, and that 
the patient may not be tired out with one form, 
nor particular medicines become habitual and use- 
less to him. 
§.51. When no benefit arises from the use of a 
medicine, rather than persist therein, it shou'd be 
changed, either wholly or in part, at the discretion 
of the physician: but, if noxious, it must be 
speedily and altogether suppressed; for, by the ju- 
vantia & ledentia, or what helps and hurts, we 
are directed principally how to act. 
§.52. Lastly, as a prudent physician never pre- 
scribes but with great attention and circumspection 
of mind, so he should never lay the formula out of 
his hand ’till he has first revised it; that he may 
be sure every thing is right, distinct and clear; 
for it being the too general lot of prescriptions 
to be made up by the hands of journeymen 
and apprentices, who are often both ignorant 
and careless, a flip of the pen, or an obscurity, 
might chance to be of fatal consequence to the pa- 
tient. 
Of the GENERAL Circumstances of pre- 
scriptions, exclusive of the particular form of 
a medicine. 
§.53. WE come now to consider the formula, 
or prescription (§.1.) in general, 
as agreeing with, or common to, all forms with- 
out distinction; and this we shall do (1.) abstractly, 
with respect to the bill itself, and then (2.) in com-
position, 

14 Of Forms in general.
position, with respect to the circumstances of its 
constituent parts. 
§,54. With regard to the first (§.53.), we un- 
derstand every thing that does not immediately 
affect or concern the medicine it self; but serve ei- 
ther for ornament, brevity, or perspecuity in the 
way of compounding and applying it. 
§.55. The first (I.) that occurs among these 
(§.54.) is an arbitrary and superstitious inscrip- 
tion, appearing in the front of the bill, and con- 
timating in some particular characters or letters in- 
timating the pious wish and inclination of the pre-
scriber: as, †. C. D. JD. JJ. α & ω *; which 
may be, and are, generally omitted without 
neglecting any thing serviceable to the patient. 
§.56. The next (II.) that appears, at the head 
of the prescription, is that constantly used, abbre- 
viated word (Rec. or ꝶ.)  † Recipe; importing that 
the apothecary is to take something, afterwards 
mentioned. 
§.57. Our business is now to examine the (III.) 
order, or series, in which the things to be thus 
(§.56.) taken are wrote. This we shall perceive 
upon enquiry to vary with every particular form of 
medicine; nor even there, shall we find one con- 
stant and uniform method observ'd; as will be 
more apparent in the particular histories of each. 
We may, however, observe in the general, 
1. That a distinct line shou'd be made of every 
single ingredient; not to obsure them, by 
writing one continuous or in the same direct- 
ion with the other. 
2. That
* This seems to smell very strong of a Romish or superstitious 
priest-craft; but as such hands are seldom daubed with physic a- 
mong us, we are intirely strangers to things of this nature. 
† When the back part of the ꝶ is left out, it makes another 
character (♃) of the same import but more frequent use, as being 
less known. 

15 Of Forms in general.
2. That ingredients of the same kind should 
be placed next to each other; roots with roots. 
waters with waters, &c. 
3. Not to be wanting in the least point of 
order, we should begin and range things, that 
differ from each other in substance, according 
to their quantities; beginning with the largest 
and ending with the smallest, or the reverse. 
4. Next to that consideration (n° 3.), the 
basis, or main ingredients (§.75.) shou'd hold 
the first place; then, the assistants (§.78.); af- 
ter them, the correcters (§.83.); and lastly, the 
vehicle (§.86.), or what serves to make them up. 
5. Such things as have their quantity undeter- 
min'd, or dependant on the consistence and bulk 
of the rest, shou'd come generally in the last 
place of a prescription. 
Not but there are several exceptions from these 
rules, which will be taken notice of in the ensuing 
parts of this treatise, and will be therefore worth 
the readers observation. 
§.58. For the (IV.) method of writing, or or- 
dering these several ingredients, and their quanti- 
ties; the more distinct and intelligible they are set 
down, the more commendable: accordingly 
1. The physician shou'd use himself to write 
plain and distinct; not to neglect and hurry over 
his letters with a careless pen. 
2. He shou'd keep up to custom and orthogra- 
phy, to avoid the sneering of an apothecary or 
his man. 
3. An irregular, or confused method of wri- 
ting, shou'd be avoided as much as possible; 
and to make things appear with more evidence 
and method, ingredients of the same kind shou'd 
be placed next to each other {per §.57. n° 2.):  
the


16 Of Forms in general.
the general appellation common to each similar 
ingredient shou’d be always placed first, and 
need not be mentioned more than once; as the 
proper name of each shou’d be placed directly 
under and even with the first, in the method of 
§.57. n° 1. The same is also to be observed, 
with respect to several ingredients following 
each other that are to enter a form in the same 
quantity, i, e. not to write the particular mark 
of quantity to each singly, but to assign only 
one character of quantity to them all; before 
which should be inserted the technical word 
ana or aa, which is used to denote that the quan- 
tity to be taken of the several preceeding ingre- 
dients must be equal or alike, whether it be in 
number, weight or measure.—There are ma- 
ny such abbreviations in use, which will be met 
with in the ensuing formulæ, and ought not to 
be neglected (if it were safe) because universally 
received and establish'd by long custom. 
4. Too much brevity in writing is still of a 
worse consequence; especially when the ingre- 
dients and their quantities are order’d, not by 
common letters, but odd characters or figures, not 
constantly used, and often falsely or imperfectly 
made *: by which means it too frequently hap- 
pens that the apothecary is brought into a mis- 
take, either of the ingredient or quantity, to the
great 
* These odd characters, of which the German (and especially 
the chemical) physicians were very fond, are extremely seldom, if 
ever, used in prescriptions among us; and therefore the caution 
seems to be directed chiefly to that quarter. But as they frequently 
occur in writers (especially foreigners) in physic, pharmacy and 
chemistry; and as they may be sometimes used with propriety in a 
prescription {per §.25.); it will be proper for the young physician 
to acquaint himself with the chief of them, agreeable to cur au- 
thors advice in the end of this paragraph: we have therefore fur- 
nished our reader with a list and explanation of the most usual of 
these characters at the end of the book; it being too long to be in- 
serted here. 

17 Of Forms in general. 
great danger of the patient. So that it is more 
prudent to intirely relinquish such, or else to use 
those only which are the most distinct and com- 
mon, and the least ambiguous; and then, only 
when {per §.25.) we have some particular rea- 
son for concealing the ingredients of the formula. 
The characters; or weight, shou’d be express’d 
with the greatest exactness, by such as love to 
use them.—And tho' the first sort of cha- 
racters are improper to enter prescriptions in 
writing, 'tis yet fit they shou’d be known; as 
they frequently occur in the works of physi- 
cians. 
5. The ingredients of a prescription shou’d be 
wrote for by those names under which they are 
kept and known in the shops; notwithstand- 
ing they shou’d be barbarous or improper: by 
which means the compounder will be under no 
difficulty, nor fall into any mistake. But if for 
concealment (per §.25.) an uncommon term be 
used, the apothecary shou’d have, if it be ne- 
cessary, a speedy and private intelligence thereof. 
6. The WEIGHTS used at present in the shops 
of apothecaries, are 
℔ the physical pound  
℥ an ounce  
ʒ a dram 
℈ a scruple
Gr. a grain
containing 
℥ xij.
ʒ viij.
℈ iij.
gr. xx.
ß ij.
A grain is seldom divided further than into two 
equal parts, whose whole amount is supposed 
to be equal to a grain of white pepper or a 
middling barley-corn: but it is much the best 
to use a grain of a determinate or standing 
weight, like that of the Goldsmiths; without 
which, this and all larger weights thence arising, 
as from unity, wou’d be always varying and un- 
certain, as Fernelius observes. 
C 7.

18 Of Forms in general. 
7. The physical measures now in use, are such 
as belong either to dry or liquid ingredients: 
and are 
(1.) Dry; as the 
Fasc. Fasciculus, or a small armfull, being as 
much as can be easily grasped by the arm bended 
together, and is equal to twelve handfuls. 
M. Manipulus, or handfull, which is as 
much as can be taken up by the whole hand at 
once, and may be compared to four pugills, 
or half an ounce. 
Pug. Pugillus, comprehends as much as can 
be contained between the thumb and two first 
fingers, and answers to about the whole or half 
of a dram. 
N°. Numero, in number, equal or unequal. 
(2.) Liquid; comprehending, besides the 
common trading measures, also the Cyath. 
Cyathum, which holds about an ounce and an 
half. 
Cochl. Coohlearium, reckon’d to be about 
half an ounce. 
Gutt. Gutta, or a Drop, which being the least 
of liquid measures, is substituted in room of a 
grain among weights, and may, like that, be 
commodiously subdivided into two (or more) 
equal parts, being first imbibed by a bit of su- 
gar, to be afterwards pulverised and divided by 
weight: but the quantity under this measure 
varies with the specific gravity and degree of 
cohesion in the liquid to be so measured; and, 
also the quantity of surface in contact with 
it, or the largeness of the bottle’s neck from 
whence it is to be dropp’d; which first also 
holds good with respect to the Cyathum and 
Cochlearium.
8.

19 Of Forms in general.
8. With regard to these medical divisions of 
quantity (n° 6. and 7.), we may observe 
(1.) That every thing, not only soft and 
solid but also liquid, whose quantity is requi- 
red to be determined with accuracy and ex- 
actness, shou’d be portion'd out by weight 
only.
(2.) The dry measures (n°. 7.) are to be 
used only for such things as are very bulky, 
and of no strength; as herbs, leaves, flowers, 
feeds, &c. The larger kind of seeds, bulbous 
roots, the whites and yolks of eggs, &c. are
usually prescribed by number. 
(3.) The liquid measures (n°. 7.) shou’d be 
seldom used in prescriptions, unless to signify 
the particular dose; by reason of their uncer- 
tainty, the measures differing with particular 
liquors and countries: but the use of weights 
is more constant and certain; and if we have, 
notwithstanding, a fancy for the use of mea- 
sures, we shou’d at least know the several 
weights of different liquors which they can con- 
tain. Strong liquids may be also portion’d 
out with more exactness by drams, scruples and 
grains, than by drops. 
(4.) Number, in prescribing ingredients, 
with their weights and measures, is to be ex- 
pressed by characters not barbarous (as 1, 2, 3, 
&c.) but Roman (as j, ij, iij, iv, &c.) as being 
more distinct and evident. 
(5.) All weights and measures are usually 
subdivided into halves, and their half part is 
then signified by the character ß.
(6.) The larger weights and measures are 
to be express’d by the characters proper to 
their whole, or half quantities; and not by 
the number of lesser weights or measures they 
contain.
C2 (7.)

20 Of Forms in general.
(7.) Sometimes the weight or measure of an 
ingredient is left to be determined at discre- 
tion by the apothecary, and is only wrote 
(q. s.) quantum sufficit, or a sufficient quantity: 
which might be well enough bore with, had 
the apothecary any constant rule to go by, or 
were the quantity and consistence of a me- 
dicine to be always the same; but when it be- 
comes on this account very uncertain, it is ad- 
viseabie for the physician to determine the quan- 
tity, as may be seen under the particular forms 
hereafter. 
(8.) Among the ancients, there were many 
other weights and measures than these (n° 7, 
8.) infrequent use; which tho' now obsolete 
and unpractised, are yet necessary to be known 
by a physician that intends to be conversant with 
their writings, and may be therefore learned 
from Fernelius and others *. 
§.59. The (V.) fifth part of a formula, or bill, 
is the SUBSCRIPTION, directing the apothecary 
in what form the physician wou’d have the ingre- 
dients made up, the manner in which they are 
to be so prepared, and the method in which they 
are to be applied, or exhibited by him to the pati- 
ent. With regard to which, 
1. If a prescription contains but one ingredi- 
ent, which requires no extemporaneous prepa- 
ration, it may be subscribed only (F.) Fiat, 
adding the name of the form, v. g. pulvis, bo- 
lus, &c. 
2.
* A list and explanation of the several weights and measures 
used by the ancient Greek, Roman, and Arabian physicians (as 
taken from Fernelius, who is for that end recommeded by our au- 
thor,) being rather too large to he conveniently inserted in this 
place, the reader will meet with that, and some others, at the 
end of the book. 

21 Of Forms in general.
2. But if it consists of several, to be only 
mix’d together without other preparation; 
there must be first inserted (M.) misce, and af- 
terwards (F.) fiat, and lastly the name of the 
form; as e.g. M. F. Bolus. But in liquid mix- 
tures it is often sufficient to write M. only; tho' 
it is sometimes requisite to give a particular ad- 
monition concerning the uniformity or exact- 
ness of the mixture. 
3. If there shou’d be required some other 
preparation besides mixture, as cutting, brui- 
ting, digesting, boiling, &c. these are also to 
be inserted either before or after M. as shall seem 
most proper. 
4. It is then requisite to add (if necessary) the 
number of doses into which the medicine is to 
be distributed: where it is also frequently pro- 
per to admonish, the apothecary to be very ex- 
act in making every dose equal and alike; be- 
cause they often, for expedition, divide a medi- 
cine by guess or the eye. 
5. Mention is to be sometimes made of the 
receptacle into which the medicine is to be put, 
and of the method of keeping, or close stop- 
ping the same; when they contain things very 
volatile, or soon melting in the air, as will be 
hereafter observed in particular forms. 
6. Lastly, the instrument whereby, and the 
particular part or the body to which, the me- 
dicine is to be applied, are required to be 
sometimes mention'd, when it appertains to the 
apothecary; as will be hereafter observed in 
the history of plasters, lambatives, glysters, 
&c. 
7. In all these particulars (no 1. to 6.), it is 
best for the physician to be full, and distinct or 
clear, and to use the terms of art, however bar- 
C3 barous:


22 Of Forms in general.
barous; left an error be committed thro' his 
own fault, or the apothecary shou’d be put to a 
nonplus. 
§.60. The (VI.) last general part of a pre- 
scription or formula, is the SUPERSCRIPTION †, 
of the medicine or direction to the patient; which 
is often (tho' not always) very necessary, inasmuch 
as it declares the form of the prescribed medicine, 
its virtue, dose, method and time of administration, 
the proper vehicle, regimen, &c. as far as they 
regard the sick patient and his attendants: which 
is to be carried on in the following order, 
1. Beneath the Subscription (§.59. n° 1, to 
6.), at a distance from the line, write the capi- 
tal letter S. i. e. signetur, let it be intitled, &c. 
2. If there be several medicines of the same 
form and appearance prescribed together for one 
patient; they shou’d be marked with the capital 
letters A, B, C, &c. or numbers, 1, 2, 3, &c. at 
the head or in the margin of each formula that 
they may be distinguish’d from each other; and 
then these distinguishing marks are to be inserted 
after the letter S. in each Superscription or di- 
rection: e.g. (S. lit. A, vel n°. 1.). But this is 
unnecessary where there is but one formula pre- 
scribed, or where there is several, but easily di- 
stinguishable from each other. 
3. There must be then annex’d the title of the 
medicine, taken from its form and virtue, e.g. 
potio purgans, a purging draught, &c. 
4. Next in order, the dose, way of taking, 
the time when, the vehicle and the regimen; 
and
† Our author calls it signatura, signment. I suppose we need 
not inform our reader that this part of a prescription is almost uni- 
versally left out by our physicians; who judge it most convenient to 
give these orders by word of mouth to the patient or his attendants, 
or leave it to the discretion of the apothecary. 

23 Of Forms in general.
and if any thing else is to be observed, it shou’d 
be mentioned in its proper place. 
5. Since this direction (n°. 1. to 4.) contains 
the rules to be observed by the patient in taking 
or applying the remedy; it shou’d be either cut 
off from the formula or prescription for him to 
keep, or else (which is the common practice) it 
shou’d be translated and wrote fair by the apo- 
thecary, on every label that is affix’d to the re- 
ceptacle of the medicine, to be transmitted there- 
with to the patient. 
6. The style of the direction shou’d be there- 
fore agreeable with the age and country wherein 
it is wrote, being concise and plain, or very in- 
telligible. 
7. In naming the medicine we shou’d avoid 
the oftentatious or quackish titles used by pre- 
tenders, nor shou’d we ever inhanse or give it 
an hyperbolical epithet; as incomparable, golden, 
grand, &c. For tho’ these may take with the 
vulgar and illiterate, it will but expose the pre- 
scriber to laughter and ridicule, among the more 
intelligible part of mankind. 
8. Care is to be also taken to hide or omit the 
names of such diseases as are indecent or impro- 
per to be mention’d in the directions; as the 
lues venerea, disorders of the menses, sterility, 
impotency, &c. For such shou’d be either 
wholly neglected, or at least signified by terms 
the least known: as exciters of the menses may 
be call’d aperients; antivenerials, purifiers of 
the blood; exciters of Venus, strengtheners, &c. 
And what relates to the method of taking, &c. 
shou’d be delivered to the patient, if possible, 
by word of mouth. 
9. The dose of the medicine, when left to 
the patient or his attendants, shou’d be ordered 
by quantities the most commonly known and 
C4 easy

24 Of Forms in general. 
easy to determine; as by large or tea spoons full, 
the size of nuts, drops, &c. But if it be of 
consequence to have the dose determined to ex- 
actness; the distribution and exhibition thereof, 
may be referr’d to the apothecary. 
10. The method and time of administring the 
remedy, depending upon the particular nature 
of the disease, the medicine itself, and many 
other circumstances; shou’d be in the general di- 
rected so as to suit best with the physician’s in- 
tention, and the patient’s convenience: neg- 
lecting the scrupulous and superstitious observa- 
tion of times and seasons deduced from astrolo- 
gy, as both useless and unbecoming the sagacity 
of our age. 
11. If there be any occasion for a vehicle to 
take it in, we shou’d endeavour to chuse one, 
that besides pleasing the palate, falls in with the 
intention of the medicine itself. The materials 
for vehicles are usually taken from things that 
are readiest at hand, grateful or pleasant to the 
patient, or become so by common and frequent 
use: as ale, wine, broth, tea, coffee, juleps, 
wafers, marmalade, roasted apple, or the like. 
12. A proper regimen, before, in, and after 
the operation of the medicine, is often abso- 
lutely necessary to be observed; for without this, 
the action of the remedy wou’d be frequently, 
either too much increased, diminish’d, chang’d, 
or wholly destroyed. But to determine what re- 
gimen will be most proper, the doctrine of in- 
dications must be call’d into consideration. 
§.61. We have been hitherto treating of a for- 
mula in general, exclusive of its particular contents; 
we come now to examine its internal composition, 
the number of its constituent parts, their nature, 
quantity, mutual affinity, proportion and the like. 
§.62.

25 Of Forms in general. 
§.62. The formula, or prescript (§.1. &
§.6.) consists either of (1.) only one officinal sim- 
ple or compound preparation; or else (2.) of se- 
veral such properly combined together: which 
first, we shall call a simple formula; but the last, a 
compound one. 
§.63. A simple formula (§.62.), as it con- 
sists of but one officinal preparation selected out of 
many, does scarce require any other restriction or 
limitation than that of its quantity. 
§.64. Its quantity then, is twofold: (1.) so 
much as is order’d by the physician to be made up 
and sent to the patient by the apothecary at one 
time; or (2.) such a quantity of the first as is to 
be applied or administred to the sick patient at 
once. The first, we shall call tht general quantity; 
the latter, the particular one, or dose: but as the 
quantity of the first depends upon the number of 
the last, we shall consider that before the former. 
§.65. The dose of a medicine comes under two 
considerations; viz. that of continued quantity, and 
that of number. 
§.66. The bulk or weight of a dose, is deter- 
mined by the physicians due consideration of the 
condition and circumstances of both the patient and 
the medicine: without which, a well chosen re- 
medy, by exceeding or falling short of its just 
quantity, may prove either hurtful or at least in- 
effectual. To prevent this, we must: therefore at- 
tend 
1. To the nature of the disease, its seat, stage, 
force or degree of strength, causes, symptoms, 
&c. that our force may be proportion’d to the 
obstacle to be removed. For as diseases that are 
violent, acute or deep-rooted, are scarce to be 
overcome but by large doses; so, if we shou’d 
overload a slight case, the remedy itself wou’d 
prove another disease. 
2.

26 Of Forms in general.
2. We must regard the strength; depending 
on that of the fibre, or the blood's motion, and 
functions of the body: that our assistant means 
may be adiquate the defect, and not prove a bur- 
then instead of a helping hand. So that large 
doses will be found to suit strong bodies; whereas 
the weak can only bear small ones. But we must 
carefully distinguish strength that is latent and 
oppress'd, from that which is really absent and 
exhausted. 
3. We must have respect to the age: with re- 
gard to which, the following general rules may 
be of service for internal medicines. 
Suppose a dose proper for a man of a consistent 
age (i. e.) about 30, or when he has done growing) 
to be 
as — 1, or ʒj.
a dose for one of 14 to 21, will be 2/3, or ℈ij.
— 7 to 14,—1/2 or ʒß. 
— 4 to 7,—1/3 or ℈j. 
— 4—1/4 or gr. xv. 
— 3—1/6 or  ℈ß. 
— 2—1/8, or gr.viij.
— 1—1/12, or gr.v.  
Old people being observed to be twice children 
in their strength and diet, as such they shou'd be 
also consider'd in this respect of dose; so that we 
may compare
an old man of 60, to a young man of 21 years. 
— 7O,—14 
— 80,—7 
and so with the rest. But it cannot be supposed that 
these rules hold always so, as not to admit of many
exceptions;

27 Of Forms in general.
exceptions for, that there must be frequently a 
variation, will appear evidently to all who consi- 
der the diversity of strength in people of the same 
age. So that a true estimate of the dose, is hardly 
deducible from the age alone. 
4. The size of the body, in people of the 
same age, does also frequently require a variation 
in the dose; tho' we shall find, their strength is 
not always proportionable to their size. 
5. The temperature has also some influence 
upon the quantity of a dose. The biliose and 
melancholly can easily dispense with a larger 
mass of cooling, moistening and relaxing me- 
dicines, than their opposite temperatures; and 
so (vice versa) on the contrary side. 
6. The difference of sex has also its force. 
Women, who are generally of a more delicate 
and weak constitution than men, require a pro- 
portionable diminution of the dose. But such as 
are very nice and fanciful, will sometimes throw 
up the dose notwithstanding it was proportion’d 
to their strength. For such, it is therefore ad- 
visable to let the quantity be as small as possible; 
or else to subdivide a larger dose into several 
smaller parcels. 
7. The particular disposition, whether morbid, 
natural, constant, periodical, from the make or 
habit of body, sex, proceeding diseases, &c. 
with the complication of the original disease, 
may have each their concern in determining the 
particular dose as well as the kind of a medi- 
cine. 
To this head belong a regard to the menses, 
breeding, lying-in, suckling, hysteric fits in wo- 
men, and the hippo in men; with obesity, tender- 
ness, a weakness in some particular organ, a defor- 
mity in the back or break, the stone, an aptness to  
vomit,

28 Of Forms in general.
vomit, with abundance of the like particular indif- 
positions. 
8. To be still more particular, it is sometimes 
very necessary to have a regard to the individual 
constitution, idiosyncrasia, or particular inclina- 
tion of every patient, as they stand affected to 
this or that class of medicines, or some one par- 
ticular remedy. These being generally inexpli- 
cable, are to be known only by experience, or 
from the patient's relation: thus some are pur- 
ged even by the smell of a cathartic; while 
others are scarce affected by double the usual 
quantity taken inwardly for a dose. 
9. Use or custom has also its force here; for 
a large dose of a medicine will produce less ef- 
fect upon one used to the same, than a small 
dose upon one who is a stranger thereto; which 
is very obvious in the use of narcotics and to- 
bacco. 
10. Nor is the employ or course of life to be 
here altogether neglected; for as the several de- 
grees of health and sickness are particularly in- 
fluenced thereby so it also frequently brings the 
body into particular habits, which either in- 
crease or diminish the action of certain medicines. 
11. The particular nation or people is to be 
also consider'd with regard to the dose; as they 
have often something in that respect singular and 
proper to themselves. Thus, the Saxons and 
Westphalians *, are hard to work upon. The 
Siamese use an arsenical instead of an antimonial 
cup; and the Indians require a dose of ipecacu- 
anha twenty times as large as the Europeans, to 
make them vomit †. 
12.
* Wedelii de compos. medic. tab. II. 
† Histoire de l'academ royale, 1703. 

29 Of Forms in general. 
12. A regard to the season of the year is also 
sometimes of consequence: as the sultry dog- 
days, the hard frost, or the temperate air, dis- 
pose the body to be more or less affected by 
one and the same dose. 
13. The known strength and virtues of the 
remedy also, when consider’d with their relation 
to the several preceeding heads, still greatly in- 
crease the variation of the dose. Thence, a phy- 
sician that intends to prescribe forms rationally, 
will make himself exactly acquainted with the 
several quantities of medicines found by experi- 
ence, and established by use to be proper for one 
dose: with the several degrees of that dose, as 
being small, mean or large, with respect to the 
preceeding considerations; more especially he 
will keep in memory those of the capital and 
most efficacious medicines. But if he would 
bring any simple into use which has not been yet 
sufficiently experienced, being mindful of the 
rule §.19. he will begin first with the least quan- 
tity, afterwards judiciously inlarging the dose, 
as he is assured of the preceeding unactivity, or 
usefulness of the medicine. 
14. Sometimes the high price of medicines, 
which are otherwise of no great efficacy, restrains 
the dose to a small compass; witness, prepared 
pearl, gems, oriental and porcupine bezoar, &c. 
15. The great bulkeyness of the matter, con- 
taining but a due quantity of medicinal parti- 
cles, obliges the dose to be sometimes less than 
is otherwise requisite; left the load of inactive 
matter shou’d excite a nausea: as is often the 
case in herbs, barks, woods, flowers, &c. 
16. The unpleasantness of a medicine, whether 
in taste, smell, or other qualities, frequently per- 
swades the physician to prescribe them in a smal- 
ler dose than the other: as asa fœt. castor. olea, 
&c. agreeable to §.27.
17.

30 Of Forms in general. 
17. The particular form of the medicine itself, 
often restrains the dose to a determinate quantum. 
For many of the forms have certain limits as to 
quantity, which they cannot exceed without the 
greatest necessity; as will hereafter appear under 
each. 
18. Lastly, the various external or internal 
use of a remedy, and its application to different 
parts of the body, are here, also, to be consi- 
dered as having some influence in determining 
the quantity of a dose. Very wide is the diffe- 
rence between the dose of a cathartic when it is 
to be given by the mouth, and when by way of 
glyster, &c. 
Nota. The limits of our present design forbid 
me to say more, or to pursue the theme of dose in 
a more special manner. The copiousness and un- 
certainty of the subject, being scarce determinable 
even by general bounds, prevailed with me not to 
insert (as is usual) a table exhibiting the proper dose 
of every single remedy. These are liable to so many 
exceptions, that they cannot be rationally ascer- 
tain’d to particular cases, without the several pro- 
ceeding conditions (§.66. n°. 1 to 18.) are first li- 
mited and consider’d. Besides, we have supposed 
our reader (per §.7.) previously acquainted with the 
doctrine of indications, and the materia medica, 
both simple and compound; which teaches their 
general doses as well as virtues: and then, what 
will be said of each form in particular, will also 
reflect much light upon this head. 
§.67. The number of doses (§.65.) is either 
one, or more, being often arbitrary and undeter- 
mined; but it may be generally limited by parti- 
cular consideration; among which, the following 
may be look’d upon as general rules. 
1.

31 Of Forms in general. 
1. If one dose will answer the physicians in- 
tention; what need of more? 
2. If the medicine be in itself unpleasant, if 
the patient has an aversion or dislike to the taking 
of it, or if the application or taking be difficult 
and troublesome; these call for the exhibition of 
as few doses as possible. 
3. Medicines, which by keeping, easily fer- 
ment and corrupt, grow moist and liquid, or too 
dry, or else exhale and lose their finest parts, 
shou’d, upon those accounts, be prescribed in 
but few doses at a time. The different state 
of the atmosphere, as to heat, moisture, and 
other qualities, has also its share in limiting the 
quantity and number of doses of such remedies; 
as those states of the air may more or less pro- 
mote such inconveniences or defects of particu- 
lar medicines. 
4. If the adequate dose of a prescribed medi- 
cine is of a larger bulk than can be conveniently 
swallow’d at once, if nothing contradicts, it may 
be properly divided into many lesser doses, to be 
taken at small intervals; to prevent it from ex- 
citing a nausea or vomiting in the patient; 
which is a consideration that takes place princi- 
pally and frequently in emetics and strong ca- 
thartics. 
5. If you order potent remedies for a patient 
whose case, constitution, and particular condi- 
tion is not yet thoroughly known; it is better 
for the just dose to be given in little separate por- 
tions at several times, that we may timely break 
off its use upon the least appearance of its im- 
propriety. The same holds good also with re- 
gard to the use of new and less experienced re- 
medies (agreeable to §.66. n°. 13.) 
6. If the obscurity, or instability, of the par- 
ticular morbid indisposition renders the effect of 
the

32 Of Forms in general.
the medicine uncertain; if we are obliged to 
prescribe something (by reason of §.14.), it 
should be but in small and few doses: by which 
means, less injury can happen to the patient, and 
it may be the more easily changed for some other 
medicine, when that may be required. 
7. When the preparation of a medicine is dif- 
ficult and a long while in making up, unless 
something forbid, it shou’d be prescribed in 
a larger quantity or more doses; to spare the 
time and pains of the apothecary, whose hands 
are sometimes too full. 
8. Hence also, remedies which are difficultly 
convey’d, and to parts remote from apotheca- 
ries, shou’d be {cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
transmitted in larger quantities or more doses, 
9. On the other hand, if the patient lives near 
his physician, so as to be often visited by him, 
the number of doses order’d at one time shou’d be 
few; left the physician’s coming often without 
prescribing shou’d be thought much of, or look’d 
upon as dilatory. 
10. When the same medicine is required to be 
used for a long time together ; there shou’d be 
as many doses order’d at once as may be conve- 
nient. For tho’ scantiness of a medicine for mo- 
ney, is a persuasive for the patient to take it 
when bought; it will hardly encourage him to 
be constantly purchasing, especially if it be disa- 
greeable at the same time. 
11. If the exhibition of the medicine is to 
be repeated at short intervals of time, the doses 
must be on that account the more numerous; to 
prevent the trouble of repeating the prescription 
and composition. 
12. Lastly, as the patient may like a variety, 
and the different face of the symptoms require a 
change (per §.50.), both in the form and me-
dicine,

33 Of Form in general.
medicine, especially in chronical cases; it may 
be on those accounts adviseable to order the me- 
dicine in a small quantity: that the form and 
remedy may be changed the oftener, and at a 
less expence to the patient. 
§.68. The general quantity (§.64.) of any form 
fit to be prescribed for the patient at one time, 
rnay be easily estimated from a previous determi- 
nation of the number or size of the proper dose, 
(per §.66. 67.): for, if the bulk or weight of a 
dose be multiplied by the number you would give, 
the product will be the whole quantity to be or- 
der’d for the patient in one prescription. Whence 
it follows, 
1. That the general quantity will be equal to 
the special or particular one (§.64.), if only 
one dose be prescribed for at one time. 
2. But if we design the prescription should 
contain more doses than one, the least general 
quantity that can be order'd will be doubly 
equal to the particular one, or dose. 
3. If the dose of a form is to be exactly de- 
termin’d by weight, the general quantity should 
be proportioned so, as that it may be distribu- 
ted into proper and exact doses, without leaving 
any remainder. But this rule is not constantly 
and every where observ’d; especially if the pre- 
scription contains many doses of a form. 
§.69. The physician should also be mindful of 
the particular consistence and texture of his ingre- 
dient, when he prescribes a simple formula; that 
it may have a natural fitness to be reduced into the 
form he desires. 
§.70. Lastly, when his prescription orders but 
one ingredient, he should be careful that it be not 
over strong, nauseous to the smell or taste, nor  
D diffi-


34 Of Forms in general.
difficult to swallow, &c. (per §.27.); because a
simple formula does not admit of that correction 
and mixture which are necessary to conceal those 
disagreeable qualities; unless he will compliment 
the patient, by ordering the medicine to be taken 
in some proper and pleasant vehicle. 
§.71. We have been hitherto considering a 
simple formula: our next business is to treat of the 
compound one (§.62.); which consisting of several 
ingredients, requires greater circumspection and 
skill in its prescription and composition. 
§.72. There seems, at the first view indeed, to 
be little or seldom occasion for extemporaneous 
composition since we are furnished with such a 
number of handing officinal compounds (per §.31. 
and 37.): but the frequent and great necessity we 
are under of forming the officinals into extempo- 
raneous compositions, is sufficiently apparent from 
the following. For, 
1. The officinal simples and compounds are 
frequently not well adapted to the particular cir- 
cumstances of the patient and his disease. Their 
dose is frequently too bulky for their strength, 
their composition unjust or inaccurate, and their 
textures or virtues changed or spoiled by long 
keeping, &c. which considerations are often e- 
nough to dissuade one from the use of officinal 
compounds, tho’ they were directly suitable for 
the intention. 
2. When the virtues and strength of an offi- 
cinal medicine are too weak, and not equal to 
the disease we would remove we are then of- 
ten obliged to the addition of others, more po- 
tent, in an extemporaneous composition. 
3. If its action be too violent, or attended 
with some ill consequence; we are then often 
obliged to moderate and correct it by extempo- 
raneous composition. 
4.

35 Of Forms in general.
4. We have frequently several different in- 
tentions to answer at the same time, which can- 
not be done by one officinal simple or com- 
pound: while the natural disposition of the se- 
veral ingredients indicated, to make a uniform 
mixture, requires them to be reduced into one 
form (per §.39.) 
5. This composition is sometimes required 
also from the situation, sensibility, and other 
circumstances of the Part to which the medicine 
is to be applied or conveyed. 
6. The constituent ingredients suited to each 
indication do also require to be combined in a 
form, for the reasons (§.43. to §.50.) which 
determine the particular form, they being of 
themselves very unsuitable. 
7. Composition sometimes serves to conceal a 
necessary remedy (per §.25.) 
8. It is often requisite, in order to change or 
correct some disagreeable smell, taste or colour, 
in an effectual remedy. 
9. Lastly, the vile and received custom of 
crouding, without necessity, more ingredients 
than are required in an officinal composition, 
often obliges the physician to make a new form: 
tho’ prudence sometimes bids the physician, 
especially a junior, (per §.30.) to pay obedi- 
ence to inch old and venerable jumbles. 
§.73. In the compound formula (§.71.) we 
are to consider (1.) its component parts, their num- 
ber, use and proportion: (2.) its quantity (§.64.) 
general, to be made up at once. and particular, to 
be taken at once. (3.) And lastly, its qualities, 
as arising from composition or mixture, 
§.74. The constituent parts are four in num- 
ber: (1.) the basis or main ingredients; (2.) the 
adjuvant, or what promotes the action of the for- 
D2 mer;

36 Of Forms in general. 
mer; (3.) the corrigens, Or correcter of something 
improper therein; (4.) and lastly, the constituens, 
or what serves to inlarge, mix and make up the 
whole. If there be any dirigens, which some 
make a fifth Part, it may be properly taken in 
under the adjuvans, 
§.75. The BASIS is the principal part in the 
composition, calculated against the immediate cause 
and chief symptoms of the disease, being that by 
which the physician endeavours chiefly to answer 
his indications. This is required to be present in 
every form, even the simple one, (§.63.) where 
it often makes the whole formula: being sometimes 
sufficient of itself alone, without tiny other addi- 
tion; but it is frequently mixed with other things, 
suitable to make it act with safety, ease and expe- 
dition, as it ought. 
§.76. The basis is, with respect to its virtue, 
either simple or compound. A simple basis is what 
corresponds to only one indication; whereas the 
compound one serves several intentions at the same 
time. Each of these are again subdivisible into 
simple and compound, with respect to their matter; 
according as they are made up of one or more in- 
gradients. 
§.77. But which of these kinds of basis (§.76.) 
is most suitable for the prescription, may be con-
cluded from the following considerations or rules, 
1. What may be well effected by a simple 
basis need not be attempted by a compound 
one: so that if only one indication is to be an- 
swered, it may be done by a basis which is 
simple both in its virtue and matter or ingre- 
dients: when the intentions are serveral, the ba- 
sis may be simple and compound in its virtues 
or properties; both which, when sufficient, are 
preferable to the more complex basis. 
2.

37 Of Forms in general. 
2. But if a combination of several simples 
one basis seems to promise more efficacy, we 
shall do well to comply with it. 
3. But then we must be careful not to con- 
fuse the mixture, by inserting things together 
which have no congruity or affinity to each 
other, both in their consistence and virtues: as 
we have in some measure already hinted, (§.29, 
30, 31, 36, 40, 41.) and shall observe more 
largely hereafter. 
§.78. The ADJUVANS (§.74.) is that part of 
a formula or extemporaneous composition which 
promotes and assists the action of the basis (§.75.) 
when that alone is not every way adequate to each 
of our intentions. So that the presence of this 
part is not absolutely necessary in all, but in only 
some prescriptions and compositions. 
§.79. The manner in which we assist the basis 
by the adjuvans, is threefold: for either (1.) we 
would directly increase its force or power; or (2.) 
we would dispose it to pass thro' particular vessels, 
and act upon certain of the animal fluids, (which 
was used to be termed preparing them) that its 
action may meet with less resistance there; or, 
lastly, (3.) we would direct that action more to 
some one particular viscus or organ of the body 
than another. 
§.80. Augmenting the natural virtue of the 
basis (per §.79. (1.) comes into use, when the 
basis is of itself too unactive, or so bulkey as to 
make a sufficient dose troublesome to take (per 
§.66. n° 1. 3. 6. 15. 17.) This is done by ad- 
ding something stronger of the same virtue, or 
invested with some more effectual specific property 
found out by experiment: as when we add tro- 
chisci alhandal to a very mild cathartic, or add an-
timonium diaphoreticum to a small dose of a drastic, 
D3 or

38 Of Forms in general.
or strong purge. This takes place frequently in 
evacuants, but seldom in alteratives: and may be 
often rather look’d upon as a piece of the basis, 
than any thing distinct. 
§.81. Preparing the animal fluids (per §.79. 
(2.) ) is seldom made use of but in evacuations; 
when the peccant matter to be discharged is diffi- 
cult to move, the basis slow and unlively, or the 
passages want to be opened and set at liberty: in 
which cases it may be useful to add attenuants, di- 
luents, antacids, antalcalescents, aperients, anti- 
spasmodics, laxatives, and the like. 
§.82. Lastly, it is. necessary to direct and re- 
gulate the action of the basis (per §.79. (3.)) when 
we find by experience that it has a natural ten- 
dance to a viscus, or part which may not be suit- 
able to our present design. Thus the action of 
mercury is determined to the intestines downwards, 
by adding a cathartic; and upwards to the salival 
glands, by astringents and opiates, &c. Bat this 
determination, especially of the antients by topical 
specifics, does for the generality seem not to have 
so much in it as was formerly supposed. 
§.83. The CORRIGENS (§.74.) is that part 
of the formula which removes some unpleasant- 
ness, or noxious quality in some of the ingredi- 
ents, without imparing any of their virtues. When 
the ingredients are free from such vices, there is 
hardly any occasion for a correcter. 
§.84. Those noxious qualities (§.83.) which are 
commonly complained of in emetics, cathartics 
and opiates, are acrimony, ftatulency, weakening 
of the viscera, too much heat, cold, or the, like. 
In order to correct these, we make use of sweeteners, 
obtunders of particular acrimony, carminatives, 
strengtheners, warmers, coolers, &c. But ob- 
serve, 
1.

39 Of Forms in general.
1. That it cannot be properly called correc- 
tion, when the virtues of the medicine are de- 
stroyed, together with its vices. 
2. That the generality of such things as re- 
markably require correction, have their virtues 
and vicious qualities so inseparable from each 
other, that one cannot be removed without 
equally imparing the other: but to say truth, 
the medicine proves offensive oftener by the 
unseasonable or unskilful use of it, than from 
any innate vice; to say nothing of the adulte- 
ration, unskilful preparation, corruption from 
a long and careless keeping, &c. which are of- 
ten the sole causes of such vices, if it have any. 
3. Hence, many commonly reputed correc- 
tions are improperly so judged and called;
since by removing the virtues with the vices, 
they either prove useless or hurtful: while at 
the same time, the addition of such correcters
often discommodes the form, and inlarges the 
proper dose to a sickly bulk, as well as weakens 
the efficacy of the basis. 
4. Also, such medicines as stand most in 
need of it, are generally kept ready prepared 
and corrected in the shops; so that if the phy- 
sician has a mind, he may spare himself the 
pains of such correction in an extemporaneous 
composition. 
5. The best correction is to have the simples 
good and genuine, the composition faithful and 
skilful, and to use it with discretion, at a pro- 
per season, and in a just dose (per §.66.) 
6. If any thing wants correcting, it is the 
inflaming oils, biting and insoluble rezins, fats 
which turn rancid, and things which are caustic: 
these being taken alone, will not mix uniformly 
with the aqueous juices in the primæ viæ, so 
that by adhering firmly to the coats and vessels 
D4 of

40 Of Forms in general.
of the œsophagus, stomach and intestines, they 
often produce an inflammation and pain by their 
stimulus, which are not very easy to remove. 
The remedies or correcters in this case, are, 
loaf-sugar, the yolk of an egg, sopes, sweet 
olive oil, mild alcalies or acids, absorbent pow- 
ders, &c. 
§.85. The unpleasantness (§.83.) to be cor- 
rected, respects either the taste, smell or color: 
for the first are used sugar, syrups, acids, &c. for 
the second, fragrant waters and oils, with amber- 
grease, musk, &c. and the last, or beauty of co- 
lour, is given by dragons blood, redsanders, co- 
chineal, leaf gold and silver, &c. But we must 
observe. 
1. It can hardly be supposed in the apothe- 
caries power, nor in the patient’s expectation, 
to have medicines always as pleasant as our meat 
and drink: nor is there any need of so much
cookery here; since the disorder gives the pa- 
tient an appetite to them. 
2. Smells and tastes reputed pleasant or un- 
grateful, are not promiscuously and equally 
esteemed so by all people: what delights and 
comforts one, is sometimes unpleasant and per- 
nicious to another: sweet tastes and smells are 
to some the most ungrateful. 
3. Every thing that comes from the apothe- 
cary, is judged by the patient to be of an ill 
smell and taste; so that often the more you cor- 
rect in those respects, the less you please: there- 
fore the best and most pleasant correction is to 
let the remedy be effectual, and contracted into 
as small a compass and as few doses as possible. 
4. But if it should be proper at any time to 
make some correction of this kind, it should 
be done with neatness and judgment; that while 
one

41 Of Forms in general. 
one fault is removing, a worse may not come in 
its room; and to be particularly careful to pre- 
serve the virtue of the medicine intire, free 
from change and destruction. 
5. We should not be over sollicitous to please 
the eye, like some, who thrust leaf gold and sil- 
ver into every thing they make up: it is indeed 
tolerable in pills or a bolus; but to never omit 
it, is a piece of ridiculous vanity. 
6. The unpleasantness of a medicine arises 
sometimes from the unfitness of the several 
simples to enter together into one form; but 
that may be avoided by chusing only such as 
have an affinity to mixture with each other, or 
else by distributing the ingredients into more 
forms, (per §.40.) 
7. Lastly, accommodating only a suitable form 
to the patient and medicine (per §.43. 44.) is 
sometimes no inconsiderable correction in this 
case. 
§.86. We come in the last place to the CON- 
STITUENTS (§.74.) which is that part of the com- 
position which serves to reduce the ingredients to 
a proper consistence and bulk for the form desired. 
So that this part has the least business to do in a 
formula, unless the ingredients cannot mix well of 
themselves, or are too small in bulk. Here we 
may observe. 
1. That if any adjuvans (§.78.), or corrigens 
(§.83.) or both be required, we must try if 
we can’t find such as will at the same time an- 
swer the end of a constituens; to avoid a multi- 
plicity of ingredients without necessity. 
2. Or else some other must be chose which 
coincides with the virtue of remedy, or at least, 
does not oppose it. 
3.

42 Of Forms in general.
3.The constituens ought to have a natural 
aptitude to mix with the rest of the ingredients; 
but if the indication should require one that has 
not, the mixture may be effected by sugar, sope, 
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
§.87. The mutual proportion of the several 
parts, now enumerated (§.74. to 86.) to each 
other, may be determined from (1.) considering 
the proper dose and consistence of each (per §.35. 
and 66.); (2.) from knowing their dose, con- 
sistence and virtue, when mix’d together; (3.) 
from the particular quantity required by the de- 
terminate form (per §.66. n° 17.) 
§.88. With regard to the proportion of the 
basis, (§.75.) tho' should not sometimes ex- 
ceed the other parts in bulk or quantity, it ought 
always to excel them ail in strength and efficacy; 
and whether it be fimple or compound, the quan- 
tity taken should be proportioned, as near as pos- 
sible, to the design to be answered: with this 
view, 
1. A respect must be had to the adjuvans 
(§.78.) if any be ordered; for if adjuvantia of 
the first kind (§.79. n° 1. and §.80.) be used, 
so as to considerably increase the energy of the 
basis, the basis must be then proportionably less. 
2. If any corrigens (§.83.) be ordered, we 
must then also consider whether and how much 
it will weaken the basis (per §.84. n° 2, 3.) 
and accordingly allow a proportionable aug- 
ment of the basis. 
3. There must be also a proportionable al- 
lowance for the constituens (§.86. n° 1.) whe- 
ther it assist or correct the basis. 
§.B9. The proportion of the adjuvans (§.78.) 
to the basis, should be such, that at least the strength,
if


43 Of Forms in general.
if not bulk of the former, may be inferior to the 
latter: for otherwise it may be termed rather a 
part of the basis, than adjuvans; especially when 
its virtue is the same with that of the basis (per 
§.8O.) Nor can we here, in general, assign a 
more particular determination of the proportion 
of this part than that care must be taken to ad- 
just the adjuvans to the basis, so, that when they 
are both joined together they make a just and ade- 
quate dose, being neither too strong, nor too bulky. 
§.90. With regard to the proportionable quan- 
tity of the corrigentia of both kinds, (§.84. and 
85.) it is in the general more adviseable to let it 
be small, that we may avoid the faults in §.84. 
n° 2, 3. §.85. n° 2, 4, 5. Hence, it is often 
improper to leave the correction of the smell, or 
taste of the medicine, to be determined at the 
apothecary’s discretion, (per §.58. n° 8. (7.) 
What farther regards this head, will be given un- 
der each particular form. 
§.91. The proportion of the constituens (§.86.) 
is pretty uncertain; for the requisite quantity 
thereof is more or less, according to the particu- 
lar nature of the constituens itself, and agreeable 
to the particular form in which the medicine is to 
be made up, as well as proportionable to the 
quantity and consistence of the several constituent 
ingredients. If it be only intended to inlarge the 
medicine, just so much may be added as will com- 
plete the required dose or quantity; but if its use 
is only to make up the form, the quantity is usu- 
ally left be determined at the discretion of the 
apothecary, without any danger, agreeable to 
§.58. n° 8. (7.) 
§.92. We have hitherto considered the com- 
ponent parts, and general quantity of a compound 
formula, (per §.73.) we come now to its PAR- 
TICULAR QUANTITY OR DOSE, which maybe be
deter-

44 Of Forms in genera!. 
determined, both as to quantity and number, upon 
the conditions of the simple formula (per §.66. 
and 67.) But the following considerations should 
be here observed. 
I. When full doses are taken of the several 
component ingredients, especially of the basis 
and its congener the adjuvans, they make up as 
many effectual doses as there are efficacious in- 
gredients: so that in this case, the number of 
ingredients will express the number of doses. 
2. When the number of active ingredients 
are but few, or when there is but one dose re- 
quired, such proportionable parts of each in- 
gredient must be taken as will together amount 
to the desired quantity or dose. 
3. Also the strength of the simples does not 
remain always in the same degree after mixture 
as before; but are sometimes made weaker there- 
by, and sometimes stronger in their virtues: 
which is therefore a consideration to be attended 
to. For there is a wide difference between ad- 
ding the adjuvans to the basis, or the corrigens, 
or both: one will sometimes inhanse the virtue, 
when the other will diminish it, the bulk re- 
maining the same, per §.79. 84. 85. Examples 
of which will be given when we come present- 
ly to treat of the qualities. 
4. From the variety of mixture often arise 
compositions by far more or less corruptible 
than the several ingredients were when asunder. 
Emulsions grow sour presently; while on the 
other hand, fix'd alcalies, ground with absor- 
bents, keep dry a long time without melting. 
So that this consideration has often no small in- 
fluence in determining the number of doses to 
be prescribed at one time, in a compound for- 
mula. (per §.67. n° 3.) 
§.93.

45 Of Forms in general 
§.93. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.73.) of 
a compound formula will evidently appear from 
comparing what has been said §.68. with §.92. 
§.94. Lastly, the QUALITIES (§.73.) which 
arise from the mixture of several ingredients, being 
frequently very different from those of any of the 
simples which make up the formula, do greatly 
merit our consideration here: for the changes 
which do thence arise are not confined only to ex- 
ternal appearance, but the most intimate nature 
and medicinal properties of the ingredients are 
also greatly affected and changed; in so much, 
that this is no small argument for preferring the 
use of simples (per §.31.) to that of compounds, 
where there is no real necessity (per §.72.) for 
the latter. 
§.95. The qualities here intended to be in- 
quired into (§.94.) are chiefly the consistence, co- 
loury smell, taste, and medicinal virtues. 
§.96. The consistence; which is proper to each 
particular form, should be cautiously preserved 
from being confused, or disturbed by various and 
injudicious mixture: otherwise the remedy may 
be render’d nauseous, unfit for use, or give the 
patient occasion to think it ill prepared: it may 
be also tedious to make up by the apothecary, and 
sometimes excite his ridicule; but what is worse, 
it may destroy the virtue of the medicine, or in- 
troduce foreign qualities. 
§.97. Its consistence (§.96.) may be vitiated 
(1.) by the inequality or ununiformity of the mix- 
ture; (2.) from too great thickness or dryness; 
(3.) from too great fluidity or softness. 
§.98. To avoid these inconsistences (§.97.) in 
prescribing, we ought to make ourselves previ- 
ously acquainted with,
1.

46 Of Forms in general. 
1. The consistence proper to every particu- 
lar form, which we shall explain hereafter in 
each of them. 
2. The consistence of every separate ingre- 
dient (§.35) which enters them, which are to 
be learned per §.7. n° 2, 3. and §.8. 
3. The mutual disposition of each ingredient 
for mixture with the other, agreeable to §.36. 
Here is to be particularly consider’d the mutual 
affinity, attraction, or repulsion that obtains be- 
tween certain simples, their effervescence, fer- 
mentation, precipitation, deliquation, concretion, 
or coagulation, &c. But as these are to be learn- 
ed from chemistry only, it is evident of what 
considerable advantage that is to pharmacy. 
§.99. The colour, is the most uncertain and 
changeable of all the qualities; especially when 
the simples mix’d together are of different natures. 
We may therefore the more readily introduce such 
as are most agreeable; the better to effect which, 
we must attend to the following considerations. 
1. No colours in nature are more agreeable 
than crystalline, white, golden, red and blue 
yellow, green, black, and such as are opake and 
compound of these, are less agreeable.
2. Several forms have their particular and 
usual colour, which are to be commended: as 
milky or white, in emulsions; red, in julaps, 
but never blue; golden, red, or crystalline, in 
mixtures, &c. Unusual colours either nauseate 
or offend the more nice patient; but it is some- 
time's prudently used, for concealment of some- 
thing (per §.25.) 
3. There can be no physical nor general de- 
termination of the particular colour that will a- 
rise from a mixture of several colour’d ingre- 
dients together in a medicine. The chemist,
from

47 Of Forms in general. 
from a mixture of colourless ingredients, pro- 
duces black, white, yellow, red, blue, brown, 
and almost what colour he pleases: we must
therefore refer to chemistry on this head, as that 
alone affords the examples and rules requifite for 
the prefent business. Consult also §.85. fore- 
going. 
§.100. The mutability and uncertainty of odors 
upon mixture, is but little inferior to that of co- 
lours (§.99.): but then they are more consider- 
able and certain signs of the internal texture and 
virtues of the compound, and they act more strong- 
ly upon the body than colours. Here we must be 
careful to prevent the result of vicious and offen- 
sive odors upon composition of different ingre- 
dients. Therefore observe. 
1. The rules concerning gratefulness of odors 
are very uncertain and confin'd; those pleasing 
Some, not pleasing all, (per §.85. 23.) 
2. Pleasantness and utility in odors are often 
very distant companions. Patients who are hy- 
pochondriacal, hysterical, epileptic, &c. often 
fare the worst from the pleasantest and sweetest 
smelling ingredients. 
3. Things which are inodorous, and mode- 
rately either sweet or fœtid, are most in univer- 
sal esteem; but putrid and excrementitious smells 
are intollerable: in the mean time, such as are 
the most fœtid or the most fragrant, will produce 
the strongest, either good or bad, effects upon 
the body.  
4. Frequently the whole virtue of a medicine 
depends upon its order, and the principles of 
which that is constituted; destroy one, and the 
other also perishes, a change in one makes also 
a change in the other.
5.

48 Of Forms In general. 
5. The odor of a compound cannot be ge- 
nerally determined from the odors of its several 
ingredients: as chemistry largely demonstrates. 
(1.) From a mixture ot inodorous ingredients 
arise compounds of the strongest smell. If sal 
ammoniacum and a fix’d alcaly or quick lime 
be ground together, tho' they are both sepa- 
rately inodorous, what a sudden and violent 
smell do they produce! oil of vitriol poured on 
nitre, sea-salt, sal ammoniac, regenerated tartar, 
and the like, produce the same. 
(2.) From a mixture of very strong smelling 
substances results a compound without any smell. 
Let a saturation of spirit of sal ammoniac with 
spirit of nitre or common salt be taken as an 
example. 
(3.) The worst of stenches may be excited 
upon a mixture of things little fœtid, or even 
fragrant: and on the contrary, the most fra- 
grant odors may arise from a composition of the 
most fœtid ingredients. Sulphur being dis- 
solved in a fixed alcaly, and mix’d with vine- 
gar, can you distinguish it from the smell of a 
rotten egg? on the other hand, juices of an 
offensive smell being carried about mix’d in a 
leather bag by Mr. Lemery *, afforded the plea- 
sant persume of musk. 
In order therefore to act circumspectly in this 
case also, a knowledge in chemistry is both use- 
ful and necessary. 
§.101. Tastes come under the same conditions 
with odors (§.100.), and answer to the same cau- 
tions. Insipid, sweet, sour, bitter, salt, &c. are 
the most agreeable: rancid, putrid and urinous, 
the most unpleasant: the production, destruction,
and 
* Hist. de l’Acad. Royal. an. 1706.

49 Of Forms in general.
and change of tastes, upon a variety of mixtures, 
is also no less various; and these too we are to 
learn from chemistry. 
Do not the sharpest tasted acid and alcaly be- 
come insipid upon a just commixture? 
What is more ungrateful to the tongue, than the 
brackishness which crabs-eyes, oyster-shells, &c.
impart to acids? 
The softest and insipid earths become aluminous 
when mix’d with acids. 
Lead mix’d with acids affords a saccharine 
sweetness: iron with acids affords a sweetish 
roughness; and the other metals with acids afford 
tastes intolerably nauseous. 
§.102. But we might easily pass by any fault 
that might happen in any of the fore-mention’d 
qualities (§.96. to §.102.), if they were not so 
frequently attended with an improper diminution 
and even intire change of the medicinal virtues of 
the composition. Even the medicinal virtues are 
often suddenly and unexpectedly impared and 
changed, without any considerable alteration in 
the other sensible qualities of the ingredients: as 
may be easily apprehended from the few following 
examples. 
1. Acids and alcalies destroy the properties 
of each other, upon mixture; and turn into a 
neutral salt, which is neither an acid or an 
alcaly. 
2. Acids arid the earthy absorbents destroy 
the natural action of each other, upon mixture; 
and produce a (tertium quid) new substance, 
which has neither the virtues of an acid nor an 
absorbent. 
3. Earths and the boles used in pharmacy, 
being mix’d with acids, acquire a stronger force 
of astringing, with an aluminous stipticity. 
E 4.

50 Of Forms in general. 
4. Some cathartics are hindred in their ac- 
tion by acids or alcalies, others are promoted 
in their action by being mix’d with the same. 
Scammony mix’d with an acid becomes as un- 
active as a little sand; on the contrary, by a 
fix’d alcaly, it is rendered stronger than alone. 
Jalap and colocynthis become quite tame and 
gentle in their stimulus, upon being mix’d with 
sal-tartari. 
5. Opiates promote the action of sudorifics 
and sialogogues: but they almost suppress the 
power of other evacuants. 
6. Mucilaginous and astringent medicines 
are weakened by a mixture of sugar. 
7. Mercury changed into an æthiops, or a 
cinnabar, by sulphur, is no longer a sialogogue, 
but loses its salivating power. Crude mercury 
ground with twice as much sugar, or testaceous 
powder *, becomes an unactive œthiops albus †. 
Turbith mineral is changed from an evacuant 
to an alterative, upon being mix’d with pil. de 
duobus & camph. ‡. Calomel ground with sul- 
phur of antimony will scarce either vomit, 
purge, salivate or provoke urine ‖. Corrosive 
sublimate, ground with more crude mercury, 
becomes sweet again. The many precipitates 
of mercury, which are stuck full of the sharp 
spicula of acids, lose all their force and acri- 
mony upon being ground with alcalies, and ear- 
thy absorbents. But ’tis a question whether 
æthiops and cinnabar remain the same, unalter’d 
by a mixture with alcalies.
8. 
* It is then the mercurius alcalizatus, which made some stir, 
not long ago. 
†. V. Edinburgh Medic. Essays, Vol. III. p. 388. 
‡ Ibid. vol. IV. p. 32. 
‖ Ibid. vol. I.  p. 46. vol. III. p. 389.

51 Of Forms in general. 
8. Calx viva being tailed unawares, burns the 
tongue with the acrimony of a fix’d alcaly. 
What a strange effed has it, when mix’d with 
sal ammoniacum! 
9. Alcalies mix’d with acids, or acids with 
alcalies, do generally excite a struggling ebul- 
lition; which is follow’d by a considerable 
change in the virtues and properties of each. 
Vitriolum martis, mix’d with alcalies, turns to 
a kind of tartarum vitriolatum, with an incor- 
rigible ochre. The same holds good with re- 
spect to the vitriols of other metals and semi- 
metals, except copper. Alum, mix’d with an 
alcaly, is precipitated in the form of an unactive 
calx: upon which principle, the nature of alu- 
minous magisteries is sufficiently apparent. Sul- 
phur, dissolved in an alcaly, is thence precipi- 
tated in a curdly form by acids, &c. 
10. Earthy absorbents, being mix’d with a- 
cids, do also in like manner reciprocally act 
upon and change each other; the absorbent 
loses its antacid property, and the acid loses its 
acrimony or acidity. 
11. A fix’d alcaly, upon mixture, sets at li- 
berty the volatile alcaline, and absorbent earthy 
parts of mix’d bodies, A volatile alcali will al- 
so separate the absorbent earthy parts of bodies:
but we must except the calx viva, which, on the 
contrary, separates and expels the volatile alca- 
ly. V. n° 8. Hence, what vast alterations must 
a compound suffer, which is made up of a fix’d 
alcaly, or calx viva, and ingredients which con- 
tain an ammoniacal or volatile salt; or when a 
volatile or fix’d alcaly is mix’d in a liquid form, 
with any of the soluble magisteries of coral or 
pearl? * &c.
E2 12. 
* Such a mixture in julaps, &c. would precipitate the fine 
magisteries into an unsightly hypostasis. 


52 Of Forms in general. 
12. A stronger acid will disengage and drive 
out a weaker, from the earthy substance or basis 
to which it has fix’d itself in bodies. The 
strongest acid is oil of vitriol; the weakest, are 
those of the vegetable juices. Hence, what will 
be the consequence if the strong acid of vitriol, 
sulphur or alum (which are all much of the 
same nature) be joined with sal ammoniacum, 
common salt, nitre, the sal febrifugum Sylvii, 
tartarum solubile, tartarum regeneratum, and 
the like? What will be the effect of this strong 
vitriolic or aluminous acid, when it disengages 
the weaker acid from the earthy parts which 
constitute those salts, and places itself in their 
room *? Hence, we may form a judgment of 
the tinctura martis Zwelseri, and others of the 
same tribe. 
13. Care must be taken not to mix acids, e- 
specially of the fossil kind, with any thing that 
is metalline or mineral: for that may pro- 
duce strange alterations in a composition; it 
may even turn a good medicine into the rankest 
poison. Mercury sublimate, red precipitate, 
lapis infernalis, butyrum antimonii, and many 
of the like nature, demand this caution. 
14. The same substance assumes very diffe- 
rent medicinal properties, barely from the dif- 
ferent menstruum in which it is dissolved. The 
generality of vegetable cathartics operate best 
when they have been first extracted with an 
aqueous menstruum; whereas if they are ex- 
tracted in a menstruum; wholly spirituous, as al-
cohol, 
* The consequence will be, that the weaker acid being disen- 
gaged by the stronger, from the earthy basis to which it was fix'd, 
will become volatile, and exhale in fumes; while the remaining 
earth and stronger acid will form another saline body, agreeable 
to the strength and mutual proportion of each.

53 Of Forms in general. 
cohol, they gripe more and purge less *. Glass, 
or liver of antimony, communicates an emetic 
power to wine; but not so to water, distilled 
vinegar, burnt wine, nor the alcohol of wine †. 
Copper dissolved in an acid, proves erhetic; dis- 
solved in a volatile alcaly, it makes a powerful 
diuretic; open’d by sal ammoniacum, it purges 
by stool ‖, &c. 
§.103. We could bring many more instances 
of the like kind with those now mention’d (§.102.), 
and it is wish’d we could say, all: but as the me- 
thod of composition is in our day without order 
and without end (per §.72. n° 9.), we must con- 
sequently fall vastly short of a just knowledge of 
the several alterations which arise in every com- 
pound upon mixture: but we should be pretty- 
near the mark, if we had but once arrived at an 
accurate knowledge of the mechanical structure, 
and constituent principles of the several simple in- 
gredients, with the mutual affinity or disposition 
they bear to each other, and from a full discovery 
of the true ways in which they act upon each o- 
ther, and upon the animal œconomy. 
§.104. In the mean time, who would be so 
rash as to enter upon the composition of the me- 
dicines used in pharmacy, without a competent 
skill in chemistry; for ’tis that which must teach 
him the surprising and infinitely various changes 
which arise upon mixture: and therefore there still 
remains an infinite number of those changes to be 
discovered and farther prosecuted by that art; for 
the mutual application and affinity of all the simples 
E3 to
* M. Boulduc dans les Memoir, de l’Acad. Roy. an. 1701. 
p. 256.
† Lemery Traité de l’Antimoine, p. 413, &c. p. 561, &c.
‖ Boerhaave Elem. Chem. vol. II. process. 189. 

54 Of Forms in particular. 
to each other have never yet been experimented, 
nor have most of those been rightly examined 
which have been already tried and observed. 
Of FORMS in particular. 
§.105. DISTINCTION and method in writing re- 
commends to us the received division 
of forms into external and internal. Internal me- 
dicines or forms, are restrained to those only which 
are convey’d thro’ the mouth and œsophagus into 
the stomach: but under the external, are compre- 
hended all such medicines as are applied to the 
body any other way, whether they lodge upon the 
skin only, or are by particular means convey’d into 
various cells or cavities. To act therefore agree- 
able to this method, we shall begin first with the 
internal forms of medicines. 
OF the INTERNAL FORMS of
MEDICINES. 
Of a POWDER. 
§.106. A Powder is a dry, uniform and (here) 
internal medicine, consisting of one 
or more ingredients, broke into 
small particles: which do not adhere to each other, 
but remain equably mix’d. 
§.107. The powder (§.106.) is distinguished 
into three KINDS, according to its particular de- 
gree of tenuity: being either (1.) very subtle, called 
alcohol;


55 Of a Powder.
alcohol *; (2.) coarse or gross, as in spices, cof- 
fee, &c. usually call’d tragea; or (3.) of a mid- 
dling degree of fineness between the two former, 
when the simples are beat as fine as they can be 
without levigation, which is what we commonly 
intend by the word powder or species †. 
§.108. Which of these degrees of subtility 
(§.107.) will be most convenient for the intention 
and form, may be chiefly determined from con-
sidering (1.) the nature of the ingredients to be 
reduced into a powder; (2.) the degree of pene- 
trability we would give it; (3.) to determine its 
action to be quicker or flower, or more to one 
part than another; (4.) to have the mixture ap- 
pear more or less uniform, and in proportion to 
the patients more easy or difficult deglutition. 
1. Ingredients which are absorbent, hard and 
ponderous, ungrateful and refinous, should be 
more exactly comminuted, and when they are 
to penetrate far, or act quickly, &c. the first 
kind (§.107.) is required. 
2. Aromatics, and volatile substances lose a 
great part of their virtue in an over exact pul- 
verization, and much more by keeping in that 
state. 
3. Some things prove purgatives in a gross 
powder; but in a more subtle one, they are 
diuretic, &c. 
§.109. The ingredients or proper MATTER
for the powder (§.106.), is every thing that is 
E4 redu-
* This is obtained by levigation; and by ablution and precipi- 
tation with water, air, &c. when the subject will conveniently 
admit of it: and may be then distinguished into a vast number of 
degrees of tenuity; for the resistance of the medium and specific gra- 
vity of the subject being determined, the fineness of the powder will 
be as the time and highth wherein it precipitates. 
† This is also subdivisible into various other degrees of tenuity, 
by the different fineness of sieves. 

56 Of a Powder. 
reducible (either alone or mix'd) into a dry or 
dusty form, and is at the same time proper for 
internal use: so that liquids are not wholly exclu- 
ded from entering into the form of a powder. 
§.110 Hence (§.109.), this form takes in (1.) 
all officinal whether vegitable, animal or 
mineral, that may be used internally with safety, 
and are of a solid, dry and brittle texture. (2.) 
All officinal preparations and compounds which 
are of the like nature. (3.) All soft and thick 
substances of the two preceding classes (1. and 2.), 
as inspissated juices, extracts, electuaries, &c. (4.) 
All liquids of the same kind (1. and 2.) in a 
small quantity, as balsams, oils, &c. 
§.111. But a CHOICE of these ingredients 
is necessary in order to avoid inconsistence in a 
prescription: with regard to which, observe 
1. That simples which are very bulky in 
proportion to their efficacy are seldom, if ever, 
reduced to the two most subtle kinds of this 
form (§.107. (1.) (3.) ): on the contrary, they 
are very frequently made into the gross powder 
(§.107. (2.) ). Of this nature, are woods, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, &c. But we must not 
exclude things which are very light and bulky 
from the two finer kinds of this form, when 
they act in a little quantity, or make but a small 
dose, as agar. colocinth. &c. 
2. If we lie under a necessity of transgressing 
against the preceding rule, we should take care 
to supply the inactivity of the former bulky 
ingredients, by adding something that is more 
potent and effectual in a very small quantity. 
3. If any liquids be order'd, they should be 
in a very small quantity, in proportion to the 
dry ingredients; that the proper consistence of 
the form may not be thence disturbed. The 
same

57 Of a Powder.
same caution holds good, with regard to soft 
and thick substances. 
4. Gums should hardly ever enter the form 
of a powder: for they are not only very diffi- 
cult to reduce to this form, but they are also 
difficult to take in that manner, as they become 
gluey by mixing with the saliva. 
5. Such simples as are full of a mucilage or 
an oil, like many seeds, should not be order’d 
for this form, but in conjunction with things 
that are more dry and brittle: for the mucilage 
or oil being express’d in the pulverization, will 
make rather a paste than a powder, which will 
grow rank so much the sooner by keeping. 
6. Fœtid ingredients should be excluded this 
form as much as possible, as they are much more 
suitable for that of a pill. 
7. Things that are very sharp, bitter, or 
otherwise disagreeable to the taste, if given at 
all in this form, should be at least not given 
alone, but mix’d and qualify’d with others that 
are more mild and pleasant: by which means 
we shall avoid sleaing or burning the patient’s 
mouth, making him sick or nauseated, and ex- 
citing him to vomit. 
8. Therefore the stronger kind of resins 
should be ground up with sugar, or earthy ab- 
sorbents, and corrected with proper salts and 
effential oils; by which means they will be 
render’d more dissolvable in the aqueous juices 
of the stomach, nor so apt to gripe and adhere 
to the membranous parts. 
9. The more potent and effectual preparations 
of mercury, are more suitable to be exhibited in 
the form of pills or a bolus, than this of a pow- 
der. At least, it is not so safe to give such 
things unmix’d; by reason of the smallness of 
the dose: but something should be judiciously 
chose

58 Of a Powder. 
chose and adapted (per §.86. and §.102. n° 7.
and 13.) to enlarge the bulk. 
10. We are dissuaded from giving fix’d al- 
calies in this form, at least unmix’d by reason 
of their urinous acrimony, and their aptness to 
liquify by the air. 
11. Volatile alcalies, as they are offensive 
both to smell and taste, so they also quickly ex- 
hale, and are lost in this form. 
12. When the ingredients of a powder are 
of an unpleasant taste, especially in the tragea, 
or coarse powder (§.107. (2.)), they may be 
corrected with sugar, solid sugar confects, or 
the like: when they are of an unpleasant smell, 
we may add some fragrant essential oil, and 
sometimes a little musk or ambergrease: and 
both intentions may be frequently answer’d at 
once by a little elæosaccharum. For the sake 
of colour, we may add sang, dracon. l. santal. 
rub. leaf-gold and silver, &c. being at the same 
time mindful of the cautions, §.85. 99. 100. 
101. 
13. The physician, studying simplicity, will 
not take in above three or four ingredients at 
most, when he prescribes this form in but a 
small quantity. But in the tragea, (§.107. 2.) 
or coarse powder, and such as are more bulky, 
he may take the liberty of inserting a greater 
number. 
§.112. The neatest ORDER for placing the se- 
veral constituent ingredients or parts of this form 
in a prescription, is, to place the basis (§.75.) 
first, then the adjuvans (§.78.) and corrigens 
(§.83.); lastly, to add the constituens (§.86.) 
agreeable to §.57. n° 4. The several quantities 
of the ingredients may also direct another order 
(per §.57. n° 3.) But in both, the placing ingre- 
dients

59 Of a Powder.
dients of the same tribe together should be ob- 
serv’d (per §.75. n° 2.) And if any sugar is to 
be added, especially when its quantity is to be de- 
termin’d from the quantity of the other ingre- 
dients, it ought always to close the series in a pre- 
script, (per §.75. n° 5.) 
§.113. The DOSE (§.64.) of a powder, espe- 
cially of the two finer forts, (§.107. (1.) (3.)) is, 
at a medium, about half a dram. But it is some- 
times increased to a whole dram; tho’ but seldom, 
and never but when the patient has a good appe- 
tite to physic, or when the ingredients are very 
weighty in proportion to their bulk, and are easy 
to dissolve. As the dose of this form seldom ex- 
ceeds a dram, so it is as seldom less than a scruple, 
unless the substance is very bulky in proportion to 
its weight. But the tragea (§.107.) or coarse powder, 
will often easily admit of a larger dose than a dram: 
tho’ the dose of these is often not determin’d by 
weight, but at discretion in a spoon, upon the 
point of a knife, &c. But in either, we are to 
observe, 
1. Bulky doses should be avoided as much 
as possible, especially when the ingredients are 
unpleasant, and the patient nice and sickly, or 
apt to vomit, and of a difficult deglutition, &c. 
2. A respect must be had to the several cir- 
cumstances limiting the dose of medicines in ge- 
neral (per §.66.), and especially with regard to 
young infants (ib. n° 3.), that such may not be 
fatigued with a large dose.
3. Hence it is frequently more proper to in- 
crease the number of doses than their bulk (per 
§.67. no° 4. 5.); as the smallness of the dose 
will make amends for the repetition of it. 
4. There are yet some powders that are easily 
soluble in a proper vehicle, which may be given 
to the quantity ot several drams for a dose, and 
2 yet

60 Of a Powder. 
yet may be taken without difficulty. Even the 
Epsom salts may be given to an ounce. 
§.114. The GENERNAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, to be transmitted from the apothe- 
cary to the patient at one time, is in different 
cases and circumstances various. The tragea (§.107. 
(2.)) may be order’d from ℥ ß. to one or two ℥'s
or more. Evacuants are very frequently prescribed 
only in one dose at a time; unless the physician 
intends the operation to be repeated in a continued 
series, and at no long intervals. Alteratives are 
used to be prescribed from  ʒij. to ℥j. or ℥j ß.
but they are sometimes order’d in the quantity of 
two or three doses only at a time. But observe, 
1. That constant bounds cannot be assigned 
to the quantity of this form in general; where- 
as it may be easily determined from considering 
the condition of the patient, and his particular 
case, with the nature of the ingredients and in- 
tention of the physician, &c. See §.67, n° 1. 
to n° 12. and §. 68. and 92. n° 4. 
2. We should be more particularly careful in 
this form, that the general quantity may be di- 
visible by weight into doses, without leaving any 
remainder; if the distribution into doses of a 
determinate weight is to be performed by the 
apothecary (per §.68. n° 3.). 
3. And sometimes, when there is danger of 
bad consequence from an inaccurate division of 
potent materials, it is adviseable to order the 
apothecary to make an exact and distinct distri- 
bution; directing the manner in which it is to 
be done in the subscription. 
§.115. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients in this form, when it consists 
of more than one; that is to be determined from 
2 the

61 Of a Powder.
the dose proper for every patient (per §.66.), 
from the common and establish’d dose of this 
form (§.113.); and lastly, from the general quan- 
tity which the physician thinks proper to order in 
his prescription. Therefore, 
1. So much of each ingredient is to be taken 
as will amount to a remedy equal to the inten- 
tion, whose dose and general quantity may be 
neither more nor less than is requisite. 
2. If the quantity of the ingredients, which 
are judged equal to the physician’s intention, 
should exceed the just dose (§.113.) of the 
form; we must either use the rule mention’d 
(ib. n° 3.), or increase its strength by adding 
such as act more powerfully in a small bulk 
(per §.80.); which is to be observed more espe- 
cially in simples that are light and bulky (per 
§.111. n° 1. and 2.) 
3. But if on the contrary, the sufficient quan- 
tity of the ingredients are of a much less bulk 
than is convenient for the proper dose (§.113.) 
of this form; we are to augment it to a proper 
size by intermixing some suitable constituens 
(per §.86. and 91.): which is frequently re- 
quired in opiates, and preparations from metals 
and minerals, &c. 
4. When liquids are to be order’d, we should 
be mindful of the rule at §.111. n° 3. 
5. The quantity of sugar used in this form, 
especially in the lighter coarse powders (§.107. 
(2.)), is often equal to, or double and triple the 
weight of the other ingredients 
6. But we should all the while carefully con- 
sider the several changes and other qualities that 
may happen to the ingredients upon mixture 
(per §.94. to 102.); lest we frustrate our in- 
tention, or occasion some injury to the patient.
§.116.

62 Of a Powder. 
§.116. The SUBSCRIPTION (§.59.) of this 
form, declares to the apothecary, the preparation 
of the powder, its distribution, and its receptacle, 
or what it is to be put up in. 
§. 17. The preparation consists in pounding 
and grinding, pulverisation or trituration; and 
where there is more than one ingredient, mixation 
is added. Which are order’d in these terms, F. 
i. e. fiat, or M. F. Pulv. i. e. misce, fiat pulvis;
per §.59. n° 1. and 2. If the powder is to be 
coarse, we add the word grossus, or tragea if ex- 
ceeding fine, we add after, or in the room of pul- 
vis, the term alcohol, or pulv. subtiliss. and when 
neither of these are expressed, the powder is sup- 
posed to be of a mean fineness, per §.107. Some- 
times it is necessary to further advise (miscel. & 
trit. diu permanend.) or, citò perficiend. that the 
mixture and trituration is to be continued a long 
or a short time; and (œquabiliter, mortario tecto, 
&c.) that the mixture should be equably made, 
and in a cover’d mortar, &c. (per §.108.) when 
the ingredients require such a treatment. 
§.118. The division or distribution of the pow- 
der into its proper doses, when it belongs to the 
apothecary, should be immediately added next af- 
ter the former (§.117.): (divide in (tot.) partes 
equales) directing him to divide it into so many 
equal parts or doses. Nor should we sometimes 
omit an admonishment in strong medicines, that 
(partitio fiat exabtissima) the distribution may be 
made with the greatest exactness; but the most cau- 
tious physicians prescribe only one dose of such 
medicines at a time, ordering a new composition 
for every dose they require, thus, fiat, or repetatur 
idem bis, ter, &c. per §.114. n° 3. But there is 
no need of this caution, when the dose of the pow- 
der is not to be determined by weight (per §.113.), 
nor


63 Of a Powder. 
nor when its division is left to the patient or his 
attendants. 
§.119. The receptacle, or case to put up and 
keep the powder in, varies with different circum- 
stances; and may sometimes require to be parti- 
cularly mentioned in a prescription. Such as will 
exhale or liquify with the air, should be put up in 
glasses. Each dose of the whole quantity of the 
powder is to be folded up in a separate paper, or 
inclosed in little card or deal boxes, which we call 
scatulte. We therefore commonly order the re- 
ceptacle thus: D. (i.e. datur, let it be sent) in 
vitro, chartis, scatula. And when the powder is 
to be taken in wafer-paper (made by the consec- 
tioners), we write afterwards, cum nebula charta- 
cea, pro vehiculo. 
§.120. The signment or SUPERSCRIPTION
(§.60.) of this form, contains the title of the 
powder, its dose, vehicle, time of taking, regi- 
men, &c. agreeable to §.60. n° 1, 2, 3, &c. that 
§.121. The title is to be deduced from the 
form, v.g. pulvis vel pulveres; and then from its 
virtue, v.g. absorbens, pectoralis, &c. being at the 
same time mindful of the cautions at §.60. 
n° 7, 8. 
§.122. The dose of this form is either left to 
be portion’d out by weight, or some common mea- 
sure by the patient (per §. .n° 9. and §. 113.), 
in which case we write sumatur drachm, or ʒj. or 
ʒß. or quantum digitabulo, cultri apice, cochleari, 
&c. capi potest. But if the powders are to be 
taken already divided by the apothecary (per 
§.118.); it may then be sufficient to write only, 
capiatur una dosis. 
§.123. The vehicles used, to take this form in, 
are various: according to the circumstances of the 
patient’s case, with the nature of the ingredients, 
and form itself. 
1.

64 Of a Powder.
1. The coarse powder (§.107. (2.)) fre- 
quently requires no vehicle, being sufficiently 
pleasant of itself (per §. 115. n° 5,): it is how- 
ever sometimes given in medicated breads, bis- 
kets, sugar cakes, or sprinkled, in a proper 
quantity, upon a common toast in some rich 
wine, or mead, &c. 
2. A very usual vehicle for the other two 
kinds of this form (§.107. (1.) (3.)), is, the 
nebula chartacea, or wafer paper of our confec- 
tioners; which, when wetted in the mouth, is 
extremely well adapted to flip down whole with 
the powder, without offending the palate by 
any of its contents. The apothecary is to be 
advised in the subscription to send as many ne- 
bulæ or wafers to the patient, as there are doses 
of the powder, and sometimes to double the 
wafer: he should also express the use of them 
to the patient, in the superscription or direction. 
3. But the most common of all vehicles for 
this form, is, some proper liquid (per §.60. 
n° 11.), indued with the qualities there men- 
tioned. Hence, 
(1.) An acid vehicle should not be used for 
alcaline or absorbent powders; lest by exciting 
an effervescence they should nauseate the pa- 
tient, or destroy the virtues of each other (per 
§.102. n° 1, 2.) But we must except a de- 
signed mixture of this kind, as in the antemetic 
of RIVERIUS ex sal. abs. & succ. limon. 
(2.) We must abstain from liquid vehicles 
which are too fat or oily; for as they are gene- 
rally disagreeable to the patient, so they fre- 
quently obstruct the action of the medicine; 
which must be observed with regard to broths. 
(3.) Sometimes it is proper to mention whe- 
ther the liquid vehicle is to be drank warm, hot 
or

65 Of a Powder. 
or cold. Such as are fat, are nauseous when 
drank cold. Such as are just warm, promote vo- 
miting. Such as are taken hot, are apt to make 
gummy powders grumous or clog together; 
they diffipate such as are volatile, make such as 
are unpleasant more so by opening their body, 
and sometimes excite a status or hysteric passion. 
The particular nature also of the liquid vehicle 
itself, the customary way of using it, and the 
use or habit of the patient, have each their pro- 
per force in assigning limits to these circumstances. 
§.124. Lastly, we are to ascertain the times for 
taking each dose, and to assign a proper regimen 
to be observ’d thro' the whole course; both which 
must vary with the physicians particular indications 
(per §.60. n° 10, and 12.); nor is an explana- 
tion of them the proper business of this place, 
(per §.7. n° 1.) 
§.125. The Use of this form, is almost univer- 
sal, being suited to evacuants as well as alteratives. 
But we must be careful that the nature of the dis- 
ease, its seat and symptoms, the constitution and 
custom of the patient, with the disposition of the 
remedies indicated, are not repugnant, but suitable 
to this form, per §.35. 43—48. 109—111. For 
the difficulty of swallowing in a quinsey, ulcers of 
the sauces, an apoplexy, epilepsy, syncope, &c. 
do forbid the use of powders. 
§.126. Take the following as SPECIMENS of 
this form, suited to common or general cases. 
1. Pulv. emet. pro adulto nimia cibi repleto. 
ꝶ. Tart. emetic, gr. v. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. iij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. emeti cum cerevisia callida sumend. pro una dosi. 
F 2.

66 Of a Powder. 
2. Pulv. emet. common. pro adulto. 
♃. Rad. ipecacuanh. ʒß. 
F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis emeticus in haustul. vini alb. una vice su- 
mendus super bibendo copiose de infuso tepido fa- 
rinœ aven. tenuiter & fine ebullitione facta, 
inter vomendum. 
3. P. Purgans pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. x. 
Elœsacch. fœnicul. gr. xxv. 
M. terendo diu, F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro dosi mane cum infuso caffe su-
mendus. 
4. P. Cathart. communis pro adulto.
♃. Rad. jalapp. ℈j. 
Diagrydii gr. xij. 
Ol. caryoph. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis cathart. mane cum custiodia in haustul. ce- 
rivis. recent, calid. sumend. 
5. Alius in cancro nondum exulcerato. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 110. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. vj. 
Diagrydii gr. vij. 
Stibii diaphoret. non ablut. gr.xxiv. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. P. Hydragog. sive drastic. pro adulto. 
(1.) ♃. Gutt.gamb. 
Calomelan. aa gr. xvj. 
Sal. succin. gr. vj. 
Ol. essent. junip. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane cum custodia in nebula char- 
tacea deglutiend.
(2.) 

67 Of a Powder.
(2.) Alius- 
4. ♃. jalapp. ʒß. 
Tartar. vitriolat. 
Spec. diambræ aa gr. v. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior, vel in haustu cerevis. recent. tepide 
sumend. 
7. Alius in scorbuti initio. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ Tart, vitriol. non acid. 
Crystal. tartar. 
Sal. polychrest. aa  ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane ex sero lactis hauriendus: 
super bibantur dein seri lactis ℥xij. 
8. P. antihelminticus purgans: pro puero circa vj 
vel viij. annos nato. 
♃. Diagrydii. 
Calomelan. aa gr. vj. 
Rad. rhei ℈ß
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro verm. mane cum regimine, in 
pulpa pomi torrifacti sumendus. 
9. Alius antihelminticus pro infante. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 234. 
ꝶ Aloës succot. gr. iij. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. j. 
Vitriol. mart. gr. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Mane, jejuna stomacho, pro una dosi sumatur.
F2 10. 

68 Of a Powder. 
10. P. antihelmint. cathart. pro infante. 
♃. P. cornachini. 
R. Rhabarhar. aa gr. vj. ad xij. 
Æthiop. alb. vel merc. alcalisat. 
Sacchar. alb. aa ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis vermifug. & purgat. in alimento lacteo 
communi exhibendus. 
11. Alius vermifugus alterans. 
♃. † Æthiop. alb. ʒß. 
Nitri purif. ℈j. 
Sal.jovis gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. sabin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Alternis auror. (cum sequent.) pro ij dosib. in 
infus. casse sumendus. 
12. Pulv. solutivus. 
♃. Pol. sen. gr. xxv. 
Tartar. vitriolat. gr. v. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. P. laxativ. vel lenitiv. in pulpa pomi tosti, vel 
aliter, sumendus, &c. 
13. Alius vermifugus evacuans 
♃. Spec. hier. gr. xv. 
Rad. rhei 
Sem. santon. aa ℈ß. 
M. f. pulv. 
S. In nebula deglutiendus: & alternis auror. 
repetendus. 
† Vel tnercur. alcalisat. fit ex pulv. testac. pts. ij. & argent. 
viv. pt. j. 
14.

69 of a Powder. 
14. Pulv. diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. 
Test. Ostreor. calcinat. aa℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu saponacea octavis horis 
sumendus. 
15. Alius diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. ℈ß. 
succin. gr. iv. 
Sp. terebinth, gtt. iij. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Capiatur statim in nebula vel haust. supra prœscript. 
16. Pulv. sialagogus.
♃. Chrystal. miner. ʒj. 
Sal. succin. ℈j. 
Sacch. alb. ʒij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. in viij. chart. dividend. 
S. Pulv. sputator. quarum unam in orem capiat sub- 
inde, vel singulis horis. 
17. Pulvis sudorificus. 
♃. Croc. angl. sicc. ℈ß 
Castor. R. gr. vj. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. chamomill. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. alexipharm. tempore idoneo in haust. julapii 
appropriat. sumendus. 
F3 18.

70 Of a Powder. 
18. Pulv. diaphoreticus. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Angel. Hispan. 
Croc. angl. sicc. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart, ij. 
S. Pulv. cardiac. in haust. julapii sumend. 
(2.) Alius P.
♃. Lapid. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Pulv. e C. C. C. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Ut prior, 6ta quaqs hora sumendus. 
19. Pulvis febrifugus. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
Alumin. rupe. gr. iv. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. febris. tertiis horis sumendus cum haustu vini 
rubri astringentis aq. Fontan. œquali parte diluti. 
20. Pulvis narcoticus in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ Opii lamellatim tenuiter scissi & lente 
exsiccati, gr.j. 
Corall. rubr. gr. xij. 
Olibani, gr. vj. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis, quavis vespera ite- 
randus. 
S. Pulvis pacans, vesperi ante somnum sumendus. 
21.

71 Of a Powder. 
21. Pulvis cephalicus. 
♃. Cinnab. antimon. levigat. ℈j. 
Rad. valer. sylv. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. bis in dies cum haustu infusi Flor. Cha- 
momillœ sumendus. 
22. Pulvis stimulans & resolvens, ib. p. 43. 
ꝶ Ol. destillat. menth. 
Marjoran. 
Tanacet. aa gtt. iv. 
Sacch. alb. sicciss. ℥j. 
M. F. s. a. † Elæosaccharum, cui adde 
Rad. Z.Z. alb. 
Cort. magellanic. aa ℥B. 
S. Pulv. ut supra, &c. capiat ʒß. ter de die ex vino.
23. Pulvis pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm, ceti ℈j. 
Bals tolut. ℈ß. 
Flor. benz. gr. iv. 
Ol. anis. 
Hysop. aa gtt. j 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. pect. vel bechic. &c. in nebula vel haust. 
appropriat. sumend. 
F4 24.
† The Eleosacchara are not near so much in use with us, as 
among foreigners: tho' we do not know any substantial reason why 
they should not be more in use than they are. 

72 Of a Powder.
24. Tragea peptica in ventric. debil 
ꝶ. Spec. diagalang. ℥ß. 
Rad. gentian. 
Cort. winteran. 
Myrrh, rubrœ aa ʒj. 
Sem. coriandr. 
Rad. calam. arom. aa ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℥j.
M. F. pulvis, dandus in scatula. 
S. Tragea stomachica: de qua cochlear. ß. pani bis- 
cocto, vino Hispanico imbuto, inspersum capiat, post 
pastum. 
25. Pulvis restorativus. 
♃. Cam. viperar. sicc. ʒß. 
F. pulvis tenuis.
Pubv. &c. bis in dies sumendus cum haust. lactis 
assinini recentis. 
26. Pulvis corrohorans. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. elect. ℈ij. 
Cinnam. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
0l. cinnam. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haustful. vini rubri sumendus. 
27. Pulvis antacidus. 
ꝶ Lap. 69 ror. ppt. 
Cretœ. 
Conch. ostreor. calcin. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. zedoar. 
Nuc. myristic. aa ʒjß.  
M. F. pulv. ten. in scatula dand. 
S. Pulvis temperans. Sumatur, quantum apice cultri 
capi potest, acido infestante. 
28.

73 Of a Powder.
28. (1.) Pulvis absorbens albus. 
♃. Test. ostreor. calcinat. ʒij. 
Cret. alb. 
Sacch. alb. ad  ʒjß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Pulvis edulcorans, cujus capiat cochleam parvam 
in haust. caffe vel theœ solut. 
(2.) Alius–Ruber. 
♃. Coral. ruhr. 
Succin. ppt. aa  ʒjß. 
801. armen. ʒß. 
Cinab. antimon. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. viij. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Alius–Niger. 
♃. Lap. Hibernic. ʒij. 
Antimon. crud. 
Æthiop. miner. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Ut prior. 
29. Pulvis niger, nosocomii sancti Bartholomæi. 
♃. Æthiop. miner. 
Antimon. crud. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Capiatur j. hor. med. cum haustu aq. benedict. 
comp. Batean. 
30. Pulvis cardialgicus. 
(1.) ♃. Cretœ alb. pl. ℈j. 
Sal. absinth. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis ten. 
S. Capiatur cum hastu aq. calc. saccharo edulcorat.
(2.)

74 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius
♃. Corall. R. levigat. 
Cretœ alb. 
Oc. gro ror ppt. aa ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Ut prior. 
31. Pul vis ecbolicus, 
♃. Borac. ℈j. 
Castor. R. 
Croc. Ang. aa gr. vj. 
Ol. sabin. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Pulvis ad partum, in haustu julapii appropriati 
sumendus. 
32. Pulvis emmenagogus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myrrh. ℈j. 
Rubig. martis ℈ß. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Capiaiur bis in dies cum haustu infusi amari. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Rubig. martis ℈j. 
Cinnab. antimon. ℈ß. 
Spec. diamhrœ, gr. viij. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
33. Pulvis hystericus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myr. gr. xv. 
Castor. gr. vj. 
Sal.succin. gr. iij. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. sabin. vel puleg. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. julapii appropriat. sumendus.
(2.)

75 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Sperm. ceti ʒß. 
Assœ fœt. gr. ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
34. Pulvis astringens rubic. 
♃. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Croc. mart. astr. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij.
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. vini rubri sumend. 
35. Pulvis nephriticus. 
♃. Test. ovor. calcinat. ʒjß. 
Sperm. ceti ʒj. 
Tereh. e chio coct. ℈ij. 
Sacch. alb. ʒj. 
M.F. pulv. ten. pro chart. iv. 
S. Pulv. ad calculum, &c. cum haustu saponacea hor. 
med. vel 4ta quaq; hor. sumend. super bibendo copiose 
de decoct. altheœ
36. Pulvis ad hœmorrhagiam. 
♃. Nitri purisicat. 
Trochisc. de carab. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu julapii cretacei octavis 
horis sumendus. 
Of

76 Of a Bolus.
Of a BOLUS. 
§.127. A Bolus is a soft, cohesive, internal 
medicine, of a roundish figure, a 
little thicker or more consistent than honey, and 
limited in quantity to a morsel, or what may be 
easily swallowed at once: whence some call it 
buccella, a Morsel. 
§.128. The MATTER or ingredients which 
are admitted to enter this form (§.127.) are every 
thing that is fit for internal use, and is also capable 
of being reduced, either of itself or by mixture, 
to the considence beforemention’d (§.127.) So 
that this form may take in all 
1. Dry substances: which are effectual in a 
small dose, and suited to form the powder 
(§.110, & 111.) These are termed excipienda, 
or what are to be taken in by others; but 
alone, they are incapable of making up this 
form of medicine. 
2. Soft medicines: which are more or less te- 
nacious and consistent: as conserves, electu- 
aries, soft extracts, inspissated Juices, soft con- 
sections, thick balsoms, both native and arti- 
ficial, potable ointments, syrups, &c. which, 
are termed excipientia or receivers; because, be- 
ing mix’d with the former, they make up the 
consistence proper for a bole: and they have 
in some measure of themselves a natural fitness 
to make up this form. 
3. Liquids: which are of a small bulk in pro- 
portion to their Strength: as natural and arti- 
ficial liquid balsoms, oils, spirits, tinctures, es- 
sences, elixirs, &c. which being of themselves 
unfit for this form, are either receiv'd by the 
others (n° 1, 2.) or else they receive other 
more

77 of a Bolus. 
more consistent substances as accessory to the 
form. 
§.129. A proper Election of the several 
ingredients (§.128.) is directed by the following 
Considerations: 
1. The most commendable Qualities of a 
Bolus are, to be so consistent as to retain its 
form, and not run or spread flat by standing;
to be so soft as easily to give way to the action 
of the sauces and œsophagus in deglution; and 
to have the mixture of its several ingredients 
made uniform and equable. 
2. Hence, the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
and also the liquid (n° 3.) are of themselves 
not fit to make up this form; but they require 
the intervention of something soft and tenacious- 
(n° 2.) to cement or glue together the whole. 
3. Also the soft substances (§.128. n° 2.) 
do for the generality require to be incrassated 
by the Addition of some that are dry, in order 
to fit them for the formation of a bolus. Yet, 
some of them are susceptible of this form with- 
out any addition: as conserves, electuaries, and 
the thicker kind of inspissated juices. These 
may be therefore formed into simple boles, 
per §.62. 
4. Every ingredient shou’d be of such a dis- 
position, as to mix uniformly with each other 
in composition. 
5. Medicines which are viscid, sharp or acrid, 
or very unpleasant to the smell and taste, are 
much more suitable for this form, than that of 
a powder (§.111.); because they may be in this 
more concealed from those sensible organs. 
Whence, strong mercurials can enter no form 
more conveniently than this.
6. Such

78 Of a Bolus. 
6. Such as are fat and resinous, as balsoms, 
potable ointments, &c. should have their parts 
divided by grinding with sugar or something 
which is dry, that they may be the more easily 
dissolved and digested in the stomach. 
7. Fix’d and volatile alcaline Salts, and every 
thing else that suddenly exhales or else liquifies 
in the air, shou’d not enter the composition of 
boles which are to be kept some time: for by 
that means, the medicine will be much the 
worse in its form or consistence, as well as in- 
tended virtue. 
8. Nor are things which effervesce with each 
other, or easily ferment, fit to enter this form; 
unless the Bolus is to be taken soon after its 
composition. 
9. The number of ingredients for composing 
this form, should scarce ever exceed three or 
four, in a prescription. 
§.130. The more usual ORDER or method of 
placing the ingredients of this form in a pre- 
scription, is, to put the excipiens (§.128. n° 2.) 
first, as being determin’d in quantity; then, the 
excipienda or dry ingredients (ib. n° 1.); after- 
wards, the liquid Substances (ib. n° 3.); and last- 
ly, (if there be any) the excipiens whose quantity 
is left to be determin’d by the apothecary. 
§.131. The Dose (§.64.) of a bolus is ex- 
tended from one dram, to a dram and a half, or 
two drams; but the dose shou’d never be injudi- 
ciously increas’d beyond the last quantity, unless 
when the ingredients are very weighty in propor- 
tion to their bulk, and the patient happens to be 
a good taker of physic. But if the bolus should 
be made up of the lighter sort of ingredients, it 
ought not to exceed one dram. So that, when the 
proper and effectual dose of the ingredients ex-
ceeds

79 Of a Bolus. 
ceeds these bounds, it is more advisable to distri- 
bute the mass in several parcels or little boles, than 
to choak the patient with a great lump. Small- 
ness of bulk in a dose, as commendable in a pow- 
der (per §.113. n° 1.), is equally or more so in a 
bolus. We can hardly err in making the dose of 
this form too small, even tho' the bolus should not 
exceed a scruple. 
§.132. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is most frequently but one dose or bolus, or 
two, but seldom more than three or four, unless 
when they are to be taken at very short intervals 
of time. For as they are always sent in separate 
Doses, portion’d out by the apothecary, they 
easily become either too dry and hard, or too 
moist and liquid, by long keeping. Therefore, 
upon multiplying the number of doses with the 
mass (§.131.) together, the physician will know 
how much the general quantity, to be prescribed 
at one time, ought to be. 
§.133. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients of this form, is determin’d from 
their particular virtues and consistences. Consult 
§.87. & 115. So that the same proportion does 
not obtain in all cases alike. For, 
1. If the soft Substances (§.128. n° 2. & 
§.129. n° 3.) which are of themselves fit to 
compose a bolus, are order’d alone in a pre- 
scription, the reciprocal proportion of each of 
them may be determin’d from the known suffi- 
cient dose (§.66.), and the dose of the bolus 
(§.131.). Fur the consistence in that case, has 
no influence to limit the proportion. 
2. When the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
are to enter this form, they may be order’d for 
one dose in the quantity of ʒß. ℈ij, or, at most, 
ʒj. But the excipientia or soft substances (§.128.  
n° 2.)


80 Of a Bolus. 
n° 2.) require to be order’d in a different pro- 
portion, according as they are more or less 
consistent. As 
(1.) Conserves (which are the most frequent 
ingredients of this form), electuaries, honey, 
thick balsoms, &c. are order’d from ℈ij, to 
ʒj.or ʒjß. 
(2.) Inspissated juices, pulps, and soft con- 
sections are order’d from ʒß. to ʒj. or ℈jv. 
(3.) To make up a determinate quantity of the 
dry ingredients into this form, so much the less 
is required of the soft substances, as these latter 
are more liquid. 
3. Hence it appears, that when the quantity 
of dry ingredients is but small, it will be most
convenient to order the excipiens or soft substance 
to be of the more consistent kind: but when the 
quantity of the first is large, the consistence of 
the latter should be proportionably thinner or 
more liquid: that the dose (§.131.) of the 
bolus may not be too much enlarged. 
4. But if to the preceeding (n° 2.), liquids 
(§.128. n° 3.) are also added, they should not 
enter in a larger quantity than from gutt. j, to 
ij, iij, or at most, jv, for each bolus. And then 
the quantity of soft excipients must be propor- 
tionably diminished. 
5. Otherwise, the dry and liquid substances 
(n° 2. 4.) only may be order’d in a determi- 
nate quantity, and the quantity of the soft sub- 
stances or excipients may be left to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary, writing only q. s. (per 
§.58. n° 8 (7.)). But this method cannot be 
comply’d with, when the effectual dose of these 
requires an exactness of limitation. 
6. But very often, when the quantity of the 
dry ingredients is pretty large, and its preced- 
ing excipiens or soft substance is very consistent, 
or


81 Of a Bolus. 
or thick and small in quantity, so that we may 
thence doubt whether they will make the bolus 
of a proper consistence and pliability; in that 
case we may still add a secondary and more li- 
quid substance, e.g. syr. q. s. &c. 
7. On the contrary, when we foresee that the 
consistence of the bolus will be too thin or soft 
(§.129. n° 1.), it is usual to adjoin q. s. Sac- 
charic pulv. liquorit. &c. which more especially 
holds good When this form is to be made up of 
simple terebinthinates, &c. 
§.134. The Subscription or direction to 
the apothecary for this form may be thus: M. F. 
bolus or boli n°. ij, iij, &c. And it may be some- 
times necessary to enjoin the same caution, with 
regard to the division of this form, with that men- 
tioned concerning powders (§.118.), which may 
be thence repeated. Sometimes we also add in the 
prescription, either for ornament to the bolus, or 
pleasantness of taking, auri folio, or nebula obvol-
vatur, or exhibeatur cum nebula. Consult §. 119. 
The receptacles for conveying this form to the pa- 
tients, are generally either gallipots or proper pa- 
pers; for mentioning which in a prescription, 
there is hardly ever any occasion. 
§.135. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient, with regard to this form, may be easily 
understood from what has been already said upon 
that head (at §.120, to 125.), For a vehicle, some 
like a nebula or water best, others prefer some li- 
quor, wherein they may first dissolve the bolus. 
It is also generally of service to order some proper 
liquid to be drank after the bolus, especially if we 
have any reason to fear that it will meet with a 
difficult dissolution in the stomach; which is to be 
more particularly observed with regard to terebin-
thinate substances, and others of the like kind.
G §.136.

82 Boles.
§. 136. The Use of this form, a bolus, is pret- 
ty much the same with that of the powder (§.125.); 
but it is not so frequently in practice * as the pow- 
der: for boles, possessing in some measure the na- 
ture of a continuous and solid body, do frequently 
not act so speedily as we would desire (§.135.). 
We often use this form for variety, or to gratify those 
who are better pleased with a bolus than a powder. 
§.137. Take the following as specimens of this 
form: which may be adapted, with a small varia- 
tion according to particular circumstances, to most 
cases which occur in practice. 
1. Bolus emeticus pro adulto. 
(1.) ꝶ Vitrioli albi, gr. xxv. 
Elect, lenit. q. s. 
M, F. bolus, detur cum nebula. 
S. Bolus emeticus ex pauxillo cerevisiœ aut infusi 
theœ viridis hariendus: post quamlibet vomitio- 
nem superbibantur cyathi aliquot infusi ejusdem 
tepidi.  
Bolus emet. communis pro adulto. 
(2.) ♃. Rad. ipecacuan. pulv. ʒß. 
Syr. flor. persicor. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Bolus emet.—salinus—
♃. Sal. vel gillœ vitriol. ℈j. 
Tarari emet. gr. ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. q. s. 
M. F: bolus, in nebula dandus. 
S. Ut prior. 2. 
* This form is seldom used among us but in acute cases, when 
we exhibit emetics, cathartics, opiates, and strong alexipharmics, 
whose dose require to be well ascertain'd; tho' it may be used also 
in some chronical cases, when we are afraid a patient will fall 
short of his proper dose, in taking an electuary. 


83 Boles. 
2. Bolus purgans communis. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Calomelan. gr. xv. 
Ol. essent. sassafr. gtt. ij.
Elect. lenit. q. s. 
M. F. bolus deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus 
(2.)
♃. Scammm. gr. xij.
Cremor. tartar. 
Calamelan. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de rhabarb. q. s. 
M. F. bol. deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)
♃. Rad. rhœi opt. pulv. ℈j. 
Trochisc. Alhandal. gr. vij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Bolus leniens. 
♃. Rad. jalap. 
Rhei pulv. 
Tereb. venet. coct. pulv. aa ℈B. 
Nitri purificat. gr. xv. 
Elect. lenitiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. quotidie repetendus. 
G2 4.


84 Boles.
4. Bolus hydragogus. 
♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Gutt. gamb. ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. iij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum haustu cerivisiœ recentis calidœ
sumendus. 
5. Bolus rheumaticus catharticus. 
♃. Rad. jalap. ℈j. 
Gum. guaiac. 
Calomelan. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de ros. solutiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus. 
6. Bolus diuret. vel è cantharid. 
♃. Pulv. cantharid. gr. vj. 
Gamph. gr. iv. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° ij. 
Extract. thebaic. gr. ss. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Bol. &c. statim sumendus, superbibendo frequenter 
de decocto hordii, radicum & sumitat. althœœ sac- 
charo pauco dulcificato. 
7. Bolus alexipharm. vel sudorif. 
(1.) ♃.Sal. vol. C. C. 
Camph. aa gr. v. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° j. 
Confect. mitbrid. ℈ij. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu seri vinosi calidi sumendus.
(2.) 


85 Boles.
(2.) Bolus alexipharm. vel card. 
♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Contrayerv. aa ℈ß. 
Flor. benzoin, gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. chamom. gtt. j. 
Philon. Roman. ℈j. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Ut prior. 
8. Bolus cardiacus flav. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. flav. aurant. ʒß. 
Lap. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Croc. angl. gr. vij. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu julapii vel seri vinosi sumend. 
(2.) Bolus cardiacus rub. 
♃. Confect. alkerm. ℈ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℈j. 
Coccinell. pulv. ℈ß. 
Spir. vitriol. gtt. iij. 
M. F. bol.
S. Bol. &c. cum haust. apozemat. aquos. acidulat. 
exhibendus. 
9. Bolus febrifug. 
♃. Pulv. cort. elect. ℈j. 
Resin. ejusd. gr. vj. 
Cons. abs. pont. ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. j. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S.Bol. &c. 4ta vel 6ta quaque bora repetendus.
G3 10.

86 Boles. 
10. Bolus anodynus vel paregor. 
♃. Philon. Roman. ℈j. ad ʒß. 
F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane, vel H. S. sumendus, & pro re 
nata repetend. 
11. Bolus antihystericus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Cons. nut. 3j. 
Troch. de myrrh. ℈ß. 
Ol. stillat. succin. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, auri folio obducendus.
S. Bolus pacans cum aquœ pulegii cyatho sumendus. 
(2.)
♃. Gum. guaiac. 
Cinnab. antimon. 
Philon. Roman. aa ℈j. 
Ext. gentian. gr. vj. 
Syr. chalib. vel hyster. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Ut prior. 
12. Boli balsamici. 
Vid. Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. 2. obs. 2. 
ꝶ. Tereb. e chio ʒij. 
Pulv. liquorit. q. s. 
M. F. boli, n° ij. 
S. boli nervini, quorum alter mane, alter vesperi ex 
vitello ovi recentis sumatur, superbibendo singulis 
aq. lact. alexiter. ℥ij. 
13.

87 Boles. 
13. Boli sialogogi. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros rub. ʒß. 
Mercutii dulc. trit. gr. ix. 
M. F. bolus: cui similes duo alii seorsim 
confecti, exhibeantur cum totidem nebulis. 
S. Boli aperientes, quorum unum singulis quadrihoriis 
capiat œger, corpore prius ptisana appropriata bene 
impleto.  
14. Bolus scilliticus. 
♃. Pulp. scill. rec. ℈j. 
Ext. gentian, gr. vj. 
Spec. diamhr. ℈B. 
Ol. juniper. essent. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, contundendo. 
S. Bol, &c. bis in dies cum nebula sumendus, super- 
bibendo haustum julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
15. Bolus paregoricus refrigerans. 
♃. Spec. diatrag. frig. recent. ʒß. 
Sperm. cet. ℈j. 
Nitri purifcat. ℈ß. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. ß. 
Syr. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. 6ta quaque hora sumendus, cum haustu 
julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
16. Bolus alterans. 
♃. Cinnabar. antimon. ℈j.
Pulv. R. ari. rec. 
Gum. guaiac. aa ℈ß. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. bis in dies h. m. sumendus, cum haustu 
aq. benidict. C. Batean. 
F4 17.

88 Boles. 
17. Bolus pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℈j. 
Rad. ir. Florent. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi chemic. gtt. j. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, &c. 
18. Bolus ad asthma nervosuni. 
♃. Cinnabar, nativ. ℈j. 
Cort. peruv. opt. pulv. ℈ß. 
Syr. pœon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bis in dies sumendus cum haustu infusi amari S. 
19. Bolus ad diarrhœam. 
♃. Pulv. rhei. torrifact. ℈ß. 
Spec. pro. confect. fracast. ℈j. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
Syr. e mecon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu decocti albi sumendus. 
Of an ELECTUARY. 
§.138. AN ELECTUARY is a soft, internal 
medicine: pretty much resembling 
the consistence of a bolus (§.127.), but not 
quite so thick; being prescribed for by more doses 
than one at a time, which are not to be portion’d 
out by the apothecary. This form sometimes, 
(tho’ seldom) comes under the denomination of
mistura; but is frequently term’d (among foreign 
physicians), from its preserv’d or candy’d ingre- 
dients, conditum: it is also sometimes named by 
them,

89 Of an Electuary. 
them, opiatum, from the opium in its composi- 
tion. 
§.139. The Matter or ingredients admitted 
to enter the composition of this form, are the same 
with those of the bolus (§.128.) If any have the 
preference, they are conserves; which are gene- 
rally taken into the composition of electuaries, 
more constantly and largely than the other sub- 
stances. 
§.140. The CHOICE of the most suitable in- 
gredients for this form, is also pretty much the 
same with that of the bolus, preceding (§.129.): 
yet the following considerations relate more parti- 
cularly to the Electuary. 
1. Such substances should more especially be 
kept out of this form, as are very unpleasant in 
smell, take and colour; by reason, electuaries 
are of constant and frequent use. 
2. Such things as liquify, exhale, corrupt, 
effervesce or easily ferment and turn sower, are 
the less suitable for this form, as the composi- 
tion is required to be pretty soft, and to keep 
some time. 
3. For the same reasons (n° 2.), the com- 
mixture of ingredients, in an electuary, should 
be perform’d with the greatest accuracy and ex- 
actness; the trituration of brittle substances shou’d 
be continu’d till they are exceeding fine, and the  
mixation of such as are fat or oily, resinous or 
terebinthinate, should be effected by yolks of 
eggs; left they should separate, subside or e- 
merge, by standing the length of time which 
this form frequently requires to be taken in. 
4. Hence also, if substances which are very 
heavy in proportion to their bulk, are to enter 
the composition of an electuary, its consistence  
is


90 Of an Electuary. 
is then required to be a little thicker than other- 
wise. 
5. Therefore the drastic or strongest purga- 
tives, with the preparations of mercury and 
other metals, are not suitable for an electuary; 
for, by an inequality of their mixture, by their 
precipitation in keeping, or by a careless dosing 
or partition ot the electuary in taking, which 
is usually left to be done by the patient or his- 
attendants; the use of such ingredients in this 
form might prove of dangerous consequence. 
6. An electuary will indeed admit of a few 
more ingredients to enter its composition, than 
a bolus (§.129. n° 9.): yet it should not be 
over-charg’d, (per §.29.). 
7. The covering this form with leaf-gold or 
silver, and sometimes intermixing them in 
the substance of an electuary, for the sake of 
ornament, or to please the patient; may be or- 
der’d at discretion by them who approve there- 
of, being at the same time mindful of the 
Rules §.85. n° 5. 
§.141. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form in a prescription, is not much diffe- 
rent from that used in writing for a bolus (§ 130.): 
the soft substances whose weight are determin’d, 
should take the first place; then, the dry ingre- 
dients; afterwards, the liquid; and lastly, we 
are to place those, whose weight or quantity is to 
be ascertain’d by the apothecary, and are usually 
wrote for under q. s. or quantum sufficit. Hence 
it appears, that when the soft substances are not 
to be ascertained in their weights by the physician 
in his prefcription; in that case, they must give 
place to the dry ingredients, which may then be 
placed first. 
§.142.

91 Of an Electuary.
§.142. The DOSE of an electuary shou'd not 
without necessity be made larger than that of a bo- 
lus (§.131.). It is seldom determin'd by weight, 
but is generally taken by bulk, as by the size of 
filberts or hazle-nuts, wall-nuts, chesnuts, and 
nutmegs, or as much as can be taken upon the 
point of a knife, spoon, &c. Sometimes the 
whole electuary is order'd to be taken at so many 
times, v. g. 3, 4, 5, &c. at certain intervals of 
time. But in those cases we must also be mindful 
that those parts or portions are not larger than 
can be conveniently swallowed at once. 
§.143. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed for at one time, is scarce 
ever less than ℥j, and very seldom exceeds ℥jv, 
or five at most: according as indications require a 
more of less frequent or continued taking of the 
electuary. When this form is order'd in very large 
quantities, or is to be kept a good while, it fre- 
quently grows either too thick and dry, too thin 
and soft, or is otherwise corrupted and spoiled * 
§.144. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is something diffe- 
rent from that of the bolus (§.133.), by reason an 
electuary is of a softer consistence (per §.138.); 
this variation of proportion, may however be li- 
mited by the following considerations. 
1. As the soft Substances or excipientia (§.128. 
n° 2.) are more or less consistent, they will 
require
* It is almost become a rule among us, that the general quan- 
tity of an extemporaneous electuary should seldom exceed ʒ iij. 
and thereabout ℥jss of conserve, ʒij. of powders, with 
a q. s. of syrup, amount to; tho' cinnabar, and some of the hea- 
vier things will not take up so much syrup. And if this rule, 
as to quantity, be not observed by the prescriber, but more he 
order'd, it is a common thing for the compounder to do it for him, 
by proportioning the materials suitable thereto; as by making up 
half, or a third of what is directed.

92 Of an Electuary. 
require a greater or less proportion of the dry 
excipienda (§.128. n° 1.). Hence, supppose the 
dry ingredients or excipienda to be ʒj. if the 
soft excipientiœ are of the thicker kind, as con- 
serves, officinal electuaries, &c. it will be ne- 
cessary to take of them ʒj: if they are thinner, 
as inspissated juices, pulps, honeys, soft con- 
fections, &c. we may take ʒiij: if more liquid, 
as syrups, ʒij will be sufficient. (See §.133. 
n° 2.) 
2. If therefore the soft excipientia of this 
form, are of different consistences, it will be no 
difficult matter to determine the mutual propor- 
tion of each {per. n° 1.). And it is customary, 
in prescribing this form, to limit only the thick- 
er substances by weight, and to subjoin those 
which are more fluid under the title of q. s. or 
quantum sufficit (per §.133. n° 6.) 
3. If ingredients be added to this form which 
are merely liquid ( per §.128. n° 3.), the mu- 
tual proportion of these may be learned from 
what has been said (at §.133. n° 4.), compar’d 
with the dose, and general quantity of the. elec- 
tuary to be prescribed, (per. §.142. and 143). 
The quantity of soft excipients must be then 
proportiorubly diminish'd, or that of the dry in- 
gredients must be accordingly increased. 
4. One or two leaves of gold or silver will 
be generally sufficient to decorate the whole 
mass of the electuary (§.143.). 
5. Sometimes the patient chuses to have the 
electuary a little softer than usual, that it may 
be the more easily diluted and taken in some li- 
quor, We, may easily obtain this point, by 
in larging the quantity of fluid excipients(n° 1, 2.). 
and by giving notice in the subscription, when 
the quantity of those ingredients is left to be de- 
termin'd by the Apothecary. 
6. What

93 Of an Electuary.  
6. What may be said further in this place, 
relating to the mutual proportion of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be seen at §.133. 
n° 3. 5. 6. 7. to which we therefore refer. 
§.145. The usual SUBSCRIPTION, or direction 
to the apothecary for this form, is no more than 
M. or M. F. electuarium vel conditum; adding 
molle, when it is to be of a thinner consistence, 
(per §.144. n° 5.). The common receptacle to re- 
tain and convey this form to the patient, is, a 
white, earthen gallypot; of which, there will be 
no occasion to make mention in a prescription. 
§.146. The Signature or direction to the 
patient proper for this form, is sufficiently appa- 
rent from §.135. 138. & 142. Sometimes it may 
be proper to advise the patient in this place, to 
stir up the electuary before taking; especially if it 
contains ingredients of a great specific gravity, or 
which are very apt to separate from each other. 
§.147. The use of this form is pretty much 
like that of the bolus (§.136.) *; but an electuary 
is not so suitable for the intention of an hysteric, 
by reason of the great quantity of sugar which usu- 
ally enters its composition. 
§. 148. Take the following Specimens of this 
form. 
1.
* There is however an obvious difference between the use of 
this form and that of a bolus: for an electuary is mostly used in 
chronical cases, and consist chiefly of alteratives; but it is not so 
with a bolus. See §.136.—Yet it is allowable, in case of po- 
verty, to save the patient from the expence of boles by ordering an 
electuary; even in acute cases, and where the electuary will co- 
incide with the proper nature of a bolus; if so be we can rely 
on the exact dosing thereof. 

94 Electuaries.
1. Elect. purgans antiphlogist. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 230. 
ꝶ. Tamarind, elect. pulp. ℥ij. 
Crystall. tartar. minutim. pulv. ʒij. 
M. 
S. Capiat omni 1/8 horœ ʒj. donec commode purgetur. 
2. Elect. solutivum. 
♃. Pulp. cash. rec. 
Fruct. tamarind. aa ℥jß.  
Pulv. rhei  ʒjß. 
Cremor. tartar. ʒvj. 
Tartar. vitriolat. ʒß.  
Syr. violar. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem nucis castan.
mane & vesperi, vel ter in die. 
3. Electuar. aromaticum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Limon. aa ℥ß. 
Rad. Z. Z. & N. M cond. aa ʒiij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Syr. cinnamomi q. s. ad consist. debit. 
M. F elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. avellan. vel mos- 
chatœ subinde: vel ter in die, paulo ante pastum. 
4. Elect. stipticum incrassans. 
ꝶ Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ij.
Mivæ cydonior. ℥j. 
Flor. granat. ʒjß. 
Boli armen. lœvig. ʒij. 
Lap. Hœmatit. ppt. ʒj. 
M. F. conditum. D. ad fictile album. 
S. Elect. astringens, de quo ter vel. quater de die ad 
castaneœ magnitudinem capiatur. 
5.


95 Electuaries. 
5. Elect. astringens. 
♃. Confect. fracastor. 
Cons. ros. rubr. aa ℥ß. 
Sang. dracon. ʒiij. 
Rad. rhei terrifact. ʒj. 
Ter. Japon. ℈j. 
Sur. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat Q. N. M. minoris ter 
in die. 
6. Elect. alterans 
♃. Cons. fruct. cynosbat. ℥jß.
Cinmb. antimon. ʒiij. 
Gum. Guaiac. ʒij. 
Ol. sassaf. in sacch. q. s. solut. gtt. vj. 
Syr. de 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat quant. nuc. mosc. mane & 
vesperi cum haustu cerivisœ medicat. calid. 
7. Elect. balsamicum. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbator. ʒx. 
Carn. viperin. pulv. ℥j. 
Rad. ering. cond. ʒij. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj.
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiatur q. n. m. 4ta quaque 
hora. 
8.


96 Electuaries. 
8. Elect. cephalicum. 
♃. Cons. flor. caryophil. ℥j.  
Anth. ℥ß. 
Rad. valer. sylv. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒijß. 
Succ. cherm. q. s.  
M. F. elect.
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. hor. med. cum 
haustul. julapii appropriate. 
M. F. eleft. 
9. Elect. pectorale. 
♃. Trochisc. bec. alb. ʒx. 
Rad. ering. condit. ʒij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Ol. essent. anis. gtt. vj. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. urgente tusse. 
10. Elect. excitans in febrili languore. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 119. 
ꝶ. Confect. alkerm. ʒj. 
Zinzib. condit. ʒvj. 
Rad. contrayerv. 
Serpentar. virgin, aa ʒj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
Ut. F. elect. 
S. capiatur 3ß. omni quadrihorio. 
11.

97 Electuaries. 
11. Elect. refrig., acidulat. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. berher. ℥ij. 
Ros. rub. ℥ß.
Ol. sulph. q. s. ad grat. acidit. 
Syr. diamar. q. s. ut. 
F. elect. molle. 
S. Elect. cardiac. cujus in orem solvatur q. n. avel-
lan. subinde. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. ros. rub. ℥ß. 
Pulp. tamarind. ʒiij. 
Sp. vitriol, ad grat. acid. 
Succ. cherm. q. s. ad debit. consist. 
M. F. elect. molle. 
S. Ut supra. 
12. Elect. antifebrile. 
ꝶ. Cort. Peruvian, opt. ℥ß. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒij. 
Syr. 5. Tad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Sumatur tempore apyrexias, omni bihorio octava 
pars totius, ex vino. 
13. Elect, ad strumas. 
♃. Cons. cochlear. hort. 
Æthiop. min. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒvj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus sumat q. n. m. ter de die, cum 
hanstu appropriat. liquor. 
H 14.

98 Electuaries. 
14. Elect. stomachicum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Absinth. Rom. aa ʒvj. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒij. 
Spec. diamb. 
Menth. crisp. aa ʒj. 
Syr. e cond. R. Z. Z. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. sumat q. n. m. ter vel quater de die
cum haustul. vini rub. 
15. Elect. deobstruens. 
(1.) ♃. Conf. absinth. Rom. ʒj. 
Ext. rad. gentian. ʒj. 
Sapon. venet. 
Millep. viv. aa ʒiij.
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiat q. n. m. ter in die. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. cochl. hort. ℥j. 
Pulp. scillit. torrifact. ℥ß. 
Pulv. ari rec. ʒjß.
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiatur ut supra, cum haust. vin. millepid.
16. Elect. chalibiatum. 
♃. Cons. absinth. Rom. ʒjß. 
Rubigin. mart. ʒiij. 
Spec, diamhr. ʒjß. 
Cinnah. antimon. ʒj. 
Syr. chalib. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat q. n. m. ter de die, cum
haustu julapii appropriat. 
Of

99 Of a Linctus. 
Of a LINCTUS 
§.149. A LINCTUS (call’d by the Greeks 
eclegma, and by the Arabians Loch, 
or Lohock) is a soft, internal medicine, thinner 
than the electuary (§.138.), but not so apt to run 
or spread as a thick syrup, which it very much re- 
sembles; being composed of the softer and more 
viscid kind of ingredients, which are to be, at se- 
parate times licked up by the tongue, retained in 
the mouth, and afterwards swallowed as they gra- 
dually dissolve there. 
§.150. The MATTER or ingredients fit to 
compose this form of medicine, is pretty much the 
same with what enters the composition of the elec- 
tuary (§.139.), or bolus (§.128.). It also takes 
in officinal lohochs, sweet oils made by expression, 
mucilages, the yolks of eggs, and sometimes dis- 
tilled waters. 
§.151. For the Choice of ingredients most 
suitable for this form, we are to observe. 
1. If any of the dry and solid substances 
(§.128. n° 1) are to  enter the composition of 
this form, they are required to be ground ex- 
ceeding fine, or to be easily dissolvable; that 
they may not injure the softness and uniformity 
proper to a linctus: to prevent which, such 
things are generally left intirely out of this form. 
2. It is upon the same account that most con- 
serves and candied simples are seldom permitted 
to enter the composition of a linctus, unless they 
have been first pulped thro’ a strainer, which 
should never be omitted in compounding for 
nice patients. 
3. The very strongest medicines, cannot be 
safely admitted into this form because they so
H2 easily

100 Of a Linctus.
easily separate, precipitate or emerge by stand- 
ing in a linctus, whose dose is at the same time 
too uncertain for such things, being not deter- 
mined with exactness by weight; so that the 
effects of such medicines could never be depend- 
ed on in this form. But as a linctus is not fitted 
for such ingredients, our indications never call 
for them in that form. 
4. Acrimonious ingredients, and such as are 
unpleasant to the smell and tast, require to be 
more cautiously avoided in this form than any 
other; for as a linctus stays so long in the mouth, 
as it is swallowed so slowly, such things would 
nauseate the patient, and render the medicine 
very difficult to be taken. 
5. As oily and mucilaginous substances are 
very frequently prescribed in this form, we 
should be the more careful that they are not 
rancid or otherwise corrupted: an ill quality 
which they readily acquire by long standing in 
the shops.  
6. It is in the general very proper to beat up 
oily substances with the yolk of an egg; to which 
may be afterwards added, sugar, honey, and 
the compositions made up with these. 
7. The number of ingredients admitted into 
this form in a prescription, is the same with 
that of a bolus §.129. n° 9. 
§.152. For the ORDER in which the several 
ingredients of this form are to be placed in a pre- 
scription, there is hardly any constant one observ’d. 
Such things as serve to prepare and mix ingredients 
which are difficultly soluble (per §.151. n° 6.), 
should be placed next to each other; but for the 
rest, they may be placed by the rules at §.57. 
n° 2, 3, 5.
§.153. 

101 Of a Linctus. 
§.153. The Dose of a linctus is seldom ascer- 
tained by weight; bat when it is, it should not 
exceed ℥ß. The more usual method of dosing this 
form, is, by the measure of a large, eating, or 
small, tea-spoon, or as much as can be taken up by 
a bruised liquorish stick *. 
§.154. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, which is usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is nearly the same with that of an electuary 
(§.132.); hardly ever exceeding ℥vj †. unless 
there should be a speedy consumption of the me- 
dicine from the very frequent repetition of its use. 
The great inclination of the softer saccharine com- 
positions to ferment, the natural aptitude of ingre- 
dients which are oily or mucilaginous to turn rank 
and corrupt, and more especially great heat of 
weather, do each forbid preferibing this form in 
large quantities. 
§.155. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingredients which are to make up this form, is 
determin’d from a previous knowledge of the con- 
sidence of each ingredient, and from considering 
also the considence (§.149.) proper to a linctus 
itself. Hence 
1. A linctus may be compounded in almost 
any proportion of Ingredients, whose consistence 
is much the same with that of the form itself: 
such are officinal lohocks, honey, cream, yolks 
of eggs, soft confections, syrups, mucilages, 
expressed oils, and the like viscid substances. 
The medicinal virtues of each ingredient, their 
price and other circumstances (mention’d §.66. 
n° 1. to 14.) may also have some influence in 
limiting their proportion. Saponaceous sub- 
H3 stances
* A method of taking now in difuse with us. 
† The quantity of a linctus order'd at one time among us, is 
seldom more than half this Quantity. 

102 Of a Linctus. 
stances may be order’d in a quantity sufficient 
to reduce such as are oily (per §.151. n° 6.) 
The yolks of eggs should be three times as much 
as the oil, &c. but honey or sugar must enter 
in a larger quantity. 
2. Conserves, electuaries, and pulps, require 
to be diluted with almost three times their quan- 
tity of syrup; but dry substances require eight 
times as much syrup: from whence we may per- 
ceive the proportion of each kind of ingredients. 
But when the solid parts of dry substances, or 
of conferves, are to be pulped thro' a strainer 
(per §.151. n° 2.), a less quantity of syrup 
will suffice. 
3. Distilled oils, liquid balsoms, elixirs, es- 
sences, tinctures, spirits, and the like, which 
are very strong, should enter a linctus (as in an 
electuary §.144. n° 3.) in but a very small quan- 
tity, so that there will be hardly any occasion to 
change the proportion of the rest of the ingre- 
dients upon their account. 
4. Distilled waters may happen to over-dilute 
the consistence proper to this form, if they are 
order’d in a certain quantity, and therefore it is 
best to leave the quantity of them to be deter- 
mined at the discretion of the apothecary. 
Upon the same account, the quantity of syrup 
is also frequently order’d by q. s. When the 
consistence of a linctus happens to be too thin, 
it may be helped by a q. s. sacchar. alb. 
5. The degree of consistence (§.149.) is 
however not so ablolutely proper to and inse- 
parable from a linctus, but that it may frequent- 
ly be made a little thicker or thinner than what 
is there mentioned: whence we learn, that the 
rules now deliver’d for proportioning the ingre- 
dients of this form, are not absolutely invio- 
lable. If we have any reason to fear a Separa- 
tion


103 Of a Linctus.
tion or emersion of the oily parts, it is a suffi- 
cient authority to make the consistence of a 
linctus a little thicker than ordinary. 
§.156. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary, concerning the composition of this 
form, is by the physician order’d M. F. linctus. 
adding per setaceum trajeciendus, when it is to be 
passed thro’ a sieve or strainer. When the ingre- 
dients are not inclined to mix uniformly together, 
it may be proper for him to advise the apothecary 
to let them be beat up well together for a good 
while. The common receptacle for a linctus, is 
a gallypot, or a wide-mouth’d phial, which may 
be either added or omitted in a prescription. Some- 
times the dose is determin’d by a scraped liquorish 
stick *, bruised at one end, which being dipped 
in the linctus, is afterwards cleared by licking it 
off. The subscription therefore concludes detur ad 
fictile cum bacillo liquoritiœ. 
§.157. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient concerning the taking of a linctus, may 
be deduced from what has been said under that 
head (§.60.) in general, and from (§.120. 121. 
122. 146.): it imports at least that a certain quan- 
tity (§.153.) the linctus is to be taken conti- 
nually or at certain intervals, to lie in the mouth 
'till it gradually dissolves there, and to be after- 
wards swallowed. If we suspect there will be a Se- 
paration or inequality of parts by its standing, it 
may be proper to order the medicine to be stirred 
about before any of it be taken. 
§.158. The USE of this form is only in dis- 
orders which infest the internal parts of the mouth, 
fauces, œsophagus, larynx, trachea and bronchia: 
* This method of taking a linctus, by a liquorish-stick, is of late 
rejected among us, as being more disagreeable, unsightly, and less 
exact than the use of a tea-spoon. 
H4 whence 


104 Linctus’s. 
whence lohocks are frequently order’d in apthæ, 
coughs, peripneumonis, phthisis, &c. to answer 
the intention of softening, healing, astringing, 
&c; for it is very rare that a linctus is order’d in 
any other diseases or intentions. 
§.159. Specimens of this form. 
1. Linctus communis. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥j. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥ij. 
Spt. vitriol, q. s. ad grat. acid. 
M. exactissime, F. linctus. 
S. Linct. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem cochleœ mi- 
noris subinde. 
2. Linctus ad sputa suppresa in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 148. 
ꝶ Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥jß.
Syr. violar. 
Mell. virgin. 
Vitell. ov. recent. aa ℥ß. 
M. accurate. 
S. Lingat. unc. ß. omni hord, donec sputa redeant.  
3. Lindus pectoralis niger. 
(1.) ♃. Succ. Hispan. ʒj.
Ext. R. liquor it. angl. ʒij. 
Ol. sem. lin. rec. frig. ext. ʒvj. 
Hysop. distillat. gtt. iv. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Linct. &c. ut prior sumendus. 
(2.)


105 Linctus's. 
(2.) Lintus pectoralis albus. 
♃. Trochisc. bech. alb. ʒiij. 
Sperm. ceti. ʒjß. 
Ol. sem. sinap. ʒx. 
Vitel. ov. rec. n° j. 
Syr. balsamic. ℥ijß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)—ruber. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. bals. tolut. 
Gum. benz. aa gtt. xx. 
Ol. chem. anis. gtt. iij. 
Syr. papav. errat. ʒjß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
4. Linct. ad partes aphthis delapsis excoriatas. 
H. Boerh. p. 170. 
ꝶ Syr. papav. alb. 
Cremor. lact. dulc. aa ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n° ij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. F. linctus. 
S. Hujus pauxillum ore assiduo contineat. 
5.


106 Pills.
5. Linctus tussim leniens. 
ꝶ. Loho. sani & experti. 
Syr. diacod. 
Mucilag. rad. alth. aq. ros. ext. aa ℥j. 
Spermat. cet. vit. ov. solut ʒj. 
Sacch. crystall. q. s. 
M. F. linct. detur in fictili cum baculo 
S. Lambat. sæpius, cum tustis urget. 
liquoritiæ. 
6. Linctus incrassans Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. 
Syr. violar. 
de mecon. aa ℥j. 
Sem. papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Contusis simul, & per setaceum trajectis, adde 
Ol. nuc. mossch. expr. gtt. vj. 
F. eclegma. 
S. Ut supra. 
Of PILLS
§.160. A Pill (the catapotium or Kαlαπoπov
of the Greeks) is a small, dry or solid, 
internal medicine; of a globular figure: made up 
of thick and cohesive substances, so as to be flex- 
ible, or give way to a small pressure. 
§.161. The MATTER or ingredients allowed 
to enter this form, is, every thing fit for internal 
use, which is capable of being brought, either of 
itself or by mixture, to the due consistence (§.160.) 
of a pill. So that in the general, we may admit 
all


107 Of Pills. 
all those substances into this form, which are enu- 
merated at §.110. 
§. 162. But a CHOICE of these several ingre- 
dients is necessary, in order to maintain the re- 
quisite cohesion, smallness of dose, and proper fi- 
gure of this kind of medicine: in order to which, 
1. Some ingredients are termed excipientiay 
others excipienda. (see §.86. 128.) Both which, 
tho’ they are the principal parts of the form, 
are yet frequently of such a texture, that they 
cannot be conveniently made into a mass of 
pills alone, without the addition of something 
accessory. 
2. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and co- 
hesive; as gums, resins, gum-resins, solid ex- 
trads, inspissated juices, officinal masses for 
pills, hard sopes, the stronger fort of troches, 
&c. or (2.) dry and brittle, or fit for pulveri- 
sation, whether they be animal, vegitable, or 
mineral substances. 
3. The first kind of these ingredients are the 
most suitable and frequent in use for this form. 
Such chiefly of the latter or brittle kind are ad- 
mitted into this form, as are very weighty in 
proportion to their bulk, or act strongly in a 
small dose: but light and dry powders, whose 
parts are gross, do not easily stick together, 
and act only in a large dose, are generally ex- 
cluded from the form of pills. 
4. But the officinal masses of pills, are, for 
the generality, better omitted in prescribing 
this form; except a few of the more neat and 
frequent in use: because they usually grow too 
dry, or are otherwise corrupted by long keep- 
ing. 
5. Salts also, which soon liquify or exhale 
in the air, are not so convenient for this form: 
they may however be permitted in a small quan- 
tity,

108 Of Pills. 
tity, when combined with other proper ingre- 
dients. 
6. But the most, powerful and acrid medi- 
cines of any kind, preparations of mercury, me- 
tals, and the like, are fitter to be exhibited in 
this form than any other. 
7. Ingredients also, which are the most of- 
sensive to the smell and taste, may be conveni- 
ently receiv’d into this form; because no other 
form of medicine can conceal them so well as 
Pills. 
8. The excipientia (n° 1.) are supplied from 
substanccs which are either (1.) thick: as honey, 
turpentine, extracts, electuaries but very seldom, 
to which we may add the crumb of new bread, 
and things of the like kind, or (2.) soft or less 
thick: as thin confections, syrups, liquid bal- 
soms, mucilages, the yolks of eggs, &c. or (3.) 
liquid: as essences, elixirs, tinctures, spirits, 
essential oils, &c. 
9.But it is not any of theforemention’d (n° 8.) 
excipients that will suit every kind of excipiend 
(n°.2.): for such as are dry and tenacious (n° 2. 
(1.).), especially refinous, should be mix’d with 
the more liquid excipients (n° 8. (3).) or else 
joined with the yolks of eggs, balsoms or tur- 
pentines. The dry and brittle substances (n° 2. 
(2.).) require to be mix’d with the thick and 
glutinous excipients (n° 8. (2.).) 
10. Sometimes all or some ot the excipienda 
(n° 1. 2.) are selected from some one class of the 
excipientia (n° 8.), being more or less tenaci- 
ous : in which case, the excipientia are to be sa- 
turated with dry and bibulous powders, as slow- 
er, powder of liquorish, and the like. 
11. The number of ingredients taken into 
this form, is much the same with that of the 
bolus (§.129. n° 9.), if the mass of pills or- 
der'd

109 Of Pills.
der’d is but small; but when the quantity pre- 
scribed for at once is large, the number of in- 
gredients may be the same with that of the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.163. The ORDER (§.57.) of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is 
hardly always the same; but the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 2. and 10.) ought to be generally placed first, 
and ranged according to the likeness or affinity 
and quantity of each (per §.57. n° 2. 3.): 
afterwards may be subjoined the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 8. 10.), the last of which should be such as are 
prescribed in no determinate quantity (per §.57. 
n° 5.). When the several constituent parts of a 
form (§.74.) enter the composition of pills, we 
should then place them by the rule (at §.57. n° 4.): 
which, frequently takes place in purging pills. 
§.164. The quantity of each pill is at present 
much less than formerly; but it is not constant- 
ly and universally the same: for different patients, 
physicians and nations, use pills of different sizes 
and weights. It is generally reputed a large Pill 
(among the Dutch) that weighs viij or x grains; 
which is however the quantity generally used among 
us and the French, who even permit our pills to 
be sometimes larger than that. Pills are deemed 
to be midling, when they are between two and 
five grains, which is almost the received standard 
for pills in Holland. The Germans love the least
pills, of a grain weight, which will frequently 
seem a large pill to many of them, unless it be 
subdivided into ij, iij, or iv lesser pills. But with 
regard to the mass of a pill in general, the young 
prescriber should observe, that 
1. Pills of the same moles or weight may be 
some very large, others very small, in propor- 
tion to the different specific gravities of the in-  
gredients

110 Of Pills.
gredients which compose them: so that a regard 
ought always to be had to the specific gravity of 
each ingredient, in limitting the mass of a pill. 
2. Smallness in a pill facilitates its dissolution 
in the stomach, and of consequence makes it act 
the more readily; because small pills have a 
greater surface in proportion to their contents, 
than large ones. 
3. But then on the contrary, large pills are 
for the same reason fitter for keeping; because 
they do not so soon grow dry, hard, add lose 
their virtue by exhalation. 
4. The physician will therefore accommo- 
date the size or weight of the pills to his parti- 
cular intention, the nature of their ingredients, 
their general quantity, or the mass which he 
prescribes, the quantity proper for a dose, &c.
together with the circumstances of the patient 
and place (per §.30. 43.): from weighing and 
comparing which, he will readily find out the 
rule which is to direct him in this point. 
§.165. For the DOSE of this form, the less the 
better, and more agreeable if it be but of sufficient 
strength; so that we can hardly commit an error 
in making the dose of a pill or pills too small. A 
moderate and commodious dose is between ℈j. 
and ʒß. It seldom amounts to ℈ij. or ʒj. unless 
in very urgent cases, when the ingredients are of 
a great specific gravity, or when the patient takes 
this form very easily. As for what further relates 
to the dose of this form, we may observe, that, 
1. Alteratives, which are of a slow opera- 
tion, difficult to dissolve in the primæ viæ, and 
are intended to be gradually insinuated into the 
mass of blood; such should be rather given in a 
small dose, and be frequently repeated, than to 
be crouded upon the patient all at once. 
2.

111 Of Pills. 
2. Salivating mercurials, drastic purgatives, 
and such like strong medicines, are, for the 
generality, more safely administer’d by dividing 
their proper dose into several smaller portions 
or pills; if so be the indication does not re- 
quire it to be otherwise, nor the nature of the 
disease or any thing else forbid it. See §.21. 
§.66. n° 13. §.67. n° 5. 
3. When the patient is to be purged without 
violence, or we would work upon the whole 
habit, it is usual to give one third or fourth 
part of the dose over night, and the rest the 
next morning. 
4. The number of pills for a dose may be de- 
termined by dividing the known quantity of 
the dose explained in this section, by the de- 
sired weight of each pill (per §.164.) 
5. There are some patients, from a supersti- 
tious notion which was introduced too by the 
physicians, who entertain an ill opinion of an 
even number of pills for a dose, especially when 
they are to purge. Such we may gratify by 
making the size of them a little less, and adding 
one more to their number. 
§.166. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is very vague and undetermined, being not assign- 
able but from the patient’s particular case com- 
pared with the weight and number of doses 
(§.165.): which latter, depend upon the physi- 
cians indications being rightly deduced, and com- 
pared with the several circumstances of the pa- 
tient, together with knowing and considering the 
disposition of each separate ingredient. Peruse 
what has been said at §.67. and 92. Evacuants 
are frequently prescribed for by only one, two, or 
three doses at a time: but alteratives are some- 
times order’d to as many ounces. In the mean 
time

112 Of Pills.
time the prescriber should be mindful of the rule 
at §.114. n° 2. Also what is there said at n° 3. 
is sometimes of consequence, with regard to the 
general quantity of this form. 
§.167. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral Ingredients of this form, may be determined 
without much difficulty, from the following con- 
siderations. 
1. The excipienda (§.162. n° 2. 10.) ma- 
king the main part of the mass, should be or- 
der’d in as many adiquate doses, suitable to the 
indication, (per §.66, 67. 87, to 91. 165, 
166.), as if they were to be exhibited separately. 
2. If these (n° 1.) are solid and tenacious 
(per §.162. n° 2. (1.)), there should be but 
little of the excipient (§.162. n° 8.) order’d; 
writing for it only by q. s. and sometimes it 
should be even wholly omitted in a prescrip- 
tion; the choice and quantity thereof, if any be 
required, being referred to the discretion of 
the apothecary. 
3. But if the excipienda be dry and brittle 
(per §.162. n° 2. (2.)), the quantity of the 
tenacious excipient must be various, according 
to the particular degree of its own consistence 
(§.162. n° 8.). The quantity thereof in gene- 
ral, should be the larger as it is thicker or 
more consistent. Whence, the particular quan- 
tity requisite, will be 
Supposing the dry excipienda as - ℥j. 
Of the exci-
pient that is 
of the thickest kind 
(§.162. n° 8.(1.)) 
ʒv to vj. 
softer or less thick 
(ib. (2.))  
ʒiij to iv.
liquid or thinest
(ib. (1.)) 
ʒij to iij.
such will be the quantities required to form a 
mass of a due consistence (§.160.) for pills. 
But

113 Of Pills. 
But sometimes in this case, as in the former 
(n° 2.), the quantity is left to be determined 
by the apothecary. 
4. From the foregoing, we may easily deter- 
mine the necessary proportion to be observed, 
when several excipients of different consistences, 
or excipiends of both classes (§.162. n° 2. (1.) 
(2.)), are order’d together, in the composition 
of pills. 
5. Such excipienda (§.162. n° 10.) as are 
less consistent than pills, are to be made up with 
a q. s. of some proper powder: tho' the requisite 
proportion of these too, may be understood 
from the rule at n° 3. 
6. If, in assigning the quantity of soft but ne- 
cessary excipients, you are doubtful, and afraid 
of ordering too much or too little, take a quan- 
tity so small, that you may be sure it is not suf- 
ficient, and subjoin q. s. of some other excipient, 
as Syr. &c. 
7. Hence appears, how necessary is the rule 
at §.35. A knowledge of the specific gravity 
of each ingredient is also here very serviceable; 
since that alone may make a great variation in 
the proportions necessary for a due consisence. 
8. What we have further to advise the young 
prescriber in relation to the proportion of 
parts in this form, is, that he be mindful of 
what we said before at §.86. and 88. n° 3. 
that if the excipientia possess the property of 
increasing or diminishing the action of the dry 
excipienda, that such alteration may be com- 
puted and allowed for in determining the dose, 
and the quantity of excipienda be proportion’d 
accordingly. See n° 1. of this section. 
§.168. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. pilulœ.
I Always  

114 Of Pills. 
Always subjoining afterwards the number of pills 
that is to be formed out of the whole mass: as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or, if the mass is large, by di- 
recting how many pills are to be formed out of a 
certain weight thereof: as ex scrupulo n° v, vij, &c. 
or lastly, by adding the exacs weight of each pill: 
as singulœ gr. ij, iij, iv, &c. Sometimes we direct 
them to be cover’d, by rolling them in some fine 
powder: as obruantur pulvere glycyrrhizœ, cinna- 
mom. &c. in which they are order’d to be rolled 
to prevent their sticking together. If we would 
have them gilded, We add deaurentur, or auri vel 
argenti foliis obducantur: which is the more al- 
lowable, as it makes them agreeable to the eye, 
confines their smell and taste, which are often ex- 
tremely unpleasant, keeps them from sticking to 
each other, from spreading flat, from growing 
too hard, dry, or crumbling into powder; but 
long keeping may deface their fine covering. The 
usual receptacle for this form is a scatula or box, 
seldom paper. 
§.169. The SIGNATURE, or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains first, the title,
compos’d of the name and virtue (per §.60. 
n° 3.); then the dose (§.165.), determining 
the number of pills to be taken at a time (ib. 
n° 4, 5.); unless when they are all to be taken 
for one dose. The time of taking them and the re- 
gimen to be used under their operation, are to be de- 
duced from the physicians indication: but here we 
must be careful, in strong doses which are divided 
into smaller portions {per §.165. n° 2.), that one 
part be not taken before the other begins to ope- 
rate and shew its effects; because, as pills are but 
slowly dissolved in the stomach, they may lie a good 
while before they begin to operate. As to a vehi- 
cle for this form, many use none at all; some use 
a thick or solid vehicle, as a waser, a fig, or rasin,
mar-


115 Of Pills.
marmalad, &c. others use liquid vehicles, which 
are generally best cold; because when they are 
hot, they in a great measure dissolve the pill, make 
it stick to the mouth, and give a greater offence 
to the taste. It is also, sometimes, necessary to 
drink some liquor after taking this form, in order 
to wash off what may have adhered to the mem- 
branes in its passage, to take off the disagreeable 
taste it may have left behind, and to facilitate its 
dissolution, and promote its action in the stomach. 
See §.60. n° 11. §.123. n° 2, 3. and §.135. 
§.170. The USE of this form is almost univer- 
sal, being equally extensive with that of the pow- 
der (§.125.): it is fitted as well for most evacuants 
as alteratives; but it is more especially useful and 
convenient in chronical cases. Pills are, however, 
sometimes given in acute cases, tho’ but seldom, and 
with the intention of narcotics, emetics *, and the 
like. One advantage which the form of pills possesses 
beyond any other, is, that it will commodiously 
take in and conceal ingredients which in other 
forms must be extremely nauseous and offensive. 
Yet, there are some particular patients to whom 
pills are less agreeable than other forms: and such 
we may gratify by changing it (per §.43.). Pills 
are also not very convenient for infants or young 
children, because they will chew them, and can- 
not get them down so easily as a liquid. They are 
also less suitable for dry habits of body (per §.47.); 
I2 but 
* Emetics are never order'd in pills among us, for the same rea- 
son that they are hardly ever given in form of a bolus: viz. left 
the cohesion of parts- in the form should be such, as to let them slip 
thro' the stomach (without exerting their energy there) into the in- 
testines, where they would become severe cathartics; whereas, in 
this intention, there is required the largest and speediest contact of 
surface between the parts of the medicine and the coats of the stomach. 
But our author, agreeable with foreign practice, begins his speci- 
mens of this form with emetic pills ex tart. emetic. gr. v. & micæ 
panis q. s. ut F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 

116 Pills. 
but that fault may be corrected by drinking some 
proper liquor, either before or after them. A diffi- 
culty, or incapacity, for swallowing in the patient, 
is a greater obstacle against ordering this form 
than that of a powder (§.125.). And lastly, the 
slow dissolution and operation of this form, being 
sometimes not speedy  enough for the intention, 
may also forbid its use. 
§.171. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Pil. cathartiæ communes. 
(1.) ♃. Pil coch. min. ℈j. 
Calomelan. ℈ß. 
Resin. jalap. gr. vj. 
Ol. junip. gtt. iij.
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 
S. Pil. &c. primo mane, in quovis vehiculo, cum re- 
gimine sumend. 
(2.)  
♃. Extract. rud. 
Pil. ex duob. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. chem. gtt. j. 
Elix. propriet. tartariz. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Summo mane cum regimine sumend. 
(3.)—ecphradicæ. 
♃. Pil. fœtid. gr. xv. 
Resin. jalap. 
Sal. succin. aa gr. v. 
Ol. succin. gtt. ij. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Pit. &c. quarum ij capiat hord somni, & tres 
summo mane, cum regimine.
2. 

117 Pills. 
2. Pil. alterantes. 
♃. Pil. ruffi ℈j. 
Ext. thebaic, gr. j. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° iij. 
S. Pil. &c. H. S. in quovis vehiculo sumendœ. 
3. Pilulæ resolventes, stimulantes, in morbis a 
glutinoso spontaneo. 
ꝶ Sapon. alcalici vel starkeani ʒjß
Extract. centaur. min.
Gumm. galban. aa ʒj. 
Sagapen.  ℈ij. 
Ol. stillat. absinth. gtt. xij. 
Cort. winteran. subtil. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ ex  ℈j. n° x. deaurandæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger ij. ter vel quater de 
die ex vino. 
4. Pilul. astringentes in fibra laxa, secund. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 8. 
ꝶ Extrad. tormentill. ʒj. 
Bistortœ. 
Pulv. cort. granator. aa ʒß. 
Lap. hœmatit. ppt. ℈j. 
Syr. myrtin. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ singulæ gr. ij. 
S. Pilulœ roborantes. Capiat œger umam ter, vel 
quater de die, ex ℥j. infusi, decocti, vel vini me- 
dicati, ib. p. 5 ad 7. descriptorum. 
I3 5.

118 Pills. 
5. Pilulæ martiales nigræ. 
♃. Mart. c. sulph. ppt. ʒjß. 
Sal. mart. 
Ter. japon. aa ℈ij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Extract. theœ virid. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ mediocres, obruantur pul-
vere sub. cort. cinnam. 
S. Nomine precedentium. Capiat unam ter die in 
quovis vehiculo, hora ante cibum. 
6. Pilulæ hypochondriacæ 
♃. Gumm. ammon. 
Asœ fœtid. 
Myrrh. pulv. 
Aloe socotrin. 
Rubig. mart. 
Extract. gent. aa ℈j. 
Syr. de 5. rad. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies cum haustul. 
vini amari. 
7. Pilulæ uterinæ. 
♃. Pil. gummos. ʒj. 
Fol. sabin. crisp. pulv. ℈ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. jv. 
Bals. sulph. terebinth. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pilulœ aperientes. Capiat n° iij. dosi, pro re 
nata repetend.
8. 

119 Pills.
8. Pilulæ emmenagogæ
♃. Cort. peruv. subt. pulv. ʒij. 
Rubig. mart. ʒj. 
Extract. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies c. haustu infusi 
amari. 
9. Pilulæ asthmaticæ. 
4. Pulp. scillœ siccat. 
Gumm. ammon. aa  ʒß. 
Flor. benz. ℈j. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres his in dies quovis vehiculo. 
10. Pilulæ terebinthinatæ. 
♃. Tereb. venet. 
E. chio coct. aa ʒj. 
Sacchar. alb. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies, superbibendo vi- 
tel. ov. rec. in haustul. vin. alb. dulcificati. 
11 Pilulæ febrifugæ.
♃. Ext. cort. peruv. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth.  ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. iv. 
Pulv. cort. elect. subt. q. s.  
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat unam omni hora, superbilendo 
haustum [℥iv.] theœ ex flor. chamom. factœ. 
I4 12.

120 Pills. 
12. Pilulæ ad strumas. 
♃. Hydrarg. in tereb. v. q. f. solut. 
Gumm. guaiac. aa ʒjß. 
Ol. sassafr. chem. gtt. xx. 
Ext. R. sarsaparill. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlvilj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies cum haustu ℥iv. 
aq. bened. Bat. C. 
13. Pilulæ nigræ. 
♃. Antimon. crud. levigat. 
Hydrarg. 
Pil. Ruffi aa ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Sumat quater omni nocte cum haust. aq. 
(ad n° xij.) precedent. 
14. Pilulæ ictericæ. 
♃. Sapon. e joppá ʒij. 
Pulv. rhei ℈ij. 
Ext. croc, anglic. ℈j. 
R. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. ex ʒß. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat quinque bis in dies cum haustu 
infusi amari. 
15. Pilula antisyphilica. 
♃. Merc. precipit. per se. 
Extract. thebaic. aa gr. j. 
Balsam. peruv. guttulam. 
M. F. pilula deauranda. 
S. Pil. ad sanguinem abstergendum, omni nocte sumenda. 
16.

121 Pills.
16. Pilulæ ceruleæ. 
♃. Scammon. ʒj. 
Gumm. guaiac. ℈ij. 
Camphor. ℈j. 
Hydrarg. ʒij. 
Ol. terebinth. gtt. vj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlviij. pulvere liquoritæ 
obruendæ. 
S. Titulo precedentis pilulœ. Capiat quater omni nocte. 
17. Pilulæ camphoratæ. 
♃. Gumm. guaiac. ʒij. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Bals. peruv. 
Ol. sassafr. aa gtt. xij. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xlviij. deaurantur. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij pro dosi. 
18. Pilulæ balsamicæ. 
(1.) ♃. Gumm. tragac. 
Tereb. e chio aa ℈ iv. 
Camphor. ℈ j. 
Bals. copaih. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. obruantur pulvere 
sang. dracon. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres mane & vesperi.
(2.)

122 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.)—in gonorrhea venerea.
Boerh. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. vulg. ℥j. 
Rei-barh. ℥ß. 
Glycyrrbiz. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ, singulæ gr. iv. 
S. Capiat unam omni hord. 
19. Pilulæ narcoticæ. 
(l.) ꝶ. Opii purissimi gr. ij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Detur una pro dosi, repetendo post horam, si prior 
nihil efficit, sic & tertio. 
(2.)—
♃. Pil. Matthœi gr. xij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Ut prior. 
Of TROCHES, or LOZENGES. 
§.l72. A Troche, (sometimes call’d up a pastill, 
or a Lozenge) is a pill (§.160.), tho' 
not of a globular figure, nor to be swallowed 
whole; but is to pass down the œsophagus slowly, 
after a gradual dissolution in the mouth, like a 
linctus (§.149.): hence, we might venture to term 
it eclegma solidum, a solid linctus. 
§.173. But it is here very proper to distinguish 
troches which are officinal from those which are ex- 
temporaneous (per §.6.); for tho' they both agree 
as

123 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
as to their form, they have frequently very diffe- 
rent uses or intentions: since the composition of 
the officinal troche is calculated chiefly for the pre- 
servation of certain species or ingredients, which 
are often, by that means, the better fitted to enter 
many other forms; but the extemporaneous regards 
more the case and circumstances of some particular 
patient. 
§.174. The MATTER, or ingredients of this 
form, are in general of two kinds: excipienda, 
things to be taken in by others; or excipientia (per 
§.128. n° 1, 2.) which are to take in, and make 
up the former.  
1. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and 
brittle; or (2.) dry and cohesive, or tenacious 
(vide §.162. n° 2.): or (3.) soft; as pulps, 
electuaries, &c. or (4.) liquid; which are either 
of the weaker and more dissused kind; as de- 
ceptions, infusions, &c. or else more contracted 
and strong; as effential oils, &c. 
2. The ingredients which serve for excipientia, 
are either (1.) liquid, with but little tenacity; 
as wines, distilled waters, spirits, vegetable jui- 
ces, decoctions, infusions, &c. or (2.) viscid: 
as the whites of eggs, mucilages, syrups, bal- 
soms, honey, pulps, &c. or (3.) dry and glu- 
tinous; as gums, extracts, inspissated juices, &c. 
or (4.) dry and not oily; as the meal of vetches, 
lupines, &c.
§.175. But a Choice of these ingredients is 
necessary for an accurate composition of this form; 
since the consistence, proper to each of the fore- 
going kinds, does not fit them promiscuously for 
an uniform mixture with each other. But, 
1. The dry excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) 
generally require to be joined with the viscid ex- 
cipientia ib. n° 2. (2.)).
2. 

124 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
2. The excipienda which, are dry and tena- 
cious (ib. n° 1. (2.)) may be well enough com- 
bin’d with the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. 
(1.)) when they are properly chose. 
3. The soft excipienda (n° 1. (3.)) are to be 
made of a due consistence for this form, by the 
mealy excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
4. The liquid excipienda (n° 1. (4.)) agree 
best with the dry and glutinous excipients (n° 
2. (3.)).
5. Thence, we may easily determine whether 
any, and what kind of excipients, are required 
when excipienda of different consistences enter 
together in composition. In which Case there 
is sometimes none at all required. 
6. Substances which are unpleasant to the 
smell and taste, shou’d be avoided in this form, 
or at least be added in a very small quantity, for 
reasons at §.151. n° 4. & §.172. 
7. Medicines of the more potent and pun- 
gent kind, shou’d also be here avoided; since 
their use and our intention do not call for them 
in this form. 
8. Salts, (for the same reason, and from their 
aptness to melt, with their unpleasant taste) are 
therefore scarce ever permitted to enter this 
form.
9. Sugar, on the contrary, is of very fre- 
quent use in this form; as it reconciles the taste 
of the medicine to the tongue, facilitates the 
dissolution thereof in the mouth, and increases 
their bulk or mass to a proper size. Which last 
intention, is also frequently answer’d with 
starch. 
10. Ingredients which are glutinous, or very 
tenacious, shou’d not enter this form (at least in 
any great quantity) when it is designed for in- 
fants;

125 Of Troches or Lozenges.
fants; for as they chew ’em, such things prove 
very troublesome, by glewing their teeth toge- 
ther. 
11. For the number of ingredients, this form 
will hardly admit of more than the electuary 
(§.140. n° 6.). 
12. If there be any officinal Troches fit to 
answer our intention, we shou’d rather order 
those than prescribe new (per §.29. 37.). 
§.176. The ORDER of placing the several in- 
gredientsof this form in a prescription,is the same 
with that observed in pills (§. 163). 
§.177. The QUANTITY of a Troche was for- 
merly extended from ʒj to ʒiij, but at present they 
are much less, being usually-limited between 
gr. vi. and ℈ß. which last quantity is seldom ex- 
ceeded; they are even sometimes but of ij or iij gr. 
weight, especiaily when designed to sweeten the 
breath. But they are oftner not determined by 
weight, but by magnitude; as the size of peas, 
lupines, &c. nor is there any danger in this di- 
sion of extemporaneous troches (per §.175. n° 7.) 
§.178. The FIGURE usually given to troches, 
is either flat and circular like a cake, tringular, 
cubical, rhomboidal, or cylindrical, &c. the choice 
of which, with the seal to imprint ’em with, may 
be well enough left to the discretion of the apo- 
thecary. 
§. 179. The DOSE of this form is usually de- 
termined by number, according to the greater or 
less size or weight of the troches (§. 177.), and 
particular nature of the ingredients. N° i, ij, iij, 
&c. are order’d to lie dissolving in the mouth; but 
when drastic or very potent medicines (such as 
opium, &c.) enter the compostion of troches, 
which is very seldom the case (per §.175. n° 7.), 
the number of troches for a dose to be ex- 
actly

126 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
actly limited from the known particular weight of 
each, and from the known proportion such strong 
ingredients bare to the whole. 
§.180. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, sent to the patient at one time, is seldom 
less than ℥j, or ℥jß; because a less quantity can- 
not be conveniently made up by the apothecary. 
But if officinal troches (§.175. n° 12.) are ordered 
alone in a prescription, there is then no reason to 
be confin'd to this quantity; but so much at least
ought to be prescribed at once, as may be judged 
sufficient to answer the intention (per §.67, 68.). 
§.181. For the PROPORTION of the excipi- 
entia to the excipienda (§.174.), as it varies with 
the different consistences of each, so it is scarce 
possible it shou'd be determin'd in all Cases with 
exactness. And, as ingredients of the stronger 
kind are seldom permitted to enter the composi- 
tion of this form (per §.175. n° 7.), the propor- 
tion may be therefore safely referred to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary (per §.58. n° 8. (7.)). But 
in general, to take notice of the following conside- 
rations may be of some use. 
1. The greater or less specific gravity of the 
dry and bibulous excipienda (§.174. n° 1. 
(1.)), makes (more or less) a considerable alter- 
ation in the necessary quantity of the excipienda. 
2. There is requir'd a less quantity of the 
excipienda to make up a certain quantity of ex- 
cipienda, as this lad is thicker, or more tena- 
cious. 
3. Hence, to iij parts of the dry powder'd 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) which are of a 
mean specific gravity, there is required almost 
ij parts of the most liquid excipienda (n°. 2. (i.)):
but of the viscid excipienria (n° 2. (2.)), there 
will be required from iv. to vj. parts, according 
as it is more or less consistent. 
To

127 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
To make up iij parts of the like dry excipi- 
enda, which are lightest, or of the least specific 
gravity, is required, of the most liquid excipi- 
entia (n° 2. (1.)) iv parts, of the viscid exci- 
pientia (n° 2. (2.)) from vj to ix parts. 
To make iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into troches, 
j part of the most liquid excipienda (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into this form, 
j part of the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the soft excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (3.)), there is need of ij parts 
of the dry excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
To iij parts of the diffused liquid excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (4.)). shou’d be added ix parts of 
the dry excipientia (n° 2. (3.)). 
4. The quantity of sugar to be added, is fre- 
quently the weight of the whole; but sometimes 
double, tripple, quadruple, and beyond, that 
quantity: according as it is required by the cir- 
cumstances at §.175. n° 9. The same holds 
good also, with regard to the use of starch in 
the composition of this form. 
§.182. The SUBSCRIPTION, or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. l. a. Tro- 
chisci, adding afterwards their size or weight (per 
§.177.), v. g. Parvi, or Pisi, Lupini, magnitudine: 
or gr. ij, vj. ℈ß. But there is no occasion for any 
such direction when the troches prescribed are offi- 
cinal (per §.175. n° 12.). Boxes, papers, &c. are 
the usual receptacles for this form. When very 
strong medicines enter the composition of this 
form (per §.179.) the quantity of excipients being
at

128 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
at the same time undetermined; it is then prudeht 
to determine the quantity of each troche, not by 
size or weight, but by directing the number to be 
formed out of the whole mass, as in pills (§.168.). 
By this means We shall be the better assured of the 
certain quantity of the drastic medicine, which 
is contained and given in each troche. 
§.183. The SIGNATURE, or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on this head, at §.60. 
and 157. compared with §.172. 179. 
§.184. The USE of this form is at present but 
seldom in practice, add even then it is only ap- 
plied, 
1. In disorders of the mouth and sauces, pha- 
rynx, larynx, aspera artera, &c. like a linctus, 
§.158. 
2. To sweeten or perfume a stinking breath: 
or, 
3. As a preventive against the action of 
contagious efluvia, upon the membranes of the 
mouth, nose and lungs. 
§.185. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Trochisci ad ptyalismum, ab apthis delapsis. 
ꝶ. Ter japon. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. 
Extract. agrimon. aa ʒj. 
Mucilag. sem. cydonior. 
Cum aq. rosar. extract. q. s. 
M. F. l. a. trochisci pisi magnitudine. 
S. Trochisci rohorantes quorum unum assiduò ore volu- 
tet œger ac lente deglutiat. 
2.

129 Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.) Trochisci opiati in pulmone suppurato, rupto. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ. Succ. liquorit. 
Flor. sulphur. aa ʒij. 
Olihan. ℈ij. 
Opii puri ℈j. 
Bals. copayb. q. s. 
Ut exacte mistis F. trochisci n° xl. 
S. Trochisci pacantes, quorum duos sumat qualibet 
vespera ante somnum. 
3. Trochisci nervini. 
♃. Sp. lavend. comp. gtt. lx. 
Ol. essent. rorismar. 
Cinnam. aa gtt. iv. 
Farin. R. ir. florent. ʒij.
Sacchart albi ℥j 
Mucilag. gummi tragac. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß.
S. Trochisci cephalici, paralytici, &c. unum vel plures 
ore volutet œger, pro re nata. 
4. Trochisci sialagogi.
♃. Rad. pyreth. pulv. ℥ß 
Mastiches  ʒij. 
Ol. caryophyllor. 
Macis. 
Sal. succin. aa ʒj. 
Cerœ flav. recent. odorat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci magni. 
S. Troch. &c. quorum unum vel duo ore volutet ad 
libitum.
K 5.

130 Troches or Lozenges. 
5. Trochisci swaveolentes ad fœtorem spiritus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Resin. cort. thymiam Hoffm. ℈j.
Amhar. grys. gr. xv. 
Moschi gr. vij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Sacchari albissimi ℥j. 
Mucilag. gumm. arab. in aq.
Cinnam. fact. q. s. ut. 
F. l. a. trochisci minimi. 
S. Unum vel alterum pro necessitate ore volutet. 
(2.) Alii- 
♃. Ol. thym. limon. gtt. xx. 
Cort. citror. gtt. vij. 
Moschi 
Ambrœ grissiœ aa gr. j. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Sacchari albissmi ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in spt. rosar. damascenar.
Solut. q. s. ut 
F. trochisci minimi. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. Trochisci sublinguales ad prophylaxin a contagio. 
ꝶ. Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Myrrh. elect. ʒj. 
Ol. still. cort. citri gtt. xij. 
Succin. citri recent. ℥ß. 
Pulv. cort. aurant. q. s. 
Ut F. l. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Mane exiturus capiat unum, alerum sub lingua 
detineat. 
7.

131 Of Tablets.
7. Trochisci bechici. 
♃. Succ. hispan. ʒjß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj. 
Flor. benz. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi gtt. xxij. 
Hysop. gtt. iv. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in syr. bals. solut. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Trochisci, &c. quorum unum ore volutet urgente 
tussi. 
Of TABLETS. 
§.186. A Tablet (sometimes termed morsu- 
lus, and from its consistence, electu- 
arium solidum, vid. §.190.) is a dry, internal me- 
dicine, formed into various figures, and made 
up of various ingredients; which are dissolved 
and boiled up with a large proportion of sugar, 
till the whole acquires a solid and brittle con- 
sistence *. Whence appears the difference of this 
form from that of the troche, §.172 †. 
§.187. The MATTER or ingredients of this 
form, are either (1.) excipienda, by which we here 
Understand all ingredients concerned or taken into 
the form as a medicine; or (2.) excipiens, what is 
employ’d in making up and rendering the form a- 
greeable. 
K2 The
* Like the barley-sugar of our confectioners, which may be 
looked upon as (tabella simplex, or) the basis of this form. 
† The difference of the tablet from the troche seems to consist in 
its brittle texture, great quantity of sugar, large dose and way of 
taking: all which are proper to a tablet, but not to a troche. But 
as this form has been long out of date, being never used among us, 
nor hardly ever in other nations we need not be very sollicitous 
about its difference. 


132 Of Tablets.
The excipienda comprehend almost every 
thing that is admitted into the electuary, whe- 
ther excipientia or excipienda (per §.139. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3.). From whence we may perceive 
the reason of the form's having been antiently 
call'd electuarium solidum. 
The excipiens is always dry or loaf sugar, 
dissolved in some proper liquor, which is gene- 
rally aqueous, and afterwards boiled to a due 
consistence. 
§.188. But a CHOICE of the ingredients is re- 
quired upon several accounts; as, 
1. It its required that this form be brittle as 
well as solid, that it be so consistent as not to 
run or flow, being also easily dissolvable in the 
mouth, and not unpleasant to the taste. 
2. Hence, gums, extracts, inspissated juices, 
things gross and oily, or the like, which intro- 
duce tenacity in the compound, should enter 
the composition of this form in the least quan- 
tity. 
3. For the same reason, the sugar made use 
of, should not be fat or repleat with its melosus; 
but if simple, it should be the whitest and dry- 
est, or else it may be saccharum rosatum. 
4. There is therefore no room in this form 
for ingredients which are very offenve to the 
smell and taste; because the use thereof requires 
it to undergo mastication and a dissolution in 
the mouth. 
5. This form will in like manner also, scarce- 
ly admit of any salts to enter its composition, 
especially those which are apt to liquify or ex- 
hale in the air. 
6. The grosser powders (species or trageæ) 
may indeed be admitted into this form, when 
they are a little soft at the same time. But for 
the

133 Of Tablets.
the harder powders, unless they are very finely 
levigated, they will prove gritty and trouble- 
some between the teeth. 
7. Acids from fossils should be also omitted, 
as they hinder the coagulation of the sugar. 
8. So also, oily things are, for the same rea- 
son and their unpleasantness, excluded from this 
form. 
9. Kernels, which are repleat with an oil that 
soon turns rancid, the fleshy parts of animals, 
and the like, are improperly order’d in this 
form, when it is to last any length of time in 
taking. 
10. Astringent and incrassating substances 
should also be expunged from this form; be- 
cause they lose their virtues by being buried in 
so large a quantity of sugar. 
11. The solid consistence of tablets will well 
enough admit of medicines which are the most 
potent, and possess the greatest specific gravity; 
if so be they undergo an equable mixture in the 
composition. 
12. Sweet smells are given to tablets by in- 
termixing a small quantity of ambergrease, musk, 
or civet; or when the mass is congealed, it may 
be wash'd over with some fragrant liquor, essen- 
tial oil, &c. and for the fake of colour, it may 
be gilded with leaf gold or silver, or tinged by 
sprinkling in flowers of various colours cut 
small, a little before the mass is grown cold;
but those who approve of these ornaments should 
be mindful of the caution at §. 85. 
13. The composition of tablets will not well 
take in a greater number of ingredients than the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.189. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients of this form, is the same with that to be 
K3 ob-

134 Of Tablets. 
observed in troches (§.176.) and pills (§.163.); 
tho' that method does frequently not agree with 
the just order of preparation and compostion. 
§.190. The FIGURE given to this mass is va- 
rious, which as it neither adds to nor diminishes 
from the virtue of the medicine, that part may 
be well enough left to be determined by the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. When it is poured into 
a box, before it is quire cold, so as to receive the 
figure thereof, it then takes the name of panda- 
leon: and when it is poured out and spread flat 
upon a plain, they afterwards cut and frame it in- 
to little, masses of a square figure, cubical like dice, 
rhomboidal or diamond-fashion, &c. which they 
accordingly term tablets, morsules, or tessellœ, lo- 
zenges, &c. tho’ it would have been much better 
to have always distinguished them by the single 
name of tablets, rejecting the rest. 
§.191. The QUANTITY or size of a tablet is 
very seldom determined either by weight or mea- 
sure; nor is it fo strictly limited but it may be 
extended from ʒj. to ℥ß. and beyond. 
§.192. The DOSE of this form is usually or- 
der’d by number, as ß, j, ij, iij, &c. according as 
they are bigger or less: or if the mass is all in one 
Jump, it may be order’d to be taken a bit at a 
time: or if it contains ingredients of any strength, 
the bits may be proportioned cut by weight: and 
in that case die dose will be more or less, accord- 
ing to the strength and proportion of the ingre- 
dients. But the dose hardly ever exceeds an ounce, 
in any case. 
§.193. For the GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time; if it 
be less than ℥iv. it cannot be conveniently made 
up by the apothecary. But if you order an offici- 
nal composition of this kind, just so much may be 
wrote

135 Of Tablets. 
wrote for as will suffice for the intention; tho' that 
should not be less than ℥ß. 
§.194. With regard to the PROPORTION of in- 
gredients for this form, that of the exciprenda is de- 
termined from a previous knowledge of the parti- 
cular nature of each, with their consistence and 
relation to one another, compared with the inten- 
tion, and the cautions given at §.188. (Vid. §.66, 
67. 115. n° 1. 6.) But the proportion of the ex- 
cipiens depends much on the former, and may be 
determined from the following considerations. 
1. In general, four or six times as much sugar 
may be conveniently taken, as the quantity of 
excipienda. But there are some who are pleased 
to order eight times as much sugar, or more; 
but with no great judgment: because the virtue 
of the ingredients is often by that means so much 
diffused, and often diminished or obtunded by 
so much sugar; from whence, the effectual dose 
must be also increased without necessity. 
2. In the mean time we must have a regard to 
the specific gravity and consistence of the ingre- 
dients. Those of the lightest kind will take up 
the most sugar, as they are very bulkey. Sub- 
stances which are dry, hard and porous, will 
grow almost stony with but a small portion of 
sugar. V. §.188. n° 1. 
3. If the excipienda or ingredients themselves 
contain any sugar, the quantity of excipiens or 
sugar should be proportionably less: which holds 
good with regard to conserves, candies, confec- 
tions, &c. 
4. But the quantity of sugar is often left to be 
determined at the pleasure of the apothecary 
(per §.58. n° 8. (7.) ), which is a liberty not 
to be comply’d with, when the dose is required 
to be adjusted by weight (per §.192.); because 
that unlimited quantity may differ very widely  
K4 in

130 Of Tablets.
in different shops, and many may be at a loss 
for the proper quantity to be used. 
§.195. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is usually wrote M. F. 
l. a. tabulœ, morsuli, electuarium solidum, panda- 
leon, &c. (§.190.), leaving what relates to the or- 
der and manner of making up the composition, to 
the judgment and dexterity of the apothecary. 
Afterwards, when it seems proper, may be sub- 
joined the liquid with which they are to be wash- 
ed, and whether the mass is to be ornamented with 
leaf gold, silver or flowers (per §.188. n° 12.) 
Sometimes the weight of each tablet (§.197.) is 
mentioned in a prescription, and a scatula or box 
order’d for the receptacle. But in prescribing for 
officinal tablets (§.193.), there is generally no oc- 
casion to mention any of these; unless you may 
think fit to add some external embellishment (per 
§.188. n° 12.) 
§.196. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on that head (at §.60. 
186. 190. 192.). A vehicle for this form is unnecessa- 
ry, upon account of the sugar. The time and me- 
thod of taking is deduced from the intention: for it 
is to be either chewed and directly swallowed, or else 
gradually dissolved by the saliva, and swallowed 
slowly. 
§.197. The USE of tablets is at present al- 
most universally laid aside. The pandaleon is quite 
obsolete. But the tablet may be sometimes order’d 
with the intention of a purgative, vermifuge, sto- 
machic, carminative, antacid, attenuant, aphrodi- 
siac, alexipharmic, pectoral, and to correct a soul 
breath. Some are better pleased with medicines in 
this form than another, and it may do well enough 
for a domestic remedy, arid to carry upon long 
journeys;

137 Tablets. 
neys; as it keeps found a long time, serves to dis- 
guise the medicine for the infant and nice patient, 
and is easy to make up: but it is not so convenient 
in many cases, when the patient is poor, or his 
blood in too thin a state; it is also culpable for the 
slowness of its action, and in hysterical cases, where 
sweet things are less agreeable. 
§.198 For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Tabulæ antihelminticæ verminum nidum de- 
struentes. 
ꝶ. Conserv. absinth. valg.
Semin. santonic. 
Tanacet. aa ʒij. 
Æthiop. mineral. ʒiij. 
Resin. jalap. ʒjß. 
Sacch. albiss. Infuso tanaceti solut. ℥v. 
M. F. l. a. tabellæ, singulæ ℥ß
S. Capiat umam mane & vesperi, vacuo ventriculo. 
2. Tabellæ purgantes. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. jalap. ʒiij. 
Scammon. opt.  ʒij. 
Antimon. diaphoret. ℥ß 
Flaved. cort. citri rec. ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. in aq. ros. solut. ℥viij. 
M. F. l. a. confectio pro tabellis. 
S. Dosis ʒiij ad v. adultis jʒß ad ʒj infantibus.
3.

138 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
3. Tabellæ antacidæ. 
ꝶ  Matr. perlar. ppt. 
Cret. albiss. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒiij. 
Cinnam. grossè triti ʒj.
Sacch. albis in aq. pur a solut. q. s. 
Ut. F. l. a. tabellæ. 
S. Tab. &c. quarum una vel altera pro necessitate 
capiatur.  
4. Tabellæ stomachicæ carminantes; in casu frigido, 
ꝶ. Cons. menth. ʒiij. 
Nuc. moschat. in Ind. cond. 
Cort. winteran. 
Aurantior. aa ʒij. 
Macis ʒj. 
M. F. cum sacch. alb. in aq. rosar. solut. 
q. s. tabellæ, ol. stillat. cort. citri ob- 
linendæ. D. in scatula. 
S. Sumatur una ante & post pastum. 
Of SUGAR-CAKES. 
§.199. A SUGAR-CAKE (termed rotula and or- 
biculus) is nothing more than the tablet 
(§.186.) made into a flat and round form, it be- 
ing (like that) received by and made up with 
sugar; but then its ingredients are usually ground 
finer, or render’d more soluble: So that there is 
but very little difference between this and the pre- 
ceeding form. However, as they are not abso- 
lutely the same, I thought it more advisable to be 
scrupulously exact in their division, than to load
the

139 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
the rules for these forms with too many exceptions 
by treating them as one. 
§.200. The MATTER or ingredients are in ge- 
neral the same as for the tablets (§.187.). Sugar 
is also in this form, always the excipient, or what 
serves to glew together and make up the other in- 
gredients. Whence, they confound sugar-cakes 
with troches or lozenges (§.172.) who give the 
name of sugar-cake to this form, when the ingre- 
dients are made up with a mucilage. 
§.201. The CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, is in some measure different from that in 
the troche. For, 
1. Besides the conditions at §.188. n° 1. su- 
gar-cakes are also most delectable when their so- 
lidity is joined with an imperfect pellucidity, or 
are semidiaphanous. Therefore, 
2. Such substances as cannot be sufficiently 
attenuated and equably diffused thro’ the substance 
of the sugar, such as conserves; candies, gross 
powders, with kernels of the nut or almond 
kind, which are apt to clog together and turn 
grumous, these are all less fit to enter the com- 
position of this form. 
3. Hence it is the more necessary for the su- 
gar to be as white and fine as possible (per- 
§.188. n° 3.): but the several other circum- 
stances (ib. n° 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 ) viz. 
gleweyness, unpleasantness, &c. ought to be 
more regarded. 
4. Sometimes, rejecting dry or thick sub- 
stances, the sugar is made into cakes with only 
the more pleasant liquid juices, especially acid, 
as juice of entrance, berberries, citrons, &c. 
which form a medicine exceeding pleasant for 
use. But those add no virtue, who endeavour to 
boil up sugar into cakes with distilled waters. 
5.

140 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
5. Others only drop aromatic or essential oils, 
and the more contracted essences upon sugar, 
and dissolving it in water, they afterwards boil 
it to a consistence for cakes: but by that me- 
thod, the medicine must suffer great loss in its 
virtues. 
6. We may therefore reasonably doubt whe- 
ther this form contains any thing more than su- 
gar, when it is made up by boiling eleosacchara 
to a consistence with water. 
7. Those also who inspissate mere syrups over 
the fire, in order to form sugar-cakes, can by 
no means expect to find the more volatile parts 
of a medicine in this form. So that 
8. When the intention requires this form to 
contain things of a volatile nature, the best way 
is to order the rotula to be washed over with 
some proper oil or essence, before it is to be 
taken by the patient: by which method, we 
need not fear such a loss, as when volatile sub- 
stances are mix’d with the mass while hot. 
9. For external ornaments to this form, there is 
here no need to say more than we have at §.188. 
n° 12. 
10. The number of ingredients for this form, 
should be less than in the table (§.188 n° 13.); 
coming nearest to that or the bolus (§.129. 
n° 9.). 
§.202. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form, in a prescription, is the same with 
that of the tablet §.189. 
§.202. The QUANTITY or weight of each 
rotula should be less than than that of the tablet 
(§.191.) being usually about ℈j. or ʒß. tho'
the quantity of this form, as well as the tablet, is 
seldom determined either by weight or measure.
§.204.

141 Of Sugar-Cakes.
§.204. The DOSE of this form, like that of the 
tablet (§.192.), is also determined by number, as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or else by weight, agreeable to the 
different strength and proportion of the ingredients. 
§.205. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time, is the 
same with that of the tablet (§.193.): But it is 
a form which cannot be very conveniently made 
extemporaneously, especially when its ingredients 
are the syrups and juices at §.201. n° 4. 7. 
§.206. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, may be pretty well 
understood from what has been said on this head at 
§.194.): for the proportion is the same as in tab- 
lets, except two or three particulars. As, 
1. We generally use a greater proportion of 
sugar for this form, with respect to the other 
ingredients (§.194. n° 1.); for reasons men- 
tioned at §.201. n° 1. 4. 5. 
2. Hence, to reduce the acid juices (§.201. 
n° 4.) to a consistence for cakes, will take up 
fix or eight times as much sugar: ʒj. or ʒjß of 
the essences (ib. n° 5.) require ʒij of sugar; 
and the like quantity of sugar is necessary to 
make up gutt. xx. of essential or aromatic oils. 
3. The dressing or washing this form (per 
§.201. n° 8.) with essences or essential oils of 
the like nature, is to be also done in the pre- 
ceeding proportion.  
§.207. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
Apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
tablet (§.195.). supposing a change of name. 
The due preparation is supposed to be previously 
known by the apothecary, who ought to manage 
it so, as to let the dissipation of volatile parts be 
as small as possible. The acid juices, essences, and 
aromatic oils (§.201. n° 4. 5.) are not to be 
mixed

142 Sugar-Cakes.
mixed with the sugar till it is boiled up to a con- 
sistence, and is beginning to cool and harden; as 
well for the foresaid reason, as because it will hin- 
der the sugar from hardening to that degree which 
the form requires. 
§.208. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is hardly any ways different 
from that of the tablet, (at §.196.). 
§.209. The USE is also much the same (as at 
§.197.). To which we may add, that rotulœ made 
up with acid juices, stand well recommended for 
abating thirst in inflammatory disorders. 
§.210. Take the following SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1. Rotulæ purgantes, antihelminticæ, pro infante 
ad exemplum. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 233. 
ꝶ. Semin. absinth. ʒij.
Mercur. dulcis ℈iv. 
Diagrydii ʒj. 
Sacchar. aq. still. tanaceti solut. ℥ijß.
M. exactissimè F. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis drach. ij ad iij alternis die- 
bus, manè, vacuo ventriculo capienda. 
2. Rotulæ contra dolores a partu. V. l. c. p. 220. 
ꝶ Matris perlar. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Laudan. gr. vj. 
M. exactissmè, dein cum sacchar. aq. 
cinnam. solut. & inspissat. ℥ijß. 
Redige in rotulas, paulo ante effusio- 
nem addendo 
Ol. cinnam. stillat. gtt. iv. 
S. Rotulœ anodynes. Capiat drach. ij. omni semihora, 
superbibendo vini rhenani unc. ß. donee dolor mi- 
tescit: dein detur tantundem mane saltem & vesperi. 
3.

143 Of Infusions. 
3. Rotulæ roborantes ventriculum debilem 
frigidum. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat. menth. 
Absinth. aa gtt. x. 
Essent. myrrh. Boerh. ʒij. 
Sacch. albiss. aq. menth. solut. & in- 
spissat. ℥ v. 
F. l. a. rotultæ. 
S. Rotulœ stomachicœ. Capiat drach. ij vel iij ter, 
quater de die, horis medicis. 
4. Rotulæ adversus sitim. 
ꝶ. Sacch. albissmi, subtiliss. pulverisat. 
℥iij.
Leni igne calefactis immisce 
Succi pomi citrei rec. ʒv. 
Flaved. ejusdem tenuiter rasœ ℈j. 
F. l. a. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Unam alteramve ore detineat assiduè. 
Nota. There is no need to take notice here of 
several other saccharine compositions used formerly 
by the ancient physicians, such as pasta regia, mas- 
sa panis, pineolatum mustaceum buccellatum, &c. for 
these have been long ago turned over from the 
shops of apothecaries to those of confectioners. 
Of INFUSIONS for Internal Use. 
§.211. AN Infusion, is a fluid, internal me- 
dicine, made by macerating proper 
ingredients in a liquid menstruum, without boil- 
ing: by which means, their finer parts, chiefly, are 
dissolved

144 Of Infusions. 
dissolved and retained by the liquor. The diffe- 
rent kinds of menstruums, and ways of infusing the 
ingredients, give different names to this form; 
which we shall mention hereafter, §.221. 
§.212. The MATTER for composing an Infu- 
sion is of three kinds: (1) the menstruum or sol-
vent; (2) the solvend; and lastly, (3) the ac- 
cessories. 
1. The menstruum is either (1) aqueous: as 
common and distilled waters, milk, whey, some 
watery decoction, the phlegm of vitriol, &c.
Or (2) vinous: as wines of all sorts, cyder, per- 
ry, meade, ale, must, &c. Or (3) spirituous: 
as common spirit of wine, alcohol, strong wa- 
ters, and other inflammable or fermented li- 
quors. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be infused, 
are, every thing fit for internal use, which pos- 
sess medicinal virtues capable of being extracted 
without boiling, by macerating in some hot or 
cold menstruum (n° 1.): of this kind there are 
a great many vegitable substances, few of the 
fossil or mineral class; but fewest of all among 
the animal substances.  
3. The accessories are either (1) such as pro- 
mote the solution, by (α) sharpening the men- 
struum, and making it fitter to penetrate, or 
else (ß) by opening the body of the solvend, 
or accommodating the texture of the solvend to 
the menstruum: for which purposes, salts of 
various kinds are used, both acid, alcaline, and 
neutral; and sometimes, tho' but seldom, in- 
flammable spirits, obtained by fermentation, 
are made use of, and that either per se, or mix’d 
and impregnated with the aromatic parts of ve- 
getables. Or (2) there are other accessories 
which are added after the infusion is compleat- 
ed, in order to increase the medicinal virtues or 
correct

145 Of Infusions. 
correct some noxious and unpleasant quality: to 
which head belong syrups, elœosacchara, ho- 
ney, soft confections, tinctures, essences, spirits, 
wine, &c. 
§.213. A proper ELECTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form seems to be more necessary than 
in any other, as they are so very numerous and dif- 
ferent in their natures. For no one can expect to 
succeed well in compositions of this kind, who is 
ignorant of the texture and disposition of the sol- 
venda (§.212. n° 2.) or ingredients to be infused, 
with the nature and dissolving power of the several 
menstruums (ib. n° 1.), and the properties or effects 
which the accessories (ib. n° 3.) may produce upon 
each. But as we suppose the prescriber to be pre- 
viously acquainted (per §.7. 8. 104.) with these; 
we shall comprise what we have to say upon this 
head in a few words. 
1. Water and watery menstruums dissolve salts, 
gums, mucilages, sopes, and that part which 
gives smell and taste to vegetables, when it is 
not too closely confined in their substance. 
Water makes the better menstruum for these 
substances, as it is purer, and less mix’d or sa- 
turated with the particles of foreign bodies. 
It will not, of itself alone, dissolve oils, fats, 
balsams, resins, or sulphurs; but it may be 
assisted and accommodated to such things by 
using alcaline salts, sugar, and inflammable spi- 
rits. Nor will it, of itself, dissolve stones, 
earths, metals and semimetals: but it may be 
qualified to dissolve these by adding a salt which 
is mildly or vehemently acid, and sometimes by 
the addition of one that is alcaline, or even 
neutral. 
2. Alcohol of wine dissolves the aromatic spi- 
ritus rector (or what gives the smell and taste 
L in

146 Of Infusion. 
in vegetables), oils of die like nature, balsoms, 
refins, soft sopes, volatile alcaline salts, and 
fix’d salts of the same kind, after they are made 
exceeding dry. It scarce dissolves any thing of 
other salts, nor of stones or earths; nor even of 
gums, common sulphur, metals or semi-metals: 
yet it will enter the substance and draw a tinc- 
ture from those bodies, when assisted by the in- 
tervention of a fix’d alcaline or lixivious salt. 
3. Now as the common inflammable spirits 
or strong waters (§.212. n° 1. (3).) consist of 
alcohol, water, and an acid, mix’d together in 
various proportions, according to the more or 
less strength or height of such liquors; we may 
readily perceive from what we have but now 
said (n° 1. 2.), the effects such liquors must
have upon bodies of the several kinds there 
mentioned. 
4. If to the forementioned principles (n° 3.) 
we add a subtle oil, almost like alcohol, we 
have then a menstruum of the same properties 
and consistence with wines of all sorts (§.212. 
n° 1. 2.) of which those are the basis: but with 
this difference, that some wines have more and 
others less spirit, some abound with the acid, 
and others are more repleat and smoothed with 
the oil. From whence we may, without much 
difficulty, understand the dissolving power of 
vinous menstruums, upon the several foremen- 
tioned substances (n° 1. 2.) 
5. Hence also appears, what simples in the 
three kingdoms of the materia medica (§.212. 
n° 2.) are suitable to each kind of these men- 
struums; observing that their solution is to be 
promoted, not by boiling, but is to be effected 
by macerating in the cold, or at most, in a strong 
heat. 
6.

147 Of Infusions. 
6. Among vegetables, those simples are most 
suitable for this intention, which being treated 
by a gentle heat, (either alone or mix’d with 
boiling water) afford essential oils and simple 
waters for medical uses *: to these we may add 
inspissated juices, sopes, gums, resins, and things 
compounded of these; as also, substances whose 
virtues are rather lock’d up, than set at liberty 
by the force of fire, or whose efficacies lodge 
in a substance capable of dissolution in some of 
those menstruums (n° 1. 2. 3. 4.), and are not 
so closely confin’d in the earthly and unactive 
parts of their composition, but that they may be 
disengaged from thence without boiling: of which 
nature we find many things in the tribe of eme- 
tics, cathartics, paregorics, emollients, astrin- 
gents, vulneraries, refrigerants, aperients, sa- 
ponacea, stimulantia, &c. 
7. The animal kingdom of the materia me- 
dica affords not many things fit to part with 
their virtues by infusion, besides a few infects, 
with castor, musk, civet, some calculi and ster- 
cora. In the mineral class, the chief are the 
ambers and sulphurs, copper, iron, antimony, 
and preparations from these. 
8. But as the several substances before enu- 
merated (n° 6. 7.) are not promiscuously and 
equally fitted to communicate their virtues to 
all menstruums (n° 1. to 4.) alike; it is there- 
fore our business to chuse out such a solvent as 
we know to be best fitted, by its consistence and 
principles to extract the parts we want to have 
separated. When one menstruum alone is unfit 
L2 for 
* See Boerhaave’s Chemistry: vol. II. Process. I. XV. 
XXIII. 


148 Of Infusions.
for all the parts we want, what have we to do, 
but to make a combination of two or more. 
And when that is insufficient or repugnant to 
our intention, we must have recourse to some 
of the accessories (§.212. n° 3 (1).). But 
the virtues and choice of these is sufficiently ap- 
parent from loc. cit. and §.213. n° 1. to 4. 
9. For the rest, things very unpleasant to the 
smell and taste should be avoided (in liquid and 
dissusive, and consequently) in this form as much 
as possible; more especially when it is prescrib’d 
for infants, nice patients, or for a common 
drink. 
10. The accessories of the second class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)) have often no occasion to enter an 
infusion. But if such should be required, they 
ought to be capable of an entire solution in the 
menstruum, without precipitating the parts 
which are already dissolved, and suspended there- 
in (consult §.102. n° 9. 10. 11. 12.). If you 
use any correctors, be careful you don’t mis- 
use them. (See §.84. 85. 96 to 103.) 
11. We may be pretty free as to the number 
of ingredients for this form; yet it ought not 
to be over-stuffed (per §.29). 
§.214. For the ORDER of prescribing this 
form, the ingredients to be infused take the first 
place: and among these the animal substances 
precede the vegetable, and the mineral take the 
last place. Those who are still more exact, range 
the parts of vegetables according to their pre- 
cedency; as first roots, then herbs, leaves, tops, 
flowers, seeds, berries, woods, barks, spices, 
fruits, juices, and lastly (if there are to be any) 
purgatives, with their correctors. Next to the 
ingredients to be infused, are subjoined the acces- 
sories of the first class (§.212. n°3. (1.)): then
follows

149 Of Infusion.
follows the menstruum; and the series is closed by 
the latter class of accessories (§.212. n° 3. (2.)). 
§.215. The DOSE is various, being more or 
less in proportion to the strength of the ingredi- 
ents and menstruum, the different intention of the 
physician, the age and other circmstances of the 
patient, &c. (per §.66.). But in general, watery 
infusions are given from ℥j. to iij, jv, v, or vj; Vi- 
nous, from ℥ß to ℥j, ij, iij or iv. Spirituous, 
from ʒij. to ℥ß. ℥j or ij. Sometimes the rules 
mentioned (§.67. n° 4. 5.) take place in the dose 
of this form. But frequently it is determined not 
by weight but by measure: v. g. Cochlear. j, ij. 
&c. or cyathum (§.58. n° 7. (2.)), or to be 
taken in the quantity of a tea or coffee-cup full, 
&c. or to drink as much as is liked, for an ordi- 
nary drink. Lastly, if the ingredients are to be 
portioned out by the patient or his attendants;
and to be infused in scalding water, in the man- 
ner of tea; then, as much as may be order’d to be 
used at a time as will lye between the fingers, in 
a spoon or tea-cup, or, to be more exact, a pugil, 
ʒij, iij, or ℥ß.  
§.216. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, has very un- 
certain bounds; making sometimes no more than 
one dose (§.215.): as in the infusions of emetics, 
cathartics, &c. either in wine or water. But when
intended for an alterative, or to purge the whole 
habit, it is frequently prescribed to ℔. j, iij, jv, 
more; according as the indication and other 
circumstances require. (Consult §.67. 68. 92. n° 4.) 
The price too, of some things restrains their quan- 
tity (per §.66. n° 14.): therefore the infusion of 
tincture of porcupine bezoar is seldom order’d in a 
larger quantity than to ℥jv, vj or viij. Sometimes, 
a medicated wine or ale that is to be used for a 
long time, or as a common drink, is order’d to 
L3 be

150 Of Infusions. 
be made in the quantity of a hogshead, or a whole 
pipe at a time. From what has been here said, 
and from what we shall observe in the proportion 
following, it will be no difficult matter to deter- 
mine how much of the ingredients to be infused 
should be order’d at one time, if the infusion of 
them is refer’d to the patient or his assistants. 
§.217. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for medicines of this kind, 
there is hardly any general rules to be given, since 
the proportion must vary with the several circum- 
stances of the things to be infused, the nature of 
the menstruum, the way of using, the state of the 
patient himself, and many other circumstances, 
with which it must vary, Observe therefore 
1. The ingredients to be macerated (§.212. 
n° 2.) are generally order’d in two or three 
times a greater quantity for an infusion, than 
when they are to be given crude or in sub- 
stance: and this, in proportion as the virtue or 
strength of the medicine is more or less with 
respect to its bulk, and according as the men- 
struum used extracts the virtues either wholly, 
or but in part. 
2. Herbs, their leaves, tops and flowers, are 
usually order’d for this form by manipules or 
pugils; and fruits are mostly prescribed by num- 
ber (per §.58 n° 7. (2.)): but the proportion 
of emetics and cathartics should be determin’d 
by weight; except the leaves of asarum, which 
are oftner order’d by number. 
3. The rest of the ingredients (§.212.) 
which are neither emetic nor cathartic, may be 
order’d in a quantity sufficient to answer the in- 
tention and proper dose (§.215. 216.): nor is 
it possible to assign the proportion of these in- 
gredients in general, by rules more determi- 
nate and particular (per §.87. 88. 217. n° 1.)
4. 

151 Of Infusions.
4. The proportion of the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.) with respect to the ingredients to be in- 
fused, is also no less various and uncertain: for, 
very often it is six, eight or twelve times the 
quantity of the other ingredients; sometimes 
it is much less than any of those quantities, at 
other times it is much larger, ascending up to 
twenty, thirty, and even a hundred times the 
quantity of the things to be infused. 
5. The proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients in short, varies with their specific 
gravity; and as their virtues are more or less 
contracted or strong, and their extraction more 
or less difficult to make: it also differs as the 
menstruum is more or less active and strong, 
and as the intention may require the liquor to 
be more or less saturated with the medicinal par- 
ticles; all which have their force in demanding 
a greater or less proportion of the menstruum 
to a certain quantity of the ingredients. 
6. Besides these considerations (n° 5.), the 
proportion of the menstruum to the ingredients, 
should be always large when the latter are un- 
pleasant, or intended for infants, nice patients, 
or a constant drink. Hence, in making medi- 
cated ales, wines, hippocras, must, &c. espe- 
cially when they are to be fermented; in such 
case, the quantity of the menstruum should be 
from thirty to a hundred times larger than that 
of the ingredients to be infused. 
7. The proportion of accessories of the first 
class §.212. n° 3. (1), which promote the 
action of the menstruum, is order’d more or less 
according as they are stronger or weaker in 
themselves, or as the other ingredients are 
more or less hard to be wrought upon, as the 
menstruum naturally possesses more or less 
strength and activity, and as it has a more or  
L4 less

152 Of Infusions. 
less congruity or affinity to the particular sub- 
stances to be extacted: so that hence, ʒj or ij. 
of these accessories are sometimes order’d to 
each pound of the menstruums; but they are 
frequently used in a much less proportion. The 
spirituous kind of these accessories are often or- 
der’d in no determinate quantity, if intended for 
irroration, or to be sprinkled upon the ingre- 
dients. 
8. The accessories of the latter class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are intended to correct or 
promote the action of the infusion as a medi- 
cine, may be order’d in a proportion equal to 
the intention to be answer’d. Nor can we pre- 
scribe any general limits to this proportion. But 
sugar and things of the like nature are com- 
monly order’d in the proportion of part j to 
viij, or x parrs of the liquor: but in making 
hippocras or aromatized wine, they are used in 
the proportion of a half,, third or quarter part, 
with respect to the menstruum. Tho’ the de- 
gree of dulcification is sometimes referr’d to the 
judgment and palate pf the patient. See 
§.85. 90. 
§.218. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction for 
making up this form, is of two kinds: (1) one is, 
when the process of infusion is committed to the 
apothecary; (2) the other, when the ingredients 
are only transmitted by the apothecary, and the 
care of infusion referr’d to the patient or his at- 
tendants. 
§.219. In the find case (§.218.), the subscrip- 
tion contains. 
1. The preparation of the ingredients in order 
for infusion: which requires, (1.) a comminu- 
tion or reduction of them into a gross powder, 
and is effected by cutting, rasping, or pounding; 
which

153 Of Infusions. 
which operations are omitted in substances na- 
turally of a pulverulent consistence, as filings of 
iron, the ashes of vegitables, &c. (2.) The 
making them up into nodules, bundles and bags, 
with muslin or fine linen; which contrivance is 
used when the virtues are not required to be ex- 
tracted all at once, or when we would save the 
trouble of straining, or when the ingredients are 
very ponderous, and require to be suspended 
in the menstruum, left falling to the bottom 
they might not be so apt to dissolve or commu- 
nicate their strength to the liquor. For these rea- 
sons, sometimes all, or only one or two of the in- 
gredients should be thus done up. (3.) Irroration 
or sprinkling; when we use liquid accessories 
(§.212. n° 3. (1.)), as the spirits of vitriol, 
sulphur, wine, roses, &c. Hot water is also 
sometimes used for this process, when dry in- 
gredients require to be opened and softened by 
heat and moisture, that they may more easily 
part with their virtues in a cold menstruum. 
(4.) A proper vessel, wherein the ingredients 
are to be put. But that is very seldom men- 
tion’d in the prescription; unless when for fear of 
a dissipation of the virtues, we would advise the 
infusion to be made chemically in a bolt-head; 
or when the fermentation with ale or must re- 
quires the materials to be put up in a cask. 
2. Infusion, which is perform’d with a men- 
struum either hot or cold. Watery menstruums 
only (§.212. n° 1. (1.) ) are poured on hot or 
scalding: the vinous and spirituous (ib. (2.)(3.)) 
are used cold. 
3. Maceration, which is also either hot or 
cold. Cold maceration is used when there is 
required but a weak extraction of the virtues; 
or when the ingredients are of such an open 
texture, and the menstruum so penetrating as 
not

154 Of Infusions.
not to require any heat; or when we are appre- 
hensive that heat will occasion some improper 
change in the medicine. Maceration with heat 
is used when the contrary of these obtain, or 
when the menstruum is of that kind (n° 2.) as 
will bear the heat of infusion; or when, after 
it is applied cold, the addition of heat will pro- 
mote its action. This heat is communicated ei- 
ther by what is term’d insolation, or by diges- 
tion, in a place or furnace proper for that pur- 
pose, using the medium water, sand or ashes, 
&c. whereby various degrees of heat are given, 
but all lower than to make the menstruum boil 
(per §.211.) the degree of heat should vary al- 
so, as the season of the year is more or less fa- 
vourable to the operation, as the texture of the 
ingredients is more or less fit for suck a process, 
and as the intention may require a more or less 
speedy extraction. Sometimes the extraction 
may be promoted by shaking the mixture now 
and then at intervals. The time or length of 
maceration is to be limited either from its 
effects, ’till the menstruum has acquired the re- 
quisite colour, smell, taste and strength; or, 
which is more usual, for so many hours, days, 
nights, &c. according as the ingredients and 
menstruum are known to be disposed for a more 
or less speedy extraction, or as it is intended to 
be stronger or weaker. The vessel is almost 
constantly order’d to be closed during the ma- 
ceration; unless when the structure of the vessel 
makes it unnecessary, or the manner in which 
the maceration is to be perform’d forbids it: 
the first obtains in the phiala chemica, or long 
and narrow-neck’d bolt-head; the last in fer- 
mentations. 
4. Depuration, This is either (1.) unnecessary, 
as when the ingredients to be macerated are 
made

155 Of Infusions. 
made into a nodule, or included in a bag (per 
n° 1. (2.)): and in that case, after a due ex- 
traction has been made, the nodule may be ei- 
ther left suspended in the liquor during its use, 
or else it may be taken out, and by pressing it 
strongly, the liquor will be more saturated. Or, 
(2.) when the ingredients are to be infused loose, 
and are not very light, the liquor may be cla- 
risied barely by standing still; so that the purer 
part of the liquor may be gradually poured off 
fine from the sediment, which will reside at 
bottom undissolved: and so much of the infu- 
sion as remains behind turbid with the residuum, 
may be afterwards separated clear by filtration; 
which is a method well enough adapted to me- 
dicated ales, wines, and spirituous infusions. Or 
(3.) the depuration may be effected by trans- 
mitting all the liquor thro' a strainer or flannel 
bagg, term’d (manica hippocratis) Hippocrates’s 
sleeve: and here also, towards the end, a strong 
expression of the residuum may be order’d, when 
the liquor is required to be very strong, and 
not over clear. Thus are depurated watery in- 
fusions, and clareta or hippocratic wines: the 
latter of which may be further purified by an 
addition of milk before percolation, whose vis- 
cid parts, stopping up the larger pores of the 
filter, will intercept the finer lee. Or (4.) the 
infusion may be clarified by filtrating thro' bi- 
bulous or spongy paper, which as it is the neat- 
est method, making the liquor perfectly clear, 
so it is the slowest and most tedious: it is used 
for liquors that require the highest purity, and 
a separation of all the parts which are not most 
intimately dissolved and combined therewith, 
and when, at the same time, the quantify to be 
filtrated is not very large. It is therefore dur- 
able for spirituous infusions, and emetic or an-  
timoniated

156 Of Infusions. 
timoniated wines. But we must be cautious how 
we treat such as are volatile, and just come from 
the fire, by the two last methods (n° (3.) (4.));
left they should be thus deprived of their vir- 
tues. 
5. The addition of such, accessories (§.212. n° 3. 
(2.) as alter or correct the infusion as a medi- 
cine: where (besides the things at §.213. n° 10.) 
we are to observe, that the sugar, and such 
things ought to be mix’d with hippocratic wines. 
&c. before their depuration (per n° 4. (4.); 
that by passing through the filter together, they 
may not be liable to render the liquor soul. 
6. The receptacle, is a glass phial, with a nar- 
row mouth: which may be order’d to be kept 
stopp’d very close; if there be any danger of a 
corruption or dissipation of the medicinal parts 
of the liquor, from a too free admission of the 
air. 
§.220. But when the ingredients are only to be 
transmitted to the patient by the apothecary, with- 
out other preparations (per §.218. (2.)); in that 
case, all that regards the infusion (§.219. n° 1. 
(4.) to §.220.) is not to enter the subscription: 
but the comminution, mixation, and forming into 
a nodule, &c. (per. §.219. n° 1. (1.) (2.) ) may 
be subjoined, when there is occasion by subscrib- 
ing e.g. conscissa, tusa, grosso, moado, M. and if the 
species are to be sent loose, add, F. collectio, or 
D. ad Chartam; for a paper, in that case, performs 
the office of a receptacle. But when the species are 
to be made into a nodule, &c. you may write: 
includantur nodulo vel sindoni. As for irroration 
(per §.219. n° 1. (3.)), that is left sometimes to 
the apothecary, and sometimes to the patient: if 
to the patient; the liquor for that purpose is to be 
transmitted to him by the apothecary with the 
other

157 Of Infusions. 
other ingredients, unless it be one of common 
use. 
§.221. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is also various, according to 
the different circumstances (§.218.—221.). 
Hence, 
1. If the preparation by the apothecary (§.219.) 
takes place, the name of the infusion will then be 
various; according as the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.), the ingredients to be infused (ib. n° 2.), the 
accessories (ib. n° 3.), the general quantity (§.216.), 
and the depuration (§.219. n° 4.), are different. 
An infusion prescribed for in but one dose, is 
without any regard to the menstruum, ingre- 
dients, or manner of preparation, termed hau- 
stus, a draught: but when it comprises more 
doses than one, and is made with water for a 
menstruum, it passes then by the bare name of 
an infusion, infusum. But if the menstruum used, 
be milk, whey, wine, ale, mead, &c. The in- 
fusion, in that case, borrows its name from 
thence. If the menstruum was spirituous, it 
takes the name of tinture. And lastly, if the 
ingredients are spices; and the menstruum, aro- 
matic distilled waters, wine and its spirit; 
sweetened with a large quantity of sugar (per 
§.217. n° 8.), and the clarification extremely 
fine (per §.219. n° 4.(3.)): the name then 
usually given to it, is, claretum or nectar; or, 
if cinnamon is the chief of the spices, and wine 
be the menstruum, it may be only term’d hippo- 
cratic wine. To each of these names may be 
added another, denoting its virtues; and then 
may be subjoined what relates to the using of it, 
which may be easily, deduced from §.60. 215. 
It is also sometimes proper to advise the patient 
to let the vessel and infusion stand in a cold 
place, especially when the general quantity of  
it


158 Of Infusions. 
it is large, and made in the summer time; and 
this, to prevent it from fermenting, turning 
sower, or musty. 
2. If the process of infusion is to be left to 
the patient (per §.220.), and the ingredients 
are to be sent to him by the apothecary, done 
up in very porous linen (per §.219. n° 1.); 
it is then term’d a nodule: but it they are sent 
loose, in a paper, they are named species; or 
else the a medicata, when they are to be infused 
by a little at a time (§.215.) like common tea. 
Here, also, should be added a name, importing 
its virtues. Afterwards should be wrote the 
menstruum, manner, proportion, order, time, 
&c. wherein the infusion, maceration and de- 
puration are to be perform’d; just as they are 
deliver’d in the subscription, at (§.219.): but 
they should be deliver’d in terms, and methods 
of preparation which are intelligible, and suited 
to the conveniency of the patient or his atten- 
dants (per §.60. n° 5. 6.). For the rest, what 
regards the taking and keeping, may be di- 
rected the same as (at n° 1.) preceding.
§.222. The USE of these formulæ, made by 
infusion, is very universal, being adapted to almost 
every disease, age and intention; provided the 
ingredients and menstruum are chose so as to be 
agreeable to each other, and suitable to the indi- 
cation (per §.213.). These formulæ are indeed 
sometimes less agreeable to infants, when the in- 
gredients have a considerable smell and taste; 
otherwise many things may be commodiously in- 
sinuated even to them, under the form of common 
drink, which they could not be so well induced to 
take under any other form. To conclude, though 
these formulæ are best fitted to penetrate the in- 
most recesses of the morbid body, they are yet fre-
quently

159 Forms by Infusion. 
quently prohibited, by their tedious preparation, 
in cases where delay is dangerous. 
§.223. Take the following examples in these 
formulæ. 
1. Vinum emeticum, antimoniatum, validè movens. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 131. 209. 
(1.) ꝶ. Croci metallor. gr. viij. 
Vini rhenan. ℥ij. 
Stent in frigida infusione per noctem: 
manè per chartam filtratis adde 
Oxymell. scillit. ʒvj. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haustus emeticus, adulto pro dosi, manè exhihendus. 
(2.) Aliud, mitius pro infante rachitico. 
V. ibid. p. 256. 
ꝶ. Radic. ipecacuanhœ ℈j. 
Vini albi gallici ℥j. 
Sacchari albi ʒij. 
Infusa totam noctem, depurata, exhibe 
manè. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro dosi, manè capiendus. 
2. Collectio purgans, roborans, anti-rachitica. ibid. 
ꝶ. Rhei selecti ℥ß. 
Mirobalan. citrin. sine nucleis ʒiij. 
Agarici trochiscati ℈ij. 
Conscissa, tusa groso modo, M. D. ad 
chartam. 
S. Species pro cerevisia medicata, que insundantur 
frigidœ cum Cerivis. fortioris ℔. iv. per horas xxiv. 
Utatur hoc potu pro familiari quotidiano, spatio iv. 
septimanarum, &c. 
3.

160 Forms by Infusion. 
3. Nodulus diureticus, in hydrope conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ciner. stipit. fabar. 
Genistœ aa ℔ ß. 
Inclusa nodulo exhibeantur. 
S. Nodulus diureticus, cui infundantur vini rhenani 
℔ iv. frigidœ, stent per noctem: tum, relicto intrœ 
vinum nodulo, illius ℥iij. ter de die bibantur. 
4. Serum lactis anti-scorbuticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Acetosellœ m. jß. 
Betoniœ. 
Chaerophylli aa m. ß. 
Tamarindor. ℥jß. 
Conscissa insunde cum 
Seri lactis œstivi ℔ iij. 
Spatio horæ, in calore sere servido, abs-
que ebullitione tamen, dein per 
linteum expressis admisce. 
Syrup e succo citri. 
Rubi idœi. 
Violacei aa ℥j. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat hujus unc. j. omni semihorio 
inter diu. 
5. Thea medicata anti-pthisica. 
V. l. c. p. 199. & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. caryophillat. mont. ℥ij 
Liquoritœ ℥jß. 
Herb. veronie. 
Heder. terrestr. aa m. j. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Centaur. min. aa pug. iij. 
Semin. fœnicul. dulc. ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S.

161 Forms by Infusion. 
S. Thea balsamica. Hujus ℥ß insundatur cum aquœ
serventis v vel vj vasculis these potui dicatis: stent 
vase clauso, calida, per aliquot minuta, tum bibat 
omni hora vasculum simile plenum,  in quo prius  
dissolutum fit'mellis virginœi cochl. parv. Eodem 
modo parantur theœ medicatœ ex omnibus vegetan- 
tium partibus; prœipuè particulis, adstringenti- 
bus, amarulentis, aromaticis fixis, pauco oleo gau- 
dentibus: e.g. 
Flor. chaimœm. 
Sem. lin
Cort. aurant.
Iead. gent. &c.
Sumit. absinth R.
Fumar. 
Centaur. min. &c. 
6. Infusum anti-hydropicum, fluorem lymphæ con- 
cilians pro plebejo. 
V. Boerh. 1. c. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristol. utriusque aa ℥jß.
Zinziberis ʒvj. 
Summit, absinth. vulg. 
Centaur. min. 
Bacc. junip, aa ℥j. 
Sal. absinthii ʒß. 
Concissa, tusa, mista D. ad chartam. 
S. Species. Infundantur cum sp. juniperi vulg. ℔. iv. 
insolentur per aliquot dies, vase clauso, turn bibat 
℥j. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, cum regimine. 
M 7.

162 Forms by Infusion. 
7. Infusum acidulatum refrigcrans in sebre ar- 
dente bibendum. 
♃. Fr. cydon. medioc. 
Limon. rec. aa n°. j. 
Pipon. aurant. n°. vj. 
In lamellis tenuissimis conscisis assunde 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. iv. 
Scent per noctem, & post decantationem 
adde
Syr. diamor. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger, haustulum, subinde, 
ad libitum. 
8. Infusum aperiens, in hydrope, icterio, &c. 
exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. raph. rustic. consciss. ℥ij 
Sem. synap. contus. ℥j. 
Millep. viv. contus. n°. C. 
Infundantur per noctem, vase stricte 
clauso, in 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. j ß. adde 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥iv hor. med.
(1.)

163 Forms by Infusion.
(1.) Infusum catharticum. 
♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒij ß. 
Rad. rhabarh. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth. ℈j. 
Infundantur per noctem in q. s. aq. font. 
ebullient, pro ℥ij. adde 
Sp. lavend. comp. ʒij. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. ʒvj. 
S. Haustus purgans mane cum regimine sumendus. 
(2.) ♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒiij. 
Cort. intern. sambuc. ʒß. 
Sal. ebishamens. ʒiij. 
Ebulliant parumper in aq. font. q. s. ut 
exprimatur ℥ij. adde 
Syr. de spin. cerv. ℥ß. 
S. Ut prior. 
9. Claretum purgans & roborans 
ꝶ. Rad. calam. aromat. ʒvj. 
Cort. magellanic. 
Rad. rhabarh. opt. 
Fol. senn. S. stipit. aa ℥ß. 
Agaric. trochiscat. ʒiij. 
Cinnamom. acut. ʒij. 
Cubebar. ʒj. 
Conscissa, infunde in vini rhenani opt. 
℔. jv. per triduum, vase clauso, loco 
tepido, subinde concute: turn adde 
sacchari albi ℔. ß. trajice aliquoties 
per manicam Hippocratis. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis mane unus vel alter cyathus. 
M2 10.


164 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
10. Cerivisia anti-scorbutica. 
Vid. Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 191. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. cochlear.
Erucœ. 
Erysimi. 
Trisol. aquat. aa m. j. 
Semin. rec. contus. nasturt. hort. 
Raphan. hort. aa ℥ij. 
Flor. centaur. min. ℥j. 
Rad. raphan. rustic. ℥v. 
Conscissa reconde in cerevisiæ recentis 
& servescentis 1/2 dolio. 
S. Sit pro potu assiduo. 
Medicated ales, wines, &c. by infusion, are
now come so much into difuse, that we shall not 
trouble our reader with a larger detail of speci- 
mens than what is given by our author. 
Of DECOCTIONS for internal Use. 
§.224. A DECOCTION or apozem is a liquid, in- 
ternal medicine, pretty much like the 
infusion (§.211.) proceeding; but with this diffe- 
rence, that as the infusion is made without boiling, 
the apozem has both its ingredients and menstruum 
boiled over the fire. Hence we see wherein the 
apozem differs from the infusion. The apozem or 
decoction goes also under various denominations, 
agreeable to particular circumstances; whereof, 
those names that are now retained in use, shall be 
mention’d hereafter. 
§.225. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
in general the same as for the infusion (§.212.), 
and may be also distinguished into three kinds:
viz. 

165 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
viz. the menstruum or liquor, the solvenda or in- 
gredients, and the accessories, which assist or cor- 
rect. 
1. The menstruum for this, like as in the 
proceeding form, is of three kinds: aqueous, vi- 
nous, and spirituous; for which, conside the in- 
fusion (§. 212. n° 1.) proceeding. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be boiled, 
are also in like manner taken from either of 
the three kingdoms of animal, vegetable, or 
mineral substances; provided they are fit for in- 
ternal use; and tho’ they part with few or none 
of their virtues in a bare maceration or infusion, 
may yet communicate them sufficiently to a pro- 
per menstruum, by means of boiling. 
3. The accessories are here of the same use, 
and often obtain the same general division as (at 
§.212. n° 3.) of infusions proceeding: where, 
those of the first kind (1.) hold good the same 
here; but those of the latter (2.) are in some 
measure to be varied, as discretion shall indi- 
cate. 
§.226. A proper Choice of the materials for 
this form, is determined not only from the know- 
ledge of what has been said (at §.213.); but also 
from the known force and degree of fire to be ap- 
plied to the menstruum and ingredients in the ope- 
ration of boiling. But the young prescriber will 
be sufficiently instrusted on this head, from having 
learned what we deem previously necessary (per 
§.7. n° 2. 3. §.8. §.104.). So that I shall only 
observe here. 
1. That water and watery menstruums are 
more frequently used, for decoctions than others; 
because they cannot lose any virtues in boiling, 
as others do. Nor are distilled waters so fit for 
this purpose: for if you use those of any strength,
M3 their  


Of Apozems or Decoctions.
their virtues are dissipated in boiling; and if 
you take those of no strength, why may not 
simple water do as well, or better. Mead was 
in the highest repute and greatest use for this 
purpose among the antients; who had some-
times justice on their side for so doing: but in 
our day, we prefer the addition of honey, after 
the decoction is made. The lighter and purer 
your water, the litter for dissolving and extract- 
ing the virtues of your ingredients (§.213. 
n° 1.). 
2. Wine is a menstruum fitter for infusions 
than decoctions, and even though you should 
boil it in a vessel, so close as to prevent any va- 
pour from exhaling, it is a liquor that will be 
the worse for the heat. I therefore chuse, when 
wine is necessary; to add it after the boiling is 
over. But we should except must (which is 
like mead) before it has become wine by fer- 
mentation; because in that state, it rather be- 
longs to the class of aqueous, than vinous or 
spirituous menstruums. 
3. Spirituous menstruums (§.212. n° 1. (3.)) 
however, will bear boiling in chemical glasses 
without any considerable loss or alteration; so 
that they are fitter for this purpose than vinous 
menstruums. 
4. The dissolving power proper to each of 
these menstruums (§.225. n° 1.), is the same 
with what we have described at §. 213. n°. 1. 
to 4; only they act more intensely upon the in- 
gredients, by the force of the fire in boiling: 
so that tho' a decoction may take out more of 
the medicinal particles than an infusion, yet it 
either changes or loses more of the finest and 
most volatile principles, and sometimes draws 
out more than it shou’d.
5.

167 Of Apoxems or Decoctions. 
5. In the mean time, the degree of heat for 
boiling, is not the same for all menstruums; the 
spirituous boil with a less heat than the vinous, 
and both, than the watery: according to which, 
there will be a variation in the dissolving power 
arising from the action of the fire. 
6. Also the greater or less strength and con- 
tinuance of the boiling will make a proportion- 
able difference in the decoction; as some things 
are hurt by a long and violent boiling, others 
require it, and the contrary. 
7. Hence it appears, that ingredients (§.325. 
n° 2.) are fit for a decoction, when (1.) their 
medicinal particles or virtues required are so- 
luble in the determinate menstruum; (2.) when 
at the same time they cannot be so well extracted 
by maceration, as ebullition; when (3.) that ope- 
ration does not dissipate, nor (4.) change their 
virtues, nor (5.) introduce any foreign quality op- 
poring the intention. 
8. Therefore the choice of a proper men- 
struum, with the adapting it by suitable acces- 
sories to particular ingredients, are things of the 
highest consequence in this form as well as infu- 
sions (§. 213. n° 8.), and are both to be directed 
by the same considerations (n° 7.) proceeding; sup- 
posing the ebullition not to change, but augment 
the force of the menstruum and accessories. 
9. A previous and just preparation of the in- 
gredients, of themselves naturally unfit for a de- 
coction, is also none of the least considerations. 
To this head belong comminution of all kinds, 
and previous maceration; which are extremely 
useful in all substances that are dry, hard and 
difficult to dissolve. 
10. The choice of a proper vessel fit for 
making the docoction, is also very necessary; as 
the success of the process and medicines do in a  
M4 great

168 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
great measure depend thereon. (V. n° 3. and 
§.219. n° 1. (4.)), See also what we shall say 
on this head in the subscription, §.231. 
11. He would take a very injudicious course, 
that orders a decoction of a menstruum merely 
aqueous, and ingredients which are earthy, in- 
sipid, stony, refinous, sulphnreous, or oily: 
for such will scarce afford any virtue to a de- 
coction, unless mix'd with the accessories at 
§. 213. n° 1. 
12. The same (n° 11.) holds good also with 
regard to metals, and semi-metals, which do not 
abound with saline parts: tho' by a previous 
ignition, or a long and strong boiling, they 
seem in some measure subject to communicate 
new qualities to water. 
13. There is scarce any thing to be extracted 
by decoction, from most of the solid parts of 
animals; unless you continue the boiling for a 
long time together. Tho’ there are a few sub- 
stances exceptionable; as the porcupine bezoar: 
for that may be even dissolved by a bare ma- 
ceration in the cold. 
14- Those substances which will communi- 
cate their virtues to a menstruum by maceration, 
should not be tortured for that end, by the 
violence of boiling: because the intensity of 
the heat generally changes, more or less, the 
texture and virtues of the medicinal particles. 
But a gentle and short boiling is sometimes al- 
lowable, as it expedites the solution and ex- 
traction. This caution chiefly regards such in- 
gredients as are fresh, and of a soft or light tex- 
ture; as are most ot the parts of vegetables. 
15. Things whose virtues are apt to evapo- 
rate in boiling, should be rather assigned to an 
infusion; but if boiling in this case be necessary, 
it should be the more gentle, short, and per- 
form'd

169 Of Apezems or Decoctions. 
Form’d in a suitable vessel (per n° 6. and 10.) 
This is of consequence in aromatics, alcalescents, 
and such as are sit for the distillation of waters 
and oils *. 
16. Such things as by boiling change their 
virtues into other qualities, disagreeing with 
the intention; should be either boiled not at all, 
or else but gently and for a short time. Asarum 
proves more diuretic than emetic, by boiling. 
Liquorish grows bitter by a long boiling. Fol. 
senœ in a decoction that has had much boiling, 
proves very griping in its operation, &c. 
17. But if the virtues are required to be drawn 
out but in part by the menstruum, and the in- 
gredient be easy to extract; we should then ra- 
ther prefer maceration, or at least use only a 
gentle boiling. R. Rhei, myrobalani, &c. do 
by long boiling impart not only their purging, 
but also astringing qualities to a decoction. Mu- 
cilaginous substances, as rad. symphyti, altheœ, 
malvœ, with many seeds, fruits, juices, and the 
like, do by long boiling give a disagreeable 
viscidity to the liquor, &c. 
18. It is matter of great consequence in de- 
coctions, whether the ingredients to be boiled 
are new or old, dry or green, and fresh gather’d; 
since that permits them to communicate their 
virtues, with more or less difficulty to certain 
menstruums †. 
19. When several ingredients are boiled to- 
gether, we should observe whether and how far 
they promote or retard each others solution; 
and whether or no the same strength and length 
of boiling may be equally suitable to them all. 
For
* F. Boerh. Elem. Chem. l. c. 
† V. Boerh. ibid. vol 11. process. II. n° 5, 6.  


170 Of Apozems or Decoction. 
For there are many things which alone give no 
virtues to a decoction, but boiled with others 
prove very efficacious, and, the contrary. But 
the various times of boiling, required for differ 
rent ingredients and menstruums, we shall de- 
termine hereafter. 
20. With regard to avoiding disagreeable o- 
dours and tastes in this form, the same caution 
holds good here, as mentioned §.213. n° 9. 
A thick slimyness is to be also avoided (per 
n° 17.). 
21. Accessories of the later kind (§.225. 
n° 3.); used in this form for augmenting the me- 
dicinal virtues, are (1.) the same with those enu- 
merated (§.212. n° 3.(2.) §.213. n° 10.). But 
(2.) when many of the medicinal particles re- 
quired are so volatile as to fly off in the boiling, 
it may be perform’d in an alembic, and the con- 
densed vapours returned into the decoction, 
when cold. But sometimes, (3.) when among 
the ingredients there are some of a very soft tex- 
ture, abounding with volatile parts, and so, fit- 
ter for infusion than decoction (per §.213. n° 5. 
to 7.); in that case, those ingredients may be 
infused in the liquor of the decoction after it has 
done boiling, agreeable to the rules of infusion 
at §.211—223; by which means the virtues 
and pleasantness of the medicine will be increas- 
ed, and the formula consisting partly both in 
decoction and infusion, may be term’d decocto- 
infusum. 
22. From what has been said (at n° 21.(3.)), 
we may understand the method of aromatiza- 
tion used by the antients; in the room whereof, 
the moderns substitute a mixture of aromatic 
waters, spirits, tinctures, elæosacchara, &c.
as being more neat and expeditious, §.212. 
n° 3.(2.). 
23.

171 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
23. With regard to the number of ingredients 
for a decoction, the same holds good here, as at 
§. 213. n° 11. of infusions. 
§.227. The ORDER of prescribing or com- 
pounding the ingredients of this form, ought in 
general to be much the same as in (§.214.) infusi- 
ons; especially if the ingredients are to be boiled 
with one equal degree of fire, or sent by the apo- 
thecary to the patient under the form of species, 
bag, nodule, &c. (per §.220.): but if some things 
require to be boiled a longer, and others a shorter 
time, the best method will be to place them next 
to each other, according to the time of their boil- 
ing; to put those which require the least boiling, 
first, and the most, last; unless we can rely on the 
skill and dexterity of the apothecary for this ma- 
nagement. Observe therefore, 
1. That the generality of fossil or mineral 
substances §.226, n° 11. 12; the bones, horns, 
and more tough or even fleshy parts of old ani- 
mals, hard and dry woods, roots, barks, &c. 
which are very refinous and without volatile 
parts; these will bear and require boiling for 
three, four, or six hours, and more. So that it 
is often necessary to open the body of those sub- 
stances by a previous maceration; that they may 
part with their virtues the more freely, per 
§.226. n° 9. 
2. The flesh and other solid parts of young 
animals, woods, barks, stalks, roots, &c. which 
are not so compact as the former, nor abound 
with aromatic particles, but are astringent, bit- 
ter, saponaceous, &c. with those of the nourish- 
ing grain or pulse kind, being laxative or cool- 
ing, diuretic, incrassating, &c; for these, one 
or two hours boiling may be sufficient. 
3.

172 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. Next to these (n° 2.) come vegetable sub- 
stances of a still softer texture; such as soft roots, 
not aromatic but cooling, nourishing, astringing, 
aperient, diuretic or saponaceous; and such as 
are purging, of the more refinous kind; and 
lastly, soft pulpy fruits, which are sweet, acid 
or austere: these will scarce admit of boiling 
beyond the space of twenty minutes, or, at most, 
the space of an hour. 
4. For plants and leaves of a pretty firm tex- 
ture, without aromatic or volatile saline parts, 
whether emollient, astringing, incrassating, re- 
frigerating or aperient; seeds of the like nature, 
but not mucilaginous; woods, roots and barks, 
which are compact, and possess parts of the more 
fix'd aromatic kind: for these, half an hour's 
boiling will be sufficient to extract their medici- 
nal virtues. 
5. Lastly, the most tender parts of vegetables, 
their flowers; with herbs and leaves which are 
subaromatic, vulnerary, bitter, uterine, &c. the 
more tender seeds, berries, fruits, barks and roots 
of the like nature; to, which we may add some 
purgatives, as senna, rhubarb, myrobalans, &c.
liquorish with such roots and seeds as afford a 
mucilage in decoction; all which ought not to
boil above a quarter of an hour. Even for the 
major part of these especially such as are fresh 
gathered and pretty soft), it may be sufficient 
only to infuse them in the scalding liquor, after 
the decoction is removed from the fire, per §.226. 
n° 21.(3.). 
6. Yet the physician may sometimes find rea- 
son to order the boiling to be longer or shorter 
than the times now(n° 1. to 5.) specified; as when 
his intention requires only the extraction of such 
parts as adhere but superficially to the ingredi- 
ents,


173 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
ents, or when, without regarding the former, he 
would obtain such as adhere more intimately. 
7. But what has been hitherto said (n° 1. to 
5.), I would have understood to relate chiefly to 
aqueous decoctions. The vinous, (which do 
not well suit this form (per §.226, n° 2.) and 
spirituous, do not directly fall under the pre- 
ceeding rules: since they require to be made in 
chemical glasses or vessels exactly closed. But 
the latter or spirituous decoctions, boiling with 
a less heat than the others (per §.226. n° 5.), 
do not require so much caution.. 
§.228. the DOSE of this form agrees with that 
of the infusion (§.215); and is therefore to be de- 
duced from thence. 
§.229. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is also much the same as that of the infusion (at §.216.): 
but it is seldom ever extended beyond ℔ vj or viij; 
nor does it ever amount to that quantity, but when 
the preparation is difficult, the dose large, and to 
be drank at short intervals; supposing the season 
of the year, and the disposition of the decoction to 
keep good, to favour its being made and sent in 
such quantities. 
§.230. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we have little more to 
say than what we have already deliver’d at §.217. 
1. With regard to the solid ingredients 
(§.225.), what has been said at §.217. n° 1. 
to 3. takes place here. 
2. For the proportion of the menstruum 
(§.225. n° 1.) to the ingredients to be boiled, 
that again differs according to the circumstances 
at §.217. n° 5.; and according as the decoction 
is to be made with or without evaporation, 
(per §.226. n° 3. 10. 14.).
3.

174 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. If there will be no loss by evaporation, or
if the vapours are to be collected and refunded 
into the decoction (§.226. n° 21); in that 
case, the proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients should be the same as for infusions 
(§.217. n° 4.): tho' the quantity of the men- 
struum is sometimes, but seldom, increased to 
twelve times and upwards the quantity of ingre- 
dients. 
4. But if on the contrary, there will be any 
loss or dissipation in the boiling; the quantity 
of the menstruum should be increased in propor- 
tion to such loss; that the liquor of the decoc- 
tion, left after the operation, may be neither too 
thick nor too thin, but duly saturated. 
5. The physician may therefore determine 
the quantity of menstruum to be poured on the 
ingredients, partly by guess, but more exactly by 
considering, n° 3. and 4.; according as the 
length of time, and force with which the boiling 
is to be continued, or as the quantity or number 
of parts to be evaporated, shall indicate, 
6. Or, which is more safe and usual, the phy- 
sician may prescribe only q. s. of the menstruum, 
and determine the quantity of boiling by either 
the length of uime or quantity to be boiled 
away; or, lastly, he may only mention the 
quantity he would have left after the operation. So 
that the apothecary must then compute what 
quantity of menstruum will boil the determinate 
length of time, so as to leave the prescribed quan- 
tity of decoction. But it is in this case very easy for 
the physician to determine the quantity of men- 
struum, being much the same as when the decoc- 
tion is made without any evaporation per n°. 3. 
7. For the proportion of accessories of the 
first kind, which are to promote the solution or 
extraction of the ingredients (§.212.) n° 3.
(1.)

Of Apozems or Decoctions. 175
(1.) §.225. n° 3.), their quantity may be de- 
termined from the considerations mention’d at 
§.217. n° 7. But as the boiling greatly pro- 
motes that action (per §.266. n° 4, 5, 7.), 
there is frequently occasion for a less quantity of 
those accessories. 
8. The proportion of accessories of the second 
kind (§.225. n° 3. §.226. n° 21.) for cor- 
recting or exalting the medicinal virtues, is the 
same with that for infusions (§.217. n° 8.); so 
far as the accessories agree with their intention 
in that form. But such accessories as are infused 
after the boiling is over {per §.226. n° 21.(3.)) 
are subject to the same rules as those in the hi- 
story of infusions, §.217. But it should be ob- 
served, that those accessories will suffer a less per- 
fect solution, by maceration, in proportion as the 
liquor of the decoction was before more highly 
saturated with the ingredients by boiling: nor is 
a decoction agreeable to the patient, when of 
too thick a consistence, especially when it is to 
be drank in large quantities. 
§.231. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction of the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, differs 
but little from that of infusions (§.218. to 221.). 
For if the ingredients for the decoction are to be 
sent by the apothecary to be boiled by the patient, 
nothing more need be observed than what we have 
mentioned at §.220. But if the apothecary him- 
self is to take charge of the decoction, the phy- 
sician may order him to observe what is to be 
done, 
1. Before the operation of boiling: which, (1.) 
regarding the comminution, colligation and irro- 
ration, differ nothing from what has been said 
on those heads at §.219. n° 1.; unless we ex- 
cept the moistening with scalding water, which 
is

176 Of Apozems or Dococtions. 
is seldom used for decoctions. (2.) It may be re- 
quisite to mention the vessel proper for making 
the decoction, when if is to be one not com- 
monly used for that operation, but required by 
the particular of boiling, or by the acri- 
mony or volatility of the ingredients; v. g. 
phiala chemica, cucurbit a alembico instructa, lagena 
stannea, olla sictilis, diploma, &c. The received 
method, among apothecaries, of making all 
forts of decoctions promiscuously in a copper 
vessel, frequently not tinned, often makes the 
repetition of this caution to the compounder ne- 
cessary in a physician’s prescription. (3.) Ma- 
ceration of all or some part of the ingredients is 
to be sometimes premised (per §.226. n° 9. §. 
227. n° 1.); as some substances are much more 
dense and compact than others. This is to be 
ordered according to the rules at §.219. n° 2. 3. 
and the form may then assume the title of Infuso- 
Decoctum. 
2. In the operation of boiling: where, the phy- 
sician may determine (1.) the degree of fire to be 
used, and the method wherein it is to be ap- 
plied; whether the ingredients are to be boiled 
with a strong or slow fire and ebullition (per §. 
226. n° 4. 6. 12. 14. &c.) whether with a 
naked fire, or in balneo? which latter, is much 
the best for decoctions that require long and 
equal boiling, and are in danger of getting an 
empyreuma, or other change from the violence 
and inequality of heat. (2.) The order and length 
of time, when some things are to be boiled for a 
longer or shorter space than others, should be 
mentioned in the prescription (vide §.227.);
which is also required for some menstruums and 
accessories (§.212. n° 3.(1.)), which cannot 
well bear long boiling. (3.) The keeping of 
the vessel close stopped, with more or less ex-
actness;

177 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
actness; according as any evaporation will prove 
more or less pernicious to the medicine. And 
the keeping up an equable degree of heat, that 
the nature of the decoction may not thence be 
changed. (4.) To ascertain the quantity of boil- 
ing which the decoction is to suffer: which is 
frequently determined; when there is any evapo- 
ration, from the number of parts dissipated, or 
the quantity left; but these are methods not very 
exact. It is better to six a time per §.227. n° 
1. to 5. or else to limit the quantity of boiling 
by the colour, taste, &c. of the decoction: for 
the quantity that will exhale by vapor in a given 
time, must vary greatly with the different width 
of the vessel and intensity of boiling. 
3. Lastly, what is to he done after the boiling: 
to which belongs (1.) the infusion of such ingre- 
dients as will not bear boiling (per §.226. n° 
21.(3).); in performing which, the same rules 
are to be observed as mentioned at §.219. n° 1. 
2. 3.(2.) Depuration, or a separation of the 
foul parts from the decoction, like as at §.219. 
n° 4.; only in decoctions made with aqueous 
menstruums, the liquor is sometimes depurated 
not only by straining or filtration, but also by 
clarification with the whites of eggs: which in- 
deed renders the medicine exceeding limpid and 
clear; but at the same time makes it less effica- 
cious; for the whites of eggs do by their tena- 
city stick to and retain those medicinal particles 
which are fittest for a decoction, and concreting 
by the force of fire, carries them up with itself 
to the surface, in form of scome: so that this 
part of the process ought to be hardly comply’d 
with, even tor the nicest patients. (3.) The ad- 
dition and mixture of such accessories as may be 
thought proper, the business of which may be 
understood from consulting §.226, n° 21.(1.) 
N (2.)

178 Apozems or Decoctions.
(2.) In the last place (4.) comes the receptacle, 
&c. as at §.219. n° 6. 
4. In executing what has been said, n° 1. 3.
regard should be had to the rule at §.59. n° 7. 
§.232. For the SUPERSCRIPTION or direction 
to the patient for this form, that may be deduced 
without much difficulty from what has been said at 
§.221; for several of the very same names (§.ib.) 
are in a measure applicable to this form; so that a 
decoction which is prescribed for one dose may be 
termed Haustus or Polio: if it contains several 
doses and is made with a spirituous menstruum, it 
may be intitled Tinctura; if made with an aqueous 
menstruum, Decoctum or Apozema; if the ingre- 
dients which form the basis (§.75.) consist of the 
parts of animals, it may be called Jus Jusculum; 
if the ingredients which have been once boiled, 
are boiled again in more water, it was formerly 
termed Bochetum or Decoctum secundarium: but the 
other denominations, used by ancients, are now- 
become almost obsolete. 
§.233. The USE of this form coincides with 
that of the infusion (§.222). 
§.234. For SPECIMENS, take the following: 
1. Haustus emeticus, ventriculo cibis nimium 
infarcto. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 117. 
ꝶ. Rad. ipecacuhan. pulv. ℈iv.
cum vini albi  ℥iij. 
Coque in phiala alta hor. iv. 
Colaturam exhibe pro una dosi.
2. 

179 Apozems or Decoctions. 
2. Nodulus purgans, minus calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Fol. senn. sine stipit. ʒiij. 
Fung, agaric. opt. ʒij. 
Nitri puri ʒj. 
Concissa, tusa, includantur sindoni. 
S. Nodulus purgans. Coquatur per 1/4 horœ in cerisiœ
dulcis ℔ ß. vase clauso. Exprimatur. capiat œger 
cyathum omni semihora, donec purgetur. 
3. Jus cancrorum fluviatilium. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 16. 
ꝶ. Cancror. fluviatil. vivor. ℔ iij.
Coque spatio horæ cum aq. ℔ xij. tum ex-
emptos contunde una cum testis, atque 
coque in priore jure proprio adhuc per 
horas iv. addendo semper tantum aquæ, 
ut a coctione ℔ viij. circiter supersint, 
tum jus fortiter exprime, atque ei infunde 
Flor. horragin. ℥jß. 
Buglossi ℥j. 
Rad. tragopogoni ℥iv. 
Sisari ℥ij. 
Dein ebulliant simul spatio 1/16 horæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumatur ad ℥ijß. omni bihoric. 
4. Decocto-infusum adstringens, incrassans, ad 
hæmoptysin. 
V. Boerh. Mater, p. 196, 197.
ꝶ Rad. consolid. maj. 
Tamarisc. aa ℥B.
N2 Cum

180 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. pur. q. s. per 1/2 horæ decoctis,
adhuc servidis, insunde 
Herb. agrimon. 
Betonic. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Papav. rhoead. aa m. ß. 
Stent vase clauso, in infusione calida per 
horæ spatium. Colaturæ ℔ ij. admisce 
Syr. myrtin. ℥j. 
S. Liquor vulnerarius. Bibat ℥ij. omni bihorio diei. 
5. Tinctura anti-hydropica ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. ib. p. 204. 
ꝶ Rad. helenii ℥j. 
Aristolochiœ utriusque.
Zedoaria aa ʒvj. 
Zinziber. ℥ß. 
Sumit. absinth. 
Centaur, min.
Semin. dauci. 
Bacc. juniper. 
Lign. sassafras rasi aa ℥j. 
Cort. winteran. ℥ß. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum sp. juniper. ℔ ij. in 
phiala alta chemica ebuliiant per vj 
horas. Tinctura frigida, pura de- 
cantetur. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥ß quater de die, vacuo 
stomacho, cum regimine. 
6. Infuso-decoctum abstergens, antisepticum, in 
spina ventosa. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Lign.guajaci virid. ponderos. rasi ℥x. 
Sal. tartari ʒß.
Cum 

181 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. comm. ℔ vj. spatio xxiv horar. 
digestum in diplomate, decoque spa- 
tio ij horar. sub sinem admiscendo 
Spir. vini rectific. ℥iv. 
Ebulliant iterum parumper, turn exhibe. 
S. Sumat ℥iv. quater de die, vacuo ventriculo: mane 
hora 7ma dein hora undecima, iterum 4ta pomeri-
diana, & ultima hora 7ma vesp. 
7. Bochetum ex residuo prioris. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Residuum decocti prioris 
Aq. pur. ℔ iij. 
Ebulliant per iv horas. Colatura D. usui. 
S. Sit pro potu quotidiano. 
8. Decoctum aperiens, attenuans; ad ictericos, in 
hydrope, &c, exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. rhei. opt. 
Rubiœ tinctor. aa ʒijß. 
Sal. absinthii ʒjß. 
Aq. font. pur. ℔ ij. 
Leni ebullitione, per horæ spatium con- 
tinuata, fiat apozema; cui, depu- 
ratæ, adde, 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat  ℥iij. ter de die. 
9. Decoctum pectorale, in tussi, phthisi, pleuritide, 
nephritide, viscerum vulneribus, & inflamma- 
tionibus exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Consolid. maj. rec. contus. 
Ering. cond. aa ℥j. 
Sem, urtic. major, vulg.  ʒvi. 
N3 De-

182 Of Expressed Juices. 
Decoque in aq. font. ℔ iv ad lb ij. ex- 
prime, & adde 
Nitri puri ʒij. 
Syr. bals. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat a ij ad vj℥. subinde, 
pro re nata. 
10. Decoctum febrifugum. 
♃. Pulv. peruv. ℥jß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
F. Tribus coctionibus decoct. ℔ ij. cum
Aq. font: q. s. 
Cui adhuc bullienti adde 
Sumit. absinth. rom. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamœmel. ʒjß. 
Cons. flav. aurat. ℥ij. 
S. Ut in fronte, Depuratas & grate dulificatas 
exhihe ℥ij quater de die. 
Nota. We say nothing here concerning the Hy- 
drosacchara, Hydromel. Medical, and ptisans of 
the ancients; nor of their medicated whey, diet, 
cock-broth, Consummatum, Destillatum instaurans, 
&c. because the preparation of these, almost quite 
out of use, may be easily understood and deduced 
from the doctrine of infusions and decoctions §.211. 
to §.234. Conf. P. Morelli Method. prœscrib. Form. 
Of Expressed JUICES *. 
§.235. AN EXPRESSED JUICE is a liquid, 
internal medicine; consisting chiefly 
of an aqueous juice, extracted by beating, grinding,
and
* A form hardly ever used among us; whatever it may be a- 
mong the German and Dutch physicians. 

183 Of Expressed Juices. 
and pressing, from the softer and more succulent 
parts of recent vegetables: being a form intended 
only for present use. 
§.236. The Matter or ingredients for this 
form are of two kinds: primary, or most effential; 
and secondary, or less essential. 
1. Of the primary kind are every thing which 
by beating, grinding and pressing, will afford an 
aqueous juice, fit for internal use: such we are 
supplied with from almost none but the parts of 
recent vegetables. 
2. Those of the secondary kind are intended 
either (1.) to promote tfie expreffion of the juice, 
either by diluting it, or by opening and soften- 
ing the texture of the bodies trom whence it is 
to be expressed. For which purpose are used to 
be added, before expression, whey, milk, &c. 
Or (2.) to increase the medicinal virtues of the 
juice already expressed, or to correct some per- 
nicious or unpleasant quality therein. To which 
end are added salts, either acid, alcaline, or neu- 
tral; wine, distilled waters, sugar, honey, sy- 
rups, eleosacchara, &c. which are suitable for 
meliorating and correcting. 
§.237. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, the business of that may be contained in a 
few words; because of the small number of sub- 
stances which are fit to afford juices by expression. 
Therefore 
1. The primary ingredients (§.236. n° 1.) 
used in this form, are only the succulent parts 
of recent vegetables: such as leaves, flowers, 
fruits, roots and whole plants, which are of a 
fort texture and abound with a thin aqueous 
juice. 
2. Substances of a dry and compact texture 
N4 are

184 Of Expressed Juices.
are all excluded from this form. Hence, woods,
barks, ligneous stalks, &c. are quite unfit. 
3. Nor are seeds fit for this form by expres- 
sion; because they abound more with an oil, 
than an aqueous juice. 
4. Such things are also less sit for this form, 
whose juices, tho' copious, are yet too thick or 
viscid; because they are more difficult to extract. 
But being mix’d with the secondary or accessory 
liquors (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), they will, by means 
of heat, pretty readily part with their more fluid 
contents by expression. 
5. If the physician's intention should require 
some ingredients which are less succulent, or re- 
plete with a thick and viscid juice, as at n° 4. 
in that case, a proper addition of other plants, 
or their parts, which are full of a thinner juice, 
will supply the place of the accessories at §.236. 
n° 2. (1.). 
6. The medicated juices taken from living a- 
nimals, or their excrements, &c. by expression, 
are hardly used by any but the more vulgar fort 
of people: for there is scarce any physician that 
would advise or prescribe the use of 'em. 
7. Hence it appears, that this form of medi- 
cine is not agreeable with all times, places and 
circumstances of the ingredients and patient: so 
that the physician ought to be cautious not to pre- 
scribe any vegetable or its parts, for expression, 
which are out of season; nor several things toge- 
ther which are not in season at the same time, left 
he should order some vegetables green or fresh ga- 
thered, which can be only had dry at that time 
of the year. 
8. The secondary kind of ingredients (§.236. 
n° 2.) of both classes, are very frequently o- 
mitted. But the first kind (ib. n° 2. (l.)) of 
accessory ingredients are often very useful, when 
the

185 Of Expressed Juices. 
the natural humidity of the rest is either too 
small in quantity or of a too thick and viscid 
consistence. Therefore such accessories ought 
to be chose for remedying those inconveniences, 
which cannot introduce any noxious quality, or 
make any sudden change in the texture and vir- 
tues of the juice; but rather correct, or fall in 
with the intention of the form itself. The latter 
kind of accessory ingredients at (§.236. n° 2. 
(2).), require the same cautions with those men- 
tioned at §.13. n° 10. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form 
should be but few, less than for infusions, at 
§.213. n° 11. For when there are many ingre- 
dients accumulated together, the prescriber will 
be much more liable to commit an error in re- 
gard to the season (per n° 7.), or to occasion 
some improper quality and consistence in the 
medicine by such a compound mixture. Vide 
§.94—105. 
§.238. The ORDER wherein the ingredients 
for this form are to be prescribed, is hardly de- 
termined by physicians; but in general, the same 
method §.214) may be observed, as for infusions, 
so far as the matter or ingredients of this form a- 
gree with the nature of those §.214. 
§.239. The DOSE of this form is to be more or 
less according to the various circumstances at §.66. 
and as the indication requires a repetition thereof, 
at longer or shorter intervals of time. Sometimes 
the dose of expressed juices is determined only by 
measure, as cochlear, j, ij, iij, or ad Cyathum j, ij, 
&c. but they are more frequently ordered by 
weight, a ʒij. ad ij, iij, seldom more, unless the 
expressed juice be very thin and pleasant. The 
slatulent crudity natural to these vegetable juices, 
with the unpleasantness of their colour, smell, and
taste,

186 Of Expressed Juices. 
taste, do require the adiquate dose to be divided 
rather into several lesser ones, agreeable to the rule 
at §.67. n° 4. 
§.240. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, it is various ac- 
cording to the several circumstances mentioned at 
§.67. with the number of doses, &c. Sometimes 
the whole general quantity sufficient, is but one 
dose; as when the intention is to vomit, &c. But 
more frequently, when this form is intended to 
alter or purge the whole habit, the use of it is 
continued for several days or even weeks together. 
In that case, (1.) so much may be prescribed as may 
serve for one or two days together; or the form 
may be fresh made every, or every other day: 
which is the more necessary to be done, if the cir- 
cumstances of the patient (§.67. n° 8.) permit, as 
these vegetable juices by expression are so apt to 
ferment and change by keeping. Or (2.) if the 
first method (1.) cannot be well complied with, 
and a quantity of juice is to be made at one time 
sufficient to last several days or a week: in that 
case, we may in some measure prevent it from 
fermenting and corrupting by stuming with the 
fumes of sulphur, by boiling, with the addition of 
such things as preserve and pickle, a close exclu- 
sion of the ambient air and keeping in a cool 
cellar. 
§.241. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, it neither requires 
nor admits of an exact determination; but may, 
in the general, be pretty easily understood from 
what follows. 
1. The general quantity (§.240.) of the ex- 
pressed juice, to be made at once, being deter- 
mined by weight; the primary ingredients at 
§.236. n° 1. may be ordered to be taken only 
in q. s. 
2. 

187 Of Expressed Juices. 
2. Or the quantity of juice to be expressed 
being unlimited, the quantity of ingredients 
only may be determined by weight or measure 
per §.58. n° 6, 7, 8. (1.) (2.).: but to deter- 
mine exactly the quantity both of juice and in- 
gredients cannot be easily done. 
3. The first method, n° 1, is generally the 
most used, and is even necessary when the dose 
(§.239, 240). being one or more is required to 
be of a certain size or number. When the lat- 
ter, n° 2. is made use of, the physician should 
consider whether the ingredients have a great or 
small degree of succulency, as also the more or 
less bulk, and frequent use or exhibition thereof, 
that he may not commit an error in excess or de- 
fect, which give room for the apothecary to ri- 
dicule, or giving himself the trouble of writing 
several of the same prescriptions in one day. So 
that this latter method (n° 2.) is hardly ever 
used, but when the general quantity of expressed 
juice is large and undetermined. 
4. But if the ingredients are several, and of 
different textures and virtues, the mutual pro- 
portion of each should be such as may corres- 
pond to the physician’s indication; as that may 
require more or less of one than another, ac- 
cording to their degree of succulency and parti- 
cular virtues. Such vegetables and their parts 
which have but a small quantity of juice, and 
that very thick or viscid (per §.237. n° 4, 5.), 
ought to be (cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
taken in a less quantity than those which are 
more succulent; that the expressed juice may be 
obtained more thin and plentiful. 
5. Therefore, in the first case, n° 1. when 
the circumstances before-mentioned (n° 4.) do 
not require all the ingredients to be taken in 
equal quantities, they may be only determin’d 
in

188 Of Expressed Juices. 
in the proportion of double, triple, sub- 
duple, &c, e.g. Radic. pars j, herhar part. ij, 
baccar. part. iij, or otherwise. As for what 
is to be done in the latter case, n° 2. that is 
self-evident. 
6. Sometimes a certain quantity of the ex- 
pressed juices of vegetables and their parts, is 
prescribed for after they have been depurat- 
ed, without making particular mention of 
each individual, or the method and order of 
expression: which is the most simple and easy 
method, if follow’d in the common way. 
7. The Secundary ingredients of the first kind 
§.236. n° 2. (1.) are prescribed in but a small 
quantity, left if they were used plentifully, they 
should render this form more like an emulsion, 
decoction or infusion, than an expressed juice; 
for the business of these is to serve not as a real 
menstruum, but only to dilute the more viscid 
parts §.236. and 237. n° 8. These should be 
therefore added in a proportion more or less, ac- 
cording as the particular texture and consistence 
of the primary ingredients may require; if so 
be they do not exceed the quantity of the juice 
itself. 
8. The latter kind of secundary ingredients 
§.236. n° 2. (2.)) do acknowledge much the 
same proportion with that given at §.216. n° 8. 
But care should be taken to prefer juices before 
other addenda, as they make part of the basis 
(§.88.); and to, be mindful that the juice be 
not made of too thick a considence by any ad- 
denda; as also, that the quantity of all together 
may not exceed the adiquate and sufficient dose, 
(§.239.). But when the weight of the juice is 
left undetermined (per. n° 2.), the proportion 
of the addenda is to be limited by equaling a cer- 
tain part thereof (per n° 5.); whence the apo- 
thecary

189 Of Expressed Juices. 
thecary may easily compute how much the whole 
will require. 
§.242. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, contains several par- 
ticulars; such as 
1. The preparation of the primary ingredients 
(§.236. n° 1.) in order for the expression of their 
juice. And this includes (1.) comminution, or a 
division of them into small parts; which for dif- 
ferent ingredients is done after different me- 
thods; sometimes by cutting, scraping, and 
beating into a soft and succulent paste; for 
which purpose a pestle and mortar of stone or 
wood is preferable to one of metal. (2.) The 
addition of a diluent liquor (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), 
when that may be necessary (per §.237. n° 8.); 
whether mixed by affusion, aspersion, or va- 
pour. (3.) The digestion, or else assation of 
the paste, after contusionand humectation; which 
is however, generally omitted: nor is it of any 
service, but when the juice of the ingredients 
is very viscid, or in but a small quantity, and 
at the same time not subject to an improper 
change by heat; but then it is often attended 
with this advantage, that it takes off a good deal of 
the crudity and flatulency of the vegetable juice, 
and often fits it to keep longer. 
2. The expression itself of the juice; concerning 
which, we have nothing in particular to observe, 
more than what is usual in the common pro- 
cess.  
3. The depuration of the expressed juice; which 
is effected by letting it stand, or it may be done 
sooner, by passing it through a strainer (§.219. 
n° 4. (2.) (3.)): which should not be neglected, 
because it greatly removes the more gross parts, 
and unpleasant viscidity or thickness of the juice.
Nor

190 Of Expressed Juices. 
Nor is it amiss to proceed like some, who, be- 
fore they strain the juice, do without any pre- 
vious digestion or assation, simmer the liquor 
over a gentle fire till they almost perceive the 
signs of boiling, which they do in a close 
vessel, if the virtue consists in volatile parts, 
or else it may be done in an open vessel till it 
even boils up a little, whereupon they depurate 
it by a strainer, whilst hot, or let it stand 'till 
cold §.219. n° 4. (4.) ult.): for by that method 
the liquor may be not only despumated, and 
freed from its more flatulent parts; but the gross 
fæces may be better separated, the insects and 
their eggs which it contains, will be destroy'd 
and the whole liquor fitted to keep a longer 
time, and with less alteration. 
4. The addition and mixture of the secundary 
ingredients §.236. n° 2. (2.), which is to be per- 
formed after what has been said at n° 3.: tho'
it would be better to dissolve suck things, whose 
solution is difficult in a cold liquor, in the juice 
whilst it is hot, (n° 3.) before draining. I 
should also advise, for the exhibition of salts, 
which are apt to congeal and separate from the 
juice, to send them to the patient distributed 
in their proper doses in the form of a powder, 
that the patient may mix a dose of the salts in 
a proper quantity of the juice a little before 
taking; by which means, the dose and distri- 
bution thereof will be more certain and equal,
than if disturbed by shooting or crystallizing 
from the juice in the cold; which observation is 
more especially of consequence, when the gene- 
ral quantity of this form to be made at once, is 
very large. 
5. The keeping of the expressed and prepared 
juice; which, if but for a short time (per §.240. 
(1.)), is of no great consequence, but if for ma-
ny

191 Of Expressed Juices. 
ny days or weeks (per ib. (2.)), it ought to be 
particularly regarded: since the natural dispo- 
sition of those juices, and the season of the year 
wherein they are mostly used, do very much sub- 
ject them to change, ferment and corrupt. Nor 
is keeping the juice in a narrow neck’d vessel well 
stopp’d, and set in a cool place, always suffi- 
cient to preserve it found and unalter’d: but we 
ought besides, as Helmont advises, to fumigate 
the vessel well with burning sulphur; or else to 
preserve the juice from fermenting by the ad- 
dition of a little spirit of wine, especially if the 
secundary ingredient; do not tend to prevent cor- 
ruption, and a vinous spirit be not repugnant to 
the indication; or, if the juice be very thin, 
and will receive no hurt from the fire, it may be 
inspissated by evaporating half a way. 
§.243. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily de- 
duced from §.60. 235. 239: nor is there any oc- 
casion to advertize the patient pf any thing more 
than usual in directions; only, when the expressed 
juice is to last several days taking, he should be 
cautioned to keep it in a close vessel, and in a cool 
place. 
§.244. The USE of this form in chronical, 
disorders, is to correct inveterate indispositions of 
the solids and fluids, the blood and fibres; to open 
obstructions of the viscera, especially those of the 
abdomen, &c. In acute diseases, this form of me- 
dicine is used to abate thirst, to prevent and drive 
out putrifaction in inflammatory disorders, &c. 
the form itself being suited as well for alteratives 
as evacuants, whether the later operate by vomit,
stool or urine. But then it is not so agreeable to 
infants and nicer patients as some other forms, nor 
is it suited indifferently for all seasons of the year:
tho'

192 Expressed Juices. 
tho* there are not wanting juices which cannot 
fail to please the most squeamish palate. The last 
objection to the use of this form, is, that it can- 
not be so easily and speedily prepared as many 
others. 
§.245. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Succus emolliens, aperiens, humectans, solido- 
rum nimiam rigiditatem corrigens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 9 & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. scorzoner. 
Rapar. aa ℥iv. 
Herb. recent. cichorei. 
Taraxaci. 
Endiviœ aa m. ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, adsunde 
Seri lact. recent, pint. ß.
Ebulliant leniter spatio vj horæ minuto- 
rum in balneo maris: turn succum 
exprime: cujus per colum depurati 
singulis unciis admisce 
Syrup. rubi idaei ʒj. 
D. in lagena sulphurata. 
S. Ut in fronte. Servetur in loco frigido. Dosis 
cochlearium omni bihorio diet. 
2. Succus emeticus, in hydrope utilis.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Cort. medii sambuc. recent. q. s. 
Ut consciff. tus exprimatur succi ℥j. 
cui adde 
Syr. violor. ℥ß 
D. usui. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro una dosi. 
3.

193 Expressed Juices.
3. Succus antipyicus in statu phlogistico variolarum. 
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 239.  
ꝶ. Succi recens expressi cichorei. 
Lactucœ. 
Taraxaci. 
Fumariœ aa  ℥ij. 
Radic. scorzoner. ℥iv. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
M. 
S. Bibat ℥j. omni hora did. 
4. Succus diluens resolvens abstergens ad aphthas. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 168. 
ꝶ. Bulb. rapar. cum cortice q. s. 
Tyrocnesti, vel radula ex bractea serrata, 
radantur: turn exprimatur succus, 
qui ebulliens leniter despumetur: 
hujus ℥xvj. admisce 
Vitell. ovor. n°. ij. 
Syrup. violar. ʒvj. 
S. Bibat ℥ß. omni semihora. 
5. Succus antacidus, in frigida scorbuti specie: 
ad exemplum Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 189. 190. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. raphan. rustican. 
Ari ana part. j. 
Herb. recent. trisol. aquat. 
Nasturt. aquatic, ana part, ij.
Radula rasis, conscissis, tusis, exprime succi 
unc. vj. quibus admisce 
Spir. antiscorbut. Fred. Dekk. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
D. vase clauso. 
S. Capiat omni trihorio ℥ß. vel cochlearium.
O 6. 

194 Emulsions. 
6. Alius in scorbuti specie alcalina. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 192. 
ꝶ. Herb. recent. acetosœ. 
Taraxaci aa q. s. 
Fr. pom. citreum n°. j. 
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succi ℥v. his, 
per colum trajectis, adde 
Sacchari albi ʒvj. 
D. usui: iterentur quovis die per duas 
hebdomodas. 
ꝶ. Crem. tartar. ʒv. 
Sal. essent. acetosell. ʒij. 
M. Divide in xxiv partes æquales. 
D. singulæ in chartulis seorsim. 
S. Capiat mane hora septima dimidium succi, cut ad- 
misceat unam dosin pulveris: reliquum hora nona 
sine pulvere. Id fiat per xiv dies. 
7. Succus in febre biliosa, inflammatoria, nause- 
ante-propinandus. 
♃. Suc. limon. recent. express. ℥ß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒß. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Syr. violar. aa ʒiij. 
M. pro dosi. 
S. Haustus cardiacus, stomachicus, 4ta quaque hora, 
vel post singulos conatus, sumendus. 
Of EMULSIONS. 
§.246. AN EMULSION is an internal liquid, 
and Somewhat oily, but more aqueous 
medicine; approaching generally to the colour and 
consistence of milk: being formed of the oily parts 
of

195 Of Emulsions: 
of vegetables, pressed out and intimately mix’d by 
trituration and emulsion in an aqueous menstruum. 
Whence appears the reason of the name, and the 
difference of this form from the preceeding 
(§.235.) 
§.247. The MATTER or ingredients for emul-
sions are of three kinds (as at §.212. 225.): viz.
the menstruum, the oily ingredients to be emulsed 
and the accessories. 
1. The menstruum commonly used is of the 
aqueous kind: as common or spring water, dis- 
tilled simple waters of the shops, some aqueous 
decoction or infusion, &c. Tho’ sometimes, 
very seldom, wine is used for the menstruum. 
2. The ingredients to he emulsed are, (1.) the 
nuclei or kernels and seeds of plants, which are 
repleat with oil. (2.) The oily juices of vege- 
tables: as resins, gum-resins and balsams; and 
sometimes roots, which are very resinous and 
mucilaginous, &c. 
3. The accessories for emulsions are, (1.) such 
as promote the solutioh and mixture of the olea- 
ginous parts of the ingredients at n° 2. being of 
a viscid and saponaceous substance; as the yolks 
of eggs, sugar, honey, and such of the oily 
seeds or fruits (at n° 2. (1.)) as are readily dis- 
solved and united with an aqueous menstruum. 
Or, (2.) such as are to be added after the emul- 
sion is made, in order to increase the medicinal 
virtues of the form, or render it more pleasant, 
and are, in general, much the same as at §.212. 
n° 3. (2.) 
§.248. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we are to observe, that 
there are two kinds of emulsions; some, (1.) pro- 
perly so called, being prepared from the ingre- 
dients at §.247. n° 2. (1.); others (2.) less proper-
O2 ly  

196 Of Emulsions. 
ly so termed, being made from the latter kind of 
gredients, §.ib. n° 2. (2.). We designedly omit the 
compositions which some refer to this form, con- 
sisting of white earthy powders (as pearl, &c.) 
ground with an aqueous menstruum; for these are 
not properly emulsions, but only mixtures: since 
we are sufficiently convinced how soon they lose 
their milky colour, by the fine white powder sub- 
siding to the bottom. 
§.249. For ingredients of the first kind (§.247. 
n° 2. (1.) ), as they resemble milk in colour and 
consistence, so should they also in their smell and 
taste; at least they should have no unpleasantness, 
which their intention will very well permit, as 
they are seldom used but for cooling, nourishing, 
easing, &c. Hence, 
1. They will admit of no menstruum but 
what is aqueous (§.247. n° 1.), having neither 
viscidity, acrimony, nor any other unpleasant 
quality, but the more simple the better. There- 
fore the best menstruum for this form, is pure 
boiling water; or else some thin and watery de- 
coction, which is insipid, inodorous, or plea- 
sant; as are those from barley, oat-meal, harts- 
horn, the roots of viper-grass, vetches, liquo- 
rish, &c. with infusions of the like kind. 
2. If any of the more simple distilled waters 
are used for this form, which they frequently are, 
care should be taken to let them be such as are 
skilfully prepared, without any empyreuma. 
Such distilled waters as are spirituous, aromatic, 
vinous, or endued with any strong or consider- 
able smell and taste, are either wholly excluded 
by the nature and intention of this form, or at 
most, are admitted in but a very small quantity, 
in the room of accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)). 
Such liquors as are acid are also prohibited 
for

197 Of Emulsions. 
for the same reasons, and because they make an. 
emulsion rancid and unfit to keep. 
3. The ingredients to be emulsed, are, nu- 
clei and seeds, mention'd §.247. n°. 2 (1.); 
and these, not of any kind indifferently, but 
such as square with the nature and intention of 
an emulsion, before-mentioned. 
4. Therefore those nuclei and seeds as are 
internally of a colour different from that proper 
to an- emulsion, are not fo fit for this form: but 
those which are fat, soft, and white within, are 
the fittest for an emulsion. 
5. Also the larger kind of these nuclei and 
seeds should be first freed from their external 
husks or skins; for if they were to be beat or 
ground together in making the emulsion, they 
would not only obscure its proper milky colour, 
but also impart a strong and disagreeable taste, 
together with an astringency, repugnant to the 
proper intention of the form. 
6. Those seeds and nuclei which are bitter, 
pungent, warm and aromatic, scarce ever enter 
the composition of an emulsion, because the co- 
lour, odour, taste and virtues of them are sel- 
dom agreeable to the intention of this form. 
But sometimes the intention will admit some 
that have a mild bitterness, as the seeds of ci- 
trons, oranges, &c. the nuclei of cherries, bit- 
ter almonds, &c. Even some which are less plea- 
sant than these may be used in a small quantity 
without offending the palate. 
7. Those seeds which afford a great quantity 
of mucilage after grinding, are also less fit for 
this form: such are the seeds of quinces, lin-seed, 
fleabane, henbane, &c. to which we add barley, 
when boiled till it bursts; for only a gentle 
boiling of that grain is usually sufficient, and 
fitter for this form. 
O3 8.

198 Of Emulsions. 
8. Care should be taken that none of these 
nuclei or seeds be rancid; which should be try'd 
in the month, before they are used: for nothing 
is more liable than these to this kind of corrup- 
tion, in a short time, which renders them unfit 
for use in any form. 
9. Those who intermix other things among 
the ingredients to be emulsed than these men- 
tioned at n° 3. to 9. such as the peels of ci- 
trons, oranges, myrrh, &c. do not consider the 
unfitness of the taste, colour and consistence of 
such for emulsion. It would seem better to add 
elæosacchara of the first, and the tincture of 
myrrh, as accessories. 
10. For accessories of the first class (§.247. 
n° 3. (1.)), there is no occasion for them in 
this form: but those of the latter kind (§.ib. (2.)) 
are admitted. These, however, should be such 
as fall in with the intention, and no ways dis- 
turb the proper qualities of an emulsion. So that 
the best accessories for this purpose, are, the 
more pleasant kind of aromatic distilled waters;
pleasaht syrups, which are without colour; ju- 
leps, sugar, elæosacchara, and neutral salts. 
11. If any powder be added which is not ca- 
pable of an intire dissolution in an emulsion, 
it ought to be white, and not very heavy, but 
ground exceeding fine, and not subject to run 
into grumes or clog together: so that there is 
room for almost none but the lighter, earthy 
powders in this form, and not those, unless they 
are most exactly levigated. 
12. Conserves, electuaries, extracts and the 
like, should not enter this form; because they 
disturb its requisite colour, taste, and consistence. 
13. Acids should be also excluded; unless the 
indication should require an emulsion really acid, 
or very quickly apt to turn so. 
14.

199 Of Emulsions. 
14. Alcaline substances, which have an uri- 
nous taste, are by their unpleasantness prohi- 
bited from entering this form. 
15. The intention of this form will also sel- 
dom permit the addition of spirits, tinctures, 
effences, elixirs, &c. tho’ they may sometimes 
enter in a very small quantity. 
16. Yet we ought not to be over solicitous 
about the smell and taste, (per. §.65. 100. 101.). 
Emulsions are generally the more agreeable, as 
they arrive nearer to the nature of milk. 
17. Some patients may imagine they shall 
eject the medicine, if the physician prescribes 
for an emulsion: but such may be easily deceiv’d 
by using a menstruum of a red or some other 
colour, or else by mixing the like colour’d pow- 
ders, syrups, tinctures, &c. 
§.250. The latter kind of Ingredients (§.247. 
n° 2. (2.) ), are less conformable to the nature of 
milk, and do not always resemble either its colour 
or consistence, they should be therefore only or- 
der’d to be emulsed; that they may be exhibited 
and made into an emulsion with some oil, inti- 
mately combin’d with an aqueous menstruum. 
Therefore emulsions of this kind differ much from 
the former (§.249.): for 
1. They do not require, nor can they be 
made so pleasant as the proceeding; because they 
do not take in the same ingredients for emul- 
sion. 
2. Their intentions are generally very diffe- 
rent; since the latter kind (§.247. n° 2. (2.)) 
is more frequently intended for heating, &c. 
than for cooling, &c. per §.249. 
3. The primary ingredients (§.247. n° 2. 
(2.)) are those of the more oily kind, which 
are difficult to dissolve in water: as oils and bal- 
O4 sams


200 Of Emulsions. 
fams which are liquid, thick, or solid; v. g. 
Terebinthina omn. bals. peruvian. capaib. tolutan. 
&c. resins and gum-resins from jalapp. scammon. 
juniper, mastiche, myrrha, opopanax, ammonia- 
cum; rad. jalappœ, &c. In order to make these 
more penetrating and easy to take, they are 
sometimes very properly exhibited under this 
milkey form. 
4. We must however abstain here from the 
use of such substances of this kind which are the 
most fœtid and disagreeable, and which are best 
exhibited in the form of pills (§.162. n° 7.). 
5. The menstruum used here, is not very dif- 
ferent from that of the former at §.249. n° 1. 
But the vinous, spirituous and aromatic waters 
are more constantly and liberally used for these 
milkey compositions; not only because they 
more readily and intimately dissolve these resinous 
substances, but also, as the emulsion and these 
mixtures have different intentions. Hence, 
wine itself is sometimes used here, for the men- 
struum. 
6. Accessories of the first class (§.247. n° 3.
(1.)) are of the greatest use here: for without 
their intervention, the generality of the preceed- 
ing, resinous ingredients (n° 3.) are altoge- 
ther immiscible with an aqueous menstruum. 
We should therefore use accessories the more 
strong and saponaceous, as the ingredients are 
more cohesive and difficult to dissolve, and as 
the menstruum is more aqueous, or the dissolu- 
tion required to be the more intimate and exact. 
7. The yolk of an egg has this saponaceous 
and, dissolving property beyond most other ac- 
cessories, and will accommodate the most oily 
and tenaceous substances for an uniform mixture 
with even water. Sugar, syrups and honey have 
this property in a less degree, But honey dar- 
kens

201 Of Emulsions. 
kens the milkey colour in a great measure. Even 
common sope may be commodiously used for 
this purpose, when it is not repugnant to the pa- 
tient’s disorder and palate. 
8. When the quantity of ingredients (at n° 3)
to be dissolved is but small, the nuclei and seeds 
for the first kind of emulsion (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) 
are added as accessories; as almonds, and most 
of the oiley nuclei and seeds, &c. For these be- 
ing ground together with the resinous substances, 
pour out a thin oil and a mealy substance, which 
insinuating between the parts of those substances 
which are difficultly soluble, perform the office 
of a sope, so that by attenuating, and intimately- 
blending the more cohesive parts with the liquid 
menstruum, they form a medicine of the same 
colour and consistence with the emulsion, 
§.246. 
9. The accessories of the latter kind (§.247. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are for augmenting the plea- 
santness or virtues of these mixtures, are much 
the same with those mention’d at §.249. n° 10. 
&c. But those of the spirituous kind (§.ib. 
n° 15.) are more frequently used here, by rea- 
son of §.250. n° 2. 5.): nor need we be so cau- 
tious to preserve the colour, taste, &c. (per. 
§.ib. n° 1.) 
§.251. For the Order or method of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for this form; in both the true 
(§.249.) and the spurious emulsion (§.250.), 
the substances to be dissolved take the first place:
after these, in emulsions of the spurious kind 
(§.250.), may be subjoined the saponaceous acces- 
sory; then, the menstruum; and lastly the acces- 
sories for augmenting the pleasantness and virtues 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)). But the prescriber may vary  
the

202 Of Emulsions.
the order of each particular kind of these, at his 
own discretion. 
§.252. The Dose of this form is almost the 
same with that of expressed juices (§.239.), and 
is like that determined either by weight or measure. 
The true kind of emulsion (§.249.), is generally 
exhibited in a very large quantity, ad cyathum, or 
from une. j, ij, &c. ad ℔ß. and sometimes it is to 
be drank at pleasure as an ordinary drink. The 
spurious emulsion (§.250.), is generally given in a 
much more restrained quantity, ad cochlearium, or a 
ʒj, ij, &c. ad ℥j. or more; according as it is more 
or less strong, dilute, or nauseous, and as the diffe- 
rent intention, and more or less easy taking by the 
patient, &c. shall indicate. (V.§.66. and 67. n° 4.).
§.253. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is sometimes no 
more than one dose (§.252.); which obtains 
mostly in the spurious emulsion (§.250.). Nor is 
it proper to prescribe the later kind of this form in 
a quantity sufficient for several days; because by 
standing, unless the mixture be very uniform and 
well confirmed, there will follow a reparation, 
precipitation or emersion of the grossest parts. The 
first or true kind of emulsion (§.249.) easily turns 
sower, and the sooner as the season is warmer; in 
so much that it will hardly keep good six or seven 
hours in a hot summer, whereas it will stand a day 
and a night without changing in the winter time. 
Having therefore considered the quantity and fre- 
quency of the dose (§.252.), together with the 
temperature of the atmosphere, the wise physician 
will prescribe no more at one time than may be 
taken whilst it is good; having no acidity, except 
when the disorder and patient may chance to re-
quire it so. 
§.254.

203 Of Emulfions. 
§.254. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, varies very much
with their different natures and indications. 
1. The true kind of emulsions (§.249.) are 
made more or less dilute and thin, as they are 
intended to answer only the intention of cooling 
and moistening, or nourishing, easing, &c.
2. It makes one of the thickest kind of emul- 
sions, when the proportion of the menstruum is 
but three, four or five times greater than that of 
the ingredients: from twelve to twenty times as 
much more menstruum as ingredients makes one 
of the thinnest emulsions; if in the proportion 
of 8 to 1, an emulsion of a midling consistence. 
3. But respect should be had to the size of 
those nuclei and seeds (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) which 
are to make the emulsion: for the smaller they 
are, the more bark and skin they have in pro- 
portion to their internal, mealy and oily sub- 
stance; of which later is formed the emul- 
sion. So that the same quantity of small seeds 
will not so much saturate a certain quantity of 
menstruum, as will a like quantity of nuclei. 
4. For the proportion of the menstruum, that 
is usually prescribed by q. s. nor is the quantity 
of menstruum to be determined but from the ge- 
neral quantity of emulsion to be made; nor even, 
sometimes, can it be determined from thence: 
in which case the apothecary takes it in a mean 
proportion, per n° 2. 
5. But to more accurately determine the due 
proportion of menstruum, respect should be had 
to the degree of consistence, and mutual solubi- 
lity of the liquors (§.250.) and ingredients 
(§.247. n° 2. (2.)), in conjunction with the 
more or less quantity of accessories (§.ib. n° 3. 
(1.) §.250. n° 6. &c.) which they may require: 
the result of which, will be a proportion nearly 
the


204 Of Emulsions. 
the same with that given at n° 2. and is fre- 
quently referr’d to be ascertained at the discre- 
tion of the compounder (per n° 4.), especially 
when the emulsion consists of but one dose. 
6. The proportionable quantity of accesso- 
ries (§.247. n° 3. (1.)) should be more or 
less according to the quantity and texture of the 
ingredients and menstruum: the quantity may 
be double, triple, or quadruple that of the in- 
gredients, more or less, as the accessory may 
have a stronger or weaker dissolving power, 
(per §.250. n° 6, 7, 8.), and as the ingredients 
to be emulsed are more or less disposed for an 
intimate union with the menstruum. Hence, it 
is the most usual to prescribe vitell. ovi q. s. 
which method is also commonly taken with those 
accessories at §.250. n° 8. 
7. For the proportion of the second kind of 
accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)), which are to 
be added after the emulsion is made; there can 
be no more particular determination thereof, 
than by the rules given at §.217. and 241. n° 8. 
An ounce of emulsion will bear ℈j of the pul- 
verulent accessories (§.249. n° 11.), and ʒß of 
the sweet: but then we should consider whether 
any honey or sugar has before enter’d the emul- 
sion in the room of sope(per §.247. n° 3. (1.)), 
with what degree of correction the unpleasant- 
ness of the ingredients may require by these 
sweets, and whether we are prescribing for an 
infant, a child, or an adult, &c. The true kind 
of emulsion (§.249.) ought not to be made 
very unpleasant by adding too large a quantity 
of salts: for ℥vj of emulsion will seldom admit 
of more than ℈j. The proportion of the rest 
may be guided by the intention. 
§.255.

205 Of Emulsions.
§.255. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, in the true kind, 
(§.249.) is comprehended barely in F. I. a. emuls. 
Afterwards is to be mentioned the quantity of emul- 
sion to be strained off, if the menstruum were only 
order’d in q. s. (per §.254. n° 4.). And lastly, 
directions may be given for adding what else is to 
be mix’d. To say any thing of the vessel for con- 
taining this form, is generally unnecessary. In the 
spurious emulsion (§.250.) or white mixture, are 
prescribed first the ingredients to be dissolved 
(§.ib. n° 3.) and their saponaceous accessory 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)) by which they are to be ex- 
actly mixed: afterwards the addition of the men- 
struum, and other things, which is to be done 
gradually, by a little at a time. But what else 
more particularly regards the encheiresis of this 
form, is supposed (per §.7. n° 3. and §.8.) to be 
previously and sufficiently understood both by the 
prescriber and compounder. 
§.256. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient advises (besides what is usual in this 
place, and has been often before repeated) that the 
emulsion may be kept under cold water or in a 
cold cellar, that it may not turn sower, especially 
if the quantity is to last taking for several days. 
V. §.249. and 253. And sometimes it may be pro- 
per to order the emulsion to be well shook before 
use, especially if any of the fine but unsoluble pow- 
ders are added, or when we fear the distribution 
and mixture of its parts may become unequal by 
standing. 
§.257. The USE of this form is not so universal 
as that of infusions (§.222.). But the first or true 
kind of emulsion (§.249.) makes one of the most 
pleasant medicines, and may be properly given to 
the nicest patient, when the intentions are to cool, 
ease, moisten, incrassate, afford light aliment, in- 
cline

206 Emulsions.
cline to sleep, recruit the spirits without heating 
the blood, or to qualify sharp humours, which are 
biliose, putrid or alcaline: it may be also accom- 
modated to provoke urine and sweat, but seldom 
to stool. This form may however chance to be 
pernicious to such patients as are of a cold habit, 
and subject to acidities. The latter kind of emul- 
sion, or white mixture (§.250.), is adapted to an- 
swer all the intentions for which its several ingre- 
dients (§.247.) n° 2. (2.) 250. n° 3.) are recom- 
mended by physicians; and has the reputation of 
making ’em even more penetrating and effectual by 
its liquid form. But it frequently takes in many 
ingredients which are not at all agreeable to ei- 
ther the smell or taste; and is usually thought pro- 
per for purging by stool, urine and sweat, to kill 
worms, to cleanse internal ulcers, to strengthen 
the nerves, &c. 
§. 258. For SPECIMENS of this Form, you 
have the following. 
1. Emulsio communis. 
♃. Amigd. dulc. excortic. ʒvj. 
Sem. quat. frig. rec. ℥ß. 
Papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Sach. alb. siccatiss. ℥j. 
Contundantur simul donec in pastam co- 
alescant, & dein, paulatim adde 
Aq. hord. ℔ ij. 
M. F. emuls. s. a. quæ fortiter expri- 
mendo coletur. 
S. Emuls. &c. de qua bibat adlibitum. 
2.

207 Emulsions. 
2. Emulsio balsamica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ j. 
Sperm. cet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut.  ʒijß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒjß. 
Tinct. benzoin, gtt. C. 
Syr. bals. C. 3vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat cochlear. iij omni bihorio. 
3. Emulsio anti-alcalica. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Avenœ exconic. ℥iij. 
F. cum aq. pur. q. s. emulsio, cujus ℔ jß 
admisce 
Nitri puri ʒß. 
Syrup, violar. ℥j. 
Aceti squillit. ʒij. 
S. Utatur pro potu familiari. 
4. Emulsio nutriens, demulcens, incrassans. 
ꝶ. Amigdal. dulc. excortic. ℥ij. 
Amaror.—n°.ij. 
Aquœ pur. servent. ℥x. 
F. S. a. emulsio. Colaturæ fortiter ex- 
pressæ admisce
Aq. stillat. cinnam. ℥j. 
Sacchar. albiss. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Amigdalatum, de quo capiat œger omni semihora 
cochlearium.
5. 

208 Emulsions.
5. Emulsio narcotica. 
V. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 64. 
ꝶ. Sem. papav. alb. contus. ℥ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. hord. F. emulsio, cujus 
℥x adde 
Syr. diacod. ℥jß. 
Tinct. opii cum S. V. rectis. gtt. xx. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ʒij. 
Cortic. citrei ʒx. 
S. Capiat ℥jß. omni 1/2 hora, donec incipiat leniri dolor.
6. Emulsio lubricans, diuretica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 243, 244. 
ꝶ. Semin. cardui mariœ. 
Bardanœ. 
Fœniculi ana ʒvj. 
Papaver. alb. ℥j. 
Amigdal. dulc. n°. xx. 
Infusi rad. liquorit. q. s. 
F. l. a. emulsio. Colatur ℔ iij. admisce 
Sal. prunellœ ʒij. 
Syr. papaver. alb. ℥jB. 
D. usui. 
S. Bibat omni semihora ℥ij. servetur lagena sub aqua 
frigida, aut in cella. 
7. Emulsum antihelminticum:
V. Boerh. ib. p. 229. 
ꝶ. Gumm. opoponac. ʒj. 
Vitell ovor. ʒij. 
M. s. a. dein adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Syrup, artemis. ʒjß
Ap stillat. fœniculi ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ʒj omni quadrihorio, cum regimine. 
8.

209 Emulsions. 
8. Emulsum purgans, forte, scammoneatum, ad 
hydropem. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 210. 
ꝶ. Semin. carthami ʒij. 
Scammon. pur. gr. viij. 
Contusis, assunde paulatim 
Aq. stillat. cort. aurant. ℥j. 
Tum colatis misce 
Syrup. de spina cervina ʒij. 
S. Sit pro dosi, mane. 
9. Emulsio Balsamica, ad ulcera interna, phthisin, 
gonorrhæam, paralysin. 
V.
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 197. & 247. Et 
Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. II. obs. II. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ʒiij. 
Vitell. ovor. q. s. 
Probe subactis admisce sensim 
Mellis alb. ʒiij. 
Aq. stillat. bacc. juniper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumat œger omni quadrihorio coch- 
learium, semper ante usum concutiendo lagenam. 
10. Emulsio asthmatica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔j.
Gumm. ammon. ʒij. solvatur in
Aq. hyssop. frigid. ℥iij. & adde
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. C.
Syr. balsamic. C. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Emuls. &c. Capiat cochlear, ij. sœpè in die, &
urgente paraxysmo asthmatico. 
P 11.

210 Of Mixtures. 
11. Emulsio nephritica. 
In statu renum inflmmatoria exhibenda. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ jß  
Aq. raph. comp. ℥jß. 
Nitri puri ℈ij. 
Syr. althœœ ℥ij. 
M.
S. Capiat ℥iv omni bihorio. 
Of MIXTURES for internal Use. 
§.259. MIXTURES are internal liquid 
medicines, made up of several in- 
gredients, without any preparation but barely that 
of commixing. Hence, they may be easily distin- 
guished from the infusion (§.211.), decoction 
(§.224.), expressed juice (§.235.), and emulsion 
(§.246.)preceding. 
§.260. There are three kinds of these mixtures 
in common use: (1.) Mixtura diffusissima, com- 
monly termed a julep: (2.) mixtura media, which 
is what we understand to be properly signified by 
the name mixture; and lastly, (3.) the mixtura 
contracta, which has various names given it, ac- 
cording to the particular circumstances we shall 
hereafter mention. Concerning each of these, we 
shall treat separately.
Of

211 Of Juleps.
Of JULEPS. 
§.261. A Julep (julapium, julepus recentiorum) 
is the largest and most dilute kind of 
mixture, almost pellucid, and invested with an 
agreeable colour, smell and taste; serving as a 
pleasant drink, to be taken at several doses. The 
julep of the antients, therefore, differs from that of 
the moderns in consistence; as the first was a kind 
of thin syrup. 
§.262. The MATTER or ingredients for this 
form are either such as are to receive, of else to be 
received by the former. 
1. The fluid excipient, as the basis or men- 
struum, is a thin, pellucid and pleasant liquor,
generally aqueous, serving to dilute the other 
substances. 
2. The excipenda, are, every thing capable of 
a solution in the preceding liquor (n° 1.), 
which can afford the requisite qualities and vir- 
tues of this form. 
§.263. The proper Election of both these 
kinds of ingredients (§.262. n° 1, 2.) is deter- 
mined from the requisite qualities or conditions of 
a julep. It may be therefore observed, 
1. As this form is very frequently exhibited 
as a common drink, or to be drank as a plea- 
sant vehicle after the taking of other medicines; 
we are therefore to give it, as much as possible, 
the most agreeable qualities: to make it thin, 
pellucid, and of a pleasant, dulcido-acid, or 
other agreeable taste; without any smell, but 
such as will please; and without colour, but 
such as will delight the eye, especially red. So 
that. 
P2 2.

212 Of Juleps. 
2. The excipient may be any liquor which is 
endued with an agreeable, or no colour, smell, 
and taste. As, 
(1.) Pure water, after it has been boiled: 
which is an excipient or menstruum preferable 
to others, as being more easy to be had and 
prepared, fitted to the texture of most things it 
is to receive, and not destroying or changing 
any of their virtues. 
(2.) The pleasant or inodorous and insipid 
distilled waters of the shops: as from sorrel, 
borrage, buglos, endive, lettuce, house-leak, &c. 
Tho' common water (1.) is generally prefer- 
able to these; because they acquire no agreeable 
smell or taste from the fire and vessels used in 
the process. But it may be better to use such 
as have a small tho' more delightful smell and 
taste: such as those obtained from baum, roses, 
black cherries, whole citrons, &c. 
(3.) The use ot the more pleasant and aque- 
ous infusions (§.211.) which can be readily 
made, may be also well enough permitted in 
the basis of this form: such as those made with 
the flowers of roses, violets, corn-poppies, or 
with apples, citrons, and conserves of the 
like, &c. Or, 
(4.) Some thin decoction (§.224.) of the 
like kind: as from barley, the roots of vipers- 
grass, harts-horn, figs, tamarinds, bread, &c.
Or, 
(5.) Wines: as rhenish, or any other, tart 
or sweet, French or Spanish wine; which are 
very suitable for this form as a cardiac, when 
the intention requires the animal fluids to be 
put into a little brisker motion. Or, 
(6.) The phlegm of vitriol well diluted; or 
thin whey, a little sower: but this latter is re- 
quired to be not turbid, but well clarified. Or, 
(7.)

213 Of Juleps.
(7.) Several of these (n° 1, to 6.) may be 
commodiously compounded together, for the 
basis of this form.  
3. The excipienda (§.262. n° 2.) or things 
fit to be diluted in the preceding liquors, must 
be such as are capable of an intire dissolution, 
and will also add to the pleasantness of those li- 
quors: such as, 
(1.) The stronger fort of aromatic distilled 
waters; from cinnament, pennyroyal, marjo- 
ram, rosemary, the flowers and peals of oranges, 
citrons, and sometimes wines, as at n° 2. 
(5.) unless that liquor makes the whole basis of 
the form. All which may in a manner be ac- 
counted a secundary kind of excipients. 
(2.) The sweet and tart, fresh expressed, juices 
of garden-fruits: as of cherries, currance, ber- 
berries, rasberries, citrons, oranges, pomegra- 
nates, golden pippins, &c. But when the pre- 
scriber orders juices of this kind, he should con- 
sider whether these things are in season (§.237. 
n° 7.) so as to be had fresh at that time: and 
how long they will keep good(§.242. n° 5.) 
without changing. 
(3.) Tincturœ acido-aquosœ, which are of a red 
colour; as e.g. Flor. 4. cordial. tunicœ  bellidis, 
aquilegiœ, rhœados, granor kermes, &c. which 
may, upon occasion, serve instead of the exci- 
pient (n° 2. (3.)) 
(4.) Spirituous tinctures, which are very plea- 
sant: as e cortic, cinnamom. citric aurantior. cassiœ, 
croc. &c. which are very useful when a gentle 
stimulus is required. 
(5.) inflammable or vinous spirits. simple, 
or else impregnated by distillation with-the 
smell and taste of the more pleasant vegetables: 
as roses, angelica, lavender, baum, cinnamon. 
P3 citrons 


214 Of Juleps. 
citrons, oranges, black cherries, aq. vitœ mat-
thioli, &c. which are of great use when the 
stimulus is required to be a little stronger than 
(4.). 
(6.) But the vegetable and fossil acid spirits, 
are very frequent ingredients in this form: as 
distilled vinegar, spirit of salt, and of nitre either 
strong or dulcified, the spirit and gas. of sul- 
phur, vitriol, &c. 
(7.) All sorts of officinal syrups, which are 
very pleasant, colourless, red, or turn so with 
acids, whether prepared from the juices of fruits 
(at 2.) or other parts of vegetables: as flor. aca- 
cia, rosar. violar. tunicœ, borragin. rhoead. herb. 
capillor. vener. melissœ, cort, cinnamom. citri, gra- 
nor. kermes, caryophyllor. &c. To this place 
also belong the liquors of candied fruits, the of- 
ficinal juleps, with oxymella and oxysacchara. 
(8.) Gellies and inspissated juices made from 
garden fruits; to which we may add, the gelly 
of harts-horn, as sometimes entering this form. 
(9.) Sugars: either simple and white, or else 
compounded by various artificers with other 
pleasant ingredients, and formed into elaeosac- 
chas, tablets, cakes, &c. 
(10.) Dry salts: of which enter scarce any 
but those of the neutral kind; and among these, 
nitre, fall prunell and polychrestum are almost 
the only ones. 
4. Substances in the form of powder, which 
are not soluble, are very seldom admitted into 
this form; at least, those of the grosser kind, 
never; but a few things which are light, plea- 
sant, or without smell and taste, are sometimes 
put into juleps, after they have been very ex- 
actly levigated; such are, principally, the earthy 
absorbents, as coral, pearl, harts-horn, &c. But 
even


215 Of Juleps. 
even these are to be excluded, if any acid is to 
enter the julep; for reasons at §101. 102. 
5. Conserves are hardly ever tiled here, unless 
for making a kind of infusion (n° 2. (3.)). 
6. Electuaries, extracts, tinctures, effences, 
spirits, and the like, whose considence, colour, 
smell and taste would make a julep unpleasant, 
should be excluded from this form (per n° 1.). 
Except only two or three confections of the 
more pleasant kind, as confect. alkermes. hya- 
cinthor. &c. 
7. By striving to make a julep over-pleasant 
it may be spoiled (per §.85. 100. 101.). Be 
careful therefore not to misuse either sweets or 
acids. When conserves, syrups, robs and fu- 
gar'd things enter in a large,quantity, there will 
be no need of adding more sugar. If mineral 
acids are not at hand, or not mix'd in a sufficient 
quantity, their place may be well enough supply'd 
with a vegetable acid. 
8. If you mix a mineral acid (n° 3. (6.)) 
together with the neutral salts (n° 3. (10.)), be 
mindful of what has been said of them at §.102. 
n° 12. 
9. To conclude, the young physician is ad- 
vised to study conciseness and simplicity in pre- 
scribing this form: not to compile something to- 
gether of every kind mentioned (n° 2. and 3.), 
but to select such only as are more immediately 
demanded by his intention, and are best fitted 
to mix and make this form agreeable to art, 
Those compositions are generally the most friend- 
ly to nature, which consist of but a few ingre- 
dients, (per §.29.) 
10. From what has been hitherto said, it ap- 
pears that hydrosaccharum and oxyhydrosaccarum 
are each a kind of julep.
P4  §.264.


216 Of Juleps. 
§.264. For the ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients of this form, the liquid ex- 
cipient (§.263. n° 2.) is generally put in the first 
place; next to this is subjoined any other, which 
is a secundary excipient (§.ib. n° 3 (1.)); and 
then the excipienda or substances to be diluted 
therein may be placed agreeable to §.57. n° 2. 3. 
5. But sometimes the liquid excipient is put in 
the last place: which is however not so proper 
when its basis is to be some extemporaneous decoc- 
tion or infusion per §.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.)). 
§.265. The DOSE of a julep is determined ei- 
ther by weight, as ad ℥j, ij, iij, &c. or by mea- 
sure, as ad cyathum, or for infants ad cochl. j, ij, 
iij, &c. But a julep is sometimes order’d as a sa- 
miliar drink, in which case it may be given in a 
quantity sufficient to appease the patient’s thirst; 
but even in this case it is generally better to give 
but a small quantity at a time, tho’ the draught be 
the oftener repeated, than to overload and swell the 
stomach by indulging great drinking. 
§.266. For the GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form to be made up at once, that will be more 
or less in proportion to the quantity and frequency 
of the dose (§.265.), and as thirst is more or less 
intense; it may be sent in quantities even to ℔ j, 
ij, iij, iv: but for infants, there is seldom less than 
℔ß made up at a time., Nor is the general quan. 
tity of a julep restrained like that of an emulsion 
(§.253.) from its sooner or later changing or cor- 
rupting. 
§.267. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients of this form, we shall endea- 
vour to prescribe general bounds to the quantities 
wherein they are to be taken; as
Ad

217 Of Juleps. 
Ad excipientis (§.263. n° 2.) ℔j vel ℥xij.
Excipientis secundarii (§.ib. n° 3. (1.)) ℥j, ij. 
Succorum (ib. (2.))—℥ij, iij. 
Tinctur. acido-aquos.(ib. (3.))—℥j, jß. 
Spirituoforum (ib. (4.) (5.).)—ʒij, vj. 
Syrup, brodior. julepor. rob. gelatinar. &c. (§.263. 
n° 3. (7.) (8.).)—℥ij, iij.
Confectionum (ib. n° 6.)—ʒij, vj. 
Salium (ib. n°.3. (10.).)—ʒß, j. 
Pulverum (ib. n° 4.)—ʒj, ij. 
Aceti destillati (ib. n° 3. (6.).)—℥j, jß. 
Acidorum fossilium (ib. q. s. ad gratum acorem 
gtt. xx.—ʒj.
Sacchari (ib. (9.).) q. s. ad gratum dulced. ℥j, jß. 
With regard to these several ingredients and their
proportions, besides what is said at §.263. n° 9.
it is requisite to observe. 
1. That the great diversity of indications, and 
palates, with the vast variety of other circum- 
stances in particular cases, do often make many 
and great exceptions from these rules of propor- 
tion; so as to make the difference sometimes 
very wide. Hence 
2. When the intention is mostly to increase 
the circulation and warm the habit, wine, with 
such as are aromatic and spirituous (§.263. n° 3. 
(1.) (4.) (5.) enter a julep in a much larger pro- 
portion than that here assigned in so much that 
wine often makes the whole basis,(§.263. n° 2. 
(5.)) or menstruum for the other substances. 
3. If the extemporaneous infusions or decoc- 
tion.(§.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.) are to make up the 
greatest part of the julep, they are required to 
be somewhat thinner than usual. So that the 
proportion of ℥j of the species to ℔j of the  
menstrumm

218 Of Juleps. 
menstruum will suffice. See the history of infu- 
sions and decoctions. 
4. The neutral salts (§.263. n° 3. (10.)) 
ought therefore to be added in a very small quan- 
tity, left they should nauseate the julep by their 
unpleasant gust. 
5. Large quantities of powder, rob, gelleys 
and the like, would destroy the proper con- 
sistence of a julep. 
6. For determining the proportion of the 
sweet and acid ingredients of this form, the rule 
at §.263. n° 7. is to be observed. Sometimes 
the liquid excipient or menstruum itself is in- 
clined to sweetness or acidity (§.ib. n° 2. (3.) 
(4.) (5.) (6.)), for which, there should be a 
proportionable allowance. Too much sugar 
will make a julep not only unpleasant to many 
patients, but will also attenuate the blood too 
much, and incline ’em to sweat. 
§.268. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is, 
by M. F. Julapium D. ad vitrum. But if the basis 
of the julep is to be some extemporaneous infusion 
or decoction, directions are to be first given for 
them, and then for their mixture with the rest 
(per §.219. 231.): but this is omitted when the in- 
fusion or decoction is an officinal, with whose pre- 
paration the apothecary is supposed to be suffici- 
ently acquainted. 
§.269. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.60. 261. and 265. But it may be some- 
times proper to admonish the patient to drink the 
julep warm or hot, when things actually cold will 
abate the fluidity or perviousness of the animal 
fluids. The patient is generally sufficiently desi- 
rous of himself to drink this form cold; so that 
there


219 Of Juleps. 
there is hardly ever any occasion, to give a parti- 
cular direction for that. 
§.270. With regard to the USE of this form, 
it is not only extremely pleasant to take, but is 
also serviceable in most diseases, both acute and 
chronic; which are attended with too great heat or 
chillyness, an alcalescent corruption of the humours, 
or a viscidity of them, with violent thirst, faint- 
ings, &c. It is also very well adapted for a ve- 
hicle to other medicines, to facilitate the taking of 
them, and to promote their action or operation. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Julapium refrigerans gratissimum. 
♃. Vin. rhenan. recent. ℔ß. 
Aq. rosar. damascen. ℥iv. 
Succ. aurant. sev. recent. express. ℥jß 
Syr. violar. ℥jß 
M. F. julapium.
S. Julap. cardiac. &c. de quo bibat cyathum, ad 
libitum. 
2. Julapium pectorale. 
♃. Decoct. Pectoral. ℔ ij. 
Aq. theriacal. ℥ij. 
Gumm. arab. ʒvj. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. tolut. ℥ij. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. De quo frequenter bibat haustum tepide.
3.

220 Juleps. 
3. Julapium stomachicum anodynum. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℔ß. 
Fort. 
Menth. simplic. aa ℥ij. 
Test. ostreor. pp. ʒjß.
Laud. liquid. gtt. xxx. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapiumi 
S. De quo bibat cochlear iij vel iv, frequenter, agi- 
tato prius vitro. 
4. Julapium stomachicum pepticum. 
♃. Vin. rub. gallic. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. aa ℥iv.
Fort. ℥ij. 
Syr. de menth. ℥jß. 
Sp. vitriol. q. s. ad gratam acidit.
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat cyathum urgente nausea. 
5. Julapium hystericum. 
♃. Aq. puleg. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Brion. comp. aa ℥iij. 
Syr. paeon. comp. ℥j. 
M. F. julap. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
6.

221 Juleps. 
6. Julapium cardiacum. 
♃. Aq. epidem. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Lact. alexiter. aa ℥iij. 
Margarit. pp. ʒjß. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
(1.) Aliud- 
♃. Aq. theriacal. 
Epidem. aa ℥ij. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥vj. 
Acet. destillat. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒß. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum 3tia quaque hora. 
7. Julapium diureticum.
♃. Vin. rhenan. vet. 
Aq. raphan. C. 
Petroselin. C. aa ℥iij. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. C. ℥j 
M. F. julapium.
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum, pro re nata. 
8.

222 Juleps. 
8. Julapium in frigore febris intermittentis 
conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 120. 
ꝶ. Aq. decoct. hord. ℥xxx. 
Oxymel. simplic. ℥iij. 
Aq. stillat. caryophyll. arom. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ij. omni 1/4 horœ, calidè valde. sorbendas. 
9. Julapium roborans, anti-acidum, califaciens.
ꝶ Aq. stillat. cerasor. nigror. ℥ viij. 
Pulegii ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. ℥jB. 
Vitœ matthioli ℥ß 
Margarit. ppt. ʒjß. 
Confect. alkermes ʒij. 
Elœosacchar. citri ʒiij. 
M. D. ad vitrum.
S. Julapium perlatam, de quo capiat ℥j. omni semi- 
bora in languore: aut sit pro vehiculo alterius me- 
dicamenti. 
10. Julapium ex decocto magistrali, cardiacum 
ad dolores a partu. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Hord. mund. 
Avenœ integrœ ana ℥j. 
Cum aq. decoct. spatio 1/2 horæ, ℔ iij. 
adde 
Vini rhenani ℔j. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ij.
Syrup. kermesin. ℥iß. 
M. 
S. Hujus ℥ij. superbibat singulis dosibus mixturœ ano- 
dynœ ibidem descriptœ, donec sopialur dolor.
11.

223 Juleps.  
11. Julapium specie infusi, antiphlogisticum, in 
variolis utile. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 238. & seq. 
ꝶ. Flor. papaver. errat. 
Tunicœ ana m. ß. 
Infunde cum aq. pur. calidœ ℥xx. stent 
vase clauso, calore leni, per iij 
horas. Colaturæ expressæ adde 
Spir. sulphuris per campan. gtt. xx. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒjß. 
Syr. flor. rhoead. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Bibat, quantum lubet. 
12. Aliud, spiritus excitans in gangræna a causa 
calida, temperie alcalina. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 95. 
ꝶ. Rob. ribesiorum. 
Berberis ana ℥ij. 
Spir. salis commun. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. melissœ ℥vj
Vini rhenani ℥x. 
M.  
S. Capiat ℥j. omni hora. 
13.

224 Of Mixtures. 
13. Julapium confortans in metu abortus ab in- 
commodis graviditatis, ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 217. 
ꝶ Vini rhenani ℔ ij. 
Ag. stillat. cort. citrei ℥iv. 
Tinctur. granor. kermes ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. 
Balsam. embryon. aa ℥j. 
Gelatin. corn. cerv. citrat. ℥jß 
Syrup. rubi idœi  ℥ij.
M.
S. Capiat ℥jß languore. 
Of MIXTURES. 
§.272. A Mixture properly so call’d (§.260. 
(2.)) is a kind of internal and li- 
quid composition (§.259.), somewhat thicker in 
consistence than a julep (§.261.), and much strong- 
er in proportion to its bulk; taking in all forts of 
ingredients, even the most unpleasant, and con- 
taining several doses, but not to be determined by 
drops. 
§.273. The MATTER for this form (as at 
§.262.) is two-fold; excipient, or receiving, and 
excipienda, to be received by the former.
1. The excipient may be any liquor fit for 
internal use, whose sufficient dose is not so small 
as to be determined by drops; so that both aque- 
ous, vinous, and spirituous menstruums are very 
frequently used for the excipient of this form: 
such as distilled waters, both simple and com- 
pound; decoctions, infusions, wines, &c.
2. 

225 Of Mixtures. 
2. The excipicnda, are, in general, all dry, 
soft and liquid substances, mentioned §. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3. and whatever else has been found 
serviceable by an internal use. 
§.274. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is almost wholly directed by their medicinal 
virtures. Not are we here so much under a necessi- 
ty of regarding their tenuity, pellucidity, or agree- 
ableness of colour, smell and taste, as we are in 
the election of ingredients for a julep (§.263.): 
tho' these considerations are not to be wholly ne- 
glected; especially too great thickness, which 
greatly incommodes the taking of this form. But 
we may observe, 
1. That distilled waters are more frequently 
used for the excipient than other liquors; be- 
cause some one or other of them may be chose 
suitable to almost every intention, and their 
great degree of fluidity makes them fitter for 
the reception and dilution of other ingredients. 
2. Decoctions and infusions are likewise often 
used; whose preparation is to be sometimes 
mentioned in a prescription, but is not the pro- 
per business of this place (V. §.211. and 224.): 
Tho' there are very few decoctions and infusions 
used in the composition of mixtures, but such 
as require no particular subscription or direction 
to the apothecary for their preparation (§.268.). 
But they should be such as are very thin: if they 
are a little thicker, they ought to be taken in a 
proportionably larger quantity. 
3. Substances of the powder kind, which are 
not dissolvable, being very frequent ingredients 
of this form, should not be gross, but of the 
most subtle kind; in order to prevent their be- 
ing troublesome to the patient the act of 
deglutition. 
Q 4.

226 Of Mixtures.
4. Things of the metallic kind, which have 
a very great specific gravity, ought to be ex- 
cluded from this form; especially if they are 
not capable of a dissolution in the liquor be- 
cause as they instantly subside, their distribution 
and the strength of the dose, may by that means 
be render’d very unequal; tho' this may be in 
in some measure excusable, when a mixture is to 
be taken for one dose, after it has been well 
shook. 
5. Such gums and gummose substances as af- 
ford a thick mucilage in an aqueous menstruum, 
ought to be either entirely omitted, or else en- 
ter in but small quantities: that the taking of 
this form may be render’d the more easy and 
agreeable. 
6. For the more uniform and intimate com- 
mixture of refinous and oily things with an aque- 
ous excipient, there is required the use of a sa- 
ponaceous intermedium. We therefore use the 
yolk of an egg for the more tenacious, as sper- 
maceti, the turpentines and the like; but sugar 
is sufficient for the more liquid, which are only 
used in small quantities, as the aromatic oils by 
distillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, &c. V. §.250. n° 3. 6, 7. 
7. Gum-resins, as ammoniacum, galbanum, 
&c. do usually enter the composition of mix- 
tures, after they have been first dissolved in 
wine, or vinegar. 
8. We ought to be the more cautious in these 
mixtures, not to compound things which will 
effervesce with, or preciptate each other, destroy 
each others virtues, or make some improper 
change; because their liquid form will render 
them much more liable to produce such tumultuous 
motions, and improper changes. (V. §.97. to 
103.). But there are some cases wherein the
physician

227 Of Mixtures. 
physician designedly combines such opposite sub- 
stances in mixtures, the better to answer his in- 
tention. 
9. If you endeavour to correct the colour, smell 
or taste, be mindful of what was said at §.85. 
99, 100, 101. that you may not disappoint your 
intention, nor appear ridiculous. 
10. Lastly, as in every form so in this, the 
prescriber should make his choice of ingredients 
short and just; aiming rather at conciseness and 
efficacy than number: in a manner that a pro- 
per judge may easily perceive his intention; 
otherwise, he may make rather a chaos than a 
uniform and proper mixture. V. §.29. 
§.275. For the ORDER of prescribing the se- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, it is the same as that 
to be observed in writing for a julep (§.264.); 
nor is it more constant or particular than that. 
§.276. The DOSE of this form is less than that 
of the julep (§.265.); being generally a spoon- 
ful or two, or a tea-cup full: by weight it is or- 
der’d from ʒj to ℥ß. But sometimes the dose is 
inlarged ad cyathum, or ad ℥j, ij, iij: which ob- 
tains mostly when the whole mixture is to be exhi- 
bited for one draught. Otherwise the dose may be 
determined by portions, in regard to the whole 
mixtures, as when one half, a third or a fourth part, 
order’d to be taken at a time: but we ought here 
to be cautious that the quantity do not exceed a 
convenient draught. For the rest, it may be of 
use to observe what'has been said at §.67. 
n° 4, 5. 
§.277. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, contains sometimes 
but one dose (§.276.),sometimes several: if the 
first, it is termed haustus, which should never ex- 
ceed ℥iij: if the latter, the mixture generally 
Q2 amounts 

228 Of Mixtures. 
amounts to ℥vj or viij; tho' it may by chance ex- 
ceed lb j. more or less according as the frequency 
and number of doses, and the circumstances at §.67. 
may require. 
§.278. The mutual Proportion of the seve- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, is determined as 
well from the proper consistence of the form (§.272. 
274.), as from the medicinal virtues of each ingre- 
dient, when separate or mixed, (per §.87. n° 1, 2.). 
collated with §.276, 277. Hence, 
1. If there are none but liquids to enter the 
composition, having no regard to the consistence, 
the proportion may be directed only by the me- 
dicinal virtues, in conjunction with the phy- 
sician’s intention. 
2. But when dry and soft substances are also 
to enter, the prescriber must guard against too 
much thickness (§.274.). In order to which,   
he may observe the following general rules of 
proportion for mixture, viz. 
Of the excipient (§.273. n° 1.)—℥j
Of soft substances, as electuaries, conserves, 
robs, pulps, and the like,—ʒj 
Of dry substances, as extracts, inspissated juices, 
mass of pills, powders, &c.—℈j, or jß.
Of sugar—ʒj, jss. 
or 
Syrups—ʒj, ij, iij. 
or q. s.
3. So that the quantity of soft substances may 
be advanced to ʒij, and the dry, to ʒj; when 
only one of them enters the composition of a 
mixture. 
4. But then the consistence of the fluid exci- 
pient will make some difference in the propor- 
tion: according as whether the liquor be of the 
thinner kind, as water, wine, &c. or of some 
thicker

229 Of Mixtures.
thicker infusion or decoction. (§.273. n° 1.). 
5. It should be likewise observed whether any 
liquid ingredients are received by the excipient; 
for in that case, the soft and dry substances may 
enter in a larger proportion. 
6. The proportion of saline and dry ingre- 
dients is to be deduced from their degree of 
strength, and their more or less easy dissolution: 
tho’ this form does not require an intire dissolu- 
tion of its ingredients; but when they are less 
soluble, they may be shook up in the mixture, 
like a powder, at the time of taking. 
7. For the quantity of sugar or syrups, read 
§.267. n° 6. These are sometimes prescribed in 
a much larger quantity than that assign’d at n° 2. 
as when they are intended to mix resins, balsams, 
oils, &c. with water or any aqueous menstruum; 
in which case, a greater inspissation of the mix- 
ture, will prevent the reparation of parts by stand- 
ing, which it would other wise suffer. 
8. A mixture for a single draught, will also 
admit of a larger proportion of soft and dry sub- 
stances, then when the intention may require it, 
than one for several doses. The generality of 
patients had rather put up with the thickness of 
a mixture, to have it in a smaller quantity; than 
to have it more liquid, but in a greater bulk,
or more doses. 
§.279.The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is 
order’d by M. F. Haustus, when the mixture is for 
one dose (§.277.): but if it is to be taken at se- 
veral times, it may be sufficient barely to write M. 
Afterwards, D. ad vitrum may be subjoined. And 
the phiol may be also order’d to be close stopp’d, 
when any loss or change may be apprehended 
from an admission of the ambient air. Sometimes  
Q3 a

230 Of Mixtures. 
a dry ingredient is order’d separate, in the form of 
a powder (§.106.), as (per §.242. n° 4. ult.), 
that it may be added to a quantity of the mixture 
a little before taking; In that case, we prescribe 
two forms. The same method is to be also ob- 
served, when an effervescence arising upon mix- 
ture ought to accompany the taking it, or when 
the intention may require the dose of powder to be 
larger, or more exactly determined, than is usual 
in this form. 
§.280. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient concerning the use of mixtures, may be 
sufficiently understood, in the general, from §.60. 
272. 276. and 277. Tho’ it may be sometimes 
proper to say whether it should be drank hot or 
cold (V. §.123. n° 3. (3.)) A julep may be or- 
der’d as a vehicle to be drank afterward, when the 
mixture is very unpleasant; otherwise it may be 
omitted, when nothing else requires it. When a 
powder is to be mix’d (per §.279. ult.) with it, 
the manner of compounding and taking it may be 
prescribed at discretion. 
§.281. The USE of this form is very frequent 
in practice, for as it is very easy to take, and fuits 
almost every intention, it is as often prescribed as 
the infusion (§.222.); it is rather order’d oftener: 
for it being a form so easilyand speedily prepar’d, 
it is fitted to give assistance in all sudden emergen- 
cies, as well as other cases; in so much that there 
is hardly any internal disease, but what will admit 
of being treated with this form. 
§.282. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Haustus anti-emeticus.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Succi recent, citrei ℥ß. 
Vini rhenani ℥j. 
M. ꝶ

231 Mixtures.
ꝶ. Salis absinthii ʒj.  
D. utraque seorsim. 
S. Pulverem misceat liquori, moxque in ipso actu ef- 
fervescentiœ hauriat. 
2. Mixtura anti-emetica. 
♃. Succ. limon. recent. express. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒj. 
Aq. cinnamom. fort. 
Tenuis aa ℥j ss. 
Sacchar. albiss. q. s. 
M. 
S. Mistur. stomach. &c. Capiat cochlear, iij in 
singulis evomendi conat. 
3. Mixtura anti-alcalica, saponacea, abstergens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Oxymell. squillit. ℥iij. 
Aceti squillit.  ʒij. 
Myrrhœ in aceto solutœ in tinct. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. cichorei ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. omni hora. 
4. Mixtura cardiaca, pretiosa, calfaciens,  
diaphoretica. 
ꝶ. Infus. lapid. porcini malacc. in aq. 
card, bened. fact. ℥iv. 
Vini rhenani generosiss ℥ij. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ss. 
Extract. essential. croci gtt. iv. 
Confect. alkermes ʒvj. 
M 
S. Sumat omni semihora cochlear. j. 
Q4 5.

232 Mixtures. 
5. Mixtura opiata, antacida, roborans, ad dolores
a partu. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Lapid. cancror. ʒiij. 
Corall, rubr. ʒij. 
Margarit. ppt. ʒj. 
Laud, puri gr. iij.
Syrup kermes ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cort. citrei. 
Melissœ. 
Majoranœ aa ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. 1/4 horœ, donec sopiatur dolor, 
superbibendo ℥ij. julapii ibid. descripti. 
6. Mixtura resolvens, saponacea. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rutœ  ℥xij. 
Borac. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒiij. 
Mellis puriss. ℥iij. 
M. 
Capiat ℥j. omni hora diet. 
7. Mixtura adstringens, ad hæmoptysin 
Vide Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. rhocados. 
Plantag. ana ℥iv.  
Extract. tormentiil. 
Bol. armen. levig. ana ʒj ss. 
Lap. hœmaiit. ppt. ʒj. 
Syr. Myrtin. ℥j. 
M.   
S. Capiat omni bora ℥j, concusso prius vitro. 
8.

233 Mixtures. 
8. Haustus emeticus, antimoniatus, fortis, pro 
adulto. 
R. Oxysacchar. emetic. Ludovic. 
Oxymell. squillit. ana ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥j.
M. F. haustus. 
S. Sit pro dosi. 
9. Haustus purgans, in febre intermittente utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 132. 
ꝶ. Pulver. cornachin. ʒss. 
Elix. Propriet. cum sale tart. ppt. 
gtt. xl. 
Elœosacchar. menthœ ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. menth. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Capiat mane, die apyrexiasy vacuo stomacho, 
pro dosi. 
1O. Mixtura balsamica, in gonorrhœa conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Tereb. vulg. in q. s. vitel. ov. solut. ʒij. 
Extract. rhei. 
Sal. prunell. aa ʒj. 
Syr. allhœœ & Fernel. ℥j. 
Infus. rad. glycyrrhiz. ℥x.
M. 
S. Capiat omni bihorio cochlear. j. probè concussa prius 
lagena: superbibat cyathum emulsi idonei, ibid. 
p. 246. descripti.
11. 


234 Mixtures. 
11. Haustus emeticus, communis. 
♃. Rad. ipecac, pulv. ʒss. 
Aq. lact. alexiter. ʒjß. 
Syr. violar. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora quinta pomeridiana 
bibendo copiose de decoct. hordei inter vomendum. 
12. Haustus catharticus, refrigerans. 
♃. Sails mirab. glaub. 
Mann. calabr. opt. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. aa ʒvj. 
Aq. cinndmom. ten. ℥iij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat primo mane cum regimine. 
13. Haustus nephriticus. 
♃. Ol. Amigd. dulc. rec. frigide expres. ʒvj. 
Tartar. P. D. ʒij. incorporat. adde 
Aq. raphan. C. ℥j fs. 
Syr. de mecon. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. bis, vel ter in dies repetendus. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat mane & vesperi, vel urgente pa- 
raxysmo. Quo tempore (pro re nata) insolvantur 
℈ij. pulv. è test. ovor. calcinat. 
(1.)

235 Mixtures. 
(1.) Alius
♃. Ol. lini sem. frigid. & recent. ext. ʒx. 
Lixiv. saponis gtt. xxx. exactissime 
incorporates, adde 
Syr. de althœœ ℥ß. 
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut prior. 
14. Haustus balsamicus. 
♃. Tereb. è chio ℈j. 
Bals. tolut. ℈ß 
Vitel. ovor. q. s. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℥ij. 
Syr. de 5 rad. aper. ʒvj.
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut in fronte, &c. 
15. Haustus pleuriticus. 
♃. Ol. sem. lini frigidè extract. ℥j. 
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. xxx. 
Aq. cerasor. nigror. 
Syr. bals. C. ana ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pector. &c, Capiat 6ta quaque hora.
16. 

236 Mixtures. 
16. Haustus diaphoreticus. 
♃. Aq. theriac. ʒvj. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥jß. 
Theriac. androm. ʒß. 
Spir. nitri dulc. gtt. xxx.
Syr. de mecon. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora decubitus. 
17. Haustus peruvianus. 
♃. Aq. absinth. mag. C. ℥ß.  
Flor. chamomel. simplic. ℥jß. 
Ext. cort, peruv. ʒß. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haustus febrifugus, 3tia quaque hora sumendus.
18. Haustus antipyreticus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamon. ten. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒß. 
Sp. vitriol, gtt. xx. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haust. antifebrilis: 4ta quaque hora exhibendus.
19. 


237 Of Drops. 
19. Haustus bechicus. 
♃. Aq. hyssop. simplic. ʒjß. 
Lact. ammoniac. ℥ß.
Tinct. benz. 
Sp. C. C. per se aa gtt. xxx. 
Syr. diacod. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pect. Hora somni sumendus.
20. Haustus paregoricus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Decoct. pectoral. aa ℥j. 
Nitri puri ℈j. 
Lauq. liq. gtt. xv.
Syr. de con. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. anodyn. &c. Decubitus hora sumendus. 
N. B. When draughts are not so well approved of, 
mixtures may he order’d after any of these formulœ; 
by a proportionable enlargement of the quantities to 
about three or four times as much. 
Of DROPS, or small Mixtures. 
§.283. DROPS (or mixtura contracta) are a kind 
of smaller or less bulkey, and stronger 
mixture (§.259.) than the foregoing (§.272.); 
consisting generally of substances which are spiri- 
tuous, 

238 of Drops.
tuous, or of great strength in proportion to their 
bulk, requiring to be dosed or portioned out by 
drops. As this form of medicine ows its origin 
to chemistry, so it undergoes various denomina- 
tions, as we shall presently observe. 
§.284. Therefore the MATTER or ingredients 
for this form, may be any kind of liquor which is 
fit for internal use, and is also effectual in a small 
quantity or dose: such as the stronger tinctures 
(§.221. n° 1. and §.232.) spirits of the like kind, 
essences, quintessences, elixirs, liquid balsams, na- 
tive and artificial, essential extracts, aromatic oils 
by distillation, the more strong and contracted sa- 
line liquors, &c.
§.285. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be guided by the physician’s inten- 
tion, the particular virtues of each ingredient 
(§.284.), and the mutual affinity or disposition 
of one to the other upon mixture. Nor is there 
any necessity in this form, to have so great a re- 
gard to the colour, smell and taste; the smallness 
of its dose being a sufficient recommendation. 
1. Therefore such ingredients should be select- 
ed as may agree not only in their virtues or in- 
tentions, but also mix with each other without 
any effervesence, precipitation, or other im- 
proper change. But the cautions which are re- 
quisite for this purpose, are hardly to be learn- 
ed but from chemistry. 
2. Tho’ sometimes ingredients are judiciously 
enough commixed, which do both ferment and 
destroy each other’s properties: as, e.g. acids 
and alcalies. There are some cases where, a 
neutral salt (which is at a medium between acid 
and alcaly, resulting from such mixture) is both 
more effectual and less hazardous. But even in 
these mixtures, we should be cautious not to let 
any


239 Of Drops. 
any precipitation ensue; for that is acircumstance 
hardly ever approved of in this form. 
3. Such substances as are aqueous, gummose, 
or repleat with an olive or butyraceous oil, which 
does not well unite with spirituous things; as 
also, conferves, electuaries, insoluble powders, 
and the like: these should be excluded from 
mixtures for drops, as well for their being of 
too thick a consistence, as for their ineptitude 
for an uniform mixture. 
4. The stronger resins, solid extracts and mas- 
ses of pills, are sometimes order’d in small mix- 
tures; when the intention is to purge, and the 
form but for one dose: but then sugar, syrups, 
or some officinal julep is usually added, either 
to promote the solution, or to qualify the heat 
of the spirituous menstruum. 
5. This form will admit of dry salts, if so be 
they act strongly in a small dose, and are also 
soluble in a spirituous menstruum: but of this 
kind there are hardly any, but such salts as are 
volatile, the tartarus regenerate, and a few  
others. 
6. Sometimes saline liquors are also order’d 
in this form: but if such are not to be exhibited 
separately, we ought to consider with what we 
mix them; for they frequently do not agree 
with liquors which are spirituous. 
7. The number of ingredients to be order’d 
in this form should be few: three or four are 
usually sufficient. The errors of mixture may 
be more easily avoided in a prescription of but 
few ingredients; we shall be also more sure of 
our intention, and give less trouble to the com- 
pounder. But when one ingredient or officinal 
compound will answer the intention, as is fre- 
quently the case; that may be then order’d to 
be given in drops (§.283.), without the trouble  
of


240 Of Drops. 
of mixture. There are also such a vast number 
of officinal compositions, that those who love a 
great many simples in a form, may well enough 
spare themselves the trouble of prescribing new 
extemporaneous mixtures for drops. 
8. Lastly, if drastic or very strong things are 
exhibited in this form, directions should be 
given for making the dose very exact; the men- 
duration by drops being usually left to,the pa- 
tient or his attendants. 
§.286. The ORDER or method of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is no 
other than what may be deduced from the rules 
at §.57. n° 2, 3. But when there are any ingre- 
dients of a more difficult solution order’d, as resins, 
extracts, &c. (§.285. n° 4.) these ought to be ge- 
nerally set in the first place; then the menstruum 
and other addenda may be subjoined. 
§.287. The DOSE of this form is usually deter- 
mined by a certain number of drops (§.283.) more 
or less; but seldom more than lx. Otherwise, 
small mixtures of the weaker kind may be dosed 
by cochlear. ß. vel j. and such as are purgative, to 
be taken all at one time (§.285. n° 4.) may equal 
℥ß vel j. for a dose. 
§.288. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is generally restrain- 
ed between ʒij and ℥j  or ij. But if the dose be 
large, to be measured by the spoon, and continued 
a long time, with other considerations at §.68. 
if these urge, the form may be prescribed in still 
larger quantities; especially as the nature of the 
ingredients is generally such as not to be subject to 
corrupt or change by keeping. Sometimes only 
one dose is sufficient for the intention: but if it be 
only a few drops, it cannot well be taken in this
forms;

241 Of Drops.
form; it should be rather diluted or inlarged into 
a draught, with some proper vehicle. 
§.289. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, does scarce admit of a de- 
termination, even by general rules. It is to be 
principally regulated by the physician’s indication, 
with the particular virtues and strength of each in- 
gredient, and their more or less easy solution or 
mixture; with which, the physician ought to be 
previously acquainted. Hence 
1. Such things as are more bulkey in propor- 
tion to their strength, may be order’d in large 
quantities; but less portions of those which are 
more strong or contracted: such are essential 
oils and extracts, volatile salts, balsams, &c.
Thus one thing is to be assisted, qualified and 
corrected by another. 
2. Otherwise, when the physician rather 
chuses a small dose, the more strong and effica- 
cious ingredients may be taken in an equal, or 
even a larger proportion than the weaker or 
more dilute. 
3. Such substances as can be dissolved in only 
a certain quantity by the rest, should be order’d 
in a proportion rather below than above than 
quantity; left some part should remain undis- 
solved, or the mixture be render’d over thick. 
To this head belong balsams, oils, resins, solid 
extracts, &c. 
4. The quantity of drastic or very strong in- 
gredients should be so carefully proportioned to 
the rest, as that every dose of the mixture may 
contain its due share. 
§.290. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, is usually order’d 
by M. D. ad vitrum. For what regards extempo- 
raneous infusion or decoction, that is not the bu- 
R siness

242 Of Drops. 
siness of this place, but belongs to §.211. 224.
But when the mixture is required to be made very 
exact, by triture, that may be allowed a particular 
injunction to the compounder: as is frequent in 
resins, solid extracts, and the like, after this it 
may be sometimes proper to order the mixture to 
be strained, when there are any impurities, or 
parts which cannot be wholly dissolved. The re- 
ceptacle may be order’d to be exactly closed with 
a cork and bladder, when the virtues of the mix- 
ture are very volatile and easy to be dissipated. It is 
sometimes usual to tie the phiol twice over with 
pieces of bladder, without a cork, when the dose 
is to be measured out by drops; for by that means, 
by perforating the inner bladder with a needle, 
&c. upon shaking and turning up the phiol, the 
drops may be number’d more easily, as they come 
but more slowly and regularly. 
§.291. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, has scarce any thing in 
it particular; unless that we give it the name of 
haustus or haustulus, when the whole quantity makes 
but one dose (§.288.); but if it contains several, 
it is usual to call it after the title of the most con- 
siderable ingredient; hence, the tincture, balsam, 
oil, spirit, essence, elixir, &c. are names frequent- 
ly in use; many of which, are however used pro- 
miscuously: nor do they often exactly observe the 
difference assigned by the chemist between the 
forms signified by those names. The title of drops 
may be a general one, for all whose dose is to be 
determined by that measure. A vehicle cannot 
well be omitted for taking the stronger mixtures:
one ought therefore to be chose which is agreeable 
with the form both in texture and virtues, making 
no precipitation, repulsion, dissipation, destruc- 
tion or change among the medicinal parts. The 
vehicles commonly in use, are, wine, juleps (§.261.), 
infu-

243 Drops or small Mixtures. 
ihfusions (§.211.), decoctions(§.224.), broth, 
&c. balsams, and oily drops, are best taken in su- 
gar or syrup. 
§.292. The USE of this form is Very exten- 
sive and agreeable: there are few but what like it 
for the smallness of ther dose; it being used mostly 
where a warming and stimulating power is requi- 
site, to which the ingredients for this form have 
a general aptitude: tho' there are not wanting some 
things which are given in drops for the intention of 
cooling, &c. as the acid spirits from minerals of 
various kinds, &c. 
§.293. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1. Haustulus aquam purgans, nec acriter tameri 
irritans. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 78. 
ꝶ. Scammon. syriac. puri gr. xiv. 
Spir. reginœ hungariœ ʒij. 
In mortario vitreo s. a. tritis, &c. fæces 
separatis, admisce 
Syrup, rosar. solut. cumsenn. ʒvj. 
F. haust. 
S. Capiat pro dosi. 
2. Alius; purgans, in scorbuta utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ. Pil. coch. maj. ℈j. 
Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. ʒj.
Spir. menthœ ʒj ss. 
Syr. rosar. solut. cum senn. ʒj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Hauriat. mane pro dosi. 
R2 3.

244 Drops or small Mixtures.
3. Elixir, stimulans, resolvens. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. 
Sal. volat. oleos. 
Purgans SENNERTI ana ℥ss, 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xxv. quater de die ex vino. 
♃. Liquor antipodagricus. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Alcahest. Glauber. ℥j. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Sumat cmni mane gtt. ix. ex jure vitulino. 
5. Tinctura anti-hysterica, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Tinct. succin. ʒij. 
Castor. 
Spir. sal. ammoniac. aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Sumat gtt. xxx. ex syrup. kermes in paraxysmo. 
6. Mixtura stimulans, roborans, anti-hydropica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Tinct. rad. helen. ℥j. 
Myrrh. 
Spir. matrical. ana ℥ss. 
Ol. stillat. baccar. juniper. 
Absinth. ana gtt. viij. 
M.
S. Capiat cochlear. ss. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, 
ex vino generoso. 
7.

245 Drops or small Mixtures. 
7. Tinctura cephalica. 
♃. Sp. lavendul. comp. ʒij. 
C. C. per se ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat gtt. xxx. in haustul. julap. 
8. Tinctura corroborans. 
♃. Tinctur. cortic. peruv. ʒiij. 
Elix. vitriol. mynsicht. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. lx. ter in die ex haustulo vini rubri. 
9. Tinctura hysterica. 
♃. Spir. castor. C. ʒiv. 
C. C. succin. 
Tinct. myrrhœ aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. l. in haust. julap. 5ta quaque bora, in 
& extra paraxysmo. 
10. Tinctura stomachica. 
♃. Elix. propriet. cum acido ℥ß 
Tinctur. mart. aur. ʒjß. 
Ol. cinnamom. in sacch. q. s. solut. 
gtt. iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xl. in haustulo julapii. 
(1.) Alius- 
♃. Tinct. stomach. amar. ʒss. 
Elix. vitriol. ʒjss.
M. 
S. Ut supra. 
R3 Of

246 Of Injections. 
Of the Forms of EXTERNAL MEDICINES. 
§.294. EXTERNAL FORMS (§.105.), are ei- 
ther commom to several parts of the 
body, or else proper to but one particular part. 
We shall treat first of those common to several 
parts. 
Of Common EXTERNAL FORMS. 
Of INJECTIONS. 
§.295. AN Infection (enema) is a medi- 
cated liquor, to be convey'd generally 
by means of some tube, thro' natural or preterna- 
tural apertures, into particular cells or cavities in 
the body, for various uses. 
§.296. The particular cavities (§.295.) into 
which injections are usually convey'd, are those of 
the ears, nose, eyes, mouth, anus, bladder, penis, 
uterus and vagina; not excluding wounds, absces- 
ses, sinusses and sistulæ. But as those for the mouth 
and anus, viz. glysters and gargarizms are more 
frequently used, and proper only to those parts; 
to proceed agreeable to our proposed method 
(§.294.), we shall hereafter give them a separate 
treatment. 
§.297. To the form of injections belongs the 
chirurgia infusoria, or injection of liquors into the 
blood-vessels of living animals, which became so 
considerable towards the end of the last century; 
but this practice being now almost extinct, we shall 
not here give a particular treatise thereof. 
§.298. 


247 Of Injections.
§.298. The Matter or ingredients for com- 
peting the medicated liquor(§.295.), are taken 
from infusions (§.211), decoctions (§.224.) 
juices (§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), and mixtures, 
large (§.272.) or small (§.283.). From whence 
(ex l.c.), whatever is necessary to be known on 
this head, may be readily learned. 
§.299. A proper Election of these ingredients 
(§.298.) can only be directed by a previous 
knowledge of the medicinal virtues of each, with 
proper judgment in the indication; for we here 
need not regard the colour, smell or taste, Hence 
1. There is here no occasion for the correc- 
tors (§.83 and 85.), which are so frequently 
used in prescribing and compounding internal 
forms. 
2. On the contrary, this form often takes in 
things, which, by reason of their unpleasant- 
ness and noxious qualities, are seldom or never 
applied to internal uses: such as oils infused or 
boiled, ointments, urine, henbane, and the 
strongest mercurials, &c. 
3. But we need be extremely cautious not to 
order things of too violent action for injections, 
in over large quantities; for the bibulous vasa 
inhalantia, which are open in every part, may 
transfer them immediately to the blood and 
lymph: or the vicinity and nakedness of some 
nerve, tendon or bone, may prove equally of 
as bad a consequence. 
4. Tho' this form will admit of a little thick- 
er consistence than others, yet it ought to be suf- 
ficiently fluid, and its mixture equable; both 
that it may not obstruct the small tube through 
which it is to be convey’d (§.295.), and that 
the intermix’d solid parts may not prove often- 
sive by their roughness. Therefore the dry in- 
gredients, which are not dissolvable, ought to 
R4 be

248 Of Injections. 
be most exactly levigated. There is also some- 
times occasion for a saponaceous intermedium 
(§.274. n° 6.) in this form, when oily sub- 
stances are to be intimately mix’d with aqueous. 
5. Sometimes things are order’d in this form 
which are of the considence of an ointment or 
butter, and which grow more or less solid upon 
cooling; but such things are not to be injected 
before they are sufficiently attenuated, by heat, 
or a proper menstruum. 
§.300. The ORDER or method of precribing 
the ingredients for an injection, is to be observed 
the same as in the several liquors §.298. agreeable 
to the particular nature of each, as we have before 
observed, in loc. ibid. cit. 
§.301. The DOSE of an injection is hardly to 
be limited in the general, as it differs very much 
with the size of the cavity (§.296.) into which 
it is to be injected, and the particular strength of 
the liquor or injection itself. In some cases only a 
drop or two will suffice; and then there is no oc- 
casion for a siphon or tube; as frequently happens 
in disorders of the eyes and ears. In many other 
cases, ʒj. ℥ss, j, ij, jv, or more, is injected into a 
part at a time. But most commonly, the filling
a part ’till it runs over is the proper limits of the 
dose of this form. 
§.302. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an in- 
jection to be prescribed at a time, may be easily 
deduced from considering the quantity of each 
dose (§.301.), the more or less frequent repeti- 
tion thereof, and the disposition of it to keep a 
longer or shorter time without changing, &c. 
§.303. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for composing an injection, may 
be learned from what has been said on this head 
in the histories of the several liquors (§.298.) 
to


249 Of Injections. 
to compound it, compared with the rules for elect- 
ing (§.299.) We may however observe, that an 
efficacious medicine may be used in three or four 
times a larger dose for this form, than for an
internal one. Yet we should not over-load it 
(§.299. n° 3.).
§.304. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for an injection, should be con- 
formable to the directions proper to the several 
other forms (§.298.) composing it; from whence, 
this article is to be learned. Tho' we sometimes 
add F. liquor pro injectione. The operation of in- 
jecting this form, not belonging to the apothecary, 
except in glysters, it is not the business of this 
place to treat thereof. 
§.305. The SUPERSCIPTION or direction to 
the patient for an injection, explains to him (be- 
sides the title §.60. n° 3. §.295. and 304.) what 
relates to the method of using or applying it; be- 
cause this business is generally referr’d to the pa- 
tient or his attendants, tho’ it may be sometimes 
properly assigned to a surgeon. The direction 
therefore injoins 
1. Whether the liquor is to be injected cold, 
warm, or hot. Cold injection being frequently 
pernicious to the body, is very seldom used; 
except when the intention is to repel, astringe 
or strengthen. A warmth nearest to that of a 
healthy human body, is the most serviceable 
and usual for this form, as best agreeing with 
every part. Too intense a heat is as bad as to 
inject cold, as it may scald or shrink up the 
small fibres and vessels. 
2. The injection is sometimes made barely by 
dropping the liquor into a part, when the cavity 
has an aperture large enough, and the quantity to 
be injected is but small (§.301.), requiring no 
great force to throw it in. But in the contrary 
cases,

250 Of Injections.
cases, a proper instrument is required. For this 
purpose, are used syringes of several sizes, made 
of various substances, and adapted to emissary 
tubes of various figures, according to the diffe- 
rence of the cavity and liquor to be injected. In- 
jections for the uterus and vagina are convey’d 
by an instrument on purpose, term’d metren- 
chites *; The bladder is injected by means of 
a tubulated catheter. 
3. The particular position of the patient, 
most convenient for injecting the liquor, may 
be sometimes directed; as may also that, where- 
in the patient is most likely to retain the liquor 
longest, whether by keeping the same posture, 
or by changing it after the injection. 
4. There are frequently several things to be 
observed also, after the injection; as when the 
liquor is to be retained in the cavity a certain 
time, or having performed its office, to be soon- 
er or later discharged. To this head belongs 
keeping the part at rest, its orifice closed, or the 
contained liquor in a proper agitation, &c. 
5. Lastly, we are here to direct how much 
at once, how often, at what time, and ’till 
when, &c. the injection is to be made and fol- 
lowed: the limitation of all which particulars, 
will readily appear to the physician, from his 
intention. 
6. But both the prescriber and compounder 
ought to be particularly cautious in this form, 
not to write any thing beyond the rule of secre- 
cy and decency, per §.60. n° 8. 
§.306.
* Described by SCULTETUS, in armament. chyrurg. part I. 
tab. 13. fig. 2. and tab. 43. fig. 6. 

251 Injections. 
§.306. The USES of injections are very nu- 
merous and extensive, especially in chirurgical cases, 
in all ages; being well accommodated to the in- 
tentions of absterging, diluting, mollifying, re- 
solving, easing, astringing, opening, healing, 
cleansing the solid, and washing out soft and fluid 
parts, &c. 
§.307. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Clysma auriculare, ulceri intra meatum audito- 
rium abstergendo, mundando, aptum. 
ꝶ. Urirœ homin. san. ℥iv. 
Sapon. venet. ℈j. 
Tinct. myrrh, gtt. xl. 
Mell. rofar. ʒvj. 
M.  
S. Hujus liquoris tepidi, quantum cavo capi potest, 
quotidie bis injiciatur in aurem œgram supinatam,
ac detineatur per aliquot minuta, dein aure prona 
rursus emittatur. 
2. Aliud, airi sordibus induratis obstructæ 
conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒij. 
Amaror. ʒj 
Fell. lucii piscis ʒß. 
Exacte M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Gtt. vj. ter de die instillentur auri supinatœ, de- 
tineantur gossypio immisso. Idem & antihelmin- 
ticum est. 
3.

252 Injections. 
3. Injectio ad cruorem coagulatum, extravasatum, 
diluendum. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 75. 
ꝶ. Mell. commun. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. marin. ℥ß. 
Aq. pluviœ ℥xij. 
M.  
S. Hujus tepefacti q. s. injiciatur cavo cruorem con- 
tinenti, leniterque conquassatum dein una cum cru- 
ore dilute rursus evacuetur. 
4. Emulsum digestivum ad sistulas curandas. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 93. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. ℥j. 
S. a. subactis admisce 
Mellis commun. ℥ij. 
Spir. vini commun. ℥ß, 
Aq. commun. ℥ix. 
D. 
S. Calefactum & probe mistum injice. 
5. Decoctum balsamicum, consolidans fistulam 
puram. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 94. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. hyperic. ℥iv. 
Aloes. 
Myrrhœ. 
Olibani ana ʒij. 
Coquendo leniter, mista, subige cum 
Vitell. ovor. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Calefactum parum in fistulam injice.
6.

253 Injections. 
6. Injectio detergens, ad urethram ulcere venereo 
erosam. Ibid. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Mell. rosar. ℥j. 
Aloes puriss. gr. x. 
Sal. ammon. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. fœnicul. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Liquor mundans, cujus q. s. ter, quater de die, in 
virgam, sanie pruis expressa vacuam, & pone lo- 
cum ulceratum constrictam, ope siphunculi injiciatur. 
7. Injectio ad gonorrhæam non virulentam. 
4. Aq. calc. viv. ℥vj. 
Tereb. venet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut. 
ʒß
Merc. dulc. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j.
Mell. commun. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Usurpetur liquor, per residentiam horœ minut. j. 
depurates, concusso prius vitro. 
8. Injectio ad sphacelum cavum. 
♃. Aq. calc. ℥vj. 
Tinct. myrrh. ℥ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ℥j. 
Mel. œrugin. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur calide, frequenter. 
9.

254 Injections. 
9. Injectio ad hæmorrhagiam in cavum. 
♃. Aq. ferrat. fabri ferrarii ℔ jß. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℥ij. 
Vitriol. alb. ʒjß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. & cola. 
S. Injiciatur frigide, ad cavi repletionem. 
10. Injectio confolidans. 
♃. Aq. hord. tepid. ℔j. 
Bals. tolut. (in vitel. ov. n°. j. solut.)
ʒij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur tepide, post hœmorrhagiam obturatam.
11. Injectio ad urethram inflammatam. 
♃. Aq. hord. ℥vj. 
Trochisch. alb. rhas. ʒij. 
Alum. rup. ℈ij. 
Mel. rosar. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur. lenissme tepifacta, frequenter.
Of

255 Of Aspersions. 
Of ASPERSIONS. 
§.308. AN ASPERSION (termed by the an- 
tients pasma, catapasma, diapasma, 
empasma, and sympasma), is a powder of the finer 
kind (§.106.), to be sprinkled upon external parts 
of the body for various uses. 
§.309. This powder is seldom thus used, but 
when it is of the midling or greatest degree of 
tenuity (per. §.107. n° 1. 3.); because large par- 
ticles do not spread fo well and equally, nor so 
easily adhere to a part, as when they have a larger 
surface given them by comminution. 
§.310. The Matter or ingredients, ELEC- 
TION and ORDER to be observed in prescribing 
this form, may be easily understood from compar- 
ing what has been said at §.109, 110. with the in- 
dication. For there is no material difference or 
exception to make, unless that we need not be so 
solicitous about the colour, smell and taste; but 
without any regard to the specific gravity, we 
may only accommodate all these three (matter, 
election and order) agreeable to our intention. 
Hence, many substances are used in this form, 
which are seldom or never taken into the body 
§.299. n° 2. 
§.311. The DOSE of this form is very uncer- 
tain, nor is it ever determined by weight; being 
generally limited only by the largeness of surface 
on the part, upon which it is to be sprinkled: 
Hence, it is not subject to that division which ob- 
tains at §.113. 118. 
§.312. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined upon the same condi- 
tions with those mention’d at §.301. 
§.313.

256 Of Aspersions.
§.313. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, that can only be 
deduced from a previous knowledge of the par- 
ticular nature and virtues of each ingredient, and 
their relation to the physicians intention. 
§.314. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is order’d by F. or M. F. 
pulvis: sometimes adding tenuissimus, when it is so 
required. A small card or deal box is the usual 
receptacle for this form; tho’ it is sometimes or- 
der’d to be ty’d up in a bit of coarse muslin, or 
lawn. 
§.315. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, acquaints him with the 
method of using it, which is usually performed 
only by inspersion, or sprinkling upon the part 
When it is ty’d up in a bit of lawn or muslin, it 
is then to be shook or sifted thro’ upon the part.
But if the declivity or oblique surface of the part, 
renders it less apt to receive and retain the powder 
by aspersion, it may be first strew’d upon a piece 
of linen or woollen cloth, or paper, and by that 
means be applied and held to the parts. 
The pasma, or powder for aspersion, is seldom 
order’d to be applied hot. But there are some- 
times several things order’d to be observed and 
done before and after the aspersion: as when the 
part is to-be first cleansed, rubbed, anointed, or 
bound up, &c. But these will sufficiently appear 
from every one’s indication. 
§.316. The USE of aspersions is pretty am- 
ple, being most frequently found in the hands of 
Surgeons, for the intentions of drying up, dispers- 
ing, astringing, cleansing, corroding, correcting 
acrimony, healing, &c. hence, this form is fre- 
quently required in wounds, ulcers and hæmor- 
rhages; in denudations and hurts of the bones, 
nerves and tendons; in defluctions of humours,
erysi-

257 Aspersions.
erysipelas, cutaneous disorders, &c. To this 
head we may also refer those powders which are 
applied by aspersion to persume or beautify divers 
parts of the body; sometimes called cyprus- 
powders.  
§.317. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Pulvis mundans, ad bubonem venereum 
apertum.  
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 249. 
ꝶ. Pulv. fol. siccator. scordii ℥ij. 
Vitriol, alb. ʒij. 
Aloes ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Aperto ulcert, deterso prius, inspergatur ad 
depurandum.  
2. Pulvis ad erysipelas. 
ꝶ. Pulv. erysipelatod. Mynsich. 
Flor. sambuc. siccator. ana ℥iij. 
Smalti ℥ij. 
Camphorœ ʒjß. 
Tenuiter trita M. 
S. Hujus calefacti prius q. s. loco adsecto insperga- 
tur, aut super charta cœrulea distributum parti 
applicetur & fascid leniter circumvoluta firmetur.
S 3. 


258 Aspersions. 
3. Pulvis balsamicus, ossibus, tendinibus nervis, 
nudatis conveniens. 
ꝶ. Myrrhœ ʒß. 
Olibani. 
Mastiches ana ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Colophoniœ ℥ß. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Eo conspergantur partes adfectœ, sub qualibet 
deligatione. 
4. Pulvis adstringens, ad sistendam hæmorrhagiam 
vulneris externi. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dratonis ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lapid. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis tenuissimus. 
S. Hujus q. s. inspergatur vasi vulnerato, & stupis 
alcohole calido madidis, vesicaque vel sascia circum- 
posita, firmetur. 
5. Diapasma acrimoniam obtunclens, ad in- 
tertriginem. 
ꝶ. Amyli ℥ij. 
Cretœ alb. 
Cerussœ ana ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. florent. ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Inclusus sindoni rarœ excuiiatur super parte exco- 
riata, prius detersa.
6. 

259 Of Epithems.
6. Diapasma detergens. 
(1.) ♃. Myrrhœ. 
Alöes ana ℈ij. 
Alum. ust. ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis subtillissimus. 
S. Flocculo gossipii excutiatur, super partes sordidas 
fungosas. 
(2.)—fortior. 
♃. Vitriol. alb. ʒij. 
Precipit. rubr. ʒjß. 
Alum. ust. ʒj. 
Disjunctim levigantur, & per cribra- 
tionem simul misce. 
S. Ut prior. 
7. Diapasma cicatrizans. 
♃. Colophon. nig. ʒij. 
Bals. tolut. ʒj. 
Sacch. albis. ʒvj. 
M. F. pulv. subtilis. exactissime levigando. 
S. In partibus excoriatis, ex gossipio, asperge. 
Of EPITHEMS. 
§.318. EPITHEMS are a kind of external me- 
dicines, of various consistences (but 
not like that of an ointment or emplaster), to be 
applied to the superficies of some external part of 
the body, for various intentions. When they are 
S2 to

260 Of Fomentations. 
to be applied hot, they take the name of somentum 
or fotus. 
§.319. Epithems are of a threefold consistence: 
either (1.) liquid; (2.) dry or solid; or (3.) soft 
and like a pultice. It is those of the first and se- 
cond consistence which ate properly termed epi- 
thems: the last kind is usually called malagma, 
puis or a cataplasm. We shall, for dictinction sake, 
treat of each separately. 
Of Liquid EPITHEMS. 
§.320. A Liquid Epithem, fotus or fomen- 
tation, is a simpie or compound medi- 
cated liquor, which is to be applied either hot or cold, 
by means of a proper vehicle, to some external part 
or the body; in order to make a change in the 
affected and adjacent parts, agreeable to the phy- 
sicians intention. 
§.321. The Matter or ingrediehts for com- 
posing the medicated liquor (§.320.) are, water, 
milk, wine, vinegar, spirit of wine, liquid juices, 
oil, urine, &c. either simple and by themselves, 
or variously compounded and prepared together, 
and mix'd with each other, or with other officinal 
or extemporaneous simples or compounds, of dif- 
ferent consistences: as distilled waters of all kinds, 
vinegars, oils by infusion or decoction, aromatic 
spirits, tinctures, essences, saline and lixivious li- 
quors, smith's-forge and lime water, &c. more 
particularly infusions made from these and other 
proper ingredients (per §.211.), decoctions 
(§.224), expressed juices (§.235.), emuisions 
(§.246.) and mixtures, diffuse (§.272.) and con- 
tracted (§.283.).
§.322. 

261 Of Fomentations. 
§.322. A proper ELECTION of the ingredients 
for infusions is to be deduced from the physician’s 
indication, with the structure and disposition of 
the particular part of the body to be alter’d, or 
to which infusions are to be applied, together with 
its morbid or sound state and the known nature of 
the liquor made use of. Observe therefore,
1. That what has been said in general con- 
cerning the election of ingredients for internal 
forms (§.213, 226, 237, 248, 274, 285.), 
may also take place here. 
2. But as we need not be solicitous about the 
colour, odour and taste, in this external form; 
so we need not make any addition of substances 
used for the correction of those qualities for in- 
ternal use, such as syrups, sugar, &c. 
3. Nor is a little thicker consistence usually 
disagreeable to this form: unless when it is re- 
quired to penetrate more than ordinary; for 
which, a greater degree of fluidity is generally 
preferable. 
4. The intention is often to produce a change, 
not only in the part to which this form is im- 
mediately applied, but it is also intended some- 
times to affect the viscera which are deeply situ- 
ated beneath, (§.320.). 
5. Hence, it will be most proper to select 
ingredients, whose principles and virtues consist 
of parts extremely small, volatile and penetrat- 
ing; especially when the intention is to affect 
parts internally situated, So that earths, stony 
substances, astringents, such as incrassate, and 
the like, seem to have little or no efficacy in 
them; since their grossness prevents their being 
absorbed by the small pores and vessels of the 
part, or else, by cloging up the small orifices, 
prevent their own ingress. But one may much 
more easily and effectually obtain the intention
S3 of

262 Of Fomentations.
of a striction, by the addition of aromatic and 
spirituous substances, which are more penetrat- 
ing. 
6. A regard must be also had to the nature of 
the part to which the fomentation is to be im- 
mediately applied; whether it will be injured by 
the action of oil, water, spirit, or something 
sharp; or whether one thing may not do the 
part as much harm as the other does it good.
7. For the rest, this form often takes in sub- 
stances which are seldom or never used inter- 
nally, such as the strongest preparations of mer- 
cury, and lead, with alcohol vini per se, the 
henbanes, mandrakes, nightshades, hemlocks, 
&c. 
8. But in ordering these deleterious substan- 
ces, the prescriber should be mindful, that as 
there are vasa inhalantia, very open and bibu- 
lous throughout the whole external surface of the 
body, their parts may enter the blood without 
ever passing thro' the stomach and primœ viœ. 
§.323. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of a fomentation, is to be observ’d 
much the same as that for internal forms (§.321.), 
which we have before recited. 
§. 324. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined either by the weight or measures used for 
the other internal forms. Its quantity or dose be- 
ing more or less, according to the size of the part 
to be fomented, and as the substance, by whose 
intervention it is to be applied, is more or less 
bibulous. A woollen cloth takes more than a 
linen one, and a cloth two or three times folded 
will imbibe more of the fomentation than one 
single, &c. 
§.325. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of 
this form to be sent to the patient at a time, as it 
is


263 Of Fomentations. 
is seldom less than lbss. so it is very frequently 
more than equal to ℔j, ij, iij.; according as the 
parts to be fomented are larger or smaller, and 
more or less in number; or as the vehicle is more 
or less bibulous (per §.324.); or the fomentation 
is to be continued a longer or shorter time, or is 
required to be repeated at longer or shorter inter- 
vals; or as the fomentation itself is more or less 
subject to change and corrupt, or is more or less 
easily prepared. It is, however, generally better 
to order somewhat too much than too little, espe- 
cially when the parts to be fomented are pretty 
large or numerous; left the liquor should be ex- 
pended too soon, or not hold out for the number 
of applications. 
§.326. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingrediens for a fomentation may be determined 
from what has been already said on this head (at 
§.217. 230. 241. 254. 278. 289.), compared with 
§.303. 322. It can be well ascertained, only from 
the phystcian's indication, and the known virtues 
of the ingredients: but the form being for exter- 
nal use, does not require so very exact a determi- 
nation of the proportion, as those do which are 
internal. Yet it may not be improper to observe 
the caution at §.322. n° 8. as also the consistence 
of each ingredient; left the form should become 
less penetrating, by its too great thickness. 
§.327. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is conformable to the 
same rules with those deliver’d for the composi- 
tion of internal liquid forms (§.218, 220, 231, 
242, 255, 279, 290.), from which, we'need ex- 
cept nothing but the names importing their inter- 
nal use, in the room of which others may be sub- 
stituted: as F. liquor pro epithemate vel fomento. 
But sometimes the form takes a name from the 
part to which it is to be applied; as may be seen 
S4 here-

264 Of Fomentations. 
hereafter in the external forms proper to particular 
parts (§.294.): at other times the form is in part 
denominated from the names of the ingredients; 
and hence the appellation oxyrhodon, &c. For 
the rest, the ingredients for this form are some- 
times only made up by the apothecary, in order 
to be afterwards infused or boiled for the fomen- 
tation, the remainder of the process being referr’d 
to the patient or his attendants, like as at §.218, 
220, 231: in which case, we may give it the name 
of species, or collectio. Lastly, this form does not 
require so exact a depuration, as at §.219. n° 4. 
§.231. n° 3. and 242. n° 3. 
§.328. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, indicates to him not 
only the name (per §.60. n° 3. §.230, and 327.), 
but also, 
1. The preparation: when that is not to be- 
performed by the apothecary (per §.327.).
Consult §.221. n° 2. 
2. The parts to he fomented: which are (per 
§.320, and 322, n° 4,) either (1.) external, to 
which the fomentation must be immediately ap- 
plied; or else, (2.) internal, invested by the for- 
mer, and only secundarily affected by the fo- 
mentation. (1) With regard to the external parts; 
as they are sufficiently manifest to the eye, we 
need only observe that, if they should have any 
open wound or ulcer, it may be sometimes pro- 
per to defend them first with some suitable mat- 
ter; that the crude liquor may not injure the 
excoriated parts, nor prove, by drying or sepa- 
rating the fibres or otherwise, hurtful to them. 
For (2.) the internal parts: when these are to 
be alter'd or affected by a fomentation, a proper 
external region should be first chose, agreeable 
to the different situation of the viscus, and inten- 
lion of the physician. And here, a previous 
know.


265 Of Fomentations.
knowledge of the consent of parts, or the distri- 
bution and communication of the nerves and 
blood vessels, will be of great service to direct 
the prescriber. For some intentions the fomen- 
tation is required to act more directly upon the 
affected part, as by strengthening, mollifying, 
moistening, cooling, relaxing, attenuating and 
dispersing impacted matter, &c. and then, the 
fittest external region for applying the fomenta- 
tion, will be, that which is neared the affected 
viscus, is the softest, and has tne thinnest integu- 
ments. Sometimes the intention requires a re- 
vulsion of the humours from, or a derivation of 
them to, some particular part; and in that case, 
the application should be accordingly made ei- 
ther in the upper or lower regions of the body; 
according as the viscus itself is situated, and as 
it may have a greater or less consent faith this 
or that external part of the body. At other 
times, our intention may be to affect the whole 
mass of blood, by the application of this form; 
and agreeable thereto, we pitch upon parts where 
the larged: vessels run the most exposed: as in 
the temples, neck, arm-pits, wrists, groyns, 
hams, &c. 
3. The vehicles by which it is to he applied 
(§.320.). Those most in use, are, linen or wool- 
len cloths of various colours, especially red, silk 
thrumbs, stupœ or bathing vessels, bread toasted, 
or its crumb, sponge, and dry epithems or bags 
of other ingredients, of which we shall treat 
hereafter. Sometimes the liquor is included in 
a hog’s bladder, capable of holding double the 
contents. The choice of these may be directed 
by the different intention, and nature of the 
parts to be fomented, and as one may be more 
easy to get than the other. When a great deal 
of the fomentation is to be applied at once, or 
its

266 Of Fomentations. 
its heat to be retained for a long time, for those 
purposes, woollen cloths, sponges and bathing ves- 
sels are most commonly used. A bladder, indeed, 
prevents any considerable dissipation of the li- 
quor, retains its heat, and keeps it from fouling 
or wetting any thing: but then it transmits none 
but the more subtle parts of the fomentation, to 
the affected parts, and those but very slowly. 
Hence, we may judge in what cases such a me- 
thod of application may be agreeable. If the 
region to be fomented is but thin, and does not 
require the epithem to be applied hot, or has 
no great necessity of retaining the heat, in these 
circumstances, linen cloths may do very well; 
and if a good deal of the fomentation is requir’d 
to be apply’d at once, they may be folded two, 
three, or more times together. 
4. Whether the fomentation is to he applied hot 
or cold. But this will be easily learned by the 
prescriber, from his own intention, and from 
the particular nature of the ingredients and part 
affected. When a fomentation is intended to 
attenuate strongly, to penetrate, or attract; to 
apply it hot, will then be of great service. But 
a cold application is the best for constringing 
the fibres, repelling the humours, &c. Such 
fomentations as are spirituous, or volatile, are 
fittest to be applied cold, or only warm; with- 
out the intention requires it otherwise. It may 
be also not improper to consider whether the ve- 
hicle (n° 3.) is to be first heated before it im- 
bibes any of the fomentation, or whether it may 
be more conveniently used cold. 
5. A direction for the method of retaining the 
epithem upon the parts. This is commonly ef- 
fected by proper bandages. But if the heat and 
humidity of the epithem be required to last any 
considerable time, it may be of service to bind
a 

267 Of Fomentations. 
a hog’s-bladder over the epithem, which has 
been first moistened with oil. Over that may 
be fastened a small bag full of warm sand, or an 
earthen tyle, brick, or any other body which 
will retain its heat a long time, without growing 
suddenly cold: and when the heat of such bo- 
dies is found declining and too low, they may 
be removed, and other hotter ones put in their 
place, the epithem itself remaining all the time 
upon the part. 
6. Lastly, the superscription also frequently- 
directs the time an epithem is to remain upon the 
part, how long the patient is to continue the use of 
it, at what times the application of it is to be re- 
newed, &c. Among these circumstances there 
is a great variety. Sometimes they are limited 
by the cessation or mitigation of particular symp- 
toms; as when, v. g. there is a remission of 
pain, watching, heat, cold, anguish, vomiting, 
bleeding, fainting, raving, &c. Sometimes 
they are limited by the strength of the liquor go- 
ing off; as, v. g. when it is cold, or all absor- 
bed by the vehicle, &c. They are also frequent- 
ly order’d to be used at some particular time; 
as in the morning, evening, or once or twice 
every day, or every second or third hour, &c. 
In all these cases, the physician may easily limit 
the application, by considering his particular in- 
tention, the disposition of the disease and its 
symptoms, with the nature of the fomentation, 
as being more volatile, fix’d, &c. as also, the 
vehicle (n° 3.) and apparatus being more easy 
or difficult to be had, or made. 
§.329. The USE of fomentations is very ex- 
tensive, being employ’d in most disorders whe- 
ther acute or chronic, external or internal; this be- 
ing a form well adapted to alleviate or remove many 
of

268 Of Fomentations. 
of their symptoms: and is used in various inten- 
tions, for mollifying, astringing, corroborating, 
repelling, drawing, warming, cooling, diluting, 
attenuating, opening, easing, stimulating, cor- 
recting or obtunding particular acrimony, &c. 
wherein the solids are no less affected and relieved 
than the fluids. This form is also suited to cause 
or promote almost every kind of evacuation by the 
emunctories, and is well enough adapted to pa- 
tients of all ages in general; supposing the 
dients to be carefully selected and adapted, and the 
application of them to be made at a proper time. 
These external epithems may very well supply the 
place of internal remedies, for infants, or others, 
who abhor to swallow, or cannot take physic in- 
ternally, But the application, and renovation of 
this form, is sometimes more troublesome than the 
use of internals. This form may also prove some- 
times hurtful by an improper application; as when 
it dissipates or relieves the symptoms, without re- 
moving the cause of the disease: which accident 
very frequently occurs in the use of narcotic epi- 
thems. Or the use of repellents in this form may 
prove pernicious, by constringing the vessels, and 
impacting the morbific matter, when it has not 
had a previous attenuation, or proper degree of 
fluidity; at other times, these applications may do 
harm by becoming too cold thro' a long residence, 
upon the part, when their warmth is all they can 
prove serviceable by, &c. But these accidental 
ill consequences are to be rather attributed to the 
injudicious application, than to the form itself; 
and may be very easily avoided by a skilful pre- 
scriber. 
§.330. Take the following. SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1.

269 Fomentations. 
1. Epithema aromaticum, promovens saburræ in- 
testinalis excretionem in infante recens nato. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Vitell. ovi. n°. j. 
Spir. matrical. 
Tinct. absynth. 
Aq. stillat, fœnicul. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Except a pauxillo micœ panis, stomacho applicentur. 
2. Aliud, ad nauseam ab inordinato liquidi nervosi 
motu ortam.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Aq. vitœ matthioli ℥j. 
Spir. rad. angelic. 
Carmin. sylv. 
Menthœ ana ℥ij. 
M. D. 
S. Taleola panis triticei tosti, bene irrorata his, ap- 
plicetur calidè epigastrio, super applicetur vesica
suilla oleo humectata, & dein supra hanc ligatura: 
renovetur post xij horas.  
3. Emulsum externum, anodynum, demulcens, 
leniter aperiens. 
V. Boerhi Mater. Med. p. 113. 
ꝶ. Semin. pomor. cotoneor. n°. vj. cum 
Aq. stillat. flor. rosar. 
Sambuc. aa ℥iij. 
F. s. a. Emulsio, cujus puro liquori ad- 
misce 
Spir. vini rectificat. ℥ß. 
Tinct. opii ʒij. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Parti a caustico aliove acri foris applicato lœsœ 
& dolenti cum panno linco triplicato admoveatur 
calidè: renovetur, ubi siccescii.
4. 

270 Fomentations.
4. Fomentum laxans, resolvens, paregoricum, ad 
pleuritidem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 149. 
ꝶ. Fol. malvæ. 
Bismalvæ
Parietar. ana m. ij. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Hyoscyam. ana m. j. 
Flor. sambuc. 
ChamœmeL 
Melilot. ana ℥iii. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. F. decoctum pro so-
mento 
S. Vesica stiilla hoc liquore calidissmo ad dimidias re- 
pleta, admoveatur lateri dolenti; firmetur liga- 
mine: turn super ponatur saccuius arena calidis- 
sima plenus, qui frigescens iterum calesiat, aut ei 
mox substituatur alius jam calefactus. Continuen- 
tur hœc, donec dolor remisit. 
5. Fotus antisepticus, calorem vitalem refuscitans, 
intestino per vulnus abdominis egresso conveniens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 79. 
ꝶ. Intestina pura animalis junioris q. s. 
Coq. in Aq. q. s. spatio 1/8 horæ; dein adde 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Lavendul. 
Centaur. ana m. ß. 
Fol. menth. m. j. 
Stent in infusione per 1/16 horæ. 
D. 
S. Liquor calidus cum panno laneo appicetur.
6.

271 Fomentations: 
6. Epithema anti-alcalicum, cardiacum, in gan- 
grena: ad exemplum ibid. p. 96. 
ꝶ. Herb. scordii 
Menthœ 
Summit. rutœ 
Fol. rosmarin. ana m. ß. 
Cort. cinnamom. 
Nuc. myristic. ana ʒij. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum acet. rosac. & vini
rhenan. aā ℥viij. coquantur in 
phialia alta, vitrea per 1/8 horæ. 
Liquori decantato adde 
Aq. prophylact. sylv. ℥ij. 
S. Hoc liquors imbutœ spongiolœ admoveantur paro-
tidibus, axillis, scrobiculo cordis, carpis, inguini-
bus. Taleola panis tosti eodem imbuta naribus sup- 
ponatur. Renoventur quolibet trihorio. 
7. Fotus antiphlogisticus. 
♃. Aq. benedict. ℥vj. 
Acet. vini alb. 
Sp. vin. camph. aā ℥ij. 
Sacch. saturn. 
Opii aā ʒj. 
M. F. Fotus, s. a. 
S. Ut in fronte, cum pannis linteis tepide adhibend. 
pro re nata. 


272 Fomentations. 
8. Fotus astringens. 
♃. Gall. virid. 
Cort. granator. aa ℥ß. 
Flor. rosar. rubr. m. j. 
Coque in Aq. font. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. 
Colaturæ adde Vin. rubr. ℔ ß. 
Alumen. rup. ʒij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Frigide applicetur, cum pannis 
linteis, omni 12° horœ parte renovand. 
9. Fotus discutiens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. absinth. vulg. 
Flor. chamœem. 
Sambuc. aa m. j. 
Ciner. lign. vulg. ℥vj. 
Coque in Aq. benedict. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. colaturæ 
adde 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv.
M. F. fotus.  
S. Cum pannis laneis calide adhibend. & frequenter 
renovand. 
10. Fotus emolliens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. & radit. althœœ aa ℥jv. 
Hyosciam. 
Flor. sambuc. 
Melilot. aa m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. ℥ij. 
Coque in A. font. ℔ iij ad ij. colaturæ adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Cremor. lact. recent. ℥ij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Cum pannis lintels tepide appli- 
cand. & pro re nata, renovand.
Of 

273 Of dry Epithems. 
Of dry EPITHEMS. 
§.331 EPITHEMA SICCUM, or a dry Fotus, 
is a kind of medicated powder (§.106.); 
which being generally fewed up in a cloth, is appli- 
ed to alter various external parts of the body, in va- 
rious intentions. It takes several names, according 
to the different parts of the body it is to be appli- 
ed to: as, saccus, sacculus, cucusa, cucullus, fron- 
tale, Scutum, lectulus, pulvinar, &c. 
§.332. The consistence of the powder for this 
form is hardly ever finer than the two first degrees 
(§.107. n° (2.)), tragea, and species; and this, in 
order to prevent its parts from sticking to each 
other, and from falling thro' the interstices of the 
cloth. 
§.333. The MATTER or ingredients for dry 
epithems, may be the same, in general, with those 
for the powder (at §.109. and 110.); supposing 
they are judged proper for external use, and for 
the particular intention. 
§.334. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
this form may be learned from §.111. 110. 322. 
compared with §.331. 332. But we may observe 
in brief; 
1. That the ingredients most frequently in 
use for dry epithems, are roots, barks, leaves, 
flowers, seeds; berries, spices, concreted jui- 
ces, and the officinal species compounded of 
these, &c. 
2. That this form does require equally, or ra- 
ther more (than at §.322, n° 5.), that its in- 
gredients should be such as consist of parts which 
are very volatile and penetrating; because its 
T con- 

274 Of dry Epithems. 
consistence and mode of application (§.331. and 
332.), would otherwise make them useless. 
3. That to these dry ingredients is frequently 
added some liquid epithem (§.320.); by which 
means, the substances become more useful or 
active, and the preceeding form becomes a ve- 
hicle for this (per §.328. n° 3.).
4. That chaff is generally used to dilate the 
ingredients of this form, when they are intend- 
ed for the composition of little beds or pillows. 
The same substance is also used (or rather one 
which is softer, as wool, cotton, &c.) to sepa- 
rate the parts of the medicated powder, when it 
is to compose a scul-cap, frontal, or the like 
small baggs; which are required to set easy upon 
the part, and have no occasion to be wetted 
much. 
5. That to this form belongs the use of small 
bags filled with sand; whether applied alone,
or mix'd with some liquid epithem (§.328. n° 5.): 
in cases which require a dry or moist heat to be 
preseved for a considerable time. 
§.335. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for dry epithems, may be observ'd 
the same as at §.112. of the internal powder. 
§.336. The DOSE of this form is limited by fil- 
ling the capacity of the bag, and that capacity is 
usually proportioned to the size of the hollow part 
of the body it is to be applied to. Hence, the 
dose of dry epithems is very different and undeter- 
mined. The hairy scalp of the head, the stomach, 
and the liver, commonly take up about ℥ij, iij, or 
jv: the heart, splen, and kidneys, about ℥j, jß or 
ij. and the other pans in proportion to their mag- 
nitudes. The little beds and pillows which are for 
the patient to lye upon, require a dose of several 
pounds. But we may observe, 
1.

275 Of dry Epithems. 
1. That different ages in patients, and degrees 
of extension for morbid parts, make a great varia- 
tion in the quantity or dose of these dry epithems. 
4. That these bags should not be stuffed full, 
but in a loose manner; that they may be the 
more soft, or easy, and the more readily adapt 
themselves to the form of the parts. 
§.337. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be transmitted to the patient at one time, 
is to be determined by the quantity of the dose 
(§.336.) and the number of bags to be filled. 
For very often there ate several bags to be trans- 
mitted together, which are to be either applied at 
one time to different parts, or to the same part at 
different times, alternately. 
§.338. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for dry epithems, may be determined front 
the same circumstances as at §.313. of aspersions. 
§.339. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, orders 
1. The preparation of the powder: which is 
usually performed by cutting, pounding or grind- 
ing in a gross manner (per §.332.); then comes 
mixation. Sometimes, particular ingredients, or 
all of them, are order’d to be roasted in a fry- 
ing-pan; in order to increase or change their 
medicinal virtues: but this process should not, 
however, be practiced upon ingredients, whose 
virtues consist in very volatile parts. At other 
times, the dry powders are order’d to be sprink- 
led with some efficacious liquor, before they are 
included in bags; as with spirits, oils, aromatic 
tinctures, &c. 
2. The making of the bag: where the first thing 
that offers, is, (1.) the cloth to be cut out, and 
few’d; which is commonly some thin and coarse 
linen, muslin, or silk, but seldom woollen. The
T2 nature 

276 Of dry Epithems. 
nature or disposition of the morbid part, the 
quantity or quality of the powder, the greater 
or smaller stress the bag will suffer in its appli- 
cation, the opinion of the patient, and the price 
of the cloth, &c. have each their particular 
share in determining the choice of its kind. 
(2.) The figure of the bag, which is to be adapt- 
ed to that of the morbid part, and the method 
of using it. It is customary to be in form of a 
hood, tor the hairy scalp of the head, and to be 
of an oblong-square, for the fore-head; pyra- 
midal for the heart, scutiform for the stomach. 
lunated for the liver; and to be in the form of an 
ox's tongue for the splen, round for the navel, 
&c. The little beds and pillows retain their 
usual form, being only proportion'd in their 
size. Sometimes the length and breadth of the 
bag is expressed to correspond to the morbid 
part, by a number of fingers breadths or inches: 
when at other times, mention is made only of 
the part to be cover'd, and the rest referr'd to 
the discretion of the apothecary. (3.) The num- 
ber of bags is sometimes mentioned, when there 
are several to be made at one time (per §.337.). 
3.The filling or stuffing of the bag: before 
which process, should go, when necessary, mixa- 
tion with the chaff, or an interposition of the 
cotton or wool (per §.334. n° 4.). The inclo- 
sure and fixation of the ingredients in the bag is 
usually performed by future: tho' sometimes,
barely tying or folding them up, is sufficient, 
when its stay upon the part is required to be but 
short, and its figure (n° 2. (2.)) less exact. And 
lastly the larger bags, which are not stuffed over 
tight, are frequently interfew'd or quilted; that 
the included powder may not clog together, or 
settle more to one part of the bag than to ano- 
ther.
4. 

277 Of dry Epithems.
4. But the business of all that has been hitherto 
said (n° 2. and 3.), is very often referr’d to be 
performed by the patient or his attendants; the 
preparation and exhibition (n° 1.) of the pow- 
der only, being left to the apothecary. And in 
this case the subscription barely orders P. species 
pro cucufa, sacculo, lectulo, &c. 
§.340. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides its name, 
(§.321. 339. n° 4.) also 
1. The inclosure of the species or powders; 
when they are to be transmitted loose to the pa- 
tient, by the apothecary (per §.339. n° 4.). 
But for this, the same directions take place, as 
at §. preced. n° 2, and 3. 
2. What belongs to the application of them: 
but this application of the dry epithems is usa- 
ally made either (1.) alone and dry, being ge- 
nerally made warm first. Or (2.) when they 
have been imbib’d with the medicinal virtues of 
others, to render them more active. Therefore 
the dry epithems are frequently order’d to be 
moitened with liquid ones (§.320. 328. n° 3.), 
either by maceration, aspersion or decoction with 
them; or else by imbibing the vapours of some 
proper decoction, boiling, or the dry fumes 
arising from the accension of some suffitus or fu- 
migation. Or (3.) a dry epithem may be ap- 
plied with a super-apposition of a liquid one, in 
order to retain its heat, or increase its virtues 
(per §.328. n° 3. 5. and §.334 n° 5.). What 
farther relates to the application of this form, by 
the patient may be deduced from what has been 
said at §.328; the greatest part of which may 
generally take place here. 
T3 §.341.


278 Of dry Epithems. 
§.341. The USE of this form is much the 
same with that of fomentations (§.329.). But a 
dry epithem is generally less penetrating, and more 
slow in action, unless it be mix’d with a liquid one 
(per §.340. n° 2. (2.)). Tho’ there are some cases 
where a dry heat is more useful and tolerable to the 
patient. To this form, of epithems, also belongs 
the application of live whelps, pigeons, chickens, 
&c. after they have been split in two; as also the 
omentum, intestine, and other parts of animals, 
while they retain their vital heat: to these we may 
add, bread hot from the oven, applied either alone 
or with some proper mixture, agreeable to the usual 
methods; the business of which, may be readily 
understood from the preceeding doctrine of epi- 
thems. 
§.342. For SPECIMENS of dry epithems, take 
the following. 
1. Cucufa confortans, capiti debili, frigido ca- 
tarrhis obnoxio, prosicua. 
ꝶ. Rad. angelicœ ℥j. 
Herb, majoran. 
Salviœ. 
Folior. & flor. rosmarin 
Sumit. serpill. aa m. ß. 
Semin, nigell. rom. ʒiij.
Caryophyll. arom. 
Mastiches. 
Styrac. calamit. ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. species pro cucufa, quœ gossypio exceptœ includan- 
tur duplicaturœ cuculli, & punctim intersuantur. 
Cucullo, mane & vesperi fumo ligni juniperi accensi 
imbuto, semper tegatur caput. 
2.

279 Dry Epithems. 
2. Scutum stomachicum, ad nauseam a motu li- 
quidi nervosi inordinato ortam. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Pulv. aromat. rosat. 
Diagalang. 
Diarrhod. abb. ana ℥j. 
M. 
S. Insuta sindoni applica epigastrio. 
3. Epithema ad dolores colicos a causa frigida, 
slatulenta, natos. 
ꝶ. Semin, contus. anisi. 
Cumini ana ℥j. 
Piperis ʒiij. 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Caryophillor. aromat. 
Maceris ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. Species califacientes, quœ panis adhuc a furno ca- 
lentis, transversim dissecti, superficei internœ mi- 
caceœ, inspergantur, tum spiritu vini irroratœ
sindone super extensd contineantur, & epigastrio 
vel regioni dolenti applicentur: post tres quasque 
boras sindon spiritu vini iterum humectetur. 
4. Epithema febrifugum. 
♃ . Camph. opt. ʒij. 
Sal. vol. C.C. per se ʒj. 
Cort. cinnam. pulv. 3j. 
Nuc. myristic. ras. ʒß. 
Ol. essent. chamœm. gtt. xxiv. 
M. 
S. Includantur species sacculo serico, rubro, septies re- 
duplicate & in figuram pyramidalem redacto: 
quœ in collum filo serico rubro suspensœ, circa cordis 
scrobiculum retineantur; donec ʒiij. pondere avo- 
lantur.
T4 5. 

280 Dry Epithems. 
5. Lectulus & pulvinaria roborantia, anti-rachitica. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Folior. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Filicis maris ℔ iij.
Majoranœ, 
Melissœ. 
Menthœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Meliloti. 
Trisolii odorati. 
Sambuci. 
Rosarum ana ℥ij. 
Tritis in pulverem tenucm, & mistis. 
F. Species pro lectulo & pulvinaribus. 
S. Species rohorantes, quibus cum duplo tanto paleæ 
hordei mistis, ac dein linteo immissis, fiant lectulus 
& pulvinaria, quibus incumbat œger. Defendan- 
tur autem ab humido, & sæpe exsiccentur. 
6. Epithema siccum ad hydrocelen, serum dissi- 
pans, educens. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 211. 
ꝶ. Sails marin. decrepit. siccissimi, calidi, 
tenuissime triti. q. s. 
D. 
S. Intra lintea consuta applicetur calidus: simul ac 
madescit, alius similis sacculus, priori remote, sub- 
stituatur. 
7.

281 Dry Epithems. 
7. Epithema anti-phlogisticum, ad nephritidem. 
V. H. Boerh. in Aphorism. §.997. n°. iij. 
ꝶ. Herb. parietar. m. ij. 
Flor. chamæmeli. 
Melioti. 
Sambuci ana ℥ß. 
Semin. contus. lini ℥j. 
Conscissa, tusa, tenuiter, mista, laxe im- 
missa duobus sacculis lineis, qua- 
tuor pollices longis, duos latis, 
insuantur. 
S. Sacculi renales, quorum urns horœ quadrante cum 
lacte dulci coctus, calidus, imponatur regioni lum- 
bari dolenti; firmetur ligamine: ubi refrixit, in- 
tera similiter coctus alter priori substituatur. 
8. Sacculus cordialis, excitans in languore ab inertia 
defectuve liquidi nervosi orto. 
(A.) ꝶ. Folior. recent. melissœ. 
Basilic. ana ʒiij. 
Flor. lavendul. siccator. ʒij. 
Cort. recent. aurant. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Croci britannici ʒß. 
Conscissa tenuiter insuantur sacculo, py- 
ramidali, serico, rubro. 
(B.) ꝶ. Aq. meliss. magistral. ℥ij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒij. 
Tinct. ambari ʒj.
M. D. seorsim vitro probe clauso  
S. Sacculus (A.) regioni cordis apponatur prius ir-
roratus liquore (B.): ubi exaruit iterum humec- 
tetur. 
9.

282 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
9. Epithema adstringens, in intestino recto pro- 
lapso, reducto, conveniens. 
ꝶ. Herb. anserin. 
Folior. querc. ana m. j. 
Flor. balaust. 
Gallar. quercin. ana ℥ß.
Conscissa, tusa insuantur binis sacculis 
sericis, æqualibus. 
S. Coquantur sacculi in vini rubri & aceti ana q. s. 
& calidi alternatim admoveantur ano. 
Of CATAPLASMS. 
§.343. A Cataplasm is a soft, cohesive epi- 
them (§.318, 319. n° 3.), in the 
form of pap; and of a middle consistence, between 
that of an ointment, and an emplaster; but not 
melting with heat, in its external application for 
various uses. 
§.344. The consistence of this form (§.343.) 
is generally given to it by boiling: but it is some- 
times prepared without that, bately by tritura- 
tion and mixture. Hence we have a two-fold di- 
stinction of cataplasms, into boiled and crude. 
Of CATAPLASMS by Decoction. 
§.345. CATAPLASMA COCTUM, or a pultice 
made by of such a consistence. 
(§.343.) as not to flow about, be composed 
of ingredients whose parts are very small, cohesive 
and

283 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.  
and slippery. These, being sufficiently attenuated 
and equably mixed, take the name of puls. 
§.346. The MATTER, or ingredients for this 
form is threefold: a liquor: a substance to be boiled 
therein: and accessories. 
1. The liquor to be used, may be of various 
kinds: as water, new-milk, butter-milk, whey, 
liquid juices by expression, mead, wine; vine- 
gar, simple, or compound of the shops; urine lixi- 
vium; oil by expression, infusion or decoction: 
and sometimes thicker substances are added, which 
yet melt with heat; as butter, the fat of animals, 
ointments, &c. And sometimes, an intention re- 
quires several of these to be mix’d together. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled in the liquor, 
are usually taken from the class of vegitable sub- 
stances: to which belong roots, bulbs, rinds, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds; or else 
meals, powders, inspissated juices, &c. made 
from these. The animal and mineral class of 
substances afford but few ingredients to be boil- 
ed into a cataplasm; tho’ the excrements of par- 
ticular animals, the nests of swallows, with pre- 
parations from lead, are sometimes taken into 
this form. 
3. The Accessories are usually added either to- 
wards the end of the decoction, or else mixed 
after that is over: and this, either to (1.) increase 
the medicinal virtues, their texture not being able 
to resist the action of the fire; such as the aro- 
matic waters and oils, tinctures, essences, spi- 
rits, wines, vinegars, balsams, extracts, pulps, 
electuaries, gums and resins, or gum-resins, li- 
quid or inspissated juices of vegetables, yest, 
salt, sope, with the finer aromatic powders of 
the softer parts of vegetables, e.g. of saffron, 
and the like. Or, (2.) they are added to give 
the form a proper cohesion and lubricity (§.345.): 
of


284 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
of which kind are meals, fine powders, oils, 
ointments, butter, honey, the crumb of white 
bread, the whites or yolks of eggs, mucilages, &c. 
§.347. The ELECTION of ingredients most  
proper for this form, is directed by the requi- 
site consistence and uniformity of a cataplasm 
(§.345.), in conjunction with the physician’s in- 
tention, and previous knowledge of the effects 
boiling will have upon the ingredients. Hence, 
1. The reader may consult what has been said 
at (§.322.); the greater part of which observa- 
tions are agreeable to this cohesive, as well as 
that liquid kind of epithem. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled (§.346. n° 2.), 
should be either naturally of a soft texture, or 
else apt to become so by the decoction: so that 
the harder parts of vegetables, which are less 
succulent, as woods, stalks, roots, barks, &c. 
are generally excluded from this, form: the 
more soft and succulent parts of recent vege- 
tables, being preferable to the more compact 
and dry, 
3. Bread, flower, or the finer powders of the 
parts of vegetables, are generally used to make 
a smooth pultice, like paste (§.345.). 
5. Sometimes the residuum left after boiling 
a liquid fomentation (§.321.), composes the 
matter of a cataplasm; when both a pultice 
and fomentation of the same virtues are requir- 
ed to be used at the same time. In this case 
there is seldom any occasion to repeat, or make 
a second decoction of the ingredients. 
6. The liquor (§.346. n° 1.) to boil, the ingre- 
dients for the cataplasm, should be chose agreeable 
to the physician’s intention, and texture of the 
ingredients; and be able to sustain the force of 
fire in the decoction. When the intention is to 
moisten,

285 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
moisten, mollify and relax, it is advisible to let 
the liquor be water, milk, or preparations of 
the last, with oil and unctuous substances: but 
when the design is to open obstructions, attenu- 
ate viscidities, or stimulate the small vessels, it 
may be best to use vinegar, oxycrate, urine, a 
lixivium, &c. From a combination of several 
of these with each other, will arise a new mix- 
ture, of complex virtues. It is advisable to mix 
such things, as may be lost by the fire in boil- 
ing, after that operation is over, and the cata- 
plasm made (per §.226. n° 1, 2, 3.); such are 
wines, distilled waters, inflammable spirits, aro- 
matic oils, and the like. 
6. The accessories (§.346. n° 3.) of both 
kinds, are not always necessary in this form. 
Tho’ the proper consistence, or requisite virtues, 
not found in the other boiled ingredients, may 
sometimes give occasion to make this addition. 
Hence, when a cataplasm is too fluid, and its 
mixture not sufficiently uniform; we then add 
fine powders or meals: if too dry, and not sub-
sicently pliable; we mix oils and unctuous sub- 
stances. And sometimes we add both, to increase 
the bulk of a cataplasm to a proper size. 
7. But both kinds of accessories (whether they 
be fluid, liquisiable by heat, or naturally soft and 
viscous, or of the fine powder kind) ought to 
be disposed to make a uniform and equable 
mixture. Such as are difficultly soluble, or run 
together into grumes by heat; such as e.g. re- 
sins and gum-resins, galbanums sagapenum, &c. 
ought to be first dissolved in vinegar, wine or its 
spirit, or else reduced by the yolk of an egg. 
8. Oils and unctuous substances should not be 
mix’d in all cases promiscuously. For they are 
often pernicious by obstructing the pores of the 
skin; unless they have previously undergone 
a

286 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.
a sufficient attenuation, by sope, or some proper 
menstruum. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form, 
may be the same as for a decoction (§.226. 
n° 23.). 
§.348. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
and compounding the ingredients for a cataplasm, 
is much the same as at §.227. of the internal de- 
coction. The accessories (§.346. n° 3. (2.)) ge- 
nerally come in the last place; because they are 
frequently order’d in an undetermined quantity. 
But if there are any ingredients whose parts are ex- 
tremely volatile, they should be mix’d the very 
last, after all the rest. 
§.349. The DOSE of this form is determined by 
the size of the part to be fomented; nor does it 
require to be limited by any other consideration. 
§.350. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be precribed and transmitted to the pa- 
tient at a time, may be determined from the con- 
siderations at §.325. Whence we learn, that as 
the general quantity is often equal to ℔j, ij, iij, 
or more; so it is seldom prescribed in a less quan- 
tity than ℔ss. because it would bo troublesome 
to boil. 
§.351. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredi- 
ents for a cataplasm, may be almost wholly under- 
stood from what has been said on this head at 
§.217. 230. 303. 326. We shall only add, 
1. That the ingredients to be boiled should 
be order’d in a proportion conformable to the 
physician’s intention, the particular dose (§.349.); 
and general quantity (§.350.); because the whole 
substance of, them are used in this form. For 
the rest, consult what is said at §.303. and 326.
2. The proportion of the liquor for decoction 
(§.346. n° 1.), is hardly ever limited, but is
only 

287 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
only order’d to be taken in q. s. But a less quan- 
tity is generally sufficient for this form, than 
for internal decoctions (per §.230.), for injec- 
tions (per §.303.), or for fomentations; and 
this, that a cataplasm may the sooner acquire 
its due consistence (§.343.): supposing the in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) do not require a long 
decoction in order to molify them. 
3. When oil, butter, or the softer fats of 
animals are used for the menstruum or liquor 
(§.346. n° 1.) of this form, they should be or- 
der’d in a very small proportion; left they should 
become rank and acrimonious by the heat of the 
fire. Whence, a bare maceration and contu- 
sion of them together, is generally preferable to 
boiling them. 
4. To make a farinaceous cataplasm, a still 
less proportion of liquor may suffice; because 
those ingredients(§.347. n° 4.), do well enough 
incorporate and acquire a consistence without 
much boiling. 
5. The proportion of accessories (§.346. n° 3. 
(1.) will hardly admit of limitation even by 
general bounds. Their virtues and consistences 
coming more or less near to those proper to this 
form, the quantity of ingredients to be boiled, 
and the particular intention of the prescriber, 
are to have each their consideration in order to 
determine their due proportion. If they should 
happen to disturb the due consistence (§.343. 
345.) of the cataplasm, by making it too thick 
or too thin; in that case we make use of the 
accessories at (§.346. n° 3. (2.). and §.347. 
n° 7.). 
6. The proportion of those accessories (§.346. 
n° 3. (2.)) may be determined from the quan- 
tity and consistence as well of the boiled ingre- 
dients as of the accessories (n° 5.) preceeding. 
But

288 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
But as they are not always of the same consi- 
stence, we may readily perceive that their quan- 
tities alone will not be sufficient to direct the due 
proportion. Hence, in doubtful cases, our most
expeditious method will be to add the requisite 
proportion of acceffories (§.347.n°.7.) by 
q. s. And if we have a mind to use accessories both 
of the dry and liquid kind (§.ib) we may then also 
order the proportion of one of both of them by q.s. 
§.352. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, orders the prescribed in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) to be macerated or boiled 
in the menstruum or liquor (§.ib. n° 1.); after they 
have been first comminuted by cutting, pounding, &c. 
when such preparation is necessary. But the quantity of 
maceration and boiling is determined by the ingre- 
dients being sufficiently softened, putrid, or atte- 
nuated; when they are of a gross and compact tex- 
ture; but if they are of a soft texture, and of the 
powder kind; then the degree of boiling is to be 
limited by their acquiring the consistence of paste, 
which will be much promoted by sufficiently agi- 
tating the mass with a spathula or pudding-stirer 
whilst boiling, by which means it will acquire a 
more uniform mixture, and be also prevented from 
burning to the vessel, when the quantity of liquor 
is but small. The next thing that this part of the 
formula directs, is, the beating and straining of 
the boiled ingredients, when their stalks, or more 
tough and woody parts cannot be sufficiently mol- 
lified. Lastly, the pulp or pultice being thus made, 
the accessories (§.346. n° 3.) are order’d to be 
mix’d therewith, according to their texture, ei- 
ther whilst it is still over, or after it is removed 
from, the fire. And the direction concludes, F. 
cataplasma vel puls. D. ad fictile. 
§.353.

289 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
§.353. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is pretty evident from 
§.345. and 328. This kind of epithem, a cata- 
plasm, is almost constantly applied hot; and some- 
times it is rolled up in linen, that if may not smere 
any thing. Sometimes volatile substances are mix- 
ed therewith, immediately before its application, 
as wine, spirits, tinctures, &c. which, unless they 
are in common use, should be for that purpose 
transmitted separately, to the patient, by the apo- 
thecary. When by a very frequent repetition, or 
continued use of this form, the substance of the ca- 
taplasm becomes too thick and dry, it may be con- 
venient to order a remixture with the decoction 
wherein the ingredients of the cataplasm were boil- 
ed, or some other proper liquor, hot. For the 
rest, it may be understood from consulting the 
forecited sections. 
§.354. The USE of this form is very conside- 
rable in tumours, inflammations, abscesse, gan- 
grenes, obstructions, contusions, burns, pains, 
where the fibres and small vessels are to be re- 
laxed and opened, or contracted and stimulated; 
and their fluids to be cooled, attenuated, derived, 
digested, or corrected in acrimony; and when the 
obstruction, heat, tension and pain from both, are 
to be removed: all which, may be effected by ac- 
commodating proper ingredients in this form, 
suitable to the case. 
§.355. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
U 1.


290 Cataplams by Decoction. 
1. Cataplasma emolliens, narcoticum: ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 65. 
ꝶ. Rad. altheœ ℥ij. 
Capit. recent. papav. hort. cum sem. 
n°. iv. 
Fol. recent. hyoscyam. nigr. m. ß. 
Micœ panis albi ℥iij. 
Contusis cum lact. recent. q. s. ad emol- 
litionem usque decoctis, trajectis, adde 
Olei solani ℥j. 
Farin. semin. lini. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum parti dolenti applicetur, donec re- 
mittet dolor. 
2. Cataplasma antisepticum, ad gangrænam: juxta 
exemplum H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 100. 
(A.) ꝶ. Rad. helenii ℥ij. 
Herb. tanacet. 
Absynth. 
Scordii ana ℥iij. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥jß 
Conscissa, tusa, decoque in aq. & acet. 
ana q. s. ad teneritudinem. Contusis 
dein & per setaceum trajectis admisce 
Sal. gemmœ  ℥ß. 
Ol. nardini ℥jß. 
Farin. lupinor. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
(B.)


291 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
(B.) ꝶ. Spirit. matrical. ℥iv. 
Camphorœ  ʒj. 
Concute ad solutionem usque D. seorsim 
vitro clauso. 
S. Cataplasma (A.) calidum, irroratum prius tan- 
tillo spiritus (B.) applicetur cum pannis lineis 
parti adfectœ, & vesica suilla oleo madefacta deti-
neatur: renovetur quolibet trihorio. 
3. Puls emolliens, stimulans, in pus maturans. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 90, 91. 
ꝶ. Farin. tritici. 
Lini recent, ana ℥iij. 
Cum Acet. & olei lilior. alb. ana q. s. sub 
jugi agitatione, cocta leniter, redige 
in pultis consistentiam, cui dein ad- 
misce 
Pulp. cepar. sub cinerihus assatar. ℥ij. 
Gumm. ammon. in vitell. ovi solut. ℥j.
D. ad fictile. 
S. Admoveatur calidè loco adfecto: renovetur quater 
de die: ubi arescit, tantillo butyri insulsi emol- 
liatur. 
4. Aliud simile. Ibid. p. 90. 
ꝶ. Fol. acetos. recent. m. iv. 
Butyri insulsi ℥j. 
Ad ignem leniter, parum, decoctis adds 
Fermenti panis ℥ij. 
Gumm. sagapen. in vitello ovi solut ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Ut prius. 
U2 5.

292 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
5. Cataplasma suppurans, ad bubonem venereum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Ficus molles, matures, ad ℔ß. 
Mell. recent. ℥ij. 
Galbani in vitello ovi soluti ℥j. 
F. s. a. cum aq. coquendo cataplasma. 
S. Admoveatur calidum parti affectœ, cum panno li- 
neo quadruplicato: renovetur post iv vel vj horas. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, commune. 
♃ Micœ panis albi. in 
Lact. rec. q. s. coct. & leniter ex- 
press. ℔ß. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Sev. melilot. ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepidè parti admoveatur, & pro re nata renovetur. 
7. Cataplasma refrigerans. 
♃. Pulp. pomor. coct. 
Micœ panis, in latte coct. aa ℥iv. 
Cacl. viv. in aq. rosar. extinct. ℥ß. 
Trochisc. alb. rhas. ʒvj. 
Acet. opt. vin. alb. ℥ij. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Statimpost compositionem, frigide applicetur.
8.

293 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
8. Cataplasma discutiens. 
♃. Ol. infus. sambuc. 
Nicotian, aa ℥ij. 
Camph. in tinct. opii q. s. solut. ʒjß. 
Lixiv. capital. ebullient. ℥ij. 
Misce in vitro, exactissime concutiendo, cui adde 
Furfur. tenuior. ℔ jß. 
Aq. pluv. ebullient. q. s. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidè parti applicetur, & frequenter renovetur. 
9. Cataplasma nervinum. 
♃ . Pulp, rapar. coct. & lenit. express. ℔ß. 
Rad. allii contus. 
Sem. sinapeos pulv. aa ℥ij. 
Ol. succin. empyreumat. ℥ß. 
Ung. opodeldoc ℥jß. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepide applicetur capiti, carpis, pedum plantis, 
partibus paralyticis, &c. 
10. Cataplasma bechicum, stomachicum, ad tussim 
anginosam. 
♃. Caffœ pulv. ℥jß. 
Spec. diamh. odorat. ʒjß. 
R. allii contus. rec. ℈iv. 
Axung. human. ʒiij. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. 
Hyssop. 
Succin. ana gtt. iij. 
Theriac. venet. q. s. ad consist. debit. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Sindone incluso, regioni epigastrici & circa collum, 
tepide applicetur; & fasciis laneis, hora somni; 
retineatur: post septimanam, si desit, renovetur. 
U3 Of

294 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
Of Crude CATAPLASMS. 
§.356. A Crude Cataplasm (§.344.) comes 
near to the consistence of a bolus or 
electuary (§.127. 138.), not having the softness, 
smoothness and uniformity of mixture proper to 
the boiled one (§.345.): which properties, as 
they are not always required in this form, so it does 
not always admit of them. 
§.357. The MATTER or ingredients for the 
composition of this form, is in general the same as 
for the bolus (§.128.): and are either excipiens, 
receiving; or excipienda, to be received by the 
former. 
1. The excipient must be either (1.) soft: as 
Conserves, robs, electuaries, honey, thick bal- 
sams, soft extracts, concreted juices (mollified 
in some proper liquor, and so, fitted for enter- 
ing the form of a cataplasm) sope, yest, the 
crumb of new bread, or of stale bread softened 
by maceration, butter, lard, ointments, pulps, 
the fresh dung of animals, or their soft and 
fleshy parts, with the soft and succulent parts of 
recent vegetables, beat into a past, &c. Or, 
(2.) Liquid: as wine and its spirit, vinegar, 
distiiled waters, milk, mucilages, syrups, oils, 
the whites and yolks of eggs, urine, lye, ex- 
pressed juices, and those mentioned at §.128. 
n° 3. 
2. The excipienda, to be made up with the 
preceeding, are, every dry substance, whether 
animal, vegetable or mineral, which is capable 
of being reduced into a fine powder.
§.358.

295 Of Crude Cataplasms.
§.358. The ELECTION of proper ingredients 
for this form, is to be determined by the intention 
of the physician, and other particular circum- 
stances of the form itself (§.356.); and may be 
easily understood from what has been hither to said 
on this head, for other external forms. But we 
may observe in brief. 
1. That when vegetables or their parts can- 
not be had green or fresh gathered, we may sub- 
stitute dry ones in their room, by macerating 
them in some proper liquor, as was said before 
of dry bread, (§.537. n° 1. (1.)). 
2. That fruits and bulbous roots are frequent- 
ly roasted first in the ashes, to make them af- 
ford a softer pulp in beating. 
3. That the soft substances (§.357. n° 1. 
(1.)) are frequently used alone, or with the li- 
quid excipients (ib. 2.) when they are of the 
thicker kind; without any addition of the dry 
excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). At other times, the 
dry excipienda only, are used with liquids: but 
they will then require something glutinous, or an 
addition of dry substances which become very co- 
hesive upon a mixture with liquors. Tho' it is most 
usual to compound the dry excipienda with both 
soft and liquid substances, in order to beat ’em 
up into a cataplasm. 
4. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the electuary (§.140. n° 6.). 
§.359. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form is also like that at 
§.141. 
§.360. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the same circumstances as at §.349. 
§.361. The GENERAL QUANTITY to be pre- 
scribed or compounded at once, is generally less 
than that of the cataplasm by decoction (§.350.);
U4 it

296 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
it sometimcs not exceeding one ounce, but is sel- 
dom larger than ℔j: for as the composition of 
this form may be much sooner and more easily 
made than the former, it is very often prescribed 
for in no larger a quantity than what will suffice 
for one dose: and the intention of this form will 
be oftener answer'd by such a quantity of the 
crude, than of the boiled cataplasm (§.353. 
355.). 
§.362. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for a crude cataplasm, may be deduced from 
comparing what has been said (at §.133. and 144.) 
with the medicinal virtues and consistence of those 
ingredients, which have been selected (per §.357. 
and 358.), together with the peculiar circumstan- 
ces ot the form itself (§.356.), its dose (§.360.), 
and general quantity (§.361.). To which we may 
add, 
1. That the degree of consistence (§.356.), 
is not always so constant, but that it may be 
sometimes more or less than specified; whenever 
the intention or nature of the ingredients may 
require it. When it is to penetrate deep, a 
thinner or more dilute consistence is most agree- 
able (per §.322. n° 3.), &c. Hence, the pro- 
portion of ingredients is not always observed the 
same, for the composition of this form; though 
it is, in the general, pretty much like that of the 
electuary (§.144.), or bolus (§.133.). 
2. It is very usual in prescribing this form, to 
order the excipient (whether soft, liquid, or both, 
per §.357. n° 1. (.1.) (2.)), only by q. s. or, on 
the contrary, to determine the quantity of these, 
but not that of the dry excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). 
By which means, the prescriber may be satisfy’d 
of the justness of his proportion, when he is 
under any doubt or difficulty. 
§.363.

279 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
§.363. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, or- 
ders first the contusion of the ingredients, and then 
their mixture, ut F. s. a. cataplasma, or epithema: 
for these two names have been generally used pro- 
miscuousty. Sometimes it takes a name from the 
part, to which it is to be applied: and accordingly, 
such as are to be applied to the wrists, are termed 
epicarpia, if to the forehead, frontale, &c. But 
more frequently, we only mention the part to which 
it is to be applied; especially when we refer its 
application ( viz. the spreading it upon some ve- 
hicle (§.320.), as linen or woollen cloth, silk, 
leather, wet rags, &c. (per §.328. n° 3.) to the 
apothecary; and in that case, the size and figure 
of the vehicle may be mentioned (per. §.339. 
n° 2. (2.)); tho' this last circumstance is not of 
so much moment. 
§.364. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.328. 353. and 363. consider’d with the 
particular part to be pulticed, the time and method 
of-application, &c. which have been but now ex- 
plained at §.363. The vehicle (§.ib.) or cloth 
is frequently wetted first (with some liquid epithem, 
vinegar, wine, oil, alcohol, or other proper liquor,) 
before the cataplasm is spread thereon. At other 
times this form is folded up in linen, &c. per §.353. 
that it may not smeer the parts, or dirty the pa- 
tient’s cloths, The application of it is made 
hot, warm, or cold, according to the physician’s in- 
tention, and the nature of the ingredients; but it is 
not so frequently used hot, as the boiled cataplasm. 
§.363. The USE of the crude cataplasm is much 
the same with that of the liquid epithem (§.329.) 
and boiled cataplasm (§.354.) but is not so exten- 
sive. Epispastics and vesicatories are very frequent- 
ly used in this form. The greater consistence of  
the

298 Crude Cataplasms.
the cataplasm beyond that of the liquid epithem, 
makes it generally less apt to penetrate into parts 
which are deeply situated, and is also not so easily 
dissipated: whence, it must act with a stronger and 
more lasting force upon the external parts. 
§.366. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Epicarpia antifebrilia. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Uvar. corinthiac. 
Summit. lupuli. 
Sal. marin. ana ℥ij. 
Contusa in pultem D. 
S. Excepta linteis pulsuum locis applica ad arterias, 
duabus horis ante ingruentem paraxysmum. 
2. Epithema stomachicum, roborans, pro infante. 
V. ibid. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Flaved. cort. citrei ras. ℥ß 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Vini hispanic. ʒiij. 
M. conterendo simul in mortario. 
S. Excepta mica panis adplicentur stomacho. 
3. Cataplasma adstringens, ad hæmorrhagiam 
partis externæ vulneratæ. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lap. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
Tenuissime pulverisata, mista, excipiantur 
Album. ovor. q. s. ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Exceptum id stupâ alcohole vini madidâ admoveatur 
vulneri, turn vesica vel fascia circumpositâ firmetur. 
4.


299 Crude Cataplasms.
4. Epithema molle, excitans, cardiacum: 
ꝶ. Summit. tener. recent. melissœ. 
Abrotan. aā ℥ß. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒiij. 
Caryophyll. aromat. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Cum Vini rhen. geros. tantillo. 
Contusa D. ad fictile. 
S. Extensa super pannum scarlat. vino rhenano prius 
madefactum, tepida, regioni cordis applicentur. 
5. Cataplasma acre, emolliens, stupifaciens. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 92. 
ꝶ. Fermenti panis acris ℥ij 
Sapon. venet. ras. ʒij. 
Mellis ℥ß. 
Ol. chamœmel. infus. ʒii. 
M. F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum imponatur abscessui maturo, aperiendo, 
donec integumenta macerata sensum perdiderint. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, anodynum. 
ꝶ. Micœ panis siligin. in lacte dulci ma- 
cerat. ℔ß. 
Vitell. ovor. n°. iij. 
Croci pulveris. ʒij. 
Farin. lini q. s. 
Ut conterendo F. cataplasma.
S. Cum linteamine duplicato, aut panno laneo, do- 
lerti parti applicetur calidum. 
V. §.355. Formul. ult. quam huic pertinet. 
Nota.

300 Of Humid Baths. 
Nota. To the history of epithems, which we 
have hitherto (§.318. to 366.) laid down, belongs 
also an account of AMULETS; so that those who 
approve of them, may thence deduce general di- 
rections to be observed for their prescription and 
composition. To the cataplasma crudum (§.356.) 
we may also refer the cataplasma emplastrodes ex the- 
riaca; spread upon linen or leather, and usually 
applied to strengthen the stomach and intestines. 
Of BATHS. 
§.367. A Bath is an external fluid medicine, 
in the form of a liquor, or a vapour; 
serving to wash or bathe the surface of the external 
parts of the human body: without the intervention 
of any vehicle, §.320. and 328. n° 3. 
§.368. It appears therefore, that baths are ei- 
ther humid or vaporous: and that each of these are 
either universal or particular; according as they are 
destined to act upon the surface of the whole, or 
some particular part of the body. We shall treat 
first of the humid bath. 
Of Humid BATHS. 
§.369. A HUMID BATH, balneum humidum, re- 
ceives various denominations, accord- 
ing to the different parts of the body, and methods 
used for its application. It is the universal (§.368.) 
only, which can be properly termed balneum; for 
if it reaches only halt way up, to the middle region 
of the body, or any space between the scrobiculum 
cordis, navel and thighs even down to the feet, it 
is then termed semicupium, insessio or insessum: if it
only 


301 Of Humid Bath.
only covers the feet, pedilivium; if appropriated 
to the head, capitiluvium; if to other parts, it is 
termed lavatio, lotio, and lavamentum: when it is 
poured by drops, or in a continued stream from 
above upon any part, it is then termed embroche, 
stillicidium, and impluvium; tho' this method of 
using is now become almost obsolete, except in the 
natural baths.  
§.370. The MATERIALS for this form, are,	 
all dilute medicated liquors, of what kind soever, 
suitable to the intention; but more frequently such 
as are in common use, requiring no preparation 
from the apothecary, nor any need of a prescrip- 
tion: such as simple or salt water, sope-suds, lye 
made from ashes, chamber-lye, new or sower milk 
and its whey; natural bath-waters, sweet-oil, wine, 
or vinegar and water, hydrogalum or milk and wa- 
ter, hydrelœon or oil and water, common dish- 
water made with bran, from the parts of animals, 
&c. At other times the liquors for baths are made 
of some decoctions (§.224.), infusions (§.211.), 
or mixtures (§.272.) prepared by the apothecary. 
Consult §.321. 
§.371. A proper ELECTION of the materials 
for this form, is apparent from §.299. and 322. 
We are here to have a principal regard to the me- 
dicinal virtues required, with the penetrability and 
consistence of the liquor neglecting what belongs 
to the colour, smell, &c. For the rest, we may 
observe 
1. That when a simple and common liquor 
will suffice, we should prefer that to an offici- 
nal composition (per §.29. and 31.); because 
the great quantity used in this form, would be 
otherwise too expensive for the patient. So that, 
for a universal bath (§.368.) especially, we sel-
dom 

302 Of Humid Baths. 
dom use any thing but the common liquors (at 
§.370 ): being, however, mindfull of the cau- 
tions at §.23, and 30. 
2. That when oily and aqueous liquors (§.370.) 
are used together in this form, their commixture 
is seldom required to be so intimate, as to call 
for a combination by means of sope (per §.274. 
n° 6.). 
3. That the artificial baths, made from fos- 
sils; as nitre, sea-salt, alum, vitriol, sulphur, 
quick-lime, fix'd alcalies, &c. can never pro- 
duce altogether the same effects as the natural 
baths, notwithstanding they have considerable 
uses. 
4. That the number of ingredients for this 
form, is seldom larger than for the decoction, 
§.226. n° 23. 
§.372. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form, agrees with that for 
similar internal forms; infusions (§.214.), decoc- 
tions (§.227.), and mixtures (§.264.). 
§.373. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the quantity of surface, or number of parts to be 
bathed (§.369.), in conjunction with the struc- 
ture of the bathing vessel. 
§.374. The GENERAL QUANTITY of an ex- 
temporaneous bath consists frequently of but one 
dose; especially when it is universal, or adapted 
to bathe any considerable extent of surface on the 
body (per §.369.). When it is design’d for the 
wafhing of leffer parts or members, it is ufual to 
prescribe several doses at a time: so that the ge- 
neral quantity may be easily determined (per 
§.325.). 
§.375. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, is limited by the same cir- 
cumstances


303 Of Humid Baths. 
cumstances as at §.326. compared with §.373, 
and 374. Observe also, 
1. That the medicinal virtues of the ingre- 
dients for this form, do not require to be pro- 
portioned with the greatest exactness: so that 
both the liquor and ingredients may be taken in 
a much larger proportion, than for internal li- 
quid forms of the like kind. 
2. That the liquid menstruum, used to boil 
the other ingredients, is very often prescribed 
only by q. s.
3. Otherwise, the decoction or infusion for a 
bath, may be order’d by the same proportions 
as for the like internal forms (§.217. and 230.); 
it being the best way to make them highly sa- 
turated, and to afterwards dilute them sufficient- 
ly, with more of a proper menstruum, at the 
time of using: which is a method the most con- 
venient for the composition of extemporaneous 
baths, which are very extensive or univesal; 
that we may not be obliged to have recourse to 
larger boilers or coppers than are at hand. 
§.376. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of an extempo- 
raneous bath, may be order’d like that for the com- 
position of similar internal liquid forms (§.218. 
to 220. 231. and 279.). For an exact depuration 
(per §.219. n° 4. (2.) (3.) (4.)), it does not re- 
quire it. Even the gross substances are frequently 
infused and macerated together with the menstru- 
um in the bathing-tub, or they are poured with 
their liquor into the bathing-tub, after they have 
been first boiled in a separate vessel, that they may 
serve to rub with, stand or fit upon, &c. And this 
is frequently observed, especially in large baths; 
when the ingredients are transmitted by the apo- 
thecary to be infused or boiled by the patient at 
his

304 Of Humid Baths. 
his own house (per. §.220. and 231.): in which 
case, they are often few’d up first in a linen or 
woollen bag, that they may be applied like a dry 
epithem (§.331.) to the affected parts, during the 
time of bathing, or to serve as a cushion to sit upon; 
which is very often practiced in the semicupium. 
Hence, this part of the formula concludes F. li- 
quor, vel species vel saccus, pro balneo, semicupio, 
pediluvio, &c. V. §.369. 
§.377. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be learned from 
§.60. 369. 373. and 376. compared with what 
will be suggested to the physician, from a proper 
knowledge of the doctrine of indications, and a 
legitimate use of baths and bathing: the business
of which, will not lie in a little compass; and 
cannot well be brought into this small treatise. Con- 
sult F. hoffmanni opuscul. physico-med. as also his 
Medic. ration. system. tom. iii. sect. ii. cap. x. & 
alii. 
§.378. The USE of baths is at present not very 
frequent; but among the antients they were very 
much used: nor are they only adapted for cleanly- 
ness and delicacy, but are also extremely serviceable 
for the cure of many diseases, by moistening, soften- 
ing, diluting, attracting, discussing, strengthening, 
opening, cooling, warming, attenuating, easing, 
&c. in most disorders, whether external or inter- 
nal, acute or chronic, in which, they afford very 
great benefit; tho' they are not without their ill 
consequences, when improperly used. V. id. hoff-
man. loc. cit. 
§.379. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

305 Humid Baths. 
1. Lotio mundans ad pediculos planos pubis. 
Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. tom. II. p. 488. 
ꝶ. Mercur. sublimat. corros. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iv. 
M. D. 
S. Tantillo hujus liquoris laventur mane & vesperi 
loca infestata. 
2. Semicupium emolliens, anodynum, calculo ure- 
teribus impacto prosicuum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphor. §.1426. 
ꝶ. Rad. althœœ  ℥iv. 
Herb. 5. emollient. aa m. iv. 
Flor. papaver. errat. 
Chamœmel. ana m. ij. 
Conscissa infuantur laxè sacculo lineo qua- 
drato, ad lumborum dimensionem apto. 
D. 
S Saccus coquatur per 1/2 horam in lact. dulc. duplo 
aquœ diluti q. s. Liquori calenti insideat œger ab 
umbilico ad crura usque, sacco lumbis supposito, 
manè & vesperi per horam. Interea bibat decoc 
tum diureticum H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 244. de- 
scriptum. 
3. Lavamentum ad intertriginem. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥x. 
Tinct. benzoin. ℥j. 
Sacch. Saturn. ʒj.
M. 
S. Lac virginale, quo partes excoriatœ, prius aqua 
abstersœ, laventur.
X 4. 

306 Humid Baths. 
4. Balneum ad glutinosa, pro infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 44. 
ꝶ. Summitat. rutœ. 
Sabinœ. 
Absynthii. 
Tanaceti. 
Chamœmeli ana m. iij. 
Cum Aq. decoct pintis xij. admisce 
Sapon. venet. ℥jv. 
Sal. sarmento. ℥j. 
F. Liquor pro balneo. 
S. Huic tepido insideat œger collo tenus mane & ves- 
peri per 1/2 horam: post fricetur corpus universum 
cum pannis laneis, siccis, calidis. 
5. Pediluvium refrigerans, paregoricum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. salicis. 
Malvœ. 
Lactuc. 
Nymphœœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. rhoead. m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. n°. vj. 
Nitri ℥ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, mistis, F. species pro 
pediluvio. 
S. Species cum aq. pluv. q. s. coquatur, sub finem ad- 
dendo aceti vini pint. j. Decoctum tepidum sit pro 
pediluvio, cui insideat œger ad crura usque per ho- 
ram, vespere: egressus ad somnum se componat.
6. 


307 Of Vaporous Baths.
6. Balneum emolliens, antisepticum, ad go- 
norrhæam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Fol rec. rutœ. 
Scordii. 
Malvœ. 
Aliiariœ ana m. ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. & expressis ad ℔ ij. adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Spir. vini comm. ʒvj. 
S. In hoc tepido virga & scrotum immergantur ter 
quaterve de die, spatio 1/2 horœ: dein panni lanei
eodem decocto immersi, & expressi omni applicentur 
pubi, scroto, perinœo. 
Of Vaporous BATHS. 
§.380. A Vaporous BATHS. balneum vaporo- 
sum (§.368.), is an external medicine 
adapted to answer some intention of the physician, 
by directing and applying its Fumes or vapours to 
the surface of some external part of the body; or 
else by conveying and drawing them, together 
with the air, into various cavities of the body, 
thro’ their particular apertures. 
§.381. The preceding vapours or fumes (§.380.), 
do either exhale (1.) spontaneously, by the action 
of the natural heat of the atmosphere, and are, 
termed smelling-bottles, balls, &c. which we shall 
explain hereafter; because they require a previous 
knowledge of several things, concerning which, 
We have not yet treated, or (2.) the effluvia are 
X2 drove

308. Of Humid Vapours. 
drove out by means of fire: and of these we intend 
to treat first. 
§.382. These last kind of exhalations (§.381. 
(2.)), are expelled either from liquors, or else from 
dry ingredients: the first of which, we shall call 
humid vapours; but the last, dry fumes, fumigation, 
suffitus or suffiment. And both of them are distin- 
guished like the humid bath (§.368.) into uni-
versal, applied to the whole body, or particular to 
some one part. We shall first consider the humid 
vaporation, or moist vapours. 
Of Humid VAPOURS. 
§.383. THE MATTER of humid vapours may 
be any liquor that is capable of being 
reduced into medicinal vapours by the force of fire: 
of which kind are, common water, milk or its 
whey, wine or its spirit, vinegar, and urine; to- 
gether with the liquid preparations and composi- 
tions of the shops, distilled waters, tinctures, essen- 
ces, elixirs, spirits, and the like: to these we may 
add, infusions (§.211.), mixtures (§.272. and 
283.), and more efpecially decodions (§.224.) com- 
pounded from the above-mention’d officinal liquid 
forms. 
§.384. In order to make a proper ELECTION
of the ingredients for this form, we are directed 
to observe (besides what has been so often repeat- 
ed under this head for other external forms) that 
1. The vapours are expelled from the ingre- 
dients (§.383.), either by accension, setting ’em 
On fire; or by ebullition, keeping them boiling 
over a fire: hence, the one or the other degree 
of heat is requisite, according as the medicinal 
virtues are more or less volatile.
2. 

309 Of Humid Vapours.
2. The prescriber should therefore consider, 
in the first place, which of those kinds of heat 
(n° 1.) he is either desirous or capable of using; 
that he may afterwards adapt the choice of his 
ingredients thereto: for from the same ingredi- 
ents, different vapours will arise, according 
as which of those different degrees of fire (n° 1.) 
are used. 
3. Hence, if the vapours are to be raised by- 
boiling, which is generally the case; those li- 
quors and ingredients will be added and used in 
vain, whose medicinal virtues cannot be elevated 
by the heat of an ebullition. Astringents there- 
fore, thick extracts made by decoction, with the 
more fix’d parts of animal and mineral substan- 
ces, &c. are unfit for this purpose. The best 
ingredients for this end (whether animal, ve- 
getable or mineral) are, all those, which upon 
boiling with water, afford distilled water, spirits 
or oils, of some strength *. And tho’ emol- 
lient, relaxing and easing virtues seem to be al- 
together fixed; yet they are in some measure ca- 
pable of an elevation, in the vapours of boiling 
liquors. 
4. Hence we also find, that those decoctions 
(§.226. n° 1, 2, 3, 15.) abounding with vola- 
tile parts, may be safely used under this form, 
tho' they cannot be properly exhibited for inter- 
nal uses; supposing their virtues are drove off 
in vapours by boiling. 
5. When various liquors and ingredients are 
to be mixed together in this form, we should 
consider their mutual affinity or actions upon each 
other, and the effects consequent thereon; which 
are to be learned from chemistry. We are by 
X3 that
* Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. vol. II. proc. I. XV. &c.

310 Of Humid Vapours.
that art taught, that a mixture of two substances, 
in themselves fix’d, emits volatile vapours; and 
on the contrary, that volatiles become fix’d, 
barely by mixture with other substances which 
are fix’d, or even volatile. Thus the fix’d sal 
ammoniacum becomes volatile by the addition of 
quick lime, or a lixivious salt, the acid part of 
nitre and common salt, becomes volatile by add- 
ing oil of vitriol to them, &c. The volatile 
acid spirits of nitre, common salt, and vinegar, 
become fixed upon an addition of alcalies; whe- 
ther saline volatile, saline fixed, or earthy ab- 
sorbent, &c. This, however strange, may be 
relied upon for true. 
6. Lastly, being mindful of the great pene- 
trating force possessed by the vapours elevated by 
fire, we should be cautious not to let them dis- 
appoint our intention. 
7. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the internals, at §.383. 
§.385. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients, has also nothing peculiar in it. 
§.386. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined by weight or measure, but is usually limited 
by the length of time assigned for the evaporation: 
so that, either the whole general quantity of the 
liquor is exposed to evaporation by the fire at one 
time, or only a certain part thereof, supplying the 
consumption by a gradual addition of more, as the 
other evaporates. But sometimes, the dose is re- 
strained to a few drops; as when we use nothing 
but precious oils or essences, to correct the dis- 
agreeable smell of any place. 
§.387. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined from the quantity of sur- 
face which is to afford vapours, the degree of fire, 
with the length of time and frequency of evapora- 
tion:

311 Of Humid Vapours. 
tion: so that ℔j, ij, iij, and more, is frequently 
order’d to be compounded and transmitted to the 
patient at a time. But when the dose is to be only 
a few drops (per §.386.), a scruple or a dram 
may be enough to order at once. 
§.388. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form, is apparent from what has been 
hitherto said on this head for external forms of the 
like nature, §.303. 326. The proportion of the 
menstruum to that of the ingredients to be infused 
or boiled, is frequently prescribed by q. s. 
§.389. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
liquid bath (§.376.). Nor does the liquor for a 
vaporous bath require to be more exactly depurat- 
ed, than barely by decantation from the fœces. 
The ingredients for this form are very often trans- 
mitted to the patient by the apothecary, in order 
to make the decoClion and evaporation before the 
patient at one and the same time (per §.384. n° 3.). 
And sometimes the species are included in a small 
bag, that they may be applied hot to the parts af- 
fected, after the vaporation is over. The subscrip- 
tion may therefore conclude, F. liquor, vel species, 
vel sacculus, pro vaporario vel balneo vaporis. 
§.390. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to the 
patient contains, besides what is common to other 
forms under this head, the method of using or ap- 
plying these vapours, which is various in different 
intentions. 
1. When the vapours are intended to correct
some disagreeable smell, putrifaction, contagion 
or pestilential state of the air, &c.; the liquor is 
then to be flung on live coals in the infected 
place, or diffused thro' the air in vapours, by 
evaporating over the coals, in an open and broad 
vessel, making the liquor boil.
X4 2. 

312 Of Humid Vapours.
2. If the vapours are to be applied immedi- 
ately to the surface of some part of the patient’s 
body; in that case, there are various contrivan- 
ces to contain and direct the vapours: as domicils, 
seats, coffers, and vaulted machines; wherein 
the patient either stands, fits, or lies down, with 
his body naked, or only cover’d with fine linen, 
and his head let thro' an apperture, that his or- 
gans of sense and respiration may enjoy the com- 
mon air, unmolested by the vapours or fumes: 
the patient’s body thus confined, receives the 
vapours expelled from the liquor, either by ac- 
cension, as in burning spirit of wine, or else by 
evaporation, with or without boiling, or by the 
extinction of red hot flints, either by throwing 
the liquor upon them, or them into the liquor, 
supplying others when they are grown cold. 
3. If the vapours are to be received into some 
small particular cavity of the body, as the ears, 
nose, mouth, fauces, bronchia, vagina, uterus, 
&c. or convey’d to the surface of a particular 
limb; it is usually done by means of a funnel, 
or a blanket, &c. 
4. What is to be done before, in, and after 
the vaporation, together with its continuation, 
repetition, &c. may be deduced from the phy- 
sician’s indication in particular cases. 
§.391. The Use of vaporations is not inconsi- 
derable, being much like that of the liquid bath 
(§.378.); and is in some cases much more effec- 
tual: upon which head, consult the excellent Hoff- 
man, in opusculo Physico-medica, & in Medic. Ra- 
tion. System. Tom. III. sect. II. cap. X. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1.

313 Humid Vapours,
2. Vaporarium particulare, emolliens, resolvens, 
ad anginam inflammatoriam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 137. 
ꝶ. Acet. sambuc. 
Rosar. 
Calendul. ana ℥j. 
Aq. stillat. sambuc. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Vapor calidus hauriatur infundibuli ope in fauces. 
2. Balneum vaporosum universale, nervinum, 
antiparalyticum. 
Conf. H. Boerh. Aphorism. §.1068, 1069. 
ꝶ. Herb. marjoran. 
Menth. 
Mari syriac.
Fol rec. cochlear. 
Summit. rec. rutœ. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Baccar. juniper. ana m. j. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, digere in phiala alta 
chemica, cum aceti & spirit. vini vulg.
ana q. s. per diem & noctem. 
S. Liquor bene calidus, una cum speciebus, in ollam 
effusus, reponatur in loculum fornicis sudatorii,
ac silicibus candentibus injectis fervens detineatur. 
Sub fornice decumbens æger, ingesto prius decocto at- 
tenuante, vapores excipiat nudo corpore, ut sudet 
per 1/2 horam aut ultra, si vires ferunt. Sudoribus 
detersis corpus fricetur pannis laneis, calidis, sic- 
cis, villosis. 
3.

314 Humid Vapours, 
3. Vapor suaveolens ad fœtorem loci corrigendum. 
ꝶ. Essent. amhar. ʒij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophillor. gtt. xxv. 
Cinnamom. gtt. x. 
M. D. vitro probe clauso. 
S. Hujus aliquot guttulœ prunis non fumantibus, aut 
silici ignito, instillentur. 
4. Vaporatio emolliens, resolvens, ad gravem adi- 
tum a causa frigida. 
ꝶ. Folior. absinth. 
Rosmarin. 
Summit. rutœ ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. ℥ß. 
Baccar. laur. 
Semin. cumin. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, insue sacculo. 
D. 
S. Coquatur sacculus in q. s. vini: vapor ope infun- 
dibuli immittatur auri affecta, mane & vesperi 
per 1/2 horam: post sacculus ipse e dococto exemptus, 
valdse calens, auri applicetur, firmetur. 
5. Vapor antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Aceti vini vulg. pint. ij. 
Sal. marin. 
Nitri. 
Ol. vitriol. vulg. ana ℔ß. 
Aq.purœ pint. j. 
M.
S. Immissa in ollam fictilem vitreatam, repandam, 
super prumas reposita, in limine domus aut cubiculi 
kniter evaporent.
6. 

315 Of Fumigations.
6. Vapor hæmorrhoidalis, anodynus, discutiens. 
♃. Summit. hyoscyam. 
Solan. vulg. 
Cicut. ana m. j. 
Aq. fontan. ℔ij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv. 
Ol succin. rect. ℈ij. 
M. 
S. Ebulliantur simul, sub sedile aperto cubiculario, 
& vapores dirigantur partibus affectis mediante 
tubo conico, donec sopiantur hœmorrhoides cœcœ, 
tumentes. 
7. Vapor swaveolens cubicularius. 
♃. Aq. omn. flor. Batean. ℥j.
Odorifer. ejusd. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Evaporentur in limine cubiculi, per ollam fictilem 
calidam vel potius œolipilam. 
Of FUMIGATIONS, 
§.393. A SUFFUMIGATION, or suffitus, is the 
fumes arising from a dry medicine, 
suspended in the air, and elevated there by accen- 
sion, or an intense heat; being afterwards con- 
ducted to the surface of some external part, or in- 
ternal cavity of the body, to answer some medicinal 
intention. 
§.394. The chief MATERIALS for this form, 
are, all dry substances, which, being either vola-  
tile

316 Of Fumigations. 
tile or inflammable, are capable of exhaling me- 
dicinal fumes by the force of fire. Hence, the 
most numerous ingredients are afforded by the 
solid parts of vegetables, their concreted juices, 
resins, gums, gum-resins, dry balsams, &c. From 
animals are taken musk, civet, castor, dry’d gall, 
&c. Among the mineral class of substances the chief 
are cinnabar, amber, ambergriss, sulphur, nitre, 
sal ammoniac, &c. 
§.395. The FORM for the ingredients of a 
suffumigation, is, either that of a dry powder, or a 
dry and cohesive or solid mass. 
1. The powder kind generally consists of par- 
ticles much grosser than the tragea (at §.107. 
n° 2.): and is to be either sprinkled on coals of 
fire, call’d fumigating powder; or else to be 
smoaked in a pipe after the manner of common 
tobacco, and may be called medicated tobacco. 
2. The solid or cohesive kind, consisting of 
smaller particles, have them more intimately 
mix’d, and being joined together by some pro- 
per glutinous substance, are made into various 
figures: as troches or pastills, little sticks, can- 
dles, little cyprus birds, and small or large 
torches; which being cast upon live coals, rubb’d 
upon hot bricks or tyles, or set on fire, do emit 
the required fumes. 
§.396. A proper ELECTION of the ingre- 
dients (§.394.) for these medicines, is to be de- 
duced from the physician’s intention, and the de- 
sired form (§.395.). 
1. Hence, the fumigations used for pleasure, 
or to correct the disagreeable smell of a cham- 
ber, &c. do consist only of perfuming ingre- 
dients; such as spices, frankincense, styrax, 
labdanum, benjamin, ambergriss, and the like. 
But when the intention is to warm and strengthen 
relaxed

317 Of Fumigations. 
relaxed parts, or to dissipate, and dry up su- 
persfluous humidities; the best things for those 
purposes are, resins, gums, gum-resins, warm, 
and partly aromatic substances joined with no 
pleasant smell, with amber, salt ammoniac, &c. 
Hysteric cases are best; suited with fœtid fumes, 
from castor, galbanum, asascetida, &c. Putri- 
faction and animal stenches are best resisted and 
overcome by the fumes of nitre and sulphur. 
Venereal cases are usually opposed by fumiga- 
tions with cinnabar. 
2. The parts of vegetables used in this form, 
are those only, which are naturally of a more so- 
lid and dry texture, or else made so by art; 
otherwise, they would be unfit for fumigations, 
as being not easily inflammable. 
3. But this form often takes in the stronger 
kind of aromatic and spirituous liquors, which 
are not watery, but inflammable; as effences, 
spirits, oils, liquid balsams, &c. but then they 
are to be mix’d in a small quantity, in propor- 
tion to the other dry ingredients: agreeable to 
the rules of composition for the internal solid 
forms at §.110. n° 3. 174. n° 1. (4.). 
4. The basis of the medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.) is usually made of the leaves of common 
tobacco, compounded with a less quantity of the 
leaves of other herbs, flowers, rinds or barks, 
spices, &c. Concreted juices which melt by 
heat, are excluded hences, because they obstruct 
the cavity of the tube or pipe, thro' which the 
smoak is to be drawn. 
5. In order to make up the latter kind or so- 
lid mass (§.295 n° 2.) for this form, we ge- 
nerally use a mucilage of gum tragacanth, a so- 
lution of labdanum, the turpentines, or ether li- 
quid balsams.  
6.

318 Of Fumigations. 
6. Sometimes, sugar is added in the compo- 
sition of pastills, small candles and cypruss birds; 
in order to augment and diffuse the other ingre- 
dients, and make them burn more briskly. 
7. That some of these fumigations may keep 
on fire when once kindled, and burn with a ser- 
pentine sparkling, as cyprus candles and. birds 
ought; for this purpose, their composition usu- 
ally takes in a sufficient quantity of powder of some 
burnt wood, which is of a soft and light texture; 
as is the wood of willows, and lime-trees; or 
even fine small-coal-dust, being mix’d in a due 
proportion with the other ingredients, renders 
them very apt to take and spread the fire. 
8. In making the larger kind of torches or 
candles, bees-wax is generally used for the basis 
of the composition. 
9. In using all fumigations (especially when 
they are to be immediately applied to the sur- 
face of the body, or convey’d into some of its 
cavities) the physician should consider the quan- 
tity of the skin’s surface to be in contact with the 
fumes, and its degree of porosity (per §.322. 
n° 8.), with the exceeding tenerity and sensi- 
bility of the internal skins: and lastly, he should 
be previously acquainted with the action and ef- 
fects of naked fire, in separating the principles 
and changing the parts of mix’d bodies; that 
he may be thereby enabled to make a judicious 
election of substances fit for his intention, which 
while they are doing good to some parts may 
do no harm to others. Cinnabar, can never 
excite a sallivation, whilst it retains the form of 
that concrete; but being converted into an atte- 
nuated mercury by naked fire, its effects are dif- 
ferent. It may be asked whether the parts of 
benjamin, amber, &c. arise the same in fumes 
as


319 Of Fumigations.
as they were in the concrete? consult chemistry, 
and you will find the contrary. 
10. Many shops are frequently ready furnish’d 
with fumigations of all forms; so that, when 
these are adapted to the intention, the prescriber 
may spare himself the trouble of an extempo- 
raneous composition: and as some of them may 
be required to keep a considerable time without 
much decaying, it may be proper to intermix, 
or else varnish them over with some suitable li- 
quid substance (at n°.3.). 
11. The number of ingredients permitted to 
enter the composition of this form, is frequently 
very great; but a concise brevity is always more 
commendable (per §.29.). 
§.397. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be observed the same as 
in the internal powders (§.112.), and troch 
(§.176.). 
§.398. The DOSE of this form varies with dif- 
ferent circumstances, being seldom determined by 
weight, but generally by number, or measure. 
Of the powder kind (§.395. n° 1.) drach. i, ij.
or pugill. i, ij. may be order'd to be cast upon the 
live coals at a time. The dose of the tobacco kind 
of fumigation (§.ib.), is usually limited by the 
capacity of the conic bowl of the tobacco-pipe. 
The troches, candles, and little birds (§.ib. n° 2.), 
may be prescribed to be burnt, or laid upon the 
live coals in n°.j, ij, iij. &c. The small sticks 
(§.ib.) may be rubbed upon a hot iron or tyle, 
in any quantity. And the dose of troches or wax- 
candles to be consumed at once, may be determin- 
ed by their number, and the length of time, 
§.399. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be prescribed and compounded at once, 
is to be deduced from the use of it being continu’d 
a


320 Of Fumigations. 
a longer or shorter time, and the repetition of it 
being more seldom or frequent. Such as are more 
troublesome in their composition and configura- 
tion, as are the generality of the latter or consi- 
stent kind of this form (§.395. n° 2.), should 
hardly be prescribed for in a less quantity than ℔ß.
at a time; unless when you order such as are kept 
ready in the shops (§.396. n° 10.). consult §.180. 
§.400. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for fumigations, is to be collected from a 
consideration of the physician’s intention, with 
the virtues and price of the materials, and the re- 
quisite consistence and form (§.395.) of the com- 
position, compared with what has been said be- 
fore (at §.87 to 92. 115. 181. 303. and 396.). 
1. The more precious and efficacious perfumes 
are generally taken in much the lesser propor- 
tion, in comparison of the other ingredients, 
whether they are intended for the composition 
of the powder or consistent kind of fumigation 
(§.395. n° 1. 2.). The same also obtains with 
regard to the liquid substances (§.396. n° 3.), 
2. In ordering a medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.), the leaves of common tobacco are usu- 
ally taken in above three, four, or six times a 
larger quantity, than the other ingredients. 
3. The proportion of glutinous substances 
(§.396. n° 5.) to form the composition into 
troches, candles, &c. (§.395. n° 2.) is usually 
prescribed by a. s: the proportion of bees-wax, 
to form troches or candles is (§. 396. n° 8.) usu- 
ally order’d to be double or triple the quantity 
of the other ingredients. 
4. The proportion of fine small-coal-dust 
(§.396. n° 7.) may be also order’d by q. s. or 
it may be order’d in equal or double the quanti- 
ty of the other ingredients. Sugar may be also 
order’d in much the same proportion. 
§.401.

321 Of Fumigations. 
§.401. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, orders 
comminution in a gross manner, mixation, &c. 
ut F. pulvis pro suffitu, nicotiana medicata, &c. or 
working the materials up with something glutinous, 
ut F. trochisci, haculi, aviculœ, cypriœ, tœde, &c. 
Nor is it usual to determine the quantity of each 
of these, either by size or weight. When officinal 
fumigations are order'd (§.396. n° 10.), it is 
evident that there will be no occasion for a sub- 
scription, unless it be to order the form to be mix- 
ed or varnished over with liquid substances. At
last, may be added D. ad chartam, scatulam, &c. 
§.402. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily understood 
from what has been said on this head at §.60. 393. 
395. and 398. But observe, 
1. That all the kinds of fumigations (§.395. 
n° 1, 2.) are frequently used only to correct or 
perfume the air; and indeed the sticks, candles, 
Cyprus, birds and troches serve no other inten- 
tion: but the powders and troches are often used 
to fumigate various parts of the body, by an im- 
mediate communication of their vapours. There- 
fore, as the first kind are used only for pleasure, 
or to prevent contagious disorders, there is hard- 
ly any necessity of observing an exact regimen 
during the use of 'em. 
2. When this form is to fumigate the body, 
the generality of what has been said at §.390. 
n° 2, 3. does also here take place. But the 
fumes are always evaporated by live coals, or a 
naked fire. Sometimes, handkerchiefs, hoods, 
and bags are fumigated (per. §.340. n°2. (2.)) 
before they are applied to the body. At other 
times, linen or woollen cloths are well impreg- 
nated with the dry fumes, in order to foment or 
rub particular parts. 
Y §.403.

322 Fumigations.
§.403. The USE of fumigations has been in a 
great measure already hinted, viz. for pleasure, as 
well as preventing and curing disorders; the latter 
by strengthening, discussing, warming, drying, &c. 
There are many who have a great esteem for fumi- 
gations of cinnabar in venereal cases; tho' they 
cannot be always apply’d with safety (§.396. n° 1. 
and 9.). Nor do I think other sharp or adust 
fumes convenient for weak lungs. 
§.404. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Suffitus antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Myrrh. 
Flor. sulph. 
Nitri ana ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis grossus. 
S. Hujus pugill. aliquot in punas inspersis vaporen- 
tur cubicula aut œdes. 
2. Suffitus roborans, discutiens, ad hydrocelem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Oliban. 
Sarcocollœ. 
Resin. guajac. ana ℥ß. 
Camphorœ ʒß. 
Mastiches ℥j.
Salis ammoniac. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Hujus incensi vapor excipiatur nudo scroto, dein 
panni lanei sumo hoc vaporosi, calidi, superappli- 
centur. 
3.

323 Fumigations. 
3. Nicotiana suaveolens, cephalica. 
ꝶ. Herb. siccat. salviœ. 
Majoran. 
Thymi. 
Flor. siccat. lilior. convall. 
Rosar. ana pug. ij. 
Cort. cascarill. 
Cinnamom. ana ℈j. 
Comminutis crassiuscule admisce 
Fol. nicotianœ concissor. ℥iv. 
Turn consperge tantillo essent. ambar. 
D. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sugatur fumus mane, dimidiam 
aut integrant horam ex fistula tabacaria. 
4. Suffumigium anti-rachiticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Mastiches. 
Succin. ana ℥j. 
Lign. aloes. 
Cort. cinnam: ana ℥ij. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒj. 
Contusa, mista, cum terebinth, venet. q. s. 
redigantur in trochiscos. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Trochisci pro suffitu, quorum aliquot prunis injici- 
antur, dum ante ignem sedet insans nudatis inferi- 
oribus. Pannis etiam laneis, siccis, horum fumo 
imbutis, fricetur spina dorsi, abdomen, &c. manè 
& vesperi. 
Y2 5.

324 Fumigations. 
5. Baculi swaveolentes ad fornacem. 
ꝶ. Labdan. 
Styrac. calamit. 
Benzoin. ana ℥j.
Bals. tolutan. ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. flor. 
Cort. cascaryll. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. lign. rhod. gtt. xx. 
Cum q. s. Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. 
Aq. rosar. extract F. massa, quæ for- 
metur in bacculos instar ceræ sigil- 
laris. 
S. Fornaci aut testœ calidœ affricetur parum baculus 
ad discutiendam mephitim. 
6. Aviculæ cypriæ. 
ꝶ. Oliban. 
Mastiches. 
Benzoin. 
Cort. thymiam. ana ℥j. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥ß. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒij. 
Sacchar. alb. ʒiv. 
Carbon. salicis ℔j. 
F. omnium pulvis subtilissimus, qui cum 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Ag. rosar. factœ q. s. subigatur & ef- 
fingatur in aviculas vel candelas. 
S. Duœ, tres, &c, accensœ reponantur in loco odore 
grato inficiendo. 
7.

325 Fumigations. 
7. Tædæ odoratæ.
ꝶ. Easdem vel similes species formulœ prœ- 
ced. exceptis saccharo & carbone. 
Cerœ flavœ duplum ad pond. omn. 
Concorporentur & formentur in tædas 
minores vel majores. 
S. Ardeant hœ ad delicias aut ad prophylaxin in 
locis infectis. 
8. Suffimentum hystericum. 
♃. Assa fœtid. ʒvj. 
Myrrh. ʒiij. 
Galban. ʒjß. 
Ol. succin. ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci n°. xxiv. 
S. Injiciantur duos vel tres in prunas, & vapores 
inhalentur œgro, naribus, & hiante ore. 
9. Fumigatio ad procidentiam ani, vel uteri. 
♃. Myrrh. 
Succin. ana ʒjß. 
Cort. cinnam. 
Menth. crisp. ana ʒj. 
Piper. jamaic. ad pond. omn. 
M. F. s. a. pulvis grosso modo. 
S. In prunas conspergatur, ad affectas vaporandas 
partes sub sedile, fundo aperto.
Y3 10. 

326 Of Plasters. 
10. Tædæ odoriseræ. 
♃. Gum. benz. ℥ij. 
Storac. ℥j.
Lahdan. ℥ß. 
Mosch. 
Ambragrisea ana ℈ß. 
Cer. flav. rec. ℔ß. 
Cera liquisacta, insperge pulverem subti- 
lissimam, & in filo gossipio contorto 
imbuatur, & deinde ex primatur. 
S. Hujus frustrum in loco comburatur contaminato, 
frequenter flammam extinguendo, ad fumum au- 
gendum. 
Nota. In this place we might add universal, and 
topical sumigation with cinnabar, and the dry gly- 
ster of the smoak of tobacco; the uses of which 
are sufficently known: so that they need not be 
inferred here; since they require no extraordinary 
artifice to prescribe them. 
Of PLASTERS. 
§.405. An EMPLASTER is an external, flex- 
ible and glutinous medicine; solid in 
the cold, but not brittle, yet melting with heat:
consisting chiefly of oily and cohesive substances, 
which being spread or extended upon a suitable 
vehicle, are applied to some external part of the 
body, for various uses. It is call’d dropax or pi- 
catio, when pitch is its basis; and sparadrapum or 
tela emplastica, a cere-cloth or paper, when spread 
upon either of those vehicles. 
§.406.

327 Of Plasters. 
§. 406. The MATERIALS for an extemporane- 
ous emplasater, are of two kinds: (1.) excipient, 
making the basis of the form; or (2.) excipienda, 
to be received by the former in much less quanti- 
ties. 
1. The excipient ingredients are generally of 
a tenacious, fat or oily consistence: and are ei- 
ther (1.) liquid; as oils made by expression, in- 
fusion or decoction: or (2.) more thick, but 
pliable; as animal fats, marrow, butter, honey, 
officinal unguents, &c. or (3.) more tenacious, 
cohesive or glutinous; as the turpentines, in- 
spissated juices, balsams, &c. or (4.) more con- 
sistent, hard, dry, and in the cold somewhat 
brittle; as wax, resins, gums, gum-resins, 
to which we may add the officinal emplasters. 
2. The excipienda also, are either (1.) liquid: 
as watery liquors, mucilages, decoctions, infu- 
sions, expressed juices; aromatic oils, whether 
obtained by expression, or distillation; liquid 
balsams, natural or artificial; tinctures, spirits, 
wine, vinegar, gall, &c. or (2.) more cohesive; 
as inspissated juices, extracts, sope, amalgams, 
&c. or (3.) dry and brittle, or capable of pul- 
verifation ; as metalline calces, powders from 
the parts of vegetables, animals, or minerals, 
&c. 
§.407. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, requires a previous know- 
ledge, and consideration of the physicians inten- 
tion, the proper nature of the several materials 
(§.406.), and the requisite qualities of an em- 
plaster (§.405.) Hence, observe 
1. That the laudable qualities of an emplaster 
are, (1.) to be of so dry a consistence in the cold, 
as not to stick to the fingers: (2.) to be soft, 
ductile and pliable in a small heat; (3.) to be 
Y4 mode-


328 Of Plasters.
moderately tenacious, or adhesive by the 
warmth of an human body, so as to readily stick 
fast both to the morbid part, and the extended 
vehicle and lastly, (4.) to have the mixture of 
its ingredients equable, and its consistence uni- 
form. 
2. The first property (n° 1. (1.)) depends 
on the proportion of materials at §.406. n° 1. 
(4.) n° 2. (3.): the second (n° 1. (2.)) pro- 
ceeds from the excipients at §.406. n° 1. (1.). 
(2.): the third (n° 1. (3.)) arises chiefly from 
the terebinthinate and gum-resinous substances 
(at §.406. n° 1. (3.). (4.)): and the last qua- 
lity (n° (4.)) is obtained by a skilful and close 
incorporation of all the ingredients. 
3. The excipienda (at §.406. n° 2.) are not 
essentially necessary for the composition of a 
plaster; for the excipient substances (§.ib. n° 1.) 
alone, being skillfully combined, will make an 
emplaster perfectly endued with every requi- 
site quality of the form. Even wax and turpen- 
tine of themselves, being melted together in a 
due proportion, will exhibit all the laudable qua- 
lities (n° 1.) proper to an emplaster. 
4. Oils (§.406. n° 1. (1.)) or substances of 
the like kind (ib. (2.)), with turpentine and 
wax, (ib. (3.) (4.)) do usually compose the ba- 
sis of most emplasters: but for wax and turpen- 
tine are sometimes substituted pitch, resins and 
gum-resins. 
5. Even pitch or gum-resins alone, are occa- 
sionally converted into an emplaster, by incor- 
porating and mollifying them with some proper 
oil or spirit, by means of a hot pestle. 
6. But what is more, oil itself may be form'd 
into an emplaster by boiling it a sufficient length 
of time with the calces of lead; as litharge, ce- 
russ, red-lead. 
7.

329 Of Plasters. 
7. The aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)), 
whose virtues consist in volatile principles, shou’d 
not enter this form: for the quantity of boiling 
necessary to evaporate their aqueous parts, will 
also at the same time dissipate their virtues. 
8. The parts of vegetables which are very 
bulkey in proportion to their weight, and whose 
virtues are inconsiderable and much diffused, are 
not proper to enter the composition of an em- 
plaster in the form of powder: but the apothe- 
cary should rather substitute their juices, decoc- 
tions, infusions, oils, or extracts. 
9. Salts (except they be metalline ones, as 
sacch. saturni, &c.) are hardly ever permitted to 
enter the composition of this form; either be- 
cause they are very difficult to incorporate with 
oily and ceraceous substances, exhale their vo- 
latile parts during the incorporation, diminish 
the emplastic, or adhesive property of the other 
ingredients, or disturb the form itself by melting 
in the air. 
10. When any powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
enter the composition of a plaster, they should 
be either capable of a dissolution, or else ground 
exceeding fine; that they may be so equably in- 
terspersed as to render the mass uniform (per 
n° 1. (2.) and n° 2.). 
11. Hence, extracts, concreted juices, gum- 
resins and the like, when they will not melt with 
the other ingredients, or be reduced into a fine 
powder, should be first dissolved in some proper 
menstruum: as vinegar, wine, oil, turpenine,
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
12. Sometimes vegetable or animal substances, 
whose virtues are desired in an emplaster, are 
first infused, boiled or fry’d in lard, oil, wine, 
or vinegar; that after expressing and straining, 
their


330 Of Plasters.
their liquid parts may be brought to the consi- 
stence of a plaster, with the other ingredients. 
13. When crude mercury is required to enter 
the composition of this form, it should be first 
reduced or kill’d by grinding with lard or turpen- 
tine, or by dissolving it in a suitable menstruum. 
14. The officinal emplasters reserved in the 
shops, are so numerous, as seldom to give occa- 
sion for an extemporaneous prescription and 
composition of others, especially in any consi- 
derable quantity. So that it is the common prac- 
tice to prescribe more for the plasters, common- 
ly used in the shops, either separately, or seve- 
ral such combined together, being mix’d and 
mollified with some proper oil, spirit, tincture, 
or elixir, &c. Sometimes the officinal emplas- 
ters serve as a basis to the other ingredients, 
more immediately adapted to the physician’s in- 
tention, for an extemporaneous plaster: as pow- 
ders, gums, resins, juices, &c. which are com- 
pounded by intermixing some excipient (at 
§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.) (3.)). Thus the time and 
trouble of extemporaneous composition may be 
much abridg’d, and the intention more effectu- 
ally answer’d, without incurring other danger. 
15. For the number of ingredients, concise- 
ness is laudable in this form, as well as in all others. 
Those who desire to contract their prescriptions 
of this form (per n° 14.), may write to several 
intentions in a few words. 
§.408. For the ORDER or series of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for a plaster, tho' they are 
more frequently ranged according to their quanti- 
ties (per §.57 n° 3.), the excipients being trans- 
posed before those which are order’d by q. s: yet 
the best method seems to be that which corresponds. 
to the order of commixture in a skilful composi- 
tion.

331 Of Plasters. 
tion. Hence the excipientia and excipienda which 
require boiling to incorporate them, should be 
placed first; and those which require melting only, 
may follow; and in the last place may come those 
substances, which should be incorporated with the 
mass when removed from the fire, as those of the 
fine powder and volatile kind, &c. But there is 
no need of being scrupulously exact on this head 
in a prescription, when we are previously satisfied 
of the skilfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.409. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
of this form are usually the same, or equal to each 
other; because there is seldom more prescribed at 
once than what is to be used at a time. The quantity 
of surface on the morbid part, and of the vehicle to 
be covered with an emplaster, are to be duly con- 
sider’d in order to determine the proper dose and 
general quantity of this form. But as the diversity 
of ages, and habits of body being more obese or 
emaciated, &c. will make the surface of the same 
parts considerably different, it is evident there can 
be no general limits assign'd to these quantities; so 
that when we order an officinal emplaster, or an ex- 
temporaneous one of the more simple kind, (§.407. 
n° 3. 5. 14.) it may be sufficient to prescribe the dose 
and general quantity thereof by q. s. mentioning the 
part which is to be covered by the plaster, or the size 
of the vehicle upon which it is to be spread. In 
extemporaneous compositions of this form which 
are difficult and tedious, it is allowable to prescribe 
a larger quantity. If the quantity prescribed be 
for several doses, the length of time and fre- 
quency of exhibition are to be taken into consi- 
deration together. 
§.410. The mutual Proportion of the se- 
veral ingredients for a plaster, is to be determined 
from the same considerations as their election (at  
§.407.

332 Of Plasters. 
§.407.), in conjunction with the different degree 
of consistence in the plaster. For take notice, 
1. That according to the different use of an 
emplaster it may obtain three degrees of con- 
sistence; viz. (1.) soft, approaching the con- 
sistence of a cerate, (2.) hard, or (3.) interme- 
diate, between hard and soft. The soft emplas- 
ters are used mostly for sparadrapes §.405. in 
the use of emollients, and substances which are 
to penetrate deep, or in applications of this form 
to moveable parts and articulations. Emplasters 
of the two last degrees of consistence are used 
mostly for desiccarives, astringents and 
lives, &c.
2. Hence, the requisite proportions for these 
different degrees of consistence (n° 1.) may be 
nearly determined thus. 
For a soft plaster,—ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥j. 
Pulver. ℥ß.
For a hard plaster,-ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j. 
Cerœ ℥ij. 
Pulver. ℥j.
For a plaster of midling
consistence,
ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥jß. 
Pulver. ℥vj. 
3. The proportion for oil is applicable to all 
thick and fat subances of the like nature (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.). (3.)): as is the proportion for wax; to 
its similar substances, enumerated at §, ib. 4. In 
the absence of powders, a larger proportion of 
wax, or its analogous substances, may supply 
the defect. 
4. But in powders, at the same time, we are 
also to consider their specific gravity, and parti- 
cular affinity to oily substances. Powders of the 
more

333 Of Plasters. 
more ponderous fossils inspissate a certain quan- 
tity of oil less than those of a lighter kind, Tho 
calces of lead imbibe large quantities of oily and 
fat substances. 
5. The physician will determine the propor- 
tion of aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) 
from his particular intention: and as almost all 
the aqueous parts of those liquors evaporate in 
the boiling, the proportion of the other ingre- 
dients may remain nearly the same. 
6. Inspissated juices, &c. (§.406. n° 2. (2.)) 
may be refer’d either to wax or lard, according 
as they come nearest to the density of one or the 
other (n° 3.): tho' they are usually added in 
but small quantities. 
7. When white wax is used in this form, as 
it is more brittle than the yellow, its proportion 
should be somewhat diminished. But it is the 
yellow wax which is almost constantly used for 
emplasters.  
8. Remembring that cold makes bodies more 
dense and rigid: in winter we should in large the 
proportion of soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2). (3).); and in summer add more of hard 
ingredients (at §.ib. n° (4.)) for a plaster. 
9. Those substances which serve to mollify or 
dissolve others (§.407. n° 5. 11. and 14.), may 
be prescribed by q. s. 
10. It is also customary to refer the propor- 
tion of oil, wax, and the like substances, to be 
determined at discretion by the apothecary: by 
which means an error in proportion may be ea- 
sily avoided by the prescriber. 
11. And when we desire to adjoin other in- 
gredients more suitable to our intention with 
some officinal emplaster (per §.407. n° 14.), 
being sensible of the consistence of those ingre- 
dients, we may readily know whether they will  
require

334 of Plasters. 
require the addition of an accessory which is soft 
and tenacious, or dry and solid; and the propor- 
tion of such accessories may be order’d by q. s. 
§.411. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, directs. 
1. The preparation of the emplastic mass. And 
this is performed either by (1.) emollition, with 
a gentle heat, or an admixture of some fit men- 
stuum (per §.407. n° 5. 14.); which latter is 
termed madifaction. Or, (2.) by colliquation or 
melting; in such a manner that the ingredients 
may be so fluid upon the fire, as to run into a 
very close commixture with each other; this 
process admitting no excipienda but that are ea- 
sily soluble, or else ground into a fine powder. 
Or, (3.) by means of boiling; which is requir’d 
when any aqueous liquor is to be evaporated 
(§.406. n° 2. (1.)), or when the more fix’d 
medicinal virtues are by this means to be ex- 
tracted from certain vegetables, rejecting after- 
wards their more solid and gross parts, or when 
metalline calces, especially those of lead, are to 
be intimately dissolved and combin’d in this form. 
We here designedly omit what relates to a re- 
gular and artificial preparation of plasters, as well 
for reasons at §.7. n° 3. and §.8. as because 
the business of that is usually refer’d to the dex- 
terity and judgment of the apothecary. Consult 
§.408. 
2. The extention or spreading this form upon 
some vehicle, which is generally either pieces of 
linen, silk, cotton, or leather, &c, according 
as the surface of the part to be covered is subject 
to various motions, is more or less tender or in 
fight, and as the plaster is to remain a longer 
or shorter time upon the part, &c. The size and 
figure of the plaster, agreeable to various parts 
and

335 Of Plasters. 
and uses, may be represented by sending a pat- 
tern cut out in paper, or limited by fingers 
breadths or any other measure, or it may be 
wholly refer’d to the discretion of the apothe- 
cary, mentioning only the particular part to 
which it is to be applied; for we suppose it suf- 
ficiently known, that the figure of an emplaster 
should be scutiform for the stomach, lunated 
for the liver, oval for the splen, orbicular for 
the umbilicus and uterus, and of an oblong-square 
for the kidneys, &c. The method of spreading 
common emplasters is sufficiently known by all; 
for making sparadrapes (§.405.), the linen 
shou’d be soft and well worn, but not ragged, 
the paper thick and soft or spongy; so that the 
melted emplaster may be equally embibed by, 
and extended upon the vehicle, making it ex- 
actly level when cold. Sometimes the internal 
surface of the plaster is smeared over with some 
oil, at other times it is sprinkled with some 
powder; by which means it will not adhere so 
firmly, nor be so apt to daub the parts. Others
do for the same purpose cover the whole, or some 
part of the plaster’s surface, with red or white 
lawn or muslin, crape or gauze, which they 
few or fasten to the margin of the plaster, before 
its application to the surface of the particular 
part it is to cover. 
§.412. The SUPERSCRIPTION (signatura) 
or direction to the patient for this form, is suffi- 
ciently intelligible from what has been already said 
at §.60. and §.405. 
§.413. The USES of emplasters are various and 
manifold, serving to mollify, disperse, maturate, 
deterge, desiccate, corroborate, attract, aggluti- 
nate and retain; excluding the air from wounds, 
ulcers and tumors, and serving to retain the lips 
of

336 Plasters. 
of wounds, fractur’d bones, tents, pledgits, asper- 
sions (§.308.), and other dressings. Depilatories, 
rubisiers, and vestcatories, are frequently exhibited 
in this form to the patient. Nor does it commu- 
nicate its virtues to the bare surface of the body on- 
ly, but even to the recesses of the more internal 
parts: as appears from the use of aromatic, opiate 
and mercurial plasters. Yet this form may be of 
disservice in many cases, by obstructing the cuta- 
neous pores, and exciting a redness, itching, pus- 
tules, or erysipelas. 
§.414. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Emplastrum anodynum, motum sedans, ad scir- 
rhum nec resolutione,nec extirpatione medicabilem. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Succi recent. expressi & puri. 
Fol. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Phellandrii ana ℥iv. 
Leni igne coque, inspissa, sub sinem admisce 
Cerœ albœ ℥viij. 
Ol. infus. rosar. ℥j. 
F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. super alutá dehitœ magnitudinis & fi- 
gurœ extensum parti scirrhosœ, prius nutritio ibid.
descripto oblitœ, applicetur. 
2. Emplastrum dissipans, ad bubonem venereum ad 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Flor. sulphuris ℥ß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ʒj. 
Picis sutoriœ ℥ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum super aluta extendendum. 
S. Applicetur loco affecto. Recentetur quovis die.
3. 

337 Plasters.
3. Emplastrum hystericum Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Galban. in tinct. castor. solut. & colat. 
ʒiij.
Tacamahac. ʒij. 
M. F. emplastrum: extendatur super a- 
luta orbiculatâ pro umbilicali regione. 
S. Ut in fronte. Admoveatur calidum umbilico. 
4. Emplastrum defensivum rubrum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 68. 
ꝶ. Ol. rosac. 
Cerœ albœ ana ℥vj. 
Boli armen. 
Sang. dracon. ana ℥jß. 
Rosar. rubr. pulv. ℥ß. 
Ceræ in oleo calore leni liquatæ, tum ab ig- 
ne remotæ, paulatim intere reliqua sub- 
tilissimè pulverisata, jugiter agitando, do- 
nec simul refrixerint. 
S. Hujus q. s. super linteamine extensum applicetur 
vulneri ad aërem arcendum & continenda reliqua. 
5- Emplastrum roborans, calisaciens, carminans, 
stomachicum. 
ꝶ. Emplast. de bacc. laur. 
Cumino ana q. s. 
Malaxata cum balsam. peruv. tantillo ex- 
tende super tela gossypina, scutiformi, te- 
ge sindone rubra decussatim interpassata. 
D. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod calidum regioni ventri- 
culi apponatur, & subinde balsami peruviani, aut 
olei vel spiritus menthœ tantillo irroretur.
Z 6. 

338 Plasters. 
6. Sparadrapum ad fonticulos 
ꝶ. Emplast. diapalm. 
Grat. Dei ana pt. ij. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec.press. pt. j.
Calore leni sub continua agitatione colli- 
qnatis turn ab igne remotis intinge lon- 
ga chartæ albæ, satis firmæ, segmina, 
tres circiter digitos lata: rite infecta 
exime, extende, cultro æqua, suspende,
ut sponte siccescant, turn in segmenta 
quadrata discinde & exhibe. 
S. Chartœ inceratœ pro deligando fonticulo. 
7. Sparadrapum pectorale, emolliens, resolvens,
ad tussim a frigore suscepto. 
ꝶ. Unguent, althœœ comp. ℥j. 
Adipis gallin. ℥iij. 
Olei press. sem. papav. ℥ß. 
Cerœ citrin. rec. ℥jß.
Simul leni igne liquifactis immisce 
Rad. irid. florent. subtiliss. pulv. ʒj. 
Olei express. nuc. myrist. ℈j. 
Detentis in fluore immerge telam lineam ve- 
terem magnirudinis & figuræ in charata
transmissa descriptæ: probè imbutam 
extende, læviga, & laxè convolutam ex- 
hibe. 
S. Tela emplastica, quœ pectori apponatur; tegatur 
panno laneo, rubro villoso, aut pelle cati.
8. 

339 Plasters. 
8. Emplastrum resolvens, ad contusa. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 83. 
ꝶ. Bryon. in farin. redact. ℥ij. 
Flor. sulphur. ℥j. 
Mercur. nigri  ʒiij. 
Galbani puri & s. a. soluti ℥iv. 
Emplastr. de melilot. ℥ix. 
Ol. chamamel. q. s. 
Ut F. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo inductum applicetur parti 
contusœ. 
9. Emplastrum nervinum, anti-arthriticum. 
♃. Emp. è cumin. ℥j. 
Ung. opodel. ʒiij. 
Sal. vol. ammon. 
Camph. subt. pulv. 
Ext. thebaic. ana ʒß.
Ol. petrol. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & regioni, vel parti- 
bus affectis tepide applicandum. 
10. Emplastrum suppuratorium, adhesivum. 
♃. Emplast. diachyl. cum mucag. 
Pic. burgundic. ana ʒvj. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Extendatur q. s. super linteum crassum, vel potius 
alutam, parti affectœ applicand.
Z2 11. 


340 Plasters.
11. Emplastrum anodynum. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. ℥ij. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥ß. 
Ol. nicotian. ʒij. 
Camph. pulv. subt. 
Sacch. saturn.
Opti ana ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Extende super linteum duplicatum, & lateri affecto 
vel parti dolenli applicetur.
12. Emplastrum emolliens, & refrigerans. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℥jß. 
Cerœ albœ ℥j. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ʒx. 
Commistis & ab igne remotis, insperge 
Sacch. saturn. pulv. subt. ʒiij. 
Camph. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
S. Extende super pannum linteum, & ung. merc. in- 
unct. applicetur ad hœmorrhoidas cœcas externas. 
13. Emplastrum discutiens, commune. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. 
è cicut. cum ammon. aā ℥j. 
Ung. cœrul. ℥ß. 
Camph. 
Opii ana ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle, lenissimo 
calore. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & parti affectœ vel 
regioni viscerum infarct. applicandum. 
14.

341 Plasters. 
14. Emplastrum epuloticum, ad familias. 
♃. Cerœ citrinœ rec. ℥ij. 
Mellis commun. ℥ß. 
Croci opt. ʒj. 
Sacchar. albiss. 
Sperm. ceti aa ʒvj. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ℥iij ß. 
M, F. s. a. emplast. mediæ consist. 
S. Emp. vulner. super pannum linteum album, vel 
sericum nigrum extendendum, & in abrasionibus 
cutaneis, incisuris levioribus, &c. applicandum. 
15. Emplastrum ad strumas, discutiens. 
♃. Emp. è cicut. 
de sapon. aa ℥j. 
Hydrarg. (in pauc. tereb. extinct.) ʒvj. 
Camph. (in ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. solut.) 
℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. In glandularum infarctionibus, partibus affectis 
applicandum. 
16. Emplastrum hystericum. 
♃. Gum. ammon. 
Galban. colat. 
Assa fœtid. ana ʒij. 
Cerœ citrinœ ʒj. 
Bals. sulph. succinat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
Ut in fronte. Super alutam extendendum, &
regioni hypogastricœ applicandum.
Z3 Nota.

342 Of Cerates. 
Nota. To the form of sparadrapes we might add 
several others composed of talc, camphir, borace, 
wax and oil; entitled telae cosmeticae ( P. Morell. 
meth. prescr. form. p. 246.): but as these hardly 
ever come under the extemporaneous prescription 
of a physician, there is no great occasion to insert 
them in this place. 
Of CERATES. 
§.415. A CERATE (ceratum, cerotum, cerelae-
um,) is a kind of soft emplaster 
(§.405.), coming near to a midling consistence 
between an ointment and emplaster. But as we do 
not at present, as they did formerly, call every 
composition of wax, whether ointment or emplas- 
ter, a cerate; the distinction of this form into li- 
quid and solid, does also of consequence vanish. 
§.416. The MATERIALS, ELECTION, OR- 
DER, DOSE, and GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form, hold the same here as in the emplaster 
(§.406 to 409.). A cerate derives its names (§.415.) 
from the wax and oil in its composition: but those 
substances are at present no such constant ingre- 
dients, but that they are often omitted, and the 
cerate composed of other similar substances, enu- 
merated at §.406, and 407. This is also a compo- 
sition very seldom in extemporaneous practice; but 
more frequently occurs among the officinals: and 
when an officinal cerate is not at hand, suitable to 
the intention, any of the emplasters may be rea- 
dily reduced to its consistence by the addition of 
some oil, mollifying it (per §.407. n° 14.). 
§.417. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is what it principally 
differs in from the emplaster: for the proportion
here, should be of oil ℥j. wax ℥ß. powders ʒj. or
ʒjss. more or less, according to their specific 
weight:


343 Of Cerates. 
weight: or excluding the powders, the wax may 
be augmented to ʒv. But observe 
1. That there is a sort of latitude for varying 
the proportions of this form, in order to make 
the cerate sometimes a little softer, or harder, 
than at others; nor are the specified proportions 
constantly observed in prescriptions: in so much 
that what is placed under the title of cerates in 
some shops, would be rank’d among the class of 
ointments or emplasters in the hands of others. 
2. For the rest, what we have before repeat- 
ed (at §.410. n° 3 to 11.) is also in this place 
applicable to the form of cerates. 
§.418. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPER 
SCRIPTION, or direction to the apothecary and 
patient for this form, is much the same as for the 
emplaster (at §.411. and 412.); supposing you 
do but change the name (§.415.). Sparadrapes 
(§.411. n° 2.) are also more frequently made from 
this form than from emplasters; because the sub- 
stance of a cerate is more soft and pliable, and so, 
more convenient (per §.410. n° 1.). Cerates are 
also transmitted to the patient, and reserved for 
use, in gallipots or bladders, when they are to last 
any considerable length of time; otherwise they 
might melt and run about, or become too hard and 
dry, thro' keeping. Their greater degree of soft- 
ness, renders them also capable of being spread upon 
proper vehicles with much more ease, than plasters. 
§.419, The USE of cerates is much the same 
as of emplasters (§.413.); and we may venture 
to say they are in more frequent use than the latter; 
for many forms which are prescribed under the 
title of emplasters, are cerates in effect and consi- 
stence. Its less degree of hardness and tenacity, in 
comparison with an emplaster, gives it a greater 
recommendation, in cases where the virtues are to 
penetrate deeper (per §.410. n° 1), where the  
Z4 parts

344 Cerates. 
parts to be cover’d are very tender and sensible, or 
seated in some moveable articulation, or when we 
are apprehensive that a more consistent form will 
do harm (per §.413.). 
§.420. FOR SPECIMEN, take the following. 
1. Ceratum exsiccans, obtundens, antiphlogisticum, 
ad ulcera tibiarum inveterata. 
ꝶ. Cerat. desensiv. cœrul. pharm. leid. 
℥iij. vel q. v. 
D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus q. s. extensum super linteo applicetur ulceri, 
prius puro, siccis, aut idoneo balsamo imbutis, carp- 
tis tecto. Renovetur quovis die semel. 
2. Ceratum adtrahens, emmenagogum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 214. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. oxycroc. 
de melilot. ana q. s. 
Cum ol. rutœ q. s. malaxando in con- 
sistentiam cerati redacta extendan- 
tur super aluta lunata juxta exem- 
plum transmissum. 
D.
S. Pubis & inguinibus applicetur. 
3. Ceratum resolvens, ad scirrhum lienis. 
ꝶ. Gumm. ammoniac. 
Galban. ana ℥ß. 
Dissolvantur in acet. squillitic. q. s. & cum 
Cerœ citrinœ ℥ß.
Ol. infus. absynth. q. s. 
Leni igne colliquata redigantur in cera- 
tum, quod super aluta ovata, in- 
star linguæ bubulæ, extensum. 
D. 
S. Ceratum spleneticum, hypochondria sinistro in re- 
gions splenis applicandum. 
4.

345 Of Ointments. 
4. Ceratum ad scabiem, lepram, &c. 
♃. Emp. de cicut. cum ammon. 
mercurial. aa 
Ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. 
M. F. ceratum. 
S. Super pannum linteum extendendum, & cuti af- 
fectœ applicandum. 
Of OINTMENTS. 
§.421. AN OINTMENTS or unguent is an ex- 
ternal, soft medicine; not so hard as 
a cerate (§.415.), but coming nearer to the con- 
sistence of thick honey, or an electuary (§.138.): 
melting with a small heat, and composed chiefly 
of oleaginous and ceraceoas substances; which are 
to be rubbed upon the suface, of divers exter- 
nal parts of the body, or applied upon some 
proper vehicle, to answer various medicinal inten- 
tions. 
§.422. The MATERIALS for this form, are in 
general the same as for an emplaster or cerate 
(§.406. 416.). 
§.423. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is also determined by the same circumstan- 
ces, as at §.407. viz. 
1. In the composition of an ointment are re- 
quired (1.) a consistence sufficient to preserve it 
from melting in the air, but so as to make it 
soft and pliable in the cold, resembling, as it 
were, soft lard. (2.) Its softness should also be 
joined

346 Of Ointments. 
joined with smoothness and lubricity, without 
any roughness or gross parts. (3.) It requires 
an equable distribution and uniform commixture 
of its ingredients. From hence, we may per- 
ceive what materials are fittest for this form; 
and what kind of preparation they are to under- 
go. Consult §.407. n° 1. and 2. 
2. Oil (§.406. n° 1. (1.)), fat (ib. (2.)), 
turpentine (ib. (3.)), wax (ib. (4.) ), or sub- 
stances analogous to these (§.410. n°3.), being 
melted together in a due quantity, will compose 
an unguent without any other addition: so that 
in this form there is no occasion for any of the 
excipienda (§.406. n° 2.), unless such should 
be required by the indication.
3, Wax, pitch, resins, gum-resins, officinal 
emplasters and cerates, or the like (§.406. n°1. 
(4.)). being mollified with oil, separately, or 
several of them in conjunction, will compose an 
ointment without any other materials (§.ib. 
n° 1. (2.) (3.) and n° 2.). 
4. Even lard, marrow, butter, &c. (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.)) have naturally of themselves the 
consistence proper to an ointment, without any 
other addition of either liquid or solid substances 
(§.ib. (1.) (4.)); but if either of these be re- 
quired a little softer, which is frequent in ex- 
temporaneous practice, they may be made so by 
the addition of a little oil; if they are desired 
somewhat more consistent, they will acquire that 
by mixture with a little wax, or some fine pow- 
der. But to reduce the more tenacious turpen- 
tines into an ointment, requires a previous atte- 
nuation and division of their parts by lard, oil, 
or the yolks of eggs. 
5. Hence, wax and turpentine are not such 
constant and necessary ingredients in this form,
as


347 Of Ointments. 
as in that of a plaster (§.407. n° 4.). They 
are both frequently excluded the composition of 
extemporaneous unguents. Wax also renders an 
ointment punch less apt to penetrate into the 
parts.  
6. If an intention persuades us to take watery 
liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) into this form, 
they are to be first boiled with the fat or oil 
(§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.)), in order to exhale their 
aqueous parts: so that what has been said at 
§.407.n°.7. may here take place. 
7. But certain watery liquors are sometimes 
reduced into an ointment, merely by a long tri- 
turation with fat substances, without any boiling: 
as we learn from the composition of rosaceum, 
and nutrilium: by which last, it appears that 
two liquors will inspissate into an ointment, 
without evaporation; but this will hold in but 
few instances. 
8. Besides the excipienda (§.406. n° 2. 
(2.)), this form sometimes takes in pulps and 
electuaries, to be intermixed with its other fat 
and glutinous ingredients. Even the whole mass 
of an ointment is sometimes composed, like an 
electuary, without any oily or fat substances at 
all: as we see in the preparation of Ægyp- 
tiacum. 
9. To make up powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
into this form, sometimes oil alone, or joined 
with vinegar, is sufficient: which obtains chiefly 
in saturnine unguents. For otherwise it will ge- 
nerally require a mixture of some thick and glu- 
tinous substance (§.406. n° 1. (2.) (3.) (4.) 
10. Very strong and corrosive ingredients, 
which inflame, should be very cautiously used 
in this form: and not at all, unless they are in- 
fringed and curbed by other more lenient sub- 
stances;

348 Of Ointments. 
stances; left they should destroy the skin, or, by- 
running thro' the pores into the circulation, di- 
sturb the whole œconomy. 
11. Such ointments as are intended to operate 
upon the more internal parts of the body, shou’d 
consist of very penetrating substances, and not 
be made of too thick a consistence (V. n° 5.). 
12. In prescribing this form, it is more ad- 
visable to order the officinal compositions of this 
kind, either separately or combined together; 
which may be adapted to the intention, by an 
extemporaneous addition of other ingredients. 
Consult §.407. n° 14. 
13. For the rest, what has been said (at 
§.407. n° 8. to 13, and 14.) does also here take 
place. Though several kinds of salts are fre- 
quently prescribed in this form, yet the mineral 
calces very seldom enter the composition of oint- 
ments, especially extemporaneous ones. 
§.424. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for ointments, is much the same 
with that used in emplasters at §.408. 
§.425. The DOSE of this form is to be deter- 
mined by the size of the part to be anointed, nor 
does it require any other limitation. 
§.426. The GENERAL QUANITY of this form 
to be prescribed and transmitted to the patient at one 
time, is limited by the consideration at §.425. as 
also from the continuation and frequency of its 
application, so that sometimes an ounce may suf- 
fice, when at other times the case may require 
above a pound. 
§.427. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredients 
for this form, may be deduced from §.410. and 
417. compared with §.421. 423. But observe, 
1. That the consistence of this form is not 
so precisely limited, but that it may be made a 
little

349 Of Ointments. 
little thicker or thinner, according to the par- 
ticular intention, as will appear from viewing 
the consistence of several officinal ointments. 
Soft ointments are bed adapted for tender and 
sensible parts, for penetrating and for entering 
the pores by friction, &c. The more solid and 
consistent ointments stop up the pores, are 
more slowly imbibed by them, and rather ob- 
struct perspiration. 
2. The materials fit for this form are of a 
threefold consistence (§.422.): liquid, soft and 
solid; so that the proportion of each ingredient 
is to be varied, according as the ointment is to 
be more soft, or else consistent (per. §.421. 
423. n° 1. 427. n° 1.). 
3. The soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (2.) 
(3.)) mix’d together in any proportion will make 
an ointment; but if you are apprehensive it will 
be too consistent adjoin q. s. olei. For the parti- 
cular management of the turpentines for this 
form consult §.423. n° 4. 
4. A mixture of oil ℥j with ℥ij or iij. of 
wax or similar substances compose an ointment 
per §.410. n° 3. If to the wax and oil we add 
a powder §.406. n° 2. (3.), the wax should 
then be proportionably diminished, so that we 
may order of wax ʒij, of powder ʒj, or ʒjß. 
or the quantity of powder being determined, 
the wax may be prescribed q. s. unless you are 
sensible that the powder and oil together will of 
themselves form an ointment per §.423. n° 9. 
and in that case the wax being omitted, the 
quantity of powder may be augmented to ʒiij. 
and sometimes ʒjv. 
5. Hence we learn what is to be done when 
the soft substances n° 3. are added instead of 
the powder, n° 4. for the proportion of those
ingre-  


350 Of Ointments. 
ingredients may remain nearly the same as if 
those soft substances were omitted. 
6. If you prescribe ung. nutritum of oil and 
vinegar of lead, per §.423. n° 7; the propor- 
tion of each may be nearly equal parts, or either 
of them may be ordered by q. s. cape: if the 
ointment consists of oil, simple vinegar and su- 
gar of lead, or any of the saturnine calces, the 
two first may be prescribed ana pt. 1. and of the 
two latter pt. ß. 
7. If the basis of this form is an officinal oint- 
ment, you will easily perceive from the consi- 
stence of its other ingredients, whether any, of 
how much wax will bring it to a consistence, 
which is generally prescribed by q. s. Oil will 
reduce its consistence, wax will increase it, when 
it exceeds either way. 
8. Lastly; to this place also belongs what 
has been said at §.410. Substances which are 
only analogous to oil and sat §.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2.) are not so constant ingredients in this form. 
§.428. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, varies 
with the different method of preparing it; it either 
orders only simple mixture, when there is no oc- 
casion for the use of fire; or the mixture may
be order’d to be done gradually, and made uni- 
form by a continued triuration, when the oint- 
ment is to consist of a mixture of sat and watery 
substances (per §.423. n° 7. 427. n° 6.) the 
mixture by triuration is then term’d nutritio, and 
the ointment, nutritum. Or, the composition may 
be order’d by melting, or by boiling, as well as 
mixture; the directions for which are much the 
same as in the emplaster §.411. n° 1. The pre- 
scription may conclude F. s. a. unguentum vel nu-
tritum. D. ad fictile. This form is seldom applied 
upon leather like the emplaster at §.411. n° 2.
but 


351 Of Ointnients. 
but when it is thus used, the margin of the latter 
should be spread about a finger’s breadth with 
some sticking emplaster, in order to prevent the 
ointment from melting and falling oh by the heat 
of the part. 
§.429. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains nothing very 
particular, except the method of using it. The ap- 
plication or inunction of this form upon particu- 
lar parts, is usually performed by spreading it first 
upon linen, leather, srap’d lint, pledgets, tents, or 
in walnut-shells, &c. But it is very usual to pre- 
mise hot or cold bathing, lotions and frictions be- 
fore inunction of the parts. For the rest, what 
relates to the chusing a proper part of the body, 
the length of time, and frequency of using the 
ointment, with the proper regimen, &c. is to be 
deduced from the physician’s indications in parti- 
cular cases. Consult §.328. n° 2. 5. 7. It is advi- 
sable to be cautious in the use of ointments which 
are corrosive, cathartic or mercurial, &c. left the 
too frequent or long continued use of them should 
bring on a salivation, a superpurgation, or other 
bad symptoms. 
§. 430. The USE of ointments is very frequent 
with physicians as well as surgeons; in order to 
mollify, disperse, maturate, deterge, warm, 
strengthen, alleviate, obtund acrimony, &c. which 
virtues it communicates not only by external ap- 
plication, but frequently by internal exhibition, in 
which case it acts more potently on the internal 
parts; being promoted in that action by its con- 
sistence being more soft and penetrating than a ce- 
rate or emplaster. The effects of this form exter- 
nally applied, are sufficiently obvious in the use of 
mercurial, cathartic, and opiate ointments, which 
produce a spitting, purging, or constipation; but 
an unseasonable or improper use of some ointments. 
proves

352 Ointments.
proves frequently pernicious by relaxing the fibres 
too much, by obstructing the cutaneous pores, or 
by acting too roughly upon some of the internal 
viscera. 
§.431. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Unguentum digestivum ad contusa, attenuans, 
antisepticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 76. 
ꝶ. Tereb. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n°.j. 
Exacte mistis admisce 
Unguent. basilici ℥ij. 
Aloës puræ ʒiv. 
F. s. a. unguentum. 
S. Hujus tantillum plumaceolis exceptum imponatur 
loco contuso, tegatur emplastro de galbano & fo- 
mento ibid, descriptis. 
2. Unguentum anodynum, motum sedans, scirrho 
dolenti aptum. Ibid. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Aceti lithargyrii ℥j. 
Ol. express. sem. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. alb. 
Rosar. infus. ana ʒij. 
F. s. a. nutritum, cui sub finem admisce 
Opii puri gr. vj. 
S. Nutritum pacans, quo leniter inungatur locus af- 
fellus, ac dein tegatur emplastro, ibid. descripto. 
3.

353 Ointments. 
3.Unguentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Fellis taurini. 
Aloës pur. ana ℥j. 
Unguent. althœœ ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici: 
aut pars dimidia juglandis nucis putamine excepta 
eidem loco apponatur. 
Cautelam huic necessariam vid. ibidem.  
4. Unguentum laxans, mitigans, sopiens, ad pleu- 
ritidem. Ibid. p.150. 
ꝶ. Unguent. popul. 
Althœœ. 
Nutrit. ana ℥j. 
M. 
F. unguentum. 
S. Hoc calido latus dolens, ter de die, inungatur, 
superponendo dein somentum, ante in histor. epithe- 
matis liquidi, p.232. descript. 
5. Unguentum emplastrodes, roborans, calesaciens, 
stomachicum ad nauseam vel vomitum à pertur- 
bato liquidi nervosi motu ortum. 
ꝶ. Cerat. stomach. Galen. 
Theriac. Andromach. ana ʒvj. 
Ol nuc. myrist. express. ʒj. 
Bals. peruvian. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. unguentum: illinatur aluti scuri- 
formi, cujus margo ad digiti latitudinem 
obducta sit emplastro mucagin. aut meliloti. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod regioni ventriculi ap- 
plicetur. 
Aa Nota.

354 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Nota. From the history of ointments, may be 
understood the composition of internal vulnerary 
balsams, or potable ointments; which are used in 
almost the same intentions with some electuaries 
or pills (§.138. 160.) External vulnerary bal- 
sams do generally differ but little from ointments: 
though they are sometimes softer; but are hardly 
ever prescribed or prepared in extemporaneous 
practice 
Of Odoriferous BALSAMS. 
§.432. A PERFUMED OR ODORIFEROUS BAL- 
SAM, is a kind of ointment (§.421.) 
composed of the more fragrant and strong scented 
ingredients, incorporated with some of the more 
tenacious, and oily or fat substances, serving for 
the inunction of several parts, and invested with 
very strong, odorous and active principles. Hence, 
it seems to differ but little from an ointment. 
§.433. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
almost the same as for the ointment (§.422.); 
but are not so numerous: they are either excipient, 
or excipiend. 
1. The excipient substances are either (1.) pri-
mary, being fat and tenacious; as oil of nut- 
megs by expression, white inodorous fats, of the 
hog, &c. the marrow of legs of veal, butter, 
wax, officinal ointments, pomatum, rosatum, 
nervinum, &c. The strong-scented officinal 
balsams, manna, and sometimes gum-resins. 
Or (2.) secundary, oleaginous and liquid: as the 
more common oils by expression, infusion, or 
decoction, and the native liquid balsams, as pe- 
ruvian. copaib. &c. 
2. The excipiend a are also either (1.) primary, 
containing the medicinal virtues, and of a liquid
con-

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
consistence: as aromatic oils obtained by dis- 
tillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, essences, spirits, volatile oily salts, 
&c. or of a thick consistence; as extracts and 
the more potent electuaries; of opium, saffron, 
theriaca, gum-resins, opium itself, musk, civet 
and the like: or dry and solid: as spices, saf- 
fron, cinnamon, cloves, benjamin, castor, am- 
bergiss, amber, its salt; &c. Or (2.) secundary, 
of less consequence, giving some colour, &c. 
for which purpose are used the finest powders, 
magisteries precipitated by alum, with various 
pigments, smalt, cochineal, turmeric, umbre, 
asphaltus, cinnabar, juice of buck-thorn, red 
sanders, the grants chermes, ochres; armenian 
bole, &c. 
§.434. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is to be directed by the intention, and other 
circumstances (at §.423. n° 1.): but as the prin- 
cipal difference of this form from an ointment con- 
sists in its strong penetrating odor, we ought to 
pay the greatest regard to that; left it should be 
weaken’d, dissipated, changed, or made worse by 
the action of other substances. The tinging it with 
some pleasant colour, is indeed less necessary, but 
more usual; nor should it be entirely neglected. 
Hence, 
1. The primary excipient (§.433. n° 1.
(1.)) should be chose the whitest: and most ino- 
dorous; in order to avoid any change of the 
odor and colour to be given it by the excipi- 
enda (§.433. n° 2.). Nut oil by expression, 
being deprived of its colour and smell by spirit 
of wine, is the most frequent in use here; in so 
much that it may well be call’d, as it usually is, 
a body for perfumed balsams. We should be 
cautious that the other fat substances are not ran- 
A22 cid:

356 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
cid: to avoid which, they should be chose very 
fresh, and be sometimes first washed with 
some proper liquor. Nor is it often that any 
other substance is used here, but white virgin’s 
wax. 
2. But there are some cases where a strong 
scented or fœtid excipient is preferable, when 
it happens to agree with the intention and vir- 
tues of the other ingredients: as may several of 
the officinal ointments and balsams, common 
oils of nuts, gum-resins, &c. and in this case 
the indication should direct the choice. The 
colour may be easily corrected or made agree- 
able per §.433. n° 2. (2.). 
3. Wax alone is seldom the excipient; be- 
cause the generality of ingrediens can be suffi- 
ciently mollified by none but oil. Oil also serves, 
by repeated mixture in small quantities, to at- 
tenuate and mix the more soft and fat substance 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) for this form. 
4. There is not always occasion for the se- 
cundary excipients (at §.ib. n° 1. (2.)): only 
when the mass is of too thick a consistence their 
addition may be proper. But then, one should be 
chose without any smell, or else with one agree- 
able to that of the other ingredients. 
5. The primary excipienda (§.433. n° 2. 
(1.)) or ingredients should be chose conformable 
to the intention (§.432. 434.), efficacious in 
a small quantity, and agreeing with each other, 
also capable of an uniform mixture with the ex- 
cipient (§.433.). Therefore those substances 
chiefly which abound in the more active odorous 
parts are principally used in this form; espe- 
cially such as are naturally of an oily or fat con- 
sistence, or else capable of an intimate commix- 
ture with oily substances. Oils by infusion or 
decoction are seldom used in this form, but to
dilute

357 Of Odorifeous Balsams. 
dilute it, when of too much consistence. If dry 
substances are order’d, which are not capable of 
a dissolutipn, they should be first reduced into 
a most subtle powder. 
6. But this form takes in not only fragrant 
substances, but sometimes fœtid ones also: as 
we may learn from what has been said at §.433. 
n° 2. So that musk, civet and ambergriss are 
not always necessary ingredients of this form: 
it is even generally better to omit these, as be- 
ing to many very unpleasant, and to others hurt- 
ful. Consult §.85. and 100. 
7. The pigments or colours (§.433. n° 2. 
(2.)) are generally elected agreeable to the co- 
lour of the medicinal basis, from which the bal- 
sam takes its name, or conformable to the re- 
ceived idea of the virtues it is to exert, or to the 
genius of the disease it is to oppose: hence, to 
the balsam of rue should be given a green co- 
lour; of amber, a yellow; of roses, a red; to
cardiac balsams, a pleasant colour, and to ant- 
apoplectic, or antiepileptic balsams should be 
given a sorrowful, fable, or black colour. But 
it is not always neccessary to colour them in this 
manner. 
8. Yet care should be taken not to use pig- 
ments which are corrosive or acrimonious, the 
use of which would be attended with bad conse- 
quences. But the powder or magistery of the 
substance which composed the basis of a balsam, 
is generally better to colour it than any other. 
If such is not to be had, a quantity of some other 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) may be substituted. 
9. Here also, if there are any officinal bal- 
sams adapted to the physician’s intention, he 
may save himself the trouble of an extempora- 
neous formula; or he may adapt some officinal
Aa3 balsam

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
balsam to his intention, by adding other ingre- 
dients to it (V. §.407. n° 14.). 
10. For the number of ingredients for this 
form, as at §.407. n° 15. so here, brevity is 
commendable. 
§.435. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of this form, is much the same as 
in the emplaster (§.408.). 
§.436. The DOSE of this form is generally but 
small, and never precisely limited; but is propor- 
tioned to the size and number of parts to be anointed. 
§.437. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an 
odorous balsam order’d at a time, is seldom more 
than ℥jß. because of the smallness of its dose 
(§.436.); it is more frequently prescribed in the 
quantity of a few drams only, according to diffe- 
rent circumstances (at §.426. 436.): it may be 
even prescribed in a still less quantity, when the 
balsam is an officinal composition (§.434. n° 9.) 
§.438. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be easily understood 
from §.427; when the consistence of the balsam 
and its ingredients are first determined and known. 
Hence we learn. 
1. That a balsam is usually a little thicker 
than an ointment (§.421. 423. n° 1.); tho' 
sometimes it is of directly the same consistence, 
or a little softer, or even so thin as to come 
nearer to a liniment. Such balsams as are to keep 
any considerable time, to be carried about in the 
pocket, or to serve for perfuming, &c. should be 
of a more hard consistence: but those to be rubb’d 
into parts, should have a softer consistence. 
2. There is therefore hardly any constant pro- 
portion observed between the excipientia and ex- 
cipienda (§.433.); but the more usual is as fol- 
lows, v.g.
Of


359 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Of the excipient or balsamic body (§.434. 
n° 1)—℥j 
—excipienda or ingredients
Liquid ʒj, ij, iij.
thick, ordry ʒss. j, ij.      
—Primary (§.434. n° 2. (1.))  
—Secundary (ib.—(2.)) 
q. s. 
3. Hence it appears, that if the excipient is 
some soft nut-oil, the quantity of thick or dry ex- 
cipienda, should be proportionably increased,and 
the liquid diminish’d; except when you would 
by accident desire to have the balsam very liquid 
(per n° 1.). 
4. It is also usual to add about a dram of wax 
to an ounce of lard, ointment, or other very soft 
excipient (§.434. n° 3.); in order to make 
their consistence equal to that of the balsamic body 
(n°. 2.), the proportion of excipienda (n°. 2.) 
remaining still the same. 
5. If the excipient (§.434. n° 3.) be wax 
only, it will require double the same quantity of 
some fluid oil, to sufficiently mollify it. But if 
any dry substance come also into the composition, 
it is to be estimated as wax. So that it is then. 
chiefly, that there will be occasion to use some 
secundary excipient (§.433. n° 1. (2.) and 
434. n° 3.); that we may not be forced to use 
a larger quantity of others which are dearer 
or stronger. Its proportion may be therefore 
order’d by q. s.
6. If you make additions to some officinal 
balsam (per §.434. n° 9.), their proportion 
should be as their consistences; and then, the 
intention only lays any restriction upon the 
proportion. But if to officinal balsams you also 
add several other substances (n° 1. to 6.) hi- 
therto mentioned, you may easily perceive what 
proportion should be follow’d, or what consti- 
tuent substance should be used, when you are 
Aa4 desirous

360 Of Odoriferous Balsams, 
desirous to avoid too much or little consistence, 
Consult §.427.n°.7. 
7. But very often the excipienda only are 
prescribed in a determinate quantity, and the ex- 
cipient (or accessory substance to make up the 
form) order’d by q. s. or when there are two 
such excipient substances, one of them only 
may be order’d in a determinate quantity. And 
sometimes, the excipientia being determined in 
quantity, the proportion of excipienda is left to 
the diseretion of the apothecary. 
8. For the rest, consult what has been said 
at §.410. and 427. 
§.439. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is prescribed by 
F. s. a. balsamum. D. in pyxide stannea, plumbea, 
eburnea, lignea vel fictili. Sometimes the balsam 
is order’d to be included in half a walnut shell, to 
be applied to and retained upon the navel. The 
method of composition is usually left to the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. 
§.440. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides the 
name taken from the basis and virtues (§.434. 
n° 7.), the method of application; which is ge- 
nerally almost like that of using an ointment 
(§.429.), by inunction or infriction. It is very 
seldom that a balsam is spread upon a vehicle, and 
so applied to a part (§.439.). The particular 
Parts of the body most suitable for the application 
of this form, is usually judged to be such as are 
the most sensible, and where the larged: vessels and 
nerves run the most exposed; as the nose, temples, 
vertex of the head, the wrists, præcordia, &c. 
§.441. The USE of this form in extempora- 
neous Practice, is not very frequent; but it is 
often used merely for pleasure or persuming, and 
some

361 Odoriferous Balsams.
sometimes in morbid affections of the brain and 
nerves: as in epilepsies, apoplexies, vertigos, faint- 
ings; in convulsive disorders, hysteric and hypo- 
chondriac; in pains, flatulencies, &c. where it is 
frequently of service by stimulating, easing, chang- 
ing the motion of the fluids, or acting by some 
other specific virtues. But the surprising activity 
and subtility of these odoriferous principles, with 
their secret manner of acting on the body, not to 
be discovered but by their effects, seems to per- 
suade us to great caution in the use of this form. 
§.442. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Balsamum fragrans, cardiacum. 
ꝶ. Corp. pro bals. ℥ß. 
Ol. stillat. cinnam. ver. ℈j. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈ß. 
Ambar. griss. gr. ij. 
Mosch. orient. gr. j. 
Bol. armen. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. balsam. 
S. Balsamum cinnamomi, naribus, carpis, &c. infri- 
candum. Ambaro & Moscho exclusis, idem fieri 
potest universalius. 
2. Balsamum excitans, antapoplecticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ Ol. stillat. rorismar. 
Tanacet. 
Lavend. 
Rutœ. 
Absynth. ana gtt. iv. 
Infus. castor. ʒj. 
Unguent. nervin. ℥j.
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Pro suffitu sub naribus & circa tempora affricetur. 
3.


362 Odoriferous Balsams. 
3. Balsamum succini, anticatarrhale. 
ꝶ. Olei nucist. express. ʒij. 
Stillat. succin. alb. ʒj. 
Sal. fuccin. volat. ℈j. 
Cera flavœ q. s. 
Colliquatis, cum rad. curcum pulv. q. s. tinctis, 
F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum cephalicum, vertici, temporibus, pone 
aures, affricandum. 
4. Balsamum hystericum. 
ꝶ. Sev. hircin. ℥ß. 
Galban. pur. ʒj. 
Ass. fœtidœ. 
Castorii ana ℈j. 
Ol. stillat. succin. 
Corn. cerv. rect. aa gtt.xxv. 
Sal. volat. corn. cerv. ℈ß. 
Ol. infus. rutœ q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. Balsamus. 
S. In languore aut paroxysmo illinatur naribus, 
temporibus, &c. 
5. Balsamum carminans, stomachicum, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Balsam. caryophyll. arom. 
Theriac. andromach. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. stillat. macis  ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Ut in fronte. Illinatur regioni epigastricœ & 
umbilico: tum operculum figulinum probe calidum, 
aut scutum stomachicum admoveatur. 
6.

363 Of Liniments. 
6.Balsamum suaveolens, ad delicias. 
ꝶ. Unguent. pomat. ℥j. 
Cerœ abiss. ʒj.
Ol. stillat. cort. citri ʒß. 
Aurant. 
Melissœ ana gtt. xij. 
Cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Ochrœ vel rad. curcum. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum citri. Sit pro odoramento. Eo & ca- 
pilli inungi possunt, aut his pectendis adhiberi pec- 
ten eo imbutus. 
Of LINIMENTS. 
§.443. A Liniment or litus, is a kind of 
very soft ointment (§.421.), being 
of a consistence between that of oil and a com- 
mon ointment, subservient to some medicinal in- 
tention by smearing over some part of the body. 
So that this form differs from an ointment in no- 
thing but consistence; and not always in that: as 
will hereafter appear. 
§.444. The MATERIALS for a liniment are in 
general the same as for an emplaster, cerate, oint- 
ment or balsam, preceding (§.406. 416. 422. 
433.).
§.445. But the ELECTION of ingredients fit- 
test for this form, is somewhat different; because 
of the different degree of consistence (§.443.). 
For.
1. This form does indeed require a softness, 
lubricity, and equable or uniform mixture, as 
well

364 Of Liniments. 
well as the ointment (§.423 n° 1. (2.) (3.)): 
but its degree of consistence is so vague and un- 
limited, that it is sometimes permitted not only 
to put on all the intermediate degrees of con- 
sistence between an oil and unguent, but a so to 
have the density of the very ointments or oils 
themselves. 
2. Hence, sometimes mere oils by expression, 
infusion, decoction, or distillation, are the mat- 
ter of this form, without any addition of more 
consistent substances. 
3. At other times, these oils are only mix’d 
with aqueous or spirituous liquors (§.406. n° 2. 
(1.)) by a long attrition or concussion of their 
parts, or by evaporating the more aqueous parts 
by boiling, in order to more intimately mix the 
viscid. 
4. Also the thick substances like an ointment 
(§.406. n° 1. (2.)), as fats, lard, officinal un- 
guents, &c. are sometimes only mix’d with 
each other, without any liquid substance, for 
the composition of a liniment, which then ab- 
solutely resembles an ointment. 
5. But liniments are more frequently com- 
pos’d both of the soft substances (n° 4.) and 
oils together, which makes this form much softer 
than (n° 4). 
6. But. sometimes liniments are compos'd of 
oil combin’d with the more solid substances, 
§.406. n° 1. (4.) n° 2. (2.). 
7. Also the powder (§.406. n° 2. (3.)). 
mix’d with oil only, or with other liquors (n° 3.) 
and joined by trituration or boiling, does some- 
times pass for a liniment. 
8. Hence it appears that those who will may 
compose liniments both of liquid (§.406. n° 1. 
(1.) n° 2. (1.)) thick (ib. n° 1. (2.) (3.) and 
n° 2. (2.)) and dry substances (ib. n° 1. (4.)
n° 2. 

365 Of Liniments. 
n° 2. (3.)), combin’d together in due propor- 
tions: tho' neatness and brevity is also laudable 
in this form (per. §.29.). 
9. There is sometimes occasion for a sapona- 
ceous intermedium in this form, when oily and 
watery substances are to be mix’d together by 
trituration; in order to prevent them from sepa- 
rating from each other by standing. For this 
purpose are used the yolk of an egg, honey, 
sope, alcalies, &c. 
10. Lastly, I would here advise the reader to 
consult what has been said at §.423. n° 5. to n° 6. 
§.446. The best ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients for this form, corresponds 
to that for the emplaster §.408. 
§.447. The DOSE and GENERNAL QUANTITY 
of this form are the same with those of the oint- 
ment at §.425. 426. But as a liniment may he 
readily composed barely by mixture, and as its con- 
sistence and long keeping will subject it much to a 
loss of its virtues, it is generally advisable to pre- 
scribe it in but a small quantity at a time, hardly 
ever exceeding ℥iij or jv. 
§.448. The mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for a liniment, is by reason of its various 
consistence (§.445. n° 1.) very undetermined; so 
that their proportion is generally regulated by their 
virtues. Hence observe, 
1. That this form can never be made of too 
thin a consistence; but too thick, it may: for 
that will obstruct both its illinition and pene- 
tration. 
2. When the liniment is to be composed of 
none but oils (§.405. n° 2.) the consistence 
will then admit of any proportion. But we shou’d 
be cautious not to let those too much predomi- 
nate, which are very hot and acrimonious: for 
these

366 Of Liniments. 
these ought to be tempered by three of four 
times as much of those which are milder. 
3. If you would combine oils with other li- 
quors by trituration (per §.445. n°.3.) it is in 
that case allowable to follow the proportion at 
§.426.n°.6: except when the liquors are spi- 
rituous; and more acrid, or saline, &c; for 
such should be mix’d in less quantities, that they 
may not prove hurtful by their too great 
strength.  
4. When this form is to be composed of a 
mixture of oily and watery substances, whose 
aqueous parts are to be exhaled by boiling, there 
is then no regard to be had to the proportion of 
such aqueous liquors (per §.410. n° 5.).  
5. If you order intermediate substances, (§.445.
n° 4.) alone in this form; then, what is said at 
n° 2. holds good here. But to avoid too great 
consistence (n° 1.), we should consider that some 
of these substances are more dense than others. 
6. If you order 3 ij, iij, of jv of intermediate 
substances (per. §. 445. n° 5.), more or less in 
proportion to their densities, to be mixed with 
℥j of oil, you will then have a liniment of a 
midling consistence (§.443.). 
7. You will also have a liniment of a mid- 
dle consistence from a mixture of oil ℥j. and of 
the more solid substances (§.445. n° 6.) ℥j: 
which will also hold with regard to the species 
at §.ib. n° 7. 
8. Lastly, from a mixture of oil ℥j of inter- 
mediate substances ʒij. and of dry ones ʒß. 
you will have a specimen of this form com- 
posed agreeable to §.445. n° 8. 
9. For the rest, consult what has been said at 
§. 410. 427. 438. a great part of which is here 
of consequence to observe. See also §.445. n° 1.
§.449 


367 Of Liniments. 
§.449. For the SUBSCRIPTION or directon to 
the apothecary for this form, having changed the 
name (§.443.), the method of preparing it may 
be order’d the same as for the ointment (§.428.). 
Sometimes a liniment is sent to the patient in a 
glass phiol, instead of an earthen gallipot, when 
its consistence is very thin, or its virtues extremely 
volatile. This form is seldom extended, like pla- 
sters, upon some vehicle; at least; hardly ever by 
the apothecary. 
§.450. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is apparent from §.429. 
The application of it is almost constantly per- 
form’d by illinition, and sometimes accompanied 
with frictions. When a bladder is to be arm’d with 
some liniment and applied to a part, I should 
ther call it an epithem (§.320.). 
§.451. The USE of this form is the same as 
that of the ointment §.430. but it is better adapt- 
ed to penetrate into the parts. 
§.452. SPECIMENS. 
1. Litus balsamicus, anodynus, ad papillarum 
dolores, &c.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 221. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Infusi hyperici. 
Violar. 
Rosar. ana ℥ß. 
M. F. linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Hujus tantillo subinde oblinatur pars affecta. 
2.

368 Liniments. 
2. Linimentum stomachicum, carminans, calc- 
faciens. 
ꝶ Ol. infus. absynth. 
crocin. ana ℥ß. 
Stillat. menth. ʒj. 
Caryophill. gtt. x. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
M. F. Linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Serviat pro inunctione regionis ventriculi & 
umbilici. 
3. Litus leniens, emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
ꝶ. Mucilagin. sem. cydonior. cum 
Aq. rosar. extract. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec. press. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥ß. 
Exactè mistis F. linimentum. D. ad fictile, 
S. Gingivœ dolentes eo subinde demulceantur. 
4. Linimentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Unguent. Agripp. 
Arthanit. ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici.
5. 

369 Liniments. 
5. Linimentum emmenagogum. 
Ad exemplum ibid. p. 215, 216. 
ꝶ. Gum. sagapen. ℥ß. 
Axung. castor. ʒij. 
Cum Ol. infus rut. q. s. dissolutis admisce 
Ol. stillat. sabin. ʒij. 
bacc. junip. ʒj. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Umbilico, pubi, inguinibus illinatur mane & vesperi. 
6. Linimentum antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 180. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥j. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Spirit, vin. rectis. q. s. 
Dissolutis admisce 
Ol. irini ℥ß. 
Stillat. succin. ʒjß. 
Spir. sal. ammon. ℥ß. 
Ung. net vin. q. s. 
Ut F. linimentum mediæ consistentiæ. 
S. Partes affectœ, prius pannis asperis, siccis, cali- 
dis, frictœ, dein hoc litu perfricentur bis de die. 
7. Litus antipleuriticus mitisicans, resolvens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 150. 
ꝶ. Sacch. saturn. ℥ß. 
Aceti ʒvj. 
Ol. rosac. infus. ℥j 
M. F. nutritum. 
S. Hoc calido inungatur latus affectum ter de die.
Bb 8.

370 Liniments.
8. Alius emolliens Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Lilior. infus. 
Ung. dialthœœ ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Ut præced. Illito loco superponatur solium brassicœ. 
9. Linimentum balsamicum demulcens, ad inter- 
triginem. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. rosar. 
Express. amygd. D. ana ℥ß. 
Ung. nutrit. S. corp. ʒiij. 
Rad. irid. flor. pulv. ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. ʒß. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Eo oblinantur partes adfectæ, prius detersæ. 
10. Linimentum ad ambusta. 
♃. Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Nicotian. ℥ß.
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒiij. 
Camph. pulv. ʒß. 
Ol. hyperic. ℥j.
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus q. s. illinantur partes affectæ, integræ.
11.

371 Of Epispastics. 
11. Linimentum ad scabiem. 
♃. Ung. nicotian. 
Cœrul. ana ʒvi. 
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒij. 
Sulph. viv. exact. trit. ℥ß. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. ℥j.
M. F. s. a. linimentum. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hoc libere inungantur partes affectœ omni nocte, 
calida manu. 
Of EPISPASTICS. 
§.453. EPISPASTICS are very warm, or stimu- 
lating external remedies, to be appli- 
ed to the surface of the skin, in various forms, and 
for various uses. When pitch is the basis of epis- 
pastics, they are termed dropaces; if they are made 
up with mustard-seed, they are then call’d, after 
the antients, synapisms; if their acrimony and sti- 
mulus are only sufficient to excite a redness upon 
the parts, they are termed phoenigmi, or rubefa- 
cientia; if they are strong enough to elevate the 
cuticle into vesicles, or little bladders, they are 
then call’d vesicatories: these are generally exhi- 
bited in the form either of a crude cataplasm 
(§.356. and 365.), an emplaster (§.405. and 413.), 
or a cerate (§.415.). 
§.454. Therefore the extemporaneous prescrip- 
tion of these medicines may be understood by the 
histories of those (loc. cit.). Their MATERIALS 
may be found under the title of stimulantia in the 
materia medica, and their USES shewn and directed 
to by the doctrine of indications; so that there is 
no need to enlarge upon them here (per.7. n° 1. 
and 2. §.8.)
Bb2  §.455.


372 Epispastics. 
§.455. A few SPECIMENS will give a better idea 
of these remedies. 
1. Dropax ad membrum paralyticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Picis ʒij. 
Galban. pur. ℥j. 
Piperis tenuiter contus. ʒiij. 
Castorei ʒj. 
Ol. irini q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. emplastrum ad alutam. 
S. Parti affectœ prius frictœ apponatur calidum; 
priusquam refrixit, iterum subito avellatur: quod 
repetendum donec pars rubeat, tumeat, caleat. 
2. Pasta rubifaciens, antifebrilis. Ibid. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Summit. rutœ virid. ℥jj. 
Semin. sinapi. ʒij. 
Contusa exhibe ad epicarpia. 
S. Applicentur carpis ad pulsuum loca, aliquot horis 
ante ingruentem paroxysmum. 
3. Synapismus cataplasmodes. Ibid. p.240. 
ꝶ. Fermenti acidi pansis ℥vj. 
Rutœ m. j. 
Semin. sinapios contus. ʒvj. 
Salis. 
Aceti ana ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Applica ad cava pedum & poplitum noctes 
atque dies. 
4.

373 Epispastics.
4. Phœnigmus emplastrodes. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 240. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. de melilot. 
Galbani 
Sagapeni ana ℥j. 
M. extende super duabus alutis ovatis. 
S. Applicentur cavis pedum. 
5. Sinapismus fortior veterum, vesicatorius. 
ꝶ. Ficuum siccar. in aq. tepida macerat. 
contusar. part. j. 
Semin. sinapios seorsim tenuissime con- 
tus. part. ij vel iij. 
Accuratè mistis F. pasta. 
S. Applicetur loco indicate, donec vesica enata sit. 
6. Vesicatorium cataplasmodes. Vid. ibid. p. 45. 
ꝶ. Cantharid. sine alis contritar. in pulv.
tenuem. ʒij. 
Accuratè misceantur cum 
Fermenti panis, pauxillo cum aceto 
subacti ʒvj. 
D. 
S. Applica spatio xij horarum, vel donec in vesicam 
manifestò epidermis elata sit. 
7. Emplastrum vesicatorium. 
ꝶ. Empl. de mucilagin. ℥jß. 
Cantharid. sine alis tenuiter pulv. ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
Accuratè mista extende super alutis orbulatis. 
S. Applicentur subutroque poplite, aut alibi; ut in- 
dicatio fert.
Bb3 Of 


374 Of Frications. 
Of FRICATIONS. 
§.456. BY a FRICATION (fricium vel frica- 
torium) we understand an external me- 
dicine which is to be applied by friction, or rub- 
bing into the surface of some soft external part of 
the body. 
§.457. Frications are distinguished into three 
kinds, according to their consistence: dry, soft, 
and liquid. The first is administer’d in the form 
of dry fumes, by rubbing with cloths; but the 
latter, in humid vapours, or wet cloths. 
§.458. The MATERIALS and FORMS for fri- 
cations may be understood from (§.272. 283. 369. 
393. 421. 432. 443.): subservient hereto, are mix- 
tures, lotions, fumes or vapors, ointments, bal- 
sams, liniments, &c. 
§.459. The USE of frications was very consi- 
derable among the antients, and is with us not con- 
temptible at present: those who are acquainted how 
much of some medicines may be introduced to the 
blood by external frictions, and have experienced 
the great effects they produce there, cannot be ig- 
norant of their uses. 
§.460. SPECIMENS of medicines to be used by 
friction, have been occasionally exhibited in the 
several places before cited (§.458.), to which we 
may add one more.  
Fricium, mixturæ mediæ formâ, antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Sp. lavendul. ℥iij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Tinctur. castorei ʒiv. 
Aq. stillat. lavend. ℥vj 
M. 
S. Perfricentur bac cum misturâ partes. 
Of

375 Of a Frontal. 
Of External FORMS, proper to particular 
Parts. 
§.461. I Might here omit to treat particularly of 
these forms; since they are in effect the 
same, and not different from several of those which 
we have consider’d in the preceding histories: 
their difference arising only from their being adapt- 
ed to particular parts (§.294.), from whence they 
take their particular denominations. 
Of FORMS proper to the Head.
Of a CUCUFA, or Scul-cap. See §.331. 
and 342. 
Of a FRONTAL. 
§.462. A Frontal is some external medi- 
cine, to be apply’d to the forehead 
and temples for various uses. 
§.463. The substances applied to these parts, are 
generally either in the form of a dry (§.320.) or 
liquid (§.331.) epithem, a boiled (§.345.) or 
crude (§.356.) cataplasm (but more frequently 
the latter), an ointment (§.421.), balsam (§.432.), 
or liniment (§.443.).  
§.464. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP- 
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient for 
the composition and application of this form, have 
neither of them any thing in particular, except 
the particular name, and the part §.462. Some- 
times the ingredients change the name of this form:
Bb4 as 


376 Frontals. 
as when the mixture, consisting of oil and vine- 
gar, especially of roses, is termed oxyrrhodinum; 
or of constipating substances beat into a cataplasm 
with some liquor, anacollema. For the rest, the 
dry rose-cake, made from the leaves, left after the 
distillation of the water, is sometimes used as a ve- 
hicle (§.328. n° 3.) for this form. 
§.465. The USES of this form are principally 
for cooling, moistening, relaxing, easing, and re- 
pelling; seldom used for the intentions of dispers- 
ing, attracting, warming, &c. and in the appli- 
cation of it for external and internal diseases of the 
head, it requires great circumspection; left by not 
removing, or even fixing, the cause of the disorder, 
there should arise a stupor, or lethargic indispo- 
sition; or by constringing the external parts, it 
should chance to throw the disease inwards. The 
election of ingredients for this form, is self- 
evident. 
§.466. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
l. Oxyrrhodinum demulcens, refrigerans, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Olei infus. rosar. ℥jß. 
Acet. sambuc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. opii cum sp. 
Acet. parat. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij. 
M. s. a. F. oxyrrhodinum. D. cum 
Placent. rosac. 
S. Placenta hoc liquore irrorata fronti & tempori- 
bus utrinque applicelur: exsiccata rursum humec- 
tetur; donec somnus obrepat.
2. 

377 Frontals. 
2. Frontale cataplasmodes, hypnoticum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. hyoscyam. 
Flor. rhœad. ana ʒij. 
Capit. rec. papav. hort. cum semin. 
n°.iij. 
Cum Acet. rosac. q. s. in pastam trita ex- 
hibe. 
S. Inclusa linteo fronti applicentur tepida. 
3. Frontale, linimenti forma, anodynum, discu- 
tiens, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Unguent. nervin. ʒvj. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Croci pulveris gr. viij. 
Ol. infus. chamœmel. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Exceptum stupis cannabinis, duobus linteis, inclu- 
sum, fronti imponatur. 
4. Anacollema constipans. 
ꝶ. Bol. Armen. 
Succ. acaciœ ana ʒij. 
Mastiches. 
Sang. dracon. 
Lap. hœmatit. ana ʒj. 
Cum Album. ov. conquass. q. s. redacta in 
pultem excipe stupis cannabinis. D. 
S. Fronti & temporibus applicentur. 
5.


378 Of Collyria. 
5. Sacculus frontalis, calesaciens, discutiens, ad ce- 
phalalgiam aut vertiginem, a causa frigida natam. 
ꝶ. Herb. rec. rutœ. 
Fol. rosmarin. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Sambuc. 
Summit. anethi ana m. ß. 
Caryophill. arom. ʒjß. 
Conscissa, tusa grosso modo, include binis 
sacculis oblongis, interpassandis. D. 
cum 
Spirtús lavendul. ℥iij. 
S. Alternatim fronti applicentur irrorati prius spi- 
ritu simul exhibito. 
Nota. To this place also belongs the emplastra 
temporalia, which are sufficiently intelligible, from 
what has been said of the emplaster at §.405. 
Of COLLYRIA. 
§.467. A COLLYRIUM is an external me- 
dicine to be applied to the eyes
for various uses. 
§.468. It is often exhibited in many of the forms 
which we have before descibed; as injections 
(§.295), aspersions (§.308.), liquid epithems 
(§.320.), and dry epithems (§.331.), cataplasms 
boiled (§.345.) and crude (§.356.), lotions 
(§.369.), humid vapours (§.383.), fumes 
(§.393), ointments (§.421.), liniments (§.443.). 
And from thence, the necessary directions and pre- 
cautions not be deduced.
§.469.

379 Of Collyria.
§.469. But the very great usefulness, tender- 
ness and sensibility of the organ of sight, being 
easily injured from slight causes, do require the 
utmost circumspection in the use of collyria which 
are either repelling or acrimonious: nor should any 
solid substances be applied, but when they have 
been most exactly levigated, to prevent them from 
offending the eye by their roughness; as in the 
dry collyria or sief of the Arabians, which are ap- 
plied alone, or mix'd with some liquor, wherein 
they are not dissolvable. For the same reason the 
mixture of sharp substances should be very equable, 
and the liquids order’d to be strained. 
§.470. The APPLICATION of collyria differs 
with their particular form, and the physician’s in- 
tention. Such as are liquid are usually applied 
to the eye, by dipping lint or a feather in them; 
or else instill’d, by a small tube or a quill, into 
the eye. Those which are of a thicker consistence 
may be applied by in unction, or spread upon 
some suitable vehicle. The dry collyria may be 
sprinkled, or blown into the eye thro’ aquil. 
§.471. The USES of collyria are many and va- 
rious, being sufficiently well adapted to most dis- 
orders of the eyes, when they are prudently di- 
rected; (§.469.) by mollifying, strengthening, 
maturating, resolving, cooling, easing, cleansing, 
&c. 
§.472. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

380 Collyria. 
1. Collyrium liquidum, antiphlogisticum, rep-
pellens, in initio ophthalmiæ externæ. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. plantag. 
Rosar. 
Troch. alb. rhas. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. gr. vj. 
M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Collyrium, quo concusso imbutum linteum quadrupli- 
catum imponatur oculo affecto: recentetur omni 
trihorio. 
2. Collyrium cataplasmodes, antiphlogisticum 
emolliens, demulcens. 
ꝶ. Pom. dulc. q. v. 
Assentur sub. cineribus, aut cum 
Lact. dulc. q. s. coquantur ad molli- 
tiem. Pulpæ per setaceum tra- 
jectæ ℥j. admisce 
Micœ panis alb. ʒvj. 
Album. ovi in liquorem conquass. q. s. 
Ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo exceptum calidè admoveatur 
oculo firmetur sine compressione. Renovetur quar- 
ta quavis horâ. 
3.

381 Collyria. 
3. Collyrium vaporosum, stimulans, roborans ad 
paralysin palpebrarum. 
ꝶ. Herb. majoran. 
Thymi. 
Mar. syriac. ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. 
Chamœmel. 
Bacc. juniper. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, D. ad Chartam. 
S. Species roborantes quarum pars quarta cum vin. 
rubr. pint. 1/4 infusa per horam maceretur tum ebul- 
liat vase aperto, & vapor exhalans per infundibu- 
lum determinetur ad oculum affectum, spatio qua- 
drantis horœ. Id fiat manè & vesperi. 
4. Collyrium siccum, detergens, leniter erodens, 
ad delendas cicatrices opacas corneæ diaphanæ. 
ꝶ. Sacchar. cand. albiss. ℥j. 
Almiin. ust. ℈ij. 
Vitriol. alb. gr. x. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Hujus tantilium bis de die loco erodendo imponatur. 
5. Collyrium, formâ unguenti, ad trachoma. 
ꝶ. Ung. rosac. ℥j. 
Tutiœ prœparat. ʒij. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j. 
Camphor. gr. vj. 
Ol. infus. rosar. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Hujus tantilium illinat palpebris omni vesiperâ,  
cubitum iturus.
Of 


382 Of Errhins.
Of FORMS proper to the Nose. 
§.473. NASALIA, are certain medicines to 
be applied to the internal parts of 
the nose; as well for pleasure, as for the cure of 
particular diseases. Among these, some are apply'd 
in gross substance to the nose, or their vapours on- 
ly are expell'd by heat; which we then term er- 
rhins: others, exhaling their vapours spontane- 
ously, only affect the organs of smelling; and are 
called odoramenta, or smelling-bottles, balls, &c. 
Of ERRHINS. 
§.474. ERRHINS have various forms, and are 
in general either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are infusions (§.211.), de- 
coctions (§.224.), juices (§.235.), emul- 
sions (§.246.), mixtures (§.272.) and drops 
(§.283.). 
2. The soft are electuaries (§.138.), oint- 
ments (§.421.), balsams (§.432.), liniments 
(§.443.). 
3. The solid are powders (§.106. 308.) of 
the two finer kinds (§.107. and 309.), fumes 
(§.393.), pyramidal tents properly call'd na-
sals, which are composed of some powder and 
a glutinous mucilage v. g. the whites of eggs, 
turpentine, honey, labdanum, wax, &c. com- 
pounded as for troches (§.172.): But are some- 
times simple, as ex rad. betœ, cyclaminis, iridis, 
&c. cut into a proper form, or ex sol. betæ, 
nicotianæ, cort. recent. aurant. &c. twisted to- 
gether in a suitable manner.
§.475.

383 Of Errhins.
§.475. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for errhins, with what belongs to them, may be 
learned from the physician’s intention, and their 
various forms (§.474. and loc. ibid. cit.). 
§.479. The APPLICATION of liquid errhins 
(§.474. n° 1.) is performed by injection (§.295.), 
by snuffing them in, and washing them but again, 
(§.369.) by evaporation (§.383.), or like a 
liquid fomentation (§.320.), by introducing 
scraped lint, tents, &c. The soft errhins (§.474
n° 2.) are apply’d either by injunction, or by 
snuffing them up with some proper vehicle, to be 
hereafter mentioned. Errhins of the powder kind 
(§.474. n° 3.) are drawn up the nose like snuff; 
fumes are conducted into the nostrils by a funnel, 
and tents are introduced or thrust there. 
§.477. The USE of errhins is recommended 
by their various virtues, of astringing, mollifying, 
relaxing, easing, opening, stimulating, and by ex- 
citing to sneeze, absterging and discharging the 
mucus, &c. by which operations they may prove 
serviceable not only in diseases proper to the nose, 
but also in those of other parts, where an evacu- 
ation by this emunctory is proper. We should 
also consider what an effect sneezing has upon the 
whole body, by violently shaking it, and whether 
the patient has been accustomed to an evacuation 
at this part, by a constant habit of taking errhins, 
not easy to be broke off. 
§.478. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1.


384 Errhins. 
1. Dococtum mundans ad ozænam. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristoloch. rot. ℥ß.
Herb. veronic.
Menth. ana m. j.  
Cum Aq. pur. q. s. quoque vase clauso per 
1/8 horæ. Colat. ℥xij. adde 
Tinct. myrrh. 
Aloës ana ℥ß. 
Mell. rosac. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur hujus repidi q. s. aliquoties de die: 
turn gossypium aut carpta eo imbuta applicentur. 
2. Liquor stipticus ad narium hæmorrhagiam. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 161. 
ꝶ. Alumin. rup. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. plantag. ℥j 
M. solve. 
S. Turundis ingestis applicetur cavo narium. 
3. Suffitus roborans, nimiam per pares destilla- 
tionem minuens. 
ꝶ. Mastiches. 
Olibani. 
Succini. 
Gumm. anim. ana ʒj. 
Herb. sicc. puleg. ʒij.
M. F. pulvis grossus. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Pujillus hujus prunis inspergatur, fumusque tecto 
capite excipiatur naribus.
4. 
 

385 Errhins. 
4. Electuarium errhinum ad gravedinem. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. galang.  
Irid. florent. ana ʒj. 
Zinziber. ʒß. 
Piper. alb. ℈j. 
Mellis comm. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S. Ter, quater de die, tantillum naribus illinatur, 
aut cum turundâ indatur. 
5. Succus errhinus, muci e naribus excretionem
promovens. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. brassicœ. 
Betonic. 
Anagalb. purp. ana q. s. 
Aq. stillat. majoran. ℥j. 
Contusis simul succum exprime, cujus
℥. iv. adde 
Spir. lilior. convall. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Hujus quantum volâ manus capi potest, mane & 
vesperi, naribus attrahatur. 
6. Nasalia ejusdem virtutis. 
ꝶ. Herb. sicc. majoran. 
Rad. ellebor. alb. 
Sem. nigell. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ℈j. 
Mastiches ʒß. 
Muciiag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Aq. rosar. damasc. fact. q. s.
Ut F. s. a. turundæ pyramidales pro nasalibus. 
S. Manè naribus immittatur. 
Cc 7.

386 Of Odoramenta.
7. Pulvis ptarmicus. 
ꝶ. Fol. siccat nicotian. ℥j. 
Majoran. 
Mari syriac. 
Flor. lavendul.
Lilior. convall. ana ʒij. 
Rad. pyrethri pulver. ʒj. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Attrahatur naribus tantilium, tempore matutino, 
ut sternutatio excitetur. 
Of ODORAMENTA, or Medicines 
to smell at. 
§.479. ODORAMENTA (§.473.) may be 
composed of every thing which emits 
or exhales odorous and medicinal particles, whe- 
ther pleasant or unpleasant. 
§.480. Their FORM, like that of errhins. 
(§.474.), is either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are compounded either of offi- 
cinal liquors only, or else of these and some other 
mixtures (§.272. and 283.) compounded to- 
gether. 
2. The soft, are composed of balsams (§.432.). 
3. The solid, are powders (§.106. 308.), 
or troches (§.172.) made of them, with some 
proper glutinous substance, and formed into odo- 
riserous apples, bails, globules, sopes, &c. But 
odoriserous sopes and wash-balls, being pre- 
pared mostly for pleasure, are at present hardly 
any where made and sold, but at the shops of 
persumers.
§.481. 

387 Odoramenta. 
§.481. These liquid balsams, powders, balls, 
apples, &c. are applied either to or near the nose; 
that they may the more strongly act upon the or- 
gan of smelling: the globules are usually carried 
about in the hands or bosom; and the sopes serve 
to wash with. 
§.482 From hence (§.479 to 481.) and from 
our intention, it will be easy to judge what may 
be further necessary in prescribing these things, 
agreeable to the rules of composition. 
§.483. The USES of smelling-bottles, balls, 
&c. are principally for pleasure, or for raising the 
spirits by their stimulus, to determine the course 
of the blood and spirits to other parts, and to cor- 
rect the ambient air. Here also consult what has 
been said at (§.85. 100. 396. n° 9. and 441.) 
§.484. SPECIMENS of balsams have been given 
before (at §.442.): examples of the rest follow. 
1. Vapor stimulans nares, in apoplexia imminente 
a causa frigida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ. Tinct. castor. 
Spir. sal. amon. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Subolfaciat sœpe. 
2. Pulvis odoratus, cardiacus. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat cinnamom. gtt. vj. 
Meliss. 
Rorismar. ana gtt. iv. 
Sal. volat. sicc. de sal. ammon. ℈ß. 
Sacchar. albissim. ℥ß 
Cinnab. nat. subtiliss. levigat. q. s. ad 
coccineum ruborem. 
Accurate, cito, mista immittantur vasculo 
vitreo, obthuraculo vitrio claudendo. 
S. Admoveatur naribus in languore.
CC2 3.

388 Of Stomatics. 
3. Pomum odoratum. 
ꝶ. Lahdani ʒiij. 
Benzoin. 
Styrac. calam. ana ʒij. 
Herb. thymi. 
Mari syriac. ana ʒj. 
Camphorœ gr. ij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
Cum Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. aq. cort. 
citri. solut. q. s. F. pomum. 
Ut supra. Ex iisdem quoque globuli magnitudinis 
arbitrariœ formari possunt. 
4. Sapo fragrans. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥viij. 
Pulv. subtiliss. rad. irid. florent. 
Flor. lavendul. ana 3iij. 
Ol. stillat. cort. citr. gtt. xv. 
Tinct. benzoin. aquâ pnœcipitat. q. s. 
Concorporentur in pastam, ex qua for- 
mentur pilæ hinc inde auri foliolis 
exornandæ. 
S. lavandis manibus, faciei, inservit. 
Of STOMATICS, or medicines proper 
to the Mouth. 
§.485. BY STOMATICS we understand such me- 
dicines as are to be applied to any of the 
internal parts of the mouth and fauces. Of these, 
there are three kinds: dentifrices, to correct the 
dis-

389 Of DENTIFRICES. 
disorders of the teeth and gums; apophlegmatisms, 
to discharge the saliva and mucus of the mouth; 
and gargarisms, to wash the membranes of the 
mouth and fauces. 
Of DENTIFRICES. 
§.486. A DENTIFRICES is either liquid, soft, 
or dry. 
1. Liquid dentifrices are usally composed of 
mixtures (§.272.), or drops (§.283.): but 
sometimes officinal liquors, decoctions, infusions, 
expressed juices, &c. are also used. It is then 
also frequently called collutorium, or collutio. 
2. Soft dentifrices may be prescribed in the 
form of an electuary. (§.135.), linctus (§.149.), 
or liniment (§.443.). 
3. A dry dentifrice may be some powder 
(§.106. and 308.) finer or coarser (§.107. 
309.): which may be made into troches (§.172.) 
or sticks (Styli dentifricii) with some proper 
glutinous substance; which latter, are not so 
much in use at present. 
§.487. The INGREDIENTS and their CHOICE, 
&c. for dentifrices, may be understood from con- 
sidering the nature of the disorder to be remedied, 
and the particular form (§.486.) desired. Mineral 
acids should be used with great caution for the 
teeth; otherwise, they may not only whiten, but 
also dissolve them. 
§.488. The USES of dentifrices are principally to 
render the teeth and gums firm, to cleanse ’em and 
free ’em from any scorbutical taint: they may upon 
occasion be also serviceable to cool and mollify 
the gums, in the difficult dentition of infants. 
§.489. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
CC3 1.

390 Dentifrices. 
1. Collutorium in scorbuto a causa calida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Myriœ limonum. 
Mell. rosac. ana ℥ij. 
Sp. sal. dulc. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. rutœ ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Eo sœpiusculè laventer dentes gingivœ. 
2. Linimentum: Vide in §.452. n° 3. 
P. 
3. Collutio, eclegmatis ferè  formâ, refrigerans, 
emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 236. 
ꝶ. Crem. lact. rec. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥j. 
Syr. violar. ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij 
M. 
S. His foveantur gingivœ dolentes. 
4. Opiata dentes detergentes, firmans. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ß. 
Oss. sepiœ. ppt. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. ana ʒj. 
Alumin. usti. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosac. q. s. 
Ut F. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S Manè & post prandium ac cœnam eo fricentur 
dentes, turn abluantur cum spirit, vini myrrhato. 
5.  


391 Of Apophlegmatisms.
5. Pulvis dentifricus. 
ꝶ. Pumicis ppt. ʒij. 
Flor. balaust. 
Rad. irid. flor. 
Myrrh. rubr. ana ʒj. 
Lap. hæmat. ppt.  
Sal. ammoniac. ana ʒß 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Ut supra. 
6. Trochisci vel styli dentifricii. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedent. 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. cum aq 
salviœ fact. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci vel styli probè siccandi. 
Of APOPHLEGMATISMS, or 
Medicines to excite a Spitting. 
§.490. APOPHLEGMATISMS (§.485.) are 
also prescribed in three forms, liquid, 
soft, and dry. 
1. Liquid apophlegmatisms are frequently 
made of decoctions (§.224.), and mixtures, 
(§.272.), but oftener drops (§.283.); some- 
times infusions (§.211.) and expressed juices 
(§.235.) or other officinal liquors are used, 
either uncompounded or mix’d. 
2. A soft apophlegmatism may be some elec- 
tuary (§.138.).  
3. Of dry, there are various kinds, either 
by the way of smoaking (§.395. n° 1.), as 
common tobacco, or a medicated one; or by 
Cc4 letting


392 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
letting a little cake (§.199.) disolve under the 
tongue; or by chewing something in the mouth, 
commonly termed a masticatory, which should 
be solid, tenacious and pungent: for which pun- 
pose are used the solid parts of the more pun- 
gent, or hot and biting vegetables, or concret- 
ed juices which are difficult to dissolve, and gross 
powders (§.106, 107. n° 2.) made of these 
or things of the like kind, which are either used 
loose in the mouth, when they are dissolvable, 
or else included in a bit of linen cloth, like a no- 
dule (§.219. n° 1. (2.)); or they may be 
formed into troches or pastills, with some glu- 
tinous substance (per §.172.). 
§.491. But we are not always at liberty to use 
any of these forms (§.490.) promiscuously. We 
are to consider which are most suitable to the par- 
ticular indication, seat of the disease, and consti- 
tution of the patient. 
1. For dispatch, upon sudden emergencies, it 
is advisable to use liquid apophlegmatisms(§.490. 
n° 1.), especially simple ones, or prepared only 
by mixture. 
2. The same (§.490. n° 1.) are also prefer- 
able in cases, where tough phlegm is to be se- 
parated, from the posterior or more remote 
parts of the mouth. 
3. Apophlegmatisms of the electuary kind, 
(§.490. n° 2.) are mostly of use when a dry 
or liquid one cannot be retained, turned about, 
and directed by manducation in the mouth: as 
frequently happens in paralytic and comatose 
affections; where an electuary kind of apophleg- 
matism being spread upon the palate, gradu- 
ally dissolves, and acts more effectually. 
4. The smoaking kind of apophlegmatisms 
are intolerable, to many who have been unaccus-
tomed 

393 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
tomed to them, they act too roughly upon the 
nerves; and the smoak not being dextrously ex- 
cluded from the cavities of the nose, larynx and 
pharynx, excites vertigos, head-achs, coughs, 
sickness and vomiting. 
5. Children and nicer patients should not be 
confined to apophlegmatisms which require a 
tedious mastication. They will be better pleas’d 
with little cakes (§.490. n° 3.), in which the 
pungent substances are none of the strongest, and 
cover’d with sugar. 
6. When the humours of the mouth are to be 
discharg’d slowly, in large quantities, or for a 
considerable time, then apophlegmatisms which 
will bear mastication, are preferable to others; 
unless any thing of the former (n° 3, 4, 5.) 
forbids. 
§.492. The MATERIALS for apophlegmatisms 
are taken from those substances, which being put 
into, retained and moved in the mouth, do exert 
a relaxing, or rather a stimulating power; so as to 
solicit a greater discharge than usual of the saliva 
and mucus which are deposited in that cavity. 
(V. H. Boerh. Inst. Med. §.1195. 1197. and 1200. 
n° 1, 2, and 3. ). We have in this place nothing 
to do with medicines which promote spitting, by 
being received into the stomach and exciting a 
nausea; nor with those which produce a ptyalism, 
by being convey’d into, and dissolving the cohe- 
sion of the blood, for we are here treating of 
topical remedies, proper to the mouth (per 
§.485.). 
§.493. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
an apophlegmatism is to be directed by their de- 
gree of strength and form required (§.491.). 
1. The materia medica furnishes the physician 
with a vast field of substances, capable of pro- 
moting

394 Of Apophlegmatisms.  
moting this discharge; some of which are 
stronger, others weaker; but most of them are 
either emollient, saponaceous, aromatic, or re- 
pleat with a sharp or pungent oil or salt; from 
whence the physician is to make a choice, agree- 
able to his intention and circumstances of the 
case. Of these, apophlegmatisms may be easily 
made with various menstrums, watery, vinous, 
decoctions, infusions, expressed juices, &c. of a 
greater or less degree of strength: and their 
composition maybe order'd by the rules at §.211. 
224. 235. They may be qualified for tender 
palates, by adding sugar and honey.
2. The materials proper for apophlegmatisms 
by mixture (§.490. n° 1.) are, distilled wa- 
ters, vinegar, spirits, tinctures, essences, oils, 
and, salts prepared from the preceding ingre- 
dients (n° 1.); which are more convenient for 
this purpose after dilution. 
3. The method of preparing medicated to- 
bacco, and fumes, for apophlegmatisms, has 
been before related, (at §.395. n° 1. 396. n° 4 
and seq.). 
4. Spices, roots, barks, leaves and seeds, which 
are whole, and of the more pungent kind, do 
often undergo a previous maceration in wine, 
vinegar, and spirit of wine. Concreated juices 
of the like nature, which are not of a very dis- 
agreeable smell, will each of them afford an ef- 
ficacious masticatory: such are myrrh, mastic, 
&c. Some can ever chew the leaves of tobacco 
without nausea: and the indians are pleased with 
chewing their betel and arac, mix'd with lime. 
5. Or the preceding ingredients (n° 4.), by 
triture, are formed powders (§.490. n° 3.); 
which being included in bits of linen cloth, make 
nodules; mix'd up with sugar, they may be 
formed into rotulœ or lozenges; incorporated 
with

395 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
with wax, mastich, honey, and other glutinous 
substances, they will form masticatories; but 
mix’d up with equal parts, or more of simple or 
medicated honey, they will afford an electuary: 
all to be used for apophlegmatisms. 
6. In prescribing apophlegmatisms for masti- 
cation, we should constantly abstain from those 
substances which are of a detestible smell and 
taste because they are to come so near, and lie 
so long upon those organs of sensation: though 
by custom or habit, the most nauseous may be- 
come tolerable (per n° 4.). 
§.494. The ORDER, DOSE, GENERAL QUAN-
TITY, PROPORTION,and SUBSCRIPTION for apo- 
phlegmatisms, are suffciently apparent from what 
has been said under these heads for forms of the like 
nature; from comparing what is deliver’d at (§.490. 
to 494.), and from consulting the subsequent spe- 
cimens. The size or weight of pastills for this pur- 
pose, are generally larger than the others (§.177.): 
they are sometimes ℈j, ʒß, or even a whole ʒ. 
§.495. With regard to the SUPERSCRIPTION 
or direction to the patient for apophlegmatisms, 
we need say but little, it is of itself so obvious. 
This evacuation is generally the best excited upon 
an empty stomach: so that these medicines are 
commonly exhibited some hours before meals; ex- 
cept when the least delay is of dangerous conse- 
quence. The discharge is forwarded by inclining 
the head, with the mouth downward; which pos- 
ture will also prevent any of the pungent apo- 
phlegmatism from slipping into the fauces, larynx 
or pharynx. Their operation is seldom continu’d 
longer than half an hour. There will be hardly 
any occasion to order the patient to wash his mouth, 
after the operation, with some mild liquor, as 
warm water, milk, &c. for he will of himself be 
ready enough to do that. 
§.496.

396 Apophlegmatisms. 
§.496. The USES of apophlegmatisms are 
very considerable when judiciously directed, for 
they produce very great effects obtainable by no 
other means, in cold habits and defluctions; in 
comatose, paralytic and epileptic disorders; in lu- 
cophlegmatic or watery habits, the watery quinsey, 
tooth-ach, &c. But the abuse of a good thing, 
in its place, may be of the worst consequence; for 
by depriving the blood of too great quantities of 
its more subtle lymph by the salival glands, it will 
extenuate the whole habit, as at also will by im- 
peding chylification; but when once the body is 
accustomed to it, 'tis no small difficulty to lay it 
aside. 
§.497. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Decoctum apophlegmatizans, ingruente apo- 
plexiâ frigidâ utilissimum. 
Vide H.Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 175. 
ꝶ. Rad. imperator. 
Pyrethri ana ℥j.
Fol. recent. rutœ. 
Majoran. ana m.j. 
Flor. lavendul. m. ß. 
Semin. sinapis contus. ℥ß
Concissa, cum vin. alb. libr. ij. coque per 1/2 
horæ, vase exacte clauso. Colat. admisce 
Spir. sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Mell. anthos. ℥ß. 
D. 
S. Hujus tepidi pauxilium ore detineat ac volutet, 
humorem prolectum jugiter exscreans. Repetat 
pro necessitate urgente, quavis horâ aut citius. 
2

397 Apophlegmatisms.
2. Mixtura similis, odontalgiæ catarrhosæ apta. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. lavendul. ℥vj. 
Spirit. regin. hungar. ℥ij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒj. 
Tinct. sal. tart. helmont. ʒij.
Zinzib. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
M. D. vitro clauso. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Apophlegmatismus, formâ succi pressi 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. becabung. m. j. 
Cochlear. m. ß. 
Rad. recent. ari. 
Armorac. 
Sem. sinapis ana ℥ß
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succum, cui 
admisce 
Vin. alb. ℥j. ß. 
Sacchari alb. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus haustulum, omni manè ore prius aqua eluto, 
contineat aliquamdiu scorbuto frigido laborans, 
tum exspuat una cum saliva sic prolectâ. 
4. Pulvis apophlegmatizans. 
ꝶ. Rad. pyrethri 
Cort. magellanic. ana ʒjß. 
Cubeb. 
Cardamom. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ʒß. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒj.  
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. vj. 
Contusis F. pulvis crassiusculus. D. in scatulâ. 
S. Capiat omni mane, jejunus quantum apice cultri 
sustineri potest, & commandat, exspuatque humorem 
proritatum.
5.

398 Apophlegmatisms. 
5 Rotulæ sialogogæ. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedentes subtilissimè tritas.
Sacchar. albiss. aq. rosar. solut. & in- 
spissat. sextuplum. 
Ut F. s. a. rotulæ, 
S. Una vel duœ sub lingua detineantur, ut sensim li- 
quescant. Excernatur liquidum affluens. 
6. Electuarium ex iisdem. 
ꝶ. Species easdem pulveris, subtilissime 
comminutas. 
Mellis anthos. triplum.
M. exactè. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus tantillum palato affricetur in morbis sopo- 
rosis frigidís. 
7. Nodulus similis. 
ꝶ. Pulver. prœcedent. ʒjß. 
Mastiches  ʒiij. 
Mista illigentur panno lineo, ut F. nodulus. 
S. Mandatur leniter mane per 1/2 horam, ut saliva pro- 
ritetur exspuenda. 
8. Trochisci masticatorii. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 175 
ꝶ. Mastich. 
Cerœ alb. 
Zinzib. ana ℥j.
F. s. a. parvi pastilli, singuli ʒß vel ʒj. 
S. Ut supra. 
9. Pulveres sialagogæ.
Vid. §.126. n° 16. pag. 69.
Of

399 Of Gargarisms. 
Of GARGARISMS. 
§.498. A GARGAISM (§.485.) is a liquid 
medicine, adapted to wash the inter- 
nal parts of the mouth and fauces, for various 
uses. It is also termed (collutio vel collutorium) 
a mouth-wash, when intended for no other use but 
to cleanse and wash those parts. 
§.499. The FORM of this medicine is always 
liquid, generally composed of some infusion 
(§.211.), decoction (§.224.), expressed juices 
(§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), juleps (§.261.), 
or mixtures, (§.272.): and is to be accordingly 
prescribed by the rules for those forms. 
§.500. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for a gargarism, is to be regulated by the physi- 
cian’s particular intention, and the form or kind of 
liquor to compose it (§.499.), in conjunction 
with a consideration of the rules for these heads, 
deliver’d under the internal forms before cited 
(§.499.). 
§.501. The ORDER, GENERAL QUANTITY, 
and PROPORTION for a gargarism, may be also
prescribed by the rules for these heads, delivered 
under the foresaid forms (§.499.). The DOSE is 
never determined by weight, but the capacity of 
the mouth; being as much as may be conveniently 
taken without distending the cheeks. 
§.502. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for a gargarism, orders F. liquor pro 
gargarismate vel collutorio. 
§.503. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for gargarisms, acquaints him with the 
method of applying or using them, which is not 
always the same. For sometimes the liquor is to  
be

400 Gargarisms. 
be shook about in the mouth with the head inclin’d 
backward; that it may the better penetrate and 
cleanse, or soak into the proper parts. At other 
times the liquor is only to be retained in the mouth 
quietly, without any agitation; when it will, by 
its motion, offend the inflamed, or otherwise in- 
jur’d parts, or cannot be prevented from slipping 
into the larynx or pharynx by such agitation. There 
are some other cases which require a gargarism to 
be injected by a syringe: particularly in infants, 
very weak patients, or such as cannot drink. This 
kind of medicine is also more frequently used warm 
or hot, than cold: but the latter is usually refer’d 
when the intention is to astringe or repel. 
§.504. The USE of gargarisms is very consider- 
able in most disorders of the internal parts of the 
mouth, sauces, and parts adjacent; for tumours, 
inflammations, ulcers, the thrush, great drought and 
rigidity, or too great relaxation, watery defluctions, 
and phlegm, &c. When the intention is to mol- 
lify, astringe, moisten, cool, dry up, warm, loosen, 
suppurate, deterge, &c. by this topical applica- 
tion immediately to the parts affected. 
§.505. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Collutio antiseptica, ad ulcera oris, a scorbuto 
putrido nata. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Spir. salis marin. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. salviœ ℥viij. 
M.
S. Hoc liquore colluat os & fauces sœpius de die.
2. 

401 Gargarisms.
2. Collutorium ad anginam inflammatoriam, anti- 
phlogisticum, resolvens, refrigerans. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. sambuc. ℥xvj. 
Acet. vin. destillat. ℥ij. 
Sal. prunell. ʒjß.  
Rob. sambuc. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Callido hoc liquore, ore detento, fauces assiduò hu-
mectentur. 
3. Decoctum emolliens, demulcens, ad promoven- 
dum ptyalysmum mercurialem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphorism. 1475.
ꝶ. Herb. althœœ m. ij. 
Malvœ. 
Flor. rhœad. 
Verbasci ana m.j. 
Rad. glycirrhiz. ℥j. 
Cum Seri. lact. rec. q. s. decoct. spatio 1/4 
horæ, turn colat. express. ℔ij. admisce 
Mellis puri ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Hoc. tepido gargariset & colluat jugiter totum 
oris cavum. 
4. Aliud laxans & detergens, ad crustæ aphthosæ 
lapsum promovendum. 
Vid. Ketelaar de Aphthis p. 38. 
ꝶ. Hordei mundat. ℥j. 
Passul exacinat. ℥ij. 
Ficuum n°.iij. 
Liquorit. ras. ℥iij. 
Coque ex aq. pur. turn cola & exprimè. 
Colat. ℔ij. admisce syr. jujubin. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Tepidum ore semper contineatur, &, sipotè, gar- 
garisetur.
Dd 5. 

402 Of Glysters. 
5. Infusum balsamicum consolidans, ad ulcera fau- 
cium mundata. 
ꝶ. Herb. agrimon. 
Veronic. 
Salviœ. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Betonic. 
Rhœad. ana m. ß. 
Infundantur cum aq. pur. fervid. ℥xx. 
stent per horam infusa, vase clauso, 
tum colat. express. admisce mell. rosat. 
℥ij. 
S. Ut supra. 
Concerning SCUTES: See §.331. 342. 414. 431. 
Of Intestinal GLYSTERS. 
§.506. A Glyster (termed also clysma, ene- 
ma, lavamentum intestinale,) is some 
kind of liquor, to be injected by the anus into the 
rectum, and the other large intestines; with a view 
to alter their morbid state, nourish the body, or 
discharge their fæces. It is therefore a member 
of injections (§.295. & seq.), of which we gave 
a general treatment before, and may from thence 
be in a great measure understood. 
§.507. The MATERIALS, in general, do re- 
ceive, or are received. 
1. The excipiens or receiving, is some liquor, 
either (1.) in vulgar use; as common and smith’s- 
forge-water, new-milk, skim’d-milk, whey, ale, 
wine, urine, &c. Or, (2.) retained in the shops, or
ready 

403 Of Glysters. 
prepared by the apothecary, so as not to require 
extemporaneous prescription; as Aq. stillat. lac. 
chalybiat. dococt. hord, avenœ, specier. emollient. 
carminant. clysmat. ordin. juscula carn. olea pressa, 
infusa, &c. Or (3.) made by extemporanous 
decoction, seldom infusion, agreeable to the phy- 
sician’s prescription. 
2. The excipienda are all things suitable to 
the physician’s intention, and capable of a solu- 
tion in the preceding liquors (n° 1.): either 
in (1.) the watery; as electuaries, juices, extracts, 
salt, sugar, honey, sope, eggs, syrups, &c. Or 
(2.) oily, as oils by infusion, decoction, expres- 
sion and distillation, fats, butter, balsams, espe- 
cially turpentine, ointments, &c. Or (3.) of 
the powder kind not soluble, which are but very 
seldom used in glysters. 
§.508. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be regulated by the different intention 
of the physician, together with the known virtues 
of the medicines, their price, and more or less 
easy preparation, with the other circumstances, 
both of the patient and medicine: and may be 
easily determined in particular cases. Hence 
1. The reader may here peruse what has been 
said before of injections at §.299. 
2. When there is very sudden occasion for the 
assistance of this form, as is frequently the case, 
we may omit infusions and decoctions with the 
other excipienda, and express’d oils, as requir- 
ing a too tedious preparation (per. §.42.). 
Tho' there are not wanting decoctions, &c. rea- 
dy prepared in the shops, adapted to most inten- 
tions. 
3. In prescribing this form, we shou’d avoid the 
more costly ingredients; especially when the gly- 
ster is to be frequently repeated: by which means 
Dd2 we

404 Of Glysters. 
we may prevent the poor patient from suffering 
too much in his pocket, and give the apothe- 
cary no opportunity of sophisticating the com- 
position, who may think any thing good enough 
to wash the grosser intestines, being also sensible 
that this kind of medicine is seldom examined 
into. 
4. The several emollient, carminative, and 
other species of the shops should be avoided, in 
extemporaneous prescriptions, as much as pos- 
sible; because, by long standing, they lose their 
virtues, breed insects, or are otherwise corrupted. 
It will be no great trouble to prescribe those that 
are fresh made. 
5. The mixture of oily and aqueous substances 
for this form, need not be so very intimate or 
exact, as is requisite for the internal ones, (at 
§.274. n° 6.) tho' the addition of honey, yolks 
of eggs, sugar, salt, sope, &c. will answer this 
purpose, at the same time it does other inten- 
tions. The turpentines should indeed be very 
exactly mix’d up with the yolk of an egg for 
this form, that by the division of their parts, 
they may have the greater action: for they are 
commonly us’d as digestives in glysters. 
6. We may ask why some forbid the use of 
acids in glysters, who yet, at the same time, 
make very free with the strongest emetics, and 
cathartics in this form. In short, when there is 
any putrefaction to be corrected, or febrile heat 
to be kept under, there is reason enough to make 
use of the weaker acids. 
7. You may very well omit ingredients of the 
powder kind for glysters, since there are other 
substances enough suitabie to every intention. 
But if you intend to use them, be mindful of the 
caution (at §.299. n° 4.) 
8.

405 Of Glysters. 
8. Salt and oil are improperly left out of gly- 
sters for the worms, for who will say they de- 
light only in sweet things, when they make their 
nests in such as are very acrimonious? When 
they are once kill’d, they quickly dissolve, and 
may be afterwards easily discharged, 
9. When the intention is to nourish by this 
form, nothing can be more proper than flesh
broths, because these do not so much require 
digestion by the intestines, but may be imme- 
diately transmitted to the blood after their 
immission, without any bad consequence; but 
when the heat of the body will much incline 'em 
to putrefaction, it may be proper to season ’em 
with a little salt and spice. 
10. Lastly, as the physician is to do nothing 
without a reason (per §.11, 12. 15.) so, when 
he is directed to prescribe a glyster, he should 
consider what kind will best answer his inten- 
tion, that he may afterwards the more readily 
select the proper ingredients for its composition. 
Hence he will perceive that all the specifics re- 
commended in this form for the head, bread, sto- 
mach, liver, uterus, will hardly do any thing 
more than common diluents, moistners, emol- 
lients, warmers, coolers, discutients, re- 
solvents, and stimulators. Thus the manage- 
ment of this form will become easy to the be- 
ginner, and he will be under no necessity of con- 
stantly adhering to set forms of glysters pre- 
scribed by others. 
11. From what has been said (n° 10.) it 
also appears, that there is no occasion for a nu- 
merous and confus’d mass for this form, one in- 
gredient alone will be frequently sufficient, with- 
out any other mixture; but two of the following 
are used oftener e.g. water, milk, whey, honey, 
sugar, nitre, oil, butter, &c. urine alone, or 
Dd3 common

406 Of Glysters.
common salt dissolved in five times its quantity 
of water, and a decoction of tobacco leaves are 
generally prefer’d when there is occasion for a 
strong stimulus. 
§.509. The ORDER OF prescribing ingredients for 
this form, is the same with that for internal decoc- 
tion. (§.227.) Infusions (§.2l4.) or mixtures (§.275.); 
for to one of those forms all glysters may be reduced. 
§.510. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
for this form are equal to one another, because there 
is seldom more prescribed than is to be injected, at 
a time (§.68. n° 1.). But this quantity varies, 
1. With regard to the age, for which the fol- 
lowing rules of proportion may be of service. 
For a new-born infant—℥ ij. 
One more advanced—℥ iij. jv.
A child—℥ vj, vij. 
An adult—℥ viij. x. xij. 
2. With regard to the patient’s habit: large 
people will bear more; small, less. The quan- 
tity of a glyster should be small, and quickly 
discharged again, when the patient has a diffi- 
cult respiration, intestines distended with wind, 
or externally compress’d by some incumbent 
body, as a large fœtus, water, &c.
3. In proportion to their effects or operations, 
the quantity may be large when the intention is 
to dilute, cool, moisten or mollify, when no- 
thing opposes. When it is to give a strong sti- 
mulus the quantity should be less, left by its sti- 
mulus, and being too large, it may be evacuated 
too soon. When the glyster is to be retain’d a- 
considerable time, then also its quantity should 
be less, which is chiefly to be observ’d in nourish- 
ing glysters. 
4. When the quantity of a glyster is too large 
to be injected at once, it may be proper to give 
it in small quantities, at intervals. 

407 Of Glysters.
§.511. For the mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for glysters, it is hardly possible to be de- 
termined, for all cases, even by general bounds: 
but the physician will find no great difficulty to 
settle the due proportion in his particular case, by 
being attentive to his indication (§.508.), the 
medicinal virtues of the ingredients, and the con- 
stitution of his patient, with the proper degree of 
consistence for injecting (§.299. n° 4.), &c. 
Hence, 
1. When cathartics are given by infusion, de- 
coction, or mixture in glysters, they are gene- 
rally prescribed in a proportion as large again, 
as when to be given internally by the mouth; 
even, upon occasion, three times as much, or 
more is order’d, when the intention is to give 
a strong stimulus. 
2. The proportion of salts which are neither 
acid nor alcaline, as are most of those used in this 
form, may be ʒj or ij, to ℥x of the liquor, 
when intended to give a moderate stimulus. 
But sometimes ℥j or ij, is order’d in the strong- 
est glysters (§.508.). 
3. The proportion of substances in consistence 
like honey or syrup, is very undetermined; be- 
ing limited by the strength of the medicine, and 
after that, its consistence; so that it may be 
deem’d the largest proportion, when these and 
the liquor are taken in equal quantities. 
4. Oily or fat substances are seldom taken in 
a larger proportion than one fourth part of the 
whole, except when they compose the whole 
form. There is seldom more than ℥ß or ʒvj. 
of the turpentines mix’d with ℥x of liquor. 
5. Ingredients of the solid, dry and powder 
kind are never order’d in a large proportion;
left they should run into grumes, or render the
Dd4 form 


408 Of Glysters.
form of too thick a consistence; ʒj, ij, or iij. 
may be enough for an adult (§.310. n° 1.). 
6. Opiates, and the strongest medicines, 
which extend their energy to the habit, and 
insinuate into the minutest vessels, should be very 
cautiously used in glysters. For even in the large 
intestines, there is a considerable intertexture of 
nerves; and there are also some absorbent veins, 
or small lacteals. So that an imprudent use of 
drastic or deleterious remedies in this form, may 
prove of the very worst consequence. A patient 
has been even known to sleep to eternity, by 
giving gr. jv. of opium in a glyster. 
7. We should be also no less circumspect in 
limiting the proportion of remedies which di- 
mulate in this form, considering whether or no, 
in what habits, and what quantity, they may 
be properly used. Or else, by a rash addition, 
or a timorous omission, all hopes may be fru- 
strated. So that when the intention is to raise 
the spirits, evacuate or revell, we may be pret- 
ty free with those which stimulate: but when 
the glyster is to mollify, dilute, relax, ease, or 
nourish, we should exclude acrimonious, or sti- 
mulating substances. 
§.512. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, may say something of 
what relates to the infusion, decoction, or mixture 
(§.218, 219. 231. 279.); except when there is 
no occasion for perfect depuration: concluding F. 
enema or clysma. But as the injection of this form 
is frequently referr’d to the apothecary, this part 
of the prescription may sometimes mention the pro- 
per instrument, whereby it should be given. We 
may also here insert, 
1. What age the patient is of, whether an in- 
fant, child, or adult; that the anus may be fitted 
with

409 Of Glysters. 
with a sizable tube: tho’ the apothecary may ge- 
nerally guess at this, by the quantity of liquor 
(§.510. n° 1.). 
2. Of what sex; when adult: for women 
love to help one another in this office. 
3. The time of administration: whether pre- 
sently, in the morning, evening, &c. for there 
is no hour, of either day or night, but will ad- 
mit of using this form, upon urgent necessity. 
Or else, the most convenient time is supposed 
to be when the stomach is empty. 
But supposing the method of injecting this 
form to be sufficiently known, we shall consider 
what else might be brought in here, under our 
next head. 
§.513. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is not always necessary, 
only when the subscription (§.512.) does not 
give a brief instruction for its use. And in that case 
we may begin with the title (per §.60. n° 3. and 
§.506.), and the rest, as may be understood from 
§.512. n° 1, 2, 3. But it may be sometimes 
more proper to give a verbal, than a written ad- 
monition concerning its administration and action. 
This part may therefore direct. 
1. What is to be done before injection: which 
is various in different cases, and may be ascer- 
tained by the physician from his indication. 
But we may observe one thing: that in giving 
nourishing glysters, the intestines should be first 
cleansed from their fœces, by giving one that is 
cathartic; that the liquor may be the sooner and 
more purely absorb’d. 
2. What regards the injecting itself of this 
form. Where it is required (1.) that the liquor 
be made so warm, as nearly to equal the heat 
of an human body in health. We may judge of  
the

410 Of Glysters. 
the degree of heat by applying the bladder, which 
includes the glyster, to the face, lips, or back 
of the hand; if it appears not too hot to those 
parts, it is fit for use. The injection of this form, 
too hot or cold, may either of them be hurtful 
to the patient, congeal the yolks of eggs, in- 
spissate the fat or other substances, and obstruct 
the tube. (2.) The posture of the patient, most 
convenient to receive the glyster into his intes- 
tines by the tube. Some physicians approve of 
the patient’s lying on his left side, as most con- 
venient; because that will give the liquor a descent 
in its passage, to the sigmoid flexure of the con 
lon, which lies on the left * side, before it forms, 
the rectum. But then the inclination of the 
rectum a little to the right side, in its ascent 
from the anus, will give some resistance to the 
impulse of the liquor; as will also the pressure 
of the super-incumbent intestines upon the lower 
part of the colon, on the left side, next to the 
rectum: and then the inconstancy or lusus na- 
turœ in her formation and disposition of this sig- 
moid flexure of the colon, placing it sometimes 
on the left side † of the rectum, will make this 
still more uncertain. So that I rather agree 
with the generality, that it is best to lie on the 
right side. But it may be sometimes proper 
to lie on neither side but prone. (3.) For 
the patient to keep still or quiet, with an easy 
respiration; left by a strong contraction of the 
abdominal muscles, the glyster might be ob- 
structed in its passage, or be afterwards too 
quickly dischaged. (4.) The instruments for 
injecting the glyster, which are different in se-
veral 
* Vid. Eustach. tab. anat. x. fig. 2. 4. 
† Idem ibid. fig. 5. 

411 Of Glysters. 
veral counties *, the particulars of which are 
not here to be enumerated. (5.) That the in- 
jection of this form be performed gradually, 
and not too forcibly. 
3. What is to be done after the injection is 
over. That is, for the patient to turn gently 
from the right to his left side, or upon his back; 
recommending him to a small and easy respira- 
tion, with a contraction of the sphincter ani, 
when the glyster is to be retained any consider- 
able time in the intestines. 
411 
§.514. The USES of this form (in general, 
have been in some measure intimated at §.506. and 
508.). are too many and considerable, to speak 
particularly to each of them here: they may be 
conveniently used in all ages and habits, even to 
the youngest infant. But when stimulating, they 
may be hurtful to those who are subject to the 
piles, and a too long or unnecessary use of them, will 
dull the peristaltic motion of the larger intestines, 
and render the patient more constipated, so that 
he must be always oblig’d to use this incentive, to 
excite them to their office. Those who affirm there 
can be no such thing as a nourishing glyster, seem 
to be ignorant of what we said before (§.511.
n° 6.): for the indefatigable anatomist Winslow † 
has demonstrated to the royal academy, that the 
human colon has lacteals, and shew’d them repleat 
with chyle. And the patient’s becoming suddled, 
by even a moderate use of wine, or its spirit in 
glysters, seems to evince the same, &c. 
515. Take the following SPECIMENS.
1. 
* Vid. R. de Farvacques Medic. Pharm. book. III. capit. X. 
† In his Anat. Exposit. Sect. VIII. of the abdomen, n° 219. 


412 Glysters.
1. Clysma meconium induratum resolvens evacuans. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 225. 
ꝶ. Seri lact. recent. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒjß. 
Mell. ʒij. 
M. F. clysma. 
Pro infante recens nato. 
2. Aliud vermes expellens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Vitriol. mart. gr. xv. 
Aq. stillat. cichor. ℥iv. 
M. F. lavamentum. 
Pro puero trienni aut quadrienni. 
3. Clysma refrigerans, antiphlogisticum in rabie 
canina. Ibid. p. 183. 
ꝶ. Nitri ʒij. 
Acet. sambuc. 
Mell. rosar. ana ℥j. 
Aq. decoct. hord. ℥x.
M. F. clysma. 
S. Injiciatur bis vel ter in die. 
5. Clysma nutriens. Ibid. p. 139. 
ꝶ. Jur. Carnium ℥x. 
Sal. nitri gr. x. 
Sp. salis gtt. vj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur octava quaque hora, postquam primo 
clysmate purgante elota alvus fuit. 
6.

413 Glysters. 
6. Clysma emolliens, anodynus, aperiens, calcu- 
lum pellens. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 243. 
ꝶ. Herb. malvœ. 
Parietar. 
Heder. terrestr. ana m. j. 
Seri lact. recent. q. s. 
Coque spatio 1/4 horæ. Colat. express. ℥. ix. adde 
Ol. lint ℥i. 
Nitri pur. ʒß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur mane & vesperi. 
7. Clysma balsamicum, anodynum antidysentericum. 
ꝶ. Flor. chamomill. m. ij. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. coque vase clauso 
per 1/4 horæ. Colat. ℥viij. adde 
Tereb. venet. vitell. ov. subact. ʒiij.
Mell.rofar. ℥j.
M. F. enema. 
Pro adulto. 
S. Clysma revellens, salivationis mercurialis impe- 
tum minuens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Flor. sennœ  ℥j. 
Agarici ʒiv. 
Semin. cartham. ʒij. 
Rad. jalapp. ʒj. 
Cum Aqua decoct. colat. ℥xij. injice pro 
clysmate. 
For glysters of the smoak of tobacco, see §.404. ult. 
on fumigations. 
9.

414. Glysters. 
9. Enema catharticum commune. 
♃. Decoct. commun. pro clyst. ℥x. 
Resin. jalap. in vitel. ov. solut. ʒß. 
Syrup. de spin. cervin. ℥j. 
Sal. commun. ℥ß. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Injiciatur tepide, mane, vel hora 
commoda. 
10. Enema nervosum, fortiter purgans. 
♃. Decocti communis ℥x. 
Sal. cathart. amar. 
Vini emet. turbid. 
Syr. de spina cervin. aa ℥jß. 
Ung. opodeld. ʒiij.  
Sal. vol. ammon. ʒj. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema ant. -apoplect. -paralyt. &c. fere frigidum,
hora commoda, injiciendum. 
11. Enema emolliens, & movens commune.
♃. Decocti communis, ℥x. 
Ol. sem. lin. ℥jß. 
Sapon. moll. vulg. ʒiij. 
Elect. lenitiv. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. enema.
S. Enem. lenitiv.—Hora, tepide injiciendmn.
12. 

415 Glysters. 
12. Enema emolliens, laxans, in paraxysmo ne- 
phritico, &c. sopiens. 
♃. Decoct. intestinor. pulli gallinac. ℔j.
Bals. Lucatul. ℥jß. 
Vitell ov. n°. ij. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. iij. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tepide & hora commoda injiciendum. 
13. Enema hystericum, emmenagogicum. 
♃. Sumit. puleg. 
Rutœ. 
Atriplic. olid, aa m. j. 
Coque inaq. font. q. s. Colaturæ ℥x. 
adde 
Gum. galban. 
Asa fœt. aa ℈ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ʒjß.  
Vitel. ov. q. s. ut solvantur gumosa. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema. Carminativ. more usutata injiciendum, 
& pro re nata reiterandum.
14. 


416 Glyjsters.
14. Enema amarum, antihelminticum. 
♃. Sem. santon. contus. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Coque in aq, font. q. s. colaturæ ℥x. adde
Extract. rudii ʒß. 
Syr. rosar. damascen. ʒvj. 
M. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tempore commodo injiciendum & diu 
retinendum. 
15. Enema restringens. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Vini rubri ana ℥iv. 
Confect. fracast. 
Mell. rosar. aa ʒvj. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Tepide, pro re nata injiciendum.
16. Enema febrifugum. 
♃. Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Cort. peruv. pulv. ℥j.
Sal. absynth. ʒjß. 
Coque in aq. font. q. s. ut exprimatur ℔j. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tertia hujus pars, sexta vel quarta 
quaque hora, de die, absente paraxysmo, tepide in- 
jiciatur; & quamdiu poterit, retineatur. 
Of

417 Of Suppositories. 
Of SUPPOSITORIES. 
§.516. A SUPPOSITORY (Bαλαvq, glans, 
& nodulus intestinalis) is a more or less 
solid remedy, of a roundish figure, to be thrust up 
the anus for various uses. Its figure is usually cy- 
lindrical, conical, oval, globular, or in the form 
of an acorn. 
§.517. When this remedy is to be formed of 
but one simple substance, as it very frequently is, it 
will hardly require an extemporaneous prescription: 
Otherwise it will be necessary; for composition. 
§.518. The MATERIALS, and their PREPA- 
RATION for simple suppositories, are well enough 
known by almost every body: some use one thing, 
while others approve of different ones; but all are 
attended with nearly the same effects. Of this kind 
are barley-sugar in a conial form, Venice-soap in 
the same figure, tallow-candle, or wax-candle dipt 
in butter, wash’d lard, a prune or fig turn’d in- 
side outwards, new cheese, and a piece of brown 
paper rowled up in the form of a cane, and spread 
over with butter, honey boiled to a solid consi- 
tence, almonds confected, or cas’d with sugar; a 
globule or cone made of alum, and moistened with 
oil or butter, a raddish-root, a marsh-mallow-root, 
or the root of beet, cabbage, elder, &c. being first 
excoriated or peel’d, cut out into a proper form, and 
moisten’d with oil or fresh butter, or the body of a 
leech prepared in the same manner; these are the 
common means, sometimes, as well for infants as 
adults, to more ,or less lubricate and stimulate the 
rectum, and solicite a discharge of worms, &c.
§.519. A compound suppository is either sti- 
mulating, or only adapted to the peculiar disor- 
ders of the anus and rectum. 
Ee §.520.

418 Of Suppositories. 
§.520. The component ingredients of a stimu- 
lating suppository, are distinguished into excipien- 
tia and excipienda. 
1. The excipient substances are honey boiled 
to a consistence, so that being poured Upon a 
cold marble, it will not adhere but be brittle; 
to this some add an officinal purging electuary, 
or some stimulating juice. Venice soap may be 
also used for the excipient with the yolk of an 
egg, mucilage of gum tragacanth, or barley su- 
gar; but these not so frequently. 
2. The excipienda to be made up with the 
former, are all sharp stimulating substances, whe- 
ther of the consistent or powder kind, of which 
there are a great variety extant in the shops, 
such are sopes, common salt, nitre, sal gem, sal 
ammoniacum, alum vitriolum martis, mouse- 
turds, aloes, myrrh, leaves of senna, agaric, jal- 
lap, species hieræ, the masses of purging pills, 
as cochiæ extract. cathol. succ. absinth. inspissat. 
bull’s gall inspissated, castor with the strongest 
emetics and cathartics, as colocynth, trochisch. 
alhand. scammony, white hellibor, euphorbium, 
crocus metallor. &c. 
§.521. The suppositories which are adapted to 
the peculiar disorders of the anus and rectum con- 
sist of various ingredients, according to the nature 
of their particular indispositions, with the intention 
of stimulating, deterging, corroding, healing, mol- 
lifying, easing, astringing, &c. There is here no 
occasion to enumerate the materials for these inten- 
tions, but they are adapted for these uses in three 
forms. 
1. For they are either reduced into a hard 
and emplastick mass (like as at §.520.) with 
the substances there mention’d, or with some 
other proper excipient. Sometimes they are com- 
pounded

419 Of Suppositories. 
pounded with ointments, cerats, or emplasters, 
and protruded into the anus, sometimes only an 
officinal emplaster, smear’d over with some oil 
or ointment, is used for a suppository. 
2. Or being brought into the consistence of 
an ointment or balsam, it is applied by the 
means of scrap’d lint, cotton, or wool done up 
in a globular form like an acorn or tent, to 
which a thread is to be fastened, by which, 
hanging out, it may be again extracted. 
3. Or a paste of the like consistance (n° 2.) 
may be tied up in a nodule in a bit of linen, to 
which a thread is to be also fastened to extract it 
by, after it has been once introduced into the 
anus. 
§.522. In the CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, respect is to be had to the physician’s indi- 
cation, the particular virtues of each simple, espe- 
ciaily those of the stronger kind, with the patient’s 
age, habit, &c. See §.299. and 508. 
§.523. The ORDER for prescribing ingredients 
for this form, is generally to subjoin the excipient 
after the excipienda, especially when the quantity 
of the former is undetermin’d, tho' sometimes this 
order is revers’d. 
§.524. The SIZE of this form is analogous to 
the DOSE of others; when it is of a round figure, 
it sometimes equals the size of pease, chesnuts, or 
acorns; if it is conical, it’s usually made equal to 
the size of the patient’s little finger, and in length 
about three or four fingers breadth. Hence, accord- 
ing to the various size, the quantity of matter may 
be from ʒj to ʒvj or ℥j. A more exact determi- 
nation of the quantity may be taken from the pa- 
tient’s particular age, and more or less morbid 
stricture of the rectum, with the more or less strength 
of the suppository and particular disease of the rec- 
Ee2 tum:

420 Of Suppostories. 
tum: so that when the suppository is to stimulate, 
in a comatous disorder it is sometimes made much 
longer than the little finger. 
§.525. The general quantity for this form is fre- 
quently no more than the dose (§.524.). But 
when the suppository is to be used a considerable 
time 2, 3, or more cones may be transmitted to the 
patient at once, that one may be thrust up after the 
other, so that by multiplying the particular dose, 
it may be easy to determine the general quantity. 
§.526. The mutual proportion of ingredients for 
this form may be learn’d from the consistence of 
the excipient and other ingredients, with the re- 
quisite consistence of the paste to be made (§.520. 
521.), from the virtues of each ingredient, and the 
desired effect of the composition. Hence 
1. When inpissated honey is the excipient 
(§.520. n° 1.) the proportion of that may be 
℥j. to ℈iiij or ʒjß of the other ingredients. 
2. If any softer substance is used for the ex- 
cipient, it may be proportionably enlarg’d ac- 
cording to the quantity of the other ingredients 
or excipienda; except when it is required as soft 
as paste. 
§.527. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP-  
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient 
for this form, contains nothing very particular, but 
what may be easily understood from what was before 
said on these heads. The hardest suppositories are 
generally anointed with butter, oil, lard, or some 
ointment, before using it; at other times, it may be 
sufficient to moisten it with the saliva, or with 
some warm oil, when intended to stimulate. The 
rectum should be discharged of its fæces before the 
suppository is introduced, except when the use of 
it is to give a stool. 
§.528.

421 Suppositories. 
§.528. The USES of suppositories have been in 
a great measure already explained (at §.518, 519. 
521.): they are frequently substituted in the room 
of purging glysters, when the patient will not ex- 
pose himself to, or be troubled with that form. 
These will often give a stool when internal purg- 
ing might not be safe, they kill and expel worms, 
and are serviceable in comatous and apoplectic 
cases, &c. by stimulating, revelling, exciting, &c. 
To say nothing of disorders peculiar to the anus 
and rectum, ulcers, fistulæ, hæmorrhoidal pains, 
&c. where suppositories are often very useful. But 
we should be cautious not to hurt or corrode the 
rectum by too sharp suppositories, not to make na- 
ture become sluggish in discharging her fæces by a 
too constant use of this form: therefore supposi- 
tories are less proper for those who have fissures 
ulcers, tumors, or pains in the rectum, the piles, 
&c. And an over strong suppository may chance 
to produce abortion.  
§.529. SPECIMEN of simple suppositories, see 
before at §.518. and in H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 224. 
A few examples of compound suppositories follow. 
1. Suppositorium antihelminticum, necans expel- 
lens vermes. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Mell. coct. ad consist. debit. ℥iv. 
Aloës ℥ß. 
Vitriol. mart. ʒij. 
M. s. a. F. parva suppositoria v. g. xij. aut 
xiv. pro puero. Serventur oleo demersa 
ne deliquescant. 
S. Applicentur post alvum exoneratam. 
Ee3 2.

422 Suppositories. 
2. Suppositorium acre, fortiter stimulans in affecti- 
bus soporosis frigid is utile. 
ꝶ. Mellis coct. indurat. ℥j. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒß. 
Scammon. ℈j. 
Troch. alhand. 
Rad. ellehor. alb. pulv. ana ℈ß 
Euphorbii gr. ij. 
M. F. s. a. suppositoria n°. ij. oleo ca- 
storei illinenda.  
3. Glans ad alvum solicitandam, pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Sal. commun. ʒß. 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Mell. coctu inspissati q. s. 
M. F. suppositorium, oleo absinth. infuso 
illinendum. 
4. Suppositorium ad excitandum hæmorrhoidum 
fluxum. 
ꝶ. Aloës pulveris. 
Sal. gemm. ana ℈j. 
Pulp. colocynth. gr. v. 
Mellis q. s. 
Coctu redigantur in suppositorium. 
5.

423 Of Pessaries and Nascales. 
5. Nodulus anodynus ad dolores ab hæmorrhoi- 
dibus. 
ꝶ. Opii crudi ℈ß. 
Croci pulveris ℈j. 
Unguent. popul. q. s. 
Ut F. pasta, quæ inclusa sindoni, aut cot- 
tone excepta, appenso filo, fit pro sup- 
positorio. 
S. Immittatur ano, filo foras propendente & retra- 
hatur post 1/2 horam. 
Of PESSARIES and NASCALES. 
§.530. A Pessary (pessarium, talus) and a NAS- 
CALE (penicillus) are a kind of suppo- 
sitories, tents, or nodules for the uterus and vagina, as 
the preceding were for the intestines, to be intro- 
duced into the sinus pudoris, vagina, &c. for 
various uses: but as they are at present seldom 
used, and may be easily understood from consider- 
ing the form preceding, there is no occasion to 
give a diffuse treatise on them here. 
FINIS. 

424 ADDENDA. 
N°.1. ad Pag.9. 
A Ppellationum generalium plura simplicia uno 
titulo complectentium explicatio. 
Quinque radices aperientes. 
Rad.
Apii. 
Asparagi. 
Fœniculi. 
Petroselini. 
Rusci. 
Quinque herbœ emollients.
Fol. & 
Sumit
Althææ. 
Malvæ. 
Mercurialis. 
Parietariæ. 
Violarum.
Quatuor flores cordiales.
Flor.
Boraginis. 
Buglossi. 
Rosarum. 
Violarum.
Quatuor 

425 ADDENDA ad Pag.9. 
Quatuor semina calida majora. 
Sem.
Anisi. 
Carvi. 
Cumini. 
Fœniculi. 
Quatuor semina calida minora. 
Sem.
Ammeos. 
Amomi. 
Apii. 
Dauci. 
Quatuor semina frigida majora.
Sem. 
Citrulli. 
Cucumeris.
Cucurbitæ. 
Melonum. 
Quatuor semina frigida minora. 
Sem.
Cichorii. 
Endiviæ. 
Lactucæ. 
Portulacæ.
CHA- 

426 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
N°. II. ad Pag. 16. 
CHARACTERES, 
FREQUENTIORES 
IN USU. 
A Cetum 🜊
Acet. destill. 🜋
Aër 🜁 
Æs ♀ 
Æs Viride 🜨 
Alumen 🌕︎
Amalgama 🝛 
Antimonium ⛢
Aqua 🜄
Aqua fontis 🜅ont.
Aqua fortis 🜅
Aqua Regia 🜆
Aqua Rof. 🜆of. 
Arena 
Argentum ☽︎ 
Argent. vivum 
Arsenicum  🜺
Auripigmentum 🜽 
Aurum ☉ 
Balneum B  
Baln. Mariæ 🝫
Calx viva 🝤 
Cancer ♋︎
Caput mort 🝎 
Chal-


427 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
Calcanth. Vitriol. 🜖 
Chalybs ♂ 
Chalybis limatura  
Cineres 🝗
Cinnabar 🜭 
Corn. Cerv. calc. C.C.C. 
Cuprum ♀
Destillare 
Dies   
Ferrum ♂
Fimum Equin. vent. Eq. 
Hora 
Hydrargyrum ☿
Ignis 🜂
Jupiter ♃
Luna ☽︎ 
Mars ♂
Massa  
Mercurius ☿ 
Merc. præcipitatus 
Merc. sublimatus 🜐 
Nitrum 🜕
Nox  
Oleum  
Plumbum 
Præcipitare 🝟
Pulvis, Pulverare 
Retorta 
Sal Armoniacum 🜹
Sal commune 🜔 
Sal Gemmæ 🜘 
Sal Petræ 🜕 
Sol ☉ 
Spiritus Sp.
Stannum ♃ 
Strat. sup. Strat. 🝜 
Sublimare 🝞
Sulphur 🜍
Tartarum 🜿
Terra 🜃 
Tinctura 
Venus ♀ 
Vinum V. 
Viride æris 🜨 
Vitriolum 🜖 
Urina 🝕
N°.

428 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20.
N°. III. ad Pag. 20. 
A List and Explanation of the WEIGHTS 
and MEASURES used among the antient 
Greek, Latin, and Arabian Physicians. 
I. WEIGHTS. 
The chalcus,  
or 
Æreolus,
was equal to half a siliqua, or gr. ij. 
The siliqua of the Latins,  
Ceration and Diachalcum of
the Greeks,
or kirat of the Arabians,
was equal to ij 
chalci, or gr. iv. 
The nμiωCoλov,   
Semiobolus, and  
Davie of the Arabians,
was equal to siliqua
and half, iij chalci
or œreolœ, or gr. vj. 
The obolus, and 
Onolosat of the Arabs,
was equal to vj chalci,
iij siliquœ, or gr. xij.
or ℈ß.
The scriptulum, term’d  
Gramma and diobolon 
by the Greeks, 
was equal to ij oboli,
xij chalci, or gr. xiij.
The semidrachma or triobolon, term’d 
Ilarium by Oribasius, and  
Victoriatus by Scribonius and Celsus
was equal 
to ℈jß. or 
gr. xxxvj. 
The drachma attica, termed also 
Holce by the Greeks, being the 
eighth part of an ounce, 
was equal to 
℈iij. six obo- 
li, orgr. lxxij. 
The denarius of the Latins was a little heavier than 
a dram, so that only seven denarii went to the 
ounce. Hence, Celsus and Scribonius, who 
translate denarium for drachma, suppose only 
seven

429 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
seven drams to the ounce: but Plutarch, Ga- 
len and Pliny, in their Latin or Greek cita- 
tions, seem to write denarium for drachma, 
and drachma for denarium, indifferently, as 
if they were both the eighth part of an ounce. 
The sextula, 
Hexagium,  
Aureus, or  
Solidum,  
was the sixth part of an ounce,
equal to four scruples.
The sicilicus, used for didrachmum by Scribonius, 
was equal to two drams. It was also term’d 
The Assarius and αoγαρiov, from its containing 
twelve oboli, as the as does ounces. 
The duella, was equal to ij sextulœ, or ℈ viij. 
The stater was half an ounce: ℥ß. or ʒiv. Term’d 
also 
The dupondium, being equal to two assarii. 
The uncia attica, being the twelfth part of a pound, 
weigh’d eight drams, or (according to Celsus) 
seven Roman denarii. 
The libra romana, 
Pondo, or  
As,  
was equal to ℥xij. or ʒxcvj.
The mna or mina attica, was a little heavier than 
a pound, weighing ʒC. or ℥xij. & ß.
Notwithstanding the proper signification of the 
term as is a pound weight, it is yet frequently 
used by the Latins to signify some whole or solid 
body: and as they divided the pound, so they di-
stributed the whole body or thing into twelve 
parts, each of which were as ounces: but the se- 
veral other parts of the integer, were denominated 
by them after the following manner.  
As,

430 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
As, libra, a pound, or the whole thing. 
Uncia, or ounce, was the twelsth part of the pound 
or thing. 
Sextans,  
Quadrans, 
Triens,  
Quincunx,  
Semis,    
Septunx,   
Bes & octunx, 
Dodrans,  
Dextans, 
Deunx, 
was
two
three
four 
five
six 
seven
eight
nine
ten 
eleven
ounces, of
parts
II. MEASURES 
We pass from weights to an explanation of the se- 
veral measures, whether dry or liquid, in use 
among the antients. 
The cochlearium minimum, their least measure, held 
about ʒj and ℈ß. of wine, suppose canary. 
The cheme, or cochlearium mediocre, held two of the 
cochlearia minima, or ʒij. and ℈j. 
The mystrum, cochlearium magnum, or ligula, held 
of the cochlearia minima ij and ß. or ʒij ß. 
The concha held ij mystra, chema ij and ß. coch. 
minim. v. 
The cyathus contained ij concha, iij mystra, or 
℥jss. 
The acetabulum, or sesquicyathum, term’d by the 
Greeks oxybaphon, held iij concha, vj mystra, 
or ℥jj. ʒij. 
The quartarius tbtclotqvi '/yxiKOTuAiov, being the 
fourth part of a sextarius, contained cy- 
ath. iij. oxybapha ij. mystra xii. or ℥iv. 
The

431 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The hemine, cotyle, or tryblium, ημιEeςov being 
the half of a sextarius, contained ij quartarii, 
cyath. vj. oxybapha iv. mystra xxiv. coch- 
lear. lx. or ℥ix. 
The sextarius, Eeςηs, of the Greeks, was the 
most frequent in use of any measure, being 
the sixth part of a congius, containing two 
hemina, four quartarii, cyath. xij. or ℔ j ss. 
and is the same with chopin of Paris. 
The chœnix of the Greeks, and modulus of the La- 
tins, held a sextary and half, or ℔ ij. ℥iij. 
The congius, or chus of the Greeks, contained six 
sextarii, xxiv quartarii, or ℔ ix. being equal 
to three pints at Paris. 
The urna held four conga, or ℔ xxxvj. 
The amphora, 
or  
Quadrantal, 
held two urnæ, or xlviij sextarii. 
The meretes and ceramium of the Greeks, and the 
cadus of the Latins, held xij congii, or ℔. C. 
viij. 
The culeus, or most capacious of the liquid mea- 
sures among the Romans, contained xx am- 
phora, 960 sextarii, 160 congii, 40 urnæ, 
or ℔ 1350. 
For the mensuration of dry substances, the Ro- 
mans made use of the following, which were also 
applied in common to liquids, as well as solids. 
The

432 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The Ligula,   
Cyathus,  
Acetabulum, 
Quartarius, 
Hemina, 
Sextarius,  
Semodius,  
Modius, 
Medimus,
equal to 
j Mystrum, or ʒ ij ss.
iij Ligulæ.
vj  Ligulæ. 
ij Acetabula. 
ij Quartarii. 
ij Heminæ.
viij Sexsarii.
ij Semodii. 
72 Sextarii. 
The liquid measures were chiefly adapted to 
wines, which when of a mean consistence will 
come near to the weights assigned. But as oil is a 
9th part lighter than wine, and honey twice as 
heavy as wine, a measure holding ten ounces of 
wine will contain ℥xv. of honey, and of oil ele- 
ven ℥. and so in the rest.
AN

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Principal Matters in the Method 
of Prescribing, &c.
A. 
Accessory ingredients of a form, what?—p. 45. §. 107. 
—for
Decoctions—p. 144. 
Infusions—p. 165. 170. 
—Cataplasms—p. 283. 285. 
Adjuvans, the second constituent part of a form—p. 37. §.78. 
Alcohol powder, what?—p. 54. §.107. 
—of wine, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions, &c.—p. 145. 
Ales, antiscorbutic—p. 179. N° 2. p. 164. N° 10. 
Amulets, v. Epithems—p. 300. ult. 
Anacolema, what?—p. 376. §.464. 
Apophlegmatisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 389. §.485. 
—liquid, soft, and dry—p. 391. §.490. 
—their ingredients—p. 393. §.492. 
—dole, and management—p. 395. §.4. 34. & seq. 
—specimens of them—p. 396. §.497. 
Apozem, v. Decoition—p. 164. 
Apparatus for infusions—p. 152. §.219. N° 1. 
Aspersions, what kind of medicines?—p. 255. §.308. 
—their ingredients, election, and order of prescribing, 
p. 255. §.310. 
—dole, and general quantity—p. ibid. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. 256. §.313. 
—their directions, uses, and specimens—p. 256. §.317. 
Ff B.

INDEX.
B. 
Bags, v. Epithems—p. 278. & seq. 
Ball, sweet-scented—p. 388. n° 3. 
Balsams, odoriferous, what?—p. 354. §.432. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.433. 
—ejection of ingredients for—p. 355 §.434. 
—order of prescribing, dose, and general quantity—p. 358. 
§.435. & seq. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—directions for—p. 360. §.439. & seq. 
—uses of them—p. ib. §.441. 
—specimens of them–p. 361. §.442. 
Bed, v. Epithem—p. 280. n° 5. 
Basis, the first constituent part of a form—p. 36. §.75. 
Baths, what, and their kinds?—p. 300 
—ingredients for—p. 301. 370. 
—election of ingredients for—p. ib. §.371. 
—order of prescribing them p. 302. 
—their dose, general quantity, and proportion of ingredients for 
p. 302. §.313. & seq. 
—subscription or direction to the Apothecary p. 303. §.376. 
—superscription or direction to the patient—p. 304. §.377. 
—uses—p. ib. §.378. 
—specimens of—p. 305. §.379. 
Boles, what kind of medicines?—p. 76. §.127. 
—the ingredients or matter of—p. ib. §.128. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 77. §.129. 
—order of prescribing their ingredients—p. 78. §.130. 
—their dose—p. ib. §.131 
—general quantity—p. 79. §.132. 
—the proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. §.133. 
—their subscription—p. 81. §. 134. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.135. 
—uses—p. 82. §.136. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.137. 
Buccellatum, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 143. 
C. 
Cakes, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 138. 
Capitiluvium, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Catapotium, v. Pils—p. 106. 
Catapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Cataplasms, what? and their kinds—p. 282. 
—by decoction, what?—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 283. §.346.
—the election of their ingredients—p. 284. §.347.
Cataplasms, 

INDEX. 
Cataplasms, order of prescribing—p. 286. §.348. 
—dose of them—p. ib. §.349. 
—general quantity, and proportion of ingredients—p. 286. 
§.350. & seq. 
—subscription for—p. 288. §.352. 
—superscription for—p.289 §.333. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.354. 
—specimens of them—p. 290. 
Cerates, what kind of medicines?—p. 342. §.415. 
—their ingredients, management, and directions for—p. 343. 
§.418. 
—uses—p. ib. §.419. 
—specimens of them—p. 344. §.420.
Choice of ingredients for Apophlegmatisms p.393. §.493. 
—aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 355. §.434. 
—baths—p. 301. §.371. 
—boles—p. 77. §.129. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.201.
—cataplasms—p. 283. §.316.
—cerates—p. 342.
—collyria—p. 469. 
—cucusæ p. 375.
—decoctions—p. 165. §.226.
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 238. §.285. 
—electuaries—p. 89 §.140. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.407.  
—emulsions—p. 195. §.248.  
—epithems—p. ib. and §.273. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.475. 
—express'd juices—p. 183. §.237.  
—fomentations—p. 261. §.322. 
—frications—p. 374. §.458.
—frontals—p. 375. §.466. 
—fumigations—p. 316. §.396. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500 
—glysters—p. 403. §.508.
—infusions—p. 145. §.213 
—injections—p. 247. §.299 
—juleps—p. 211. §.263. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.151 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444.  
—lotions—p. 247. §.299. 
—mixtures—p. 225. §.274. 
—ointments—p. 345. §.423. 
—pills—p. 107. §.162. 
—powders—p. 56. §.111. 
—suppositories—p. 417. §.518.
Ff2 Choice

INDEX. 
Choice of ingredients for tablets—p. 132. §.188. 
—troches—p. 123. §.175 
—vapors—p. 308. §.384. 
—unguents—p. 345. §.423. 
Clysma, v. Glyster—p. 402. 
Colour of medicines arising from mixture—p. 46. §.99. 
Collutorium, v. Gargarism—p. 339. 
Colyria, what kind of medicines?—p. 378. 
—their various forms, ingredients, application, and uses—p. 379. 
—specimens of them—p. 380. 
Composition, its effefts on medicines, Mixture. 
Conditum, v. Electuary—p. 88. 
Consistence of medicines from mixture—p. 45. §.96. 
Constituens, the fourth and last part of a form—p. 41. §.86. 
Corrigens, the third condiment part of a form—p. 38. §.83. 
—for noxious qualities—p. ib. §.84. 
—unpleasantness—p. 40. §.85. 
Couch, v. Epithem—p. 285. n° 4. 
Cucullus  
Cucusa   
Cushion
v. Epithem—p. 278. & seq.  
D. 
Decoctions, internal, what kind of medicines?—p. 164. §.224. 
—their ingredients p. ib. §.225. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 165. §.226. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 171. §.227. 
—times for boiling their different ingredients—p. ib. 
n° 1. 2. & seq. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 173. 
—the mutual proportion of their ingredients p. 173. §.230. 
—process of, and apparatus for—p. 175. §.231. 
—their subscription, for the apothecary—p. ib. 
—superscription, to the patient—p. 178. 
—uses—p. ib. §.233. 
—specimens of —p. 179. §.234. 
Dentifrices, what?–p. 388. §.485. 
—their kinds—p. 389. §.486. 
—ingredients and uses–ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 390. 
Depuration of liquors, (1.) by decantation, and (2.) by filtration 
p. 155
Diapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Directions for medicines to the apothecary in a prescription, v. Sub- 
scription. 
—patient, v. Superscription. 
Distribution of medicines, v. Dose. 
—powders—p. 62. §.118. 122. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. n° 9. 
Dose


INDEX. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. §.65. & seq 
—should be proportioned to 
1° the patient's disease—p. 25. n° 1. p. 27. n° 7. 
—strength—p. 26. n° 2. 
—age—p. ib. n° 3. 
—size of body—p. 27. n°. 4. 
—habit—p. ib. n° 5. and—p. 28. n° 8. 
—sex—p. ib. n° 6. 
—use or custom to medicines—p. 28. n° 9. 
—course of life—p. ib. n° 10. 
—country or nation—p. ib. n.° 11. 
2° the Medicine's strength—p. 29. n° 15. 
—virtues—p. ib. n° 13. 
—season of the year—p. ib. n° 12. 
—price— n° 14. 
—unpleasantness—p. ib. n° 16. 
—form—p. 30. n° 17. 
—way of using—p. ib. n° 18. 
Doses, number of, in a form, agreeable to particular circumstances, 
p. 30. §.67. 
Dose, its quantity how to determine in compound forms, p. 42. §.92. 
—an estimate thereof, for different ages—p. 26. n° 3. 
—of boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.204. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.349. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.228. 
—drops—p. 240.  §.287. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.142. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.252. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.239. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.324. 
—fumes—p. 319 §.398. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. § 501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 149. §.215. 
—injections—p. 248. §.301. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.265. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.153. 
—liniment—p. 365. §.447. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.276. 
—pills—p. 110. §.165. 
—powders—p. 59. §.113. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.192. 
—troches—p. 125. §.179. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.425. 
—vapors—p. 310. §.386. 
Draughts—p. 230. & seq. 
Dropax, v. Emplasters—p. 236 
Ff3 Drops,

INDEX. 
Drops, what kind of medicines?—p. 237. §.283. 
—their ingredients—p. 238. §.284. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.285. 
—order of prescribing—p. 240. §.286. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. ib. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. 241. 
—their subscription—p. ib. §.290. 
—superscription—p. 242. §.291. 
—uses—p. 243. §.292. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.293. 
E.
Edegma, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
—solidum, v. Lozenges— p. 122. §.172. 
—Election of ingredient for forms, v. Choice. 
—Electuaries, what kind of medicines?—p. 88. §.138. 
—ingredient for—p. 89. §.139. 
—choice of their ingredients—p. ib. §.140. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 90. 
—their dose—p. 91. §.142. 
—general quantity—p. ib. §.143. 
—subscription—p. 39. §.145. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.146. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 94. & seq. 
Electuary, solid, v. Tablets—p. 131. 
Elixir, v. Drops.—p. 244. 
Embrocation, v. Bath—p. 301. 
Emplasters, what kind of medicines?—p. 326. §.405. 
—ingredients for—p. 327. §.406. 
—their election— p. ib. §.407. 
—order of prescribing—p. 330. §.408. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 331. §.409. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—their subscription—p. 334. §.411. 
—superscription—p. 335. §.412. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 336. §.414. 
Empasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Emulsions, what kind of medicines?—p. 194. §.246. 
—ingredients for—p. 195. §.247. 
—their election—p. ib. §.248. 
—order of prescribing—p. 201. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 202. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 203. 
—their subscription—p. 205. §.255. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.256.
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 206.
Enema,

INDEX. 
Enema, v. Glysters—p. 402. 
Epispastics—p. 371. & seq. 
Epithems, in general, what?—p. 259. 
—liquid, v. Fomentations. 
—soft, v. Cataplasms. 
—dry, what?—p. 273.
—their management—p. ib. & seq. 
—ingredients—p. 273. 
—order, and dose—p. 274. 
—general quantity—p. 275. 
—superscription—p. 277. 
—their uses—p. 278. §.341. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
—moist, what?—p. 294. §.356. 
—their ingredients—p. 295. 
—subscription, &c.—p. 297. 
—specimens of them—p. 298. 
Errhins, what? and their kinds—p. 382. 
—the exhibition, and uses—p. 383. 
—specimens of them—p. 384. 
Excipients, what kind of ingredients?—p. 76. n° 2. p. 108. n° 8. 
p. 123. 
Excipiends—p. 107. p. 76. n° 1. 
Expressed-juices, v. Juices. 
F. 
Fomentations, what kind of medicines— p. 260. 
—ingredient for them p. ib. §.321. 
—their election—p. 261. §.322. 
—order of prescribing— p. 262. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 263. §.326. 
—their superscription—p. 264. §.328. 
—uses—p. 267. §.329. 
—specimens of them—p. 269. 
Forms, internal and external—p. 54. §.105. 
—fitest for acute diseases—p. 12. §.47. 
—chronic diseases—p. ib. 
—should be adapted to the most urgent symptoms—p. 10. p. 41. 
—age and circumstances of the patients, 
§.26. 27. 47. 48. 
—intention and medic virtues p. 11. §. 43. 
—texture and disposition of the ingredients 
p. 9. §.35. 43. 
—condition of the disease—p. 12. §.47. 
Formula, what?—p. 1. §.1. 
—simple, what?—p. 25. §.63. 
—compound, what?—p. 34. §.71.
Ff4 Formula,

INDEX. 
Formula, its four constituent parts.—p. 35. §.74. 
—l°. its basis—p. 36. §.75. 
—2°. its adjuvans—p. 37. §.78. 
—3°. its corrigens—p. 38. §.83. 
—4°. its constituens—p. 41. §.86. 
—its six general heads, v. Prescription. 
Fotus, v. Fomentation. 
Frications, what ? their kinds and uses—p. 374. 
Frontals, v. Epithems.—p. 278. 
—what Kind of medicines—p. 373. §.462. 
—their uses and specimens—p. 376. 
Fumigations, what?—p. 315. §.393. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—forms—p. 316. §.395. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 319. 
—their dole, or quantity—p. ib. §.398. 
—oroportion of their ingredients—p. 320. 
—their sub and superscription—p. 321. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 322. 
G. 
Gargarisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 399.
—their kinds anti ingredients—p. ib. 
—management and uses—p. 400. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
General quantity of a form—p. 33. and 45. 
i. e. to be sent to the patient at once 
—of aspersions—p. 255. §.312. 
—balsams—p. 350. 
—baths—p. 302. 
—boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.205. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.250. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173 §.229. 
—drops—p. 240. §.288. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.143. 
—emplasters—p. 331. §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.253. 
—epithems—p. 195. and 275. 
—fomentations—p. 262. §.325. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 309. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 194. §.216. 
—injestions—p. 248. §.302. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.266. 
General

INDEX. 
General quantity of linctus—p. 104. §.154. 
—liniments—p. 365. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.277. 
—pills—p. 111. §.166. 
—powders—p. 60. §.114. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.193. 
—troches—p. 126. §.180. 
—unguents—p. 348. 
—vapors—p. 310. 
Glysters, what kind of medicines?—p. 402. §.506. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.507. 
—election of their d°—p. 403. §.508. 
—order of prescribing—p. 406. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. §.510. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 407. §.511. 
—their subfcription—p. 408. §.512. 
—superscription—p. 409. §.513. 
—uses—p. 411. §.514. 
—specimens—p. 412. 
Guttæ, v. Drops. 
H. 
Haustus var.—p. 234. & seq. 
Hydrelæon  
and   
Hydrogalum 
for bathing—p. 301. §.370. 
Hydromel 
and  
Hydrosaccharum 
kinds of juleps—p. 188.
I. 
Impluvium, v. Bath,—p. 301. §.369. 
Infusions, what kind of medicines?—p. 143. 
—their ingredients—p. 144. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 145. 
—order of prescribing—p. 148. 
—their dose—p. 149. §.2l5. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 150. §.217. 
—their subscription—p. 152. 
—process—p. ib. N° 2. 3. 
—apparatus—p. ib. ult. 
—depuration—p. 154. ult. 
—superscription—p. 157. §.221. 
—uses—p. 158. §.222. 
—specimens of them—p. 159. §.223. 
Ingredients for apophlegmatisms 
—aspersions—p. 255. 
Ingredients 

INDEX 
Ingredients for balsams—p. 354. §.433. 
—baths—p. 301. §.370. 
—boles—p. 71. §.128. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.200. 
—cataplasms—p. 283. 
—cerates.—p. 342. 
—collyria—p. 380. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 164. §.225. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.487. 
—drops—p. 238. §.284. 
—electuaries—p. 89. §.139. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.406. 
—emulsions—p. 195. §.247. 
—epithems—p. 294. and 273. 
—errhins—p. 384. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.236. 
—fomentations—p. 260. §.321. 
—frontal—p. 376. & seq. 
—fumigations—p. 315. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500. 
—glysters—p. 402. §.507. 
—infufions—p. 144. §.212. 
—injections—p. 247. §.298. 
—julep—p. 211. §.262. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.150. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444. 
—mixtures—p. 224. §.273. 
—pills—p. 1O6. §.161. 
—powders—p. 55. §.109. 
—tablets—p. 131. §.187. 
—troches—p. 123. §.174. 
—vapors—p. 308. 
—unguents—p. 342. 
Injections, what kind of medicines?—p. 246. 
—their ingredients—p. 247. §.298. 
—election, order, dose, &c.—p. 248. 
—their subscription—p. 249. §.304. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.305. 
—uses—p. 251. §.306. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.307. 
Inscription, the first part of formula—p. 14. §.55. 
Infessus, Bath—p. 300. §.369. 
Intitling of medicines, v. Superscription. 
—in general—p. 23. n° 7. 8. 
Juices-expressed, what?—p. 182. §.235. 
—their ingredients—p. 183. §.236. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.237. 
—order of prescribing—p. 185. §.238. 
—their dose—p. ib. 
Juices

INDEX
Juices-expressed, their general quantity—p. 186. 
—subscription—p. 189. 
—superscription—p. 191. 
—uses—p. ib. §.244. 
—specimens of them—p. 192. §.245. 
Juleps, what kind of medicine?—p. 211. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.262. 
—order of prescribing—p. 216. 
—their dose, and quantity—p. ib. 
—subscription for them—p. 218. 
—superscription for them—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 219. 
L. 
Lavamentum, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Linctus, what kind of medicine?—p. 99. §.149. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.150. 
—election, and order of prescribing—p. 100. 
—dose, and general quantity—p. 101. §.153. 
—proportion of ingredients—p.102. 
—subscription for—p. 103. §.156. 
—superscription for—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens of—p. 104. 
Liniments, what kind of medicines—p. 363. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.444. 
—order of prescribing, dose, &c.—p. 365. 
—their sub- and superscription, uses, and specimens,—p. 367. 
Lohock, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
Lotion, v. Bath—p. 201. §.369. 
Lozenges, v. Troches—p. 122 
M. 
Maceration, the process of—p. 153. N° 2. 3. 
Massa Panis, v. Sugar cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Materia Medica for forms, v. Ingredients.  
Measures now used by apothecaries—p. 18. 
—used by the antients—p. 428. 
Menstrua for infusions, their kinds and properties—p. 144. & seq. 
Method of prescribing the ingredients of a form in general—p. 15. §.58. 
Metrenchites, for injecting the Uterus—p. 250. 
Mixture, its effects on the consistence of medicines—p. 45. §.96  
—colour of medicines—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor of medicines—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste of medicines—p. 48. §.101. 
—virtues of medicines p.-49 §.102. 
Mixtures, what? and their kinds—p. 210. §.259. 
—of liquid medicines—p. 224. §.272. 
Mixtures 

INDEX. 
Mixtures, ingredients for—p. ib. §.273. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 225. §.274. 
—order of prescribing— p. 227. 
—their dose—ib. 
—general quantity—ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 228. 
—subscription for—p. 229. 
—superscription, uses, and specimens—p. 230.
N. 
Nasals, what kind of medicines?—p. 382. §.474. 
Nascale, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Nebula chartacea, a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Nodules, what?—p. 158. n° 2. p. 179. n° 2. 
—for spitting—p. 398. n° 7. 
O. 
Odor of a form upon mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Odoriferous balsams, v. Balsams. 
Odoromenta, what kind of medicines?—p. 386. §.479. 
—their uses, and specimens—p. 387. 
Ointment, v. Unguents—p. 342. 
Orbiculus, v. Cake. 
Order of ranging the ingredients of a form—p. 14. §.57. 
—prescribing the ingredients of aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 358. §.435. 
—baths—p. 322. §.372. 
—boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 140. §.202. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.348. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 171. §.227. 
—drops—p. 240. §.286. 
—electuaries p. 90. §.141. 
—emplasters—p. 330. §.408. 
—emulsions—p. 201. §.251. 
—epithems—p. 274. §.355. 
—fomentations—p. 362. §.323. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.307. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.509. 
—infusions—p. 148. §.214. 
—injections—p. 248. §.300. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.264. 
—juices—p. 185. §.338. 
—linctus—p. 100. §.152. 
Order

INDEX. 
Order of prescribing the ingredients of liniments—p. 367. §.446. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.275. 
—ointments—p. 348. §.424. 
—pills—p. 109. §.163. 
—powders—p.58. §.112 
—tablets—p. 133 §.189 
—troches—p. 125. §.176. 
—vapors—p. 308 
—unguents—p. 348. §.420. 
Oxyrrhodimum, what?—p. 376. §.464 
P. 
Pandalion, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190 
Pasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Pasta regia, v. Sugar-cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Pastills, v. Troches—p. 122.
Pessary, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Phoenigmi, v. Rubisacientia.—p. 371 
Picatio, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Pillow, v. Epithem.—p. 273. 
Pills, what kind of medicines?—p. 106. §.160. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 107. §.162. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 109. §.163.
—their size and weight—p. 109. §.164. 
—dose—p. 110. §.165 
—general quantity,—p.111 §.166. 
—proportion of ingredients—p. 112. 
—subscription—p. 113. 
—superscription—p. 114.
—uses—p. 115. §.170. 
—specimens of them—p. 116. §.171.  
Pineolatum, v. Sugar-cake,—p. 143.  
Powders, what kind of medicines?—p. 54. §.106. 
—of 3 kinds, in degree of tenuity—p. ib. 
—ingredients for—p. 55. §.109.
—their election—p. 56. §.111. 
—method of prescribing—p. 58 §.112. 
—their Dose—p. 58. §.113.
—general quantity—p. 60. §.114. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib.
—their subscription—p. 62 §.116
—preparation—p. ib. §.117
—distribution—p. ib. §.118
—receptacles—p. 63. §.119 
—superscription—p. ib. §.120. 
—uses and specimens—p. 65. 
Plasters, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Prescribing

INDEX. 
Prescribing, general rules and cautions for—p. 4. §.11. 
Prescriptions, what? v. Formula—p. 1. §.1. 
—their kinds—p. 2. §.6. 
—parts in general—p. 14. 
Preparation of Powders p. 62. §.117. 
—infusions—p. 152. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 175. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 189. & seq. 
—emplasters—p. 334. 
Proportion of in-
gredients for 
Aspersions—p. 256. §.313.
—Balsams—p. 358. §.438. 
—Baths—p. 302. §.375. 
—Boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141 §.206. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.351. 
—cerates—p. 342. §.417. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.236. 
—drops—p. 241. §.289. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.144. 
—emplasters—p. 331 §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 203. §.254. 
—epithems—p. 296. §.362. 
—epispastics—p. 372. §.455. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.326. 
—fumigations—p. 320. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 407. §.511. 
—infusions—p. 150. §.217. 
—injections—p. 248. §.303. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.267. 
—juices-expressed—p. 186. §.241. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.155. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 228. §.278. 
—pills—p. 112. §.167. 
—powders—p. 60. §.115. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 135. §.194. 
—troches—p. 126. §.181. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.388. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.427. 
Pultice, v. Cataplasm.—p. 282. 
Pulvinar, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Q.
Quantity of a medicine to be prescribed and made up at one time, v. 
General quantity. 
Quanity

INDEX. 
Quantity of a medicine to be taken at once, v. Dose. 
Qualities of a medicine from 
composition or mixture
—p. 45. §.94. 95. 
—in consistence—p. 45. §.96. 
—colour—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste—p. 48. §. 101. 
—virtues—p. 49. §.102. 
R. 
Receptacles for aspersions—p. 256. §.314. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. ult. 
—drops—p. 242. §.290. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.145. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—pills—p. 114. §.168. ult. 
—powders—p. 63. §.119. 
Recipe, the 2d general part of prescription—p. 14. §.56. 
Regimen, proper in taking medicines—p. 24. 
—powders—p. 65. §.124. 
Rotula, v. Sugar-cake.—p. 138. 
Rubisters, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
S. 
Saccus, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Salivatics, v. Apophlegmatisms.—p. 391. 
Scatulæ, what they are—p. 63. §.119. 
Scute, what kind of medicine—p. 402. 
Scul-cap, v. Cucusa.—p. 375. 
Semicupium, v. Baths.—p. 300. §.369. 
Series, for ranging the ingredients of a form, v. Order of prescribing. 
Sief of the Arabians, what?—p. 379. §.469. 
Smell of medicines, from mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Sope, persumed—p. 388. n° 4. 
Spirits, inflammable, their composition—p. 146. n° 3. 
Species or powders, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Specimens of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. 
—aspersions—p. 256. 
—balsams—p. 361. 
—baths—p. 305. 
—boles—p. 82. 
—cakes—p. 138. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. 
—cerates.—p. 344.
—colyria—p. 380. 
—cucusæ—p. 375. 
—decoctions—p. 178.
Specimens 


INDEX. 
Specimens of dentifrices—p. 390 
—draughts—p. 230. 
—drops—p. 243. 
—electuaries—p. 94. 
—emplasters—p. 336. 
—emulsions—p. 206. 
—epithems  
dry—p. 278.
moist—p. 298. 
—epispastics—p. 372. 
—errhins—p. 384. 
—expressed-juices—p. 192. 
—fomentations—p. 269. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 376. 
—fumes—p. 322. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. 
—glysters—p. 412. 
—infusions—p. 159. 
—injections—p. 251. 
—juleps—p. 219. 
—juices—p. 192. 
—linctus—p. 104. 
—liniments—p. 367. 
—mixtures—p. 230. 243. 
—nascales—p. 424. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. 
—pills—p. 116. 
—powders—p. 65. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 131. 
—troches—p. 128. 
—vapors—p. 313. 
—unguents—p. 352. 
Stillicidium, v. Baths.—p. 301. 369. 
Stomatics, what kind of medicines—p. 388. 
Subscription, i. e. directions to the compounder in general, p. 20. §.59 
—for aspersions— p. 256. §.314. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.439. 
—baths—p. 303. §.376. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.207. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.352. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418.
—decoctions—p. 175. §.231. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—electuaries—p.93. §.145. 
—emplasters—p. 334. §.4l1. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.255. 
—epithems—p. 275. §.297. 
Sub-

INDEX.
Subscription for fomentations—p. 263. §.327. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.401. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.502.
—glysters—p. 409. 512. 
—infusions—p. 132. §.218. 
—injections—p. 249. §.304.
—juleps—p. 218. §.268. 
—juices—p. 189. §.242. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.449. 
—mixtures-p. 229. §.279. 
—pills—p. 113. §.168. 
—powders—p. 62. §.116. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.195. 
—troches—p. 127. §.182. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.389. 
—unguents—p. 330. §.428. 
Suffitus, v. Fumigations—p. 315. 
Sugar-cakes, what kind of medicines?—p. 138. §.199. 
—ingredients for—p. 139. §.200. 
—their election—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing—p. 140. §.202. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.203. 
—dose—p. 141. §.204. 
—general quantity,—p. 131. §.205. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—their superscription p. 142. §.208. 
—uses and specimens p. 142. 
Superscriptions (i.e. directions to the patients in general p. 22. §.60. 
—for apophlegmatisms—p. 395. §.495. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.315. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.443. 
—baths—p. 304. §.377. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—cakes—p.142. §.208. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.353. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418. 
—colyria—p. 379. §.470. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.232. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291.
—electuaries—p.93- §.146. 
—emplasters—p. 335. §.412. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.256. 
—epithems—p. 277 and 297. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.479. 
—fomentations—p. 264. §.428. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.402. 
G2 Superscriptions

INDEX.
Superscriptions for gargarisms—p. 399. §.503. 
—glysters—p. 409. §.513.
—infusions—p. 157. §.221. 
—injections—p. 249. §.305. 
—juleps—p. 218. §.269. 
—juices—p. 191. §.243. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.157. 
—liniments p. 367. §.450. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.280. 
—pills—p. 114. §.169. 
—powders—p. 63. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.196. 
—troches—p. 128. §.183. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.330. 
—unguents—p. 351. §.429. 
Suppositories, what kind of medicines?—p. 417. 
—their ingredients and composition—p. ib. 
—uses—p. 421. 
—specimens of them—p. 422. 
Sympasma, v. Aspersions.—p. 255. 
Synapisms, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
T. 
Tablets, what kind of medicines?—p. 131. §.186. 
—election of ingredients—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 132. §.188, 
—order of prefcribing them p. 133. §.189. 
—figures of—p. 134. §.190. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.191. 
—dose general quantity—p. 134. §.190. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 135. §.194. 
—subscription for—p. 136. §.195. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.197. 
—specimens of them—p. 137. §.198. 
Tastes, various, from mixture— p. 48. §.101. 
Teas, medicinal—p. 158. n° 2. p. 160. n° 5. 
Tessellæ, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190. 
Tincture, by infusion—p. 157, n° 1. 
Tobacco, medicinal—p. 323. n° 3. 
Tragea, powder, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Transfusion of blood, in live animals—p. 246. §.299. 
Troches, what kind of medicines?—p. 122. §.172. 
—ingredients for—p. 123. §.174. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.175. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 125. §.176. 
—their figure, size, and weight—p. ib. 
—dose and general quantity—p. 126. §.180. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
Troches

INDEX. 
Troches, subscription for—p. 127. §.182. 
—superscription for—p. 128. §.183. 
—their uses and speicmens—p. ib. 
U. 
Vapors, what? and their kinds—p. 307. §.380. 
—ingredients for them—p. 307. §.383. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.384. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. 310. §.386. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 311. §.388.
—subscription for them—p. ib. 
—their uses—p. 312. §.391. 
—specimens of them—p. 313. 
Vehicles, in general—p. 24. n° 11. 
—for taking powders—p. 63. §.123. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—for applying emplasters—p. 334. n° 2. 
—fomentations—p. 265. n° 3. 
Unguents, what kind of medicines?—p. 345. §.421. 
—ingredients for them—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing, &c.—p. 348. 
—their subscription—p. 350. §.428. 
—superscription—p. 351. §.429. 
—uses—p. ib. §.430. 
—specimens of them—p. 352. §.431. 
Uses of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. §.496. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.316.
—balsams—p. 360. §.441. 
—baths—p. 304. §.378. 
—boles—p. 82. §.136. 
—cakes p. 142. §.209. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.354. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.419. 
-colyria—p. 397- §.471. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.233. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.488. 
—drops—p. 243. §.292. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.147. 
—emplasters—p. 335- §.413. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.257. 
—epithems—p. 278. and 297. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.477. 
—fomentations—p. 267. §.329. 
—frications—p. 374. §.459. 
—frontals—p. 376. §.465. 
—fumigations—p. 322. §.403. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. §.504. 
—glysters—p. 411. §.5l4.
Gg2 Uses

INDEX.
—infusions—p. 158. §.222. 
—injections—p. 251. §.306. 
—juleps—p. 219. §.270. 
—juices—p. 191. §.244. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.158. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.452. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.281. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. §.483. 
—ointments—p. 351. §.430. 
—pills—p. 115. §.170. 
—powders—p. 65. §.125. 
—suppositaries—p. 451. §.528. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.197. 
—troches—p. 128. §.184. 
—vapors—p. 312. §.391. 
—unguents—p.351. §.430.
Vinous menstrua, their kinds and properties p. 144. n° 1 (2.) 
p. 145. n° 1. 2. 
Wafer-paper, for a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Wash, v. Bath—p. 308. §.369. 
Water, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions and decoctions, 
p. 145. 
Weights, used by apothecaries—p. 17. N° 6
—the antients—p.
AN 

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Diseases and Intentions, 
TO WHICH 
The several FORMULÆ, or PRESCRIPTIONS in 
this Book, correspond. 
Note, The Intentions are in Italick. 
A.
ABORTION, to prevent, v.
Analeptics, and
Hysterics.
—promote
boles 
emetic—p. 82
diuret.—p. 84. n° 6. 
elect. chalib.—p. 98. 
emplast. hyst.—p. 341. 
ointment purg.—p. 353. 
pills—p. 118. n° 7. 
powder—p. 74. n° 31. 
Abscess to suppurate
cataplas.—p. 291. n° 3, 4, 5.
electury.—p. 94. n° 3. 10 
emplaster—p. 339. n° 10 
unguent—p. 352. n° 1. 
Absorbent cap—p. 278. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 13. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—fumigation—p. 323. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 3. p. 221. n° 6. 
Gg3 Absorbent

INDEX. 
Absorbent mixture—p. 232. n° 5. 
—powders—p. 73. n° 27, 28, 29 and 30. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 3. 
Abstergents, v. Aperients. 
Aches, v. Anodynes. 
Acid bolus—p. 85. n° 8. (2.). 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 11. & seq. 
—fomentation—p. 271. n° 1. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 194, n° 6 and 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 4. and 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 2.
—vapors—p. 322. n° 1. 
Acrimony of the juices, v.
absorbent. 
acid, and  
alcaline 
Agglutinant aspersion p. 259. n° 7. 
—bolus—p. 86. n° 12. 
—cerate—p. 344. n° 1. 
—deceptions—p. 179. n° 4. p. 181. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. p. 96. n° 9. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 4. p. 341. n° 14. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. p. 209. n° 9. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 10. 
—injections—p. 252. n° 4. p. 254. n° 10. 
—julap—p. 219. n° 2. 
—liniment—p. 3. n° 9. 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233- n° 10. p. 235. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. p. 72. n° 25. 
—troches p. 131. n° 7. 
Alcaline, bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 293. n° 8 and 9. 
—decoction—p. 181. n° 8. 
—draughts— p. 234. n° 13. & seq. p. 235. n° 15. 
-drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4, 5. p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 15. & seq. 
—emplaster—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 279. n° 4. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—liniment—p. 369 n° 6. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. p. 234. n° 13. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. p. 120. n° 14. 
Alexipharmic, apozem—p. 180. n° 5. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 7, & seq. 
Alexi-

INDEX.
Alexipharmic draught—p. 236. n° 16. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. p. 96. n° 8. and 10. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—juleps—p. 221. n° 6. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 232. n° 6. p. 236. n° 16. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 17. 18. 22. 
Ague, boles emet.—p. 82. 
—febrifug.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoc. feb.—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—elect.—p. 97. n° 12. 
—emplast. ad carp.—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 298. n° 1. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 16. 
—infusion emet.—p. 159. 
—mixture peruv.—p. 236. n° 17. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
Analeptic, (v. Corroborants) apozem.—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 17. 
—broth—p. 179. n° 3. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 7. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. and n° 4. 
—juice-expressed p. 193. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. p. 220. n° 4. 
—linct. omn.—p. 104. & seq. 
—mixture—p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25. and 26. 
—troches—p. 128. n° 1. 
Anasarca, apozem—l80. n° 5. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 2. 4. 14. 
—decoction p. 181. n° 8. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 15. & seq. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—infusions—p. 161. n° 6. 8. & seq. 
—juice-expressed—p. 192. n° 2. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—mixtures—p. 244. n° 4. 6. 8. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 14. 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6. 15. 29. 
Ani procidentia, epithems—p. 282. n° 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 9. 
—suppository—p. 382. §.521. 
Anodyne, bolus—p. 86. n° 10. n°. 15.
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. n° 1. p. 292. n° 6. 
—draught—p. 237. n° 20. 
Gg4 Anodyne,

INDEX. 
Anodyne, drops, laud. liq. omn. 
—emplasters—p. 336. n° 1. p. 340. n° 11. 
—emulsions—p. 206. n° 1. p. 208. n° 5. 
—epithems p. 279. n° 3. p. 299. n° 6. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 4. 7. 9. 10. 
—gargarisms—p. 401. n° 3, 4. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 6. 12. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 10. and 11. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 3. 
—liniments—p. 367. n° 1. 3.7, 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5 and 6. 
—mixtures p. 232. n° 5. p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 122. n° 19. & feq. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 20. p. 73. n° 30. 
—sugar-cakes—p. 142. n° 2. 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
—unguents—p. 352. n° 2. 
Antacids, v. Absorbents. 
Antarthritic apozem—p. 193. n° 4.
—boles p. 84. n° 5. 16. 
—cataplasm p. 293. no. 8. 
—draughts p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 13. seg.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° 9. 11. 13. 15. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—mixtures p. 234. n° 13. p. 244. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n°10. 14. 18. & seq. 
—powders p. 73. n° 29. 35. 
—unguents p. 352. n° 2. 
Antasthmatic boles—p. 87. n° 14. 16. 18.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 9. 13. 15. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. 10. 
—infusion—p. z62. n° 8. 
—juleps—p. 219 n° 2. 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 3. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 13. 17. 19. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—powers—p. 71. n° 23. 32. 35. 
Anticolic, v. Colic. 
Antemetic boles—p. 85. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 230. n° 1. 20. 
—drops-p. 245. n° 10. & seq. 
—electuaries-p. 98. n° 14. 16. 
—emplaster-p. 337. n° 5. 
—epithem-p. 293. n° 10. p. 208. n° 2. 
—infusion-p. 162. n° 7 
—juleps-p. 219. n° 1. 4. 
Antemetic

INDEX. 
Antemetic liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures P- 194. n° 7. p. 231. n° 2. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 8. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 24. 26.
Antepileptic apophlegmatism—p. 396. n° 1. 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—balsam—p. 361. n° 2. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—epithem—p. 281. n° 8. 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 4. 7. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 
Anthelmintic bolus—p. 83. n° 2. (3.) n° 11. (2.) 
—draught—p. 243. n° 2. p. 163. 
—emulsion—p. 208. n° 7. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 2. 14. 
—infusions—p. 163. n° 8. & seq 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 3. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 12. 
—powders—p. 67 and 68. 
—tablets—p. 137. n° 1, 2. p. 142. n° 1. 
Anthysteric balsam—p. 362. n° 4. 
—boles—p. 86. n° 11. & seq. n° 7. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 5. 7. 9. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 16. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—infusion—p. 16l. n° 6. 
—julep—p.220. n° 5. 
—liniment—p. 369- n° ib. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 6, 7. 
—powders?—p. 74. n° 32, 33. 
Anticteric, v. Jaundice
Antinephritic
Antiparalytic, v. Palsy.
—apozem—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 3. 12. 15. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 13.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 2. 15. 
—emulsion-p. 210. n° 11. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 6. 12. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. 7.
—linctus—p. 105. n° (2.) 5. 
—mixtures—p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 75. n° 35.
 



INDEX 
Antiphlogistic boles p. 83. n° 3. 15. 17. 
—baths—p. 306. n° 5, 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 292. n° 6, 7. 
—collyria—p. 380. n° 1, 2. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 20. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 11, 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—emullions—p. 206. n° 1. 3. 11. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 3. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 3. 6, 11, 12. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 192. n° 1. 3. 4. 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 2. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7, 8. 10. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 36.
Antipleuritic, v. Pleurisy. 
Antirheumatic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 12. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 5. 12. 16. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 16. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—infusion—p. 160. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 10. 
—mixture—p. 235. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 10. 12 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 29. 35. 
Antiscorbutic ale—p. 164. n° 10. p. 179. n° 2. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 87. n° 16. 
—electuaries—p. 93. n° 6. 8. 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juices—p. 193. n° 5, 6. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—infusions-p. 160. n° 4. 10. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 219. n° 10. 12. 16. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6, 7. 
Antipasmodic boles—p. 83. n° 3. 10. 16. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—electuary—p. 96. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 9. 11. 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 
Antisyphilic boles—p. 83. n° 2. (1.) n° 13. 
—electuaries p. 95. n° 6. 13. 
—emplaster p. 341. n° 15.
—fumigation p. 326. n° 10. & ult. 
—liniment—p. 371- n° 11. 
—pills—p. 12. n° 12, 13. 15, 16. 
St.

INDEX. 
St. Anthony's Fire, v. Antiphlogistic. 
Anxiety, v. Cardiac. 
Aperient boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—cataplasm.—p. 293. n° 8. 
—decoctions—p. 181. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 17. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juice—p. 192. n° 1. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 
—fumes—p. 322. n° 2. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 16. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. & seq. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 10. 12. 
Appetite to recover, v. Antemetic. 
Apophlegmatic decoction—p. 396. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 398. n° 6 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 5. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 
—juice—p. 397. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 2. 
—nodule—p. 398. n° 7.
—powders—p. 69. n° 16. p. 397. n° 4.
—sugar-cakes—p. 398. n° 5 
—troches—p. ib. n° 8. 
Apoplexy, v. Antepileptic. 
Ardor urinæ, v. Diluents, Refrigerants, and Balsamics. 
Aromatic balsam p. 362. n° 5. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 10. 14. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 2. 6. 
—fumes—p. 323. n° 4. 9. 
—glysters—p. 415. n° 13. 15. 16. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 4. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixture—p. 236. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 22. 24. 
—tablets—p. 1 38. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 
—vapors—p. 314. n° 2. 3. 
Arthritic, v. Antarthritic. 
Ascarides, v. Anthelmintic. 
Ascites, v. Anasarca. 
Asthma, v. Antastmatic.
Astringent 


INDEX. 
Astringent bolus—p. 83. n° 19. 
—decoction—p. 179. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 4, 5. 
—emplaster—p. 337. n° 4. 
—epithems—p. 280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 8. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 159. n° 2. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture— p. 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 26. 34. 
Atrophe, v. Analeptic. 
Attenuants, v.
Alexipharmics 
Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
Attrahent, v.
Epispastic.
Rubisier.
B. 
Balsamic boles—p. 86. n° 12. 17. 
—decoctions—p. 179. n° 3, 4. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 14, 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. 9. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 12. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—fotus—p. 272. n° 10. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 4, 5. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 5. 6. 12. 
—infusion—p. 160, n° 5. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 219. n° 2. 
—linctus—p. 105. (2.) and n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233. n° 10. 14. 15. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 17, 18, & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. 25. 
—troches—p. 131. n° 7. 
Bechich, v. Pectoral and Balsamic. 
Belly-ache, v. Colic. 
Birth to promote, bolus—p. 84. n° 7. 
—draughts—p. 235. n° 14. 15.
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 10. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5.
—powders—p. 74. n° 31, 32, 33. 
Blasts, v. Erisipelas, and Antiphlogistic. 
Bleeding, v. Hæmorrhage. 
Bloody-

INDEX. 
Bloody-flux, v. Dysentery. 
Breath-fetid, troches—p. 130. n° 5 & seq. 
Bruises, v.
Aperients and
Balsamics.
Bubos to suppurate—p. 339. n° 10. 
Burns, (v. Antiphlogistic,) emplast.—p. 340. n° 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7. 10. 
C.
Cachexy, v. Aperients, Aromatics, Corroborants. 
Calculus, v. Antinephritics. 
Cancer, v. Aperients and Paregorics. 
Cardiac (v. Alexipharmic) boles—p. 85. n° 8. 
—draughts—p. 236. n° 16. 18. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 96. n° 8. 10, 11. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—epithem—p. 299. n° 4. p. 281. n° 8. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 7. 15. 
—infusion—p. 262. n° 7. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. and n° (3.) 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. 16. 18. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 21. 28.
Cardialgia, v. Absorbents.
Caries, v. Alexipharmics, and Detergents. 
Carminatives, v. Alexipharmics. 
Catalepsy, v. Antapoplectics. 
Catarrh, v. Diaphoretics, and Corroborants. 
Cathartic apozem—p. p.179. n° 2.
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. 3, 4, 5. 
—cakes—p. 142 n° 1. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1. 2 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 6 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 2. 8, 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—infusions—p. 159. n° 2. p. 163. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixtures—p. 209. n° 8. p. 213. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1, 2.
—pills—p. 116. 
—potions, v. draughts. 
—powders—p. 66, 67, 68. 
—suppositories 
—tablets—p. J37. p. Ncr,nc-r, 2. 
—wines—p. 159. n° 2. 9. 
Catoche, v. Antapoplectic. 
Caustic aspersions—p. 259. n° 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. p. 299. n° 5. p. 373. n° 5. and 6.
Caustic 

INDEX. 
Caustic emplasters—p. 37. n° 7.
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—liquor—p. 244. n° 4. 
—powders—p. 259. n° ib. 
Cephalic balsams—p. 361. n° 1. 2. 6. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 8. 16. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—decoction—p. 222. n° 10. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 14. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° g. 11. 16. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—errhins—p. 385. n° 5. 
—frication—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 378. n° 5. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 3. 8. 10. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 10. 13. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 4. 5. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—pills—p. 116. n° (3.) 6. 7. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 22. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 5, 6. 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 7. 
Chaliliat drops—p. 245. n° 10. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 16. 
—mixture—p. 245. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 5. 6. 8. 
—powders—p. 74. n° 32. 34. 
Chlorosis, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Coolers, v. Acids, Refrigerants, and Diluents. 
Contusions, v. Aperients, and Balsamics. 
Cholic, Biliose, v. Acid, Absorbent, Cathartics, and oily Mixtures. 
—Arthritic, v. Aromatics, Anodynes, and Revulsives. 
—Hysteric, v. Anthysterics. 
—Flatulent, v. Aromatics. 
—Nephritic, v. Antinephritic. 
—from Aliments, v. Emetics and Cathartics. 
Constipatives, v. Astringents. 
Convulsions, v. Antispasmodics. 
Corroborant, (v. Analeptics) ale—p. 159. n° 2. 
—apozem—p. 179. n° 4.
—bath, cold water 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 18. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—colyrium, cold water 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries p. 94. n° 4. 5. 11. 14. 16. 
Corroborant

INDEX. 
Corroborant, v. (Analeptics) emplasters p. 337. n° 4, 5.
—epithems—p.280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 2. 4. 9. 
—infusion—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture—p 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4, 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25, 26. 34 
Cough, v. Balsamics, and Aperients. 
Courses to promote, v. Aperients and Anthysterics. 
—to restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Cutaneous Disorders, v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
D. 
Delivery to promote, v. Alexipharmics, Emetics, and Anthysteries. 
Dentition to facilitate, gargarism—p. 401. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 368. n° ib. 
Deobstruents, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
Desiccatives, v. Absorbents. 
Detergent, (v. Aperients) aspersions—p. 257. n° 1. 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 290. n° 2. 
—gargarism—p. 400. n° 1. 2.  
—glysters—p. 412. n° 1. 2. 7. 14. 
—injections—p. 251. n° 1. 4. 6. 8. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 6. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 21. 35. 
Diabetes 
Diarrhæ  
v. Agglutinants, Astringents, and Balsamics, 
Diaphoretics, v. Aromatics. 
Digestion to strengthen, v. Aromatics, and Astringents. 
Diluent apozem—p. 179. n° 3. 
—infusion 162. n° 7. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8. 10, 11. 
—juice—p. 93. n° 4. 
Discutients, v. Aperients. 
Diuretic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 6. 12. 
—bath—p. 303. n° 2.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 13. 
—emulsions—p. 208. n° 6. 11. 
—infusions—p. 160. n° 3. 4. 7. 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 193. n° 4. 5. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 18. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 15. 35. 
Dropsys v. Aperients, Cathartics, and Diuretics. 
Dysentery, v. Alexipharmics, Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Dysury,  v, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
E.

INDEX.
E. 
Ecbolics, v. Birth to promote. 
Ecchimoses, v. Apperients, Attenuants. 
Eccoprotics, v. Lenitives. 
Ecphratlics, v. Aperients.  
Emetic boles—p. 82. 
—draughts p. 233. n° 8. 11.
—juices p. 192. n° 2. 
—infusions p. 159. n° 1. 
—powders p. 65. 
—wines p. 159. n° 1. 
Emmenagtgs, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Emmenagogic boles—p. 86. n° 11. 16. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15, 16. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 3. 16. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5. 
—pessary—p. 424. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 6, 7, 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 2. 32. 
Emollients, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Epispastics, cataplasms—p. 372. n° 3. 6. 
—dropax—p. 372. n° 1. 
—emplasters—p. 373. n° 4. 7. 
—pastes—p. 372. n° 2. 5. 
Epulotic Aspersion—p. 259. n° 7. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 14. 
—sparadrap p. 338, n° 6. 
Erysipelas, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Errhins—p. 384 
Escharotics, v. Caustics. 
Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
Exanthemata, Scorbutic, v. Absorbents, Aperients, Diluents, Ca- 
thartics. 
—Inflammatory, v. Lenitives, Antiphlogistics, Diluents. 
F.
Faintings, v. Antapopledics, Cephalics, and Cardiacs. 
Fevers in general, v. Aiexipharmics, Epispastics, Cardiacs, Dilu- 
ents. Acids, Antiphlogistics. 
Fevers, Intermitting, v. Emetics, and Aperients. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
Fevers

INDEX. 
Fevers, intermitting, draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 12. 
—epithems—p. 279. n° 4. p. 298. n° 1. 
—glysters—p. 416. n° 14. 16. 
—infusion—p. 160. n6, 5. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8, 9. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° g. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
—Remitting, bolus feb.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—Inflammatory, v. Acids, Antiphlogistics, Diluents, Car- 
diacs, and Alexipharmics. 
—Nervous, or Slow, v. Alexipharmics, Cephalics, Epispastics. 
—Patrid-hestic, v. Antiphlogistics, Acids, Analeptics. 
G. 
Gangrene, v. Aperients, and Alexipharmics. 
Gleet, v. Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Gonorrhæ, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
Gout, v. Antarthritic. 
Gravel, v. Antinephritic, 
Green-sickness, v. Aperients, and Emmenagoges. 
Gripes, v. Cholic, and Anodynes. 
Gutta-Rosacea, v. Antiphlogistics. 
H. 
Hæmorrhage, internal, v. Balsamics, and Refrigerants. 
—pulv.—p. 75. n° 36. 
—external. 
—aspersion—p. 258. n° 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 298. n° 3. 
—injection—p. 254. n° 9. 
Hæmorrhoids (v. Eccoprotics.) 
—cataplasm—p. 292. n° 6. 
—epithem—p. 299, n° 6. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 10. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 11. 
—suppositories—p. 423. no. 5 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
Heart burn, v. Cardialgia. 
Hectic, v. Fever. 
Hemeplegia, v. Palsy. 
Hoarseness, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Hydrogog draughts—p. 102. n° 2. p. 209. n° 8. p. 243. n° 1. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 1. 
Hh Hydrocele


INDEX. 
Hydrocele, v. Aperient Externals. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
Hydrops, v. Anasarca 
Hypnotics, v. Anodynes. 
Hypo, v. Aperients. 
Hysteric Passion, v. Anthysterics. 
I. 
Jaundice, apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. p. 83. n° 3. 14. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 13. 
—drops p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 14. 
—powders p. 66. n° 2. 13. 35. 
Impotency, v. Aromatics, Externals and Internals. 
Inflammations, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Intermittents, v. Agues. 
Itch, v. Aperients, and Cathartics. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 13. 
—linimen—p. 371. n° 11. 
—unguents—p. 345. n° 4.
K. 
King's-Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
L.
Laxatives, or
Lenitives, 
boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 
—electuarics—p. 94. n° 2. 6. 
—epithems—p. 270. n° 4. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 
—mixture—p. 234. n° 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 
Leprosy, v Itch, and King's-Evil. 
Lechargy, v. Cephalics, and Antapoplectics. 
Looseness, and  
Lientery
v. Diarrhæ   
Lythontriptics, v. Antinephritics.
Lubricants, v. Balsamics.
Madness,

INDEX.
M. 
Madness, raving, v. Laxatives, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—melancholy, v. Emetics, Aperients, and Chalybiats. 
Measles, v. Balsamics, Cardiacs, Diluents, and Eccoprotics, 
Melancholy, v. Hippo. 
Menses to provoke, v. Emmenagogs. 
—restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Mortification, v. Gangrene. 
N. 
Narcotics, v. Anodynes. 
Nausea, v. Antemetics. 
Nephritics, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Neurotics, v. Cephalics. 
Numbness, v. Palsy. 
O. 
Obstructions, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
P. 
Pains to ease, v. Anodynes. 
Palsy. v. Antarthritics. 
Paregorics, Anodynes, Balsamics, and Diluents.
Phlegm, v. Hydrogogs, and Diaphoretics. 
Phthisis, v. Analeptics. 
Piles, v. Hæmorrhoides. 
Plague, v. Fevers, nervous. 
Pleurisy, v. Balsamics, Detergents, and Diluents. 
Pox, v. Antisiphilics. 
Q.
Quinsey, v. Antiphlogistics. 
R. 
Rheumatism, v. Antarthritics. 
Rickets, v. Aperients, and Corroborants. 
S. 
Scalds, v. Burns. 
Scabs 
Scald-head  
Schirri 
v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
Hh2 Scurvy,

INDEX. 
Scurvy, v. Antiscorbutics. 
Seminal Weakness, v. Analeptics, Balsamics, and Corroborants. 
Sleep to promote, v. Anodynes. 
Small Pox, v. Fevers, inflammatory. 
Spasms, v. Antispasmodics. 
Spleen, v. Aperients, and Chalibiates. 
Sterility, v. Aromatics. 
Stinking Breath, Troches for—p. 130. n° 5. 
Stone, v. Antinephrities. 
Strangury, v. Balsamics; and Diluents. 
Struma, v. Aperients, Absorbents, Antisyphilics, ahd Diluents. 
Sweats, to check, v. Acids, and Corroborants. 
T. 
Teeth, to cleanse and preserve—p. 390. 
Thirst, v. Acids, and Diluents. 
Tubercles of the Lungs, and Tumors to discuss, v. Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
U. 
Venery to provoke, v. Aromatics. 
Vertigo, v. Antepileptics. 
Vomiting, v. Antemetics. 
Urine, bloody, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—hot or scalding, v, Balsamics, and Astringents. 
—involuntary, u. Corroborants. 
W. 
Whites, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Wind, v. Carminatives, and Aromatics. 
Worms, v. Anthelmintics.







































LECTURES
OF 
PHARMACY: 
EXHIBITING 
EXACT RULES for PRESCRIBING, 
And of Use to every 
STUDENT of PHYSIC, 
As well as Necessary to all 
APOTHECARIES. 
FIRST GIVEN 
At the Close of an Annual COURSE of CHYMISTRY (on
the Desire of the late Learned Dr. BOERHAAVE) and since 
Published by Dr. H. GAUBIUS, Successor to that celebrated 
PROFESSOR in the Colledges of MEDICINE and CHEMISTRY, 
in the UNIVERSITY of LEYDEN. 
Translated by a PHYSICIAN, 
With proper NOTES, additional FORMS of PRESCRIPTION, 
an useful APPENDIX, and a double INDEX. 
LONDON: 
PRINTED for JOHN NOON, at the White Hart, near Mercers-
Chapel, in Cheapside, MDCCXLIV. 



(iii)
THE 
TRANSLATOR'S 
PREFACE. 
THE public, it is presumed, can 
be under no surprize at the ap- 
pearance of the present treatise: 
the character, abilities, and station of 
its learned author are so considerable, 
the composition and order of the book it- 
self so accurate, and its usefulness so ex- 
tensive and evident, that to make any 
apology on this account, would be alto- 
gether useless if not ridiculous. 
A2 THE

iv The Translator’s 
THE judicious will soon perceive the 
book to be none of those justly complain'd 
of; which consisting of mere repeti- 
tions from others, or a bare parade 
of method, leave the science as they 
found it; or rather retarded, by aug- 
menting the number of books without in- 
creasing knowledge. So far from it, that 
we have not any modern performance of 
the kind (at least in our language) ex- 
tant; notwithstanding the subject is so 
evidently useful and important: in so 
much, that it seems surprising Dr. Fuller 
shou'd give us (ex professo) an extempo- 
raneous Dispensatory, and yet neglect the 
main part; which is here largely con- 
sider’d; viz. the method of prescribing,
compounding, and exhibiting extempo- 
raneous medicines. 
Dr. Quincy has indeed said something 
on this head, in the latter part of his 
Dispensatory; but very little, and tran- 
siently, in comparison with the fulness 
and order of this: so that we may justly 
deem it more worthy of the title usurped 
by

v PREFACE.
by Dr. Fuller (i.e. Pharmacopæa Ex- 
temporanea), than any performance yet 
exposed to the world. 
To make the book as useful to the rea- 
der as intended by the author, does indeed 
require frequent revolution, and consul- 
tation by reference; but then it excludes 
numerous tautologies, and restrains the 
volume to a moderate size. 
THE formulas inserted as specimens 
by our author, may serve very well to il- 
lustrate the rules he has just before pre- 
scribed for them, and will give the rea- 
der some idea of the foreign practice this 
way: but most of them wou'd be judged 
aukward prescriptions by the physicians 
our own practice, notwithstanding they 
are generally extracted from the materia 
medica of the late celebrated professor 
Boerhaave: for which reason it was 
thought proper to further add such spe- 
cimens to the forms most in use, as are 
frequently to be met with in the practice 
of our best physicians. Those of the au- 
thor may be distinguished from such as 
A3 are 

vi The Translator’s 
are added; as the first begin with ꝶ. but 
the last with 4: and if any body is de- 
sirous to have still a larger number of 
specimens for each form, they may have 
recourse to Fuller; whose Pharmacopæa 
may be taken as a supplement to this.
WITH regard to the present trans- 
lation and edition, to have given a ver- 
sion directly literal wou’d have made the 
reading too stiff, and less agreeable with 
our own language: but care has been all 
along taken to preserve the author's sense, 
and to represent it generally to advan- 
tage, as much as possible in his own words. 
It is hoped the book has improved and 
pained in the translation; and there are 
several things which render this edition 
more compleat and useful than the origi- 
nal: the quotations referred to by our 
author are here subjoined in their pro- 
per places, Some occasional but necessary 
observations are here and there made,
and both are properly distinguished in the 
way of note; the several formulœ are in- 
stanced more largely and accurately, and 
the


vii PREFACE. 
the book is closed with useful and necessa- 
ry indices. 
TO conclude, for the literal errors, 
or other small over-sights which have 
accidentally crept in, we must presume 
on the readers allowance; since we 
find the most elaborate performances 
are not intirely free: and as the com- 
mon interest of the faculty was the cause 
of this publication, there is the more 
room to expect candor and good nature 
from its members, in behalf of their 
Humble Servant, 
S. M.

THE
AUTHOR’S PREFACE 
WHEN I first applied myself to the 
profession of physic, among several dif- 
ficulties which offer'd, the greatest 
was that of prescribing a proper form 
to the medicines indicated; such as might not 
only best answer the intention, but also fit them 
for the most just and easy composition in the pro- 
per hands, and make their exhibition to the pa- 
tient the least irksome mid most successful. For 
I soon found the general precepts which are usu- 
ally learned on this head, barely in universities, 
were very unequal to the purpose; and that a 
just determination of the form was to be had only 
from considering every individual, and even the 
most minute circumstances both of the patient 
and the medicine: that there were no forms of 
medicines answer able for the same intention in all 
cases alike; and that the same indication often 
required the application of a medicine in very 
different ways and forms, before a physician cou'd 
effect his design, and acquit himself to his patient. 
I also remarked the admonition of Hippocrates, 
(μηfεγ ειχη, μηδεv ζωεgopαv) that to attempt a 
cure inconsiderately, was to attempt to do no- 
thing to the purpose; which caution is service- 
able here, if any where: for if a physician be
wrong


ix The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.        
wrong or careless in prescribing proper medicines, 
he will quickly find how easily his intention may 
be frustrated, notwithstanding that and his other 
observations be ever so just. The vast hopes and 
designs which a physician may have formed to 
himself from a due consideration of the disease, 
must inevitably fall to nothing, if he does not 
establish their being, by a just prescription and 
exhibition of proper medicines; the result of 
which, may be a happy cure, the proper end of 
his profession: nor does a physician draw his cha-
racter so much from what he thinks, as from 
what he orders and commits to paper; from 
whence, the great importance of our present sub- 
ject, both to the physician and patient, is suffici- 
ently evident.
I found it not only a great difficulty to charge 
my memory with set forms, composed by my tea- 
chers and the best writers; but I also perceived, 
notwithstanding the deference and credulity of 
youth, that such could not directly, suit my prac- 
tice in all similar cases that occurred: as my 
cases did not in every circumstance correspond with 
those for which the set forms were compiled; and 
that therefore I  must be under a necessity of com- 
posing new forms for my particular patients; or 
else of making frequent changes in those which I 
had learned. This consideration, with the new
and sudden changes in the state of disease; and a 
natural aversion to the servile yoke of prejudice, 
prevailed with me to set my judgment free from 
the fetters of set forms complied by other men; 
especially as I was encouraged thereto, by the cus-
tom

x The AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
tom of extemporaneous prescription prevailing, 
now, almost universally.  
NOR was I satisfied with the answer made 
me by some old standers in practice, whom I some- 
times consulted in those difficult and sudden changes, 
viz. that use and experience would make this 
work easy, however difficult it might seem to a 
beginner; but for fear of an irreparable loss of 
my reputation in practice, from many unhappy 
events, and even death, I was resolved to be also 
guided by my own reason, I therefore thought it 
incumbent on before I advanced in practice, 
to acquaint myself with all that had been well 
said on the subject by my predecessors in physic: 
for which end, I turned over all the physical 
writings that I cou'd get upon this theme, and 
compared the general rules which they prescribed, 
with the particular formulæ or prescriptions of 
the best physicians. 
BUT I as quickly found upon this review, 
that a great number of these rules were so uncer- 
tain, as to be oftener neglected than observed; 
that many were contradictory to each other, and 
the greatest part of them all liable to abundance 
of exceptions: as will appear to any one who 
compares them with the prescription in the daily 
practice of our most skilful physicians. Many 
physicians who had undertaken to instruct their 
juniors by their works on this head, having as it 
were forgot themselves, seem to have writ rather 
as expert masters, to masters, than to unskilful 
beginners: while others, over studious of brevity,
only

xi The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.             
only throw a darker mist before us. I therefore 
came at last to this resolution, viz. of collecting 
indifferently all the precepts which had been given 
for each particular form, and subjoining all the 
exceptions that occurred in their proper places, 
that by comparing and accommodating the dif- 
ference, I might thence deduce a set of general 
and more intelligible directions or propositions, 
which being methodized and reduced to their 
proper heads, wou'd form a manual to consult, 
and to direct my hand in practice. 
AND hence arose the present treatise: which 
tho' now published, I have not the vanity to pretend 
it has many great perfections and new doctrines, 
which are not to be met with scatter'd in the 
works of others; but I ingenuously confess there 
are few or none, but what have been exhausted, 
with some pains, from the attempts of others in 
this way. Nor will an impartial reader think 
the worse of this performance for having thus 
candidly imparted to him its origin. 
THE authors who have contributed and been 
consulted in the composition of this work, are too 
numerous to give a particular account of them 
here; tho' almost all of them are worthy of 
esteem: and were each to take bis proper quota, 
there wou'd not remain many pages to myself; for 
which reason I have omitted citations and refe- 
rences to authors in the body of the book itself; 
that I might not tire my reader with their num- 
ber, nor appear to him ostentatious of much 
reading. 
TO

xii The AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
TO conclude, the only cause of my publication, 
was this: being promoted to the public professor- 
ship of chemistry in this university, I was strongly 
sollicited by Boerhaave to subjoin a pharmaceuti- 
cal to my annual chemical course; and here it 
seemed for the interest of my audience to exhibit 
the doctrine and preparation of extemporaneous, 
as well as officinal medicines. I had therefore 
recourse to what I had formerly collected and me- 
thodized for my own use on this head, and from 
thence, as every one is pleased with his own, I 
took the method and materials of my lectures; 
that so my pupils might have same general rules 
to direct their prescriptions conformable to prac- 
tice, which I endeavoured to illustrate to them 
by specimen or example. But the time limited 
for the performance of this course was too short, 
to give the doctrine with that slowness and distinc- 
tion which is necessary for a swift elocution 
wou'd not make an impression on their minds, suf- 
ficient to enable them to prescribe a form regular- 
ly to a proposed case, by that time they were re- 
turned home; so that I thought of the press as an 
expedient to save myself trouble, and make this 
doctrine the more useful to them. If I obtain this, 
it is enough; but if any body else reap advantage 
from hence, they are welcome: I shall then at 
least have the happiness of thinking myself the more 
useful by my labours. 
Written at Leyden, 1739.
THE

(xiii) 
THE 
CONTENTS. 
THE introduction—Pag.1
General rules and cautions to he observed
before prescribing—4 
OF FORMS IN GENERAL—4—57 
Of the general heads and circumstances of formula or 
prescriptions: 
(I.) In common to all—13 
Viz. Inscription (§.55.), beginning (§.56.), 
order or method (§. 57.), the way of 
writing the ingredients and their quan- 
tities (§.58.), the subscription directing 
the apothecary (§. 59.), the superscrip-
tion directing the patient (§. 60.). 
(II.) In common to simple formula—25 
Viz. The dose (§. 65.) and general quantity 
to be made up at once (§. 68.)—25 
(III.)

xiv The CONTENTS. 
(III.) Proper to compound formulæ—Pag.35 
Viz. 1°. Parts; basis (§.75.), adjuvans 
(§.78.), corrigens (§.83.), consti- 
tuens (§.86.) 
2°. Their mutual proportion (§.87.), 
general quantity (§.93.), and dose 
(§.92.) 
3°. Their QUALITIES; consistence 
(§.96.), colour (§.99.), odor 
(§.100.), taste (§.101.), medicinal 
virtues (§.102.).
OF FORMS IN PARTICULAR—Pag.54 
Forms of internal medicines—ib. 
Powder—ib. 
Bolus—76 
Electuary–88 
Linctus—99 
Pills—106 
Troches—122 
Tablets—131 
Cakes—138 
Insusions—143 
Decoctions—164 
Expressed juices—182 
Emulsions—194 
Forms

xv The CONTENTS.
Forms by mixture, p. 210
Juleps—pag. 211 
Mixtures—224 
Drops, &c—237 
Forms of external medicines—246 
Of external forms common to several parts. 
Of Injections—246 
Aspersions—255 
Epithems in general—259 
liquid, or fomentations—260 
dry, of several kinds—273 
Cataplasms in general—282 
boiled—ib. 
crude—294 
Baths in general—300 
watery—ib 
vaporous in general—307 
Moist vapours—308 
Suffitus, or dry fumes—315 
Plasters—326 
Cerates—342 
Ointments—345 
Balsams, odoriserous—354 
Liniments—363 
Epispastics—371 
Frications-374 
Of external forms proper to certain parts—375 
—to the head—ib. 
Cucusa, or scull-cap—ib. 
Frontal—ib. 
Collyrium—378
Exter-

xvi THE CONTENTS.
External forms proper to the nose—382 
Errhines—ib. 
Smelling bottles, &c.—380 
Of stomatics for the mouth, in general—388 
Dentifrices—389 
Apophlegmatisms—391 
Gargarisms—399 
Scutes, or stomach plasters—402 
Clysters, intestinal—ib. 
Suppositories—417 
Pessaries, and nascales—423 
Addenda—424 
AN

AN 
INTRODUCTION 
TO THE 
Method of Prescribing, &c. 
§.1. Formula or prescription, a- 
mong physicians, is a rati- 
onal assignment and com- 
bination of such pharma- 
ceutical remedies as have 
by art been found to be 
proper in particular cases; 
respect being had to the 
matter and form of the ingredients and medicine: 
so that it may be commodiously made up by the 
apothecary, and applied with ease and success by 
the patient.  
§.2. Therefore that branch of the practice of 
physic which delivers rules for the effecting this 
rational combination (§.1.), is termed the method 
of prescribing forms of medicines. 
§.3. The matter of the formula (§.1.), whe- 
ther it be the product of nature or art, is sup- 
plied from the (iλη iατoiχη) materia medica, or 
pharmaceutical stores. The form thereof is va- 
rious, being determined by the very different 
B cir-

2 INTRODUCTION.
circumstances both of the patient and ingredi- 
ents; as will hereafter more evidently appear. The 
end and design of it, is, an artful preparation and 
just administration of those means by which the 
physician endeavours to answer his indications, and 
effect a cure. 
§.4. The method of prescribing (§.2.) therefore 
comprises the very last part which a physician is 
to engage with in his profession; this being the 
point to which his skill in all the other branches 
of the science have a direct tendence: nor does a 
complete workman therein hardly ever miss 
of a happy compensation for his industry and 
care. 
§.5. From hence (§.3. and §.4.), the neces- 
sity, usefulness and advantages as well as dignity 
of this ultimate branch of the profession, are suf- 
ficiently obvious. 
§.6. The formulæ, or prescriptions, (§.1.) are 
distinguished into (1.) officinal, respecting a medi- 
cine made and kept ready for future uses in apo- 
thecaries shops; and (2.) extemporaneous, to be 
directly made up and applied for present exigen- 
cies. 'Tis chiefly the latter of these we intend re- 
handle in this treatie. 
§.7. In order to prescribe either of these for- 
mula’s (§.6.), it is supposed that the physician or 
prescriber has a previous knowledge of, 
1. The doctrine of indications; whereby he is 
instructed whether any thing is to be done, what, 
by what means, and after what manner, toge- 
ther with the time, order, &c. in which the me- 
dicines or instruments are to be used. 
2. Of the whole materia medica in all the 
three kingdoms, animal, vegetable and mine- 
ral; inasmuch as they afford the matter (§.3.) 
of the prescribed formula: but he shou'd be 
more particularly versed in those simples and 
medicines


3 INTRODUCTION.
medicines which are at hand, or proper to the 
country where he practises. And lastly, 
3. Of all the preparations in pharmacy, both 
chemical and galenical, simple and compound; 
together with the manner in which they all 
operate, and the effects they produce in the 
animal system: for by the knowledge of these 
(1.2.3.) the physician knows how to direct 
his choice of ingredients, when he prescribes 
the formula (§.1.) 
§.8. And indeed it is not a superficial, as is 
too commonly found, but a just and more exten- 
sive knowledge of the two last (§.7. n° 2. 3.), that 
is here required for this purpose. For who will 
pretend to direct the apothecary how to act, that 
is himself ignorant of the proper methods of act- 
ing, in things of that nature? How can any one 
select or make a rational choice ot materials which 
he has never seen, or scarce heard, of? What 
room has he to foresee (and consequently prevent 
the bad) effects of applications, who has never 
examined their composition and texture, nor ex- 
perienced their action on other bodies?—He 
therefore that intends for this branch (§.2.) of the 
profession will doubtless find his account in giving 
some attention to the practical part of officinal phar- 
macy; in critically examining the mechanical struc- 
ture and sensible qualities of the materia medica & 
chemica, and in observing their effects and manner 
of acting on animal bodies. 
§.9. So that from comparing what has been 
said (§ 7. and 8. with §.4.), we may naturally 
infer that there is required more time and diligence 
than is generally supposed, to qualify one for this 
business; with regard to which, we are going to 
lay down directions according to the best of our 
abilities. But a just treatment and method will 
B2 cer-

4 INTRODUCTION. 
certainly have their, force in making the acquisi- 
tion hereof the more easy. 
§.10. Supposing therefore the preliminaries 
(mentioned §.7. and §.8.), requisite for prescrib- 
ing forms rationally, to be sufficiently known; 
we shall distribute the matter of our subject
under three general heads; the first of which, 
by way of introduction to the rest, will com- 
prise the rules and cautions necessary to be 
observed before prescribing, the second, will ex- 
hibit what relates to prescriptions in general, with- 
out regarding the particular form; and the last, 
will contain the particulars of every individual 
form of medicine in use, with proper examples or 
specimens of each. 
GENERAL RULES and CAUTIONS 
to be observed before prescribing. 
§.11. A prudent physician never orders any  
thing in his prescription but what he 
has a sufficient reason for, which upon inquiry he 
is able to give; so that he does not ad at random, 
from custom or prejudice, but as the indications, 
which he has before rightly deduced and consider- 
ed, direct him. 
§.12. He is first of all therefore to determine 
rationally, whether in the present case there be 
required any thing to be done on his part. 
§.13. In consequence of which determination 
if nature herself be found strong enough, and in a 
proper disposition to throw off the disease, if the 
disorder can absolutely receive no benefit from 
medicines, if its nature or particular disposition be 
doubtful and not yet determined, or if it be fore- 
seen

5 General Rules and Cautions.
seen that a cure thereof will bring on a worse dis- 
ease; it is then both just and rational to omit pre- 
scribing, at least any thing that will much affect
the œconomy, in order to avoid oppressing the 
patient both in his body and purse. 
§.14. But to prevent the patient’s falling into 
despair from being destitute of physical help, and 
to exclude ignominious reflection on the physician 
and his profession, as seeming useless or imper- 
fect; it is often adviseable in those circumstances 
(§.13.), to order something innocent in a pre- 
scription, such as will do no harm, if they should 
prove of no great benefit. With this view, the 
physician will acquaint and familiarise himself with 
several forms consisting of simple ingredients; as 
innocent julaps, mild emulsions, easing mixtures, 
unactive powders, &c. by which specious shew of 
assistance, the patient will rest much more quiet 
and easy both in his body and mind, than if left 
destitute with a harsh prognostic. This conside- 
ration will be more particularly useful in the un- 
certain and often imaginary disorders of virgins, 
and married women, especially whilst teeming. 
§.15. If the physician finds by his indications 
that there is room to expect success from his en- 
deavours, the next step is to determine how and 
by what means that may be obtained with the 
greatest ease and expedition: both which we are 
directed to by the doctrine of indications, which 
being supposed already known, we shall here men- 
tion such only as more immediately relate to our 
present design. 
§.16. The grand scope in a cure being to re- 
cover (tuto, cito & jucunde) safely, quickly and 
pleasantly, the physician should always have his 
eye fix’d upon that view; as being the point to 
which every thing he orders shou’d have, as much 
as possible, an immediate tendency. 
§.17.

6 General Rules and Cautions. 
§.17. Hence he is directed to select the most 
efficacious and proper ingredients, and to combine 
them in a manner most suitable to answer his in- 
tentions, having a regard both to their matter and 
the form. 
§.18. His prescription should also contain no- 
thing that will be attended with hazard or danger 
in the administration: tho' in desperate and un- 
tractable cases, it is allowable to try a new method; 
supposing it to be conducted with judgment, and 
the relations forewarned of the doubtfulness of 
success in the case. 
§.19. A physician that consults his character 
and interest, will never be fond of using new and 
unexperienced methods and remedies, whilst there 
are others of long standing in practice as suitable 
for his purpose; and even those, he will order 
with the utmost circumspection: reputation being 
oftener lost and envy got in its room, by such at- 
tempts, than thro' ignorance. 
§.20. He will reject all obsolete and useless 
medicines, and such as easily change or corrupt 
by keeping, left, they prove disagreeable and hurt- 
ful to the patient, or at least obstruct his inten- 
tion: upon which account, it is proportionably 
better for medicines to be made up at the shops of 
the most celebrated apothecaries; because their 
more constant and speedy vent gives oftener occa- 
sion for a renewal or fresh making of those medi- 
cines; but skill and honesty in compounding, are, 
however, stronger recommendations on the behalf 
of the apothecary. 
§.21. Rough medicines are to be always laid 
aside, where more gentle ones will serve the turn; 
but if such are used, it must be with great circum- 
spection and prudence, especially when intended 
for weak and delicate habits of body, or very sen- 
sible and nervous parts, left the violence of 
remedy

7 General Rules and Cautions.
remedy raise an ill opinion of the physician and 
his profession. 
§.22. Medicines which require extraordinary 
skill to prepare them, shou'd be made up and ex- 
hibited with one's own hand, or else not be pre- 
scribed at all; unless we be sufficiently assured of 
the faithfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.23. Very costly ingredients shou'd be spar- 
ingly or very little used, when others more com- 
mon and cheap are as suitable for the intention; 
which caution we generally find to be observed in 
prescriptions: but some allowance must be made 
for the luxurious daintiness of the rich, who of- 
ten judge the virtue of a medicine by its price. 
§.24. Exotic or far-fetch'd remedies, are not 
to be superstitiously preferred to such as are the 
product of our own country, when the latter are 
equal to our design; for the indigenous simples and 
compounds are not so subject to adulteration and 
fraud, nor decay from the length of time and 
change ot climate, as exoticks are. 
§.25. It is often prudent to order such things 
as (by their great commonness, easy and frequent 
name, particular smell, taste and other qualities) 
are popularly known and discoverable, by titles 
the least in use, or else mix'd and veiled with 
other substances; left being discovered, the pa- 
tient might be disgusted at them, or else despise 
them as of no efficacy. 
§.26. We may be more ready and liberal in 
the use of particular medicines to such as have 
frequently undergone their operation, than to o- 
thers unaccustomed to 'em, which particularly 
holds good with regard to emetics, cathartics, 
opiates, &c. 
§.27. Such ingredients as are unpleasant, nau- 
seous or troublesome to be taken, should be avoid- 
ed as much as possible; or at least ordered in a
B4 very

8 General Rules and Cautions. 
very small quantity, and artfully disguised in 
something more agreeable: it being generally bet- 
ter to give nothing, than what nature has a parti- 
cular abhorrence to; which caution is particularly 
of consequence with respect to very nice and 
fanciful women, children, infants, and such as have 
some particular antipathy, &c. 
§.28. Hence it is often proper to be satisfied, 
that the patient has no natural disgust and aver- 
sion to the particular medicine and form pre- 
scribed; for otherwise, remedies extremely well 
adapted to the disorder, may prove not only in- 
effectual, but sometimes of pernicious consequence; 
notwithstanding that be brought about by nothing 
more than the imagination or fancy. 
§.29. The judicious physician will aim at sim- 
plicity with efficacy, and not multitude and quan- 
tity of ingredients in his prescription; studying 
rather a concise brevity, than a pompous and af- 
fected scroll: and accordingly he will select his 
materials from the vast field of the materia medica, 
not promiscuously, but as they stand approved by 
reason and experience. 
§.30. But the younger physician, whose cha- 
racter and business are not yet sufficiently establish- 
ed, will accommodate his practice, as much as is 
consistent with his intention, to the customs and 
opinions of the age, place, and people he is con- 
cerned with: thus he will the more easily pave 
the way for coming into publick esteem; but 
when confirmed, and of considerable standing in 
practice, he may then safely disregard such cir- 
cumstances. 
§.31. Natural and simple medicines are prefer- 
able to prepared and compound ones, when the 
virtues of both are equally the same. For in pre- 
paration and competition, medicines are not only 
subject to change and put on other qualities, but
their

9 General Rules and Cautions. 
their goodness must also greatly depend on the 
honesty and dexterity of the compounder; whereas 
the conduct and constancy of faithful nature greatly 
surpasses all the pretensions of art. 
§.32. Tho' the knowledge of every simple in 
the Materia medica be useful to a physician, he is 
required to have a more particular acquaintance 
with such as are in constant practice, and for that 
purpose always kept ready in the shops; left he 
should order things which are not ready at hand: 
which would be matter of little consequence, were 
it not for the prevailing forwardness of substitut- 
ing one thing for another, without consulting the 
physician. 
§.33. Besides the properties and doses of each 
simple and compound medicine, the young phy- 
sician. will remember the several synonimous appella- 
tions usually assigned to each; that he may not be 
liable to order the same thing more than once in a 
prescription, under different titles. Upon the 
same account he will also learn the several general 
appellations, which are for brevity used to signify 
several simples, as they are expressed in Morellus *. 
§.34. An acquaintance also with the several 
seasons of the year, proper to vegitable and ani- 
mal substances, should not be neglected but had in 
memory; left he order something to be fresh ga- 
thered, &c. in autumn or winter, which is to be had 
in that flourishing state only in spring' or summer. 
§.35. The different textures and consistences of 
both simple and compound medicines, must also 
come into consideration; to avoid improper forms 
and proportions in prescription. 
§.36. The mutual affinity and aptitude of the 
simples for mixture with each other, and of the 
instruments and methods by which they must be 
so
* See a list of these general appellations at the end of the Book.

10 General Rules and Cautions. 
so prepared, should be in like manner learned 
from a rational and practical pharmacy; which 
will make for the interest both of himself and pati- 
ent, and preserve him from being ridiculed by 
the apothecary’s man, when he may have occasion 
to mention them in his prescription. 
§.37. By remembering the constituent ingredi- 
ents of officinal compounds, we may avoid an im- 
proper repetition of the same simples in an ex- 
temporaneous form; but indications, sometimes, 
require such repetition. 
§.38. Nor is it proper to accumulate many in- 
gredients in one form, which differ, indeed, in 
name, but not in their nature and specific virtues; 
for that would be much the same as neglecting the 
caution at §.33. 
§.39. Such of the select ingredients as may com- 
modiously enter one form, should not, without ne- 
cessity, be distributed into more, respect being had 
to the opinions and circumstances mention’d 
§.30;  for there are some who are much displeased 
with few and short formulæ. 
§.40. On the other hand, simples which have 
no congruity with each other, so as to mix uni- 
formly, should be left out off the form, or be as- 
signed to some other, especially oily and terebin- 
thinate substances with watery, and such things, 
as upon mixture, change or destroy the properties 
of each other, &c. of which, particular mention 
will be made hereafter, well worth special ob- 
servation. 
§.41. To avoid in some measure both these 
difficulties {§.39. & 40.), we must oppose medi- 
cines not to every trifling, but the most urgent 
Symptoms; for these being the effects or conse- 
quences of the disease, that, or its immediate cause 
being removed, the symptoms must spontaneously 
vanish; besides, the train of symptoms is often so 
numerous

11 General Rules and Cautions.
numerous and opposite, as so make a distinct 
treatment of them impracticable without confusion. 
§.42. In very acute diseases, and in symptoms 
extremely urgent, it is adviseable to order remedies 
that may be made up and exhibited with the greatest 
ease and expedition; that a critical opportunity 
may not be lost through a want of the medicine, or 
a delay of the apothecary. 
§.43. If the texture of the ingredients suit 
them indifferently for several forms, we may, upon 
inquiry, reduce them to that most agreeable to 
the patient; as many have a particular liking, or 
aversion, naturally or from use, more for one form 
than another: by which means the physician and 
his profession will come more into the good opi- 
nion of the patient, as well as taking the medi- 
cine be render’d more certain and pleasant. 
§.44. On the contrary, we must not be so solli- 
citous about the palate as to forget the proper na- 
ture, danger, and symptoms of the disease; nor 
neglect the pre-disposing cause in the patient’s 
habit. Some forms are more suitable to one dis- 
ease than another. How preposterous would it be 
to order an electuary, or bolus, in a quinsy,or where 
deglutition is difficult, &c. 
§.45. Nor is the intention of a medicine as 
easily answer’d by one form as another: sudorifics 
agree best with a liquid form, absorbents with a 
dry one, and fœtid, or nauseous things, with that 
of a pill, as we shall observe more at large in 
the several histories of each particular form. 
§.46. The age and circumstances of the pati- 
ent have also their force in determining the parti- 
cular form of the medicine. Infants should not be 
fatigued with internals, when external forms will 
prove as effectual; nor should they be ever mo- 
lested with a bolus, pill, or any thing unpleasant 
and difficult to swallow.
§.47.

12 General Rules and Cautions.
§.47. The patients natural constitution, or ha- 
bit, has, in like manner, some influence in de- 
manding a variation in the particular form. The 
hot and dry require a liquid, the moist and phleg- 
matic are benefited most by a dry form; but these 
being of less consequence must give place to the 
consideration of §.43, to 47, which are of greater 
importance *. 
* The condition of the disease, being either acute 
or chronic, has also no small influence in deter- 
mining the particular form, and manner of exhi- 
bition.—In the 
(1.) Chronic, we should gradually inlarge the 
dose (per §.26.), and may more regard the pa- 
late (per §.43.) with the patients convenience 
and circumstances (per §.23. 27. 28. 29. 46. 47. 
48. 50.); always preferring pills, electuaries, 
wines, ales, &c. to a train of boles, draughts, &c. 
which appear more formidable and discouraging. 
But, the 
(2.) Acute, generally require medicines of the 
strongest efficacy, to be used often, interchange- 
ably, in different forms for the same case, and to 
be more ascertain’d in their dose; as in boles, 
powders, draughts, drops, &c. 
§.48. Medicines that are to be taken upon long 
journeys, or continually carried about in boxes for 
constant use, should consist of ingredients the least 
bulky, most effectual and durable, and reduced to 
a form the most convenient and portable. 
§.49. If a patient finds himself better after a 
prescription, he should continue in the use of it 'till 
the physician finds some variation required; nor 
is it commendable to make a change therein with- 
out an evident and weighty reason. 
§.50. It is, however, allowable and proper, in 
hereditary, or habitual and very chronical distem- 
pers,

13 General Rules and Cautions. 
pers, to vary both the ingredients and form, tho'
the face of symptoms and their indications re- 
main the same: whereby is shewn the skill of the 
physician and the copiousness of his art, and that 
the patient may not be tired out with one form, 
nor particular medicines become habitual and use- 
less to him. 
§.51. When no benefit arises from the use of a 
medicine, rather than persist therein, it shou'd be 
changed, either wholly or in part, at the discretion 
of the physician: but, if noxious, it must be 
speedily and altogether suppressed; for, by the ju- 
vantia & ledentia, or what helps and hurts, we 
are directed principally how to act. 
§.52. Lastly, as a prudent physician never pre- 
scribes but with great attention and circumspection 
of mind, so he should never lay the formula out of 
his hand ’till he has first revised it; that he may 
be sure every thing is right, distinct and clear; 
for it being the too general lot of prescriptions 
to be made up by the hands of journeymen 
and apprentices, who are often both ignorant 
and careless, a flip of the pen, or an obscurity, 
might chance to be of fatal consequence to the pa- 
tient. 
Of the GENERAL Circumstances of pre- 
scriptions, exclusive of the particular form of 
a medicine. 
§.53. WE come now to consider the formula, 
or prescription (§.1.) in general, 
as agreeing with, or common to, all forms with- 
out distinction; and this we shall do (1.) abstractly, 
with respect to the bill itself, and then (2.) in com-
position, 

14 Of Forms in general.
position, with respect to the circumstances of its 
constituent parts. 
§,54. With regard to the first (§.53.), we un- 
derstand every thing that does not immediately 
affect or concern the medicine it self; but serve ei- 
ther for ornament, brevity, or perspecuity in the 
way of compounding and applying it. 
§.55. The first (I.) that occurs among these 
(§.54.) is an arbitrary and superstitious inscrip- 
tion, appearing in the front of the bill, and con- 
timating in some particular characters or letters in- 
timating the pious wish and inclination of the pre-
scriber: as, †. C. D. JD. JJ. α & ω *; which 
may be, and are, generally omitted without 
neglecting any thing serviceable to the patient. 
§.56. The next (II.) that appears, at the head 
of the prescription, is that constantly used, abbre- 
viated word (Rec. or ꝶ.)  † Recipe; importing that 
the apothecary is to take something, afterwards 
mentioned. 
§.57. Our business is now to examine the (III.) 
order, or series, in which the things to be thus 
(§.56.) taken are wrote. This we shall perceive 
upon enquiry to vary with every particular form of 
medicine; nor even there, shall we find one con- 
stant and uniform method observ'd; as will be 
more apparent in the particular histories of each. 
We may, however, observe in the general, 
1. That a distinct line shou'd be made of every 
single ingredient; not to obsure them, by 
writing one continuous or in the same direct- 
ion with the other. 
2. That
* This seems to smell very strong of a Romish or superstitious 
priest-craft; but as such hands are seldom daubed with physic a- 
mong us, we are intirely strangers to things of this nature. 
† When the back part of the ꝶ is left out, it makes another 
character (♃) of the same import but more frequent use, as being 
less known. 

15 Of Forms in general.
2. That ingredients of the same kind should 
be placed next to each other; roots with roots. 
waters with waters, &c. 
3. Not to be wanting in the least point of 
order, we should begin and range things, that 
differ from each other in substance, according 
to their quantities; beginning with the largest 
and ending with the smallest, or the reverse. 
4. Next to that consideration (n° 3.), the 
basis, or main ingredients (§.75.) shou'd hold 
the first place; then, the assistants (§.78.); af- 
ter them, the correcters (§.83.); and lastly, the 
vehicle (§.86.), or what serves to make them up. 
5. Such things as have their quantity undeter- 
min'd, or dependant on the consistence and bulk 
of the rest, shou'd come generally in the last 
place of a prescription. 
Not but there are several exceptions from these 
rules, which will be taken notice of in the ensuing 
parts of this treatise, and will be therefore worth 
the readers observation. 
§.58. For the (IV.) method of writing, or or- 
dering these several ingredients, and their quanti- 
ties; the more distinct and intelligible they are set 
down, the more commendable: accordingly 
1. The physician shou'd use himself to write 
plain and distinct; not to neglect and hurry over 
his letters with a careless pen. 
2. He shou'd keep up to custom and orthogra- 
phy, to avoid the sneering of an apothecary or 
his man. 
3. An irregular, or confused method of wri- 
ting, shou'd be avoided as much as possible; 
and to make things appear with more evidence 
and method, ingredients of the same kind shou'd 
be placed next to each other {per §.57. n° 2.):  
the


16 Of Forms in general.
the general appellation common to each similar 
ingredient shou’d be always placed first, and 
need not be mentioned more than once; as the 
proper name of each shou’d be placed directly 
under and even with the first, in the method of 
§.57. n° 1. The same is also to be observed, 
with respect to several ingredients following 
each other that are to enter a form in the same 
quantity, i, e. not to write the particular mark 
of quantity to each singly, but to assign only 
one character of quantity to them all; before 
which should be inserted the technical word 
ana or aa, which is used to denote that the quan- 
tity to be taken of the several preceeding ingre- 
dients must be equal or alike, whether it be in 
number, weight or measure.—There are ma- 
ny such abbreviations in use, which will be met 
with in the ensuing formulæ, and ought not to 
be neglected (if it were safe) because universally 
received and establish'd by long custom. 
4. Too much brevity in writing is still of a 
worse consequence; especially when the ingre- 
dients and their quantities are order’d, not by 
common letters, but odd characters or figures, not 
constantly used, and often falsely or imperfectly 
made *: by which means it too frequently hap- 
pens that the apothecary is brought into a mis- 
take, either of the ingredient or quantity, to the
great 
* These odd characters, of which the German (and especially 
the chemical) physicians were very fond, are extremely seldom, if 
ever, used in prescriptions among us; and therefore the caution 
seems to be directed chiefly to that quarter. But as they frequently 
occur in writers (especially foreigners) in physic, pharmacy and 
chemistry; and as they may be sometimes used with propriety in a 
prescription {per §.25.); it will be proper for the young physician 
to acquaint himself with the chief of them, agreeable to cur au- 
thors advice in the end of this paragraph: we have therefore fur- 
nished our reader with a list and explanation of the most usual of 
these characters at the end of the book; it being too long to be in- 
serted here. 

17 Of Forms in general. 
great danger of the patient. So that it is more 
prudent to intirely relinquish such, or else to use 
those only which are the most distinct and com- 
mon, and the least ambiguous; and then, only 
when {per §.25.) we have some particular rea- 
son for concealing the ingredients of the formula. 
The characters; or weight, shou’d be express’d 
with the greatest exactness, by such as love to 
use them.—And tho' the first sort of cha- 
racters are improper to enter prescriptions in 
writing, 'tis yet fit they shou’d be known; as 
they frequently occur in the works of physi- 
cians. 
5. The ingredients of a prescription shou’d be 
wrote for by those names under which they are 
kept and known in the shops; notwithstand- 
ing they shou’d be barbarous or improper: by 
which means the compounder will be under no 
difficulty, nor fall into any mistake. But if for 
concealment (per §.25.) an uncommon term be 
used, the apothecary shou’d have, if it be ne- 
cessary, a speedy and private intelligence thereof. 
6. The WEIGHTS used at present in the shops 
of apothecaries, are 
℔ the physical pound  
℥ an ounce  
ʒ a dram 
℈ a scruple
Gr. a grain
containing 
℥ xij.
ʒ viij.
℈ iij.
gr. xx.
ß ij.
A grain is seldom divided further than into two 
equal parts, whose whole amount is supposed 
to be equal to a grain of white pepper or a 
middling barley-corn: but it is much the best 
to use a grain of a determinate or standing 
weight, like that of the Goldsmiths; without 
which, this and all larger weights thence arising, 
as from unity, wou’d be always varying and un- 
certain, as Fernelius observes. 
C 7.

18 Of Forms in general. 
7. The physical measures now in use, are such 
as belong either to dry or liquid ingredients: 
and are 
(1.) Dry; as the 
Fasc. Fasciculus, or a small armfull, being as 
much as can be easily grasped by the arm bended 
together, and is equal to twelve handfuls. 
M. Manipulus, or handfull, which is as 
much as can be taken up by the whole hand at 
once, and may be compared to four pugills, 
or half an ounce. 
Pug. Pugillus, comprehends as much as can 
be contained between the thumb and two first 
fingers, and answers to about the whole or half 
of a dram. 
N°. Numero, in number, equal or unequal. 
(2.) Liquid; comprehending, besides the 
common trading measures, also the Cyath. 
Cyathum, which holds about an ounce and an 
half. 
Cochl. Coohlearium, reckon’d to be about 
half an ounce. 
Gutt. Gutta, or a Drop, which being the least 
of liquid measures, is substituted in room of a 
grain among weights, and may, like that, be 
commodiously subdivided into two (or more) 
equal parts, being first imbibed by a bit of su- 
gar, to be afterwards pulverised and divided by 
weight: but the quantity under this measure 
varies with the specific gravity and degree of 
cohesion in the liquid to be so measured; and, 
also the quantity of surface in contact with 
it, or the largeness of the bottle’s neck from 
whence it is to be dropp’d; which first also 
holds good with respect to the Cyathum and 
Cochlearium.
8.

19 Of Forms in general.
8. With regard to these medical divisions of 
quantity (n° 6. and 7.), we may observe 
(1.) That every thing, not only soft and 
solid but also liquid, whose quantity is requi- 
red to be determined with accuracy and ex- 
actness, shou’d be portion'd out by weight 
only.
(2.) The dry measures (n°. 7.) are to be 
used only for such things as are very bulky, 
and of no strength; as herbs, leaves, flowers, 
feeds, &c. The larger kind of seeds, bulbous 
roots, the whites and yolks of eggs, &c. are
usually prescribed by number. 
(3.) The liquid measures (n°. 7.) shou’d be 
seldom used in prescriptions, unless to signify 
the particular dose; by reason of their uncer- 
tainty, the measures differing with particular 
liquors and countries: but the use of weights 
is more constant and certain; and if we have, 
notwithstanding, a fancy for the use of mea- 
sures, we shou’d at least know the several 
weights of different liquors which they can con- 
tain. Strong liquids may be also portion’d 
out with more exactness by drams, scruples and 
grains, than by drops. 
(4.) Number, in prescribing ingredients, 
with their weights and measures, is to be ex- 
pressed by characters not barbarous (as 1, 2, 3, 
&c.) but Roman (as j, ij, iij, iv, &c.) as being 
more distinct and evident. 
(5.) All weights and measures are usually 
subdivided into halves, and their half part is 
then signified by the character ß.
(6.) The larger weights and measures are 
to be express’d by the characters proper to 
their whole, or half quantities; and not by 
the number of lesser weights or measures they 
contain.
C2 (7.)

20 Of Forms in general.
(7.) Sometimes the weight or measure of an 
ingredient is left to be determined at discre- 
tion by the apothecary, and is only wrote 
(q. s.) quantum sufficit, or a sufficient quantity: 
which might be well enough bore with, had 
the apothecary any constant rule to go by, or 
were the quantity and consistence of a me- 
dicine to be always the same; but when it be- 
comes on this account very uncertain, it is ad- 
viseabie for the physician to determine the quan- 
tity, as may be seen under the particular forms 
hereafter. 
(8.) Among the ancients, there were many 
other weights and measures than these (n° 7, 
8.) infrequent use; which tho' now obsolete 
and unpractised, are yet necessary to be known 
by a physician that intends to be conversant with 
their writings, and may be therefore learned 
from Fernelius and others *. 
§.59. The (V.) fifth part of a formula, or bill, 
is the SUBSCRIPTION, directing the apothecary 
in what form the physician wou’d have the ingre- 
dients made up, the manner in which they are 
to be so prepared, and the method in which they 
are to be applied, or exhibited by him to the pati- 
ent. With regard to which, 
1. If a prescription contains but one ingredi- 
ent, which requires no extemporaneous prepa- 
ration, it may be subscribed only (F.) Fiat, 
adding the name of the form, v. g. pulvis, bo- 
lus, &c. 
2.
* A list and explanation of the several weights and measures 
used by the ancient Greek, Roman, and Arabian physicians (as 
taken from Fernelius, who is for that end recommeded by our au- 
thor,) being rather too large to he conveniently inserted in this 
place, the reader will meet with that, and some others, at the 
end of the book. 

21 Of Forms in general.
2. But if it consists of several, to be only 
mix’d together without other preparation; 
there must be first inserted (M.) misce, and af- 
terwards (F.) fiat, and lastly the name of the 
form; as e.g. M. F. Bolus. But in liquid mix- 
tures it is often sufficient to write M. only; tho' 
it is sometimes requisite to give a particular ad- 
monition concerning the uniformity or exact- 
ness of the mixture. 
3. If there shou’d be required some other 
preparation besides mixture, as cutting, brui- 
ting, digesting, boiling, &c. these are also to 
be inserted either before or after M. as shall seem 
most proper. 
4. It is then requisite to add (if necessary) the 
number of doses into which the medicine is to 
be distributed: where it is also frequently pro- 
per to admonish, the apothecary to be very ex- 
act in making every dose equal and alike; be- 
cause they often, for expedition, divide a medi- 
cine by guess or the eye. 
5. Mention is to be sometimes made of the 
receptacle into which the medicine is to be put, 
and of the method of keeping, or close stop- 
ping the same; when they contain things very 
volatile, or soon melting in the air, as will be 
hereafter observed in particular forms. 
6. Lastly, the instrument whereby, and the 
particular part or the body to which, the me- 
dicine is to be applied, are required to be 
sometimes mention'd, when it appertains to the 
apothecary; as will be hereafter observed in 
the history of plasters, lambatives, glysters, 
&c. 
7. In all these particulars (no 1. to 6.), it is 
best for the physician to be full, and distinct or 
clear, and to use the terms of art, however bar- 
C3 barous:


22 Of Forms in general.
barous; left an error be committed thro' his 
own fault, or the apothecary shou’d be put to a 
nonplus. 
§.60. The (VI.) last general part of a pre- 
scription or formula, is the SUPERSCRIPTION †, 
of the medicine or direction to the patient; which 
is often (tho' not always) very necessary, inasmuch 
as it declares the form of the prescribed medicine, 
its virtue, dose, method and time of administration, 
the proper vehicle, regimen, &c. as far as they 
regard the sick patient and his attendants: which 
is to be carried on in the following order, 
1. Beneath the Subscription (§.59. n° 1, to 
6.), at a distance from the line, write the capi- 
tal letter S. i. e. signetur, let it be intitled, &c. 
2. If there be several medicines of the same 
form and appearance prescribed together for one 
patient; they shou’d be marked with the capital 
letters A, B, C, &c. or numbers, 1, 2, 3, &c. at 
the head or in the margin of each formula that 
they may be distinguish’d from each other; and 
then these distinguishing marks are to be inserted 
after the letter S. in each Superscription or di- 
rection: e.g. (S. lit. A, vel n°. 1.). But this is 
unnecessary where there is but one formula pre- 
scribed, or where there is several, but easily di- 
stinguishable from each other. 
3. There must be then annex’d the title of the 
medicine, taken from its form and virtue, e.g. 
potio purgans, a purging draught, &c. 
4. Next in order, the dose, way of taking, 
the time when, the vehicle and the regimen; 
and
† Our author calls it signatura, signment. I suppose we need 
not inform our reader that this part of a prescription is almost uni- 
versally left out by our physicians; who judge it most convenient to 
give these orders by word of mouth to the patient or his attendants, 
or leave it to the discretion of the apothecary. 

23 Of Forms in general.
and if any thing else is to be observed, it shou’d 
be mentioned in its proper place. 
5. Since this direction (n°. 1. to 4.) contains 
the rules to be observed by the patient in taking 
or applying the remedy; it shou’d be either cut 
off from the formula or prescription for him to 
keep, or else (which is the common practice) it 
shou’d be translated and wrote fair by the apo- 
thecary, on every label that is affix’d to the re- 
ceptacle of the medicine, to be transmitted there- 
with to the patient. 
6. The style of the direction shou’d be there- 
fore agreeable with the age and country wherein 
it is wrote, being concise and plain, or very in- 
telligible. 
7. In naming the medicine we shou’d avoid 
the oftentatious or quackish titles used by pre- 
tenders, nor shou’d we ever inhanse or give it 
an hyperbolical epithet; as incomparable, golden, 
grand, &c. For tho’ these may take with the 
vulgar and illiterate, it will but expose the pre- 
scriber to laughter and ridicule, among the more 
intelligible part of mankind. 
8. Care is to be also taken to hide or omit the 
names of such diseases as are indecent or impro- 
per to be mention’d in the directions; as the 
lues venerea, disorders of the menses, sterility, 
impotency, &c. For such shou’d be either 
wholly neglected, or at least signified by terms 
the least known: as exciters of the menses may 
be call’d aperients; antivenerials, purifiers of 
the blood; exciters of Venus, strengtheners, &c. 
And what relates to the method of taking, &c. 
shou’d be delivered to the patient, if possible, 
by word of mouth. 
9. The dose of the medicine, when left to 
the patient or his attendants, shou’d be ordered 
by quantities the most commonly known and 
C4 easy

24 Of Forms in general. 
easy to determine; as by large or tea spoons full, 
the size of nuts, drops, &c. But if it be of 
consequence to have the dose determined to ex- 
actness; the distribution and exhibition thereof, 
may be referr’d to the apothecary. 
10. The method and time of administring the 
remedy, depending upon the particular nature 
of the disease, the medicine itself, and many 
other circumstances; shou’d be in the general di- 
rected so as to suit best with the physician’s in- 
tention, and the patient’s convenience: neg- 
lecting the scrupulous and superstitious observa- 
tion of times and seasons deduced from astrolo- 
gy, as both useless and unbecoming the sagacity 
of our age. 
11. If there be any occasion for a vehicle to 
take it in, we shou’d endeavour to chuse one, 
that besides pleasing the palate, falls in with the 
intention of the medicine itself. The materials 
for vehicles are usually taken from things that 
are readiest at hand, grateful or pleasant to the 
patient, or become so by common and frequent 
use: as ale, wine, broth, tea, coffee, juleps, 
wafers, marmalade, roasted apple, or the like. 
12. A proper regimen, before, in, and after 
the operation of the medicine, is often abso- 
lutely necessary to be observed; for without this, 
the action of the remedy wou’d be frequently, 
either too much increased, diminish’d, chang’d, 
or wholly destroyed. But to determine what re- 
gimen will be most proper, the doctrine of in- 
dications must be call’d into consideration. 
§.61. We have been hitherto treating of a for- 
mula in general, exclusive of its particular contents; 
we come now to examine its internal composition, 
the number of its constituent parts, their nature, 
quantity, mutual affinity, proportion and the like. 
§.62.

25 Of Forms in general. 
§.62. The formula, or prescript (§.1. &
§.6.) consists either of (1.) only one officinal sim- 
ple or compound preparation; or else (2.) of se- 
veral such properly combined together: which 
first, we shall call a simple formula; but the last, a 
compound one. 
§.63. A simple formula (§.62.), as it con- 
sists of but one officinal preparation selected out of 
many, does scarce require any other restriction or 
limitation than that of its quantity. 
§.64. Its quantity then, is twofold: (1.) so 
much as is order’d by the physician to be made up 
and sent to the patient by the apothecary at one 
time; or (2.) such a quantity of the first as is to 
be applied or administred to the sick patient at 
once. The first, we shall call tht general quantity; 
the latter, the particular one, or dose: but as the 
quantity of the first depends upon the number of 
the last, we shall consider that before the former. 
§.65. The dose of a medicine comes under two 
considerations; viz. that of continued quantity, and 
that of number. 
§.66. The bulk or weight of a dose, is deter- 
mined by the physicians due consideration of the 
condition and circumstances of both the patient and 
the medicine: without which, a well chosen re- 
medy, by exceeding or falling short of its just 
quantity, may prove either hurtful or at least in- 
effectual. To prevent this, we must: therefore at- 
tend 
1. To the nature of the disease, its seat, stage, 
force or degree of strength, causes, symptoms, 
&c. that our force may be proportion’d to the 
obstacle to be removed. For as diseases that are 
violent, acute or deep-rooted, are scarce to be 
overcome but by large doses; so, if we shou’d 
overload a slight case, the remedy itself wou’d 
prove another disease. 
2.

26 Of Forms in general.
2. We must regard the strength; depending 
on that of the fibre, or the blood's motion, and 
functions of the body: that our assistant means 
may be adiquate the defect, and not prove a bur- 
then instead of a helping hand. So that large 
doses will be found to suit strong bodies; whereas 
the weak can only bear small ones. But we must 
carefully distinguish strength that is latent and 
oppress'd, from that which is really absent and 
exhausted. 
3. We must have respect to the age: with re- 
gard to which, the following general rules may 
be of service for internal medicines. 
Suppose a dose proper for a man of a consistent 
age (i. e.) about 30, or when he has done growing) 
to be 
as — 1, or ʒj.
a dose for one of 14 to 21, will be 2/3, or ℈ij.
— 7 to 14,—1/2 or ʒß. 
— 4 to 7,—1/3 or ℈j. 
— 4—1/4 or gr. xv. 
— 3—1/6 or  ℈ß. 
— 2—1/8, or gr.viij.
— 1—1/12, or gr.v.  
Old people being observed to be twice children 
in their strength and diet, as such they shou'd be 
also consider'd in this respect of dose; so that we 
may compare
an old man of 60, to a young man of 21 years. 
— 7O,—14 
— 80,—7 
and so with the rest. But it cannot be supposed that 
these rules hold always so, as not to admit of many
exceptions;

27 Of Forms in general.
exceptions for, that there must be frequently a 
variation, will appear evidently to all who consi- 
der the diversity of strength in people of the same 
age. So that a true estimate of the dose, is hardly 
deducible from the age alone. 
4. The size of the body, in people of the 
same age, does also frequently require a variation 
in the dose; tho' we shall find, their strength is 
not always proportionable to their size. 
5. The temperature has also some influence 
upon the quantity of a dose. The biliose and 
melancholly can easily dispense with a larger 
mass of cooling, moistening and relaxing me- 
dicines, than their opposite temperatures; and 
so (vice versa) on the contrary side. 
6. The difference of sex has also its force. 
Women, who are generally of a more delicate 
and weak constitution than men, require a pro- 
portionable diminution of the dose. But such as 
are very nice and fanciful, will sometimes throw 
up the dose notwithstanding it was proportion’d 
to their strength. For such, it is therefore ad- 
visable to let the quantity be as small as possible; 
or else to subdivide a larger dose into several 
smaller parcels. 
7. The particular disposition, whether morbid, 
natural, constant, periodical, from the make or 
habit of body, sex, proceeding diseases, &c. 
with the complication of the original disease, 
may have each their concern in determining the 
particular dose as well as the kind of a medi- 
cine. 
To this head belong a regard to the menses, 
breeding, lying-in, suckling, hysteric fits in wo- 
men, and the hippo in men; with obesity, tender- 
ness, a weakness in some particular organ, a defor- 
mity in the back or break, the stone, an aptness to  
vomit,

28 Of Forms in general.
vomit, with abundance of the like particular indif- 
positions. 
8. To be still more particular, it is sometimes 
very necessary to have a regard to the individual 
constitution, idiosyncrasia, or particular inclina- 
tion of every patient, as they stand affected to 
this or that class of medicines, or some one par- 
ticular remedy. These being generally inexpli- 
cable, are to be known only by experience, or 
from the patient's relation: thus some are pur- 
ged even by the smell of a cathartic; while 
others are scarce affected by double the usual 
quantity taken inwardly for a dose. 
9. Use or custom has also its force here; for 
a large dose of a medicine will produce less ef- 
fect upon one used to the same, than a small 
dose upon one who is a stranger thereto; which 
is very obvious in the use of narcotics and to- 
bacco. 
10. Nor is the employ or course of life to be 
here altogether neglected; for as the several de- 
grees of health and sickness are particularly in- 
fluenced thereby so it also frequently brings the 
body into particular habits, which either in- 
crease or diminish the action of certain medicines. 
11. The particular nation or people is to be 
also consider'd with regard to the dose; as they 
have often something in that respect singular and 
proper to themselves. Thus, the Saxons and 
Westphalians *, are hard to work upon. The 
Siamese use an arsenical instead of an antimonial 
cup; and the Indians require a dose of ipecacu- 
anha twenty times as large as the Europeans, to 
make them vomit †. 
12.
* Wedelii de compos. medic. tab. II. 
† Histoire de l'academ royale, 1703. 

29 Of Forms in general. 
12. A regard to the season of the year is also 
sometimes of consequence: as the sultry dog- 
days, the hard frost, or the temperate air, dis- 
pose the body to be more or less affected by 
one and the same dose. 
13. The known strength and virtues of the 
remedy also, when consider’d with their relation 
to the several preceeding heads, still greatly in- 
crease the variation of the dose. Thence, a phy- 
sician that intends to prescribe forms rationally, 
will make himself exactly acquainted with the 
several quantities of medicines found by experi- 
ence, and established by use to be proper for one 
dose: with the several degrees of that dose, as 
being small, mean or large, with respect to the 
preceeding considerations; more especially he 
will keep in memory those of the capital and 
most efficacious medicines. But if he would 
bring any simple into use which has not been yet 
sufficiently experienced, being mindful of the 
rule §.19. he will begin first with the least quan- 
tity, afterwards judiciously inlarging the dose, 
as he is assured of the preceeding unactivity, or 
usefulness of the medicine. 
14. Sometimes the high price of medicines, 
which are otherwise of no great efficacy, restrains 
the dose to a small compass; witness, prepared 
pearl, gems, oriental and porcupine bezoar, &c. 
15. The great bulkeyness of the matter, con- 
taining but a due quantity of medicinal parti- 
cles, obliges the dose to be sometimes less than 
is otherwise requisite; left the load of inactive 
matter shou’d excite a nausea: as is often the 
case in herbs, barks, woods, flowers, &c. 
16. The unpleasantness of a medicine, whether 
in taste, smell, or other qualities, frequently per- 
swades the physician to prescribe them in a smal- 
ler dose than the other: as asa fœt. castor. olea, 
&c. agreeable to §.27.
17.

30 Of Forms in general. 
17. The particular form of the medicine itself, 
often restrains the dose to a determinate quantum. 
For many of the forms have certain limits as to 
quantity, which they cannot exceed without the 
greatest necessity; as will hereafter appear under 
each. 
18. Lastly, the various external or internal 
use of a remedy, and its application to different 
parts of the body, are here, also, to be consi- 
dered as having some influence in determining 
the quantity of a dose. Very wide is the diffe- 
rence between the dose of a cathartic when it is 
to be given by the mouth, and when by way of 
glyster, &c. 
Nota. The limits of our present design forbid 
me to say more, or to pursue the theme of dose in 
a more special manner. The copiousness and un- 
certainty of the subject, being scarce determinable 
even by general bounds, prevailed with me not to 
insert (as is usual) a table exhibiting the proper dose 
of every single remedy. These are liable to so many 
exceptions, that they cannot be rationally ascer- 
tain’d to particular cases, without the several pro- 
ceeding conditions (§.66. n°. 1 to 18.) are first li- 
mited and consider’d. Besides, we have supposed 
our reader (per §.7.) previously acquainted with the 
doctrine of indications, and the materia medica, 
both simple and compound; which teaches their 
general doses as well as virtues: and then, what 
will be said of each form in particular, will also 
reflect much light upon this head. 
§.67. The number of doses (§.65.) is either 
one, or more, being often arbitrary and undeter- 
mined; but it may be generally limited by parti- 
cular consideration; among which, the following 
may be look’d upon as general rules. 
1.

31 Of Forms in general. 
1. If one dose will answer the physicians in- 
tention; what need of more? 
2. If the medicine be in itself unpleasant, if 
the patient has an aversion or dislike to the taking 
of it, or if the application or taking be difficult 
and troublesome; these call for the exhibition of 
as few doses as possible. 
3. Medicines, which by keeping, easily fer- 
ment and corrupt, grow moist and liquid, or too 
dry, or else exhale and lose their finest parts, 
shou’d, upon those accounts, be prescribed in 
but few doses at a time. The different state 
of the atmosphere, as to heat, moisture, and 
other qualities, has also its share in limiting the 
quantity and number of doses of such remedies; 
as those states of the air may more or less pro- 
mote such inconveniences or defects of particu- 
lar medicines. 
4. If the adequate dose of a prescribed medi- 
cine is of a larger bulk than can be conveniently 
swallow’d at once, if nothing contradicts, it may 
be properly divided into many lesser doses, to be 
taken at small intervals; to prevent it from ex- 
citing a nausea or vomiting in the patient; 
which is a consideration that takes place princi- 
pally and frequently in emetics and strong ca- 
thartics. 
5. If you order potent remedies for a patient 
whose case, constitution, and particular condi- 
tion is not yet thoroughly known; it is better 
for the just dose to be given in little separate por- 
tions at several times, that we may timely break 
off its use upon the least appearance of its im- 
propriety. The same holds good also with re- 
gard to the use of new and less experienced re- 
medies (agreeable to §.66. n°. 13.) 
6. If the obscurity, or instability, of the par- 
ticular morbid indisposition renders the effect of 
the

32 Of Forms in general.
the medicine uncertain; if we are obliged to 
prescribe something (by reason of §.14.), it 
should be but in small and few doses: by which 
means, less injury can happen to the patient, and 
it may be the more easily changed for some other 
medicine, when that may be required. 
7. When the preparation of a medicine is dif- 
ficult and a long while in making up, unless 
something forbid, it shou’d be prescribed in 
a larger quantity or more doses; to spare the 
time and pains of the apothecary, whose hands 
are sometimes too full. 
8. Hence also, remedies which are difficultly 
convey’d, and to parts remote from apotheca- 
ries, shou’d be {cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
transmitted in larger quantities or more doses, 
9. On the other hand, if the patient lives near 
his physician, so as to be often visited by him, 
the number of doses order’d at one time shou’d be 
few; left the physician’s coming often without 
prescribing shou’d be thought much of, or look’d 
upon as dilatory. 
10. When the same medicine is required to be 
used for a long time together ; there shou’d be 
as many doses order’d at once as may be conve- 
nient. For tho’ scantiness of a medicine for mo- 
ney, is a persuasive for the patient to take it 
when bought; it will hardly encourage him to 
be constantly purchasing, especially if it be disa- 
greeable at the same time. 
11. If the exhibition of the medicine is to 
be repeated at short intervals of time, the doses 
must be on that account the more numerous; to 
prevent the trouble of repeating the prescription 
and composition. 
12. Lastly, as the patient may like a variety, 
and the different face of the symptoms require a 
change (per §.50.), both in the form and me-
dicine,

33 Of Form in general.
medicine, especially in chronical cases; it may 
be on those accounts adviseable to order the me- 
dicine in a small quantity: that the form and 
remedy may be changed the oftener, and at a 
less expence to the patient. 
§.68. The general quantity (§.64.) of any form 
fit to be prescribed for the patient at one time, 
rnay be easily estimated from a previous determi- 
nation of the number or size of the proper dose, 
(per §.66. 67.): for, if the bulk or weight of a 
dose be multiplied by the number you would give, 
the product will be the whole quantity to be or- 
der’d for the patient in one prescription. Whence 
it follows, 
1. That the general quantity will be equal to 
the special or particular one (§.64.), if only 
one dose be prescribed for at one time. 
2. But if we design the prescription should 
contain more doses than one, the least general 
quantity that can be order'd will be doubly 
equal to the particular one, or dose. 
3. If the dose of a form is to be exactly de- 
termin’d by weight, the general quantity should 
be proportioned so, as that it may be distribu- 
ted into proper and exact doses, without leaving 
any remainder. But this rule is not constantly 
and every where observ’d; especially if the pre- 
scription contains many doses of a form. 
§.69. The physician should also be mindful of 
the particular consistence and texture of his ingre- 
dient, when he prescribes a simple formula; that 
it may have a natural fitness to be reduced into the 
form he desires. 
§.70. Lastly, when his prescription orders but 
one ingredient, he should be careful that it be not 
over strong, nauseous to the smell or taste, nor  
D diffi-


34 Of Forms in general.
difficult to swallow, &c. (per §.27.); because a
simple formula does not admit of that correction 
and mixture which are necessary to conceal those 
disagreeable qualities; unless he will compliment 
the patient, by ordering the medicine to be taken 
in some proper and pleasant vehicle. 
§.71. We have been hitherto considering a 
simple formula: our next business is to treat of the 
compound one (§.62.); which consisting of several 
ingredients, requires greater circumspection and 
skill in its prescription and composition. 
§.72. There seems, at the first view indeed, to 
be little or seldom occasion for extemporaneous 
composition since we are furnished with such a 
number of handing officinal compounds (per §.31. 
and 37.): but the frequent and great necessity we 
are under of forming the officinals into extempo- 
raneous compositions, is sufficiently apparent from 
the following. For, 
1. The officinal simples and compounds are 
frequently not well adapted to the particular cir- 
cumstances of the patient and his disease. Their 
dose is frequently too bulky for their strength, 
their composition unjust or inaccurate, and their 
textures or virtues changed or spoiled by long 
keeping, &c. which considerations are often e- 
nough to dissuade one from the use of officinal 
compounds, tho’ they were directly suitable for 
the intention. 
2. When the virtues and strength of an offi- 
cinal medicine are too weak, and not equal to 
the disease we would remove we are then of- 
ten obliged to the addition of others, more po- 
tent, in an extemporaneous composition. 
3. If its action be too violent, or attended 
with some ill consequence; we are then often 
obliged to moderate and correct it by extempo- 
raneous composition. 
4.

35 Of Forms in general.
4. We have frequently several different in- 
tentions to answer at the same time, which can- 
not be done by one officinal simple or com- 
pound: while the natural disposition of the se- 
veral ingredients indicated, to make a uniform 
mixture, requires them to be reduced into one 
form (per §.39.) 
5. This composition is sometimes required 
also from the situation, sensibility, and other 
circumstances of the Part to which the medicine 
is to be applied or conveyed. 
6. The constituent ingredients suited to each 
indication do also require to be combined in a 
form, for the reasons (§.43. to §.50.) which 
determine the particular form, they being of 
themselves very unsuitable. 
7. Composition sometimes serves to conceal a 
necessary remedy (per §.25.) 
8. It is often requisite, in order to change or 
correct some disagreeable smell, taste or colour, 
in an effectual remedy. 
9. Lastly, the vile and received custom of 
crouding, without necessity, more ingredients 
than are required in an officinal composition, 
often obliges the physician to make a new form: 
tho’ prudence sometimes bids the physician, 
especially a junior, (per §.30.) to pay obedi- 
ence to inch old and venerable jumbles. 
§.73. In the compound formula (§.71.) we 
are to consider (1.) its component parts, their num- 
ber, use and proportion: (2.) its quantity (§.64.) 
general, to be made up at once. and particular, to 
be taken at once. (3.) And lastly, its qualities, 
as arising from composition or mixture, 
§.74. The constituent parts are four in num- 
ber: (1.) the basis or main ingredients; (2.) the 
adjuvant, or what promotes the action of the for- 
D2 mer;

36 Of Forms in general. 
mer; (3.) the corrigens, Or correcter of something 
improper therein; (4.) and lastly, the constituens, 
or what serves to inlarge, mix and make up the 
whole. If there be any dirigens, which some 
make a fifth Part, it may be properly taken in 
under the adjuvans, 
§.75. The BASIS is the principal part in the 
composition, calculated against the immediate cause 
and chief symptoms of the disease, being that by 
which the physician endeavours chiefly to answer 
his indications. This is required to be present in 
every form, even the simple one, (§.63.) where 
it often makes the whole formula: being sometimes 
sufficient of itself alone, without tiny other addi- 
tion; but it is frequently mixed with other things, 
suitable to make it act with safety, ease and expe- 
dition, as it ought. 
§.76. The basis is, with respect to its virtue, 
either simple or compound. A simple basis is what 
corresponds to only one indication; whereas the 
compound one serves several intentions at the same 
time. Each of these are again subdivisible into 
simple and compound, with respect to their matter; 
according as they are made up of one or more in- 
gradients. 
§.77. But which of these kinds of basis (§.76.) 
is most suitable for the prescription, may be con-
cluded from the following considerations or rules, 
1. What may be well effected by a simple 
basis need not be attempted by a compound 
one: so that if only one indication is to be an- 
swered, it may be done by a basis which is 
simple both in its virtue and matter or ingre- 
dients: when the intentions are serveral, the ba- 
sis may be simple and compound in its virtues 
or properties; both which, when sufficient, are 
preferable to the more complex basis. 
2.

37 Of Forms in general. 
2. But if a combination of several simples 
one basis seems to promise more efficacy, we 
shall do well to comply with it. 
3. But then we must be careful not to con- 
fuse the mixture, by inserting things together 
which have no congruity or affinity to each 
other, both in their consistence and virtues: as 
we have in some measure already hinted, (§.29, 
30, 31, 36, 40, 41.) and shall observe more 
largely hereafter. 
§.78. The ADJUVANS (§.74.) is that part of 
a formula or extemporaneous composition which 
promotes and assists the action of the basis (§.75.) 
when that alone is not every way adequate to each 
of our intentions. So that the presence of this 
part is not absolutely necessary in all, but in only 
some prescriptions and compositions. 
§.79. The manner in which we assist the basis 
by the adjuvans, is threefold: for either (1.) we 
would directly increase its force or power; or (2.) 
we would dispose it to pass thro' particular vessels, 
and act upon certain of the animal fluids, (which 
was used to be termed preparing them) that its 
action may meet with less resistance there; or, 
lastly, (3.) we would direct that action more to 
some one particular viscus or organ of the body 
than another. 
§.80. Augmenting the natural virtue of the 
basis (per §.79. (1.) comes into use, when the 
basis is of itself too unactive, or so bulkey as to 
make a sufficient dose troublesome to take (per 
§.66. n° 1. 3. 6. 15. 17.) This is done by ad- 
ding something stronger of the same virtue, or 
invested with some more effectual specific property 
found out by experiment: as when we add tro- 
chisci alhandal to a very mild cathartic, or add an-
timonium diaphoreticum to a small dose of a drastic, 
D3 or

38 Of Forms in general.
or strong purge. This takes place frequently in 
evacuants, but seldom in alteratives: and may be 
often rather look’d upon as a piece of the basis, 
than any thing distinct. 
§.81. Preparing the animal fluids (per §.79. 
(2.) ) is seldom made use of but in evacuations; 
when the peccant matter to be discharged is diffi- 
cult to move, the basis slow and unlively, or the 
passages want to be opened and set at liberty: in 
which cases it may be useful to add attenuants, di- 
luents, antacids, antalcalescents, aperients, anti- 
spasmodics, laxatives, and the like. 
§.82. Lastly, it is. necessary to direct and re- 
gulate the action of the basis (per §.79. (3.)) when 
we find by experience that it has a natural ten- 
dance to a viscus, or part which may not be suit- 
able to our present design. Thus the action of 
mercury is determined to the intestines downwards, 
by adding a cathartic; and upwards to the salival 
glands, by astringents and opiates, &c. Bat this 
determination, especially of the antients by topical 
specifics, does for the generality seem not to have 
so much in it as was formerly supposed. 
§.83. The CORRIGENS (§.74.) is that part 
of the formula which removes some unpleasant- 
ness, or noxious quality in some of the ingredi- 
ents, without imparing any of their virtues. When 
the ingredients are free from such vices, there is 
hardly any occasion for a correcter. 
§.84. Those noxious qualities (§.83.) which are 
commonly complained of in emetics, cathartics 
and opiates, are acrimony, ftatulency, weakening 
of the viscera, too much heat, cold, or the, like. 
In order to correct these, we make use of sweeteners, 
obtunders of particular acrimony, carminatives, 
strengtheners, warmers, coolers, &c. But ob- 
serve, 
1.

39 Of Forms in general.
1. That it cannot be properly called correc- 
tion, when the virtues of the medicine are de- 
stroyed, together with its vices. 
2. That the generality of such things as re- 
markably require correction, have their virtues 
and vicious qualities so inseparable from each 
other, that one cannot be removed without 
equally imparing the other: but to say truth, 
the medicine proves offensive oftener by the 
unseasonable or unskilful use of it, than from 
any innate vice; to say nothing of the adulte- 
ration, unskilful preparation, corruption from 
a long and careless keeping, &c. which are of- 
ten the sole causes of such vices, if it have any. 
3. Hence, many commonly reputed correc- 
tions are improperly so judged and called;
since by removing the virtues with the vices, 
they either prove useless or hurtful: while at 
the same time, the addition of such correcters
often discommodes the form, and inlarges the 
proper dose to a sickly bulk, as well as weakens 
the efficacy of the basis. 
4. Also, such medicines as stand most in 
need of it, are generally kept ready prepared 
and corrected in the shops; so that if the phy- 
sician has a mind, he may spare himself the 
pains of such correction in an extemporaneous 
composition. 
5. The best correction is to have the simples 
good and genuine, the composition faithful and 
skilful, and to use it with discretion, at a pro- 
per season, and in a just dose (per §.66.) 
6. If any thing wants correcting, it is the 
inflaming oils, biting and insoluble rezins, fats 
which turn rancid, and things which are caustic: 
these being taken alone, will not mix uniformly 
with the aqueous juices in the primæ viæ, so 
that by adhering firmly to the coats and vessels 
D4 of

40 Of Forms in general.
of the œsophagus, stomach and intestines, they 
often produce an inflammation and pain by their 
stimulus, which are not very easy to remove. 
The remedies or correcters in this case, are, 
loaf-sugar, the yolk of an egg, sopes, sweet 
olive oil, mild alcalies or acids, absorbent pow- 
ders, &c. 
§.85. The unpleasantness (§.83.) to be cor- 
rected, respects either the taste, smell or color: 
for the first are used sugar, syrups, acids, &c. for 
the second, fragrant waters and oils, with amber- 
grease, musk, &c. and the last, or beauty of co- 
lour, is given by dragons blood, redsanders, co- 
chineal, leaf gold and silver, &c. But we must 
observe. 
1. It can hardly be supposed in the apothe- 
caries power, nor in the patient’s expectation, 
to have medicines always as pleasant as our meat 
and drink: nor is there any need of so much
cookery here; since the disorder gives the pa- 
tient an appetite to them. 
2. Smells and tastes reputed pleasant or un- 
grateful, are not promiscuously and equally 
esteemed so by all people: what delights and 
comforts one, is sometimes unpleasant and per- 
nicious to another: sweet tastes and smells are 
to some the most ungrateful. 
3. Every thing that comes from the apothe- 
cary, is judged by the patient to be of an ill 
smell and taste; so that often the more you cor- 
rect in those respects, the less you please: there- 
fore the best and most pleasant correction is to 
let the remedy be effectual, and contracted into 
as small a compass and as few doses as possible. 
4. But if it should be proper at any time to 
make some correction of this kind, it should 
be done with neatness and judgment; that while 
one

41 Of Forms in general. 
one fault is removing, a worse may not come in 
its room; and to be particularly careful to pre- 
serve the virtue of the medicine intire, free 
from change and destruction. 
5. We should not be over sollicitous to please 
the eye, like some, who thrust leaf gold and sil- 
ver into every thing they make up: it is indeed 
tolerable in pills or a bolus; but to never omit 
it, is a piece of ridiculous vanity. 
6. The unpleasantness of a medicine arises 
sometimes from the unfitness of the several 
simples to enter together into one form; but 
that may be avoided by chusing only such as 
have an affinity to mixture with each other, or 
else by distributing the ingredients into more 
forms, (per §.40.) 
7. Lastly, accommodating only a suitable form 
to the patient and medicine (per §.43. 44.) is 
sometimes no inconsiderable correction in this 
case. 
§.86. We come in the last place to the CON- 
STITUENTS (§.74.) which is that part of the com- 
position which serves to reduce the ingredients to 
a proper consistence and bulk for the form desired. 
So that this part has the least business to do in a 
formula, unless the ingredients cannot mix well of 
themselves, or are too small in bulk. Here we 
may observe. 
1. That if any adjuvans (§.78.), or corrigens 
(§.83.) or both be required, we must try if 
we can’t find such as will at the same time an- 
swer the end of a constituens; to avoid a multi- 
plicity of ingredients without necessity. 
2. Or else some other must be chose which 
coincides with the virtue of remedy, or at least, 
does not oppose it. 
3.

42 Of Forms in general.
3.The constituens ought to have a natural 
aptitude to mix with the rest of the ingredients; 
but if the indication should require one that has 
not, the mixture may be effected by sugar, sope, 
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
§.87. The mutual proportion of the several 
parts, now enumerated (§.74. to 86.) to each 
other, may be determined from (1.) considering 
the proper dose and consistence of each (per §.35. 
and 66.); (2.) from knowing their dose, con- 
sistence and virtue, when mix’d together; (3.) 
from the particular quantity required by the de- 
terminate form (per §.66. n° 17.) 
§.88. With regard to the proportion of the 
basis, (§.75.) tho' should not sometimes ex- 
ceed the other parts in bulk or quantity, it ought 
always to excel them ail in strength and efficacy; 
and whether it be fimple or compound, the quan- 
tity taken should be proportioned, as near as pos- 
sible, to the design to be answered: with this 
view, 
1. A respect must be had to the adjuvans 
(§.78.) if any be ordered; for if adjuvantia of 
the first kind (§.79. n° 1. and §.80.) be used, 
so as to considerably increase the energy of the 
basis, the basis must be then proportionably less. 
2. If any corrigens (§.83.) be ordered, we 
must then also consider whether and how much 
it will weaken the basis (per §.84. n° 2, 3.) 
and accordingly allow a proportionable aug- 
ment of the basis. 
3. There must be also a proportionable al- 
lowance for the constituens (§.86. n° 1.) whe- 
ther it assist or correct the basis. 
§.B9. The proportion of the adjuvans (§.78.) 
to the basis, should be such, that at least the strength,
if


43 Of Forms in general.
if not bulk of the former, may be inferior to the 
latter: for otherwise it may be termed rather a 
part of the basis, than adjuvans; especially when 
its virtue is the same with that of the basis (per 
§.8O.) Nor can we here, in general, assign a 
more particular determination of the proportion 
of this part than that care must be taken to ad- 
just the adjuvans to the basis, so, that when they 
are both joined together they make a just and ade- 
quate dose, being neither too strong, nor too bulky. 
§.90. With regard to the proportionable quan- 
tity of the corrigentia of both kinds, (§.84. and 
85.) it is in the general more adviseable to let it 
be small, that we may avoid the faults in §.84. 
n° 2, 3. §.85. n° 2, 4, 5. Hence, it is often 
improper to leave the correction of the smell, or 
taste of the medicine, to be determined at the 
apothecary’s discretion, (per §.58. n° 8. (7.) 
What farther regards this head, will be given un- 
der each particular form. 
§.91. The proportion of the constituens (§.86.) 
is pretty uncertain; for the requisite quantity 
thereof is more or less, according to the particu- 
lar nature of the constituens itself, and agreeable 
to the particular form in which the medicine is to 
be made up, as well as proportionable to the 
quantity and consistence of the several constituent 
ingredients. If it be only intended to inlarge the 
medicine, just so much may be added as will com- 
plete the required dose or quantity; but if its use 
is only to make up the form, the quantity is usu- 
ally left be determined at the discretion of the 
apothecary, without any danger, agreeable to 
§.58. n° 8. (7.) 
§.92. We have hitherto considered the com- 
ponent parts, and general quantity of a compound 
formula, (per §.73.) we come now to its PAR- 
TICULAR QUANTITY OR DOSE, which maybe be
deter-

44 Of Forms in genera!. 
determined, both as to quantity and number, upon 
the conditions of the simple formula (per §.66. 
and 67.) But the following considerations should 
be here observed. 
I. When full doses are taken of the several 
component ingredients, especially of the basis 
and its congener the adjuvans, they make up as 
many effectual doses as there are efficacious in- 
gredients: so that in this case, the number of 
ingredients will express the number of doses. 
2. When the number of active ingredients 
are but few, or when there is but one dose re- 
quired, such proportionable parts of each in- 
gredient must be taken as will together amount 
to the desired quantity or dose. 
3. Also the strength of the simples does not 
remain always in the same degree after mixture 
as before; but are sometimes made weaker there- 
by, and sometimes stronger in their virtues: 
which is therefore a consideration to be attended 
to. For there is a wide difference between ad- 
ding the adjuvans to the basis, or the corrigens, 
or both: one will sometimes inhanse the virtue, 
when the other will diminish it, the bulk re- 
maining the same, per §.79. 84. 85. Examples 
of which will be given when we come present- 
ly to treat of the qualities. 
4. From the variety of mixture often arise 
compositions by far more or less corruptible 
than the several ingredients were when asunder. 
Emulsions grow sour presently; while on the 
other hand, fix'd alcalies, ground with absor- 
bents, keep dry a long time without melting. 
So that this consideration has often no small in- 
fluence in determining the number of doses to 
be prescribed at one time, in a compound for- 
mula. (per §.67. n° 3.) 
§.93.

45 Of Forms in general 
§.93. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.73.) of 
a compound formula will evidently appear from 
comparing what has been said §.68. with §.92. 
§.94. Lastly, the QUALITIES (§.73.) which 
arise from the mixture of several ingredients, being 
frequently very different from those of any of the 
simples which make up the formula, do greatly 
merit our consideration here: for the changes 
which do thence arise are not confined only to ex- 
ternal appearance, but the most intimate nature 
and medicinal properties of the ingredients are 
also greatly affected and changed; in so much, 
that this is no small argument for preferring the 
use of simples (per §.31.) to that of compounds, 
where there is no real necessity (per §.72.) for 
the latter. 
§.95. The qualities here intended to be in- 
quired into (§.94.) are chiefly the consistence, co- 
loury smell, taste, and medicinal virtues. 
§.96. The consistence; which is proper to each 
particular form, should be cautiously preserved 
from being confused, or disturbed by various and 
injudicious mixture: otherwise the remedy may 
be render’d nauseous, unfit for use, or give the 
patient occasion to think it ill prepared: it may 
be also tedious to make up by the apothecary, and 
sometimes excite his ridicule; but what is worse, 
it may destroy the virtue of the medicine, or in- 
troduce foreign qualities. 
§.97. Its consistence (§.96.) may be vitiated 
(1.) by the inequality or ununiformity of the mix- 
ture; (2.) from too great thickness or dryness; 
(3.) from too great fluidity or softness. 
§.98. To avoid these inconsistences (§.97.) in 
prescribing, we ought to make ourselves previ- 
ously acquainted with,
1.

46 Of Forms in general. 
1. The consistence proper to every particu- 
lar form, which we shall explain hereafter in 
each of them. 
2. The consistence of every separate ingre- 
dient (§.35) which enters them, which are to 
be learned per §.7. n° 2, 3. and §.8. 
3. The mutual disposition of each ingredient 
for mixture with the other, agreeable to §.36. 
Here is to be particularly consider’d the mutual 
affinity, attraction, or repulsion that obtains be- 
tween certain simples, their effervescence, fer- 
mentation, precipitation, deliquation, concretion, 
or coagulation, &c. But as these are to be learn- 
ed from chemistry only, it is evident of what 
considerable advantage that is to pharmacy. 
§.99. The colour, is the most uncertain and 
changeable of all the qualities; especially when 
the simples mix’d together are of different natures. 
We may therefore the more readily introduce such 
as are most agreeable; the better to effect which, 
we must attend to the following considerations. 
1. No colours in nature are more agreeable 
than crystalline, white, golden, red and blue 
yellow, green, black, and such as are opake and 
compound of these, are less agreeable.
2. Several forms have their particular and 
usual colour, which are to be commended: as 
milky or white, in emulsions; red, in julaps, 
but never blue; golden, red, or crystalline, in 
mixtures, &c. Unusual colours either nauseate 
or offend the more nice patient; but it is some- 
time's prudently used, for concealment of some- 
thing (per §.25.) 
3. There can be no physical nor general de- 
termination of the particular colour that will a- 
rise from a mixture of several colour’d ingre- 
dients together in a medicine. The chemist,
from

47 Of Forms in general. 
from a mixture of colourless ingredients, pro- 
duces black, white, yellow, red, blue, brown, 
and almost what colour he pleases: we must
therefore refer to chemistry on this head, as that 
alone affords the examples and rules requifite for 
the prefent business. Consult also §.85. fore- 
going. 
§.100. The mutability and uncertainty of odors 
upon mixture, is but little inferior to that of co- 
lours (§.99.): but then they are more consider- 
able and certain signs of the internal texture and 
virtues of the compound, and they act more strong- 
ly upon the body than colours. Here we must be 
careful to prevent the result of vicious and offen- 
sive odors upon composition of different ingre- 
dients. Therefore observe. 
1. The rules concerning gratefulness of odors 
are very uncertain and confin'd; those pleasing 
Some, not pleasing all, (per §.85. 23.) 
2. Pleasantness and utility in odors are often 
very distant companions. Patients who are hy- 
pochondriacal, hysterical, epileptic, &c. often 
fare the worst from the pleasantest and sweetest 
smelling ingredients. 
3. Things which are inodorous, and mode- 
rately either sweet or fœtid, are most in univer- 
sal esteem; but putrid and excrementitious smells 
are intollerable: in the mean time, such as are 
the most fœtid or the most fragrant, will produce 
the strongest, either good or bad, effects upon 
the body.  
4. Frequently the whole virtue of a medicine 
depends upon its order, and the principles of 
which that is constituted; destroy one, and the 
other also perishes, a change in one makes also 
a change in the other.
5.

48 Of Forms In general. 
5. The odor of a compound cannot be ge- 
nerally determined from the odors of its several 
ingredients: as chemistry largely demonstrates. 
(1.) From a mixture ot inodorous ingredients 
arise compounds of the strongest smell. If sal 
ammoniacum and a fix’d alcaly or quick lime 
be ground together, tho' they are both sepa- 
rately inodorous, what a sudden and violent 
smell do they produce! oil of vitriol poured on 
nitre, sea-salt, sal ammoniac, regenerated tartar, 
and the like, produce the same. 
(2.) From a mixture of very strong smelling 
substances results a compound without any smell. 
Let a saturation of spirit of sal ammoniac with 
spirit of nitre or common salt be taken as an 
example. 
(3.) The worst of stenches may be excited 
upon a mixture of things little fœtid, or even 
fragrant: and on the contrary, the most fra- 
grant odors may arise from a composition of the 
most fœtid ingredients. Sulphur being dis- 
solved in a fixed alcaly, and mix’d with vine- 
gar, can you distinguish it from the smell of a 
rotten egg? on the other hand, juices of an 
offensive smell being carried about mix’d in a 
leather bag by Mr. Lemery *, afforded the plea- 
sant persume of musk. 
In order therefore to act circumspectly in this 
case also, a knowledge in chemistry is both use- 
ful and necessary. 
§.101. Tastes come under the same conditions 
with odors (§.100.), and answer to the same cau- 
tions. Insipid, sweet, sour, bitter, salt, &c. are 
the most agreeable: rancid, putrid and urinous, 
the most unpleasant: the production, destruction,
and 
* Hist. de l’Acad. Royal. an. 1706.

49 Of Forms in general.
and change of tastes, upon a variety of mixtures, 
is also no less various; and these too we are to 
learn from chemistry. 
Do not the sharpest tasted acid and alcaly be- 
come insipid upon a just commixture? 
What is more ungrateful to the tongue, than the 
brackishness which crabs-eyes, oyster-shells, &c.
impart to acids? 
The softest and insipid earths become aluminous 
when mix’d with acids. 
Lead mix’d with acids affords a saccharine 
sweetness: iron with acids affords a sweetish 
roughness; and the other metals with acids afford 
tastes intolerably nauseous. 
§.102. But we might easily pass by any fault 
that might happen in any of the fore-mention’d 
qualities (§.96. to §.102.), if they were not so 
frequently attended with an improper diminution 
and even intire change of the medicinal virtues of 
the composition. Even the medicinal virtues are 
often suddenly and unexpectedly impared and 
changed, without any considerable alteration in 
the other sensible qualities of the ingredients: as 
may be easily apprehended from the few following 
examples. 
1. Acids and alcalies destroy the properties 
of each other, upon mixture; and turn into a 
neutral salt, which is neither an acid or an 
alcaly. 
2. Acids arid the earthy absorbents destroy 
the natural action of each other, upon mixture; 
and produce a (tertium quid) new substance, 
which has neither the virtues of an acid nor an 
absorbent. 
3. Earths and the boles used in pharmacy, 
being mix’d with acids, acquire a stronger force 
of astringing, with an aluminous stipticity. 
E 4.

50 Of Forms in general. 
4. Some cathartics are hindred in their ac- 
tion by acids or alcalies, others are promoted 
in their action by being mix’d with the same. 
Scammony mix’d with an acid becomes as un- 
active as a little sand; on the contrary, by a 
fix’d alcaly, it is rendered stronger than alone. 
Jalap and colocynthis become quite tame and 
gentle in their stimulus, upon being mix’d with 
sal-tartari. 
5. Opiates promote the action of sudorifics 
and sialogogues: but they almost suppress the 
power of other evacuants. 
6. Mucilaginous and astringent medicines 
are weakened by a mixture of sugar. 
7. Mercury changed into an æthiops, or a 
cinnabar, by sulphur, is no longer a sialogogue, 
but loses its salivating power. Crude mercury 
ground with twice as much sugar, or testaceous 
powder *, becomes an unactive œthiops albus †. 
Turbith mineral is changed from an evacuant 
to an alterative, upon being mix’d with pil. de 
duobus & camph. ‡. Calomel ground with sul- 
phur of antimony will scarce either vomit, 
purge, salivate or provoke urine ‖. Corrosive 
sublimate, ground with more crude mercury, 
becomes sweet again. The many precipitates 
of mercury, which are stuck full of the sharp 
spicula of acids, lose all their force and acri- 
mony upon being ground with alcalies, and ear- 
thy absorbents. But ’tis a question whether 
æthiops and cinnabar remain the same, unalter’d 
by a mixture with alcalies.
8. 
* It is then the mercurius alcalizatus, which made some stir, 
not long ago. 
†. V. Edinburgh Medic. Essays, Vol. III. p. 388. 
‡ Ibid. vol. IV. p. 32. 
‖ Ibid. vol. I.  p. 46. vol. III. p. 389.

51 Of Forms in general. 
8. Calx viva being tailed unawares, burns the 
tongue with the acrimony of a fix’d alcaly. 
What a strange effed has it, when mix’d with 
sal ammoniacum! 
9. Alcalies mix’d with acids, or acids with 
alcalies, do generally excite a struggling ebul- 
lition; which is follow’d by a considerable 
change in the virtues and properties of each. 
Vitriolum martis, mix’d with alcalies, turns to 
a kind of tartarum vitriolatum, with an incor- 
rigible ochre. The same holds good with re- 
spect to the vitriols of other metals and semi- 
metals, except copper. Alum, mix’d with an 
alcaly, is precipitated in the form of an unactive 
calx: upon which principle, the nature of alu- 
minous magisteries is sufficiently apparent. Sul- 
phur, dissolved in an alcaly, is thence precipi- 
tated in a curdly form by acids, &c. 
10. Earthy absorbents, being mix’d with a- 
cids, do also in like manner reciprocally act 
upon and change each other; the absorbent 
loses its antacid property, and the acid loses its 
acrimony or acidity. 
11. A fix’d alcaly, upon mixture, sets at li- 
berty the volatile alcaline, and absorbent earthy 
parts of mix’d bodies, A volatile alcali will al- 
so separate the absorbent earthy parts of bodies:
but we must except the calx viva, which, on the 
contrary, separates and expels the volatile alca- 
ly. V. n° 8. Hence, what vast alterations must 
a compound suffer, which is made up of a fix’d 
alcaly, or calx viva, and ingredients which con- 
tain an ammoniacal or volatile salt; or when a 
volatile or fix’d alcaly is mix’d in a liquid form, 
with any of the soluble magisteries of coral or 
pearl? * &c.
E2 12. 
* Such a mixture in julaps, &c. would precipitate the fine 
magisteries into an unsightly hypostasis. 


52 Of Forms in general. 
12. A stronger acid will disengage and drive 
out a weaker, from the earthy substance or basis 
to which it has fix’d itself in bodies. The 
strongest acid is oil of vitriol; the weakest, are 
those of the vegetable juices. Hence, what will 
be the consequence if the strong acid of vitriol, 
sulphur or alum (which are all much of the 
same nature) be joined with sal ammoniacum, 
common salt, nitre, the sal febrifugum Sylvii, 
tartarum solubile, tartarum regeneratum, and 
the like? What will be the effect of this strong 
vitriolic or aluminous acid, when it disengages 
the weaker acid from the earthy parts which 
constitute those salts, and places itself in their 
room *? Hence, we may form a judgment of 
the tinctura martis Zwelseri, and others of the 
same tribe. 
13. Care must be taken not to mix acids, e- 
specially of the fossil kind, with any thing that 
is metalline or mineral: for that may pro- 
duce strange alterations in a composition; it 
may even turn a good medicine into the rankest 
poison. Mercury sublimate, red precipitate, 
lapis infernalis, butyrum antimonii, and many 
of the like nature, demand this caution. 
14. The same substance assumes very diffe- 
rent medicinal properties, barely from the dif- 
ferent menstruum in which it is dissolved. The 
generality of vegetable cathartics operate best 
when they have been first extracted with an 
aqueous menstruum; whereas if they are ex- 
tracted in a menstruum; wholly spirituous, as al-
cohol, 
* The consequence will be, that the weaker acid being disen- 
gaged by the stronger, from the earthy basis to which it was fix'd, 
will become volatile, and exhale in fumes; while the remaining 
earth and stronger acid will form another saline body, agreeable 
to the strength and mutual proportion of each.

53 Of Forms in general. 
cohol, they gripe more and purge less *. Glass, 
or liver of antimony, communicates an emetic 
power to wine; but not so to water, distilled 
vinegar, burnt wine, nor the alcohol of wine †. 
Copper dissolved in an acid, proves erhetic; dis- 
solved in a volatile alcaly, it makes a powerful 
diuretic; open’d by sal ammoniacum, it purges 
by stool ‖, &c. 
§.103. We could bring many more instances 
of the like kind with those now mention’d (§.102.), 
and it is wish’d we could say, all: but as the me- 
thod of composition is in our day without order 
and without end (per §.72. n° 9.), we must con- 
sequently fall vastly short of a just knowledge of 
the several alterations which arise in every com- 
pound upon mixture: but we should be pretty- 
near the mark, if we had but once arrived at an 
accurate knowledge of the mechanical structure, 
and constituent principles of the several simple in- 
gredients, with the mutual affinity or disposition 
they bear to each other, and from a full discovery 
of the true ways in which they act upon each o- 
ther, and upon the animal œconomy. 
§.104. In the mean time, who would be so 
rash as to enter upon the composition of the me- 
dicines used in pharmacy, without a competent 
skill in chemistry; for ’tis that which must teach 
him the surprising and infinitely various changes 
which arise upon mixture: and therefore there still 
remains an infinite number of those changes to be 
discovered and farther prosecuted by that art; for 
the mutual application and affinity of all the simples 
E3 to
* M. Boulduc dans les Memoir, de l’Acad. Roy. an. 1701. 
p. 256.
† Lemery Traité de l’Antimoine, p. 413, &c. p. 561, &c.
‖ Boerhaave Elem. Chem. vol. II. process. 189. 

54 Of Forms in particular. 
to each other have never yet been experimented, 
nor have most of those been rightly examined 
which have been already tried and observed. 
Of FORMS in particular. 
§.105. DISTINCTION and method in writing re- 
commends to us the received division 
of forms into external and internal. Internal me- 
dicines or forms, are restrained to those only which 
are convey’d thro’ the mouth and œsophagus into 
the stomach: but under the external, are compre- 
hended all such medicines as are applied to the 
body any other way, whether they lodge upon the 
skin only, or are by particular means convey’d into 
various cells or cavities. To act therefore agree- 
able to this method, we shall begin first with the 
internal forms of medicines. 
OF the INTERNAL FORMS of
MEDICINES. 
Of a POWDER. 
§.106. A Powder is a dry, uniform and (here) 
internal medicine, consisting of one 
or more ingredients, broke into 
small particles: which do not adhere to each other, 
but remain equably mix’d. 
§.107. The powder (§.106.) is distinguished 
into three KINDS, according to its particular de- 
gree of tenuity: being either (1.) very subtle, called 
alcohol;


55 Of a Powder.
alcohol *; (2.) coarse or gross, as in spices, cof- 
fee, &c. usually call’d tragea; or (3.) of a mid- 
dling degree of fineness between the two former, 
when the simples are beat as fine as they can be 
without levigation, which is what we commonly 
intend by the word powder or species †. 
§.108. Which of these degrees of subtility 
(§.107.) will be most convenient for the intention 
and form, may be chiefly determined from con-
sidering (1.) the nature of the ingredients to be 
reduced into a powder; (2.) the degree of pene- 
trability we would give it; (3.) to determine its 
action to be quicker or flower, or more to one 
part than another; (4.) to have the mixture ap- 
pear more or less uniform, and in proportion to 
the patients more easy or difficult deglutition. 
1. Ingredients which are absorbent, hard and 
ponderous, ungrateful and refinous, should be 
more exactly comminuted, and when they are 
to penetrate far, or act quickly, &c. the first 
kind (§.107.) is required. 
2. Aromatics, and volatile substances lose a 
great part of their virtue in an over exact pul- 
verization, and much more by keeping in that 
state. 
3. Some things prove purgatives in a gross 
powder; but in a more subtle one, they are 
diuretic, &c. 
§.109. The ingredients or proper MATTER
for the powder (§.106.), is every thing that is 
E4 redu-
* This is obtained by levigation; and by ablution and precipi- 
tation with water, air, &c. when the subject will conveniently 
admit of it: and may be then distinguished into a vast number of 
degrees of tenuity; for the resistance of the medium and specific gra- 
vity of the subject being determined, the fineness of the powder will 
be as the time and highth wherein it precipitates. 
† This is also subdivisible into various other degrees of tenuity, 
by the different fineness of sieves. 

56 Of a Powder. 
reducible (either alone or mix'd) into a dry or 
dusty form, and is at the same time proper for 
internal use: so that liquids are not wholly exclu- 
ded from entering into the form of a powder. 
§.110 Hence (§.109.), this form takes in (1.) 
all officinal whether vegitable, animal or 
mineral, that may be used internally with safety, 
and are of a solid, dry and brittle texture. (2.) 
All officinal preparations and compounds which 
are of the like nature. (3.) All soft and thick 
substances of the two preceding classes (1. and 2.), 
as inspissated juices, extracts, electuaries, &c. (4.) 
All liquids of the same kind (1. and 2.) in a 
small quantity, as balsams, oils, &c. 
§.111. But a CHOICE of these ingredients 
is necessary in order to avoid inconsistence in a 
prescription: with regard to which, observe 
1. That simples which are very bulky in 
proportion to their efficacy are seldom, if ever, 
reduced to the two most subtle kinds of this 
form (§.107. (1.) (3.) ): on the contrary, they 
are very frequently made into the gross powder 
(§.107. (2.) ). Of this nature, are woods, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, &c. But we must not 
exclude things which are very light and bulky 
from the two finer kinds of this form, when 
they act in a little quantity, or make but a small 
dose, as agar. colocinth. &c. 
2. If we lie under a necessity of transgressing 
against the preceding rule, we should take care 
to supply the inactivity of the former bulky 
ingredients, by adding something that is more 
potent and effectual in a very small quantity. 
3. If any liquids be order'd, they should be 
in a very small quantity, in proportion to the 
dry ingredients; that the proper consistence of 
the form may not be thence disturbed. The 
same

57 Of a Powder.
same caution holds good, with regard to soft 
and thick substances. 
4. Gums should hardly ever enter the form 
of a powder: for they are not only very diffi- 
cult to reduce to this form, but they are also 
difficult to take in that manner, as they become 
gluey by mixing with the saliva. 
5. Such simples as are full of a mucilage or 
an oil, like many seeds, should not be order’d 
for this form, but in conjunction with things 
that are more dry and brittle: for the mucilage 
or oil being express’d in the pulverization, will 
make rather a paste than a powder, which will 
grow rank so much the sooner by keeping. 
6. Fœtid ingredients should be excluded this 
form as much as possible, as they are much more 
suitable for that of a pill. 
7. Things that are very sharp, bitter, or 
otherwise disagreeable to the taste, if given at 
all in this form, should be at least not given 
alone, but mix’d and qualify’d with others that 
are more mild and pleasant: by which means 
we shall avoid sleaing or burning the patient’s 
mouth, making him sick or nauseated, and ex- 
citing him to vomit. 
8. Therefore the stronger kind of resins 
should be ground up with sugar, or earthy ab- 
sorbents, and corrected with proper salts and 
effential oils; by which means they will be 
render’d more dissolvable in the aqueous juices 
of the stomach, nor so apt to gripe and adhere 
to the membranous parts. 
9. The more potent and effectual preparations 
of mercury, are more suitable to be exhibited in 
the form of pills or a bolus, than this of a pow- 
der. At least, it is not so safe to give such 
things unmix’d; by reason of the smallness of 
the dose: but something should be judiciously 
chose

58 Of a Powder. 
chose and adapted (per §.86. and §.102. n° 7.
and 13.) to enlarge the bulk. 
10. We are dissuaded from giving fix’d al- 
calies in this form, at least unmix’d by reason 
of their urinous acrimony, and their aptness to 
liquify by the air. 
11. Volatile alcalies, as they are offensive 
both to smell and taste, so they also quickly ex- 
hale, and are lost in this form. 
12. When the ingredients of a powder are 
of an unpleasant taste, especially in the tragea, 
or coarse powder (§.107. (2.)), they may be 
corrected with sugar, solid sugar confects, or 
the like: when they are of an unpleasant smell, 
we may add some fragrant essential oil, and 
sometimes a little musk or ambergrease: and 
both intentions may be frequently answer’d at 
once by a little elæosaccharum. For the sake 
of colour, we may add sang, dracon. l. santal. 
rub. leaf-gold and silver, &c. being at the same 
time mindful of the cautions, §.85. 99. 100. 
101. 
13. The physician, studying simplicity, will 
not take in above three or four ingredients at 
most, when he prescribes this form in but a 
small quantity. But in the tragea, (§.107. 2.) 
or coarse powder, and such as are more bulky, 
he may take the liberty of inserting a greater 
number. 
§.112. The neatest ORDER for placing the se- 
veral constituent ingredients or parts of this form 
in a prescription, is, to place the basis (§.75.) 
first, then the adjuvans (§.78.) and corrigens 
(§.83.); lastly, to add the constituens (§.86.) 
agreeable to §.57. n° 4. The several quantities 
of the ingredients may also direct another order 
(per §.57. n° 3.) But in both, the placing ingre- 
dients

59 Of a Powder.
dients of the same tribe together should be ob- 
serv’d (per §.75. n° 2.) And if any sugar is to 
be added, especially when its quantity is to be de- 
termin’d from the quantity of the other ingre- 
dients, it ought always to close the series in a pre- 
script, (per §.75. n° 5.) 
§.113. The DOSE (§.64.) of a powder, espe- 
cially of the two finer forts, (§.107. (1.) (3.)) is, 
at a medium, about half a dram. But it is some- 
times increased to a whole dram; tho’ but seldom, 
and never but when the patient has a good appe- 
tite to physic, or when the ingredients are very 
weighty in proportion to their bulk, and are easy 
to dissolve. As the dose of this form seldom ex- 
ceeds a dram, so it is as seldom less than a scruple, 
unless the substance is very bulky in proportion to 
its weight. But the tragea (§.107.) or coarse powder, 
will often easily admit of a larger dose than a dram: 
tho’ the dose of these is often not determin’d by 
weight, but at discretion in a spoon, upon the 
point of a knife, &c. But in either, we are to 
observe, 
1. Bulky doses should be avoided as much 
as possible, especially when the ingredients are 
unpleasant, and the patient nice and sickly, or 
apt to vomit, and of a difficult deglutition, &c. 
2. A respect must be had to the several cir- 
cumstances limiting the dose of medicines in ge- 
neral (per §.66.), and especially with regard to 
young infants (ib. n° 3.), that such may not be 
fatigued with a large dose.
3. Hence it is frequently more proper to in- 
crease the number of doses than their bulk (per 
§.67. no° 4. 5.); as the smallness of the dose 
will make amends for the repetition of it. 
4. There are yet some powders that are easily 
soluble in a proper vehicle, which may be given 
to the quantity ot several drams for a dose, and 
2 yet

60 Of a Powder. 
yet may be taken without difficulty. Even the 
Epsom salts may be given to an ounce. 
§.114. The GENERNAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, to be transmitted from the apothe- 
cary to the patient at one time, is in different 
cases and circumstances various. The tragea (§.107. 
(2.)) may be order’d from ℥ ß. to one or two ℥'s
or more. Evacuants are very frequently prescribed 
only in one dose at a time; unless the physician 
intends the operation to be repeated in a continued 
series, and at no long intervals. Alteratives are 
used to be prescribed from  ʒij. to ℥j. or ℥j ß.
but they are sometimes order’d in the quantity of 
two or three doses only at a time. But observe, 
1. That constant bounds cannot be assigned 
to the quantity of this form in general; where- 
as it may be easily determined from considering 
the condition of the patient, and his particular 
case, with the nature of the ingredients and in- 
tention of the physician, &c. See §.67, n° 1. 
to n° 12. and §. 68. and 92. n° 4. 
2. We should be more particularly careful in 
this form, that the general quantity may be di- 
visible by weight into doses, without leaving any 
remainder; if the distribution into doses of a 
determinate weight is to be performed by the 
apothecary (per §.68. n° 3.). 
3. And sometimes, when there is danger of 
bad consequence from an inaccurate division of 
potent materials, it is adviseable to order the 
apothecary to make an exact and distinct distri- 
bution; directing the manner in which it is to 
be done in the subscription. 
§.115. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients in this form, when it consists 
of more than one; that is to be determined from 
2 the

61 Of a Powder.
the dose proper for every patient (per §.66.), 
from the common and establish’d dose of this 
form (§.113.); and lastly, from the general quan- 
tity which the physician thinks proper to order in 
his prescription. Therefore, 
1. So much of each ingredient is to be taken 
as will amount to a remedy equal to the inten- 
tion, whose dose and general quantity may be 
neither more nor less than is requisite. 
2. If the quantity of the ingredients, which 
are judged equal to the physician’s intention, 
should exceed the just dose (§.113.) of the 
form; we must either use the rule mention’d 
(ib. n° 3.), or increase its strength by adding 
such as act more powerfully in a small bulk 
(per §.80.); which is to be observed more espe- 
cially in simples that are light and bulky (per 
§.111. n° 1. and 2.) 
3. But if on the contrary, the sufficient quan- 
tity of the ingredients are of a much less bulk 
than is convenient for the proper dose (§.113.) 
of this form; we are to augment it to a proper 
size by intermixing some suitable constituens 
(per §.86. and 91.): which is frequently re- 
quired in opiates, and preparations from metals 
and minerals, &c. 
4. When liquids are to be order’d, we should 
be mindful of the rule at §.111. n° 3. 
5. The quantity of sugar used in this form, 
especially in the lighter coarse powders (§.107. 
(2.)), is often equal to, or double and triple the 
weight of the other ingredients 
6. But we should all the while carefully con- 
sider the several changes and other qualities that 
may happen to the ingredients upon mixture 
(per §.94. to 102.); lest we frustrate our in- 
tention, or occasion some injury to the patient.
§.116.

62 Of a Powder. 
§.116. The SUBSCRIPTION (§.59.) of this 
form, declares to the apothecary, the preparation 
of the powder, its distribution, and its receptacle, 
or what it is to be put up in. 
§. 17. The preparation consists in pounding 
and grinding, pulverisation or trituration; and 
where there is more than one ingredient, mixation 
is added. Which are order’d in these terms, F. 
i. e. fiat, or M. F. Pulv. i. e. misce, fiat pulvis;
per §.59. n° 1. and 2. If the powder is to be 
coarse, we add the word grossus, or tragea if ex- 
ceeding fine, we add after, or in the room of pul- 
vis, the term alcohol, or pulv. subtiliss. and when 
neither of these are expressed, the powder is sup- 
posed to be of a mean fineness, per §.107. Some- 
times it is necessary to further advise (miscel. & 
trit. diu permanend.) or, citò perficiend. that the 
mixture and trituration is to be continued a long 
or a short time; and (œquabiliter, mortario tecto, 
&c.) that the mixture should be equably made, 
and in a cover’d mortar, &c. (per §.108.) when 
the ingredients require such a treatment. 
§.118. The division or distribution of the pow- 
der into its proper doses, when it belongs to the 
apothecary, should be immediately added next af- 
ter the former (§.117.): (divide in (tot.) partes 
equales) directing him to divide it into so many 
equal parts or doses. Nor should we sometimes 
omit an admonishment in strong medicines, that 
(partitio fiat exabtissima) the distribution may be 
made with the greatest exactness; but the most cau- 
tious physicians prescribe only one dose of such 
medicines at a time, ordering a new composition 
for every dose they require, thus, fiat, or repetatur 
idem bis, ter, &c. per §.114. n° 3. But there is 
no need of this caution, when the dose of the pow- 
der is not to be determined by weight (per §.113.), 
nor


63 Of a Powder. 
nor when its division is left to the patient or his 
attendants. 
§.119. The receptacle, or case to put up and 
keep the powder in, varies with different circum- 
stances; and may sometimes require to be parti- 
cularly mentioned in a prescription. Such as will 
exhale or liquify with the air, should be put up in 
glasses. Each dose of the whole quantity of the 
powder is to be folded up in a separate paper, or 
inclosed in little card or deal boxes, which we call 
scatulte. We therefore commonly order the re- 
ceptacle thus: D. (i.e. datur, let it be sent) in 
vitro, chartis, scatula. And when the powder is 
to be taken in wafer-paper (made by the consec- 
tioners), we write afterwards, cum nebula charta- 
cea, pro vehiculo. 
§.120. The signment or SUPERSCRIPTION
(§.60.) of this form, contains the title of the 
powder, its dose, vehicle, time of taking, regi- 
men, &c. agreeable to §.60. n° 1, 2, 3, &c. that 
§.121. The title is to be deduced from the 
form, v.g. pulvis vel pulveres; and then from its 
virtue, v.g. absorbens, pectoralis, &c. being at the 
same time mindful of the cautions at §.60. 
n° 7, 8. 
§.122. The dose of this form is either left to 
be portion’d out by weight, or some common mea- 
sure by the patient (per §. .n° 9. and §. 113.), 
in which case we write sumatur drachm, or ʒj. or 
ʒß. or quantum digitabulo, cultri apice, cochleari, 
&c. capi potest. But if the powders are to be 
taken already divided by the apothecary (per 
§.118.); it may then be sufficient to write only, 
capiatur una dosis. 
§.123. The vehicles used, to take this form in, 
are various: according to the circumstances of the 
patient’s case, with the nature of the ingredients, 
and form itself. 
1.

64 Of a Powder.
1. The coarse powder (§.107. (2.)) fre- 
quently requires no vehicle, being sufficiently 
pleasant of itself (per §. 115. n° 5,): it is how- 
ever sometimes given in medicated breads, bis- 
kets, sugar cakes, or sprinkled, in a proper 
quantity, upon a common toast in some rich 
wine, or mead, &c. 
2. A very usual vehicle for the other two 
kinds of this form (§.107. (1.) (3.)), is, the 
nebula chartacea, or wafer paper of our confec- 
tioners; which, when wetted in the mouth, is 
extremely well adapted to flip down whole with 
the powder, without offending the palate by 
any of its contents. The apothecary is to be 
advised in the subscription to send as many ne- 
bulæ or wafers to the patient, as there are doses 
of the powder, and sometimes to double the 
wafer: he should also express the use of them 
to the patient, in the superscription or direction. 
3. But the most common of all vehicles for 
this form, is, some proper liquid (per §.60. 
n° 11.), indued with the qualities there men- 
tioned. Hence, 
(1.) An acid vehicle should not be used for 
alcaline or absorbent powders; lest by exciting 
an effervescence they should nauseate the pa- 
tient, or destroy the virtues of each other (per 
§.102. n° 1, 2.) But we must except a de- 
signed mixture of this kind, as in the antemetic 
of RIVERIUS ex sal. abs. & succ. limon. 
(2.) We must abstain from liquid vehicles 
which are too fat or oily; for as they are gene- 
rally disagreeable to the patient, so they fre- 
quently obstruct the action of the medicine; 
which must be observed with regard to broths. 
(3.) Sometimes it is proper to mention whe- 
ther the liquid vehicle is to be drank warm, hot 
or

65 Of a Powder. 
or cold. Such as are fat, are nauseous when 
drank cold. Such as are just warm, promote vo- 
miting. Such as are taken hot, are apt to make 
gummy powders grumous or clog together; 
they diffipate such as are volatile, make such as 
are unpleasant more so by opening their body, 
and sometimes excite a status or hysteric passion. 
The particular nature also of the liquid vehicle 
itself, the customary way of using it, and the 
use or habit of the patient, have each their pro- 
per force in assigning limits to these circumstances. 
§.124. Lastly, we are to ascertain the times for 
taking each dose, and to assign a proper regimen 
to be observ’d thro' the whole course; both which 
must vary with the physicians particular indications 
(per §.60. n° 10, and 12.); nor is an explana- 
tion of them the proper business of this place, 
(per §.7. n° 1.) 
§.125. The Use of this form, is almost univer- 
sal, being suited to evacuants as well as alteratives. 
But we must be careful that the nature of the dis- 
ease, its seat and symptoms, the constitution and 
custom of the patient, with the disposition of the 
remedies indicated, are not repugnant, but suitable 
to this form, per §.35. 43—48. 109—111. For 
the difficulty of swallowing in a quinsey, ulcers of 
the sauces, an apoplexy, epilepsy, syncope, &c. 
do forbid the use of powders. 
§.126. Take the following as SPECIMENS of 
this form, suited to common or general cases. 
1. Pulv. emet. pro adulto nimia cibi repleto. 
ꝶ. Tart. emetic, gr. v. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. iij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. emeti cum cerevisia callida sumend. pro una dosi. 
F 2.

66 Of a Powder. 
2. Pulv. emet. common. pro adulto. 
♃. Rad. ipecacuanh. ʒß. 
F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis emeticus in haustul. vini alb. una vice su- 
mendus super bibendo copiose de infuso tepido fa- 
rinœ aven. tenuiter & fine ebullitione facta, 
inter vomendum. 
3. P. Purgans pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. x. 
Elœsacch. fœnicul. gr. xxv. 
M. terendo diu, F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro dosi mane cum infuso caffe su-
mendus. 
4. P. Cathart. communis pro adulto.
♃. Rad. jalapp. ℈j. 
Diagrydii gr. xij. 
Ol. caryoph. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis cathart. mane cum custiodia in haustul. ce- 
rivis. recent, calid. sumend. 
5. Alius in cancro nondum exulcerato. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 110. 
ꝶ. Resin. jalapp. gr. vj. 
Diagrydii gr. vij. 
Stibii diaphoret. non ablut. gr.xxiv. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. P. Hydragog. sive drastic. pro adulto. 
(1.) ♃. Gutt.gamb. 
Calomelan. aa gr. xvj. 
Sal. succin. gr. vj. 
Ol. essent. junip. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane cum custodia in nebula char- 
tacea deglutiend.
(2.) 

67 Of a Powder.
(2.) Alius- 
4. ♃. jalapp. ʒß. 
Tartar. vitriolat. 
Spec. diambræ aa gr. v. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Ut prior, vel in haustu cerevis. recent. tepide 
sumend. 
7. Alius in scorbuti initio. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ Tart, vitriol. non acid. 
Crystal. tartar. 
Sal. polychrest. aa  ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans mane ex sero lactis hauriendus: 
super bibantur dein seri lactis ℥xij. 
8. P. antihelminticus purgans: pro puero circa vj 
vel viij. annos nato. 
♃. Diagrydii. 
Calomelan. aa gr. vj. 
Rad. rhei ℈ß
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis purgans pro verm. mane cum regimine, in 
pulpa pomi torrifacti sumendus. 
9. Alius antihelminticus pro infante. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 234. 
ꝶ Aloës succot. gr. iij. 
Resin. jalapp. gr. j. 
Vitriol. mart. gr. ij. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Mane, jejuna stomacho, pro una dosi sumatur.
F2 10. 

68 Of a Powder. 
10. P. antihelmint. cathart. pro infante. 
♃. P. cornachini. 
R. Rhabarhar. aa gr. vj. ad xij. 
Æthiop. alb. vel merc. alcalisat. 
Sacchar. alb. aa ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulvis vermifug. & purgat. in alimento lacteo 
communi exhibendus. 
11. Alius vermifugus alterans. 
♃. † Æthiop. alb. ʒß. 
Nitri purif. ℈j. 
Sal.jovis gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. sabin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Alternis auror. (cum sequent.) pro ij dosib. in 
infus. casse sumendus. 
12. Pulv. solutivus. 
♃. Pol. sen. gr. xxv. 
Tartar. vitriolat. gr. v. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. P. laxativ. vel lenitiv. in pulpa pomi tosti, vel 
aliter, sumendus, &c. 
13. Alius vermifugus evacuans 
♃. Spec. hier. gr. xv. 
Rad. rhei 
Sem. santon. aa ℈ß. 
M. f. pulv. 
S. In nebula deglutiendus: & alternis auror. 
repetendus. 
† Vel tnercur. alcalisat. fit ex pulv. testac. pts. ij. & argent. 
viv. pt. j. 
14.

69 of a Powder. 
14. Pulv. diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. 
Test. Ostreor. calcinat. aa℈j. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu saponacea octavis horis 
sumendus. 
15. Alius diuret. 
♃. Sal. prunell. ℈ß. 
succin. gr. iv. 
Sp. terebinth, gtt. iij. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Capiatur statim in nebula vel haust. supra prœscript. 
16. Pulv. sialagogus.
♃. Chrystal. miner. ʒj. 
Sal. succin. ℈j. 
Sacch. alb. ʒij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
M. F. pulv. in viij. chart. dividend. 
S. Pulv. sputator. quarum unam in orem capiat sub- 
inde, vel singulis horis. 
17. Pulvis sudorificus. 
♃. Croc. angl. sicc. ℈ß 
Castor. R. gr. vj. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. chamomill. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. alexipharm. tempore idoneo in haust. julapii 
appropriat. sumendus. 
F3 18.

70 Of a Powder. 
18. Pulv. diaphoreticus. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Angel. Hispan. 
Croc. angl. sicc. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart, ij. 
S. Pulv. cardiac. in haust. julapii sumend. 
(2.) Alius P.
♃. Lapid. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Pulv. e C. C. C. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Ut prior, 6ta quaqs hora sumendus. 
19. Pulvis febrifugus. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
Alumin. rupe. gr. iv. 
Ol. cinnamom. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. q. s. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. febris. tertiis horis sumendus cum haustu vini 
rubri astringentis aq. Fontan. œquali parte diluti. 
20. Pulvis narcoticus in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ Opii lamellatim tenuiter scissi & lente 
exsiccati, gr.j. 
Corall. rubr. gr. xij. 
Olibani, gr. vj. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis, quavis vespera ite- 
randus. 
S. Pulvis pacans, vesperi ante somnum sumendus. 
21.

71 Of a Powder. 
21. Pulvis cephalicus. 
♃. Cinnab. antimon. levigat. ℈j. 
Rad. valer. sylv. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. bis in dies cum haustu infusi Flor. Cha- 
momillœ sumendus. 
22. Pulvis stimulans & resolvens, ib. p. 43. 
ꝶ Ol. destillat. menth. 
Marjoran. 
Tanacet. aa gtt. iv. 
Sacch. alb. sicciss. ℥j. 
M. F. s. a. † Elæosaccharum, cui adde 
Rad. Z.Z. alb. 
Cort. magellanic. aa ℥B. 
S. Pulv. ut supra, &c. capiat ʒß. ter de die ex vino.
23. Pulvis pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm, ceti ℈j. 
Bals tolut. ℈ß. 
Flor. benz. gr. iv. 
Ol. anis. 
Hysop. aa gtt. j 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. pect. vel bechic. &c. in nebula vel haust. 
appropriat. sumend. 
F4 24.
† The Eleosacchara are not near so much in use with us, as 
among foreigners: tho' we do not know any substantial reason why 
they should not be more in use than they are. 

72 Of a Powder.
24. Tragea peptica in ventric. debil 
ꝶ. Spec. diagalang. ℥ß. 
Rad. gentian. 
Cort. winteran. 
Myrrh, rubrœ aa ʒj. 
Sem. coriandr. 
Rad. calam. arom. aa ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. ℥j.
M. F. pulvis, dandus in scatula. 
S. Tragea stomachica: de qua cochlear. ß. pani bis- 
cocto, vino Hispanico imbuto, inspersum capiat, post 
pastum. 
25. Pulvis restorativus. 
♃. Cam. viperar. sicc. ʒß. 
F. pulvis tenuis.
Pubv. &c. bis in dies sumendus cum haust. lactis 
assinini recentis. 
26. Pulvis corrohorans. 
♃. Cort. Peruv. elect. ℈ij. 
Cinnam. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
0l. cinnam. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haustful. vini rubri sumendus. 
27. Pulvis antacidus. 
ꝶ Lap. 69 ror. ppt. 
Cretœ. 
Conch. ostreor. calcin. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. zedoar. 
Nuc. myristic. aa ʒjß.  
M. F. pulv. ten. in scatula dand. 
S. Pulvis temperans. Sumatur, quantum apice cultri 
capi potest, acido infestante. 
28.

73 Of a Powder.
28. (1.) Pulvis absorbens albus. 
♃. Test. ostreor. calcinat. ʒij. 
Cret. alb. 
Sacch. alb. ad  ʒjß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Pulvis edulcorans, cujus capiat cochleam parvam 
in haust. caffe vel theœ solut. 
(2.) Alius–Ruber. 
♃. Coral. ruhr. 
Succin. ppt. aa  ʒjß. 
801. armen. ʒß. 
Cinab. antimon. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. viij. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Alius–Niger. 
♃. Lap. Hibernic. ʒij. 
Antimon. crud. 
Æthiop. miner. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. D. in scatula. 
S. Ut prior. 
29. Pulvis niger, nosocomii sancti Bartholomæi. 
♃. Æthiop. miner. 
Antimon. crud. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Capiatur j. hor. med. cum haustu aq. benedict. 
comp. Batean. 
30. Pulvis cardialgicus. 
(1.) ♃. Cretœ alb. pl. ℈j. 
Sal. absinth. ℈ß. 
M. F. pulvis ten. 
S. Capiatur cum hastu aq. calc. saccharo edulcorat.
(2.)

74 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius
♃. Corall. R. levigat. 
Cretœ alb. 
Oc. gro ror ppt. aa ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. alcohol. pro chart. ij. 
S. Ut prior. 
31. Pul vis ecbolicus, 
♃. Borac. ℈j. 
Castor. R. 
Croc. Ang. aa gr. vj. 
Ol. sabin. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Pulvis ad partum, in haustu julapii appropriati 
sumendus. 
32. Pulvis emmenagogus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myrrh. ℈j. 
Rubig. martis ℈ß. 
M. F. pulv. ten. 
S. Capiaiur bis in dies cum haustu infusi amari. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Rubig. martis ℈j. 
Cinnab. antimon. ℈ß. 
Spec. diamhrœ, gr. viij. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
33. Pulvis hystericus. 
(1.) ♃. Trochisc. de myr. gr. xv. 
Castor. gr. vj. 
Sal.succin. gr. iij. 
Camph. gr. ij. 
Ol. sabin. vel puleg. gtt. j. 
M. F. pulv. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. julapii appropriat. sumendus.
(2.)

75 Of a Powder. 
(2.) Alius 
♃. Sperm. ceti ʒß. 
Assœ fœt. gr. ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. j. 
Sacch. alb. ℈j. 
M. F. pulv. s. a. 
S. Ut prior. 
34. Pulvis astringens rubic. 
♃. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Croc. mart. astr. ℈j. 
Ter. Japon. ℈ß. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. ij.
M. F. pulv. pro chart. ij. 
S. Pulv. &c. in haust. vini rubri sumend. 
35. Pulvis nephriticus. 
♃. Test. ovor. calcinat. ʒjß. 
Sperm. ceti ʒj. 
Tereh. e chio coct. ℈ij. 
Sacch. alb. ʒj. 
M.F. pulv. ten. pro chart. iv. 
S. Pulv. ad calculum, &c. cum haustu saponacea hor. 
med. vel 4ta quaq; hor. sumend. super bibendo copiose 
de decoct. altheœ
36. Pulvis ad hœmorrhagiam. 
♃. Nitri purisicat. 
Trochisc. de carab. aa ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Pulv. &c. cum haustu julapii cretacei octavis 
horis sumendus. 
Of

76 Of a Bolus.
Of a BOLUS. 
§.127. A Bolus is a soft, cohesive, internal 
medicine, of a roundish figure, a 
little thicker or more consistent than honey, and 
limited in quantity to a morsel, or what may be 
easily swallowed at once: whence some call it 
buccella, a Morsel. 
§.128. The MATTER or ingredients which 
are admitted to enter this form (§.127.) are every 
thing that is fit for internal use, and is also capable 
of being reduced, either of itself or by mixture, 
to the considence beforemention’d (§.127.) So 
that this form may take in all 
1. Dry substances: which are effectual in a 
small dose, and suited to form the powder 
(§.110, & 111.) These are termed excipienda, 
or what are to be taken in by others; but 
alone, they are incapable of making up this 
form of medicine. 
2. Soft medicines: which are more or less te- 
nacious and consistent: as conserves, electu- 
aries, soft extracts, inspissated Juices, soft con- 
sections, thick balsoms, both native and arti- 
ficial, potable ointments, syrups, &c. which, 
are termed excipientia or receivers; because, be- 
ing mix’d with the former, they make up the 
consistence proper for a bole: and they have 
in some measure of themselves a natural fitness 
to make up this form. 
3. Liquids: which are of a small bulk in pro- 
portion to their Strength: as natural and arti- 
ficial liquid balsoms, oils, spirits, tinctures, es- 
sences, elixirs, &c. which being of themselves 
unfit for this form, are either receiv'd by the 
others (n° 1, 2.) or else they receive other 
more

77 of a Bolus. 
more consistent substances as accessory to the 
form. 
§.129. A proper Election of the several 
ingredients (§.128.) is directed by the following 
Considerations: 
1. The most commendable Qualities of a 
Bolus are, to be so consistent as to retain its 
form, and not run or spread flat by standing;
to be so soft as easily to give way to the action 
of the sauces and œsophagus in deglution; and 
to have the mixture of its several ingredients 
made uniform and equable. 
2. Hence, the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
and also the liquid (n° 3.) are of themselves 
not fit to make up this form; but they require 
the intervention of something soft and tenacious- 
(n° 2.) to cement or glue together the whole. 
3. Also the soft substances (§.128. n° 2.) 
do for the generality require to be incrassated 
by the Addition of some that are dry, in order 
to fit them for the formation of a bolus. Yet, 
some of them are susceptible of this form with- 
out any addition: as conserves, electuaries, and 
the thicker kind of inspissated juices. These 
may be therefore formed into simple boles, 
per §.62. 
4. Every ingredient shou’d be of such a dis- 
position, as to mix uniformly with each other 
in composition. 
5. Medicines which are viscid, sharp or acrid, 
or very unpleasant to the smell and taste, are 
much more suitable for this form, than that of 
a powder (§.111.); because they may be in this 
more concealed from those sensible organs. 
Whence, strong mercurials can enter no form 
more conveniently than this.
6. Such

78 Of a Bolus. 
6. Such as are fat and resinous, as balsoms, 
potable ointments, &c. should have their parts 
divided by grinding with sugar or something 
which is dry, that they may be the more easily 
dissolved and digested in the stomach. 
7. Fix’d and volatile alcaline Salts, and every 
thing else that suddenly exhales or else liquifies 
in the air, shou’d not enter the composition of 
boles which are to be kept some time: for by 
that means, the medicine will be much the 
worse in its form or consistence, as well as in- 
tended virtue. 
8. Nor are things which effervesce with each 
other, or easily ferment, fit to enter this form; 
unless the Bolus is to be taken soon after its 
composition. 
9. The number of ingredients for composing 
this form, should scarce ever exceed three or 
four, in a prescription. 
§.130. The more usual ORDER or method of 
placing the ingredients of this form in a pre- 
scription, is, to put the excipiens (§.128. n° 2.) 
first, as being determin’d in quantity; then, the 
excipienda or dry ingredients (ib. n° 1.); after- 
wards, the liquid Substances (ib. n° 3.); and last- 
ly, (if there be any) the excipiens whose quantity 
is left to be determin’d by the apothecary. 
§.131. The Dose (§.64.) of a bolus is ex- 
tended from one dram, to a dram and a half, or 
two drams; but the dose shou’d never be injudi- 
ciously increas’d beyond the last quantity, unless 
when the ingredients are very weighty in propor- 
tion to their bulk, and the patient happens to be 
a good taker of physic. But if the bolus should 
be made up of the lighter sort of ingredients, it 
ought not to exceed one dram. So that, when the 
proper and effectual dose of the ingredients ex-
ceeds

79 Of a Bolus. 
ceeds these bounds, it is more advisable to distri- 
bute the mass in several parcels or little boles, than 
to choak the patient with a great lump. Small- 
ness of bulk in a dose, as commendable in a pow- 
der (per §.113. n° 1.), is equally or more so in a 
bolus. We can hardly err in making the dose of 
this form too small, even tho' the bolus should not 
exceed a scruple. 
§.132. The GENERAL QUANTITY (§.64.) 
of this form, usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is most frequently but one dose or bolus, or 
two, but seldom more than three or four, unless 
when they are to be taken at very short intervals 
of time. For as they are always sent in separate 
Doses, portion’d out by the apothecary, they 
easily become either too dry and hard, or too 
moist and liquid, by long keeping. Therefore, 
upon multiplying the number of doses with the 
mass (§.131.) together, the physician will know 
how much the general quantity, to be prescribed 
at one time, ought to be. 
§.133. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients of this form, is determin’d from 
their particular virtues and consistences. Consult 
§.87. & 115. So that the same proportion does 
not obtain in all cases alike. For, 
1. If the soft Substances (§.128. n° 2. & 
§.129. n° 3.) which are of themselves fit to 
compose a bolus, are order’d alone in a pre- 
scription, the reciprocal proportion of each of 
them may be determin’d from the known suffi- 
cient dose (§.66.), and the dose of the bolus 
(§.131.). Fur the consistence in that case, has 
no influence to limit the proportion. 
2. When the dry ingredients (§.128. n° 1.) 
are to enter this form, they may be order’d for 
one dose in the quantity of ʒß. ℈ij, or, at most, 
ʒj. But the excipientia or soft substances (§.128.  
n° 2.)


80 Of a Bolus. 
n° 2.) require to be order’d in a different pro- 
portion, according as they are more or less 
consistent. As 
(1.) Conserves (which are the most frequent 
ingredients of this form), electuaries, honey, 
thick balsoms, &c. are order’d from ℈ij, to 
ʒj.or ʒjß. 
(2.) Inspissated juices, pulps, and soft con- 
sections are order’d from ʒß. to ʒj. or ℈jv. 
(3.) To make up a determinate quantity of the 
dry ingredients into this form, so much the less 
is required of the soft substances, as these latter 
are more liquid. 
3. Hence it appears, that when the quantity 
of dry ingredients is but small, it will be most
convenient to order the excipiens or soft substance 
to be of the more consistent kind: but when the 
quantity of the first is large, the consistence of 
the latter should be proportionably thinner or 
more liquid: that the dose (§.131.) of the 
bolus may not be too much enlarged. 
4. But if to the preceeding (n° 2.), liquids 
(§.128. n° 3.) are also added, they should not 
enter in a larger quantity than from gutt. j, to 
ij, iij, or at most, jv, for each bolus. And then 
the quantity of soft excipients must be propor- 
tionably diminished. 
5. Otherwise, the dry and liquid substances 
(n° 2. 4.) only may be order’d in a determi- 
nate quantity, and the quantity of the soft sub- 
stances or excipients may be left to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary, writing only q. s. (per 
§.58. n° 8 (7.)). But this method cannot be 
comply’d with, when the effectual dose of these 
requires an exactness of limitation. 
6. But very often, when the quantity of the 
dry ingredients is pretty large, and its preced- 
ing excipiens or soft substance is very consistent, 
or


81 Of a Bolus. 
or thick and small in quantity, so that we may 
thence doubt whether they will make the bolus 
of a proper consistence and pliability; in that 
case we may still add a secondary and more li- 
quid substance, e.g. syr. q. s. &c. 
7. On the contrary, when we foresee that the 
consistence of the bolus will be too thin or soft 
(§.129. n° 1.), it is usual to adjoin q. s. Sac- 
charic pulv. liquorit. &c. which more especially 
holds good When this form is to be made up of 
simple terebinthinates, &c. 
§.134. The Subscription or direction to 
the apothecary for this form may be thus: M. F. 
bolus or boli n°. ij, iij, &c. And it may be some- 
times necessary to enjoin the same caution, with 
regard to the division of this form, with that men- 
tioned concerning powders (§.118.), which may 
be thence repeated. Sometimes we also add in the 
prescription, either for ornament to the bolus, or 
pleasantness of taking, auri folio, or nebula obvol-
vatur, or exhibeatur cum nebula. Consult §. 119. 
The receptacles for conveying this form to the pa- 
tients, are generally either gallipots or proper pa- 
pers; for mentioning which in a prescription, 
there is hardly ever any occasion. 
§.135. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient, with regard to this form, may be easily 
understood from what has been already said upon 
that head (at §.120, to 125.), For a vehicle, some 
like a nebula or water best, others prefer some li- 
quor, wherein they may first dissolve the bolus. 
It is also generally of service to order some proper 
liquid to be drank after the bolus, especially if we 
have any reason to fear that it will meet with a 
difficult dissolution in the stomach; which is to be 
more particularly observed with regard to terebin-
thinate substances, and others of the like kind.
G §.136.

82 Boles.
§. 136. The Use of this form, a bolus, is pret- 
ty much the same with that of the powder (§.125.); 
but it is not so frequently in practice * as the pow- 
der: for boles, possessing in some measure the na- 
ture of a continuous and solid body, do frequently 
not act so speedily as we would desire (§.135.). 
We often use this form for variety, or to gratify those 
who are better pleased with a bolus than a powder. 
§.137. Take the following as specimens of this 
form: which may be adapted, with a small varia- 
tion according to particular circumstances, to most 
cases which occur in practice. 
1. Bolus emeticus pro adulto. 
(1.) ꝶ Vitrioli albi, gr. xxv. 
Elect, lenit. q. s. 
M, F. bolus, detur cum nebula. 
S. Bolus emeticus ex pauxillo cerevisiœ aut infusi 
theœ viridis hariendus: post quamlibet vomitio- 
nem superbibantur cyathi aliquot infusi ejusdem 
tepidi.  
Bolus emet. communis pro adulto. 
(2.) ♃. Rad. ipecacuan. pulv. ʒß. 
Syr. flor. persicor. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut prior. 
(3.) Bolus emet.—salinus—
♃. Sal. vel gillœ vitriol. ℈j. 
Tarari emet. gr. ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. q. s. 
M. F: bolus, in nebula dandus. 
S. Ut prior. 2. 
* This form is seldom used among us but in acute cases, when 
we exhibit emetics, cathartics, opiates, and strong alexipharmics, 
whose dose require to be well ascertain'd; tho' it may be used also 
in some chronical cases, when we are afraid a patient will fall 
short of his proper dose, in taking an electuary. 


83 Boles. 
2. Bolus purgans communis. 
(1.) ♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Calomelan. gr. xv. 
Ol. essent. sassafr. gtt. ij.
Elect. lenit. q. s. 
M. F. bolus deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus 
(2.)
♃. Scammm. gr. xij.
Cremor. tartar. 
Calamelan. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de rhabarb. q. s. 
M. F. bol. deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)
♃. Rad. rhœi opt. pulv. ℈j. 
Trochisc. Alhandal. gr. vij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Bolus leniens. 
♃. Rad. jalap. 
Rhei pulv. 
Tereb. venet. coct. pulv. aa ℈B. 
Nitri purificat. gr. xv. 
Elect. lenitiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus.
S. Bol. &c. quotidie repetendus. 
G2 4.


84 Boles.
4. Bolus hydragogus. 
♃. Rad. jalap, pulv. ℈j. 
Gutt. gamb. ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. iij. 
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum haustu cerivisiœ recentis calidœ
sumendus. 
5. Bolus rheumaticus catharticus. 
♃. Rad. jalap. ℈j. 
Gum. guaiac. 
Calomelan. aa ℈ß. 
Ol. junip. chem. gtt. ij. 
Syr. de ros. solutiv. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane cum regimine sumendus. 
6. Bolus diuret. vel è cantharid. 
♃. Pulv. cantharid. gr. vj. 
Gamph. gr. iv. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° ij. 
Extract. thebaic. gr. ss. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, deaurandus. 
S. Bol. &c. statim sumendus, superbibendo frequenter 
de decocto hordii, radicum & sumitat. althœœ sac- 
charo pauco dulcificato. 
7. Bolus alexipharm. vel sudorif. 
(1.) ♃.Sal. vol. C. C. 
Camph. aa gr. v. 
Amigd. dulc. excortic. n° j. 
Confect. mitbrid. ℈ij. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu seri vinosi calidi sumendus.
(2.) 


85 Boles.
(2.) Bolus alexipharm. vel card. 
♃. Rad. serp. virg. 
Contrayerv. aa ℈ß. 
Flor. benzoin, gr. iv. 
Ol. effent. chamom. gtt. j. 
Philon. Roman. ℈j. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Ut prior. 
8. Bolus cardiacus flav. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. flav. aurant. ʒß. 
Lap. contrayerv. ℈j. 
Croc. angl. gr. vij. 
Syr. croc. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu julapii vel seri vinosi sumend. 
(2.) Bolus cardiacus rub. 
♃. Confect. alkerm. ℈ij. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℈j. 
Coccinell. pulv. ℈ß. 
Spir. vitriol. gtt. iij. 
M. F. bol.
S. Bol. &c. cum haust. apozemat. aquos. acidulat. 
exhibendus. 
9. Bolus febrifug. 
♃. Pulv. cort. elect. ℈j. 
Resin. ejusd. gr. vj. 
Cons. abs. pont. ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. j. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S.Bol. &c. 4ta vel 6ta quaque bora repetendus.
G3 10.

86 Boles. 
10. Bolus anodynus vel paregor. 
♃. Philon. Roman. ℈j. ad ʒß. 
F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. mane, vel H. S. sumendus, & pro re 
nata repetend. 
11. Bolus antihystericus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Cons. nut. 3j. 
Troch. de myrrh. ℈ß. 
Ol. stillat. succin. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, auri folio obducendus.
S. Bolus pacans cum aquœ pulegii cyatho sumendus. 
(2.)
♃. Gum. guaiac. 
Cinnab. antimon. 
Philon. Roman. aa ℈j. 
Ext. gentian. gr. vj. 
Syr. chalib. vel hyster. q. s. 
M. F. bol. 
S. Ut prior. 
12. Boli balsamici. 
Vid. Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. 2. obs. 2. 
ꝶ. Tereb. e chio ʒij. 
Pulv. liquorit. q. s. 
M. F. boli, n° ij. 
S. boli nervini, quorum alter mane, alter vesperi ex 
vitello ovi recentis sumatur, superbibendo singulis 
aq. lact. alexiter. ℥ij. 
13.

87 Boles. 
13. Boli sialogogi. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros rub. ʒß. 
Mercutii dulc. trit. gr. ix. 
M. F. bolus: cui similes duo alii seorsim 
confecti, exhibeantur cum totidem nebulis. 
S. Boli aperientes, quorum unum singulis quadrihoriis 
capiat œger, corpore prius ptisana appropriata bene 
impleto.  
14. Bolus scilliticus. 
♃. Pulp. scill. rec. ℈j. 
Ext. gentian, gr. vj. 
Spec. diamhr. ℈B. 
Ol. juniper. essent. gtt. ij. 
M. F. bolus, contundendo. 
S. Bol, &c. bis in dies cum nebula sumendus, super- 
bibendo haustum julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
15. Bolus paregoricus refrigerans. 
♃. Spec. diatrag. frig. recent. ʒß. 
Sperm. cet. ℈j. 
Nitri purifcat. ℈ß. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. ß. 
Syr. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. 6ta quaque hora sumendus, cum haustu 
julapii vel apozemat. appropriat. 
16. Bolus alterans. 
♃. Cinnabar. antimon. ℈j.
Pulv. R. ari. rec. 
Gum. guaiac. aa ℈ß. 
Syr. cort. aurant. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. bis in dies h. m. sumendus, cum haustu 
aq. benidict. C. Batean. 
F4 17.

88 Boles. 
17. Bolus pectoralis. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℈j. 
Rad. ir. Florent. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi chemic. gtt. j. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. bolus, &c. 
18. Bolus ad asthma nervosuni. 
♃. Cinnabar, nativ. ℈j. 
Cort. peruv. opt. pulv. ℈ß. 
Syr. pœon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bis in dies sumendus cum haustu infusi amari S. 
19. Bolus ad diarrhœam. 
♃. Pulv. rhei. torrifact. ℈ß. 
Spec. pro. confect. fracast. ℈j. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. gtt. ij. 
Syr. e mecon. q. s. 
M. F. bolus. 
S. Bol. &c. cum haustu decocti albi sumendus. 
Of an ELECTUARY. 
§.138. AN ELECTUARY is a soft, internal 
medicine: pretty much resembling 
the consistence of a bolus (§.127.), but not 
quite so thick; being prescribed for by more doses 
than one at a time, which are not to be portion’d 
out by the apothecary. This form sometimes, 
(tho’ seldom) comes under the denomination of
mistura; but is frequently term’d (among foreign 
physicians), from its preserv’d or candy’d ingre- 
dients, conditum: it is also sometimes named by 
them,

89 Of an Electuary. 
them, opiatum, from the opium in its composi- 
tion. 
§.139. The Matter or ingredients admitted 
to enter the composition of this form, are the same 
with those of the bolus (§.128.) If any have the 
preference, they are conserves; which are gene- 
rally taken into the composition of electuaries, 
more constantly and largely than the other sub- 
stances. 
§.140. The CHOICE of the most suitable in- 
gredients for this form, is also pretty much the 
same with that of the bolus, preceding (§.129.): 
yet the following considerations relate more parti- 
cularly to the Electuary. 
1. Such substances should more especially be 
kept out of this form, as are very unpleasant in 
smell, take and colour; by reason, electuaries 
are of constant and frequent use. 
2. Such things as liquify, exhale, corrupt, 
effervesce or easily ferment and turn sower, are 
the less suitable for this form, as the composi- 
tion is required to be pretty soft, and to keep 
some time. 
3. For the same reasons (n° 2.), the com- 
mixture of ingredients, in an electuary, should 
be perform’d with the greatest accuracy and ex- 
actness; the trituration of brittle substances shou’d 
be continu’d till they are exceeding fine, and the  
mixation of such as are fat or oily, resinous or 
terebinthinate, should be effected by yolks of 
eggs; left they should separate, subside or e- 
merge, by standing the length of time which 
this form frequently requires to be taken in. 
4. Hence also, if substances which are very 
heavy in proportion to their bulk, are to enter 
the composition of an electuary, its consistence  
is


90 Of an Electuary. 
is then required to be a little thicker than other- 
wise. 
5. Therefore the drastic or strongest purga- 
tives, with the preparations of mercury and 
other metals, are not suitable for an electuary; 
for, by an inequality of their mixture, by their 
precipitation in keeping, or by a careless dosing 
or partition ot the electuary in taking, which 
is usually left to be done by the patient or his- 
attendants; the use of such ingredients in this 
form might prove of dangerous consequence. 
6. An electuary will indeed admit of a few 
more ingredients to enter its composition, than 
a bolus (§.129. n° 9.): yet it should not be 
over-charg’d, (per §.29.). 
7. The covering this form with leaf-gold or 
silver, and sometimes intermixing them in 
the substance of an electuary, for the sake of 
ornament, or to please the patient; may be or- 
der’d at discretion by them who approve there- 
of, being at the same time mindful of the 
Rules §.85. n° 5. 
§.141. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form in a prescription, is not much diffe- 
rent from that used in writing for a bolus (§ 130.): 
the soft substances whose weight are determin’d, 
should take the first place; then, the dry ingre- 
dients; afterwards, the liquid; and lastly, we 
are to place those, whose weight or quantity is to 
be ascertain’d by the apothecary, and are usually 
wrote for under q. s. or quantum sufficit. Hence 
it appears, that when the soft substances are not 
to be ascertained in their weights by the physician 
in his prefcription; in that case, they must give 
place to the dry ingredients, which may then be 
placed first. 
§.142.

91 Of an Electuary.
§.142. The DOSE of an electuary shou'd not 
without necessity be made larger than that of a bo- 
lus (§.131.). It is seldom determin'd by weight, 
but is generally taken by bulk, as by the size of 
filberts or hazle-nuts, wall-nuts, chesnuts, and 
nutmegs, or as much as can be taken upon the 
point of a knife, spoon, &c. Sometimes the 
whole electuary is order'd to be taken at so many 
times, v. g. 3, 4, 5, &c. at certain intervals of 
time. But in those cases we must also be mindful 
that those parts or portions are not larger than 
can be conveniently swallowed at once. 
§.143. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed for at one time, is scarce 
ever less than ℥j, and very seldom exceeds ℥jv, 
or five at most: according as indications require a 
more of less frequent or continued taking of the 
electuary. When this form is order'd in very large 
quantities, or is to be kept a good while, it fre- 
quently grows either too thick and dry, too thin 
and soft, or is otherwise corrupted and spoiled * 
§.144. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is something diffe- 
rent from that of the bolus (§.133.), by reason an 
electuary is of a softer consistence (per §.138.); 
this variation of proportion, may however be li- 
mited by the following considerations. 
1. As the soft Substances or excipientia (§.128. 
n° 2.) are more or less consistent, they will 
require
* It is almost become a rule among us, that the general quan- 
tity of an extemporaneous electuary should seldom exceed ʒ iij. 
and thereabout ℥jss of conserve, ʒij. of powders, with 
a q. s. of syrup, amount to; tho' cinnabar, and some of the hea- 
vier things will not take up so much syrup. And if this rule, 
as to quantity, be not observed by the prescriber, but more he 
order'd, it is a common thing for the compounder to do it for him, 
by proportioning the materials suitable thereto; as by making up 
half, or a third of what is directed.

92 Of an Electuary. 
require a greater or less proportion of the dry 
excipienda (§.128. n° 1.). Hence, supppose the 
dry ingredients or excipienda to be ʒj. if the 
soft excipientiœ are of the thicker kind, as con- 
serves, officinal electuaries, &c. it will be ne- 
cessary to take of them ʒj: if they are thinner, 
as inspissated juices, pulps, honeys, soft con- 
fections, &c. we may take ʒiij: if more liquid, 
as syrups, ʒij will be sufficient. (See §.133. 
n° 2.) 
2. If therefore the soft excipientia of this 
form, are of different consistences, it will be no 
difficult matter to determine the mutual propor- 
tion of each {per. n° 1.). And it is customary, 
in prescribing this form, to limit only the thick- 
er substances by weight, and to subjoin those 
which are more fluid under the title of q. s. or 
quantum sufficit (per §.133. n° 6.) 
3. If ingredients be added to this form which 
are merely liquid ( per §.128. n° 3.), the mu- 
tual proportion of these may be learned from 
what has been said (at §.133. n° 4.), compar’d 
with the dose, and general quantity of the. elec- 
tuary to be prescribed, (per. §.142. and 143). 
The quantity of soft excipients must be then 
proportiorubly diminish'd, or that of the dry in- 
gredients must be accordingly increased. 
4. One or two leaves of gold or silver will 
be generally sufficient to decorate the whole 
mass of the electuary (§.143.). 
5. Sometimes the patient chuses to have the 
electuary a little softer than usual, that it may 
be the more easily diluted and taken in some li- 
quor, We, may easily obtain this point, by 
in larging the quantity of fluid excipients(n° 1, 2.). 
and by giving notice in the subscription, when 
the quantity of those ingredients is left to be de- 
termin'd by the Apothecary. 
6. What

93 Of an Electuary.  
6. What may be said further in this place, 
relating to the mutual proportion of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be seen at §.133. 
n° 3. 5. 6. 7. to which we therefore refer. 
§.145. The usual SUBSCRIPTION, or direction 
to the apothecary for this form, is no more than 
M. or M. F. electuarium vel conditum; adding 
molle, when it is to be of a thinner consistence, 
(per §.144. n° 5.). The common receptacle to re- 
tain and convey this form to the patient, is, a 
white, earthen gallypot; of which, there will be 
no occasion to make mention in a prescription. 
§.146. The Signature or direction to the 
patient proper for this form, is sufficiently appa- 
rent from §.135. 138. & 142. Sometimes it may 
be proper to advise the patient in this place, to 
stir up the electuary before taking; especially if it 
contains ingredients of a great specific gravity, or 
which are very apt to separate from each other. 
§.147. The use of this form is pretty much 
like that of the bolus (§.136.) *; but an electuary 
is not so suitable for the intention of an hysteric, 
by reason of the great quantity of sugar which usu- 
ally enters its composition. 
§. 148. Take the following Specimens of this 
form. 
1.
* There is however an obvious difference between the use of 
this form and that of a bolus: for an electuary is mostly used in 
chronical cases, and consist chiefly of alteratives; but it is not so 
with a bolus. See §.136.—Yet it is allowable, in case of po- 
verty, to save the patient from the expence of boles by ordering an 
electuary; even in acute cases, and where the electuary will co- 
incide with the proper nature of a bolus; if so be we can rely 
on the exact dosing thereof. 

94 Electuaries.
1. Elect. purgans antiphlogist. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 230. 
ꝶ. Tamarind, elect. pulp. ℥ij. 
Crystall. tartar. minutim. pulv. ʒij. 
M. 
S. Capiat omni 1/8 horœ ʒj. donec commode purgetur. 
2. Elect. solutivum. 
♃. Pulp. cash. rec. 
Fruct. tamarind. aa ℥jß.  
Pulv. rhei  ʒjß. 
Cremor. tartar. ʒvj. 
Tartar. vitriolat. ʒß.  
Syr. violar. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem nucis castan.
mane & vesperi, vel ter in die. 
3. Electuar. aromaticum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Limon. aa ℥ß. 
Rad. Z. Z. & N. M cond. aa ʒiij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Syr. cinnamomi q. s. ad consist. debit. 
M. F elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. avellan. vel mos- 
chatœ subinde: vel ter in die, paulo ante pastum. 
4. Elect. stipticum incrassans. 
ꝶ Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ij.
Mivæ cydonior. ℥j. 
Flor. granat. ʒjß. 
Boli armen. lœvig. ʒij. 
Lap. Hœmatit. ppt. ʒj. 
M. F. conditum. D. ad fictile album. 
S. Elect. astringens, de quo ter vel. quater de die ad 
castaneœ magnitudinem capiatur. 
5.


95 Electuaries. 
5. Elect. astringens. 
♃. Confect. fracastor. 
Cons. ros. rubr. aa ℥ß. 
Sang. dracon. ʒiij. 
Rad. rhei terrifact. ʒj. 
Ter. Japon. ℈j. 
Sur. papav. errat. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat Q. N. M. minoris ter 
in die. 
6. Elect. alterans 
♃. Cons. fruct. cynosbat. ℥jß.
Cinmb. antimon. ʒiij. 
Gum. Guaiac. ʒij. 
Ol. sassaf. in sacch. q. s. solut. gtt. vj. 
Syr. de 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat quant. nuc. mosc. mane & 
vesperi cum haustu cerivisœ medicat. calid. 
7. Elect. balsamicum. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbator. ʒx. 
Carn. viperin. pulv. ℥j. 
Rad. ering. cond. ʒij. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj.
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiatur q. n. m. 4ta quaque 
hora. 
8.


96 Electuaries. 
8. Elect. cephalicum. 
♃. Cons. flor. caryophil. ℥j.  
Anth. ℥ß. 
Rad. valer. sylv. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒijß. 
Succ. cherm. q. s.  
M. F. elect.
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. hor. med. cum 
haustul. julapii appropriate. 
M. F. eleft. 
9. Elect. pectorale. 
♃. Trochisc. bec. alb. ʒx. 
Rad. ering. condit. ʒij. 
Ir. florent. ʒj. 
Ol. essent. anis. gtt. vj. 
Syr. balsamic. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus capiat q. n. m. urgente tusse. 
10. Elect. excitans in febrili languore. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 119. 
ꝶ. Confect. alkerm. ʒj. 
Zinzib. condit. ʒvj. 
Rad. contrayerv. 
Serpentar. virgin, aa ʒj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
Ut. F. elect. 
S. capiatur 3ß. omni quadrihorio. 
11.

97 Electuaries. 
11. Elect. refrig., acidulat. 
(1.) ♃. Cons. berher. ℥ij. 
Ros. rub. ℥ß.
Ol. sulph. q. s. ad grat. acidit. 
Syr. diamar. q. s. ut. 
F. elect. molle. 
S. Elect. cardiac. cujus in orem solvatur q. n. avel-
lan. subinde. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. ros. rub. ℥ß. 
Pulp. tamarind. ʒiij. 
Sp. vitriol, ad grat. acid. 
Succ. cherm. q. s. ad debit. consist. 
M. F. elect. molle. 
S. Ut supra. 
12. Elect. antifebrile. 
ꝶ. Cort. Peruvian, opt. ℥ß. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒij. 
Syr. 5. Tad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Sumatur tempore apyrexias, omni bihorio octava 
pars totius, ex vino. 
13. Elect, ad strumas. 
♃. Cons. cochlear. hort. 
Æthiop. min. 
Cinnab. antimon. aa ʒvj. 
Syr. 5. rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. cujus sumat q. n. m. ter de die, cum 
hanstu appropriat. liquor. 
H 14.

98 Electuaries. 
14. Elect. stomachicum. 
♃. Cons. flav. aurant. 
Absinth. Rom. aa ʒvj. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒij. 
Spec. diamb. 
Menth. crisp. aa ʒj. 
Syr. e cond. R. Z. Z. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. sumat q. n. m. ter vel quater de die
cum haustul. vini rub. 
15. Elect. deobstruens. 
(1.) ♃. Conf. absinth. Rom. ʒj. 
Ext. rad. gentian. ʒj. 
Sapon. venet. 
Millep. viv. aa ʒiij.
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiat q. n. m. ter in die. 
(2.) ♃. Cons. cochl. hort. ℥j. 
Pulp. scillit. torrifact. ℥ß. 
Pulv. ari rec. ʒjß.
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
Syr. 5 rad. aper. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Capiatur ut supra, cum haust. vin. millepid.
16. Elect. chalibiatum. 
♃. Cons. absinth. Rom. ʒjß. 
Rubigin. mart. ʒiij. 
Spec, diamhr. ʒjß. 
Cinnah. antimon. ʒj. 
Syr. chalib. q. s. 
M. F. elect. 
S. Elect. &c. de quo capiat q. n. m. ter de die, cum
haustu julapii appropriat. 
Of

99 Of a Linctus. 
Of a LINCTUS 
§.149. A LINCTUS (call’d by the Greeks 
eclegma, and by the Arabians Loch, 
or Lohock) is a soft, internal medicine, thinner 
than the electuary (§.138.), but not so apt to run 
or spread as a thick syrup, which it very much re- 
sembles; being composed of the softer and more 
viscid kind of ingredients, which are to be, at se- 
parate times licked up by the tongue, retained in 
the mouth, and afterwards swallowed as they gra- 
dually dissolve there. 
§.150. The MATTER or ingredients fit to 
compose this form of medicine, is pretty much the 
same with what enters the composition of the elec- 
tuary (§.139.), or bolus (§.128.). It also takes 
in officinal lohochs, sweet oils made by expression, 
mucilages, the yolks of eggs, and sometimes dis- 
tilled waters. 
§.151. For the Choice of ingredients most 
suitable for this form, we are to observe. 
1. If any of the dry and solid substances 
(§.128. n° 1) are to  enter the composition of 
this form, they are required to be ground ex- 
ceeding fine, or to be easily dissolvable; that 
they may not injure the softness and uniformity 
proper to a linctus: to prevent which, such 
things are generally left intirely out of this form. 
2. It is upon the same account that most con- 
serves and candied simples are seldom permitted 
to enter the composition of a linctus, unless they 
have been first pulped thro’ a strainer, which 
should never be omitted in compounding for 
nice patients. 
3. The very strongest medicines, cannot be 
safely admitted into this form because they so
H2 easily

100 Of a Linctus.
easily separate, precipitate or emerge by stand- 
ing in a linctus, whose dose is at the same time 
too uncertain for such things, being not deter- 
mined with exactness by weight; so that the 
effects of such medicines could never be depend- 
ed on in this form. But as a linctus is not fitted 
for such ingredients, our indications never call 
for them in that form. 
4. Acrimonious ingredients, and such as are 
unpleasant to the smell and tast, require to be 
more cautiously avoided in this form than any 
other; for as a linctus stays so long in the mouth, 
as it is swallowed so slowly, such things would 
nauseate the patient, and render the medicine 
very difficult to be taken. 
5. As oily and mucilaginous substances are 
very frequently prescribed in this form, we 
should be the more careful that they are not 
rancid or otherwise corrupted: an ill quality 
which they readily acquire by long standing in 
the shops.  
6. It is in the general very proper to beat up 
oily substances with the yolk of an egg; to which 
may be afterwards added, sugar, honey, and 
the compositions made up with these. 
7. The number of ingredients admitted into 
this form in a prescription, is the same with 
that of a bolus §.129. n° 9. 
§.152. For the ORDER in which the several 
ingredients of this form are to be placed in a pre- 
scription, there is hardly any constant one observ’d. 
Such things as serve to prepare and mix ingredients 
which are difficultly soluble (per §.151. n° 6.), 
should be placed next to each other; but for the 
rest, they may be placed by the rules at §.57. 
n° 2, 3, 5.
§.153. 

101 Of a Linctus. 
§.153. The Dose of a linctus is seldom ascer- 
tained by weight; bat when it is, it should not 
exceed ℥ß. The more usual method of dosing this 
form, is, by the measure of a large, eating, or 
small, tea-spoon, or as much as can be taken up by 
a bruised liquorish stick *. 
§.154. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, which is usually sent to the patient at one 
time, is nearly the same with that of an electuary 
(§.132.); hardly ever exceeding ℥vj †. unless 
there should be a speedy consumption of the me- 
dicine from the very frequent repetition of its use. 
The great inclination of the softer saccharine com- 
positions to ferment, the natural aptitude of ingre- 
dients which are oily or mucilaginous to turn rank 
and corrupt, and more especially great heat of 
weather, do each forbid preferibing this form in 
large quantities. 
§.155. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingredients which are to make up this form, is 
determin’d from a previous knowledge of the con- 
sidence of each ingredient, and from considering 
also the considence (§.149.) proper to a linctus 
itself. Hence 
1. A linctus may be compounded in almost 
any proportion of Ingredients, whose consistence 
is much the same with that of the form itself: 
such are officinal lohocks, honey, cream, yolks 
of eggs, soft confections, syrups, mucilages, 
expressed oils, and the like viscid substances. 
The medicinal virtues of each ingredient, their 
price and other circumstances (mention’d §.66. 
n° 1. to 14.) may also have some influence in 
limiting their proportion. Saponaceous sub- 
H3 stances
* A method of taking now in difuse with us. 
† The quantity of a linctus order'd at one time among us, is 
seldom more than half this Quantity. 

102 Of a Linctus. 
stances may be order’d in a quantity sufficient 
to reduce such as are oily (per §.151. n° 6.) 
The yolks of eggs should be three times as much 
as the oil, &c. but honey or sugar must enter 
in a larger quantity. 
2. Conserves, electuaries, and pulps, require 
to be diluted with almost three times their quan- 
tity of syrup; but dry substances require eight 
times as much syrup: from whence we may per- 
ceive the proportion of each kind of ingredients. 
But when the solid parts of dry substances, or 
of conferves, are to be pulped thro' a strainer 
(per §.151. n° 2.), a less quantity of syrup 
will suffice. 
3. Distilled oils, liquid balsoms, elixirs, es- 
sences, tinctures, spirits, and the like, which 
are very strong, should enter a linctus (as in an 
electuary §.144. n° 3.) in but a very small quan- 
tity, so that there will be hardly any occasion to 
change the proportion of the rest of the ingre- 
dients upon their account. 
4. Distilled waters may happen to over-dilute 
the consistence proper to this form, if they are 
order’d in a certain quantity, and therefore it is 
best to leave the quantity of them to be deter- 
mined at the discretion of the apothecary. 
Upon the same account, the quantity of syrup 
is also frequently order’d by q. s. When the 
consistence of a linctus happens to be too thin, 
it may be helped by a q. s. sacchar. alb. 
5. The degree of consistence (§.149.) is 
however not so ablolutely proper to and inse- 
parable from a linctus, but that it may frequent- 
ly be made a little thicker or thinner than what 
is there mentioned: whence we learn, that the 
rules now deliver’d for proportioning the ingre- 
dients of this form, are not absolutely invio- 
lable. If we have any reason to fear a Separa- 
tion


103 Of a Linctus.
tion or emersion of the oily parts, it is a suffi- 
cient authority to make the consistence of a 
linctus a little thicker than ordinary. 
§.156. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary, concerning the composition of this 
form, is by the physician order’d M. F. linctus. 
adding per setaceum trajeciendus, when it is to be 
passed thro’ a sieve or strainer. When the ingre- 
dients are not inclined to mix uniformly together, 
it may be proper for him to advise the apothecary 
to let them be beat up well together for a good 
while. The common receptacle for a linctus, is 
a gallypot, or a wide-mouth’d phial, which may 
be either added or omitted in a prescription. Some- 
times the dose is determin’d by a scraped liquorish 
stick *, bruised at one end, which being dipped 
in the linctus, is afterwards cleared by licking it 
off. The subscription therefore concludes detur ad 
fictile cum bacillo liquoritiœ. 
§.157. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient concerning the taking of a linctus, may 
be deduced from what has been said under that 
head (§.60.) in general, and from (§.120. 121. 
122. 146.): it imports at least that a certain quan- 
tity (§.153.) the linctus is to be taken conti- 
nually or at certain intervals, to lie in the mouth 
'till it gradually dissolves there, and to be after- 
wards swallowed. If we suspect there will be a Se- 
paration or inequality of parts by its standing, it 
may be proper to order the medicine to be stirred 
about before any of it be taken. 
§.158. The USE of this form is only in dis- 
orders which infest the internal parts of the mouth, 
fauces, œsophagus, larynx, trachea and bronchia: 
* This method of taking a linctus, by a liquorish-stick, is of late 
rejected among us, as being more disagreeable, unsightly, and less 
exact than the use of a tea-spoon. 
H4 whence 


104 Linctus’s. 
whence lohocks are frequently order’d in apthæ, 
coughs, peripneumonis, phthisis, &c. to answer 
the intention of softening, healing, astringing, 
&c; for it is very rare that a linctus is order’d in 
any other diseases or intentions. 
§.159. Specimens of this form. 
1. Linctus communis. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥j. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥ij. 
Spt. vitriol, q. s. ad grat. acid. 
M. exactissime, F. linctus. 
S. Linct. &c. cujus capiat quantitatem cochleœ mi- 
noris subinde. 
2. Linctus ad sputa suppresa in peripneum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 148. 
ꝶ Ol. amigd. dulc. rec. ℥jß.
Syr. violar. 
Mell. virgin. 
Vitell. ov. recent. aa ℥ß. 
M. accurate. 
S. Lingat. unc. ß. omni hord, donec sputa redeant.  
3. Lindus pectoralis niger. 
(1.) ♃. Succ. Hispan. ʒj.
Ext. R. liquor it. angl. ʒij. 
Ol. sem. lin. rec. frig. ext. ʒvj. 
Hysop. distillat. gtt. iv. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Linct. &c. ut prior sumendus. 
(2.)


105 Linctus's. 
(2.) Lintus pectoralis albus. 
♃. Trochisc. bech. alb. ʒiij. 
Sperm. ceti. ʒjß. 
Ol. sem. sinap. ʒx. 
Vitel. ov. rec. n° j. 
Syr. balsamic. ℥ijß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
(3.)—ruber. 
♃. Cons. fr. cynosbat. ʒiij. 
Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. bals. tolut. 
Gum. benz. aa gtt. xx. 
Ol. chem. anis. gtt. iij. 
Syr. papav. errat. ʒjß. 
M. F. linct. 
S. Ut supra. 
4. Linct. ad partes aphthis delapsis excoriatas. 
H. Boerh. p. 170. 
ꝶ Syr. papav. alb. 
Cremor. lact. dulc. aa ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n° ij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. F. linctus. 
S. Hujus pauxillum ore assiduo contineat. 
5.


106 Pills.
5. Linctus tussim leniens. 
ꝶ. Loho. sani & experti. 
Syr. diacod. 
Mucilag. rad. alth. aq. ros. ext. aa ℥j. 
Spermat. cet. vit. ov. solut ʒj. 
Sacch. crystall. q. s. 
M. F. linct. detur in fictili cum baculo 
S. Lambat. sæpius, cum tustis urget. 
liquoritiæ. 
6. Linctus incrassans Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. 
Syr. violar. 
de mecon. aa ℥j. 
Sem. papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Contusis simul, & per setaceum trajectis, adde 
Ol. nuc. mossch. expr. gtt. vj. 
F. eclegma. 
S. Ut supra. 
Of PILLS
§.160. A Pill (the catapotium or Kαlαπoπov
of the Greeks) is a small, dry or solid, 
internal medicine; of a globular figure: made up 
of thick and cohesive substances, so as to be flex- 
ible, or give way to a small pressure. 
§.161. The MATTER or ingredients allowed 
to enter this form, is, every thing fit for internal 
use, which is capable of being brought, either of 
itself or by mixture, to the due consistence (§.160.) 
of a pill. So that in the general, we may admit 
all


107 Of Pills. 
all those substances into this form, which are enu- 
merated at §.110. 
§. 162. But a CHOICE of these several ingre- 
dients is necessary, in order to maintain the re- 
quisite cohesion, smallness of dose, and proper fi- 
gure of this kind of medicine: in order to which, 
1. Some ingredients are termed excipientiay 
others excipienda. (see §.86. 128.) Both which, 
tho’ they are the principal parts of the form, 
are yet frequently of such a texture, that they 
cannot be conveniently made into a mass of 
pills alone, without the addition of something 
accessory. 
2. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and co- 
hesive; as gums, resins, gum-resins, solid ex- 
trads, inspissated juices, officinal masses for 
pills, hard sopes, the stronger fort of troches, 
&c. or (2.) dry and brittle, or fit for pulveri- 
sation, whether they be animal, vegitable, or 
mineral substances. 
3. The first kind of these ingredients are the 
most suitable and frequent in use for this form. 
Such chiefly of the latter or brittle kind are ad- 
mitted into this form, as are very weighty in 
proportion to their bulk, or act strongly in a 
small dose: but light and dry powders, whose 
parts are gross, do not easily stick together, 
and act only in a large dose, are generally ex- 
cluded from the form of pills. 
4. But the officinal masses of pills, are, for 
the generality, better omitted in prescribing 
this form; except a few of the more neat and 
frequent in use: because they usually grow too 
dry, or are otherwise corrupted by long keep- 
ing. 
5. Salts also, which soon liquify or exhale 
in the air, are not so convenient for this form: 
they may however be permitted in a small quan- 
tity,

108 Of Pills. 
tity, when combined with other proper ingre- 
dients. 
6. But the most, powerful and acrid medi- 
cines of any kind, preparations of mercury, me- 
tals, and the like, are fitter to be exhibited in 
this form than any other. 
7. Ingredients also, which are the most of- 
sensive to the smell and taste, may be conveni- 
ently receiv’d into this form; because no other 
form of medicine can conceal them so well as 
Pills. 
8. The excipientia (n° 1.) are supplied from 
substanccs which are either (1.) thick: as honey, 
turpentine, extracts, electuaries but very seldom, 
to which we may add the crumb of new bread, 
and things of the like kind, or (2.) soft or less 
thick: as thin confections, syrups, liquid bal- 
soms, mucilages, the yolks of eggs, &c. or (3.) 
liquid: as essences, elixirs, tinctures, spirits, 
essential oils, &c. 
9.But it is not any of theforemention’d (n° 8.) 
excipients that will suit every kind of excipiend 
(n°.2.): for such as are dry and tenacious (n° 2. 
(1.).), especially refinous, should be mix’d with 
the more liquid excipients (n° 8. (3).) or else 
joined with the yolks of eggs, balsoms or tur- 
pentines. The dry and brittle substances (n° 2. 
(2.).) require to be mix’d with the thick and 
glutinous excipients (n° 8. (2.).) 
10. Sometimes all or some ot the excipienda 
(n° 1. 2.) are selected from some one class of the 
excipientia (n° 8.), being more or less tenaci- 
ous : in which case, the excipientia are to be sa- 
turated with dry and bibulous powders, as slow- 
er, powder of liquorish, and the like. 
11. The number of ingredients taken into 
this form, is much the same with that of the 
bolus (§.129. n° 9.), if the mass of pills or- 
der'd

109 Of Pills.
der’d is but small; but when the quantity pre- 
scribed for at once is large, the number of in- 
gredients may be the same with that of the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.163. The ORDER (§.57.) of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is 
hardly always the same; but the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 2. and 10.) ought to be generally placed first, 
and ranged according to the likeness or affinity 
and quantity of each (per §.57. n° 2. 3.): 
afterwards may be subjoined the excipienda (§.162. 
n° 8. 10.), the last of which should be such as are 
prescribed in no determinate quantity (per §.57. 
n° 5.). When the several constituent parts of a 
form (§.74.) enter the composition of pills, we 
should then place them by the rule (at §.57. n° 4.): 
which, frequently takes place in purging pills. 
§.164. The quantity of each pill is at present 
much less than formerly; but it is not constant- 
ly and universally the same: for different patients, 
physicians and nations, use pills of different sizes 
and weights. It is generally reputed a large Pill 
(among the Dutch) that weighs viij or x grains; 
which is however the quantity generally used among 
us and the French, who even permit our pills to 
be sometimes larger than that. Pills are deemed 
to be midling, when they are between two and 
five grains, which is almost the received standard 
for pills in Holland. The Germans love the least
pills, of a grain weight, which will frequently 
seem a large pill to many of them, unless it be 
subdivided into ij, iij, or iv lesser pills. But with 
regard to the mass of a pill in general, the young 
prescriber should observe, that 
1. Pills of the same moles or weight may be 
some very large, others very small, in propor- 
tion to the different specific gravities of the in-  
gredients

110 Of Pills.
gredients which compose them: so that a regard 
ought always to be had to the specific gravity of 
each ingredient, in limitting the mass of a pill. 
2. Smallness in a pill facilitates its dissolution 
in the stomach, and of consequence makes it act 
the more readily; because small pills have a 
greater surface in proportion to their contents, 
than large ones. 
3. But then on the contrary, large pills are 
for the same reason fitter for keeping; because 
they do not so soon grow dry, hard, add lose 
their virtue by exhalation. 
4. The physician will therefore accommo- 
date the size or weight of the pills to his parti- 
cular intention, the nature of their ingredients, 
their general quantity, or the mass which he 
prescribes, the quantity proper for a dose, &c.
together with the circumstances of the patient 
and place (per §.30. 43.): from weighing and 
comparing which, he will readily find out the 
rule which is to direct him in this point. 
§.165. For the DOSE of this form, the less the 
better, and more agreeable if it be but of sufficient 
strength; so that we can hardly commit an error 
in making the dose of a pill or pills too small. A 
moderate and commodious dose is between ℈j. 
and ʒß. It seldom amounts to ℈ij. or ʒj. unless 
in very urgent cases, when the ingredients are of 
a great specific gravity, or when the patient takes 
this form very easily. As for what further relates 
to the dose of this form, we may observe, that, 
1. Alteratives, which are of a slow opera- 
tion, difficult to dissolve in the primæ viæ, and 
are intended to be gradually insinuated into the 
mass of blood; such should be rather given in a 
small dose, and be frequently repeated, than to 
be crouded upon the patient all at once. 
2.

111 Of Pills. 
2. Salivating mercurials, drastic purgatives, 
and such like strong medicines, are, for the 
generality, more safely administer’d by dividing 
their proper dose into several smaller portions 
or pills; if so be the indication does not re- 
quire it to be otherwise, nor the nature of the 
disease or any thing else forbid it. See §.21. 
§.66. n° 13. §.67. n° 5. 
3. When the patient is to be purged without 
violence, or we would work upon the whole 
habit, it is usual to give one third or fourth 
part of the dose over night, and the rest the 
next morning. 
4. The number of pills for a dose may be de- 
termined by dividing the known quantity of 
the dose explained in this section, by the de- 
sired weight of each pill (per §.164.) 
5. There are some patients, from a supersti- 
tious notion which was introduced too by the 
physicians, who entertain an ill opinion of an 
even number of pills for a dose, especially when 
they are to purge. Such we may gratify by 
making the size of them a little less, and adding 
one more to their number. 
§.166. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is very vague and undetermined, being not assign- 
able but from the patient’s particular case com- 
pared with the weight and number of doses 
(§.165.): which latter, depend upon the physi- 
cians indications being rightly deduced, and com- 
pared with the several circumstances of the pa- 
tient, together with knowing and considering the 
disposition of each separate ingredient. Peruse 
what has been said at §.67. and 92. Evacuants 
are frequently prescribed for by only one, two, or 
three doses at a time: but alteratives are some- 
times order’d to as many ounces. In the mean 
time

112 Of Pills.
time the prescriber should be mindful of the rule 
at §.114. n° 2. Also what is there said at n° 3. 
is sometimes of consequence, with regard to the 
general quantity of this form. 
§.167. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral Ingredients of this form, may be determined 
without much difficulty, from the following con- 
siderations. 
1. The excipienda (§.162. n° 2. 10.) ma- 
king the main part of the mass, should be or- 
der’d in as many adiquate doses, suitable to the 
indication, (per §.66, 67. 87, to 91. 165, 
166.), as if they were to be exhibited separately. 
2. If these (n° 1.) are solid and tenacious 
(per §.162. n° 2. (1.)), there should be but 
little of the excipient (§.162. n° 8.) order’d; 
writing for it only by q. s. and sometimes it 
should be even wholly omitted in a prescrip- 
tion; the choice and quantity thereof, if any be 
required, being referred to the discretion of 
the apothecary. 
3. But if the excipienda be dry and brittle 
(per §.162. n° 2. (2.)), the quantity of the 
tenacious excipient must be various, according 
to the particular degree of its own consistence 
(§.162. n° 8.). The quantity thereof in gene- 
ral, should be the larger as it is thicker or 
more consistent. Whence, the particular quan- 
tity requisite, will be 
Supposing the dry excipienda as - ℥j. 
Of the exci-
pient that is 
of the thickest kind 
(§.162. n° 8.(1.)) 
ʒv to vj. 
softer or less thick 
(ib. (2.))  
ʒiij to iv.
liquid or thinest
(ib. (1.)) 
ʒij to iij.
such will be the quantities required to form a 
mass of a due consistence (§.160.) for pills. 
But

113 Of Pills. 
But sometimes in this case, as in the former 
(n° 2.), the quantity is left to be determined 
by the apothecary. 
4. From the foregoing, we may easily deter- 
mine the necessary proportion to be observed, 
when several excipients of different consistences, 
or excipiends of both classes (§.162. n° 2. (1.) 
(2.)), are order’d together, in the composition 
of pills. 
5. Such excipienda (§.162. n° 10.) as are 
less consistent than pills, are to be made up with 
a q. s. of some proper powder: tho' the requisite 
proportion of these too, may be understood 
from the rule at n° 3. 
6. If, in assigning the quantity of soft but ne- 
cessary excipients, you are doubtful, and afraid 
of ordering too much or too little, take a quan- 
tity so small, that you may be sure it is not suf- 
ficient, and subjoin q. s. of some other excipient, 
as Syr. &c. 
7. Hence appears, how necessary is the rule 
at §.35. A knowledge of the specific gravity 
of each ingredient is also here very serviceable; 
since that alone may make a great variation in 
the proportions necessary for a due consisence. 
8. What we have further to advise the young 
prescriber in relation to the proportion of 
parts in this form, is, that he be mindful of 
what we said before at §.86. and 88. n° 3. 
that if the excipientia possess the property of 
increasing or diminishing the action of the dry 
excipienda, that such alteration may be com- 
puted and allowed for in determining the dose, 
and the quantity of excipienda be proportion’d 
accordingly. See n° 1. of this section. 
§.168. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. pilulœ.
I Always  

114 Of Pills. 
Always subjoining afterwards the number of pills 
that is to be formed out of the whole mass: as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or, if the mass is large, by di- 
recting how many pills are to be formed out of a 
certain weight thereof: as ex scrupulo n° v, vij, &c. 
or lastly, by adding the exacs weight of each pill: 
as singulœ gr. ij, iij, iv, &c. Sometimes we direct 
them to be cover’d, by rolling them in some fine 
powder: as obruantur pulvere glycyrrhizœ, cinna- 
mom. &c. in which they are order’d to be rolled 
to prevent their sticking together. If we would 
have them gilded, We add deaurentur, or auri vel 
argenti foliis obducantur: which is the more al- 
lowable, as it makes them agreeable to the eye, 
confines their smell and taste, which are often ex- 
tremely unpleasant, keeps them from sticking to 
each other, from spreading flat, from growing 
too hard, dry, or crumbling into powder; but 
long keeping may deface their fine covering. The 
usual receptacle for this form is a scatula or box, 
seldom paper. 
§.169. The SIGNATURE, or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains first, the title,
compos’d of the name and virtue (per §.60. 
n° 3.); then the dose (§.165.), determining 
the number of pills to be taken at a time (ib. 
n° 4, 5.); unless when they are all to be taken 
for one dose. The time of taking them and the re- 
gimen to be used under their operation, are to be de- 
duced from the physicians indication: but here we 
must be careful, in strong doses which are divided 
into smaller portions {per §.165. n° 2.), that one 
part be not taken before the other begins to ope- 
rate and shew its effects; because, as pills are but 
slowly dissolved in the stomach, they may lie a good 
while before they begin to operate. As to a vehi- 
cle for this form, many use none at all; some use 
a thick or solid vehicle, as a waser, a fig, or rasin,
mar-


115 Of Pills.
marmalad, &c. others use liquid vehicles, which 
are generally best cold; because when they are 
hot, they in a great measure dissolve the pill, make 
it stick to the mouth, and give a greater offence 
to the taste. It is also, sometimes, necessary to 
drink some liquor after taking this form, in order 
to wash off what may have adhered to the mem- 
branes in its passage, to take off the disagreeable 
taste it may have left behind, and to facilitate its 
dissolution, and promote its action in the stomach. 
See §.60. n° 11. §.123. n° 2, 3. and §.135. 
§.170. The USE of this form is almost univer- 
sal, being equally extensive with that of the pow- 
der (§.125.): it is fitted as well for most evacuants 
as alteratives; but it is more especially useful and 
convenient in chronical cases. Pills are, however, 
sometimes given in acute cases, tho’ but seldom, and 
with the intention of narcotics, emetics *, and the 
like. One advantage which the form of pills possesses 
beyond any other, is, that it will commodiously 
take in and conceal ingredients which in other 
forms must be extremely nauseous and offensive. 
Yet, there are some particular patients to whom 
pills are less agreeable than other forms: and such 
we may gratify by changing it (per §.43.). Pills 
are also not very convenient for infants or young 
children, because they will chew them, and can- 
not get them down so easily as a liquid. They are 
also less suitable for dry habits of body (per §.47.); 
I2 but 
* Emetics are never order'd in pills among us, for the same rea- 
son that they are hardly ever given in form of a bolus: viz. left 
the cohesion of parts- in the form should be such, as to let them slip 
thro' the stomach (without exerting their energy there) into the in- 
testines, where they would become severe cathartics; whereas, in 
this intention, there is required the largest and speediest contact of 
surface between the parts of the medicine and the coats of the stomach. 
But our author, agreeable with foreign practice, begins his speci- 
mens of this form with emetic pills ex tart. emetic. gr. v. & micæ 
panis q. s. ut F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 

116 Pills. 
but that fault may be corrected by drinking some 
proper liquor, either before or after them. A diffi- 
culty, or incapacity, for swallowing in the patient, 
is a greater obstacle against ordering this form 
than that of a powder (§.125.). And lastly, the 
slow dissolution and operation of this form, being 
sometimes not speedy  enough for the intention, 
may also forbid its use. 
§.171. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Pil. cathartiæ communes. 
(1.) ♃. Pil coch. min. ℈j. 
Calomelan. ℈ß. 
Resin. jalap. gr. vj. 
Ol. junip. gtt. iij.
Syr. de spin. cerv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. pro dosi. 
S. Pil. &c. primo mane, in quovis vehiculo, cum re- 
gimine sumend. 
(2.)  
♃. Extract. rud. 
Pil. ex duob. aa gr. xv. 
Ol. anis. chem. gtt. j. 
Elix. propriet. tartariz. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Summo mane cum regimine sumend. 
(3.)—ecphradicæ. 
♃. Pil. fœtid. gr. xv. 
Resin. jalap. 
Sal. succin. aa gr. v. 
Ol. succin. gtt. ij. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°.v. deaurandæ. 
S. Pit. &c. quarum ij capiat hord somni, & tres 
summo mane, cum regimine.
2. 

117 Pills. 
2. Pil. alterantes. 
♃. Pil. ruffi ℈j. 
Ext. thebaic, gr. j. 
Bals. peruv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° iij. 
S. Pil. &c. H. S. in quovis vehiculo sumendœ. 
3. Pilulæ resolventes, stimulantes, in morbis a 
glutinoso spontaneo. 
ꝶ Sapon. alcalici vel starkeani ʒjß
Extract. centaur. min.
Gumm. galban. aa ʒj. 
Sagapen.  ℈ij. 
Ol. stillat. absinth. gtt. xij. 
Cort. winteran. subtil. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ ex  ℈j. n° x. deaurandæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger ij. ter vel quater de 
die ex vino. 
4. Pilul. astringentes in fibra laxa, secund. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 8. 
ꝶ Extrad. tormentill. ʒj. 
Bistortœ. 
Pulv. cort. granator. aa ʒß. 
Lap. hœmatit. ppt. ℈j. 
Syr. myrtin. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ singulæ gr. ij. 
S. Pilulœ roborantes. Capiat œger umam ter, vel 
quater de die, ex ℥j. infusi, decocti, vel vini me- 
dicati, ib. p. 5 ad 7. descriptorum. 
I3 5.

118 Pills. 
5. Pilulæ martiales nigræ. 
♃. Mart. c. sulph. ppt. ʒjß. 
Sal. mart. 
Ter. japon. aa ℈ij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Extract. theœ virid. q. s. 
M. F. pilulæ mediocres, obruantur pul-
vere sub. cort. cinnam. 
S. Nomine precedentium. Capiat unam ter die in 
quovis vehiculo, hora ante cibum. 
6. Pilulæ hypochondriacæ 
♃. Gumm. ammon. 
Asœ fœtid. 
Myrrh. pulv. 
Aloe socotrin. 
Rubig. mart. 
Extract. gent. aa ℈j. 
Syr. de 5. rad. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies cum haustul. 
vini amari. 
7. Pilulæ uterinæ. 
♃. Pil. gummos. ʒj. 
Fol. sabin. crisp. pulv. ℈ij. 
Ol. succin. gtt. jv. 
Bals. sulph. terebinth. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pilulœ aperientes. Capiat n° iij. dosi, pro re 
nata repetend.
8. 

119 Pills.
8. Pilulæ emmenagogæ
♃. Cort. peruv. subt. pulv. ʒij. 
Rubig. mart. ʒj. 
Extract. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres bis in dies c. haustu infusi 
amari. 
9. Pilulæ asthmaticæ. 
4. Pulp. scillœ siccat. 
Gumm. ammon. aa  ʒß. 
Flor. benz. ℈j. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres his in dies quovis vehiculo. 
10. Pilulæ terebinthinatæ. 
♃. Tereb. venet. 
E. chio coct. aa ʒj. 
Sacchar. alb. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies, superbibendo vi- 
tel. ov. rec. in haustul. vin. alb. dulcificati. 
11 Pilulæ febrifugæ.
♃. Ext. cort. peruv. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth.  ℈ij. 
Ol. chamom. gtt. iv. 
Pulv. cort. elect. subt. q. s.  
M. F. pil. n° xxiv. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat unam omni hora, superbilendo 
haustum [℥iv.] theœ ex flor. chamom. factœ. 
I4 12.

120 Pills. 
12. Pilulæ ad strumas. 
♃. Hydrarg. in tereb. v. q. f. solut. 
Gumm. guaiac. aa ʒjß. 
Ol. sassafr. chem. gtt. xx. 
Ext. R. sarsaparill. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlvilj. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij bis in dies cum haustu ℥iv. 
aq. bened. Bat. C. 
13. Pilulæ nigræ. 
♃. Antimon. crud. levigat. 
Hydrarg. 
Pil. Ruffi aa ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. 
S. Pil. &c. Sumat quater omni nocte cum haust. aq. 
(ad n° xij.) precedent. 
14. Pilulæ ictericæ. 
♃. Sapon. e joppá ʒij. 
Pulv. rhei ℈ij. 
Ext. croc, anglic. ℈j. 
R. gent. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° v. ex ʒß. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat quinque bis in dies cum haustu 
infusi amari. 
15. Pilula antisyphilica. 
♃. Merc. precipit. per se. 
Extract. thebaic. aa gr. j. 
Balsam. peruv. guttulam. 
M. F. pilula deauranda. 
S. Pil. ad sanguinem abstergendum, omni nocte sumenda. 
16.

121 Pills.
16. Pilulæ ceruleæ. 
♃. Scammon. ʒj. 
Gumm. guaiac. ℈ij. 
Camphor. ℈j. 
Hydrarg. ʒij. 
Ol. terebinth. gtt. vj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n°. xlviij. pulvere liquoritæ 
obruendæ. 
S. Titulo precedentis pilulœ. Capiat quater omni nocte. 
17. Pilulæ camphoratæ. 
♃. Gumm. guaiac. ʒij. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Bals. peruv. 
Ol. sassafr. aa gtt. xij. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xlviij. deaurantur. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat iij pro dosi. 
18. Pilulæ balsamicæ. 
(1.) ♃. Gumm. tragac. 
Tereb. e chio aa ℈ iv. 
Camphor. ℈ j. 
Bals. copaih. q. s. 
M. F. pil. n° xxxvj. obruantur pulvere 
sang. dracon. 
S. Pil. &c. Capiat tres mane & vesperi.
(2.)

122 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.)—in gonorrhea venerea.
Boerh. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. vulg. ℥j. 
Rei-barh. ℥ß. 
Glycyrrbiz. sicc. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. pilulæ, singulæ gr. iv. 
S. Capiat unam omni hord. 
19. Pilulæ narcoticæ. 
(l.) ꝶ. Opii purissimi gr. ij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Detur una pro dosi, repetendo post horam, si prior 
nihil efficit, sic & tertio. 
(2.)—
♃. Pil. Matthœi gr. xij. 
F. pilulæ n° iij. 
S. Ut prior. 
Of TROCHES, or LOZENGES. 
§.l72. A Troche, (sometimes call’d up a pastill, 
or a Lozenge) is a pill (§.160.), tho' 
not of a globular figure, nor to be swallowed 
whole; but is to pass down the œsophagus slowly, 
after a gradual dissolution in the mouth, like a 
linctus (§.149.): hence, we might venture to term 
it eclegma solidum, a solid linctus. 
§.173. But it is here very proper to distinguish 
troches which are officinal from those which are ex- 
temporaneous (per §.6.); for tho' they both agree 
as

123 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
as to their form, they have frequently very diffe- 
rent uses or intentions: since the composition of 
the officinal troche is calculated chiefly for the pre- 
servation of certain species or ingredients, which 
are often, by that means, the better fitted to enter 
many other forms; but the extemporaneous regards 
more the case and circumstances of some particular 
patient. 
§.174. The MATTER, or ingredients of this 
form, are in general of two kinds: excipienda, 
things to be taken in by others; or excipientia (per 
§.128. n° 1, 2.) which are to take in, and make 
up the former.  
1. The excipienda are either (1.) dry and 
brittle; or (2.) dry and cohesive, or tenacious 
(vide §.162. n° 2.): or (3.) soft; as pulps, 
electuaries, &c. or (4.) liquid; which are either 
of the weaker and more dissused kind; as de- 
ceptions, infusions, &c. or else more contracted 
and strong; as effential oils, &c. 
2. The ingredients which serve for excipientia, 
are either (1.) liquid, with but little tenacity; 
as wines, distilled waters, spirits, vegetable jui- 
ces, decoctions, infusions, &c. or (2.) viscid: 
as the whites of eggs, mucilages, syrups, bal- 
soms, honey, pulps, &c. or (3.) dry and glu- 
tinous; as gums, extracts, inspissated juices, &c. 
or (4.) dry and not oily; as the meal of vetches, 
lupines, &c.
§.175. But a Choice of these ingredients is 
necessary for an accurate composition of this form; 
since the consistence, proper to each of the fore- 
going kinds, does not fit them promiscuously for 
an uniform mixture with each other. But, 
1. The dry excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) 
generally require to be joined with the viscid ex- 
cipientia ib. n° 2. (2.)).
2. 

124 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
2. The excipienda which, are dry and tena- 
cious (ib. n° 1. (2.)) may be well enough com- 
bin’d with the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. 
(1.)) when they are properly chose. 
3. The soft excipienda (n° 1. (3.)) are to be 
made of a due consistence for this form, by the 
mealy excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
4. The liquid excipienda (n° 1. (4.)) agree 
best with the dry and glutinous excipients (n° 
2. (3.)).
5. Thence, we may easily determine whether 
any, and what kind of excipients, are required 
when excipienda of different consistences enter 
together in composition. In which Case there 
is sometimes none at all required. 
6. Substances which are unpleasant to the 
smell and taste, shou’d be avoided in this form, 
or at least be added in a very small quantity, for 
reasons at §.151. n° 4. & §.172. 
7. Medicines of the more potent and pun- 
gent kind, shou’d also be here avoided; since 
their use and our intention do not call for them 
in this form. 
8. Salts, (for the same reason, and from their 
aptness to melt, with their unpleasant taste) are 
therefore scarce ever permitted to enter this 
form.
9. Sugar, on the contrary, is of very fre- 
quent use in this form; as it reconciles the taste 
of the medicine to the tongue, facilitates the 
dissolution thereof in the mouth, and increases 
their bulk or mass to a proper size. Which last 
intention, is also frequently answer’d with 
starch. 
10. Ingredients which are glutinous, or very 
tenacious, shou’d not enter this form (at least in 
any great quantity) when it is designed for in- 
fants;

125 Of Troches or Lozenges.
fants; for as they chew ’em, such things prove 
very troublesome, by glewing their teeth toge- 
ther. 
11. For the number of ingredients, this form 
will hardly admit of more than the electuary 
(§.140. n° 6.). 
12. If there be any officinal Troches fit to 
answer our intention, we shou’d rather order 
those than prescribe new (per §.29. 37.). 
§.176. The ORDER of placing the several in- 
gredientsof this form in a prescription,is the same 
with that observed in pills (§. 163). 
§.177. The QUANTITY of a Troche was for- 
merly extended from ʒj to ʒiij, but at present they 
are much less, being usually-limited between 
gr. vi. and ℈ß. which last quantity is seldom ex- 
ceeded; they are even sometimes but of ij or iij gr. 
weight, especiaily when designed to sweeten the 
breath. But they are oftner not determined by 
weight, but by magnitude; as the size of peas, 
lupines, &c. nor is there any danger in this di- 
sion of extemporaneous troches (per §.175. n° 7.) 
§.178. The FIGURE usually given to troches, 
is either flat and circular like a cake, tringular, 
cubical, rhomboidal, or cylindrical, &c. the choice 
of which, with the seal to imprint ’em with, may 
be well enough left to the discretion of the apo- 
thecary. 
§. 179. The DOSE of this form is usually de- 
termined by number, according to the greater or 
less size or weight of the troches (§. 177.), and 
particular nature of the ingredients. N° i, ij, iij, 
&c. are order’d to lie dissolving in the mouth; but 
when drastic or very potent medicines (such as 
opium, &c.) enter the compostion of troches, 
which is very seldom the case (per §.175. n° 7.), 
the number of troches for a dose to be ex- 
actly

126 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
actly limited from the known particular weight of 
each, and from the known proportion such strong 
ingredients bare to the whole. 
§.180. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, sent to the patient at one time, is seldom 
less than ℥j, or ℥jß; because a less quantity can- 
not be conveniently made up by the apothecary. 
But if officinal troches (§.175. n° 12.) are ordered 
alone in a prescription, there is then no reason to 
be confin'd to this quantity; but so much at least
ought to be prescribed at once, as may be judged 
sufficient to answer the intention (per §.67, 68.). 
§.181. For the PROPORTION of the excipi- 
entia to the excipienda (§.174.), as it varies with 
the different consistences of each, so it is scarce 
possible it shou'd be determin'd in all Cases with 
exactness. And, as ingredients of the stronger 
kind are seldom permitted to enter the composi- 
tion of this form (per §.175. n° 7.), the propor- 
tion may be therefore safely referred to the discre- 
tion of the apothecary (per §.58. n° 8. (7.)). But 
in general, to take notice of the following conside- 
rations may be of some use. 
1. The greater or less specific gravity of the 
dry and bibulous excipienda (§.174. n° 1. 
(1.)), makes (more or less) a considerable alter- 
ation in the necessary quantity of the excipienda. 
2. There is requir'd a less quantity of the 
excipienda to make up a certain quantity of ex- 
cipienda, as this lad is thicker, or more tena- 
cious. 
3. Hence, to iij parts of the dry powder'd 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (1.)) which are of a 
mean specific gravity, there is required almost 
ij parts of the most liquid excipienda (n°. 2. (i.)):
but of the viscid excipienria (n° 2. (2.)), there 
will be required from iv. to vj. parts, according 
as it is more or less consistent. 
To

127 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
To make up iij parts of the like dry excipi- 
enda, which are lightest, or of the least specific 
gravity, is required, of the most liquid excipi- 
entia (n° 2. (1.)) iv parts, of the viscid exci- 
pientia (n° 2. (2.)) from vj to ix parts. 
To make iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into troches, 
j part of the most liquid excipienda (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the dry and tenacious 
excipienda (§.174. n° 1. (2.)) into this form, 
j part of the most liquid excipientia (n° 2. (1.)) 
will be sufficient. 
To make up iij parts of the soft excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (3.)), there is need of ij parts 
of the dry excipientia (n° 2. (4.)). 
To iij parts of the diffused liquid excipienda 
(§.174. n° 1. (4.)). shou’d be added ix parts of 
the dry excipientia (n° 2. (3.)). 
4. The quantity of sugar to be added, is fre- 
quently the weight of the whole; but sometimes 
double, tripple, quadruple, and beyond, that 
quantity: according as it is required by the cir- 
cumstances at §.175. n° 9. The same holds 
good also, with regard to the use of starch in 
the composition of this form. 
§.182. The SUBSCRIPTION, or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is, M. F. l. a. Tro- 
chisci, adding afterwards their size or weight (per 
§.177.), v. g. Parvi, or Pisi, Lupini, magnitudine: 
or gr. ij, vj. ℈ß. But there is no occasion for any 
such direction when the troches prescribed are offi- 
cinal (per §.175. n° 12.). Boxes, papers, &c. are 
the usual receptacles for this form. When very 
strong medicines enter the composition of this 
form (per §.179.) the quantity of excipients being
at

128 Of Troches or Lozenges. 
at the same time undetermined; it is then prudeht 
to determine the quantity of each troche, not by 
size or weight, but by directing the number to be 
formed out of the whole mass, as in pills (§.168.). 
By this means We shall be the better assured of the 
certain quantity of the drastic medicine, which 
is contained and given in each troche. 
§.183. The SIGNATURE, or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on this head, at §.60. 
and 157. compared with §.172. 179. 
§.184. The USE of this form is at present but 
seldom in practice, add even then it is only ap- 
plied, 
1. In disorders of the mouth and sauces, pha- 
rynx, larynx, aspera artera, &c. like a linctus, 
§.158. 
2. To sweeten or perfume a stinking breath: 
or, 
3. As a preventive against the action of 
contagious efluvia, upon the membranes of the 
mouth, nose and lungs. 
§.185. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Trochisci ad ptyalismum, ab apthis delapsis. 
ꝶ. Ter japon. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. 
Extract. agrimon. aa ʒj. 
Mucilag. sem. cydonior. 
Cum aq. rosar. extract. q. s. 
M. F. l. a. trochisci pisi magnitudine. 
S. Trochisci rohorantes quorum unum assiduò ore volu- 
tet œger ac lente deglutiat. 
2.

129 Troches or Lozenges. 
(2.) Trochisci opiati in pulmone suppurato, rupto. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 145. 
ꝶ. Succ. liquorit. 
Flor. sulphur. aa ʒij. 
Olihan. ℈ij. 
Opii puri ℈j. 
Bals. copayb. q. s. 
Ut exacte mistis F. trochisci n° xl. 
S. Trochisci pacantes, quorum duos sumat qualibet 
vespera ante somnum. 
3. Trochisci nervini. 
♃. Sp. lavend. comp. gtt. lx. 
Ol. essent. rorismar. 
Cinnam. aa gtt. iv. 
Farin. R. ir. florent. ʒij.
Sacchart albi ℥j 
Mucilag. gummi tragac. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß.
S. Trochisci cephalici, paralytici, &c. unum vel plures 
ore volutet œger, pro re nata. 
4. Trochisci sialagogi.
♃. Rad. pyreth. pulv. ℥ß 
Mastiches  ʒij. 
Ol. caryophyllor. 
Macis. 
Sal. succin. aa ʒj. 
Cerœ flav. recent. odorat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci magni. 
S. Troch. &c. quorum unum vel duo ore volutet ad 
libitum.
K 5.

130 Troches or Lozenges. 
5. Trochisci swaveolentes ad fœtorem spiritus. 
(1.) ꝶ. Resin. cort. thymiam Hoffm. ℈j.
Amhar. grys. gr. xv. 
Moschi gr. vij. 
Ol. cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Sacchari albissimi ℥j. 
Mucilag. gumm. arab. in aq.
Cinnam. fact. q. s. ut. 
F. l. a. trochisci minimi. 
S. Unum vel alterum pro necessitate ore volutet. 
(2.) Alii- 
♃. Ol. thym. limon. gtt. xx. 
Cort. citror. gtt. vij. 
Moschi 
Ambrœ grissiœ aa gr. j. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Sacchari albissmi ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in spt. rosar. damascenar.
Solut. q. s. ut 
F. trochisci minimi. 
S. Ut prior. 
6. Trochisci sublinguales ad prophylaxin a contagio. 
ꝶ. Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Myrrh. elect. ʒj. 
Ol. still. cort. citri gtt. xij. 
Succin. citri recent. ℥ß. 
Pulv. cort. aurant. q. s. 
Ut F. l. a. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Mane exiturus capiat unum, alerum sub lingua 
detineat. 
7.

131 Of Tablets.
7. Trochisci bechici. 
♃. Succ. hispan. ʒjß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒj. 
Flor. benz. ℈ß. 
Ol. anisi gtt. xxij. 
Hysop. gtt. iv. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
Gum. arab. in syr. bals. solut. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci singuli ℈ß. 
S. Trochisci, &c. quorum unum ore volutet urgente 
tussi. 
Of TABLETS. 
§.186. A Tablet (sometimes termed morsu- 
lus, and from its consistence, electu- 
arium solidum, vid. §.190.) is a dry, internal me- 
dicine, formed into various figures, and made 
up of various ingredients; which are dissolved 
and boiled up with a large proportion of sugar, 
till the whole acquires a solid and brittle con- 
sistence *. Whence appears the difference of this 
form from that of the troche, §.172 †. 
§.187. The MATTER or ingredients of this 
form, are either (1.) excipienda, by which we here 
Understand all ingredients concerned or taken into 
the form as a medicine; or (2.) excipiens, what is 
employ’d in making up and rendering the form a- 
greeable. 
K2 The
* Like the barley-sugar of our confectioners, which may be 
looked upon as (tabella simplex, or) the basis of this form. 
† The difference of the tablet from the troche seems to consist in 
its brittle texture, great quantity of sugar, large dose and way of 
taking: all which are proper to a tablet, but not to a troche. But 
as this form has been long out of date, being never used among us, 
nor hardly ever in other nations we need not be very sollicitous 
about its difference. 


132 Of Tablets.
The excipienda comprehend almost every 
thing that is admitted into the electuary, whe- 
ther excipientia or excipienda (per §.139. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3.). From whence we may perceive 
the reason of the form's having been antiently 
call'd electuarium solidum. 
The excipiens is always dry or loaf sugar, 
dissolved in some proper liquor, which is gene- 
rally aqueous, and afterwards boiled to a due 
consistence. 
§.188. But a CHOICE of the ingredients is re- 
quired upon several accounts; as, 
1. It its required that this form be brittle as 
well as solid, that it be so consistent as not to 
run or flow, being also easily dissolvable in the 
mouth, and not unpleasant to the taste. 
2. Hence, gums, extracts, inspissated juices, 
things gross and oily, or the like, which intro- 
duce tenacity in the compound, should enter 
the composition of this form in the least quan- 
tity. 
3. For the same reason, the sugar made use 
of, should not be fat or repleat with its melosus; 
but if simple, it should be the whitest and dry- 
est, or else it may be saccharum rosatum. 
4. There is therefore no room in this form 
for ingredients which are very offenve to the 
smell and taste; because the use thereof requires 
it to undergo mastication and a dissolution in 
the mouth. 
5. This form will in like manner also, scarce- 
ly admit of any salts to enter its composition, 
especially those which are apt to liquify or ex- 
hale in the air. 
6. The grosser powders (species or trageæ) 
may indeed be admitted into this form, when 
they are a little soft at the same time. But for 
the

133 Of Tablets.
the harder powders, unless they are very finely 
levigated, they will prove gritty and trouble- 
some between the teeth. 
7. Acids from fossils should be also omitted, 
as they hinder the coagulation of the sugar. 
8. So also, oily things are, for the same rea- 
son and their unpleasantness, excluded from this 
form. 
9. Kernels, which are repleat with an oil that 
soon turns rancid, the fleshy parts of animals, 
and the like, are improperly order’d in this 
form, when it is to last any length of time in 
taking. 
10. Astringent and incrassating substances 
should also be expunged from this form; be- 
cause they lose their virtues by being buried in 
so large a quantity of sugar. 
11. The solid consistence of tablets will well 
enough admit of medicines which are the most 
potent, and possess the greatest specific gravity; 
if so be they undergo an equable mixture in the 
composition. 
12. Sweet smells are given to tablets by in- 
termixing a small quantity of ambergrease, musk, 
or civet; or when the mass is congealed, it may 
be wash'd over with some fragrant liquor, essen- 
tial oil, &c. and for the fake of colour, it may 
be gilded with leaf gold or silver, or tinged by 
sprinkling in flowers of various colours cut 
small, a little before the mass is grown cold;
but those who approve of these ornaments should 
be mindful of the caution at §. 85. 
13. The composition of tablets will not well 
take in a greater number of ingredients than the 
electuary (§.140. n° 6.) 
§.189. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients of this form, is the same with that to be 
K3 ob-

134 Of Tablets. 
observed in troches (§.176.) and pills (§.163.); 
tho' that method does frequently not agree with 
the just order of preparation and compostion. 
§.190. The FIGURE given to this mass is va- 
rious, which as it neither adds to nor diminishes 
from the virtue of the medicine, that part may 
be well enough left to be determined by the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. When it is poured into 
a box, before it is quire cold, so as to receive the 
figure thereof, it then takes the name of panda- 
leon: and when it is poured out and spread flat 
upon a plain, they afterwards cut and frame it in- 
to little, masses of a square figure, cubical like dice, 
rhomboidal or diamond-fashion, &c. which they 
accordingly term tablets, morsules, or tessellœ, lo- 
zenges, &c. tho’ it would have been much better 
to have always distinguished them by the single 
name of tablets, rejecting the rest. 
§.191. The QUANTITY or size of a tablet is 
very seldom determined either by weight or mea- 
sure; nor is it fo strictly limited but it may be 
extended from ʒj. to ℥ß. and beyond. 
§.192. The DOSE of this form is usually or- 
der’d by number, as ß, j, ij, iij, &c. according as 
they are bigger or less: or if the mass is all in one 
Jump, it may be order’d to be taken a bit at a 
time: or if it contains ingredients of any strength, 
the bits may be proportioned cut by weight: and 
in that case die dose will be more or less, accord- 
ing to the strength and proportion of the ingre- 
dients. But the dose hardly ever exceeds an ounce, 
in any case. 
§.193. For the GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time; if it 
be less than ℥iv. it cannot be conveniently made 
up by the apothecary. But if you order an offici- 
nal composition of this kind, just so much may be 
wrote

135 Of Tablets. 
wrote for as will suffice for the intention; tho' that 
should not be less than ℥ß. 
§.194. With regard to the PROPORTION of in- 
gredients for this form, that of the exciprenda is de- 
termined from a previous knowledge of the parti- 
cular nature of each, with their consistence and 
relation to one another, compared with the inten- 
tion, and the cautions given at §.188. (Vid. §.66, 
67. 115. n° 1. 6.) But the proportion of the ex- 
cipiens depends much on the former, and may be 
determined from the following considerations. 
1. In general, four or six times as much sugar 
may be conveniently taken, as the quantity of 
excipienda. But there are some who are pleased 
to order eight times as much sugar, or more; 
but with no great judgment: because the virtue 
of the ingredients is often by that means so much 
diffused, and often diminished or obtunded by 
so much sugar; from whence, the effectual dose 
must be also increased without necessity. 
2. In the mean time we must have a regard to 
the specific gravity and consistence of the ingre- 
dients. Those of the lightest kind will take up 
the most sugar, as they are very bulkey. Sub- 
stances which are dry, hard and porous, will 
grow almost stony with but a small portion of 
sugar. V. §.188. n° 1. 
3. If the excipienda or ingredients themselves 
contain any sugar, the quantity of excipiens or 
sugar should be proportionably less: which holds 
good with regard to conserves, candies, confec- 
tions, &c. 
4. But the quantity of sugar is often left to be 
determined at the pleasure of the apothecary 
(per §.58. n° 8. (7.) ), which is a liberty not 
to be comply’d with, when the dose is required 
to be adjusted by weight (per §.192.); because 
that unlimited quantity may differ very widely  
K4 in

130 Of Tablets.
in different shops, and many may be at a loss 
for the proper quantity to be used. 
§.195. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is usually wrote M. F. 
l. a. tabulœ, morsuli, electuarium solidum, panda- 
leon, &c. (§.190.), leaving what relates to the or- 
der and manner of making up the composition, to 
the judgment and dexterity of the apothecary. 
Afterwards, when it seems proper, may be sub- 
joined the liquid with which they are to be wash- 
ed, and whether the mass is to be ornamented with 
leaf gold, silver or flowers (per §.188. n° 12.) 
Sometimes the weight of each tablet (§.197.) is 
mentioned in a prescription, and a scatula or box 
order’d for the receptacle. But in prescribing for 
officinal tablets (§.193.), there is generally no oc- 
casion to mention any of these; unless you may 
think fit to add some external embellishment (per 
§.188. n° 12.) 
§.196. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is sufficiently apparent from 
what has been already said on that head (at §.60. 
186. 190. 192.). A vehicle for this form is unnecessa- 
ry, upon account of the sugar. The time and me- 
thod of taking is deduced from the intention: for it 
is to be either chewed and directly swallowed, or else 
gradually dissolved by the saliva, and swallowed 
slowly. 
§.197. The USE of tablets is at present al- 
most universally laid aside. The pandaleon is quite 
obsolete. But the tablet may be sometimes order’d 
with the intention of a purgative, vermifuge, sto- 
machic, carminative, antacid, attenuant, aphrodi- 
siac, alexipharmic, pectoral, and to correct a soul 
breath. Some are better pleased with medicines in 
this form than another, and it may do well enough 
for a domestic remedy, arid to carry upon long 
journeys;

137 Tablets. 
neys; as it keeps found a long time, serves to dis- 
guise the medicine for the infant and nice patient, 
and is easy to make up: but it is not so convenient 
in many cases, when the patient is poor, or his 
blood in too thin a state; it is also culpable for the 
slowness of its action, and in hysterical cases, where 
sweet things are less agreeable. 
§.198 For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Tabulæ antihelminticæ verminum nidum de- 
struentes. 
ꝶ. Conserv. absinth. valg.
Semin. santonic. 
Tanacet. aa ʒij. 
Æthiop. mineral. ʒiij. 
Resin. jalap. ʒjß. 
Sacch. albiss. Infuso tanaceti solut. ℥v. 
M. F. l. a. tabellæ, singulæ ℥ß
S. Capiat umam mane & vesperi, vacuo ventriculo. 
2. Tabellæ purgantes. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. jalap. ʒiij. 
Scammon. opt.  ʒij. 
Antimon. diaphoret. ℥ß 
Flaved. cort. citri rec. ʒiij. 
Sacch. albiss. in aq. ros. solut. ℥viij. 
M. F. l. a. confectio pro tabellis. 
S. Dosis ʒiij ad v. adultis jʒß ad ʒj infantibus.
3.

138 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
3. Tabellæ antacidæ. 
ꝶ  Matr. perlar. ppt. 
Cret. albiss. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Rad. Z. Z. condit. ʒiij. 
Cinnam. grossè triti ʒj.
Sacch. albis in aq. pur a solut. q. s. 
Ut. F. l. a. tabellæ. 
S. Tab. &c. quarum una vel altera pro necessitate 
capiatur.  
4. Tabellæ stomachicæ carminantes; in casu frigido, 
ꝶ. Cons. menth. ʒiij. 
Nuc. moschat. in Ind. cond. 
Cort. winteran. 
Aurantior. aa ʒij. 
Macis ʒj. 
M. F. cum sacch. alb. in aq. rosar. solut. 
q. s. tabellæ, ol. stillat. cort. citri ob- 
linendæ. D. in scatula. 
S. Sumatur una ante & post pastum. 
Of SUGAR-CAKES. 
§.199. A SUGAR-CAKE (termed rotula and or- 
biculus) is nothing more than the tablet 
(§.186.) made into a flat and round form, it be- 
ing (like that) received by and made up with 
sugar; but then its ingredients are usually ground 
finer, or render’d more soluble: So that there is 
but very little difference between this and the pre- 
ceeding form. However, as they are not abso- 
lutely the same, I thought it more advisable to be 
scrupulously exact in their division, than to load
the

139 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
the rules for these forms with too many exceptions 
by treating them as one. 
§.200. The MATTER or ingredients are in ge- 
neral the same as for the tablets (§.187.). Sugar 
is also in this form, always the excipient, or what 
serves to glew together and make up the other in- 
gredients. Whence, they confound sugar-cakes 
with troches or lozenges (§.172.) who give the 
name of sugar-cake to this form, when the ingre- 
dients are made up with a mucilage. 
§.201. The CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, is in some measure different from that in 
the troche. For, 
1. Besides the conditions at §.188. n° 1. su- 
gar-cakes are also most delectable when their so- 
lidity is joined with an imperfect pellucidity, or 
are semidiaphanous. Therefore, 
2. Such substances as cannot be sufficiently 
attenuated and equably diffused thro’ the substance 
of the sugar, such as conserves; candies, gross 
powders, with kernels of the nut or almond 
kind, which are apt to clog together and turn 
grumous, these are all less fit to enter the com- 
position of this form. 
3. Hence it is the more necessary for the su- 
gar to be as white and fine as possible (per- 
§.188. n° 3.): but the several other circum- 
stances (ib. n° 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 ) viz. 
gleweyness, unpleasantness, &c. ought to be 
more regarded. 
4. Sometimes, rejecting dry or thick sub- 
stances, the sugar is made into cakes with only 
the more pleasant liquid juices, especially acid, 
as juice of entrance, berberries, citrons, &c. 
which form a medicine exceeding pleasant for 
use. But those add no virtue, who endeavour to 
boil up sugar into cakes with distilled waters. 
5.

140 Of Sugar-Cakes. 
5. Others only drop aromatic or essential oils, 
and the more contracted essences upon sugar, 
and dissolving it in water, they afterwards boil 
it to a consistence for cakes: but by that me- 
thod, the medicine must suffer great loss in its 
virtues. 
6. We may therefore reasonably doubt whe- 
ther this form contains any thing more than su- 
gar, when it is made up by boiling eleosacchara 
to a consistence with water. 
7. Those also who inspissate mere syrups over 
the fire, in order to form sugar-cakes, can by 
no means expect to find the more volatile parts 
of a medicine in this form. So that 
8. When the intention requires this form to 
contain things of a volatile nature, the best way 
is to order the rotula to be washed over with 
some proper oil or essence, before it is to be 
taken by the patient: by which method, we 
need not fear such a loss, as when volatile sub- 
stances are mix’d with the mass while hot. 
9. For external ornaments to this form, there is 
here no need to say more than we have at §.188. 
n° 12. 
10. The number of ingredients for this form, 
should be less than in the table (§.188 n° 13.); 
coming nearest to that or the bolus (§.129. 
n° 9.). 
§.202. The ORDER of placing the ingredients 
for this form, in a prescription, is the same with 
that of the tablet §.189. 
§.202. The QUANTITY or weight of each 
rotula should be less than than that of the tablet 
(§.191.) being usually about ℈j. or ʒß. tho'
the quantity of this form, as well as the tablet, is 
seldom determined either by weight or measure.
§.204.

141 Of Sugar-Cakes.
§.204. The DOSE of this form, like that of the 
tablet (§.192.), is also determined by number, as 
n° j, ij, iij, &c. or else by weight, agreeable to the 
different strength and proportion of the ingredients. 
§.205. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be sent to the patient at one time, is the 
same with that of the tablet (§.193.): But it is 
a form which cannot be very conveniently made 
extemporaneously, especially when its ingredients 
are the syrups and juices at §.201. n° 4. 7. 
§.206. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, may be pretty well 
understood from what has been said on this head at 
§.194.): for the proportion is the same as in tab- 
lets, except two or three particulars. As, 
1. We generally use a greater proportion of 
sugar for this form, with respect to the other 
ingredients (§.194. n° 1.); for reasons men- 
tioned at §.201. n° 1. 4. 5. 
2. Hence, to reduce the acid juices (§.201. 
n° 4.) to a consistence for cakes, will take up 
fix or eight times as much sugar: ʒj. or ʒjß of 
the essences (ib. n° 5.) require ʒij of sugar; 
and the like quantity of sugar is necessary to 
make up gutt. xx. of essential or aromatic oils. 
3. The dressing or washing this form (per 
§.201. n° 8.) with essences or essential oils of 
the like nature, is to be also done in the pre- 
ceeding proportion.  
§.207. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
Apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
tablet (§.195.). supposing a change of name. 
The due preparation is supposed to be previously 
known by the apothecary, who ought to manage 
it so, as to let the dissipation of volatile parts be 
as small as possible. The acid juices, essences, and 
aromatic oils (§.201. n° 4. 5.) are not to be 
mixed

142 Sugar-Cakes.
mixed with the sugar till it is boiled up to a con- 
sistence, and is beginning to cool and harden; as 
well for the foresaid reason, as because it will hin- 
der the sugar from hardening to that degree which 
the form requires. 
§.208. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is hardly any ways different 
from that of the tablet, (at §.196.). 
§.209. The USE is also much the same (as at 
§.197.). To which we may add, that rotulœ made 
up with acid juices, stand well recommended for 
abating thirst in inflammatory disorders. 
§.210. Take the following SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1. Rotulæ purgantes, antihelminticæ, pro infante 
ad exemplum. 
H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 233. 
ꝶ. Semin. absinth. ʒij.
Mercur. dulcis ℈iv. 
Diagrydii ʒj. 
Sacchar. aq. still. tanaceti solut. ℥ijß.
M. exactissimè F. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis drach. ij ad iij alternis die- 
bus, manè, vacuo ventriculo capienda. 
2. Rotulæ contra dolores a partu. V. l. c. p. 220. 
ꝶ Matris perlar. 
Corall. rubr. ppt. aa ʒij. 
Laudan. gr. vj. 
M. exactissmè, dein cum sacchar. aq. 
cinnam. solut. & inspissat. ℥ijß. 
Redige in rotulas, paulo ante effusio- 
nem addendo 
Ol. cinnam. stillat. gtt. iv. 
S. Rotulœ anodynes. Capiat drach. ij. omni semihora, 
superbibendo vini rhenani unc. ß. donee dolor mi- 
tescit: dein detur tantundem mane saltem & vesperi. 
3.

143 Of Infusions. 
3. Rotulæ roborantes ventriculum debilem 
frigidum. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat. menth. 
Absinth. aa gtt. x. 
Essent. myrrh. Boerh. ʒij. 
Sacch. albiss. aq. menth. solut. & in- 
spissat. ℥ v. 
F. l. a. rotultæ. 
S. Rotulœ stomachicœ. Capiat drach. ij vel iij ter, 
quater de die, horis medicis. 
4. Rotulæ adversus sitim. 
ꝶ. Sacch. albissmi, subtiliss. pulverisat. 
℥iij.
Leni igne calefactis immisce 
Succi pomi citrei rec. ʒv. 
Flaved. ejusdem tenuiter rasœ ℈j. 
F. l. a. rotulæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Unam alteramve ore detineat assiduè. 
Nota. There is no need to take notice here of 
several other saccharine compositions used formerly 
by the ancient physicians, such as pasta regia, mas- 
sa panis, pineolatum mustaceum buccellatum, &c. for 
these have been long ago turned over from the 
shops of apothecaries to those of confectioners. 
Of INFUSIONS for Internal Use. 
§.211. AN Infusion, is a fluid, internal me- 
dicine, made by macerating proper 
ingredients in a liquid menstruum, without boil- 
ing: by which means, their finer parts, chiefly, are 
dissolved

144 Of Infusions. 
dissolved and retained by the liquor. The diffe- 
rent kinds of menstruums, and ways of infusing the 
ingredients, give different names to this form; 
which we shall mention hereafter, §.221. 
§.212. The MATTER for composing an Infu- 
sion is of three kinds: (1) the menstruum or sol-
vent; (2) the solvend; and lastly, (3) the ac- 
cessories. 
1. The menstruum is either (1) aqueous: as 
common and distilled waters, milk, whey, some 
watery decoction, the phlegm of vitriol, &c.
Or (2) vinous: as wines of all sorts, cyder, per- 
ry, meade, ale, must, &c. Or (3) spirituous: 
as common spirit of wine, alcohol, strong wa- 
ters, and other inflammable or fermented li- 
quors. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be infused, 
are, every thing fit for internal use, which pos- 
sess medicinal virtues capable of being extracted 
without boiling, by macerating in some hot or 
cold menstruum (n° 1.): of this kind there are 
a great many vegitable substances, few of the 
fossil or mineral class; but fewest of all among 
the animal substances.  
3. The accessories are either (1) such as pro- 
mote the solution, by (α) sharpening the men- 
struum, and making it fitter to penetrate, or 
else (ß) by opening the body of the solvend, 
or accommodating the texture of the solvend to 
the menstruum: for which purposes, salts of 
various kinds are used, both acid, alcaline, and 
neutral; and sometimes, tho' but seldom, in- 
flammable spirits, obtained by fermentation, 
are made use of, and that either per se, or mix’d 
and impregnated with the aromatic parts of ve- 
getables. Or (2) there are other accessories 
which are added after the infusion is compleat- 
ed, in order to increase the medicinal virtues or 
correct

145 Of Infusions. 
correct some noxious and unpleasant quality: to 
which head belong syrups, elœosacchara, ho- 
ney, soft confections, tinctures, essences, spirits, 
wine, &c. 
§.213. A proper ELECTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form seems to be more necessary than 
in any other, as they are so very numerous and dif- 
ferent in their natures. For no one can expect to 
succeed well in compositions of this kind, who is 
ignorant of the texture and disposition of the sol- 
venda (§.212. n° 2.) or ingredients to be infused, 
with the nature and dissolving power of the several 
menstruums (ib. n° 1.), and the properties or effects 
which the accessories (ib. n° 3.) may produce upon 
each. But as we suppose the prescriber to be pre- 
viously acquainted (per §.7. 8. 104.) with these; 
we shall comprise what we have to say upon this 
head in a few words. 
1. Water and watery menstruums dissolve salts, 
gums, mucilages, sopes, and that part which 
gives smell and taste to vegetables, when it is 
not too closely confined in their substance. 
Water makes the better menstruum for these 
substances, as it is purer, and less mix’d or sa- 
turated with the particles of foreign bodies. 
It will not, of itself alone, dissolve oils, fats, 
balsams, resins, or sulphurs; but it may be 
assisted and accommodated to such things by 
using alcaline salts, sugar, and inflammable spi- 
rits. Nor will it, of itself, dissolve stones, 
earths, metals and semimetals: but it may be 
qualified to dissolve these by adding a salt which 
is mildly or vehemently acid, and sometimes by 
the addition of one that is alcaline, or even 
neutral. 
2. Alcohol of wine dissolves the aromatic spi- 
ritus rector (or what gives the smell and taste 
L in

146 Of Infusion. 
in vegetables), oils of die like nature, balsoms, 
refins, soft sopes, volatile alcaline salts, and 
fix’d salts of the same kind, after they are made 
exceeding dry. It scarce dissolves any thing of 
other salts, nor of stones or earths; nor even of 
gums, common sulphur, metals or semi-metals: 
yet it will enter the substance and draw a tinc- 
ture from those bodies, when assisted by the in- 
tervention of a fix’d alcaline or lixivious salt. 
3. Now as the common inflammable spirits 
or strong waters (§.212. n° 1. (3).) consist of 
alcohol, water, and an acid, mix’d together in 
various proportions, according to the more or 
less strength or height of such liquors; we may 
readily perceive from what we have but now 
said (n° 1. 2.), the effects such liquors must
have upon bodies of the several kinds there 
mentioned. 
4. If to the forementioned principles (n° 3.) 
we add a subtle oil, almost like alcohol, we 
have then a menstruum of the same properties 
and consistence with wines of all sorts (§.212. 
n° 1. 2.) of which those are the basis: but with 
this difference, that some wines have more and 
others less spirit, some abound with the acid, 
and others are more repleat and smoothed with 
the oil. From whence we may, without much 
difficulty, understand the dissolving power of 
vinous menstruums, upon the several foremen- 
tioned substances (n° 1. 2.) 
5. Hence also appears, what simples in the 
three kingdoms of the materia medica (§.212. 
n° 2.) are suitable to each kind of these men- 
struums; observing that their solution is to be 
promoted, not by boiling, but is to be effected 
by macerating in the cold, or at most, in a strong 
heat. 
6.

147 Of Infusions. 
6. Among vegetables, those simples are most 
suitable for this intention, which being treated 
by a gentle heat, (either alone or mix’d with 
boiling water) afford essential oils and simple 
waters for medical uses *: to these we may add 
inspissated juices, sopes, gums, resins, and things 
compounded of these; as also, substances whose 
virtues are rather lock’d up, than set at liberty 
by the force of fire, or whose efficacies lodge 
in a substance capable of dissolution in some of 
those menstruums (n° 1. 2. 3. 4.), and are not 
so closely confin’d in the earthly and unactive 
parts of their composition, but that they may be 
disengaged from thence without boiling: of which 
nature we find many things in the tribe of eme- 
tics, cathartics, paregorics, emollients, astrin- 
gents, vulneraries, refrigerants, aperients, sa- 
ponacea, stimulantia, &c. 
7. The animal kingdom of the materia me- 
dica affords not many things fit to part with 
their virtues by infusion, besides a few infects, 
with castor, musk, civet, some calculi and ster- 
cora. In the mineral class, the chief are the 
ambers and sulphurs, copper, iron, antimony, 
and preparations from these. 
8. But as the several substances before enu- 
merated (n° 6. 7.) are not promiscuously and 
equally fitted to communicate their virtues to 
all menstruums (n° 1. to 4.) alike; it is there- 
fore our business to chuse out such a solvent as 
we know to be best fitted, by its consistence and 
principles to extract the parts we want to have 
separated. When one menstruum alone is unfit 
L2 for 
* See Boerhaave’s Chemistry: vol. II. Process. I. XV. 
XXIII. 


148 Of Infusions.
for all the parts we want, what have we to do, 
but to make a combination of two or more. 
And when that is insufficient or repugnant to 
our intention, we must have recourse to some 
of the accessories (§.212. n° 3 (1).). But 
the virtues and choice of these is sufficiently ap- 
parent from loc. cit. and §.213. n° 1. to 4. 
9. For the rest, things very unpleasant to the 
smell and taste should be avoided (in liquid and 
dissusive, and consequently) in this form as much 
as possible; more especially when it is prescrib’d 
for infants, nice patients, or for a common 
drink. 
10. The accessories of the second class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)) have often no occasion to enter an 
infusion. But if such should be required, they 
ought to be capable of an entire solution in the 
menstruum, without precipitating the parts 
which are already dissolved, and suspended there- 
in (consult §.102. n° 9. 10. 11. 12.). If you 
use any correctors, be careful you don’t mis- 
use them. (See §.84. 85. 96 to 103.) 
11. We may be pretty free as to the number 
of ingredients for this form; yet it ought not 
to be over-stuffed (per §.29). 
§.214. For the ORDER of prescribing this 
form, the ingredients to be infused take the first 
place: and among these the animal substances 
precede the vegetable, and the mineral take the 
last place. Those who are still more exact, range 
the parts of vegetables according to their pre- 
cedency; as first roots, then herbs, leaves, tops, 
flowers, seeds, berries, woods, barks, spices, 
fruits, juices, and lastly (if there are to be any) 
purgatives, with their correctors. Next to the 
ingredients to be infused, are subjoined the acces- 
sories of the first class (§.212. n°3. (1.)): then
follows

149 Of Infusion.
follows the menstruum; and the series is closed by 
the latter class of accessories (§.212. n° 3. (2.)). 
§.215. The DOSE is various, being more or 
less in proportion to the strength of the ingredi- 
ents and menstruum, the different intention of the 
physician, the age and other circmstances of the 
patient, &c. (per §.66.). But in general, watery 
infusions are given from ℥j. to iij, jv, v, or vj; Vi- 
nous, from ℥ß to ℥j, ij, iij or iv. Spirituous, 
from ʒij. to ℥ß. ℥j or ij. Sometimes the rules 
mentioned (§.67. n° 4. 5.) take place in the dose 
of this form. But frequently it is determined not 
by weight but by measure: v. g. Cochlear. j, ij. 
&c. or cyathum (§.58. n° 7. (2.)), or to be 
taken in the quantity of a tea or coffee-cup full, 
&c. or to drink as much as is liked, for an ordi- 
nary drink. Lastly, if the ingredients are to be 
portioned out by the patient or his attendants;
and to be infused in scalding water, in the man- 
ner of tea; then, as much as may be order’d to be 
used at a time as will lye between the fingers, in 
a spoon or tea-cup, or, to be more exact, a pugil, 
ʒij, iij, or ℥ß.  
§.216. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, has very un- 
certain bounds; making sometimes no more than 
one dose (§.215.): as in the infusions of emetics, 
cathartics, &c. either in wine or water. But when
intended for an alterative, or to purge the whole 
habit, it is frequently prescribed to ℔. j, iij, jv, 
more; according as the indication and other 
circumstances require. (Consult §.67. 68. 92. n° 4.) 
The price too, of some things restrains their quan- 
tity (per §.66. n° 14.): therefore the infusion of 
tincture of porcupine bezoar is seldom order’d in a 
larger quantity than to ℥jv, vj or viij. Sometimes, 
a medicated wine or ale that is to be used for a 
long time, or as a common drink, is order’d to 
L3 be

150 Of Infusions. 
be made in the quantity of a hogshead, or a whole 
pipe at a time. From what has been here said, 
and from what we shall observe in the proportion 
following, it will be no difficult matter to deter- 
mine how much of the ingredients to be infused 
should be order’d at one time, if the infusion of 
them is refer’d to the patient or his assistants. 
§.217. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for medicines of this kind, 
there is hardly any general rules to be given, since 
the proportion must vary with the several circum- 
stances of the things to be infused, the nature of 
the menstruum, the way of using, the state of the 
patient himself, and many other circumstances, 
with which it must vary, Observe therefore 
1. The ingredients to be macerated (§.212. 
n° 2.) are generally order’d in two or three 
times a greater quantity for an infusion, than 
when they are to be given crude or in sub- 
stance: and this, in proportion as the virtue or 
strength of the medicine is more or less with 
respect to its bulk, and according as the men- 
struum used extracts the virtues either wholly, 
or but in part. 
2. Herbs, their leaves, tops and flowers, are 
usually order’d for this form by manipules or 
pugils; and fruits are mostly prescribed by num- 
ber (per §.58 n° 7. (2.)): but the proportion 
of emetics and cathartics should be determin’d 
by weight; except the leaves of asarum, which 
are oftner order’d by number. 
3. The rest of the ingredients (§.212.) 
which are neither emetic nor cathartic, may be 
order’d in a quantity sufficient to answer the in- 
tention and proper dose (§.215. 216.): nor is 
it possible to assign the proportion of these in- 
gredients in general, by rules more determi- 
nate and particular (per §.87. 88. 217. n° 1.)
4. 

151 Of Infusions.
4. The proportion of the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.) with respect to the ingredients to be in- 
fused, is also no less various and uncertain: for, 
very often it is six, eight or twelve times the 
quantity of the other ingredients; sometimes 
it is much less than any of those quantities, at 
other times it is much larger, ascending up to 
twenty, thirty, and even a hundred times the 
quantity of the things to be infused. 
5. The proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients in short, varies with their specific 
gravity; and as their virtues are more or less 
contracted or strong, and their extraction more 
or less difficult to make: it also differs as the 
menstruum is more or less active and strong, 
and as the intention may require the liquor to 
be more or less saturated with the medicinal par- 
ticles; all which have their force in demanding 
a greater or less proportion of the menstruum 
to a certain quantity of the ingredients. 
6. Besides these considerations (n° 5.), the 
proportion of the menstruum to the ingredients, 
should be always large when the latter are un- 
pleasant, or intended for infants, nice patients, 
or a constant drink. Hence, in making medi- 
cated ales, wines, hippocras, must, &c. espe- 
cially when they are to be fermented; in such 
case, the quantity of the menstruum should be 
from thirty to a hundred times larger than that 
of the ingredients to be infused. 
7. The proportion of accessories of the first 
class §.212. n° 3. (1), which promote the 
action of the menstruum, is order’d more or less 
according as they are stronger or weaker in 
themselves, or as the other ingredients are 
more or less hard to be wrought upon, as the 
menstruum naturally possesses more or less 
strength and activity, and as it has a more or  
L4 less

152 Of Infusions. 
less congruity or affinity to the particular sub- 
stances to be extacted: so that hence, ʒj or ij. 
of these accessories are sometimes order’d to 
each pound of the menstruums; but they are 
frequently used in a much less proportion. The 
spirituous kind of these accessories are often or- 
der’d in no determinate quantity, if intended for 
irroration, or to be sprinkled upon the ingre- 
dients. 
8. The accessories of the latter class (§.212. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are intended to correct or 
promote the action of the infusion as a medi- 
cine, may be order’d in a proportion equal to 
the intention to be answer’d. Nor can we pre- 
scribe any general limits to this proportion. But 
sugar and things of the like nature are com- 
monly order’d in the proportion of part j to 
viij, or x parrs of the liquor: but in making 
hippocras or aromatized wine, they are used in 
the proportion of a half,, third or quarter part, 
with respect to the menstruum. Tho’ the de- 
gree of dulcification is sometimes referr’d to the 
judgment and palate pf the patient. See 
§.85. 90. 
§.218. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction for 
making up this form, is of two kinds: (1) one is, 
when the process of infusion is committed to the 
apothecary; (2) the other, when the ingredients 
are only transmitted by the apothecary, and the 
care of infusion referr’d to the patient or his at- 
tendants. 
§.219. In the find case (§.218.), the subscrip- 
tion contains. 
1. The preparation of the ingredients in order 
for infusion: which requires, (1.) a comminu- 
tion or reduction of them into a gross powder, 
and is effected by cutting, rasping, or pounding; 
which

153 Of Infusions. 
which operations are omitted in substances na- 
turally of a pulverulent consistence, as filings of 
iron, the ashes of vegitables, &c. (2.) The 
making them up into nodules, bundles and bags, 
with muslin or fine linen; which contrivance is 
used when the virtues are not required to be ex- 
tracted all at once, or when we would save the 
trouble of straining, or when the ingredients are 
very ponderous, and require to be suspended 
in the menstruum, left falling to the bottom 
they might not be so apt to dissolve or commu- 
nicate their strength to the liquor. For these rea- 
sons, sometimes all, or only one or two of the in- 
gredients should be thus done up. (3.) Irroration 
or sprinkling; when we use liquid accessories 
(§.212. n° 3. (1.)), as the spirits of vitriol, 
sulphur, wine, roses, &c. Hot water is also 
sometimes used for this process, when dry in- 
gredients require to be opened and softened by 
heat and moisture, that they may more easily 
part with their virtues in a cold menstruum. 
(4.) A proper vessel, wherein the ingredients 
are to be put. But that is very seldom men- 
tion’d in the prescription; unless when for fear of 
a dissipation of the virtues, we would advise the 
infusion to be made chemically in a bolt-head; 
or when the fermentation with ale or must re- 
quires the materials to be put up in a cask. 
2. Infusion, which is perform’d with a men- 
struum either hot or cold. Watery menstruums 
only (§.212. n° 1. (1.) ) are poured on hot or 
scalding: the vinous and spirituous (ib. (2.)(3.)) 
are used cold. 
3. Maceration, which is also either hot or 
cold. Cold maceration is used when there is 
required but a weak extraction of the virtues; 
or when the ingredients are of such an open 
texture, and the menstruum so penetrating as 
not

154 Of Infusions.
not to require any heat; or when we are appre- 
hensive that heat will occasion some improper 
change in the medicine. Maceration with heat 
is used when the contrary of these obtain, or 
when the menstruum is of that kind (n° 2.) as 
will bear the heat of infusion; or when, after 
it is applied cold, the addition of heat will pro- 
mote its action. This heat is communicated ei- 
ther by what is term’d insolation, or by diges- 
tion, in a place or furnace proper for that pur- 
pose, using the medium water, sand or ashes, 
&c. whereby various degrees of heat are given, 
but all lower than to make the menstruum boil 
(per §.211.) the degree of heat should vary al- 
so, as the season of the year is more or less fa- 
vourable to the operation, as the texture of the 
ingredients is more or less fit for suck a process, 
and as the intention may require a more or less 
speedy extraction. Sometimes the extraction 
may be promoted by shaking the mixture now 
and then at intervals. The time or length of 
maceration is to be limited either from its 
effects, ’till the menstruum has acquired the re- 
quisite colour, smell, taste and strength; or, 
which is more usual, for so many hours, days, 
nights, &c. according as the ingredients and 
menstruum are known to be disposed for a more 
or less speedy extraction, or as it is intended to 
be stronger or weaker. The vessel is almost 
constantly order’d to be closed during the ma- 
ceration; unless when the structure of the vessel 
makes it unnecessary, or the manner in which 
the maceration is to be perform’d forbids it: 
the first obtains in the phiala chemica, or long 
and narrow-neck’d bolt-head; the last in fer- 
mentations. 
4. Depuration, This is either (1.) unnecessary, 
as when the ingredients to be macerated are 
made

155 Of Infusions. 
made into a nodule, or included in a bag (per 
n° 1. (2.)): and in that case, after a due ex- 
traction has been made, the nodule may be ei- 
ther left suspended in the liquor during its use, 
or else it may be taken out, and by pressing it 
strongly, the liquor will be more saturated. Or, 
(2.) when the ingredients are to be infused loose, 
and are not very light, the liquor may be cla- 
risied barely by standing still; so that the purer 
part of the liquor may be gradually poured off 
fine from the sediment, which will reside at 
bottom undissolved: and so much of the infu- 
sion as remains behind turbid with the residuum, 
may be afterwards separated clear by filtration; 
which is a method well enough adapted to me- 
dicated ales, wines, and spirituous infusions. Or 
(3.) the depuration may be effected by trans- 
mitting all the liquor thro' a strainer or flannel 
bagg, term’d (manica hippocratis) Hippocrates’s 
sleeve: and here also, towards the end, a strong 
expression of the residuum may be order’d, when 
the liquor is required to be very strong, and 
not over clear. Thus are depurated watery in- 
fusions, and clareta or hippocratic wines: the 
latter of which may be further purified by an 
addition of milk before percolation, whose vis- 
cid parts, stopping up the larger pores of the 
filter, will intercept the finer lee. Or (4.) the 
infusion may be clarified by filtrating thro' bi- 
bulous or spongy paper, which as it is the neat- 
est method, making the liquor perfectly clear, 
so it is the slowest and most tedious: it is used 
for liquors that require the highest purity, and 
a separation of all the parts which are not most 
intimately dissolved and combined therewith, 
and when, at the same time, the quantify to be 
filtrated is not very large. It is therefore dur- 
able for spirituous infusions, and emetic or an-  
timoniated

156 Of Infusions. 
timoniated wines. But we must be cautious how 
we treat such as are volatile, and just come from 
the fire, by the two last methods (n° (3.) (4.));
left they should be thus deprived of their vir- 
tues. 
5. The addition of such, accessories (§.212. n° 3. 
(2.) as alter or correct the infusion as a medi- 
cine: where (besides the things at §.213. n° 10.) 
we are to observe, that the sugar, and such 
things ought to be mix’d with hippocratic wines. 
&c. before their depuration (per n° 4. (4.); 
that by passing through the filter together, they 
may not be liable to render the liquor soul. 
6. The receptacle, is a glass phial, with a nar- 
row mouth: which may be order’d to be kept 
stopp’d very close; if there be any danger of a 
corruption or dissipation of the medicinal parts 
of the liquor, from a too free admission of the 
air. 
§.220. But when the ingredients are only to be 
transmitted to the patient by the apothecary, with- 
out other preparations (per §.218. (2.)); in that 
case, all that regards the infusion (§.219. n° 1. 
(4.) to §.220.) is not to enter the subscription: 
but the comminution, mixation, and forming into 
a nodule, &c. (per. §.219. n° 1. (1.) (2.) ) may 
be subjoined, when there is occasion by subscrib- 
ing e.g. conscissa, tusa, grosso, moado, M. and if the 
species are to be sent loose, add, F. collectio, or 
D. ad Chartam; for a paper, in that case, performs 
the office of a receptacle. But when the species are 
to be made into a nodule, &c. you may write: 
includantur nodulo vel sindoni. As for irroration 
(per §.219. n° 1. (3.)), that is left sometimes to 
the apothecary, and sometimes to the patient: if 
to the patient; the liquor for that purpose is to be 
transmitted to him by the apothecary with the 
other

157 Of Infusions. 
other ingredients, unless it be one of common 
use. 
§.221. The SIGNATURE or direction to the 
patient for this form, is also various, according to 
the different circumstances (§.218.—221.). 
Hence, 
1. If the preparation by the apothecary (§.219.) 
takes place, the name of the infusion will then be 
various; according as the menstruum (§.212. 
n° 1.), the ingredients to be infused (ib. n° 2.), the 
accessories (ib. n° 3.), the general quantity (§.216.), 
and the depuration (§.219. n° 4.), are different. 
An infusion prescribed for in but one dose, is 
without any regard to the menstruum, ingre- 
dients, or manner of preparation, termed hau- 
stus, a draught: but when it comprises more 
doses than one, and is made with water for a 
menstruum, it passes then by the bare name of 
an infusion, infusum. But if the menstruum used, 
be milk, whey, wine, ale, mead, &c. The in- 
fusion, in that case, borrows its name from 
thence. If the menstruum was spirituous, it 
takes the name of tinture. And lastly, if the 
ingredients are spices; and the menstruum, aro- 
matic distilled waters, wine and its spirit; 
sweetened with a large quantity of sugar (per 
§.217. n° 8.), and the clarification extremely 
fine (per §.219. n° 4.(3.)): the name then 
usually given to it, is, claretum or nectar; or, 
if cinnamon is the chief of the spices, and wine 
be the menstruum, it may be only term’d hippo- 
cratic wine. To each of these names may be 
added another, denoting its virtues; and then 
may be subjoined what relates to the using of it, 
which may be easily, deduced from §.60. 215. 
It is also sometimes proper to advise the patient 
to let the vessel and infusion stand in a cold 
place, especially when the general quantity of  
it


158 Of Infusions. 
it is large, and made in the summer time; and 
this, to prevent it from fermenting, turning 
sower, or musty. 
2. If the process of infusion is to be left to 
the patient (per §.220.), and the ingredients 
are to be sent to him by the apothecary, done 
up in very porous linen (per §.219. n° 1.); 
it is then term’d a nodule: but it they are sent 
loose, in a paper, they are named species; or 
else the a medicata, when they are to be infused 
by a little at a time (§.215.) like common tea. 
Here, also, should be added a name, importing 
its virtues. Afterwards should be wrote the 
menstruum, manner, proportion, order, time, 
&c. wherein the infusion, maceration and de- 
puration are to be perform’d; just as they are 
deliver’d in the subscription, at (§.219.): but 
they should be deliver’d in terms, and methods 
of preparation which are intelligible, and suited 
to the conveniency of the patient or his atten- 
dants (per §.60. n° 5. 6.). For the rest, what 
regards the taking and keeping, may be di- 
rected the same as (at n° 1.) preceding.
§.222. The USE of these formulæ, made by 
infusion, is very universal, being adapted to almost 
every disease, age and intention; provided the 
ingredients and menstruum are chose so as to be 
agreeable to each other, and suitable to the indi- 
cation (per §.213.). These formulæ are indeed 
sometimes less agreeable to infants, when the in- 
gredients have a considerable smell and taste; 
otherwise many things may be commodiously in- 
sinuated even to them, under the form of common 
drink, which they could not be so well induced to 
take under any other form. To conclude, though 
these formulæ are best fitted to penetrate the in- 
most recesses of the morbid body, they are yet fre-
quently

159 Forms by Infusion. 
quently prohibited, by their tedious preparation, 
in cases where delay is dangerous. 
§.223. Take the following examples in these 
formulæ. 
1. Vinum emeticum, antimoniatum, validè movens. 
H. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 131. 209. 
(1.) ꝶ. Croci metallor. gr. viij. 
Vini rhenan. ℥ij. 
Stent in frigida infusione per noctem: 
manè per chartam filtratis adde 
Oxymell. scillit. ʒvj. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haustus emeticus, adulto pro dosi, manè exhihendus. 
(2.) Aliud, mitius pro infante rachitico. 
V. ibid. p. 256. 
ꝶ. Radic. ipecacuanhœ ℈j. 
Vini albi gallici ℥j. 
Sacchari albi ʒij. 
Infusa totam noctem, depurata, exhibe 
manè. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro dosi, manè capiendus. 
2. Collectio purgans, roborans, anti-rachitica. ibid. 
ꝶ. Rhei selecti ℥ß. 
Mirobalan. citrin. sine nucleis ʒiij. 
Agarici trochiscati ℈ij. 
Conscissa, tusa groso modo, M. D. ad 
chartam. 
S. Species pro cerevisia medicata, que insundantur 
frigidœ cum Cerivis. fortioris ℔. iv. per horas xxiv. 
Utatur hoc potu pro familiari quotidiano, spatio iv. 
septimanarum, &c. 
3.

160 Forms by Infusion. 
3. Nodulus diureticus, in hydrope conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ciner. stipit. fabar. 
Genistœ aa ℔ ß. 
Inclusa nodulo exhibeantur. 
S. Nodulus diureticus, cui infundantur vini rhenani 
℔ iv. frigidœ, stent per noctem: tum, relicto intrœ 
vinum nodulo, illius ℥iij. ter de die bibantur. 
4. Serum lactis anti-scorbuticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Acetosellœ m. jß. 
Betoniœ. 
Chaerophylli aa m. ß. 
Tamarindor. ℥jß. 
Conscissa insunde cum 
Seri lactis œstivi ℔ iij. 
Spatio horæ, in calore sere servido, abs-
que ebullitione tamen, dein per 
linteum expressis admisce. 
Syrup e succo citri. 
Rubi idœi. 
Violacei aa ℥j. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat hujus unc. j. omni semihorio 
inter diu. 
5. Thea medicata anti-pthisica. 
V. l. c. p. 199. & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. caryophillat. mont. ℥ij 
Liquoritœ ℥jß. 
Herb. veronie. 
Heder. terrestr. aa m. j. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Centaur. min. aa pug. iij. 
Semin. fœnicul. dulc. ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S.

161 Forms by Infusion. 
S. Thea balsamica. Hujus ℥ß insundatur cum aquœ
serventis v vel vj vasculis these potui dicatis: stent 
vase clauso, calida, per aliquot minuta, tum bibat 
omni hora vasculum simile plenum,  in quo prius  
dissolutum fit'mellis virginœi cochl. parv. Eodem 
modo parantur theœ medicatœ ex omnibus vegetan- 
tium partibus; prœipuè particulis, adstringenti- 
bus, amarulentis, aromaticis fixis, pauco oleo gau- 
dentibus: e.g. 
Flor. chaimœm. 
Sem. lin
Cort. aurant.
Iead. gent. &c.
Sumit. absinth R.
Fumar. 
Centaur. min. &c. 
6. Infusum anti-hydropicum, fluorem lymphæ con- 
cilians pro plebejo. 
V. Boerh. 1. c. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristol. utriusque aa ℥jß.
Zinziberis ʒvj. 
Summit, absinth. vulg. 
Centaur. min. 
Bacc. junip, aa ℥j. 
Sal. absinthii ʒß. 
Concissa, tusa, mista D. ad chartam. 
S. Species. Infundantur cum sp. juniperi vulg. ℔. iv. 
insolentur per aliquot dies, vase clauso, turn bibat 
℥j. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, cum regimine. 
M 7.

162 Forms by Infusion. 
7. Infusum acidulatum refrigcrans in sebre ar- 
dente bibendum. 
♃. Fr. cydon. medioc. 
Limon. rec. aa n°. j. 
Pipon. aurant. n°. vj. 
In lamellis tenuissimis conscisis assunde 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. iv. 
Scent per noctem, & post decantationem 
adde
Syr. diamor. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat œger, haustulum, subinde, 
ad libitum. 
8. Infusum aperiens, in hydrope, icterio, &c. 
exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. raph. rustic. consciss. ℥ij 
Sem. synap. contus. ℥j. 
Millep. viv. contus. n°. C. 
Infundantur per noctem, vase stricte 
clauso, in 
Aq. font. ebullient. ℔. j ß. adde 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥iv hor. med.
(1.)

163 Forms by Infusion.
(1.) Infusum catharticum. 
♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒij ß. 
Rad. rhabarh. ʒjß. 
Sal. absinth. ℈j. 
Infundantur per noctem in q. s. aq. font. 
ebullient, pro ℥ij. adde 
Sp. lavend. comp. ʒij. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. ʒvj. 
S. Haustus purgans mane cum regimine sumendus. 
(2.) ♃. Fol. senn. alex. ʒiij. 
Cort. intern. sambuc. ʒß. 
Sal. ebishamens. ʒiij. 
Ebulliant parumper in aq. font. q. s. ut 
exprimatur ℥ij. adde 
Syr. de spin. cerv. ℥ß. 
S. Ut prior. 
9. Claretum purgans & roborans 
ꝶ. Rad. calam. aromat. ʒvj. 
Cort. magellanic. 
Rad. rhabarh. opt. 
Fol. senn. S. stipit. aa ℥ß. 
Agaric. trochiscat. ʒiij. 
Cinnamom. acut. ʒij. 
Cubebar. ʒj. 
Conscissa, infunde in vini rhenani opt. 
℔. jv. per triduum, vase clauso, loco 
tepido, subinde concute: turn adde 
sacchari albi ℔. ß. trajice aliquoties 
per manicam Hippocratis. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Dosis mane unus vel alter cyathus. 
M2 10.


164 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
10. Cerivisia anti-scorbutica. 
Vid. Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 191. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. cochlear.
Erucœ. 
Erysimi. 
Trisol. aquat. aa m. j. 
Semin. rec. contus. nasturt. hort. 
Raphan. hort. aa ℥ij. 
Flor. centaur. min. ℥j. 
Rad. raphan. rustic. ℥v. 
Conscissa reconde in cerevisiæ recentis 
& servescentis 1/2 dolio. 
S. Sit pro potu assiduo. 
Medicated ales, wines, &c. by infusion, are
now come so much into difuse, that we shall not 
trouble our reader with a larger detail of speci- 
mens than what is given by our author. 
Of DECOCTIONS for internal Use. 
§.224. A DECOCTION or apozem is a liquid, in- 
ternal medicine, pretty much like the 
infusion (§.211.) proceeding; but with this diffe- 
rence, that as the infusion is made without boiling, 
the apozem has both its ingredients and menstruum 
boiled over the fire. Hence we see wherein the 
apozem differs from the infusion. The apozem or 
decoction goes also under various denominations, 
agreeable to particular circumstances; whereof, 
those names that are now retained in use, shall be 
mention’d hereafter. 
§.225. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
in general the same as for the infusion (§.212.), 
and may be also distinguished into three kinds:
viz. 

165 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
viz. the menstruum or liquor, the solvenda or in- 
gredients, and the accessories, which assist or cor- 
rect. 
1. The menstruum for this, like as in the 
proceeding form, is of three kinds: aqueous, vi- 
nous, and spirituous; for which, conside the in- 
fusion (§. 212. n° 1.) proceeding. 
2. The solvenda or ingredients to be boiled, 
are also in like manner taken from either of 
the three kingdoms of animal, vegetable, or 
mineral substances; provided they are fit for in- 
ternal use; and tho’ they part with few or none 
of their virtues in a bare maceration or infusion, 
may yet communicate them sufficiently to a pro- 
per menstruum, by means of boiling. 
3. The accessories are here of the same use, 
and often obtain the same general division as (at 
§.212. n° 3.) of infusions proceeding: where, 
those of the first kind (1.) hold good the same 
here; but those of the latter (2.) are in some 
measure to be varied, as discretion shall indi- 
cate. 
§.226. A proper Choice of the materials for 
this form, is determined not only from the know- 
ledge of what has been said (at §.213.); but also 
from the known force and degree of fire to be ap- 
plied to the menstruum and ingredients in the ope- 
ration of boiling. But the young prescriber will 
be sufficiently instrusted on this head, from having 
learned what we deem previously necessary (per 
§.7. n° 2. 3. §.8. §.104.). So that I shall only 
observe here. 
1. That water and watery menstruums are 
more frequently used, for decoctions than others; 
because they cannot lose any virtues in boiling, 
as others do. Nor are distilled waters so fit for 
this purpose: for if you use those of any strength,
M3 their  


Of Apozems or Decoctions.
their virtues are dissipated in boiling; and if 
you take those of no strength, why may not 
simple water do as well, or better. Mead was 
in the highest repute and greatest use for this 
purpose among the antients; who had some-
times justice on their side for so doing: but in 
our day, we prefer the addition of honey, after 
the decoction is made. The lighter and purer 
your water, the litter for dissolving and extract- 
ing the virtues of your ingredients (§.213. 
n° 1.). 
2. Wine is a menstruum fitter for infusions 
than decoctions, and even though you should 
boil it in a vessel, so close as to prevent any va- 
pour from exhaling, it is a liquor that will be 
the worse for the heat. I therefore chuse, when 
wine is necessary; to add it after the boiling is 
over. But we should except must (which is 
like mead) before it has become wine by fer- 
mentation; because in that state, it rather be- 
longs to the class of aqueous, than vinous or 
spirituous menstruums. 
3. Spirituous menstruums (§.212. n° 1. (3.)) 
however, will bear boiling in chemical glasses 
without any considerable loss or alteration; so 
that they are fitter for this purpose than vinous 
menstruums. 
4. The dissolving power proper to each of 
these menstruums (§.225. n° 1.), is the same 
with what we have described at §. 213. n°. 1. 
to 4; only they act more intensely upon the in- 
gredients, by the force of the fire in boiling: 
so that tho' a decoction may take out more of 
the medicinal particles than an infusion, yet it 
either changes or loses more of the finest and 
most volatile principles, and sometimes draws 
out more than it shou’d.
5.

167 Of Apoxems or Decoctions. 
5. In the mean time, the degree of heat for 
boiling, is not the same for all menstruums; the 
spirituous boil with a less heat than the vinous, 
and both, than the watery: according to which, 
there will be a variation in the dissolving power 
arising from the action of the fire. 
6. Also the greater or less strength and con- 
tinuance of the boiling will make a proportion- 
able difference in the decoction; as some things 
are hurt by a long and violent boiling, others 
require it, and the contrary. 
7. Hence it appears, that ingredients (§.325. 
n° 2.) are fit for a decoction, when (1.) their 
medicinal particles or virtues required are so- 
luble in the determinate menstruum; (2.) when 
at the same time they cannot be so well extracted 
by maceration, as ebullition; when (3.) that ope- 
ration does not dissipate, nor (4.) change their 
virtues, nor (5.) introduce any foreign quality op- 
poring the intention. 
8. Therefore the choice of a proper men- 
struum, with the adapting it by suitable acces- 
sories to particular ingredients, are things of the 
highest consequence in this form as well as infu- 
sions (§. 213. n° 8.), and are both to be directed 
by the same considerations (n° 7.) proceeding; sup- 
posing the ebullition not to change, but augment 
the force of the menstruum and accessories. 
9. A previous and just preparation of the in- 
gredients, of themselves naturally unfit for a de- 
coction, is also none of the least considerations. 
To this head belong comminution of all kinds, 
and previous maceration; which are extremely 
useful in all substances that are dry, hard and 
difficult to dissolve. 
10. The choice of a proper vessel fit for 
making the docoction, is also very necessary; as 
the success of the process and medicines do in a  
M4 great

168 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
great measure depend thereon. (V. n° 3. and 
§.219. n° 1. (4.)), See also what we shall say 
on this head in the subscription, §.231. 
11. He would take a very injudicious course, 
that orders a decoction of a menstruum merely 
aqueous, and ingredients which are earthy, in- 
sipid, stony, refinous, sulphnreous, or oily: 
for such will scarce afford any virtue to a de- 
coction, unless mix'd with the accessories at 
§. 213. n° 1. 
12. The same (n° 11.) holds good also with 
regard to metals, and semi-metals, which do not 
abound with saline parts: tho' by a previous 
ignition, or a long and strong boiling, they 
seem in some measure subject to communicate 
new qualities to water. 
13. There is scarce any thing to be extracted 
by decoction, from most of the solid parts of 
animals; unless you continue the boiling for a 
long time together. Tho’ there are a few sub- 
stances exceptionable; as the porcupine bezoar: 
for that may be even dissolved by a bare ma- 
ceration in the cold. 
14- Those substances which will communi- 
cate their virtues to a menstruum by maceration, 
should not be tortured for that end, by the 
violence of boiling: because the intensity of 
the heat generally changes, more or less, the 
texture and virtues of the medicinal particles. 
But a gentle and short boiling is sometimes al- 
lowable, as it expedites the solution and ex- 
traction. This caution chiefly regards such in- 
gredients as are fresh, and of a soft or light tex- 
ture; as are most ot the parts of vegetables. 
15. Things whose virtues are apt to evapo- 
rate in boiling, should be rather assigned to an 
infusion; but if boiling in this case be necessary, 
it should be the more gentle, short, and per- 
form'd

169 Of Apezems or Decoctions. 
Form’d in a suitable vessel (per n° 6. and 10.) 
This is of consequence in aromatics, alcalescents, 
and such as are sit for the distillation of waters 
and oils *. 
16. Such things as by boiling change their 
virtues into other qualities, disagreeing with 
the intention; should be either boiled not at all, 
or else but gently and for a short time. Asarum 
proves more diuretic than emetic, by boiling. 
Liquorish grows bitter by a long boiling. Fol. 
senœ in a decoction that has had much boiling, 
proves very griping in its operation, &c. 
17. But if the virtues are required to be drawn 
out but in part by the menstruum, and the in- 
gredient be easy to extract; we should then ra- 
ther prefer maceration, or at least use only a 
gentle boiling. R. Rhei, myrobalani, &c. do 
by long boiling impart not only their purging, 
but also astringing qualities to a decoction. Mu- 
cilaginous substances, as rad. symphyti, altheœ, 
malvœ, with many seeds, fruits, juices, and the 
like, do by long boiling give a disagreeable 
viscidity to the liquor, &c. 
18. It is matter of great consequence in de- 
coctions, whether the ingredients to be boiled 
are new or old, dry or green, and fresh gather’d; 
since that permits them to communicate their 
virtues, with more or less difficulty to certain 
menstruums †. 
19. When several ingredients are boiled to- 
gether, we should observe whether and how far 
they promote or retard each others solution; 
and whether or no the same strength and length 
of boiling may be equally suitable to them all. 
For
* F. Boerh. Elem. Chem. l. c. 
† V. Boerh. ibid. vol 11. process. II. n° 5, 6.  


170 Of Apozems or Decoction. 
For there are many things which alone give no 
virtues to a decoction, but boiled with others 
prove very efficacious, and, the contrary. But 
the various times of boiling, required for differ 
rent ingredients and menstruums, we shall de- 
termine hereafter. 
20. With regard to avoiding disagreeable o- 
dours and tastes in this form, the same caution 
holds good here, as mentioned §.213. n° 9. 
A thick slimyness is to be also avoided (per 
n° 17.). 
21. Accessories of the later kind (§.225. 
n° 3.); used in this form for augmenting the me- 
dicinal virtues, are (1.) the same with those enu- 
merated (§.212. n° 3.(2.) §.213. n° 10.). But 
(2.) when many of the medicinal particles re- 
quired are so volatile as to fly off in the boiling, 
it may be perform’d in an alembic, and the con- 
densed vapours returned into the decoction, 
when cold. But sometimes, (3.) when among 
the ingredients there are some of a very soft tex- 
ture, abounding with volatile parts, and so, fit- 
ter for infusion than decoction (per §.213. n° 5. 
to 7.); in that case, those ingredients may be 
infused in the liquor of the decoction after it has 
done boiling, agreeable to the rules of infusion 
at §.211—223; by which means the virtues 
and pleasantness of the medicine will be increas- 
ed, and the formula consisting partly both in 
decoction and infusion, may be term’d decocto- 
infusum. 
22. From what has been said (at n° 21.(3.)), 
we may understand the method of aromatiza- 
tion used by the antients; in the room whereof, 
the moderns substitute a mixture of aromatic 
waters, spirits, tinctures, elæosacchara, &c.
as being more neat and expeditious, §.212. 
n° 3.(2.). 
23.

171 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
23. With regard to the number of ingredients 
for a decoction, the same holds good here, as at 
§. 213. n° 11. of infusions. 
§.227. The ORDER of prescribing or com- 
pounding the ingredients of this form, ought in 
general to be much the same as in (§.214.) infusi- 
ons; especially if the ingredients are to be boiled 
with one equal degree of fire, or sent by the apo- 
thecary to the patient under the form of species, 
bag, nodule, &c. (per §.220.): but if some things 
require to be boiled a longer, and others a shorter 
time, the best method will be to place them next 
to each other, according to the time of their boil- 
ing; to put those which require the least boiling, 
first, and the most, last; unless we can rely on the 
skill and dexterity of the apothecary for this ma- 
nagement. Observe therefore, 
1. That the generality of fossil or mineral 
substances §.226, n° 11. 12; the bones, horns, 
and more tough or even fleshy parts of old ani- 
mals, hard and dry woods, roots, barks, &c. 
which are very refinous and without volatile 
parts; these will bear and require boiling for 
three, four, or six hours, and more. So that it 
is often necessary to open the body of those sub- 
stances by a previous maceration; that they may 
part with their virtues the more freely, per 
§.226. n° 9. 
2. The flesh and other solid parts of young 
animals, woods, barks, stalks, roots, &c. which 
are not so compact as the former, nor abound 
with aromatic particles, but are astringent, bit- 
ter, saponaceous, &c. with those of the nourish- 
ing grain or pulse kind, being laxative or cool- 
ing, diuretic, incrassating, &c; for these, one 
or two hours boiling may be sufficient. 
3.

172 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. Next to these (n° 2.) come vegetable sub- 
stances of a still softer texture; such as soft roots, 
not aromatic but cooling, nourishing, astringing, 
aperient, diuretic or saponaceous; and such as 
are purging, of the more refinous kind; and 
lastly, soft pulpy fruits, which are sweet, acid 
or austere: these will scarce admit of boiling 
beyond the space of twenty minutes, or, at most, 
the space of an hour. 
4. For plants and leaves of a pretty firm tex- 
ture, without aromatic or volatile saline parts, 
whether emollient, astringing, incrassating, re- 
frigerating or aperient; seeds of the like nature, 
but not mucilaginous; woods, roots and barks, 
which are compact, and possess parts of the more 
fix'd aromatic kind: for these, half an hour's 
boiling will be sufficient to extract their medici- 
nal virtues. 
5. Lastly, the most tender parts of vegetables, 
their flowers; with herbs and leaves which are 
subaromatic, vulnerary, bitter, uterine, &c. the 
more tender seeds, berries, fruits, barks and roots 
of the like nature; to, which we may add some 
purgatives, as senna, rhubarb, myrobalans, &c.
liquorish with such roots and seeds as afford a 
mucilage in decoction; all which ought not to
boil above a quarter of an hour. Even for the 
major part of these especially such as are fresh 
gathered and pretty soft), it may be sufficient 
only to infuse them in the scalding liquor, after 
the decoction is removed from the fire, per §.226. 
n° 21.(3.). 
6. Yet the physician may sometimes find rea- 
son to order the boiling to be longer or shorter 
than the times now(n° 1. to 5.) specified; as when 
his intention requires only the extraction of such 
parts as adhere but superficially to the ingredi- 
ents,


173 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
ents, or when, without regarding the former, he 
would obtain such as adhere more intimately. 
7. But what has been hitherto said (n° 1. to 
5.), I would have understood to relate chiefly to 
aqueous decoctions. The vinous, (which do 
not well suit this form (per §.226, n° 2.) and 
spirituous, do not directly fall under the pre- 
ceeding rules: since they require to be made in 
chemical glasses or vessels exactly closed. But 
the latter or spirituous decoctions, boiling with 
a less heat than the others (per §.226. n° 5.), 
do not require so much caution.. 
§.228. the DOSE of this form agrees with that 
of the infusion (§.215); and is therefore to be de- 
duced from thence. 
§.229. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this form 
is also much the same as that of the infusion (at §.216.): 
but it is seldom ever extended beyond ℔ vj or viij; 
nor does it ever amount to that quantity, but when 
the preparation is difficult, the dose large, and to 
be drank at short intervals; supposing the season 
of the year, and the disposition of the decoction to 
keep good, to favour its being made and sent in 
such quantities. 
§.230. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we have little more to 
say than what we have already deliver’d at §.217. 
1. With regard to the solid ingredients 
(§.225.), what has been said at §.217. n° 1. 
to 3. takes place here. 
2. For the proportion of the menstruum 
(§.225. n° 1.) to the ingredients to be boiled, 
that again differs according to the circumstances 
at §.217. n° 5.; and according as the decoction 
is to be made with or without evaporation, 
(per §.226. n° 3. 10. 14.).
3.

174 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
3. If there will be no loss by evaporation, or
if the vapours are to be collected and refunded 
into the decoction (§.226. n° 21); in that 
case, the proportion of the menstruum to the 
ingredients should be the same as for infusions 
(§.217. n° 4.): tho' the quantity of the men- 
struum is sometimes, but seldom, increased to 
twelve times and upwards the quantity of ingre- 
dients. 
4. But if on the contrary, there will be any 
loss or dissipation in the boiling; the quantity 
of the menstruum should be increased in propor- 
tion to such loss; that the liquor of the decoc- 
tion, left after the operation, may be neither too 
thick nor too thin, but duly saturated. 
5. The physician may therefore determine 
the quantity of menstruum to be poured on the 
ingredients, partly by guess, but more exactly by 
considering, n° 3. and 4.; according as the 
length of time, and force with which the boiling 
is to be continued, or as the quantity or number 
of parts to be evaporated, shall indicate, 
6. Or, which is more safe and usual, the phy- 
sician may prescribe only q. s. of the menstruum, 
and determine the quantity of boiling by either 
the length of uime or quantity to be boiled 
away; or, lastly, he may only mention the 
quantity he would have left after the operation. So 
that the apothecary must then compute what 
quantity of menstruum will boil the determinate 
length of time, so as to leave the prescribed quan- 
tity of decoction. But it is in this case very easy for 
the physician to determine the quantity of men- 
struum, being much the same as when the decoc- 
tion is made without any evaporation per n°. 3. 
7. For the proportion of accessories of the 
first kind, which are to promote the solution or 
extraction of the ingredients (§.212.) n° 3.
(1.)

Of Apozems or Decoctions. 175
(1.) §.225. n° 3.), their quantity may be de- 
termined from the considerations mention’d at 
§.217. n° 7. But as the boiling greatly pro- 
motes that action (per §.266. n° 4, 5, 7.), 
there is frequently occasion for a less quantity of 
those accessories. 
8. The proportion of accessories of the second 
kind (§.225. n° 3. §.226. n° 21.) for cor- 
recting or exalting the medicinal virtues, is the 
same with that for infusions (§.217. n° 8.); so 
far as the accessories agree with their intention 
in that form. But such accessories as are infused 
after the boiling is over {per §.226. n° 21.(3.)) 
are subject to the same rules as those in the hi- 
story of infusions, §.217. But it should be ob- 
served, that those accessories will suffer a less per- 
fect solution, by maceration, in proportion as the 
liquor of the decoction was before more highly 
saturated with the ingredients by boiling: nor is 
a decoction agreeable to the patient, when of 
too thick a consistence, especially when it is to 
be drank in large quantities. 
§.231. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction of the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, differs 
but little from that of infusions (§.218. to 221.). 
For if the ingredients for the decoction are to be 
sent by the apothecary to be boiled by the patient, 
nothing more need be observed than what we have 
mentioned at §.220. But if the apothecary him- 
self is to take charge of the decoction, the phy- 
sician may order him to observe what is to be 
done, 
1. Before the operation of boiling: which, (1.) 
regarding the comminution, colligation and irro- 
ration, differ nothing from what has been said 
on those heads at §.219. n° 1.; unless we ex- 
cept the moistening with scalding water, which 
is

176 Of Apozems or Dococtions. 
is seldom used for decoctions. (2.) It may be re- 
quisite to mention the vessel proper for making 
the decoction, when if is to be one not com- 
monly used for that operation, but required by 
the particular of boiling, or by the acri- 
mony or volatility of the ingredients; v. g. 
phiala chemica, cucurbit a alembico instructa, lagena 
stannea, olla sictilis, diploma, &c. The received 
method, among apothecaries, of making all 
forts of decoctions promiscuously in a copper 
vessel, frequently not tinned, often makes the 
repetition of this caution to the compounder ne- 
cessary in a physician’s prescription. (3.) Ma- 
ceration of all or some part of the ingredients is 
to be sometimes premised (per §.226. n° 9. §. 
227. n° 1.); as some substances are much more 
dense and compact than others. This is to be 
ordered according to the rules at §.219. n° 2. 3. 
and the form may then assume the title of Infuso- 
Decoctum. 
2. In the operation of boiling: where, the phy- 
sician may determine (1.) the degree of fire to be 
used, and the method wherein it is to be ap- 
plied; whether the ingredients are to be boiled 
with a strong or slow fire and ebullition (per §. 
226. n° 4. 6. 12. 14. &c.) whether with a 
naked fire, or in balneo? which latter, is much 
the best for decoctions that require long and 
equal boiling, and are in danger of getting an 
empyreuma, or other change from the violence 
and inequality of heat. (2.) The order and length 
of time, when some things are to be boiled for a 
longer or shorter space than others, should be 
mentioned in the prescription (vide §.227.);
which is also required for some menstruums and 
accessories (§.212. n° 3.(1.)), which cannot 
well bear long boiling. (3.) The keeping of 
the vessel close stopped, with more or less ex-
actness;

177 Of Apozems or Decoctions. 
actness; according as any evaporation will prove 
more or less pernicious to the medicine. And 
the keeping up an equable degree of heat, that 
the nature of the decoction may not thence be 
changed. (4.) To ascertain the quantity of boil- 
ing which the decoction is to suffer: which is 
frequently determined; when there is any evapo- 
ration, from the number of parts dissipated, or 
the quantity left; but these are methods not very 
exact. It is better to six a time per §.227. n° 
1. to 5. or else to limit the quantity of boiling 
by the colour, taste, &c. of the decoction: for 
the quantity that will exhale by vapor in a given 
time, must vary greatly with the different width 
of the vessel and intensity of boiling. 
3. Lastly, what is to he done after the boiling: 
to which belongs (1.) the infusion of such ingre- 
dients as will not bear boiling (per §.226. n° 
21.(3).); in performing which, the same rules 
are to be observed as mentioned at §.219. n° 1. 
2. 3.(2.) Depuration, or a separation of the 
foul parts from the decoction, like as at §.219. 
n° 4.; only in decoctions made with aqueous 
menstruums, the liquor is sometimes depurated 
not only by straining or filtration, but also by 
clarification with the whites of eggs: which in- 
deed renders the medicine exceeding limpid and 
clear; but at the same time makes it less effica- 
cious; for the whites of eggs do by their tena- 
city stick to and retain those medicinal particles 
which are fittest for a decoction, and concreting 
by the force of fire, carries them up with itself 
to the surface, in form of scome: so that this 
part of the process ought to be hardly comply’d 
with, even tor the nicest patients. (3.) The ad- 
dition and mixture of such accessories as may be 
thought proper, the business of which may be 
understood from consulting §.226, n° 21.(1.) 
N (2.)

178 Apozems or Decoctions.
(2.) In the last place (4.) comes the receptacle, 
&c. as at §.219. n° 6. 
4. In executing what has been said, n° 1. 3.
regard should be had to the rule at §.59. n° 7. 
§.232. For the SUPERSCRIPTION or direction 
to the patient for this form, that may be deduced 
without much difficulty from what has been said at 
§.221; for several of the very same names (§.ib.) 
are in a measure applicable to this form; so that a 
decoction which is prescribed for one dose may be 
termed Haustus or Polio: if it contains several 
doses and is made with a spirituous menstruum, it 
may be intitled Tinctura; if made with an aqueous 
menstruum, Decoctum or Apozema; if the ingre- 
dients which form the basis (§.75.) consist of the 
parts of animals, it may be called Jus Jusculum; 
if the ingredients which have been once boiled, 
are boiled again in more water, it was formerly 
termed Bochetum or Decoctum secundarium: but the 
other denominations, used by ancients, are now- 
become almost obsolete. 
§.233. The USE of this form coincides with 
that of the infusion (§.222). 
§.234. For SPECIMENS, take the following: 
1. Haustus emeticus, ventriculo cibis nimium 
infarcto. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 117. 
ꝶ. Rad. ipecacuhan. pulv. ℈iv.
cum vini albi  ℥iij. 
Coque in phiala alta hor. iv. 
Colaturam exhibe pro una dosi.
2. 

179 Apozems or Decoctions. 
2. Nodulus purgans, minus calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Fol. senn. sine stipit. ʒiij. 
Fung, agaric. opt. ʒij. 
Nitri puri ʒj. 
Concissa, tusa, includantur sindoni. 
S. Nodulus purgans. Coquatur per 1/4 horœ in cerisiœ
dulcis ℔ ß. vase clauso. Exprimatur. capiat œger 
cyathum omni semihora, donec purgetur. 
3. Jus cancrorum fluviatilium. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 16. 
ꝶ. Cancror. fluviatil. vivor. ℔ iij.
Coque spatio horæ cum aq. ℔ xij. tum ex-
emptos contunde una cum testis, atque 
coque in priore jure proprio adhuc per 
horas iv. addendo semper tantum aquæ, 
ut a coctione ℔ viij. circiter supersint, 
tum jus fortiter exprime, atque ei infunde 
Flor. horragin. ℥jß. 
Buglossi ℥j. 
Rad. tragopogoni ℥iv. 
Sisari ℥ij. 
Dein ebulliant simul spatio 1/16 horæ. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumatur ad ℥ijß. omni bihoric. 
4. Decocto-infusum adstringens, incrassans, ad 
hæmoptysin. 
V. Boerh. Mater, p. 196, 197.
ꝶ Rad. consolid. maj. 
Tamarisc. aa ℥B.
N2 Cum

180 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. pur. q. s. per 1/2 horæ decoctis,
adhuc servidis, insunde 
Herb. agrimon. 
Betonic. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Papav. rhoead. aa m. ß. 
Stent vase clauso, in infusione calida per 
horæ spatium. Colaturæ ℔ ij. admisce 
Syr. myrtin. ℥j. 
S. Liquor vulnerarius. Bibat ℥ij. omni bihorio diei. 
5. Tinctura anti-hydropica ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. ib. p. 204. 
ꝶ Rad. helenii ℥j. 
Aristolochiœ utriusque.
Zedoaria aa ʒvj. 
Zinziber. ℥ß. 
Sumit. absinth. 
Centaur, min.
Semin. dauci. 
Bacc. juniper. 
Lign. sassafras rasi aa ℥j. 
Cort. winteran. ℥ß. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum sp. juniper. ℔ ij. in 
phiala alta chemica ebuliiant per vj 
horas. Tinctura frigida, pura de- 
cantetur. D. usui. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat ℥ß quater de die, vacuo 
stomacho, cum regimine. 
6. Infuso-decoctum abstergens, antisepticum, in 
spina ventosa. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Lign.guajaci virid. ponderos. rasi ℥x. 
Sal. tartari ʒß.
Cum 

181 Apozems or Decoctions. 
Cum aq. comm. ℔ vj. spatio xxiv horar. 
digestum in diplomate, decoque spa- 
tio ij horar. sub sinem admiscendo 
Spir. vini rectific. ℥iv. 
Ebulliant iterum parumper, turn exhibe. 
S. Sumat ℥iv. quater de die, vacuo ventriculo: mane 
hora 7ma dein hora undecima, iterum 4ta pomeri-
diana, & ultima hora 7ma vesp. 
7. Bochetum ex residuo prioris. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 112. 
ꝶ. Residuum decocti prioris 
Aq. pur. ℔ iij. 
Ebulliant per iv horas. Colatura D. usui. 
S. Sit pro potu quotidiano. 
8. Decoctum aperiens, attenuans; ad ictericos, in 
hydrope, &c, exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. rhei. opt. 
Rubiœ tinctor. aa ʒijß. 
Sal. absinthii ʒjß. 
Aq. font. pur. ℔ ij. 
Leni ebullitione, per horæ spatium con- 
tinuata, fiat apozema; cui, depu- 
ratæ, adde, 
Syr. de quinq. rad. aper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat  ℥iij. ter de die. 
9. Decoctum pectorale, in tussi, phthisi, pleuritide, 
nephritide, viscerum vulneribus, & inflamma- 
tionibus exhibendum. 
♃. Rad. ir. florent. ʒiij. 
Consolid. maj. rec. contus. 
Ering. cond. aa ℥j. 
Sem, urtic. major, vulg.  ʒvi. 
N3 De-

182 Of Expressed Juices. 
Decoque in aq. font. ℔ iv ad lb ij. ex- 
prime, & adde 
Nitri puri ʒij. 
Syr. bals. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Bibat a ij ad vj℥. subinde, 
pro re nata. 
10. Decoctum febrifugum. 
♃. Pulv. peruv. ℥jß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒj. 
F. Tribus coctionibus decoct. ℔ ij. cum
Aq. font: q. s. 
Cui adhuc bullienti adde 
Sumit. absinth. rom. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamœmel. ʒjß. 
Cons. flav. aurat. ℥ij. 
S. Ut in fronte, Depuratas & grate dulificatas 
exhihe ℥ij quater de die. 
Nota. We say nothing here concerning the Hy- 
drosacchara, Hydromel. Medical, and ptisans of 
the ancients; nor of their medicated whey, diet, 
cock-broth, Consummatum, Destillatum instaurans, 
&c. because the preparation of these, almost quite 
out of use, may be easily understood and deduced 
from the doctrine of infusions and decoctions §.211. 
to §.234. Conf. P. Morelli Method. prœscrib. Form. 
Of Expressed JUICES *. 
§.235. AN EXPRESSED JUICE is a liquid, 
internal medicine; consisting chiefly 
of an aqueous juice, extracted by beating, grinding,
and
* A form hardly ever used among us; whatever it may be a- 
mong the German and Dutch physicians. 

183 Of Expressed Juices. 
and pressing, from the softer and more succulent 
parts of recent vegetables: being a form intended 
only for present use. 
§.236. The Matter or ingredients for this 
form are of two kinds: primary, or most effential; 
and secondary, or less essential. 
1. Of the primary kind are every thing which 
by beating, grinding and pressing, will afford an 
aqueous juice, fit for internal use: such we are 
supplied with from almost none but the parts of 
recent vegetables. 
2. Those of the secondary kind are intended 
either (1.) to promote tfie expreffion of the juice, 
either by diluting it, or by opening and soften- 
ing the texture of the bodies trom whence it is 
to be expressed. For which purpose are used to 
be added, before expression, whey, milk, &c. 
Or (2.) to increase the medicinal virtues of the 
juice already expressed, or to correct some per- 
nicious or unpleasant quality therein. To which 
end are added salts, either acid, alcaline, or neu- 
tral; wine, distilled waters, sugar, honey, sy- 
rups, eleosacchara, &c. which are suitable for 
meliorating and correcting. 
§.237. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, the business of that may be contained in a 
few words; because of the small number of sub- 
stances which are fit to afford juices by expression. 
Therefore 
1. The primary ingredients (§.236. n° 1.) 
used in this form, are only the succulent parts 
of recent vegetables: such as leaves, flowers, 
fruits, roots and whole plants, which are of a 
fort texture and abound with a thin aqueous 
juice. 
2. Substances of a dry and compact texture 
N4 are

184 Of Expressed Juices.
are all excluded from this form. Hence, woods,
barks, ligneous stalks, &c. are quite unfit. 
3. Nor are seeds fit for this form by expres- 
sion; because they abound more with an oil, 
than an aqueous juice. 
4. Such things are also less sit for this form, 
whose juices, tho' copious, are yet too thick or 
viscid; because they are more difficult to extract. 
But being mix’d with the secondary or accessory 
liquors (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), they will, by means 
of heat, pretty readily part with their more fluid 
contents by expression. 
5. If the physician's intention should require 
some ingredients which are less succulent, or re- 
plete with a thick and viscid juice, as at n° 4. 
in that case, a proper addition of other plants, 
or their parts, which are full of a thinner juice, 
will supply the place of the accessories at §.236. 
n° 2. (1.). 
6. The medicated juices taken from living a- 
nimals, or their excrements, &c. by expression, 
are hardly used by any but the more vulgar fort 
of people: for there is scarce any physician that 
would advise or prescribe the use of 'em. 
7. Hence it appears, that this form of medi- 
cine is not agreeable with all times, places and 
circumstances of the ingredients and patient: so 
that the physician ought to be cautious not to pre- 
scribe any vegetable or its parts, for expression, 
which are out of season; nor several things toge- 
ther which are not in season at the same time, left 
he should order some vegetables green or fresh ga- 
thered, which can be only had dry at that time 
of the year. 
8. The secondary kind of ingredients (§.236. 
n° 2.) of both classes, are very frequently o- 
mitted. But the first kind (ib. n° 2. (l.)) of 
accessory ingredients are often very useful, when 
the

185 Of Expressed Juices. 
the natural humidity of the rest is either too 
small in quantity or of a too thick and viscid 
consistence. Therefore such accessories ought 
to be chose for remedying those inconveniences, 
which cannot introduce any noxious quality, or 
make any sudden change in the texture and vir- 
tues of the juice; but rather correct, or fall in 
with the intention of the form itself. The latter 
kind of accessory ingredients at (§.236. n° 2. 
(2).), require the same cautions with those men- 
tioned at §.13. n° 10. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form 
should be but few, less than for infusions, at 
§.213. n° 11. For when there are many ingre- 
dients accumulated together, the prescriber will 
be much more liable to commit an error in re- 
gard to the season (per n° 7.), or to occasion 
some improper quality and consistence in the 
medicine by such a compound mixture. Vide 
§.94—105. 
§.238. The ORDER wherein the ingredients 
for this form are to be prescribed, is hardly de- 
termined by physicians; but in general, the same 
method §.214) may be observed, as for infusions, 
so far as the matter or ingredients of this form a- 
gree with the nature of those §.214. 
§.239. The DOSE of this form is to be more or 
less according to the various circumstances at §.66. 
and as the indication requires a repetition thereof, 
at longer or shorter intervals of time. Sometimes 
the dose of expressed juices is determined only by 
measure, as cochlear, j, ij, iij, or ad Cyathum j, ij, 
&c. but they are more frequently ordered by 
weight, a ʒij. ad ij, iij, seldom more, unless the 
expressed juice be very thin and pleasant. The 
slatulent crudity natural to these vegetable juices, 
with the unpleasantness of their colour, smell, and
taste,

186 Of Expressed Juices. 
taste, do require the adiquate dose to be divided 
rather into several lesser ones, agreeable to the rule 
at §.67. n° 4. 
§.240. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at one time, it is various ac- 
cording to the several circumstances mentioned at 
§.67. with the number of doses, &c. Sometimes 
the whole general quantity sufficient, is but one 
dose; as when the intention is to vomit, &c. But 
more frequently, when this form is intended to 
alter or purge the whole habit, the use of it is 
continued for several days or even weeks together. 
In that case, (1.) so much may be prescribed as may 
serve for one or two days together; or the form 
may be fresh made every, or every other day: 
which is the more necessary to be done, if the cir- 
cumstances of the patient (§.67. n° 8.) permit, as 
these vegetable juices by expression are so apt to 
ferment and change by keeping. Or (2.) if the 
first method (1.) cannot be well complied with, 
and a quantity of juice is to be made at one time 
sufficient to last several days or a week: in that 
case, we may in some measure prevent it from 
fermenting and corrupting by stuming with the 
fumes of sulphur, by boiling, with the addition of 
such things as preserve and pickle, a close exclu- 
sion of the ambient air and keeping in a cool 
cellar. 
§.241. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, it neither requires 
nor admits of an exact determination; but may, 
in the general, be pretty easily understood from 
what follows. 
1. The general quantity (§.240.) of the ex- 
pressed juice, to be made at once, being deter- 
mined by weight; the primary ingredients at 
§.236. n° 1. may be ordered to be taken only 
in q. s. 
2. 

187 Of Expressed Juices. 
2. Or the quantity of juice to be expressed 
being unlimited, the quantity of ingredients 
only may be determined by weight or measure 
per §.58. n° 6, 7, 8. (1.) (2.).: but to deter- 
mine exactly the quantity both of juice and in- 
gredients cannot be easily done. 
3. The first method, n° 1, is generally the 
most used, and is even necessary when the dose 
(§.239, 240). being one or more is required to 
be of a certain size or number. When the lat- 
ter, n° 2. is made use of, the physician should 
consider whether the ingredients have a great or 
small degree of succulency, as also the more or 
less bulk, and frequent use or exhibition thereof, 
that he may not commit an error in excess or de- 
fect, which give room for the apothecary to ri- 
dicule, or giving himself the trouble of writing 
several of the same prescriptions in one day. So 
that this latter method (n° 2.) is hardly ever 
used, but when the general quantity of expressed 
juice is large and undetermined. 
4. But if the ingredients are several, and of 
different textures and virtues, the mutual pro- 
portion of each should be such as may corres- 
pond to the physician’s indication; as that may 
require more or less of one than another, ac- 
cording to their degree of succulency and parti- 
cular virtues. Such vegetables and their parts 
which have but a small quantity of juice, and 
that very thick or viscid (per §.237. n° 4, 5.), 
ought to be (cœteris paribus) prescribed and 
taken in a less quantity than those which are 
more succulent; that the expressed juice may be 
obtained more thin and plentiful. 
5. Therefore, in the first case, n° 1. when 
the circumstances before-mentioned (n° 4.) do 
not require all the ingredients to be taken in 
equal quantities, they may be only determin’d 
in

188 Of Expressed Juices. 
in the proportion of double, triple, sub- 
duple, &c, e.g. Radic. pars j, herhar part. ij, 
baccar. part. iij, or otherwise. As for what 
is to be done in the latter case, n° 2. that is 
self-evident. 
6. Sometimes a certain quantity of the ex- 
pressed juices of vegetables and their parts, is 
prescribed for after they have been depurat- 
ed, without making particular mention of 
each individual, or the method and order of 
expression: which is the most simple and easy 
method, if follow’d in the common way. 
7. The Secundary ingredients of the first kind 
§.236. n° 2. (1.) are prescribed in but a small 
quantity, left if they were used plentifully, they 
should render this form more like an emulsion, 
decoction or infusion, than an expressed juice; 
for the business of these is to serve not as a real 
menstruum, but only to dilute the more viscid 
parts §.236. and 237. n° 8. These should be 
therefore added in a proportion more or less, ac- 
cording as the particular texture and consistence 
of the primary ingredients may require; if so 
be they do not exceed the quantity of the juice 
itself. 
8. The latter kind of secundary ingredients 
§.236. n° 2. (2.)) do acknowledge much the 
same proportion with that given at §.216. n° 8. 
But care should be taken to prefer juices before 
other addenda, as they make part of the basis 
(§.88.); and to, be mindful that the juice be 
not made of too thick a considence by any ad- 
denda; as also, that the quantity of all together 
may not exceed the adiquate and sufficient dose, 
(§.239.). But when the weight of the juice is 
left undetermined (per. n° 2.), the proportion 
of the addenda is to be limited by equaling a cer- 
tain part thereof (per n° 5.); whence the apo- 
thecary

189 Of Expressed Juices. 
thecary may easily compute how much the whole 
will require. 
§.242. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, contains several par- 
ticulars; such as 
1. The preparation of the primary ingredients 
(§.236. n° 1.) in order for the expression of their 
juice. And this includes (1.) comminution, or a 
division of them into small parts; which for dif- 
ferent ingredients is done after different me- 
thods; sometimes by cutting, scraping, and 
beating into a soft and succulent paste; for 
which purpose a pestle and mortar of stone or 
wood is preferable to one of metal. (2.) The 
addition of a diluent liquor (§.236. n° 2. (1.)), 
when that may be necessary (per §.237. n° 8.); 
whether mixed by affusion, aspersion, or va- 
pour. (3.) The digestion, or else assation of 
the paste, after contusionand humectation; which 
is however, generally omitted: nor is it of any 
service, but when the juice of the ingredients 
is very viscid, or in but a small quantity, and 
at the same time not subject to an improper 
change by heat; but then it is often attended 
with this advantage, that it takes off a good deal of 
the crudity and flatulency of the vegetable juice, 
and often fits it to keep longer. 
2. The expression itself of the juice; concerning 
which, we have nothing in particular to observe, 
more than what is usual in the common pro- 
cess.  
3. The depuration of the expressed juice; which 
is effected by letting it stand, or it may be done 
sooner, by passing it through a strainer (§.219. 
n° 4. (2.) (3.)): which should not be neglected, 
because it greatly removes the more gross parts, 
and unpleasant viscidity or thickness of the juice.
Nor

190 Of Expressed Juices. 
Nor is it amiss to proceed like some, who, be- 
fore they strain the juice, do without any pre- 
vious digestion or assation, simmer the liquor 
over a gentle fire till they almost perceive the 
signs of boiling, which they do in a close 
vessel, if the virtue consists in volatile parts, 
or else it may be done in an open vessel till it 
even boils up a little, whereupon they depurate 
it by a strainer, whilst hot, or let it stand 'till 
cold §.219. n° 4. (4.) ult.): for by that method 
the liquor may be not only despumated, and 
freed from its more flatulent parts; but the gross 
fæces may be better separated, the insects and 
their eggs which it contains, will be destroy'd 
and the whole liquor fitted to keep a longer 
time, and with less alteration. 
4. The addition and mixture of the secundary 
ingredients §.236. n° 2. (2.), which is to be per- 
formed after what has been said at n° 3.: tho'
it would be better to dissolve suck things, whose 
solution is difficult in a cold liquor, in the juice 
whilst it is hot, (n° 3.) before draining. I 
should also advise, for the exhibition of salts, 
which are apt to congeal and separate from the 
juice, to send them to the patient distributed 
in their proper doses in the form of a powder, 
that the patient may mix a dose of the salts in 
a proper quantity of the juice a little before 
taking; by which means, the dose and distri- 
bution thereof will be more certain and equal,
than if disturbed by shooting or crystallizing 
from the juice in the cold; which observation is 
more especially of consequence, when the gene- 
ral quantity of this form to be made at once, is 
very large. 
5. The keeping of the expressed and prepared 
juice; which, if but for a short time (per §.240. 
(1.)), is of no great consequence, but if for ma-
ny

191 Of Expressed Juices. 
ny days or weeks (per ib. (2.)), it ought to be 
particularly regarded: since the natural dispo- 
sition of those juices, and the season of the year 
wherein they are mostly used, do very much sub- 
ject them to change, ferment and corrupt. Nor 
is keeping the juice in a narrow neck’d vessel well 
stopp’d, and set in a cool place, always suffi- 
cient to preserve it found and unalter’d: but we 
ought besides, as Helmont advises, to fumigate 
the vessel well with burning sulphur; or else to 
preserve the juice from fermenting by the ad- 
dition of a little spirit of wine, especially if the 
secundary ingredient; do not tend to prevent cor- 
ruption, and a vinous spirit be not repugnant to 
the indication; or, if the juice be very thin, 
and will receive no hurt from the fire, it may be 
inspissated by evaporating half a way. 
§.243. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily de- 
duced from §.60. 235. 239: nor is there any oc- 
casion to advertize the patient pf any thing more 
than usual in directions; only, when the expressed 
juice is to last several days taking, he should be 
cautioned to keep it in a close vessel, and in a cool 
place. 
§.244. The USE of this form in chronical, 
disorders, is to correct inveterate indispositions of 
the solids and fluids, the blood and fibres; to open 
obstructions of the viscera, especially those of the 
abdomen, &c. In acute diseases, this form of me- 
dicine is used to abate thirst, to prevent and drive 
out putrifaction in inflammatory disorders, &c. 
the form itself being suited as well for alteratives 
as evacuants, whether the later operate by vomit,
stool or urine. But then it is not so agreeable to 
infants and nicer patients as some other forms, nor 
is it suited indifferently for all seasons of the year:
tho'

192 Expressed Juices. 
tho* there are not wanting juices which cannot 
fail to please the most squeamish palate. The last 
objection to the use of this form, is, that it can- 
not be so easily and speedily prepared as many 
others. 
§.245. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Succus emolliens, aperiens, humectans, solido- 
rum nimiam rigiditatem corrigens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 9 & seq. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. scorzoner. 
Rapar. aa ℥iv. 
Herb. recent. cichorei. 
Taraxaci. 
Endiviœ aa m. ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, adsunde 
Seri lact. recent, pint. ß.
Ebulliant leniter spatio vj horæ minuto- 
rum in balneo maris: turn succum 
exprime: cujus per colum depurati 
singulis unciis admisce 
Syrup. rubi idaei ʒj. 
D. in lagena sulphurata. 
S. Ut in fronte. Servetur in loco frigido. Dosis 
cochlearium omni bihorio diet. 
2. Succus emeticus, in hydrope utilis.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Cort. medii sambuc. recent. q. s. 
Ut consciff. tus exprimatur succi ℥j. 
cui adde 
Syr. violor. ℥ß 
D. usui. 
S. Haustus emeticus pro una dosi. 
3.

193 Expressed Juices.
3. Succus antipyicus in statu phlogistico variolarum. 
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 239.  
ꝶ. Succi recens expressi cichorei. 
Lactucœ. 
Taraxaci. 
Fumariœ aa  ℥ij. 
Radic. scorzoner. ℥iv. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
M. 
S. Bibat ℥j. omni hora did. 
4. Succus diluens resolvens abstergens ad aphthas. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 168. 
ꝶ. Bulb. rapar. cum cortice q. s. 
Tyrocnesti, vel radula ex bractea serrata, 
radantur: turn exprimatur succus, 
qui ebulliens leniter despumetur: 
hujus ℥xvj. admisce 
Vitell. ovor. n°. ij. 
Syrup. violar. ʒvj. 
S. Bibat ℥ß. omni semihora. 
5. Succus antacidus, in frigida scorbuti specie: 
ad exemplum Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 189. 190. 
ꝶ. Rad. recent. raphan. rustican. 
Ari ana part. j. 
Herb. recent. trisol. aquat. 
Nasturt. aquatic, ana part, ij.
Radula rasis, conscissis, tusis, exprime succi 
unc. vj. quibus admisce 
Spir. antiscorbut. Fred. Dekk. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥j. 
D. vase clauso. 
S. Capiat omni trihorio ℥ß. vel cochlearium.
O 6. 

194 Emulsions. 
6. Alius in scorbuti specie alcalina. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 192. 
ꝶ. Herb. recent. acetosœ. 
Taraxaci aa q. s. 
Fr. pom. citreum n°. j. 
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succi ℥v. his, 
per colum trajectis, adde 
Sacchari albi ʒvj. 
D. usui: iterentur quovis die per duas 
hebdomodas. 
ꝶ. Crem. tartar. ʒv. 
Sal. essent. acetosell. ʒij. 
M. Divide in xxiv partes æquales. 
D. singulæ in chartulis seorsim. 
S. Capiat mane hora septima dimidium succi, cut ad- 
misceat unam dosin pulveris: reliquum hora nona 
sine pulvere. Id fiat per xiv dies. 
7. Succus in febre biliosa, inflammatoria, nause- 
ante-propinandus. 
♃. Suc. limon. recent. express. ℥ß. 
Sal. absinth. ʒß. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Syr. violar. aa ʒiij. 
M. pro dosi. 
S. Haustus cardiacus, stomachicus, 4ta quaque hora, 
vel post singulos conatus, sumendus. 
Of EMULSIONS. 
§.246. AN EMULSION is an internal liquid, 
and Somewhat oily, but more aqueous 
medicine; approaching generally to the colour and 
consistence of milk: being formed of the oily parts 
of

195 Of Emulsions: 
of vegetables, pressed out and intimately mix’d by 
trituration and emulsion in an aqueous menstruum. 
Whence appears the reason of the name, and the 
difference of this form from the preceeding 
(§.235.) 
§.247. The MATTER or ingredients for emul-
sions are of three kinds (as at §.212. 225.): viz.
the menstruum, the oily ingredients to be emulsed 
and the accessories. 
1. The menstruum commonly used is of the 
aqueous kind: as common or spring water, dis- 
tilled simple waters of the shops, some aqueous 
decoction or infusion, &c. Tho’ sometimes, 
very seldom, wine is used for the menstruum. 
2. The ingredients to he emulsed are, (1.) the 
nuclei or kernels and seeds of plants, which are 
repleat with oil. (2.) The oily juices of vege- 
tables: as resins, gum-resins and balsams; and 
sometimes roots, which are very resinous and 
mucilaginous, &c. 
3. The accessories for emulsions are, (1.) such 
as promote the solutioh and mixture of the olea- 
ginous parts of the ingredients at n° 2. being of 
a viscid and saponaceous substance; as the yolks 
of eggs, sugar, honey, and such of the oily 
seeds or fruits (at n° 2. (1.)) as are readily dis- 
solved and united with an aqueous menstruum. 
Or, (2.) such as are to be added after the emul- 
sion is made, in order to increase the medicinal 
virtues of the form, or render it more pleasant, 
and are, in general, much the same as at §.212. 
n° 3. (2.) 
§.248. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, we are to observe, that 
there are two kinds of emulsions; some, (1.) pro- 
perly so called, being prepared from the ingre- 
dients at §.247. n° 2. (1.); others (2.) less proper-
O2 ly  

196 Of Emulsions. 
ly so termed, being made from the latter kind of 
gredients, §.ib. n° 2. (2.). We designedly omit the 
compositions which some refer to this form, con- 
sisting of white earthy powders (as pearl, &c.) 
ground with an aqueous menstruum; for these are 
not properly emulsions, but only mixtures: since 
we are sufficiently convinced how soon they lose 
their milky colour, by the fine white powder sub- 
siding to the bottom. 
§.249. For ingredients of the first kind (§.247. 
n° 2. (1.) ), as they resemble milk in colour and 
consistence, so should they also in their smell and 
taste; at least they should have no unpleasantness, 
which their intention will very well permit, as 
they are seldom used but for cooling, nourishing, 
easing, &c. Hence, 
1. They will admit of no menstruum but 
what is aqueous (§.247. n° 1.), having neither 
viscidity, acrimony, nor any other unpleasant 
quality, but the more simple the better. There- 
fore the best menstruum for this form, is pure 
boiling water; or else some thin and watery de- 
coction, which is insipid, inodorous, or plea- 
sant; as are those from barley, oat-meal, harts- 
horn, the roots of viper-grass, vetches, liquo- 
rish, &c. with infusions of the like kind. 
2. If any of the more simple distilled waters 
are used for this form, which they frequently are, 
care should be taken to let them be such as are 
skilfully prepared, without any empyreuma. 
Such distilled waters as are spirituous, aromatic, 
vinous, or endued with any strong or consider- 
able smell and taste, are either wholly excluded 
by the nature and intention of this form, or at 
most, are admitted in but a very small quantity, 
in the room of accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)). 
Such liquors as are acid are also prohibited 
for

197 Of Emulsions. 
for the same reasons, and because they make an. 
emulsion rancid and unfit to keep. 
3. The ingredients to be emulsed, are, nu- 
clei and seeds, mention'd §.247. n°. 2 (1.); 
and these, not of any kind indifferently, but 
such as square with the nature and intention of 
an emulsion, before-mentioned. 
4. Therefore those nuclei and seeds as are 
internally of a colour different from that proper 
to an- emulsion, are not fo fit for this form: but 
those which are fat, soft, and white within, are 
the fittest for an emulsion. 
5. Also the larger kind of these nuclei and 
seeds should be first freed from their external 
husks or skins; for if they were to be beat or 
ground together in making the emulsion, they 
would not only obscure its proper milky colour, 
but also impart a strong and disagreeable taste, 
together with an astringency, repugnant to the 
proper intention of the form. 
6. Those seeds and nuclei which are bitter, 
pungent, warm and aromatic, scarce ever enter 
the composition of an emulsion, because the co- 
lour, odour, taste and virtues of them are sel- 
dom agreeable to the intention of this form. 
But sometimes the intention will admit some 
that have a mild bitterness, as the seeds of ci- 
trons, oranges, &c. the nuclei of cherries, bit- 
ter almonds, &c. Even some which are less plea- 
sant than these may be used in a small quantity 
without offending the palate. 
7. Those seeds which afford a great quantity 
of mucilage after grinding, are also less fit for 
this form: such are the seeds of quinces, lin-seed, 
fleabane, henbane, &c. to which we add barley, 
when boiled till it bursts; for only a gentle 
boiling of that grain is usually sufficient, and 
fitter for this form. 
O3 8.

198 Of Emulsions. 
8. Care should be taken that none of these 
nuclei or seeds be rancid; which should be try'd 
in the month, before they are used: for nothing 
is more liable than these to this kind of corrup- 
tion, in a short time, which renders them unfit 
for use in any form. 
9. Those who intermix other things among 
the ingredients to be emulsed than these men- 
tioned at n° 3. to 9. such as the peels of ci- 
trons, oranges, myrrh, &c. do not consider the 
unfitness of the taste, colour and consistence of 
such for emulsion. It would seem better to add 
elæosacchara of the first, and the tincture of 
myrrh, as accessories. 
10. For accessories of the first class (§.247. 
n° 3. (1.)), there is no occasion for them in 
this form: but those of the latter kind (§.ib. (2.)) 
are admitted. These, however, should be such 
as fall in with the intention, and no ways dis- 
turb the proper qualities of an emulsion. So that 
the best accessories for this purpose, are, the 
more pleasant kind of aromatic distilled waters;
pleasaht syrups, which are without colour; ju- 
leps, sugar, elæosacchara, and neutral salts. 
11. If any powder be added which is not ca- 
pable of an intire dissolution in an emulsion, 
it ought to be white, and not very heavy, but 
ground exceeding fine, and not subject to run 
into grumes or clog together: so that there is 
room for almost none but the lighter, earthy 
powders in this form, and not those, unless they 
are most exactly levigated. 
12. Conserves, electuaries, extracts and the 
like, should not enter this form; because they 
disturb its requisite colour, taste, and consistence. 
13. Acids should be also excluded; unless the 
indication should require an emulsion really acid, 
or very quickly apt to turn so. 
14.

199 Of Emulsions. 
14. Alcaline substances, which have an uri- 
nous taste, are by their unpleasantness prohi- 
bited from entering this form. 
15. The intention of this form will also sel- 
dom permit the addition of spirits, tinctures, 
effences, elixirs, &c. tho’ they may sometimes 
enter in a very small quantity. 
16. Yet we ought not to be over solicitous 
about the smell and taste, (per. §.65. 100. 101.). 
Emulsions are generally the more agreeable, as 
they arrive nearer to the nature of milk. 
17. Some patients may imagine they shall 
eject the medicine, if the physician prescribes 
for an emulsion: but such may be easily deceiv’d 
by using a menstruum of a red or some other 
colour, or else by mixing the like colour’d pow- 
ders, syrups, tinctures, &c. 
§.250. The latter kind of Ingredients (§.247. 
n° 2. (2.) ), are less conformable to the nature of 
milk, and do not always resemble either its colour 
or consistence, they should be therefore only or- 
der’d to be emulsed; that they may be exhibited 
and made into an emulsion with some oil, inti- 
mately combin’d with an aqueous menstruum. 
Therefore emulsions of this kind differ much from 
the former (§.249.): for 
1. They do not require, nor can they be 
made so pleasant as the proceeding; because they 
do not take in the same ingredients for emul- 
sion. 
2. Their intentions are generally very diffe- 
rent; since the latter kind (§.247. n° 2. (2.)) 
is more frequently intended for heating, &c. 
than for cooling, &c. per §.249. 
3. The primary ingredients (§.247. n° 2. 
(2.)) are those of the more oily kind, which 
are difficult to dissolve in water: as oils and bal- 
O4 sams


200 Of Emulsions. 
fams which are liquid, thick, or solid; v. g. 
Terebinthina omn. bals. peruvian. capaib. tolutan. 
&c. resins and gum-resins from jalapp. scammon. 
juniper, mastiche, myrrha, opopanax, ammonia- 
cum; rad. jalappœ, &c. In order to make these 
more penetrating and easy to take, they are 
sometimes very properly exhibited under this 
milkey form. 
4. We must however abstain here from the 
use of such substances of this kind which are the 
most fœtid and disagreeable, and which are best 
exhibited in the form of pills (§.162. n° 7.). 
5. The menstruum used here, is not very dif- 
ferent from that of the former at §.249. n° 1. 
But the vinous, spirituous and aromatic waters 
are more constantly and liberally used for these 
milkey compositions; not only because they 
more readily and intimately dissolve these resinous 
substances, but also, as the emulsion and these 
mixtures have different intentions. Hence, 
wine itself is sometimes used here, for the men- 
struum. 
6. Accessories of the first class (§.247. n° 3.
(1.)) are of the greatest use here: for without 
their intervention, the generality of the preceed- 
ing, resinous ingredients (n° 3.) are altoge- 
ther immiscible with an aqueous menstruum. 
We should therefore use accessories the more 
strong and saponaceous, as the ingredients are 
more cohesive and difficult to dissolve, and as 
the menstruum is more aqueous, or the dissolu- 
tion required to be the more intimate and exact. 
7. The yolk of an egg has this saponaceous 
and, dissolving property beyond most other ac- 
cessories, and will accommodate the most oily 
and tenaceous substances for an uniform mixture 
with even water. Sugar, syrups and honey have 
this property in a less degree, But honey dar- 
kens

201 Of Emulsions. 
kens the milkey colour in a great measure. Even 
common sope may be commodiously used for 
this purpose, when it is not repugnant to the pa- 
tient’s disorder and palate. 
8. When the quantity of ingredients (at n° 3)
to be dissolved is but small, the nuclei and seeds 
for the first kind of emulsion (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) 
are added as accessories; as almonds, and most 
of the oiley nuclei and seeds, &c. For these be- 
ing ground together with the resinous substances, 
pour out a thin oil and a mealy substance, which 
insinuating between the parts of those substances 
which are difficultly soluble, perform the office 
of a sope, so that by attenuating, and intimately- 
blending the more cohesive parts with the liquid 
menstruum, they form a medicine of the same 
colour and consistence with the emulsion, 
§.246. 
9. The accessories of the latter kind (§.247. 
n° 3. (2.)), which are for augmenting the plea- 
santness or virtues of these mixtures, are much 
the same with those mention’d at §.249. n° 10. 
&c. But those of the spirituous kind (§.ib. 
n° 15.) are more frequently used here, by rea- 
son of §.250. n° 2. 5.): nor need we be so cau- 
tious to preserve the colour, taste, &c. (per. 
§.ib. n° 1.) 
§.251. For the Order or method of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for this form; in both the true 
(§.249.) and the spurious emulsion (§.250.), 
the substances to be dissolved take the first place:
after these, in emulsions of the spurious kind 
(§.250.), may be subjoined the saponaceous acces- 
sory; then, the menstruum; and lastly the acces- 
sories for augmenting the pleasantness and virtues 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)). But the prescriber may vary  
the

202 Of Emulsions.
the order of each particular kind of these, at his 
own discretion. 
§.252. The Dose of this form is almost the 
same with that of expressed juices (§.239.), and 
is like that determined either by weight or measure. 
The true kind of emulsion (§.249.), is generally 
exhibited in a very large quantity, ad cyathum, or 
from une. j, ij, &c. ad ℔ß. and sometimes it is to 
be drank at pleasure as an ordinary drink. The 
spurious emulsion (§.250.), is generally given in a 
much more restrained quantity, ad cochlearium, or a 
ʒj, ij, &c. ad ℥j. or more; according as it is more 
or less strong, dilute, or nauseous, and as the diffe- 
rent intention, and more or less easy taking by the 
patient, &c. shall indicate. (V.§.66. and 67. n° 4.).
§.253. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is sometimes no 
more than one dose (§.252.); which obtains 
mostly in the spurious emulsion (§.250.). Nor is 
it proper to prescribe the later kind of this form in 
a quantity sufficient for several days; because by 
standing, unless the mixture be very uniform and 
well confirmed, there will follow a reparation, 
precipitation or emersion of the grossest parts. The 
first or true kind of emulsion (§.249.) easily turns 
sower, and the sooner as the season is warmer; in 
so much that it will hardly keep good six or seven 
hours in a hot summer, whereas it will stand a day 
and a night without changing in the winter time. 
Having therefore considered the quantity and fre- 
quency of the dose (§.252.), together with the 
temperature of the atmosphere, the wise physician 
will prescribe no more at one time than may be 
taken whilst it is good; having no acidity, except 
when the disorder and patient may chance to re-
quire it so. 
§.254.

203 Of Emulfions. 
§.254. The mutual PROPORTION of the se- 
veral ingredients for this form, varies very much
with their different natures and indications. 
1. The true kind of emulsions (§.249.) are 
made more or less dilute and thin, as they are 
intended to answer only the intention of cooling 
and moistening, or nourishing, easing, &c.
2. It makes one of the thickest kind of emul- 
sions, when the proportion of the menstruum is 
but three, four or five times greater than that of 
the ingredients: from twelve to twenty times as 
much more menstruum as ingredients makes one 
of the thinnest emulsions; if in the proportion 
of 8 to 1, an emulsion of a midling consistence. 
3. But respect should be had to the size of 
those nuclei and seeds (§.247. n° 2. (1.)) which 
are to make the emulsion: for the smaller they 
are, the more bark and skin they have in pro- 
portion to their internal, mealy and oily sub- 
stance; of which later is formed the emul- 
sion. So that the same quantity of small seeds 
will not so much saturate a certain quantity of 
menstruum, as will a like quantity of nuclei. 
4. For the proportion of the menstruum, that 
is usually prescribed by q. s. nor is the quantity 
of menstruum to be determined but from the ge- 
neral quantity of emulsion to be made; nor even, 
sometimes, can it be determined from thence: 
in which case the apothecary takes it in a mean 
proportion, per n° 2. 
5. But to more accurately determine the due 
proportion of menstruum, respect should be had 
to the degree of consistence, and mutual solubi- 
lity of the liquors (§.250.) and ingredients 
(§.247. n° 2. (2.)), in conjunction with the 
more or less quantity of accessories (§.ib. n° 3. 
(1.) §.250. n° 6. &c.) which they may require: 
the result of which, will be a proportion nearly 
the


204 Of Emulsions. 
the same with that given at n° 2. and is fre- 
quently referr’d to be ascertained at the discre- 
tion of the compounder (per n° 4.), especially 
when the emulsion consists of but one dose. 
6. The proportionable quantity of accesso- 
ries (§.247. n° 3. (1.)) should be more or 
less according to the quantity and texture of the 
ingredients and menstruum: the quantity may 
be double, triple, or quadruple that of the in- 
gredients, more or less, as the accessory may 
have a stronger or weaker dissolving power, 
(per §.250. n° 6, 7, 8.), and as the ingredients 
to be emulsed are more or less disposed for an 
intimate union with the menstruum. Hence, it 
is the most usual to prescribe vitell. ovi q. s. 
which method is also commonly taken with those 
accessories at §.250. n° 8. 
7. For the proportion of the second kind of 
accessories (§.247. n° 3. (2.)), which are to 
be added after the emulsion is made; there can 
be no more particular determination thereof, 
than by the rules given at §.217. and 241. n° 8. 
An ounce of emulsion will bear ℈j of the pul- 
verulent accessories (§.249. n° 11.), and ʒß of 
the sweet: but then we should consider whether 
any honey or sugar has before enter’d the emul- 
sion in the room of sope(per §.247. n° 3. (1.)), 
with what degree of correction the unpleasant- 
ness of the ingredients may require by these 
sweets, and whether we are prescribing for an 
infant, a child, or an adult, &c. The true kind 
of emulsion (§.249.) ought not to be made 
very unpleasant by adding too large a quantity 
of salts: for ℥vj of emulsion will seldom admit 
of more than ℈j. The proportion of the rest 
may be guided by the intention. 
§.255.

205 Of Emulsions.
§.255. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, in the true kind, 
(§.249.) is comprehended barely in F. I. a. emuls. 
Afterwards is to be mentioned the quantity of emul- 
sion to be strained off, if the menstruum were only 
order’d in q. s. (per §.254. n° 4.). And lastly, 
directions may be given for adding what else is to 
be mix’d. To say any thing of the vessel for con- 
taining this form, is generally unnecessary. In the 
spurious emulsion (§.250.) or white mixture, are 
prescribed first the ingredients to be dissolved 
(§.ib. n° 3.) and their saponaceous accessory 
(§.247. n° 3. (2.)) by which they are to be ex- 
actly mixed: afterwards the addition of the men- 
struum, and other things, which is to be done 
gradually, by a little at a time. But what else 
more particularly regards the encheiresis of this 
form, is supposed (per §.7. n° 3. and §.8.) to be 
previously and sufficiently understood both by the 
prescriber and compounder. 
§.256. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient advises (besides what is usual in this 
place, and has been often before repeated) that the 
emulsion may be kept under cold water or in a 
cold cellar, that it may not turn sower, especially 
if the quantity is to last taking for several days. 
V. §.249. and 253. And sometimes it may be pro- 
per to order the emulsion to be well shook before 
use, especially if any of the fine but unsoluble pow- 
ders are added, or when we fear the distribution 
and mixture of its parts may become unequal by 
standing. 
§.257. The USE of this form is not so universal 
as that of infusions (§.222.). But the first or true 
kind of emulsion (§.249.) makes one of the most 
pleasant medicines, and may be properly given to 
the nicest patient, when the intentions are to cool, 
ease, moisten, incrassate, afford light aliment, in- 
cline

206 Emulsions.
cline to sleep, recruit the spirits without heating 
the blood, or to qualify sharp humours, which are 
biliose, putrid or alcaline: it may be also accom- 
modated to provoke urine and sweat, but seldom 
to stool. This form may however chance to be 
pernicious to such patients as are of a cold habit, 
and subject to acidities. The latter kind of emul- 
sion, or white mixture (§.250.), is adapted to an- 
swer all the intentions for which its several ingre- 
dients (§.247.) n° 2. (2.) 250. n° 3.) are recom- 
mended by physicians; and has the reputation of 
making ’em even more penetrating and effectual by 
its liquid form. But it frequently takes in many 
ingredients which are not at all agreeable to ei- 
ther the smell or taste; and is usually thought pro- 
per for purging by stool, urine and sweat, to kill 
worms, to cleanse internal ulcers, to strengthen 
the nerves, &c. 
§. 258. For SPECIMENS of this Form, you 
have the following. 
1. Emulsio communis. 
♃. Amigd. dulc. excortic. ʒvj. 
Sem. quat. frig. rec. ℥ß. 
Papav. alb. ʒiij. 
Sach. alb. siccatiss. ℥j. 
Contundantur simul donec in pastam co- 
alescant, & dein, paulatim adde 
Aq. hord. ℔ ij. 
M. F. emuls. s. a. quæ fortiter expri- 
mendo coletur. 
S. Emuls. &c. de qua bibat adlibitum. 
2.

207 Emulsions. 
2. Emulsio balsamica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ j. 
Sperm. cet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut.  ʒijß. 
Farin. rad. ir. florent. ʒjß. 
Tinct. benzoin, gtt. C. 
Syr. bals. C. 3vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat cochlear. iij omni bihorio. 
3. Emulsio anti-alcalica. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Avenœ exconic. ℥iij. 
F. cum aq. pur. q. s. emulsio, cujus ℔ jß 
admisce 
Nitri puri ʒß. 
Syrup, violar. ℥j. 
Aceti squillit. ʒij. 
S. Utatur pro potu familiari. 
4. Emulsio nutriens, demulcens, incrassans. 
ꝶ. Amigdal. dulc. excortic. ℥ij. 
Amaror.—n°.ij. 
Aquœ pur. servent. ℥x. 
F. S. a. emulsio. Colaturæ fortiter ex- 
pressæ admisce
Aq. stillat. cinnam. ℥j. 
Sacchar. albiss. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Amigdalatum, de quo capiat œger omni semihora 
cochlearium.
5. 

208 Emulsions.
5. Emulsio narcotica. 
V. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 64. 
ꝶ. Sem. papav. alb. contus. ℥ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. hord. F. emulsio, cujus 
℥x adde 
Syr. diacod. ℥jß. 
Tinct. opii cum S. V. rectis. gtt. xx. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ʒij. 
Cortic. citrei ʒx. 
S. Capiat ℥jß. omni 1/2 hora, donec incipiat leniri dolor.
6. Emulsio lubricans, diuretica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 243, 244. 
ꝶ. Semin. cardui mariœ. 
Bardanœ. 
Fœniculi ana ʒvj. 
Papaver. alb. ℥j. 
Amigdal. dulc. n°. xx. 
Infusi rad. liquorit. q. s. 
F. l. a. emulsio. Colatur ℔ iij. admisce 
Sal. prunellœ ʒij. 
Syr. papaver. alb. ℥jB. 
D. usui. 
S. Bibat omni semihora ℥ij. servetur lagena sub aqua 
frigida, aut in cella. 
7. Emulsum antihelminticum:
V. Boerh. ib. p. 229. 
ꝶ. Gumm. opoponac. ʒj. 
Vitell ovor. ʒij. 
M. s. a. dein adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Syrup, artemis. ʒjß
Ap stillat. fœniculi ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ʒj omni quadrihorio, cum regimine. 
8.

209 Emulsions. 
8. Emulsum purgans, forte, scammoneatum, ad 
hydropem. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 210. 
ꝶ. Semin. carthami ʒij. 
Scammon. pur. gr. viij. 
Contusis, assunde paulatim 
Aq. stillat. cort. aurant. ℥j. 
Tum colatis misce 
Syrup. de spina cervina ʒij. 
S. Sit pro dosi, mane. 
9. Emulsio Balsamica, ad ulcera interna, phthisin, 
gonorrhæam, paralysin. 
V.
Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 197. & 247. Et 
Harris de Morb. Infant, lib. II. obs. II. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ʒiij. 
Vitell. ovor. q. s. 
Probe subactis admisce sensim 
Mellis alb. ʒiij. 
Aq. stillat. bacc. juniper. ℥iij. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sumat œger omni quadrihorio coch- 
learium, semper ante usum concutiendo lagenam. 
10. Emulsio asthmatica. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔j.
Gumm. ammon. ʒij. solvatur in
Aq. hyssop. frigid. ℥iij. & adde
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. C.
Syr. balsamic. C. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Emuls. &c. Capiat cochlear, ij. sœpè in die, &
urgente paraxysmo asthmatico. 
P 11.

210 Of Mixtures. 
11. Emulsio nephritica. 
In statu renum inflmmatoria exhibenda. 
♃. Emuls. commun. ℔ jß  
Aq. raph. comp. ℥jß. 
Nitri puri ℈ij. 
Syr. althœœ ℥ij. 
M.
S. Capiat ℥iv omni bihorio. 
Of MIXTURES for internal Use. 
§.259. MIXTURES are internal liquid 
medicines, made up of several in- 
gredients, without any preparation but barely that 
of commixing. Hence, they may be easily distin- 
guished from the infusion (§.211.), decoction 
(§.224.), expressed juice (§.235.), and emulsion 
(§.246.)preceding. 
§.260. There are three kinds of these mixtures 
in common use: (1.) Mixtura diffusissima, com- 
monly termed a julep: (2.) mixtura media, which 
is what we understand to be properly signified by 
the name mixture; and lastly, (3.) the mixtura 
contracta, which has various names given it, ac- 
cording to the particular circumstances we shall 
hereafter mention. Concerning each of these, we 
shall treat separately.
Of

211 Of Juleps.
Of JULEPS. 
§.261. A Julep (julapium, julepus recentiorum) 
is the largest and most dilute kind of 
mixture, almost pellucid, and invested with an 
agreeable colour, smell and taste; serving as a 
pleasant drink, to be taken at several doses. The 
julep of the antients, therefore, differs from that of 
the moderns in consistence; as the first was a kind 
of thin syrup. 
§.262. The MATTER or ingredients for this 
form are either such as are to receive, of else to be 
received by the former. 
1. The fluid excipient, as the basis or men- 
struum, is a thin, pellucid and pleasant liquor,
generally aqueous, serving to dilute the other 
substances. 
2. The excipenda, are, every thing capable of 
a solution in the preceding liquor (n° 1.), 
which can afford the requisite qualities and vir- 
tues of this form. 
§.263. The proper Election of both these 
kinds of ingredients (§.262. n° 1, 2.) is deter- 
mined from the requisite qualities or conditions of 
a julep. It may be therefore observed, 
1. As this form is very frequently exhibited 
as a common drink, or to be drank as a plea- 
sant vehicle after the taking of other medicines; 
we are therefore to give it, as much as possible, 
the most agreeable qualities: to make it thin, 
pellucid, and of a pleasant, dulcido-acid, or 
other agreeable taste; without any smell, but 
such as will please; and without colour, but 
such as will delight the eye, especially red. So 
that. 
P2 2.

212 Of Juleps. 
2. The excipient may be any liquor which is 
endued with an agreeable, or no colour, smell, 
and taste. As, 
(1.) Pure water, after it has been boiled: 
which is an excipient or menstruum preferable 
to others, as being more easy to be had and 
prepared, fitted to the texture of most things it 
is to receive, and not destroying or changing 
any of their virtues. 
(2.) The pleasant or inodorous and insipid 
distilled waters of the shops: as from sorrel, 
borrage, buglos, endive, lettuce, house-leak, &c. 
Tho' common water (1.) is generally prefer- 
able to these; because they acquire no agreeable 
smell or taste from the fire and vessels used in 
the process. But it may be better to use such 
as have a small tho' more delightful smell and 
taste: such as those obtained from baum, roses, 
black cherries, whole citrons, &c. 
(3.) The use ot the more pleasant and aque- 
ous infusions (§.211.) which can be readily 
made, may be also well enough permitted in 
the basis of this form: such as those made with 
the flowers of roses, violets, corn-poppies, or 
with apples, citrons, and conserves of the 
like, &c. Or, 
(4.) Some thin decoction (§.224.) of the 
like kind: as from barley, the roots of vipers- 
grass, harts-horn, figs, tamarinds, bread, &c.
Or, 
(5.) Wines: as rhenish, or any other, tart 
or sweet, French or Spanish wine; which are 
very suitable for this form as a cardiac, when 
the intention requires the animal fluids to be 
put into a little brisker motion. Or, 
(6.) The phlegm of vitriol well diluted; or 
thin whey, a little sower: but this latter is re- 
quired to be not turbid, but well clarified. Or, 
(7.)

213 Of Juleps.
(7.) Several of these (n° 1, to 6.) may be 
commodiously compounded together, for the 
basis of this form.  
3. The excipienda (§.262. n° 2.) or things 
fit to be diluted in the preceding liquors, must 
be such as are capable of an intire dissolution, 
and will also add to the pleasantness of those li- 
quors: such as, 
(1.) The stronger fort of aromatic distilled 
waters; from cinnament, pennyroyal, marjo- 
ram, rosemary, the flowers and peals of oranges, 
citrons, and sometimes wines, as at n° 2. 
(5.) unless that liquor makes the whole basis of 
the form. All which may in a manner be ac- 
counted a secundary kind of excipients. 
(2.) The sweet and tart, fresh expressed, juices 
of garden-fruits: as of cherries, currance, ber- 
berries, rasberries, citrons, oranges, pomegra- 
nates, golden pippins, &c. But when the pre- 
scriber orders juices of this kind, he should con- 
sider whether these things are in season (§.237. 
n° 7.) so as to be had fresh at that time: and 
how long they will keep good(§.242. n° 5.) 
without changing. 
(3.) Tincturœ acido-aquosœ, which are of a red 
colour; as e.g. Flor. 4. cordial. tunicœ  bellidis, 
aquilegiœ, rhœados, granor kermes, &c. which 
may, upon occasion, serve instead of the exci- 
pient (n° 2. (3.)) 
(4.) Spirituous tinctures, which are very plea- 
sant: as e cortic, cinnamom. citric aurantior. cassiœ, 
croc. &c. which are very useful when a gentle 
stimulus is required. 
(5.) inflammable or vinous spirits. simple, 
or else impregnated by distillation with-the 
smell and taste of the more pleasant vegetables: 
as roses, angelica, lavender, baum, cinnamon. 
P3 citrons 


214 Of Juleps. 
citrons, oranges, black cherries, aq. vitœ mat-
thioli, &c. which are of great use when the 
stimulus is required to be a little stronger than 
(4.). 
(6.) But the vegetable and fossil acid spirits, 
are very frequent ingredients in this form: as 
distilled vinegar, spirit of salt, and of nitre either 
strong or dulcified, the spirit and gas. of sul- 
phur, vitriol, &c. 
(7.) All sorts of officinal syrups, which are 
very pleasant, colourless, red, or turn so with 
acids, whether prepared from the juices of fruits 
(at 2.) or other parts of vegetables: as flor. aca- 
cia, rosar. violar. tunicœ, borragin. rhoead. herb. 
capillor. vener. melissœ, cort, cinnamom. citri, gra- 
nor. kermes, caryophyllor. &c. To this place 
also belong the liquors of candied fruits, the of- 
ficinal juleps, with oxymella and oxysacchara. 
(8.) Gellies and inspissated juices made from 
garden fruits; to which we may add, the gelly 
of harts-horn, as sometimes entering this form. 
(9.) Sugars: either simple and white, or else 
compounded by various artificers with other 
pleasant ingredients, and formed into elaeosac- 
chas, tablets, cakes, &c. 
(10.) Dry salts: of which enter scarce any 
but those of the neutral kind; and among these, 
nitre, fall prunell and polychrestum are almost 
the only ones. 
4. Substances in the form of powder, which 
are not soluble, are very seldom admitted into 
this form; at least, those of the grosser kind, 
never; but a few things which are light, plea- 
sant, or without smell and taste, are sometimes 
put into juleps, after they have been very ex- 
actly levigated; such are, principally, the earthy 
absorbents, as coral, pearl, harts-horn, &c. But 
even


215 Of Juleps. 
even these are to be excluded, if any acid is to 
enter the julep; for reasons at §101. 102. 
5. Conserves are hardly ever tiled here, unless 
for making a kind of infusion (n° 2. (3.)). 
6. Electuaries, extracts, tinctures, effences, 
spirits, and the like, whose considence, colour, 
smell and taste would make a julep unpleasant, 
should be excluded from this form (per n° 1.). 
Except only two or three confections of the 
more pleasant kind, as confect. alkermes. hya- 
cinthor. &c. 
7. By striving to make a julep over-pleasant 
it may be spoiled (per §.85. 100. 101.). Be 
careful therefore not to misuse either sweets or 
acids. When conserves, syrups, robs and fu- 
gar'd things enter in a large,quantity, there will 
be no need of adding more sugar. If mineral 
acids are not at hand, or not mix'd in a sufficient 
quantity, their place may be well enough supply'd 
with a vegetable acid. 
8. If you mix a mineral acid (n° 3. (6.)) 
together with the neutral salts (n° 3. (10.)), be 
mindful of what has been said of them at §.102. 
n° 12. 
9. To conclude, the young physician is ad- 
vised to study conciseness and simplicity in pre- 
scribing this form: not to compile something to- 
gether of every kind mentioned (n° 2. and 3.), 
but to select such only as are more immediately 
demanded by his intention, and are best fitted 
to mix and make this form agreeable to art, 
Those compositions are generally the most friend- 
ly to nature, which consist of but a few ingre- 
dients, (per §.29.) 
10. From what has been hitherto said, it ap- 
pears that hydrosaccharum and oxyhydrosaccarum 
are each a kind of julep.
P4  §.264.


216 Of Juleps. 
§.264. For the ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients of this form, the liquid ex- 
cipient (§.263. n° 2.) is generally put in the first 
place; next to this is subjoined any other, which 
is a secundary excipient (§.ib. n° 3 (1.)); and 
then the excipienda or substances to be diluted 
therein may be placed agreeable to §.57. n° 2. 3. 
5. But sometimes the liquid excipient is put in 
the last place: which is however not so proper 
when its basis is to be some extemporaneous decoc- 
tion or infusion per §.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.)). 
§.265. The DOSE of a julep is determined ei- 
ther by weight, as ad ℥j, ij, iij, &c. or by mea- 
sure, as ad cyathum, or for infants ad cochl. j, ij, 
iij, &c. But a julep is sometimes order’d as a sa- 
miliar drink, in which case it may be given in a 
quantity sufficient to appease the patient’s thirst; 
but even in this case it is generally better to give 
but a small quantity at a time, tho’ the draught be 
the oftener repeated, than to overload and swell the 
stomach by indulging great drinking. 
§.266. For the GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form to be made up at once, that will be more 
or less in proportion to the quantity and frequency 
of the dose (§.265.), and as thirst is more or less 
intense; it may be sent in quantities even to ℔ j, 
ij, iij, iv: but for infants, there is seldom less than 
℔ß made up at a time., Nor is the general quan. 
tity of a julep restrained like that of an emulsion 
(§.253.) from its sooner or later changing or cor- 
rupting. 
§.267. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients of this form, we shall endea- 
vour to prescribe general bounds to the quantities 
wherein they are to be taken; as
Ad

217 Of Juleps. 
Ad excipientis (§.263. n° 2.) ℔j vel ℥xij.
Excipientis secundarii (§.ib. n° 3. (1.)) ℥j, ij. 
Succorum (ib. (2.))—℥ij, iij. 
Tinctur. acido-aquos.(ib. (3.))—℥j, jß. 
Spirituoforum (ib. (4.) (5.).)—ʒij, vj. 
Syrup, brodior. julepor. rob. gelatinar. &c. (§.263. 
n° 3. (7.) (8.).)—℥ij, iij.
Confectionum (ib. n° 6.)—ʒij, vj. 
Salium (ib. n°.3. (10.).)—ʒß, j. 
Pulverum (ib. n° 4.)—ʒj, ij. 
Aceti destillati (ib. n° 3. (6.).)—℥j, jß. 
Acidorum fossilium (ib. q. s. ad gratum acorem 
gtt. xx.—ʒj.
Sacchari (ib. (9.).) q. s. ad gratum dulced. ℥j, jß. 
With regard to these several ingredients and their
proportions, besides what is said at §.263. n° 9.
it is requisite to observe. 
1. That the great diversity of indications, and 
palates, with the vast variety of other circum- 
stances in particular cases, do often make many 
and great exceptions from these rules of propor- 
tion; so as to make the difference sometimes 
very wide. Hence 
2. When the intention is mostly to increase 
the circulation and warm the habit, wine, with 
such as are aromatic and spirituous (§.263. n° 3. 
(1.) (4.) (5.) enter a julep in a much larger pro- 
portion than that here assigned in so much that 
wine often makes the whole basis,(§.263. n° 2. 
(5.)) or menstruum for the other substances. 
3. If the extemporaneous infusions or decoc- 
tion.(§.263. n° 2. (3.) (4.) are to make up the 
greatest part of the julep, they are required to 
be somewhat thinner than usual. So that the 
proportion of ℥j of the species to ℔j of the  
menstrumm

218 Of Juleps. 
menstruum will suffice. See the history of infu- 
sions and decoctions. 
4. The neutral salts (§.263. n° 3. (10.)) 
ought therefore to be added in a very small quan- 
tity, left they should nauseate the julep by their 
unpleasant gust. 
5. Large quantities of powder, rob, gelleys 
and the like, would destroy the proper con- 
sistence of a julep. 
6. For determining the proportion of the 
sweet and acid ingredients of this form, the rule 
at §.263. n° 7. is to be observed. Sometimes 
the liquid excipient or menstruum itself is in- 
clined to sweetness or acidity (§.ib. n° 2. (3.) 
(4.) (5.) (6.)), for which, there should be a 
proportionable allowance. Too much sugar 
will make a julep not only unpleasant to many 
patients, but will also attenuate the blood too 
much, and incline ’em to sweat. 
§.268. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is, 
by M. F. Julapium D. ad vitrum. But if the basis 
of the julep is to be some extemporaneous infusion 
or decoction, directions are to be first given for 
them, and then for their mixture with the rest 
(per §.219. 231.): but this is omitted when the in- 
fusion or decoction is an officinal, with whose pre- 
paration the apothecary is supposed to be suffici- 
ently acquainted. 
§.269. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.60. 261. and 265. But it may be some- 
times proper to admonish the patient to drink the 
julep warm or hot, when things actually cold will 
abate the fluidity or perviousness of the animal 
fluids. The patient is generally sufficiently desi- 
rous of himself to drink this form cold; so that 
there


219 Of Juleps. 
there is hardly ever any occasion, to give a parti- 
cular direction for that. 
§.270. With regard to the USE of this form, 
it is not only extremely pleasant to take, but is 
also serviceable in most diseases, both acute and 
chronic; which are attended with too great heat or 
chillyness, an alcalescent corruption of the humours, 
or a viscidity of them, with violent thirst, faint- 
ings, &c. It is also very well adapted for a ve- 
hicle to other medicines, to facilitate the taking of 
them, and to promote their action or operation. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Julapium refrigerans gratissimum. 
♃. Vin. rhenan. recent. ℔ß. 
Aq. rosar. damascen. ℥iv. 
Succ. aurant. sev. recent. express. ℥jß 
Syr. violar. ℥jß 
M. F. julapium.
S. Julap. cardiac. &c. de quo bibat cyathum, ad 
libitum. 
2. Julapium pectorale. 
♃. Decoct. Pectoral. ℔ ij. 
Aq. theriacal. ℥ij. 
Gumm. arab. ʒvj. 
Nitri puri ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. tolut. ℥ij. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. De quo frequenter bibat haustum tepide.
3.

220 Juleps. 
3. Julapium stomachicum anodynum. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℔ß. 
Fort. 
Menth. simplic. aa ℥ij. 
Test. ostreor. pp. ʒjß.
Laud. liquid. gtt. xxx. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapiumi 
S. De quo bibat cochlear iij vel iv, frequenter, agi- 
tato prius vitro. 
4. Julapium stomachicum pepticum. 
♃. Vin. rub. gallic. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. aa ℥iv.
Fort. ℥ij. 
Syr. de menth. ℥jß. 
Sp. vitriol. q. s. ad gratam acidit.
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat cyathum urgente nausea. 
5. Julapium hystericum. 
♃. Aq. puleg. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Brion. comp. aa ℥iij. 
Syr. paeon. comp. ℥j. 
M. F. julap. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
6.

221 Juleps. 
6. Julapium cardiacum. 
♃. Aq. epidem. 
Cerasor. nigror. 
Lact. alexiter. aa ℥iij. 
Margarit. pp. ʒjß. 
Syr. de mecon. ℥j. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut in fronte, &c. 
(1.) Aliud- 
♃. Aq. theriacal. 
Epidem. aa ℥ij. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥vj. 
Acet. destillat. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒß. 
Syr. papav. errat. ℥jß. 
M. F. julapium. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum 3tia quaque hora. 
7. Julapium diureticum.
♃. Vin. rhenan. vet. 
Aq. raphan. C. 
Petroselin. C. aa ℥iij. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒjß. 
Syr. bals. C. ℥j 
M. F. julapium.
S. Ut supra. Capiat cyathum, pro re nata. 
8.

222 Juleps. 
8. Julapium in frigore febris intermittentis 
conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater Med. p. 120. 
ꝶ. Aq. decoct. hord. ℥xxx. 
Oxymel. simplic. ℥iij. 
Aq. stillat. caryophyll. arom. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ij. omni 1/4 horœ, calidè valde. sorbendas. 
9. Julapium roborans, anti-acidum, califaciens.
ꝶ Aq. stillat. cerasor. nigror. ℥ viij. 
Pulegii ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. ℥jB. 
Vitœ matthioli ℥ß 
Margarit. ppt. ʒjß. 
Confect. alkermes ʒij. 
Elœosacchar. citri ʒiij. 
M. D. ad vitrum.
S. Julapium perlatam, de quo capiat ℥j. omni semi- 
bora in languore: aut sit pro vehiculo alterius me- 
dicamenti. 
10. Julapium ex decocto magistrali, cardiacum 
ad dolores a partu. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Hord. mund. 
Avenœ integrœ ana ℥j. 
Cum aq. decoct. spatio 1/2 horæ, ℔ iij. 
adde 
Vini rhenani ℔j. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ij.
Syrup. kermesin. ℥iß. 
M. 
S. Hujus ℥ij. superbibat singulis dosibus mixturœ ano- 
dynœ ibidem descriptœ, donec sopialur dolor.
11.

223 Juleps.  
11. Julapium specie infusi, antiphlogisticum, in 
variolis utile. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 238. & seq. 
ꝶ. Flor. papaver. errat. 
Tunicœ ana m. ß. 
Infunde cum aq. pur. calidœ ℥xx. stent 
vase clauso, calore leni, per iij 
horas. Colaturæ expressæ adde 
Spir. sulphuris per campan. gtt. xx. 
Sal. polychrest. ʒjß. 
Syr. flor. rhoead. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Bibat, quantum lubet. 
12. Aliud, spiritus excitans in gangræna a causa 
calida, temperie alcalina. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 95. 
ꝶ. Rob. ribesiorum. 
Berberis ana ℥ij. 
Spir. salis commun. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. melissœ ℥vj
Vini rhenani ℥x. 
M.  
S. Capiat ℥j. omni hora. 
13.

224 Of Mixtures. 
13. Julapium confortans in metu abortus ab in- 
commodis graviditatis, ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 217. 
ꝶ Vini rhenani ℔ ij. 
Ag. stillat. cort. citrei ℥iv. 
Tinctur. granor. kermes ℥ij. 
Cinnamom. 
Balsam. embryon. aa ℥j. 
Gelatin. corn. cerv. citrat. ℥jß 
Syrup. rubi idœi  ℥ij.
M.
S. Capiat ℥jß languore. 
Of MIXTURES. 
§.272. A Mixture properly so call’d (§.260. 
(2.)) is a kind of internal and li- 
quid composition (§.259.), somewhat thicker in 
consistence than a julep (§.261.), and much strong- 
er in proportion to its bulk; taking in all forts of 
ingredients, even the most unpleasant, and con- 
taining several doses, but not to be determined by 
drops. 
§.273. The MATTER for this form (as at 
§.262.) is two-fold; excipient, or receiving, and 
excipienda, to be received by the former.
1. The excipient may be any liquor fit for 
internal use, whose sufficient dose is not so small 
as to be determined by drops; so that both aque- 
ous, vinous, and spirituous menstruums are very 
frequently used for the excipient of this form: 
such as distilled waters, both simple and com- 
pound; decoctions, infusions, wines, &c.
2. 

225 Of Mixtures. 
2. The excipicnda, are, in general, all dry, 
soft and liquid substances, mentioned §. 128. 
n° 1, 2, 3. and whatever else has been found 
serviceable by an internal use. 
§.274. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is almost wholly directed by their medicinal 
virtures. Not are we here so much under a necessi- 
ty of regarding their tenuity, pellucidity, or agree- 
ableness of colour, smell and taste, as we are in 
the election of ingredients for a julep (§.263.): 
tho' these considerations are not to be wholly ne- 
glected; especially too great thickness, which 
greatly incommodes the taking of this form. But 
we may observe, 
1. That distilled waters are more frequently 
used for the excipient than other liquors; be- 
cause some one or other of them may be chose 
suitable to almost every intention, and their 
great degree of fluidity makes them fitter for 
the reception and dilution of other ingredients. 
2. Decoctions and infusions are likewise often 
used; whose preparation is to be sometimes 
mentioned in a prescription, but is not the pro- 
per business of this place (V. §.211. and 224.): 
Tho' there are very few decoctions and infusions 
used in the composition of mixtures, but such 
as require no particular subscription or direction 
to the apothecary for their preparation (§.268.). 
But they should be such as are very thin: if they 
are a little thicker, they ought to be taken in a 
proportionably larger quantity. 
3. Substances of the powder kind, which are 
not dissolvable, being very frequent ingredients 
of this form, should not be gross, but of the 
most subtle kind; in order to prevent their be- 
ing troublesome to the patient the act of 
deglutition. 
Q 4.

226 Of Mixtures.
4. Things of the metallic kind, which have 
a very great specific gravity, ought to be ex- 
cluded from this form; especially if they are 
not capable of a dissolution in the liquor be- 
cause as they instantly subside, their distribution 
and the strength of the dose, may by that means 
be render’d very unequal; tho' this may be in 
in some measure excusable, when a mixture is to 
be taken for one dose, after it has been well 
shook. 
5. Such gums and gummose substances as af- 
ford a thick mucilage in an aqueous menstruum, 
ought to be either entirely omitted, or else en- 
ter in but small quantities: that the taking of 
this form may be render’d the more easy and 
agreeable. 
6. For the more uniform and intimate com- 
mixture of refinous and oily things with an aque- 
ous excipient, there is required the use of a sa- 
ponaceous intermedium. We therefore use the 
yolk of an egg for the more tenacious, as sper- 
maceti, the turpentines and the like; but sugar 
is sufficient for the more liquid, which are only 
used in small quantities, as the aromatic oils by 
distillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, &c. V. §.250. n° 3. 6, 7. 
7. Gum-resins, as ammoniacum, galbanum, 
&c. do usually enter the composition of mix- 
tures, after they have been first dissolved in 
wine, or vinegar. 
8. We ought to be the more cautious in these 
mixtures, not to compound things which will 
effervesce with, or preciptate each other, destroy 
each others virtues, or make some improper 
change; because their liquid form will render 
them much more liable to produce such tumultuous 
motions, and improper changes. (V. §.97. to 
103.). But there are some cases wherein the
physician

227 Of Mixtures. 
physician designedly combines such opposite sub- 
stances in mixtures, the better to answer his in- 
tention. 
9. If you endeavour to correct the colour, smell 
or taste, be mindful of what was said at §.85. 
99, 100, 101. that you may not disappoint your 
intention, nor appear ridiculous. 
10. Lastly, as in every form so in this, the 
prescriber should make his choice of ingredients 
short and just; aiming rather at conciseness and 
efficacy than number: in a manner that a pro- 
per judge may easily perceive his intention; 
otherwise, he may make rather a chaos than a 
uniform and proper mixture. V. §.29. 
§.275. For the ORDER of prescribing the se- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, it is the same as that 
to be observed in writing for a julep (§.264.); 
nor is it more constant or particular than that. 
§.276. The DOSE of this form is less than that 
of the julep (§.265.); being generally a spoon- 
ful or two, or a tea-cup full: by weight it is or- 
der’d from ʒj to ℥ß. But sometimes the dose is 
inlarged ad cyathum, or ad ℥j, ij, iij: which ob- 
tains mostly when the whole mixture is to be exhi- 
bited for one draught. Otherwise the dose may be 
determined by portions, in regard to the whole 
mixtures, as when one half, a third or a fourth part, 
order’d to be taken at a time: but we ought here 
to be cautious that the quantity do not exceed a 
convenient draught. For the rest, it may be of 
use to observe what'has been said at §.67. 
n° 4, 5. 
§.277. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, contains sometimes 
but one dose (§.276.),sometimes several: if the 
first, it is termed haustus, which should never ex- 
ceed ℥iij: if the latter, the mixture generally 
Q2 amounts 

228 Of Mixtures. 
amounts to ℥vj or viij; tho' it may by chance ex- 
ceed lb j. more or less according as the frequency 
and number of doses, and the circumstances at §.67. 
may require. 
§.278. The mutual Proportion of the seve- 
veral ingredients for mixtures, is determined as 
well from the proper consistence of the form (§.272. 
274.), as from the medicinal virtues of each ingre- 
dient, when separate or mixed, (per §.87. n° 1, 2.). 
collated with §.276, 277. Hence, 
1. If there are none but liquids to enter the 
composition, having no regard to the consistence, 
the proportion may be directed only by the me- 
dicinal virtues, in conjunction with the phy- 
sician’s intention. 
2. But when dry and soft substances are also 
to enter, the prescriber must guard against too 
much thickness (§.274.). In order to which,   
he may observe the following general rules of 
proportion for mixture, viz. 
Of the excipient (§.273. n° 1.)—℥j
Of soft substances, as electuaries, conserves, 
robs, pulps, and the like,—ʒj 
Of dry substances, as extracts, inspissated juices, 
mass of pills, powders, &c.—℈j, or jß.
Of sugar—ʒj, jss. 
or 
Syrups—ʒj, ij, iij. 
or q. s.
3. So that the quantity of soft substances may 
be advanced to ʒij, and the dry, to ʒj; when 
only one of them enters the composition of a 
mixture. 
4. But then the consistence of the fluid exci- 
pient will make some difference in the propor- 
tion: according as whether the liquor be of the 
thinner kind, as water, wine, &c. or of some 
thicker

229 Of Mixtures.
thicker infusion or decoction. (§.273. n° 1.). 
5. It should be likewise observed whether any 
liquid ingredients are received by the excipient; 
for in that case, the soft and dry substances may 
enter in a larger proportion. 
6. The proportion of saline and dry ingre- 
dients is to be deduced from their degree of 
strength, and their more or less easy dissolution: 
tho’ this form does not require an intire dissolu- 
tion of its ingredients; but when they are less 
soluble, they may be shook up in the mixture, 
like a powder, at the time of taking. 
7. For the quantity of sugar or syrups, read 
§.267. n° 6. These are sometimes prescribed in 
a much larger quantity than that assign’d at n° 2. 
as when they are intended to mix resins, balsams, 
oils, &c. with water or any aqueous menstruum; 
in which case, a greater inspissation of the mix- 
ture, will prevent the reparation of parts by stand- 
ing, which it would other wise suffer. 
8. A mixture for a single draught, will also 
admit of a larger proportion of soft and dry sub- 
stances, then when the intention may require it, 
than one for several doses. The generality of 
patients had rather put up with the thickness of 
a mixture, to have it in a smaller quantity; than 
to have it more liquid, but in a greater bulk,
or more doses. 
§.279.The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of this form, is 
order’d by M. F. Haustus, when the mixture is for 
one dose (§.277.): but if it is to be taken at se- 
veral times, it may be sufficient barely to write M. 
Afterwards, D. ad vitrum may be subjoined. And 
the phiol may be also order’d to be close stopp’d, 
when any loss or change may be apprehended 
from an admission of the ambient air. Sometimes  
Q3 a

230 Of Mixtures. 
a dry ingredient is order’d separate, in the form of 
a powder (§.106.), as (per §.242. n° 4. ult.), 
that it may be added to a quantity of the mixture 
a little before taking; In that case, we prescribe 
two forms. The same method is to be also ob- 
served, when an effervescence arising upon mix- 
ture ought to accompany the taking it, or when 
the intention may require the dose of powder to be 
larger, or more exactly determined, than is usual 
in this form. 
§.280. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient concerning the use of mixtures, may be 
sufficiently understood, in the general, from §.60. 
272. 276. and 277. Tho’ it may be sometimes 
proper to say whether it should be drank hot or 
cold (V. §.123. n° 3. (3.)) A julep may be or- 
der’d as a vehicle to be drank afterward, when the 
mixture is very unpleasant; otherwise it may be 
omitted, when nothing else requires it. When a 
powder is to be mix’d (per §.279. ult.) with it, 
the manner of compounding and taking it may be 
prescribed at discretion. 
§.281. The USE of this form is very frequent 
in practice, for as it is very easy to take, and fuits 
almost every intention, it is as often prescribed as 
the infusion (§.222.); it is rather order’d oftener: 
for it being a form so easilyand speedily prepar’d, 
it is fitted to give assistance in all sudden emergen- 
cies, as well as other cases; in so much that there 
is hardly any internal disease, but what will admit 
of being treated with this form. 
§.282. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Haustus anti-emeticus.
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Succi recent, citrei ℥ß. 
Vini rhenani ℥j. 
M. ꝶ

231 Mixtures.
ꝶ. Salis absinthii ʒj.  
D. utraque seorsim. 
S. Pulverem misceat liquori, moxque in ipso actu ef- 
fervescentiœ hauriat. 
2. Mixtura anti-emetica. 
♃. Succ. limon. recent. express. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒj. 
Aq. cinnamom. fort. 
Tenuis aa ℥j ss. 
Sacchar. albiss. q. s. 
M. 
S. Mistur. stomach. &c. Capiat cochlear, iij in 
singulis evomendi conat. 
3. Mixtura anti-alcalica, saponacea, abstergens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 51. 
ꝶ. Oxymell. squillit. ℥iij. 
Aceti squillit.  ʒij. 
Myrrhœ in aceto solutœ in tinct. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. cichorei ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. omni hora. 
4. Mixtura cardiaca, pretiosa, calfaciens,  
diaphoretica. 
ꝶ. Infus. lapid. porcini malacc. in aq. 
card, bened. fact. ℥iv. 
Vini rhenani generosiss ℥ij. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥ss. 
Extract. essential. croci gtt. iv. 
Confect. alkermes ʒvj. 
M 
S. Sumat omni semihora cochlear. j. 
Q4 5.

232 Mixtures. 
5. Mixtura opiata, antacida, roborans, ad dolores
a partu. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 219. 
ꝶ. Lapid. cancror. ʒiij. 
Corall, rubr. ʒij. 
Margarit. ppt. ʒj. 
Laud, puri gr. iij.
Syrup kermes ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cort. citrei. 
Melissœ. 
Majoranœ aa ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat ℥ss. 1/4 horœ, donec sopiatur dolor, 
superbibendo ℥ij. julapii ibid. descripti. 
6. Mixtura resolvens, saponacea. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rutœ  ℥xij. 
Borac. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒiij. 
Mellis puriss. ℥iij. 
M. 
Capiat ℥j. omni hora diet. 
7. Mixtura adstringens, ad hæmoptysin 
Vide Boerh, Mater. Med. p. 195. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. rhocados. 
Plantag. ana ℥iv.  
Extract. tormentiil. 
Bol. armen. levig. ana ʒj ss. 
Lap. hœmaiit. ppt. ʒj. 
Syr. Myrtin. ℥j. 
M.   
S. Capiat omni bora ℥j, concusso prius vitro. 
8.

233 Mixtures. 
8. Haustus emeticus, antimoniatus, fortis, pro 
adulto. 
R. Oxysacchar. emetic. Ludovic. 
Oxymell. squillit. ana ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. cinnamom. ℥j.
M. F. haustus. 
S. Sit pro dosi. 
9. Haustus purgans, in febre intermittente utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 132. 
ꝶ. Pulver. cornachin. ʒss. 
Elix. Propriet. cum sale tart. ppt. 
gtt. xl. 
Elœosacchar. menthœ ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. menth. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Capiat mane, die apyrexiasy vacuo stomacho, 
pro dosi. 
1O. Mixtura balsamica, in gonorrhœa conveniens. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 247. 
ꝶ. Tereb. vulg. in q. s. vitel. ov. solut. ʒij. 
Extract. rhei. 
Sal. prunell. aa ʒj. 
Syr. allhœœ & Fernel. ℥j. 
Infus. rad. glycyrrhiz. ℥x.
M. 
S. Capiat omni bihorio cochlear. j. probè concussa prius 
lagena: superbibat cyathum emulsi idonei, ibid. 
p. 246. descripti.
11. 


234 Mixtures. 
11. Haustus emeticus, communis. 
♃. Rad. ipecac, pulv. ʒss. 
Aq. lact. alexiter. ʒjß. 
Syr. violar. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora quinta pomeridiana 
bibendo copiose de decoct. hordei inter vomendum. 
12. Haustus catharticus, refrigerans. 
♃. Sails mirab. glaub. 
Mann. calabr. opt. 
Syr. rosar. damascenar. aa ʒvj. 
Aq. cinndmom. ten. ℥iij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat primo mane cum regimine. 
13. Haustus nephriticus. 
♃. Ol. Amigd. dulc. rec. frigide expres. ʒvj. 
Tartar. P. D. ʒij. incorporat. adde 
Aq. raphan. C. ℥j fs. 
Syr. de mecon. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. bis, vel ter in dies repetendus. 
S. Ut supra. Capiat mane & vesperi, vel urgente pa- 
raxysmo. Quo tempore (pro re nata) insolvantur 
℈ij. pulv. è test. ovor. calcinat. 
(1.)

235 Mixtures. 
(1.) Alius
♃. Ol. lini sem. frigid. & recent. ext. ʒx. 
Lixiv. saponis gtt. xxx. exactissime 
incorporates, adde 
Syr. de althœœ ℥ß. 
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut prior. 
14. Haustus balsamicus. 
♃. Tereb. è chio ℈j. 
Bals. tolut. ℈ß 
Vitel. ovor. q. s. 
Aq. cinnamom. ten. ℥ij. 
Syr. de 5 rad. aper. ʒvj.
M. F. haust. 
S.Ut in fronte, &c. 
15. Haustus pleuriticus. 
♃. Ol. sem. lini frigidè extract. ℥j. 
Sp. C. C. per se gtt. xxx. 
Aq. cerasor. nigror. 
Syr. bals. C. ana ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pector. &c, Capiat 6ta quaque hora.
16. 

236 Mixtures. 
16. Haustus diaphoreticus. 
♃. Aq. theriac. ʒvj. 
Cerasor. nigror. ℥jß. 
Theriac. androm. ʒß. 
Spir. nitri dulc. gtt. xxx.
Syr. de mecon. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat hora decubitus. 
17. Haustus peruvianus. 
♃. Aq. absinth. mag. C. ℥ß.  
Flor. chamomel. simplic. ℥jß. 
Ext. cort, peruv. ʒß. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haustus febrifugus, 3tia quaque hora sumendus.
18. Haustus antipyreticus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamon. ten. ℥ij. 
Salis absinth. ʒß. 
Sp. vitriol, gtt. xx. 
Syr. croc. ʒij. 
M. F. haustus. 
S. Haust. antifebrilis: 4ta quaque hora exhibendus.
19. 


237 Of Drops. 
19. Haustus bechicus. 
♃. Aq. hyssop. simplic. ʒjß. 
Lact. ammoniac. ℥ß.
Tinct. benz. 
Sp. C. C. per se aa gtt. xxx. 
Syr. diacod. ʒvj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. pect. Hora somni sumendus.
20. Haustus paregoricus. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Decoct. pectoral. aa ℥j. 
Nitri puri ℈j. 
Lauq. liq. gtt. xv.
Syr. de con. ʒij. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Haust. anodyn. &c. Decubitus hora sumendus. 
N. B. When draughts are not so well approved of, 
mixtures may he order’d after any of these formulœ; 
by a proportionable enlargement of the quantities to 
about three or four times as much. 
Of DROPS, or small Mixtures. 
§.283. DROPS (or mixtura contracta) are a kind 
of smaller or less bulkey, and stronger 
mixture (§.259.) than the foregoing (§.272.); 
consisting generally of substances which are spiri- 
tuous, 

238 of Drops.
tuous, or of great strength in proportion to their 
bulk, requiring to be dosed or portioned out by 
drops. As this form of medicine ows its origin 
to chemistry, so it undergoes various denomina- 
tions, as we shall presently observe. 
§.284. Therefore the MATTER or ingredients 
for this form, may be any kind of liquor which is 
fit for internal use, and is also effectual in a small 
quantity or dose: such as the stronger tinctures 
(§.221. n° 1. and §.232.) spirits of the like kind, 
essences, quintessences, elixirs, liquid balsams, na- 
tive and artificial, essential extracts, aromatic oils 
by distillation, the more strong and contracted sa- 
line liquors, &c.
§.285. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be guided by the physician’s inten- 
tion, the particular virtues of each ingredient 
(§.284.), and the mutual affinity or disposition 
of one to the other upon mixture. Nor is there 
any necessity in this form, to have so great a re- 
gard to the colour, smell and taste; the smallness 
of its dose being a sufficient recommendation. 
1. Therefore such ingredients should be select- 
ed as may agree not only in their virtues or in- 
tentions, but also mix with each other without 
any effervesence, precipitation, or other im- 
proper change. But the cautions which are re- 
quisite for this purpose, are hardly to be learn- 
ed but from chemistry. 
2. Tho’ sometimes ingredients are judiciously 
enough commixed, which do both ferment and 
destroy each other’s properties: as, e.g. acids 
and alcalies. There are some cases where, a 
neutral salt (which is at a medium between acid 
and alcaly, resulting from such mixture) is both 
more effectual and less hazardous. But even in 
these mixtures, we should be cautious not to let 
any


239 Of Drops. 
any precipitation ensue; for that is acircumstance 
hardly ever approved of in this form. 
3. Such substances as are aqueous, gummose, 
or repleat with an olive or butyraceous oil, which 
does not well unite with spirituous things; as 
also, conferves, electuaries, insoluble powders, 
and the like: these should be excluded from 
mixtures for drops, as well for their being of 
too thick a consistence, as for their ineptitude 
for an uniform mixture. 
4. The stronger resins, solid extracts and mas- 
ses of pills, are sometimes order’d in small mix- 
tures; when the intention is to purge, and the 
form but for one dose: but then sugar, syrups, 
or some officinal julep is usually added, either 
to promote the solution, or to qualify the heat 
of the spirituous menstruum. 
5. This form will admit of dry salts, if so be 
they act strongly in a small dose, and are also 
soluble in a spirituous menstruum: but of this 
kind there are hardly any, but such salts as are 
volatile, the tartarus regenerate, and a few  
others. 
6. Sometimes saline liquors are also order’d 
in this form: but if such are not to be exhibited 
separately, we ought to consider with what we 
mix them; for they frequently do not agree 
with liquors which are spirituous. 
7. The number of ingredients to be order’d 
in this form should be few: three or four are 
usually sufficient. The errors of mixture may 
be more easily avoided in a prescription of but 
few ingredients; we shall be also more sure of 
our intention, and give less trouble to the com- 
pounder. But when one ingredient or officinal 
compound will answer the intention, as is fre- 
quently the case; that may be then order’d to 
be given in drops (§.283.), without the trouble  
of


240 Of Drops. 
of mixture. There are also such a vast number 
of officinal compositions, that those who love a 
great many simples in a form, may well enough 
spare themselves the trouble of prescribing new 
extemporaneous mixtures for drops. 
8. Lastly, if drastic or very strong things are 
exhibited in this form, directions should be 
given for making the dose very exact; the men- 
duration by drops being usually left to,the pa- 
tient or his attendants. 
§.286. The ORDER or method of placing the 
ingredients of this form in a prescription, is no 
other than what may be deduced from the rules 
at §.57. n° 2, 3. But when there are any ingre- 
dients of a more difficult solution order’d, as resins, 
extracts, &c. (§.285. n° 4.) these ought to be ge- 
nerally set in the first place; then the menstruum 
and other addenda may be subjoined. 
§.287. The DOSE of this form is usually deter- 
mined by a certain number of drops (§.283.) more 
or less; but seldom more than lx. Otherwise, 
small mixtures of the weaker kind may be dosed 
by cochlear. ß. vel j. and such as are purgative, to 
be taken all at one time (§.285. n° 4.) may equal 
℥ß vel j. for a dose. 
§.288. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form to be prescribed at once, is generally restrain- 
ed between ʒij and ℥j  or ij. But if the dose be 
large, to be measured by the spoon, and continued 
a long time, with other considerations at §.68. 
if these urge, the form may be prescribed in still 
larger quantities; especially as the nature of the 
ingredients is generally such as not to be subject to 
corrupt or change by keeping. Sometimes only 
one dose is sufficient for the intention: but if it be 
only a few drops, it cannot well be taken in this
forms;

241 Of Drops.
form; it should be rather diluted or inlarged into 
a draught, with some proper vehicle. 
§.289. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, does scarce admit of a de- 
termination, even by general rules. It is to be 
principally regulated by the physician’s indication, 
with the particular virtues and strength of each in- 
gredient, and their more or less easy solution or 
mixture; with which, the physician ought to be 
previously acquainted. Hence 
1. Such things as are more bulkey in propor- 
tion to their strength, may be order’d in large 
quantities; but less portions of those which are 
more strong or contracted: such are essential 
oils and extracts, volatile salts, balsams, &c.
Thus one thing is to be assisted, qualified and 
corrected by another. 
2. Otherwise, when the physician rather 
chuses a small dose, the more strong and effica- 
cious ingredients may be taken in an equal, or 
even a larger proportion than the weaker or 
more dilute. 
3. Such substances as can be dissolved in only 
a certain quantity by the rest, should be order’d 
in a proportion rather below than above than 
quantity; left some part should remain undis- 
solved, or the mixture be render’d over thick. 
To this head belong balsams, oils, resins, solid 
extracts, &c. 
4. The quantity of drastic or very strong in- 
gredients should be so carefully proportioned to 
the rest, as that every dose of the mixture may 
contain its due share. 
§.290. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, is usually order’d 
by M. D. ad vitrum. For what regards extempo- 
raneous infusion or decoction, that is not the bu- 
R siness

242 Of Drops. 
siness of this place, but belongs to §.211. 224.
But when the mixture is required to be made very 
exact, by triture, that may be allowed a particular 
injunction to the compounder: as is frequent in 
resins, solid extracts, and the like, after this it 
may be sometimes proper to order the mixture to 
be strained, when there are any impurities, or 
parts which cannot be wholly dissolved. The re- 
ceptacle may be order’d to be exactly closed with 
a cork and bladder, when the virtues of the mix- 
ture are very volatile and easy to be dissipated. It is 
sometimes usual to tie the phiol twice over with 
pieces of bladder, without a cork, when the dose 
is to be measured out by drops; for by that means, 
by perforating the inner bladder with a needle, 
&c. upon shaking and turning up the phiol, the 
drops may be number’d more easily, as they come 
but more slowly and regularly. 
§.291. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, has scarce any thing in 
it particular; unless that we give it the name of 
haustus or haustulus, when the whole quantity makes 
but one dose (§.288.); but if it contains several, 
it is usual to call it after the title of the most con- 
siderable ingredient; hence, the tincture, balsam, 
oil, spirit, essence, elixir, &c. are names frequent- 
ly in use; many of which, are however used pro- 
miscuously: nor do they often exactly observe the 
difference assigned by the chemist between the 
forms signified by those names. The title of drops 
may be a general one, for all whose dose is to be 
determined by that measure. A vehicle cannot 
well be omitted for taking the stronger mixtures:
one ought therefore to be chose which is agreeable 
with the form both in texture and virtues, making 
no precipitation, repulsion, dissipation, destruc- 
tion or change among the medicinal parts. The 
vehicles commonly in use, are, wine, juleps (§.261.), 
infu-

243 Drops or small Mixtures. 
ihfusions (§.211.), decoctions(§.224.), broth, 
&c. balsams, and oily drops, are best taken in su- 
gar or syrup. 
§.292. The USE of this form is Very exten- 
sive and agreeable: there are few but what like it 
for the smallness of ther dose; it being used mostly 
where a warming and stimulating power is requi- 
site, to which the ingredients for this form have 
a general aptitude: tho' there are not wanting some 
things which are given in drops for the intention of 
cooling, &c. as the acid spirits from minerals of 
various kinds, &c. 
§.293. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1. Haustulus aquam purgans, nec acriter tameri 
irritans. 
Vid. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 78. 
ꝶ. Scammon. syriac. puri gr. xiv. 
Spir. reginœ hungariœ ʒij. 
In mortario vitreo s. a. tritis, &c. fæces 
separatis, admisce 
Syrup, rosar. solut. cumsenn. ʒvj. 
F. haust. 
S. Capiat pro dosi. 
2. Alius; purgans, in scorbuta utilis. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 184. 
ꝶ. Pil. coch. maj. ℈j. 
Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. ʒj.
Spir. menthœ ʒj ss. 
Syr. rosar. solut. cum senn. ʒj. 
M. F. haust. 
S. Hauriat. mane pro dosi. 
R2 3.

244 Drops or small Mixtures.
3. Elixir, stimulans, resolvens. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 18. 
ꝶ. Elix. propr. cum sale tartar. ppt. 
Sal. volat. oleos. 
Purgans SENNERTI ana ℥ss, 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xxv. quater de die ex vino. 
♃. Liquor antipodagricus. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Alcahest. Glauber. ℥j. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Sumat cmni mane gtt. ix. ex jure vitulino. 
5. Tinctura anti-hysterica, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Tinct. succin. ʒij. 
Castor. 
Spir. sal. ammoniac. aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Sumat gtt. xxx. ex syrup. kermes in paraxysmo. 
6. Mixtura stimulans, roborans, anti-hydropica. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 204. 
ꝶ. Tinct. rad. helen. ℥j. 
Myrrh. 
Spir. matrical. ana ℥ss. 
Ol. stillat. baccar. juniper. 
Absinth. ana gtt. viij. 
M.
S. Capiat cochlear. ss. quater de die, vacuo stomacho, 
ex vino generoso. 
7.

245 Drops or small Mixtures. 
7. Tinctura cephalica. 
♃. Sp. lavendul. comp. ʒij. 
C. C. per se ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Ut in fronte. Capiat gtt. xxx. in haustul. julap. 
8. Tinctura corroborans. 
♃. Tinctur. cortic. peruv. ʒiij. 
Elix. vitriol. mynsicht. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. lx. ter in die ex haustulo vini rubri. 
9. Tinctura hysterica. 
♃. Spir. castor. C. ʒiv. 
C. C. succin. 
Tinct. myrrhœ aa ʒj. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. l. in haust. julap. 5ta quaque bora, in 
& extra paraxysmo. 
10. Tinctura stomachica. 
♃. Elix. propriet. cum acido ℥ß 
Tinctur. mart. aur. ʒjß. 
Ol. cinnamom. in sacch. q. s. solut. 
gtt. iij. 
M. 
S. Capiat gtt. xl. in haustulo julapii. 
(1.) Alius- 
♃. Tinct. stomach. amar. ʒss. 
Elix. vitriol. ʒjss.
M. 
S. Ut supra. 
R3 Of

246 Of Injections. 
Of the Forms of EXTERNAL MEDICINES. 
§.294. EXTERNAL FORMS (§.105.), are ei- 
ther commom to several parts of the 
body, or else proper to but one particular part. 
We shall treat first of those common to several 
parts. 
Of Common EXTERNAL FORMS. 
Of INJECTIONS. 
§.295. AN Infection (enema) is a medi- 
cated liquor, to be convey'd generally 
by means of some tube, thro' natural or preterna- 
tural apertures, into particular cells or cavities in 
the body, for various uses. 
§.296. The particular cavities (§.295.) into 
which injections are usually convey'd, are those of 
the ears, nose, eyes, mouth, anus, bladder, penis, 
uterus and vagina; not excluding wounds, absces- 
ses, sinusses and sistulæ. But as those for the mouth 
and anus, viz. glysters and gargarizms are more 
frequently used, and proper only to those parts; 
to proceed agreeable to our proposed method 
(§.294.), we shall hereafter give them a separate 
treatment. 
§.297. To the form of injections belongs the 
chirurgia infusoria, or injection of liquors into the 
blood-vessels of living animals, which became so 
considerable towards the end of the last century; 
but this practice being now almost extinct, we shall 
not here give a particular treatise thereof. 
§.298. 


247 Of Injections.
§.298. The Matter or ingredients for com- 
peting the medicated liquor(§.295.), are taken 
from infusions (§.211), decoctions (§.224.) 
juices (§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), and mixtures, 
large (§.272.) or small (§.283.). From whence 
(ex l.c.), whatever is necessary to be known on 
this head, may be readily learned. 
§.299. A proper Election of these ingredients 
(§.298.) can only be directed by a previous 
knowledge of the medicinal virtues of each, with 
proper judgment in the indication; for we here 
need not regard the colour, smell or taste, Hence 
1. There is here no occasion for the correc- 
tors (§.83 and 85.), which are so frequently 
used in prescribing and compounding internal 
forms. 
2. On the contrary, this form often takes in 
things, which, by reason of their unpleasant- 
ness and noxious qualities, are seldom or never 
applied to internal uses: such as oils infused or 
boiled, ointments, urine, henbane, and the 
strongest mercurials, &c. 
3. But we need be extremely cautious not to 
order things of too violent action for injections, 
in over large quantities; for the bibulous vasa 
inhalantia, which are open in every part, may 
transfer them immediately to the blood and 
lymph: or the vicinity and nakedness of some 
nerve, tendon or bone, may prove equally of 
as bad a consequence. 
4. Tho' this form will admit of a little thick- 
er consistence than others, yet it ought to be suf- 
ficiently fluid, and its mixture equable; both 
that it may not obstruct the small tube through 
which it is to be convey’d (§.295.), and that 
the intermix’d solid parts may not prove often- 
sive by their roughness. Therefore the dry in- 
gredients, which are not dissolvable, ought to 
R4 be

248 Of Injections. 
be most exactly levigated. There is also some- 
times occasion for a saponaceous intermedium 
(§.274. n° 6.) in this form, when oily sub- 
stances are to be intimately mix’d with aqueous. 
5. Sometimes things are order’d in this form 
which are of the considence of an ointment or 
butter, and which grow more or less solid upon 
cooling; but such things are not to be injected 
before they are sufficiently attenuated, by heat, 
or a proper menstruum. 
§.300. The ORDER or method of precribing 
the ingredients for an injection, is to be observed 
the same as in the several liquors §.298. agreeable 
to the particular nature of each, as we have before 
observed, in loc. ibid. cit. 
§.301. The DOSE of an injection is hardly to 
be limited in the general, as it differs very much 
with the size of the cavity (§.296.) into which 
it is to be injected, and the particular strength of 
the liquor or injection itself. In some cases only a 
drop or two will suffice; and then there is no oc- 
casion for a siphon or tube; as frequently happens 
in disorders of the eyes and ears. In many other 
cases, ʒj. ℥ss, j, ij, jv, or more, is injected into a 
part at a time. But most commonly, the filling
a part ’till it runs over is the proper limits of the 
dose of this form. 
§.302. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an in- 
jection to be prescribed at a time, may be easily 
deduced from considering the quantity of each 
dose (§.301.), the more or less frequent repeti- 
tion thereof, and the disposition of it to keep a 
longer or shorter time without changing, &c. 
§.303. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for composing an injection, may 
be learned from what has been said on this head 
in the histories of the several liquors (§.298.) 
to


249 Of Injections. 
to compound it, compared with the rules for elect- 
ing (§.299.) We may however observe, that an 
efficacious medicine may be used in three or four 
times a larger dose for this form, than for an
internal one. Yet we should not over-load it 
(§.299. n° 3.).
§.304. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for an injection, should be con- 
formable to the directions proper to the several 
other forms (§.298.) composing it; from whence, 
this article is to be learned. Tho' we sometimes 
add F. liquor pro injectione. The operation of in- 
jecting this form, not belonging to the apothecary, 
except in glysters, it is not the business of this 
place to treat thereof. 
§.305. The SUPERSCIPTION or direction to 
the patient for an injection, explains to him (be- 
sides the title §.60. n° 3. §.295. and 304.) what 
relates to the method of using or applying it; be- 
cause this business is generally referr’d to the pa- 
tient or his attendants, tho’ it may be sometimes 
properly assigned to a surgeon. The direction 
therefore injoins 
1. Whether the liquor is to be injected cold, 
warm, or hot. Cold injection being frequently 
pernicious to the body, is very seldom used; 
except when the intention is to repel, astringe 
or strengthen. A warmth nearest to that of a 
healthy human body, is the most serviceable 
and usual for this form, as best agreeing with 
every part. Too intense a heat is as bad as to 
inject cold, as it may scald or shrink up the 
small fibres and vessels. 
2. The injection is sometimes made barely by 
dropping the liquor into a part, when the cavity 
has an aperture large enough, and the quantity to 
be injected is but small (§.301.), requiring no 
great force to throw it in. But in the contrary 
cases,

250 Of Injections.
cases, a proper instrument is required. For this 
purpose, are used syringes of several sizes, made 
of various substances, and adapted to emissary 
tubes of various figures, according to the diffe- 
rence of the cavity and liquor to be injected. In- 
jections for the uterus and vagina are convey’d 
by an instrument on purpose, term’d metren- 
chites *; The bladder is injected by means of 
a tubulated catheter. 
3. The particular position of the patient, 
most convenient for injecting the liquor, may 
be sometimes directed; as may also that, where- 
in the patient is most likely to retain the liquor 
longest, whether by keeping the same posture, 
or by changing it after the injection. 
4. There are frequently several things to be 
observed also, after the injection; as when the 
liquor is to be retained in the cavity a certain 
time, or having performed its office, to be soon- 
er or later discharged. To this head belongs 
keeping the part at rest, its orifice closed, or the 
contained liquor in a proper agitation, &c. 
5. Lastly, we are here to direct how much 
at once, how often, at what time, and ’till 
when, &c. the injection is to be made and fol- 
lowed: the limitation of all which particulars, 
will readily appear to the physician, from his 
intention. 
6. But both the prescriber and compounder 
ought to be particularly cautious in this form, 
not to write any thing beyond the rule of secre- 
cy and decency, per §.60. n° 8. 
§.306.
* Described by SCULTETUS, in armament. chyrurg. part I. 
tab. 13. fig. 2. and tab. 43. fig. 6. 

251 Injections. 
§.306. The USES of injections are very nu- 
merous and extensive, especially in chirurgical cases, 
in all ages; being well accommodated to the in- 
tentions of absterging, diluting, mollifying, re- 
solving, easing, astringing, opening, healing, 
cleansing the solid, and washing out soft and fluid 
parts, &c. 
§.307. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Clysma auriculare, ulceri intra meatum audito- 
rium abstergendo, mundando, aptum. 
ꝶ. Urirœ homin. san. ℥iv. 
Sapon. venet. ℈j. 
Tinct. myrrh, gtt. xl. 
Mell. rofar. ʒvj. 
M.  
S. Hujus liquoris tepidi, quantum cavo capi potest, 
quotidie bis injiciatur in aurem œgram supinatam,
ac detineatur per aliquot minuta, dein aure prona 
rursus emittatur. 
2. Aliud, airi sordibus induratis obstructæ 
conveniens. 
ꝶ. Ol. amigd. dulc. ʒij. 
Amaror. ʒj 
Fell. lucii piscis ʒß. 
Exacte M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Gtt. vj. ter de die instillentur auri supinatœ, de- 
tineantur gossypio immisso. Idem & antihelmin- 
ticum est. 
3.

252 Injections. 
3. Injectio ad cruorem coagulatum, extravasatum, 
diluendum. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 75. 
ꝶ. Mell. commun. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Sal. marin. ℥ß. 
Aq. pluviœ ℥xij. 
M.  
S. Hujus tepefacti q. s. injiciatur cavo cruorem con- 
tinenti, leniterque conquassatum dein una cum cru- 
ore dilute rursus evacuetur. 
4. Emulsum digestivum ad sistulas curandas. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 93. 
ꝶ. Terebinth. nativ. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. ℥j. 
S. a. subactis admisce 
Mellis commun. ℥ij. 
Spir. vini commun. ℥ß, 
Aq. commun. ℥ix. 
D. 
S. Calefactum & probe mistum injice. 
5. Decoctum balsamicum, consolidans fistulam 
puram. 
V. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 94. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. hyperic. ℥iv. 
Aloes. 
Myrrhœ. 
Olibani ana ʒij. 
Coquendo leniter, mista, subige cum 
Vitell. ovor. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Calefactum parum in fistulam injice.
6.

253 Injections. 
6. Injectio detergens, ad urethram ulcere venereo 
erosam. Ibid. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Mell. rosar. ℥j. 
Aloes puriss. gr. x. 
Sal. ammon. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. fœnicul. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Liquor mundans, cujus q. s. ter, quater de die, in 
virgam, sanie pruis expressa vacuam, & pone lo- 
cum ulceratum constrictam, ope siphunculi injiciatur. 
7. Injectio ad gonorrhæam non virulentam. 
4. Aq. calc. viv. ℥vj. 
Tereb. venet. in vitel. ov. q. s. solut. 
ʒß
Merc. dulc. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j.
Mell. commun. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Usurpetur liquor, per residentiam horœ minut. j. 
depurates, concusso prius vitro. 
8. Injectio ad sphacelum cavum. 
♃. Aq. calc. ℥vj. 
Tinct. myrrh. ℥ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ℥j. 
Mel. œrugin. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur calide, frequenter. 
9.

254 Injections. 
9. Injectio ad hæmorrhagiam in cavum. 
♃. Aq. ferrat. fabri ferrarii ℔ jß. 
Cons. ros. rub. ℥ij. 
Vitriol. alb. ʒjß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosar. ℥ij. 
M. & cola. 
S. Injiciatur frigide, ad cavi repletionem. 
10. Injectio confolidans. 
♃. Aq. hord. tepid. ℔j. 
Bals. tolut. (in vitel. ov. n°. j. solut.)
ʒij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥ij. 
Sacchar. alb. ℥iij. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur tepide, post hœmorrhagiam obturatam.
11. Injectio ad urethram inflammatam. 
♃. Aq. hord. ℥vj. 
Trochisch. alb. rhas. ʒij. 
Alum. rup. ℈ij. 
Mel. rosar. ʒvj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur. lenissme tepifacta, frequenter.
Of

255 Of Aspersions. 
Of ASPERSIONS. 
§.308. AN ASPERSION (termed by the an- 
tients pasma, catapasma, diapasma, 
empasma, and sympasma), is a powder of the finer 
kind (§.106.), to be sprinkled upon external parts 
of the body for various uses. 
§.309. This powder is seldom thus used, but 
when it is of the midling or greatest degree of 
tenuity (per. §.107. n° 1. 3.); because large par- 
ticles do not spread fo well and equally, nor so 
easily adhere to a part, as when they have a larger 
surface given them by comminution. 
§.310. The Matter or ingredients, ELEC- 
TION and ORDER to be observed in prescribing 
this form, may be easily understood from compar- 
ing what has been said at §.109, 110. with the in- 
dication. For there is no material difference or 
exception to make, unless that we need not be so 
solicitous about the colour, smell and taste; but 
without any regard to the specific gravity, we 
may only accommodate all these three (matter, 
election and order) agreeable to our intention. 
Hence, many substances are used in this form, 
which are seldom or never taken into the body 
§.299. n° 2. 
§.311. The DOSE of this form is very uncer- 
tain, nor is it ever determined by weight; being 
generally limited only by the largeness of surface 
on the part, upon which it is to be sprinkled: 
Hence, it is not subject to that division which ob- 
tains at §.113. 118. 
§.312. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined upon the same condi- 
tions with those mention’d at §.301. 
§.313.

256 Of Aspersions.
§.313. For the mutual PROPORTION of the 
several ingredients for this form, that can only be 
deduced from a previous knowledge of the par- 
ticular nature and virtues of each ingredient, and 
their relation to the physicians intention. 
§.314. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, is order’d by F. or M. F. 
pulvis: sometimes adding tenuissimus, when it is so 
required. A small card or deal box is the usual 
receptacle for this form; tho’ it is sometimes or- 
der’d to be ty’d up in a bit of coarse muslin, or 
lawn. 
§.315. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, acquaints him with the 
method of using it, which is usually performed 
only by inspersion, or sprinkling upon the part 
When it is ty’d up in a bit of lawn or muslin, it 
is then to be shook or sifted thro’ upon the part.
But if the declivity or oblique surface of the part, 
renders it less apt to receive and retain the powder 
by aspersion, it may be first strew’d upon a piece 
of linen or woollen cloth, or paper, and by that 
means be applied and held to the parts. 
The pasma, or powder for aspersion, is seldom 
order’d to be applied hot. But there are some- 
times several things order’d to be observed and 
done before and after the aspersion: as when the 
part is to-be first cleansed, rubbed, anointed, or 
bound up, &c. But these will sufficiently appear 
from every one’s indication. 
§.316. The USE of aspersions is pretty am- 
ple, being most frequently found in the hands of 
Surgeons, for the intentions of drying up, dispers- 
ing, astringing, cleansing, corroding, correcting 
acrimony, healing, &c. hence, this form is fre- 
quently required in wounds, ulcers and hæmor- 
rhages; in denudations and hurts of the bones, 
nerves and tendons; in defluctions of humours,
erysi-

257 Aspersions.
erysipelas, cutaneous disorders, &c. To this 
head we may also refer those powders which are 
applied by aspersion to persume or beautify divers 
parts of the body; sometimes called cyprus- 
powders.  
§.317. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Pulvis mundans, ad bubonem venereum 
apertum.  
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 249. 
ꝶ. Pulv. fol. siccator. scordii ℥ij. 
Vitriol, alb. ʒij. 
Aloes ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Aperto ulcert, deterso prius, inspergatur ad 
depurandum.  
2. Pulvis ad erysipelas. 
ꝶ. Pulv. erysipelatod. Mynsich. 
Flor. sambuc. siccator. ana ℥iij. 
Smalti ℥ij. 
Camphorœ ʒjß. 
Tenuiter trita M. 
S. Hujus calefacti prius q. s. loco adsecto insperga- 
tur, aut super charta cœrulea distributum parti 
applicetur & fascid leniter circumvoluta firmetur.
S 3. 


258 Aspersions. 
3. Pulvis balsamicus, ossibus, tendinibus nervis, 
nudatis conveniens. 
ꝶ. Myrrhœ ʒß. 
Olibani. 
Mastiches ana ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Colophoniœ ℥ß. 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Eo conspergantur partes adfectœ, sub qualibet 
deligatione. 
4. Pulvis adstringens, ad sistendam hæmorrhagiam 
vulneris externi. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dratonis ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lapid. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis tenuissimus. 
S. Hujus q. s. inspergatur vasi vulnerato, & stupis 
alcohole calido madidis, vesicaque vel sascia circum- 
posita, firmetur. 
5. Diapasma acrimoniam obtunclens, ad in- 
tertriginem. 
ꝶ. Amyli ℥ij. 
Cretœ alb. 
Cerussœ ana ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. florent. ʒj. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Inclusus sindoni rarœ excuiiatur super parte exco- 
riata, prius detersa.
6. 

259 Of Epithems.
6. Diapasma detergens. 
(1.) ♃. Myrrhœ. 
Alöes ana ℈ij. 
Alum. ust. ʒß. 
M. F. pulvis subtillissimus. 
S. Flocculo gossipii excutiatur, super partes sordidas 
fungosas. 
(2.)—fortior. 
♃. Vitriol. alb. ʒij. 
Precipit. rubr. ʒjß. 
Alum. ust. ʒj. 
Disjunctim levigantur, & per cribra- 
tionem simul misce. 
S. Ut prior. 
7. Diapasma cicatrizans. 
♃. Colophon. nig. ʒij. 
Bals. tolut. ʒj. 
Sacch. albis. ʒvj. 
M. F. pulv. subtilis. exactissime levigando. 
S. In partibus excoriatis, ex gossipio, asperge. 
Of EPITHEMS. 
§.318. EPITHEMS are a kind of external me- 
dicines, of various consistences (but 
not like that of an ointment or emplaster), to be 
applied to the superficies of some external part of 
the body, for various intentions. When they are 
S2 to

260 Of Fomentations. 
to be applied hot, they take the name of somentum 
or fotus. 
§.319. Epithems are of a threefold consistence: 
either (1.) liquid; (2.) dry or solid; or (3.) soft 
and like a pultice. It is those of the first and se- 
cond consistence which ate properly termed epi- 
thems: the last kind is usually called malagma, 
puis or a cataplasm. We shall, for dictinction sake, 
treat of each separately. 
Of Liquid EPITHEMS. 
§.320. A Liquid Epithem, fotus or fomen- 
tation, is a simpie or compound medi- 
cated liquor, which is to be applied either hot or cold, 
by means of a proper vehicle, to some external part 
or the body; in order to make a change in the 
affected and adjacent parts, agreeable to the phy- 
sicians intention. 
§.321. The Matter or ingrediehts for com- 
posing the medicated liquor (§.320.) are, water, 
milk, wine, vinegar, spirit of wine, liquid juices, 
oil, urine, &c. either simple and by themselves, 
or variously compounded and prepared together, 
and mix'd with each other, or with other officinal 
or extemporaneous simples or compounds, of dif- 
ferent consistences: as distilled waters of all kinds, 
vinegars, oils by infusion or decoction, aromatic 
spirits, tinctures, essences, saline and lixivious li- 
quors, smith's-forge and lime water, &c. more 
particularly infusions made from these and other 
proper ingredients (per §.211.), decoctions 
(§.224), expressed juices (§.235.), emuisions 
(§.246.) and mixtures, diffuse (§.272.) and con- 
tracted (§.283.).
§.322. 

261 Of Fomentations. 
§.322. A proper ELECTION of the ingredients 
for infusions is to be deduced from the physician’s 
indication, with the structure and disposition of 
the particular part of the body to be alter’d, or 
to which infusions are to be applied, together with 
its morbid or sound state and the known nature of 
the liquor made use of. Observe therefore,
1. That what has been said in general con- 
cerning the election of ingredients for internal 
forms (§.213, 226, 237, 248, 274, 285.), 
may also take place here. 
2. But as we need not be solicitous about the 
colour, odour and taste, in this external form; 
so we need not make any addition of substances 
used for the correction of those qualities for in- 
ternal use, such as syrups, sugar, &c. 
3. Nor is a little thicker consistence usually 
disagreeable to this form: unless when it is re- 
quired to penetrate more than ordinary; for 
which, a greater degree of fluidity is generally 
preferable. 
4. The intention is often to produce a change, 
not only in the part to which this form is im- 
mediately applied, but it is also intended some- 
times to affect the viscera which are deeply situ- 
ated beneath, (§.320.). 
5. Hence, it will be most proper to select 
ingredients, whose principles and virtues consist 
of parts extremely small, volatile and penetrat- 
ing; especially when the intention is to affect 
parts internally situated, So that earths, stony 
substances, astringents, such as incrassate, and 
the like, seem to have little or no efficacy in 
them; since their grossness prevents their being 
absorbed by the small pores and vessels of the 
part, or else, by cloging up the small orifices, 
prevent their own ingress. But one may much 
more easily and effectually obtain the intention
S3 of

262 Of Fomentations.
of a striction, by the addition of aromatic and 
spirituous substances, which are more penetrat- 
ing. 
6. A regard must be also had to the nature of 
the part to which the fomentation is to be im- 
mediately applied; whether it will be injured by 
the action of oil, water, spirit, or something 
sharp; or whether one thing may not do the 
part as much harm as the other does it good.
7. For the rest, this form often takes in sub- 
stances which are seldom or never used inter- 
nally, such as the strongest preparations of mer- 
cury, and lead, with alcohol vini per se, the 
henbanes, mandrakes, nightshades, hemlocks, 
&c. 
8. But in ordering these deleterious substan- 
ces, the prescriber should be mindful, that as 
there are vasa inhalantia, very open and bibu- 
lous throughout the whole external surface of the 
body, their parts may enter the blood without 
ever passing thro' the stomach and primœ viœ. 
§.323. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of a fomentation, is to be observ’d 
much the same as that for internal forms (§.321.), 
which we have before recited. 
§. 324. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined either by the weight or measures used for 
the other internal forms. Its quantity or dose be- 
ing more or less, according to the size of the part 
to be fomented, and as the substance, by whose 
intervention it is to be applied, is more or less 
bibulous. A woollen cloth takes more than a 
linen one, and a cloth two or three times folded 
will imbibe more of the fomentation than one 
single, &c. 
§.325. For the GENERAL QUANTITY of 
this form to be sent to the patient at a time, as it 
is


263 Of Fomentations. 
is seldom less than lbss. so it is very frequently 
more than equal to ℔j, ij, iij.; according as the 
parts to be fomented are larger or smaller, and 
more or less in number; or as the vehicle is more 
or less bibulous (per §.324.); or the fomentation 
is to be continued a longer or shorter time, or is 
required to be repeated at longer or shorter inter- 
vals; or as the fomentation itself is more or less 
subject to change and corrupt, or is more or less 
easily prepared. It is, however, generally better 
to order somewhat too much than too little, espe- 
cially when the parts to be fomented are pretty 
large or numerous; left the liquor should be ex- 
pended too soon, or not hold out for the number 
of applications. 
§.326. The mutual PROPORTION of the several 
ingrediens for a fomentation may be determined 
from what has been already said on this head (at 
§.217. 230. 241. 254. 278. 289.), compared with 
§.303. 322. It can be well ascertained, only from 
the phystcian's indication, and the known virtues 
of the ingredients: but the form being for exter- 
nal use, does not require so very exact a determi- 
nation of the proportion, as those do which are 
internal. Yet it may not be improper to observe 
the caution at §.322. n° 8. as also the consistence 
of each ingredient; left the form should become 
less penetrating, by its too great thickness. 
§.327. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is conformable to the 
same rules with those deliver’d for the composi- 
tion of internal liquid forms (§.218, 220, 231, 
242, 255, 279, 290.), from which, we'need ex- 
cept nothing but the names importing their inter- 
nal use, in the room of which others may be sub- 
stituted: as F. liquor pro epithemate vel fomento. 
But sometimes the form takes a name from the 
part to which it is to be applied; as may be seen 
S4 here-

264 Of Fomentations. 
hereafter in the external forms proper to particular 
parts (§.294.): at other times the form is in part 
denominated from the names of the ingredients; 
and hence the appellation oxyrhodon, &c. For 
the rest, the ingredients for this form are some- 
times only made up by the apothecary, in order 
to be afterwards infused or boiled for the fomen- 
tation, the remainder of the process being referr’d 
to the patient or his attendants, like as at §.218, 
220, 231: in which case, we may give it the name 
of species, or collectio. Lastly, this form does not 
require so exact a depuration, as at §.219. n° 4. 
§.231. n° 3. and 242. n° 3. 
§.328. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, indicates to him not 
only the name (per §.60. n° 3. §.230, and 327.), 
but also, 
1. The preparation: when that is not to be- 
performed by the apothecary (per §.327.).
Consult §.221. n° 2. 
2. The parts to he fomented: which are (per 
§.320, and 322, n° 4,) either (1.) external, to 
which the fomentation must be immediately ap- 
plied; or else, (2.) internal, invested by the for- 
mer, and only secundarily affected by the fo- 
mentation. (1) With regard to the external parts; 
as they are sufficiently manifest to the eye, we 
need only observe that, if they should have any 
open wound or ulcer, it may be sometimes pro- 
per to defend them first with some suitable mat- 
ter; that the crude liquor may not injure the 
excoriated parts, nor prove, by drying or sepa- 
rating the fibres or otherwise, hurtful to them. 
For (2.) the internal parts: when these are to 
be alter'd or affected by a fomentation, a proper 
external region should be first chose, agreeable 
to the different situation of the viscus, and inten- 
lion of the physician. And here, a previous 
know.


265 Of Fomentations.
knowledge of the consent of parts, or the distri- 
bution and communication of the nerves and 
blood vessels, will be of great service to direct 
the prescriber. For some intentions the fomen- 
tation is required to act more directly upon the 
affected part, as by strengthening, mollifying, 
moistening, cooling, relaxing, attenuating and 
dispersing impacted matter, &c. and then, the 
fittest external region for applying the fomenta- 
tion, will be, that which is neared the affected 
viscus, is the softest, and has tne thinnest integu- 
ments. Sometimes the intention requires a re- 
vulsion of the humours from, or a derivation of 
them to, some particular part; and in that case, 
the application should be accordingly made ei- 
ther in the upper or lower regions of the body; 
according as the viscus itself is situated, and as 
it may have a greater or less consent faith this 
or that external part of the body. At other 
times, our intention may be to affect the whole 
mass of blood, by the application of this form; 
and agreeable thereto, we pitch upon parts where 
the larged: vessels run the most exposed: as in 
the temples, neck, arm-pits, wrists, groyns, 
hams, &c. 
3. The vehicles by which it is to he applied 
(§.320.). Those most in use, are, linen or wool- 
len cloths of various colours, especially red, silk 
thrumbs, stupœ or bathing vessels, bread toasted, 
or its crumb, sponge, and dry epithems or bags 
of other ingredients, of which we shall treat 
hereafter. Sometimes the liquor is included in 
a hog’s bladder, capable of holding double the 
contents. The choice of these may be directed 
by the different intention, and nature of the 
parts to be fomented, and as one may be more 
easy to get than the other. When a great deal 
of the fomentation is to be applied at once, or 
its

266 Of Fomentations. 
its heat to be retained for a long time, for those 
purposes, woollen cloths, sponges and bathing ves- 
sels are most commonly used. A bladder, indeed, 
prevents any considerable dissipation of the li- 
quor, retains its heat, and keeps it from fouling 
or wetting any thing: but then it transmits none 
but the more subtle parts of the fomentation, to 
the affected parts, and those but very slowly. 
Hence, we may judge in what cases such a me- 
thod of application may be agreeable. If the 
region to be fomented is but thin, and does not 
require the epithem to be applied hot, or has 
no great necessity of retaining the heat, in these 
circumstances, linen cloths may do very well; 
and if a good deal of the fomentation is requir’d 
to be apply’d at once, they may be folded two, 
three, or more times together. 
4. Whether the fomentation is to he applied hot 
or cold. But this will be easily learned by the 
prescriber, from his own intention, and from 
the particular nature of the ingredients and part 
affected. When a fomentation is intended to 
attenuate strongly, to penetrate, or attract; to 
apply it hot, will then be of great service. But 
a cold application is the best for constringing 
the fibres, repelling the humours, &c. Such 
fomentations as are spirituous, or volatile, are 
fittest to be applied cold, or only warm; with- 
out the intention requires it otherwise. It may 
be also not improper to consider whether the ve- 
hicle (n° 3.) is to be first heated before it im- 
bibes any of the fomentation, or whether it may 
be more conveniently used cold. 
5. A direction for the method of retaining the 
epithem upon the parts. This is commonly ef- 
fected by proper bandages. But if the heat and 
humidity of the epithem be required to last any 
considerable time, it may be of service to bind
a 

267 Of Fomentations. 
a hog’s-bladder over the epithem, which has 
been first moistened with oil. Over that may 
be fastened a small bag full of warm sand, or an 
earthen tyle, brick, or any other body which 
will retain its heat a long time, without growing 
suddenly cold: and when the heat of such bo- 
dies is found declining and too low, they may 
be removed, and other hotter ones put in their 
place, the epithem itself remaining all the time 
upon the part. 
6. Lastly, the superscription also frequently- 
directs the time an epithem is to remain upon the 
part, how long the patient is to continue the use of 
it, at what times the application of it is to be re- 
newed, &c. Among these circumstances there 
is a great variety. Sometimes they are limited 
by the cessation or mitigation of particular symp- 
toms; as when, v. g. there is a remission of 
pain, watching, heat, cold, anguish, vomiting, 
bleeding, fainting, raving, &c. Sometimes 
they are limited by the strength of the liquor go- 
ing off; as, v. g. when it is cold, or all absor- 
bed by the vehicle, &c. They are also frequent- 
ly order’d to be used at some particular time; 
as in the morning, evening, or once or twice 
every day, or every second or third hour, &c. 
In all these cases, the physician may easily limit 
the application, by considering his particular in- 
tention, the disposition of the disease and its 
symptoms, with the nature of the fomentation, 
as being more volatile, fix’d, &c. as also, the 
vehicle (n° 3.) and apparatus being more easy 
or difficult to be had, or made. 
§.329. The USE of fomentations is very ex- 
tensive, being employ’d in most disorders whe- 
ther acute or chronic, external or internal; this be- 
ing a form well adapted to alleviate or remove many 
of

268 Of Fomentations. 
of their symptoms: and is used in various inten- 
tions, for mollifying, astringing, corroborating, 
repelling, drawing, warming, cooling, diluting, 
attenuating, opening, easing, stimulating, cor- 
recting or obtunding particular acrimony, &c. 
wherein the solids are no less affected and relieved 
than the fluids. This form is also suited to cause 
or promote almost every kind of evacuation by the 
emunctories, and is well enough adapted to pa- 
tients of all ages in general; supposing the 
dients to be carefully selected and adapted, and the 
application of them to be made at a proper time. 
These external epithems may very well supply the 
place of internal remedies, for infants, or others, 
who abhor to swallow, or cannot take physic in- 
ternally, But the application, and renovation of 
this form, is sometimes more troublesome than the 
use of internals. This form may also prove some- 
times hurtful by an improper application; as when 
it dissipates or relieves the symptoms, without re- 
moving the cause of the disease: which accident 
very frequently occurs in the use of narcotic epi- 
thems. Or the use of repellents in this form may 
prove pernicious, by constringing the vessels, and 
impacting the morbific matter, when it has not 
had a previous attenuation, or proper degree of 
fluidity; at other times, these applications may do 
harm by becoming too cold thro' a long residence, 
upon the part, when their warmth is all they can 
prove serviceable by, &c. But these accidental 
ill consequences are to be rather attributed to the 
injudicious application, than to the form itself; 
and may be very easily avoided by a skilful pre- 
scriber. 
§.330. Take the following. SPECIMENS of this 
form. 
1.

269 Fomentations. 
1. Epithema aromaticum, promovens saburræ in- 
testinalis excretionem in infante recens nato. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Vitell. ovi. n°. j. 
Spir. matrical. 
Tinct. absynth. 
Aq. stillat, fœnicul. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Except a pauxillo micœ panis, stomacho applicentur. 
2. Aliud, ad nauseam ab inordinato liquidi nervosi 
motu ortam.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Aq. vitœ matthioli ℥j. 
Spir. rad. angelic. 
Carmin. sylv. 
Menthœ ana ℥ij. 
M. D. 
S. Taleola panis triticei tosti, bene irrorata his, ap- 
plicetur calidè epigastrio, super applicetur vesica
suilla oleo humectata, & dein supra hanc ligatura: 
renovetur post xij horas.  
3. Emulsum externum, anodynum, demulcens, 
leniter aperiens. 
V. Boerhi Mater. Med. p. 113. 
ꝶ. Semin. pomor. cotoneor. n°. vj. cum 
Aq. stillat. flor. rosar. 
Sambuc. aa ℥iij. 
F. s. a. Emulsio, cujus puro liquori ad- 
misce 
Spir. vini rectificat. ℥ß. 
Tinct. opii ʒij. 
D. ad vitrum. 
S. Parti a caustico aliove acri foris applicato lœsœ 
& dolenti cum panno linco triplicato admoveatur 
calidè: renovetur, ubi siccescii.
4. 

270 Fomentations.
4. Fomentum laxans, resolvens, paregoricum, ad 
pleuritidem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 149. 
ꝶ. Fol. malvæ. 
Bismalvæ
Parietar. ana m. ij. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Hyoscyam. ana m. j. 
Flor. sambuc. 
ChamœmeL 
Melilot. ana ℥iii. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. F. decoctum pro so-
mento 
S. Vesica stiilla hoc liquore calidissmo ad dimidias re- 
pleta, admoveatur lateri dolenti; firmetur liga- 
mine: turn super ponatur saccuius arena calidis- 
sima plenus, qui frigescens iterum calesiat, aut ei 
mox substituatur alius jam calefactus. Continuen- 
tur hœc, donec dolor remisit. 
5. Fotus antisepticus, calorem vitalem refuscitans, 
intestino per vulnus abdominis egresso conveniens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 79. 
ꝶ. Intestina pura animalis junioris q. s. 
Coq. in Aq. q. s. spatio 1/8 horæ; dein adde 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Lavendul. 
Centaur. ana m. ß. 
Fol. menth. m. j. 
Stent in infusione per 1/16 horæ. 
D. 
S. Liquor calidus cum panno laneo appicetur.
6.

271 Fomentations: 
6. Epithema anti-alcalicum, cardiacum, in gan- 
grena: ad exemplum ibid. p. 96. 
ꝶ. Herb. scordii 
Menthœ 
Summit. rutœ 
Fol. rosmarin. ana m. ß. 
Cort. cinnamom. 
Nuc. myristic. ana ʒij. 
Conscissa, tusa, cum acet. rosac. & vini
rhenan. aā ℥viij. coquantur in 
phialia alta, vitrea per 1/8 horæ. 
Liquori decantato adde 
Aq. prophylact. sylv. ℥ij. 
S. Hoc liquors imbutœ spongiolœ admoveantur paro-
tidibus, axillis, scrobiculo cordis, carpis, inguini-
bus. Taleola panis tosti eodem imbuta naribus sup- 
ponatur. Renoventur quolibet trihorio. 
7. Fotus antiphlogisticus. 
♃. Aq. benedict. ℥vj. 
Acet. vini alb. 
Sp. vin. camph. aā ℥ij. 
Sacch. saturn. 
Opii aā ʒj. 
M. F. Fotus, s. a. 
S. Ut in fronte, cum pannis linteis tepide adhibend. 
pro re nata. 


272 Fomentations. 
8. Fotus astringens. 
♃. Gall. virid. 
Cort. granator. aa ℥ß. 
Flor. rosar. rubr. m. j. 
Coque in Aq. font. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. 
Colaturæ adde Vin. rubr. ℔ ß. 
Alumen. rup. ʒij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Frigide applicetur, cum pannis 
linteis, omni 12° horœ parte renovand. 
9. Fotus discutiens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. absinth. vulg. 
Flor. chamœem. 
Sambuc. aa m. j. 
Ciner. lign. vulg. ℥vj. 
Coque in Aq. benedict. ℔ jß ad ℔ j. colaturæ 
adde 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv.
M. F. fotus.  
S. Cum pannis laneis calide adhibend. & frequenter 
renovand. 
10. Fotus emolliens communis. 
♃ . Sumit. & radit. althœœ aa ℥jv. 
Hyosciam. 
Flor. sambuc. 
Melilot. aa m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. ℥ij. 
Coque in A. font. ℔ iij ad ij. colaturæ adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒij. 
Cremor. lact. recent. ℥ij. 
M. F. fotus. 
S. Ut in fronte. Cum pannis lintels tepide appli- 
cand. & pro re nata, renovand.
Of 

273 Of dry Epithems. 
Of dry EPITHEMS. 
§.331 EPITHEMA SICCUM, or a dry Fotus, 
is a kind of medicated powder (§.106.); 
which being generally fewed up in a cloth, is appli- 
ed to alter various external parts of the body, in va- 
rious intentions. It takes several names, according 
to the different parts of the body it is to be appli- 
ed to: as, saccus, sacculus, cucusa, cucullus, fron- 
tale, Scutum, lectulus, pulvinar, &c. 
§.332. The consistence of the powder for this 
form is hardly ever finer than the two first degrees 
(§.107. n° (2.)), tragea, and species; and this, in 
order to prevent its parts from sticking to each 
other, and from falling thro' the interstices of the 
cloth. 
§.333. The MATTER or ingredients for dry 
epithems, may be the same, in general, with those 
for the powder (at §.109. and 110.); supposing 
they are judged proper for external use, and for 
the particular intention. 
§.334. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
this form may be learned from §.111. 110. 322. 
compared with §.331. 332. But we may observe 
in brief; 
1. That the ingredients most frequently in 
use for dry epithems, are roots, barks, leaves, 
flowers, seeds; berries, spices, concreted jui- 
ces, and the officinal species compounded of 
these, &c. 
2. That this form does require equally, or ra- 
ther more (than at §.322, n° 5.), that its in- 
gredients should be such as consist of parts which 
are very volatile and penetrating; because its 
T con- 

274 Of dry Epithems. 
consistence and mode of application (§.331. and 
332.), would otherwise make them useless. 
3. That to these dry ingredients is frequently 
added some liquid epithem (§.320.); by which 
means, the substances become more useful or 
active, and the preceeding form becomes a ve- 
hicle for this (per §.328. n° 3.).
4. That chaff is generally used to dilate the 
ingredients of this form, when they are intend- 
ed for the composition of little beds or pillows. 
The same substance is also used (or rather one 
which is softer, as wool, cotton, &c.) to sepa- 
rate the parts of the medicated powder, when it 
is to compose a scul-cap, frontal, or the like 
small baggs; which are required to set easy upon 
the part, and have no occasion to be wetted 
much. 
5. That to this form belongs the use of small 
bags filled with sand; whether applied alone,
or mix'd with some liquid epithem (§.328. n° 5.): 
in cases which require a dry or moist heat to be 
preseved for a considerable time. 
§.335. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for dry epithems, may be observ'd 
the same as at §.112. of the internal powder. 
§.336. The DOSE of this form is limited by fil- 
ling the capacity of the bag, and that capacity is 
usually proportioned to the size of the hollow part 
of the body it is to be applied to. Hence, the 
dose of dry epithems is very different and undeter- 
mined. The hairy scalp of the head, the stomach, 
and the liver, commonly take up about ℥ij, iij, or 
jv: the heart, splen, and kidneys, about ℥j, jß or 
ij. and the other pans in proportion to their mag- 
nitudes. The little beds and pillows which are for 
the patient to lye upon, require a dose of several 
pounds. But we may observe, 
1.

275 Of dry Epithems. 
1. That different ages in patients, and degrees 
of extension for morbid parts, make a great varia- 
tion in the quantity or dose of these dry epithems. 
4. That these bags should not be stuffed full, 
but in a loose manner; that they may be the 
more soft, or easy, and the more readily adapt 
themselves to the form of the parts. 
§.337. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be transmitted to the patient at one time, 
is to be determined by the quantity of the dose 
(§.336.) and the number of bags to be filled. 
For very often there ate several bags to be trans- 
mitted together, which are to be either applied at 
one time to different parts, or to the same part at 
different times, alternately. 
§.338. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for dry epithems, may be determined front 
the same circumstances as at §.313. of aspersions. 
§.339. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the compounder for this form, orders 
1. The preparation of the powder: which is 
usually performed by cutting, pounding or grind- 
ing in a gross manner (per §.332.); then comes 
mixation. Sometimes, particular ingredients, or 
all of them, are order’d to be roasted in a fry- 
ing-pan; in order to increase or change their 
medicinal virtues: but this process should not, 
however, be practiced upon ingredients, whose 
virtues consist in very volatile parts. At other 
times, the dry powders are order’d to be sprink- 
led with some efficacious liquor, before they are 
included in bags; as with spirits, oils, aromatic 
tinctures, &c. 
2. The making of the bag: where the first thing 
that offers, is, (1.) the cloth to be cut out, and 
few’d; which is commonly some thin and coarse 
linen, muslin, or silk, but seldom woollen. The
T2 nature 

276 Of dry Epithems. 
nature or disposition of the morbid part, the 
quantity or quality of the powder, the greater 
or smaller stress the bag will suffer in its appli- 
cation, the opinion of the patient, and the price 
of the cloth, &c. have each their particular 
share in determining the choice of its kind. 
(2.) The figure of the bag, which is to be adapt- 
ed to that of the morbid part, and the method 
of using it. It is customary to be in form of a 
hood, tor the hairy scalp of the head, and to be 
of an oblong-square, for the fore-head; pyra- 
midal for the heart, scutiform for the stomach. 
lunated for the liver; and to be in the form of an 
ox's tongue for the splen, round for the navel, 
&c. The little beds and pillows retain their 
usual form, being only proportion'd in their 
size. Sometimes the length and breadth of the 
bag is expressed to correspond to the morbid 
part, by a number of fingers breadths or inches: 
when at other times, mention is made only of 
the part to be cover'd, and the rest referr'd to 
the discretion of the apothecary. (3.) The num- 
ber of bags is sometimes mentioned, when there 
are several to be made at one time (per §.337.). 
3.The filling or stuffing of the bag: before 
which process, should go, when necessary, mixa- 
tion with the chaff, or an interposition of the 
cotton or wool (per §.334. n° 4.). The inclo- 
sure and fixation of the ingredients in the bag is 
usually performed by future: tho' sometimes,
barely tying or folding them up, is sufficient, 
when its stay upon the part is required to be but 
short, and its figure (n° 2. (2.)) less exact. And 
lastly the larger bags, which are not stuffed over 
tight, are frequently interfew'd or quilted; that 
the included powder may not clog together, or 
settle more to one part of the bag than to ano- 
ther.
4. 

277 Of dry Epithems.
4. But the business of all that has been hitherto 
said (n° 2. and 3.), is very often referr’d to be 
performed by the patient or his attendants; the 
preparation and exhibition (n° 1.) of the pow- 
der only, being left to the apothecary. And in 
this case the subscription barely orders P. species 
pro cucufa, sacculo, lectulo, &c. 
§.340. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides its name, 
(§.321. 339. n° 4.) also 
1. The inclosure of the species or powders; 
when they are to be transmitted loose to the pa- 
tient, by the apothecary (per §.339. n° 4.). 
But for this, the same directions take place, as 
at §. preced. n° 2, and 3. 
2. What belongs to the application of them: 
but this application of the dry epithems is usa- 
ally made either (1.) alone and dry, being ge- 
nerally made warm first. Or (2.) when they 
have been imbib’d with the medicinal virtues of 
others, to render them more active. Therefore 
the dry epithems are frequently order’d to be 
moitened with liquid ones (§.320. 328. n° 3.), 
either by maceration, aspersion or decoction with 
them; or else by imbibing the vapours of some 
proper decoction, boiling, or the dry fumes 
arising from the accension of some suffitus or fu- 
migation. Or (3.) a dry epithem may be ap- 
plied with a super-apposition of a liquid one, in 
order to retain its heat, or increase its virtues 
(per §.328. n° 3. 5. and §.334 n° 5.). What 
farther relates to the application of this form, by 
the patient may be deduced from what has been 
said at §.328; the greatest part of which may 
generally take place here. 
T3 §.341.


278 Of dry Epithems. 
§.341. The USE of this form is much the 
same with that of fomentations (§.329.). But a 
dry epithem is generally less penetrating, and more 
slow in action, unless it be mix’d with a liquid one 
(per §.340. n° 2. (2.)). Tho’ there are some cases 
where a dry heat is more useful and tolerable to the 
patient. To this form, of epithems, also belongs 
the application of live whelps, pigeons, chickens, 
&c. after they have been split in two; as also the 
omentum, intestine, and other parts of animals, 
while they retain their vital heat: to these we may 
add, bread hot from the oven, applied either alone 
or with some proper mixture, agreeable to the usual 
methods; the business of which, may be readily 
understood from the preceeding doctrine of epi- 
thems. 
§.342. For SPECIMENS of dry epithems, take 
the following. 
1. Cucufa confortans, capiti debili, frigido ca- 
tarrhis obnoxio, prosicua. 
ꝶ. Rad. angelicœ ℥j. 
Herb, majoran. 
Salviœ. 
Folior. & flor. rosmarin 
Sumit. serpill. aa m. ß. 
Semin, nigell. rom. ʒiij.
Caryophyll. arom. 
Mastiches. 
Styrac. calamit. ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. species pro cucufa, quœ gossypio exceptœ includan- 
tur duplicaturœ cuculli, & punctim intersuantur. 
Cucullo, mane & vesperi fumo ligni juniperi accensi 
imbuto, semper tegatur caput. 
2.

279 Dry Epithems. 
2. Scutum stomachicum, ad nauseam a motu li- 
quidi nervosi inordinato ortam. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 129. 
ꝶ. Pulv. aromat. rosat. 
Diagalang. 
Diarrhod. abb. ana ℥j. 
M. 
S. Insuta sindoni applica epigastrio. 
3. Epithema ad dolores colicos a causa frigida, 
slatulenta, natos. 
ꝶ. Semin, contus. anisi. 
Cumini ana ℥j. 
Piperis ʒiij. 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Caryophillor. aromat. 
Maceris ana ʒj. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, D. ad chartam. 
S. Species califacientes, quœ panis adhuc a furno ca- 
lentis, transversim dissecti, superficei internœ mi- 
caceœ, inspergantur, tum spiritu vini irroratœ
sindone super extensd contineantur, & epigastrio 
vel regioni dolenti applicentur: post tres quasque 
boras sindon spiritu vini iterum humectetur. 
4. Epithema febrifugum. 
♃ . Camph. opt. ʒij. 
Sal. vol. C.C. per se ʒj. 
Cort. cinnam. pulv. 3j. 
Nuc. myristic. ras. ʒß. 
Ol. essent. chamœm. gtt. xxiv. 
M. 
S. Includantur species sacculo serico, rubro, septies re- 
duplicate & in figuram pyramidalem redacto: 
quœ in collum filo serico rubro suspensœ, circa cordis 
scrobiculum retineantur; donec ʒiij. pondere avo- 
lantur.
T4 5. 

280 Dry Epithems. 
5. Lectulus & pulvinaria roborantia, anti-rachitica. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Folior. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Filicis maris ℔ iij.
Majoranœ, 
Melissœ. 
Menthœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. recent. in umbra siccator. 
Meliloti. 
Trisolii odorati. 
Sambuci. 
Rosarum ana ℥ij. 
Tritis in pulverem tenucm, & mistis. 
F. Species pro lectulo & pulvinaribus. 
S. Species rohorantes, quibus cum duplo tanto paleæ 
hordei mistis, ac dein linteo immissis, fiant lectulus 
& pulvinaria, quibus incumbat œger. Defendan- 
tur autem ab humido, & sæpe exsiccentur. 
6. Epithema siccum ad hydrocelen, serum dissi- 
pans, educens. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 211. 
ꝶ. Sails marin. decrepit. siccissimi, calidi, 
tenuissime triti. q. s. 
D. 
S. Intra lintea consuta applicetur calidus: simul ac 
madescit, alius similis sacculus, priori remote, sub- 
stituatur. 
7.

281 Dry Epithems. 
7. Epithema anti-phlogisticum, ad nephritidem. 
V. H. Boerh. in Aphorism. §.997. n°. iij. 
ꝶ. Herb. parietar. m. ij. 
Flor. chamæmeli. 
Melioti. 
Sambuci ana ℥ß. 
Semin. contus. lini ℥j. 
Conscissa, tusa, tenuiter, mista, laxe im- 
missa duobus sacculis lineis, qua- 
tuor pollices longis, duos latis, 
insuantur. 
S. Sacculi renales, quorum urns horœ quadrante cum 
lacte dulci coctus, calidus, imponatur regioni lum- 
bari dolenti; firmetur ligamine: ubi refrixit, in- 
tera similiter coctus alter priori substituatur. 
8. Sacculus cordialis, excitans in languore ab inertia 
defectuve liquidi nervosi orto. 
(A.) ꝶ. Folior. recent. melissœ. 
Basilic. ana ʒiij. 
Flor. lavendul. siccator. ʒij. 
Cort. recent. aurant. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Croci britannici ʒß. 
Conscissa tenuiter insuantur sacculo, py- 
ramidali, serico, rubro. 
(B.) ꝶ. Aq. meliss. magistral. ℥ij. 
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒij. 
Tinct. ambari ʒj.
M. D. seorsim vitro probe clauso  
S. Sacculus (A.) regioni cordis apponatur prius ir-
roratus liquore (B.): ubi exaruit iterum humec- 
tetur. 
9.

282 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
9. Epithema adstringens, in intestino recto pro- 
lapso, reducto, conveniens. 
ꝶ. Herb. anserin. 
Folior. querc. ana m. j. 
Flor. balaust. 
Gallar. quercin. ana ℥ß.
Conscissa, tusa insuantur binis sacculis 
sericis, æqualibus. 
S. Coquantur sacculi in vini rubri & aceti ana q. s. 
& calidi alternatim admoveantur ano. 
Of CATAPLASMS. 
§.343. A Cataplasm is a soft, cohesive epi- 
them (§.318, 319. n° 3.), in the 
form of pap; and of a middle consistence, between 
that of an ointment, and an emplaster; but not 
melting with heat, in its external application for 
various uses. 
§.344. The consistence of this form (§.343.) 
is generally given to it by boiling: but it is some- 
times prepared without that, bately by tritura- 
tion and mixture. Hence we have a two-fold di- 
stinction of cataplasms, into boiled and crude. 
Of CATAPLASMS by Decoction. 
§.345. CATAPLASMA COCTUM, or a pultice 
made by of such a consistence. 
(§.343.) as not to flow about, be composed 
of ingredients whose parts are very small, cohesive 
and

283 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.  
and slippery. These, being sufficiently attenuated 
and equably mixed, take the name of puls. 
§.346. The MATTER, or ingredients for this 
form is threefold: a liquor: a substance to be boiled 
therein: and accessories. 
1. The liquor to be used, may be of various 
kinds: as water, new-milk, butter-milk, whey, 
liquid juices by expression, mead, wine; vine- 
gar, simple, or compound of the shops; urine lixi- 
vium; oil by expression, infusion or decoction: 
and sometimes thicker substances are added, which 
yet melt with heat; as butter, the fat of animals, 
ointments, &c. And sometimes, an intention re- 
quires several of these to be mix’d together. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled in the liquor, 
are usually taken from the class of vegitable sub- 
stances: to which belong roots, bulbs, rinds, 
herbs, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds; or else 
meals, powders, inspissated juices, &c. made 
from these. The animal and mineral class of 
substances afford but few ingredients to be boil- 
ed into a cataplasm; tho’ the excrements of par- 
ticular animals, the nests of swallows, with pre- 
parations from lead, are sometimes taken into 
this form. 
3. The Accessories are usually added either to- 
wards the end of the decoction, or else mixed 
after that is over: and this, either to (1.) increase 
the medicinal virtues, their texture not being able 
to resist the action of the fire; such as the aro- 
matic waters and oils, tinctures, essences, spi- 
rits, wines, vinegars, balsams, extracts, pulps, 
electuaries, gums and resins, or gum-resins, li- 
quid or inspissated juices of vegetables, yest, 
salt, sope, with the finer aromatic powders of 
the softer parts of vegetables, e.g. of saffron, 
and the like. Or, (2.) they are added to give 
the form a proper cohesion and lubricity (§.345.): 
of


284 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
of which kind are meals, fine powders, oils, 
ointments, butter, honey, the crumb of white 
bread, the whites or yolks of eggs, mucilages, &c. 
§.347. The ELECTION of ingredients most  
proper for this form, is directed by the requi- 
site consistence and uniformity of a cataplasm 
(§.345.), in conjunction with the physician’s in- 
tention, and previous knowledge of the effects 
boiling will have upon the ingredients. Hence, 
1. The reader may consult what has been said 
at (§.322.); the greater part of which observa- 
tions are agreeable to this cohesive, as well as 
that liquid kind of epithem. 
2. The ingredients to be boiled (§.346. n° 2.), 
should be either naturally of a soft texture, or 
else apt to become so by the decoction: so that 
the harder parts of vegetables, which are less 
succulent, as woods, stalks, roots, barks, &c. 
are generally excluded from this, form: the 
more soft and succulent parts of recent vege- 
tables, being preferable to the more compact 
and dry, 
3. Bread, flower, or the finer powders of the 
parts of vegetables, are generally used to make 
a smooth pultice, like paste (§.345.). 
5. Sometimes the residuum left after boiling 
a liquid fomentation (§.321.), composes the 
matter of a cataplasm; when both a pultice 
and fomentation of the same virtues are requir- 
ed to be used at the same time. In this case 
there is seldom any occasion to repeat, or make 
a second decoction of the ingredients. 
6. The liquor (§.346. n° 1.) to boil, the ingre- 
dients for the cataplasm, should be chose agreeable 
to the physician’s intention, and texture of the 
ingredients; and be able to sustain the force of 
fire in the decoction. When the intention is to 
moisten,

285 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
moisten, mollify and relax, it is advisible to let 
the liquor be water, milk, or preparations of 
the last, with oil and unctuous substances: but 
when the design is to open obstructions, attenu- 
ate viscidities, or stimulate the small vessels, it 
may be best to use vinegar, oxycrate, urine, a 
lixivium, &c. From a combination of several 
of these with each other, will arise a new mix- 
ture, of complex virtues. It is advisable to mix 
such things, as may be lost by the fire in boil- 
ing, after that operation is over, and the cata- 
plasm made (per §.226. n° 1, 2, 3.); such are 
wines, distilled waters, inflammable spirits, aro- 
matic oils, and the like. 
6. The accessories (§.346. n° 3.) of both 
kinds, are not always necessary in this form. 
Tho’ the proper consistence, or requisite virtues, 
not found in the other boiled ingredients, may 
sometimes give occasion to make this addition. 
Hence, when a cataplasm is too fluid, and its 
mixture not sufficiently uniform; we then add 
fine powders or meals: if too dry, and not sub-
sicently pliable; we mix oils and unctuous sub- 
stances. And sometimes we add both, to increase 
the bulk of a cataplasm to a proper size. 
7. But both kinds of accessories (whether they 
be fluid, liquisiable by heat, or naturally soft and 
viscous, or of the fine powder kind) ought to 
be disposed to make a uniform and equable 
mixture. Such as are difficultly soluble, or run 
together into grumes by heat; such as e.g. re- 
sins and gum-resins, galbanums sagapenum, &c. 
ought to be first dissolved in vinegar, wine or its 
spirit, or else reduced by the yolk of an egg. 
8. Oils and unctuous substances should not be 
mix’d in all cases promiscuously. For they are 
often pernicious by obstructing the pores of the 
skin; unless they have previously undergone 
a

286 Of Cataplasms by Decoction.
a sufficient attenuation, by sope, or some proper 
menstruum. 
9. The number of ingredients for this form, 
may be the same as for a decoction (§.226. 
n° 23.). 
§.348. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
and compounding the ingredients for a cataplasm, 
is much the same as at §.227. of the internal de- 
coction. The accessories (§.346. n° 3. (2.)) ge- 
nerally come in the last place; because they are 
frequently order’d in an undetermined quantity. 
But if there are any ingredients whose parts are ex- 
tremely volatile, they should be mix’d the very 
last, after all the rest. 
§.349. The DOSE of this form is determined by 
the size of the part to be fomented; nor does it 
require to be limited by any other consideration. 
§.350. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be precribed and transmitted to the pa- 
tient at a time, may be determined from the con- 
siderations at §.325. Whence we learn, that as 
the general quantity is often equal to ℔j, ij, iij, 
or more; so it is seldom prescribed in a less quan- 
tity than ℔ss. because it would bo troublesome 
to boil. 
§.351. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredi- 
ents for a cataplasm, may be almost wholly under- 
stood from what has been said on this head at 
§.217. 230. 303. 326. We shall only add, 
1. That the ingredients to be boiled should 
be order’d in a proportion conformable to the 
physician’s intention, the particular dose (§.349.); 
and general quantity (§.350.); because the whole 
substance of, them are used in this form. For 
the rest, consult what is said at §.303. and 326.
2. The proportion of the liquor for decoction 
(§.346. n° 1.), is hardly ever limited, but is
only 

287 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
only order’d to be taken in q. s. But a less quan- 
tity is generally sufficient for this form, than 
for internal decoctions (per §.230.), for injec- 
tions (per §.303.), or for fomentations; and 
this, that a cataplasm may the sooner acquire 
its due consistence (§.343.): supposing the in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) do not require a long 
decoction in order to molify them. 
3. When oil, butter, or the softer fats of 
animals are used for the menstruum or liquor 
(§.346. n° 1.) of this form, they should be or- 
der’d in a very small proportion; left they should 
become rank and acrimonious by the heat of the 
fire. Whence, a bare maceration and contu- 
sion of them together, is generally preferable to 
boiling them. 
4. To make a farinaceous cataplasm, a still 
less proportion of liquor may suffice; because 
those ingredients(§.347. n° 4.), do well enough 
incorporate and acquire a consistence without 
much boiling. 
5. The proportion of accessories (§.346. n° 3. 
(1.) will hardly admit of limitation even by 
general bounds. Their virtues and consistences 
coming more or less near to those proper to this 
form, the quantity of ingredients to be boiled, 
and the particular intention of the prescriber, 
are to have each their consideration in order to 
determine their due proportion. If they should 
happen to disturb the due consistence (§.343. 
345.) of the cataplasm, by making it too thick 
or too thin; in that case we make use of the 
accessories at (§.346. n° 3. (2.). and §.347. 
n° 7.). 
6. The proportion of those accessories (§.346. 
n° 3. (2.)) may be determined from the quan- 
tity and consistence as well of the boiled ingre- 
dients as of the accessories (n° 5.) preceeding. 
But

288 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
But as they are not always of the same consi- 
stence, we may readily perceive that their quan- 
tities alone will not be sufficient to direct the due 
proportion. Hence, in doubtful cases, our most
expeditious method will be to add the requisite 
proportion of acceffories (§.347.n°.7.) by 
q. s. And if we have a mind to use accessories both 
of the dry and liquid kind (§.ib) we may then also 
order the proportion of one of both of them by q.s. 
§.352. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, orders the prescribed in- 
gredients (§.346. n° 2.) to be macerated or boiled 
in the menstruum or liquor (§.ib. n° 1.); after they 
have been first comminuted by cutting, pounding, &c. 
when such preparation is necessary. But the quantity of 
maceration and boiling is determined by the ingre- 
dients being sufficiently softened, putrid, or atte- 
nuated; when they are of a gross and compact tex- 
ture; but if they are of a soft texture, and of the 
powder kind; then the degree of boiling is to be 
limited by their acquiring the consistence of paste, 
which will be much promoted by sufficiently agi- 
tating the mass with a spathula or pudding-stirer 
whilst boiling, by which means it will acquire a 
more uniform mixture, and be also prevented from 
burning to the vessel, when the quantity of liquor 
is but small. The next thing that this part of the 
formula directs, is, the beating and straining of 
the boiled ingredients, when their stalks, or more 
tough and woody parts cannot be sufficiently mol- 
lified. Lastly, the pulp or pultice being thus made, 
the accessories (§.346. n° 3.) are order’d to be 
mix’d therewith, according to their texture, ei- 
ther whilst it is still over, or after it is removed 
from, the fire. And the direction concludes, F. 
cataplasma vel puls. D. ad fictile. 
§.353.

289 Of Cataplasms by Decoction. 
§.353. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is pretty evident from 
§.345. and 328. This kind of epithem, a cata- 
plasm, is almost constantly applied hot; and some- 
times it is rolled up in linen, that if may not smere 
any thing. Sometimes volatile substances are mix- 
ed therewith, immediately before its application, 
as wine, spirits, tinctures, &c. which, unless they 
are in common use, should be for that purpose 
transmitted separately, to the patient, by the apo- 
thecary. When by a very frequent repetition, or 
continued use of this form, the substance of the ca- 
taplasm becomes too thick and dry, it may be con- 
venient to order a remixture with the decoction 
wherein the ingredients of the cataplasm were boil- 
ed, or some other proper liquor, hot. For the 
rest, it may be understood from consulting the 
forecited sections. 
§.354. The USE of this form is very conside- 
rable in tumours, inflammations, abscesse, gan- 
grenes, obstructions, contusions, burns, pains, 
where the fibres and small vessels are to be re- 
laxed and opened, or contracted and stimulated; 
and their fluids to be cooled, attenuated, derived, 
digested, or corrected in acrimony; and when the 
obstruction, heat, tension and pain from both, are 
to be removed: all which, may be effected by ac- 
commodating proper ingredients in this form, 
suitable to the case. 
§.355. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
U 1.


290 Cataplams by Decoction. 
1. Cataplasma emolliens, narcoticum: ad exemplum 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 65. 
ꝶ. Rad. altheœ ℥ij. 
Capit. recent. papav. hort. cum sem. 
n°. iv. 
Fol. recent. hyoscyam. nigr. m. ß. 
Micœ panis albi ℥iij. 
Contusis cum lact. recent. q. s. ad emol- 
litionem usque decoctis, trajectis, adde 
Olei solani ℥j. 
Farin. semin. lini. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum parti dolenti applicetur, donec re- 
mittet dolor. 
2. Cataplasma antisepticum, ad gangrænam: juxta 
exemplum H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 100. 
(A.) ꝶ. Rad. helenii ℥ij. 
Herb. tanacet. 
Absynth. 
Scordii ana ℥iij. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥jß 
Conscissa, tusa, decoque in aq. & acet. 
ana q. s. ad teneritudinem. Contusis 
dein & per setaceum trajectis admisce 
Sal. gemmœ  ℥ß. 
Ol. nardini ℥jß. 
Farin. lupinor. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. cataplasma. 
(B.)


291 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
(B.) ꝶ. Spirit. matrical. ℥iv. 
Camphorœ  ʒj. 
Concute ad solutionem usque D. seorsim 
vitro clauso. 
S. Cataplasma (A.) calidum, irroratum prius tan- 
tillo spiritus (B.) applicetur cum pannis lineis 
parti adfectœ, & vesica suilla oleo madefacta deti-
neatur: renovetur quolibet trihorio. 
3. Puls emolliens, stimulans, in pus maturans. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 90, 91. 
ꝶ. Farin. tritici. 
Lini recent, ana ℥iij. 
Cum Acet. & olei lilior. alb. ana q. s. sub 
jugi agitatione, cocta leniter, redige 
in pultis consistentiam, cui dein ad- 
misce 
Pulp. cepar. sub cinerihus assatar. ℥ij. 
Gumm. ammon. in vitell. ovi solut. ℥j.
D. ad fictile. 
S. Admoveatur calidè loco adfecto: renovetur quater 
de die: ubi arescit, tantillo butyri insulsi emol- 
liatur. 
4. Aliud simile. Ibid. p. 90. 
ꝶ. Fol. acetos. recent. m. iv. 
Butyri insulsi ℥j. 
Ad ignem leniter, parum, decoctis adds 
Fermenti panis ℥ij. 
Gumm. sagapen. in vitello ovi solut ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Ut prius. 
U2 5.

292 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
5. Cataplasma suppurans, ad bubonem venereum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Ficus molles, matures, ad ℔ß. 
Mell. recent. ℥ij. 
Galbani in vitello ovi soluti ℥j. 
F. s. a. cum aq. coquendo cataplasma. 
S. Admoveatur calidum parti affectœ, cum panno li- 
neo quadruplicato: renovetur post iv vel vj horas. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, commune. 
♃ Micœ panis albi. in 
Lact. rec. q. s. coct. & leniter ex- 
press. ℔ß. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Sev. melilot. ℥ß.
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepidè parti admoveatur, & pro re nata renovetur. 
7. Cataplasma refrigerans. 
♃. Pulp. pomor. coct. 
Micœ panis, in latte coct. aa ℥iv. 
Cacl. viv. in aq. rosar. extinct. ℥ß. 
Trochisc. alb. rhas. ʒvj. 
Acet. opt. vin. alb. ℥ij. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Statimpost compositionem, frigide applicetur.
8.

293 Cataplasms by Decoction. 
8. Cataplasma discutiens. 
♃. Ol. infus. sambuc. 
Nicotian, aa ℥ij. 
Camph. in tinct. opii q. s. solut. ʒjß. 
Lixiv. capital. ebullient. ℥ij. 
Misce in vitro, exactissime concutiendo, cui adde 
Furfur. tenuior. ℔ jß. 
Aq. pluv. ebullient. q. s. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidè parti applicetur, & frequenter renovetur. 
9. Cataplasma nervinum. 
♃ . Pulp, rapar. coct. & lenit. express. ℔ß. 
Rad. allii contus. 
Sem. sinapeos pulv. aa ℥ij. 
Ol. succin. empyreumat. ℥ß. 
Ung. opodeldoc ℥jß. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Tepide applicetur capiti, carpis, pedum plantis, 
partibus paralyticis, &c. 
10. Cataplasma bechicum, stomachicum, ad tussim 
anginosam. 
♃. Caffœ pulv. ℥jß. 
Spec. diamh. odorat. ʒjß. 
R. allii contus. rec. ℈iv. 
Axung. human. ʒiij. 
Ol. essent. cinnam. 
Hyssop. 
Succin. ana gtt. iij. 
Theriac. venet. q. s. ad consist. debit. 
F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Sindone incluso, regioni epigastrici & circa collum, 
tepide applicetur; & fasciis laneis, hora somni; 
retineatur: post septimanam, si desit, renovetur. 
U3 Of

294 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
Of Crude CATAPLASMS. 
§.356. A Crude Cataplasm (§.344.) comes 
near to the consistence of a bolus or 
electuary (§.127. 138.), not having the softness, 
smoothness and uniformity of mixture proper to 
the boiled one (§.345.): which properties, as 
they are not always required in this form, so it does 
not always admit of them. 
§.357. The MATTER or ingredients for the 
composition of this form, is in general the same as 
for the bolus (§.128.): and are either excipiens, 
receiving; or excipienda, to be received by the 
former. 
1. The excipient must be either (1.) soft: as 
Conserves, robs, electuaries, honey, thick bal- 
sams, soft extracts, concreted juices (mollified 
in some proper liquor, and so, fitted for enter- 
ing the form of a cataplasm) sope, yest, the 
crumb of new bread, or of stale bread softened 
by maceration, butter, lard, ointments, pulps, 
the fresh dung of animals, or their soft and 
fleshy parts, with the soft and succulent parts of 
recent vegetables, beat into a past, &c. Or, 
(2.) Liquid: as wine and its spirit, vinegar, 
distiiled waters, milk, mucilages, syrups, oils, 
the whites and yolks of eggs, urine, lye, ex- 
pressed juices, and those mentioned at §.128. 
n° 3. 
2. The excipienda, to be made up with the 
preceeding, are, every dry substance, whether 
animal, vegetable or mineral, which is capable 
of being reduced into a fine powder.
§.358.

295 Of Crude Cataplasms.
§.358. The ELECTION of proper ingredients 
for this form, is to be determined by the intention 
of the physician, and other particular circum- 
stances of the form itself (§.356.); and may be 
easily understood from what has been hither to said 
on this head, for other external forms. But we 
may observe in brief. 
1. That when vegetables or their parts can- 
not be had green or fresh gathered, we may sub- 
stitute dry ones in their room, by macerating 
them in some proper liquor, as was said before 
of dry bread, (§.537. n° 1. (1.)). 
2. That fruits and bulbous roots are frequent- 
ly roasted first in the ashes, to make them af- 
ford a softer pulp in beating. 
3. That the soft substances (§.357. n° 1. 
(1.)) are frequently used alone, or with the li- 
quid excipients (ib. 2.) when they are of the 
thicker kind; without any addition of the dry 
excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). At other times, the 
dry excipienda only, are used with liquids: but 
they will then require something glutinous, or an 
addition of dry substances which become very co- 
hesive upon a mixture with liquors. Tho' it is most 
usual to compound the dry excipienda with both 
soft and liquid substances, in order to beat ’em 
up into a cataplasm. 
4. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the electuary (§.140. n° 6.). 
§.359. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form is also like that at 
§.141. 
§.360. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the same circumstances as at §.349. 
§.361. The GENERAL QUANTITY to be pre- 
scribed or compounded at once, is generally less 
than that of the cataplasm by decoction (§.350.);
U4 it

296 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
it sometimcs not exceeding one ounce, but is sel- 
dom larger than ℔j: for as the composition of 
this form may be much sooner and more easily 
made than the former, it is very often prescribed 
for in no larger a quantity than what will suffice 
for one dose: and the intention of this form will 
be oftener answer'd by such a quantity of the 
crude, than of the boiled cataplasm (§.353. 
355.). 
§.362. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for a crude cataplasm, may be deduced from 
comparing what has been said (at §.133. and 144.) 
with the medicinal virtues and consistence of those 
ingredients, which have been selected (per §.357. 
and 358.), together with the peculiar circumstan- 
ces ot the form itself (§.356.), its dose (§.360.), 
and general quantity (§.361.). To which we may 
add, 
1. That the degree of consistence (§.356.), 
is not always so constant, but that it may be 
sometimes more or less than specified; whenever 
the intention or nature of the ingredients may 
require it. When it is to penetrate deep, a 
thinner or more dilute consistence is most agree- 
able (per §.322. n° 3.), &c. Hence, the pro- 
portion of ingredients is not always observed the 
same, for the composition of this form; though 
it is, in the general, pretty much like that of the 
electuary (§.144.), or bolus (§.133.). 
2. It is very usual in prescribing this form, to 
order the excipient (whether soft, liquid, or both, 
per §.357. n° 1. (.1.) (2.)), only by q. s. or, on 
the contrary, to determine the quantity of these, 
but not that of the dry excipienda (§.ib. n° 2.). 
By which means, the prescriber may be satisfy’d 
of the justness of his proportion, when he is 
under any doubt or difficulty. 
§.363.

279 Of Crude Cataplasms. 
§.363. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, or- 
ders first the contusion of the ingredients, and then 
their mixture, ut F. s. a. cataplasma, or epithema: 
for these two names have been generally used pro- 
miscuousty. Sometimes it takes a name from the 
part, to which it is to be applied: and accordingly, 
such as are to be applied to the wrists, are termed 
epicarpia, if to the forehead, frontale, &c. But 
more frequently, we only mention the part to which 
it is to be applied; especially when we refer its 
application ( viz. the spreading it upon some ve- 
hicle (§.320.), as linen or woollen cloth, silk, 
leather, wet rags, &c. (per §.328. n° 3.) to the 
apothecary; and in that case, the size and figure 
of the vehicle may be mentioned (per. §.339. 
n° 2. (2.)); tho' this last circumstance is not of 
so much moment. 
§.364. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily deduced 
from §.328. 353. and 363. consider’d with the 
particular part to be pulticed, the time and method 
of-application, &c. which have been but now ex- 
plained at §.363. The vehicle (§.ib.) or cloth 
is frequently wetted first (with some liquid epithem, 
vinegar, wine, oil, alcohol, or other proper liquor,) 
before the cataplasm is spread thereon. At other 
times this form is folded up in linen, &c. per §.353. 
that it may not smeer the parts, or dirty the pa- 
tient’s cloths, The application of it is made 
hot, warm, or cold, according to the physician’s in- 
tention, and the nature of the ingredients; but it is 
not so frequently used hot, as the boiled cataplasm. 
§.363. The USE of the crude cataplasm is much 
the same with that of the liquid epithem (§.329.) 
and boiled cataplasm (§.354.) but is not so exten- 
sive. Epispastics and vesicatories are very frequent- 
ly used in this form. The greater consistence of  
the

298 Crude Cataplasms.
the cataplasm beyond that of the liquid epithem, 
makes it generally less apt to penetrate into parts 
which are deeply situated, and is also not so easily 
dissipated: whence, it must act with a stronger and 
more lasting force upon the external parts. 
§.366. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Epicarpia antifebrilia. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Uvar. corinthiac. 
Summit. lupuli. 
Sal. marin. ana ℥ij. 
Contusa in pultem D. 
S. Excepta linteis pulsuum locis applica ad arterias, 
duabus horis ante ingruentem paraxysmum. 
2. Epithema stomachicum, roborans, pro infante. 
V. ibid. p. 223. 
ꝶ. Flaved. cort. citrei ras. ℥ß 
Nuc. myristic. ʒij. 
Vini hispanic. ʒiij. 
M. conterendo simul in mortario. 
S. Excepta mica panis adplicentur stomacho. 
3. Cataplasma adstringens, ad hæmorrhagiam 
partis externæ vulneratæ. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 104. 
ꝶ. Sang. dracon. ʒj. 
Sarcocoll. ʒij. 
Lap. hœmatit. ʒß. 
Bol. armen. ℥j. 
Tenuissime pulverisata, mista, excipiantur 
Album. ovor. q. s. ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Exceptum id stupâ alcohole vini madidâ admoveatur 
vulneri, turn vesica vel fascia circumpositâ firmetur. 
4.


299 Crude Cataplasms.
4. Epithema molle, excitans, cardiacum: 
ꝶ. Summit. tener. recent. melissœ. 
Abrotan. aā ℥ß. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒiij. 
Caryophyll. aromat. 
Cinnamom. ana ʒj. 
Cum Vini rhen. geros. tantillo. 
Contusa D. ad fictile. 
S. Extensa super pannum scarlat. vino rhenano prius 
madefactum, tepida, regioni cordis applicentur. 
5. Cataplasma acre, emolliens, stupifaciens. 
Vide H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 92. 
ꝶ. Fermenti panis acris ℥ij 
Sapon. venet. ras. ʒij. 
Mellis ℥ß. 
Ol. chamœmel. infus. ʒii. 
M. F. s. a. cataplasma. 
S. Calidum imponatur abscessui maturo, aperiendo, 
donec integumenta macerata sensum perdiderint. 
6. Cataplasma emolliens, anodynum. 
ꝶ. Micœ panis siligin. in lacte dulci ma- 
cerat. ℔ß. 
Vitell. ovor. n°. iij. 
Croci pulveris. ʒij. 
Farin. lini q. s. 
Ut conterendo F. cataplasma.
S. Cum linteamine duplicato, aut panno laneo, do- 
lerti parti applicetur calidum. 
V. §.355. Formul. ult. quam huic pertinet. 
Nota.

300 Of Humid Baths. 
Nota. To the history of epithems, which we 
have hitherto (§.318. to 366.) laid down, belongs 
also an account of AMULETS; so that those who 
approve of them, may thence deduce general di- 
rections to be observed for their prescription and 
composition. To the cataplasma crudum (§.356.) 
we may also refer the cataplasma emplastrodes ex the- 
riaca; spread upon linen or leather, and usually 
applied to strengthen the stomach and intestines. 
Of BATHS. 
§.367. A Bath is an external fluid medicine, 
in the form of a liquor, or a vapour; 
serving to wash or bathe the surface of the external 
parts of the human body: without the intervention 
of any vehicle, §.320. and 328. n° 3. 
§.368. It appears therefore, that baths are ei- 
ther humid or vaporous: and that each of these are 
either universal or particular; according as they are 
destined to act upon the surface of the whole, or 
some particular part of the body. We shall treat 
first of the humid bath. 
Of Humid BATHS. 
§.369. A HUMID BATH, balneum humidum, re- 
ceives various denominations, accord- 
ing to the different parts of the body, and methods 
used for its application. It is the universal (§.368.) 
only, which can be properly termed balneum; for 
if it reaches only halt way up, to the middle region 
of the body, or any space between the scrobiculum 
cordis, navel and thighs even down to the feet, it 
is then termed semicupium, insessio or insessum: if it
only 


301 Of Humid Bath.
only covers the feet, pedilivium; if appropriated 
to the head, capitiluvium; if to other parts, it is 
termed lavatio, lotio, and lavamentum: when it is 
poured by drops, or in a continued stream from 
above upon any part, it is then termed embroche, 
stillicidium, and impluvium; tho' this method of 
using is now become almost obsolete, except in the 
natural baths.  
§.370. The MATERIALS for this form, are,	 
all dilute medicated liquors, of what kind soever, 
suitable to the intention; but more frequently such 
as are in common use, requiring no preparation 
from the apothecary, nor any need of a prescrip- 
tion: such as simple or salt water, sope-suds, lye 
made from ashes, chamber-lye, new or sower milk 
and its whey; natural bath-waters, sweet-oil, wine, 
or vinegar and water, hydrogalum or milk and wa- 
ter, hydrelœon or oil and water, common dish- 
water made with bran, from the parts of animals, 
&c. At other times the liquors for baths are made 
of some decoctions (§.224.), infusions (§.211.), 
or mixtures (§.272.) prepared by the apothecary. 
Consult §.321. 
§.371. A proper ELECTION of the materials 
for this form, is apparent from §.299. and 322. 
We are here to have a principal regard to the me- 
dicinal virtues required, with the penetrability and 
consistence of the liquor neglecting what belongs 
to the colour, smell, &c. For the rest, we may 
observe 
1. That when a simple and common liquor 
will suffice, we should prefer that to an offici- 
nal composition (per §.29. and 31.); because 
the great quantity used in this form, would be 
otherwise too expensive for the patient. So that, 
for a universal bath (§.368.) especially, we sel-
dom 

302 Of Humid Baths. 
dom use any thing but the common liquors (at 
§.370 ): being, however, mindfull of the cau- 
tions at §.23, and 30. 
2. That when oily and aqueous liquors (§.370.) 
are used together in this form, their commixture 
is seldom required to be so intimate, as to call 
for a combination by means of sope (per §.274. 
n° 6.). 
3. That the artificial baths, made from fos- 
sils; as nitre, sea-salt, alum, vitriol, sulphur, 
quick-lime, fix'd alcalies, &c. can never pro- 
duce altogether the same effects as the natural 
baths, notwithstanding they have considerable 
uses. 
4. That the number of ingredients for this 
form, is seldom larger than for the decoction, 
§.226. n° 23. 
§.372. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for this form, agrees with that for 
similar internal forms; infusions (§.214.), decoc- 
tions (§.227.), and mixtures (§.264.). 
§.373. The DOSE of this form is limited by 
the quantity of surface, or number of parts to be 
bathed (§.369.), in conjunction with the struc- 
ture of the bathing vessel. 
§.374. The GENERAL QUANTITY of an ex- 
temporaneous bath consists frequently of but one 
dose; especially when it is universal, or adapted 
to bathe any considerable extent of surface on the 
body (per §.369.). When it is design’d for the 
wafhing of leffer parts or members, it is ufual to 
prescribe several doses at a time: so that the ge- 
neral quantity may be easily determined (per 
§.325.). 
§.375. The mutual PROPORTION of the in- 
gredients for this form, is limited by the same cir- 
cumstances


303 Of Humid Baths. 
cumstances as at §.326. compared with §.373, 
and 374. Observe also, 
1. That the medicinal virtues of the ingre- 
dients for this form, do not require to be pro- 
portioned with the greatest exactness: so that 
both the liquor and ingredients may be taken in 
a much larger proportion, than for internal li- 
quid forms of the like kind. 
2. That the liquid menstruum, used to boil 
the other ingredients, is very often prescribed 
only by q. s.
3. Otherwise, the decoction or infusion for a 
bath, may be order’d by the same proportions 
as for the like internal forms (§.217. and 230.); 
it being the best way to make them highly sa- 
turated, and to afterwards dilute them sufficient- 
ly, with more of a proper menstruum, at the 
time of using: which is a method the most con- 
venient for the composition of extemporaneous 
baths, which are very extensive or univesal; 
that we may not be obliged to have recourse to 
larger boilers or coppers than are at hand. 
§.376. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for the composition of an extempo- 
raneous bath, may be order’d like that for the com- 
position of similar internal liquid forms (§.218. 
to 220. 231. and 279.). For an exact depuration 
(per §.219. n° 4. (2.) (3.) (4.)), it does not re- 
quire it. Even the gross substances are frequently 
infused and macerated together with the menstru- 
um in the bathing-tub, or they are poured with 
their liquor into the bathing-tub, after they have 
been first boiled in a separate vessel, that they may 
serve to rub with, stand or fit upon, &c. And this 
is frequently observed, especially in large baths; 
when the ingredients are transmitted by the apo- 
thecary to be infused or boiled by the patient at 
his

304 Of Humid Baths. 
his own house (per. §.220. and 231.): in which 
case, they are often few’d up first in a linen or 
woollen bag, that they may be applied like a dry 
epithem (§.331.) to the affected parts, during the 
time of bathing, or to serve as a cushion to sit upon; 
which is very often practiced in the semicupium. 
Hence, this part of the formula concludes F. li- 
quor, vel species vel saccus, pro balneo, semicupio, 
pediluvio, &c. V. §.369. 
§.377. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be learned from 
§.60. 369. 373. and 376. compared with what 
will be suggested to the physician, from a proper 
knowledge of the doctrine of indications, and a 
legitimate use of baths and bathing: the business
of which, will not lie in a little compass; and 
cannot well be brought into this small treatise. Con- 
sult F. hoffmanni opuscul. physico-med. as also his 
Medic. ration. system. tom. iii. sect. ii. cap. x. & 
alii. 
§.378. The USE of baths is at present not very 
frequent; but among the antients they were very 
much used: nor are they only adapted for cleanly- 
ness and delicacy, but are also extremely serviceable 
for the cure of many diseases, by moistening, soften- 
ing, diluting, attracting, discussing, strengthening, 
opening, cooling, warming, attenuating, easing, 
&c. in most disorders, whether external or inter- 
nal, acute or chronic, in which, they afford very 
great benefit; tho' they are not without their ill 
consequences, when improperly used. V. id. hoff-
man. loc. cit. 
§.379. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

305 Humid Baths. 
1. Lotio mundans ad pediculos planos pubis. 
Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. tom. II. p. 488. 
ꝶ. Mercur. sublimat. corros. gr. iv. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iv. 
M. D. 
S. Tantillo hujus liquoris laventur mane & vesperi 
loca infestata. 
2. Semicupium emolliens, anodynum, calculo ure- 
teribus impacto prosicuum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphor. §.1426. 
ꝶ. Rad. althœœ  ℥iv. 
Herb. 5. emollient. aa m. iv. 
Flor. papaver. errat. 
Chamœmel. ana m. ij. 
Conscissa infuantur laxè sacculo lineo qua- 
drato, ad lumborum dimensionem apto. 
D. 
S Saccus coquatur per 1/2 horam in lact. dulc. duplo 
aquœ diluti q. s. Liquori calenti insideat œger ab 
umbilico ad crura usque, sacco lumbis supposito, 
manè & vesperi per horam. Interea bibat decoc 
tum diureticum H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 244. de- 
scriptum. 
3. Lavamentum ad intertriginem. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥x. 
Tinct. benzoin. ℥j. 
Sacch. Saturn. ʒj.
M. 
S. Lac virginale, quo partes excoriatœ, prius aqua 
abstersœ, laventur.
X 4. 

306 Humid Baths. 
4. Balneum ad glutinosa, pro infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 44. 
ꝶ. Summitat. rutœ. 
Sabinœ. 
Absynthii. 
Tanaceti. 
Chamœmeli ana m. iij. 
Cum Aq. decoct pintis xij. admisce 
Sapon. venet. ℥jv. 
Sal. sarmento. ℥j. 
F. Liquor pro balneo. 
S. Huic tepido insideat œger collo tenus mane & ves- 
peri per 1/2 horam: post fricetur corpus universum 
cum pannis laneis, siccis, calidis. 
5. Pediluvium refrigerans, paregoricum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. salicis. 
Malvœ. 
Lactuc. 
Nymphœœ ana m. ij. 
Flor. rhoead. m. j. 
Capit. papav. alb. n°. vj. 
Nitri ℥ij. 
Conscissis, tusis, mistis, F. species pro 
pediluvio. 
S. Species cum aq. pluv. q. s. coquatur, sub finem ad- 
dendo aceti vini pint. j. Decoctum tepidum sit pro 
pediluvio, cui insideat œger ad crura usque per ho- 
ram, vespere: egressus ad somnum se componat.
6. 


307 Of Vaporous Baths.
6. Balneum emolliens, antisepticum, ad go- 
norrhæam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 245. 
ꝶ. Fol rec. rutœ. 
Scordii. 
Malvœ. 
Aliiariœ ana m. ij. 
Cum Aq. decoct. & expressis ad ℔ ij. adde 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Spir. vini comm. ʒvj. 
S. In hoc tepido virga & scrotum immergantur ter 
quaterve de die, spatio 1/2 horœ: dein panni lanei
eodem decocto immersi, & expressi omni applicentur 
pubi, scroto, perinœo. 
Of Vaporous BATHS. 
§.380. A Vaporous BATHS. balneum vaporo- 
sum (§.368.), is an external medicine 
adapted to answer some intention of the physician, 
by directing and applying its Fumes or vapours to 
the surface of some external part of the body; or 
else by conveying and drawing them, together 
with the air, into various cavities of the body, 
thro’ their particular apertures. 
§.381. The preceding vapours or fumes (§.380.), 
do either exhale (1.) spontaneously, by the action 
of the natural heat of the atmosphere, and are, 
termed smelling-bottles, balls, &c. which we shall 
explain hereafter; because they require a previous 
knowledge of several things, concerning which, 
We have not yet treated, or (2.) the effluvia are 
X2 drove

308. Of Humid Vapours. 
drove out by means of fire: and of these we intend 
to treat first. 
§.382. These last kind of exhalations (§.381. 
(2.)), are expelled either from liquors, or else from 
dry ingredients: the first of which, we shall call 
humid vapours; but the last, dry fumes, fumigation, 
suffitus or suffiment. And both of them are distin- 
guished like the humid bath (§.368.) into uni-
versal, applied to the whole body, or particular to 
some one part. We shall first consider the humid 
vaporation, or moist vapours. 
Of Humid VAPOURS. 
§.383. THE MATTER of humid vapours may 
be any liquor that is capable of being 
reduced into medicinal vapours by the force of fire: 
of which kind are, common water, milk or its 
whey, wine or its spirit, vinegar, and urine; to- 
gether with the liquid preparations and composi- 
tions of the shops, distilled waters, tinctures, essen- 
ces, elixirs, spirits, and the like: to these we may 
add, infusions (§.211.), mixtures (§.272. and 
283.), and more efpecially decodions (§.224.) com- 
pounded from the above-mention’d officinal liquid 
forms. 
§.384. In order to make a proper ELECTION
of the ingredients for this form, we are directed 
to observe (besides what has been so often repeat- 
ed under this head for other external forms) that 
1. The vapours are expelled from the ingre- 
dients (§.383.), either by accension, setting ’em 
On fire; or by ebullition, keeping them boiling 
over a fire: hence, the one or the other degree 
of heat is requisite, according as the medicinal 
virtues are more or less volatile.
2. 

309 Of Humid Vapours.
2. The prescriber should therefore consider, 
in the first place, which of those kinds of heat 
(n° 1.) he is either desirous or capable of using; 
that he may afterwards adapt the choice of his 
ingredients thereto: for from the same ingredi- 
ents, different vapours will arise, according 
as which of those different degrees of fire (n° 1.) 
are used. 
3. Hence, if the vapours are to be raised by- 
boiling, which is generally the case; those li- 
quors and ingredients will be added and used in 
vain, whose medicinal virtues cannot be elevated 
by the heat of an ebullition. Astringents there- 
fore, thick extracts made by decoction, with the 
more fix’d parts of animal and mineral substan- 
ces, &c. are unfit for this purpose. The best 
ingredients for this end (whether animal, ve- 
getable or mineral) are, all those, which upon 
boiling with water, afford distilled water, spirits 
or oils, of some strength *. And tho’ emol- 
lient, relaxing and easing virtues seem to be al- 
together fixed; yet they are in some measure ca- 
pable of an elevation, in the vapours of boiling 
liquors. 
4. Hence we also find, that those decoctions 
(§.226. n° 1, 2, 3, 15.) abounding with vola- 
tile parts, may be safely used under this form, 
tho' they cannot be properly exhibited for inter- 
nal uses; supposing their virtues are drove off 
in vapours by boiling. 
5. When various liquors and ingredients are 
to be mixed together in this form, we should 
consider their mutual affinity or actions upon each 
other, and the effects consequent thereon; which 
are to be learned from chemistry. We are by 
X3 that
* Vide H. Boerh. Elem. Chem. vol. II. proc. I. XV. &c.

310 Of Humid Vapours.
that art taught, that a mixture of two substances, 
in themselves fix’d, emits volatile vapours; and 
on the contrary, that volatiles become fix’d, 
barely by mixture with other substances which 
are fix’d, or even volatile. Thus the fix’d sal 
ammoniacum becomes volatile by the addition of 
quick lime, or a lixivious salt, the acid part of 
nitre and common salt, becomes volatile by add- 
ing oil of vitriol to them, &c. The volatile 
acid spirits of nitre, common salt, and vinegar, 
become fixed upon an addition of alcalies; whe- 
ther saline volatile, saline fixed, or earthy ab- 
sorbent, &c. This, however strange, may be 
relied upon for true. 
6. Lastly, being mindful of the great pene- 
trating force possessed by the vapours elevated by 
fire, we should be cautious not to let them dis- 
appoint our intention. 
7. The number of ingredients for this form, 
is the same as for the internals, at §.383. 
§.385. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients, has also nothing peculiar in it. 
§.386. The DOSE of this form is never deter- 
mined by weight or measure, but is usually limited 
by the length of time assigned for the evaporation: 
so that, either the whole general quantity of the 
liquor is exposed to evaporation by the fire at one 
time, or only a certain part thereof, supplying the 
consumption by a gradual addition of more, as the 
other evaporates. But sometimes, the dose is re- 
strained to a few drops; as when we use nothing 
but precious oils or essences, to correct the dis- 
agreeable smell of any place. 
§.387. The GENERAL QUANTITY of this 
form is to be determined from the quantity of sur- 
face which is to afford vapours, the degree of fire, 
with the length of time and frequency of evapora- 
tion:

311 Of Humid Vapours. 
tion: so that ℔j, ij, iij, and more, is frequently 
order’d to be compounded and transmitted to the 
patient at a time. But when the dose is to be only 
a few drops (per §.386.), a scruple or a dram 
may be enough to order at once. 
§.388. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingredi- 
ents for this form, is apparent from what has been 
hitherto said on this head for external forms of the 
like nature, §.303. 326. The proportion of the 
menstruum to that of the ingredients to be infused 
or boiled, is frequently prescribed by q. s. 
§.389. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is the same as in the 
liquid bath (§.376.). Nor does the liquor for a 
vaporous bath require to be more exactly depurat- 
ed, than barely by decantation from the fœces. 
The ingredients for this form are very often trans- 
mitted to the patient by the apothecary, in order 
to make the decoClion and evaporation before the 
patient at one and the same time (per §.384. n° 3.). 
And sometimes the species are included in a small 
bag, that they may be applied hot to the parts af- 
fected, after the vaporation is over. The subscrip- 
tion may therefore conclude, F. liquor, vel species, 
vel sacculus, pro vaporario vel balneo vaporis. 
§.390. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to the 
patient contains, besides what is common to other 
forms under this head, the method of using or ap- 
plying these vapours, which is various in different 
intentions. 
1. When the vapours are intended to correct
some disagreeable smell, putrifaction, contagion 
or pestilential state of the air, &c.; the liquor is 
then to be flung on live coals in the infected 
place, or diffused thro' the air in vapours, by 
evaporating over the coals, in an open and broad 
vessel, making the liquor boil.
X4 2. 

312 Of Humid Vapours.
2. If the vapours are to be applied immedi- 
ately to the surface of some part of the patient’s 
body; in that case, there are various contrivan- 
ces to contain and direct the vapours: as domicils, 
seats, coffers, and vaulted machines; wherein 
the patient either stands, fits, or lies down, with 
his body naked, or only cover’d with fine linen, 
and his head let thro' an apperture, that his or- 
gans of sense and respiration may enjoy the com- 
mon air, unmolested by the vapours or fumes: 
the patient’s body thus confined, receives the 
vapours expelled from the liquor, either by ac- 
cension, as in burning spirit of wine, or else by 
evaporation, with or without boiling, or by the 
extinction of red hot flints, either by throwing 
the liquor upon them, or them into the liquor, 
supplying others when they are grown cold. 
3. If the vapours are to be received into some 
small particular cavity of the body, as the ears, 
nose, mouth, fauces, bronchia, vagina, uterus, 
&c. or convey’d to the surface of a particular 
limb; it is usually done by means of a funnel, 
or a blanket, &c. 
4. What is to be done before, in, and after 
the vaporation, together with its continuation, 
repetition, &c. may be deduced from the phy- 
sician’s indication in particular cases. 
§.391. The Use of vaporations is not inconsi- 
derable, being much like that of the liquid bath 
(§.378.); and is in some cases much more effec- 
tual: upon which head, consult the excellent Hoff- 
man, in opusculo Physico-medica, & in Medic. Ra- 
tion. System. Tom. III. sect. II. cap. X. 
§.271. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1.

313 Humid Vapours,
2. Vaporarium particulare, emolliens, resolvens, 
ad anginam inflammatoriam. 
V. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 137. 
ꝶ. Acet. sambuc. 
Rosar. 
Calendul. ana ℥j. 
Aq. stillat. sambuc. ℥vj. 
M. 
S. Vapor calidus hauriatur infundibuli ope in fauces. 
2. Balneum vaporosum universale, nervinum, 
antiparalyticum. 
Conf. H. Boerh. Aphorism. §.1068, 1069. 
ꝶ. Herb. marjoran. 
Menth. 
Mari syriac.
Fol rec. cochlear. 
Summit. rec. rutœ. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Baccar. juniper. ana m. j. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, digere in phiala alta 
chemica, cum aceti & spirit. vini vulg.
ana q. s. per diem & noctem. 
S. Liquor bene calidus, una cum speciebus, in ollam 
effusus, reponatur in loculum fornicis sudatorii,
ac silicibus candentibus injectis fervens detineatur. 
Sub fornice decumbens æger, ingesto prius decocto at- 
tenuante, vapores excipiat nudo corpore, ut sudet 
per 1/2 horam aut ultra, si vires ferunt. Sudoribus 
detersis corpus fricetur pannis laneis, calidis, sic- 
cis, villosis. 
3.

314 Humid Vapours, 
3. Vapor suaveolens ad fœtorem loci corrigendum. 
ꝶ. Essent. amhar. ʒij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophillor. gtt. xxv. 
Cinnamom. gtt. x. 
M. D. vitro probe clauso. 
S. Hujus aliquot guttulœ prunis non fumantibus, aut 
silici ignito, instillentur. 
4. Vaporatio emolliens, resolvens, ad gravem adi- 
tum a causa frigida. 
ꝶ. Folior. absinth. 
Rosmarin. 
Summit. rutœ ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. ℥ß. 
Baccar. laur. 
Semin. cumin. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, mista, insue sacculo. 
D. 
S. Coquatur sacculus in q. s. vini: vapor ope infun- 
dibuli immittatur auri affecta, mane & vesperi 
per 1/2 horam: post sacculus ipse e dococto exemptus, 
valdse calens, auri applicetur, firmetur. 
5. Vapor antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Aceti vini vulg. pint. ij. 
Sal. marin. 
Nitri. 
Ol. vitriol. vulg. ana ℔ß. 
Aq.purœ pint. j. 
M.
S. Immissa in ollam fictilem vitreatam, repandam, 
super prumas reposita, in limine domus aut cubiculi 
kniter evaporent.
6. 

315 Of Fumigations.
6. Vapor hæmorrhoidalis, anodynus, discutiens. 
♃. Summit. hyoscyam. 
Solan. vulg. 
Cicut. ana m. j. 
Aq. fontan. ℔ij. 
Sp. vin. camph. ℥iv. 
Ol succin. rect. ℈ij. 
M. 
S. Ebulliantur simul, sub sedile aperto cubiculario, 
& vapores dirigantur partibus affectis mediante 
tubo conico, donec sopiantur hœmorrhoides cœcœ, 
tumentes. 
7. Vapor swaveolens cubicularius. 
♃. Aq. omn. flor. Batean. ℥j.
Odorifer. ejusd. ℥ß. 
Sp. nitri dulc. ʒj. 
M. 
S. Evaporentur in limine cubiculi, per ollam fictilem 
calidam vel potius œolipilam. 
Of FUMIGATIONS, 
§.393. A SUFFUMIGATION, or suffitus, is the 
fumes arising from a dry medicine, 
suspended in the air, and elevated there by accen- 
sion, or an intense heat; being afterwards con- 
ducted to the surface of some external part, or in- 
ternal cavity of the body, to answer some medicinal 
intention. 
§.394. The chief MATERIALS for this form, 
are, all dry substances, which, being either vola-  
tile

316 Of Fumigations. 
tile or inflammable, are capable of exhaling me- 
dicinal fumes by the force of fire. Hence, the 
most numerous ingredients are afforded by the 
solid parts of vegetables, their concreted juices, 
resins, gums, gum-resins, dry balsams, &c. From 
animals are taken musk, civet, castor, dry’d gall, 
&c. Among the mineral class of substances the chief 
are cinnabar, amber, ambergriss, sulphur, nitre, 
sal ammoniac, &c. 
§.395. The FORM for the ingredients of a 
suffumigation, is, either that of a dry powder, or a 
dry and cohesive or solid mass. 
1. The powder kind generally consists of par- 
ticles much grosser than the tragea (at §.107. 
n° 2.): and is to be either sprinkled on coals of 
fire, call’d fumigating powder; or else to be 
smoaked in a pipe after the manner of common 
tobacco, and may be called medicated tobacco. 
2. The solid or cohesive kind, consisting of 
smaller particles, have them more intimately 
mix’d, and being joined together by some pro- 
per glutinous substance, are made into various 
figures: as troches or pastills, little sticks, can- 
dles, little cyprus birds, and small or large 
torches; which being cast upon live coals, rubb’d 
upon hot bricks or tyles, or set on fire, do emit 
the required fumes. 
§.396. A proper ELECTION of the ingre- 
dients (§.394.) for these medicines, is to be de- 
duced from the physician’s intention, and the de- 
sired form (§.395.). 
1. Hence, the fumigations used for pleasure, 
or to correct the disagreeable smell of a cham- 
ber, &c. do consist only of perfuming ingre- 
dients; such as spices, frankincense, styrax, 
labdanum, benjamin, ambergriss, and the like. 
But when the intention is to warm and strengthen 
relaxed

317 Of Fumigations. 
relaxed parts, or to dissipate, and dry up su- 
persfluous humidities; the best things for those 
purposes are, resins, gums, gum-resins, warm, 
and partly aromatic substances joined with no 
pleasant smell, with amber, salt ammoniac, &c. 
Hysteric cases are best; suited with fœtid fumes, 
from castor, galbanum, asascetida, &c. Putri- 
faction and animal stenches are best resisted and 
overcome by the fumes of nitre and sulphur. 
Venereal cases are usually opposed by fumiga- 
tions with cinnabar. 
2. The parts of vegetables used in this form, 
are those only, which are naturally of a more so- 
lid and dry texture, or else made so by art; 
otherwise, they would be unfit for fumigations, 
as being not easily inflammable. 
3. But this form often takes in the stronger 
kind of aromatic and spirituous liquors, which 
are not watery, but inflammable; as effences, 
spirits, oils, liquid balsams, &c. but then they 
are to be mix’d in a small quantity, in propor- 
tion to the other dry ingredients: agreeable to 
the rules of composition for the internal solid 
forms at §.110. n° 3. 174. n° 1. (4.). 
4. The basis of the medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.) is usually made of the leaves of common 
tobacco, compounded with a less quantity of the 
leaves of other herbs, flowers, rinds or barks, 
spices, &c. Concreted juices which melt by 
heat, are excluded hences, because they obstruct 
the cavity of the tube or pipe, thro' which the 
smoak is to be drawn. 
5. In order to make up the latter kind or so- 
lid mass (§.295 n° 2.) for this form, we ge- 
nerally use a mucilage of gum tragacanth, a so- 
lution of labdanum, the turpentines, or ether li- 
quid balsams.  
6.

318 Of Fumigations. 
6. Sometimes, sugar is added in the compo- 
sition of pastills, small candles and cypruss birds; 
in order to augment and diffuse the other ingre- 
dients, and make them burn more briskly. 
7. That some of these fumigations may keep 
on fire when once kindled, and burn with a ser- 
pentine sparkling, as cyprus candles and. birds 
ought; for this purpose, their composition usu- 
ally takes in a sufficient quantity of powder of some 
burnt wood, which is of a soft and light texture; 
as is the wood of willows, and lime-trees; or 
even fine small-coal-dust, being mix’d in a due 
proportion with the other ingredients, renders 
them very apt to take and spread the fire. 
8. In making the larger kind of torches or 
candles, bees-wax is generally used for the basis 
of the composition. 
9. In using all fumigations (especially when 
they are to be immediately applied to the sur- 
face of the body, or convey’d into some of its 
cavities) the physician should consider the quan- 
tity of the skin’s surface to be in contact with the 
fumes, and its degree of porosity (per §.322. 
n° 8.), with the exceeding tenerity and sensi- 
bility of the internal skins: and lastly, he should 
be previously acquainted with the action and ef- 
fects of naked fire, in separating the principles 
and changing the parts of mix’d bodies; that 
he may be thereby enabled to make a judicious 
election of substances fit for his intention, which 
while they are doing good to some parts may 
do no harm to others. Cinnabar, can never 
excite a sallivation, whilst it retains the form of 
that concrete; but being converted into an atte- 
nuated mercury by naked fire, its effects are dif- 
ferent. It may be asked whether the parts of 
benjamin, amber, &c. arise the same in fumes 
as


319 Of Fumigations.
as they were in the concrete? consult chemistry, 
and you will find the contrary. 
10. Many shops are frequently ready furnish’d 
with fumigations of all forms; so that, when 
these are adapted to the intention, the prescriber 
may spare himself the trouble of an extempo- 
raneous composition: and as some of them may 
be required to keep a considerable time without 
much decaying, it may be proper to intermix, 
or else varnish them over with some suitable li- 
quid substance (at n°.3.). 
11. The number of ingredients permitted to 
enter the composition of this form, is frequently 
very great; but a concise brevity is always more 
commendable (per §.29.). 
§.397. The ORDER of prescribing the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be observed the same as 
in the internal powders (§.112.), and troch 
(§.176.). 
§.398. The DOSE of this form varies with dif- 
ferent circumstances, being seldom determined by 
weight, but generally by number, or measure. 
Of the powder kind (§.395. n° 1.) drach. i, ij.
or pugill. i, ij. may be order'd to be cast upon the 
live coals at a time. The dose of the tobacco kind 
of fumigation (§.ib.), is usually limited by the 
capacity of the conic bowl of the tobacco-pipe. 
The troches, candles, and little birds (§.ib. n° 2.), 
may be prescribed to be burnt, or laid upon the 
live coals in n°.j, ij, iij. &c. The small sticks 
(§.ib.) may be rubbed upon a hot iron or tyle, 
in any quantity. And the dose of troches or wax- 
candles to be consumed at once, may be determin- 
ed by their number, and the length of time, 
§.399. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of this 
form, to be prescribed and compounded at once, 
is to be deduced from the use of it being continu’d 
a


320 Of Fumigations. 
a longer or shorter time, and the repetition of it 
being more seldom or frequent. Such as are more 
troublesome in their composition and configura- 
tion, as are the generality of the latter or consi- 
stent kind of this form (§.395. n° 2.), should 
hardly be prescribed for in a less quantity than ℔ß.
at a time; unless when you order such as are kept 
ready in the shops (§.396. n° 10.). consult §.180. 
§.400. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for fumigations, is to be collected from a 
consideration of the physician’s intention, with 
the virtues and price of the materials, and the re- 
quisite consistence and form (§.395.) of the com- 
position, compared with what has been said be- 
fore (at §.87 to 92. 115. 181. 303. and 396.). 
1. The more precious and efficacious perfumes 
are generally taken in much the lesser propor- 
tion, in comparison of the other ingredients, 
whether they are intended for the composition 
of the powder or consistent kind of fumigation 
(§.395. n° 1. 2.). The same also obtains with 
regard to the liquid substances (§.396. n° 3.), 
2. In ordering a medicated tobacco (§.395. 
n° 1.), the leaves of common tobacco are usu- 
ally taken in above three, four, or six times a 
larger quantity, than the other ingredients. 
3. The proportion of glutinous substances 
(§.396. n° 5.) to form the composition into 
troches, candles, &c. (§.395. n° 2.) is usually 
prescribed by a. s: the proportion of bees-wax, 
to form troches or candles is (§. 396. n° 8.) usu- 
ally order’d to be double or triple the quantity 
of the other ingredients. 
4. The proportion of fine small-coal-dust 
(§.396. n° 7.) may be also order’d by q. s. or 
it may be order’d in equal or double the quanti- 
ty of the other ingredients. Sugar may be also 
order’d in much the same proportion. 
§.401.

321 Of Fumigations. 
§.401. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, orders 
comminution in a gross manner, mixation, &c. 
ut F. pulvis pro suffitu, nicotiana medicata, &c. or 
working the materials up with something glutinous, 
ut F. trochisci, haculi, aviculœ, cypriœ, tœde, &c. 
Nor is it usual to determine the quantity of each 
of these, either by size or weight. When officinal 
fumigations are order'd (§.396. n° 10.), it is 
evident that there will be no occasion for a sub- 
scription, unless it be to order the form to be mix- 
ed or varnished over with liquid substances. At
last, may be added D. ad chartam, scatulam, &c. 
§.402. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, may be easily understood 
from what has been said on this head at §.60. 393. 
395. and 398. But observe, 
1. That all the kinds of fumigations (§.395. 
n° 1, 2.) are frequently used only to correct or 
perfume the air; and indeed the sticks, candles, 
Cyprus, birds and troches serve no other inten- 
tion: but the powders and troches are often used 
to fumigate various parts of the body, by an im- 
mediate communication of their vapours. There- 
fore, as the first kind are used only for pleasure, 
or to prevent contagious disorders, there is hard- 
ly any necessity of observing an exact regimen 
during the use of 'em. 
2. When this form is to fumigate the body, 
the generality of what has been said at §.390. 
n° 2, 3. does also here take place. But the 
fumes are always evaporated by live coals, or a 
naked fire. Sometimes, handkerchiefs, hoods, 
and bags are fumigated (per. §.340. n°2. (2.)) 
before they are applied to the body. At other 
times, linen or woollen cloths are well impreg- 
nated with the dry fumes, in order to foment or 
rub particular parts. 
Y §.403.

322 Fumigations.
§.403. The USE of fumigations has been in a 
great measure already hinted, viz. for pleasure, as 
well as preventing and curing disorders; the latter 
by strengthening, discussing, warming, drying, &c. 
There are many who have a great esteem for fumi- 
gations of cinnabar in venereal cases; tho' they 
cannot be always apply’d with safety (§.396. n° 1. 
and 9.). Nor do I think other sharp or adust 
fumes convenient for weak lungs. 
§.404. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Suffitus antiloimicus. 
ꝶ. Myrrh. 
Flor. sulph. 
Nitri ana ℥j. 
M. F. pulvis grossus. 
S. Hujus pugill. aliquot in punas inspersis vaporen- 
tur cubicula aut œdes. 
2. Suffitus roborans, discutiens, ad hydrocelem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 212. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Oliban. 
Sarcocollœ. 
Resin. guajac. ana ℥ß. 
Camphorœ ʒß. 
Mastiches ℥j.
Salis ammoniac. ℈ij. 
M. F. pulvis. 
S. Hujus incensi vapor excipiatur nudo scroto, dein 
panni lanei sumo hoc vaporosi, calidi, superappli- 
centur. 
3.

323 Fumigations. 
3. Nicotiana suaveolens, cephalica. 
ꝶ. Herb. siccat. salviœ. 
Majoran. 
Thymi. 
Flor. siccat. lilior. convall. 
Rosar. ana pug. ij. 
Cort. cascarill. 
Cinnamom. ana ℈j. 
Comminutis crassiuscule admisce 
Fol. nicotianœ concissor. ℥iv. 
Turn consperge tantillo essent. ambar. 
D. 
S. Ut in fronte. Sugatur fumus mane, dimidiam 
aut integrant horam ex fistula tabacaria. 
4. Suffumigium anti-rachiticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 255. 
ꝶ. Benzoin. 
Mastiches. 
Succin. ana ℥j. 
Lign. aloes. 
Cort. cinnam: ana ℥ij. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒj. 
Contusa, mista, cum terebinth, venet. q. s. 
redigantur in trochiscos. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Trochisci pro suffitu, quorum aliquot prunis injici- 
antur, dum ante ignem sedet insans nudatis inferi- 
oribus. Pannis etiam laneis, siccis, horum fumo 
imbutis, fricetur spina dorsi, abdomen, &c. manè 
& vesperi. 
Y2 5.

324 Fumigations. 
5. Baculi swaveolentes ad fornacem. 
ꝶ. Labdan. 
Styrac. calamit. 
Benzoin. ana ℥j.
Bals. tolutan. ℥ß. 
Pulv. rad. irid. flor. 
Cort. cascaryll. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. lign. rhod. gtt. xx. 
Cum q. s. Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. 
Aq. rosar. extract F. massa, quæ for- 
metur in bacculos instar ceræ sigil- 
laris. 
S. Fornaci aut testœ calidœ affricetur parum baculus 
ad discutiendam mephitim. 
6. Aviculæ cypriæ. 
ꝶ. Oliban. 
Mastiches. 
Benzoin. 
Cort. thymiam. ana ℥j. 
Baccar. juniper. ℥ß. 
Caryophyll. arom. ʒij. 
Sacchar. alb. ʒiv. 
Carbon. salicis ℔j. 
F. omnium pulvis subtilissimus, qui cum 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Ag. rosar. factœ q. s. subigatur & ef- 
fingatur in aviculas vel candelas. 
S. Duœ, tres, &c, accensœ reponantur in loco odore 
grato inficiendo. 
7.

325 Fumigations. 
7. Tædæ odoratæ.
ꝶ. Easdem vel similes species formulœ prœ- 
ced. exceptis saccharo & carbone. 
Cerœ flavœ duplum ad pond. omn. 
Concorporentur & formentur in tædas 
minores vel majores. 
S. Ardeant hœ ad delicias aut ad prophylaxin in 
locis infectis. 
8. Suffimentum hystericum. 
♃. Assa fœtid. ʒvj. 
Myrrh. ʒiij. 
Galban. ʒjß. 
Ol. succin. ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. trochisci n°. xxiv. 
S. Injiciantur duos vel tres in prunas, & vapores 
inhalentur œgro, naribus, & hiante ore. 
9. Fumigatio ad procidentiam ani, vel uteri. 
♃. Myrrh. 
Succin. ana ʒjß. 
Cort. cinnam. 
Menth. crisp. ana ʒj. 
Piper. jamaic. ad pond. omn. 
M. F. s. a. pulvis grosso modo. 
S. In prunas conspergatur, ad affectas vaporandas 
partes sub sedile, fundo aperto.
Y3 10. 

326 Of Plasters. 
10. Tædæ odoriseræ. 
♃. Gum. benz. ℥ij. 
Storac. ℥j.
Lahdan. ℥ß. 
Mosch. 
Ambragrisea ana ℈ß. 
Cer. flav. rec. ℔ß. 
Cera liquisacta, insperge pulverem subti- 
lissimam, & in filo gossipio contorto 
imbuatur, & deinde ex primatur. 
S. Hujus frustrum in loco comburatur contaminato, 
frequenter flammam extinguendo, ad fumum au- 
gendum. 
Nota. In this place we might add universal, and 
topical sumigation with cinnabar, and the dry gly- 
ster of the smoak of tobacco; the uses of which 
are sufficently known: so that they need not be 
inferred here; since they require no extraordinary 
artifice to prescribe them. 
Of PLASTERS. 
§.405. An EMPLASTER is an external, flex- 
ible and glutinous medicine; solid in 
the cold, but not brittle, yet melting with heat:
consisting chiefly of oily and cohesive substances, 
which being spread or extended upon a suitable 
vehicle, are applied to some external part of the 
body, for various uses. It is call’d dropax or pi- 
catio, when pitch is its basis; and sparadrapum or 
tela emplastica, a cere-cloth or paper, when spread 
upon either of those vehicles. 
§.406.

327 Of Plasters. 
§. 406. The MATERIALS for an extemporane- 
ous emplasater, are of two kinds: (1.) excipient, 
making the basis of the form; or (2.) excipienda, 
to be received by the former in much less quanti- 
ties. 
1. The excipient ingredients are generally of 
a tenacious, fat or oily consistence: and are ei- 
ther (1.) liquid; as oils made by expression, in- 
fusion or decoction: or (2.) more thick, but 
pliable; as animal fats, marrow, butter, honey, 
officinal unguents, &c. or (3.) more tenacious, 
cohesive or glutinous; as the turpentines, in- 
spissated juices, balsams, &c. or (4.) more con- 
sistent, hard, dry, and in the cold somewhat 
brittle; as wax, resins, gums, gum-resins, 
to which we may add the officinal emplasters. 
2. The excipienda also, are either (1.) liquid: 
as watery liquors, mucilages, decoctions, infu- 
sions, expressed juices; aromatic oils, whether 
obtained by expression, or distillation; liquid 
balsams, natural or artificial; tinctures, spirits, 
wine, vinegar, gall, &c. or (2.) more cohesive; 
as inspissated juices, extracts, sope, amalgams, 
&c. or (3.) dry and brittle, or capable of pul- 
verifation ; as metalline calces, powders from 
the parts of vegetables, animals, or minerals, 
&c. 
§.407. To make a proper ELECTION of the 
ingredients for this form, requires a previous know- 
ledge, and consideration of the physicians inten- 
tion, the proper nature of the several materials 
(§.406.), and the requisite qualities of an em- 
plaster (§.405.) Hence, observe 
1. That the laudable qualities of an emplaster 
are, (1.) to be of so dry a consistence in the cold, 
as not to stick to the fingers: (2.) to be soft, 
ductile and pliable in a small heat; (3.) to be 
Y4 mode-


328 Of Plasters.
moderately tenacious, or adhesive by the 
warmth of an human body, so as to readily stick 
fast both to the morbid part, and the extended 
vehicle and lastly, (4.) to have the mixture of 
its ingredients equable, and its consistence uni- 
form. 
2. The first property (n° 1. (1.)) depends 
on the proportion of materials at §.406. n° 1. 
(4.) n° 2. (3.): the second (n° 1. (2.)) pro- 
ceeds from the excipients at §.406. n° 1. (1.). 
(2.): the third (n° 1. (3.)) arises chiefly from 
the terebinthinate and gum-resinous substances 
(at §.406. n° 1. (3.). (4.)): and the last qua- 
lity (n° (4.)) is obtained by a skilful and close 
incorporation of all the ingredients. 
3. The excipienda (at §.406. n° 2.) are not 
essentially necessary for the composition of a 
plaster; for the excipient substances (§.ib. n° 1.) 
alone, being skillfully combined, will make an 
emplaster perfectly endued with every requi- 
site quality of the form. Even wax and turpen- 
tine of themselves, being melted together in a 
due proportion, will exhibit all the laudable qua- 
lities (n° 1.) proper to an emplaster. 
4. Oils (§.406. n° 1. (1.)) or substances of 
the like kind (ib. (2.)), with turpentine and 
wax, (ib. (3.) (4.)) do usually compose the ba- 
sis of most emplasters: but for wax and turpen- 
tine are sometimes substituted pitch, resins and 
gum-resins. 
5. Even pitch or gum-resins alone, are occa- 
sionally converted into an emplaster, by incor- 
porating and mollifying them with some proper 
oil or spirit, by means of a hot pestle. 
6. But what is more, oil itself may be form'd 
into an emplaster by boiling it a sufficient length 
of time with the calces of lead; as litharge, ce- 
russ, red-lead. 
7.

329 Of Plasters. 
7. The aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)), 
whose virtues consist in volatile principles, shou’d 
not enter this form: for the quantity of boiling 
necessary to evaporate their aqueous parts, will 
also at the same time dissipate their virtues. 
8. The parts of vegetables which are very 
bulkey in proportion to their weight, and whose 
virtues are inconsiderable and much diffused, are 
not proper to enter the composition of an em- 
plaster in the form of powder: but the apothe- 
cary should rather substitute their juices, decoc- 
tions, infusions, oils, or extracts. 
9. Salts (except they be metalline ones, as 
sacch. saturni, &c.) are hardly ever permitted to 
enter the composition of this form; either be- 
cause they are very difficult to incorporate with 
oily and ceraceous substances, exhale their vo- 
latile parts during the incorporation, diminish 
the emplastic, or adhesive property of the other 
ingredients, or disturb the form itself by melting 
in the air. 
10. When any powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
enter the composition of a plaster, they should 
be either capable of a dissolution, or else ground 
exceeding fine; that they may be so equably in- 
terspersed as to render the mass uniform (per 
n° 1. (2.) and n° 2.). 
11. Hence, extracts, concreted juices, gum- 
resins and the like, when they will not melt with 
the other ingredients, or be reduced into a fine 
powder, should be first dissolved in some proper 
menstruum: as vinegar, wine, oil, turpenine,
the yolk of an egg, &c. 
12. Sometimes vegetable or animal substances, 
whose virtues are desired in an emplaster, are 
first infused, boiled or fry’d in lard, oil, wine, 
or vinegar; that after expressing and straining, 
their


330 Of Plasters.
their liquid parts may be brought to the consi- 
stence of a plaster, with the other ingredients. 
13. When crude mercury is required to enter 
the composition of this form, it should be first 
reduced or kill’d by grinding with lard or turpen- 
tine, or by dissolving it in a suitable menstruum. 
14. The officinal emplasters reserved in the 
shops, are so numerous, as seldom to give occa- 
sion for an extemporaneous prescription and 
composition of others, especially in any consi- 
derable quantity. So that it is the common prac- 
tice to prescribe more for the plasters, common- 
ly used in the shops, either separately, or seve- 
ral such combined together, being mix’d and 
mollified with some proper oil, spirit, tincture, 
or elixir, &c. Sometimes the officinal emplas- 
ters serve as a basis to the other ingredients, 
more immediately adapted to the physician’s in- 
tention, for an extemporaneous plaster: as pow- 
ders, gums, resins, juices, &c. which are com- 
pounded by intermixing some excipient (at 
§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.) (3.)). Thus the time and 
trouble of extemporaneous composition may be 
much abridg’d, and the intention more effectu- 
ally answer’d, without incurring other danger. 
15. For the number of ingredients, concise- 
ness is laudable in this form, as well as in all others. 
Those who desire to contract their prescriptions 
of this form (per n° 14.), may write to several 
intentions in a few words. 
§.408. For the ORDER or series of prescrib- 
ing the ingredients for a plaster, tho' they are 
more frequently ranged according to their quanti- 
ties (per §.57 n° 3.), the excipients being trans- 
posed before those which are order’d by q. s: yet 
the best method seems to be that which corresponds. 
to the order of commixture in a skilful composi- 
tion.

331 Of Plasters. 
tion. Hence the excipientia and excipienda which 
require boiling to incorporate them, should be 
placed first; and those which require melting only, 
may follow; and in the last place may come those 
substances, which should be incorporated with the 
mass when removed from the fire, as those of the 
fine powder and volatile kind, &c. But there is 
no need of being scrupulously exact on this head 
in a prescription, when we are previously satisfied 
of the skilfulness and dexterity of the apothecary. 
§.409. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
of this form are usually the same, or equal to each 
other; because there is seldom more prescribed at 
once than what is to be used at a time. The quantity 
of surface on the morbid part, and of the vehicle to 
be covered with an emplaster, are to be duly con- 
sider’d in order to determine the proper dose and 
general quantity of this form. But as the diversity 
of ages, and habits of body being more obese or 
emaciated, &c. will make the surface of the same 
parts considerably different, it is evident there can 
be no general limits assign'd to these quantities; so 
that when we order an officinal emplaster, or an ex- 
temporaneous one of the more simple kind, (§.407. 
n° 3. 5. 14.) it may be sufficient to prescribe the dose 
and general quantity thereof by q. s. mentioning the 
part which is to be covered by the plaster, or the size 
of the vehicle upon which it is to be spread. In 
extemporaneous compositions of this form which 
are difficult and tedious, it is allowable to prescribe 
a larger quantity. If the quantity prescribed be 
for several doses, the length of time and fre- 
quency of exhibition are to be taken into consi- 
deration together. 
§.410. The mutual Proportion of the se- 
veral ingredients for a plaster, is to be determined 
from the same considerations as their election (at  
§.407.

332 Of Plasters. 
§.407.), in conjunction with the different degree 
of consistence in the plaster. For take notice, 
1. That according to the different use of an 
emplaster it may obtain three degrees of con- 
sistence; viz. (1.) soft, approaching the con- 
sistence of a cerate, (2.) hard, or (3.) interme- 
diate, between hard and soft. The soft emplas- 
ters are used mostly for sparadrapes §.405. in 
the use of emollients, and substances which are 
to penetrate deep, or in applications of this form 
to moveable parts and articulations. Emplasters 
of the two last degrees of consistence are used 
mostly for desiccarives, astringents and 
lives, &c.
2. Hence, the requisite proportions for these 
different degrees of consistence (n° 1.) may be 
nearly determined thus. 
For a soft plaster,—ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥j. 
Pulver. ℥ß.
For a hard plaster,-ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j. 
Cerœ ℥ij. 
Pulver. ℥j.
For a plaster of midling
consistence,
ꝶ. 
Olei ℥j.
Cerœ ℥jß. 
Pulver. ℥vj. 
3. The proportion for oil is applicable to all 
thick and fat subances of the like nature (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.). (3.)): as is the proportion for wax; to 
its similar substances, enumerated at §, ib. 4. In 
the absence of powders, a larger proportion of 
wax, or its analogous substances, may supply 
the defect. 
4. But in powders, at the same time, we are 
also to consider their specific gravity, and parti- 
cular affinity to oily substances. Powders of the 
more

333 Of Plasters. 
more ponderous fossils inspissate a certain quan- 
tity of oil less than those of a lighter kind, Tho 
calces of lead imbibe large quantities of oily and 
fat substances. 
5. The physician will determine the propor- 
tion of aqueous liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) 
from his particular intention: and as almost all 
the aqueous parts of those liquors evaporate in 
the boiling, the proportion of the other ingre- 
dients may remain nearly the same. 
6. Inspissated juices, &c. (§.406. n° 2. (2.)) 
may be refer’d either to wax or lard, according 
as they come nearest to the density of one or the 
other (n° 3.): tho' they are usually added in 
but small quantities. 
7. When white wax is used in this form, as 
it is more brittle than the yellow, its proportion 
should be somewhat diminished. But it is the 
yellow wax which is almost constantly used for 
emplasters.  
8. Remembring that cold makes bodies more 
dense and rigid: in winter we should in large the 
proportion of soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2). (3).); and in summer add more of hard 
ingredients (at §.ib. n° (4.)) for a plaster. 
9. Those substances which serve to mollify or 
dissolve others (§.407. n° 5. 11. and 14.), may 
be prescribed by q. s. 
10. It is also customary to refer the propor- 
tion of oil, wax, and the like substances, to be 
determined at discretion by the apothecary: by 
which means an error in proportion may be ea- 
sily avoided by the prescriber. 
11. And when we desire to adjoin other in- 
gredients more suitable to our intention with 
some officinal emplaster (per §.407. n° 14.), 
being sensible of the consistence of those ingre- 
dients, we may readily know whether they will  
require

334 of Plasters. 
require the addition of an accessory which is soft 
and tenacious, or dry and solid; and the propor- 
tion of such accessories may be order’d by q. s. 
§.411. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, directs. 
1. The preparation of the emplastic mass. And 
this is performed either by (1.) emollition, with 
a gentle heat, or an admixture of some fit men- 
stuum (per §.407. n° 5. 14.); which latter is 
termed madifaction. Or, (2.) by colliquation or 
melting; in such a manner that the ingredients 
may be so fluid upon the fire, as to run into a 
very close commixture with each other; this 
process admitting no excipienda but that are ea- 
sily soluble, or else ground into a fine powder. 
Or, (3.) by means of boiling; which is requir’d 
when any aqueous liquor is to be evaporated 
(§.406. n° 2. (1.)), or when the more fix’d 
medicinal virtues are by this means to be ex- 
tracted from certain vegetables, rejecting after- 
wards their more solid and gross parts, or when 
metalline calces, especially those of lead, are to 
be intimately dissolved and combin’d in this form. 
We here designedly omit what relates to a re- 
gular and artificial preparation of plasters, as well 
for reasons at §.7. n° 3. and §.8. as because 
the business of that is usually refer’d to the dex- 
terity and judgment of the apothecary. Consult 
§.408. 
2. The extention or spreading this form upon 
some vehicle, which is generally either pieces of 
linen, silk, cotton, or leather, &c, according 
as the surface of the part to be covered is subject 
to various motions, is more or less tender or in 
fight, and as the plaster is to remain a longer 
or shorter time upon the part, &c. The size and 
figure of the plaster, agreeable to various parts 
and

335 Of Plasters. 
and uses, may be represented by sending a pat- 
tern cut out in paper, or limited by fingers 
breadths or any other measure, or it may be 
wholly refer’d to the discretion of the apothe- 
cary, mentioning only the particular part to 
which it is to be applied; for we suppose it suf- 
ficiently known, that the figure of an emplaster 
should be scutiform for the stomach, lunated 
for the liver, oval for the splen, orbicular for 
the umbilicus and uterus, and of an oblong-square 
for the kidneys, &c. The method of spreading 
common emplasters is sufficiently known by all; 
for making sparadrapes (§.405.), the linen 
shou’d be soft and well worn, but not ragged, 
the paper thick and soft or spongy; so that the 
melted emplaster may be equally embibed by, 
and extended upon the vehicle, making it ex- 
actly level when cold. Sometimes the internal 
surface of the plaster is smeared over with some 
oil, at other times it is sprinkled with some 
powder; by which means it will not adhere so 
firmly, nor be so apt to daub the parts. Others
do for the same purpose cover the whole, or some 
part of the plaster’s surface, with red or white 
lawn or muslin, crape or gauze, which they 
few or fasten to the margin of the plaster, before 
its application to the surface of the particular 
part it is to cover. 
§.412. The SUPERSCRIPTION (signatura) 
or direction to the patient for this form, is suffi- 
ciently intelligible from what has been already said 
at §.60. and §.405. 
§.413. The USES of emplasters are various and 
manifold, serving to mollify, disperse, maturate, 
deterge, desiccate, corroborate, attract, aggluti- 
nate and retain; excluding the air from wounds, 
ulcers and tumors, and serving to retain the lips 
of

336 Plasters. 
of wounds, fractur’d bones, tents, pledgits, asper- 
sions (§.308.), and other dressings. Depilatories, 
rubisiers, and vestcatories, are frequently exhibited 
in this form to the patient. Nor does it commu- 
nicate its virtues to the bare surface of the body on- 
ly, but even to the recesses of the more internal 
parts: as appears from the use of aromatic, opiate 
and mercurial plasters. Yet this form may be of 
disservice in many cases, by obstructing the cuta- 
neous pores, and exciting a redness, itching, pus- 
tules, or erysipelas. 
§.414. For SPECIMENS of this form, take the 
following. 
1. Emplastrum anodynum, motum sedans, ad scir- 
rhum nec resolutione,nec extirpatione medicabilem. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Succi recent. expressi & puri. 
Fol. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. hortens. 
Phellandrii ana ℥iv. 
Leni igne coque, inspissa, sub sinem admisce 
Cerœ albœ ℥viij. 
Ol. infus. rosar. ℥j. 
F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. super alutá dehitœ magnitudinis & fi- 
gurœ extensum parti scirrhosœ, prius nutritio ibid.
descripto oblitœ, applicetur. 
2. Emplastrum dissipans, ad bubonem venereum ad 
H. Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 248. 
ꝶ. Flor. sulphuris ℥ß. 
Sacchar. saturn. ʒj. 
Picis sutoriœ ℥ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum super aluta extendendum. 
S. Applicetur loco affecto. Recentetur quovis die.
3. 

337 Plasters.
3. Emplastrum hystericum Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Galban. in tinct. castor. solut. & colat. 
ʒiij.
Tacamahac. ʒij. 
M. F. emplastrum: extendatur super a- 
luta orbiculatâ pro umbilicali regione. 
S. Ut in fronte. Admoveatur calidum umbilico. 
4. Emplastrum defensivum rubrum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 68. 
ꝶ. Ol. rosac. 
Cerœ albœ ana ℥vj. 
Boli armen. 
Sang. dracon. ana ℥jß. 
Rosar. rubr. pulv. ℥ß. 
Ceræ in oleo calore leni liquatæ, tum ab ig- 
ne remotæ, paulatim intere reliqua sub- 
tilissimè pulverisata, jugiter agitando, do- 
nec simul refrixerint. 
S. Hujus q. s. super linteamine extensum applicetur 
vulneri ad aërem arcendum & continenda reliqua. 
5- Emplastrum roborans, calisaciens, carminans, 
stomachicum. 
ꝶ. Emplast. de bacc. laur. 
Cumino ana q. s. 
Malaxata cum balsam. peruv. tantillo ex- 
tende super tela gossypina, scutiformi, te- 
ge sindone rubra decussatim interpassata. 
D. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod calidum regioni ventri- 
culi apponatur, & subinde balsami peruviani, aut 
olei vel spiritus menthœ tantillo irroretur.
Z 6. 

338 Plasters. 
6. Sparadrapum ad fonticulos 
ꝶ. Emplast. diapalm. 
Grat. Dei ana pt. ij. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec.press. pt. j.
Calore leni sub continua agitatione colli- 
qnatis turn ab igne remotis intinge lon- 
ga chartæ albæ, satis firmæ, segmina, 
tres circiter digitos lata: rite infecta 
exime, extende, cultro æqua, suspende,
ut sponte siccescant, turn in segmenta 
quadrata discinde & exhibe. 
S. Chartœ inceratœ pro deligando fonticulo. 
7. Sparadrapum pectorale, emolliens, resolvens,
ad tussim a frigore suscepto. 
ꝶ. Unguent, althœœ comp. ℥j. 
Adipis gallin. ℥iij. 
Olei press. sem. papav. ℥ß. 
Cerœ citrin. rec. ℥jß.
Simul leni igne liquifactis immisce 
Rad. irid. florent. subtiliss. pulv. ʒj. 
Olei express. nuc. myrist. ℈j. 
Detentis in fluore immerge telam lineam ve- 
terem magnirudinis & figuræ in charata
transmissa descriptæ: probè imbutam 
extende, læviga, & laxè convolutam ex- 
hibe. 
S. Tela emplastica, quœ pectori apponatur; tegatur 
panno laneo, rubro villoso, aut pelle cati.
8. 

339 Plasters. 
8. Emplastrum resolvens, ad contusa. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 83. 
ꝶ. Bryon. in farin. redact. ℥ij. 
Flor. sulphur. ℥j. 
Mercur. nigri  ʒiij. 
Galbani puri & s. a. soluti ℥iv. 
Emplastr. de melilot. ℥ix. 
Ol. chamamel. q. s. 
Ut F. emplastrum. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo inductum applicetur parti 
contusœ. 
9. Emplastrum nervinum, anti-arthriticum. 
♃. Emp. è cumin. ℥j. 
Ung. opodel. ʒiij. 
Sal. vol. ammon. 
Camph. subt. pulv. 
Ext. thebaic. ana ʒß.
Ol. petrol. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & regioni, vel parti- 
bus affectis tepide applicandum. 
10. Emplastrum suppuratorium, adhesivum. 
♃. Emplast. diachyl. cum mucag. 
Pic. burgundic. ana ʒvj. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. Extendatur q. s. super linteum crassum, vel potius 
alutam, parti affectœ applicand.
Z2 11. 


340 Plasters.
11. Emplastrum anodynum. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. ℥ij. 
Ung. sambuc. ℥ß. 
Ol. nicotian. ʒij. 
Camph. pulv. subt. 
Sacch. saturn.
Opti ana ℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle. 
S. Extende super linteum duplicatum, & lateri affecto 
vel parti dolenli applicetur.
12. Emplastrum emolliens, & refrigerans. 
♃. Sperm. ceti ℥jß. 
Cerœ albœ ℥j. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ʒx. 
Commistis & ab igne remotis, insperge 
Sacch. saturn. pulv. subt. ʒiij. 
Camph. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
S. Extende super pannum linteum, & ung. merc. in- 
unct. applicetur ad hœmorrhoidas cœcas externas. 
13. Emplastrum discutiens, commune. 
♃. Emp. de sapon. 
è cicut. cum ammon. aā ℥j. 
Ung. cœrul. ℥ß. 
Camph. 
Opii ana ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum molle, lenissimo 
calore. 
S. Super alutam extendendum, & parti affectœ vel 
regioni viscerum infarct. applicandum. 
14.

341 Plasters. 
14. Emplastrum epuloticum, ad familias. 
♃. Cerœ citrinœ rec. ℥ij. 
Mellis commun. ℥ß. 
Croci opt. ʒj. 
Sacchar. albiss. 
Sperm. ceti aa ʒvj. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. ℥iij ß. 
M, F. s. a. emplast. mediæ consist. 
S. Emp. vulner. super pannum linteum album, vel 
sericum nigrum extendendum, & in abrasionibus 
cutaneis, incisuris levioribus, &c. applicandum. 
15. Emplastrum ad strumas, discutiens. 
♃. Emp. è cicut. 
de sapon. aa ℥j. 
Hydrarg. (in pauc. tereb. extinct.) ʒvj. 
Camph. (in ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. solut.) 
℈ij. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum. 
S. In glandularum infarctionibus, partibus affectis 
applicandum. 
16. Emplastrum hystericum. 
♃. Gum. ammon. 
Galban. colat. 
Assa fœtid. ana ʒij. 
Cerœ citrinœ ʒj. 
Bals. sulph. succinat. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. emplastrum mediæ consist. 
Ut in fronte. Super alutam extendendum, &
regioni hypogastricœ applicandum.
Z3 Nota.

342 Of Cerates. 
Nota. To the form of sparadrapes we might add 
several others composed of talc, camphir, borace, 
wax and oil; entitled telae cosmeticae ( P. Morell. 
meth. prescr. form. p. 246.): but as these hardly 
ever come under the extemporaneous prescription 
of a physician, there is no great occasion to insert 
them in this place. 
Of CERATES. 
§.415. A CERATE (ceratum, cerotum, cerelae-
um,) is a kind of soft emplaster 
(§.405.), coming near to a midling consistence 
between an ointment and emplaster. But as we do 
not at present, as they did formerly, call every 
composition of wax, whether ointment or emplas- 
ter, a cerate; the distinction of this form into li- 
quid and solid, does also of consequence vanish. 
§.416. The MATERIALS, ELECTION, OR- 
DER, DOSE, and GENERAL QUANITY of this 
form, hold the same here as in the emplaster 
(§.406 to 409.). A cerate derives its names (§.415.) 
from the wax and oil in its composition: but those 
substances are at present no such constant ingre- 
dients, but that they are often omitted, and the 
cerate composed of other similar substances, enu- 
merated at §.406, and 407. This is also a compo- 
sition very seldom in extemporaneous practice; but 
more frequently occurs among the officinals: and 
when an officinal cerate is not at hand, suitable to 
the intention, any of the emplasters may be rea- 
dily reduced to its consistence by the addition of 
some oil, mollifying it (per §.407. n° 14.). 
§.417. The mutual PROPORTION of the seve- 
ral ingredients for this form, is what it principally 
differs in from the emplaster: for the proportion
here, should be of oil ℥j. wax ℥ß. powders ʒj. or
ʒjss. more or less, according to their specific 
weight:


343 Of Cerates. 
weight: or excluding the powders, the wax may 
be augmented to ʒv. But observe 
1. That there is a sort of latitude for varying 
the proportions of this form, in order to make 
the cerate sometimes a little softer, or harder, 
than at others; nor are the specified proportions 
constantly observed in prescriptions: in so much 
that what is placed under the title of cerates in 
some shops, would be rank’d among the class of 
ointments or emplasters in the hands of others. 
2. For the rest, what we have before repeat- 
ed (at §.410. n° 3 to 11.) is also in this place 
applicable to the form of cerates. 
§.418. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPER 
SCRIPTION, or direction to the apothecary and 
patient for this form, is much the same as for the 
emplaster (at §.411. and 412.); supposing you 
do but change the name (§.415.). Sparadrapes 
(§.411. n° 2.) are also more frequently made from 
this form than from emplasters; because the sub- 
stance of a cerate is more soft and pliable, and so, 
more convenient (per §.410. n° 1.). Cerates are 
also transmitted to the patient, and reserved for 
use, in gallipots or bladders, when they are to last 
any considerable length of time; otherwise they 
might melt and run about, or become too hard and 
dry, thro' keeping. Their greater degree of soft- 
ness, renders them also capable of being spread upon 
proper vehicles with much more ease, than plasters. 
§.419, The USE of cerates is much the same 
as of emplasters (§.413.); and we may venture 
to say they are in more frequent use than the latter; 
for many forms which are prescribed under the 
title of emplasters, are cerates in effect and consi- 
stence. Its less degree of hardness and tenacity, in 
comparison with an emplaster, gives it a greater 
recommendation, in cases where the virtues are to 
penetrate deeper (per §.410. n° 1), where the  
Z4 parts

344 Cerates. 
parts to be cover’d are very tender and sensible, or 
seated in some moveable articulation, or when we 
are apprehensive that a more consistent form will 
do harm (per §.413.). 
§.420. FOR SPECIMEN, take the following. 
1. Ceratum exsiccans, obtundens, antiphlogisticum, 
ad ulcera tibiarum inveterata. 
ꝶ. Cerat. desensiv. cœrul. pharm. leid. 
℥iij. vel q. v. 
D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus q. s. extensum super linteo applicetur ulceri, 
prius puro, siccis, aut idoneo balsamo imbutis, carp- 
tis tecto. Renovetur quovis die semel. 
2. Ceratum adtrahens, emmenagogum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 214. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. oxycroc. 
de melilot. ana q. s. 
Cum ol. rutœ q. s. malaxando in con- 
sistentiam cerati redacta extendan- 
tur super aluta lunata juxta exem- 
plum transmissum. 
D.
S. Pubis & inguinibus applicetur. 
3. Ceratum resolvens, ad scirrhum lienis. 
ꝶ. Gumm. ammoniac. 
Galban. ana ℥ß. 
Dissolvantur in acet. squillitic. q. s. & cum 
Cerœ citrinœ ℥ß.
Ol. infus. absynth. q. s. 
Leni igne colliquata redigantur in cera- 
tum, quod super aluta ovata, in- 
star linguæ bubulæ, extensum. 
D. 
S. Ceratum spleneticum, hypochondria sinistro in re- 
gions splenis applicandum. 
4.

345 Of Ointments. 
4. Ceratum ad scabiem, lepram, &c. 
♃. Emp. de cicut. cum ammon. 
mercurial. aa 
Ol. amygd. dulc. q. s. 
M. F. ceratum. 
S. Super pannum linteum extendendum, & cuti af- 
fectœ applicandum. 
Of OINTMENTS. 
§.421. AN OINTMENTS or unguent is an ex- 
ternal, soft medicine; not so hard as 
a cerate (§.415.), but coming nearer to the con- 
sistence of thick honey, or an electuary (§.138.): 
melting with a small heat, and composed chiefly 
of oleaginous and ceraceoas substances; which are 
to be rubbed upon the suface, of divers exter- 
nal parts of the body, or applied upon some 
proper vehicle, to answer various medicinal inten- 
tions. 
§.422. The MATERIALS for this form, are in 
general the same as for an emplaster or cerate 
(§.406. 416.). 
§.423. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is also determined by the same circumstan- 
ces, as at §.407. viz. 
1. In the composition of an ointment are re- 
quired (1.) a consistence sufficient to preserve it 
from melting in the air, but so as to make it 
soft and pliable in the cold, resembling, as it 
were, soft lard. (2.) Its softness should also be 
joined

346 Of Ointments. 
joined with smoothness and lubricity, without 
any roughness or gross parts. (3.) It requires 
an equable distribution and uniform commixture 
of its ingredients. From hence, we may per- 
ceive what materials are fittest for this form; 
and what kind of preparation they are to under- 
go. Consult §.407. n° 1. and 2. 
2. Oil (§.406. n° 1. (1.)), fat (ib. (2.)), 
turpentine (ib. (3.)), wax (ib. (4.) ), or sub- 
stances analogous to these (§.410. n°3.), being 
melted together in a due quantity, will compose 
an unguent without any other addition: so that 
in this form there is no occasion for any of the 
excipienda (§.406. n° 2.), unless such should 
be required by the indication.
3, Wax, pitch, resins, gum-resins, officinal 
emplasters and cerates, or the like (§.406. n°1. 
(4.)). being mollified with oil, separately, or 
several of them in conjunction, will compose an 
ointment without any other materials (§.ib. 
n° 1. (2.) (3.) and n° 2.). 
4. Even lard, marrow, butter, &c. (§.406. 
n° 1. (2.)) have naturally of themselves the 
consistence proper to an ointment, without any 
other addition of either liquid or solid substances 
(§.ib. (1.) (4.)); but if either of these be re- 
quired a little softer, which is frequent in ex- 
temporaneous practice, they may be made so by 
the addition of a little oil; if they are desired 
somewhat more consistent, they will acquire that 
by mixture with a little wax, or some fine pow- 
der. But to reduce the more tenacious turpen- 
tines into an ointment, requires a previous atte- 
nuation and division of their parts by lard, oil, 
or the yolks of eggs. 
5. Hence, wax and turpentine are not such 
constant and necessary ingredients in this form,
as


347 Of Ointments. 
as in that of a plaster (§.407. n° 4.). They 
are both frequently excluded the composition of 
extemporaneous unguents. Wax also renders an 
ointment punch less apt to penetrate into the 
parts.  
6. If an intention persuades us to take watery 
liquors (§.406. n° 2. (1.)) into this form, 
they are to be first boiled with the fat or oil 
(§.406. n° 1. (1.) (2.)), in order to exhale their 
aqueous parts: so that what has been said at 
§.407.n°.7. may here take place. 
7. But certain watery liquors are sometimes 
reduced into an ointment, merely by a long tri- 
turation with fat substances, without any boiling: 
as we learn from the composition of rosaceum, 
and nutrilium: by which last, it appears that 
two liquors will inspissate into an ointment, 
without evaporation; but this will hold in but 
few instances. 
8. Besides the excipienda (§.406. n° 2. 
(2.)), this form sometimes takes in pulps and 
electuaries, to be intermixed with its other fat 
and glutinous ingredients. Even the whole mass 
of an ointment is sometimes composed, like an 
electuary, without any oily or fat substances at 
all: as we see in the preparation of Ægyp- 
tiacum. 
9. To make up powders (§.406. n° 2. (3.)) 
into this form, sometimes oil alone, or joined 
with vinegar, is sufficient: which obtains chiefly 
in saturnine unguents. For otherwise it will ge- 
nerally require a mixture of some thick and glu- 
tinous substance (§.406. n° 1. (2.) (3.) (4.) 
10. Very strong and corrosive ingredients, 
which inflame, should be very cautiously used 
in this form: and not at all, unless they are in- 
fringed and curbed by other more lenient sub- 
stances;

348 Of Ointments. 
stances; left they should destroy the skin, or, by- 
running thro' the pores into the circulation, di- 
sturb the whole œconomy. 
11. Such ointments as are intended to operate 
upon the more internal parts of the body, shou’d 
consist of very penetrating substances, and not 
be made of too thick a consistence (V. n° 5.). 
12. In prescribing this form, it is more ad- 
visable to order the officinal compositions of this 
kind, either separately or combined together; 
which may be adapted to the intention, by an 
extemporaneous addition of other ingredients. 
Consult §.407. n° 14. 
13. For the rest, what has been said (at 
§.407. n° 8. to 13, and 14.) does also here take 
place. Though several kinds of salts are fre- 
quently prescribed in this form, yet the mineral 
calces very seldom enter the composition of oint- 
ments, especially extemporaneous ones. 
§.424. The ORDER or method of prescribing 
the ingredients for ointments, is much the same 
with that used in emplasters at §.408. 
§.425. The DOSE of this form is to be deter- 
mined by the size of the part to be anointed, nor 
does it require any other limitation. 
§.426. The GENERAL QUANITY of this form 
to be prescribed and transmitted to the patient at one 
time, is limited by the consideration at §.425. as 
also from the continuation and frequency of its 
application, so that sometimes an ounce may suf- 
fice, when at other times the case may require 
above a pound. 
§.427. The mutual PROPORTION of ingredients 
for this form, may be deduced from §.410. and 
417. compared with §.421. 423. But observe, 
1. That the consistence of this form is not 
so precisely limited, but that it may be made a 
little

349 Of Ointments. 
little thicker or thinner, according to the par- 
ticular intention, as will appear from viewing 
the consistence of several officinal ointments. 
Soft ointments are bed adapted for tender and 
sensible parts, for penetrating and for entering 
the pores by friction, &c. The more solid and 
consistent ointments stop up the pores, are 
more slowly imbibed by them, and rather ob- 
struct perspiration. 
2. The materials fit for this form are of a 
threefold consistence (§.422.): liquid, soft and 
solid; so that the proportion of each ingredient 
is to be varied, according as the ointment is to 
be more soft, or else consistent (per. §.421. 
423. n° 1. 427. n° 1.). 
3. The soft substances (§.406. n° 1. (2.) 
(3.)) mix’d together in any proportion will make 
an ointment; but if you are apprehensive it will 
be too consistent adjoin q. s. olei. For the parti- 
cular management of the turpentines for this 
form consult §.423. n° 4. 
4. A mixture of oil ℥j with ℥ij or iij. of 
wax or similar substances compose an ointment 
per §.410. n° 3. If to the wax and oil we add 
a powder §.406. n° 2. (3.), the wax should 
then be proportionably diminished, so that we 
may order of wax ʒij, of powder ʒj, or ʒjß. 
or the quantity of powder being determined, 
the wax may be prescribed q. s. unless you are 
sensible that the powder and oil together will of 
themselves form an ointment per §.423. n° 9. 
and in that case the wax being omitted, the 
quantity of powder may be augmented to ʒiij. 
and sometimes ʒjv. 
5. Hence we learn what is to be done when 
the soft substances n° 3. are added instead of 
the powder, n° 4. for the proportion of those
ingre-  


350 Of Ointments. 
ingredients may remain nearly the same as if 
those soft substances were omitted. 
6. If you prescribe ung. nutritum of oil and 
vinegar of lead, per §.423. n° 7; the propor- 
tion of each may be nearly equal parts, or either 
of them may be ordered by q. s. cape: if the 
ointment consists of oil, simple vinegar and su- 
gar of lead, or any of the saturnine calces, the 
two first may be prescribed ana pt. 1. and of the 
two latter pt. ß. 
7. If the basis of this form is an officinal oint- 
ment, you will easily perceive from the consi- 
stence of its other ingredients, whether any, of 
how much wax will bring it to a consistence, 
which is generally prescribed by q. s. Oil will 
reduce its consistence, wax will increase it, when 
it exceeds either way. 
8. Lastly; to this place also belongs what 
has been said at §.410. Substances which are 
only analogous to oil and sat §.406. n° 1. (1.) 
(2.) are not so constant ingredients in this form. 
§.428. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for the composition of this form, varies 
with the different method of preparing it; it either 
orders only simple mixture, when there is no oc- 
casion for the use of fire; or the mixture may
be order’d to be done gradually, and made uni- 
form by a continued triuration, when the oint- 
ment is to consist of a mixture of sat and watery 
substances (per §.423. n° 7. 427. n° 6.) the 
mixture by triuration is then term’d nutritio, and 
the ointment, nutritum. Or, the composition may 
be order’d by melting, or by boiling, as well as 
mixture; the directions for which are much the 
same as in the emplaster §.411. n° 1. The pre- 
scription may conclude F. s. a. unguentum vel nu-
tritum. D. ad fictile. This form is seldom applied 
upon leather like the emplaster at §.411. n° 2.
but 


351 Of Ointnients. 
but when it is thus used, the margin of the latter 
should be spread about a finger’s breadth with 
some sticking emplaster, in order to prevent the 
ointment from melting and falling oh by the heat 
of the part. 
§.429. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains nothing very 
particular, except the method of using it. The ap- 
plication or inunction of this form upon particu- 
lar parts, is usually performed by spreading it first 
upon linen, leather, srap’d lint, pledgets, tents, or 
in walnut-shells, &c. But it is very usual to pre- 
mise hot or cold bathing, lotions and frictions be- 
fore inunction of the parts. For the rest, what 
relates to the chusing a proper part of the body, 
the length of time, and frequency of using the 
ointment, with the proper regimen, &c. is to be 
deduced from the physician’s indications in parti- 
cular cases. Consult §.328. n° 2. 5. 7. It is advi- 
sable to be cautious in the use of ointments which 
are corrosive, cathartic or mercurial, &c. left the 
too frequent or long continued use of them should 
bring on a salivation, a superpurgation, or other 
bad symptoms. 
§. 430. The USE of ointments is very frequent 
with physicians as well as surgeons; in order to 
mollify, disperse, maturate, deterge, warm, 
strengthen, alleviate, obtund acrimony, &c. which 
virtues it communicates not only by external ap- 
plication, but frequently by internal exhibition, in 
which case it acts more potently on the internal 
parts; being promoted in that action by its con- 
sistence being more soft and penetrating than a ce- 
rate or emplaster. The effects of this form exter- 
nally applied, are sufficiently obvious in the use of 
mercurial, cathartic, and opiate ointments, which 
produce a spitting, purging, or constipation; but 
an unseasonable or improper use of some ointments. 
proves

352 Ointments.
proves frequently pernicious by relaxing the fibres 
too much, by obstructing the cutaneous pores, or 
by acting too roughly upon some of the internal 
viscera. 
§.431. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Unguentum digestivum ad contusa, attenuans, 
antisepticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 76. 
ꝶ. Tereb. ℥ij. 
Vitell. ovor. n°.j. 
Exacte mistis admisce 
Unguent. basilici ℥ij. 
Aloës puræ ʒiv. 
F. s. a. unguentum. 
S. Hujus tantillum plumaceolis exceptum imponatur 
loco contuso, tegatur emplastro de galbano & fo- 
mento ibid, descriptis. 
2. Unguentum anodynum, motum sedans, scirrho 
dolenti aptum. Ibid. p. 109. 
ꝶ. Aceti lithargyrii ℥j. 
Ol. express. sem. hyoscyami. 
Papaver. alb. 
Rosar. infus. ana ʒij. 
F. s. a. nutritum, cui sub finem admisce 
Opii puri gr. vj. 
S. Nutritum pacans, quo leniter inungatur locus af- 
fellus, ac dein tegatur emplastro, ibid. descripto. 
3.

353 Ointments. 
3.Unguentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Fellis taurini. 
Aloës pur. ana ℥j. 
Unguent. althœœ ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici: 
aut pars dimidia juglandis nucis putamine excepta 
eidem loco apponatur. 
Cautelam huic necessariam vid. ibidem.  
4. Unguentum laxans, mitigans, sopiens, ad pleu- 
ritidem. Ibid. p.150. 
ꝶ. Unguent. popul. 
Althœœ. 
Nutrit. ana ℥j. 
M. 
F. unguentum. 
S. Hoc calido latus dolens, ter de die, inungatur, 
superponendo dein somentum, ante in histor. epithe- 
matis liquidi, p.232. descript. 
5. Unguentum emplastrodes, roborans, calesaciens, 
stomachicum ad nauseam vel vomitum à pertur- 
bato liquidi nervosi motu ortum. 
ꝶ. Cerat. stomach. Galen. 
Theriac. Andromach. ana ʒvj. 
Ol nuc. myrist. express. ʒj. 
Bals. peruvian. ʒß. 
M. F. s. a. unguentum: illinatur aluti scuri- 
formi, cujus margo ad digiti latitudinem 
obducta sit emplastro mucagin. aut meliloti. 
S. Scutum stomachicum, quod regioni ventriculi ap- 
plicetur. 
Aa Nota.

354 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Nota. From the history of ointments, may be 
understood the composition of internal vulnerary 
balsams, or potable ointments; which are used in 
almost the same intentions with some electuaries 
or pills (§.138. 160.) External vulnerary bal- 
sams do generally differ but little from ointments: 
though they are sometimes softer; but are hardly 
ever prescribed or prepared in extemporaneous 
practice 
Of Odoriferous BALSAMS. 
§.432. A PERFUMED OR ODORIFEROUS BAL- 
SAM, is a kind of ointment (§.421.) 
composed of the more fragrant and strong scented 
ingredients, incorporated with some of the more 
tenacious, and oily or fat substances, serving for 
the inunction of several parts, and invested with 
very strong, odorous and active principles. Hence, 
it seems to differ but little from an ointment. 
§.433. The MATERIALS for this form, are 
almost the same as for the ointment (§.422.); 
but are not so numerous: they are either excipient, 
or excipiend. 
1. The excipient substances are either (1.) pri-
mary, being fat and tenacious; as oil of nut- 
megs by expression, white inodorous fats, of the 
hog, &c. the marrow of legs of veal, butter, 
wax, officinal ointments, pomatum, rosatum, 
nervinum, &c. The strong-scented officinal 
balsams, manna, and sometimes gum-resins. 
Or (2.) secundary, oleaginous and liquid: as the 
more common oils by expression, infusion, or 
decoction, and the native liquid balsams, as pe- 
ruvian. copaib. &c. 
2. The excipiend a are also either (1.) primary, 
containing the medicinal virtues, and of a liquid
con-

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
consistence: as aromatic oils obtained by dis- 
tillation or expression, liquid balsams, natural 
or artificial, essences, spirits, volatile oily salts, 
&c. or of a thick consistence; as extracts and 
the more potent electuaries; of opium, saffron, 
theriaca, gum-resins, opium itself, musk, civet 
and the like: or dry and solid: as spices, saf- 
fron, cinnamon, cloves, benjamin, castor, am- 
bergiss, amber, its salt; &c. Or (2.) secundary, 
of less consequence, giving some colour, &c. 
for which purpose are used the finest powders, 
magisteries precipitated by alum, with various 
pigments, smalt, cochineal, turmeric, umbre, 
asphaltus, cinnabar, juice of buck-thorn, red 
sanders, the grants chermes, ochres; armenian 
bole, &c. 
§.434. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form, is to be directed by the intention, and other 
circumstances (at §.423. n° 1.): but as the prin- 
cipal difference of this form from an ointment con- 
sists in its strong penetrating odor, we ought to 
pay the greatest regard to that; left it should be 
weaken’d, dissipated, changed, or made worse by 
the action of other substances. The tinging it with 
some pleasant colour, is indeed less necessary, but 
more usual; nor should it be entirely neglected. 
Hence, 
1. The primary excipient (§.433. n° 1.
(1.)) should be chose the whitest: and most ino- 
dorous; in order to avoid any change of the 
odor and colour to be given it by the excipi- 
enda (§.433. n° 2.). Nut oil by expression, 
being deprived of its colour and smell by spirit 
of wine, is the most frequent in use here; in so 
much that it may well be call’d, as it usually is, 
a body for perfumed balsams. We should be 
cautious that the other fat substances are not ran- 
A22 cid:

356 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
cid: to avoid which, they should be chose very 
fresh, and be sometimes first washed with 
some proper liquor. Nor is it often that any 
other substance is used here, but white virgin’s 
wax. 
2. But there are some cases where a strong 
scented or fœtid excipient is preferable, when 
it happens to agree with the intention and vir- 
tues of the other ingredients: as may several of 
the officinal ointments and balsams, common 
oils of nuts, gum-resins, &c. and in this case 
the indication should direct the choice. The 
colour may be easily corrected or made agree- 
able per §.433. n° 2. (2.). 
3. Wax alone is seldom the excipient; be- 
cause the generality of ingrediens can be suffi- 
ciently mollified by none but oil. Oil also serves, 
by repeated mixture in small quantities, to at- 
tenuate and mix the more soft and fat substance 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) for this form. 
4. There is not always occasion for the se- 
cundary excipients (at §.ib. n° 1. (2.)): only 
when the mass is of too thick a consistence their 
addition may be proper. But then, one should be 
chose without any smell, or else with one agree- 
able to that of the other ingredients. 
5. The primary excipienda (§.433. n° 2. 
(1.)) or ingredients should be chose conformable 
to the intention (§.432. 434.), efficacious in 
a small quantity, and agreeing with each other, 
also capable of an uniform mixture with the ex- 
cipient (§.433.). Therefore those substances 
chiefly which abound in the more active odorous 
parts are principally used in this form; espe- 
cially such as are naturally of an oily or fat con- 
sistence, or else capable of an intimate commix- 
ture with oily substances. Oils by infusion or 
decoction are seldom used in this form, but to
dilute

357 Of Odorifeous Balsams. 
dilute it, when of too much consistence. If dry 
substances are order’d, which are not capable of 
a dissolutipn, they should be first reduced into 
a most subtle powder. 
6. But this form takes in not only fragrant 
substances, but sometimes fœtid ones also: as 
we may learn from what has been said at §.433. 
n° 2. So that musk, civet and ambergriss are 
not always necessary ingredients of this form: 
it is even generally better to omit these, as be- 
ing to many very unpleasant, and to others hurt- 
ful. Consult §.85. and 100. 
7. The pigments or colours (§.433. n° 2. 
(2.)) are generally elected agreeable to the co- 
lour of the medicinal basis, from which the bal- 
sam takes its name, or conformable to the re- 
ceived idea of the virtues it is to exert, or to the 
genius of the disease it is to oppose: hence, to 
the balsam of rue should be given a green co- 
lour; of amber, a yellow; of roses, a red; to
cardiac balsams, a pleasant colour, and to ant- 
apoplectic, or antiepileptic balsams should be 
given a sorrowful, fable, or black colour. But 
it is not always neccessary to colour them in this 
manner. 
8. Yet care should be taken not to use pig- 
ments which are corrosive or acrimonious, the 
use of which would be attended with bad conse- 
quences. But the powder or magistery of the 
substance which composed the basis of a balsam, 
is generally better to colour it than any other. 
If such is not to be had, a quantity of some other 
(§.433. n° 2. (2.)) may be substituted. 
9. Here also, if there are any officinal bal- 
sams adapted to the physician’s intention, he 
may save himself the trouble of an extempora- 
neous formula; or he may adapt some officinal
Aa3 balsam

358 Of Odoriferous Balsams.
balsam to his intention, by adding other ingre- 
dients to it (V. §.407. n° 14.). 
10. For the number of ingredients for this 
form, as at §.407. n° 15. so here, brevity is 
commendable. 
§.435. The ORDER or method for prescribing 
the ingredients of this form, is much the same as 
in the emplaster (§.408.). 
§.436. The DOSE of this form is generally but 
small, and never precisely limited; but is propor- 
tioned to the size and number of parts to be anointed. 
§.437. The GENERNAL QUANTITY of an 
odorous balsam order’d at a time, is seldom more 
than ℥jß. because of the smallness of its dose 
(§.436.); it is more frequently prescribed in the 
quantity of a few drams only, according to diffe- 
rent circumstances (at §.426. 436.): it may be 
even prescribed in a still less quantity, when the 
balsam is an officinal composition (§.434. n° 9.) 
§.438. The mutual PROPORTION of the ingre- 
dients for this form, may be easily understood 
from §.427; when the consistence of the balsam 
and its ingredients are first determined and known. 
Hence we learn. 
1. That a balsam is usually a little thicker 
than an ointment (§.421. 423. n° 1.); tho' 
sometimes it is of directly the same consistence, 
or a little softer, or even so thin as to come 
nearer to a liniment. Such balsams as are to keep 
any considerable time, to be carried about in the 
pocket, or to serve for perfuming, &c. should be 
of a more hard consistence: but those to be rubb’d 
into parts, should have a softer consistence. 
2. There is therefore hardly any constant pro- 
portion observed between the excipientia and ex- 
cipienda (§.433.); but the more usual is as fol- 
lows, v.g.
Of


359 Of Odoriferous Balsams. 
Of the excipient or balsamic body (§.434. 
n° 1)—℥j 
—excipienda or ingredients
Liquid ʒj, ij, iij.
thick, ordry ʒss. j, ij.      
—Primary (§.434. n° 2. (1.))  
—Secundary (ib.—(2.)) 
q. s. 
3. Hence it appears, that if the excipient is 
some soft nut-oil, the quantity of thick or dry ex- 
cipienda, should be proportionably increased,and 
the liquid diminish’d; except when you would 
by accident desire to have the balsam very liquid 
(per n° 1.). 
4. It is also usual to add about a dram of wax 
to an ounce of lard, ointment, or other very soft 
excipient (§.434. n° 3.); in order to make 
their consistence equal to that of the balsamic body 
(n°. 2.), the proportion of excipienda (n°. 2.) 
remaining still the same. 
5. If the excipient (§.434. n° 3.) be wax 
only, it will require double the same quantity of 
some fluid oil, to sufficiently mollify it. But if 
any dry substance come also into the composition, 
it is to be estimated as wax. So that it is then. 
chiefly, that there will be occasion to use some 
secundary excipient (§.433. n° 1. (2.) and 
434. n° 3.); that we may not be forced to use 
a larger quantity of others which are dearer 
or stronger. Its proportion may be therefore 
order’d by q. s.
6. If you make additions to some officinal 
balsam (per §.434. n° 9.), their proportion 
should be as their consistences; and then, the 
intention only lays any restriction upon the 
proportion. But if to officinal balsams you also 
add several other substances (n° 1. to 6.) hi- 
therto mentioned, you may easily perceive what 
proportion should be follow’d, or what consti- 
tuent substance should be used, when you are 
Aa4 desirous

360 Of Odoriferous Balsams, 
desirous to avoid too much or little consistence, 
Consult §.427.n°.7. 
7. But very often the excipienda only are 
prescribed in a determinate quantity, and the ex- 
cipient (or accessory substance to make up the 
form) order’d by q. s. or when there are two 
such excipient substances, one of them only 
may be order’d in a determinate quantity. And 
sometimes, the excipientia being determined in 
quantity, the proportion of excipienda is left to 
the diseretion of the apothecary. 
8. For the rest, consult what has been said 
at §.410. and 427. 
§.439. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to 
the apothecary for this form, is prescribed by 
F. s. a. balsamum. D. in pyxide stannea, plumbea, 
eburnea, lignea vel fictili. Sometimes the balsam 
is order’d to be included in half a walnut shell, to 
be applied to and retained upon the navel. The 
method of composition is usually left to the judg- 
ment of the apothecary. 
§.440. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, contains, besides the 
name taken from the basis and virtues (§.434. 
n° 7.), the method of application; which is ge- 
nerally almost like that of using an ointment 
(§.429.), by inunction or infriction. It is very 
seldom that a balsam is spread upon a vehicle, and 
so applied to a part (§.439.). The particular 
Parts of the body most suitable for the application 
of this form, is usually judged to be such as are 
the most sensible, and where the larged: vessels and 
nerves run the most exposed; as the nose, temples, 
vertex of the head, the wrists, præcordia, &c. 
§.441. The USE of this form in extempora- 
neous Practice, is not very frequent; but it is 
often used merely for pleasure or persuming, and 
some

361 Odoriferous Balsams.
sometimes in morbid affections of the brain and 
nerves: as in epilepsies, apoplexies, vertigos, faint- 
ings; in convulsive disorders, hysteric and hypo- 
chondriac; in pains, flatulencies, &c. where it is 
frequently of service by stimulating, easing, chang- 
ing the motion of the fluids, or acting by some 
other specific virtues. But the surprising activity 
and subtility of these odoriferous principles, with 
their secret manner of acting on the body, not to 
be discovered but by their effects, seems to per- 
suade us to great caution in the use of this form. 
§.442. SPECIMENS of this form. 
1. Balsamum fragrans, cardiacum. 
ꝶ. Corp. pro bals. ℥ß. 
Ol. stillat. cinnam. ver. ℈j. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈ß. 
Ambar. griss. gr. ij. 
Mosch. orient. gr. j. 
Bol. armen. q. s. 
M. F. s. a. balsam. 
S. Balsamum cinnamomi, naribus, carpis, &c. infri- 
candum. Ambaro & Moscho exclusis, idem fieri 
potest universalius. 
2. Balsamum excitans, antapoplecticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ Ol. stillat. rorismar. 
Tanacet. 
Lavend. 
Rutœ. 
Absynth. ana gtt. iv. 
Infus. castor. ʒj. 
Unguent. nervin. ℥j.
Sal. volat. oleos. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Pro suffitu sub naribus & circa tempora affricetur. 
3.


362 Odoriferous Balsams. 
3. Balsamum succini, anticatarrhale. 
ꝶ. Olei nucist. express. ʒij. 
Stillat. succin. alb. ʒj. 
Sal. fuccin. volat. ℈j. 
Cera flavœ q. s. 
Colliquatis, cum rad. curcum pulv. q. s. tinctis, 
F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum cephalicum, vertici, temporibus, pone 
aures, affricandum. 
4. Balsamum hystericum. 
ꝶ. Sev. hircin. ℥ß. 
Galban. pur. ʒj. 
Ass. fœtidœ. 
Castorii ana ℈j. 
Ol. stillat. succin. 
Corn. cerv. rect. aa gtt.xxv. 
Sal. volat. corn. cerv. ℈ß. 
Ol. infus. rutœ q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. Balsamus. 
S. In languore aut paroxysmo illinatur naribus, 
temporibus, &c. 
5. Balsamum carminans, stomachicum, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Balsam. caryophyll. arom. 
Theriac. andromach. ana ʒiij. 
Ol. stillat. macis  ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Ut in fronte. Illinatur regioni epigastricœ & 
umbilico: tum operculum figulinum probe calidum, 
aut scutum stomachicum admoveatur. 
6.

363 Of Liniments. 
6.Balsamum suaveolens, ad delicias. 
ꝶ. Unguent. pomat. ℥j. 
Cerœ abiss. ʒj.
Ol. stillat. cort. citri ʒß. 
Aurant. 
Melissœ ana gtt. xij. 
Cinnam. gtt. vj. 
Ochrœ vel rad. curcum. pulv. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. balsamum. 
S. Balsamum citri. Sit pro odoramento. Eo & ca- 
pilli inungi possunt, aut his pectendis adhiberi pec- 
ten eo imbutus. 
Of LINIMENTS. 
§.443. A Liniment or litus, is a kind of 
very soft ointment (§.421.), being 
of a consistence between that of oil and a com- 
mon ointment, subservient to some medicinal in- 
tention by smearing over some part of the body. 
So that this form differs from an ointment in no- 
thing but consistence; and not always in that: as 
will hereafter appear. 
§.444. The MATERIALS for a liniment are in 
general the same as for an emplaster, cerate, oint- 
ment or balsam, preceding (§.406. 416. 422. 
433.).
§.445. But the ELECTION of ingredients fit- 
test for this form, is somewhat different; because 
of the different degree of consistence (§.443.). 
For.
1. This form does indeed require a softness, 
lubricity, and equable or uniform mixture, as 
well

364 Of Liniments. 
well as the ointment (§.423 n° 1. (2.) (3.)): 
but its degree of consistence is so vague and un- 
limited, that it is sometimes permitted not only 
to put on all the intermediate degrees of con- 
sistence between an oil and unguent, but a so to 
have the density of the very ointments or oils 
themselves. 
2. Hence, sometimes mere oils by expression, 
infusion, decoction, or distillation, are the mat- 
ter of this form, without any addition of more 
consistent substances. 
3. At other times, these oils are only mix’d 
with aqueous or spirituous liquors (§.406. n° 2. 
(1.)) by a long attrition or concussion of their 
parts, or by evaporating the more aqueous parts 
by boiling, in order to more intimately mix the 
viscid. 
4. Also the thick substances like an ointment 
(§.406. n° 1. (2.)), as fats, lard, officinal un- 
guents, &c. are sometimes only mix’d with 
each other, without any liquid substance, for 
the composition of a liniment, which then ab- 
solutely resembles an ointment. 
5. But liniments are more frequently com- 
pos’d both of the soft substances (n° 4.) and 
oils together, which makes this form much softer 
than (n° 4). 
6. But. sometimes liniments are compos'd of 
oil combin’d with the more solid substances, 
§.406. n° 1. (4.) n° 2. (2.). 
7. Also the powder (§.406. n° 2. (3.)). 
mix’d with oil only, or with other liquors (n° 3.) 
and joined by trituration or boiling, does some- 
times pass for a liniment. 
8. Hence it appears that those who will may 
compose liniments both of liquid (§.406. n° 1. 
(1.) n° 2. (1.)) thick (ib. n° 1. (2.) (3.) and 
n° 2. (2.)) and dry substances (ib. n° 1. (4.)
n° 2. 

365 Of Liniments. 
n° 2. (3.)), combin’d together in due propor- 
tions: tho' neatness and brevity is also laudable 
in this form (per. §.29.). 
9. There is sometimes occasion for a sapona- 
ceous intermedium in this form, when oily and 
watery substances are to be mix’d together by 
trituration; in order to prevent them from sepa- 
rating from each other by standing. For this 
purpose are used the yolk of an egg, honey, 
sope, alcalies, &c. 
10. Lastly, I would here advise the reader to 
consult what has been said at §.423. n° 5. to n° 6. 
§.446. The best ORDER or method of pre- 
scribing the ingredients for this form, corresponds 
to that for the emplaster §.408. 
§.447. The DOSE and GENERNAL QUANTITY 
of this form are the same with those of the oint- 
ment at §.425. 426. But as a liniment may he 
readily composed barely by mixture, and as its con- 
sistence and long keeping will subject it much to a 
loss of its virtues, it is generally advisable to pre- 
scribe it in but a small quantity at a time, hardly 
ever exceeding ℥iij or jv. 
§.448. The mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for a liniment, is by reason of its various 
consistence (§.445. n° 1.) very undetermined; so 
that their proportion is generally regulated by their 
virtues. Hence observe, 
1. That this form can never be made of too 
thin a consistence; but too thick, it may: for 
that will obstruct both its illinition and pene- 
tration. 
2. When the liniment is to be composed of 
none but oils (§.405. n° 2.) the consistence 
will then admit of any proportion. But we shou’d 
be cautious not to let those too much predomi- 
nate, which are very hot and acrimonious: for 
these

366 Of Liniments. 
these ought to be tempered by three of four 
times as much of those which are milder. 
3. If you would combine oils with other li- 
quors by trituration (per §.445. n°.3.) it is in 
that case allowable to follow the proportion at 
§.426.n°.6: except when the liquors are spi- 
rituous; and more acrid, or saline, &c; for 
such should be mix’d in less quantities, that they 
may not prove hurtful by their too great 
strength.  
4. When this form is to be composed of a 
mixture of oily and watery substances, whose 
aqueous parts are to be exhaled by boiling, there 
is then no regard to be had to the proportion of 
such aqueous liquors (per §.410. n° 5.).  
5. If you order intermediate substances, (§.445.
n° 4.) alone in this form; then, what is said at 
n° 2. holds good here. But to avoid too great 
consistence (n° 1.), we should consider that some 
of these substances are more dense than others. 
6. If you order 3 ij, iij, of jv of intermediate 
substances (per. §. 445. n° 5.), more or less in 
proportion to their densities, to be mixed with 
℥j of oil, you will then have a liniment of a 
midling consistence (§.443.). 
7. You will also have a liniment of a mid- 
dle consistence from a mixture of oil ℥j. and of 
the more solid substances (§.445. n° 6.) ℥j: 
which will also hold with regard to the species 
at §.ib. n° 7. 
8. Lastly, from a mixture of oil ℥j of inter- 
mediate substances ʒij. and of dry ones ʒß. 
you will have a specimen of this form com- 
posed agreeable to §.445. n° 8. 
9. For the rest, consult what has been said at 
§. 410. 427. 438. a great part of which is here 
of consequence to observe. See also §.445. n° 1.
§.449 


367 Of Liniments. 
§.449. For the SUBSCRIPTION or directon to 
the apothecary for this form, having changed the 
name (§.443.), the method of preparing it may 
be order’d the same as for the ointment (§.428.). 
Sometimes a liniment is sent to the patient in a 
glass phiol, instead of an earthen gallipot, when 
its consistence is very thin, or its virtues extremely 
volatile. This form is seldom extended, like pla- 
sters, upon some vehicle; at least; hardly ever by 
the apothecary. 
§.450. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is apparent from §.429. 
The application of it is almost constantly per- 
form’d by illinition, and sometimes accompanied 
with frictions. When a bladder is to be arm’d with 
some liniment and applied to a part, I should 
ther call it an epithem (§.320.). 
§.451. The USE of this form is the same as 
that of the ointment §.430. but it is better adapt- 
ed to penetrate into the parts. 
§.452. SPECIMENS. 
1. Litus balsamicus, anodynus, ad papillarum 
dolores, &c.
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 221. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Infusi hyperici. 
Violar. 
Rosar. ana ℥ß. 
M. F. linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Hujus tantillo subinde oblinatur pars affecta. 
2.

368 Liniments. 
2. Linimentum stomachicum, carminans, calc- 
faciens. 
ꝶ Ol. infus. absynth. 
crocin. ana ℥ß. 
Stillat. menth. ʒj. 
Caryophill. gtt. x. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
M. F. Linimentum. D. in vitro. 
S. Serviat pro inunctione regionis ventriculi & 
umbilici. 
3. Litus leniens, emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
ꝶ. Mucilagin. sem. cydonior. cum 
Aq. rosar. extract. 
Ol. amygd. dulc. rec. press. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥ß. 
Exactè mistis F. linimentum. D. ad fictile, 
S. Gingivœ dolentes eo subinde demulceantur. 
4. Linimentum purgans, antihelminticum, pro 
infante. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 231. 
ꝶ. Unguent. Agripp. 
Arthanit. ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus pauxillo inungatur subinde locus umbilici.
5. 

369 Liniments. 
5. Linimentum emmenagogum. 
Ad exemplum ibid. p. 215, 216. 
ꝶ. Gum. sagapen. ℥ß. 
Axung. castor. ʒij. 
Cum Ol. infus rut. q. s. dissolutis admisce 
Ol. stillat. sabin. ʒij. 
bacc. junip. ʒj. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Umbilico, pubi, inguinibus illinatur mane & vesperi. 
6. Linimentum antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 180. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥j. 
Camphor. ʒj. 
Spirit, vin. rectis. q. s. 
Dissolutis admisce 
Ol. irini ℥ß. 
Stillat. succin. ʒjß. 
Spir. sal. ammon. ℥ß. 
Ung. net vin. q. s. 
Ut F. linimentum mediæ consistentiæ. 
S. Partes affectœ, prius pannis asperis, siccis, cali- 
dis, frictœ, dein hoc litu perfricentur bis de die. 
7. Litus antipleuriticus mitisicans, resolvens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 150. 
ꝶ. Sacch. saturn. ℥ß. 
Aceti ʒvj. 
Ol. rosac. infus. ℥j 
M. F. nutritum. 
S. Hoc calido inungatur latus affectum ter de die.
Bb 8.

370 Liniments.
8. Alius emolliens Sydenhami. 
ꝶ. Ol. amygd. dulc. 
Lilior. infus. 
Ung. dialthœœ ana ℥j. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Ut præced. Illito loco superponatur solium brassicœ. 
9. Linimentum balsamicum demulcens, ad inter- 
triginem. 
ꝶ. Ol. infus. rosar. 
Express. amygd. D. ana ℥ß. 
Ung. nutrit. S. corp. ʒiij. 
Rad. irid. flor. pulv. ℈j. 
Cerœ alb. ʒß. 
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Eo oblinantur partes adfectæ, prius detersæ. 
10. Linimentum ad ambusta. 
♃. Ung. sambuc. ℥j. 
Nicotian. ℥ß.
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒiij. 
Camph. pulv. ʒß. 
Ol. hyperic. ℥j.
M. F. linimentum. 
S. Hujus q. s. illinantur partes affectæ, integræ.
11.

371 Of Epispastics. 
11. Linimentum ad scabiem. 
♃. Ung. nicotian. 
Cœrul. ana ʒvi. 
Sacch. saturn. levig. ʒij. 
Sulph. viv. exact. trit. ℥ß. 
Bals. sulph. anisat. ℥j.
M. F. s. a. linimentum. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hoc libere inungantur partes affectœ omni nocte, 
calida manu. 
Of EPISPASTICS. 
§.453. EPISPASTICS are very warm, or stimu- 
lating external remedies, to be appli- 
ed to the surface of the skin, in various forms, and 
for various uses. When pitch is the basis of epis- 
pastics, they are termed dropaces; if they are made 
up with mustard-seed, they are then call’d, after 
the antients, synapisms; if their acrimony and sti- 
mulus are only sufficient to excite a redness upon 
the parts, they are termed phoenigmi, or rubefa- 
cientia; if they are strong enough to elevate the 
cuticle into vesicles, or little bladders, they are 
then call’d vesicatories: these are generally exhi- 
bited in the form either of a crude cataplasm 
(§.356. and 365.), an emplaster (§.405. and 413.), 
or a cerate (§.415.). 
§.454. Therefore the extemporaneous prescrip- 
tion of these medicines may be understood by the 
histories of those (loc. cit.). Their MATERIALS 
may be found under the title of stimulantia in the 
materia medica, and their USES shewn and directed 
to by the doctrine of indications; so that there is 
no need to enlarge upon them here (per.7. n° 1. 
and 2. §.8.)
Bb2  §.455.


372 Epispastics. 
§.455. A few SPECIMENS will give a better idea 
of these remedies. 
1. Dropax ad membrum paralyticum. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Picis ʒij. 
Galban. pur. ℥j. 
Piperis tenuiter contus. ʒiij. 
Castorei ʒj. 
Ol. irini q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. emplastrum ad alutam. 
S. Parti affectœ prius frictœ apponatur calidum; 
priusquam refrixit, iterum subito avellatur: quod 
repetendum donec pars rubeat, tumeat, caleat. 
2. Pasta rubifaciens, antifebrilis. Ibid. p. 136. 
ꝶ. Summit. rutœ virid. ℥jj. 
Semin. sinapi. ʒij. 
Contusa exhibe ad epicarpia. 
S. Applicentur carpis ad pulsuum loca, aliquot horis 
ante ingruentem paroxysmum. 
3. Synapismus cataplasmodes. Ibid. p.240. 
ꝶ. Fermenti acidi pansis ℥vj. 
Rutœ m. j. 
Semin. sinapios contus. ʒvj. 
Salis. 
Aceti ana ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Applica ad cava pedum & poplitum noctes 
atque dies. 
4.

373 Epispastics.
4. Phœnigmus emplastrodes. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 240. 
ꝶ. Emplastr. de melilot. 
Galbani 
Sagapeni ana ℥j. 
M. extende super duabus alutis ovatis. 
S. Applicentur cavis pedum. 
5. Sinapismus fortior veterum, vesicatorius. 
ꝶ. Ficuum siccar. in aq. tepida macerat. 
contusar. part. j. 
Semin. sinapios seorsim tenuissime con- 
tus. part. ij vel iij. 
Accuratè mistis F. pasta. 
S. Applicetur loco indicate, donec vesica enata sit. 
6. Vesicatorium cataplasmodes. Vid. ibid. p. 45. 
ꝶ. Cantharid. sine alis contritar. in pulv.
tenuem. ʒij. 
Accuratè misceantur cum 
Fermenti panis, pauxillo cum aceto 
subacti ʒvj. 
D. 
S. Applica spatio xij horarum, vel donec in vesicam 
manifestò epidermis elata sit. 
7. Emplastrum vesicatorium. 
ꝶ. Empl. de mucilagin. ℥jß. 
Cantharid. sine alis tenuiter pulv. ʒj. 
Tereb. venet. q. s. 
Accuratè mista extende super alutis orbulatis. 
S. Applicentur subutroque poplite, aut alibi; ut in- 
dicatio fert.
Bb3 Of 


374 Of Frications. 
Of FRICATIONS. 
§.456. BY a FRICATION (fricium vel frica- 
torium) we understand an external me- 
dicine which is to be applied by friction, or rub- 
bing into the surface of some soft external part of 
the body. 
§.457. Frications are distinguished into three 
kinds, according to their consistence: dry, soft, 
and liquid. The first is administer’d in the form 
of dry fumes, by rubbing with cloths; but the 
latter, in humid vapours, or wet cloths. 
§.458. The MATERIALS and FORMS for fri- 
cations may be understood from (§.272. 283. 369. 
393. 421. 432. 443.): subservient hereto, are mix- 
tures, lotions, fumes or vapors, ointments, bal- 
sams, liniments, &c. 
§.459. The USE of frications was very consi- 
derable among the antients, and is with us not con- 
temptible at present: those who are acquainted how 
much of some medicines may be introduced to the 
blood by external frictions, and have experienced 
the great effects they produce there, cannot be ig- 
norant of their uses. 
§.460. SPECIMENS of medicines to be used by 
friction, have been occasionally exhibited in the 
several places before cited (§.458.), to which we 
may add one more.  
Fricium, mixturæ mediæ formâ, antiparalyticum. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 179. 
ꝶ. Sp. lavendul. ℥iij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Tinctur. castorei ʒiv. 
Aq. stillat. lavend. ℥vj 
M. 
S. Perfricentur bac cum misturâ partes. 
Of

375 Of a Frontal. 
Of External FORMS, proper to particular 
Parts. 
§.461. I Might here omit to treat particularly of 
these forms; since they are in effect the 
same, and not different from several of those which 
we have consider’d in the preceding histories: 
their difference arising only from their being adapt- 
ed to particular parts (§.294.), from whence they 
take their particular denominations. 
Of FORMS proper to the Head.
Of a CUCUFA, or Scul-cap. See §.331. 
and 342. 
Of a FRONTAL. 
§.462. A Frontal is some external medi- 
cine, to be apply’d to the forehead 
and temples for various uses. 
§.463. The substances applied to these parts, are 
generally either in the form of a dry (§.320.) or 
liquid (§.331.) epithem, a boiled (§.345.) or 
crude (§.356.) cataplasm (but more frequently 
the latter), an ointment (§.421.), balsam (§.432.), 
or liniment (§.443.).  
§.464. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP- 
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient for 
the composition and application of this form, have 
neither of them any thing in particular, except 
the particular name, and the part §.462. Some- 
times the ingredients change the name of this form:
Bb4 as 


376 Frontals. 
as when the mixture, consisting of oil and vine- 
gar, especially of roses, is termed oxyrrhodinum; 
or of constipating substances beat into a cataplasm 
with some liquor, anacollema. For the rest, the 
dry rose-cake, made from the leaves, left after the 
distillation of the water, is sometimes used as a ve- 
hicle (§.328. n° 3.) for this form. 
§.465. The USES of this form are principally 
for cooling, moistening, relaxing, easing, and re- 
pelling; seldom used for the intentions of dispers- 
ing, attracting, warming, &c. and in the appli- 
cation of it for external and internal diseases of the 
head, it requires great circumspection; left by not 
removing, or even fixing, the cause of the disorder, 
there should arise a stupor, or lethargic indispo- 
sition; or by constringing the external parts, it 
should chance to throw the disease inwards. The 
election of ingredients for this form, is self- 
evident. 
§.466. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
l. Oxyrrhodinum demulcens, refrigerans, sopiens. 
ꝶ. Olei infus. rosar. ℥jß. 
Acet. sambuc. ʒvj. 
Tinct. opii cum sp. 
Acet. parat. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij. 
M. s. a. F. oxyrrhodinum. D. cum 
Placent. rosac. 
S. Placenta hoc liquore irrorata fronti & tempori- 
bus utrinque applicelur: exsiccata rursum humec- 
tetur; donec somnus obrepat.
2. 

377 Frontals. 
2. Frontale cataplasmodes, hypnoticum. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. hyoscyam. 
Flor. rhœad. ana ʒij. 
Capit. rec. papav. hort. cum semin. 
n°.iij. 
Cum Acet. rosac. q. s. in pastam trita ex- 
hibe. 
S. Inclusa linteo fronti applicentur tepida. 
3. Frontale, linimenti forma, anodynum, discu- 
tiens, calesaciens. 
ꝶ. Unguent. nervin. ʒvj. 
Theriac. andromach. ʒij. 
Croci pulveris gr. viij. 
Ol. infus. chamœmel. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Exceptum stupis cannabinis, duobus linteis, inclu- 
sum, fronti imponatur. 
4. Anacollema constipans. 
ꝶ. Bol. Armen. 
Succ. acaciœ ana ʒij. 
Mastiches. 
Sang. dracon. 
Lap. hœmatit. ana ʒj. 
Cum Album. ov. conquass. q. s. redacta in 
pultem excipe stupis cannabinis. D. 
S. Fronti & temporibus applicentur. 
5.


378 Of Collyria. 
5. Sacculus frontalis, calesaciens, discutiens, ad ce- 
phalalgiam aut vertiginem, a causa frigida natam. 
ꝶ. Herb. rec. rutœ. 
Fol. rosmarin. 
Flor. chamœmel. 
Sambuc. 
Summit. anethi ana m. ß. 
Caryophill. arom. ʒjß. 
Conscissa, tusa grosso modo, include binis 
sacculis oblongis, interpassandis. D. 
cum 
Spirtús lavendul. ℥iij. 
S. Alternatim fronti applicentur irrorati prius spi- 
ritu simul exhibito. 
Nota. To this place also belongs the emplastra 
temporalia, which are sufficiently intelligible, from 
what has been said of the emplaster at §.405. 
Of COLLYRIA. 
§.467. A COLLYRIUM is an external me- 
dicine to be applied to the eyes
for various uses. 
§.468. It is often exhibited in many of the forms 
which we have before descibed; as injections 
(§.295), aspersions (§.308.), liquid epithems 
(§.320.), and dry epithems (§.331.), cataplasms 
boiled (§.345.) and crude (§.356.), lotions 
(§.369.), humid vapours (§.383.), fumes 
(§.393), ointments (§.421.), liniments (§.443.). 
And from thence, the necessary directions and pre- 
cautions not be deduced.
§.469.

379 Of Collyria.
§.469. But the very great usefulness, tender- 
ness and sensibility of the organ of sight, being 
easily injured from slight causes, do require the 
utmost circumspection in the use of collyria which 
are either repelling or acrimonious: nor should any 
solid substances be applied, but when they have 
been most exactly levigated, to prevent them from 
offending the eye by their roughness; as in the 
dry collyria or sief of the Arabians, which are ap- 
plied alone, or mix'd with some liquor, wherein 
they are not dissolvable. For the same reason the 
mixture of sharp substances should be very equable, 
and the liquids order’d to be strained. 
§.470. The APPLICATION of collyria differs 
with their particular form, and the physician’s in- 
tention. Such as are liquid are usually applied 
to the eye, by dipping lint or a feather in them; 
or else instill’d, by a small tube or a quill, into 
the eye. Those which are of a thicker consistence 
may be applied by in unction, or spread upon 
some suitable vehicle. The dry collyria may be 
sprinkled, or blown into the eye thro’ aquil. 
§.471. The USES of collyria are many and va- 
rious, being sufficiently well adapted to most dis- 
orders of the eyes, when they are prudently di- 
rected; (§.469.) by mollifying, strengthening, 
maturating, resolving, cooling, easing, cleansing, 
&c. 
§.472. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
1.

380 Collyria. 
1. Collyrium liquidum, antiphlogisticum, rep-
pellens, in initio ophthalmiæ externæ. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. plantag. 
Rosar. 
Troch. alb. rhas. ʒß. 
Sacchar. saturn. gr. vj. 
M. D. ad vitrum. 
S. Collyrium, quo concusso imbutum linteum quadrupli- 
catum imponatur oculo affecto: recentetur omni 
trihorio. 
2. Collyrium cataplasmodes, antiphlogisticum 
emolliens, demulcens. 
ꝶ. Pom. dulc. q. v. 
Assentur sub. cineribus, aut cum 
Lact. dulc. q. s. coquantur ad molli- 
tiem. Pulpæ per setaceum tra- 
jectæ ℥j. admisce 
Micœ panis alb. ʒvj. 
Album. ovi in liquorem conquass. q. s. 
Ut F. cataplasma. 
S. Hujus q. s. linteo exceptum calidè admoveatur 
oculo firmetur sine compressione. Renovetur quar- 
ta quavis horâ. 
3.

381 Collyria. 
3. Collyrium vaporosum, stimulans, roborans ad 
paralysin palpebrarum. 
ꝶ. Herb. majoran. 
Thymi. 
Mar. syriac. ana m. ß. 
Flor. lavendul. 
Chamœmel. 
Bacc. juniper. ana ʒiij. 
Conscissa, tusa, D. ad Chartam. 
S. Species roborantes quarum pars quarta cum vin. 
rubr. pint. 1/4 infusa per horam maceretur tum ebul- 
liat vase aperto, & vapor exhalans per infundibu- 
lum determinetur ad oculum affectum, spatio qua- 
drantis horœ. Id fiat manè & vesperi. 
4. Collyrium siccum, detergens, leniter erodens, 
ad delendas cicatrices opacas corneæ diaphanæ. 
ꝶ. Sacchar. cand. albiss. ℥j. 
Almiin. ust. ℈ij. 
Vitriol. alb. gr. x. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Hujus tantilium bis de die loco erodendo imponatur. 
5. Collyrium, formâ unguenti, ad trachoma. 
ꝶ. Ung. rosac. ℥j. 
Tutiœ prœparat. ʒij. 
Sacchar. saturn. ℈j. 
Camphor. gr. vj. 
Ol. infus. rosar. q. s. 
Ut F. unguentum molle. 
S. Hujus tantilium illinat palpebris omni vesiperâ,  
cubitum iturus.
Of 


382 Of Errhins.
Of FORMS proper to the Nose. 
§.473. NASALIA, are certain medicines to 
be applied to the internal parts of 
the nose; as well for pleasure, as for the cure of 
particular diseases. Among these, some are apply'd 
in gross substance to the nose, or their vapours on- 
ly are expell'd by heat; which we then term er- 
rhins: others, exhaling their vapours spontane- 
ously, only affect the organs of smelling; and are 
called odoramenta, or smelling-bottles, balls, &c. 
Of ERRHINS. 
§.474. ERRHINS have various forms, and are 
in general either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are infusions (§.211.), de- 
coctions (§.224.), juices (§.235.), emul- 
sions (§.246.), mixtures (§.272.) and drops 
(§.283.). 
2. The soft are electuaries (§.138.), oint- 
ments (§.421.), balsams (§.432.), liniments 
(§.443.). 
3. The solid are powders (§.106. 308.) of 
the two finer kinds (§.107. and 309.), fumes 
(§.393.), pyramidal tents properly call'd na-
sals, which are composed of some powder and 
a glutinous mucilage v. g. the whites of eggs, 
turpentine, honey, labdanum, wax, &c. com- 
pounded as for troches (§.172.): But are some- 
times simple, as ex rad. betœ, cyclaminis, iridis, 
&c. cut into a proper form, or ex sol. betæ, 
nicotianæ, cort. recent. aurant. &c. twisted to- 
gether in a suitable manner.
§.475.

383 Of Errhins.
§.475. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for errhins, with what belongs to them, may be 
learned from the physician’s intention, and their 
various forms (§.474. and loc. ibid. cit.). 
§.479. The APPLICATION of liquid errhins 
(§.474. n° 1.) is performed by injection (§.295.), 
by snuffing them in, and washing them but again, 
(§.369.) by evaporation (§.383.), or like a 
liquid fomentation (§.320.), by introducing 
scraped lint, tents, &c. The soft errhins (§.474
n° 2.) are apply’d either by injunction, or by 
snuffing them up with some proper vehicle, to be 
hereafter mentioned. Errhins of the powder kind 
(§.474. n° 3.) are drawn up the nose like snuff; 
fumes are conducted into the nostrils by a funnel, 
and tents are introduced or thrust there. 
§.477. The USE of errhins is recommended 
by their various virtues, of astringing, mollifying, 
relaxing, easing, opening, stimulating, and by ex- 
citing to sneeze, absterging and discharging the 
mucus, &c. by which operations they may prove 
serviceable not only in diseases proper to the nose, 
but also in those of other parts, where an evacu- 
ation by this emunctory is proper. We should 
also consider what an effect sneezing has upon the 
whole body, by violently shaking it, and whether 
the patient has been accustomed to an evacuation 
at this part, by a constant habit of taking errhins, 
not easy to be broke off. 
§.478. Take the following SPECIMENS. 
1.


384 Errhins. 
1. Dococtum mundans ad ozænam. 
ꝶ. Rad. aristoloch. rot. ℥ß.
Herb. veronic.
Menth. ana m. j.  
Cum Aq. pur. q. s. quoque vase clauso per 
1/8 horæ. Colat. ℥xij. adde 
Tinct. myrrh. 
Aloës ana ℥ß. 
Mell. rosac. ℥jß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur hujus repidi q. s. aliquoties de die: 
turn gossypium aut carpta eo imbuta applicentur. 
2. Liquor stipticus ad narium hæmorrhagiam. 
Vide Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 161. 
ꝶ. Alumin. rup. ʒj. 
Aq. stillat. plantag. ℥j 
M. solve. 
S. Turundis ingestis applicetur cavo narium. 
3. Suffitus roborans, nimiam per pares destilla- 
tionem minuens. 
ꝶ. Mastiches. 
Olibani. 
Succini. 
Gumm. anim. ana ʒj. 
Herb. sicc. puleg. ʒij.
M. F. pulvis grossus. D. ad scatulam. 
S. Pujillus hujus prunis inspergatur, fumusque tecto 
capite excipiatur naribus.
4. 
 

385 Errhins. 
4. Electuarium errhinum ad gravedinem. 
ꝶ. Pulv. rad. galang.  
Irid. florent. ana ʒj. 
Zinziber. ʒß. 
Piper. alb. ℈j. 
Mellis comm. q. s. 
Ut F. s. a. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S. Ter, quater de die, tantillum naribus illinatur, 
aut cum turundâ indatur. 
5. Succus errhinus, muci e naribus excretionem
promovens. 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. brassicœ. 
Betonic. 
Anagalb. purp. ana q. s. 
Aq. stillat. majoran. ℥j. 
Contusis simul succum exprime, cujus
℥. iv. adde 
Spir. lilior. convall. ℥ß. 
M. 
S. Hujus quantum volâ manus capi potest, mane & 
vesperi, naribus attrahatur. 
6. Nasalia ejusdem virtutis. 
ꝶ. Herb. sicc. majoran. 
Rad. ellebor. alb. 
Sem. nigell. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ℈j. 
Mastiches ʒß. 
Muciiag. gumm. tragacanth. in 
Aq. rosar. damasc. fact. q. s.
Ut F. s. a. turundæ pyramidales pro nasalibus. 
S. Manè naribus immittatur. 
Cc 7.

386 Of Odoramenta.
7. Pulvis ptarmicus. 
ꝶ. Fol. siccat nicotian. ℥j. 
Majoran. 
Mari syriac. 
Flor. lavendul.
Lilior. convall. ana ʒij. 
Rad. pyrethri pulver. ʒj. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
M. F. pulvis subtilissimus. 
S. Attrahatur naribus tantilium, tempore matutino, 
ut sternutatio excitetur. 
Of ODORAMENTA, or Medicines 
to smell at. 
§.479. ODORAMENTA (§.473.) may be 
composed of every thing which emits 
or exhales odorous and medicinal particles, whe- 
ther pleasant or unpleasant. 
§.480. Their FORM, like that of errhins. 
(§.474.), is either liquid, soft, or solid. 
1. The liquid are compounded either of offi- 
cinal liquors only, or else of these and some other 
mixtures (§.272. and 283.) compounded to- 
gether. 
2. The soft, are composed of balsams (§.432.). 
3. The solid, are powders (§.106. 308.), 
or troches (§.172.) made of them, with some 
proper glutinous substance, and formed into odo- 
riserous apples, bails, globules, sopes, &c. But 
odoriserous sopes and wash-balls, being pre- 
pared mostly for pleasure, are at present hardly 
any where made and sold, but at the shops of 
persumers.
§.481. 

387 Odoramenta. 
§.481. These liquid balsams, powders, balls, 
apples, &c. are applied either to or near the nose; 
that they may the more strongly act upon the or- 
gan of smelling: the globules are usually carried 
about in the hands or bosom; and the sopes serve 
to wash with. 
§.482 From hence (§.479 to 481.) and from 
our intention, it will be easy to judge what may 
be further necessary in prescribing these things, 
agreeable to the rules of composition. 
§.483. The USES of smelling-bottles, balls, 
&c. are principally for pleasure, or for raising the 
spirits by their stimulus, to determine the course 
of the blood and spirits to other parts, and to cor- 
rect the ambient air. Here also consult what has 
been said at (§.85. 100. 396. n° 9. and 441.) 
§.484. SPECIMENS of balsams have been given 
before (at §.442.): examples of the rest follow. 
1. Vapor stimulans nares, in apoplexia imminente 
a causa frigida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 177. 
ꝶ. Tinct. castor. 
Spir. sal. amon. ana ʒij. 
M. 
S. Subolfaciat sœpe. 
2. Pulvis odoratus, cardiacus. 
ꝶ. Ol. stillat cinnamom. gtt. vj. 
Meliss. 
Rorismar. ana gtt. iv. 
Sal. volat. sicc. de sal. ammon. ℈ß. 
Sacchar. albissim. ℥ß 
Cinnab. nat. subtiliss. levigat. q. s. ad 
coccineum ruborem. 
Accurate, cito, mista immittantur vasculo 
vitreo, obthuraculo vitrio claudendo. 
S. Admoveatur naribus in languore.
CC2 3.

388 Of Stomatics. 
3. Pomum odoratum. 
ꝶ. Lahdani ʒiij. 
Benzoin. 
Styrac. calam. ana ʒij. 
Herb. thymi. 
Mari syriac. ana ʒj. 
Camphorœ gr. ij. 
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. iv. 
Bals. peruvian. ℈j. 
Cum Mucilag. gum. tragacanth. aq. cort. 
citri. solut. q. s. F. pomum. 
Ut supra. Ex iisdem quoque globuli magnitudinis 
arbitrariœ formari possunt. 
4. Sapo fragrans. 
ꝶ. Sapon. venet. ℥viij. 
Pulv. subtiliss. rad. irid. florent. 
Flor. lavendul. ana 3iij. 
Ol. stillat. cort. citr. gtt. xv. 
Tinct. benzoin. aquâ pnœcipitat. q. s. 
Concorporentur in pastam, ex qua for- 
mentur pilæ hinc inde auri foliolis 
exornandæ. 
S. lavandis manibus, faciei, inservit. 
Of STOMATICS, or medicines proper 
to the Mouth. 
§.485. BY STOMATICS we understand such me- 
dicines as are to be applied to any of the 
internal parts of the mouth and fauces. Of these, 
there are three kinds: dentifrices, to correct the 
dis-

389 Of DENTIFRICES. 
disorders of the teeth and gums; apophlegmatisms, 
to discharge the saliva and mucus of the mouth; 
and gargarisms, to wash the membranes of the 
mouth and fauces. 
Of DENTIFRICES. 
§.486. A DENTIFRICES is either liquid, soft, 
or dry. 
1. Liquid dentifrices are usally composed of 
mixtures (§.272.), or drops (§.283.): but 
sometimes officinal liquors, decoctions, infusions, 
expressed juices, &c. are also used. It is then 
also frequently called collutorium, or collutio. 
2. Soft dentifrices may be prescribed in the 
form of an electuary. (§.135.), linctus (§.149.), 
or liniment (§.443.). 
3. A dry dentifrice may be some powder 
(§.106. and 308.) finer or coarser (§.107. 
309.): which may be made into troches (§.172.) 
or sticks (Styli dentifricii) with some proper 
glutinous substance; which latter, are not so 
much in use at present. 
§.487. The INGREDIENTS and their CHOICE, 
&c. for dentifrices, may be understood from con- 
sidering the nature of the disorder to be remedied, 
and the particular form (§.486.) desired. Mineral 
acids should be used with great caution for the 
teeth; otherwise, they may not only whiten, but 
also dissolve them. 
§.488. The USES of dentifrices are principally to 
render the teeth and gums firm, to cleanse ’em and 
free ’em from any scorbutical taint: they may upon 
occasion be also serviceable to cool and mollify 
the gums, in the difficult dentition of infants. 
§.489. For SPECIMENS take the following. 
CC3 1.

390 Dentifrices. 
1. Collutorium in scorbuto a causa calida. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Myriœ limonum. 
Mell. rosac. ana ℥ij. 
Sp. sal. dulc. ʒß. 
Aq. stillat. rutœ ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Eo sœpiusculè laventer dentes gingivœ. 
2. Linimentum: Vide in §.452. n° 3. 
P. 
3. Collutio, eclegmatis ferè  formâ, refrigerans, 
emolliens, in dentitione difficili. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 236. 
ꝶ. Crem. lact. rec. 
Vitell. ovor. ana ℥j. 
Syr. violar. ʒvj. 
Aq. stillat. rosar. ℥iij 
M. 
S. His foveantur gingivœ dolentes. 
4. Opiata dentes detergentes, firmans. 
ꝶ. Cons. ros. rubr. ℥ß. 
Oss. sepiœ. ppt. ʒij. 
Sang. dracon. 
Cort. granator. ana ʒj. 
Alumin. usti. ℈ij. 
Mell. rosac. q. s. 
Ut F. electuarium. D. ad fictile. 
S Manè & post prandium ac cœnam eo fricentur 
dentes, turn abluantur cum spirit, vini myrrhato. 
5.  


391 Of Apophlegmatisms.
5. Pulvis dentifricus. 
ꝶ. Pumicis ppt. ʒij. 
Flor. balaust. 
Rad. irid. flor. 
Myrrh. rubr. ana ʒj. 
Lap. hæmat. ppt.  
Sal. ammoniac. ana ʒß 
M. F. pulvis tenuis. 
S. Ut supra. 
6. Trochisci vel styli dentifricii. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedent. 
Mucilag. gumm. tragacanth. cum aq 
salviœ fact. q. s. 
Ut F. trochisci vel styli probè siccandi. 
Of APOPHLEGMATISMS, or 
Medicines to excite a Spitting. 
§.490. APOPHLEGMATISMS (§.485.) are 
also prescribed in three forms, liquid, 
soft, and dry. 
1. Liquid apophlegmatisms are frequently 
made of decoctions (§.224.), and mixtures, 
(§.272.), but oftener drops (§.283.); some- 
times infusions (§.211.) and expressed juices 
(§.235.) or other officinal liquors are used, 
either uncompounded or mix’d. 
2. A soft apophlegmatism may be some elec- 
tuary (§.138.).  
3. Of dry, there are various kinds, either 
by the way of smoaking (§.395. n° 1.), as 
common tobacco, or a medicated one; or by 
Cc4 letting


392 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
letting a little cake (§.199.) disolve under the 
tongue; or by chewing something in the mouth, 
commonly termed a masticatory, which should 
be solid, tenacious and pungent: for which pun- 
pose are used the solid parts of the more pun- 
gent, or hot and biting vegetables, or concret- 
ed juices which are difficult to dissolve, and gross 
powders (§.106, 107. n° 2.) made of these 
or things of the like kind, which are either used 
loose in the mouth, when they are dissolvable, 
or else included in a bit of linen cloth, like a no- 
dule (§.219. n° 1. (2.)); or they may be 
formed into troches or pastills, with some glu- 
tinous substance (per §.172.). 
§.491. But we are not always at liberty to use 
any of these forms (§.490.) promiscuously. We 
are to consider which are most suitable to the par- 
ticular indication, seat of the disease, and consti- 
tution of the patient. 
1. For dispatch, upon sudden emergencies, it 
is advisable to use liquid apophlegmatisms(§.490. 
n° 1.), especially simple ones, or prepared only 
by mixture. 
2. The same (§.490. n° 1.) are also prefer- 
able in cases, where tough phlegm is to be se- 
parated, from the posterior or more remote 
parts of the mouth. 
3. Apophlegmatisms of the electuary kind, 
(§.490. n° 2.) are mostly of use when a dry 
or liquid one cannot be retained, turned about, 
and directed by manducation in the mouth: as 
frequently happens in paralytic and comatose 
affections; where an electuary kind of apophleg- 
matism being spread upon the palate, gradu- 
ally dissolves, and acts more effectually. 
4. The smoaking kind of apophlegmatisms 
are intolerable, to many who have been unaccus-
tomed 

393 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
tomed to them, they act too roughly upon the 
nerves; and the smoak not being dextrously ex- 
cluded from the cavities of the nose, larynx and 
pharynx, excites vertigos, head-achs, coughs, 
sickness and vomiting. 
5. Children and nicer patients should not be 
confined to apophlegmatisms which require a 
tedious mastication. They will be better pleas’d 
with little cakes (§.490. n° 3.), in which the 
pungent substances are none of the strongest, and 
cover’d with sugar. 
6. When the humours of the mouth are to be 
discharg’d slowly, in large quantities, or for a 
considerable time, then apophlegmatisms which 
will bear mastication, are preferable to others; 
unless any thing of the former (n° 3, 4, 5.) 
forbids. 
§.492. The MATERIALS for apophlegmatisms 
are taken from those substances, which being put 
into, retained and moved in the mouth, do exert 
a relaxing, or rather a stimulating power; so as to 
solicit a greater discharge than usual of the saliva 
and mucus which are deposited in that cavity. 
(V. H. Boerh. Inst. Med. §.1195. 1197. and 1200. 
n° 1, 2, and 3. ). We have in this place nothing 
to do with medicines which promote spitting, by 
being received into the stomach and exciting a 
nausea; nor with those which produce a ptyalism, 
by being convey’d into, and dissolving the cohe- 
sion of the blood, for we are here treating of 
topical remedies, proper to the mouth (per 
§.485.). 
§.493. A proper ELECTION of ingredients for 
an apophlegmatism is to be directed by their de- 
gree of strength and form required (§.491.). 
1. The materia medica furnishes the physician 
with a vast field of substances, capable of pro- 
moting

394 Of Apophlegmatisms.  
moting this discharge; some of which are 
stronger, others weaker; but most of them are 
either emollient, saponaceous, aromatic, or re- 
pleat with a sharp or pungent oil or salt; from 
whence the physician is to make a choice, agree- 
able to his intention and circumstances of the 
case. Of these, apophlegmatisms may be easily 
made with various menstrums, watery, vinous, 
decoctions, infusions, expressed juices, &c. of a 
greater or less degree of strength: and their 
composition maybe order'd by the rules at §.211. 
224. 235. They may be qualified for tender 
palates, by adding sugar and honey.
2. The materials proper for apophlegmatisms 
by mixture (§.490. n° 1.) are, distilled wa- 
ters, vinegar, spirits, tinctures, essences, oils, 
and, salts prepared from the preceding ingre- 
dients (n° 1.); which are more convenient for 
this purpose after dilution. 
3. The method of preparing medicated to- 
bacco, and fumes, for apophlegmatisms, has 
been before related, (at §.395. n° 1. 396. n° 4 
and seq.). 
4. Spices, roots, barks, leaves and seeds, which 
are whole, and of the more pungent kind, do 
often undergo a previous maceration in wine, 
vinegar, and spirit of wine. Concreated juices 
of the like nature, which are not of a very dis- 
agreeable smell, will each of them afford an ef- 
ficacious masticatory: such are myrrh, mastic, 
&c. Some can ever chew the leaves of tobacco 
without nausea: and the indians are pleased with 
chewing their betel and arac, mix'd with lime. 
5. Or the preceding ingredients (n° 4.), by 
triture, are formed powders (§.490. n° 3.); 
which being included in bits of linen cloth, make 
nodules; mix'd up with sugar, they may be 
formed into rotulœ or lozenges; incorporated 
with

395 Of Apophlegmatisms. 
with wax, mastich, honey, and other glutinous 
substances, they will form masticatories; but 
mix’d up with equal parts, or more of simple or 
medicated honey, they will afford an electuary: 
all to be used for apophlegmatisms. 
6. In prescribing apophlegmatisms for masti- 
cation, we should constantly abstain from those 
substances which are of a detestible smell and 
taste because they are to come so near, and lie 
so long upon those organs of sensation: though 
by custom or habit, the most nauseous may be- 
come tolerable (per n° 4.). 
§.494. The ORDER, DOSE, GENERAL QUAN-
TITY, PROPORTION,and SUBSCRIPTION for apo- 
phlegmatisms, are suffciently apparent from what 
has been said under these heads for forms of the like 
nature; from comparing what is deliver’d at (§.490. 
to 494.), and from consulting the subsequent spe- 
cimens. The size or weight of pastills for this pur- 
pose, are generally larger than the others (§.177.): 
they are sometimes ℈j, ʒß, or even a whole ʒ. 
§.495. With regard to the SUPERSCRIPTION 
or direction to the patient for apophlegmatisms, 
we need say but little, it is of itself so obvious. 
This evacuation is generally the best excited upon 
an empty stomach: so that these medicines are 
commonly exhibited some hours before meals; ex- 
cept when the least delay is of dangerous conse- 
quence. The discharge is forwarded by inclining 
the head, with the mouth downward; which pos- 
ture will also prevent any of the pungent apo- 
phlegmatism from slipping into the fauces, larynx 
or pharynx. Their operation is seldom continu’d 
longer than half an hour. There will be hardly 
any occasion to order the patient to wash his mouth, 
after the operation, with some mild liquor, as 
warm water, milk, &c. for he will of himself be 
ready enough to do that. 
§.496.

396 Apophlegmatisms. 
§.496. The USES of apophlegmatisms are 
very considerable when judiciously directed, for 
they produce very great effects obtainable by no 
other means, in cold habits and defluctions; in 
comatose, paralytic and epileptic disorders; in lu- 
cophlegmatic or watery habits, the watery quinsey, 
tooth-ach, &c. But the abuse of a good thing, 
in its place, may be of the worst consequence; for 
by depriving the blood of too great quantities of 
its more subtle lymph by the salival glands, it will 
extenuate the whole habit, as at also will by im- 
peding chylification; but when once the body is 
accustomed to it, 'tis no small difficulty to lay it 
aside. 
§.497. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Decoctum apophlegmatizans, ingruente apo- 
plexiâ frigidâ utilissimum. 
Vide H.Boerh. in Mater. Med. p. 175. 
ꝶ. Rad. imperator. 
Pyrethri ana ℥j.
Fol. recent. rutœ. 
Majoran. ana m.j. 
Flor. lavendul. m. ß. 
Semin. sinapis contus. ℥ß
Concissa, cum vin. alb. libr. ij. coque per 1/2 
horæ, vase exacte clauso. Colat. admisce 
Spir. sal. ammon. ʒij. 
Mell. anthos. ℥ß. 
D. 
S. Hujus tepidi pauxilium ore detineat ac volutet, 
humorem prolectum jugiter exscreans. Repetat 
pro necessitate urgente, quavis horâ aut citius. 
2

397 Apophlegmatisms.
2. Mixtura similis, odontalgiæ catarrhosæ apta. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. lavendul. ℥vj. 
Spirit. regin. hungar. ℥ij. 
Sal. ammon. ʒj. 
Tinct. sal. tart. helmont. ʒij.
Zinzib. subtiliss. pulv. ʒß. 
M. D. vitro clauso. 
S. Ut supra. 
3. Apophlegmatismus, formâ succi pressi 
ꝶ. Fol. recent. becabung. m. j. 
Cochlear. m. ß. 
Rad. recent. ari. 
Armorac. 
Sem. sinapis ana ℥ß
Conscissis, tusis, exprime succum, cui 
admisce 
Vin. alb. ℥j. ß. 
Sacchari alb. ℥j. 
M. 
S. Hujus haustulum, omni manè ore prius aqua eluto, 
contineat aliquamdiu scorbuto frigido laborans, 
tum exspuat una cum saliva sic prolectâ. 
4. Pulvis apophlegmatizans. 
ꝶ. Rad. pyrethri 
Cort. magellanic. ana ʒjß. 
Cubeb. 
Cardamom. 
Caryophyll. arom. ana ʒß. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒj.  
Ol. stillat. caryophyll. gtt. vj. 
Contusis F. pulvis crassiusculus. D. in scatulâ. 
S. Capiat omni mane, jejunus quantum apice cultri 
sustineri potest, & commandat, exspuatque humorem 
proritatum.
5.

398 Apophlegmatisms. 
5 Rotulæ sialogogæ. 
ꝶ. Species prœcedentes subtilissimè tritas.
Sacchar. albiss. aq. rosar. solut. & in- 
spissat. sextuplum. 
Ut F. s. a. rotulæ, 
S. Una vel duœ sub lingua detineantur, ut sensim li- 
quescant. Excernatur liquidum affluens. 
6. Electuarium ex iisdem. 
ꝶ. Species easdem pulveris, subtilissime 
comminutas. 
Mellis anthos. triplum.
M. exactè. D. ad fictile. 
S. Hujus tantillum palato affricetur in morbis sopo- 
rosis frigidís. 
7. Nodulus similis. 
ꝶ. Pulver. prœcedent. ʒjß. 
Mastiches  ʒiij. 
Mista illigentur panno lineo, ut F. nodulus. 
S. Mandatur leniter mane per 1/2 horam, ut saliva pro- 
ritetur exspuenda. 
8. Trochisci masticatorii. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 175 
ꝶ. Mastich. 
Cerœ alb. 
Zinzib. ana ℥j.
F. s. a. parvi pastilli, singuli ʒß vel ʒj. 
S. Ut supra. 
9. Pulveres sialagogæ.
Vid. §.126. n° 16. pag. 69.
Of

399 Of Gargarisms. 
Of GARGARISMS. 
§.498. A GARGAISM (§.485.) is a liquid 
medicine, adapted to wash the inter- 
nal parts of the mouth and fauces, for various 
uses. It is also termed (collutio vel collutorium) 
a mouth-wash, when intended for no other use but 
to cleanse and wash those parts. 
§.499. The FORM of this medicine is always 
liquid, generally composed of some infusion 
(§.211.), decoction (§.224.), expressed juices 
(§.235.), emulsions (§.246.), juleps (§.261.), 
or mixtures, (§.272.): and is to be accordingly 
prescribed by the rules for those forms. 
§.500. The MATERIALS and their CHOICE 
for a gargarism, is to be regulated by the physi- 
cian’s particular intention, and the form or kind of 
liquor to compose it (§.499.), in conjunction 
with a consideration of the rules for these heads, 
deliver’d under the internal forms before cited 
(§.499.). 
§.501. The ORDER, GENERAL QUANTITY, 
and PROPORTION for a gargarism, may be also
prescribed by the rules for these heads, delivered 
under the foresaid forms (§.499.). The DOSE is 
never determined by weight, but the capacity of 
the mouth; being as much as may be conveniently 
taken without distending the cheeks. 
§.502. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for a gargarism, orders F. liquor pro 
gargarismate vel collutorio. 
§.503. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for gargarisms, acquaints him with the 
method of applying or using them, which is not 
always the same. For sometimes the liquor is to  
be

400 Gargarisms. 
be shook about in the mouth with the head inclin’d 
backward; that it may the better penetrate and 
cleanse, or soak into the proper parts. At other 
times the liquor is only to be retained in the mouth 
quietly, without any agitation; when it will, by 
its motion, offend the inflamed, or otherwise in- 
jur’d parts, or cannot be prevented from slipping 
into the larynx or pharynx by such agitation. There 
are some other cases which require a gargarism to 
be injected by a syringe: particularly in infants, 
very weak patients, or such as cannot drink. This 
kind of medicine is also more frequently used warm 
or hot, than cold: but the latter is usually refer’d 
when the intention is to astringe or repel. 
§.504. The USE of gargarisms is very consider- 
able in most disorders of the internal parts of the 
mouth, sauces, and parts adjacent; for tumours, 
inflammations, ulcers, the thrush, great drought and 
rigidity, or too great relaxation, watery defluctions, 
and phlegm, &c. When the intention is to mol- 
lify, astringe, moisten, cool, dry up, warm, loosen, 
suppurate, deterge, &c. by this topical applica- 
tion immediately to the parts affected. 
§.505. For SPECIMENS, take the following. 
1. Collutio antiseptica, ad ulcera oris, a scorbuto 
putrido nata. 
Vide H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 193. 
ꝶ. Spir. salis marin. ʒij. 
Aq. stillat. salviœ ℥viij. 
M.
S. Hoc liquore colluat os & fauces sœpius de die.
2. 

401 Gargarisms.
2. Collutorium ad anginam inflammatoriam, anti- 
phlogisticum, resolvens, refrigerans. 
ꝶ. Aq. stillat. flor. sambuc. ℥xvj. 
Acet. vin. destillat. ℥ij. 
Sal. prunell. ʒjß.  
Rob. sambuc. ℥ij. 
M. 
S. Callido hoc liquore, ore detento, fauces assiduò hu-
mectentur. 
3. Decoctum emolliens, demulcens, ad promoven- 
dum ptyalysmum mercurialem. 
Vide H. Boerh. Aphorism. 1475.
ꝶ. Herb. althœœ m. ij. 
Malvœ. 
Flor. rhœad. 
Verbasci ana m.j. 
Rad. glycirrhiz. ℥j. 
Cum Seri. lact. rec. q. s. decoct. spatio 1/4 
horæ, turn colat. express. ℔ij. admisce 
Mellis puri ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Hoc. tepido gargariset & colluat jugiter totum 
oris cavum. 
4. Aliud laxans & detergens, ad crustæ aphthosæ 
lapsum promovendum. 
Vid. Ketelaar de Aphthis p. 38. 
ꝶ. Hordei mundat. ℥j. 
Passul exacinat. ℥ij. 
Ficuum n°.iij. 
Liquorit. ras. ℥iij. 
Coque ex aq. pur. turn cola & exprimè. 
Colat. ℔ij. admisce syr. jujubin. ℥ij. 
D. 
S. Tepidum ore semper contineatur, &, sipotè, gar- 
garisetur.
Dd 5. 

402 Of Glysters. 
5. Infusum balsamicum consolidans, ad ulcera fau- 
cium mundata. 
ꝶ. Herb. agrimon. 
Veronic. 
Salviœ. 
Flor. hyperic. 
Betonic. 
Rhœad. ana m. ß. 
Infundantur cum aq. pur. fervid. ℥xx. 
stent per horam infusa, vase clauso, 
tum colat. express. admisce mell. rosat. 
℥ij. 
S. Ut supra. 
Concerning SCUTES: See §.331. 342. 414. 431. 
Of Intestinal GLYSTERS. 
§.506. A Glyster (termed also clysma, ene- 
ma, lavamentum intestinale,) is some 
kind of liquor, to be injected by the anus into the 
rectum, and the other large intestines; with a view 
to alter their morbid state, nourish the body, or 
discharge their fæces. It is therefore a member 
of injections (§.295. & seq.), of which we gave 
a general treatment before, and may from thence 
be in a great measure understood. 
§.507. The MATERIALS, in general, do re- 
ceive, or are received. 
1. The excipiens or receiving, is some liquor, 
either (1.) in vulgar use; as common and smith’s- 
forge-water, new-milk, skim’d-milk, whey, ale, 
wine, urine, &c. Or, (2.) retained in the shops, or
ready 

403 Of Glysters. 
prepared by the apothecary, so as not to require 
extemporaneous prescription; as Aq. stillat. lac. 
chalybiat. dococt. hord, avenœ, specier. emollient. 
carminant. clysmat. ordin. juscula carn. olea pressa, 
infusa, &c. Or (3.) made by extemporanous 
decoction, seldom infusion, agreeable to the phy- 
sician’s prescription. 
2. The excipienda are all things suitable to 
the physician’s intention, and capable of a solu- 
tion in the preceding liquors (n° 1.): either 
in (1.) the watery; as electuaries, juices, extracts, 
salt, sugar, honey, sope, eggs, syrups, &c. Or 
(2.) oily, as oils by infusion, decoction, expres- 
sion and distillation, fats, butter, balsams, espe- 
cially turpentine, ointments, &c. Or (3.) of 
the powder kind not soluble, which are but very 
seldom used in glysters. 
§.508. The ELECTION of ingredients for this 
form is to be regulated by the different intention 
of the physician, together with the known virtues 
of the medicines, their price, and more or less 
easy preparation, with the other circumstances, 
both of the patient and medicine: and may be 
easily determined in particular cases. Hence 
1. The reader may here peruse what has been 
said before of injections at §.299. 
2. When there is very sudden occasion for the 
assistance of this form, as is frequently the case, 
we may omit infusions and decoctions with the 
other excipienda, and express’d oils, as requir- 
ing a too tedious preparation (per. §.42.). 
Tho' there are not wanting decoctions, &c. rea- 
dy prepared in the shops, adapted to most inten- 
tions. 
3. In prescribing this form, we shou’d avoid the 
more costly ingredients; especially when the gly- 
ster is to be frequently repeated: by which means 
Dd2 we

404 Of Glysters. 
we may prevent the poor patient from suffering 
too much in his pocket, and give the apothe- 
cary no opportunity of sophisticating the com- 
position, who may think any thing good enough 
to wash the grosser intestines, being also sensible 
that this kind of medicine is seldom examined 
into. 
4. The several emollient, carminative, and 
other species of the shops should be avoided, in 
extemporaneous prescriptions, as much as pos- 
sible; because, by long standing, they lose their 
virtues, breed insects, or are otherwise corrupted. 
It will be no great trouble to prescribe those that 
are fresh made. 
5. The mixture of oily and aqueous substances 
for this form, need not be so very intimate or 
exact, as is requisite for the internal ones, (at 
§.274. n° 6.) tho' the addition of honey, yolks 
of eggs, sugar, salt, sope, &c. will answer this 
purpose, at the same time it does other inten- 
tions. The turpentines should indeed be very 
exactly mix’d up with the yolk of an egg for 
this form, that by the division of their parts, 
they may have the greater action: for they are 
commonly us’d as digestives in glysters. 
6. We may ask why some forbid the use of 
acids in glysters, who yet, at the same time, 
make very free with the strongest emetics, and 
cathartics in this form. In short, when there is 
any putrefaction to be corrected, or febrile heat 
to be kept under, there is reason enough to make 
use of the weaker acids. 
7. You may very well omit ingredients of the 
powder kind for glysters, since there are other 
substances enough suitabie to every intention. 
But if you intend to use them, be mindful of the 
caution (at §.299. n° 4.) 
8.

405 Of Glysters. 
8. Salt and oil are improperly left out of gly- 
sters for the worms, for who will say they de- 
light only in sweet things, when they make their 
nests in such as are very acrimonious? When 
they are once kill’d, they quickly dissolve, and 
may be afterwards easily discharged, 
9. When the intention is to nourish by this 
form, nothing can be more proper than flesh
broths, because these do not so much require 
digestion by the intestines, but may be imme- 
diately transmitted to the blood after their 
immission, without any bad consequence; but 
when the heat of the body will much incline 'em 
to putrefaction, it may be proper to season ’em 
with a little salt and spice. 
10. Lastly, as the physician is to do nothing 
without a reason (per §.11, 12. 15.) so, when 
he is directed to prescribe a glyster, he should 
consider what kind will best answer his inten- 
tion, that he may afterwards the more readily 
select the proper ingredients for its composition. 
Hence he will perceive that all the specifics re- 
commended in this form for the head, bread, sto- 
mach, liver, uterus, will hardly do any thing 
more than common diluents, moistners, emol- 
lients, warmers, coolers, discutients, re- 
solvents, and stimulators. Thus the manage- 
ment of this form will become easy to the be- 
ginner, and he will be under no necessity of con- 
stantly adhering to set forms of glysters pre- 
scribed by others. 
11. From what has been said (n° 10.) it 
also appears, that there is no occasion for a nu- 
merous and confus’d mass for this form, one in- 
gredient alone will be frequently sufficient, with- 
out any other mixture; but two of the following 
are used oftener e.g. water, milk, whey, honey, 
sugar, nitre, oil, butter, &c. urine alone, or 
Dd3 common

406 Of Glysters.
common salt dissolved in five times its quantity 
of water, and a decoction of tobacco leaves are 
generally prefer’d when there is occasion for a 
strong stimulus. 
§.509. The ORDER OF prescribing ingredients for 
this form, is the same with that for internal decoc- 
tion. (§.227.) Infusions (§.2l4.) or mixtures (§.275.); 
for to one of those forms all glysters may be reduced. 
§.510. The DOSE and GENERAL QUANTITY
for this form are equal to one another, because there 
is seldom more prescribed than is to be injected, at 
a time (§.68. n° 1.). But this quantity varies, 
1. With regard to the age, for which the fol- 
lowing rules of proportion may be of service. 
For a new-born infant—℥ ij. 
One more advanced—℥ iij. jv.
A child—℥ vj, vij. 
An adult—℥ viij. x. xij. 
2. With regard to the patient’s habit: large 
people will bear more; small, less. The quan- 
tity of a glyster should be small, and quickly 
discharged again, when the patient has a diffi- 
cult respiration, intestines distended with wind, 
or externally compress’d by some incumbent 
body, as a large fœtus, water, &c.
3. In proportion to their effects or operations, 
the quantity may be large when the intention is 
to dilute, cool, moisten or mollify, when no- 
thing opposes. When it is to give a strong sti- 
mulus the quantity should be less, left by its sti- 
mulus, and being too large, it may be evacuated 
too soon. When the glyster is to be retain’d a- 
considerable time, then also its quantity should 
be less, which is chiefly to be observ’d in nourish- 
ing glysters. 
4. When the quantity of a glyster is too large 
to be injected at once, it may be proper to give 
it in small quantities, at intervals. 

407 Of Glysters.
§.511. For the mutual PROPORTION of ingre- 
dients for glysters, it is hardly possible to be de- 
termined, for all cases, even by general bounds: 
but the physician will find no great difficulty to 
settle the due proportion in his particular case, by 
being attentive to his indication (§.508.), the 
medicinal virtues of the ingredients, and the con- 
stitution of his patient, with the proper degree of 
consistence for injecting (§.299. n° 4.), &c. 
Hence, 
1. When cathartics are given by infusion, de- 
coction, or mixture in glysters, they are gene- 
rally prescribed in a proportion as large again, 
as when to be given internally by the mouth; 
even, upon occasion, three times as much, or 
more is order’d, when the intention is to give 
a strong stimulus. 
2. The proportion of salts which are neither 
acid nor alcaline, as are most of those used in this 
form, may be ʒj or ij, to ℥x of the liquor, 
when intended to give a moderate stimulus. 
But sometimes ℥j or ij, is order’d in the strong- 
est glysters (§.508.). 
3. The proportion of substances in consistence 
like honey or syrup, is very undetermined; be- 
ing limited by the strength of the medicine, and 
after that, its consistence; so that it may be 
deem’d the largest proportion, when these and 
the liquor are taken in equal quantities. 
4. Oily or fat substances are seldom taken in 
a larger proportion than one fourth part of the 
whole, except when they compose the whole 
form. There is seldom more than ℥ß or ʒvj. 
of the turpentines mix’d with ℥x of liquor. 
5. Ingredients of the solid, dry and powder 
kind are never order’d in a large proportion;
left they should run into grumes, or render the
Dd4 form 


408 Of Glysters.
form of too thick a consistence; ʒj, ij, or iij. 
may be enough for an adult (§.310. n° 1.). 
6. Opiates, and the strongest medicines, 
which extend their energy to the habit, and 
insinuate into the minutest vessels, should be very 
cautiously used in glysters. For even in the large 
intestines, there is a considerable intertexture of 
nerves; and there are also some absorbent veins, 
or small lacteals. So that an imprudent use of 
drastic or deleterious remedies in this form, may 
prove of the very worst consequence. A patient 
has been even known to sleep to eternity, by 
giving gr. jv. of opium in a glyster. 
7. We should be also no less circumspect in 
limiting the proportion of remedies which di- 
mulate in this form, considering whether or no, 
in what habits, and what quantity, they may 
be properly used. Or else, by a rash addition, 
or a timorous omission, all hopes may be fru- 
strated. So that when the intention is to raise 
the spirits, evacuate or revell, we may be pret- 
ty free with those which stimulate: but when 
the glyster is to mollify, dilute, relax, ease, or 
nourish, we should exclude acrimonious, or sti- 
mulating substances. 
§.512. The SUBSCRIPTION or direction to the 
apothecary for this form, may say something of 
what relates to the infusion, decoction, or mixture 
(§.218, 219. 231. 279.); except when there is 
no occasion for perfect depuration: concluding F. 
enema or clysma. But as the injection of this form 
is frequently referr’d to the apothecary, this part 
of the prescription may sometimes mention the pro- 
per instrument, whereby it should be given. We 
may also here insert, 
1. What age the patient is of, whether an in- 
fant, child, or adult; that the anus may be fitted 
with

409 Of Glysters. 
with a sizable tube: tho’ the apothecary may ge- 
nerally guess at this, by the quantity of liquor 
(§.510. n° 1.). 
2. Of what sex; when adult: for women 
love to help one another in this office. 
3. The time of administration: whether pre- 
sently, in the morning, evening, &c. for there 
is no hour, of either day or night, but will ad- 
mit of using this form, upon urgent necessity. 
Or else, the most convenient time is supposed 
to be when the stomach is empty. 
But supposing the method of injecting this 
form to be sufficiently known, we shall consider 
what else might be brought in here, under our 
next head. 
§.513. The SUPERSCRIPTION or direction to 
the patient for this form, is not always necessary, 
only when the subscription (§.512.) does not 
give a brief instruction for its use. And in that case 
we may begin with the title (per §.60. n° 3. and 
§.506.), and the rest, as may be understood from 
§.512. n° 1, 2, 3. But it may be sometimes 
more proper to give a verbal, than a written ad- 
monition concerning its administration and action. 
This part may therefore direct. 
1. What is to be done before injection: which 
is various in different cases, and may be ascer- 
tained by the physician from his indication. 
But we may observe one thing: that in giving 
nourishing glysters, the intestines should be first 
cleansed from their fœces, by giving one that is 
cathartic; that the liquor may be the sooner and 
more purely absorb’d. 
2. What regards the injecting itself of this 
form. Where it is required (1.) that the liquor 
be made so warm, as nearly to equal the heat 
of an human body in health. We may judge of  
the

410 Of Glysters. 
the degree of heat by applying the bladder, which 
includes the glyster, to the face, lips, or back 
of the hand; if it appears not too hot to those 
parts, it is fit for use. The injection of this form, 
too hot or cold, may either of them be hurtful 
to the patient, congeal the yolks of eggs, in- 
spissate the fat or other substances, and obstruct 
the tube. (2.) The posture of the patient, most 
convenient to receive the glyster into his intes- 
tines by the tube. Some physicians approve of 
the patient’s lying on his left side, as most con- 
venient; because that will give the liquor a descent 
in its passage, to the sigmoid flexure of the con 
lon, which lies on the left * side, before it forms, 
the rectum. But then the inclination of the 
rectum a little to the right side, in its ascent 
from the anus, will give some resistance to the 
impulse of the liquor; as will also the pressure 
of the super-incumbent intestines upon the lower 
part of the colon, on the left side, next to the 
rectum: and then the inconstancy or lusus na- 
turœ in her formation and disposition of this sig- 
moid flexure of the colon, placing it sometimes 
on the left side † of the rectum, will make this 
still more uncertain. So that I rather agree 
with the generality, that it is best to lie on the 
right side. But it may be sometimes proper 
to lie on neither side but prone. (3.) For 
the patient to keep still or quiet, with an easy 
respiration; left by a strong contraction of the 
abdominal muscles, the glyster might be ob- 
structed in its passage, or be afterwards too 
quickly dischaged. (4.) The instruments for 
injecting the glyster, which are different in se-
veral 
* Vid. Eustach. tab. anat. x. fig. 2. 4. 
† Idem ibid. fig. 5. 

411 Of Glysters. 
veral counties *, the particulars of which are 
not here to be enumerated. (5.) That the in- 
jection of this form be performed gradually, 
and not too forcibly. 
3. What is to be done after the injection is 
over. That is, for the patient to turn gently 
from the right to his left side, or upon his back; 
recommending him to a small and easy respira- 
tion, with a contraction of the sphincter ani, 
when the glyster is to be retained any consider- 
able time in the intestines. 
411 
§.514. The USES of this form (in general, 
have been in some measure intimated at §.506. and 
508.). are too many and considerable, to speak 
particularly to each of them here: they may be 
conveniently used in all ages and habits, even to 
the youngest infant. But when stimulating, they 
may be hurtful to those who are subject to the 
piles, and a too long or unnecessary use of them, will 
dull the peristaltic motion of the larger intestines, 
and render the patient more constipated, so that 
he must be always oblig’d to use this incentive, to 
excite them to their office. Those who affirm there 
can be no such thing as a nourishing glyster, seem 
to be ignorant of what we said before (§.511.
n° 6.): for the indefatigable anatomist Winslow † 
has demonstrated to the royal academy, that the 
human colon has lacteals, and shew’d them repleat 
with chyle. And the patient’s becoming suddled, 
by even a moderate use of wine, or its spirit in 
glysters, seems to evince the same, &c. 
515. Take the following SPECIMENS.
1. 
* Vid. R. de Farvacques Medic. Pharm. book. III. capit. X. 
† In his Anat. Exposit. Sect. VIII. of the abdomen, n° 219. 


412 Glysters.
1. Clysma meconium induratum resolvens evacuans. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 225. 
ꝶ. Seri lact. recent. ℥ij. 
Sapon. venet. ʒjß. 
Mell. ʒij. 
M. F. clysma. 
Pro infante recens nato. 
2. Aliud vermes expellens. 
H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Vitriol. mart. gr. xv. 
Aq. stillat. cichor. ℥iv. 
M. F. lavamentum. 
Pro puero trienni aut quadrienni. 
3. Clysma refrigerans, antiphlogisticum in rabie 
canina. Ibid. p. 183. 
ꝶ. Nitri ʒij. 
Acet. sambuc. 
Mell. rosar. ana ℥j. 
Aq. decoct. hord. ℥x.
M. F. clysma. 
S. Injiciatur bis vel ter in die. 
5. Clysma nutriens. Ibid. p. 139. 
ꝶ. Jur. Carnium ℥x. 
Sal. nitri gr. x. 
Sp. salis gtt. vj. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur octava quaque hora, postquam primo 
clysmate purgante elota alvus fuit. 
6.

413 Glysters. 
6. Clysma emolliens, anodynus, aperiens, calcu- 
lum pellens. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 243. 
ꝶ. Herb. malvœ. 
Parietar. 
Heder. terrestr. ana m. j. 
Seri lact. recent. q. s. 
Coque spatio 1/4 horæ. Colat. express. ℥. ix. adde 
Ol. lint ℥i. 
Nitri pur. ʒß. 
M. 
S. Injiciatur mane & vesperi. 
7. Clysma balsamicum, anodynum antidysentericum. 
ꝶ. Flor. chamomill. m. ij. 
Cum Lact. dulc. q. s. coque vase clauso 
per 1/4 horæ. Colat. ℥viij. adde 
Tereb. venet. vitell. ov. subact. ʒiij.
Mell.rofar. ℥j.
M. F. enema. 
Pro adulto. 
S. Clysma revellens, salivationis mercurialis impe- 
tum minuens. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 251. 
ꝶ. Flor. sennœ  ℥j. 
Agarici ʒiv. 
Semin. cartham. ʒij. 
Rad. jalapp. ʒj. 
Cum Aqua decoct. colat. ℥xij. injice pro 
clysmate. 
For glysters of the smoak of tobacco, see §.404. ult. 
on fumigations. 
9.

414. Glysters. 
9. Enema catharticum commune. 
♃. Decoct. commun. pro clyst. ℥x. 
Resin. jalap. in vitel. ov. solut. ʒß. 
Syrup. de spin. cervin. ℥j. 
Sal. commun. ℥ß. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Injiciatur tepide, mane, vel hora 
commoda. 
10. Enema nervosum, fortiter purgans. 
♃. Decocti communis ℥x. 
Sal. cathart. amar. 
Vini emet. turbid. 
Syr. de spina cervin. aa ℥jß. 
Ung. opodeld. ʒiij.  
Sal. vol. ammon. ʒj. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema ant. -apoplect. -paralyt. &c. fere frigidum,
hora commoda, injiciendum. 
11. Enema emolliens, & movens commune.
♃. Decocti communis, ℥x. 
Ol. sem. lin. ℥jß. 
Sapon. moll. vulg. ʒiij. 
Elect. lenitiv. ʒj. 
M. F. s. a. enema.
S. Enem. lenitiv.—Hora, tepide injiciendmn.
12. 

415 Glysters. 
12. Enema emolliens, laxans, in paraxysmo ne- 
phritico, &c. sopiens. 
♃. Decoct. intestinor. pulli gallinac. ℔j.
Bals. Lucatul. ℥jß. 
Vitell ov. n°. ij. 
Ext. thebaic. gr. iij. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tepide & hora commoda injiciendum. 
13. Enema hystericum, emmenagogicum. 
♃. Sumit. puleg. 
Rutœ. 
Atriplic. olid, aa m. j. 
Coque inaq. font. q. s. Colaturæ ℥x. 
adde 
Gum. galban. 
Asa fœt. aa ℈ij. 
Bals. sulph. tereb. ʒjß.  
Vitel. ov. q. s. ut solvantur gumosa. 
M. s. a. F. enema. 
S. Enema. Carminativ. more usutata injiciendum, 
& pro re nata reiterandum.
14. 


416 Glyjsters.
14. Enema amarum, antihelminticum. 
♃. Sem. santon. contus. ʒiij. 
Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Coque in aq, font. q. s. colaturæ ℥x. adde
Extract. rudii ʒß. 
Syr. rosar. damascen. ʒvj. 
M. F. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tempore commodo injiciendum & diu 
retinendum. 
15. Enema restringens. 
♃. Aq. cinnamom. ten. 
Vini rubri ana ℥iv. 
Confect. fracast. 
Mell. rosar. aa ʒvj. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut in fronte. Tepide, pro re nata injiciendum.
16. Enema febrifugum. 
♃. Flor. chamom. 
Sumit. absynth. vulg. aa m. j. 
Cort. peruv. pulv. ℥j.
Sal. absynth. ʒjß. 
Coque in aq. font. q. s. ut exprimatur ℔j. 
M. F. s. a. enema. 
S. Ut supra. Tertia hujus pars, sexta vel quarta 
quaque hora, de die, absente paraxysmo, tepide in- 
jiciatur; & quamdiu poterit, retineatur. 
Of

417 Of Suppositories. 
Of SUPPOSITORIES. 
§.516. A SUPPOSITORY (Bαλαvq, glans, 
& nodulus intestinalis) is a more or less 
solid remedy, of a roundish figure, to be thrust up 
the anus for various uses. Its figure is usually cy- 
lindrical, conical, oval, globular, or in the form 
of an acorn. 
§.517. When this remedy is to be formed of 
but one simple substance, as it very frequently is, it 
will hardly require an extemporaneous prescription: 
Otherwise it will be necessary; for composition. 
§.518. The MATERIALS, and their PREPA- 
RATION for simple suppositories, are well enough 
known by almost every body: some use one thing, 
while others approve of different ones; but all are 
attended with nearly the same effects. Of this kind 
are barley-sugar in a conial form, Venice-soap in 
the same figure, tallow-candle, or wax-candle dipt 
in butter, wash’d lard, a prune or fig turn’d in- 
side outwards, new cheese, and a piece of brown 
paper rowled up in the form of a cane, and spread 
over with butter, honey boiled to a solid consi- 
tence, almonds confected, or cas’d with sugar; a 
globule or cone made of alum, and moistened with 
oil or butter, a raddish-root, a marsh-mallow-root, 
or the root of beet, cabbage, elder, &c. being first 
excoriated or peel’d, cut out into a proper form, and 
moisten’d with oil or fresh butter, or the body of a 
leech prepared in the same manner; these are the 
common means, sometimes, as well for infants as 
adults, to more ,or less lubricate and stimulate the 
rectum, and solicite a discharge of worms, &c.
§.519. A compound suppository is either sti- 
mulating, or only adapted to the peculiar disor- 
ders of the anus and rectum. 
Ee §.520.

418 Of Suppositories. 
§.520. The component ingredients of a stimu- 
lating suppository, are distinguished into excipien- 
tia and excipienda. 
1. The excipient substances are honey boiled 
to a consistence, so that being poured Upon a 
cold marble, it will not adhere but be brittle; 
to this some add an officinal purging electuary, 
or some stimulating juice. Venice soap may be 
also used for the excipient with the yolk of an 
egg, mucilage of gum tragacanth, or barley su- 
gar; but these not so frequently. 
2. The excipienda to be made up with the 
former, are all sharp stimulating substances, whe- 
ther of the consistent or powder kind, of which 
there are a great variety extant in the shops, 
such are sopes, common salt, nitre, sal gem, sal 
ammoniacum, alum vitriolum martis, mouse- 
turds, aloes, myrrh, leaves of senna, agaric, jal- 
lap, species hieræ, the masses of purging pills, 
as cochiæ extract. cathol. succ. absinth. inspissat. 
bull’s gall inspissated, castor with the strongest 
emetics and cathartics, as colocynth, trochisch. 
alhand. scammony, white hellibor, euphorbium, 
crocus metallor. &c. 
§.521. The suppositories which are adapted to 
the peculiar disorders of the anus and rectum con- 
sist of various ingredients, according to the nature 
of their particular indispositions, with the intention 
of stimulating, deterging, corroding, healing, mol- 
lifying, easing, astringing, &c. There is here no 
occasion to enumerate the materials for these inten- 
tions, but they are adapted for these uses in three 
forms. 
1. For they are either reduced into a hard 
and emplastick mass (like as at §.520.) with 
the substances there mention’d, or with some 
other proper excipient. Sometimes they are com- 
pounded

419 Of Suppositories. 
pounded with ointments, cerats, or emplasters, 
and protruded into the anus, sometimes only an 
officinal emplaster, smear’d over with some oil 
or ointment, is used for a suppository. 
2. Or being brought into the consistence of 
an ointment or balsam, it is applied by the 
means of scrap’d lint, cotton, or wool done up 
in a globular form like an acorn or tent, to 
which a thread is to be fastened, by which, 
hanging out, it may be again extracted. 
3. Or a paste of the like consistance (n° 2.) 
may be tied up in a nodule in a bit of linen, to 
which a thread is to be also fastened to extract it 
by, after it has been once introduced into the 
anus. 
§.522. In the CHOICE of ingredients for this 
form, respect is to be had to the physician’s indi- 
cation, the particular virtues of each simple, espe- 
ciaily those of the stronger kind, with the patient’s 
age, habit, &c. See §.299. and 508. 
§.523. The ORDER for prescribing ingredients 
for this form, is generally to subjoin the excipient 
after the excipienda, especially when the quantity 
of the former is undetermin’d, tho' sometimes this 
order is revers’d. 
§.524. The SIZE of this form is analogous to 
the DOSE of others; when it is of a round figure, 
it sometimes equals the size of pease, chesnuts, or 
acorns; if it is conical, it’s usually made equal to 
the size of the patient’s little finger, and in length 
about three or four fingers breadth. Hence, accord- 
ing to the various size, the quantity of matter may 
be from ʒj to ʒvj or ℥j. A more exact determi- 
nation of the quantity may be taken from the pa- 
tient’s particular age, and more or less morbid 
stricture of the rectum, with the more or less strength 
of the suppository and particular disease of the rec- 
Ee2 tum:

420 Of Suppostories. 
tum: so that when the suppository is to stimulate, 
in a comatous disorder it is sometimes made much 
longer than the little finger. 
§.525. The general quantity for this form is fre- 
quently no more than the dose (§.524.). But 
when the suppository is to be used a considerable 
time 2, 3, or more cones may be transmitted to the 
patient at once, that one may be thrust up after the 
other, so that by multiplying the particular dose, 
it may be easy to determine the general quantity. 
§.526. The mutual proportion of ingredients for 
this form may be learn’d from the consistence of 
the excipient and other ingredients, with the re- 
quisite consistence of the paste to be made (§.520. 
521.), from the virtues of each ingredient, and the 
desired effect of the composition. Hence 
1. When inpissated honey is the excipient 
(§.520. n° 1.) the proportion of that may be 
℥j. to ℈iiij or ʒjß of the other ingredients. 
2. If any softer substance is used for the ex- 
cipient, it may be proportionably enlarg’d ac- 
cording to the quantity of the other ingredients 
or excipienda; except when it is required as soft 
as paste. 
§.527. The SUBSCRIPTION and SUPERSCRIP-  
TION or direction to the apothecary and patient 
for this form, contains nothing very particular, but 
what may be easily understood from what was before 
said on these heads. The hardest suppositories are 
generally anointed with butter, oil, lard, or some 
ointment, before using it; at other times, it may be 
sufficient to moisten it with the saliva, or with 
some warm oil, when intended to stimulate. The 
rectum should be discharged of its fæces before the 
suppository is introduced, except when the use of 
it is to give a stool. 
§.528.

421 Suppositories. 
§.528. The USES of suppositories have been in 
a great measure already explained (at §.518, 519. 
521.): they are frequently substituted in the room 
of purging glysters, when the patient will not ex- 
pose himself to, or be troubled with that form. 
These will often give a stool when internal purg- 
ing might not be safe, they kill and expel worms, 
and are serviceable in comatous and apoplectic 
cases, &c. by stimulating, revelling, exciting, &c. 
To say nothing of disorders peculiar to the anus 
and rectum, ulcers, fistulæ, hæmorrhoidal pains, 
&c. where suppositories are often very useful. But 
we should be cautious not to hurt or corrode the 
rectum by too sharp suppositories, not to make na- 
ture become sluggish in discharging her fæces by a 
too constant use of this form: therefore supposi- 
tories are less proper for those who have fissures 
ulcers, tumors, or pains in the rectum, the piles, 
&c. And an over strong suppository may chance 
to produce abortion.  
§.529. SPECIMEN of simple suppositories, see 
before at §.518. and in H. Boerh. Mat. Med. p. 224. 
A few examples of compound suppositories follow. 
1. Suppositorium antihelminticum, necans expel- 
lens vermes. 
Vid. H. Boerh. Mater. Med. p. 235. 
ꝶ. Mell. coct. ad consist. debit. ℥iv. 
Aloës ℥ß. 
Vitriol. mart. ʒij. 
M. s. a. F. parva suppositoria v. g. xij. aut 
xiv. pro puero. Serventur oleo demersa 
ne deliquescant. 
S. Applicentur post alvum exoneratam. 
Ee3 2.

422 Suppositories. 
2. Suppositorium acre, fortiter stimulans in affecti- 
bus soporosis frigid is utile. 
ꝶ. Mellis coct. indurat. ℥j. 
Sal. ammoniac. ʒß. 
Scammon. ℈j. 
Troch. alhand. 
Rad. ellehor. alb. pulv. ana ℈ß 
Euphorbii gr. ij. 
M. F. s. a. suppositoria n°. ij. oleo ca- 
storei illinenda.  
3. Glans ad alvum solicitandam, pro adulto. 
ꝶ. Sal. commun. ʒß. 
Sapon. venet. ʒj. 
Mell. coctu inspissati q. s. 
M. F. suppositorium, oleo absinth. infuso 
illinendum. 
4. Suppositorium ad excitandum hæmorrhoidum 
fluxum. 
ꝶ. Aloës pulveris. 
Sal. gemm. ana ℈j. 
Pulp. colocynth. gr. v. 
Mellis q. s. 
Coctu redigantur in suppositorium. 
5.

423 Of Pessaries and Nascales. 
5. Nodulus anodynus ad dolores ab hæmorrhoi- 
dibus. 
ꝶ. Opii crudi ℈ß. 
Croci pulveris ℈j. 
Unguent. popul. q. s. 
Ut F. pasta, quæ inclusa sindoni, aut cot- 
tone excepta, appenso filo, fit pro sup- 
positorio. 
S. Immittatur ano, filo foras propendente & retra- 
hatur post 1/2 horam. 
Of PESSARIES and NASCALES. 
§.530. A Pessary (pessarium, talus) and a NAS- 
CALE (penicillus) are a kind of suppo- 
sitories, tents, or nodules for the uterus and vagina, as 
the preceding were for the intestines, to be intro- 
duced into the sinus pudoris, vagina, &c. for 
various uses: but as they are at present seldom 
used, and may be easily understood from consider- 
ing the form preceding, there is no occasion to 
give a diffuse treatise on them here. 
FINIS. 

424 ADDENDA. 
N°.1. ad Pag.9. 
A Ppellationum generalium plura simplicia uno 
titulo complectentium explicatio. 
Quinque radices aperientes. 
Rad.
Apii. 
Asparagi. 
Fœniculi. 
Petroselini. 
Rusci. 
Quinque herbœ emollients.
Fol. & 
Sumit
Althææ. 
Malvæ. 
Mercurialis. 
Parietariæ. 
Violarum.
Quatuor flores cordiales.
Flor.
Boraginis. 
Buglossi. 
Rosarum. 
Violarum.
Quatuor 

425 ADDENDA ad Pag.9. 
Quatuor semina calida majora. 
Sem.
Anisi. 
Carvi. 
Cumini. 
Fœniculi. 
Quatuor semina calida minora. 
Sem.
Ammeos. 
Amomi. 
Apii. 
Dauci. 
Quatuor semina frigida majora.
Sem. 
Citrulli. 
Cucumeris.
Cucurbitæ. 
Melonum. 
Quatuor semina frigida minora. 
Sem.
Cichorii. 
Endiviæ. 
Lactucæ. 
Portulacæ.
CHA- 

426 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
N°. II. ad Pag. 16. 
CHARACTERES, 
FREQUENTIORES 
IN USU. 
A Cetum 🜊
Acet. destill. 🜋
Aër 🜁 
Æs ♀ 
Æs Viride 🜨 
Alumen 🌕︎
Amalgama 🝛 
Antimonium ⛢
Aqua 🜄
Aqua fontis 🜅ont.
Aqua fortis 🜅
Aqua Regia 🜆
Aqua Rof. 🜆of. 
Arena 
Argentum ☽︎ 
Argent. vivum 
Arsenicum  🜺
Auripigmentum 🜽 
Aurum ☉ 
Balneum B  
Baln. Mariæ 🝫
Calx viva 🝤 
Cancer ♋︎
Caput mort 🝎 
Chal-


427 ADDENDA ad Pag. 16. 
Calcanth. Vitriol. 🜖 
Chalybs ♂ 
Chalybis limatura  
Cineres 🝗
Cinnabar 🜭 
Corn. Cerv. calc. C.C.C. 
Cuprum ♀
Destillare 
Dies   
Ferrum ♂
Fimum Equin. vent. Eq. 
Hora 
Hydrargyrum ☿
Ignis 🜂
Jupiter ♃
Luna ☽︎ 
Mars ♂
Massa  
Mercurius ☿ 
Merc. præcipitatus 
Merc. sublimatus 🜐 
Nitrum 🜕
Nox  
Oleum  
Plumbum 
Præcipitare 🝟
Pulvis, Pulverare 
Retorta 
Sal Armoniacum 🜹
Sal commune 🜔 
Sal Gemmæ 🜘 
Sal Petræ 🜕 
Sol ☉ 
Spiritus Sp.
Stannum ♃ 
Strat. sup. Strat. 🝜 
Sublimare 🝞
Sulphur 🜍
Tartarum 🜿
Terra 🜃 
Tinctura 
Venus ♀ 
Vinum V. 
Viride æris 🜨 
Vitriolum 🜖 
Urina 🝕
N°.

428 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20.
N°. III. ad Pag. 20. 
A List and Explanation of the WEIGHTS 
and MEASURES used among the antient 
Greek, Latin, and Arabian Physicians. 
I. WEIGHTS. 
The chalcus,  
or 
Æreolus,
was equal to half a siliqua, or gr. ij. 
The siliqua of the Latins,  
Ceration and Diachalcum of
the Greeks,
or kirat of the Arabians,
was equal to ij 
chalci, or gr. iv. 
The nμiωCoλov,   
Semiobolus, and  
Davie of the Arabians,
was equal to siliqua
and half, iij chalci
or œreolœ, or gr. vj. 
The obolus, and 
Onolosat of the Arabs,
was equal to vj chalci,
iij siliquœ, or gr. xij.
or ℈ß.
The scriptulum, term’d  
Gramma and diobolon 
by the Greeks, 
was equal to ij oboli,
xij chalci, or gr. xiij.
The semidrachma or triobolon, term’d 
Ilarium by Oribasius, and  
Victoriatus by Scribonius and Celsus
was equal 
to ℈jß. or 
gr. xxxvj. 
The drachma attica, termed also 
Holce by the Greeks, being the 
eighth part of an ounce, 
was equal to 
℈iij. six obo- 
li, orgr. lxxij. 
The denarius of the Latins was a little heavier than 
a dram, so that only seven denarii went to the 
ounce. Hence, Celsus and Scribonius, who 
translate denarium for drachma, suppose only 
seven

429 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
seven drams to the ounce: but Plutarch, Ga- 
len and Pliny, in their Latin or Greek cita- 
tions, seem to write denarium for drachma, 
and drachma for denarium, indifferently, as 
if they were both the eighth part of an ounce. 
The sextula, 
Hexagium,  
Aureus, or  
Solidum,  
was the sixth part of an ounce,
equal to four scruples.
The sicilicus, used for didrachmum by Scribonius, 
was equal to two drams. It was also term’d 
The Assarius and αoγαρiov, from its containing 
twelve oboli, as the as does ounces. 
The duella, was equal to ij sextulœ, or ℈ viij. 
The stater was half an ounce: ℥ß. or ʒiv. Term’d 
also 
The dupondium, being equal to two assarii. 
The uncia attica, being the twelfth part of a pound, 
weigh’d eight drams, or (according to Celsus) 
seven Roman denarii. 
The libra romana, 
Pondo, or  
As,  
was equal to ℥xij. or ʒxcvj.
The mna or mina attica, was a little heavier than 
a pound, weighing ʒC. or ℥xij. & ß.
Notwithstanding the proper signification of the 
term as is a pound weight, it is yet frequently 
used by the Latins to signify some whole or solid 
body: and as they divided the pound, so they di-
stributed the whole body or thing into twelve 
parts, each of which were as ounces: but the se- 
veral other parts of the integer, were denominated 
by them after the following manner.  
As,

430 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
As, libra, a pound, or the whole thing. 
Uncia, or ounce, was the twelsth part of the pound 
or thing. 
Sextans,  
Quadrans, 
Triens,  
Quincunx,  
Semis,    
Septunx,   
Bes & octunx, 
Dodrans,  
Dextans, 
Deunx, 
was
two
three
four 
five
six 
seven
eight
nine
ten 
eleven
ounces, of
parts
II. MEASURES 
We pass from weights to an explanation of the se- 
veral measures, whether dry or liquid, in use 
among the antients. 
The cochlearium minimum, their least measure, held 
about ʒj and ℈ß. of wine, suppose canary. 
The cheme, or cochlearium mediocre, held two of the 
cochlearia minima, or ʒij. and ℈j. 
The mystrum, cochlearium magnum, or ligula, held 
of the cochlearia minima ij and ß. or ʒij ß. 
The concha held ij mystra, chema ij and ß. coch. 
minim. v. 
The cyathus contained ij concha, iij mystra, or 
℥jss. 
The acetabulum, or sesquicyathum, term’d by the 
Greeks oxybaphon, held iij concha, vj mystra, 
or ℥jj. ʒij. 
The quartarius tbtclotqvi '/yxiKOTuAiov, being the 
fourth part of a sextarius, contained cy- 
ath. iij. oxybapha ij. mystra xii. or ℥iv. 
The

431 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The hemine, cotyle, or tryblium, ημιEeςov being 
the half of a sextarius, contained ij quartarii, 
cyath. vj. oxybapha iv. mystra xxiv. coch- 
lear. lx. or ℥ix. 
The sextarius, Eeςηs, of the Greeks, was the 
most frequent in use of any measure, being 
the sixth part of a congius, containing two 
hemina, four quartarii, cyath. xij. or ℔ j ss. 
and is the same with chopin of Paris. 
The chœnix of the Greeks, and modulus of the La- 
tins, held a sextary and half, or ℔ ij. ℥iij. 
The congius, or chus of the Greeks, contained six 
sextarii, xxiv quartarii, or ℔ ix. being equal 
to three pints at Paris. 
The urna held four conga, or ℔ xxxvj. 
The amphora, 
or  
Quadrantal, 
held two urnæ, or xlviij sextarii. 
The meretes and ceramium of the Greeks, and the 
cadus of the Latins, held xij congii, or ℔. C. 
viij. 
The culeus, or most capacious of the liquid mea- 
sures among the Romans, contained xx am- 
phora, 960 sextarii, 160 congii, 40 urnæ, 
or ℔ 1350. 
For the mensuration of dry substances, the Ro- 
mans made use of the following, which were also 
applied in common to liquids, as well as solids. 
The

432 ADDENDA ad Pag. 20. 
The Ligula,   
Cyathus,  
Acetabulum, 
Quartarius, 
Hemina, 
Sextarius,  
Semodius,  
Modius, 
Medimus,
equal to 
j Mystrum, or ʒ ij ss.
iij Ligulæ.
vj  Ligulæ. 
ij Acetabula. 
ij Quartarii. 
ij Heminæ.
viij Sexsarii.
ij Semodii. 
72 Sextarii. 
The liquid measures were chiefly adapted to 
wines, which when of a mean consistence will 
come near to the weights assigned. But as oil is a 
9th part lighter than wine, and honey twice as 
heavy as wine, a measure holding ten ounces of 
wine will contain ℥xv. of honey, and of oil ele- 
ven ℥. and so in the rest.
AN

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Principal Matters in the Method 
of Prescribing, &c.
A. 
Accessory ingredients of a form, what?—p. 45. §. 107. 
—for
Decoctions—p. 144. 
Infusions—p. 165. 170. 
—Cataplasms—p. 283. 285. 
Adjuvans, the second constituent part of a form—p. 37. §.78. 
Alcohol powder, what?—p. 54. §.107. 
—of wine, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions, &c.—p. 145. 
Ales, antiscorbutic—p. 179. N° 2. p. 164. N° 10. 
Amulets, v. Epithems—p. 300. ult. 
Anacolema, what?—p. 376. §.464. 
Apophlegmatisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 389. §.485. 
—liquid, soft, and dry—p. 391. §.490. 
—their ingredients—p. 393. §.492. 
—dole, and management—p. 395. §.4. 34. & seq. 
—specimens of them—p. 396. §.497. 
Apozem, v. Decoition—p. 164. 
Apparatus for infusions—p. 152. §.219. N° 1. 
Aspersions, what kind of medicines?—p. 255. §.308. 
—their ingredients, election, and order of prescribing, 
p. 255. §.310. 
—dole, and general quantity—p. ibid. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. 256. §.313. 
—their directions, uses, and specimens—p. 256. §.317. 
Ff B.

INDEX.
B. 
Bags, v. Epithems—p. 278. & seq. 
Ball, sweet-scented—p. 388. n° 3. 
Balsams, odoriferous, what?—p. 354. §.432. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.433. 
—ejection of ingredients for—p. 355 §.434. 
—order of prescribing, dose, and general quantity—p. 358. 
§.435. & seq. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—directions for—p. 360. §.439. & seq. 
—uses of them—p. ib. §.441. 
—specimens of them–p. 361. §.442. 
Bed, v. Epithem—p. 280. n° 5. 
Basis, the first constituent part of a form—p. 36. §.75. 
Baths, what, and their kinds?—p. 300 
—ingredients for—p. 301. 370. 
—election of ingredients for—p. ib. §.371. 
—order of prescribing them p. 302. 
—their dose, general quantity, and proportion of ingredients for 
p. 302. §.313. & seq. 
—subscription or direction to the Apothecary p. 303. §.376. 
—superscription or direction to the patient—p. 304. §.377. 
—uses—p. ib. §.378. 
—specimens of—p. 305. §.379. 
Boles, what kind of medicines?—p. 76. §.127. 
—the ingredients or matter of—p. ib. §.128. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 77. §.129. 
—order of prescribing their ingredients—p. 78. §.130. 
—their dose—p. ib. §.131 
—general quantity—p. 79. §.132. 
—the proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. §.133. 
—their subscription—p. 81. §. 134. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.135. 
—uses—p. 82. §.136. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.137. 
Buccellatum, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 143. 
C. 
Cakes, v. Sugar-cakes—p. 138. 
Capitiluvium, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Catapotium, v. Pils—p. 106. 
Catapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Cataplasms, what? and their kinds—p. 282. 
—by decoction, what?—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 283. §.346.
—the election of their ingredients—p. 284. §.347.
Cataplasms, 

INDEX. 
Cataplasms, order of prescribing—p. 286. §.348. 
—dose of them—p. ib. §.349. 
—general quantity, and proportion of ingredients—p. 286. 
§.350. & seq. 
—subscription for—p. 288. §.352. 
—superscription for—p.289 §.333. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.354. 
—specimens of them—p. 290. 
Cerates, what kind of medicines?—p. 342. §.415. 
—their ingredients, management, and directions for—p. 343. 
§.418. 
—uses—p. ib. §.419. 
—specimens of them—p. 344. §.420.
Choice of ingredients for Apophlegmatisms p.393. §.493. 
—aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 355. §.434. 
—baths—p. 301. §.371. 
—boles—p. 77. §.129. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.201.
—cataplasms—p. 283. §.316.
—cerates—p. 342.
—collyria—p. 469. 
—cucusæ p. 375.
—decoctions—p. 165. §.226.
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 238. §.285. 
—electuaries—p. 89 §.140. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.407.  
—emulsions—p. 195. §.248.  
—epithems—p. ib. and §.273. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.475. 
—express'd juices—p. 183. §.237.  
—fomentations—p. 261. §.322. 
—frications—p. 374. §.458.
—frontals—p. 375. §.466. 
—fumigations—p. 316. §.396. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500 
—glysters—p. 403. §.508.
—infusions—p. 145. §.213 
—injections—p. 247. §.299 
—juleps—p. 211. §.263. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.151 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444.  
—lotions—p. 247. §.299. 
—mixtures—p. 225. §.274. 
—ointments—p. 345. §.423. 
—pills—p. 107. §.162. 
—powders—p. 56. §.111. 
—suppositories—p. 417. §.518.
Ff2 Choice

INDEX. 
Choice of ingredients for tablets—p. 132. §.188. 
—troches—p. 123. §.175 
—vapors—p. 308. §.384. 
—unguents—p. 345. §.423. 
Clysma, v. Glyster—p. 402. 
Colour of medicines arising from mixture—p. 46. §.99. 
Collutorium, v. Gargarism—p. 339. 
Colyria, what kind of medicines?—p. 378. 
—their various forms, ingredients, application, and uses—p. 379. 
—specimens of them—p. 380. 
Composition, its effefts on medicines, Mixture. 
Conditum, v. Electuary—p. 88. 
Consistence of medicines from mixture—p. 45. §.96. 
Constituens, the fourth and last part of a form—p. 41. §.86. 
Corrigens, the third condiment part of a form—p. 38. §.83. 
—for noxious qualities—p. ib. §.84. 
—unpleasantness—p. 40. §.85. 
Couch, v. Epithem—p. 285. n° 4. 
Cucullus  
Cucusa   
Cushion
v. Epithem—p. 278. & seq.  
D. 
Decoctions, internal, what kind of medicines?—p. 164. §.224. 
—their ingredients p. ib. §.225. 
—election of ingredients for—p. 165. §.226. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 171. §.227. 
—times for boiling their different ingredients—p. ib. 
n° 1. 2. & seq. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 173. 
—the mutual proportion of their ingredients p. 173. §.230. 
—process of, and apparatus for—p. 175. §.231. 
—their subscription, for the apothecary—p. ib. 
—superscription, to the patient—p. 178. 
—uses—p. ib. §.233. 
—specimens of —p. 179. §.234. 
Dentifrices, what?–p. 388. §.485. 
—their kinds—p. 389. §.486. 
—ingredients and uses–ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 390. 
Depuration of liquors, (1.) by decantation, and (2.) by filtration 
p. 155
Diapasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Directions for medicines to the apothecary in a prescription, v. Sub- 
scription. 
—patient, v. Superscription. 
Distribution of medicines, v. Dose. 
—powders—p. 62. §.118. 122. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. n° 9. 
Dose


INDEX. 
Dose in general, to determine—p. 23. §.65. & seq 
—should be proportioned to 
1° the patient's disease—p. 25. n° 1. p. 27. n° 7. 
—strength—p. 26. n° 2. 
—age—p. ib. n° 3. 
—size of body—p. 27. n°. 4. 
—habit—p. ib. n° 5. and—p. 28. n° 8. 
—sex—p. ib. n° 6. 
—use or custom to medicines—p. 28. n° 9. 
—course of life—p. ib. n° 10. 
—country or nation—p. ib. n.° 11. 
2° the Medicine's strength—p. 29. n° 15. 
—virtues—p. ib. n° 13. 
—season of the year—p. ib. n° 12. 
—price— n° 14. 
—unpleasantness—p. ib. n° 16. 
—form—p. 30. n° 17. 
—way of using—p. ib. n° 18. 
Doses, number of, in a form, agreeable to particular circumstances, 
p. 30. §.67. 
Dose, its quantity how to determine in compound forms, p. 42. §.92. 
—an estimate thereof, for different ages—p. 26. n° 3. 
—of boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.204. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.349. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.228. 
—drops—p. 240.  §.287. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.142. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.252. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.239. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.324. 
—fumes—p. 319 §.398. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. § 501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 149. §.215. 
—injections—p. 248. §.301. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.265. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.153. 
—liniment—p. 365. §.447. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.276. 
—pills—p. 110. §.165. 
—powders—p. 59. §.113. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.192. 
—troches—p. 125. §.179. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.425. 
—vapors—p. 310. §.386. 
Draughts—p. 230. & seq. 
Dropax, v. Emplasters—p. 236 
Ff3 Drops,

INDEX. 
Drops, what kind of medicines?—p. 237. §.283. 
—their ingredients—p. 238. §.284. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.285. 
—order of prescribing—p. 240. §.286. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. ib. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. 241. 
—their subscription—p. ib. §.290. 
—superscription—p. 242. §.291. 
—uses—p. 243. §.292. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.293. 
E.
Edegma, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
—solidum, v. Lozenges— p. 122. §.172. 
—Election of ingredient for forms, v. Choice. 
—Electuaries, what kind of medicines?—p. 88. §.138. 
—ingredient for—p. 89. §.139. 
—choice of their ingredients—p. ib. §.140. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 90. 
—their dose—p. 91. §.142. 
—general quantity—p. ib. §.143. 
—subscription—p. 39. §.145. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.146. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 94. & seq. 
Electuary, solid, v. Tablets—p. 131. 
Elixir, v. Drops.—p. 244. 
Embrocation, v. Bath—p. 301. 
Emplasters, what kind of medicines?—p. 326. §.405. 
—ingredients for—p. 327. §.406. 
—their election— p. ib. §.407. 
—order of prescribing—p. 330. §.408. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 331. §.409. 
—the proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—their subscription—p. 334. §.411. 
—superscription—p. 335. §.412. 
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 336. §.414. 
Empasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Emulsions, what kind of medicines?—p. 194. §.246. 
—ingredients for—p. 195. §.247. 
—their election—p. ib. §.248. 
—order of prescribing—p. 201. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. 202. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 203. 
—their subscription—p. 205. §.255. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.256.
—uses—ib. 
—specimens of them—p. 206.
Enema,

INDEX. 
Enema, v. Glysters—p. 402. 
Epispastics—p. 371. & seq. 
Epithems, in general, what?—p. 259. 
—liquid, v. Fomentations. 
—soft, v. Cataplasms. 
—dry, what?—p. 273.
—their management—p. ib. & seq. 
—ingredients—p. 273. 
—order, and dose—p. 274. 
—general quantity—p. 275. 
—superscription—p. 277. 
—their uses—p. 278. §.341. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
—moist, what?—p. 294. §.356. 
—their ingredients—p. 295. 
—subscription, &c.—p. 297. 
—specimens of them—p. 298. 
Errhins, what? and their kinds—p. 382. 
—the exhibition, and uses—p. 383. 
—specimens of them—p. 384. 
Excipients, what kind of ingredients?—p. 76. n° 2. p. 108. n° 8. 
p. 123. 
Excipiends—p. 107. p. 76. n° 1. 
Expressed-juices, v. Juices. 
F. 
Fomentations, what kind of medicines— p. 260. 
—ingredient for them p. ib. §.321. 
—their election—p. 261. §.322. 
—order of prescribing— p. 262. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 263. §.326. 
—their superscription—p. 264. §.328. 
—uses—p. 267. §.329. 
—specimens of them—p. 269. 
Forms, internal and external—p. 54. §.105. 
—fitest for acute diseases—p. 12. §.47. 
—chronic diseases—p. ib. 
—should be adapted to the most urgent symptoms—p. 10. p. 41. 
—age and circumstances of the patients, 
§.26. 27. 47. 48. 
—intention and medic virtues p. 11. §. 43. 
—texture and disposition of the ingredients 
p. 9. §.35. 43. 
—condition of the disease—p. 12. §.47. 
Formula, what?—p. 1. §.1. 
—simple, what?—p. 25. §.63. 
—compound, what?—p. 34. §.71.
Ff4 Formula,

INDEX. 
Formula, its four constituent parts.—p. 35. §.74. 
—l°. its basis—p. 36. §.75. 
—2°. its adjuvans—p. 37. §.78. 
—3°. its corrigens—p. 38. §.83. 
—4°. its constituens—p. 41. §.86. 
—its six general heads, v. Prescription. 
Fotus, v. Fomentation. 
Frications, what ? their kinds and uses—p. 374. 
Frontals, v. Epithems.—p. 278. 
—what Kind of medicines—p. 373. §.462. 
—their uses and specimens—p. 376. 
Fumigations, what?—p. 315. §.393. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—forms—p. 316. §.395. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 319. 
—their dole, or quantity—p. ib. §.398. 
—oroportion of their ingredients—p. 320. 
—their sub and superscription—p. 321. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 322. 
G. 
Gargarisms, what kind of medicines?—p. 399.
—their kinds anti ingredients—p. ib. 
—management and uses—p. 400. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. 
General quantity of a form—p. 33. and 45. 
i. e. to be sent to the patient at once 
—of aspersions—p. 255. §.312. 
—balsams—p. 350. 
—baths—p. 302. 
—boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.205. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.250. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 173 §.229. 
—drops—p. 240. §.288. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.143. 
—emplasters—p. 331. §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 202. §.253. 
—epithems—p. 195. and 275. 
—fomentations—p. 262. §.325. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 309. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.510. 
—infusions—p. 194. §.216. 
—injestions—p. 248. §.302. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.266. 
General

INDEX. 
General quantity of linctus—p. 104. §.154. 
—liniments—p. 365. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.277. 
—pills—p. 111. §.166. 
—powders—p. 60. §.114. 
—tablets—p. 134. §.193. 
—troches—p. 126. §.180. 
—unguents—p. 348. 
—vapors—p. 310. 
Glysters, what kind of medicines?—p. 402. §.506. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.507. 
—election of their d°—p. 403. §.508. 
—order of prescribing—p. 406. 
—their dose, and general quantity—p. ib. §.510. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 407. §.511. 
—their subfcription—p. 408. §.512. 
—superscription—p. 409. §.513. 
—uses—p. 411. §.514. 
—specimens—p. 412. 
Guttæ, v. Drops. 
H. 
Haustus var.—p. 234. & seq. 
Hydrelæon  
and   
Hydrogalum 
for bathing—p. 301. §.370. 
Hydromel 
and  
Hydrosaccharum 
kinds of juleps—p. 188.
I. 
Impluvium, v. Bath,—p. 301. §.369. 
Infusions, what kind of medicines?—p. 143. 
—their ingredients—p. 144. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 145. 
—order of prescribing—p. 148. 
—their dose—p. 149. §.2l5. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 150. §.217. 
—their subscription—p. 152. 
—process—p. ib. N° 2. 3. 
—apparatus—p. ib. ult. 
—depuration—p. 154. ult. 
—superscription—p. 157. §.221. 
—uses—p. 158. §.222. 
—specimens of them—p. 159. §.223. 
Ingredients for apophlegmatisms 
—aspersions—p. 255. 
Ingredients 

INDEX 
Ingredients for balsams—p. 354. §.433. 
—baths—p. 301. §.370. 
—boles—p. 71. §.128. 
—cakes—p. 139. §.200. 
—cataplasms—p. 283. 
—cerates.—p. 342. 
—collyria—p. 380. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 164. §.225. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.487. 
—drops—p. 238. §.284. 
—electuaries—p. 89. §.139. 
—emplasters—p. 327. §.406. 
—emulsions—p. 195. §.247. 
—epithems—p. 294. and 273. 
—errhins—p. 384. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 183. §.236. 
—fomentations—p. 260. §.321. 
—frontal—p. 376. & seq. 
—fumigations—p. 315. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.500. 
—glysters—p. 402. §.507. 
—infufions—p. 144. §.212. 
—injections—p. 247. §.298. 
—julep—p. 211. §.262. 
—linctus—p. 99. §.150. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.444. 
—mixtures—p. 224. §.273. 
—pills—p. 1O6. §.161. 
—powders—p. 55. §.109. 
—tablets—p. 131. §.187. 
—troches—p. 123. §.174. 
—vapors—p. 308. 
—unguents—p. 342. 
Injections, what kind of medicines?—p. 246. 
—their ingredients—p. 247. §.298. 
—election, order, dose, &c.—p. 248. 
—their subscription—p. 249. §.304. 
—superscription—p. ib. §.305. 
—uses—p. 251. §.306. 
—specimens of them—p. ib. §.307. 
Inscription, the first part of formula—p. 14. §.55. 
Infessus, Bath—p. 300. §.369. 
Intitling of medicines, v. Superscription. 
—in general—p. 23. n° 7. 8. 
Juices-expressed, what?—p. 182. §.235. 
—their ingredients—p. 183. §.236. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.237. 
—order of prescribing—p. 185. §.238. 
—their dose—p. ib. 
Juices

INDEX
Juices-expressed, their general quantity—p. 186. 
—subscription—p. 189. 
—superscription—p. 191. 
—uses—p. ib. §.244. 
—specimens of them—p. 192. §.245. 
Juleps, what kind of medicine?—p. 211. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. §.262. 
—order of prescribing—p. 216. 
—their dose, and quantity—p. ib. 
—subscription for them—p. 218. 
—superscription for them—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens—p. 219. 
L. 
Lavamentum, v. Bath—p. 301. §.369. 
Linctus, what kind of medicine?—p. 99. §.149. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.150. 
—election, and order of prescribing—p. 100. 
—dose, and general quantity—p. 101. §.153. 
—proportion of ingredients—p.102. 
—subscription for—p. 103. §.156. 
—superscription for—p. ib. 
—uses, and specimens of—p. 104. 
Liniments, what kind of medicines—p. 363. 
—ingredients for—p. ib. §.444. 
—order of prescribing, dose, &c.—p. 365. 
—their sub- and superscription, uses, and specimens,—p. 367. 
Lohock, v. Linctus—p. 99. 
Lotion, v. Bath—p. 201. §.369. 
Lozenges, v. Troches—p. 122 
M. 
Maceration, the process of—p. 153. N° 2. 3. 
Massa Panis, v. Sugar cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Materia Medica for forms, v. Ingredients.  
Measures now used by apothecaries—p. 18. 
—used by the antients—p. 428. 
Menstrua for infusions, their kinds and properties—p. 144. & seq. 
Method of prescribing the ingredients of a form in general—p. 15. §.58. 
Metrenchites, for injecting the Uterus—p. 250. 
Mixture, its effects on the consistence of medicines—p. 45. §.96  
—colour of medicines—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor of medicines—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste of medicines—p. 48. §.101. 
—virtues of medicines p.-49 §.102. 
Mixtures, what? and their kinds—p. 210. §.259. 
—of liquid medicines—p. 224. §.272. 
Mixtures 

INDEX. 
Mixtures, ingredients for—p. ib. §.273. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 225. §.274. 
—order of prescribing— p. 227. 
—their dose—ib. 
—general quantity—ib. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 228. 
—subscription for—p. 229. 
—superscription, uses, and specimens—p. 230.
N. 
Nasals, what kind of medicines?—p. 382. §.474. 
Nascale, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Nebula chartacea, a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Nodules, what?—p. 158. n° 2. p. 179. n° 2. 
—for spitting—p. 398. n° 7. 
O. 
Odor of a form upon mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Odoriferous balsams, v. Balsams. 
Odoromenta, what kind of medicines?—p. 386. §.479. 
—their uses, and specimens—p. 387. 
Ointment, v. Unguents—p. 342. 
Orbiculus, v. Cake. 
Order of ranging the ingredients of a form—p. 14. §.57. 
—prescribing the ingredients of aspersions—p. 255. §.310. 
—balsams—p. 358. §.435. 
—baths—p. 322. §.372. 
—boles—p. 78. §.131. 
—cakes—p. 140. §.202. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.348. 
—cerates—p. 342. 
—decoctions—p. 171. §.227. 
—drops—p. 240. §.286. 
—electuaries p. 90. §.141. 
—emplasters—p. 330. §.408. 
—emulsions—p. 201. §.251. 
—epithems—p. 274. §.355. 
—fomentations—p. 362. §.323. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 319. §.307. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 406. §.509. 
—infusions—p. 148. §.214. 
—injections—p. 248. §.300. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.264. 
—juices—p. 185. §.338. 
—linctus—p. 100. §.152. 
Order

INDEX. 
Order of prescribing the ingredients of liniments—p. 367. §.446. 
—mixtures—p. 227. §.275. 
—ointments—p. 348. §.424. 
—pills—p. 109. §.163. 
—powders—p.58. §.112 
—tablets—p. 133 §.189 
—troches—p. 125. §.176. 
—vapors—p. 308 
—unguents—p. 348. §.420. 
Oxyrrhodimum, what?—p. 376. §.464 
P. 
Pandalion, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190 
Pasma, v. Aspersion—p. 255. 
Pasta regia, v. Sugar-cake—p. 143. §.210. ult. 
Pastills, v. Troches—p. 122.
Pessary, what kind of medicine?—p. 423. 
Phoenigmi, v. Rubisacientia.—p. 371 
Picatio, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Pillow, v. Epithem.—p. 273. 
Pills, what kind of medicines?—p. 106. §.160. 
—their ingredients—p. ib. 
—election of their ingredients—p. 107. §.162. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 109. §.163.
—their size and weight—p. 109. §.164. 
—dose—p. 110. §.165 
—general quantity,—p.111 §.166. 
—proportion of ingredients—p. 112. 
—subscription—p. 113. 
—superscription—p. 114.
—uses—p. 115. §.170. 
—specimens of them—p. 116. §.171.  
Pineolatum, v. Sugar-cake,—p. 143.  
Powders, what kind of medicines?—p. 54. §.106. 
—of 3 kinds, in degree of tenuity—p. ib. 
—ingredients for—p. 55. §.109.
—their election—p. 56. §.111. 
—method of prescribing—p. 58 §.112. 
—their Dose—p. 58. §.113.
—general quantity—p. 60. §.114. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib.
—their subscription—p. 62 §.116
—preparation—p. ib. §.117
—distribution—p. ib. §.118
—receptacles—p. 63. §.119 
—superscription—p. ib. §.120. 
—uses and specimens—p. 65. 
Plasters, v. Emplaster.—p. 326. 
Prescribing

INDEX. 
Prescribing, general rules and cautions for—p. 4. §.11. 
Prescriptions, what? v. Formula—p. 1. §.1. 
—their kinds—p. 2. §.6. 
—parts in general—p. 14. 
Preparation of Powders p. 62. §.117. 
—infusions—p. 152. & seq. 
—decoctions—p. 175. & seq. 
—expressed-juices—p. 189. & seq. 
—emplasters—p. 334. 
Proportion of in-
gredients for 
Aspersions—p. 256. §.313.
—Balsams—p. 358. §.438. 
—Baths—p. 302. §.375. 
—Boles—p. 79. §.132. 
—cakes—p. 141 §.206. 
—cataplasms—p. 286. §.351. 
—cerates—p. 342. §.417. 
—decoctions—p. 173. §.236. 
—drops—p. 241. §.289. 
—electuaries—p. 91. §.144. 
—emplasters—p. 331 §.410. 
—emulsions—p. 203. §.254. 
—epithems—p. 296. §.362. 
—epispastics—p. 372. §.455. 
—fomentations—p. 263. §.326. 
—fumigations—p. 320. §.400. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.501. 
—glysters—p. 407. §.511. 
—infusions—p. 150. §.217. 
—injections—p. 248. §.303. 
—juleps—p. 216. §.267. 
—juices-expressed—p. 186. §.241. 
—linctus—p. 101. §.155. 
—liniments—p. 363. §.448. 
—mixtures—p. 228. §.278. 
—pills—p. 112. §.167. 
—powders—p. 60. §.115. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 135. §.194. 
—troches—p. 126. §.181. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.388. 
—unguents—p. 348. §.427. 
Pultice, v. Cataplasm.—p. 282. 
Pulvinar, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Q.
Quantity of a medicine to be prescribed and made up at one time, v. 
General quantity. 
Quanity

INDEX. 
Quantity of a medicine to be taken at once, v. Dose. 
Qualities of a medicine from 
composition or mixture
—p. 45. §.94. 95. 
—in consistence—p. 45. §.96. 
—colour—p. 46. §.99. 
—odor—p. 47. §.100. 
—taste—p. 48. §. 101. 
—virtues—p. 49. §.102. 
R. 
Receptacles for aspersions—p. 256. §.314. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. ult. 
—drops—p. 242. §.290. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.145. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—pills—p. 114. §.168. ult. 
—powders—p. 63. §.119. 
Recipe, the 2d general part of prescription—p. 14. §.56. 
Regimen, proper in taking medicines—p. 24. 
—powders—p. 65. §.124. 
Rotula, v. Sugar-cake.—p. 138. 
Rubisters, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
S. 
Saccus, v. Epithems.—p. 273. 
Salivatics, v. Apophlegmatisms.—p. 391. 
Scatulæ, what they are—p. 63. §.119. 
Scute, what kind of medicine—p. 402. 
Scul-cap, v. Cucusa.—p. 375. 
Semicupium, v. Baths.—p. 300. §.369. 
Series, for ranging the ingredients of a form, v. Order of prescribing. 
Sief of the Arabians, what?—p. 379. §.469. 
Smell of medicines, from mixture—p. 47. §.100. 
Sope, persumed—p. 388. n° 4. 
Spirits, inflammable, their composition—p. 146. n° 3. 
Species or powders, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Specimens of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. 
—aspersions—p. 256. 
—balsams—p. 361. 
—baths—p. 305. 
—boles—p. 82. 
—cakes—p. 138. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. 
—cerates.—p. 344.
—colyria—p. 380. 
—cucusæ—p. 375. 
—decoctions—p. 178.
Specimens 


INDEX. 
Specimens of dentifrices—p. 390 
—draughts—p. 230. 
—drops—p. 243. 
—electuaries—p. 94. 
—emplasters—p. 336. 
—emulsions—p. 206. 
—epithems  
dry—p. 278.
moist—p. 298. 
—epispastics—p. 372. 
—errhins—p. 384. 
—expressed-juices—p. 192. 
—fomentations—p. 269. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 376. 
—fumes—p. 322. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. 
—glysters—p. 412. 
—infusions—p. 159. 
—injections—p. 251. 
—juleps—p. 219. 
—juices—p. 192. 
—linctus—p. 104. 
—liniments—p. 367. 
—mixtures—p. 230. 243. 
—nascales—p. 424. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. 
—pills—p. 116. 
—powders—p. 65. 
—suppositories—p. 422. 
—tablets—p. 131. 
—troches—p. 128. 
—vapors—p. 313. 
—unguents—p. 352. 
Stillicidium, v. Baths.—p. 301. 369. 
Stomatics, what kind of medicines—p. 388. 
Subscription, i. e. directions to the compounder in general, p. 20. §.59 
—for aspersions— p. 256. §.314. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.439. 
—baths—p. 303. §.376. 
—boles—p. 81. §.134. 
—cakes—p. 141. §.207. 
—cataplasms—p. 288. §.352. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418.
—decoctions—p. 175. §.231. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—electuaries—p.93. §.145. 
—emplasters—p. 334. §.4l1. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.255. 
—epithems—p. 275. §.297. 
Sub-

INDEX.
Subscription for fomentations—p. 263. §.327. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.401. 
—gargarisms—p. 399. §.502.
—glysters—p. 409. 512. 
—infusions—p. 132. §.218. 
—injections—p. 249. §.304.
—juleps—p. 218. §.268. 
—juices—p. 189. §.242. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.156. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.449. 
—mixtures-p. 229. §.279. 
—pills—p. 113. §.168. 
—powders—p. 62. §.116. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.195. 
—troches—p. 127. §.182. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.389. 
—unguents—p. 330. §.428. 
Suffitus, v. Fumigations—p. 315. 
Sugar-cakes, what kind of medicines?—p. 138. §.199. 
—ingredients for—p. 139. §.200. 
—their election—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing—p. 140. §.202. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.203. 
—dose—p. 141. §.204. 
—general quantity,—p. 131. §.205. 
—proportion of ingredients for—p. ib. 
—their superscription p. 142. §.208. 
—uses and specimens p. 142. 
Superscriptions (i.e. directions to the patients in general p. 22. §.60. 
—for apophlegmatisms—p. 395. §.495. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.315. 
—balsams—p. 360. §.443. 
—baths—p. 304. §.377. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—cakes—p.142. §.208. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.353. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.418. 
—colyria—p. 379. §.470. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.232. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291.
—electuaries—p.93- §.146. 
—emplasters—p. 335. §.412. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.256. 
—epithems—p. 277 and 297. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.479. 
—fomentations—p. 264. §.428. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 321. §.402. 
G2 Superscriptions

INDEX.
Superscriptions for gargarisms—p. 399. §.503. 
—glysters—p. 409. §.513.
—infusions—p. 157. §.221. 
—injections—p. 249. §.305. 
—juleps—p. 218. §.269. 
—juices—p. 191. §.243. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.157. 
—liniments p. 367. §.450. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.280. 
—pills—p. 114. §.169. 
—powders—p. 63. & seq. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.196. 
—troches—p. 128. §.183. 
—vapors—p. 311. §.330. 
—unguents—p. 351. §.429. 
Suppositories, what kind of medicines?—p. 417. 
—their ingredients and composition—p. ib. 
—uses—p. 421. 
—specimens of them—p. 422. 
Sympasma, v. Aspersions.—p. 255. 
Synapisms, v. Epispastics.—p. 371. 
T. 
Tablets, what kind of medicines?—p. 131. §.186. 
—election of ingredients—p. ib. 
—their ingredients—p. 132. §.188, 
—order of prefcribing them p. 133. §.189. 
—figures of—p. 134. §.190. 
—their size and weight—p. ib. §.191. 
—dose general quantity—p. 134. §.190. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 135. §.194. 
—subscription for—p. 136. §.195. 
—their uses—p. ib. §.197. 
—specimens of them—p. 137. §.198. 
Tastes, various, from mixture— p. 48. §.101. 
Teas, medicinal—p. 158. n° 2. p. 160. n° 5. 
Tessellæ, v. Tablets—p. 134. §.190. 
Tincture, by infusion—p. 157, n° 1. 
Tobacco, medicinal—p. 323. n° 3. 
Tragea, powder, what?—p. 55. §.107. 
Transfusion of blood, in live animals—p. 246. §.299. 
Troches, what kind of medicines?—p. 122. §.172. 
—ingredients for—p. 123. §.174. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.175. 
—order of prescribing them—p. 125. §.176. 
—their figure, size, and weight—p. ib. 
—dose and general quantity—p. 126. §.180. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. ib. 
Troches

INDEX. 
Troches, subscription for—p. 127. §.182. 
—superscription for—p. 128. §.183. 
—their uses and speicmens—p. ib. 
U. 
Vapors, what? and their kinds—p. 307. §.380. 
—ingredients for them—p. 307. §.383. 
—election of their ingredients—p. ib. §.384. 
—their dose and general quantity—p. 310. §.386. 
—proportion of their ingredients—p. 311. §.388.
—subscription for them—p. ib. 
—their uses—p. 312. §.391. 
—specimens of them—p. 313. 
Vehicles, in general—p. 24. n° 11. 
—for taking powders—p. 63. §.123. 
—boles—p. 81. §.135. 
—drops—p. 242. §.291. 
—for applying emplasters—p. 334. n° 2. 
—fomentations—p. 265. n° 3. 
Unguents, what kind of medicines?—p. 345. §.421. 
—ingredients for them—p. ib. 
—order of prescribing, &c.—p. 348. 
—their subscription—p. 350. §.428. 
—superscription—p. 351. §.429. 
—uses—p. ib. §.430. 
—specimens of them—p. 352. §.431. 
Uses of apophlegmatisms—p. 396. §.496. 
—aspersions—p. 256. §.316.
—balsams—p. 360. §.441. 
—baths—p. 304. §.378. 
—boles—p. 82. §.136. 
—cakes p. 142. §.209. 
—cataplasms—p. 289. §.354. 
—cerates—p. 343. §.419. 
-colyria—p. 397- §.471. 
—decoctions—p. 178. §.233. 
—dentifrices—p. 389. §.488. 
—drops—p. 243. §.292. 
—electuaries—p. 93. §.147. 
—emplasters—p. 335- §.413. 
—emulsions—p. 205. §.257. 
—epithems—p. 278. and 297. 
—epispastics—p. 371. §.454. 
—errhins—p. 383. §.477. 
—fomentations—p. 267. §.329. 
—frications—p. 374. §.459. 
—frontals—p. 376. §.465. 
—fumigations—p. 322. §.403. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. §.504. 
—glysters—p. 411. §.5l4.
Gg2 Uses

INDEX.
—infusions—p. 158. §.222. 
—injections—p. 251. §.306. 
—juleps—p. 219. §.270. 
—juices—p. 191. §.244. 
—linctus—p. 103. §.158. 
—liniments—p. 367. §.452. 
—mixtures—p. 230. §.281. 
—odoramenta—p. 387. §.483. 
—ointments—p. 351. §.430. 
—pills—p. 115. §.170. 
—powders—p. 65. §.125. 
—suppositaries—p. 451. §.528. 
—tablets—p. 136. §.197. 
—troches—p. 128. §.184. 
—vapors—p. 312. §.391. 
—unguents—p.351. §.430.
Vinous menstrua, their kinds and properties p. 144. n° 1 (2.) 
p. 145. n° 1. 2. 
Wafer-paper, for a vehicle—p. 64. n° 2. 
Wash, v. Bath—p. 308. §.369. 
Water, its properties, as a menstruum for infusions and decoctions, 
p. 145. 
Weights, used by apothecaries—p. 17. N° 6
—the antients—p.
AN 

AN 
INDEX 
OF THE 
Diseases and Intentions, 
TO WHICH 
The several FORMULÆ, or PRESCRIPTIONS in 
this Book, correspond. 
Note, The Intentions are in Italick. 
A.
ABORTION, to prevent, v.
Analeptics, and
Hysterics.
—promote
boles 
emetic—p. 82
diuret.—p. 84. n° 6. 
elect. chalib.—p. 98. 
emplast. hyst.—p. 341. 
ointment purg.—p. 353. 
pills—p. 118. n° 7. 
powder—p. 74. n° 31. 
Abscess to suppurate
cataplas.—p. 291. n° 3, 4, 5.
electury.—p. 94. n° 3. 10 
emplaster—p. 339. n° 10 
unguent—p. 352. n° 1. 
Absorbent cap—p. 278. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 13. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—fumigation—p. 323. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 3. p. 221. n° 6. 
Gg3 Absorbent

INDEX. 
Absorbent mixture—p. 232. n° 5. 
—powders—p. 73. n° 27, 28, 29 and 30. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 3. 
Abstergents, v. Aperients. 
Aches, v. Anodynes. 
Acid bolus—p. 85. n° 8. (2.). 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 11. & seq. 
—fomentation—p. 271. n° 1. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 194, n° 6 and 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 4. and 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 2.
—vapors—p. 322. n° 1. 
Acrimony of the juices, v.
absorbent. 
acid, and  
alcaline 
Agglutinant aspersion p. 259. n° 7. 
—bolus—p. 86. n° 12. 
—cerate—p. 344. n° 1. 
—deceptions—p. 179. n° 4. p. 181. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. p. 96. n° 9. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 4. p. 341. n° 14. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. p. 209. n° 9. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 10. 
—injections—p. 252. n° 4. p. 254. n° 10. 
—julap—p. 219. n° 2. 
—liniment—p. 3. n° 9. 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233- n° 10. p. 235. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. p. 72. n° 25. 
—troches p. 131. n° 7. 
Alcaline, bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 293. n° 8 and 9. 
—decoction—p. 181. n° 8. 
—draughts— p. 234. n° 13. & seq. p. 235. n° 15. 
-drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4, 5. p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 15. & seq. 
—emplaster—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 279. n° 4. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—liniment—p. 369 n° 6. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. p. 234. n° 13. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. p. 120. n° 14. 
Alexipharmic, apozem—p. 180. n° 5. 
—bolus—p. 84. n° 7, & seq. 
Alexi-

INDEX.
Alexipharmic draught—p. 236. n° 16. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. p. 96. n° 8. and 10. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—juleps—p. 221. n° 6. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 232. n° 6. p. 236. n° 16. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 17. 18. 22. 
Ague, boles emet.—p. 82. 
—febrifug.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoc. feb.—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—elect.—p. 97. n° 12. 
—emplast. ad carp.—p. 339. n° 9. 
—epithem—p. 298. n° 1. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 16. 
—infusion emet.—p. 159. 
—mixture peruv.—p. 236. n° 17. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
Analeptic, (v. Corroborants) apozem.—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 17. 
—broth—p. 179. n° 3. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 7. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. and n° 4. 
—juice-expressed p. 193. n° 4. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. p. 220. n° 4. 
—linct. omn.—p. 104. & seq. 
—mixture—p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 121. n° 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25. and 26. 
—troches—p. 128. n° 1. 
Anasarca, apozem—l80. n° 5. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 2. 4. 14. 
—decoction p. 181. n° 8. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 15. & seq. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
—infusions—p. 161. n° 6. 8. & seq. 
—juice-expressed—p. 192. n° 2. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—mixtures—p. 244. n° 4. 6. 8. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 14. 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6. 15. 29. 
Ani procidentia, epithems—p. 282. n° 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 9. 
—suppository—p. 382. §.521. 
Anodyne, bolus—p. 86. n° 10. n°. 15.
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—cataplasms—p. 290. n° 1. p. 292. n° 6. 
—draught—p. 237. n° 20. 
Gg4 Anodyne,

INDEX. 
Anodyne, drops, laud. liq. omn. 
—emplasters—p. 336. n° 1. p. 340. n° 11. 
—emulsions—p. 206. n° 1. p. 208. n° 5. 
—epithems p. 279. n° 3. p. 299. n° 6. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 4. 7. 9. 10. 
—gargarisms—p. 401. n° 3, 4. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 6. 12. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 10. and 11. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 3. 
—liniments—p. 367. n° 1. 3.7, 
—linctus—p. 106. n° 5 and 6. 
—mixtures p. 232. n° 5. p. 237. n° 20. 
—pills—p. 122. n° 19. & feq. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 20. p. 73. n° 30. 
—sugar-cakes—p. 142. n° 2. 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
—unguents—p. 352. n° 2. 
Antacids, v. Absorbents. 
Antarthritic apozem—p. 193. n° 4.
—boles p. 84. n° 5. 16. 
—cataplasm p. 293. no. 8. 
—draughts p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 13. seg.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° 9. 11. 13. 15. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—mixtures p. 234. n° 13. p. 244. n° 4. 
—pills—p. 119. n°10. 14. 18. & seq. 
—powders p. 73. n° 29. 35. 
—unguents p. 352. n° 2. 
Antasthmatic boles—p. 87. n° 14. 16. 18.
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 9. 13. 15. 
—emulsions—p. 207. n° 2. 10. 
—infusion—p. z62. n° 8. 
—juleps—p. 219 n° 2. 7. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 3. & seq. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 13. 17. 19. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—powers—p. 71. n° 23. 32. 35. 
Anticolic, v. Colic. 
Antemetic boles—p. 85. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 230. n° 1. 20. 
—drops-p. 245. n° 10. & seq. 
—electuaries-p. 98. n° 14. 16. 
—emplaster-p. 337. n° 5. 
—epithem-p. 293. n° 10. p. 208. n° 2. 
—infusion-p. 162. n° 7 
—juleps-p. 219. n° 1. 4. 
Antemetic

INDEX. 
Antemetic liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures P- 194. n° 7. p. 231. n° 2. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 8. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 24. 26.
Antepileptic apophlegmatism—p. 396. n° 1. 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—balsam—p. 361. n° 2. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—epithem—p. 281. n° 8. 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 4. 7. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 
Anthelmintic bolus—p. 83. n° 2. (3.) n° 11. (2.) 
—draught—p. 243. n° 2. p. 163. 
—emulsion—p. 208. n° 7. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 2. 14. 
—infusions—p. 163. n° 8. & seq 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixture—p. 231. n° 3. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 12. 
—powders—p. 67 and 68. 
—tablets—p. 137. n° 1, 2. p. 142. n° 1. 
Anthysteric balsam—p. 362. n° 4. 
—boles—p. 86. n° 11. & seq. n° 7. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 5. 7. 9. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 16. 
—fumes—p. 325. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—infusion—p. 16l. n° 6. 
—julep—p.220. n° 5. 
—liniment—p. 369- n° ib. 
—mixture—p. 232. n° 6. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 6, 7. 
—powders?—p. 74. n° 32, 33. 
Anticteric, v. Jaundice
Antinephritic
Antiparalytic, v. Palsy.
—apozem—p. 181. n° 9. 
—bath—p. 305. n° 2. 
—boles—p. 83. n° 3. 12. 15. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 13.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 2. 15. 
—emulsion-p. 210. n° 11. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 6. 12. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 2. 7.
—linctus—p. 105. n° (2.) 5. 
—mixtures—p. 234. n° 13. & seq. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 75. n° 35.
 



INDEX 
Antiphlogistic boles p. 83. n° 3. 15. 17. 
—baths—p. 306. n° 5, 6. 
—cataplasms—p. 292. n° 6, 7. 
—collyria—p. 380. n° 1, 2. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 20. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 11, 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—emullions—p. 206. n° 1. 3. 11. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 3. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 3. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 3. 6, 11, 12. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 192. n° 1. 3. 4. 7. 
—juleps—p. 219. n° 1. 2. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7, 8. 10. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 36.
Antipleuritic, v. Pleurisy. 
Antirheumatic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 12. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 5. 12. 16. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 16. 
—electuary—p. 95. n° 6. 
—infusion—p. 160. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 6. 10. 
—mixture—p. 235. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 10. 12 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 29. 35. 
Antiscorbutic ale—p. 164. n° 10. p. 179. n° 2. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—bolus—p. 87. n° 16. 
—electuaries—p. 93. n° 6. 8. 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juices—p. 193. n° 5, 6. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—infusions-p. 160. n° 4. 10. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 219. n° 10. 12. 16. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 6, 7. 
Antipasmodic boles—p. 83. n° 3. 10. 16. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. 
—electuary—p. 96. n° 8. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 9. 11. 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 10. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 
Antisyphilic boles—p. 83. n° 2. (1.) n° 13. 
—electuaries p. 95. n° 6. 13. 
—emplaster p. 341. n° 15.
—fumigation p. 326. n° 10. & ult. 
—liniment—p. 371- n° 11. 
—pills—p. 12. n° 12, 13. 15, 16. 
St.

INDEX. 
St. Anthony's Fire, v. Antiphlogistic. 
Anxiety, v. Cardiac. 
Aperient boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—bath—p. 306. n° 4. 
—cataplasm.—p. 293. n° 8. 
—decoctions—p. 181. n° 8. 10. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 17. 
—drops—p. 244. n° 3, 4. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11. 13. 15. 
—expressed-juice—p. 192. n° 1. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 
—fumes—p. 322. n° 2. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 16. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. & seq. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. (3.) 10. 12. 
Appetite to recover, v. Antemetic. 
Apophlegmatic decoction—p. 396. n° 1. 
—electuary—p. 398. n° 6 
—errhin—p. 385. n° 5. 7. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 2. 
—juice—p. 397. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 2. 
—nodule—p. 398. n° 7.
—powders—p. 69. n° 16. p. 397. n° 4.
—sugar-cakes—p. 398. n° 5 
—troches—p. ib. n° 8. 
Apoplexy, v. Antepileptic. 
Ardor urinæ, v. Diluents, Refrigerants, and Balsamics. 
Aromatic balsam p. 362. n° 5. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 10. 14. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—fomentations—p. 269. n° 2. 6. 
—fumes—p. 323. n° 4. 9. 
—glysters—p. 415. n° 13. 15. 16. 
—infusion—p. 161. n° 6. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 4. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixture—p. 236. n° 16. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 3. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 22. 24. 
—tablets—p. 1 38. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 
—vapors—p. 314. n° 2. 3. 
Arthritic, v. Antarthritic. 
Ascarides, v. Anthelmintic. 
Ascites, v. Anasarca. 
Asthma, v. Antastmatic.
Astringent 


INDEX. 
Astringent bolus—p. 83. n° 19. 
—decoction—p. 179. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 4, 5. 
—emplaster—p. 337. n° 4. 
—epithems—p. 280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—fomentation—p. 272. n° 8. 
—gargarisms—p. 400. n° 1, 2. 
—glyster—p. 416. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 159. n° 2. 
—injections—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture— p. 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4. 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 26. 34. 
Atrophe, v. Analeptic. 
Attenuants, v.
Alexipharmics 
Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
Attrahent, v.
Epispastic.
Rubisier.
B. 
Balsamic boles—p. 86. n° 12. 17. 
—decoctions—p. 179. n° 3, 4. 
—draught—p. 235. n° 14, 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 7. 9. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 12. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—fotus—p. 272. n° 10. 
—gargarism—p. 401. n° 4, 5. 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 5. 6. 12. 
—infusion—p. 160, n° 5. 
—juice—p. 193. n° 4. 
—julep—p. 219. n° 2. 
—linctus—p. 105. (2.) and n° 5. 
—mixtures—p. 233. n° 10. 14. 15. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 17, 18, & seq. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 23. 25. 
—troches—p. 131. n° 7. 
Bechich, v. Pectoral and Balsamic. 
Belly-ache, v. Colic. 
Birth to promote, bolus—p. 84. n° 7. 
—draughts—p. 235. n° 14. 15.
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 10. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5.
—powders—p. 74. n° 31, 32, 33. 
Blasts, v. Erisipelas, and Antiphlogistic. 
Bleeding, v. Hæmorrhage. 
Bloody-

INDEX. 
Bloody-flux, v. Dysentery. 
Breath-fetid, troches—p. 130. n° 5 & seq. 
Bruises, v.
Aperients and
Balsamics.
Bubos to suppurate—p. 339. n° 10. 
Burns, (v. Antiphlogistic,) emplast.—p. 340. n° 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 10. 
—liniments—p. 369. n° 7. 10. 
C.
Cachexy, v. Aperients, Aromatics, Corroborants. 
Calculus, v. Antinephritics. 
Cancer, v. Aperients and Paregorics. 
Cardiac (v. Alexipharmic) boles—p. 85. n° 8. 
—draughts—p. 236. n° 16. 18. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 96. n° 8. 10, 11. 14. 
—emulsion—p. 207. n° 2. 
—epithem—p. 299. n° 4. p. 281. n° 8. 
—glysters—p. 413. n° 7. 15. 
—infusion—p. 262. n° 7. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 6. 
—linctus—p. 104. n° 1. and n° (3.) 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. 16. 18. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 18. 21. 28.
Cardialgia, v. Absorbents.
Caries, v. Alexipharmics, and Detergents. 
Carminatives, v. Alexipharmics. 
Catalepsy, v. Antapoplectics. 
Catarrh, v. Diaphoretics, and Corroborants. 
Cathartic apozem—p. p.179. n° 2.
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. 3, 4, 5. 
—cakes—p. 142 n° 1. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1. 2 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 1, 2. 6 
—glysters—p. 412. n° 2. 8, 9, 10, 11, 14. 
—infusions—p. 159. n° 2. p. 163. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 4. 
—mixtures—p. 209. n° 8. p. 213. n° 12. p. 243. n° 1, 2.
—pills—p. 116. 
—potions, v. draughts. 
—powders—p. 66, 67, 68. 
—suppositories 
—tablets—p. J37. p. Ncr,nc-r, 2. 
—wines—p. 159. n° 2. 9. 
Catoche, v. Antapoplectic. 
Caustic aspersions—p. 259. n° 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 293. n° 9. p. 299. n° 5. p. 373. n° 5. and 6.
Caustic 

INDEX. 
Caustic emplasters—p. 37. n° 7.
—liniment—p. 369. n° 6. 
—liquor—p. 244. n° 4. 
—powders—p. 259. n° ib. 
Cephalic balsams—p. 361. n° 1. 2. 6. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 8. 16. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—decoction—p. 222. n° 10. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—electuaries—p. 94. n° 3. 8. 14. 
—emplasters—p. 339. n° g. 11. 16. 
—epithems—p. 278. n° 1. 8. p. 299. n° 4. 
—errhins—p. 385. n° 5. 
—frication—p. 374. 
—frontals—p. 378. n° 5. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 3. 8. 10. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 10. 13. 
—juleps—p. 220. n° 4. 5. 
—liniment—p. 368. n° 2. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 4. p. 245. n° 7. 9. 
—pills—p. 116. n° (3.) 6. 7. 
—powders—p. 71. n° 21. 22. 
—tablets—p. 138. n° 4. 
—troches—p. 129. n° 3. 5, 6. 
—vapors—p. 313. n° 2. 7. 
Chaliliat drops—p. 245. n° 10. 
—electuary—p. 98. n° 16. 
—mixture—p. 245. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 118. n° 5. 6. 8. 
—powders—p. 74. n° 32. 34. 
Chlorosis, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Coolers, v. Acids, Refrigerants, and Diluents. 
Contusions, v. Aperients, and Balsamics. 
Cholic, Biliose, v. Acid, Absorbent, Cathartics, and oily Mixtures. 
—Arthritic, v. Aromatics, Anodynes, and Revulsives. 
—Hysteric, v. Anthysterics. 
—Flatulent, v. Aromatics. 
—Nephritic, v. Antinephritic. 
—from Aliments, v. Emetics and Cathartics. 
Constipatives, v. Astringents. 
Convulsions, v. Antispasmodics. 
Corroborant, (v. Analeptics) ale—p. 159. n° 2. 
—apozem—p. 179. n° 4.
—bath, cold water 
—bolus—p. 88. n° 18. 
—cakes—p. 143. n° 3. 
—colyrium, cold water 
—dentifrice—p. 390. n° 4. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 8. 10. 
—electuaries p. 94. n° 4. 5. 11. 14. 16. 
Corroborant

INDEX. 
Corroborant, v. (Analeptics) emplasters p. 337. n° 4, 5.
—epithems—p.280. n° 5. 9. p. 298. n° 3. 
—frications—p. 374. 
—fumigations—p. 322. n° 2. 4. 9. 
—infusion—p. 254. n° 9. 11. 
—mixture—p 232. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 4, 5. 8. 18. & seq. 
—powders—p. 72. n° 25, 26. 34 
Cough, v. Balsamics, and Aperients. 
Courses to promote, v. Aperients and Anthysterics. 
—to restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Cutaneous Disorders, v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
D. 
Delivery to promote, v. Alexipharmics, Emetics, and Anthysteries. 
Dentition to facilitate, gargarism—p. 401. n° 3. 
—linctus—p. 368. n° ib. 
Deobstruents, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
Desiccatives, v. Absorbents. 
Detergent, (v. Aperients) aspersions—p. 257. n° 1. 6. 
—cataplasm—p. 290. n° 2. 
—gargarism—p. 400. n° 1. 2.  
—glysters—p. 412. n° 1. 2. 7. 14. 
—injections—p. 251. n° 1. 4. 6. 8. 
—mixtures—p. 231. n° 3. 6. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 21. 35. 
Diabetes 
Diarrhæ  
v. Agglutinants, Astringents, and Balsamics, 
Diaphoretics, v. Aromatics. 
Digestion to strengthen, v. Aromatics, and Astringents. 
Diluent apozem—p. 179. n° 3. 
—infusion 162. n° 7. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8. 10, 11. 
—juice—p. 93. n° 4. 
Discutients, v. Aperients. 
Diuretic apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 84. n° 6. 12. 
—bath—p. 303. n° 2.
—drops—p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 13. 
—emulsions—p. 208. n° 6. 11. 
—infusions—p. 160. n° 3. 4. 7. 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—juices—p. 193. n° 4. 5. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° 10. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 10. 18. 
—powders—p. 69. n° 14. 15. 35. 
Dropsys v. Aperients, Cathartics, and Diuretics. 
Dysentery, v. Alexipharmics, Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Dysury,  v, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
E.

INDEX.
E. 
Ecbolics, v. Birth to promote. 
Ecchimoses, v. Apperients, Attenuants. 
Eccoprotics, v. Lenitives. 
Ecphratlics, v. Aperients.  
Emetic boles—p. 82. 
—draughts p. 233. n° 8. 11.
—juices p. 192. n° 2. 
—infusions p. 159. n° 1. 
—powders p. 65. 
—wines p. 159. n° 1. 
Emmenagtgs, v. Aperients, and Anthysterics. 
Emmenagogic boles—p. 86. n° 11. 16. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
—draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—drops—p. 245. n° 9. 
—electuaries—p. 95. n° 6. 13. 15, 16. 
—emplasters—p. 337. n° 3. 16. 
—glyster—p. 415. n° 13. 
—julep—p. 220. n° 5. 
—pessary—p. 424. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 6, 7, 8. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 2. 32. 
Emollients, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Epispastics, cataplasms—p. 372. n° 3. 6. 
—dropax—p. 372. n° 1. 
—emplasters—p. 373. n° 4. 7. 
—pastes—p. 372. n° 2. 5. 
Epulotic Aspersion—p. 259. n° 7. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 14. 
—sparadrap p. 338, n° 6. 
Erysipelas, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Errhins—p. 384 
Escharotics, v. Caustics. 
Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
Exanthemata, Scorbutic, v. Absorbents, Aperients, Diluents, Ca- 
thartics. 
—Inflammatory, v. Lenitives, Antiphlogistics, Diluents. 
F.
Faintings, v. Antapopledics, Cephalics, and Cardiacs. 
Fevers in general, v. Aiexipharmics, Epispastics, Cardiacs, Dilu- 
ents. Acids, Antiphlogistics. 
Fevers, Intermitting, v. Emetics, and Aperients. 
—bolus—p. 85. n° 9. 
—decoction—p. 182. n° 10. 
Fevers

INDEX. 
Fevers, intermitting, draught—p. 236. n° 17. 
—electuary—p. 97. n° 12. 
—epithems—p. 279. n° 4. p. 298. n° 1. 
—glysters—p. 416. n° 14. 16. 
—infusion—p. 160. n6, 5. 
—juleps—p. 222. n° 8, 9. 
—mixture—p. 233. n° g. 
—pills—p. 119. n° 11. 
—powders—p. 70. n° 19. 
—Remitting, bolus feb.—p. 85. n° 9. 
—Inflammatory, v. Acids, Antiphlogistics, Diluents, Car- 
diacs, and Alexipharmics. 
—Nervous, or Slow, v. Alexipharmics, Cephalics, Epispastics. 
—Patrid-hestic, v. Antiphlogistics, Acids, Analeptics. 
G. 
Gangrene, v. Aperients, and Alexipharmics. 
Gleet, v. Astringents, and Balsamics. 
Gonorrhæ, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Refrigerants. 
Gout, v. Antarthritic. 
Gravel, v. Antinephritic, 
Green-sickness, v. Aperients, and Emmenagoges. 
Gripes, v. Cholic, and Anodynes. 
Gutta-Rosacea, v. Antiphlogistics. 
H. 
Hæmorrhage, internal, v. Balsamics, and Refrigerants. 
—pulv.—p. 75. n° 36. 
—external. 
—aspersion—p. 258. n° 4. 
—cataplasm—p. 298. n° 3. 
—injection—p. 254. n° 9. 
Hæmorrhoids (v. Eccoprotics.) 
—cataplasm—p. 292. n° 6. 
—epithem—p. 299, n° 6. 
—emplasters—p. 340. n° 11, 12. 
—fomentations—p. 271. n° 7. 9. 10. 
—glyster—p. 414. n° 11. 
—suppositories—p. 423. no. 5 
—vapors—p. 315. n° 6. 
Heart burn, v. Cardialgia. 
Hectic, v. Fever. 
Hemeplegia, v. Palsy. 
Hoarseness, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Hydrogog draughts—p. 102. n° 2. p. 209. n° 8. p. 243. n° 1. 
—pills—p. 116. n° 1. 
—powders—p. 66. n° 1. 
Hh Hydrocele


INDEX. 
Hydrocele, v. Aperient Externals. 
—epithem—p. 280. n° 6. 
Hydrops, v. Anasarca 
Hypnotics, v. Anodynes. 
Hypo, v. Aperients. 
Hysteric Passion, v. Anthysterics. 
I. 
Jaundice, apozem—p. 181. n° 8. 
—boles—p. 82. n° 2. p. 83. n° 3. 14. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 11. 13. 
—drops p. 244. n° 4. 
—electuaries—p. 98. n° 15. 
—infusion—p. 162. n° 8. 
—julep—p. 221. n° 7. 
—pills—p. 120. n° 14. 
—powders p. 66. n° 2. 13. 35. 
Impotency, v. Aromatics, Externals and Internals. 
Inflammations, v. Antiphlogistics. 
Intermittents, v. Agues. 
Itch, v. Aperients, and Cathartics. 
—emplaster—p. 341. n° 13. 
—linimen—p. 371. n° 11. 
—unguents—p. 345. n° 4.
K. 
King's-Evil, v. Aperients, Diluents, and Absorbents. 
L.
Laxatives, or
Lenitives, 
boles—p. 83. n° 3. 16. 
—draughts—p. 234. n° 12. 
—electuarics—p. 94. n° 2. 6. 
—epithems—p. 270. n° 4. 
—glysters—p. 414. n° 11. 
—mixture—p. 234. n° 12. 
—pills—p. 117. n° 2. 
—powders—p. 68. n° 12. 
Leprosy, v Itch, and King's-Evil. 
Lechargy, v. Cephalics, and Antapoplectics. 
Looseness, and  
Lientery
v. Diarrhæ   
Lythontriptics, v. Antinephritics.
Lubricants, v. Balsamics.
Madness,

INDEX.
M. 
Madness, raving, v. Laxatives, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—melancholy, v. Emetics, Aperients, and Chalybiats. 
Measles, v. Balsamics, Cardiacs, Diluents, and Eccoprotics, 
Melancholy, v. Hippo. 
Menses to provoke, v. Emmenagogs. 
—restrain, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Mortification, v. Gangrene. 
N. 
Narcotics, v. Anodynes. 
Nausea, v. Antemetics. 
Nephritics, v. Aperients, Balsamics, and Diluents. 
Neurotics, v. Cephalics. 
Numbness, v. Palsy. 
O. 
Obstructions, v. Aperients, and Diluents. 
P. 
Pains to ease, v. Anodynes. 
Palsy. v. Antarthritics. 
Paregorics, Anodynes, Balsamics, and Diluents.
Phlegm, v. Hydrogogs, and Diaphoretics. 
Phthisis, v. Analeptics. 
Piles, v. Hæmorrhoides. 
Plague, v. Fevers, nervous. 
Pleurisy, v. Balsamics, Detergents, and Diluents. 
Pox, v. Antisiphilics. 
Q.
Quinsey, v. Antiphlogistics. 
R. 
Rheumatism, v. Antarthritics. 
Rickets, v. Aperients, and Corroborants. 
S. 
Scalds, v. Burns. 
Scabs 
Scald-head  
Schirri 
v. Aperients, Absorbents, and Diluents.
Hh2 Scurvy,

INDEX. 
Scurvy, v. Antiscorbutics. 
Seminal Weakness, v. Analeptics, Balsamics, and Corroborants. 
Sleep to promote, v. Anodynes. 
Small Pox, v. Fevers, inflammatory. 
Spasms, v. Antispasmodics. 
Spleen, v. Aperients, and Chalibiates. 
Sterility, v. Aromatics. 
Stinking Breath, Troches for—p. 130. n° 5. 
Stone, v. Antinephrities. 
Strangury, v. Balsamics; and Diluents. 
Struma, v. Aperients, Absorbents, Antisyphilics, ahd Diluents. 
Sweats, to check, v. Acids, and Corroborants. 
T. 
Teeth, to cleanse and preserve—p. 390. 
Thirst, v. Acids, and Diluents. 
Tubercles of the Lungs, and Tumors to discuss, v. Aperients, and 
Diluents. 
U. 
Venery to provoke, v. Aromatics. 
Vertigo, v. Antepileptics. 
Vomiting, v. Antemetics. 
Urine, bloody, v. Balsamics, and Diluents. 
—hot or scalding, v, Balsamics, and Astringents. 
—involuntary, u. Corroborants. 
W. 
Whites, v. Balsamics, and Astringents. 
Wind, v. Carminatives, and Aromatics. 
Worms, v. Anthelmintics.